The URL can be used to link to this page

7140-Fire Station # 8-Specifications DENTON FIRE STATION NO. 8 3131 Colorado Blvd., Denton, TX 76210 PROJECT MANUAL August 2019 OWNER: CITY OF DENTON 215 East McKinney Street Denton, Texas 76201 940.349.8200 ARCHITECT: KIRKPATRICK ARCHITECTURE STUDIO 100 West Mulberry Denton, Texas 76201 940.387.8182 voice Contact: David M. Robinson / david.robinson@k-a-studio.com CIVIL ENGINEER: MJ THOMAS ENGINEERING 3973 West Vickery Boulevard, Suite 103 Fort Worth, Texas 76107 817.732.9839 voice Contact: Mickey Thomas / mickeyt@mjthomaseng.com STRUCTURAL ENGINEER: FRANK W. NEAL & ASSOCIATES 1015 West Broadway Fort Worth, Texas 76104 817.332.1944 voice Contact: David Hartmann / dhartmann@fwna-eng.com MEP ENGINEER: MD ENGINEERING 1255 West 15th Street, Suite 300 Plano, Texas 75075 469.467.0200 voice Contact: Michael Smith / msmith@md-eng.com LANDSCAPE ARCHITECT: CHRISTOPHER RUSSELL 5925 La Vista, Suite 3 Dallas, Texas 75206 214.695.7344 voice Contact: Chris Russell / chris@christopher-russell.com (This page intentionally left blank) Denton Fire Station No. 8 SEALS PAGE Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 000107-1 August 2019 DOCUMENT 000107 – SEALS PAGE ARCHITECT: KIRKPATRICK ARCHITECTURE STUDIO 100 West Mulberry Denton, Texas 76201 Contact: David M. Robinson SPECIFICATION DIVISIONS: 00-12, 31, 32 CIVIL ENGINEER: MJ THOMAS ENGINEERING 3973 West Vickery Boulevard, Suite 103 Fort Worth, Texas 76107 Contact: Mickey Thomas SPECIFICATION DIVISIONS: 02, 03, 10, 22, 31, 32, 33 STRUCTURAL ENGINEER: FRANK W. NEAL & ASSOCIATES 1015 West Broadway Fort Worth, Texas 76104 Contact: David Hartmann SPECIFICATION DIVISIONS: 03, 05, 31 MECHANICAL & PLUMBING ENGINEER: MD ENGINEERING 1255 West 15th Street, Suite 300 Plano, Texas 75075 Contact: Michael Smith SPECIFICATION DIVISIONS: 21, 22, 23 ELECTRICAL ENGINEER: MD ENGINEERING 1255 West 15th Street, Suite 300 Plano, Texas 75075 Contact: John Vincent SPECIFICATION DIVISIONS: 26, 28 LANDSCAPE ARCHITECT: CHRISTOPHER RUSSELL 5925 La Vista, Suite 3 Dallas, Texas 75206 Contact: Chris Russell SPECIFICATION DIVISIONS: 32 (This page intentionally left blank) Denton Fire Station No. 8 TABLE OF CONTENTS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 000110-1 August 2019 DOCUMENT 000110 - TABLE OF CONTENTS NUMBER TITLE ISSUE DATE REVISED DATE DIVISION 00 - PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS 000100 Title Page .............................................................................. August 2019 000107 Seals Page ............................................................................. August 2019 000110 Table of Contents ................................................................... August 2019 003132 Geotechnical Data .................................................................. August 2019 Geotechnical Report #G18-2295 Geotechnical Report #G18-2295 – Addendum No. 1 DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 011000 Summary .............................................................................. August 2019 012100 Allowances ............................................................................. August 2019 012200 Unit Prices .............................................................................. August 2019 012300 Alternates .............................................................................. August 2019 012500 Substitution Procedures ......................................................... August 2019 012500.13 Substitution Request Form ..................................................... August 2019 012600 Contract Modification Procedures .......................................... August 2019 012900 Payment Procedures .............................................................. August 2019 013100 Project Management and Coordination .................................. August 2019 013200 Construction Progress Documentation ................................... August 2019 013233 Photographic Documentation ................................................. August 2019 013300 Submittal Procedures ............................................................. August 2019 014000 Quality Requirements ............................................................. August 2019 014200 References ............................................................................. August 2019 014339 Mock-Up Wall Construction .................................................... August 2019 015000 Temporary Facilities and Controls .......................................... August 2019 015639 Temporary Tree and Plant Protection .................................... August 2019 015713 Erosion and Sedimentation Control ........................................ August 2019 016000 Product Requirements ............................................................ August 2019 017300 Execution .............................................................................. August 2019 017700 Closeout Procedures .............................................................. August 2019 017823 Operation and Maintenance Data ........................................... August 2019 017839 Project Record Documents ..................................................... August 2019 017900 Demonstration and Training ................................................... August 2019 DIVISION 02 - EXISTING CONDITIONS 024100 Demolition (C) ........................................................................ August 2019 024113 Selective Site Demolition ........................................................ August 2019 024116 Structure Demolition ............................................................... August 2019 DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE 031100 Concrete Forming (C) ............................................................. August 2019 032000 Concrete Reinforcing (C) ........................................................ August 2019 033000 Cast-In-Place Concrete (C) .................................................... August 2019 033000 Cast-In-Place Concrete (S) .................................................... August 2019 033543 Polished Concrete .................................................................. August 2019 DIVISION 04 - MASONRY 042000 Unit Masonry .......................................................................... August 2019 047300 Manufactured Stone Veneer ................................................... August 2019 DIVISION 05 - METALS 051200 Structural Steel Framing (S) ................................................... August 2019 052100 Steel Joist Framing (S) ........................................................... August 2019 053100 Steel Decking (S) ................................................................... August 2019 054000 Cold-Formed Metal Framing (S) ............................................. August 2019 054400 Cold-Formed Metal Trusses (S) ............................................. August 2019 Denton Fire Station No. 8 TABLE OF CONTENTS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 000110-2 August 2019 055000 Metal Fabrications ................................................................. August 2019 DIVISION 06 - WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES 061053 Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry ............................................ August 2019 061600 Sheathing ............................................................................. August 2019 062023 Interior Finish Carpentry ......................................................... August 2019 064113 Wood Veneer Faced Architectural Cabinets ........................... August 2019 064116 Plastic Laminate Faced Architectural Cabinets ...................... August 2019 066100 Shower Surrounds .................................................................. August 2019 066400 Plastic Paneling ...................................................................... August 2019 DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 071113 Bituminous Dampproofing ...................................................... August 2019 071900 Water Repellents .................................................................... August 2019 072100 Thermal Insulation .................................................................. August 2019 072400 Masonry Veneer System on Continuous Insulation ................ August 2019 072600 Under Slab Vapor Barrier ....................................................... August 2019 072730 SPF Insulation ........................................................................ August 2019 073113 Dimensional Shingle Roofing System .................................... August 2019 074100 Metal Roof Panels .................................................................. August 2019 074646 Fiber Cement Siding ............................................................... August 2019 076210 Flexible Flashing .................................................................... August 2019 077100 Roof Specialties ..................................................................... August 2019 077253 Snow Guards .......................................................................... August 2019 078123 Intumescent Fireproofing ........................................................ August 2019 078413 Penetration Firestopping ........................................................ August 2019 078446 Fire-Resistive Joint Systems .................................................. August 2019 079200 Joint Sealants ......................................................................... August 2019 DIVISION 08 - OPENINGS 081113 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames ............................................ August 2019 081423.16 Plastic Laminate Faced Wood Doors ..................................... August 2019 083113 Access Doors and Frames ..................................................... August 2019 083326 Upcoiling Security Grilles ....................................................... August 2019 083513 Panel Folding Doors ............................................................... August 2019 083613 Sectional Overhead Doors ..................................................... August 2019 084113 Aluminum Framed Entrances and Storefronts ........................ August 2019 086223 Tubular Daylighting Devices ................................................... August 2019 087100 Door Hardware ....................................................................... August 2019 088000 Glazing .............................................................................. August 2019 088300 Mirrors ............................................................................. August 2019 089119 Fixed Louvers ......................................................................... August 2019 DIVISION 09 - FINISHES 092216 Non-Structural Metal Framing ................................................ August 2019 092423 Continuously Insulated Cement Plaster Stucco ...................... August 2019 092900 Gypsum Board ....................................................................... August 2019 093013 Ceramic Tiling ........................................................................ August 2019 095113 Acoustical Panel Ceilings ....................................................... August 2019 096116 Concrete Floor Sealing ........................................................... August 2019 096240 Sport Flooring ......................................................................... August 2019 096513 Resilient Base and Accessories ............................................. August 2019 096813 Tile Carpeting ......................................................................... August 2019 098116 Acoustical Blanket Insulation .................................................. August 2019 099100 Painting .............................................................................. August 2019 099450 Decorative Exterior Finish System ......................................... August 2019 DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES 101400 Signage .............................................................................. August 2019 101453 Traffic Signage (C) ................................................................. August 2019 102600 Wall and Door Protection........................................................ August 2019 102800 Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories ................................... August 2019 Denton Fire Station No. 8 TABLE OF CONTENTS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 000110-3 August 2019 104413 Fire Protection Cabinets ......................................................... August 2019 104416 Fire Extinguishers ................................................................... August 2019 105510 Turn-Out Gear Lockers .......................................................... August 2019 107114 Fixed Aluminum Sun Screens ................................................ August 2019 107516 Ground-Set Flagpoles .......................................................... August 2019 109900 Miscellaneous Specialties ...................................................... August 2019 DIVISION 11 – EQUIPMENT 113100 Residential Appliances ........................................................... August 2019 DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS 122112 Horizontal Louver Blinds-Aluminum ....................................... August 2019 122413 Roller Window Shades ........................................................... August 2019 122414 Blackout Window Shades ....................................................... August 2019 123616 Metal Countertops .................................................................. August 2019 123661 Simulated Stone Countertops ................................................. August 2019 124813 Entrance Floor Mats & Frames ............................................... August 2019 DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION (NOT USED) DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING EQUIPMENT (NOT USED) DIVISION 21 - FIRE SUPPRESSION 210010 Fire Suppression Submittal Process ..................................... August 2019 210500 Common Work Results for Fire Suppression ......................... August 2019 210529 Hangers & Supports for Fire Suppression Piping & Equip. .... August 2019 210553 Identification for Fire Suppression Piping & Equipment .......... August 2019 211300 Wet-Pipe Sprinkler Systems ................................................... August 2019 DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING 220010 Plumbing Submittal Process ................................................... August 2019 220500 Common Work Results for Plumbing ..................................... August 2019 220516 Expansion Fittings and Loops for Plumbing Piping ................ August 2019 220519 Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping .................................. August 2019 220523 General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping .............................. August 2019 220529 Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equip .......... August 2019 220553 Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment .................. August 2019 220700 Plumbing Insulation ................................................................ August 2019 221100 Facility Water Distribution ....................................................... August 2019 221123 Domestic Water Pumps .......................................................... August 2019 221300 Facility Sanitary Sewerage ..................................................... August 2019 221400 Facility Storm Drainage .......................................................... August 2019 221423 Reinforced Concrete Storm Sewers (C) ................................. August 2019 223436 Commercial Gas Domestic Water Heater ............................... August 2019 224200 Commercial Plumbing Fixtures ............................................... August 2019 DIVISION 23 - MECHANICAL 230010 Mechanical Submittal Process ............................................... August 2019 230500 Common Work Results for HVAC ......................................... August 2019 230513 Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment ............ August 2019 230529 Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment ....... August 2019 230553 Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment ....................... August 2019 230593 Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC .......................... August 2019 230700 HVAC Insulation ..................................................................... August 2019 230993 Sequence of Operations for HVAC Equipment ....................... August 2019 231123 Facility Natural Gas Piping ..................................................... August 2019 232300 Refrigerant Piping ................................................................... August 2019 232923 Variable Frequency Motor Controllers .................................... August 2019 233113 Air Distribution ........................................................................ August 2019 233150 Hangers and Supports for Ductwork ...................................... August 2019 233423 HVAC Power Ventilators ........................................................ August 2019 233516 Vehicle Exhaust Removal/Filtrations ...................................... August 2019 Denton Fire Station No. 8 TABLE OF CONTENTS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 000110-4 August 2019 233713 Diffusers, Registers and Grilles .............................................. August 2019 233813 Commercial Kitchen Hoods .................................................... August 2019 234100 Particulate Air Filtration .......................................................... August 2019 235000 Heat Generation Equipment ................................................... August 2019 237600 DX Split Systems .................................................................... August 2019 238239 Unit Heaters ........................................................................... August 2019 DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL 260010 Electrical Submittal Process .................................................. August 2019 260500 Common Work Results for Electrical ...................................... August 2019 260503 Firestopping ............................................................................ August 2019 260505 Site Electrical .......................................................................... August 2019 260519 Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables ........... August 2019 260526 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems ...................... August 2019 260529 Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems ........................ August 2019 260533.13 Conduit for Electrical Systems ................................................ August 2019 260533.16 Boxes for Electrical Systems .................................................. August 2019 260536 Cable Trays for Electrical Systems ......................................... August 2019 260553 Identification for Electrical Systems ........................................ August 2019 260593 Electrical Testing .................................................................... August 2019 260620 Disconnect Switches .............................................................. August 2019 260923 Occupancy Sensors ............................................................... August 2019 262116 Low Voltage Underground Electrical Service Entrance .......... August 2019 262416 Panelboards ........................................................................... August 2019 262716 Electrical Cabinets and Enclosures ........................................ August 2019 262726 Wiring Devices ....................................................................... August 2019 262816 Enclosed Switches ................................................................. August 2019 263213 Packaged Engine Generators-Diesel ..................................... August 2019 263623 Automatic Transfer Switch ...................................................... August 2019 264100 Facility Lightning Protection .................................................... August 2019 264300 Surge Protective Devices ....................................................... August 2019 265500 LED Lighting ........................................................................... August 2019 265564 Telephone/Data Raceway ...................................................... August 2019 DIVISION 27 – COMMUNICATIONS – (NOT USED) DIVISION 28 - ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 283110 Fire Detection and Alarm Systems ......................................... August 2019 DIVISION 31 - EARTHWORK 310000 Earthwork (C) ......................................................................... August 2019 310513 Soils for Earthwork (C) ........................................................... August 2019 310516 Aggregates for Earthwork (C) ................................................. August 2019 311100 Clearing and Grubbing (C) ..................................................... August 2019 311400 Site Preparation (C) ................................................................ August 2019 312333 Trenching and Backfilling (C) ................................................. August 2019 312500 Erosion and Sedimentation Controls (C) ................................ August 2019 313116 Termite Control ....................................................................... August 2019 314133 Trench Shielding (C) .............................................................. August 2019 315000 Excavation Support and Protection ........................................ August 2019 316329 Drilled Concrete Piers and Shaft (S) ...................................... August 2019 DIVISION 32 - EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS 321313 Concrete Paving (C) ............................................................... August 2019 321373 Sealants and Caulkings (C) .................................................... August 2019 321713 Parking Bumpers .................................................................... August 2019 321723 Pavement Markings (C) .......................................................... August 2019 323100 Steel Roll Gate System .......................................................... August 2019 323119 Steel Ornamental Fence System ............................................ August 2019 323132 Vehicular Slide Gate Operator ................................................ August 2019 328400 Landscape Irrigation System (L) ............................................. August 2019 329119 Finish Grading for Landscape Areas (L) ................................. August 2019 Denton Fire Station No. 8 TABLE OF CONTENTS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 000110-5 August 2019 329200 Turf Establishment (Hydromulch) (L) ...................................... August 2019 329300 Landscaping (L) ...................................................................... August 2019 DIVISION 33 - UTILITIES 334100 Storm Utility Drainage Piping (C) ............................................ August 2019 END OF DOCUMENT (This page intentionally left blank) Denton Fire Station No. 8 GEOTECHNICAL DATA Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 003132-1 August 2019 SECTION 003132 – GEOTECHNICAL DATA PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This document includes information pertaining to geotechnical data. 1.2 INVESTIGATION A. Investigations of subsurface soil conditions at the building site was authorized by the Owner, and were subsequently performed by D&S Engineering Labs: 1. Report #G18-2295, dated December 17, 2018. 2. Report #G18-2295 – Addendum No. 1, dated July 2, 2019. 1.3 REPORT A. The Geotechnical Investigation Report is for information only, and is not a warranty of subsurface conditions. B. The Report is made available for information only, and is not a Contract Document. C. The information contained in the Report represents design criteria, recommendations, and guidelines that were utilized as the basis of design for the engineering of the earthwork operations, paving design, and foundation design indicated in the Contract Documents. No changes in this design criteria will be considered or permitted. Where options are indicated, the options were considered by the respective design team members and implemented in the construction documents. 1.4 RESPONSIBILITY A. Bidders are expected to examine the site and subsurface investigation reports and then decide for themselves the character of the materials to be encountered. B. The Architect and Owner assume no responsibility for variations in subsoil conditions, quality, or stability, or for the presence, level, and extent of underground water. C. The Architect and Owner assume no responsibility for Bidder’s interpretation of data contained in the Report. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION (This page intentionally left blank) Geotechnical Engineering Report Denton Fire Station No. 8 Denton, TX December 17, 2018 D&S ENGINEERING LABS, LLC Denton Fire Station No. 8 Denton, Texas G18-2295 TABLE OF CONTENTS PROJECT DESCRIPTION ................................................................................................... 1 PURPOSE AND SCOPE ..................................................................................................... 1 FIELD AND LABORATORY INVESTIGATION .................................................................... 2 General .......................................................................................................................... 2 Laboratory Testing ......................................................................................................... 3 Unconfined Compression Tests ............................................................................ 4 Overburden Swell Tests ........................................................................................ 4 SITE CONDITIONS .............................................................................................................. 4 Stratigraphy .................................................................................................................... 4 Groundwater .................................................................................................................. 5 ENGINEERING ANALYSIS ................................................................................................. 6 Estimated Potential Vertical Movement (PVM) .............................................................. 6 FOUNDATION RECOMMENDATIONS ............................................................................... 6 Straight-sided Drilled Shafts ........................................................................................... 6 Drilled Shaft Construction Considerations ............................................................. 7 Pier-supported Grade Beams ................................................................................ 8 Lateral Loads......................................................................................................... 9 Shallow Foundations .................................................................................................... 10 Soil-Supported Floor System ....................................................................................... 11 EARTHWORK RECOMMENDATIONS ............................................................................. 11 Soil Preparation for Structurally Suspended Floor Slabs ............................................. 12 Earthwork Preparation for Soil-Supported Floor Slabs and Shallow Foundations ....... 12 Additional Considerations ............................................................................................ 13 PAVEMENT RECOMMENDATIONS ................................................................................. 14 General ........................................................................................................................ 14 Behavior Characteristics of Expansive Soils Beneath Pavement ................................ 14 Subgrade Strength Characteristics .............................................................................. 15 Pavement Subgrade Preparation Recommendations .................................................. 15 Soil Preparation ................................................................................................... 15 Cement Treatment Recommendations ............................................................... 17 Rigid Pavement ............................................................................................................ 18 Pavement Joints and Cutting ....................................................................................... 19 Pavement Reinforcing Steel ......................................................................................... 19 D&S ENGINEERING LABS, LLC Denton Fire Station No. 8 Denton, Texas G18-2295 OTHER CONSTRUCTION ................................................................................................. 20 Utility and Service Lines ............................................................................................... 20 Exterior Flatwork .......................................................................................................... 20 Surface Drainage ......................................................................................................... 21 Landscaping ................................................................................................................. 22 Site Grading ................................................................................................................. 22 Excavations .................................................................................................................. 22 SEISMIC CONSIDERATIONS ........................................................................................... 23 LIMITATIONS ..................................................................................................................... 23 APPENDIX A – BORING LOGS AND SUPPORTING DATA APPENDIX B – GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PROCEDURES 1 GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION DENTON FIRE STATION NO. 8 DENTON, TEXAS PROJECT DESCRIPTION This report presents the results of the geotechnical investigation for the proposed new City of Denton Fire Station No. 8. The site is located on the north side of Colorado Boulevard, approximately 400 feet east of its intersection with Brinker Road in Denton, Texas. We understand that the proposed fire station will be a single-story building with a footprint of 8,000 to 9,000 square feet on the 5.86-acre parcel. The new structure will include two bays to accommodate heavy vehicle capacity drive ways and Apparatus Bay floors, staff and visitor parking, sleeping quarters, and dumpster, generator and air conditioning pads. Based on the site visit and aerial photograph, the proposed location of the building is an open space currently covered with short grasses and sparse trees. Based on the available NCTCOG topographic maps (www.dfwmaps.com), the site slopes down from the west to the east with an overall relief of about 6 feet within the proposed development. Within the proposed building pad, there is 4 feet of topographic relief. Photographs showing the recent site condition are provided below. PURPOSE AND SCOPE The purpose of this investigation was to:  Identify the subsurface stratigraphy present at the site.  Evaluate the physical and engineering properties of the subsurface soil and bedrock strata for use in the geotechnical analyses.  Provide geotechnical recommendations for use in design of foundations for the proposed structures and related site work, including pavements and flatwork. The scope of this investigation consisted of: D&S ENGINEERING LABS, LLC Denton Fire Station No. 8 Denton, Texas G18-2295 2  Drilling and sampling of six (6) borings. Three borings (B1 through B3) were drilled within the footprint of the new structure to depths of about 41 feet. Three borings (B4 through B6) were drilled within the new parking areas to depths of about 11 feet.  Laboratory testing of selected soil and rock samples obtained during the field investigation.  Preparation of a Geotechnical Report that includes the following: o Evaluation of Potential Vertical Movement (PVM). o Recommendations for the design of foundations. o Recommendations for earthwork. o Recommendations for the design of pavements and other flatwork. FIELD AND LABORATORY INVESTIGATION General The borings were advanced utilizing truck-mounted drilling equipment outfitted with hollow stem flight augers. Undisturbed samples of cohesive soils and weathered bedrock were obtained using 3-inch diameter tube samplers, which were advanced into the soils in 1-foot increments by the continuous thrust of a hydraulic ram located on the drilling equipment. After sample extrusion, a hand penetrometer measurement was performed on each cohesive soil sample to provide an estimate of soil stiffness. Soils and bedrock strata were intermittently tested in situ using cone penetration tests in order to determine their resistance to penetration. For this test, a 3-inch diameter steel cone is driven by the energy equivalent of a 170-pound hammer falling freely from a height of 24 inches and striking an anvil located at the top of the drill string. Depending on the resistance of the soil, either the number of blows of the hammer required to provide 12 inches of penetration is recorded (as two increments of 6 inches each), or the inches of penetration of the cone resulting from 100 blows of the hammer are recorded (as two increments of 50 blows each). Some subsurface materials were also sampled in general accordance with the Standard Penetration Test (ASTM D1586). During this test, a disturbed sample of subsurface material is recovered using a nominal 2-inch O.D. split-barrel sampler. The sampler is driven into the soil strata utilizing the energy equivalent of a 140-pound hammer falling freely from a height of 30 inches and striking an anvil located at the top of the drill string. The number of blows required to advance the sampler in three consecutive 6-inch increments is recorded, and the number of blows required for the final 12 inches is noted as the “N”-value. The test is terminated at the first occurrence of either of the following: 1) when sampler has advanced a total of 18 inches; 2) When the sampler has advanced less than one complete 6-inch increment after 50 blows of D&S ENGINEERING LABS, LLC Denton Fire Station No. 8 Denton, Texas G18-2295 3 the hammer; 3) when the total number of blows reaches 100; or 4) if there is no advancement of the sampler in any 10-blow interval. The bedrock strata present within Borings B1 and B3 were drilled and sampled using a double-tube core barrel fitted with a tungsten-carbide, sawtooth bit. The length of core recovered (REC), expressed as a percentage of the coring interval, along with the Rock Quality Designation (RQD), is tabulated at the appropriate depths on the Log of Boring illustrations. The RQD is the sum of all core pieces longer than four inches divided by the total length of the cored interval. Pieces shorter than four inches which were determined to be broken by drilling or by handling were fitted together and considered as one piece. All samples obtained were extruded in the field, placed in plastic bags to minimize changes in the natural moisture condition, labeled according to the appropriate boring number and depth, and placed in protective cardboard boxes for transportation to the laboratory. The approximate locations of the borings performed at the site are shown on the boring location map that is included in Appendix A. The specific depths, thicknesses and descriptions of the strata encountered are presented on the individual Boring Log illustrations, which are also included in Appendix A. The approximate surface elevations shown on the boring logs were interpolated from NCTCOG maps (www.dfwmaps.com) which provides contours in 2-foot intervals. Strata boundaries shown on the boring log are approximate. Laboratory Testing Laboratory tests were performed to identify relevant engineering characteristics of the subsurface materials encountered and to provide data for developing engineering design parameters. The subsurface materials recovered during the field exploration were initially described in the field by the drilling crew, then logged in detail by a staff engineer in the laboratory. These descriptions were later refined by a Geotechnical Engineer based on results of the laboratory tests performed. All recovered soil samples were classified and described in part using the Unified Soil Classification System (USCS) and other accepted procedures. Bedrock strata were described using standard geologic nomenclature. In order to determine soil characteristics and to aid in classifying the soils, index property and classification testing were performed on selected soil samples as requested by the Geotechnical Engineer. These index property and classification tests were performed in general accordance with the following ASTM testing standards:  Moisture Content ASTM D2216  Atterberg Limits ASTM D4318  Percent Passing No. 200 Sieve ASTM D1140 D&S ENGINEERING LABS, LLC Denton Fire Station No. 8 Denton, Texas G18-2295 4 Additional tests were performed to aid in evaluating strength and volume change characteristics, which consisted of the following:  Unconfined Compressive Strength of Soil Samples ASTM D2166  Unconfined Compressive Strength of Rock Cores ASTM D7012  Overburden Swell Testing The results of these tests are presented at the corresponding sample depths on the appropriate Boring Log illustrations. The index property and classification testing procedures are described in more detail in Appendix B. Unconfined Compression Tests Unconfined compression strength testing was performed on selected samples of the cohesive soils and weathered bedrock and on selected sections of intact bedrock cores. These tests were performed in general accordance with ASTM D2166 for soil and weathered bedrock samples and ASTM D7012 Method C for rock core samples. During each test, a cylindrical specimen is subjected to an axial load that is applied at a constant rate of strain until either failure or a large strain (i.e., greater than 15 percent) occurs. Once the test is completed, the unit weight of the sample is determined based on the moisture content. Overburden Swell Tests A selected sample of the near-surface soil was subjected to overburden swell testing. For this test, a sample is placed in a consolidometer and subjected to the estimated overburden pressure. The sample is then inundated with water and is allowed to swell. The moisture content of the sample is determined both before and after completion of the test. Test results are recorded, including the percent swell and the initial and final moisture contents. SITE CONDITIONS Stratigraphy Based upon a review of the recovered samples, as well as the Geologic Atlas of Texas, Sherman Sheet, this site is characterized by the soils and bedrock strata associated with the Woodbine Formation. Subsurface materials of the Woodbine geological formation typically consist of sands, sandy clays, and clays underlain by shale and/or sandstone. The subsurface materials of the Woodbine Formation often have little consistency and uniformity in deposition. The deposition of the sand, sandy clay, clay, sandstone, and shale layers can be very erratic and highly variable. Although not encountered during the field investigation, this geological formation can contain very hard sandstone boulders or “erratics” which often require coring to penetrate during pier installation. D&S ENGINEERING LABS, LLC Denton Fire Station No. 8 Denton, Texas G18-2295 5 At the surface within Borings B1 through B4, native sand soils are present. The sand soils present are loose to medium dense in condition and are various shades of brown in color. Varying amounts of clay, silt, ferrous nodules, iron oxide stains and gravel are present within the sand strata. The sand soils extend to depths of 2 to 9 feet. At the surface within Borings B5 and B6 and below the sand soils within Borings B1 through B4, native lean and fat clay soils are present. The clay soils present are stiff to very stiff in consistency and are various shades of brown and gray in color. Varying amounts of sand and sand seams, sandstone fragments, ferrous nodules and iron oxide stains are present within the clay matrix. The clay strata extend to depths of 19 to 24 feet within Borings B1 through B3 and to the maximum depth explored of about 11 feet within Borings B4 through B6. Within Boring B6, a thin layer of silty sand is present from a depth of 2 to 4 feet. The sand layer present is loose to medium dense in condition, is brown in color and extend to a depth of 4 feet. Beneath the overburden soils within Borings B1 and B2, weathered shale bedrock is present. The weathered shale strata are generally soft in rock hardness, are tan, brown and gray in color and contain varying amounts of sand. The zone of weathering extends to depths of about 23 to 27 feet. Below the overburden soils within Boring B3 and below the weathered shale bedrock within Borings B1 and B2, fresh shale bedrock is present. The fresh shale strata present are very soft to soft in rock hardness, are gray and dark gray in color and contain varying amounts of sand within the strata. The fresh shale strata extend to the termination depths of about 40.5 to 41 feet. Groundwater Groundwater seepage was encountered during drilling operations at depths of about 25 feet within Borings B2 and B3. Groundwater was also measured at a depth of about 37 feet within Boring B2 after completion of drilling operations. Boring B1 was observed to be dry prior to the introduction of drilling fluids for coring purposes. Borings B4 through B6 were observed dry during drilling and after completion of drilling operations. Groundwater levels may be anticipated to fluctuate with seasonal and annual variations in rainfall, and also may vary as a result of development and landscape irrigation. Groundwater is often contained within the joints, fractures and other rock mass defects present in bedrock strata. When intercepted, these defects can produce appreciable amounts of water for a period of time, especially if those defects are extensive and well inter-connected. D&S ENGINEERING LABS, LLC Denton Fire Station No. 8 Denton, Texas G18-2295 6 ENGINEERING ANALYSIS Estimated Potential Vertical Movement (PVM) Potential Vertical Movement (PVM) was evaluated utilizing several different methods for predicting movement, as described in Appendix B, and based on our experience and professional opinion. At the time of our field investigation, the near-surface soils were generally found to be in a dry moisture condition. Based upon the results of our analysis, the site is estimated to possess a PVM of about 1 to 1-1/2-inches at the soil moisture conditions existing at the time of the field investigation. Dry, average and wet are relative terms based on moisture content and plasticity. FOUNDATION RECOMMENDATIONS The near-surface soils present at the site have a low potential for post-construction vertical movement with changes in soil moisture content. Considering the type of structure, anticipated loading intensities, the most positive foundation system for the proposed building is a straight-sided drilled shaft foundation system bearing in the fresh shale with a structurally supported suspended floor slab. We anticipate this foundation system to limit potential foundation movements to small fractions of an inch. If potential movements of 1- inch can be tolerated, either a drilled straight shaft or a shallow footing foundation system may be utilized with a soil supported floor slab if soil is prepared as the earthwork recommendations section of this report. This report provides recommendations for both alternatives. Please note that a soil-supported floor system may experience some vertical movement with changes in soil moisture content. Non-load bearing walls, partitions, and other elements bearing on the floor slab will reflect these movements should they occur. However, with appropriate design, adherence to good construction practices and appropriate post-construction maintenance, these potential movements can be reduced. If potential movements on the order of 1-inch cannot be tolerated, a structurally suspended floor slab should be considered. Straight-sided Drilled Shafts The structural loads for the new building may be supported on auger-excavated, straight-sided, reinforced concrete drilled shafts founded in the fresh shale encountered at depths of about 23 to 27 feet below the grades existing at the time of our field investigation. The drilled shafts may be designed to transfer imposed loads to the bearing stratum using a combination of end-bearing pressure and side friction. Drilled shafts should be designed for an allowable end bearing and side friction as outlined in Table 1 below. D&S ENGINEERING LABS, LLC Denton Fire Station No. 8 Denton, Texas G18-2295 7 We recommend drilled shafts be a minimum of 18 inches in diameter and penetrate a minimum of 7 feet into the fresh shale bedrock. It should be noted that the upper part of the fresh shale was very soft. The allowable side frictions to resist both axial loading and uplift may be taken from the top the bearing stratum or from the bottom of any temporary casing used, whichever is deeper, to resist both axial loading and uplift. As there is appreciable strain-compatibility between the weathered and the fresh shales, the side friction for both may be included in the shaft design for shafts extending into the fresh shale. Table 1. Drilled Shaft Allowable Bearing Material Depth Below Current Grades (ft) Allowable Side Friction (psf) Allowable End Bearing (psf) Tan and Brown Weathered Shale B1 – 19 B2 – 19 B3 - NE 750 NA Dark Gray Fresh Shale 23 to 27 800 12,000 The shafts should be provided with sufficient steel reinforcement throughout their length to resist potential uplift pressures that will be exerted. For the near-surface soils, these pressures are approximated to be on the order of 500 pounds of shaft area over an average depth of 10 feet. Often, 1/2 of a percent of steel by cross- sectional area is sufficient for this purpose (ACI 318). However, the final amount of reinforcement required should be determined based on the information provided herein and should be the greater of that determination, or ACI 318. Uplift forces acting on individual shafts will be resisted by the dead weight of the structure, plus the bearing stratum-to-concrete adhesion acting on that portion of the shaft that is in contact with the weathered shale and fresh shale below a depth of 19 to 24 feet. There is no reduction in allowable capacities for shafts in proximity to each other. However, for a two-shaft system, there is an 18 percent reduction in the available perimeter area for side friction capacity for shafts in contact (tangent). The area reduction can be extrapolated linearly to zero at one shaft diameter clear spacing. Please contact this office if other close proximity geometries need to be considered. We anticipate that a straight-sided drilled pier foundation system designed and constructed in accordance with the information provided in this report will have a factor of safety in excess of 2.5 against shear failure and may experience settlements of small fractions of an inch. Drilled Shaft Construction Considerations Groundwater seepage was encountered within Borings B2 and B3 at depths of about 25 feet during drilling operations. Groundwater was measured at a depth of about 37 feet within Boring B2 upon the completion of drilling. Groundwater D&S ENGINEERING LABS, LLC Denton Fire Station No. 8 Denton, Texas G18-2295 8 may be encountered when rock mass defects are intercepted during excavations. The amount of water present in rock mass defects may fluctuate over time. Temporary casing will likely be necessary for many shaft locations and should be available on site in the event that excessive groundwater seepage is encountered that cannot be controlled with conventional pumps, sumps, or other means, or in the event that excessive sidewall sloughing occurs. The installation of all drilled piers should be observed by experienced geotechnical personnel during construction to verify compliance with design assumptions including: 1) verticality of the shaft excavation, 2) identification of the bearing stratum, 3) minimum pier diameter and depth, 4) correct amount of reinforcement, 5) proper removal of loose material, and 6) that groundwater seepage, if present, is properly controlled. D&S would be pleased to provide these services in support of this project. During construction of the drilled shafts, care should be taken to avoid creating an oversized cap ("mushroom") near the ground surface that is larger than the shaft diameter. These “mushrooms” provide a resistance surface that near- surface soils can heave against. If near-surface soils are prone to sloughing, (a condition which can result in “mushrooming”), the tops of the shafts should be formed in the sloughing soils using cardboard or other circular forms equal to the diameter of the shaft. Concrete used for the shafts should have a slump of 8 inches ± 1 inch. Individual shafts should be excavated in a continuous operation and concrete should be placed as soon after completion of the drilling as is practical. All shafts should be filled with concrete within 8 hours after completion of drilling. In the event of equipment breakdown, any uncompleted open shaft should be backfilled with soil to be redrilled at a later date. This office should be contacted when shafts have reached the target depth but cannot be completed. Pier-supported Grade Beams For pier-supported grade beams, a minimum void space of 4 inches should be provided beneath all grade beams (and the floor slab if structurally suspended). Two methods are typically utilized for constructing a suspended floor slab system. These include constructing a crawl space using pan and joist type construction utilizing either concrete or steel beams and raising the floor slab well above the underlying expansive soils or using cardboard carton forms to create a void. If a pan and joist system is used, and if utility lines are suspended beneath the slab, the void space clearance should be increased to either a minimum of 2 feet to provide for access to these lines, or to provide a minimum of 4 inches clearance below the lowest suspended utility, whichever is greater. Flexible connections or oversized penetration sleeves should be considered in D&S ENGINEERING LABS, LLC Denton Fire Station No. 8 Denton, Texas G18-2295 9 the design of utilities to accommodate potential future movements of soil supported utility lines, especially where these lines approach or enter stationary elements or structures. If a crawl space is employed, provisions should be made for positive drainage of the crawl space floor. Sufficient ventilation should also be provided where construction with metal beams and joists is planned, in order to limit corrosion of the metal components. Structural cardboard carton forms (void boxes) may be used to provide the required voids beneath the floor slab and grade beams; however, trapezoidal void boxes should not be used. Care should be taken to assure that the void boxes are not allowed to become wet or crushed prior to or during concrete placement and finishing operations. We recommend that masonite (1/4” thick) or other protective material be placed on top of the carton forms per carton form manufacturer recommendations to reduce the risk of crushing the cardboard forms during concrete placement and finishing operations. We recommend using side retainers along the grade beams to prevent soil from infiltrating the void space after the carton forms deteriorate. Grade beams may be earth-formed, but only if the sides can be cut and maintained vertical. If sloughing occurs, or if the sides cannot be maintained vertical, the grade beams should then be formed on both sides. The bottom of all grade beam excavations should be essentially free of any loose or soft material prior to the placement of concrete. All grade beams and floor slabs should be adequately reinforced to minimize cracking as normal movements occur in the foundation soils. Required fill under the void boxes may be any clean soil and should be compacted in accordance with the earthwork recommendation in this report. If needed, a thin (less than 3-inches thick) leveling bed of lean concrete or flowable fill may be used. If grade beams are formed, the exterior side of the grade beams around the structure should be carefully backfilled with on-site clayey soils. The backfill soils should be compacted to at least 95 percent of the maximum dry density for the backfill material as determined by ASTM D698 (standard Proctor). The fill should be placed at a moisture content that is at least the optimum moisture content, as determined by that same test. This fill should extend the full depth of the grade beam and void box and should extend a minimum distance of three feet away from the exterior grade beam perimeter. Lateral Loads Geotechnical parameters recommended for shaft design are presented in the tables below. Many of these parameters are common among various brands of commercial lateral load analysis software. Those shown are used in the software program LPILE 2012®. If needed, other parameters not shown will be provided upon request. We recommend that the lateral resistance D&S ENGINEERING LABS, LLC Denton Fire Station No. 8 Denton, Texas G18-2295 10 parameters be neglected for the uppermost 2 feet of shaft to account for seasonal and annual cyclic variations in soil desiccation and contraction and a lack of confining pressure. Tables 2, 3 and 4 below describe stratigraphic sections for the soils and rock encountered at the site. Table 2. Representative Soil Stratigraphy Stratum Depth Range (ft.) Software Material Designation Effective Unit Weight (pcf) CLAY 2 – 19 Stiff Clay w/o Free Water 120 WEATHERED SHALE 19 – 27 Stiff Clay w/o Free Water 125 FRESH SHALE 27+ Weak Rock 130 Table 3. Lateral Load Parameters Material Depth Range (ft) Undrained Cohesion (psf) Strain Factor (ε50) CLAY 2 – 19 1,000 0.01 WEATHERED SHALE 19 – 27 1,500 0.007 Table 4. Lateral Load Parameters – Weak Rock Material Depth Range (ft) Initial Modulus (psi) Uniaxial Compressive Strength (psi) RQD Strain Factor (Km) FRESH SHALE 27+ 4,000 25 95 0.0005 Shallow Foundations Structural loads for the new building may be supported on reinforced concrete, monolithic shallow continuous and/or isolated footings that are founded a minimum depth of 26 inches below the final exterior grade. Such footings may be designed using an allowable bearing capacity of 1,600 pounds per square foot (psf) when the foundations are based in properly prepared reworked soils. Footings should be a minimum of 16 inches in width for continuous footings and should be a minimum of 24 inches in width for isolated footings. Footings may be earth-formed, but only if the sides can be cut and maintained vertically. If sloughing occurs, or if the sides cannot be maintained vertically, grade beams should then be formed on both sides of the footings. The bottom of all footing excavations should be essentially free of any loose or soft material prior to the D&S ENGINEERING LABS, LLC Denton Fire Station No. 8 Denton, Texas G18-2295 11 placement of concrete. All footings and floor slabs should be adequately reinforced to minimize cracking, as normal movements will occur in the foundation soils. If footings are formed, the exterior side of the footings around the structure should be carefully backfilled with on-site clayey soils. The backfill soils should be compacted to between 95 and 98 percent of the maximum dry density, as determined by ASTM D698 (standard Proctor), and should be placed at a moisture content that is at or above the optimum moisture content, as determined by that same test. This fill should extend to the full depth of the footing and should extend a minimum distance of five feet away from the exterior footing perimeter. All footings or footing segments should be constructed in a relatively seamless operation, with excavation activities and placement of the reinforcement steel and concrete occurring within 5 days. If concrete cannot be placed in newly excavated footings in a timely manner, the base of the excavated footing may be covered with a thin seal of lean concrete. We recommend that a qualified representative of a geotechnical engineer should observe all footing excavations prior to concrete placement to verify the competence of the bearing stratum. Any footing excavations that are left open more than 5 days should be observed by the representative prior to concrete placement to determine the degree of stratum degradation and, if necessary, to recommend additional excavation where required. D&S would be pleased provide these services in support of this project Soil-Supported Floor System A soil-supported floor system that is placed directly on a modified subgrade may be used for the structure in conjunction with a drilled shaft foundation system or with shallow foundations. A ground supported system has an increased risk of potential vertical movement resulting from subgrade soil volume changes which may occur as a result of changes in soil moisture content. The majority of such movement typically occurs in the perimeter 10 feet of buildings. We recommend that the subgrade be prepared according to the Earthwork Recommendations section of this report in order to reduce the potential for post-construction movement. The floor slab in conjunction with a pier and beam foundation should be doweled to the beams at the locations of the doors in order to prevent vertical steps from forming at these high-traffic areas. EARTHWORK RECOMMENDATIONS The near-surface soils present have some potential for post-construction vertical movement with changes in subsurface soil moisture conditions. We have the following earthwork recommendations for both a structurally-supported floor slab system and a soil supported floor slab. Each are described separately below. D&S ENGINEERING LABS, LLC Denton Fire Station No. 8 Denton, Texas G18-2295 12 Soil Preparation for Structurally Suspended Floor Slabs  Strip the site of all vegetation, organic soil, and deleterious material within the new building areas. Typically, 6 to 12 inches is sufficient for this purpose.  After stripping, begin any required fill operations using debris-free on-site or imported soil to no higher than the bottom of the void boxes. The grade-raise soil fill should be placed in maximum 1-foot compacted lifts.  Place a minimum 15-mil thick vapor barrier beneath all floor slabs (Stego or equivalent). The vapor barrier should be securely bonded to the underside of the floor slab during concrete placement and curing and maintain that bond throughout the design life of the structure. All seams and penetrations through the barrier should be sealed in accordance with the manufacturer’s requirements. Earthwork Preparation for Soil-Supported Floor Slabs and Shallow Foundations If post-construction movements on the order of 1-inch can be tolerated after subgrade preparation is completed in accordance with the recommendations provided herein, it is our opinion that the floor slab and shallow foundations may be soil-supported. Please note that more stringent tolerances limiting potential post-construction vertical movement will require more extensive effort.  Strip the site of all vegetation, organic soil, and deleterious material within the new building areas. Typically, 6 to 12 inches is sufficient for this purpose.  After stripping and after performing any necessary grade cuts, excavate an additional 3 feet of material and stockpile any clayey soil for re-use. The silty clayey sand and silty sand encountered at depths of 2 to 4 feet within all the structure borings is not suitable for structure fill and should not be used as grade raise fill. The excavation should extend at least 5 feet beyond the perimeter of the new structure.  After excavating, scarify, rework, and recompact the exposed stripped subgrade to a depth of 12 inches. The scarified and reworked soils should be compacted to at least 95 percent of the maximum dry density, as determined by ASTM D698 (Standard Proctor), and placed at a moisture content that is in the range of zero to three percentage points (0 to +3) above the optimum moisture content, as determined by the same test. This procedure should extend at least 5 feet beyond the perimeter of the new structure.  Within 24 hours of recompacting the reworked excavated subgrade, begin fill operations with the stockpiled clayey soil to no higher than 1-foot below the bottom of floor slab final grade elevation. The fill soil should be placed in D&S ENGINEERING LABS, LLC Denton Fire Station No. 8 Denton, Texas G18-2295 13 maximum 8-inch compacted lifts, be compacted to at least 95 percent of the maximum dry density as determined by ASTM D698 (Standard Proctor), and be placed at a moisture content that is in the range of zero to three percentage points (0 to +3) above the optimum moisture content, as determined by the same test. Grade raise fill within the building pad area may be on-site or imported material having a Liquid Limit (LL) of 45 or less, a Plasticity Index (PI) of 30 or less, a minimum of 30% of the material passing a No. 200 mesh sieve, and be essentially free of particles in excess of 4 inches in their longest direction.  Provide a minimum of 12 inches of select fill on top of the re-worked fill, but only within the confines of the building perimeter. Select fill should have a liquid limit less than 35, a plasticity index between 6 and 18, and a minimum of 35 percent passing the No. 200 sieve. The select fill should be placed in maximum 6-inch compacted lifts and compacted to at least 95 percent of the maximum density as determined by ASTM D698, and to a moisture content of optimum or greater. Select fill may be used in lieu of on-site or imported grade-raise fill to bring the entire pad to grade.  The moisture content of the subgrade should be maintained up to the time of concrete placement. Depending on the speed of the earthwork layers, on hot or windy days, sprinkling with water atop the subgrade may be required, to maintain the compaction moisture content.  Water should not be allowed to pond on the prepared subgrade either during fill placement, or after reaching final subgrade elevation. To that end, the subgrade surfaces should be shaped to shed water to the edges of the respective pads.  Place a minimum 15-mil thick vapor barrier beneath all floor slabs (Stego or equivalent). All seams and penetrations through the barrier should be sealed in accordance with the manufacturer’s requirements.  Each lift of fill placed should be tested for moisture content and degree of compaction by a testing laboratory at the rate of one test per 3,000 square feet, with a minimum of three tests performed per lift within the building pad, one (1) test per 10,000 square feet in paved areas, one (1) test per lift per 100 linear feet in sidewalk areas, and one (1) test lift per 100 linear feet of utility trench backfill. D&S would be pleased to provide these services in support of this project. Additional Considerations In order to further minimize the potential for post-construction vertical movement, consideration should be given to the following: D&S ENGINEERING LABS, LLC Denton Fire Station No. 8 Denton, Texas G18-2295 14  Trees or shrubbery with a mature height greater than 6 feet and/or that require excessive amounts of water should not be planted near structures or flatwork.  Trees should not be planted closer than the mature tree’s height from structure foundations.  The grade should slope away from the foundation to the maximum amount possible, preferably at a minimum of five (5) percent within the first 10 feet of the foundation’s perimeter.  Water should not be allowed to pond next to foundations. Rainfall roof runoff should be collected and conveyed to downspouts. Downspouts should be directed to discharge at least 5 feet away from the foundation.  The moisture content of exposed subgrade soils that are within proximity to at- grade foundations should be maintained as close as possible to a consistent level throughout the year. However, we strongly recommend that excessive watering near foundations be avoided.  Where practical, pavements, sidewalks, or other flatwork may be constructed adjacent to foundations to serve as horizontal moisture control elements to help control subgrade moisture variations near foundations or soils-supported floor slabs. PAVEMENT RECOMMENDATIONS General The pavement design recommendations provided herein are derived from the subgrade information that was obtained from our geotechnical investigation, design assumptions based on project information, our experience with similar projects in this area, and on the guidelines and recommendations of the American Concrete Pavement Association (ACPA). It is ultimately the responsibility of the Civil Engineer of Record and/or other design professionals who are responsible for pavement design to seal the final pavement plans and associated specifications for this project. Behavior Characteristics of Expansive Soils Beneath Pavement Near-surface soils at this site are considered to have a low potential for volume change with changes in soil moisture content. However, increased moisture content can result in reduced soil stiffness. The moisture content can be “stabilized”, to some degree, in these soils by covering them with an impermeable surface, such as pavement. However, if moisture is introduced by surface or subsurface water, poor drainage or the addition of excessive irrigation after periods of no moisture, the soil strength can reduce causing distress to pavements as traffic travels over it. D&S ENGINEERING LABS, LLC Denton Fire Station No. 8 Denton, Texas G18-2295 15 The edges of pavements are particularly prone to moisture variations, therefore, these areas often experience the most distress (cracking, displacement, etc.). When cracks appear on the surface of the pavement, these openings can allow moisture to enter the pavement subgrade, which can lead to further weakening of the pavement section as well as accelerated failure of the pavement surface. In order to minimize the potential impacts of excessive water entering pavement subgrades and to improve the long-term performance of the pavement, we have the following recommendations:  Design a crowned or sloped pavement with edge slopes. A minimum slope of five percent within the first 5 feet from the edge of the pavement is considered ideal.  Subgrade treatments should be extended to at least 2 feet beyond the back of curbs or edges of pavements. Subgrade Strength Characteristics We recommend that a California Bearing Ratio (CBR) value of 4 be used in the design with a corresponding resilient modulus of 5,000 psi. For cement treated soils, we recommend a resilient modulus of 30,000 psi. Pavement Subgrade Preparation Recommendations The anticipated subgrade soils in the proposed paving areas will consist of clayey sand, sandy lean clay, silty sand and lean clay with sand. These soils can become weak with appreciable increases in moisture content. A commonly used method to improve the strength properties of the subgrade soils, provide a working platform, and provide a uniform subgrade is to treat them with lime. However, for this site, plasticity indices are generally low, and the soils contain significant amounts of sand. Therefore, we recommend treating pavement subgrade soils with cement. The following recommendations discuss subgrade preparation. Soil Preparation  Strip the site of all vegetation and remove any remaining organic or deleterious material under the planned paved areas. Typically, 6 to 12 inches is sufficient for this purpose.  Cut as needed to required pavement subgrade elevation.  After stripping and performing any necessary cuts, the exposed subgrade should be proof rolled. Proof rolling should consist of rolling the entire pavement subgrade with a heavily-loaded, tandem-axle dump truck weighing at least 25 tons or other approved equipment D&S ENGINEERING LABS, LLC Denton Fire Station No. 8 Denton, Texas G18-2295 16 capable of applying similar loading conditions. Any soft, wet or weak soils that are observed to rut or pump excessively during proof rolling should be removed and replaced with well-compacted, on-site clayey material as outlined below. The proof rolling operation should be performed under the observation of a qualified geotechnical engineer.  After proof rolling, all exposed surfaces should be scarified and reworked to a depth of 12 inches. The soils should then be recompacted to a minimum of 95 percent of the maximum dry density obtained in accordance with ASTM D698 (standard Proctor), and to a moisture content that is at or above the material’s optimum moisture content, as determined by the same test.  In areas to receive fill, fill may be derived from on-site or may be imported. The fill should be placed in maximum 8-inch compacted lifts, compacted to at least 95 percent of the maximum dry density, as determined by ASTM D698 (standard Proctor), and placed at a moisture content that is at or above the optimum moisture content, as determined by the same test. Prior to compaction, each lift of fill should first be processed throughout its thickness to break up and reduce clod sizes and blended to achieve a material of uniform density and moisture content. Once blended, compaction should be performed with a heavy tamping foot roller. Once compacted, if the surface of the embankment is too smooth, it may not bond properly with the succeeding layer. If this occurs, the surface of the compacted lift should be roughened and loosened by dicing before the succeeding layer is placed.  Water required to bring the fill material to the proper moisture content should be applied evenly through each layer. Any layers that become significantly altered by weather conditions should be reprocessed in order to meet recommended requirements. On hot or windy days, the use of water spraying methods may be required in order to keep each lift moist prior to placement of the subsequent lift. Furthermore, the subsurface soils should be kept moist prior to placing the pavement by water sprinkling or spraying methods.  Water should not be allowed to pond on the prepared surface once cement treatment is performed to that end, the cement-treated should be shaped in a way that will allow water to shed to one or more edges of the prepared subgrade.  Field density tests should be performed at a minimum rate of one test per each 5,000 square feet, per lift, for all compacted fills in drive areas, fire lanes and truck areas. The frequency of testing can be D&S ENGINEERING LABS, LLC Denton Fire Station No. 8 Denton, Texas G18-2295 17 reduced to one test per lift every 10,000 square feet in parking areas (minimum 3 tests per lift). Earthwork operations, including proof rolling, should be observed and tested on a continual basis by an experienced technician working under the supervision of a licensed geotechnical engineer. D&S would be pleased to provide those services in support of this project.  Surface grading adjacent to the edges of pavements and other flatwork should be sloped away from the edges to the maximum degree possible. Where minimum recommended slopes of adjacent surface grades cannot be achieved, the edges of pavements should be thickened a minimum of 2-feet wide along each edge.  Fill materials should be placed on a properly prepared subgrade as outlined above. The combined excavation, placement, and spreading operation should be performed in such a manner as to obtain blending of the material, and to assure that, once compacted, the materials, will have the most practicable degree of compaction and stability. Materials obtained from on-site must be mixed and not segregated.  Soil imported from off-site sources should be tested for compliance with the recommendations herein and approved by the project geotechnical engineer prior to being used as fill. Imported materials should consist of lean clays (maximum Plasticity Index of 30) that are essentially free of organic materials and particles larger than 4 inches in their maximum dimension. Cement Treatment Recommendations Once the subgrade is brought to rough grade, cement treatment may begin to achieve a treated compacted depth of 6-inches. We have the following recommendations for subgrade cement-treatment:  Cement treated subgrade should be prepared in accordance with TxDOT Item 275 to the elevations shown on the plans using an estimated five (5) percent cement by dry weight measure of the subgrade soil. The actual percentage to be used should be determined once the subgrade is at rough grade elevation. The amount of cement used should be the minimum amount required to achieve a 7-day cured unconfined compressive strength of 100 pounds per square inch.  Cement should be applied such that mixing operations for a given area can be completed during the same working day. D&S ENGINEERING LABS, LLC Denton Fire Station No. 8 Denton, Texas G18-2295 18  The cement may be placed dry or by the slurry method (meaning that the cement should be mixed with water in trucks or in tanks and applied as a thin slurry).  After mixing, the soil-cement mixture should be tested for sufficient pulverization and mixing in accordance with TxDOT Item 275. The mixed material should meet the following requirements when tested dry by laboratory sieves: o Minimum passing 1¾" sieve: 100% o Minimum passing ¾” sieve: 85% o Minimum passing No. 4 sieve: 60%  After sufficient mixing, the soil / cement mixture should be compacted to a minimum of 95% of Standard Proctor (ASTM D698) and to a moisture content that is at or above the optimum moisture, as determined by that same test. Compaction should be completed within 2 hours after the application of water to the mixture of soil and cement.  Cure for at least 3 days by “sprinkling” as described in TxDOT Item 204.  To reduce the potential for subgrade soil moisture changes at the edges of pavements, the cement stabilized subgrade should extend a minimum of 2 feet past the back of the roadway curbs.  In order to reduce the potential for reflective cracking up through the pavement, particularly with asphalt pavement, the cement treated subgrade should be rolled with a vibratory roller 1 to 2 days after final compaction to create a network of hairline cracks (microcracking). Cure for at least 2 days by “sprinkling” as described in TxDOT Item 204 after completion of microcracking.  Field density and moisture content testing should be performed at the rate of one test per lift per 5,000 square feet of pavement. These tests are necessary to determine if the recommended moisture and compaction requirements have been attained. Rigid Pavement We recommend that reinforced Rigid Portland Cement Concrete for this site have a minimum thickness of 7 inches for all fire lanes, truck areas and dumpster pads. A minimum thickness of 5 inches is recommended for automobile parking. The reinforced concrete paving should be placed over 6-inches of cement treated subgrade. D&S ENGINEERING LABS, LLC Denton Fire Station No. 8 Denton, Texas G18-2295 19 We have the following concrete mix design recommendations:  Recommended minimum design compressive strength: 3,500 psi.  15 to 20 percent fly ash may be used with the approval of the Civil Engineer of record  Curing compound should be applied within one hour of finishing operations Pavement Joints and Cutting The performance of concrete pavement depends to a large degree on the design, construction, and long-term maintenance of concrete joints. The following recommendations and observations are offered for consideration by the Civil Engineer and/or pavement Designer-of-Record. The concrete pavements should have adequately-spaced contraction joints to control shrinkage cracking. Past experience indicates that reinforced concrete pavements with sealed contraction joints on a 12 to 15-foot spacing, cut to a depth of one-quarter to one-third of the pavement thickness, have generally exhibited less uncontrolled post-construction cracking than pavements with wider spacing. The contraction joint pattern should divide the pavement into panels that are approximately square where the panel length should not exceed 25 percent more than the panel width. Saw cut, post placement formed contraction joints should be saw cut as soon as the concrete can support the saw cutting equipment and personnel and before shrinkage cracks appear, on the order of 4 to 6 hours after concrete placement. Isolation joints should be used wherever the pavement will abut a structural element subject to a different magnitude of movement, e.g., light poles, retaining walls, existing pavement, stairways, entryway piers, building walls, or manholes. In order to minimize the potential differential movement across the pavement areas, all joints including contraction, isolation and construction joints should be sealed to minimize the potential for infiltration of surface water. Rubberized asphalt, silicone or other suitable flexible sealant may be used to seal the joints. Maintenance should include periodic inspection of these joints and resealed as necessary. Pavement Reinforcing Steel We recommend that a minimum of 0.1 percent of steel be used for all concrete pavements. For a 6-inch thick concrete pavement section, this reinforcement ratio is approximately equivalent to No. 3 bars spaced at 18-inches on-center each way. Reinforcement requirements may increase depending on specific traffic loading and design life parameters. D&S ENGINEERING LABS, LLC Denton Fire Station No. 8 Denton, Texas G18-2295 20 OTHER CONSTRUCTION Utility and Service Lines Backfill for utility lines should consist of on-site material and should be placed in accordance with the following recommendations. The on-site fill soil should be placed in maximum 6-inch compacted lifts, compacted to a minimum of 95 percent of the maximum dry density, as determined by ASTM D698 (standard Proctor), and placed at a moisture content that is at least the optimum moisture content, as determined by that same test. It is not uncommon to realize some settlement along the trench backfill. We also recommend that the utility trenches be visually inspected during the excavation process to ensure that undesirable fill that was not detected by the test borings does not exist at the site. This office should be notified immediately if any such fill is detected. Utility lines connected to the structure may experience differential movement in response to changing moisture conditions in expansive soil. These movements may result in damage to the lines, especially at connections. Flexible connections are recommended to account for potential differential movement between the building and utilities. Utility excavations should be sloped so that water within excavations will flow to a low point away from the active construction where it can be removed before backfilling. Compaction of bedding material should not be water-jetted. Compacted backfill above the utilities should be on-site clays to limit the percolation of surface water. Exterior Flatwork Concrete flatwork should include high tensile steel reinforcement to reduce the formation and size of cracks. Flatwork should also include frequent and regularly spaced expansion/control joints and dowels to limit vertical offsets between neighboring flatwork slabs. Structure entrances should either be part of the structure or designed to tolerate vertical movement without inhibiting access. The moisture content of the subgrade should be maintained up to the time of concrete placement. If subgrade soils are allowed to dry below the levels recommended herein, additional moisture conditioning of the soils may be required. These recommendations are intended to reduce possible distress to exterior flatwork but will not prevent movement and/or vertical offsets between slabs. The upper one foot of subgrade soils should be scarified and recompacted. The scarified soil should be compacted to between 92 and 98 percent of the maximum dry density, as determined by ASTM D698 (standard Proctor), and placed at a moisture content that is at least the optimum moisture content, as determined by the same test (≥+0%). The concrete flatwork should have adequately-spaced contraction joints to control shrinkage cracking. Past experience indicates that reinforced concrete flatwork with D&S ENGINEERING LABS, LLC Denton Fire Station No. 8 Denton, Texas G18-2295 21 sealed contraction joints on a 4 to 10-foot spacing, cut to a depth of one-quarter to one-third of the pavement thickness, have generally exhibited less uncontrolled post- construction cracking than pavements with wider spacing. The contraction joint pattern should divide the pavement into panels that are approximately square where the panel length should not exceed 25 percent more than the panel width. Saw cut, post placement formed contraction joints should be saw cut as soon as the concrete can support the saw cutting equipment and personnel and before shrinkage cracks appear, on the order of 4 to 6 hours after concrete placement. Rubberized asphalt, silicone or other suitable flexible sealant could be used to seal the joints. Isolation joints should be used wherever the pavement will abut a structural element subject to a different magnitude of movement, e.g., light poles, retaining walls, existing pavement, stairways, entryway piers, building walls, or manholes. Consideration may be given to improving the subgrade beneath the ground supported flatwork. One option is to incorporate a 5-inch layer of select fill placed atop the subgrade soils. This would improve the strength properties of the subgrade soils, provide a working platform, and provide a more uniform subgrade. Select fill should have a liquid limit less than 35, a plasticity index between 6 and 18, and a minimum of 30 percent passing the No. 200 sieve and be essentially free of particles in excess of 4 inches in their longest direction. The select fill should be placed in maximum 6- inch loose lifts, compacted to at least 95 percent of the maximum density as determined by the Standard Moisture Density Relationship test (ASTM D698), and should be placed at a moisture content that is at least the optimum moisture content, as determined by that same test. Surface Drainage Proper drainage is critical to the performance and condition of the building foundation, pavements and flatwork. Positive surface drainage should be provided that directs surface water away from the building, pavements and flatwork. Where possible, we recommend that the exterior grades should slope away from foundations at the rate of five (5) percent in the first five (5), and preferably ten (10) feet away. The slopes should direct water away from the structure, and these grades should be maintained throughout construction and the life of the structure. The location of gutter downspouts, and other features, should be designed such that these items will not create moisture concentrations at or beneath the structure or flatwork. Downspouts should discharge well away from the structure and should not be allowed to erode surface soil. Moisture related issues can be positively addressed by constructing continuous exterior flatwork that extends to the building line. Where this occurs, the joints created at the interface of the flatwork and building line should be sealed with a flexible joint sealer to prevent the infiltration of water. Open cracks that may develop in the flatwork should also be sealed. The joint and any cracks that develop should be resealed as D&S ENGINEERING LABS, LLC Denton Fire Station No. 8 Denton, Texas G18-2295 22 they become apparent and should be part of a periodic inspection and maintenance program. Landscaping Landscaping against and around the exterior of the structure can adversely affect subgrade moisture resulting in localized differential movements if not properly maintained. If used, landscaping should be kept as far away from the foundation as possible, and positive drainage away from the structure should be designed, constructed, and maintained. Landscaping elements (such as edging) should not prohibit or slow the drainage of water that could result in water ponding next to foundations or edges of flatwork. When feasible, irrigation lines and heads should not be placed in close proximity to the foundation to prevent the collection of water near the foundation or flatwork, particularly in the event of leaking lines or sprinkler heads. Trees (if planned) should not be placed in proximity to the structure or movement sensitive flatwork, as trees are known to cause in localized soil shrinkage due to desiccation of the soil by the root system, possibly leading to differential movements of the structure. The desiccation zone varies by tree, but trees should not be planted closer to structures than the mature tree height, and in no cases should the drip-line of the mature tree extend closer than 10-feet of rooflines. To the extent practical, it is recommended that trees scheduled for removal in the vicinity of the proposed building and pavements be removed as far in advance of slab construction as possible. This will tend to restore a more favorable soil moisture equilibrium which will, in turn, tend to minimize the potential for greater than anticipated post-construction ground movements. A moist but not overly wet soil condition should be maintained at all times in all landscaped areas near the building after construction to minimize soil volume changes caused by changing soil moisture conditions. Site Grading Expansive clay cut and fill slopes should be gentle and preferably should not exceed 4 horizontal to 1 vertical (4H: 1V). Excess water ponding on and beside roadways, sidewalks, and ground-supported slabs can cause unacceptable heave of these structures. To reduce this potential heave, good surface drainage should be established. In addition, final grades in the vicinity of structures, pavements, and flatwork should provide for positive drainage away from these elements. Excavations Excavations greater than 5 feet in height/depth should be in accordance with OSHA 29CFR 1926, Subpart P. Temporary construction slopes should incorporate excavation protection systems or should be sloped back. Where the excavation does D&S ENGINEERING LABS, LLC Denton Fire Station No. 8 Denton, Texas G18-2295 23 not extend close to building lines, these areas may be laid back. Where space allows, temporary slopes should be sloped at 1.5 horizontal to 1 vertical (1.5H: 1V) or flatter. SEISMIC CONSIDERATIONS North Central Texas is generally regarded as an area of low seismic activity. Based on the boring log data and general geologic information gathered, we recommend that Soil Site Class “C” be used at this site. LIMITATIONS The professional geotechnical engineering services performed for this project, the findings obtained, and the recommendations prepared were accomplished in accordance with currently accepted geotechnical engineering principles and practices. Variations in the subsurface conditions are noted at the specific boring locations for this study. As such, all users of this report should be aware that differences in depths and thicknesses of strata encountered can vary between the boring locations. Statements in the report as to subsurface conditions across the site are extrapolated from the data obtained at the specific boring locations. The number and spacing of the exploration borings were chosen to obtain geotechnical information for the design and construction of a lightly to moderately loaded municipal structure foundation. If there are any conditions differing significantly from those described herein, D&S should be notified to re-evaluate the recommendations contained in this report. Recommendations contained herein are not considered applicable for an indefinite period of time. Our office must be contacted to reevaluate the contents of this report if construction does not begin within a one-year period after completion of this report. The scope of services provided herein does not include an environmental assessment of the site or investigation for the presence or absence of hazardous materials in the soil, surface water, or groundwater. All contractors referring to this geotechnical report should draw their own conclusions regarding excavations, construction, etc. for bidding purposes. D&S is not responsible for conclusions, opinions or recommendations made by others based on these data. The report is intended to guide preparation of project specifications and should not be used as a substitute for the project specifications. Recommendations provided in this report are based on our understanding of information provided by the Client to us regarding the scope of work for this project. If the Client notes any differences, our office should be contacted immediately since this may materially alter the recommendations. APPENDIX A - BORING LOGS AND SUPPORTING DATA **BORING LOCATIONS ARE INTENDED FOR GRAPHICAL REFERENCE ONLY**N.T.S.DENTONTEXASSHEET NO.DATE DRILLEDG1November 21-23, 2018PLAN OF BORINGSDENTON FIRE STATION NO. 8B1B2B3B4B5B6 KEY TO SYMBOLS AND TERMS CONSISTENCY: FINE GRAINED SOILS CONDITION OF SOILS SECONDARY COMPONENTS WEATHERING OF ROCK MASS TCP (#blows/ft) < 8 8 - 20 20 - 60 60 - 100 > 100 Relative Density (%) 0 - 15 15 - 35 35 - 65 65 - 85 85 - 100 SPT (# blows/ft) 0 - 2 3 - 4 5 - 8 9 - 15 16 - 30 > 30 UCS (tsf) < 0.25 0.25 - 0.5 0.5 - 1.0 1.0 - 2.0 2.0 - 4.0 > 4.0 CONSISTENCY OF SOILSLITHOLOGIC SYMBOLS CONDITION: COARSE GRAINED SOILS QUANTITY DESCRIPTORS RELATIVE HARDNESS OF ROCK MASS SPT (# blows/ft) 0 - 4 5 - 10 11 - 30 31 - 50 > 50 Description No visible sign of weathering Penetrative weathering on open discontinuity surfaces, but only slight weathering of rock material Weathering extends throughout rock mass, but the rock material is not friable Weathering extends throughout rock mass, and the rock material is partly friable Rock is wholly decomposed and in a friable condition but the rock texture and structure are preserved A soil material with the original texture, structure, and mineralogy of the rock completely destroyed Designation Fresh Slightly weathered Moderately weathered Highly weathered Completely weathered Residual Soil Description Can be carved with a knife. Can be excavated readily with point of pick. Pieces 1" or more in thickness can be broken by finger pressure. Readily scratched with fingernail. Can be gouged or grooved readily with knife or pick point. Can be excavated in chips to pieces several inches in size by moderate blows with the pick point. Small, thin pieces can be broken by finger pressure. Can be grooved or gouged 1/4" deep by firm pressure on knife or pick point. Can be excavated in small chips to pieces about 1" maximum size by hard blows with the point of a pick. Can be scratched with knife or pick. Gouges or grooves 1/4" deep can be excavated by hard blow of the point of a pick. Hand specimens can be detached by a moderate blow. Can be scratched with knife or pick only with difficulty. Hard blow of hammer required to detach a hand specimen. Cannot be scratched with knife or sharp pick. Breaking of hand specimens requires several hard blows from a hammer or pick. Trace Few Little Some With Designation Very Soft Soft Medium Hard Moderately Hard Hard Very Hard < 5% of sample 5% to 10% 10% to 25% 25% to 35% > 35% Condition Very Loose Loose Medium Dense Dense Very Dense Consistency Very Soft Soft Medium Stiff Stiff Very Stiff HardARTIFICIALAsphalt Aggregate Base Concrete Fill SOILROCKLimestone Mudstone Shale Sandstone Weathered Limestone Weathered Shale Weathered Sandstone CH: High Plasticity Clay CL: Low Plasticity Clay GP: Poorly-graded Gravel GW: Well-graded Gravel SC: Clayey Sand SP: Poorly-graded Sand SW: Well-graded Sand ! " ! #$%&'()$%*++$,-) ,-)'.$/'',01/'%2 ,-)'.$/'',01/' %2 3 " ! #$%&'%-%2/(%4)++$,-) 56/-7#$%&'%-%2/(%4)++$,-) 8%2#$%&'()$%*++$,-) ,-)'.$/'',01/' %2 ,-)'.$/'',01/'%2 ! "9 9 "9 9 2.0 ft 6.0 ft 15.0 ft 19.0 ft 23.0 ft 26.0 ft SILTY CLAYEY SAND (SC-SM);loose; brown, dark brown; trace ferrous nodules and fine roots LEAN CLAY (CL); very stiff; brown,reddish brown; little iron oxide stains SANDY LEAN CLAY (CL); very stiff;brown, gray, yellowish brown FAT CLAY (CH); stiff; gray, light gray SHALE; moderately to highlyweathered; soft; tan, brown, gray SHALE; fresh; soft; gray, dark gray;frequent sand seams SHALE; fresh; medium hard; gray;few thin sand seams 9292 S S S T S T S T S S T T N T N T N T C 1.3 23 25 32 4 9 17 4,8 20,23 26,27 20,20 16,7 2,5,7 50=4.0"50=1.0" 32,49,50=4.25" 11,19 11,12,15 50=1.75"50=0.5" 2.5 3.5 2.0 4.5+ 4.5+ 4.5+ 4.5+ 43 50 618.0 ft 614.0 ft 605.0 ft 601.0 ft 597.0 ft 594.0 ft 19 16 15 122.4 138.7 14.4 13.8 7.6 5.8 9.2 8.5 25.8 Depth(ft) 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 Atterberg Limits Clay(%) B1 PAGE 1 OF 2 Legend: S-Shelby Tube N-Standard Penetration T-Texas Cone Penetration C-Core B-Bag Sample - Water Encountered REC (%)RQD (%) SampleType Swell(%)LL(%)PI TotalSuction(pF) Hand Pen. (tsf)orSPT orTCP Hand Pen. (tsf)orSPT orTCP Passing #200Sieve (%) BORING LOG GraphicLog PL(%) DUW(pcf)MC(%) DeviatorStress(ksf) CLIENT: City of Denton LOCATION: Denton, TexasPROJECT: Denton Fire Station No. 8 DRILLED BY: Octavio Herrera (D&S) START DATE: 11/21/2018 DRILL METHOD: HSA/Core LOGGED BY: Sandip Adhikari (D&S) FINISH DATE: 11/21/2018 GROUND ELEVATION: Approx. 620 feet GPS COORDINATES: N33.182795, W97.097701 PROJECT NUMBER: G18-2295 40.5 ft SHALE; fresh; medium hard; gray;few thin sand seams End of boring at 40.5' Notes: -dry prior to introduction of water forcoring purpose at 30 feet 95 95 T C T 50=0.75"50=0.0" 50=4.0" 50=1.75" 579.5 ft 129.911.4 8.8 Depth(ft) 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 Atterberg Limits Clay(%) B1 PAGE 2 OF 2 Legend: S-Shelby Tube N-Standard Penetration T-Texas Cone Penetration C-Core B-Bag Sample - Water Encountered REC (%)RQD (%) SampleType Swell(%)LL(%)PI TotalSuction(pF) Hand Pen. (tsf)orSPT orTCP Hand Pen. (tsf)orSPT orTCP Passing #200Sieve (%) BORING LOG GraphicLog PL(%) DUW(pcf)MC(%) DeviatorStress(ksf) CLIENT: City of Denton LOCATION: Denton, TexasPROJECT: Denton Fire Station No. 8 DRILLED BY: Octavio Herrera (D&S) START DATE: 11/21/2018 DRILL METHOD: HSA/Core LOGGED BY: Sandip Adhikari (D&S) FINISH DATE: 11/21/2018 GROUND ELEVATION: Approx. 620 feet GPS COORDINATES: N33.182795, W97.097701 PROJECT NUMBER: G18-2295 4.0 ft 9.0 ft 19.0 ft 27.0 ft SILTY SAND (SM); loose to mediumdense; brown, dark brown, gray; trace fine roots CLAYEY SAND (SC); mediumdense; brown, reddish brown, gray;few iron oxide stains LEAN CLAY (CL); very stiff; tan, brown; little sandstone fragments SHALE; moderately to slightlyweathered; soft; tan, brown, gray; little sand SHALE; fresh; medium hard; gray;trace sand S S S T S T S T S S T S T S T T N B T B 0.0 18 27 2 14 7,7 14,25 14,12 8,9 12,7 50=2.0" 50=1.0" 22,17 8,12,18 50=1.5"50=0.25" 1.5 4.5+ 4.5+ 4.5+ 4.5+ 4.5+ 4.5+ 4.5+ 4.5+ 43 46 614.0 ft 609.0 ft 599.0 ft 591.0 ft 16 13 107.1 110.6 13.4 16.5 10.1 6.0 13.2 17.7 3.9 Depth(ft) 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 Atterberg Limits Clay(%) B2 PAGE 1 OF 2 Legend: S-Shelby Tube N-Standard Penetration T-Texas Cone Penetration C-Core B-Bag Sample - Water Encountered REC (%)RQD (%) SampleType Swell(%)LL(%)PI TotalSuction(pF) Hand Pen. (tsf)orSPT orTCP Hand Pen. (tsf)orSPT orTCP Passing #200Sieve (%) BORING LOG GraphicLog PL(%) DUW(pcf)MC(%) DeviatorStress(ksf) CLIENT: City of Denton LOCATION: Denton, TexasPROJECT: Denton Fire Station No. 8 DRILLED BY: Octavio Herrera (D&S) START DATE: 11/23/2018 DRILL METHOD: Hollow Stem Flight Auger LOGGED BY: Sandip Adhikari (D&S) FINISH DATE: 11/23/2018 GROUND ELEVATION: Approx. 618 feet GPS COORDINATES: N33.182648, W97.097590 PROJECT NUMBER: G18-2295 40.5 ft SHALE; fresh; medium hard; gray;trace sand End of boring at 40.5' Notes: -seepage at 25 feet during drilling-water at 37 feet at completion T B T 50=1.0"50=0.75" 50=3.75" 50=2.0" 577.5 ft Depth(ft) 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 Atterberg Limits Clay(%) B2 PAGE 2 OF 2 Legend: S-Shelby Tube N-Standard Penetration T-Texas Cone Penetration C-Core B-Bag Sample - Water Encountered REC (%)RQD (%) SampleType Swell(%)LL(%)PI TotalSuction(pF) Hand Pen. (tsf)orSPT orTCP Hand Pen. (tsf)orSPT orTCP Passing #200Sieve (%) BORING LOG GraphicLog PL(%) DUW(pcf)MC(%) DeviatorStress(ksf) CLIENT: City of Denton LOCATION: Denton, TexasPROJECT: Denton Fire Station No. 8 DRILLED BY: Octavio Herrera (D&S) START DATE: 11/23/2018 DRILL METHOD: Hollow Stem Flight Auger LOGGED BY: Sandip Adhikari (D&S) FINISH DATE: 11/23/2018 GROUND ELEVATION: Approx. 618 feet GPS COORDINATES: N33.182648, W97.097590 PROJECT NUMBER: G18-2295 4.0 ft 19.0 ft 24.0 ft 27.0 ft SILTY SAND (SM); loose to mediumdense; brown; little iron oxide stains; trace fine roots LEAN CLAY (CL); very stiff; brown,gray; trace iron oxide stains andferrous nodules; trace gravel SANDY LEAN CLAY (CL); very stiff;brown, gray SHALE; fresh; very soft; dark gray;frequent thin sand seams SHALE; fresh; soft to medium hard;gray; little sand 100 100 S S S T S T S T S S T S T S T S T T C 0.6 20 34 1 18 11,10 6,8 9,14 7,7 5,8 28,50=5.0" 14,12 44,50=4.0" 3.0 1.0 1.5 4.5 4.5 4.5+ 4.5+ 3.25 0.25 3.25 43 36 55 612.0 ft 597.0 ft 592.0 ft 589.0 ft 19 16 117.2 100.7 127.7 13.5 14.4 15.0 13.4 10.3 18.0 20.1 9.1 2.4 16.8 Depth(ft) 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 Atterberg Limits Clay(%) B3 PAGE 1 OF 2 Legend: S-Shelby Tube N-Standard Penetration T-Texas Cone Penetration C-Core B-Bag Sample - Water Encountered REC (%)RQD (%) SampleType Swell(%)LL(%)PI TotalSuction(pF) Hand Pen. (tsf)orSPT orTCP Hand Pen. (tsf)orSPT orTCP Passing #200Sieve (%) BORING LOG GraphicLog PL(%) DUW(pcf)MC(%) DeviatorStress(ksf) CLIENT: City of Denton LOCATION: Denton, TexasPROJECT: Denton Fire Station No. 8 DRILLED BY: Octavio Herrera (D&S) START DATE: 11/21/2018 DRILL METHOD: HSA/Core LOGGED BY: Sandip Adhikari (D&S) FINISH DATE: 11/21/2018 GROUND ELEVATION: Approx. 616 feet GPS COORDINATES: N33.182673, W97.097313 PROJECT NUMBER: G18-2295 41.0 ft SHALE; fresh; soft to medium hard;gray; little sand End of boring at 41.0' Notes: -seepage at 25 feet during drilling-drilling fluids introduced at 30 feet forcoring purposes 100100 T C T 50=5.0"50=0.25" 43,43 575.0 ft 146.36.9 24.4 Depth(ft) 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 Atterberg Limits Clay(%) B3 PAGE 2 OF 2 Legend: S-Shelby Tube N-Standard Penetration T-Texas Cone Penetration C-Core B-Bag Sample - Water Encountered REC (%)RQD (%) SampleType Swell(%)LL(%)PI TotalSuction(pF) Hand Pen. (tsf)orSPT orTCP Hand Pen. (tsf)orSPT orTCP Passing #200Sieve (%) BORING LOG GraphicLog PL(%) DUW(pcf)MC(%) DeviatorStress(ksf) CLIENT: City of Denton LOCATION: Denton, TexasPROJECT: Denton Fire Station No. 8 DRILLED BY: Octavio Herrera (D&S) START DATE: 11/21/2018 DRILL METHOD: HSA/Core LOGGED BY: Sandip Adhikari (D&S) FINISH DATE: 11/21/2018 GROUND ELEVATION: Approx. 616 feet GPS COORDINATES: N33.182673, W97.097313 PROJECT NUMBER: G18-2295 3.0 ft 11.0 ft CLAYEY SAND (SC); mediumdense; brown, reddish brown; little iron oxide stains, fine roots and gravel LEAN CLAY (CL); stiff to very stiff;brown; reddish brown; little sand andiron oxide stains; trace sandstone fragments End of boring at 11.0' Notes:-dry during drilling -dry upon completion S S S T S T S T S S T 28 28 13 14 20,17 20,23 15,10 7,7 4.0 4.5 4.5 4.5+ 4.0 3.0 4.5 47 615.0 ft 607.0 ft 15 14 13.4 10.9 7.5 13.2 Depth(ft) 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 Atterberg Limits Clay(%) B4 PAGE 1 OF 1 Legend: S-Shelby Tube N-Standard Penetration T-Texas Cone Penetration C-Core B-Bag Sample - Water Encountered REC (%)RQD (%) SampleType Swell(%)LL(%)PI TotalSuction(pF) Hand Pen. (tsf)orSPT orTCP Hand Pen. (tsf)orSPT orTCP Passing #200Sieve (%) BORING LOG GraphicLog PL(%) DUW(pcf)MC(%) DeviatorStress(ksf) CLIENT: City of Denton LOCATION: Denton, TexasPROJECT: Denton Fire Station No. 8 DRILLED BY: Octavio Herrera (D&S) START DATE: 11/21/2018 DRILL METHOD: Hollow Stem Flight Auger LOGGED BY: Sandip Adhikari (D&S) FINISH DATE: 11/21/2018 GROUND ELEVATION: Approx. 618 feet GPS COORDINATES: N33.182359, W97.097562 PROJECT NUMBER: G18-2295 2.0 ft 3.0 ft 11.0 ft SANDY LEAN CLAY (CL); stiff;brown; trace fine roots LEAN CLAY WITH SAND (CL);medium stiff; brown, gray LEAN CLAY (CL); very stiff; brown, gray; trace sand, little iron oxide stainsand ferrous nodules End of boring at 11.0' Notes:-dry during drilling -dry upon completion S S S T S T S T S S T 32 19 17,24 12,15 2,5 7,6 2.5 1.25 0.25 4.5+ 4.5+ 4.5+ 4.5+ 59 75 612.0 ft 611.0 ft 603.0 ft 1317.7 19.3 9.3 11.2 12.7 Depth(ft) 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 Atterberg Limits Clay(%) B5 PAGE 1 OF 1 Legend: S-Shelby Tube N-Standard Penetration T-Texas Cone Penetration C-Core B-Bag Sample - Water Encountered REC (%)RQD (%) SampleType Swell(%)LL(%)PI TotalSuction(pF) Hand Pen. (tsf)orSPT orTCP Hand Pen. (tsf)orSPT orTCP Passing #200Sieve (%) BORING LOG GraphicLog PL(%) DUW(pcf)MC(%) DeviatorStress(ksf) CLIENT: City of Denton LOCATION: Denton, TexasPROJECT: Denton Fire Station No. 8 DRILLED BY: Octavio Herrera (D&S) START DATE: 11/21/2018 DRILL METHOD: Hollow Stem Flight Auger LOGGED BY: Sandip Adhikari (D&S) FINISH DATE: 11/21/2018 GROUND ELEVATION: Approx. 614 feet GPS COORDINATES: N33.182540, W97.097204 PROJECT NUMBER: G18-2295 2.0 ft 4.0 ft 11.0 ft LEAN CLAY WITH SAND (CL); stiff;brown; few sandstone fragments; trace fine roots SILTY SAND (SM); loose to mediumdense; brown LEAN CLAY (CL); very stiff; gray,brown, dark brown; few sand seams End of boring at 11.0' Notes:-dry during drilling -dry upon completion S S S T S T S T S S T NP NP 14,10 6,6 7,6 7,12 3.0 3.0 2.0 4.0 4.25 3.5 3.5 37 612.0 ft 610.0 ft 603.0 ft NP 18.6 8.4 18.9 17.0 Depth(ft) 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 Atterberg Limits Clay(%) B6 PAGE 1 OF 1 Legend: S-Shelby Tube N-Standard Penetration T-Texas Cone Penetration C-Core B-Bag Sample - Water Encountered REC (%)RQD (%) SampleType Swell(%)LL(%)PI TotalSuction(pF) Hand Pen. (tsf)orSPT orTCP Hand Pen. (tsf)orSPT orTCP Passing #200Sieve (%) BORING LOG GraphicLog PL(%) DUW(pcf)MC(%) DeviatorStress(ksf) CLIENT: City of Denton LOCATION: Denton, TexasPROJECT: Denton Fire Station No. 8 DRILLED BY: Octavio Herrera (D&S) START DATE: 11/23/2018 DRILL METHOD: Hollow Stem Flight Auger LOGGED BY: Sandip Adhikari (D&S) FINISH DATE: 11/23/2018 GROUND ELEVATION: Approx. 614 feet GPS COORDINATES: N33.182887, W97.096971 PROJECT NUMBER: G18-2295 B1 4-5 7.6 14.1 521 1.3 B2 8-9 13.2 17.5 1044 0.0 B3 4-5 15.0 16.3 521 0.6 Boring Number Depth feet Vertical Swell, %Final Moisture Content, % Initial Moisture Content, % Applied Pressure,psf SWELL TEST RESULTS CLIENT: City of DentonPROJECT: Denton Fire Station No. 8 PROJECT NUMBER: G18-2295 LOCATION: Denton, Texas APPENDIX B - GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PROCEDURES D&S ENGINEERING LABS, LLC Denton Fire Station No. 8 Denton, Texas G18-2295 ANALYTICAL METHODS TO PREDICT MOVEMENT INDEX PROPERTY AND CLASSIFICATION TESTS Index property and classification testing is perhaps the most basic, yet fundamental tool available for predicting potential movements of clay soils. Index property testing typically consists of moisture content, Atterberg Limits, and Grain-size distribution determinations. From these results a general assessment of a soil’s propensity for volume change with changes in soil moisture content can be made. Moisture Content By studying the moisture content of the soils at varying depths and comparing them with the results of Atterberg Limits, one can estimate a rough order of magnitude of potential soil movement at various moisture contents, as well as movements with moisture changes. These tests are typically performed in accordance with ASTM D2216. Atterberg Limits Atterberg limits determine the liquid limit (LL), plastic limit (PL), and plasticity index (PI) of a soil. The liquid limit is the moisture content at which a soil begins to behave as a viscous fluid. The plastic limit is the moisture content at which a soil becomes workable like putty, and at which a clay soil begins to crumble when rolled into a thin thread (1/8” diameter). The PI is the numerical difference between the moisture constants at the liquid limit and the plastic limit. This test is typically performed in accordance with ASTM D4318. Clay mineralogy and the particle size influence the Atterberg Limits values, with certain minerals (e.g., montmorillonite) and smaller particle sizes having higher PI values, and therefore higher movement potential. A soil with a PI below about 15 to 18 is considered to be generally stable and should not experience significant movement with changes in moisture content. Soils with a PI above about 30 to 35 are considered to be highly active and may exhibit considerable movement with changes in moisture content. Fat clays with very high liquid limits, weakly cemented sandy clays, or silty clays are examples of soils in which it can be difficult to predict movement from index property testing alone. Grain-size Distribution The simplest grain-size distribution test involves washing a soil specimen over the No. 200 mesh sieve with an opening size of 0.075 mm (ASTM D1140). This particle size has been defined by the engineering community as the demarcation between coarse-grained and fine-grained soils. Particles smaller than this size can be further distinguished between silt-size and clay-size particles by use of a Hydrometer test (ASTM D422). A more complete grain-size distribution test that uses sieves to relative amount of particles according is the Sieve Gradation Analysis of Soils (ASTM D6913). Once the characteristics of the soil are determined through classification testing, a number of movement prediction techniques are available to predict the potential movement of the soils. Some of these are discussed in general below. D&S ENGINEERING LABS, LLC Denton Fire Station No. 8 Denton, Texas G18-2295 POTENTIAL VERTICAL MOVEMENT A general index for movement is known as the Potential Vertical Rise (PVR). The actual term PVR refers to the TxDOT Method 124-E mentioned above. For the purpose of this report the term Potential Vertical Movement (PVM) will be used since PVM estimates are derived using multiple analytical techniques, not just TxDOT methods. It should be noted that all slabs and foundations constructed on clay or clayey soils have at least some risk of potential vertical movement due to changes in soil moisture contents. To eliminate that risk, slabs and foundation elements (e.g., grade beams) should be designed as structural elements physically separated by some distance from the subgrade soils (usually 6 to 12 inches). In some cases, a floor slab with movements as little as 1/4 of an inch may result in damage to interior walls, such as cracking in sheet rock or masonry walls, or separation of floor tiles. However, these cracks are often minor and most people consider them 'liveable'. In other cases, movement of one inch may cause significant damage, inconvenience, or even create a hazard (trip hazard or others). Vertical movement of clay soils under slab on grade foundations due to soil moisture changes can result from a variety causes, including poor site grading and drainage, improperly prepared subgrade, trees and large shrubbery located too close to structures, utility leaks or breaks, poor subgrade maintenance such as inadequate or excessive irrigation, or other causes. PVM is generally considered to be a measurement of the change in height of a foundation from the elevation it was originally placed. Experience and generally accepted practice suggests that if the PVM of a site is less than one inch, the associated differential movement will be minor and acceptable to most people. SETTLEMENT Settlement is a measure of a downward movement due to consolidation of soil. This can occur from improperly placed fill (uncompacted or under-compacted), loose native soil, or from large amounts of unconfined sandy material. Properly compacted fill may settle approximately one percent of its depth, particularly when fill depths exceed 10 feet. D&S ENGINEERING LABS, LLC Denton Fire Station No. 8 Denton, Texas G18-2295 EDGE AND CENTER LIFT MOVEMENT (ym) The Post-Tensioning Institute (PTI) has developed a parameter of movement defined as the differential movement (ym) estimated using the change in soil surface elevation in two locations separated by a distance em within which the differential movement will occur; em being measured from the exterior of a building to some distance toward the interior. All calculations for this report are based on the modified PTI procedure in addition to our judgment as necessary for specific site conditions. The minimum movements given in the PTI are for climatic conditions only and have been modified somewhat to account for site conditions which may increase the actual parameters. “Center lift” occurs when the center, or some portion of the center of the building, is higher than the exterior. This can occur when the soil around the exterior shrinks, or the soil under the center of the building swells, or a combination of both occurs. “Edge lift” occurs when the edge, or some portion of the exterior of the building, is higher than the center. This can occur when the soil around the exterior swells. It is not uncommon to have both the center lift and the edge lift phenomena occurring on the same building, in different areas. D&S ENGINEERING LABS, LLC Denton Fire Station No. 8 Denton, Texas G18-2295 SPECIAL COMMENTARY ON CONCRETE AND EARTHWORK RESTRAINT TO SHRINKAGE CRACKS One of the characteristics of concrete is that during the curing process shrinkage occurs and if there are any restraints to prevent the concrete from shrinking, cracks can form. In a typical slab on grade or structurally suspended foundation there will be cracks due to interior beams and piers that restrict shrinkage. This restriction is called Restraint to Shrinkage (RTS). In post tensioned slabs, the post tensioning strands are slack when installed and must be stressed at a later time. The best procedure is to stress the cables approximately 30% within one to two days of placing the concrete. Then the cables are stressed fully when the concrete reaches greater strength, usually in 7 days. During this time before the cables are stressed fully, the concrete may crack more than conventionally reinforced slabs. When the cables are stressed, some of the cracks will pull together. These RTS cracks do not normally adversely affect the overall performance of the foundation. It should be noted that for exposed floors, especially those that will be painted, stained or stamped, these cracks may be aesthetically unacceptable. Any tile which is applied directly to concrete or over a mortar bed over concrete has a high probability of minor cracks occurring in the tile due to RTS. It is recommended if tile is used to install expansion joints in appropriate locations to minimize these cracks. UTILITY TRENCH EXCAVATION Trench excavation for utilities should be sloped or braced in the interest of safety. Attention is drawn to OSHA Safety and Health Standards (29 CFR 1926/1910), Subpart P, regarding trench excavations greater than 5 feet in depth. FIELD SUPERVISION AND DENSITY TESTING Field density and moisture content determinations should be made on each lift of fill with a minimum of three (3) tests performed per lift in the building pad area, one (1) test per lift per 3,000 square feet in other fill areas, and one (1) test lift per 100 linear feet of utility trench backfill. Supervision by the field technician and the project engineer is required. Some adjustments in the test frequencies may be required based upon the general fill types and soil conditions at the time of fill placement. It is recommended that all site and subgrade preparation, proof rolling, and pavement construction be monitored by a qualified engineering firm. Density tests should be performed to verify proper compaction and moisture content of any earthwork. Inspection should be performed prior to and during concrete placement operations. D&S would be pleased to perform these services in support of this project. 14805 Trinity Boulevard, Fort Worth, Texas 76155 Geotechnical 817.529.8464 Corporate 940.735.3733 www.dsenglabs.com Texas Engineering Firm Registration # F‐12796 Oklahoma Engineering Firm Certificate of Authorization CA 7181 (This page intentionally left blank) (This page intentionally left blank) Denton Fire Station No. 8 SUMMARY Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 011000-1 August 2019 SECTION 011000 – SUMMARY PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Project information. 2. Work covered by Contract Documents. 3. Work by Owner. 4. Owner-furnished products. 5. Access to site. 6. Work restrictions. 7. Specification and drawing conventions. 1.3 PROJECT INFORMATION A. Project Identification: City of Denton - Fire Station No. 8 1. Project Location: 3131 Colorado Blvd., Denton, Texas B. Owner: City of Denton, Texas C. Architect: Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 1.4 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. The Work of Project is defined by the Contract Documents and consists of the following: 1. An 8,481 S.F. one story fire station with two apparatus bays, living quarters, and all associated site work. B. Type of Contract: 1. Project will be constructed under a single prime contract. 1.5 WORK BY OWNER A. General: Cooperate fully with Owner so work may be carried out smoothly, without interfering with or delaying work under this Contract or work by Owner. Coordinate the Work of this Contract with work performed by Owner. 1.6 OWNER-FURNISHED PRODUCTS A. Owner will furnish products indicated. The Work includes receiving, unloading, handling, storing, protecting, and installing Owner-furnished products. B. Owner-Furnished Products installed by Owner or Owners’ vendor, listed for coordination purposes: 1. Alerting System. 2. Refrigerators. 3. Washers and Dryers. 4. SCBA Air Compressor and Fill Station. 5. Furniture. 6. Mattresses. 7. Exercise equipment. 1.7 ACCESS TO SITE A. General: Contractor shall have full use of Project site for construction operations during construction period. Contractor's use of Project site is limited only by Owner's right to perform work or to retain other contractors on portions of Project. B. General: Contractor shall have limited use of Project site for construction operations during construction period. Contractor's use of Project site is limited by Owner’s use of existing facility which must remain in operation until new facility is completed. C. Use of Site: Limit use of Project site to areas within the Contract limits indicated. Do not disturb portions of Project site beyond areas in which the Work is indicated. 1. Driveways, Walkways and Entrances: Keep driveways and entrances serving premises clear and available to Owner, Owner's employees, and emergency vehicles at all times. Do not use these areas for parking or storage of materials. a. Schedule deliveries to minimize use of driveways and entrances by construction operations. b. Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of materials and equipment on-site. Denton Fire Station No. 8 SUMMARY Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 011000-2 August 2019 1.8 WORK RESTRICTIONS A. Work Restrictions, General: Comply with restrictions on construction operations. 1. Comply with limitations on use of public streets and with other requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 1.9 SPECIFICATION AND DRAWING CONVENTIONS A. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations. These conventions are as follows: 1. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications. The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are implied where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase. 2. Specification requirements are to be performed by Contractor unless specifically stated otherwise. B. Division 01 General Requirements: Requirements of Sections in Division 01 apply to the Work of all Sections in the Specifications. C. Drawing Coordination: Requirements for materials and products identified on Drawings are described in detail in the Specifications. One or more of the following are used on Drawings to identify materials and products: 1. Terminology: Materials and products are identified by the typical generic terms used in the individual Specifications Sections. 2. Abbreviations: Materials and products are identified by abbreviations published as part of the U.S. National CAD Standard and scheduled on Drawings. 3. Keynoting: Materials and products are identified by reference keynotes referencing Specification Section numbers found in this Project Manual. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION Denton Fire Station No. 8 ALLOWANCES Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 012100-1 August 2019 SECTION 012100 – ALLOWANCES PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements governing allowances. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 012200 Unit Prices for procedures for using unit prices. 2. Section 014000 Quality Requirements for procedures governing the use of allowances for testing and inspecting. 1.3 SELECTION AND PURCHASE A. At the earliest practical date after award of the Contract, advise Architect of the date when final selection and purchase of each product or system described by an allowance must be completed to avoid delaying the Work. B. At Architect's request, obtain proposals for each allowance for use in making final selections. Include recommendations that are relevant to performing the Work. C. Purchase products and systems selected by Architect from the designated supplier. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Submit proposals for purchase of products or systems included in allowances, in the form specified for Change Orders. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Submit invoices or delivery slips to show actual quantities of materials delivered to the site for use in fulfillment of each allowance. B. Submit time sheets and other documentation to show labor time and cost for installation of allowance items that include installation as part of the allowance. C. Coordinate and process submittals for allowance items in same manner as for other portions of the Work. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate allowance items with other portions of the Work. Furnish templates as required to coordinate installation. 1.7 LUMP SUM ALLOWANCES A. Allowance shall include cost to Contractor of specific products and materials ordered by Owner or selected by Architect under allowance and shall include freight and delivery to Project site. B. Unless otherwise indicated, Contractor's costs for receiving and handling at Project site, labor, installation, overhead and profit, and similar costs related to products and materials selected by Architect under allowance shall be included as part of the Contract Sum and not part of the allowance. C. Unused Materials: Return unused materials purchased under an allowance to manufacturer or supplier for credit to Owner, after installation has been completed and accepted. 1. If requested by Architect, retain and prepare unused material for storage by Owner. Deliver un- used material to Owner's storage space as directed. 1.8 ADJUSTMENT OF ALLOWANCES A. Allowance Adjustment: To adjust allowance amounts, prepare an Allowance Expenditure Authorization Form based on the difference between purchase amount and the allowance, multiplied by final measurement of work-in-place where applicable. If applicable, include reasonable allowances for cutting losses, tolerances, mixing wastes, normal product imperfections, and similar margins. 1. If requested, prepare explanation and documentation to substantiate distribution of overhead costs and other margins claimed. 2. Submit substantiation of a change in scope of work, if any, claimed in Change Orders related to unit-cost allowances. 3. Owner reserves the right to establish the quantity of work-in-place by independent quantity survey, measure, or count. B. Submit claims for increased costs because of a change in scope or nature of the allowance described in the Contract Documents, whether for the purchase order amount or Contractor's handling, labor, installation, overhead, and profit. Denton Fire Station No. 8 ALLOWANCES Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 012100-2 August 2019 1. Do not include Contractor's or subcontractor's indirect expense in the Change Order cost amount unless it is clearly shown that the nature or extent of work has changed from what could have been foreseen from information in the Contract Documents. 2. No change to Contractor's indirect expense is permitted for selection of higher- or lower-priced materials or systems of the same scope and nature as originally indicated. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine products covered by an allowance promptly on delivery for damage or defects. Return damaged or defective products to manufacturer for replacement. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Coordinate materials and their installation for each allowance with related materials and installations to ensure that each allowance item is completely integrated and interfaced with related work. 3.3 SCHEDULE OF ALLOWANCES A. Allow the lump sum of $2,000 for purchase and installation of cast bronze building dedication plaque. B. Allow the lump sum of $75,000 for Owner’s betterment. END OF SECTION Denton Fire Station No. 8 UNIT PRICES Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 012200-1 August 2019 SECTION 012200 – UNIT PRICES PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Related Requirements: 1. Section 012600 Contract Modification Procedures for procedures for submitting and handling Change Orders. 2. Section 014000 Quality Requirements for general testing and inspecting requirements. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Unit price is an amount incorporated in the Agreement, applicable during the duration of the Work as a price per unit of measurement for materials, equipment, or services, or a portion of the Work, added to or deducted from the Contract Sum by appropriate modification, if the scope of Work or estimated quantities of Work required by the Contract Documents are increased or decreased. 1.3 PROCEDURES A. Unit prices include all necessary material, plus cost for delivery, installation, insurance, applicable taxes, overhead, and profit. B. Measurement and Payment: See individual Specification Sections for work that requires establishment of unit prices. Methods of measurement and payment for unit prices are specified in those Sections. C. Owner reserves the right to reject Contractor's measurement of work-in-place that involves use of established unit prices and to have this work measured, at Owner's expense, by an independent surveyor acceptable to Contractor. 1.4 SCHEDULE OF UNIT PRICES A. Drilled Piers: 1. For actual depth versus anticipated depth indicated on Drawings. 2. Reconciliation: Per pier diameter category for net add or deduct, not per individual pier. 3. For each diameter category pier required, provide: a. Unit price per additional or deleted lineal foot of completed pier (steel and concrete). b. Unit price per additional or deleted lineal foot of steel casings. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 – EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION Denton Fire Station No. 8 ALTERNATES Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 012300-1 August 2019 SECTION 012300 – ALTERNATES PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for alternates. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Alternate: An amount proposed by bidders and stated on the Bid Form for certain work defined in the bidding requirements that may be added to or deducted from the base bid amount if Owner decides to accept a corresponding change either in the amount of construction to be completed or in the products, materials, equipment, systems, or installation methods described in the Contract Documents. 1. Alternates described in this Section are part of the Work only if enumerated in the Agreement. 2. The cost or credit for each alternate is the net addition to or deduction from the Contract Sum to incorporate alternate into the Work. No other adjustments are made to the Contract Sum. 1.4 PROCEDURES A. Coordination: Revise or adjust affected adjacent work as necessary to completely integrate work of the alternate into Project. 1. Include as part of each alternate, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects, and similar items incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not indicated as part of alternate. B. Notification: Immediately following award of the Contract, notify each party involved, in writing, of the status of each alternate. Indicate if alternates have been accepted, rejected, or deferred for later consideration. Include a complete description of negotiated revisions to alternates. C. Execute accepted alternates under the same conditions as other work of the Contract. D. Schedule: A schedule of alternates is included at the end of this Section. Specification Sections referenced in schedule contain requirements for materials necessary to achieve the work described under each alternate. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES A. Deduct Alternate No. 1: Remove steel roll gate system as specified in Section 323100, steel ornamental fence system as specified in Section 323119, vehicular roll gate operator as specified in Section 323132, and steel ornamental man swing gate hardware as specified in Section 087100 from project scope. *All infrastructures related to the ornamental fence and gate components including vehicle induction loops, conduit and junction boxes as noted on E1.0 to remain as a part of base bid. B. Deduct Alternate No. 2: Provide full cavity glass-fiber blanket insulation (R-19) as specified in Section 072100 in lieu of open cell spray polyurethane foam insulation as specified in Section 072730 at exterior light gauge metal stud wall framing. C. Deduct Alternate No. 3: Provide dimensional shingle roofing system as specified in Section 073113 in lieu of standing seam metal roofing system as specified in Section 074100 and metal roofing snow guard system as specified in Section 077253. *Rigid insulation, plywood cover board, and ice and water shield membrane requirements as detailed and specified in Section 074100 remain constant. D. Add Alternate No. 4: Provide a no-stain, polished concrete floor finish as specified in Section 033543 in lieu of the troweled and sealed concrete floor finish as specified in Section 096116. *Alternate applies to the following rooms receiving F2 floor finish: Vehicle Bays 138, Shop 139, Storage 141, Electrical 142 and Bunker Gear 143. END OF SECTION Denton Fire Station No. 8 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 012500-1 August 2019 SECTION 012500 – SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor. 1. Substitutions for Cause: Changes proposed by Contractor that are required due to changed Project conditions, such as unavailability of product, regulatory changes, or unavailability of required warranty terms. 2. Substitutions for Convenience: Changes proposed by Contractor or Owner that are not required in order to meet other Project requirements but may offer advantage to Contractor or Owner. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Substitution Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles. 1. Substitution Request Form: Use form provided in Project Manual. 2. Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following, as applicable: a. Statement indicating why specified product or fabrication or installation cannot be provided, if applicable. b. Coordination information, including a list of changes or revisions needed to other parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate contractors that will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution. c. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of the Work specified. Include annotated copy of applicable Specification Section. Significant qualities may include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, sustainable design characteristics, warranties, and specific features and requirements indicated. Indicate deviations, if any, from the Work specified. d. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and installation procedures. e. Samples, where applicable or requested. f. Certificates and qualification data, where applicable or requested. g. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners. h. Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results for compliance with requirements indicated. i. Research reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for Project, from ICC- ES or other agency approved by local authority. j. Detailed comparison of Contractor's construction schedule using proposed substitution with products specified for the Work, including effect on the overall Contract Time. If specified product or method of construction cannot be provided within the Contract Time, include letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer's letterhead, stating date of receipt of purchase order, lack of availability, or delays in delivery. k. Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Sum. l. Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in the Contract Documents except as indicated in substitution request, is compatible with related materials, and is appropriate for applications indicated. m. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce indicated results. 3. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within seven days of receipt of a request for substitution. Architect will notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection of proposed substitution within 15 days of receipt of request, or seven days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later. a. Forms of Acceptance: Change Order, Construction Change Directive, or Architect's Supplemental Instructions for minor changes in the Work. b. Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a proposed substitution within time allocated. Denton Fire Station No. 8 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 012500-2 August 2019 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Compatibility of Substitutions: Investigate and document compatibility of proposed substitution with related products and materials. Engage a qualified testing agency to perform compatibility tests recommended by manufacturers. 1.5 PROCEDURES A. Coordination: Revise or adjust affected work as necessary to integrate work of the approved substitutions. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 SUBSTITUTIONS A. Substitutions for Cause: Submit requests for substitution immediately on discovery of need for change, but not later than 15 days prior to time required for preparation and review of related submittals. 1. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements: a. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce indicated results. b. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted. c. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction schedule. d. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having jurisdiction. e. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work. f. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work. g. Requested substitution provides specified warranty. B. Substitutions for Convenience: Architect will consider requests for substitution if received within the stated period during bidding phase or within 60days after commencement of the Work. Requests received after that time may be considered or rejected at discretion of Architect. 1. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements: a. Requested substitution offers Owner a substantial advantage in cost, time, energy conservation, or other considerations, after deducting additional responsibilities Owner must assume. Owner's additional responsibilities may include compensation to Architect for re-design and evaluation services, increased cost of other construction by Owner, and similar considerations. b. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce indicated results. c. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted. d. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction schedule. e. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having jurisdiction. f. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work. g. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work. h. Requested substitution provides specified warranty. i. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved. PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION Denton Fire Station No. 8 SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 012500.13-1 August 2019 SECTION 012500.13 – SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM (After Contract Award) PROJECT: TO: _________________________________ NO. ____________ DATE: _________________________________ Contractor hereby requests acceptance of the following product or system as a substitution in accordance with provisions of Division 01 Section “Substitution Procedures:” 1. SPECIFIED PRODUCT OR SYSTEM Substitution request for: _________________________________________________ Specification Section No.: _________________ Article/ Paragraph: 2. REASON FOR SUBSTITUTION REQUEST SPECIFIED PRODUCT PROPOSED PRODUCT 0 Is no longer available. 0 W ill reduce construction time 0 Is unable to meet project schedule. 0 W ill result in cost savings of 0 Is unsuitable for the designated application. $ to Project 0 Cannot interface with adjacent materials. 0 Is for supplier’s convenience 0 Is not compatible with adjacent materials. 0 Is for subcontractor’s convenience 0 Cannot provide the specified warranty. 0 Other: 0 Cannot be constructed as indicated _________________________________________ 0 Cannot be obtained due to one or more of the following: 0 Strike 0 Bankruptcy of manufacturer or supplier 0 Lockout 0 Similar occurrence (explain below) 3. SUPPORTING DATA 0 Drawings, specifications, product data, performance data, test data, and any other necessary information to facilitate review of the Substitution Request are attached. 0 Sample is attached. 0 Sample will be sent if requested. 4. QUALITY COMPARISON Provide all necessary side-by-side comparative data as required to facilitate review of Substitution Request: SPECIFIED PRODUCT PROPOSED PRODUCT Manufacturer: __________________________ ___________________________ Name / Brand: __________________________ ___________________________ Denton Fire Station No. 8 SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 012500.13-2 August 2019 Catalog No.: __________________________ ___________________________ Vendor: __________________________ ___________________________ Variations: __________________________ ___________________________ (Add Additional Sheets If Necessary) Local Distributor or Supplier: ___________________________________________ Maintenance Service Available: 0 Yes 0 No Spare Parts Source: Warranty: 0 Yes 0 No _____ Years 5. PREVIOUS INSTALLATIONS Identification of at least three similar projects on which proposed substitution was used: PROJECT #1: Project: _______________________________________________________ Address: _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ Architect: _______________________________________________________ Owner: _______________________________________________________ Contractor: _______________________________________________________ Date Installed: ________________________ PROJECT #2: Project: _______________________________________________________ Address: _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ Architect: _______________________________________________________ Owner: _______________________________________________________ Contractor: _______________________________________________________ Date Installed: PROJECT #3: Project: _______________________________________________________ Address: _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ Architect: _______________________________________________________ Denton Fire Station No. 8 SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 012500.13-3 August 2019 Owner: _______________________________________________________ Contractor: _______________________________________________________ Date Installed: 6. EFFECT OF SUBSTITUTION Proposed substitution affects other work or trades: 0 No 0 Yes (if Yes, explain) _______________________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________________ Proposed substitution requires dimensional revisions or redesign of architectural, structural, M-E-P, life safety, or other work: 0 No 0 Yes (if Yes, attach data explaining revisions) 7. STATEMENT OF CONFORMANCE OF REQUEST TO CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS Contractor and Subcontractor have investigated the proposed substitution and hereby represent that: A. They have personally investigated the proposed substitution and believe that it is equal to or superior in all respects to specified product, except as stated above; B. The proposed substitution is in compliance with applicable codes and ordinances; C. The proposed substitution will provide same warranty as specified for specified product; D. They will coordinate the incorporation of the proposed substitution into the Work, and will include modifications to the Work as required to fully integrate the substitution; E. They have included complete cost data and implications of the substitution (attached); F. They will pay any redesign fees incurred by the Architect or any of the Architect’s consultants, and any special inspection costs incurred by the Owner, caused by the use of this product; G. They waive all future claims for added cost or time to the Contract related to the substitution, or that become known after substitution is accepted. H. The Architect’s approval, if granted, will be based upon reliance upon data submitted and the opinion, knowledge, information, and belief of the Architect at the time decision is rendered and Addendum is issued; and that Architect’s approval therefore is interim in nature and subject to reevaluation and reconsideration as additional data, materials, workmanship, and coordination with other work are observed and reviewed. Contractor: __________ (Name of Contractor) Date: ___________________ By: Subcontractor: (Name of Subcontractor) Date: ___________________ By: _____________________ Note: Unresponsive or incomplete requests will be rejected and returned without review. 8. ARCHITECT'S REVIEW AND ACTION 0 Substitution is accepted. Denton Fire Station No. 8 SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 012500.13-4 August 2019 0 Substitution is accepted, with the following comments: ___________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________ 0 Resubmit Substitution Request: 0 Provide more information in the following areas: _______________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________ 0 Provide proposal indicating amount of savings / credit to Owner 0 Bidding Contractor shall sign Bidder's Statement of Conformance 0 Bidding Subcontractor shall sign Bidder's Statement of Conformance 0 Substitution is not accepted: 0 Substitution Request received too late. 0 Substitution Request received directly from subcontractor or supplier. 0 Substitution Request not submitted in accordance with requirements. 0 Substitution Request Form is not properly executed. 0 Substitution Request does not indicate what item is being proposed. 0 Insufficient information submitted to facilitate proper evaluation. 0 Proposed product does not appear to comply with specified requirements. 0 Proposed product will require substantial revisions to Contract Documents. By: ___________________________________________ Date: Architect has relied upon the information provided by the Contractor, and makes no claim as to the accuracy, completeness, or validity of such information. If an accepted substitution is later found to be not in compliance with the Contract Documents, Contractor shall provide the specified product. 9. OWNER’S REVIEW AND ACTION 0 Substitution is accepted; Architect to prepare Change Order. 0 Substitution is not accepted. 0 Owner will pay Architect directly for redesign fees. 0 Include Architect’s Additional Service fee for implementing the substitution in the Change Order. By: ____________________________________________ (Owner/Owner’s Representative) Date: END OF FORM Denton Fire Station No. 8 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 012600-1 August 2019 SECTION 012600 – CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK A. Architect will issue supplemental instructions authorizing minor changes in the Work, not involving adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time, on AIA Document G710, "Architect's Supplemental Instructions." 1.3 PROPOSAL REQUESTS A. Owner-Initiated Proposal Requests: Architect will issue a detailed description of proposed changes in the Work that may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. If necessary, the description will include supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications. 1. Work Change Proposal Requests issued by Architect are not instructions either to stop work in progress or to execute the proposed change. 2. Within time specified in Proposal Request or 20 days, when not otherwise specified after receipt of Proposal Request, submit a quotation estimating cost adjustments to the Contract Sum and the Contract Time necessary to execute the change. a. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities. b. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts. c. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. d. Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the effect of the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time. e. Quotation Form: Use CSI Form 13.6D, "Proposal Worksheet Summary," and Form 13.6C, "Proposal Worksheet Detail." or other forms acceptable to Architect. B. Contractor-Initiated Proposals: If latent or changed conditions require modifications to the Contract, Contractor may initiate a claim by submitting a request for a change to Architect. 1. Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the proposed change on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time. 2. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities. 3. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts. 4. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. 5. Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the effect of the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time. 6. Comply with requirements in Section 012500 Substitution Procedures if the proposed change requires substitution of one product or system for product or system specified. 7. Proposal Request Form: Use CSI Form 13.6A, "Change Order Request (Proposal)," with attachments CSI Form 13.6D, "Proposal Worksheet Summary," and Form 13.6C, "Proposal Worksheet Detail." or other form acceptable to Architect. 1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE CHANGE ORDERS A. Allowance Adjustment: See Section 012100 "Allowances" for administrative procedures for preparation of Change Order Proposal for adjusting the Contract Sum to reflect actual costs of allowances. B. Unit-Price Adjustment: See Section 012200 "Unit Prices" for administrative procedures for preparation of Change Order Proposal for adjusting the Contract Sum to reflect measured scope of unit-price work. 1.5 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES A. On Owner's approval of a Work Changes Proposal Request, Architect will issue a Change Order for signatures of Owner and Contractor on AIA Document G701 or other form acceptable to Architect. 1.6 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE A. Construction Change Directive: Architect may issue a Construction Change Directive on AIA Document G714. Construction Change Directive instructs Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, for Denton Fire Station No. 8 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 012600-2 August 2019 subsequent inclusion in a Change Order. 1. Construction Change Directive contains a complete description of change in the Work. It also designates method to be followed to determine change in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. B. Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by the Construction Change Directive. 1. After completion of change, submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary to substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION Denton Fire Station No. 8 PAYMENT PROCEDURES Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 012900-1 August 2019 SECTION 012900 – PAYMENT PROCEDURES PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Schedule of Values: A statement furnished by Contractor allocating portions of the Contract Sum to various portions of the Work and used as the basis for reviewing Contractor's Applications for Payment. 1.3 SCHEDULE OF VALUES A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the schedule of values with preparation of Contractor's construction schedule. Cost-loaded Critical Path Method Schedule may serve to satisfy requirements for the schedule of values. 1. Coordinate line items in the schedule of values with other required administrative forms and schedules, including the following: a. Application for Payment forms with continuation sheets. b. Submittal schedule. c. Items required to be indicated as separate activities in Contractor's construction schedule. 2. Sub-schedules for Separate Design Contracts: Where the Owner has retained design professionals under separate contracts who will each provide certification of payment requests, provide sub- schedules showing values coordinated with the scope of each design services contract as described in Section 011000 Summary. B. Format and Content: Use Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish line items for the schedule of values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section. 1. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the schedule of values: a. Project name and location. b. Name of Architect. c. Architect's project number. d. Contractor's name and address. e. Date of submittal. 2. Arrange schedule of values consistent with format of AIA Document G703. 3. Arrange the schedule of values in tabular form with separate columns to indicate the following for each item listed: a. Related Specification Section or Division. b. Description of the Work. c. Name of subcontractor. d. Name of manufacturer or fabricator. e. Name of supplier. f. Change Orders (numbers) that affect value. g. Dollar value of the following, as a percentage of the Contract Sum to nearest one-hundredth percent, adjusted to total 100 percent. 1) Labor. 2) Materials. 3) Equipment. 4. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in enough detail to facilitate continued evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Coordinate with Project Manual table of contents. Provide multiple line items for principal subcontract amounts in excess of five percent of the Contract Sum. 5. Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; total shall equal the Contract Sum. 6. Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each part of the Work where Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed. a. Differentiate between items stored on-site and items stored off-site. If required, include evidence of insurance. 7. Each item in the schedule of values and Applications for Payment shall be complete. Include total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit for each item. a. Temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of actual work-in- place may be shown either as separate line items in the schedule of values or distributed as general overhead expense, at Contractor's option. 8. Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the schedule of values prior to the next Applications. Denton Fire Station No. 8 PAYMENT PROCEDURES Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 012900-2 August 2019 1.4 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT A. Each Application for Payment following the initial Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as certified by Architect and paid for by Owner. 1. Initial Application for Payment, Application for Payment at time of Substantial Completion, and final Application for Payment involve additional requirements. B. Payment Application Times: The date for each progress payment is indicated in the Agreement between Owner and Contractor. The period of construction work covered by each Application for Payment is the period indicated in the Agreement. C. Payment Application Times: Submit Application for Payment to Architect by the last day of the month. The period covered by each Application for Payment is one month, ending on the 25 day of the month. 1. Submit draft copy of Application for Payment seven days prior to due date for review by Architect. D. Application for Payment Forms: Use forms provided by Owner for Applications for Payment. E. Application for Payment Forms: Use forms acceptable to Architect and Owner for Applications for Payment. Submit forms for approval with initial submittal of schedule of values. F. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Notarize and execute by a person authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. Architect will return incomplete applications without action. 1. Entries shall match data on the schedule of values and Contractor's construction schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions were made. 2. Include amounts for work completed following previous Application for Payment, whether or not payment has been received. Include only amounts for work completed at time of Application for Payment. 3. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued before last day of construction period covered by application. 4. Indicate separate amounts for work being carried out under Owner-requested project acceleration. G. Stored Materials: Include in Application for Payment amounts applied for materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed. Differentiate between items stored on-site and items stored off-site. 1. Provide certificate of insurance, evidence of transfer of title to Owner, and consent of surety to payment, for stored materials. 2. Provide supporting documentation that verifies amount requested, such as paid invoices. Match amount requested with amounts indicated on documentation; do not include overhead and profit on stored materials. 3. Provide summary documentation for stored materials indicating the following: a. Value of materials previously stored and remaining stored as of date of previous Applications for Payment. b. Value of previously stored materials put in place after date of previous Application for Payment and on or before date of current Application for Payment. c. Value of materials stored since date of previous Application for Payment and remaining stored as of date of current Application for Payment. H. Transmittal: Submit three signed and notarized original copies of each Application for Payment to Architect by a method ensuring receipt within 24 hours. One copy shall include waivers of lien and similar attachments if required. 1. Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording appropriate information about application. I. Waivers of Mechanic's Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of mechanic's lien from entities lawfully entitled to file a mechanic's lien arising out of the Contract and related to the Work covered by the payment. 1. Submit partial waivers on each item for amount requested in previous application, after deduction for retainage, on each item. 2. When an application shows completion of an item, submit conditional final or full waivers. 3. Owner reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must submit waivers. 4. Waiver Forms: Submit executed waivers of lien on forms acceptable to Owner. J. Waivers of Mechanic's Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of mechanic's liens from subcontractors, sub-subcontractors, and suppliers for construction period covered by the previous application. 1. Submit partial waivers on each item for amount requested in previous application, after deduction for retainage, on each item. 2. When an application shows completion of an item, submit conditional final or full waivers. 3. Owner reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must submit waivers. 4. Submit final Application for Payment with or preceded by conditional final waivers from every entity involved with performance of the Work covered by the application who is lawfully entitled to a lien. 5. Waiver Forms: Submit executed waivers of lien on forms, acceptable to Owner. Denton Fire Station No. 8 PAYMENT PROCEDURES Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 012900-3 August 2019 K. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or coincide with submittal of first Application for Payment include the following: 1. Schedule of values. 2. Schedule of unit prices. 3. Submittal schedule (preliminary if not final). 4. List of Contractor's staff assignments. 5. List of Contractor's principal consultants. 6. Copies of building permits. 7. Copies of authorizations and licenses from authorities having jurisdiction for performance of the Work. 8. Initial progress report. 9. Report of preconstruction conference. 10. Certificates of insurance and insurance policies. 11. Performance and payment bonds. 12. Data needed to acquire Owner's insurance. L. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After Architect issues the Certificate of Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment showing 100 percent completion for portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete. 1. Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete and a statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum. 2. This application shall reflect Certificate(s) of Substantial Completion issued previously for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work. M. Final Payment Application: After completing Project closeout requirements, submit final Application for Payment with releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted, including, but not limited, to the following: 1. Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements. 2. Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required and proof that taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid. 3. Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Sum. 4. AIA Document G706, "Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims." 5. AIA Document G707, "Consent of Surety to Final Payment." 6. Final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and similar data as of date of Substantial Completion or when Owner took possession of and assumed responsibility for corresponding elements of the Work. 7. Final liquidated damages settlement statement. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION Denton Fire Station No. 8 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 013100-1 August 2019 SECTION 013100 – PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on Project including, but not limited to, the following: 1. General coordination procedures. 2. Coordination drawings. 3. Requests for Information (RFIs). 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. RFI: Request from Owner, Architect, or Contractor seeking information required by or clarifications of the Contract Documents. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a special design. Include the following information in tabular form: 1. Name, address, and telephone number of entity performing subcontract or supplying products. 2. Number and title of related Specification Section(s) covered by subcontract. 3. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate, covered by subcontract. B. Key Personnel Names: Within 15 days of starting construction operations, submit a list of key personnel assignments, including superintendent and other personnel in attendance at Project site. Identify individuals and their duties and responsibilities; list addresses and telephone numbers, including home, office, and cellular telephone numbers and e-mail addresses. Provide names, addresses, and telephone numbers of individuals assigned as alternates in the absence of individuals assigned to Project. 1. Post copies of list in project meeting room, in temporary field office, on Project Web site, and by each temporary telephone. Keep list current at all times. 1.5 GENERAL COORDINATION PROCEDURES A. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate construction operations, included in different Sections, that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. 1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own installation. 2. Coordinate installation of different components to ensure maximum performance and accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair. B. Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of attendees at meetings. C. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative procedures with other construction activities to avoid conflicts and to ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Preparation of Contractor's construction schedule. 2. Preparation of the schedule of values. 3. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls. 4. Delivery and processing of submittals. 5. Progress meetings. 6. Pre-installation conferences. 7. Project closeout activities. 8. Startup and adjustment of systems. D. Conservation: Coordinate construction activities to ensure that operations are carried out with consideration given to conservation of energy, water, and materials. Coordinate use of temporary utilities to minimize waste. 1. Salvage materials and equipment involved in performance of, but not actually incorporated into, the Work. See other Sections for disposition of salvaged materials that are designated as Owner's property. Denton Fire Station No. 8 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 013100-2 August 2019 1.6 COORDINATION DRAWINGS A. Coordination Drawings, General: Prepare coordination drawings according to requirements in individual Sections, and additionally where installation is not completely shown on Shop Drawings, where limited space availability necessitates coordination, or if coordination is required to facilitate integration of products and materials fabricated or installed by more than one entity. 1. Content: Project-specific information, drawn accurately to a scale large enough to indicate and resolve conflicts. Do not base coordination drawings on standard printed data. Include the following information, as applicable: a. Indicate functional and spatial relationships of components of architectural, structural, civil, mechanical, and electrical systems. b. Indicate space requirements for routine maintenance and for anticipated replacement of components during the life of the installation. c. Show location and size of access doors required for access to concealed dampers, valves, and other controls. d. Indicate required installation sequences. e. Indicate dimensions shown on the Drawings. Specifically note dimensions that appear to be in conflict with submitted equipment and minimum clearance requirements. Provide alternate sketches to Architect indicating proposed resolution of such conflicts. Minor dimension changes and difficult installations will not be considered changes to the Contract. B. Coordination Drawing Organization: Organize coordination drawings as follows: 1. Floor Plans and Reflected Ceiling Plans: Show architectural and structural elements, and mechanical, plumbing, fire-protection, fire-alarm, and electrical Work. Show locations of visible ceiling-mounted devices relative to acoustical ceiling grid. Supplement plan drawings with section drawings where required to adequately represent the Work. 2. Plenum Space: Indicate sub-framing for support of ceiling and wall systems, mechanical and electrical equipment, and related Work. Locate components within ceiling plenum to accommodate layout of light fixtures indicated on Drawings. Indicate areas of conflict between light fixtures and other components. 3. Mechanical Rooms: Provide coordination drawings for mechanical rooms showing plans and elevations of mechanical, plumbing, fire-protection, fire-alarm, and electrical equipment. 4. Structural Penetrations: Indicate penetrations and openings required for all disciplines. 5. Slab Edge and Embedded Items: Indicate slab edge locations and sizes and locations of embedded items for metal fabrications, sleeves, anchor bolts, bearing plates, angles, door floor closers, slab depressions for floor finishes, curbs and housekeeping pads, and similar items. 6. Mechanical and Plumbing Work: Show the following: a. Sizes and bottom elevations of ductwork, piping, and conduit runs, including insulation, bracing, flanges, and support systems. b. Dimensions of major components, such as dampers, valves, diffusers, access doors, cleanouts and electrical distribution equipment. c. Fire-rated enclosures around ductwork. 7. Electrical Work: Show the following: a. Runs of vertical and horizontal conduit 1-1/4 inches in diameter and larger. b. Light fixture, exit light, emergency battery pack, smoke detector, and other fire-alarm locations. c. Panel board, switch board, switchgear, transformer, busway, generator, and motor control center locations. d. Location of pull boxes and junction boxes, dimensioned from column center lines. 8. Fire-Protection System: Show the following: a. Locations of standpipes, mains piping, branch lines, pipe drops, and sprinkler heads. 9. Coordination Drawing Prints: Prepare coordination drawing prints according to requirements in Section 013300 Submittal Procedures. C. Coordination Digital Data Files: Prepare coordination digital data files according to the following requirements: 1. File Preparation Format: Same digital data software program, version, and operating system as original Drawings. 2. File Submittal Format: Submit or post coordination drawing files using format same as file preparation format. 3. Architect will furnish Contractor one set of digital data files of Drawings for use in preparing coordination digital data files. a. Architect makes no representations as to the accuracy or completeness of digital data files as they relate to Drawings. b. Digital Data Software Program: Refer to Section 011000 Summary for digital data software program. Denton Fire Station No. 8 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 013100-3 August 2019 c. Contractor shall execute a data licensing agreement in the form of agreement acceptable to Owner and Architect. 1.7 REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION (RFIs) A. General: Immediately on discovery of the need for additional information or interpretation of the Contract Documents, Contractor shall prepare and submit an RFI in the form specified. 1. Architect will return RFIs submitted to Architect by other entities controlled by Contractor with no response. 2. Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in Contractor's work or work of subcontractors. B. Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing information or interpretation and the following: 1. Project name. 2. Project number. 3. Date. 4. Name of Contractor. 5. Name of Architect. 6. RFI number, numbered sequentially. 7. RFI subject. 8. Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate. 9. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. 10. Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate. 11. Contractor's suggested resolution. If Contractor's suggested resolution impacts the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact in the RFI. 12. Contractor's signature. 13. Attachments: Include sketches, descriptions, measurements, photos, Product Data, Shop Drawings, coordination drawings, and other information necessary to fully describe items needing interpretation. a. Include dimensions, thicknesses, structural grid references, and details of affected materials, assemblies, and attachments on attached sketches. C. RFI Forms: Software-generated form with substantially the same content as indicated above, acceptable to Architect. 1. Attachments shall be electronic files in Adobe Acrobat PDF format. D. Architect's Action: Architect will review each RFI, determine action required, and respond. Allow seven working days for Architect's response for each RFI. RFIs received by Architect after 1:00 p.m. will be considered as received the following working day. 1. The following Contractor-generated RFIs will be returned without action: a. Requests for approval of submittals. b. Requests for approval of substitutions. c. Requests for approval of Contractor's means and methods. d. Requests for coordination information already indicated in the Contract Documents. e. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum. f. Requests for interpretation of Architect's actions on submittals. g. Incomplete RFIs or inaccurately prepared RFIs. 2. Architect's action may include a request for additional information, in which case Architect's time for response will date from time of receipt of additional information. 3. Architect's action on RFIs that may result in a change to the Contract Time or the Contract Sum may be eligible for Contractor to submit Change Proposal according to Section 012600 Contract Modification Procedures. a. If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, notify Architect in writing within 10 days of receipt of the RFI response. E. RFI Log: Prepare, maintain, and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized by the RFI number. Submit log weekly. Software log with not less than the following: 1. Project name. 2. Name and address of Contractor. 3. Name and address of Architect. 4. RFI number including RFIs that were returned without action or withdrawn. 5. RFI description. 6. Date the RFI was submitted. 7. Date Architect's response was received. F. On receipt of Architect's action, update the RFI log and immediately distribute the RFI response to affected parties. Review response and notify Architect within seven days if Contractor disagrees with response. 1. Identification of related Minor Change in the Work, Construction Change Directive, and Proposal Denton Fire Station No. 8 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 013100-4 August 2019 Request, as appropriate. 1.8 PROJECT MEETINGS A. General: Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site unless otherwise indicated. 1. Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and Architect of scheduled meeting dates and times. 2. Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited attendees. 3. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record significant discussions and agreements achieved. Distribute the meeting minutes to everyone concerned, including Owner and Architect, within three days of the meeting. B. Preconstruction Conference: Schedule and conduct a preconstruction conference before starting construction, at a time convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than 15 days after execution of the Agreement. 1. Conduct the conference to review responsibilities and personnel assignments. 2. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Owner's Commissioning Authority, Architect, and their consultants; Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the conference. Participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. 3. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record and distribute meeting minutes. C. Pre-installation Conferences: Conduct a pre-installation conference at Project site before each construction activity that requires coordination with other construction. 1. Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or affected by the installation and its coordination or integration with other materials and installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting. Advise Architect and Owner's Commissioning Authority of scheduled meeting dates. 2. Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for the particular activity under consideration, including requirements for the following: a. Options. b. Related RFIs. c. Related Change Orders. d. Purchases. e. Deliveries. f. Submittals. g. Sustainable design requirements. h. Review of mockups. i. Possible conflicts. j. Compatibility requirements. k. Time schedules. l. Weather limitations. m. Manufacturer's written instructions. n. Warranty requirements. o. Compatibility of materials. p. Acceptability of substrates. q. Temporary facilities and controls. r. Space and access limitations. s. Regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. t. Testing and inspecting requirements. u. Installation procedures. v. Coordination with other work. w. Required performance results. x. Protection of adjacent work. y. Protection of construction and personnel. 3. Record significant conference discussions, agreements, and disagreements, including required corrective measures and actions. 4. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to other parties requiring information. 5. Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded. Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of the Work and reconvene the conference at earliest feasible date. 6. Coordinate Pre-Installation conferences with Owner and Architect. Conferences to include, but not limited to: a. Sub-structures and Vehicle Bays. b. Sub-structure and Division 26 and 28. c. Masonry structure and Division 26 and 28. Denton Fire Station No. 8 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 013100-5 August 2019 d. Masonry structure and Vehicle Bay doors. e. Concrete slab protection and finish. D. Project Closeout Conference: Schedule and conduct a project closeout conference, at a time convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than 90 days prior to the scheduled date of Substantial Completion. 1. Conduct the conference to review requirements and responsibilities related to Project closeout. 2. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Owner's Commissioning Authority, Architect, and their consultants; Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the meeting. Participants at the meeting shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. 3. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect or delay Project closeout, including the following: a. Preparation of record documents. b. Procedures required prior to inspection for Substantial Completion and for final inspection for acceptance. c. Submittal of written warranties. d. Requirements for completing sustainable design documentation. e. Requirements for preparing operations and maintenance data. f. Requirements for delivery of material samples, attic stock, and spare parts. g. Requirements for demonstration and training. h. Preparation of Contractor's punch list. i. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment at Substantial Completion and for final payment. j. Coordination of separate contracts. k. Owner's partial occupancy requirements. l. Installation of Owner's furniture, fixtures, and equipment. m. Responsibility for removing temporary facilities and controls. 4. Minutes: Entity conducting meeting will record and distribute meeting minutes. E. Progress Meetings: Conduct progress meetings at weekly intervals. 1. Coordinate dates of meetings with preparation of payment requests. 2. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner and Architect, each contractor, subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the meeting shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. 3. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to status of Project. a. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting. Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to Contractor's construction schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time. 1) Review schedule for next period. b. Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following: 1) Interface requirements. 2) Status of submittals. 3) Status of sustainable design documentation, including review of action plans. 4) Deliveries. 5) Off-site fabrication. 6) Access. 7) Site utilization. 8) Temporary facilities and controls. 9) Progress cleaning. 10) Quality and work standards. 11) Status of correction of deficient items. 12) Field observations. 13) Status of RFIs. 14) Status of proposal requests. 15) Pending changes. 16) Status of Change Orders. 17) Pending claims and disputes. 18) Documentation of information for payment requests. 4. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting the meeting will record and distribute the meeting Denton Fire Station No. 8 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 013100-6 August 2019 minutes to each party present and to parties requiring information. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION Denton Fire Station No. 8 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 013200-1 August 2019 SECTION 013200 – CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for documenting the progress of construction during performance of the Work, including the following: 1. Startup construction schedule. 2. Construction schedule updating reports. 3. Daily construction reports. 4. Material location reports. 5. Site condition reports. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 014000 Quality Requirements for submitting a schedule of tests and inspections. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Activity: A discrete part of a project that can be identified for planning, scheduling, monitoring, and controlling the construction project. Activities included in a construction schedule consume time and resources. 1. Critical Activity: An activity on the critical path that must start and finish on the planned early start and finish times. 2. Predecessor Activity: An activity that precedes another activity in the network. 3. Successor Activity: An activity that follows another activity in the network. B. Cost Loading: The allocation of the schedule of values for the completion of an activity as scheduled. The sum of costs for all activities must equal the total Contract Sum unless otherwise approved by Architect. C. CPM: Critical path method, which is a method of planning and scheduling a construction project where activities are arranged based on activity relationships. Network calculations determine when activities can be performed and the critical path of Project. D. Critical Path: The longest connected chain of interdependent activities through the network schedule that establishes the minimum overall Project duration and contains no float. E. Event: The starting or ending point of an activity. F. Float: The measure of leeway in starting and completing an activity. 1. Float time is not for the exclusive use or benefit of either Owner or Contractor, but is a jointly owned, expiring Project resource available to both parties as needed to meet schedule milestones and Contract completion date. 2. Free float is the amount of time an activity can be delayed without adversely affecting the early start of the successor activity. 3. Total float is the measure of leeway in starting or completing an activity without adversely affecting the planned Project completion date. G. Resource Loading: The allocation of manpower and equipment necessary for the completion of an activity as scheduled. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Format for Submittals: Submit required submittals in the following format: 1. Working electronic copy of schedule file, where indicated. B. Startup construction schedule. 1. Approval of cost-loaded, startup construction schedule will not constitute approval of schedule of values for cost-loaded activities. C. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Initial schedule, of size required to display entire schedule for entire construction period. D. CPM Reports: Concurrent with CPM schedule, submit each of the following reports. Format for each activity in reports shall contain activity number, activity description, cost and resource loading, original duration, remaining duration, early start date, early finish date, late start date, late finish date, and total float in calendar days. 1. Activity Report: List of all activities sorted by activity number and then early start date, or actual start date if known. 2. Logic Report: List of preceding and succeeding activities for all activities, sorted in ascending order by activity number and then early start date, or actual start date if known. 3. Total Float Report: List of all activities sorted in ascending order of total float. E. Construction Schedule Updating Reports: Submit with Applications for Payment. Denton Fire Station No. 8 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 013200-2 August 2019 F. Special Reports: Submit at time of unusual event. G. Qualification Data: For scheduling consultant. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Scheduling Consultant Qualifications: An experienced specialist in CPM scheduling and reporting, with capability of producing CPM reports and diagrams within 24 hours of Architect's request. May be an employee of the Contractor. B. Prescheduling Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Section 013100 Project Management and Coordination. Review methods and procedures related to the preliminary construction schedule and Contractor's construction schedule, including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Review software limitations and content and format for reports. 2. Verify availability of qualified personnel needed to develop and update schedule. 3. Discuss constraints, including phasing work stages and partial Owner occupancy. 4. Review delivery dates for Owner-furnished products. 5. Review schedule for work of Owner's separate contracts. 6. Review submittal requirements and procedures. 7. Review time required for review of submittals and resubmittals. 8. Review requirements for tests and inspections by independent testing and inspecting agencies. 9. Review time required for Project closeout and Owner startup procedures, including commissioning activities. 10. Review and finalize list of construction activities to be included in schedule. 11. Review procedures for updating schedule. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate Contractor's construction schedule with the schedule of values, list of subcontracts, submittal schedule, progress reports, payment requests, and other required schedules and reports. 1. Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from entities involved. 2. Coordinate each construction activity in the network with other activities and schedule them in proper sequence. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE, GENERAL A. Time Frame: Extend schedule from date established for commencement of the Work to date of final completion. 1. Contract completion date shall not be changed by submission of a schedule that shows an early completion date, unless specifically authorized by Change Order. B. Activities: Treat each story or separate area as a separate numbered activity for each main element of the Work. Comply with the following: 1. Activity Duration: Define activities so no activity is longer than 20 days, unless specifically allowed by Architect. 2. Procurement Activities: Include procurement process activities for the following long lead items and major items, requiring a cycle of more than 60 days, as separate activities in schedule. Procurement cycle activities include, but are not limited to, submittals, approvals, purchasing, fabrication, and delivery. 3. Submittal Review Time: Include review and resubmittal times indicated in Section 013300 Submittal Procedures in schedule. Coordinate submittal review times in Contractor's construction schedule with submittal schedule. 4. Startup and Testing Time: Include no fewer than 7 days for startup and testing. 5. Substantial Completion: Indicate completion in advance of date established for Substantial Completion, and allow time for Architect's administrative procedures necessary for certification of Substantial Completion. 6. Punch List and Final Completion: Include not more than 30 days for completion of punch list items and final completion. C. Constraints: Include constraints and work restrictions indicated in the Contract Documents and as follows in schedule, and show how the sequence of the Work is affected. 1. Work under More Than One Contract: Include a separate activity for each contract. 2. Work by Owner: Include a separate activity for each portion of the Work performed by Owner. 3. Products Ordered in Advance: Include a separate activity for each product. Include delivery date indicated in Section 011000 Summary. Delivery dates indicated stipulate the earliest possible delivery date. 4. Owner-Furnished Products: Include a separate activity for each product. Include delivery date indicated in Section 011000 Summary. Delivery dates indicated stipulate the earliest possible Denton Fire Station No. 8 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 013200-3 August 2019 delivery date. 5. Work Restrictions: Show the effect of the following items on the schedule: a. Provisions for future construction. b. Seasonal variations. c. Environmental control. 6. Work Stages: Indicate important stages of construction for each major portion of the Work, including, but not limited to, the following: a. Subcontract awards. b. Submittals. c. Purchases. d. Mockups. e. Fabrication. f. Sample testing. g. Deliveries. h. Installation. i. Tests and inspections. j. Adjusting. k. Curing. l. Building flush-out. m. Startup and placement into final use and operation. 7. Construction Areas: Identify each major area of construction for each major portion of the Work. Indicate where each construction activity within a major area must be sequenced or integrated with other construction activities to provide for the following: a. Structural completion. b. Temporary enclosure and space conditioning. c. Permanent space enclosure. d. Completion of mechanical installation. e. Completion of electrical installation. f. Substantial Completion. D. Milestones: Include milestones indicated in the Contract Documents in schedule, including, but not limited to, the Notice to Proceed, Substantial Completion, and final completion, and the following interim milestones: 1. Temporary enclosure and space conditioning. E. Cost Correlation: Superimpose a cost correlation timeline, indicating planned and actual costs. On the line, show planned and actual dollar volume of the Work performed as of planned and actual dates used for preparation of payment requests. 1. See Section 012900 Payment Procedures for cost reporting and payment procedures. F. Upcoming Work Summary: Prepare summary report indicating activities scheduled to occur or commence prior to submittal of next schedule update. Summarize the following issues: 1. Unresolved issues. 2. Unanswered Requests for Information. 3. Rejected or unreturned submittals. 4. Notations on returned submittals. 5. Pending modifications affecting the Work and Contract Time. G. Recovery Schedule: When periodic update indicates the Work is 14 or more calendar days behind the current approved schedule, submit a separate recovery schedule indicating means by which Contractor intends to regain compliance with the schedule. Indicate changes to working hours, working days, crew sizes, and equipment required to achieve compliance, and date by which recovery will be accomplished. H. Computer Scheduling Software: Prepare schedules using current version of a program that has been developed specifically to manage construction schedules. 2.2 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE (CPM SCHEDULE) A. General: Prepare network diagrams using AON (activity-on-node) format. B. Startup Network Diagram: Submit diagram within 14 days of date established for commencement of the Work. Outline significant construction activities for the first 90 days of construction. Include skeleton diagram for the remainder of the Work and a cash requirement prediction based on indicated activities. C. CPM Schedule: Prepare Contractor's construction schedule using a cost- and resource-loaded, time- scaled CPM network analysis diagram for the Work. 1. Develop network diagram in sufficient time to submit CPM schedule so it can be accepted for use no later than 60 days after date established for commencement of the Work. a. Failure to include any work item required for performance of this Contract shall not excuse Contractor from completing all work within applicable completion dates, regardless of Architect's approval of the schedule. 2. Conduct educational workshops to train and inform key Project personnel, including subcontractors' Denton Fire Station No. 8 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 013200-4 August 2019 personnel, in proper methods of providing data and using CPM schedule information. 3. Establish procedures for monitoring and updating CPM schedule and for reporting progress. Coordinate procedures with progress meeting and payment request dates. 4. Use "one workday" as the unit of time for individual activities. Indicate nonworking days and holidays incorporated into the schedule in order to coordinate with the Contract Time. D. CPM Schedule Preparation: Prepare a list of all activities required to complete the Work. Using the startup network diagram, prepare a skeleton network to identify probable critical paths. 1. Activities: Indicate the estimated time duration, sequence requirements, and relationship of each activity in relation to other activities. Include estimated time frames for the following activities: a. Preparation and processing of submittals. b. Mobilization and demobilization. c. Purchase of materials. d. Delivery. e. Fabrication. f. Utility interruptions. g. Installation. h. Work by Owner that may affect or be affected by Contractor's activities. i. Testing and commissioning. j. Punch list and final completion. k. Activities occurring following final completion. 2. Critical Path Activities: Identify critical path activities, including those for interim completion dates. Scheduled start and completion dates shall be consistent with Contract milestone dates. 3. Processing: Process data to produce output data on a computer-drawn, time-scaled network. Revise data, reorganize activity sequences, and reproduce as often as necessary to produce the CPM schedule within the limitations of the Contract Time. 4. Format: Mark the critical path. Locate the critical path near center of network; locate paths with most float near the edges. a. Subnetworks on separate sheets are permissible for activities clearly off the critical path. 5. Cost- and Resource-Loading of CPM Schedule: Assign cost to construction activities on the CPM schedule. Do not assign costs to submittal activities. Obtain Architect's approval prior to assigning costs to fabrication and delivery activities. Assign costs under main subcontracts for testing and commissioning activities, operation and maintenance manuals, punch list activities, Project record documents, and demonstration and training (if applicable), in the amount of 5 percent of the Contract Sum. a. Each activity cost shall reflect an appropriate value subject to approval by Architect. b. Total cost assigned to activities shall equal the total Contract Sum. E. Contract Modifications: For each proposed contract modification and concurrent with its submission, prepare a time-impact analysis using a network fragment to demonstrate the effect of the proposed change on the overall project schedule. F. Initial Issue of Schedule: Prepare initial network diagram from a sorted activity list indicating straight "early start-total float." Identify critical activities. Prepare tabulated reports showing the following: 1. Contractor or subcontractor and the Work or activity. 2. Description of activity. 3. Main events of activity. 4. Immediate preceding and succeeding activities. 5. Early and late start dates. 6. Early and late finish dates. 7. Activity duration in workdays. 8. Total float or slack time. 9. Average size of workforce. 10. Dollar value of activity (coordinated with the schedule of values). G. Schedule Updating: Concurrent with making revisions to schedule, prepare tabulated reports showing the following: 1. Identification of activities that have changed. 2. Changes in early and late start dates. 3. Changes in early and late finish dates. 4. Changes in activity durations in workdays. 5. Changes in the critical path. 6. Changes in total float or slack time. 7. Changes in the Contract Time. H. Value Summaries: Prepare two cumulative value lists, sorted by finish dates. 1. In first list, tabulate activity number, early finish date, dollar value, and cumulative dollar value. 2. In second list, tabulate activity number, late finish date, dollar value, and cumulative dollar value. Denton Fire Station No. 8 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 013200-5 August 2019 3. In subsequent issues of both lists, substitute actual finish dates for activities completed as of list date. 4. Prepare list for ease of comparison with payment requests; coordinate timing with progress meetings. a. In both value summary lists, tabulate "actual percent complete" and "cumulative value completed" with total at bottom. b. Submit value summary printouts one week before each regularly scheduled progress meeting. 2.3 REPORTS A. Daily Construction Reports: Prepare a daily construction report recording the following information concerning events at Project site: 1. List of separate contractors at Project site. 2. Approximate count of personnel at Project site. 3. Equipment at Project site. 4. Material deliveries. 5. High and low temperatures and general weather conditions, including presence of rain or snow. 6. Accidents. 7. Meetings and significant decisions. 8. Unusual events (see special reports). 9. Stoppages, delays, shortages, and losses. 10. Meter readings and similar recordings. 11. Emergency procedures. 12. Orders and requests of authorities having jurisdiction. 13. Change Orders received and implemented. 14. Construction Change Directives received and implemented. 15. Services connected and disconnected. 16. Partial completions and occupancies. 17. Substantial Completions authorized. B. Material Location Reports: At monthly intervals, prepare and submit a comprehensive list of materials delivered to and stored at Project site. List shall be cumulative, showing materials previously reported plus items recently delivered. Include with list a statement of progress on and delivery dates for materials or items of equipment fabricated or stored away from Project site. Indicate the following categories for stored materials: 1. Material stored prior to previous report and remaining in storage. 2. Material stored prior to previous report and since removed from storage and installed. 3. Material stored following previous report and remaining in storage. C. Site Condition Reports: Immediately on discovery of a difference between site conditions and the Contract Documents, prepare and submit a detailed report. Submit with a Request for Information. Include a detailed description of the differing conditions, together with recommendations for changing the Contract Documents. 2.4 SPECIAL REPORTS A. General: Submit special reports directly to Owner within one day(s) of an occurrence. Distribute copies of report to parties affected by the occurrence. B. Reporting Unusual Events: When an event of an unusual and significant nature occurs at Project site, whether or not related directly to the Work, prepare and submit a special report. List chain of events, persons participating, responses by Contractor's personnel, evaluation of results or effects, and similar pertinent information. Advise Owner in advance when these events are known or predictable. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE A. Scheduling Consultant: Engage a consultant to provide planning, evaluation, and reporting using CPM scheduling. 1. In-House Option: Owner may waive the requirement to retain a consultant if Contractor employs skilled personnel with experience in CPM scheduling and reporting techniques. Submit qualifications. B. Contractor's Construction Schedule Updating: At monthly intervals, update schedule to reflect actual construction progress and activities. Issue schedule one week before each regularly scheduled progress meeting. 1. Revise schedule immediately after each meeting or other activity where revisions have been recognized or made. Issue updated schedule concurrently with the report of each such meeting. Denton Fire Station No. 8 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 013200-6 August 2019 2. Include a report with updated schedule that indicates every change, including, but not limited to, changes in logic, durations, actual starts and finishes, and activity durations. 3. As the Work progresses, indicate final completion percentage for each activity. C. Distribution: Distribute copies of approved schedule to Architect, Owner, separate contractors, testing and inspecting agencies, and other parties identified by Contractor with a need-to-know schedule responsibility. 1. Post copies in Project meeting rooms and temporary field offices. 2. When revisions are made, distribute updated schedules to the same parties and post in the same locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned portion of the Work and are no longer involved in performance of construction activities. END OF SECTION Denton Fire Station No. 8 PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 013233-1 August 2019 SECTION 013233 – PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following: 1. Preconstruction photographs. 2. Periodic construction photographs. 3. Final completion construction photographs. 4. Preconstruction video recordings. 5. Periodic construction video recordings. 1.3 UNIT PRICES A. Basis for Bids: Base number of construction photographs on average of 20 photographs per week over the duration of Project. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For photographer. B. Key Plan: Submit key plan of Project site and building with notation of vantage points marked for location and direction of each photograph and video recording. Indicate elevation or story of construction. Include same information as corresponding photographic documentation. C. Digital Photographs: Submit image files within three days of taking photographs. 1. Digital Camera: Minimum sensor resolution of 8 megapixels. 2. Format: Minimum 3200 by 2400 pixels, in unaltered original files, with same aspect ratio as the sensor, uncropped, date and time stamped, in folder named by date of photograph, accompanied by key plan file. 3. Identification: Provide the following information with each image description in file metadata tag: a. Name of Project. b. Name and contact information for photographer. c. Name of Architect. d. Name of Contractor. e. Date photograph was taken. f. Description of vantage point, indicating location, direction (by compass point), and elevation or story of construction. g. Unique sequential identifier keyed to accompanying key plan. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 PHOTOGRAPHIC MEDIA A. Digital Images: Provide images in JPG format, produced by a digital camera with minimum sensor size of 8 megapixels, and at an image resolution of not less than 3200 by 2400 pixels. 1. Mount camera on a fixed pole at a location and height as required that provides complete and unobstructed view of entire site for full duration of construction. B. Digital Video Recordings: Provide high-resolution, digital video disc in format acceptable to Architect. 1. Mount camera on a fixed pole at a location and height as required that provides complete and unobstructed view of entire site for full duration of construction. 2. Scheduling: Video recorder to be installed and in working order with viewing link provided to Owner and Architect prior to Commencement of the Work. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS A. General: Take photographs using the maximum range of depth of field, and that are in focus, to clearly show the Work. Photographs with blurry or out-of-focus areas will not be accepted. 1. Maintain key plan with each set of construction photographs that identifies each photographic location. B. Digital Images: Submit digital images exactly as originally recorded in the digital camera, without alteration, manipulation, editing, or modifications using image-editing software. 1. Date and Time: Include date and time in file name for each image. Denton Fire Station No. 8 PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 013233-2 August 2019 2. Field Office Images: Maintain one set of images accessible in the field office at Project site, available at all times for reference. Identify images in the same manner as those submitted to Architect. C. Preconstruction Photographs: Before starting construction, take photographs and video of Project site and surrounding properties, including existing items to remain during construction, from different vantage points, as directed by Architect. 1. Flag excavation areas before taking construction photographs. 2. Take 20 photographs to show existing conditions adjacent to property before starting the Work. 3. Take 20 photographs of existing buildings either on or adjoining property to accurately record physical conditions at start of construction. 4. Take additional photographs as required to record settlement or cracking of adjacent structures, pavements, and improvements. D. Periodic Construction Photographs: Take 20 photographs monthly, coinciding with the cutoff date associated with each Application for Payment. Select vantage points to show status of construction and progress since last photographs were taken. E. Time-Lapse Sequence Construction Photographs: Take photographs with web cam mounted on pole and connected to internet via IP address. 1. Frequency: Take photographs at 1 minute intervals each day construction activities occur. 2. Vantage Points: Confirm location with Architect. F. Final Completion Construction Photographs: Take 20 color photographs after date of Substantial Completion for submission as project record documents. will inform photographer of desired vantage points. 1. Do not include date stamp. G. Additional Photographs: Architect may request photographs in addition to periodic photographs specified. Additional photographs will be paid for by Change Order and are not included in the Contract Sum. 1. Three days' notice will be given, where feasible. 2. In emergency situations, take additional photographs within 24 hours of request. 3. Circumstances that could require additional photographs include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Immediate follow-up when on-site events result in construction damage or losses. b. Photographs to be taken at fabrication locations away from Project site. These photographs are not subject to unit prices or unit-cost allowances. c. Substantial Completion of a major phase or component of the Work. d. Extra record photographs at time of final acceptance. 3.2 CONSTRUCTION VIDEO RECORDINGS A. Video Recording Photographer: Engage a qualified videographer to record construction video recordings. B. Time-Lapse Sequence Construction Video Recordings: Record video recording to show status of construction and progress. 1. Frequency: During each of the following construction phases, set up video recorder to automatically record one frame of video recording every five minutes, from same vantage point each time, to create a time-lapse sequence of 30 minutes in length as follows: a. Commencement of the Work, through completion of subgrade construction. b. Above-grade structural framing. c. Exterior building enclosure. d. Exterior improvements including landscaping and irrigation. 2. Timer: Provide timer to automatically start and stop video recorder so recording occurs only during construction work hours. 3. Vantage Points: Following suggestions by Architect and Contractor, photographer shall select vantage points. END OF SECTION Denton Fire Station No. 8 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 013300-1 August 2019 SECTION 013300 – SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes requirements for the submittal schedule and administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other submittals. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that require Architect's responsive action. Action submittals are those submittals indicated in individual Specification Sections as "action submittals." B. Informational Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that do not require Architect's responsive action. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements. Informational submittals are those submittals indicated in individual Specification Sections as "informational submittals." C. File Transfer Protocol (FTP): Communications protocol that enables transfer of files to and from another computer over a network and that serves as the basis for standard Internet protocols. An FTP site is a portion of a network located outside of network firewalls within which internal and external users are able to access files. D. Portable Document Format (PDF): An open standard file format licensed by Adobe Systems used for representing documents in a device-independent and display resolution-independent fixed-layout document format. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Submittal Schedule: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates required by construction schedule. Include time required for review, ordering, manufacturing, fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates. Include additional time required for making corrections or revisions to submittals noted by Architect and additional time for handling and reviewing submittals required by those corrections. 1. Coordinate submittal schedule with list of subcontracts, the schedule of values, and Contractor's construction schedule. 2. Initial Submittal: Submit concurrently with startup construction schedule. Include submittals required during the first 60 days of construction. List those submittals required to maintain orderly progress of the Work and those required early because of long lead time for manufacture or fabrication. 3. Final Submittal: Submit concurrently with the first complete submittal of Contractor's construction schedule. a. Submit revised submittal schedule to reflect changes in current status and timing for submittals. 4. Format: Arrange the following information in a tabular format: a. Scheduled date for first submittal. b. Specification Section number and title. c. Submittal category: Action; informational. d. Name of subcontractor. e. Description of the Work covered. f. Scheduled date for Architect's final release or approval. g. Scheduled date of fabrication. h. Scheduled dates for purchasing. i. Scheduled dates for installation. j. Activity or event number. 1.5 SUBMITTAL ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Architect's Digital Data Files: Electronic digital data files of the Contract Drawings will be provided by Architect for Contractor's use in preparing submittals. 1. Architect will furnish Contractor one set of Architectural digital data drawing files of the Contract Drawings for use in preparing Shop Drawings and Project record drawings. a. Architect makes no representations as to the accuracy or completeness of digital data drawing files as they relate to the Contract Drawings. Denton Fire Station No. 8 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 013300-2 August 2019 b. Contractor shall execute a digital file release form provided by the Architect. c. Cost for Architectural files shall be $200 for up to five files and $50 for each additional file. 1) Cost shall be for each request occurrence. 2) Cost is for file preparation, handling, and correspondence and shall not be deemed as a sale of the electronic digital files by the Architect to the Contractor. 3) File format shall be .dwf.. 2. Consultant’s own their intellectual property and transfer of information is at their discretion. Refer applicable Divisions for digital file availability and requirements including forms, policies and potential fees. B. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities. 1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity. 2. Submit all submittal items required for each Specification Section concurrently unless partial submittals for portions of the Work are indicated on approved submittal schedule. 3. Submit action submittals and informational submittals required by the same Specification Section as separate packages under separate transmittals. 4. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for coordination. a. The right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received. C. Processing Time: Allow time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows. Time for review shall commence on receipt of submittal. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals. 1. Initial Review: Allow 21 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Will advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination. 2. Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner as initial submittal. 3. Resubmittal Review: Allow 21 days for review of each resubmittal. 4. Sequential Review: Where sequential review of submittals by Architect's consultants, Owner, or other parties is indicated, allow 21 days for initial review of each submittal. 5. Concurrent Consultant Review: Where the Contract Documents indicate that submittals may be transmitted simultaneously to Architect and to Architect's consultants, allow 28 days for review of each submittal. Submittal will be returned to before being returned to Contractor. D. Electronic Submittals: Identify and incorporate information in each electronic submittal file as follows: 1. Assemble complete submittal package into a single indexed file incorporating submittal requirements of a single Specification Section and transmittal form with links enabling navigation to each item. 2. Name file with submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier. a. File name shall use project identifier and Specification Section number followed by a decimal point and then a sequential number (e.g., LNHS-061000.01). Resubmittals shall include an alphabetic suffix after another decimal point (e.g., LNHS-061000.01.A). 3. Provide means for insertion to permanently record Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect. 4. Transmittal Form for Electronic Submittals: Use electronic form acceptable to Owner, containing the following information: a. Project name. b. Date. c. Name and address of Architect. d. Name of Contractor. e. Name of firm or entity that prepared submittal. f. Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier. g. Category and type of submittal. h. Submittal purpose and description. i. Specification Section number and title. j. Specification paragraph number or drawing designation and name for each of multiple items. k. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. l. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate. m. Related physical samples submitted directly. n. Indication of full or partial submittal. o. Transmittal number, numbered consecutively. p. Submittal and transmittal distribution record. Denton Fire Station No. 8 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 013300-3 August 2019 q. Other necessary identification. r. Remarks. 5. Metadata: Include the following information as keywords in the electronic submittal file metadata: a. Project name. b. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. c. Manufacturer name. d. Product name. E. Options: Identify options requiring selection by Architect. F. Deviations and Additional Information: On an attached separate sheet, prepared on Contractor's letterhead, record relevant information, requests for data, revisions other than those requested by Architect on previous submittals, and deviations from requirements in the Contract Documents, including minor variations and limitations. Include same identification information as related submittal. G. Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal. 1. Note date and content of previous submittal. 2. Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent of revision. 3. Resubmit submittals until they are marked with approval notation from Architect's action stamp. H. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms. I. Use for Construction: Retain complete copies of submittals on Project site. Use only final action submittals that are marked with approval notation from Architect's action stamp. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. General Submittal Procedure Requirements: Prepare and submit submittals required by individual Specification Sections. Types of submittals are indicated in individual Specification Sections. 1. Send electronic submittals as PDF electronic files to Architect. a. Architect will return annotated file. Annotate and retain one copy of file as an electronic Project record document file. 2. Submit electronic submittals via email as PDF electronic files. a. Architect will return annotated file. Annotate and retain one copy of file as an electronic Project record document file. 3. Action Submittals: Submit three paper copies of each submittal unless otherwise indicated. Architect will return two copies. 4. Informational Submittals: Submit two paper copies of each submittal unless otherwise indicated. Architect will not return copies. 5. Certificates and Certifications Submittals: Provide a statement that includes signature of entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity. a. Provide a digital signature with digital certificate on electronically submitted certificates and certifications where indicated. b. Provide a notarized statement on original paper copy certificates and certifications where indicated. B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and type of product or equipment. 1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard published data are not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data. 2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable. 3. Include the following information, as applicable: a. Manufacturer's catalog cuts. b. Manufacturer's product specifications. c. Color charts for full available range of colors. d. Statement of compliance with specified referenced standards. e. Testing by recognized testing agency. f. Application of testing agency labels and seals. g. Notation of coordination requirements. h. Availability and delivery time information. 4. For equipment, include the following in addition to the above, as applicable: a. Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring. b. Printed performance curves. c. Operational range diagrams. d. Clearances required to other construction, if not indicated on accompanying Shop Drawings. Denton Fire Station No. 8 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 013300-4 August 2019 5. Submit Product Data before or concurrent with Samples. 6. Submit Product Data in the following format: a. PDF electronic file. C. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data, unless submittal based on Architect's digital data drawing files is otherwise permitted. 1. Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the following information, as applicable: a. Identification of products. b. Schedules. c. Compliance with specified standards. d. Notation of coordination requirements. e. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement. f. Relationship and attachment to adjoining construction clearly indicated. g. Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified. 2. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches, but no larger than 30 by 42 inches. 3. Submit Shop Drawings in the following format: a. PDF electronic file. D. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between submittal and actual component as delivered and installed. 1. Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories together in one submittal package. 2. Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following: a. Generic description of Sample. b. Product name and name of manufacturer. c. Sample source. d. Number and title of applicable Specification Section. e. Specification paragraph number and generic name of each item. 3. For projects where electronic submittals are required, provide corresponding electronic submittal of Sample transmittal, digital image file illustrating Sample characteristics, and identification information for record. 4. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality-control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set. a. Samples that may be incorporated into the Work are indicated in individual Specification Sections. Such Samples must be in an undamaged condition at time of use. b. Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as Owner's property, are the property of Contractor. 5. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available. a. Number of Samples: Submit one full set(s) of available choices where color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from manufacturer's product line. Architect will return submittal with options selected. 6. Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared from same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and physically identical with material or product proposed for use, and that show full range of color and texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the following: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing color, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent testing and inspection. a. Number of Samples: Submit sets of Samples. Architect will retain two Sample sets; remainder will be returned. Mark up and retain one returned Sample set as a project record sample. 1) Submit a single Sample where assembly details, workmanship, fabrication techniques, connections, operation, and other similar characteristics are to be demonstrated. 2) If variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in material or product represented by a Sample, submit at least three sets of paired units that show approximate limits of variations. E. Product Schedule: As required in individual Specification Sections, prepare a written summary indicating types of products required for the Work and their intended location. Include the following information in Denton Fire Station No. 8 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 013300-5 August 2019 tabular form: 1. Type of product. Include unique identifier for each product indicated in the Contract Documents or assigned by Contractor if none is indicated. 2. Manufacturer and product name, and model number if applicable. 3. Number and name of room or space. 4. Location within room or space. 5. Submit product schedule in the following format: a. PDF electronic file. F. Coordination Drawing Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Section 013100 Project Management and Coordination. G. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Section 013200 Construction Progress Documentation. H. Application for Payment and Schedule of Values: Comply with requirements specified in Section 012900 Payment Procedures. I. Test and Inspection Reports and Schedule of Tests and Inspections Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Section 014000 Quality Requirements. J. Closeout Submittals and Maintenance Material Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Section 017700 Closeout Procedures. K. Maintenance Data: Comply with requirements specified in Section 017823 Operation and Maintenance Data. L. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, contact information of architects and owners, and other information specified. M. Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel comply with requirements in the Contract Documents. Submit record of Welding Procedure Specification and Procedure Qualification Record on AWS forms. Include names of firms and personnel certified. N. Installer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that Installer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and, where required, is authorized by manufacturer for this specific Project. O. Manufacturer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Include evidence of manufacturing experience where required. P. Product Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that product complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Q. Material Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that material complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. R. Material Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents. S. Product Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating that current product produced by manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Base reports on evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency. T. Research Reports: Submit written evidence, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code in effect for Project. Include the following information: 1. Name of evaluation organization. 2. Date of evaluation. 3. Time period when report is in effect. 4. Product and manufacturers' names. 5. Description of product. 6. Test procedures and results. 7. Limitations of use. U. Preconstruction Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed before installation of product, for compliance with performance requirements in the Contract Documents. V. Compatibility Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed before installation of product. Include written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion. W. Field Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed either during installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents. X. Design Data: Prepare and submit written and graphic information, including, but not limited to, Denton Fire Station No. 8 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 013300-6 August 2019 performance and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations. Include list of assumptions and other performance and design criteria and a summary of loads. Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for calculations. Include page numbers. 2.2 DELEGATED-DESIGN SERVICES A. Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated. 1. If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required, submit a written request for additional information to Architect. B. Delegated-Design Services Certification: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other required submittals, submit digitally signed PDF electronic file paper copies of certificate, signed and sealed by the responsible design professional, for each product and system specifically assigned to Contractor to be designed or certified by a design professional. 1. Indicate that products and systems comply with performance and design criteria in the Contract Documents. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing these services. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW A. Action and Informational Submittals: Review each submittal and check for coordination with other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect. B. Project Closeout and Maintenance Material Submittals: See requirements in Section 017700 Closeout Procedures. C. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents. 3.2 ARCHITECT'S ACTION A. Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or revisions required, and return it. Architect will stamp each submittal with an action stamp and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action. B. Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, or will return it if it does not comply with requirements. Architect will forward each submittal to appropriate party. C. Partial submittals prepared for a portion of the Work will be reviewed when use of partial submittals has received prior approval from Architect. D. Incomplete submittals are unacceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned for resubmittal without review. E. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may be returned by the Architect without action. END OF SECTION Denton Fire Station No. 8 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 014000-1 August 2019 SECTION 014000 – QUALITY REQUIREMENTS PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality control. B. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the Contract Document requirements. 1. Specific quality-assurance and -control requirements for individual construction activities are specified in the Sections that specify those activities. Requirements in those Sections may also cover production of standard products. 2. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other quality-assurance and -control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document requirements. 3. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-assurance and -control services required by Architect, Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this Section. 4. Specific test and inspection requirements are not specified in this Section. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed construction will comply with requirements. B. Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after execution of the Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work and completed construction comply with requirements. Services do not include contract enforcement activities performed by Architect. C. Mockups: Full-size physical assemblies that are constructed on-site. Mockups are constructed to verify selections made under Sample submittals; to demonstrate aesthetic effects and, where indicated, qualities of materials and execution; to review coordination, testing, or operation; to show interface between dissimilar materials; and to demonstrate compliance with specified installation tolerances. Mockups are not Samples. Unless otherwise indicated, approved mockups establish the standard by which the Work will be judged. 1. Integrated Exterior Mockups: Mockups of the exterior envelope erected separately from the building but on Project site, consisting of multiple products, assemblies, and subassemblies. 2. Room Mockups: Mockups of typical interior spaces complete with wall, floor, and ceiling finishes, doors, windows, millwork, casework, specialties, furnishings and equipment, and lighting. D. Preconstruction Testing: Tests and inspections performed specifically for Project before products and materials are incorporated into the Work, to verify performance or compliance with specified criteria. E. Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed by an NRTL, an NVLAP, or a testing agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to establish product performance and compliance with specified requirements. F. Source Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed at the source, e.g., plant, mill, factory, or shop. G. Field Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed on-site for installation of the Work and for completed Work. H. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency. I. Experienced: When used with an entity or individual, "experienced" means having successfully completed a minimum of five previous projects similar in nature, size, and extent to this Project; being familiar with special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. J. Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an employee, Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation, including installation, erection, application, and similar operations. 1. Use of trade-specific terminology in referring to a trade or entity does not require that certain construction activities be performed by accredited or unionized individuals, or that requirements specified apply exclusively to specific trade(s). 1.4 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS A. Referenced Standards: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the standards establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with the most stringent Denton Fire Station No. 8 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 014000-2 August 2019 requirement. Refer conflicting requirements that are different, but apparently equal, to Architect for a decision before proceeding. B. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Architect for a decision before proceeding. 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: For integrated exterior mockups, provide plans, sections, and elevations, indicating materials and size of mockup construction. 1. Indicate manufacturer and model number of individual components. 2. Provide axonometric drawings for conditions difficult to illustrate in two dimensions. 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Contractor's Quality-Control Plan: For quality-assurance and quality-control activities and responsibilities. B. Qualification Data: For Contractor's quality-control personnel. C. Contractor's Statement of Responsibility: When required by authorities having jurisdiction, submit copy of written statement of responsibility sent to authorities having jurisdiction before starting work on the following systems: 1. Seismic-force-resisting system, designated seismic system, or component listed in the designated seismic system quality-assurance plan prepared by Architect. 2. Main wind-force-resisting system or a wind-resisting component listed in the wind-force-resisting system quality-assurance plan prepared by Architect. D. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agencies specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include proof of qualifications in the form of a recent report on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority. E. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare in tabular form and include the following: 1. Specification Section number and title. 2. Entity responsible for performing tests and inspections. 3. Description of test and inspection. 4. Identification of applicable standards. 5. Identification of test and inspection methods. 6. Number of tests and inspections required. 7. Time schedule or time span for tests and inspections. 8. Requirements for obtaining samples. 9. Unique characteristics of each quality-control service. 1.7 CONTRACTOR'S QUALITY-CONTROL PLAN A. Quality-Control Plan, General: Submit quality-control plan within 10 days of commencement of construction , and not less than five days prior to preconstruction conference. Submit in format acceptable to Architect. Identify personnel, procedures, controls, instructions, tests, records, and forms to be used to carry out Contractor's quality-assurance and quality-control responsibilities. Coordinate with Contractor's construction schedule. B. Quality-Control Personnel Qualifications: Engage qualified full-time personnel trained and experienced in managing and executing quality-assurance and quality-control procedures similar in nature and extent to those required for Project. 1. Project quality-control manager may also serve as Project superintendent. C. Submittal Procedure: Describe procedures for ensuring compliance with requirements through review and management of submittal process. Indicate qualifications of personnel responsible for submittal review. D. Testing and Inspection: In quality-control plan, include a comprehensive schedule of Work requiring testing or inspection, including the following: 1. Contractor-performed tests and inspections including subcontractor-performed tests and inspections. Include required tests and inspections and Contractor-elected tests and inspections. 2. Special inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction and indicated on the "Statement of Special Inspections." 3. Owner-performed tests and inspections indicated in the Contract Documents, including tests and inspections indicated to be performed by the Commissioning Authority. E. Continuous Inspection of Workmanship: Describe process for continuous inspection during construction to identify and correct deficiencies in workmanship in addition to testing and inspection specified. Indicate types of corrective actions to be required to bring work into compliance with standards of workmanship established by Contract requirements and approved mockups. F. Monitoring and Documentation: Maintain testing and inspection reports including log of approved and Denton Fire Station No. 8 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 014000-3 August 2019 rejected results. Include work Architect has indicated as nonconforming or defective. Indicate corrective actions taken to bring nonconforming work into compliance with requirements. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 1.8 REPORTS AND DOCUMENTS A. Test and Inspection Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports specified in other Sections. Include the following: 1. Date of issue. 2. Project title and number. 3. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency. 4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections. 5. Names of individuals making tests and inspections. 6. Description of the Work and test and inspection method. 7. Identification of product and Specification Section. 8. Complete test or inspection data. 9. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results. 10. Record of temperature and weather conditions at time of sample taking and testing and inspecting. 11. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with the Contract Document requirements. 12. Name and signature of laboratory inspector. 13. Recommendations on retesting and re-inspecting. B. Manufacturer's Technical Representative's Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting manufacturer's technical representative's tests and inspections specified in other Sections. Include the following: 1. Name, address, and telephone number of technical representative making report. 2. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product. 3. Statement that products at Project site comply with requirements. 4. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with requirements and, if not, what corrective action was taken. 5. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance complies with requirements. 6. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty. 7. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections. C. Factory-Authorized Service Representative's Reports: Prepare written information documenting manufacturer's factory-authorized service representative's tests and inspections specified in other Sections. Include the following: 1. Name, address, and telephone number of factory-authorized service representative making report. 2. Statement that equipment complies with requirements. 3. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance complies with requirements. 4. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty. 5. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections. D. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work. 1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. General: Qualifications paragraphs in this article establish the minimum qualification levels required; individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. C. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. D. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. E. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of the system, assembly, or products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project. Denton Fire Station No. 8 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 014000-4 August 2019 F. Specialists: Certain Specification Sections require that specific construction activities shall be performed by entities who are recognized experts in those operations. Specialists shall satisfy qualification requirements indicated and shall be engaged for the activities indicated. 1. Requirements of authorities having jurisdiction shall supersede requirements for specialists. G. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL, an NVLAP, or an independent agency with the experience and capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 329; and with additional qualifications specified in individual Sections; and, where required by authorities having jurisdiction, that is acceptable to authorities. 1. NRTL: A nationally recognized testing laboratory according to 29 CFR 1910.7. 2. NVLAP: A testing agency accredited according to NIST's National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program. H. Manufacturer's Technical Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to observe and inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project. I. Factory-Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project. J. Preconstruction Testing: Where testing agency is indicated to perform preconstruction testing for compliance with specified requirements for performance and test methods, comply with the following: 1. Contractor responsibilities include the following: a. Provide test specimens representative of proposed products and construction. b. Submit specimens in a timely manner with sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work. c. Provide sizes and configurations of test assemblies, mockups, and laboratory mockups to adequately demonstrate capability of products to comply with performance requirements. d. Build site-assembled test assemblies and mockups using installers who will perform same tasks for Project. e. When testing is complete, remove test specimens, assemblies, and mockups; do not reuse products on Project. 2. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Submit a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality-assurance service to Architect, with copy to Contractor. Interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents. K. Mockups: Refer to Section 014339. 1.10 QUALITY CONTROL A. Owner Responsibilities: Where quality-control services are indicated as Owner's responsibility, Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform these services. 1. Owner will furnish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of testing agencies engaged and a description of types of testing and inspecting they are engaged to perform. 2. Costs for retesting and re-inspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated by work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to Contractor, and the Contract Sum will be adjusted by Change Order. B. Contractor Responsibilities: Tests and inspections not explicitly assigned to Owner are Contractor's responsibility. Perform additional quality-control activities required to verify that the Work complies with requirements, whether specified or not. 1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide quality-control services specified and those required by authorities having jurisdiction. Perform quality-control services required of Contractor by authorities having jurisdiction, whether specified or not. 2. Where services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, engage a qualified testing agency to perform these quality-control services. a. Contractor shall not employ same entity engaged by Owner, unless agreed to in writing by Owner. 3. Notify testing agencies at least 24 hours in advance of time when Work that requires testing or inspecting will be performed. 4. Where quality-control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each quality-control service. 5. Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract Documents are Contractor's responsibility. 6. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction, when they so direct. C. Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including service connections. Report Denton Fire Station No. 8 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 014000-5 August 2019 results in writing as specified in Section 013300 Submittal Procedures. D. Manufacturer's Technical Services: Where indicated, engage a manufacturer's technical representative to observe and inspect the Work. Manufacturer's technical representative's services include participation in pre-installation conferences, examination of substrates and conditions, verification of materials, observation of Installer activities, inspection of completed portions of the Work, and submittal of written reports. E. Re-testing/Re-inspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's responsibility, provide quality-control services, including retesting and re-inspecting, for construction that replaced Work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents. F. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Architect and Contractor in performance of duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections. 1. Notify Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services. 2. Determine the location from which test samples will be taken and in which in-situ tests are conducted. 3. Conduct and interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from requirements. 4. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control service through Contractor. 5. Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase the Contract Document requirements or approve or accept any portion of the Work. 6. Do not perform any duties of Contractor. G. Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, and similar quality- control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the following: 1. Access to the Work. 2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections. 3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and inspecting. Assist agency in obtaining samples. 4. Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples. 5. Delivery of samples to testing agencies. 6. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing agency. 7. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at Project site. H. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-assurance and -control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspecting. 1. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities. I. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare a schedule of tests, inspections, and similar quality-control services required by the Contract Documents as a component of Contractor's quality-control plan. Coordinate and submit concurrently with Contractor's construction schedule. Update as the Work progresses. 1. Distribution: Distribute schedule to Owner, Architect, testing agencies, and each party involved in performance of portions of the Work where tests and inspections are required. 1.11 SPECIAL TESTS AND INSPECTIONS A. Special Tests and Inspections: Conducted by a qualified testing agency and special inspector as required by authorities having jurisdiction, as indicated in individual Specification Sections, and as follows: 1. Verifying that manufacturer maintains detailed fabrication and quality-control procedures and reviews the completeness and adequacy of those procedures to perform the Work. 2. Notifying Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities and deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services. 3. Submitting a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control service to Architect with copy to Contractor and to authorities having jurisdiction. 4. Submitting a final report of special tests and inspections at Substantial Completion, which includes a list of unresolved deficiencies. 5. Interpreting tests and inspections and stating in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents. 6. Retesting and re-inspecting corrected work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 TEST AND INSPECTION LOG A. Test and Inspection Log: Prepare a record of tests and inspections. Include the following: Denton Fire Station No. 8 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 014000-6 August 2019 1. Date test or inspection was conducted. 2. Description of the Work tested or inspected. 3. Date test or inspection results were transmitted to Architect. 4. Identification of testing agency or special inspector conducting test or inspection. B. Maintain log at project site. Post changes and revisions as they occur. Provide access to test and inspection log for Architect’s reference during normal working hours. 3.2 REPAIR AND PROTECTION A. General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes. 1. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Specification Sections or matching existing substrates and finishes. Restore patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Comply with the Contract Document requirements for cutting and patching in Section 017300 Execution. B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities. C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibility for quality-control services. END OF SECTION Denton Fire Station No. 8 REFERENCES Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 014200-1 August 2019 SECTION 014200 – REFERENCES PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract. B. "Approved": When used to convey Architect's action on Contractor's submittals, applications, and requests, "approved" is limited to Architect's duties and responsibilities as stated in the Conditions of the Contract. C. "Directed": A command or instruction by Architect. Other terms including "requested," "authorized," "selected," "required," and "permitted" have the same meaning as "directed." D. "Indicated": Requirements expressed by graphic representations or in written form on Drawings, in Specifications, and in other Contract Documents. Other terms including "shown," "noted," "scheduled," and "specified" have the same meaning as "indicated." E. "Regulations": Laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having jurisdiction, and rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control performance of the Work. F. "Furnish": Supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, and similar operations. G. "Install": Unload, temporarily store, unpack, assemble, erect, place, anchor, apply, work to dimension, finish, cure, protect, clean, and similar operations at Project site. H. "Provide": Furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use. I. "Project Site": Space available for performing construction activities. The extent of Project site is shown on Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on which Project is to be built. 1.3 INDUSTRY STANDARDS A. Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference. B. Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of the Contract Documents unless otherwise indicated. 1.4 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS A. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities indicated in Gale's "Encyclopedia of Associations: National Organizations of the U.S." or in Columbia Books' "National Trade & Professional Associations of the United States." PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION Denton Fire Station No. 8 MOCK-UP WALL CONSTRUCTION Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 014339-1 August 2019 SECTION 014339 – MOCK-UP WALL CONSTRUCTION PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A An Envelope Pre-construction meeting shall be held with all of the subcontractors responsible for erecting the envelope related materials. B. Work includes: Constructing mock-up, including all reviewed submittals required by the Contract Documents, to establish compliance with the design intent as well as the specified requirements to provide a complete and watertight facility. C. Providing a photo manifest of as-built conditions as the mock-up is being constructed. Photos shall be kept at the job site during construction for reference. D. Mock-up fabrication must be completed and reviewed and approved by the Owner and Architect prior to starting installation of envelope material. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Coordination of product submittals and construction installation: 1. Prior to each submittal, carefully review and coordinate all aspects of each item being submitted. 2. Verify that each item being submitted is in conformance in all respects with the specified requirements. 3. By affixing the Contractor's signature to each submittal for the mock-up, the contractor certifies that this coordination has been performed. 4. Contractor shall construct the site built mock-up with the same manner of specified construction as the new construction. 5. Contractor shall construct the site built mock-up with the same workmanship and quality as being implemented on the new construction. 6. All material to be installed shall be reviewed by architect and consultants for conformance. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 MOCK-UP REQUIREMENTS A. Build mock-ups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and qualities of materials and execution. Mock-ups construction shall be coordinated by the General Contractor and constructed by the subcontractor responsible for the actual construction work. All conditions and materials to be used on the job shall be included in the mock-up. Build mock-ups to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for the completed Work. Refer sheet A-9.01 for additional information and requirements. B. Contractor shall start the construction of the mock-up based on, but not limited to, the following list: 1. Waterproofing membrane 2. Dampproofing material 3. Flexible Through-Wall Flashing Membrane 4. Metal Through-Wall Flashing 5. Preformed Flashing Pieces 6. Face Brick with Mortar and Weeps 7. CMU with mortar and weeps 8. Wall Ties 9. Weather Barrier 10. Weeps 11. Window Unit C. Samples and Manufacturer's Submittals: Submit prior to delivery or installation. 1. Samples of all building system components including all specified accessories. 2. Submit samples of proposed warranties complete with any addenda necessary to meet the warranty requirements as specified. 3. Submit latest edition of manufacturer's specifications and installation procedures. Submit only those items applicable to this project. 4. A written statement from the materials manufacturer approving the installer, specifications and drawings as described and/or shown for this project and stating the intent to guarantee the completed project. 5. Follow submitted shop drawings, product data of all sheet metal. D. Scale and Measurements: Make Shop Drawings accurately to a scale sufficiently large enough to show all pertinent aspects of the item and its method of connection to the work. E. Shop Drawings and Product Data: Provide manufacturer's approved details of all conditions, Denton Fire Station No. 8 MOCK-UP WALL CONSTRUCTION Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 014339-2 August 2019 projection conditions, and any additional special job conditions which require details other than indicated in the drawings. 1. Manufacturer's Details: All termination details and other details normally required by the manufacturer's Technical Specifications, including both standard details and special details, shall be furnished by the Contractor and shall be approved in writing by the manufacturer, the company project manager, and the Owner's representative prior to final installation. F. Provide manufacturer's approved details, of all perimeter conditions, project conditions, and any additional special job conditions which require details other than indicated in the drawings. 2.2 MANUFACTURER'S LITERATURE A. Work provided on the mock-up shall follow all of the submitted literature from manufacturers. B. Manufacturer’s literature shall be the minimum for basis of design and shall be in conjunction with construction documents. All manufacturers' warranties shall remain in effect as specified. 2.3 SAMPLES A. Provide sample or samples identical to the precise article proposed to be provided. 2.4 COLORS AND PATTERNS A. Unless the precise color and pattern are specifically called out in the Contract Documents, and whenever a choice of color or pattern is available in the specified products, submit accurate color and pattern charts to the Architect/Project Manager for selection. B. Contractor shall coordinate with Architect for exact layout or design of patterns and textures and how they are to be installed on the mock-up. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF MATERIALS A. Contractor shall install all materials on mock-up in same manner required for the main structure. Refer to specification sections for basis of design of all material being installed on this mock-up. B. Contractor shall maintain a photo manifest of mock-up construction for Architect and Owner to review. C. Quality of installation is of utmost importance and shall be monitored for completeness and conformance. D. Once mock-up is complete, it shall be reviewed by the Architect and Owner’s Representative for conformance to construction documents. E. Contractor shall install material in same sequencing as required by industry standards. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF WINDOWS AND ASSOCIATED FLASHING A. Installer shall coordinate the installation of the window with associated trades to maintain proper compatibility of material. B. Installation shall be in accordance with referencing specifications. C. Install all perimeters flashing as detailed to create a sealed and watertight condition. D. Once window and flashing has been installed, Contractor shall notify Architect, Owner and Consultants for review for conformance and shall provide a water test of all wall flashing. Contractor shall notify Architect, Owner and Consultants to observe the testing. All tests shall be in accordance with referencing specifications. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF FLASHING AT THROUGH-WALL LOCATION A. Installer shall coordinate the installation of the wall flashing with associated trades to maintain proper compatibility of material. B. Installation shall be in accordance with referencing specifications. C. Once flashing has been installed, Contractor shall notify Architect, Owner and Consultants for review for conformance and shall provide a water test of all wall flashing. Contractor shall notify Architect, Owner and Consultants to observe the testing. All tests shall be in accordance with referencing specifications. END OF SECTION Denton Fire Station No. 8 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 015000-1 August 2019 SECTION 015000 – TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes requirements for temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and protection facilities. 1.3 USE CHARGES A. General: Installation and removal of and use charges for temporary facilities shall be included in the Contract Sum unless otherwise indicated. Allow other entities to use temporary services and facilities without cost, including, but not limited to, Owner's construction forces, Architect, testing agencies, and authorities having jurisdiction. B. Sewer Service: Pay sewer-service use charges for sewer usage by all entities for construction operations. C. Water Service: Pay water-service use charges for water used by all entities for construction operations. D. Electric Power Service: Pay electric-power-service use charges for electricity used by all entities for construction operations. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Site Plan: Show temporary facilities, utility hookups, staging areas, and parking areas for construction personnel. B. Erosion and Sedimentation Control Plan: Show compliance with requirements of EPA Construction General Permit or authorities having jurisdiction, whichever is more stringent. C. Fire Safety Program: Show compliance with requirements of NFPA 241 and authorities having jurisdiction. Indicate Contractor personnel responsible for management of fire-prevention program. D. Moisture Protection Plan: Describe procedures and controls for protecting materials and construction from water absorption and damage. 1. Describe delivery, handling, and storage provisions for materials subject to water absorption or water damage. 2. Indicate procedures for discarding water-damaged materials, protocols for mitigating water intrusion into completed Work, and replacing water-damaged Work. 3. Indicate sequencing of work that requires water, such as sprayed fire-resistive materials, plastering, and terrazzo grinding, and describe plans for dealing with water from these operations. Show procedures for verifying that wet construction has dried sufficiently to permit installation of finish materials. E. Dust and HVAC Control Plan: Submit coordination drawing and narrative that indicates the dust- and HVAC-control measures proposed for use, proposed locations, and proposed time frame for their operation. Identify further options if proposed measures are later determined to be inadequate. Include the following: 1. Locations of dust-control partitions at each phase of work. 2. HVAC system isolation schematic drawing. 3. Location of proposed air-filtration system discharge. 4. Waste handling procedures. 5. Other dust-control measures. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70. B. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits. C. Accessible Temporary Egress: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Engage Installer of each permanent service to assume responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent service during its use as a construction facility before Owner's acceptance, regardless of previously assigned responsibilities. Denton Fire Station No. 8 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 015000-2 August 2019 PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Chain-Link Fencing: Minimum 2-inch, 0.148-inch- thick, galvanized-steel, chain-link fabric fencing; minimum 6 feet high with galvanized-steel pipe posts; minimum 2-3/8-inch- OD line posts and 2-7/8-inch- OD corner and pull posts, with 1-5/8-inch- OD top rails. B. Polyethylene Sheet: Reinforced, fire-resistive sheet, 10-mil minimum thickness, with flame-spread rating of 15 or less per ASTM E 84 and passing NFPA 701 Test Method 2. C. Dust Control Adhesive Surface Walk Off Mats: Provide mats minimum 36 by 60 inches. D. Insulation: Un-faced mineral-fiber blanket, manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively. 2.2 TEMPORARY FACILITIES A. Field Offices, General: Prefabricated or mobile units with serviceable finishes, temperature controls, and foundations adequate for normal loading. B. Common-Use Field Office: Of sufficient size to accommodate needs of Owner, Architect, and construction personnel office activities and to accommodate Project meetings specified in other Division 01 Sections. Keep office clean and orderly. Furnish and equip offices as follows: 1. Furniture required for Project-site documents including file cabinets, plan tables, plan racks, and bookcases. 2. Conference room of sufficient size to accommodate meetings of 10 individuals. Provide electrical power service and 120-V ac duplex receptacles, with no fewer than one receptacle on each wall. Furnish room with conference table, chairs, and 4-foot- square tack and marker boards. 3. Drinking water and private toilet. 4. Coffee machine and supplies. 5. Heating and cooling equipment necessary to maintain a uniform indoor temperature of 68 to 72 deg F. 6. Lighting fixtures capable of maintaining average illumination of 20 fc at desk height. 7. WiFi connection. C. Storage and Fabrication Sheds: Provide sheds sized, furnished, and equipped to accommodate materials and equipment for construction operations. 1. Store combustible materials apart from building. 2.3 EQUIPMENT A. Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL rated; with class and extinguishing agent as required by locations and classes of fire exposures. B. HVAC Equipment: Unless Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system, provide vented, self- contained, liquid-propane-gas or fuel-oil heaters with individual space thermostatic control. 1. Use of gasoline-burning space heaters, open-flame heaters, or salamander-type heating units is prohibited. 2. Heating Units: Listed and labeled for type of fuel being consumed, by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended location and application. 3. Permanent HVAC System: If Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system for temporary use during construction, provide filter with MERV of 8 at each return-air grille in system and remove at end of construction and clean HVAC system as required in Section 017700 Closeout Procedures. C. Air-Filtration Units: Primary and secondary HEPA-filter-equipped portable units with four-stage filtration. Provide single switch for emergency shutoff. Configure to run continuously. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required by progress of the Work. B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities. 3.2 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION A. General: Install temporary service or connect to existing service. 1. Arrange with utility company, Owner, and existing users for time when service can be interrupted, if necessary, to make connections for temporary services. B. Sewers and Drainage: Provide temporary utilities to remove effluent lawfully. 1. Connect temporary sewers to municipal system as directed by authorities having jurisdiction. C. Water Service: Install water service and distribution piping in sizes and pressures adequate for Denton Fire Station No. 8 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 015000-3 August 2019 construction. D. Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking water for use of construction personnel. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for type, number, location, operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities. 1. Toilets: Use of Owner's existing toilet facilities will be permitted, as long as facilities are cleaned and maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion, restore these facilities to condition existing before initial use. E. Heating and Cooling: Provide temporary heating and cooling required by construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of low temperatures or high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed. F. Ventilation and Humidity Control: Provide temporary ventilation required by construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed. Coordinate ventilation requirements to produce ambient condition required and minimize energy consumption. 1. Provide dehumidification systems when required to reduce substrate moisture levels to level required to allow installation or application of finishes. G. Electric Power Service: Provide electric power service and distribution system of sufficient size, capacity, and power characteristics required for construction operations. 1. Install electric power service overhead unless otherwise indicated. 2. Connect temporary service to Owner's existing power source, as directed by Owner. H. Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination for construction operations, observations, inspections, and traffic conditions. 1. Install and operate temporary lighting that fulfills security and protection requirements without operating entire system. 2. Install lighting for Project identification sign. I. Telephone Service: Provide temporary telephone service in common-use facilities for use by all construction personnel. Install one telephone line(s) for each field office. 1. Provide additional telephone lines for the following: a. Provide a dedicated telephone line for each facsimile machine in each field office. b. Provide one telephone line(s) for Owner's use. 2. At each telephone, post a list of important telephone numbers. a. Police and fire departments. b. Ambulance service. c. Contractor's home office. d. Contractor's emergency after-hours telephone number. e. Architect's office. f. Engineers' offices. g. Owner's office. h. Principal subcontractors' field and home offices. 3. Provide superintendent with cellular telephone or portable two-way radio for use when away from field office. J. Electronic Communication Service: Provide a desktop computer in the primary field to access Project electronic documents and maintain electronic communications. Equip computer with not less than the following: 1. Processor: Intel Pentium D or Intel CoreDuo, 3.0 GHz processing speed. 2. Memory: 4 gigabyte. 3. Disk Storage: 300 gigabyte hard-disk drive and combination DVD-RW/CD-RW drive. 4. Display: 22-inch LCD monitor with 256-Mb dedicated video RAM. 5. Full-size keyboard and mouse. 6. Network Connectivity: 02/110BaseT Ethernet. 7. Operating System: Microsoft Windows XP Professional or Microsoft Windows Vista Business. 8. Productivity Software: a. Microsoft Office 2010 or higher, including Word, Excel, and Outlook. b. Adobe Reader 10.0 or higher. c. WinZip 7.0 or higher. 9. Printer: "All-in-one" unit equipped with printer server, combining color printing, photocopying, scanning, and faxing, or separate units for each of these three functions. 10. Internet Service: Broadband modem, router and ISP, equipped with hardware firewall, providing minimum 384 Kbps upload and 1 Mbps download speeds at each computer. 11. Internet Security: Integrated software, providing software firewall, virus, spyware, phishing, and spam protection in a combined application. Denton Fire Station No. 8 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 015000-4 August 2019 12. Backup: External hard drive, minimum 40 gigabyte, with automated backup software providing daily backups. 3.3 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with the following: 1. Provide construction for temporary offices, shops, and sheds located within construction area or within 30 feet of building lines that is noncombustible according to ASTM E 136. Comply with NFPA 241. 2. Maintain support facilities until Architect schedules Substantial Completion inspection. Remove before Substantial Completion. Personnel remaining after Substantial Completion will be permitted to use permanent facilities, under conditions acceptable to Owner. B. Temporary Use of Permanent Roads and Paved Areas: Locate temporary roads and paved areas in same location as permanent roads and paved areas. Construct and maintain temporary roads and paved areas adequate for construction operations. Extend temporary roads and paved areas, within construction limits indicated, as necessary for construction operations. 1. Coordinate elevations of temporary roads and paved areas with permanent roads and paved areas. 2. Prepare subgrade and install subbase and base for temporary roads and paved areas according to Section 312000 Earth Moving. 3. Recondition base after temporary use, including removing contaminated material, regrading, proof-rolling, compacting, and testing. C. Traffic Controls: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Protect existing site improvements to remain including curbs, pavement, and utilities. 2. Maintain access for fire-fighting equipment and access to fire hydrants. D. Parking: Provide temporary parking areas for construction personnel. E. Dewatering Facilities and Drains: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Maintain Project site, excavations, and construction free of water. 1. Dispose of rainwater in a lawful manner that will not result in flooding Project or adjoining properties or endanger permanent Work or temporary facilities. 2. Remove snow and ice as required to minimize accumulations. F. Project Signs: Provide Project signs as indicated. Unauthorized signs are not permitted. 1. Identification Signs: Provide Project identification signs as indicated on Drawings. 2. Temporary Signs: Provide other signs as indicated and as required to inform public and individuals seeking entrance to Project. a. Provide temporary, directional signs for construction personnel and visitors. 3. Maintain and touchup signs so they are legible at all times. G. Lifts and Hoists: Provide facilities necessary for hoisting materials and personnel. 1. Truck cranes and similar devices used for hoisting materials are considered "tools and equipment" and not temporary facilities. 3.4 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION A. Protection of Existing Facilities: Protect existing vegetation, equipment, structures, utilities, and other improvements at Project site and on adjacent properties, except those indicated to be removed or altered. Repair damage to existing facilities. B. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct construction as required to comply with environmental regulations and that minimize possible air, waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable effects. 1. Comply with work restrictions specified in Section 011000 Summary. C. Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control: Provide measures to prevent soil erosion and discharge of soil-bearing water runoff and airborne dust to undisturbed areas and to adjacent properties and walkways, according to erosion- and sedimentation-control Drawings. 1. Verify that flows of water redirected from construction areas or generated by construction activity do not enter or cross tree- or plant- protection zones. 2. Inspect, repair, and maintain erosion- and sedimentation-control measures during construction until permanent vegetation has been established. 3. Clean, repair, and restore adjoining properties and roads affected by erosion and sedimentation from Project site during the course of Project. 4. Remove erosion and sedimentation controls and restore and stabilize areas disturbed during removal. D. Storm water Control: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Provide barriers in and around excavations and subgrade construction to prevent flooding by runoff of storm water from heavy rains. E. Tree and Plant Protection: Install temporary fencing located as indicated or outside the drip line of trees to protect vegetation from damage from construction operations. Protect tree root systems from damage, Denton Fire Station No. 8 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 015000-5 August 2019 flooding, and erosion. F. Pest Control: Engage pest-control service to recommend practices to minimize attraction and harboring of rodents, roaches, and other pests and to perform extermination and control procedures at regular intervals so Project will be free of pests and their residues at Substantial Completion. Perform control operations lawfully, using environmentally safe materials. G. Site Enclosure Fence: Before construction operations begin, furnish and install site enclosure fence in a manner that will prevent people and animals from easily entering site except by entrance gates. 1. Extent of Fence: As required to enclose entire Project site or portion determined sufficient to accommodate construction operations. 2. Maintain security by limiting number of keys and restricting distribution to authorized personnel. Furnish one set of keys to Owner. H. Security Enclosure and Lockup: Install temporary enclosure around partially completed areas of construction. Provide lockable entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance, vandalism, theft, and similar violations of security. Lock entrances at end of each work day. I. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for erecting structurally adequate barricades, including warning signs and lighting. J. Temporary Egress: Maintain temporary egress from existing occupied facilities as indicated and as required by authorities having jurisdiction. K. Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction, in progress and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations, and similar activities. Provide temporary weathertight enclosure for building exterior. 1. Where heating or cooling is needed and permanent enclosure is incomplete, insulate temporary enclosures. L. Temporary Partitions: Provide floor-to-ceiling dustproof partitions to limit dust and dirt migration and to separate areas occupied by Owner from fumes and noise. 1. Construct dustproof partitions with gypsum wallboard with joints taped on occupied side, and fire- retardant-treated plywood on construction operations side. 2. Where fire-resistance-rated temporary partitions are indicated or are required by authorities having jurisdiction, construct partitions according to the rated assemblies. 3. Insulate partitions to control noise transmission to occupied areas. 4. Seal joints and perimeter. Equip partitions with gasketed dustproof doors and security locks where openings are required. 5. Protect air-handling equipment. 6. Provide walk-off mats at each entrance through temporary partition. M. Temporary Fire Protection: Install and maintain temporary fire-protection facilities of types needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply with NFPA 241; manage fire- prevention program. 1. Prohibit smoking in construction areas. 2. Supervise welding operations, combustion-type temporary heating units, and similar sources of fire ignition according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Develop and supervise an overall fire-prevention and -protection program for personnel at Project site. Review needs with local fire department and establish procedures to be followed. Instruct personnel in methods and procedures. Post warnings and information. 4. Provide temporary standpipes and hoses for fire protection. Hang hoses with a warning sign stating that hoses are for fire-protection purposes only and are not to be removed. Match hose size with outlet size and equip with suitable nozzles. 3.5 MOISTURE AND MOLD CONTROL A. Contractor's Moisture-Protection Plan: Avoid trapping water in finished work. Document visible signs of mold that may appear during construction. B. Exposed Construction Phase: Before installation of weather barriers, when materials are subject to wetting and exposure and to airborne mold spores, protect as follows: 1. Protect porous materials from water damage. 2. Protect stored and installed material from flowing or standing water. 3. Keep porous and organic materials from coming into prolonged contact with concrete. 4. Remove standing water from decks. 5. Keep deck openings covered or dammed. C. Partially Enclosed Construction Phase: After installation of weather barriers but before full enclosure and conditioning of building, when installed materials are still subject to infiltration of moisture and ambient mold spores, protect as follows: 1. Do not load or install drywall or other porous materials or components, or items with high organic content, into partially enclosed building. 2. Keep interior spaces reasonably clean and protected from water damage. Denton Fire Station No. 8 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 015000-6 August 2019 3. Periodically collect and remove waste containing cellulose or other organic matter. 4. Discard or replace water-damaged material. 5. Do not install material that is wet. 6. Discard, replace, or clean stored or installed material that begins to grow mold. 7. Perform work in a sequence that allows any wet materials adequate time to dry before enclosing the material in drywall or other interior finishes. D. Controlled Construction Phase of Construction: After completing and sealing of the building enclosure but prior to the full operation of permanent HVAC systems, maintain as follows: 1. Control moisture and humidity inside building by maintaining effective dry-in conditions. 2. Use permanent HVAC system to control humidity. 3. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, relative humidity, and exposure to water limits. a. Hygroscopic materials that may support mold growth, including wood and gypsum-based products, that become wet during the course of construction and remain wet for 48 hours are considered defective. b. Measure moisture content of materials that have been exposed to moisture during construction operations or after installation. Record readings beginning at time of exposure and continuing daily for 48 hours. Identify materials containing moisture levels higher than allowed. Report findings in writing to Architect. c. Remove materials that cannot be completely restored to their manufactured moisture level within 48 hours. 3.6 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses. B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal. 1. Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control, ventilation, and similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve indicated results and to avoid possibility of damage. C. Operate Project-identification-sign lighting daily from dusk until 12:00 midnight. D. Temporary Facility Changeover: Do not change over from using temporary security and protection facilities to permanent facilities until Substantial Completion. E. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may have been delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired. 1. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are property of Contractor. Owner reserves right to take possession of Project identification signs. 2. At Substantial Completion, repair, renovate, and clean permanent facilities used during construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements specified in Section 017700 Closeout Procedures. END OF SECTION Denton Fire Station No. 8 TEMPORARY TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 015639-1 August 2019 SECTION 015639 – TEMPORARY TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes general protection and pruning of existing trees and plants that are affected by execution of the Work, whether temporary or permanent construction. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Caliper: Diameter of a trunk measured by a diameter tape or the average of the smallest and largest diameters at 6 inches above the ground for trees up to, and including, 4-inch size; and 12 inches above the ground for trees larger than 4-inch size. B. Plant-Protection Zone: Area surrounding individual trees, groups of trees, shrubs, or other vegetation to be protected during construction, and indicated on Drawings. C. Tree-Protection Zone: Area surrounding individual trees or groups of trees to be protected during construction, and defined by a circle concentric with each tree with a radius 1.5 times the diameter of the drip line unless otherwise indicated. D. Vegetation: Trees, shrubs, groundcovers, grass, and other plants. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Samples for Verification: For each type of the following: 1. Organic Mulch: 1-pint volume of organic mulch; in sealed plastic bags labeled with composition of materials by percentage of weight and source of mulch. 2. Protection-Zone Fencing: Assembled Samples of manufacturer's standard size made from full-size components. 3. Protection-Zone Signage: Full-size Samples of each size and text, ready for installation. C. Tree Pruning Schedule: Written schedule detailing scope and extent of pruning of trees to remain that interfere with or are affected by construction. 1. Species and size of tree. 2. Location on site plan. Include unique identifier for each. 3. Reason for pruning. 4. Description of pruning to be performed. 5. Description of maintenance following pruning. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For qualified arborist and tree service firm. B. Maintenance Recommendations: From arborist, for care and protection of trees affected by construction during and after completing the Work. C. Existing Conditions: Documentation of existing trees and plantings indicated to remain, which establishes preconstruction conditions that might be misconstrued as damage caused by construction activities. 1. Use sufficiently detailed photographs or videotape. 2. Include plans and notations to indicate specific wounds and damage conditions of each tree or other plants designated to remain. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Arborist Qualifications: Certified Arborist as certified by ISA. B. Tree Service Firm Qualifications: An experienced tree service firm that has successfully completed temporary tree and plant protection work similar to that required for this Project and that will assign an experienced, qualified arborist to Project site during execution of the Work. C. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1. Review methods and procedures related to temporary tree and plant protection including, but not limited to, the following: a. Construction schedule. Verify availability of materials, personnel, and equipment needed to make progress and avoid delays. b. Enforcing requirements for protection zones. c. Arborist's responsibilities. d. Field quality control. Denton Fire Station No. 8 TEMPORARY TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 015639-2 August 2019 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. The following practices are prohibited within protection zones: 1. Storage of construction materials, debris, or excavated material. 2. Parking vehicles or equipment. 3. Foot traffic. 4. Erection of sheds or structures. 5. Impoundment of water. 6. Excavation or other digging unless otherwise indicated. 7. Attachment of signs to or wrapping materials around trees or plants unless otherwise indicated. B. Do not direct vehicle or equipment exhaust toward protection zones. C. Prohibit heat sources, flames, ignition sources, and smoking within or near protection zones and organic mulch. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Topsoil: Natural or cultivated top layer of the soil profile or manufactured topsoil; containing organic matter and sand, silt, and clay particles; friable, pervious, and black or a darker shade of brown, gray, or red than underlying subsoil; reasonably free of subsoil, clay lumps, gravel, and other objects more than 1 inch in diameter; and free of weeds, roots, and toxic and other non-soil materials. 1. Obtain topsoil only from well-drained sites where topsoil is 4 inches deep or more; do not obtain from bogs or marshes. B. Organic Mulch: Free from deleterious materials and suitable as a top dressing for trees and shrubs, consisting of one of the following: 1. Type: Ground or shredded bark. 2. Size Range: 3 inches maximum, 1/2 inch minimum. 3. Color: Natural. C. Protection-Zone Fencing: Fencing fixed in position and meeting the following requirements. Previously used materials may be used when approved by Architect. 1. Chain-Link Protection-Zone Fencing: Galvanized-steel fencing fabricated from minimum 2-inch opening, 0.148-inch-diameter wire chain-link fabric; with pipe posts, minimum 2-3/8-inch- OD line posts, and 2-7/8-inch- OD corner and pull posts; with 1-5/8-inch-OD top rails and 0.177-inch- diameter bottom tension wire; with tie wires, hog ring ties, and other accessories for a complete fence system. a. Height: 6 feet. 2. Gates: Single swing access gates matching material and appearance of fencing, to allow for maintenance activities within protection zones; leaf width 36 inches. D. Protection-Zone Signage: Shop-fabricated, rigid plastic or metal sheet with attachment holes pre-punched and reinforced; legibly printed with nonfading lettering and as follows: 1. Size and Text: As shown on Drawings. 2. Lettering: 3-inch-high minimum, white characters on red background. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Erosion and Sedimentation Control: Examine the site to verify that temporary erosion- and sedimentation- control measures are in place. Verify that flows of water redirected from construction areas or generated by construction activity do not enter or cross protection zones. B. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by arborist, listing conditions detrimental to tree and plant protection. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Locate and clearly identify trees, shrubs, and other vegetation to remain or to be relocated. Flag each tree trunk at 54 inches above the ground. B. Protect tree root systems from damage caused by runoff or spillage of noxious materials while mixing, placing, or storing construction materials. Protect root systems from ponding, eroding, or excessive wetting caused by dewatering operations. C. Tree-Protection Zones: Mulch areas inside tree-protection zones and other areas indicated. 1. Apply 4-inch average thickness of organic mulch. Do not place mulch within 6 inches of tree trunks. D. Cut underbrush under all trees throughout the entire site. 3.3 TREE- AND PLANT-PROTECTION ZONES A. Protection-Zone Fencing: Install protection-zone fencing along edges of protection zones before materials Denton Fire Station No. 8 TEMPORARY TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 015639-3 August 2019 or equipment are brought on the site and construction operations begin in a manner that will prevent people and animals from easily entering protected area except by entrance gates. Construct fencing so as not to obstruct safe passage or visibility at vehicle intersections where fencing is located adjacent to pedestrian walkways or in close proximity to street intersections, drives, or other vehicular circulation. 1. Chain-Link Fencing: Install to comply with ASTM F 567 and with manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Posts: Set or drive posts into ground one-third the total height of the fence without concrete footings. Where a post is located on existing paving or concrete to remain, provide appropriate means of post support acceptable to Architect. 3. Access Gates: Install where indicated; adjust to operate smoothly, easily, and quietly, free of binding, warp, excessive deflection, distortion, nonalignment, misplacement, disruption, or malfunction, throughout entire operational range. Confirm that latches and locks engage accurately and securely without forcing or binding. B. Protection-Zone Signage: Install protection-zone signage in visibly prominent locations in a manner approved by Architect. Install one sign spaced approximately every 20 feet on protection-zone fencing, but no fewer than four signs with each facing a different direction. C. Maintain protection zones free of weeds and trash. D. Repair or replace trees, shrubs, and other vegetation indicated to remain or be relocated that are damaged by construction operations, in a manner approved by Architect. E. Maintain protection-zone fencing and signage in good condition as acceptable to Architect and remove when construction operations are complete and equipment has been removed from the site. 1. Do not remove protection-zone fencing, even temporarily, to allow deliveries or equipment access through the protection zone. 2. Temporary access is permitted subject to preapproval in writing by arborist if a root buffer effective against soil compaction is constructed as directed by arborist. Maintain root buffer so long as access is permitted. 3.4 EXCAVATION A. General: Excavate at edge of protection zones and for trenches indicated within protection zones according to requirements in Division 31 Earthwork. B. Trenching near Trees: Where utility trenches are required within protection zones, hand excavate under or around tree roots or tunnel under the roots by drilling, auger boring, or pipe jacking. Do not cut main lateral tree roots or taproots; cut only smaller roots that interfere with installation of utilities. Cut roots as required for root pruning. C. Redirect roots in backfill areas where possible. If encountering large, main lateral roots, expose roots beyond excavation limits as required to bend and redirect them without breaking. If encountered immediately adjacent to location of new construction and redirection is not practical, cut roots approximately 3 inches back from new construction and as required for root pruning. D. Do not allow exposed roots to dry out before placing permanent backfill. Provide temporary earth cover or pack with peat moss and wrap with burlap. Water and maintain in a moist condition. Temporarily support and protect roots from damage until they are permanently relocated and covered with soil. 3.5 ROOT PRUNING A. Prune roots that are affected by temporary and permanent construction. Prune roots as shown on Drawings and as follows: 1. Cut roots manually by digging a trench and cutting exposed roots with sharp pruning instruments; do not break, tear, chop, or slant the cuts. Do not use a backhoe or other equipment that rips, tears, or pulls roots. 2. Cut Ends: Do not paint cut root ends. 3. Temporarily support and protect roots from damage until they are permanently redirected and covered with soil. 4. Cover exposed roots with burlap and water regularly. 5. Backfill as soon as possible according to requirements in Division 31 Earthwork. B. Root Pruning at Edge of Protection Zone: Prune roots 12 inches outside of the protection zone, by cleanly cutting all roots to the depth of the required excavation. C. Root Pruning within Protection Zone: Clear and excavate by hand to the depth of the required excavation to minimize damage to root systems. Use narrow-tine spading forks, comb soil to expose roots, and cleanly cut roots as close to excavation as possible. 3.6 CROWN PRUNING A. Prune branches that are affected by temporary and permanent construction. Prune branches as shown on Drawings and as follows: 1. Prune trees to remain to compensate for root loss caused by damaging or cutting root system. Denton Fire Station No. 8 TEMPORARY TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 015639-4 August 2019 Provide subsequent maintenance during Contract period as recommended by arborist. 2. Pruning Standards: Prune trees according to ANSI A300 (Part 1) and the following: a. Type of Pruning: Cleaning. b. Specialty Pruning: Restoration. 3. Cut branches with sharp pruning instruments; do not break or chop. 4. Do not apply pruning paint to wounds. B. Chip removed branches and dispose of off-site. 3.7 REGRADING A. Lowering Grade: Where new finish grade is indicated below existing grade around trees, slope grade beyond the protection zone. Maintain existing grades within the protection zone. B. Lowering Grade within Protection Zone: Where new finish grade is indicated below existing grade around trees, slope grade away from trees as recommended by arborist unless otherwise indicated. 1. Root Pruning: Prune tree roots exposed by lowering the grade. Do not cut main lateral roots or taproots; cut only smaller roots. Cut roots as required for root pruning. C. Raising Grade: Where new finish grade is indicated above existing grade around trees, slope grade beyond the protection zone. Maintain existing grades within the protection zone. D. Minor Fill within Protection Zone: Where existing grade is 2 inches or less below elevation of finish grade, fill with topsoil. Place topsoil in a single un-compacted layer and hand grade to required finish elevations. 3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspections: Engage a qualified arborist to direct plant-protection measures in the vicinity of trees, shrubs, and other vegetation indicated to remain and to prepare inspection reports. 3.9 REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT A. General: Repair or replace trees, shrubs, and other vegetation indicated to remain or be relocated that are damaged by construction operations, in a manner approved by Architect. 1. Submit details of proposed root cutting and tree and shrub repairs. 2. Have arborist perform the root cutting, branch pruning, and damage repair of trees and shrubs. 3. Treat damaged trunks, limbs, and roots according to arborist's written instructions. 4. Perform repairs within 24 hours. 5. Replace vegetation that cannot be repaired and restored to full-growth status, as determined by Architect. B. Trees: Remove and replace trees indicated to remain that are more than 25 percent dead or in an unhealthy condition before the end of the corrections period or are damaged during construction operations that Architect determines are incapable of restoring to normal growth pattern. Confirm with Architect that intent of Tree Preservation Plans are being met. 1. Provide new trees of same size and species as those being replaced for each tree that measures 6 inches or smaller in caliper size. For trees over 6 inches, provide twice the caliper size. 2. Plant and maintain new trees as specified in Division 32 Exterior Improvements. C. Soil Aeration: Where directed by Architect, aerate surface soil compacted during construction. Aerate 10 feet beyond drip line and no closer than 36 inches to tree trunk. Drill 2-inch-diameter holes a minimum of 12 inches deep at 24 inches o.c. Backfill holes with an equal mix of augured soil and sand. 3.10 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS A. Disposal: Remove excess excavated material, displaced trees, trash and debris, and legally dispose of them off Owner's property. END OF SECTION Denton Fire Station No. 8 EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 015713-1 August 2019 SECTION 015713 – EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes providing temporary erosion- and sedimentation-control measures to prevent soil erosion and discharge of soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways, according to erosion- and sedimentation-control Drawings and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Temporary measures include the following. 1. Silt fences. 2. Sediment barriers and check dams. 3. Stabilized construction entrance. 4. Construction of temporary swales and sedimentation basins as required. 5. Seeding, sodding, and hydromulching. 6. Dust control. 7. Slope protection. B. Comply with all local, state, and federal regulations regarding erosion control including the applicable provisions of the National Pollution Discharge Elimination System (NPDES) regulations from the Federal Clean Water Act. C. Should any provisions of this section be at variance with erosion control plan prepared by the civil engineer, the civil engineer’s directive shall take precedence. 1.2 NOTICE OF INTENT A. Contractor and Owner shall jointly submit an EPA Notice of Intent (NOI) prior to construction. B. Contractor shall prepare the report, coordinate with Owner, and file in accordance with regulations. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 SILT FENCE A. Filter Fabric: Non-woven polypropylene, polyethylene or polyamide thermoplastic fibers with non-raveling edges. The fabric shall be non-biodegradable, inert to most soil chemicals, ultraviolet resistant, unaffected by moisture or other weather conditions, and permeable to water while retaining sediment. The filter fabric shall be supplied in rolls a minimum of 36 inches wide. 1. Acceptable Products: Lundin "Silt Buster", Mirafi "Envirofence" or acceptable substitution. B. Wire Fence Support: Welded wire fabric 2 x 4 - W1.0 x W1.0. C. Fence Posts: Painted or galvanized steel Tee or Y-posts with anchor plates, not less than 5 feet in length with a minimum weight of 1.3 pounds per foot . Hangers shall be adequate to secure fence and fabric to posts. Posts and anchor plates shall conform to ASTM A-702. D. Dust Retardant: Equal to one of the following: 1. Coherex by Golden Bear Div of Witco Corp, Chandler, AZ. 2. Soil-Sement by Midwarst Insustrial Supply, Canton, OH. 3. Soil Seal Concentrate by Soil Seakl Corp., Los Angeles, CA. 2.2 SEDIMENT TRAPS A. Standard manufacture designed to fit the intended inlet. 2.3 STABILIZED CONSTRUCTION ENTRANCE A. Aggregate: Graded mixture of crushed stone, crushed or uncrushed gravel; ASTM D 448 and TEX 401- A coarse-aggregate; with 0 percent being retained by a 5-inch sieve and 100 percent being retained by a 3-inch sieve. 2.4 GRASS A. Materials and seeding and sodding shall conform to applicable Division 32. 2.5 FERTILIZER A. Use commercial grade fertilizers to insure germination and growth. Analysis by weight shall be 16-4-8 or 15-5-10 for Nitrogen, Phosphoric Acid and Potash. 2.6 WATER A. Use clean potable water for maintaining the grass. Denton Fire Station No. 8 EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 015713-2 August 2019 PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Keep disturbed areas to a minimum required to adequately perform the work. At all times maintain the site in such a manner that minimizes erosion of the site. The execution of work under this section shall be in conformance with the NPDES rulings and the site Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan. 3.2 SILT FENCES A. Silt fence shall be a minimum of 24 inches (0.6 meter) high. Posts shall be embedded a minimum of 12 inches in the ground, placed a maximum of 8 feet apart and set on a slight angle toward the anticipated runoff source. 1. When directed by the Engineer or designated representative, posts shall be set at specified intervals to support concentrated loads. B. Securely attach filter fabric to posts and wire support fence, with the bottom 12 inches of filter fabric buried in a trench a minimum of 6 inches deep and 6 inches (150 mm) wide to prevent sediment from passing under the fence. 1. When silt fence is constructed on impervious material, a 12-inch flap of fabric shall be extended upstream from the bottom of the silt fence and weighted to limit particulate loss. 2. No horizontal joints will be allowed in the filter fabric. 3. Vertical joints shall be overlapped a minimum of 12 inches with the ends sewn or otherwise securely tied. C. Silt fence shall be maintained for the duration of the project, and repaired, replaced, and/or relocated when necessary or as directed by the Engineer or designated representative. Accumulated silt shall be removed when it reaches a depth of 6 inches. 3.3 EROSION CONTROL BARRIERS A. Provide erosion control barriers at intervals along swales and ditches as shown on the Drawings or as necessary to meet the requirements of the Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan. B. Barriers: Silt fence or hay bales placed as indicated on the Drawings. C. Maintain barriers in good working condition and replace when damaged. 3.4 STABILIZED CONSTRUCTION ENTRANCE A. Remove trees, brush, stumps, obstructions, and other objectionable material and disposed of in a manner that will not interfere with the excavation, grading, and construction of the entrance as indicated on the Drawings. 1. Stabilized construction entrance shall not drain onto the public right-of-way and shall not allow surface water runoff to exit the construction site. 2. When necessary, vehicle wheels shall be cleaned to remove sediment prior to entrance onto public right of way. a. When vehicle washing is required, it shall be done on an area stabilized with crushed stone, which drains into an approved sediment trap or sediment basin. 3. Sediment shall be prevented from entering any storm drain, ditch or watercourse through use of sand bags, gravel, boards, silt fence or other methods approved by the Engineer or designated representative. B. The entrance shall be maintained in a condition that will prevent tracking or disposition of sediment onto public right of way. Provide periodic top dressing with additional stone as conditions demand, as well as the repair and/or cleanout of any measures used to trap sediment. Sediment that is spilled, dropped, washed, or tracked onto public right-of-way shall be removed immediately. 3.5 TEMPORARY AND PERMANENT SWALES A. Description: 1. Provide temporary and permanent drainage swales as required to carry drainage away from the work area to an approved outfall point. 2. Unless otherwise shown on the drawings, swales shall be earthen "V" shaped channels graded to a sufficient depth and slope to carry the anticipated runoff, but at least 2 feet deep with a slope of 0.1 percent. 3. Swales not designated to remain in place at the completion of the contract shall be cleaned of any muck, debris and other unsuitable material and filled with approved fill before final grading operations begin. 4. Swales shall have erosion control barriers as required. 5. All permanent swales shall be sodded to a minimum width of 10 feet on either side of the centerline of the swale. B. Maintenance: Denton Fire Station No. 8 EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 015713-3 August 2019 1. During the course of construction maintain temporary swales constructed for this contract so as to allow proper drainage from the construction area. Before Contractor leaves the site at the end of construction, place temporary swales to remain in good working condition. 2. Work with other contractors at the site in maintaining existing swales and ditches. 3. Where necessary for access to the work areas, install adequately sized culverts and maintain to provide the access without disturbing the site drainage. 4. Take care not to rut and damage sodded swales. Immediately repair damaged swales. 5. Keep sodded swales mowed. 3.6 DRAINAGE DITCHES A. Immediately hydromulch drainage ditches upon final grading. B. Repair erosion of the banks of the drainage ditches immediately and re-stabilize. C. Place sediment barriers at intervals along the ditch as shown on the plans or as necessary to help trap sediment on the site. Daily remove sediment and other debris trapped by the barriers. D. Maximum Ditch Side Slopes: 3 feet horizontal to 1 foot vertical. E. Maintenance of the ditches during construction shall include but not be limited to mowing, re-grading, sediment removal, re-hydromulching, bank repair and debris removal. F. Sediment removed from the ditches may be respread on the site as directed by the Owner. 3.7 FILL AND CUT SLOPES A. Fill slopes in all cases shall be no steeper than 3:1 unless specifically stated on the plans or approved by the Owner's soils engineer. B. When cut slopes exceed 2:1 for depths over 3 feet, proper bracing and shoring per OSHA requirements shall be used and maintained. C. For permanent slopes, cut or fill, between 2:1 and 10:1, erosion protection shall be provided with hydromulching, sodding, seeding, or other method as approved. 3.8 SEDIMENTATION BASINS A. Description: 1. Provide sedimentation ponds where indicated. 2. Route drainage from cleared areas through the sedimentation basin. 3. Operate and maintain the pond during construction. B. Maintenance: 1. Maintain the pond and the outfall and sediment retarding structure in good working condition throughout the time the pond is to be in operation. 2. When sediment and debris fill the pond to over one third (1/3) its designed capacity, clean out the pond. 3. Stockpile, in its’ own separate area, the sediment from the clearing operation, or remove from the site, as required. Make adequate drainage provisions such that drainage from the sediment stockpile drains back into the sediment pond. When approved by the Owner, sediment removed from the pond may be spread over the site. 3.9 SEEDING A. Seed disturbed portions of the site and stockpile areas within 14 days if the phasing of the construction operations are anticipated to leave those portions of the areas unworked for 21 days or more. B. Maintain seeded areas until the project is accepted by the Owner. Maintain by watering, fertilizing, reseeding, mowing and erosion repair as may be required. Cut grass when the average height of the grass reaches 6 inches. Clippings may be mulched back into the seeded areas. 3.10 DUST RETARDENT A. Apply with mobile pressure type distributor truck at 300 gallons per acre. Initiate dust retardant treatment once site grading has been initiated and during windy conditions (forecasted or actual 20 mph or greater). Perform not less than 3 times per day during the months of May-Sept and once per day the remaining months or whenever dryness of the soil warrants. END OF SECTION Denton Fire Station No. 8 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 016000-1 August 2019 SECTION 016000 – PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for selection of products for use in Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on products; special warranties; and comparable products. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Products: Items obtained for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material," "equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent. 1. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or model number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's published product literature that is current as of date of the Contract Documents. 2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or facility. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered new products. 3. Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through submittal process to have the indicated qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics that equal or exceed those of specified product. B. Basis-of-Design Product Specification: A specification in which a specific manufacturer's product is named and accompanied by the words "basis-of-design product," including make or model number or other designation, to establish the significant qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics for purposes of evaluating comparable products of additional manufacturers named in the specification. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Comparable Product Requests: Submit request for consideration of each comparable product. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles. 1. Include data to indicate compliance with the requirements specified in "Comparable Products" Article. 2. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within one week of receipt of a comparable product request. Architect will notify Contractor of approval or rejection of proposed comparable product request within 15 days of receipt of request, or seven days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later. a. Form of Approval: As specified in Section 013300 Submittal Procedures. b. Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a comparable product request within time allocated. B. Basis-of-Design Product Specification Submittal: Comply with requirements in Section 013300 Submittal Procedures. Show compliance with requirements. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more products for use on Project, select product compatible with products previously selected, even if previously selected products were also options. 1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft and vandalism. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. B. Delivery and Handling: 1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent overcrowding of construction spaces. 2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other losses. 3. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing. Denton Fire Station No. 8 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 016000-2 August 2019 4. Inspect products on delivery to determine compliance with the Contract Documents and to determine that products are undamaged and properly protected. C. Storage: 1. Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units. 2. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure. 3. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weathertight enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation. 4. Protect foam plastic from exposure to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of installation and concealment. 5. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity, ventilation, and weather-protection requirements for storage. 6. Protect stored products from damage and liquids from freezing. 7. Provide a secure location and enclosure at Project site for storage of materials and equipment by Owner's construction forces. Coordinate location with Owner. 1.7 PRODUCT WARRANTIES A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract Documents. 1. Manufacturer's Warranty: Written warranty furnished by individual manufacturer for a particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner. 2. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by the Contract Documents to provide specific rights for Owner. B. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution. 1. Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information and properly executed. 2. Specified Form: When specified forms are included with the Specifications, prepare a written document using indicated form properly executed. 3. See other Sections for specific content requirements and particular requirements for submitting special warranties. C. Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Section 017700 Closeout Procedures. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, are new at time of installation. 1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect. 2. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects. 3. Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract Documents. 4. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Architect will make selection. 5. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications establish salient characteristics of products. 6. Or Equal: For products specified by name and accompanied by the term "or equal," or "or approved equal," or "or approved," comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product. B. Product Selection Procedures: 1. Product: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer and product, provide the named product that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered. 2. Manufacturer/Source: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer or source, provide a product by the named manufacturer or source that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered. 3. Products: a. Restricted List: Where Specifications include a list of names of both manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will be considered unless otherwise indicated. Denton Fire Station No. 8 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 016000-3 August 2019 b. Nonrestricted List: Where Specifications include a list of names of both available manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed, or an unnamed product, that complies with requirements. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product. 4. Manufacturers: a. Restricted List: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers' names, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will be considered unless otherwise indicated. b. Nonrestricted List: Where Specifications include a list of available manufacturers, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed, or a product by an unnamed manufacturer, that complies with requirements. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed manufacturer's product. 5. Basis-of-Design Product: Where Specifications name a product, or refer to a product indicated on Drawings, and include a list of manufacturers, provide the specified or indicated product or a comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers. Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and other characteristics that are based on the product named. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product by one of the other named manufacturers. C. Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require "match Architect's sample", provide a product that complies with requirements and matches Architect's sample. Architect's decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches. 1. If no product available within specified category matches and complies with other specified requirements, comply with requirements in Section 012500 Substitution Procedures for proposal of product. D. Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range" or similar phrase, select a product that complies with requirements. Architect will select color, gloss, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's product line that includes both standard and premium items. 2.2 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS A. Conditions for Consideration: Architect will consider Contractor's request for comparable product when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect may return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements: 1. Evidence that the proposed product does not require revisions to the Contract Documents, that it is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the indicated results, and that it is compatible with other portions of the Work. 2. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated. 3. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty. 4. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners, if requested. 5. Samples, if requested. PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION Denton Fire Station No. 8 EXECUTION Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 017300-1 August 2019 SECTION 017300 – EXECUTION PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes general administrative and procedural requirements governing execution of the Work including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Construction layout. 2. Field engineering and surveying. 3. Installation of the Work. 4. Cutting and patching. 5. Coordination of Owner-installed products. 6. Progress cleaning. 7. Starting and adjusting. 8. Protection of installed construction. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Cutting: Removal of in-place construction necessary to permit installation or performance of other work. B. Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore construction to original conditions after installation of other work. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Certificates: Submit certificate signed by land surveyor certifying that location and elevation of improvements comply with requirements. B. Cutting and Patching Plan: Submit plan describing procedures at least 10 days prior to the time cutting and patching will be performed. Include the following information: 1. Extent: Describe reason for and extent of each occurrence of cutting and patching. 2. Changes to In-Place Construction: Describe anticipated results. Include changes to structural elements and operating components as well as changes in building appearance and other significant visual elements. 3. Products: List products to be used for patching and firms or entities that will perform patching work. 4. Dates: Indicate when cutting and patching will be performed. 5. Utilities and Mechanical and Electrical Systems: List services and systems that cutting and patching procedures will disturb or affect. List services and systems that will be relocated and those that will be temporarily out of service. Indicate length of time permanent services and systems will be disrupted. a. Include description of provisions for temporary services and systems during interruption of permanent services and systems. C. Landfill Receipts: Submit copy of receipts issued by a landfill facility, licensed to accept hazardous materials, for hazardous waste disposal. D. Certified Surveys: Submit two copies signed. E. Final Property Survey: Submit 10 copies showing the Work performed and record survey data. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Land Surveyor Qualifications: A professional land surveyor who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing land-surveying services of the kind indicated. B. Cutting and Patching: Comply with requirements for and limitations on cutting and patching of construction elements. 1. Structural Elements: When cutting and patching structural elements, notify Architect of locations and details of cutting and await directions from Architect before proceeding. Shore, brace, and support structural elements during cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity or increase deflection 2. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. Operational elements include the following: a. Primary operational systems and equipment. b. Fire separation assemblies. c. Air or smoke barriers. Denton Fire Station No. 8 EXECUTION Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 017300-2 August 2019 d. Fire-suppression systems. e. Mechanical systems piping and ducts. f. Control systems. g. Communication systems. h. Fire-detection and -alarm systems. i. Conveying systems. j. Electrical wiring systems. k. Operating systems of special construction. 3. Other Construction Elements: Do not cut and patch other construction elements or components in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity, that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or that result in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. Other construction elements include but are not limited to the following: a. Water, moisture, or vapor barriers. b. Membranes and flashings. c. Exterior curtain-wall construction. d. Sprayed fire-resistive material. e. Equipment supports. f. Piping, ductwork, vessels, and equipment. g. Noise and vibration control elements and systems. 4. Visual Elements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch exposed construction in a manner that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner. C. Cutting and Patching Conference: Before proceeding, meet at Project site with parties involved in cutting and patching, including mechanical and electrical trades. Review areas of potential interference and conflict. Coordinate procedures and resolve potential conflicts before proceeding. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Obtain and maintain on-site manufacturer's written recommendations and instructions for installation of products and equipment. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections. B. In-Place Materials: Use materials for patching identical to in-place materials. For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible. 1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed, will provide a match acceptable to Architect for the visual and functional performance of in-place materials. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Existing Conditions: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning site work, investigate and verify the existence and location of underground utilities, mechanical and electrical systems, and other construction affecting the Work. 1. Before construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of connection of sanitary sewer, storm sewer, and water-service piping; underground electrical services, and other utilities. 2. Furnish location data for work related to Project that must be performed by public utilities serving Project site. B. Examination and Acceptance of Conditions: Before proceeding with each component of the Work, examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator present where indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Record observations. 1. Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of connections before equipment and fixture installation. 2. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are to be installed. 3. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers. C. Written Report: Where a written report listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work is required by other Sections, include the following: 1. Description of the Work. Denton Fire Station No. 8 EXECUTION Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 017300-3 August 2019 2. List of detrimental conditions, including substrates. 3. List of unacceptable installation tolerances. 4. Recommended corrections. D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. B. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown diagrammatically on Drawings. C. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for clarification of the Contract Documents caused by differing field conditions outside the control of Contractor, submit a request for information to Architect according to requirements in Section 013100 Project Management and Coordination. 3.3 CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT A. Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on Drawings, in relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks. If discrepancies are discovered, notify Architect promptly. B. General: Engage a licensed surveyor to lay out the Work using accepted surveying practices. 1. Establish benchmarks and control points to set lines and levels at each story of construction and elsewhere as needed to locate each element of Project. 2. Establish limits on use of Project site. 3. Establish dimensions within tolerances indicated. Do not scale Drawings to obtain required dimensions. 4. Inform installers of lines and levels to which they must comply. 5. Check the location, level and plumb, of every major element as the Work progresses. 6. Notify Architect when deviations from required lines and levels exceed allowable tolerances. 7. Close site surveys with an error of closure equal to or less than the standard established by authorities having jurisdiction. C. Site Improvements: Locate and lay out site improvements, including pavements, grading, fill and topsoil placement, utility slopes, and rim and invert elevations. D. Building Lines and Levels: Locate and lay out control lines and levels for structures, building foundations, column grids, and floor levels, including those required for mechanical and electrical work. Transfer survey markings and elevations for use with control lines and levels. Level foundations and piers from two or more locations. E. Record Log: Maintain a log of layout control work. Record deviations from required lines and levels. Include beginning and ending dates and times of surveys, weather conditions, name and duty of each survey party member, and types of instruments and tapes used. Make the log available for reference by Architect. 3.4 FIELD ENGINEERING A. Identification: Owner will identify existing benchmarks, control points, and property corners. B. Reference Points: Locate existing permanent benchmarks, control points, and similar reference points before beginning the Work. Preserve and protect permanent benchmarks and control points during construction operations. 1. Replace lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks and control points promptly. Base replacements on the original survey control points. C. Benchmarks: Establish and maintain a minimum of two permanent benchmarks on Project site, referenced to data established by survey control points. Comply with authorities having jurisdiction for type and size of benchmark. 1. Record benchmark locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on Project Record Documents. 2. Where the actual location or elevation of layout points cannot be marked, provide temporary reference points sufficient to locate the Work. 3. Remove temporary reference points when no longer needed. Restore marked construction to its original condition. D. Certified Survey: On completion of foundation walls, major site improvements, and other work requiring field-engineering services, prepare a certified survey showing dimensions, locations, angles, and elevations of construction and site work. E. Final Property Survey: Engage a land surveyor to prepare a final property survey showing significant Denton Fire Station No. 8 EXECUTION Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 017300-4 August 2019 features (real property) for Project. Include on the survey a certification, signed by land surveyor, that principal metes, bounds, lines, and levels of Project are accurately positioned as shown on the survey. 1. Show boundary lines, monuments, streets, site improvements and utilities, existing improvements and significant vegetation, adjoining properties, acreage, grade contours, and the distance and bearing from a site corner to a legal point. 2. Recording: At Substantial Completion, have the final property survey recorded by or with authorities having jurisdiction as the official "property survey." 3.5 INSTALLATION A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and elevation, as indicated. 1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level. 2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance and ease of removal for replacement. 3. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas unless otherwise indicated. 4. Maintain minimum headroom clearance of 96 inches in occupied spaces and 90 inches in unoccupied spaces. B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in applications indicated. C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results. Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion. D. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy. E. Sequence the Work and allow adequate clearances to accommodate movement of construction items on site and placement in permanent locations. F. Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels. G. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to be factory prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing products to comply with indicated requirements. H. Attachment: Provide blocking and attachment plates and anchors and fasteners of adequate size and number to securely anchor each component in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of the Work. Where size and type of attachments are not indicated, verify size and type required for load conditions. 1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at heights directed by Architect. 2. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction. 3. Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. I. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated, arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. J. Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered hazardous. 3.6 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Cutting and Patching, General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay. 1. Cut in-place construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their original condition. B. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during installation or cutting and patching operations, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties. C. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of work to be cut. D. Protection: Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations. E. Adjacent Occupied Areas: Where interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas is unavoidable, coordinate cutting and patching according to requirements in Section 011000 Summary. F. Existing Utility Services and Mechanical/Electrical Systems: Where existing services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, bypass such services/systems before cutting to minimize interruption to occupied areas. Denton Fire Station No. 8 EXECUTION Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 017300-5 August 2019 G. Cutting: Cut in-place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply with original Installer's written recommendations. 1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots neatly to minimum size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use. 2. Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces. 3. Concrete and Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a diamond-core drill. 4. Excavating and Backfilling: Comply with requirements in applicable Sections where required by cutting and patching operations. 5. Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting. 6. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete. H. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations following performance of other work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as practicable. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections, where applicable. 1. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to demonstrate physical integrity of installation. 2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will minimize evidence of patching and refinishing. a. Clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other finishing materials. b. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition. 3. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even surface of uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance. Remove in-place floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance. a. Where patching occurs in a painted surface, prepare substrate and apply primer and intermediate paint coats appropriate for substrate over the patch, and apply final paint coat over entire unbroken surface containing the patch. Provide additional coats until patch blends with adjacent surfaces. 4. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang in-place ceilings as necessary to provide an even-plane surface of uniform appearance. 5. Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a weathertight condition and ensures thermal and moisture integrity of building enclosure. I. Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials from adjacent finished surfaces. 3.7 OWNER-INSTALLED PRODUCTS A. Site Access: Provide access to Project site for Owner's construction personnel. B. Coordination: Coordinate construction and operations of the Work with work performed by Owner's construction personnel. 1. Construction Schedule: Inform Owner of Contractor's preferred construction schedule for Owner's portion of the Work. Adjust construction schedule based on a mutually agreeable timetable. Notify Owner if changes to schedule are required due to differences in actual construction progress. 2. Pre-installation Conferences: Include Owner's construction personnel at pre-installation conferences covering portions of the Work that are to receive Owner's work. Attend pre-installation conferences conducted by Owner's construction personnel if portions of the Work depend on Owner's construction. 3.8 PROGRESS CLEANING A. General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Enforce requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully. 1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and debris. 2. Do not hold waste materials more than seven days during normal weather or three days if the temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F. 3. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations. a. Use containers intended for holding waste materials of type to be stored. 4. Coordinate progress cleaning for joint-use areas where Contractor and other contractors are working concurrently. B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris. C. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for proper Denton Fire Station No. 8 EXECUTION Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 017300-6 August 2019 execution of the Work. 1. Remove liquid spills promptly. 2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the entire work area, as appropriate. D. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces. E. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space. F. Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. G. Waste Disposal: Do not bury or burn waste materials on-site. Do not wash waste materials down sewers or into waterways. Comply with waste disposal requirements in Section 015000 Temporary Facilities and Controls. H. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion. I. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure operability without damaging effects. J. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period. 3.9 STARTING AND ADJUSTING A. Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest. B. Adjust equipment for proper operation. Adjust operating components for proper operation without binding. C. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. D. Manufacturer's Field Service: Comply with qualification requirements in Section 014000 Quality Requirements. 3.10 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity. END OF SECTION Denton Fire Station No. 8 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 017700-1 August 2019 SECTION 017700 – CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Substantial Completion procedures. 2. Final completion procedures. 3. Warranties. 4. Final cleaning. 5. Repair of the Work. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For cleaning agents. B. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Initial submittal at Substantial Completion. C. Certified List of Incomplete Items: Final submittal at Final Completion. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Certificates of Release: From authorities having jurisdiction. B. Certificate of Insurance: For continuing coverage. C. Field Report: For pest control inspection. 1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Schedule of Maintenance Material Items: For maintenance material submittal items specified in other Sections. 1.6 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES A. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Prepare and submit a list of items to be completed and corrected (Contractor's punch list), indicating the value of each item on the list and reasons why the Work is incomplete. B. Submittals Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 10 days prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below that are incomplete at time of request. 1. Certificates of Release: Obtain and submit releases from authorities having jurisdiction permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases. 2. Submit closeout submittals specified in other Division 01 Sections, including project record documents, operation and maintenance manuals, final completion construction photographic documentation, damage or settlement surveys, property surveys, and similar final record information. 3. Submit closeout submittals specified in individual Sections, including specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final certifications, and similar documents. 4. Submit maintenance material submittals specified in individual Sections, including tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items, and deliver to location designated by Architect. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable. a. Schedule of Maintenance Material Items: Prepare and submit schedule of maintenance material submittal items, including name and quantity of each item and name and number of related Specification Section. Obtain Architect's signature for receipt of submittals. 5. Submit test/adjust/balance records. 6. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and maintenance. C. Procedures Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 10 days prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below that are incomplete at time of request. 1. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements. 2. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's personnel of changeover in security provisions. 3. Complete startup and testing of systems and equipment. 4. Perform preventive maintenance on equipment used prior to Substantial Completion. 5. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment, and Denton Fire Station No. 8 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 017700-2 August 2019 systems. Submit demonstration and training video recordings specified in Section 017900 Demonstration and Training. 6. Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities. 7. Participate with Owner in conducting inspection and walkthrough with local emergency responders. 8. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups, construction tools, and similar elements. 9. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting. 10. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual defects. D. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection to determine Substantial Completion a minimum of 7 days prior to date the work will be completed and ready for final inspection and tests. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by Architect, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. 1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. 2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for final completion. 1.7 FINAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES A. Submittals Prior to Final Completion: Before requesting final inspection for determining final completion, complete the following: 1. Submit a final Application for Payment according to Section 012900 Payment Procedures. 2. Certified List of Incomplete Items: Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Architect. Certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance. 3. Certificate of Insurance: Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements. 4. Submit pest-control final inspection report. B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection to determine acceptance a minimum of 10 days prior to date the work will be completed and ready for final inspection and tests. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. 1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. 1.8 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST) A. Organization of List: Include name and identification of each space and area affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction. 1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order, starting with exterior areas first [and proceeding from lowest floor to highest floor]. 2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling, individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems. 3. Include the following information at the top of each page: a. Project name. b. Date. c. Name of Architect. d. Name of Contractor. e. Page number. 4. Submit list of incomplete items in the following format: a. MS Excel electronic file. Architect will return annotated file. b. PDF electronic file. Architect will return annotated file. 1.9 SUBMITTAL OF PROJECT WARRANTIES A. Time of Submittal: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions of the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is indicated, or when delay in submittal of warranties might limit Owner's rights under warranty. B. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of Project Manual. 1. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, three-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2-by-11-inch paper. 2. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark tab to Denton Fire Station No. 8 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 017700-3 August 2019 identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or installation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone number of Installer. 3. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES," Project name, and name of Contractor. 4. Warranty Electronic File: Scan warranties and bonds and assemble complete warranty and bond submittal package into a single indexed electronic PDF file with links enabling navigation to each item. Provide bookmarked table of contents at beginning of document. C. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces. 1. Use cleaning products that comply with Green Seal's GS-37, or if GS-37 is not applicable, use products that comply with the California Code of Regulations maximum allowable VOC levels. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 FINAL CLEANING A. General: Perform final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations. B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a designated portion of Project: a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other foreign substances. b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other foreign deposits. c. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even-textured surface. d. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from Project site. e. Remove snow and ice to provide safe access to building. f. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition, free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition. g. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs, plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces. h. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces. i. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap; clean according to manufacturer's recommendations if visible soil or stains remain. j. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows. Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision-obscuring materials. Polish mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces. k. Remove labels that are not permanent. l. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment and similar equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign substances. m. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains resulting from water exposure. n. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills. o. Clean ducts, blowers, and coils if units were operated without filters during construction or that display contamination with particulate matter on inspection. 1) Clean HVAC system in compliance with NADCA Standard 1992-01. Provide written report on completion of cleaning. p. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency. q. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy. C. Pest Control: Comply with pest control requirements in Section 015000 Temporary Facilities and Controls. Prepare written report. D. Construction Waste Disposal: Comply with waste disposal requirements in Section 015000 Temporary Facilities and Controls. Denton Fire Station No. 8 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 017700-4 August 2019 3.2 REPAIR OF THE WORK A. Complete repair and restoration operations before requesting inspection for determination of Substantial Completion. B. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment. Where damaged or worn items cannot be repaired or restored, provide replacements. Remove and replace operating components that cannot be repaired. Restore damaged construction and permanent facilities used during construction to specified condition. 1. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass, reflective surfaces, and other damaged transparent materials. 2. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred or exposed finishes and surfaces. Replace finishes and surfaces that that already show evidence of repair or restoration. a. Do not paint over "UL" and other required labels and identification, including mechanical and electrical nameplates. Remove paint applied to required labels and identification. 3. Replace parts subject to operating conditions during construction that may impede operation or reduce longevity. 4. Replace burned-out bulbs, bulbs noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with requirements for new fixtures. END OF SECTION Denton Fire Station No. 8 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 017823-1 August 2019 SECTION 017823 – OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation and maintenance manuals, including the following: 1. Operation and maintenance documentation directory. 2. Emergency manuals. 3. Operation manuals for systems, subsystems, and equipment. 4. Product maintenance manuals. 5. Systems and equipment maintenance manuals. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. System: An organized collection of parts, equipment, or subsystems united by regular interaction. B. Subsystem: A portion of a system with characteristics similar to a system. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Manual Content: Operations and maintenance manual content is specified in individual Specification Sections to be reviewed at the time of Section submittals. Submit reviewed manual content formatted and organized as required by this Section. 1. Architect and Commissioning Authority will comment on whether content of operations and maintenance submittals are acceptable. 2. Where applicable, clarify and update reviewed manual content to correspond to revisions and field conditions. B. Format: Submit operations and maintenance manuals in the following format: 1. PDF electronic file. Assemble each manual into a composite electronically indexed file. Submit on digital media acceptable to Architect. a. Name each indexed document file in composite electronic index with applicable item name. Include a complete electronically linked operation and maintenance directory. b. Enable inserted reviewer comments on draft submittals. 2. Also provide two hard copies of the O&M Manual. C. Initial Manual Submittal: Submit draft copy of each manual at least 30 days before commencing demonstration and training. Architect and Commissioning Authority will comment on whether general scope and content of manual are acceptable. D. Final Manual Submittal: Submit each manual in final form prior to requesting inspection for Substantial Completion and at least 15 days before commencing demonstration and training. Architect and Commissioning Authority will return copy with comments. 1. Correct or revise each manual to comply with Architect's and Commissioning Authority's comments. Submit copies of each corrected manual within 15 days of receipt of Architect's and Commissioning Authority's comments and prior to commencing demonstration and training. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTATION DIRECTORY A. Directory: Prepare a single, comprehensive directory of emergency, operation, and maintenance data and materials, listing items and their location to facilitate ready access to desired information. Include a section in the directory for each of the following: 1. List of documents. 2. List of systems. 3. List of equipment. 4. Table of contents. B. List of Systems and Subsystems: List systems alphabetically. Include references to operation and maintenance manuals that contain information about each system. C. List of Equipment: List equipment for each system, organized alphabetically by system. For pieces of equipment not part of system, list alphabetically in separate list. D. Tables of Contents: Include a table of contents for each emergency, operation, and maintenance manual. E. Identification: In the documentation directory and in each operation and maintenance manual, identify each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment with same designation used in the Contract Documents. Denton Fire Station No. 8 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 017823-2 August 2019 If no designation exists, assign a designation according to ASHRAE Guideline 4, "Preparation of Operating and Maintenance Documentation for Building Systems." 2.2 REQUIREMENTS FOR EMERGENCY, OPERATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Organization: Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into a separate section for each system and subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of equipment not part of a system. Each manual shall contain the following materials, in the order listed: 1. Title page. 2. Table of contents. 3. Manual contents. B. Title Page: Include the following information: 1. Subject matter included in manual. 2. Name and address of Project. 3. Name and address of Owner. 4. Date of submittal. 5. Name and contact information for Contractor. 6. Name and contact information for Architect. 7. Name and contact information for Commissioning Authority. 8. Names and contact information for major consultants to the Architect that designed the systems contained in the manuals. 9. Cross-reference to related systems in other operation and maintenance manuals. C. Table of Contents: List each product included in manual, identified by product name, indexed to the content of the volume, and cross-referenced to Specification Section number in Project Manual. 1. If operation or maintenance documentation requires more than one volume to accommodate data, include comprehensive table of contents for all volumes in each volume of the set. D. Manual Contents: Organize into sets of manageable size. Arrange contents alphabetically by system, subsystem, and equipment. If possible, assemble instructions for subsystems, equipment, and components of one system into a single binder. E. Manuals, Electronic Files: Submit manuals in the form of a multiple file composite electronic PDF file for each manual type required. 1. Electronic Files: Use electronic files prepared by manufacturer where available. Where scanning of paper documents is required, configure scanned file for minimum readable file size. 2. File Names and Bookmarks: Enable bookmarking of individual documents based on file names. Name document files to correspond to system, subsystem, and equipment names used in manual directory and table of contents. Group documents for each system and subsystem into individual composite bookmarked files, then create composite manual, so that resulting bookmarks reflect the system, subsystem, and equipment names in a readily navigated file tree. Configure electronic manual to display bookmark panel on opening file. 2.3 EMERGENCY MANUALS A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each of the following: 1. Type of emergency. 2. Emergency instructions. 3. Emergency procedures. B. Type of Emergency: Where applicable for each type of emergency indicated below, include instructions and procedures for each system, subsystem, piece of equipment, and component: 1. Fire. 2. Flood. 3. Gas leak. 4. Water leak. 5. Power failure. 6. Water outage. 7. System, subsystem, or equipment failure. 8. Chemical release or spill. C. Emergency Instructions: Describe and explain warnings, trouble indications, error messages, and similar codes and signals. Include responsibilities of Owner's operating personnel for notification of Installer, supplier, and manufacturer to maintain warranties. D. Emergency Procedures: Include the following, as applicable: 1. Instructions on stopping. 2. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency. 3. Operating instructions for conditions outside normal operating limits. 4. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. 5. Special operating instructions and procedures. Denton Fire Station No. 8 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 017823-3 August 2019 2.4 OPERATION MANUALS A. Content: In addition to requirements in this Section, include operation data required in individual Specification Sections and the following information: 1. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. Use designations for systems and equipment indicated on Contract Documents. 2. Performance and design criteria if Contractor has delegated design responsibility. 3. Operating standards. 4. Operating procedures. 5. Operating logs. 6. Wiring diagrams. 7. Control diagrams. 8. Piped system diagrams. 9. Precautions against improper use. 10. License requirements including inspection and renewal dates. B. Descriptions: Include the following: 1. Product name and model number. Use designations for products indicated on Contract Documents. 2. Manufacturer's name. 3. Equipment identification with serial number of each component. 4. Equipment function. 5. Operating characteristics. 6. Limiting conditions. 7. Performance curves. 8. Engineering data and tests. 9. Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts. C. Operating Procedures: Include the following, as applicable: 1. Startup procedures. 2. Equipment or system break-in procedures. 3. Routine and normal operating instructions. 4. Regulation and control procedures. 5. Instructions on stopping. 6. Normal shutdown instructions. 7. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions. 8. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. 9. Special operating instructions and procedures. D. Systems and Equipment Controls: Describe the sequence of operation, and diagram controls as installed. E. Piped Systems: Diagram piping as installed, and identify color-coding where required for identification. 2.5 PRODUCT MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each product, material, and finish. Include source information, product information, maintenance procedures, repair materials and sources, and warranties and bonds, as described below. B. Source Information: List each product included in manual identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual and drawing or schedule designation or identifier where applicable. C. Product Information: Include the following, as applicable: 1. Product name and model number. 2. Manufacturer's name. 3. Color, pattern, and texture. 4. Material and chemical composition. 5. Reordering information for specially manufactured products. D. Maintenance Procedures: Include manufacturer's written recommendations and the following: 1. Inspection procedures. 2. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning. 3. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product. 4. Schedule for routine cleaning and maintenance. 5. Repair instructions. E. Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials and related services. F. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds. 1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims. Denton Fire Station No. 8 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 017823-4 August 2019 2.6 SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Content: For each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system, include source information, manufacturers' maintenance documentation, maintenance procedures, maintenance and service schedules, spare parts list and source information, maintenance service contracts, and warranty and bond information, as described below. B. Source Information: List each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual and drawing or schedule designation or identifier where applicable. C. Manufacturers' Maintenance Documentation: Manufacturers' maintenance documentation including the following information for each component part or piece of equipment: 1. Standard maintenance instructions and bulletins. 2. Drawings, diagrams, and instructions required for maintenance, including disassembly and component removal, replacement, and assembly. 3. Identification and nomenclature of parts and components. 4. List of items recommended to be stocked as spare parts. D. Maintenance Procedures: Include the following information and items that detail essential maintenance procedures: 1. Test and inspection instructions. 2. Troubleshooting guide. 3. Precautions against improper maintenance. 4. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly instructions. 5. Aligning, adjusting, and checking instructions. 6. Demonstration and training video recording, if available. E. Maintenance and Service Schedules: Include service and lubrication requirements, list of required lubricants for equipment, and separate schedules for preventive and routine maintenance and service with standard time allotment. 1. Scheduled Maintenance and Service: Tabulate actions for daily, weekly, monthly, quarterly, semiannual, and annual frequencies. 2. Maintenance and Service Record: Include manufacturers' forms for recording maintenance. F. Spare Parts List and Source Information: Include lists of replacement and repair parts, with parts identified and cross-referenced to manufacturers' maintenance documentation and local sources of maintenance materials and related services. G. Maintenance Service Contracts: Include copies of maintenance agreements with name and telephone number of service agent. H. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds. 1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 MANUAL PREPARATION A. Operation and Maintenance Documentation Directory: Prepare a separate manual that provides an organized reference to emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. B. Emergency Manual: Assemble a complete set of emergency information indicating procedures for use by emergency personnel and by Owner's operating personnel for types of emergencies indicated. C. Product Maintenance Manual: Assemble a complete set of maintenance data indicating care and maintenance of each product, material, and finish incorporated into the Work. D. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance data indicating operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system. 1. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to assemble and prepare information for each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system. 2. Prepare a separate manual for each system and subsystem, in the form of an instructional manual for use by Owner's operating personnel. E. Manufacturers' Data: Where manuals contain manufacturers' standard printed data, include only sheets pertinent to product or component installed. Mark each sheet to identify each product or component incorporated into the Work. If data include more than one item in a tabular format, identify each item using appropriate references from the Contract Documents. Identify data applicable to the Work and delete references to information not applicable. 1. Prepare supplementary text if manufacturers' standard printed data are not available and where the information is necessary for proper operation and maintenance of equipment or systems. Denton Fire Station No. 8 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 017823-5 August 2019 F. Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers' printed data to illustrate the relationship of component parts of equipment and systems and to illustrate control sequence and flow diagrams. Coordinate these drawings with information contained in record Drawings to ensure correct illustration of completed installation. 1. Do not use original project record documents as part of operation and maintenance manuals. 2. Comply with requirements of newly prepared record Drawings in Section 017839 Project Record Documents. G. Comply with Section 017700 Closeout Procedures for schedule for submitting operation and maintenance documentation. END OF SECTION Denton Fire Station No. 8 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 017839-1 August 2019 SECTION 017839 – PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for project record documents, including the following: 1. Record Drawings. 2. Record Specifications. 3. Record Product Data. 4. Miscellaneous record submittals. 1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Record Drawings: Comply with the following: 1. Number of Copies: Submit one set of marked-up record prints. 2. Number of Copies: Submit copies of record Drawings as follows: a. Initial Submittal: 1) Submit record digital data files and one set(s) of plots. 2) Architect will indicate whether general scope of changes, additional information recorded, and quality of drafting are acceptable. b. Final Submittal: 1) Submit one paper-copy set(s) of marked-up record prints. 2) Submit record digital data files and three set(s) of record digital data file plots. 3) Plot each drawing file, whether or not changes and additional information were recorded. B. Record Specifications: Submit of Project's Specifications, including addenda and contract modifications. C. Record Product Data: Submit of each submittal. 1. Where record Product Data are required as part of operation and maintenance manuals, submit duplicate marked-up Product Data as a component of manual. D. Miscellaneous Record Submittals: See other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record-keeping requirements and submittals in connection with various construction activities. Submit of each submittal. E. Reports: Submit written report ]indicating items incorporated into project record documents concurrent with progress of the Work, including revisions, concealed conditions, field changes, product selections, and other notations incorporated. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 RECORD DRAWINGS A. Record Prints: Maintain one set of marked-up paper copies of the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings, incorporating new and revised drawings as modifications are issued. 1. Preparation: Mark record prints to show the actual installation where installation varies from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to provide information for preparation of corresponding marked-up record prints. a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be difficult to identify or measure and record later. b. Accurately record information in an acceptable drawing technique. c. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. d. Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations. e. Cross-reference record prints to corresponding archive photographic documentation. 2. Content: Types of items requiring marking include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Dimensional changes to Drawings. b. Revisions to details shown on Drawings. c. Depths of foundations below first floor. d. Locations and depths of underground utilities. e. Revisions to routing of piping and conduits. f. Revisions to electrical circuitry. g. Actual equipment locations. h. Duct size and routing. Denton Fire Station No. 8 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 017839-2 August 2019 i. Locations of concealed internal utilities. j. Changes made by Change Order or Construction Change Directive. k. Changes made following Architect's written orders. l. Details not on the original Contract Drawings. m. Field records for variable and concealed conditions. n. Record information on the Work that is shown only schematically. 3. Mark the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings completely and accurately. Use personnel proficient at recording graphic information in production of marked-up record prints. 4. Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between changes for different categories of the Work at same location. 5. Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted from original Drawings. 6. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order numbers, and similar identification, where applicable. B. Record Digital Data Files: Immediately before inspection for Certificate of Substantial Completion, review marked-up record prints with Architect. When authorized, prepare a full set of corrected digital data files of the Contract Drawings, as follows: 1. Format: Same digital data software program, version, and operating system as the original Contract Drawings. 2. Incorporate changes and additional information previously marked on record prints. Delete, redraw, and add details and notations where applicable. 3. Refer instances of uncertainty to Architect for resolution. 4. Architect will furnish Contractor one set of digital data files of the Contract Drawings for use in recording information. a. See Section 013300 Submittal Procedures for requirements related to use of Architect's digital data files. b. Architect will provide data file layer information. Record markups in separate layers. C. Newly Prepared Record Drawings: Prepare new Drawings instead of preparing record Drawings where Architect determines that neither the original Contract Drawings nor Shop Drawings are suitable to show actual installation. 1. New Drawings may be required when a Change Order is issued as a result of accepting an alternate, substitution, or other modification. 2. Consult Architect for proper scale and scope of detailing and notations required to record the actual physical installation and its relation to other construction. Integrate newly prepared record Drawings into record Drawing sets; comply with procedures for formatting, organizing, copying, binding, and submitting. D. Format: Identify and date each record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWING" in a prominent location. 1. Record Prints: Organize record prints and newly prepared record Drawings into manageable sets. Bind each set with durable paper cover sheets. Include identification on cover sheets. 2. Record Digital Data Files: Organize digital data information into separate electronic files that correspond to each sheet of the Contract Drawings. Name each file with the sheet identification. Include identification in each digital data file. 3. Identification: As follows: a. Project name. b. Date. c. Designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS." d. Name of Architect. e. Name of Contractor. 2.2 RECORD SPECIFICATIONS A. Preparation: Mark Specifications to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications. 1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later. 2. Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products, materials, and equipment furnished, including substitutions and product options selected. 3. Record the name of manufacturer, supplier, Installer, and other information necessary to provide a record of selections made. 4. For each principal product, indicate whether record Product Data has been submitted in operation and maintenance manuals instead of submitted as record Product Data. 5. Note related Change Orders, record Product Data, and record Drawings where applicable. B. Format: Submit record Specifications as digital data file. Denton Fire Station No. 8 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 017839-3 August 2019 2.3 RECORD PRODUCT DATA A. Preparation: Mark Product Data to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies substantially from that indicated in Product Data submittal. 1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later. 2. Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in manufacturer's written instructions for installation. 3. Note related Change Orders, record Specifications, and record Drawings where applicable. B. Format: Submit record Product Data as digital data file. 1. Include record Product Data directory organized by Specification Section number and title, electronically linked to each item of record Product Data. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS A. Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Bind or file miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for continued use and reference. B. Format: Submit miscellaneous record submittals as digital data file. 1. Include miscellaneous record submittals directory organized by Specification Section number and title, electronically linked to each item of miscellaneous record submittals. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE A. Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for project record document purposes. Post changes and revisions to project record documents as they occur; do not wait until end of Project. B. Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples: Store record documents and Samples in the field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use project record documents for construction purposes. Maintain record documents in good order and in a clean, dry, legible condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Provide access to project record documents for Architect's reference during normal working hours. END OF SECTION Denton Fire Station No. 8 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 017900-1 August 2019 SECTION 017900 – DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for instructing Owner's personnel, including the following: 1. Demonstration of operation of systems, subsystems, and equipment. 2. Training in operation and maintenance of systems, subsystems, and equipment. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Instruction Program: Submit outline of instructional program for demonstration and training, including a list of training modules and a schedule of proposed dates, times, length of instruction time, and instructors' names for each training module. Include learning objective and outline for each training module. 1. Indicate proposed training modules using manufacturer-produced demonstration and training video recordings for systems, equipment, and products in lieu of video recording of live instructional module. B. Attendance Record: For each training module, submit list of participants and length of instruction time. C. Evaluations: For each participant and for each training module, submit results and documentation of performance-based test. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Pre-instruction Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Section 013100 Project Management and Coordination. Review methods and procedures related to demonstration and training including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Inspect and discuss locations and other facilities required for instruction. 2. Review and finalize instruction schedule and verify availability of educational materials, instructors' personnel, audiovisual equipment, and facilities needed to avoid delays. 3. Review required content of instruction. 4. For instruction that must occur outside, review weather and forecasted weather conditions and procedures to follow if conditions are unfavorable. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate instruction schedule with Owner's operations. Adjust schedule as required to minimize disrupting Owner's operations and to ensure availability of Owner's personnel. B. Coordinate instructors, including providing notification of dates, times, length of instruction time, and course content. C. Coordinate content of training modules with content of approved emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. Do not submit instruction program until operation and maintenance data has been reviewed and approved by Architect. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 INSTRUCTION PROGRAM A. Program Structure: Develop an instruction program that includes individual training modules for each system and for equipment not part of a system, as required by individual Specification Sections. B. Training Modules: Develop a learning objective and teaching outline for each module. Include a description of specific skills and knowledge that participant is expected to master. For each module, include instruction for the following as applicable to the system, equipment, or component: 1. Basis of System Design, Operational Requirements, and Criteria: Include the following: a. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. b. Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design responsibility. c. Operating standards. d. Regulatory requirements. e. Equipment function. f. Operating characteristics. g. Limiting conditions. h. Performance curves. 2. Documentation: Review the following items in detail: Denton Fire Station No. 8 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 017900-2 August 2019 a. Emergency manuals. b. Operations manuals. c. Maintenance manuals. d. Project record documents. e. Identification systems. f. Warranties and bonds. g. Maintenance service agreements and similar continuing commitments. 3. Emergencies: Include the following, as applicable: a. Instructions on meaning of warnings, trouble indications, and error messages. b. Instructions on stopping. c. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency. d. Operating instructions for conditions outside of normal operating limits. e. Sequences for electric or electronic systems. f. Special operating instructions and procedures. 4. Operations: Include the following, as applicable: a. Startup procedures. b. Equipment or system break-in procedures. c. Routine and normal operating instructions. d. Regulation and control procedures. e. Control sequences. f. Safety procedures. g. Instructions on stopping. h. Normal shutdown instructions. i. Operating procedures for emergencies. j. Operating procedures for system, subsystem, or equipment failure. k. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions. l. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. m. Special operating instructions and procedures. 5. Adjustments: Include the following: a. Alignments. b. Checking adjustments. c. Noise and vibration adjustments. d. Economy and efficiency adjustments. 6. Troubleshooting: Include the following: a. Diagnostic instructions. b. Test and inspection procedures. 7. Maintenance: Include the following: a. Inspection procedures. b. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning. c. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product. d. Procedures for routine cleaning e. Procedures for preventive maintenance. f. Procedures for routine maintenance. g. Instruction on use of special tools. 8. Repairs: Include the following: a. Diagnosis instructions. b. Repair instructions. c. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly instructions. d. Instructions for identifying parts and components. e. Review of spare parts needed for operation and maintenance. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Assemble educational materials necessary for instruction, including documentation and training module. Assemble training modules into a training manual organized in coordination with requirements in Section 017823 Operation and Maintenance Data. B. Set up instructional equipment at instruction location. C. Training for mechanical systems and emergency generator shall be provided by the manufacturer. 3.2 INSTRUCTION A. Scheduling: Provide instruction at mutually agreed on times. For equipment that requires seasonal operation, provide similar instruction at start of each season. Denton Fire Station No. 8 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 017900-3 August 2019 1. Schedule training with Owner with at least seven days' advance notice. B. Training Location and Reference Material: Conduct training on-site in the completed and fully operational facility using the actual equipment in-place. Conduct training using final operation and maintenance data submittals. C. Cleanup: Collect used and leftover educational materials and give to Owner. Remove instructional equipment. Restore systems and equipment to condition existing before initial training use. END OF SECTION Denton Fire Station No. 8 DEMOLITION MJ Thomas Engineering, LLC. 024100-1 August 2019 SECTION 024100 DEMOLITION PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary for every type of required demolition. B. Furnish equipment of every type required to demolish and transport construction debris away from the site. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE [Not Used] 1.03 SUBMITTALS Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 013323 – Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples. 1.04 STANDARDS Work shall be performed in accordance with the codes and ordinances of the agency having jurisdiction over the Place of Record. 1.05 DELIVERY AND STORAGE Stockpile construction debris at the site only as long as necessary to arrange hauling to a disposal site. Stack materials neatly and handle in an orderly manner until removed from site. Construction debris shall be placed in trash containers. Do not allow trash to blow around the construction site. 1.06 JOB CONDITIONS A. Contractor shall visit the site and determine the extent of demolition required and the site conditions that might affect his proposal. Include costs of covering all aspects of the demolition as part of the proposal. B. The drawings shall be carefully reviewed to determine the extent of necessary demolition. Property lines and limits of demolition shall be accurately located prior to beginning site demolition. Demolition outside the limits indicated on the plans, or outside the property lines shall not be performed. C. Material removed from the construction site during demolition, and any equipment not otherwise designated to remain the property of the Owner shall become the property of the Contractor and shall be promptly removed from the construction site. D. Remove and dispose of off-site all drilled pier spoils. PART 2 - PRODUCTS [Not Used] PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Mark areas to be cleared and grubbed prior to commencing clearing additional requirements. Program Manager shall approve clearing and grubbing limits prior to commencement of clearing operations. Denton Fire Station No. 8 DEMOLITION MJ Thomas Engineering, LLC. 024100-2 August 2019 B. The clearing limits shall not extend beyond the project limits, plus adequate distance as approved by the Program Manager to allow for construction procedures. 3.02 BACKFILLING A. Backfill cavities resulting from demolition. Fill cavities occurring within the limits of building, structures, or pavements in accordance with the requirements of other sections of the specifications. Backfill and compact cavities outside the construction limits to the same density as the surrounding earth. B. Except where further excavation extends beyond the cavities resulting from work performed under this section, fill holes with appropriate backfill material and compact to the density of the surrounding undisturbed soil. Finish the site by blading or other methods to smooth the area, remove ditches, mounds, or other natural or manmade irregular features. Blend grades together in a smooth uniform manner. 3.03 EXISTING LANDSCAPING A. Remove trees and brush of all sizes and description within the limits of construction. Cut trees approximately 12" above ground line and grub out and remove the remaining stumps and roots. Remove root systems larger than one (1) inch to 12" below the lowest foundation line. B. Protect trees and landscaping not designated to be removed from damage. Contractor and Program Manager shall visit the site and mark trees that are to remain. In the event that these trees are in close proximity to the construction, wrap trunks with 2” x 4” timber and take precautions to prevent damage to limbs and root systems. C. Scrape the entire site within the limits of construction, including structures, building, streets, parking lots or other pavements clear of brush, under-growth, or other vegetation. D. Felled trees, brush, lumber, concrete, and other debris shall become the property of the Contractor, and shall be promptly removed from the site. E. Areas that have gravel parking or areas that are HMAC surfaces shown to be removed will be excavated down to natural soil. All gravel will be stockpiled on site as per Engineer. Gravel may be used in other areas requiring gravel if approved by Engineer. All HMAC surfaces shall be disposed of legally off site. 3.04 EXISTING STRUCTURES Remove any concrete or masonry structures within the limits of the construction, or as otherwise indicated, including concrete slabs, foundations, brick or other masonry work, concrete steps, septic tanks, sidewalks, pavements, curbs and gutters or other components. 3.05 BURIED STRUCTURES Remove underground structures such as abandoned manholes, vaults, septic tanks and distribution field piping, inlets, buried trash, or debris. 3.06 UNDERGROUND UTILITIES Take precautions during excavation procedures to guard against damage to active underground piping. In the event that inactive or abandoned pipelines are uncovered, determine that the lines are inactive, then remove buried piping within the limits of construction, or 4'-0" beyond the limits of buildings or other structures, or as needed to clear excavations. Plug both ends of such abandoned piping with concrete plugs. Denton Fire Station No. 8 DEMOLITION MJ Thomas Engineering, LLC. 024100-3 August 2019 3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL No burning will be permitted on the site. 3.08 CLEAN AND ADJUST At conclusion of demolition, remove all remaining trash and debris from the construction site. Clean site to remove wind-blown paper, trash or other debris. END OF SECTION Denton Fire Station No. 8 SELECTIVE SITE DEMOLITION Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 024113-1 August 2019 SECTION 024113 – SELECTIVE SITE DEMOLITION PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes the following: 1. Demolition and removal of selected site elements and building remnants. 2. Demolition and removal of existing paving, curbs, sidewalks, and adjacent landscape work to limits indicated on Drawings. B. Items of interest or value to Owner that may be encountered during selective demolition shall remain Owner's property. Carefully remove and salvage each item or object in a manner to prevent damage and deliver promptly to Owner. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American National Standard Institute (ANSI): 1. ANSI A 10.6 “Demolition, Safety Requirements” B. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 1. NFPA 241 “Standard for Safeguarding Construction, Alteration, and Demolition Operations” 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site, unless indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled. B. Remove and Salvage: Detach items from existing construction and deliver them to Owner ready for reuse. C. Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, prepare them for reuse, and reinstall them where indicated. D. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be removed and that are not otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following under provisions of Section 013300 Submittal Procedures. B. Schedule of Selective Demolition Activities: Indicate the following: 1. Interruption of utility services. Indicate how long utility services will be interrupted. 2. Coordination for shut-off, capping, and continuation of utility services as required. 3. Owner’s On-Site Operations: Provide a detailed sequence of demolition and removal work to ensure uninterrupted progress of Owner's off-site operations. 4. Means of protection for items to remain and items in path of waste removal from site. C. Qualification Data: Qualification data for firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include list of completed projects with project name, addresses, names of Architects and Owners, and other information specified. D. Pre-demolition Photographs or Videotapes: Show existing conditions of adjoining construction and site improvements, including finish surfaces that might be misconstrued as damage caused by selective demolition operations. Comply with Section 013233 Photographic Documentation. Submit before Work begins. E. Landfill Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of hazardous wastes by a landfill facility licensed to accept hazardous wastes. F. Closeout Submittals: Record documents, indicating locations of encountered items, whether currently in use or abandoned in place. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. Contractor: Contractor is responsible for quality control of the Work. 2. Demolition Firm: A firm experienced in successfully demolition and removal of work similar to that indicated for this Project, with a record of successful performance, and with sufficient capacity to provide demolition, removal, and legal disposal of debris without causing delay in the W ork. B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with all applicable requirements of the laws, codes, ordinances and regulations of Federal, State and Municipal authorities having jurisdiction. Obtain necessary approvals from all such authorities. 1. Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Comply with ANSI A 10.6 and NFPA 241. C. Pre-demolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section Project Management and Coordination. Review methods and procedures related to demolition. Denton Fire Station No. 8 SELECTIVE SITE DEMOLITION Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 024113-2 August 2019 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS OR SITE CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: Proceed with the Work in accordance with governmental requirements. B. Condition of Site Elements: Owner assumes no responsibility for actual condition of site elements to be demolished. 1. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner insofar as practicable. However, variations may occur by Owner's removal and salvage operations prior to start of demolition work. C. Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding with selective demolition. D. Recycled Materials: Items of recycled value to Contractor may be removed from structure as work progresses. Recycled items shall be transported from site as they are removed. Comply with governing regulations pertaining to environmental protection. E. Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the Work. 1. Hazardous Materials: If materials suspected of containing hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify Architect and Owner. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner under a separate contract. F. Explosives: Use of explosives will not be permitted. G. Traffic: Conduct demolition operations and removal of debris to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities. H. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks or other occupied or used facilities without permission from authorities having jurisdiction. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by governing regulations. I. Protections: Ensure safe passage of persons around areas of demolition. Conduct operations to prevent injury to adjacent buildings, structures, other facilities, and persons. 1. Erect temporary covered passageways as required by authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Provide shoring, bracing, or support to prevent movement, settlement or collapse of structures to be demolished and adjacent facilities to remain. J. Damages: Promptly repair damages caused to adjacent facilities by demolition operations at no cost to Owner. K. Utility Services: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain, keep in service, and protect against damage during demolition operations. 1. Do not interrupt existing utilities serving adjacent facilities, except when authorized in writing by authorities having jurisdiction. Provide temporary services during interruptions to existing utilities, as acceptable to governing authorities. L. Utility Services: Refer to applicable Sections for disconnecting, removal, and capping of utility services. Do not start demolition work until utility disconnections have been completed and verified in writing. PART 2 – PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped. B. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of selective demolition required. C. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and reinstalled and items to be removed and salvaged. D. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict. Promptly submit a written report to Architect. E. Survey of Existing Conditions: Record existing conditions by use of preconstruction photographs and preconstruction videotapes. 1. Comply with requirements specified in Section 013233 Photographic Documentation. 3.2 UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS A. Existing Services/Systems: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations. 1. Comply with requirements for existing services/systems interruptions specified in Division 01 Section "Summary of Work." B. Service/System Requirements: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utility services and mechanical/electrical systems serving areas to be selectively demolished. 1. Owner will arrange to shut off indicated services/systems when requested by Contractor. 2. If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, before proceeding with Denton Fire Station No. 8 SELECTIVE SITE DEMOLITION Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 024113-3 August 2019 selective demolition provide temporary services/systems that bypass area of selective demolition and that maintain continuity of services/systems to other parts of building. 3. Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit after bypassing. 3.3 PREPARATION A. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities. 1. Comply with requirements for access and protection specified in Section 015000 Temporary Facilities and Controls. B. Temporary Facilities: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain. 1. Provide protection to ensure safe passage of people around selective demolition area and to and from occupied portions of existing adjacent buildings. C. Temporary Shoring: Provide and maintain interior and exterior shoring, bracing, or structural support to preserve stability and prevent unexpected movement or collapse of construction being demolished. 1. Strengthen or add new supports when required during progress of demolition. D. Pollution Controls: Use water sprinkling, temporary enclosures, and other suitable methods to limit dust and dirt rising and scattering in air to lowest practical level. Comply with governing regulations pertaining to environmental protection. 1. Do not use water when it may create hazardous or objectionable conditions such as ice, flooding, and pollution. 3.4 DEMOLITION A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows: 1. Proceed with demolition in systematic manner, from top of structure to ground. Complete demolition work above each floor or tier before disturbing supporting members on lower levels. 2. Demolish concrete and masonry in small sections. 3. Break up and remove concrete slabs-on-grade, unless otherwise shown to remain. B. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during selective demolition. C. Below-Grade Construction: 1. Demolish and remove below-grade construction and concrete slabs on grade. 2. Filling Basements and Voids: Completely fill below-grade areas and voids resulting from demolition of structures. 3. Use satisfactory soil materials consisting of stone, gravel, and sand, free from debris, trash, frozen materials, roots and other organic matter. 4. Prior to placement of fill materials, ensure that areas to be filled are free of standing water, frost, frozen material, trash and debris. 5. Place fill materials in horizontal layers not exceeding 6" in loose depth. Compact each layer at optimum moisture content of fill material to a density equal to original adjacent ground, unless subsequent excavation for new work is required. 6. After fill placement and compaction, grade surface to meet adjacent contours and to provide flow to surface drainage structures. 3.5 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS A. General: Except for items or materials indicated to be reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or otherwise indicated to remain Owner's property, remove demolished materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in an EPA-approved landfill. 1. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site. 2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas. B. At the end of each workday, remove unused materials, debris and containers from the site. C. Burning of removed materials from demolished structures will not be permitted on site. D. Disposal: Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them. E. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition operations began. END OF SECTION Denton Fire Station No. 8 STRUCTURE DEMOLITION Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 024116-1 August 2019 SECTION 024116 - STRUCTURE DEMOLITION PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Demolition and removal of buildings and site improvements. 2. Removing below-grade construction. 3. Disconnecting, capping or sealing, and abandoning in-place removing site utilities. 4. Salvaging items for reuse by Owner. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site unless indicated to be removed and salvaged. B. Remove and Salvage: Carefully detach from existing construction, in a manner to prevent damage, and deliver to Owner ready for reuse. Include fasteners or brackets needed for reattachment elsewhere. 1.4 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP A. Unless otherwise indicated, demolition waste becomes property of Contractor. B. Historic items, relics, antiques, and similar objects including, but not limited to, cornerstones and their contents, commemorative plaques and tablets, and other items of interest or value to Owner that may be uncovered during demolition remain the property of Owner. 1. Carefully salvage in a manner to prevent damage and promptly return to Owner. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Pre-demolition Photographs: Show existing conditions of adjoining construction and site improvements, including finish surfaces that might be misconstrued as damage caused by demolition operations. Comply with Section 013233 Photographic Documentation. Submit before the Work begins. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Standards: Comply with ANSI/ASSE A10.6 and NFPA 241. C. Pre-demolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1. Inspect and discuss condition of construction to be demolished. 2. Review structural load limitations of existing structures. 3. Review and finalize building demolition schedule and verify availability of demolition personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. 4. Review and finalize protection requirements. 5. Review procedures for noise control and dust control. 6. Review procedures for protection of adjacent buildings. 7. Review items to be salvaged and returned to Owner. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Buildings to be demolished will be vacated and their use discontinued before start of the Work. B. Buildings immediately adjacent to demolition area will be occupied. Conduct building demolition so operations of occupied buildings will not be disrupted. 1. Provide not less than 72 hours' notice of activities that will affect operations of adjacent occupied buildings. 2. Maintain access to existing walkways, exits, and other facilities used by occupants of adjacent buildings. a. Do not close or obstruct walkways, exits, or other facilities used by occupants of adjacent buildings without written permission from authorities having jurisdiction. C. Owner assumes no responsibility for buildings and structures to be demolished. 1. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as far as practical. D. Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the Work. 1. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner before start of the Work. 2. If materials suspected of containing hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; Denton Fire Station No. 8 STRUCTURE DEMOLITION Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 024116-2 August 2019 immediately notify Architect and Owner. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner under a separate contract. E. On-site storage or sale of removed items or materials is not permitted. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Arrange demolition schedule so as not to interfere with operations of adjacent properties and occupied buildings. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 SOIL MATERIALS A. Satisfactory Soils: Comply with requirements in Division 31 Earthwork. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before starting demolition operations. B. Review Project Record Documents of existing construction provided by Owner. Owner does not guarantee that existing conditions are same as those indicated in Project Record Documents. C. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and salvaged. Provide photographs of conditions that might be misconstrued as damage caused by salvage operations. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Existing Utilities: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utilities serving buildings and structures to be demolished. 1. Arrange to shut off indicated utilities with utility companies. 2. If removal, relocation, or abandonment of utility services will affect adjacent occupied buildings, then provide temporary utilities that bypass buildings and structures to be demolished and that maintain continuity of service to other buildings and structures. 3. Cut off pipe or conduit a minimum of 24 inches below grade. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit after bypassing according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Temporary Shoring: Provide and maintain interior and exterior shoring, bracing, or structural support to preserve stability and prevent unexpected movement or collapse of construction being demolished. 1. Strengthen or add new supports when required during progress of demolition. C. Salvaged Items: Comply with the following: 1. Clean salvaged items of dirt and demolition debris. 2. Transport items to storage area designated by Owner. 3.3 PROTECTION A. Existing Facilities: Protect adjacent walkways, loading docks, building entries, and other building facilities during demolition operations. Maintain exits from existing buildings. B. Existing Utilities: Maintain utility services to remain and protect from damage during demolition operations. 1. Do not interrupt existing utilities serving adjacent occupied or operating facilities unless authorized in writing by Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Provide temporary services during interruptions to existing utilities, as acceptable to Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. a. Provide at least 72hours' notice to occupants of affected buildings if shutdown of service is required during changeover. C. Temporary Protection: Erect temporary protection, such as walks, fences, railings, canopies, and covered passageways, where required by authorities having jurisdiction and as indicated. Comply with requirements in Section 015000 Temporary Facilities and Controls. D. Remove temporary barriers and protections where hazards no longer exist. Where open excavations or other hazardous conditions remain, leave temporary barriers and protections in place. 3.4 DEMOLITION, GENERAL A. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct building demolition and debris-removal operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities. 1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, walkways, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Use water mist and other suitable methods to limit spread of dust and dirt. Comply with governing Denton Fire Station No. 8 STRUCTURE DEMOLITION Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 024116-3 August 2019 environmental-protection regulations. Do not use water when it may damage adjacent construction or create hazardous or objectionable conditions, such as ice, flooding, and pollution. 3.5 DEMOLITION BY MECHANICAL MEANS A. Proceed with demolition of structural framing members systematically, from higher to lower level. Complete building demolition operations above each floor or tier before disturbing supporting members on the next lower level. B. Remove debris from elevated portions of the building by chute, hoist, or other device that will convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent. 1. Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by method suitable to minimize ground impact and dust generation. C. Salvage: Items to be removed and salvaged are indicated D. Below-Grade Construction: Demolish foundation walls and other below-grade construction that are within footprint of new construction and extending 5 feet outside footprint indicated for new construction. Abandon below-grade construction outside this area. 1. Remove below-grade construction, including basements, foundation walls, and footings, completely. E. Existing Utilities: Demolish existing utilities and below-grade utility structures that are within 5 feet outside footprint indicated for new construction. Abandon utilities outside this area. 1. Fill abandoned utility structures with according to backfill requirements in Division 31 Earthwork. 3.6 SITE RESTORATION A. Below-Grade Areas: Rough grade below-grade areas ready for further excavation or new construction. B. Site Grading: Uniformly rough grade area of demolished construction to a smooth surface, free from irregular surface changes. Provide a smooth transition between adjacent existing grades and new grades. 3.7 REPAIRS A. Promptly repair damage to adjacent buildings caused by demolition operations. 3.8 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS A. Remove demolition waste materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in an EPA-approved landfill acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site. 2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas. B. Do not burn demolished materials. 3.9 CLEANING A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by building demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before building demolition operations began. 1. Clean roadways of debris caused by debris transport. END OF SECTION Denton Fire Station No. 8 CONCRETE FORMING MJ Thomas Engineering, LLC. 031100-1 August 2019 SECTION 031100 CONCRETE FORMING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED Furnish material and labor to form, tie, brace and support wet concrete, reinforcing steel and embedded items until the concrete has developed sufficient strength to remove forms. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. DESIGN CRITERIA Forms shall be designed for the pressure exerted by a liquid weighing 150 pounds per cubic foot. The rate of placing the concrete, the temperature of the concrete, and all other pertinent factors shall be taken into consideration when determining the depth of the equivalent liquid. An additional design live load of 50 pounds per square foot shall be used on horizontal surfaces. B. ALIGNMENT CONTROL True alignment of walls and other vertical surfaces having straight lines or rectangular shapes shall be controlled and checked by the following procedures: 1. Forming shall be arranged with provisions for adjusting the horizontal alignment of a form, after the form has been filled with concrete to grade, using wedges, turn-buckles, or other adjustment methods. Establish a transit line or other reference so that adjustments can be made to an established line while the concrete in the top of the form is still plastic. 2. Adjusting facilities shall be at intervals which permit adjustments to a straight line. Concrete shall not be placed until adequate adjusting facilities are in place. 1.03 SUBMITTALS Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 013300, SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES and shall include drawings or descriptions of construction joint locations. 1.04 STANDARDS The applicable provisions of the following standards shall apply as if written here in their entirety: A. American Concrete Institute (ACI) specifications: ACI 361 Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings ACI 318 Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete B. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC) publication: AISC Manual of Steel Construction C. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI) publication: D. American Plywood Association (APA) standards 1.05 DELIVERY AND STORAGE Lumber for forms shall be stacked neatly on platforms raised above ground. 1.06 JOB CONDITIONS A. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer upon completion of various portions of the work required for placing concrete so that compliance with the plans and specifications may be monitored. The Engineer will authorize the Contractor to proceed with the placement after this has been completed and corrections, if required, have been made. Denton Fire Station No. 8 CONCRETE FORMING MJ Thomas Engineering, LLC. 031100-2 August 2019 B. In hot weather, both sides of the face forms may be required to be treated with oil to prevent warping and to secure tight joints. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. LUMBER: Properly seasoned and of good quality; free from loose or unsound knots, knot holes, twists, shakes, decay, splits, and other imperfections which would affect its strength or impair the finished surface of the concrete. B. FIBER BOARD FORM LINING: Hardboard finished smooth on one (1) side; minimum thickness of 3/16"; thoroughly wet with water at least 12 hours before using. C. PLYWOOD FORM LINING: Conforming to APA HDO; exterior exposure waterproof adhesive, 3/8" thick. D. FORM OIL: Light, clear oil; shall not discolor or injuriously affect the concrete surface, subsequent coatings, or delay or impair curing operations 2.02 FABRICATIONS A. LUMBER: Lumber for facing or sheathing shall be surfaced on at least one (1) side and two (2) edges, and sized to uniform thickness. Lumber of nominal 1" thickness or plywood of 3/4" thickness shall be permitted for general use on structures, if backed by a sufficient number of studs and wales. B. SPECIAL FORM LUMBER 1. Molding for chamfer strips or other uses shall be made of redwood, cypress, or pine materials of a grade that will not split when nailed, and which can be maintained to a true line without warping. The form shall be mill cut and dressed on all faces. Fillet forms at sharp corners, both inside and outside and at edges, with triangular chamfer strips at all non- contiguous edges exposed to view. Thoroughly oil chamfer strips before installation on forms. 2. Construct forms for railings and ornamental work to standards equivalent to first class mill work. 3. All moldings, panel work, and bevel strips shall be straight and true with neatly mitered joints, and designed so that the finished work shall be true, sharp and clean-cut. C. FORMS 1. Forms shall be built mortar-tight and of material sufficient in strength to prevent bulging between supports. 2. Reused forms or form lumber shall be maintained clean and in good condition as to accuracy, shape, strength, rigidity, tightness, and smoothness of surface. 3. All forms shall be so constructed as to permit removal without damage to the concrete. Exercise special care in framing forms for copings, offsets, railing and ornamental work, so that there will be no damage to the concrete when the forms are removed. D. METAL FORMS 1. The specifications for "Forms” regarding design, mortar tightness, filleted corners, beveled projections, bracing, alignment, removal, re-use, oiling, and wetting shall apply equally to metal forms. 2. The metal used for forms shall be of such thickness that the forms will remain true to shape. Bolt and rivet heads on the facing sides shall be countersunk. Clamps, pins, or other Denton Fire Station No. 8 CONCRETE FORMING MJ Thomas Engineering, LLC. 031100-3 August 2019 connecting devices shall be designed to hold the forms rigidly together and to allow removal without injury to the concrete. 3. Metal forms which do not present a smooth surface or line up properly shall not be used. Exercise special care to keep metal free from rust, grease, or other foreign material that discolors the concrete. E. FORM LININGS 1. Timber forms for exposed concrete surfaces which are to be given a rubbed finish shall be facelined with an approved type of form lining material. 2. If plywood is used for form lining, it shall be made with waterproof adhesive and have a minimum thickness of 3/4". It shall preferably be oiled at the mill and then be oiled or lacquered on the job before using. 3. If fiber beard is used, apply water to the screen side on the board. Stack the boards screen side to screen side. Use the smooth hard face as the contact surface of the form. Such surfaces may be formed with 3/4" thick plywood made with waterproof adhesive if backed with adequate studs and wales. The greatest strength of the outer plies should be at right angles to the studding. In this case, form lining will not be required. 4. Carefully align edges and faces of adjacent panels and fill the joints between panels with patching plaster or cold water putty to prevent leakage. Lightly sand with No.0 sandpaper to make the joints smooth. 5. Forms which are reused shall have all unused form tie holes filled and smoothed as specified above. F. FORM TIES 1. Metal form ties shall be used to hold forms in place and to provide easy metal removal. The use of wire for ties shall not be permitted. 2. Remove metal appliances which are used inside the forms to hold the forms in correct alignment to a depth of at least 1-1/2" from the surface of the concrete, without undue injury to the surface from chipping or spalling. Such devices, when removed, shall leave a smooth opening in the concrete surface no larger than 1" in diameter. 3. Burning off rods, bolts, or ties shall not be permitted. 4. Metal ties shall be held in place by devices attached to wales. Each device shall be capable of developing the strength of the tie. 5. Metal and wooden spreaders which are separate from the forms shall be wired from the top of form and shall be entirely removed as the concrete is placed. 6. The use of metal form ties which are encased in paper or other material to allow the removal of complete tie, and which leave a hole through the concrete structure, shall not be permitted in the construction of basement or water bearing walls. G. FALSEWORK 1. Falsework shall be designed and constructed so that no excessive settlement or deformation occurs. Falsework shall provide necessary rigidity. 2. Timber used in falsework centering shall be sound, in good condition and free from defects which impair its strength. 3. Steel members shall be of adequate strength and shape for the intended purpose. 4 Timber piling used in falsework may be of any wood species which satisfactorily withstands driving and which adequately supports the superimposed load. Denton Fire Station No. 8 CONCRETE FORMING MJ Thomas Engineering, LLC. 031100-4 August 2019 5. When sills or timber grillages are used to support falsework Columns, unless founded on solid rock, shale or other hard materials, place them in excavated pits. Backfill to prevent the softening of the supporting material from form drip or from rains that may occur during the construction process. Sills or grillages shall be of ample size to support the superimposed load without settlement. 6. Falsework not founded on a satisfactory spread footing shall be supported on piling, which shall be driven to a bearing capacity to support the superimposed load without settlement. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION Before placing concrete, insure that embedded items are correctly, firmly and securely fastened into place. Embedded items shall be thoroughly clean and free of oil and other foreign material. Anchor bolts shall be set to exact locations by the use of suitable anchor bolt templates. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Pre-placement 1. During the elapsed time between building the forms and placing the concrete, maintain the forms to eliminate warping and shrinking. 2. Treat the facing of forms with suitable form oil before concrete is placed. Apply oil before the reinforcement is placed. Wet form surfaces which will come in contact with the concrete immediately before the concrete is placed. 3. At the time of placing concrete, the forms shall be clean and entirely free from all chips, dirt, sawdust, and other extraneous matter at the time. Forms for slab, beam and birder construction shall not have tie wire cuttings, nails, matches or any other matter which would mar the appearance of the finished construction. Clean forms and keep them free of foreign matter during concrete placement. B. PLACEMENT 1. Set and maintain forms to the lines designated, until the concrete is sufficiently hardened to permit form removal. If, at any stage of the work, the forms show signs of bulging or sagging, immediately remove that portion of the concrete causing this condition. If necessary, reset the forms and securely brace against further movement. 2. Provide adequate cleanout openings where access to the bottom of the forms is not otherwise readily attainable. 3. Carefully and accurately place and support reinforcement in concrete structures. C. REMOVAL Remove forms so that the underlying concrete surface is not marred or damaged in any way. Forms shall not be removed until the concrete has attained sufficient strength (minimum of 28-day compressive strength) to safely carry the dead load, but in no case less than the number of curing days set forth in the following table. Forms for concrete paving. 7 day min. OR 75% design strength END OF SECTION Denton Fire Station No. 8 CONCRETE REINFORCING MJ Thomas Engineering, LLC. 032000-1 August 2019 SECTION 032000 CONCRETE REINFORCING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED Furnish labor and reinforcing materials required to cut, bend, tie, splice, place and support the reinforcement in the material grades, sizes, quantities and locations specified. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE TOLERANCES Reinforcement shall be placed where specified, with the following maximum tolerances, plus or minus: A. Cover 1/4" B. Spacings 1/4" in 12" 1.03 SUBMITTALS Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 013300, SUBMITTALS and shall include: A. Record data for layouts (shop drawings with bar lists clearly marked with reference to plans. B. Certifications of steel quality, size, grade and manufacturers origin. 1.04 STANDARDS The applicable provisions of the following standards shall apply as if written here in their entirety: A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) standards: ASTM A615 “Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement” B. American Concrete Institute (ACI) publications: ACI 301 “Specification for Structural Concrete for Buildings” ACI 315 “Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement” ACI 318 “Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete” C. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI) publication: CRSI Manual of Standard Practice 1.05 DELIVERY AND STORAGE Store steel reinforcement above the surface of the ground upon platform skids or other supports. Protect from mechanical injury and surface deterioration caused by exposure to conditions producing rust. When placed in the work, steel reinforcement shall be free from dirt, scale, dust, paint, oil and other foreign material. Tag and store steel reinforcement for ease of correlation with shop drawings. 1.06 JOB CONDITIONS A. Proposed deviations from reinforcing indicated on the plans or specifications shall be approved in writing by the Engineer prior to fabrication. B. Bar lengths shall be of the length shown on the plans or tables, not the minimum code length. C. Specified cover for reinforcing shall be maintained throughout construction. Bars shall be cut to lengths Denton Fire Station No. 8 CONCRETE REINFORCING MJ Thomas Engineering, LLC. 032000-2 June 2019 necessary to allow for proper clearances. D. Stirrups shall be hooked. E. Steel reinforcing bars shall be produced in the United States of America. F. Cover of concrete shall be measured from face of forms to outside face of reinforcement bar, stirrup or tie. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. STEEL REINFORCING BARS: Billet-Steel bars for concrete reinforcement conforming to ASTM A615; Grade 60 with minimum yield strength of 60,000 psi. B. SUPPORTS: Bar supports shall be of the proper type for the intended use. Bar supports shall be uniform high density polyethylene (plastic) or fiberglass reinforced plastic (FRP) conforming to CRSI Class 1, Maximum Protection. C. SPACERS: Pre-cast mortar or concrete blocks. D. MECHANICAL BAR SPLICES: Cadweld splices as manufactured by Erico Products, Inc., or equal, installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations.The mechanical devices shall develop at least 125% of the specified yield of the spliced bars. E. MECHANICAL THREADED SPLICES: Mechanical threaded connections shall utilize a metal coupling sleeve with internal threads which engage threaded ends of the bars to be spliced and shall develop in tension or compression 125% of the specified yield strength of the bar. 2.02 FABRICATIONS BENDING: Reinforcement shall be bent cold by machine to shapes indicated on the plans; true to shapes indicated; irregularities in bending shall be cause for rejection. Unless otherwise noted, all hook and bend details and tolerances shall conform to the requirements of ACI 315 and ACI 318. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION The reinforcing steel in all concrete walls shall be spaced its proper distance from the face of the forms using chairs. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. GENERAL: Place the reinforcement carefully and accurately in the concrete structures. Rigidly tie and support the reinforcement. Welding of any type of reinforcement shall not be permitted. B. SPLICES 1. Splicing of bars, except where indicated on the plans, shall not be permitted. Lap splices which are permitted shall have a lap in accordance with ACI 318. Rigidly clamp or wire the bars at all splices, in accordance with ACI. Welding of reinforcing steel splices shall not be permitted. 2. Make mechanical splices using “Cadweld” reinforcing bar connectors, installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations. The mechanical device shall develop at least 125% of the specified yield strength of the bar. 3. Lap splice locations not shown on the plans shall be approved by the Engineer prior to fabrication. Splices shall be kept to a minimum. Splices shall occur only at points of minimum stress. Stagger splices in adjacent bars. Denton Fire Station No. 8 CONCRETE REINFORCING MJ Thomas Engineering, LLC. 032000-3 August 2019 C. PLACEMENT 1. Place steel reinforcement, as indicated on the plans, with the specified tolerances. Hold securely in place during the placing of the concrete. The minimum clear distance between bars shall be per ACI 318. Always pass vertical stirrups around the main tension members and securely attach thereto. Wire reinforcing together at a sufficient number of intersections to produce a sound, sturdy mat or cage of reinforcement that will maintain the reinforcement in correct positions when the concrete is placed. 2. Hold the reinforcing steel in concrete slabs firmly in place with wire supports or “chairs”. Sizing and spacing of the chairs shall be sufficient to properly support the steel, and shall be in accordance with CRSI Publications “Manual of Standard Practice”. 3. Space the reinforcing steel in concrete walls the proper distance from the face of the forms, as indicted on the drawings, using galvanized metal spacers. 4. Where reinforcing conflicts with location of anchor bolts, inserts, etc., required to be cast in concrete, submit prompt notifications so that revisions can be made before concrete is placed. No cutting of reinforcing shall be permitted without the prior approval of the Engineer. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Concrete shall not be deposited until the Engineer has observed the final placing of the reinforcing steel, and has given permission to place concrete. END OF SECTION Denton Fire Station No. 8 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE MJ Thomas Engineering, LLC. 033000-1 August 2019 SECTION 033000 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Codes and Standards: Comply with the applicable provisions of the following codes, specifications, and standards: ACI 301 “Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings.” ACI 304 “Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting and Placing Concrete.” ACI 311 “Recommended Practice for Concrete Inspection.” ACI 318 “Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete.” ACI 347 “Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork.” Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute, “Manual for Standard Practice.” B. Workmanship: Contractor is responsible for correction of concrete work which does not conform to the specified requirements, including strength, tolerance, and finishes. Correct deficient unsatisfactory concrete as directed by Engineer. C. Provide testing and inspection service for quality control testing during concrete operations in accordance with General Conditions. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Concrete Reinforcement: Submit in accordance with General Conditions. Include drawings for fabrication, bending, and placement of concrete reinforcement. Comply with the ACI 315 ”Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete structures”; shows bar schedules, stirrup spacing, diagrams of bent bars, arrangement of concrete reinforcement. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 FORM MATERIALS A. Forms for Exposed Finish Concrete: Construct formwork for exposed concrete surfaces with plywood, metal, metal-framed plywood-faced or other acceptable panel-type materials to provide continuous, straight, smooth, exposed surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable size to minimize number of joints. Provide form material with sufficient thickness to withstand pressure of newly-placed concrete without bow or deflection. Use plywood complying with U.S. Product Standards PS-1 “B-B High Density Overlaid Concrete Form,” Class 1. B. Forms for Unexposed Finish Concrete: Form concrete surfaces which will be unexposed in finished structure with plywood, lumber, metal or other acceptable material. Provide lumber dressed on at least 2 edges and one side for tight fit. 2.02 REINFORCING MATERIALS A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 60. B. Supports for Reinforcement: Provide supports for reinforcement including bolsters, chairs and spacers, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars in place. Use wire bar type supports complying with CRSI recommendations. Wood, brick, plastic, and other devices will not be acceptable 2.03 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I, domestic manufacture. Use only one brand of cement throughout the project. B. Normal Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33. 1. Fine Aggregate: Clean, sharp, natural sand free from loam, clay, lumps, or other deleterious substances. Denton Fire Station No. 8 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE MJ Thomas Engineering, LLC. 033000-2 August 2019 2. Coarse Aggregate: Clean, uncoated, processed aggregate containing no clay, mud, loam or foreign matter, as follows: a. Crushed stone, processed from natural rock or stone. b. Washed gravel, either natural or crushed. Use of pit or bankrun gravel is not permitted. c. Maximum Aggregate Size: 1½". C. Water: Clean, fresh, free from oil, acid, organic matter or other deleterious substances. D. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260. E. Fly ash and calcium chloride or admixture containing more than 0.1% chloride ions are not permitted. 2.04 RELATED MATERIAL A. Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C309, Type I. B. Bonding Compound: Polyvinyl acetate or acrylic base, rewettable type. Product/manufacturer; one of the following: Weldcrete; Larsen Products EucoWeld; Euclid Chemical Co. Sonocrete; Sonneborn-Contech Acrylic Bondcrete; The Burke Co. 2.05 PROPORTIONING AND DESIGN OF MIXES A. Prepare design mix for concrete, to produce a minimum 28 day compressive strength of 3,500 psi, as indicated on Contract Documents. Use an independent testing facility acceptable to the Architect for preparing and reporting proposed mix designs. B. Proportion mixes by laboratory trial batch, using materials to be employed on the project for each class of concrete required, complying with ACI 211.1. C. Submit written reports to the Architect of each proposed mix for each class concrete at least 15 days prior to start of work. Do not begin concrete production until mixes have been reviewed by the Architect/Engineer. D. Admixtures: 1. Use air-entraining admixture in exterior exposed concrete. Add air-entraining admixture at the manufacturer’s prescribed rate to result in concrete at the point of placement having air content of 5% (±1%) with a maximum water cement ratio of 0.50. E. Slump Limits: Proportion and design mixes to result in concrete slump at the point of placement of not less than 3" and not more than 5". 2.06 CONCRETE MIXING A. Ready-Mix Concrete: Comply with the requirements of ASTM C94, and as herein specified. No additional water to be added to the batch for material with insufficient slump with approval of Architect/Engineer. B. During hot weather, or under conditions contributing to rapid setting of concrete, a shorter mixing time than specified in ASTM C 94 may be required. When the air temperature is between 85° F and 90° F, reduce the mixing and delivery time from 1-2 hours to 75 minutes, and when the air temperature is above 90° F, reduce the mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes. Denton Fire Station No. 8 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE MJ Thomas Engineering, LLC. 033000-3 August 2019 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 FORMS A. Design, erect, support, brace, and maintain formwork to support vertical and lateral loads that might be applied until such loads can be supported by the concrete structure. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of correct size, shape, alignment, elevation and position. B. Design formwork to be readily removable without impact, shock or damage to cast-in-place concrete surfaces and adjacent materials. C. Construct forms complying with ACI 347, to sizes, shapes, lines, and dimensions shown, and to obtain accurate alignment, location, grades, level and plumb work in finished structures. Solidly butt joints and provide backup at joints to prevent leakage of cement paste. D. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against the concrete surfaces. E. Chamfer exposed corners and edges as shown, using wood, metal, PVC or rubber chamfer strips fabricated to produce uniforms smooth lines and tight edge joints. F. Form Ties: Factory-fabricated, adjustable-length, removable or snap-off metal form ties, designed to prevent form deflection, and to prevent spalling concrete surfaces upon removal. Provide ties so portion remaining within concrete after removal is at least 1½" inside concrete and which will not leave holes larger than 1" diameter in concrete surface. G. Provisions for Other Trades: Provide openings in concrete formwork to accommodate work of other trades. Determine size and locations of openings, recesses and chases from trades providing such items. Accurately place and securely support items built into forms. H. Cleaning and Tightening: Thoroughly clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt or other debris just before concrete is placed. Retighten forms after concrete placement if required to eliminate leaks. I. Forms which are destroyed or damaged and are not capable of supporting the design load shall be replaced with new forms prior to placing concrete. 3.02 PLACING REINFORCEMENT A. Comply with the specified codes and standards, and Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute’s recommended practice for “Placing Reinforcing Bars,” for details and methods of reinforcement placement and supports. B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other materials which reduce or destroy bond with concrete. C. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement by formwork, construction, or concrete-placement operations. Locate and support reinforcing by metal chairs, runners, bolsters, spacers and hangers. D. Place reinforcement to obtain the minimum coverage for concrete protection. Arrange, space and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position during concrete placement operations. Set wire ties so ends are directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces. 3.03 JOINTS A. Construction Joints: Locate and install construction joints, which are not shown on the drawings, so as not to impair the strength and appearance of the structure, as acceptable to the Engineer. B. Provide keyways at least 1½" deep in all construction joints in grade beams. C. Place construction joints perpendicular to the main reinforcement. Continue all reinforcement across construction joints. Denton Fire Station No. 8 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE MJ Thomas Engineering, LLC. 033000-4 August 2019 D. Control Joints per details. 3.04 INSTALLATION OF EMBEDDED ITEMS A. General: Set and build into the work anchorage devices and other embedded items required for other work that is attached to, or supported by, cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, diagrams, instructions and directions provided by suppliers of the items to be attached thereto. B. Edge Forms and Screed Strips for Slabs: Set edge forms or bulkheads and intermediate screed strips for slabs to obtain the required elevations and contours in the finished slab surface. Provide and secure units sufficiently strong to support the types of screeds required. Align the concrete surface to the elevation of the screed strips by the use of strike-off templates. 3.05 PREPARATION OF FORM SURFACES A. Coat the contact surfaces of forms with a form-coating compound before reinforcement is placed. B. Do not allow excess form-coating material to accumulate in the forms or to come into contact with concrete surfaces against which fresh concrete will be placed. Apply in compliance with manufacturer’s instructions. 3.06 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. Pre-Placement Inspection: Before placing concrete, inspect and complete the formwork installation, reinforcing steel, and items to be embedded or cast-in. Notify other crafts to permit the installation of their work; cooperate with other trades in setting such work. Thoroughly wet wood forms immediately before placing concrete, where form-coatings are not used. Notify the Architect/Engineer at least one (2) working days prior to concrete placement. B. Coordinate the installation of joint materials and moisture barrier with placement of forms and reinforcing steel. C. General: Comply with ACI 304, and as herein specified. D. Deposit concrete continuously or in layers of such thickness that no concrete will be placed on concrete which has hardened sufficiently to cause the formation of seams or planes of weakness within the section. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as herein specified. Deposit concrete as nearly as practicable to its final location to avoid segregation due to rehandling or flowing. E. Placing Concrete in Forms: Deposit concrete in grade beam forms in horizontal layers not deeper than 48" and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints. Place continuously where possible. Start placing at ends of section and progress toward the center. Do not place concrete in beams supported on piers until the concrete in the piers is no longer plastic. F. Consolidate place concrete by mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented by hand-spading, rodding or tamping. Use vibrators designed to operate with vibratory element submerged in concrete, maintaining a speed of not less than 6000 impulses per minute. G. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside of forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced locations not farther than the visible effectiveness of the machine. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to set. At each insertion, limit the duration of vibration to the time necessary to consolidate the concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing segregation of the mix. H. Placing Concrete: Deposit and consolidate concrete slabs in a continuous operation, within the limits of construction joints, until the placing of a panel or section is completed. I. Consolidate concrete during placing operation so that concrete is thoroughly worked around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners. J. Bring surfaces to the correct level with a straight-edge and strikeoff. Use bull floats and darbies to smooth the surface, leaving it free of humps or hollow. Do not sprinkle water on the plastic surface. Denton Fire Station No. 8 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE MJ Thomas Engineering, LLC. 033000-5 August 2019 Do not disturb the slab surfaces prior to beginning finishing operations or while seep water is present on slab surface. K. Maintain reinforcing in the proper position during concrete placement operations. L. Cold Weather Placing: Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength which could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures, in compliances with ACI 306. M. Hot Weather Placing: When hot weather conditions exist that would seriously impair the quality and strength of concrete, place concrete in compliance with ACI 305. 3.07 FINISH OR FORMED SURFACES A. Related Unformed Surfaces: At horizontal offset and similar unformed surfaces occurring adjacent to formed surfaces, strike-off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces. 3.08 PAVING FINISHES A. Non-Slip Broom Finish: Apply non-slip broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps, and ramps. Immediately after trowel finishing, slightly roughen surface by brooming with fiber bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate required final finish with Architect before application. 3.09 CONCRETE CURING A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperature, and maintain without drying at a relatively proper hardening. Start initial curing as soon as free water has disappeared from concrete surface after placing and finishing. Keep continuously moist for not less than 72 hours. Begin Final curing procedures immediately following initial curing and before concrete has dried. Continue final curing for at least 168 cumulative hours (not necessarily consecutive) during which concrete has been exposed to air temperatures above 50° F. Avoid rapid drying at end of final curing period. B. Concrete surfaces shall be cured by application of curing compound. Provide membrane curing by applying membrane-forming curing compound to damp concrete surfaces as soon as water film has disappeared. Apply uniformly in 2-coat continuous operation by power-spray equipment in accordance with manufacturer’s directions. Apply second coat at right angle to first coat. 3.10 REMOVAL OF FORMS A. Formwork not supporting weight of concrete, such as sides of beams, walls, and similar parts of the work, may be removed 48 hours after placing concrete, provide concrete is sufficiently hard to not be damaged by form removal operations, and provided curing and protection operations are maintained. 3.11 RE-USE OF FORMS A. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be re-used in the work. Split, frayed, delaminated or otherwise damaged form facing material will not be acceptable. Apply new form coating compound materials to concrete contact form surfaces as specified for new formwork. B. When forms are extended for successive concrete placement thoroughly clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten forms to close joints. Align and secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use “patched” forms for exposed concrete surfaces. 3.12 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS A. Filling In: Fill-in holes and openings left in concrete structures for passage of work by other trades, after work of other trades is in place. Mix, place, and cure concrete as herein specified, to blend with in-place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling shown or required to complete the work. Denton Fire Station No. 8 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE MJ Thomas Engineering, LLC. 033000-6 August 2019 3.13 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS A. Patching Defective Areas: Repair and patch defective areas with cement mortar immediately after removal of forms, but only when acceptable to the Architect/Engineer. Remove and replace damaged concrete as directed by Engineer. B. Cut out honeycomb, rock pockets, voids over ½” diameter, and holes left by tie rods and bolts, down to solid concrete, but in no case to a depth of less than 1". Make edge of cuts perpendicular to the concrete surface. Before placing cement mortar, thoroughly clean, dampen with water and brush-coat the area to be patched with neat cement grout. Proprietary patching compounds may be used when acceptable to the Architect/Engineer. 3.14 QUALITY CONTROL TESTING DURING CONSTRUCTION A. Concrete shall be sampled and tested for quality control during the placement of concrete, as follows: 1. Slump: ASTM C 143: One test for each concrete load at point of discharge; and one for each set of compressive strength test specimens. 2. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31; one set of 4 standard cylinders for each compressive strength test. Mold and store cylinders for laboratory cured test specimens. 3. Compressive Strength Tests: ASTM C 39; one set for each 100 cu. Yds. or fraction thereof, of each concrete class placed in any day or for each 5,000 sq. Ft. of surface area placed; 1 specimen tested at 7 days, 2 specimens tested at 28 days and the remaining specimen held for future testing, if required. Report test results in writing to the Architect and the Contractor on the same day that tests are made. Reports of compressive strength tests shall contain the project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of contractor, name of concrete type and class, location of concrete batch in the structure, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mix proportions and materials; compressive breaking strength and type of break for both 7-day test and 28-day tests. B. Additional Tests: The testing service will make additional tests of in-place concrete when test results indicate specified concrete strengths and other characteristics have not been attained. Test to determine adequacy of concrete will be by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42. Contractor shall pay for such test conducted, and any other additional testing as may be required, when unacceptable concrete is verified. C. Concrete shall meet the compressive strength as shown on the plans and specifications regardless of ACI 318. ACI 318 shall have no bearing on pass/fail of all site concrete. END OF SECTION City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE FWN&A Structural Engineering 033000 - 1 August 2019 SECTION 033000 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes cast-in-place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, concrete materials, mixture design, placement procedures, and finishes. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 033300 "Architectural Concrete" for general building applications of specially finished formed concrete. 2. Section 321313 "Concrete Paving" for concrete pavement and walks. 3. Section 321316 "Decorative Concrete Paving" for decorative concrete pavement and walks. 4. Section 033543 “ Polished Concrete Finish” for polished concrete. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of the following: blended hydraulic cement, fly ash, slag cement, other pozzolans, and silica fume; materials subject to compliance with requirements. B. W/C Ratio: The ratio by weight of water to cementitious materials. 1.4 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1. Before submitting design mixtures, review concrete design mixture and examine procedures for ensuring quality of concrete materials. Require representatives of each entity directly concerned with cast-in-place concrete to attend, including the following: a. Contractor's superintendent. b. Independent testing agency responsible for concrete design mixtures. c. Ready-mix concrete manufacturer. d. Concrete Subcontractor. e. Special concrete finish Subcontractor. f. Concrete Polisher. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE FWN&A Structural Engineering 033000 - 2 August 2019 2. Review items shall include but not be limited to: a. special inspection and testing and inspecting agency procedures for field quality control b. concrete finishes and finishing c. cold- and hot-weather concreting procedures d. curing procedures e. construction contraction and isolation joints f. joint-filler strips g. semirigid joint fillers h. forms and form removal limitations i. vapor-retarder installation j. anchor rod and anchorage device installation tolerances k. steel reinforcement installation l. methods for achieving specified floor and slab flatness and levelness floor and slab flatness and levelness measurement m. concrete repair procedures n. concrete protection 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture. Submit alternate design mixtures when characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments. 1. Indicate amounts of mixing water to be withheld for later addition at Project site. C. Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Placing Drawings that detail fabrication, bending, and placement. Include bar sizes, lengths, material, grade, bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar diagrams, bar arrangement, splices and laps, mechanical connections, tie spacing, hoop spacing, and supports for concrete reinforcement. D. Construction Joint Layout: Indicate proposed construction joints required to construct the structure. 1. Location of construction joints is subject to approval of the Architect. E. Samples: For vapor retarder. 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer, manufacturer and testing agency. B. Welding certificates. C. Material Certificates: For each of the following, signed by manufacturers: 1. Cementitious materials. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE FWN&A Structural Engineering 033000 - 3 August 2019 2. Admixtures. 3. Form materials and form-release agents. 4. Steel reinforcement and accessories. 5. Curing compounds. 6. Floor and slab treatments. 7. Bonding agents. 8. Adhesives. 9. Vapor retarders. 10. Semirigid joint filler. 11. Joint-filler strips. 12. Repair materials. D. Material Test Reports: For the following, from a qualified testing agency: 1. Aggregates. E. Formwork Shop Drawings: Prepared by or under the supervision of a qualified professional engineer, detailing fabrication, assembly, and support of formwork. F. Floor surface flatness and levelness measurements indicating compliance with specified tolerances. G. Field quality-control reports. H. Minutes of preinstallation conference. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs on Project personnel qualified as ACI-certified Flatwork Technician and Finisher and a supervisor who is an ACI-certified Concrete Flatwork Technician. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and equipment. C. Testing Agency Qualifications: Owner shall engage an Independent Testing Agency, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 for testing indicated. 1. Personnel conducting field tests shall be qualified as ACI Concrete Field Testing Technician, Grade 1, according to ACI CP-1 or an equivalent certification program. 2. Personnel performing laboratory tests shall be ACI-certified Concrete Strength Testing Technician and Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician, Grade I. Testing agency laboratory supervisor shall be an ACI-certified Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician, Grade II. D. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.4/D 1.4M. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE FWN&A Structural Engineering 033000 - 4 August 2019 1.8 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING A. Preconstruction Testing Service: Owner shall engage an Independent Testing Agency to perform preconstruction testing on concrete mixtures. 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Steel Reinforcement: Deliver, store, and handle steel reinforcement to prevent bending and damage. 1.10 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures. 1. When average high and low temperature is expected to fall below 40 deg F for three successive days, maintain delivered concrete mixture temperature within the temperature range required by ACI 301. 2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials. 3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in mixture designs. B. Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 and as follows: 1. Maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F at time of placement. Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option. 2. Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade uniformly moist without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CONCRETE, GENERAL A. ACI Publications: Comply with the following unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents: 1. ACI 301. 2. ACI 117. 2.2 FORM-FACING MATERIALS A. Smooth-Formed Finished Concrete: Form-facing panels that provide continuous, true, and smooth concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE FWN&A Structural Engineering 033000 - 5 August 2019 1. Plywood, metal, or other approved panel materials. 2. Exterior-grade plywood panels, suitable for concrete forms, complying with DOC PS 1, and as follows: a. Structural 1, B-B or better; mill oiled and edge sealed. b. B-B (Concrete Form), Class 1 or better; mill oiled and edge sealed. B. Rough-Formed Finished Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or another approved material. Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit. C. Void Forms: Biodegradable paper surface, treated for moisture resistance, structurally sufficient to support weight of plastic concrete and other superimposed loads. D. Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that does not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and does not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces. 1. Formulate form-release agent with rust inhibitor for steel form-facing materials. E. Form Ties: Factory-fabricated, removable or snap-off glass-fiber-reinforced plastic or metal form ties designed to resist lateral pressure of fresh concrete on forms and to prevent spalling of concrete on removal. 1. Furnish units that leave no corrodible metal closer than 1 inch to the plane of exposed concrete surface. 2. Furnish ties that, when removed, leave holes no larger than 1 inch in diameter in concrete surface. 3. Furnish ties with integral water-barrier plates to walls indicated to receive dampproofing or waterproofing. 2.3 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed. B. Low-Alloy-Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 706/A 706M, deformed. C. Plain-Steel Wire: ASTM A 1064/A 1064M, as drawn. D. Plain-Steel Welded-Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 1064/A 1064M, plain, fabricated from as- drawn steel wire into flat sheets. 2.4 REINFORCEMENT ACCESSORIES A. Joint Dowel Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, plain-steel bars, cut true to length with ends square and free of burrs. B. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded-wire reinforcement in place. Manufacture bar supports from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice," of greater compressive strength than concrete and as follows: City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE FWN&A Structural Engineering 033000 - 6 August 2019 1. For concrete surfaces where legs of wire bar supports contact forms, use CRSI Class 1 plastic-protected steel wire or CRSI Class 2 stainless-steel bar supports. 2.5 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand from the same manufacturer's plant, obtain aggregate from single source, and obtain admixtures from single source from single manufacturer. B. Cementitious Materials: 1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150/C 150M, Type I/II, gray. 2. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class F or C. C. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33/C 33M, Class 3M coarse aggregate or better, graded. Provide aggregates from a single source with documented service record data of at least 10 years' satisfactory service in similar applications and service conditions using similar aggregates and cementitious materials. 1. Maximum Coarse-Aggregate Size: 3/4 inch nominal. 2. Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement. D. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260/C 260M. E. Chemical Admixtures: Certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and that do not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those permitted in hardened concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride. 1. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A. 2. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type B. 3. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D. 4. High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type F. 5. High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type G. 6. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017/C 1017M, Type II. F. Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M and potable. 2.6 VAPOR RETARDERS A. Sheet Vapor Retarder: 15-MIL, ASTM E 1745, Class A, except with maximum water-vapor permeance of 0.01 perms. Include manufacturer's recommended adhesive or pressure-sensitive tape. 2.7 CURING MATERIALS A. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. when dry. B. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE FWN&A Structural Engineering 033000 - 7 August 2019 C. Water: Potable. 2.8 RELATED MATERIALS A. Expansion- and Isolation-Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber or ASTM D 1752, cork or self-expanding cork, as noted by the Architect. B. Semirigid Joint Filler: Two-component, semirigid, 100 percent solids, epoxy resin with a Type A shore durometer hardness of 80 according to ASTM D 2240. C. Bonding Agent: ASTM C 1059/C 1059M, Type II, nonredispersible, acrylic emulsion or styrene butadiene. 2.9 REPAIR MATERIALS A. Repair Underlayment: Cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product that can be applied in thicknesses from 1/8 inch and that can be feathered at edges to match adjacent floor elevations. 1. Cement Binder: ASTM C 150/C 150M, portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic cement as defined in ASTM C 219. 2. Primer: Product of underlayment manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions, and application. 3. Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch or coarse sand as recommended by underlayment manufacturer. 4. Compressive Strength: Not less than 4100 psi at 28 days when tested according to ASTM C 109/C 109M. B. Repair Overlayment: Cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product that can be applied in thicknesses from 1/4 inch and that can be filled in over a scarified surface to match adjacent floor elevations. 1. Cement Binder: ASTM C 150/C 150M, portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic cement as defined in ASTM C 219. 2. Primer: Product of topping manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions, and application. 3. Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch or coarse sand as recommended by topping manufacturer. 4. Compressive Strength: Not less than 5000 psi at 28 days when tested according to ASTM C 109/C 109M. 2.10 CONCRETE MIXTURES, GENERAL A. Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the basis of laboratory trial mixture or field test data, or both, according to ACI 301. 1. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mixture designs based on laboratory trial mixtures. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE FWN&A Structural Engineering 033000 - 8 August 2019 B. Cementitious Materials: Use fly ash as needed to reduce the total amount of portland cement, which would otherwise be used. Limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other than portland cement in concrete as follows:] 1. Fly Ash: 15 percent, maximum, coordinate with finishing contractor and Polished Concrete Finish, Section 035360. C. Limit water-soluble, chloride-ion content in hardened concrete to 0.30 percent by weight of cement. D. Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Use water-reducing high-range water-reducing or plasticizing admixture in concrete, as required, for placement and workability. 2. Use water-reducing and -retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low humidity, or other adverse placement conditions. 3. Use water-reducing admixture in pumped concrete and concrete with a w/c ratio below 0.50. 2.11 CONCRETE MIXTURES FOR BUILDING ELEMENTS A. Piers: Normal-weight concrete. 1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 3000 psi at 28 days. 2. Maximum W/C Ratio: 0.50. 3. Slump Limit: 8 inches for concrete with verified slump of 2 to 4 inches before adding high-range water-reducing admixture or plasticizing admixture, plus or minus 1 inch. B. Grade Beams: Normal-weight concrete. 1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 4000 psi at 28 days. 2. Maximum W/C Ratio: 0.50. 3. Slump Limit: 3 to 5 inches for concrete with verified slump of 2 to 4 inches before adding high-range water-reducing admixture or plasticizing admixture, plus or minus 1 inch. 4. Air Content: 3 to 6 percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery for 3/4 -inch nominal maximum aggregate size. C. Slabs-on-Grade (Exterior Exposed Concrete): Normal-weight concrete. 1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 3000 psi at 28 days. 2. Maximum W/C Ratio: 0.50. 3. Minimum Cementitious Materials Content: 540 lb/cu. yd.. 4. Slump Limit: 5 inches, plus or minus 1 inch. 5. Air Content: Air Content: 3 to 6 percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery for 3/4-inch nominal maximum aggregate size. D. Suspended Slabs (Structural Slabs on Void Forms): Normal-weight concrete. 1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 4000 psi at 28 days. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE FWN&A Structural Engineering 033000 - 9 August 2019 2. Maximum W/C Ratio: 0.45. 3. Slump Limit: 2 to 4 inches, plus or minus 1 inch. 4. Air Content: 3 percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery for 3/4-inch nominal maximum aggregate size. 5. Air Content: Do not allow air content of trowel-finished floors to exceed 3 percent. 2.12 FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice." 2.13 CONCRETE MIXING A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M, and furnish batch ticket information. 1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 FORMWORK INSTALLATION A. Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 301, to support vertical, lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until structure can support such loads. B. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment, elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117. C. Limit concrete surface irregularities, designated by ACI 347 as abrupt or gradual, as follows: 1. Class A, 1/8 inch for smooth-formed finished surfaces. 2. Class C, 1/2 inch for rough-formed finished surfaces. D. Construct forms tight enough to prevent loss of concrete mortar. E. Construct forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces. Provide crush or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast-concrete surfaces. Provide top forms for inclined surfaces steeper than 1.5 horizontal to 1 vertical. 1. Do not use rust-stained steel form-facing material. F. Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve required elevations and slopes in finished concrete surfaces. Provide and secure units to support screed strips; use strike-off templates or compacting-type screeds. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE FWN&A Structural Engineering 033000 - 10 August 2019 G. Provide temporary openings for cleanouts and inspection ports where interior area of formwork is inaccessible. Close openings with panels tightly fitted to forms and securely braced to prevent loss of concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings in forms at inconspicuous locations. H. Chamfer exterior corners and edges of permanently exposed concrete. I. Form openings, chases, offsets, sinkages, keyways, blocking, screeds, and bulkheads required in the Work. Determine sizes and locations from trades providing such items. J. Clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, and other debris just before placing concrete. K. Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar leaks and maintain proper alignment. L. Coat contact surfaces of forms with form-release agent, according to manufacturer's written instructions, before placing reinforcement. • EMBEDDED ITEM INSTALLATION M. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 1. Install anchor rods, accurately located, to elevations required and complying with tolerances in Section 7.5 of AISC 303. 3.2 REMOVING AND REUSING FORMS A. General: Formwork for sides of beams, and similar parts of the Work that does not support weight of concrete may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50 deg F for 24 hours after placing concrete. Concrete has to be hard enough to not be damaged by form- removal operations, and curing and protection operations need to be maintained. B. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in the Work. Split, frayed, delaminated, or otherwise damaged form-facing material are not acceptable for exposed surfaces. Apply new form-release agent. C. When forms are reused, clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten to close joints. Align and secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use patched forms for exposed concrete surfaces unless approved by Architect. 3.3 VAPOR-RETARDER INSTALLATION A. Sheet Vapor Retarders: Place, protect, and repair sheet vapor retarder according to ASTM E 1643 and manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Lap joints 6 inches and seal with manufacturer's recommended tape. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE FWN&A Structural Engineering 033000 - 11 August 2019 3.4 STEEL REINFORCEMENT INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating, placing, and supporting reinforcement. 1. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before placing concrete. B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other foreign materials that reduce bond to concrete. C. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and support reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete cover. Do not tack weld crossing reinforcing bars. 1. Weld reinforcing bars according to AWS D1.4/D 1.4M, where indicated. D. Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces. E. Install welded-wire reinforcement in longest practicable lengths on bar supports spaced to minimize sagging. Lap edges and ends of adjoining sheets at least one mesh spacing. Offset laps of adjoining sheet widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction. Lace overlaps with wire. 3.5 JOINTS A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. B. Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations indicated or as approved by Architect / Engineer. 1. Place joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across construction joints unless otherwise indicated. Do not continue reinforcement through sides of strip placements of floors and slabs. 2. Form keyed joints as indicated. Embed keys at least 1-1/2 inches into concrete. 3. Locate joints for beams, slabs, joists, and girders in the middle third of spans. Offset joints in girders a minimum distance of twice the beam width from a beam-girder intersection. 4. Use a bonding agent at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces. C. Contraction Joints in Structural Slabs: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one- fourth of concrete thickness as follows: 1. Grooved Joints in Structural Slabs: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing each edge of joint to a radius of 1/8 inch. Repeat grooving of contraction joints after applying surface finishes. Eliminate groover tool marks on concrete surfaces. 2. Sawed Joints in Structural Slabs: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch- wide joints into concrete City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE FWN&A Structural Engineering 033000 - 12 August 2019 when cutting action does not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before concrete develops random contraction cracks. D. Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: After removing formwork, install joint-filler strips at slab junctions with vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and other locations, as indicated. 1. Extend joint-filler strips full width and depth of joint, terminating flush with finished concrete surface unless otherwise indicated by Architect. 2. Install joint-filler strips in lengths as long as practicable. Where more than one length is required, lace or clip sections together. E. Doweled Joints: Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated. Lubricate or asphalt coat one-half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint. 3.6 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embedded items is complete and that required inspections are completed. B. Before test sampling and placing concrete, water may be added at Project site, subject to limitations of ACI 301 and the withheld water indicated on the batch ticket from the concrete supplier. 1. Do not add water to concrete after adding high-range water-reducing admixtures to mixture. C. Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness that no new concrete is placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as indicated. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation. 1. Deposit concrete in horizontal layers of depth not to exceed formwork design pressures and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints. 2. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment according to ACI 301. 3. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced locations to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6 inches into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to lose plasticity. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration to time necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing mixture constituents to segregate. D. Deposit and consolidate concrete for floors and slabs in a continuous operation, within limits of construction joints, until placement of a panel or section is complete. 1. Consolidate concrete during placement operations, so concrete is thoroughly worked around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners. 2. Maintain reinforcement in position on chairs during concrete placement. 3. Screed slab surfaces with a straightedge and strike off to correct elevations. 4. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE FWN&A Structural Engineering 033000 - 13 August 2019 5. Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open-textured surface plane, before excess bleedwater appears on the surface. Do not further disturb slab surfaces before starting finishing operations. 3.7 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES A. Rough-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material with tie holes and defects repaired and patched. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed-surface irregularities. 1. Apply to concrete surfaces not exposed to public view. B. Smooth-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material, arranged in an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch tie holes and defects. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed-surface irregularities. 1. Apply to concrete surfaces exposed to public view, or to be covered with a coating or covering material applied directly to concrete. C. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces unless otherwise indicated. 3.8 FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS A. General: Comply with ACI 302.1R recommendations for screeding, restraightening, and finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces. B. Scratch Finish: While still plastic, texture concrete surface that has been screeded and bull- floated or darbied. Use stiff brushes, brooms, or rakes to produce a profile amplitude of 1/4 inch in one direction. 1. Apply scratch finish to surfaces indicated by Architect to receive concrete floor toppings and mortar setting beds for bonded cementitious floor finishes. C. Float Finish: Consolidate surface with power-driven floats or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power-driven floats. Restraighten, cut down high spots, and fill low spots. Repeat float passes and restraightening until surface is left with a uniform, smooth, granular texture. 1. Apply float finish to surfaces indicated by Architect to receive trowel finish. D. Trowel Finish: After applying float finish, apply first troweling and consolidate concrete by hand or power-driven trowel. Continue troweling passes and restraighten until surface is free of trowel marks and uniform in texture and appearance. Grind smooth any surface defects that would telegraph through applied coatings or floor coverings. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE FWN&A Structural Engineering 033000 - 14 August 2019 1. Apply a trowel finish to surfaces indicated by Architect that is exposed to view or to be covered with resilient flooring, carpet, ceramic or quarry tile set over a cleavage membrane, paint, or another thin-film-finish coating system. 2. Finish surfaces to the following tolerances, according to ASTM E 1155, for a randomly trafficked floor surface: a. Specified overall values of flatness, F(F) 25; and of levelness, F(L) 20; with minimum local values of flatness, F(F) 17; and of levelness, F(L) 15, at carpeted floor areas. b. Specified overall values of flatness, F(F) 30; and of levelness, F(L) 20; with minimum local values of flatness, F(F) 24; and of levelness, F(L) 15; for other non-sloped suspended slabs floor surfaces. c. Specified overall values of flatness, F(F) 50; and of levelness, F(L) 35; at polished concrete areas and bays. Measure in accordance with ASTM E1155 and ACI 117. Provide testing at 1 test per 100 sf of floor surface area, evenly distributed over the test surface area, tests shall not be closer than 5’-0” on center. E. Trowel and Fine-Broom Finish: Apply a first trowel finish to surfaces indicated by Architect where ceramic or quarry tile is to be installed by either thickset or thinset method. While concrete is still plastic, slightly scarify surface with a fine broom. 1. Comply with flatness and levelness tolerances for trowel-finished floor surfaces. F. Broom Finish: Apply a broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps, ramps, and elsewhere as indicated. 1. Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen trafficked surface by brooming with fiber-bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate required final finish with Architect before application. G. Slip-Resistive Finish: Before final floating, where indicated by Architect, apply slip-resistive aggregate or aluminum granule finish, and where indicated to concrete stair treads, platforms, and ramps. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions and as follows: 1. Uniformly spread 25 lb/100 sq. ft. of dampened slip-resistive aggregate or aluminum granules over surface in one or two applications. Tamp aggregate flush with surface, but do not force below surface. 2. After broadcasting and tamping, apply float finish. 3. After curing, lightly work surface with a steel wire brush or an abrasive stone and water to expose slip-resistive aggregate or aluminum granules. H. Dry-Shake Floor Hardener Finish: After initial floating, apply dry-shake floor hardener to surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions and as follows, where indicated by Architect: (Reference “Polished Concrete Finish”, Section 035360) 1. Uniformly apply dry-shake floor hardener at a rate of 100 lb/100 sq. ft. unless greater amount is recommended by manufacturer. 2. Uniformly distribute approximately two-thirds of dry-shake floor hardener over surface by hand or with mechanical spreader, and embed by power floating. Follow power floating with a second dry-shake floor hardener application, uniformly distributing remainder of material, and embed by power floating. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE FWN&A Structural Engineering 033000 - 15 August 2019 3. After final floating, apply a trowel finish. Cure concrete with curing compound recommended by dry-shake floor hardener manufacturer and apply immediately after final finishing. I. Polished Surface 1. Reference architectural. 3.9 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEM INSTALLATION A. Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures after work of other trades is in place unless otherwise indicated. Mix, place, and cure concrete, as specified, to blend with in- place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling indicated or required to complete the Work. B. Curbs: Provide monolithic finish to interior curbs by stripping forms while concrete is still green and by steel-troweling surfaces to a hard, dense finish with corners, intersections, and terminations slightly rounded. C. Equipment Bases and Foundations: 1. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided. 2. Construct concrete bases 6 inches high unless otherwise indicated, and extend base not less than 6 inches in each direction beyond the maximum dimensions of supported equipment unless otherwise indicated. 3. Minimum Compressive Strength: 3000 psi at 28 days. 4. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated, install dowel rods on 12-inch centers around the full perimeter of concrete base. 5. For supported equipment, install anchor rods that extend through concrete base and anchor into structural concrete substrate. 6. Prior to pouring concrete, place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 7. Cast anchor-rod insert into bases. Install anchor rods to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment. 3.10 CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and ACI 301 for hot-weather protection during curing. B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to unformed concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h before and during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing. C. Unformed Surfaces: Begin curing immediately after finishing concrete. Cure unformed surfaces, including floors and slabs, concrete floor toppings, and other surfaces. D. Cure concrete according to ACI 308.1, by one or a combination of the following methods: City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE FWN&A Structural Engineering 033000 - 16 August 2019 1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the following materials: a. Water. b. Continuous water-fog spray. c. Absorptive cover, water saturated, and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete surfaces and edges with 12-inch lap over adjacent absorptive covers. 2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches, and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for not less than seven days. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period, using cover material and waterproof tape. a. Moisture cure or use moisture-retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to receive floor coverings. b. Moisture cure or use moisture-retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to receive penetrating liquid floor treatments. c. Cure concrete surfaces to receive floor coverings with either a moisture-retaining cover or a curing compound that the manufacturer certifies does not interfere with bonding of floor covering used on Project. 3. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period. a. Removal: After curing period has elapsed, remove curing compound without damaging concrete surfaces by method recommended by curing compound manufacturer unless manufacturer certifies curing compound does not interfere with bonding of floor covering used on Project. 4. Curing and Sealing Compound: Apply uniformly to floors and slabs indicated in a continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Repeat process 24 hours later and apply a second coat. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period. 3.11 LIQUID FLOOR TREATMENT APPLICATION A. Penetrating Liquid Floor Treatment: Prepare, apply, and finish penetrating liquid floor treatment according to manufacturer's written instructions, where indicated by Architect. (Reference “Polished Concrete Finish”, section 035360) 1. Remove curing compounds, sealers, oil, dirt, laitance, and other contaminants and complete surface repairs. 2. Do not apply to concrete that is less than seven days' old. 3. Apply liquid until surface is saturated, scrubbing into surface until a gel forms; rewet; and repeat brooming or scrubbing. Rinse with water; remove excess material until surface is dry. Apply a second coat in a similar manner if surface is rough or porous. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE FWN&A Structural Engineering 033000 - 17 August 2019 B. Sealing Coat: Uniformly apply a continuous sealing coat of curing and sealing compound to hardened concrete by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. 3.12 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS A. Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Architect. Remove and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Architect's approval. B. Patching Mortar: Mix dry-pack patching mortar, consisting of 1 part portland cement to 2-1/2 parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 sieve, using only enough water for handling and placing. C. Repairing Formed Surfaces: Surface defects include color and texture irregularities, cracks, spalls, air bubbles, honeycombs, rock pockets, fins and other projections on the surface, and stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning. 1. Immediately after form removal, cut out honeycombs, rock pockets, and voids more than 1/2 inch in any dimension to solid concrete. Limit cut depth to 3/4 inch. Make edges of cuts perpendicular to concrete surface. Clean, dampen with water, and brush-coat holes and voids with bonding agent. Fill and compact with patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Fill form-tie voids with patching mortar or cone plugs secured in place with bonding agent. 2. Repair defects on surfaces exposed to view by blending white portland cement and standard portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar matches surrounding color. Patch a test area at inconspicuous locations to verify mixture and color match before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike off slightly higher than surrounding surface. 3. Repair defects on concealed formed surfaces that affect concrete's durability and structural performance as determined by Architect. D. Repairing Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as floors and slabs, for finish and verify surface tolerances specified for each surface. Correct low and high areas. Test surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness; use a sloped template. 1. Repair finished surfaces containing defects. Surface defects include spalls, popouts, honeycombs, rock pockets, crazing and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch wide or that penetrate to reinforcement or completely through unreinforced sections regardless of width, and other objectionable conditions. 2. After concrete has cured at least 14 days, correct high areas by grinding. 3. Correct localized low areas during or immediately after completing surface finishing operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with patching mortar. Finish repaired areas to blend into adjacent concrete. 4. Correct other low areas scheduled to receive floor coverings with a repair underlayment. Prepare, mix, and apply repair underlayment and primer according to manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface. Feather edges to match adjacent floor elevations. 5. Correct other low areas scheduled to remain exposed with a repair topping. Cut out low areas to ensure a minimum repair topping depth of 1/4 inch to match adjacent floor elevations. Prepare, mix, and apply repair topping and primer according to manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE FWN&A Structural Engineering 033000 - 18 August 2019 6. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas with clean, square cuts and expose steel reinforcement with at least a 3/4-inch clearance all around. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and apply bonding agent. Mix patching concrete of same materials and mixture as original concrete, except without coarse aggregate. Place, compact, and finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete. Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete. 7. Repair random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in diameter with patching mortar. Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and clean off dust, dirt, and loose particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding agent. Place patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Compact patching mortar and finish to match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist for at least 72 hours. E. Perform structural repairs of concrete, subject to Architect's approval, using epoxy adhesive and patching mortar. F. Repair materials and installation not specified above may be used, subject to Architect's approval. 3.13 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Special Inspections: Owner will engage a Special Inspector and an Independent Testing Agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports. B. Testing Agency: Owner shall engage an Independent Testing Agency to perform tests and inspections and to submit reports. C. Inspections: 1. Steel reinforcement placement. 2. Steel reinforcement welding. 3. Headed bolts and studs. 4. Verification of use of required design mixture. 5. Concrete placement, including conveying and depositing. 6. Curing procedures and maintenance of curing temperature. 7. Verification of concrete strength before removal of shores and forms from beams and slabs. D. Concrete Tests: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to ASTM C 172/C 172M shall be performed according to the following requirements: 1. Testing Frequency: Obtain one composite sample for each day's pour of each concrete mixture exceeding 5 cu. yd., but less than 25 cu. yd., plus one set for each additional 50 cu. yd. or fraction thereof. a. When frequency of testing provides fewer than five compressive-strength tests for each concrete mixture, testing shall be conducted from at least five randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE FWN&A Structural Engineering 033000 - 19 August 2019 2. Slump: ASTM C 143/C 143M; one test at point of placement for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. Perform additional tests when concrete consistency appears to change. 3. Air Content: ASTM C 231/C 231M, pressure method, for normal-weight concrete; one test for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. 4. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064/C 1064M; one test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F and below or 80 deg F and above, and one test for each composite sample. 5. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31/C 31M. a. Cast and laboratory cure two sets of four standard cylinder specimens (6”x12” cylinders) for each composite sample. 6. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39/C 39M; test one set of one laboratory-cured specimens at 7 days and one set of two specimens at 28 days, hold fourth cylinder to be tested at a later date if required by Architect / Engineer. a. A compressive-strength test shall be the average compressive strength from a set of two specimens obtained from same composite sample and tested at 28-days. 7. Strength of each concrete mixture will be satisfactory if every average of any three consecutive compressive-strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive strength and no compressive-strength test value falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi. 8. Test results shall be reported in writing to Architect, concrete manufacturer, and Contractor within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive-strength tests shall contain Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing and inspecting agency, location of concrete batch in Work, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mixture proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7- and 28-day tests. 9. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be permitted by Architect but will not be used as sole basis for approval or rejection of concrete. 10. Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete when test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other requirements have not been met, as directed by Architect. Testing and inspecting agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42/C 42M or by other methods as directed by Architect. 11. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. 12. Correct deficiencies in the Work that test reports and inspections indicate do not comply with the Contract Documents. E. Measure floor and slab flatness and levelness according to ASTM E 1155 within 48 hours of finishing. 3.14 PROTECTION OF LIQUID FLOOR TREATMENTS A. Protect liquid floor treatment from damage and wear during the remainder of construction period. Use protective methods and materials, including temporary covering, recommended in writing by liquid floor treatments installer. (Refer to Section 035360) END OF SECTION 033000 Denton Fire Station No. 8 POLISHED CONCRETE Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 033543-1 August 2019 SECTION 033543 – POLISHED CONCRETE (Included with Add Alternate No. 4) PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Polished concrete floor finish consisting of thorough cleaning of new concrete slab, dry grinding to remove surface imperfections and irregularities, application of dye hardener, and polishing. 1.3 REFERENCES A. NFSI - National Floor Safety Institute; Test Method 101A; current edition. 1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Polished Concrete Floor Finish: A multi-step finishing process on concrete floor surfaces consisting of dry grinding and polishing to the scheduled reflective sheen. 1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Completed polished concrete floor surface shall have a static Coefficient of Friction or Slip Coefficient of 0.6, minimum, when tested in accordance with NFSI Test Method 101A. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's product data sheets on densifier, sealer, and joint filler materials. Provide manufacturer's product data on polishing equipment, including grinding machine, grinding heads, grinding pads and dust extraction system. B. Samples: Submit two polished concrete finish samples, 6 x 6 inch in size, illustrating sheen level of polished concrete. C. Test Reports: Submit test reports or certification from NFSI confirming that polished concrete floor finish has been tested in accordance with Method 101A and has passed phase 2 level of certification. D. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate complete preparation and finishing instructions for each level of sheen. E. Maintenance Data: Indicate manufacturer's recommended cleaning and maintenance instructions for polished concrete floor finish. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this Section and trained by equipment manufacturer in proper operation of equipment; successfully completed not less than 3 previous projects of similar scope. B. Pre-Installation Conference: 1. Prior to application of polished concrete floor finish, conduct a pre-installation conference at the project site. 2. Attendance: Contractor, job superintendent, and suppliers of hardeners and sealers related to polished concrete floor finish work. 3. Agenda: Finish criteria, mock-ups, preparation, application process and protection of completed floors. C. Provide list of not less than 5 successful projects, complete with name and contact information of owner, documenting past performance. 1.8 MOCK-UP A. Aggregate mock-up: 1. Location: pour temporary slab. 2. Size: minimum 6' x 6'. B. Finish mock-up: 1. Location: Day Room or Exercise Room. 2. Size: minimum 6' x 6'. 3. Show colorant, polished finish and selected sheen level. C. Accepted mock-up will serve as a standard to judge quality and workmanship of completed polished concrete floor finish 1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS Denton Fire Station No. 8 POLISHED CONCRETE Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 033543-2 August 2019 A. Take precautions to prevent staining of concrete prior to application of concrete floor polishing: B. Prohibit parking of vehicles on concrete slab. C. If construction equipment must be used for application, diaper components that might drip oil, hydraulic fluid, or other liquids. D. Prohibit acids and acidic detergents from contacting concrete surfaces. E. Sequence application of concrete polishing after completion of other construction activities that would be damaging to completed polished finish. F. Concrete Substrate 1. Minimum Ff/Fl rating: 50/35, tested to ASTM E-1155. a. Provide testing at 1 test per 100 sf of floor surface area, evenly distributed over the test surface area. Tests shall not be closer than 5’-0” on center. b. Provide testing of slab flatness and levelness according to ASTM E-1155 within 48 hours of finishing. 2. 28 day compressive strength 4500 to 5000 PSI. 3. Cured minimum 14 days using methods indicated in Section 033000. If curing compound is used, it shall be natural dissipating type. 4. Power troweled, without burning and without hand finishing. 5. If fine aggregate concrete mix with minimal aggregate is specified, concrete must be thoroughly floated and tamped. 6. Acceptable ph ASTM F710, consult with manufacturer with results. 7. Relative Humidity performed ASTM F2170, consult with manufacturer with results. 8. Maximum fly ash content to be 15%. G. Protect concrete surfaces scheduled to receive dyed and polished finish prior to finishing; prevent damage and staining: 1. Provide fluid containment for equipment working on floors before and after polishing. 2. Do not allow vehicular traffic on floors before or after polishing. 3. Do not allow acids to contact surfaces. 4. Close areas to traffic during finishing and for minimum time period after finishing as recommended by concrete treatment manufacturer. 1.10 SCHEDULING A. Erect exterior walls prior to beginning work (including all grinding, application of densifier, application of color, and polishing) of this section. Complete all work of this section prior to erecting any interior partitions and load bearing walls. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE HARDENING/SEALING MANUFACTURERS A. RetroPlate Concrete Polishing System, by Advanced Floor Products 1. Hardener: RetroPlate 99 2. Sealer: RetroGuard (living quarters), RetroPel (apparatus bays) B. Consolideck, By Prosoco 1. Hardener: LS 2. Sealer: PolishGuard (living quarters), Consolideck SLX 100 Water and Oil Repellent (apparatus bays) C. Armour Products, by Silex Custom Concrete Solutions 1. Hardener: Armour Hard 2. Sealer: Armour Renew Stain Guard (living quarters), Armour Seal (apparatus bays) D. Each manufacturer must provide a: 1. Hardener 2. Stain sealer 2.2 EQUIPMENT A. Grinding Machine: Counter rotating head floor grinding machine and edge grinder. B. Dust Extraction System: Provide complete with squeegee attachment. C. Grinding Heads: 1. Metal Bonded SF-80, SF-150 or SF-300 diamonds depending on application. 2. Resin Bonded: HTC phenolic resin diamonds in 400, 800, 1500, and 3000 grits. D. Grinding Pads for Edges: 1. Swiflex Telum grits 40 or 60 and 120, depending upon application. 2. KGS Speedline grits 200, 400, 800, 1500, and 3000. Denton Fire Station No. 8 POLISHED CONCRETE Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 033543-3 August 2019 2.3 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Acceptable Control Joint Filler: 1. Metzger McGuire MM 80 epoxy joint filler. 2. Hi-Tech Structural Systems Polyurea Joint Filler HT-PE85. B. Self-Leveling Underlayment: As recommended by system manufacturer for use in areas requiring deep grinding to remove deep surface imperfections. C. Dye: To be provided by manufacturer of hardener/sealer from their full range of products and colors. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine concrete floors for defects and conditions that cannot be corrected by preparatory work. B. Do not proceed until defects are corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean concrete surfaces free of dirt, debris, paint/oil splatters and other residue. B. Remove curing compounds and sealers from concrete surfaces. C. Leave concrete surfaces clean and dry, ready for polishing process. D. Protect adjacent surfaces and finishes from damage by concrete polishing procedures. E. Fill control joints with joint filler and shave prior to the grinding and polishing process. 3.3 APPLICATION A. Apply concrete polishing in accordance with manufacturer's instructions to the selected sheen level. B. Finish to be: 1. Class B Fine Aggregate 2. Surface Texture Grade B-1 (CSDA ST-115). C. Grind concrete floor to within 5 inches of walls and partitions using SF-40 grit, removing construction debris and floor slab imperfections and imparting a uniform scratch pattern in concrete surfaces. Thoroughly vacuum floor using a squeegee vacuum attachment to completely remove dust and debris. D. Apply liquid densifier, undiluted, at approximate rate of 200 s.f. per gal (or as otherwise recommended by manufacturer) in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Remove excess material from surfaces. Allow to cure for 1 to 2 hours before proceeding with grinding and polishing. E. Grind concrete floor to within 5 inches of walls and partitions using metal bonded diamond grits, SF-80, SF-150 and SF-300 in succession, grinding 90 degrees from each previous grind and removing scratches from each previous grind. After each grind, thoroughly vacuum floor using a squeegee vacuum attachment to completely remove dust and debris. F. Any additional grinding required to meet Surface Texture Grade B-1 (CSDA ST-115) shall be included. G. Grind edges of floor using KGS 60, 120 and 220-grit grinding pads, completely removing scratches from each previous grind. After each grind, thoroughly vacuum floor using a squeegee vacuum attachment to completely remove dust and debris. H. Polish concrete floor, to sheen level indicated, with resin bonded diamond grit of 800 as applicable, first polishing floor edges with pads of same grit and then polishing field of floor, completely removing scratches from each previous grit. I. Apply dye to polished concrete after 400 grit polishing has occurred. J. Completed polished concrete floor shall have uniform sheen level and shall match accepted mock-up. K. Stain sealer to be applied per manufacturer's recommendation. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Measure with profilometer in accordance with ST-115. B. Measure gloss rating using Horbia 320 gloss meter; re-polish if required to achieve specified gloss rating. C. Measure slip resistance using BOT-3000 slip-tester by Universal Walkway Testing; ensure compliance with specified slip resistance rating 3.5 PROTECTION A. Close areas to traffic until concrete treatment has cured. B. Protect completed work with non-staining, water repellent, breathable sheet coverings by RAMBOARD (www.ramboard.com). Coverings shall be replaced every sixty days and as necessary END OF SECTION Denton Fire Station No. 8 UNIT MASONRY Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 042000-1 August 2019 SECTION 042000 – UNIT MASONRY PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Concrete masonry units. 2. Decorative concrete masonry units. 3. Acoustical concrete masonry units. 4. Building (common) brick. 5. Mortar and grout. 6. Steel reinforcing bars. 7. Masonry joint reinforcement. 8. Ties and anchors. 9. Embedded flashing. 10. Miscellaneous masonry accessories. 11. Cavity-wall insulation. B. Products Installed but not Furnished under this Section: 1. Cavity-wall insulation. 2. Steel lintels in unit masonry. 3. Steel shelf angles for supporting unit masonry. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. CMU(s): Concrete masonry unit(s). B. Reinforced Masonry: Masonry containing reinforcing steel in grouted cells. 1.4 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Section 013100 Project Management and Coordination. 1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide structural unit masonry that develops indicated net-area compressive strengths at 28 days. 1. Determine net-area compressive strength of masonry from average net-area compressive strengths of masonry units and mortar types (unit-strength method) according to Tables 1 and 2 in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. 1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: For the following: 1. Masonry Units: Show sizes, profiles, coursing, and locations of special shapes. 2. Stone Trim Units: Show sizes, profiles, and locations of each stone trim unit required. 3. Reinforcing Steel: Detail bending, lap lengths, and placement of unit masonry reinforcing bars. Comply with ACI 315. Show elevations of reinforced walls. 4. Fabricated Flashing: Detail corner units, end-dam units, and other special applications. C. Mock Up: 1. Contractor is directed to Drawings for mock-up requirements. Contractor is to incorporate all components from this section I the mock up. B. Samples for Verification: 1. Exposed CMUs, including Decorative and Acoustical, in the form of small-scale units. 2. Face brick, in the form of straps of five or more bricks. 3. Weep holes/vents. 4. Pigmented mortar. Make samples using same sand and mortar ingredients to be used on Project. 1.7 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Material Certificates: For each type and size of the following: 1. Masonry units. a. Include data on material properties and material test reports substantiating compliance with requirements. b. For brick, include size-variation data verifying that actual range of sizes falls within specified Denton Fire Station No. 8 UNIT MASONRY Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 042000-2 August 2019 tolerances. c. For exposed brick, include test report for efflorescence according to ASTM C 67. d. For masonry units used in structural masonry, include data and calculations establishing average net-area compressive strength of units. 2. Cementitious materials. Include brand, type, and name of manufacturer. 3. Pre-blended, dry mortar mixes. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients. 4. Grout mixes. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients. 5. Reinforcing bars. 6. Joint reinforcement. 7. Anchors, ties, and metal accessories. 8. Integral water repellant used in CMU’s. 9. Mortar Admixtures. B. Qualification Data: For testing agency. C. Mix Designs: For each type of mortar and grout. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients. 1. Include test reports for mortar mixes required to comply with property specification. Test according to ASTM C 109/C 109M for compressive strength, ASTM C 1506 for water retention, and ASTM C 91/C 91M for air content. 2. Include test reports, according to ASTM C 1019, for grout mixes required to comply with compressive strength requirement. D. Cold-Weather and Hot-Weather Procedures: Detailed description of methods, materials, and equipment to be used to comply with requirements. 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations for Masonry Units: Obtain exposed masonry units of a uniform texture and color, or a uniform blend within the ranges accepted for these characteristics, from single source from single manufacturer for each product required. B. Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform quality, including color for exposed masonry, from a single manufacturer for each cementitious component and from single source producer for each aggregate. C. Masonry Standard: Comply with ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents. D. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Build mockup of typical wall area as shown on Drawings. 2. Build mockups for each type of exposed unit masonry construction in size as indicated on Drawings. a. Include a sealant-filled joint at least 16 inches long in each exterior wall mockup. b. Include lower corner of window opening at upper corner of exterior wall mockup. Make opening approximately 12 inches wide by 16 inches high. c. Include through-wall flashing installed for a 24-inch length in corner of exterior wall mockup approximately 16 inches down from top of mockup, with a 12-inch length of flashing left exposed to view (omit masonry above half of flashing). d. Include studs, sheathing, and veneer anchors, flashing, cavity drainage material, and weep holes in exterior masonry-veneer wall mockup. 3. Clean one-half of exposed faces of mockups with masonry cleaner as indicated. 4. Protect accepted mockups from the elements with weather-resistant membrane. 5. Approval of mockups is for color, texture, and blending of masonry units; relationship of mortar and sealant colors to masonry unit colors; tooling of joints; and aesthetic qualities of workmanship. a. Approval of mockups is also for other material and construction qualities specifically approved by Architect in writing. b. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless such deviations are specifically approved by Architect in writing. 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store masonry units on elevated platforms in a dry location. If units are not stored in an enclosed location, cover tops and sides of stacks with waterproof sheeting, securely tied. If units become wet, do not install until they are dry. B. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Do not use cementitious materials that have become damp. C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination avoided. D. Deliver pre-blended, dry mortar mix in moisture-resistant containers designed for use with dispensing silos. Store pre-blended, dry mortar mix in delivery containers on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry Denton Fire Station No. 8 UNIT MASONRY Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 042000-3 August 2019 location or in covered weatherproof dispensing silos. E. Store masonry accessories, including metal items, to prevent corrosion and accumulation of dirt and oil. 1.10 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Protection of Masonry: During construction, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills with waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed masonry when construction is not in progress. 1. Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches down both sides of walls and hold cover securely in place. 2. Where one wythe of multiwythe masonry walls is completed in advance of other wythes, secure cover a minimum of 24 inches down face next to unconstructed wythe and hold cover in place. B. Do not apply uniform floor or roof loads for at least 12 hours and concentrated loads for at least three days after building masonry walls or columns. C. Stain Prevention: Prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining the face of masonry to be left exposed or painted. Immediately remove grout, mortar, and soil that come in contact with such masonry. 1. Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and from mortar splatter by spreading coverings on ground and over wall surface. 2. Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings. 3. Protect surfaces of window and door frames, as well as similar products with painted and integral finishes, from mortar droppings. 4. Turn scaffold boards near the wall on edge at the end of each day to prevent rain from splashing mortar and dirt onto completed masonry. D. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace unit masonry damaged by frost or by freezing conditions. Comply with cold-weather construction requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. 1. Cold-Weather Cleaning: Use liquid cleaning methods only when air temperature is 40 deg F and higher and will remain so until masonry has dried, but not less than seven days after completing cleaning. E. Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 MASONRY UNITS, GENERAL A. Masonry Standard: Comply with ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602, except as modified by requirements in the Contract Documents. B. Defective Units: Referenced masonry unit standards may allow a certain percentage of units to contain chips, cracks, or other defects exceeding limits stated in the standard. Do not use units where such defects will be exposed in the completed Work. C. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide units that comply with requirements for fire-resistance ratings indicated as determined by testing according to ASTM E 119, by equivalent masonry thickness, or by other means, as acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 2.2 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS A. Shapes: Provide shapes indicated and as follows, with exposed surfaces matching exposed faces of adjacent units unless otherwise indicated. 1. Provide special shapes for lintels, corners, jambs, sashes, movement joints, headers, bonding, and other special conditions. 2. Provide square-edged units for outside corners unless otherwise indicated. B. Integral Water Repellent: Provide units made with integral water repellent for exposed units. 1. Integral Water Repellent: Liquid polymeric, integral water-repellent admixture that does not reduce flexural bond strength. Units made with integral water repellent, when tested according to ASTM E 514/E 514M as a wall assembly made with mortar containing integral water-repellent manufacturer's mortar additive, with test period extended to 24 hours, shall show no visible water or leaks on the back of test specimen. a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1) ACM Chemistries; RainBloc. 2) BASF; Rheopel Plus. 3) Grace Construction Products, W. R. Grace & Co. - Conn.; Dry-Block. C. CMUs: ASTM C 90. 1. Density Classification: Lightweight. 2. Size (Width): Manufactured to dimension 3/8 inch less than nominal dimensions. 3. Exposed Faces: Provide color and texture matching the range represented by Architect's sample. D. Decorative CMUs: ASTM C 90. 1. Density Classification: Lightweight. 2. Size (Width): Manufactured to dimensions specified in "CMUs" Paragraph. Denton Fire Station No. 8 UNIT MASONRY Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 042000-4 August 2019 3. Color, Pattern and Texture: a. Standard pattern, ground-face texture. Provide in the following shapes as required: F, FE, FEBN (at outside corners), FT, F8, and KOBB. b. Trenwyth Trendstone-ground face masonry units, color group E, “Mission White”. 4. Special Aggregate: Provide units made with aggregate matching aggregate in Architect's sample. 5. Provide raked mortar joints at interior locations. E. Sound Absorbing (Acoustical) Concrete Masonry Units: Hollow units with solid closed tops, fabricated from Portland cement and lightweight mineral aggregate, Soundblox Type 12RSC/RF-4 as manufactured by Proudfoot Company, Inc., Greenwich, Connecticut, priding an NRC of 0.80. 1. All units shall be from the same manufacturing plant, shall have the same surface texture and shall meet the requirements of ASTM C 90, Grade N lightweight for load-bearing units. Units shall have a linear shrinkage not to exceed 0.065% by test. 2. Size: 8" x 16" face. 3. Sound Absorption: Two cavities with two funnel-shaped slots in each block. Each cavity shall have incombustible fibrous fillers with metal septa factory installed. 4. Provide left and right sound blocks as required for reinforced masonry construction. 5. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net-area compressive strength of 1900 psi. 6. Provide "equivalent concrete masonry thickness" required for fire-rated assemblies where indicated or required by code. 2.3 CONCRETE LINTELS A. General: Provide one of the following: B. Concrete Lintels: ASTM C 1623, matching CMUs in color, texture, and density classification; and with reinforcing bars indicated. Provide lintels with net-area compressive strength not less than CMUs. 2.4 BRICK A. General: Provide shapes indicated and as follows, with exposed surfaces matching finish and color of exposed faces of adjacent units: 1. For ends of sills and caps and for similar applications that would otherwise expose unfinished brick surfaces, provide units without cores or frogs and with exposed surfaces finished. 2. Provide special shapes for applications where stretcher units cannot accommodate special conditions, including those at corners, movement joints, bond beams, sashes, and lintels. 3. Provide special shapes for applications requiring brick of size, form, color, and texture on exposed surfaces that cannot be produced by sawing. 4. Provide special shapes for applications where shapes produced by sawing would result in sawed surfaces being exposed to view. B. Face Brick: Facing brick complying with ASTM C 216. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: a. As scheduled below. 2. Grade: SW. 3. Type: FBS. 4. Initial Rate of Absorption: Less than 30 g/30 sq. in. per minute when tested per ASTM C 67. 5. Efflorescence: Provide brick that has been tested according to ASTM C 67 and is rated "not effloresced." 6. Size (Actual Dimensions): As indicated. 7. Provide solid brick unit at water table at door and window jambs. 8. Application: Use where brick is exposed unless otherwise indicated. 9. Color and Texture: a. Brick Type A: Acme Brick “Texas” with velour finish. 2.5 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150/C 150M, Type I or II, except Type III may be used for cold-weather construction. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce mortar color indicated. 1. Alkali content shall not be more than 0.1 percent when tested according to ASTM C 114. B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S. C. Portland Cement-Lime Mix: Packaged blend of portland cement and hydrated lime containing no other ingredients. D. Mortar Pigments: Natural and synthetic iron oxides and chromium oxides, compounded for use in mortar mixes and complying with ASTM C 979/C 979M. Use only pigments with a record of satisfactory performance in masonry mortar. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Davis Colors; True Tone Mortar Colors. b. Solomon Colors, Inc.; SGS Mortar Colors. Denton Fire Station No. 8 UNIT MASONRY Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 042000-5 August 2019 E. Colored Cement Product: Packaged blend made from and mortar pigments, all complying with specified requirements, and containing no other ingredients. 1. Formulate blend as required to produce color indicated or, if not indicated, as selected from manufacturer's standard colors. 2. Pigments shall not exceed 10 percent of portland cement by weight. 3. Pigments shall not exceed 5 percent of masonry cement by weight. F. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144. 1. For mortar that is exposed to view, use washed aggregate consisting of natural sand or crushed stone. 2. For joints less than 1/4 inch thick, use aggregate graded with 100 percent passing the No. 16 sieve. 3. White-Mortar Aggregates: Natural white sand or crushed white stone. 4. Colored-Mortar Aggregates: Natural sand or crushed stone of color necessary to produce required mortar color. G. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404. H. Cold-Weather Admixture: Non-chloride, noncorrosive, accelerating admixture complying with ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type C, and recommended by manufacturer for use in masonry mortar of composition indicated. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Euclid Chemical Company (The); Accelguard 80. b. Grace Construction Products, W. R. Grace & Co. - Conn.; Morset. c. Sonneborn Products, BASF; Trimix-NCA. I. Water-Repellent Admixture: Liquid water-repellent mortar admixture intended for use with CMUs containing integral water repellent by same manufacturer. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. ACM Chemistries; RainBloc for Mortar. b. BASF; Rheopel Plus Mortar Admixture. c. Grace Construction Products, W. R. Grace & Co. - Conn.; Dry-Block Mortar Admixture. J. Water: Potable. 2.6 REINFORCEMENT A. Uncoated Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M or ASTM A 996/A 996M, Grade 60. B. Reinforcing Bar Positioners: Wire units designed to fit into mortar bed joints spanning masonry unit cells and to hold reinforcing bars in center of cells. Units are formed from 0.148-inch steel wire, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. Provide units designed for number of bars indicated. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Dur-O-Wal; a Hohmann & Barnard company. b. Heckmann Building Products, Inc. c. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc. d. Lock Rite. e. Wire-Bond. B. Masonry Joint Reinforcement, General: ASTM A 951/A 951M. 1. Interior Walls: Hot-dip galvanized, carbon steel. 2. Exterior Walls: a. Hot-dip galvanized, carbon steel in typical locations. b. Stainless-steel where reinforcing is used with veneer anchors. 3. Wire Size for Side Rods: 0.148-inchdiameter. 4. Wire Size for Cross Rods: 0.148-inchdiameter. 5. Wire Size for Veneer Ties: 0.148-inchdiameter. 6. Spacing of Cross Rods, Tabs, and Cross Ties: Not more than 16 inches o.c. 7. Provide in lengths of not less than 10 feet, with prefabricated corner and tee units. C. Masonry Joint Reinforcement for Single-Wythe Masonry: Either ladder or truss type with single pair of side rods. D. Masonry Joint Reinforcement for Multiwythe Masonry: 1. Adjustable (two-piece) type, either ladder or truss design, with one side rod at each face shell of backing wythe and with separate adjustable ties with pintle-and-eye connections having a maximum adjustment of 1-1/4 inches. Size ties to extend at least halfway through facing wythe but with at least 5/8-inch cover on outside face. Ties have hooks or clips to engage a continuous horizontal wire in the facing wythe. 2. Acceptable Products: a. Brick Veneer: Hohmann & Barnard Inc.; 270-2X-SH, Type 304 stainless steel. 2.7 TIES AND ANCHORS A. Materials: Provide ties and anchors specified in this article that are made from materials that comply with the following unless otherwise indicated. 1. Mill-Galvanized, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82/A 82M; with ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 coating. Denton Fire Station No. 8 UNIT MASONRY Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 042000-6 August 2019 2. Hot-Dip Galvanized, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82/A 82M; with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B-2 coating. 3. Stainless-Steel Wire: ASTM A 580/A 580M, Type 304. 4. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel, G60 zinc coating. 5. Steel Sheet, Galvanized after Fabrication: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel, with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B coating. 6. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 304. B. Wire Ties, General: Unless otherwise indicated, size wire ties to extend at least halfway through veneer but with at least 5/8-inch cover on outside face. Outer ends of wires are bent 90 degrees and extend 2 inches parallel to face of veneer. C. Individual Wire Ties: Rectangular units with closed ends and not less than 4 inches wide. 1. Z-shaped ties with ends bent 90 degrees to provide hooks not less than 2 inches long may be used for masonry constructed from solid units. 2. Where wythes do not align or are of different materials, use adjustable ties with pintle-and-eye connections having a maximum adjustment of 1-1/4 inches. 3. Wire: Fabricate from 3/16-inch-diameter, stainless-steel wire. D. Adjustable Anchors for Connecting to Concrete: Provide anchors that allow vertical or horizontal adjustment but resist tension and compression forces perpendicular to plane of wall. 1. Connector Section: Dovetail tabs for inserting into dovetail slots in concrete and attached to tie section; formed from 0.060-inch- thick, steel sheet, galvanized after fabrication. a. 0.064-inch- thick, galvanized sheet may be used at interior walls unless otherwise indicated. 2. Tie Section: Triangular-shaped wire tie, sized to extend within 1 inch of masonry face, made from 0.187-inch-diameter, hot-dip galvanized steel wire. E. Adjustable Masonry-Veneer Anchors: 1. General: Provide anchors that allow vertical adjustment but resist tension and compression forces perpendicular to plane of wall, for attachment over sheathing to wood or metal studs, and as follows: a. Structural Performance Characteristics: Capable of withstanding a 100-lbf load in both tension and compression without deforming or developing play in excess of 0.05 inch. 2. Fabricate sheet metal anchor sections and other sheet metal parts from 0.078-inch- thick, stainless steel sheet. 3. Wire Ties: Triangular-, rectangular-shaped wire ties fabricated from 0.187-inch- diameter stainless- steel wire unless otherwise indicated. 4. Screw-Attached, Masonry-Veneer Anchors: Units consisting of a wire tie and a metal anchor section. a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: 1) Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.; 213-2X SH, Type 304 stainless steel. 2.8 EMBEDDED FLASHING MATERIALS A. The built-in flashing membrane shall be 40 mil flexible sheet material, consisting of a blend of elastomeric and thermal plastic polymers, incorporating DuPont Elvaloy. The membrane shall be reinforced with synthetic fibers, calendered into sheet form, rolled and cut to width. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: a. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.: Flex-Flash Flashing B. Cloaks shall be pre-formed, three dimensional flexible or stainless-steel units used for detail corners, level changes, stop ends and special applications. Cloak color shall be as selected by Architect and/or shall match mortar color. Reference manufacturer's list of colors for selection. C. Flashing Membrane Adhesive: Flashing adhesive exceeds the requirements of TTS00230C Type II, Class B, ASTM C 92094 and Canadian Spec CAN 19, 13M82. D. Fabricate metal drip edges from Type 304 stainless steel. Extend at least 3 inches into wall and 1/2 inch out from wall, with outer edge bent down 30 degrees and hemmed. Include preformed inside and outside corners. E. Surface-adhered with drip membrane shall be a composite 40 mil membrane consisting of 25 mils of elastomeric/thermal plastic membrane incorporating DuPont Elvaloy and 15 mils of SBS asphaltic adhesive. The membrane shall be reinforced with synthetic fibers, calendered into sheet form, rolled and cut to standard widths. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: a. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.: Flex-Flash Flashing F. Standard Sheet Dimensions: Thickness 40 mil G. Roll length 75 ft H. Roll widths 12, 18, 24, 36 inch I. Cloaks shall be pre-formed, three dimensional flexible units used for detail corners, level changes, stop ends, J. Asphalt Primer: Shall be a two-sided, self-adhering tape used to seal the top of cloaks against the back-up wythe. Adhesive may be used as an alternative. Denton Fire Station No. 8 UNIT MASONRY Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 042000-7 August 2019 K. Mastic: Shall be used at all laps and joints, and top terminations. L. Substrate Primer: As recommended by flashing manufacturer. M. Termination Bars for Flashing: Stainless steel sheet 1/8 inch thick by 1 inch wide. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: a. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.; Type T1, Type 304 stainless steel. 2.9 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES A. Compressible Filler: Pre-molded filler strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Grade 2A1; compressible up to 35 percent; of width and thickness indicated; formulated from neoprene, urethane or PVC. B. Preformed Control-Joint Gaskets: Made from styrene-butadiene-rubber compound, complying with ASTM D 2000, Designation M2AA-805 or PVC, complying with ASTM D 2287, Type PVC-65406 and designed to fit standard sash block and to maintain lateral stability in masonry wall; size and configuration as indicated. C. Weep/Vent Products: Use the following unless otherwise indicated: 1. Cellular Plastic Weep/Vent: One-piece, flexible extrusion made from UV-resistant polypropylene copolymer, full height and width of head joint and depth 1/8 inch less than depth of outer wythe, in color selected from manufacturer's standard. a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1) Advanced Building Products Inc.; Mortar Maze weep vent. 2) Dayton Superior Corporation, Dur-O-Wal Division; Cell Vents. 3) Heckmann Building Products Inc.; No. 85 Cell Vent. 4) Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.; Quadro-Vent. D. Cavity Drainage Material: Free-draining mesh, made from polymer strands that will not degrade within the wall cavity. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Mortar Net Solutions; WallDefender (Basis of Design) b. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.; Mortar Trap 2. Provide one of the following configurations: a. Strips, not less than 2 inch thick and 10 inches high, with dovetail shaped notches 7 inches deep that prevent clogging with mortar droppings. b. Strips, not less than 2 inch thick and 10 inches high, with dimpled surface designed to catch mortar droppings and prevent weep holes from clogging with mortar. E. Reinforcing Bar Positioners: Wire units designed to fit into mortar bed joints spanning masonry unit cells and hold reinforcing bars in center of cells. Units are formed from 0.148-inch steel wire, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. Provide units designed for number of bars indicated. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Dayton Superior Corporation, Dur-O-Wal Division; D/A 810, D/A 812 or D/A 817. b. Heckmann Building Products Inc.; No. 376 Rebar Positioner. c. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.; #RB or #RB-Twin Rebar Positioner. 2.10 CAVITY-WALL INSULATION A. Refer to Section 072100. B. Adhesive: Type recommended by insulation board manufacturer for application indicated. 2.11 MASONRY CLEANERS A. Proprietary Non-Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard-strength cleaner designed for removing mortar/grout stains, efflorescence, and other new construction stains from new masonry without discoloring or damaging masonry surfaces. Use product expressly approved for intended use by cleaner manufacturer and manufacturer of masonry units being cleaned. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. PROSOCO; Sure-Klean 600 (at exterior masonry). b. PROSOCO; Sure-Klean Manufactured Stone Cleaner (at manufactured stone veneer) c. SynPro Masonry Cleaner (at interior masonry over polished concrete floor). 2.12 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES A. General: Do not use admixtures, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout. 2. Use portland cement-lime mortar unless otherwise indicated. 3. For exterior masonry, use portland cement-lime mortar. 4. For reinforced masonry, use portland cement-lime mortar. 5. Add cold-weather admixture (if used) at same rate for all mortar that will be exposed to view, regardless of weather conditions, to ensure that mortar color is consistent. B. Pre-blended, Dry Mortar Mix: Furnish dry mortar ingredients in form of a pre-blended mix. Measure quantities by weight to ensure accurate proportions, and thoroughly blend ingredients before delivering to Denton Fire Station No. 8 UNIT MASONRY Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 042000-8 August 2019 Project site. C. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification. Provide the following types of mortar for applications stated unless another type is indicated or needed to provide required compressive strength of masonry. 1. For masonry below grade or in contact with earth, use Type M. 2. For reinforced masonry, use Type S. 3. For exterior, above-grade, load-bearing and non-load-bearing walls and parapet walls; for interior load- bearing walls; for interior non-load-bearing partitions; and for other applications where another type is not indicated, use Type N. Where exposed to the elements, provide water repellent admixture. 4. For interior non-load-bearing partitions, Type N or O may be used. D. Pigmented Mortar: Use colored cement product or select and proportion pigments with other ingredients to produce color required. Do not add pigments to colored cement products. 1. Pigments shall not exceed 10 percent of portland cement by weight. 2. Mix to match Architect's sample. 3. Application: Use pigmented mortar for exposed mortar joints with the following units: a. Decorative CMUs. b. Face brick. c. Cast stone trim units. E. Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 476. 1. Use grout of type indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, of type (fine or coarse) that will comply with Table 1.15.1 in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for dimensions of grout spaces and pour height. 2. Proportion grout in accordance with ASTM C 476, Table 1 for specified 28-day compressive strength indicated, but not less than 2000 psi. 3. Provide grout with a slump of 8 to 11 inches as measured according to ASTM C 143/C 143M. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of work. 2. Verify that foundations are within tolerances specified. 3. Verify that reinforcing dowels are properly placed. 4. Verify that substrates are free of substances that impair mortar bond. B. Before installation, examine rough-in and built-in construction for piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Thickness: Build cavity and composite walls and other masonry construction to full thickness shown. Build single-wythe walls to actual widths of masonry units, using units of widths indicated. B. Build chases and recesses to accommodate items specified in this and other Sections. C. Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completing masonry. After installing equipment, complete masonry to match the construction immediately adjacent to opening. D. Use full-size units without cutting if possible. If cutting is required to provide a continuous pattern or to fit adjoining construction, cut units with motor-driven saws; provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Allow units to dry before laying unless wetting of units is specified. Install cut units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed. E. Select and arrange units for exposed unit masonry to produce a uniform blend of colors and textures. 1. Mix units from several pallets or cubes as they are placed. F. Matching Existing Masonry: Match coursing, bonding, color, and texture of existing masonry. G. Wetting of Brick: Wet brick before laying if initial rate of absorption exceeds 30 g/30 sq. in. per minute when tested per ASTM C 67. Allow units to absorb water so they are damp but not wet at time of laying. 3.3 TOLERANCES A. Dimensions and Locations of Elements: 1. For dimensions in cross section or elevation do not vary by more than plus 1/2 inch or minus 1/4 inch. 2. For location of elements in plan do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or minus 1/2 inch. 3. For location of elements in elevation do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or minus 1/4 inch in a story height or 1/2 inch total. B. Lines and Levels: 1. For bed joints and top surfaces of bearing walls do not vary from level by more than 1/4 inch in 10 Denton Fire Station No. 8 UNIT MASONRY Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 042000-9 August 2019 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum. 2. For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as lintels, sills, parapets, and reveals, do not vary from level by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet, 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum. 3. For vertical lines and surfaces do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet, 3/8 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum. 4. For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, door jambs, reveals, and expansion and control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet, 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum. 5. For lines and surfaces do not vary from straight by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet, 3/8 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum. 6. For vertical alignment of exposed head joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum. 7. For faces of adjacent exposed masonry units, do not vary from flush alignment by more than 1/16 inch except due to warpage of masonry units within tolerances specified for warpage of units. C. Joints: 1. For bed joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch, with a maximum thickness limited to 1/2 inch. 2. For exposed bed joints, do not vary from bed-joint thickness of adjacent courses by more than 1/8 inch. 3. For head and collar joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus 3/8 inch or minus 1/4 inch. 4. For exposed head joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch. Do not vary from adjacent bed-joint and head-joint thicknesses by more than 1/8 inch. 5. For exposed bed joints and head joints of stacked bond, do not vary from a straight line by more than 1/16 inch from one masonry unit to the next. 3.4 LAYING MASONRY WALLS A. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint thicknesses and for accurate location of openings, movement-type joints, returns, and offsets. Avoid using less-than-half- size units, particularly at corners, jambs, and, where possible, at other locations. B. Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Unless otherwise indicated, lay exposed masonry in running bond or bond pattern indicated on Drawings if different; do not use units with less than nominal 4-inch horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs. C. Lay concealed masonry with all units in a wythe in running bond or bonded by lapping not less than 4- inches. Bond and interlock each course of each wythe at corners. Do not use units with less than nominal 4-inch horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs. D. Stopping and Resuming Work: Stop work by racking back units in each course from those in course below; do not tooth. When resuming work, clean masonry surfaces that are to receive mortar, remove loose masonry units and mortar, and wet brick if required before laying fresh masonry. E. Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build in items specified in this and other Sections. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items. F. Fill space between steel frames and masonry solidly with mortar unless otherwise indicated. G. Where built-in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units, place a layer of metal lath, wire mesh, or plastic mesh in the joint below and rod mortar or grout into core. H. Fill cores in hollow CMUs with grout 24 inches under bearing plates, beams, lintels, posts, and similar items unless otherwise indicated. I. Build non-load-bearing interior partitions full height of story to underside of solid floor or roof structure above unless otherwise indicated. 1. Install compressible filler in joint between top of partition and underside of structure above. 2. Fasten partition top anchors to structure above and build into top of partition. Grout cells of CMUs solidly around plastic tubes of anchors and push tubes down into grout to provide 1/2-inch clearance between end of anchor rod and end of tube. Space anchors 48 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated. 3. Wedge non-load-bearing partitions against structure above with small pieces of tile, slate, or metal. Fill joint with mortar after dead-load deflection of structure above approaches final position. 4. At fire-rated partitions, treat joint between top of partition and underside of structure above to comply with Section 078446 Fire-Resistive Joint Systems. 3.5 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING A. Lay hollow brick CMUs as follows: 1. With face shells fully bedded in mortar and with head joints of depth equal to bed joints. 2. With webs fully bedded in mortar in all courses of piers, columns, and pilasters. 3. With webs fully bedded in mortar in grouted masonry, including starting course on footings. Denton Fire Station No. 8 UNIT MASONRY Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 042000-10 August 2019 4. With entire units, including areas under cells, fully bedded in mortar at starting course on footings where cells are not grouted. B. Lay solid masonry units with completely filled bed and head joints; butter ends with sufficient mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Do not deeply furrow bed joints or slush head joints. C. Set trim units in full bed of mortar with full vertical joints. Fill dowel, anchor, and similar holes. 1. Clean soiled surfaces with fiber brush and soap powder and rinse thoroughly with clear water. 2. Allow cleaned surfaces to dry before setting. 3. Wet joint surfaces thoroughly before applying mortar. 4. Rake out mortar joints for pointing with sealant. D. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than joint thickness unless otherwise indicated. 1. For glazed masonry units, use a nonmetallic jointer 3/4 inch or more in width. E. Cut joints flush for masonry walls to receive plaster or other direct-applied finishes (other than paint) unless otherwise indicated. F. Cut joints flush where indicated to receive waterproofing, cavity wall insulation, or air barriers unless otherwise indicated. 3.6 MASONRY JOINT REINFORCEMENT A. General: Install entire length of longitudinal side rods in mortar with a minimum cover of 5/8 inch on exterior side of walls, 1/2 inch elsewhere. Lap reinforcement a minimum of 6 inches. 1. Space reinforcement not more than 16 inches o.c. 2. Space reinforcement not more than 8 inches o.c. in foundation walls and parapet walls. 3. Provide reinforcement not more than 8 inches above and below wall openings and extending 12 inches beyond openings in addition to continuous reinforcement. B. Interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints unless otherwise indicated. C. Provide continuity at wall intersections by using prefabricated T-shaped units. D. Provide continuity at corners by using prefabricated L-shaped units. E. Cut and bend reinforcing units as directed by manufacturer for continuity at corners, returns, offsets, column fireproofing, pipe enclosures, and other special conditions. 3.7 ANCHORING MASONRY VENEERS A. Anchor masonry veneers to wall framing and concrete and masonry backup with masonry-veneer anchors to comply with the following requirements: 1. Fasten screw-attached anchors through sheathing to wall framing and to concrete and masonry backup with metal fasteners of type indicated. Use two fasteners unless anchor design only uses one fastener. 2. Embed in masonry joints. Provide not less than 2 inches of air space between back of masonry veneer and face of sheathing. 3. Locate anchor sections to allow maximum vertical differential movement of ties up and down. 4. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 16 inches o.c. vertically and 16 inches o.c. horizontally. Install additional anchors within 12 inches of openings and at intervals, not exceeding 8 inches, around perimeter. 3.8 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS A. General: Install control and expansion joint materials in unit masonry as masonry progresses. Do not allow materials to span control and expansion joints without provision to allow for in-plane wall or partition movement. B. Form control joints in concrete masonry using one of the following methods: 1. Install preformed control-joint gaskets designed to fit standard sash block. 2. Install temporary foam-plastic filler in head joints and remove filler when unit masonry is complete for application of sealant. C. Form expansion joints in brick as follows: 1. Build flanges of metal expansion strips into masonry. Lap each joint 4 inches in direction of water flow. Seal joints below grade and at junctures with horizontal expansion joints if any. 2. Build flanges of factory-fabricated, expansion-joint units into masonry. 3. Build in compressible joint fillers where indicated. 4. Form open joint full depth of brick wythe and of width indicated, but not less than 3/8 inch for installation of sealant and backer rod specified in Section 079200 Joint Sealants. D. Provide horizontal, pressure-relieving joints by either leaving an air space or inserting a compressible filler of width required for installing sealant and backer rod specified in Section 079200 Joint Sealants, but not less than 3/8 inch. 1. Locate horizontal, pressure-relieving joints beneath shelf angles supporting masonry. 3.9 LINTELS A. Install steel lintels where indicated. Denton Fire Station No. 8 UNIT MASONRY Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 042000-11 August 2019 B. Provide lintels where shown and where openings of more than 12 inches for brick-size units and 24 inches for block-size units are shown without structural steel or other supporting lintels. C. Provide minimum bearing of 8 inches at each jamb unless otherwise indicated. 3.10 FLASHING, WEEP HOLES, CAVITY DRAINAGE, AND VENTS A. General: Install embedded flashing and weep holes in masonry at shelf angles, lintels, ledges, other obstructions to downward flow of water in wall, and where indicated B. Install flashing as follows unless otherwise indicated: 1. Prepare masonry surfaces so they are smooth and free from projections that could puncture flashing. Where flashing is within mortar joint, place through-wall flashing on sloping bed of mortar and cover with mortar. Before covering with mortar, seal penetrations in flashing with adhesive, sealant, or tape as recommended by flashing manufacturer. 2. At multiwythe masonry walls, including cavity walls, extend flashing through outer wythe, turned up a minimum of 8 inches, and through inner wythe to within 1/2 inch of the interior face of wall in exposed masonry. Where interior face of wall is to receive furring or framing, carry flashing completely through inner wythe and turn flashing up approximately 2 inches on interior face. 3. At multiwythe masonry walls, including cavity walls, extend flashing through outer wythe, turned up a minimum of 4 inches and 1-1/2 inches into the inner wythe. 4. At masonry-veneer walls, extend flashing through veneer, across air space behind veneer, and up face of sheathing at least 8 inches; with upper edge tucked under building paper or building wrap, lapping at least 4 inches and terminated with a termination bar. 5. At lintels and shelf angles, extend flashing a minimum of 6 inches into masonry at each end. At heads and sills, extend flashing 6 inches at ends and turn up not less than 2 inches at end dams. 6. Interlock end joints of ribbed sheet metal flashing by overlapping ribs not less than 1-1/2 inches or as recommended by flashing manufacturer, and seal lap with elastomeric sealant complying with requirements in Section 079200 Joint Sealants for application indicated. 7. Install metal drip edges with ribbed sheet metal flashing by interlocking hemmed edges to form hooked seam. Seal seam with elastomeric sealant complying with requirements in Section 079200 Joint Sealants for application indicated. 8. Install metal drip edges beneath flexible flashing at exterior face of wall. Stop flexible flashing 1/2 inch back from outside face of wall and adhere flexible flashing to top of metal drip edge. 9. Install metal flashing termination beneath flexible flashing at exterior face of wall. Stop flexible flashing 1/2 back from outside face of wall and adhere flexible flashing to top of metal flashing termination. 10. Cut flexible flashing off flush with face of wall after masonry wall construction is completed. C. Install single-wythe CMU flashing system in bed joints of CMU walls where indicated to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Install CMU cell pans with upturned edges located below face shells and webs of CMUs above and with weep spouts aligned with face of wall. Install CMU web covers so that they cover upturned edges of CMU cell pans at CMU webs and extend from face shell to face shell. D. Install reglets and nailers for flashing and other related construction where they are shown to be built into masonry. E. Install weep holes in head joints in exterior wythes of first course of masonry immediately above embedded flashing and as follows: 1. Use specified weep/vent products to form weep holes. 2. Space weep holes 24 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated. 3. Space weep holes formed from 16 inches o.c. F. Place cavity drainage material in cavities to comply with configuration requirements for cavity drainage material in "Miscellaneous Masonry Accessories" Article. 3.11 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY INSTALLATION A. Temporary Formwork and Shores: Construct formwork and shores as needed to support reinforced masonry elements during construction. 1. Construct formwork to provide shape, line, and dimensions of completed masonry as indicated. Make forms sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar and grout. Brace, tie, and support forms to maintain position and shape during construction and curing of reinforced masonry. 2. Do not remove forms and shores until reinforced masonry members have hardened sufficiently to carry their own weight and other loads that may be placed on them during construction. B. Placing Reinforcement: Comply with requirements in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. C. Grouting: Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained enough strength to resist grout pressure. 1. Comply with requirements in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for cleanouts and for grout placement, including minimum grout space and maximum pour height. 2. Limit height of vertical grout pours to not more than 60 inches. Denton Fire Station No. 8 UNIT MASONRY Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 042000-12 August 2019 3.12 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing and Inspecting: Owner will engage special inspectors to perform tests and inspections and prepare reports. Allow inspectors access to scaffolding and work areas, as needed to perform tests and inspections. Retesting of materials that fail to comply with specified requirements shall be done at Contractor's expense. B. Inspections: Level 1 special inspections according to the "International Building Code." 1. Begin masonry construction only after inspectors have verified proportions of site-prepared mortar. 2. Place grout only after inspectors have verified compliance of grout spaces and of grades, sizes, and locations of reinforcement. 3. Place grout only after inspectors have verified proportions of site-prepared grout. C. Testing Prior to Construction: One set of tests. D. Testing Frequency: One set of tests for each 5000 sq. ft. of wall area or portion thereof. E. Clay Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit provided, according to ASTM C 67 for compressive strength. F. Concrete Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit provided, according to ASTM C 140 for compressive strength. G. Mortar Aggregate Ratio Test (Proportion Specification): For each mix provided, according to ASTM C 780. H. Mortar Test (Property Specification): For each mix provided, according to ASTM C 780. Test mortar for mortar air content and compressive strength. I. Grout Test (Compressive Strength): For each mix provided, according to ASTM C 1019. J. Prism Test: For each type of construction provided, according to ASTM C 1314 at 7 days and at 28 days. 3.13 REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING A. Remove and replace masonry units that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise damaged or that do not match adjoining units. Install new units to match adjoining units; install in fresh mortar, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement. B. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints. C. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows: 1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape hoes or chisels. 2. Protect adjacent stone and non-masonry surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering them with liquid strippable masking agent or polyethylene film and waterproof masking tape. 3. Wet wall surfaces with water before applying cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by rinsing surfaces thoroughly with clear water. 4. Clean brick by bucket-and-brush hand-cleaning method described in BIA Technical Notes 20. 5. Clean masonry with a proprietary acidic cleaner applied according to manufacturer's written instructions. 6. Clean concrete masonry by cleaning method indicated in NCMA TEK 8-2A applicable to type of stain on exposed surfaces. 3.14 MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL A. Salvageable Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, excess masonry materials are Contractor's property. At completion of unit masonry work, remove from Project site. B. Waste Disposal as Fill Material: Dispose of clean masonry waste, including excess or soil-contaminated sand, waste mortar, and broken masonry units, by crushing and mixing with fill material as fill is placed. 1. Crush masonry waste to less than 4 inches in each dimension. 2. Mix masonry waste with at least two parts of specified fill material for each part of masonry waste. Fill material is specified in Section 310000 Earthwork. 3. Do not dispose of masonry waste as fill within 24 inches of finished grade. C. Excess Masonry Waste: Remove excess clean masonry waste that cannot be used as fill, as described above, and other masonry waste, and legally dispose of off Owner's property. END OF SECTION Denton Fire Station No. 8 MANUFACTURED STONE VENEER Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 047300-1 August 2019 SECTION 047300 – MANUFACTURED STONE VENEER PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Manufactured (simulated) stone veneer. 2. Reinforcement, anchorages, mortar, and accessories. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Submit for fabricated wire reinforcement and each type of stone specified. Include all applicable physical and performance data. 2. Manufacturer’s detailed installation instructions. B. Samples for Initial Selection. C. Samples for Verification: Submit 4 samples of manufactured stone units to illustrate color, texture, and size range of each type unit. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. List of projects for which manufacturer has supplied manufactured stone materials in the past 5 yea.rs B. Certifications listed in Quality Assurance article of Part 1 this Section. 1.4 FIELD SAMPLES A. Sample Installation: Construct stone to 3 feet by 4 feet panel size, including mortar, special shapes, bonding, joint work, reinforcement, moisture barrier, grouting, corbeling, mortar color, expansion, control joints, and accessories 1. Obtain Architect’s approval before beginning work. Protect and retain sample as a basis on which the quality of the work will be judged. Do not remove until Substantial Completion. 2. Accepted Field Sample: May not remain as part of completed Work 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer: Minimum 5 years experience in similar types of work of similar scope and be able to furnish list of previous jobs and references if requested by Architect. B. Fabricator: Licensee of manufacturer with not less than 5 years experience manufacturing manufactured stone products of size, type, and quantity as required for this project. C. Expansion Joints: Provide expansion joints as indicated on Drawings or, if not indicated, install at frequency and in accordance with details and as recommended by manufacturer. Confirm locations and frequency with Architect before beginning work. D. Certifications: 1. Provide written documentation that products have met or exceeded at least one of the following certifications for a minimum of 10 years: a. ICBO – International Conference of Building Officials; b. SBCCI – Southern Building Code Congress International; c. BOCA – Building Officials and Code Administrators International; or d. ICC – International Code Council. E. Mockups: Build mockups to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Build mockup of typical wall area as shown on Drawings. If not shown on drawings, provide mockup based on the following below: 2. Build mockups for each type of stone masonry in sizes approximately 48 inches long by 48 inches high by full thickness, including face and backup wythes and accessories. a. Include coping at top of mockup. b. Include a sealant-filled joint at least 16 inches long in mockup. c. Include through-wall flashing installed for a 24-inch length by 61-inch width, match actual conditions of project, with a 12-inch length of flashing left exposed to view (omit stone masonry above half of flashing). d. Include studs, sheathing, veneer anchors, flashing, and weep holes in exterior masonry veneer wall mockup. Denton Fire Station No. 8 MANUFACTURED STONE VENEER Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 047300-2 August 2019 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: 1. Minimum air temperature of 40 degrees F prior to, during, and for 48 hours after completion of work. 2. Cold Weather Requirements: IMIAC (International Masonry Industry All-Weather Council) - Recommended Practices and Guide Specifications for Cold Weather Masonry Construction. 3. Hot Weather Requirements: If temperatures exceed 90 degrees Fahrenheit during the installation, additional moisture will need to be added to the backs of the stone veneer and scratch coated surface. Shade and/or frequent misting of the wall and stone may be required. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store mortar materials on pallets in dry place. B. Protect materials from rain, moisture, and freezing temperatures. C. Protect reinforcement and accessories from elements. D. Store manufactured stone above ground on level platforms, which allow air circulation under stacked units. E. Handle units on pallets or flatbed barrows. F. Do not permit free discharge from conveyor units or transporting in mortar trays 1.8 WARRANTY A. Special Warranties: Provide 50-year warranty against manufacturing defects in manufactured stone products. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURER A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Coronado Stone Products; 2025 Country Club Dr.; Carrollton, TX 75006; Telephone: 888-567-2833; Web: www.coronado.com. B. Substitutions: Submit in accordance with Section 012500. 2.2 STONE MATERIALS A. Manufactured Stone: 1. Option 1: (Basis of Design) a. Pattern: Idaho Drystack b. Color: Aspen 2. Option 2: a. Pattern: Idaho Drystack b. Color: Grey Quartzite 3. Provide samples of each option for Owner review and selection. Refer A-9.01 for mockup and sample size requirements. B. Stone Accessories: 1. Provide accessory and accent stones, such as quoins, wall caps, keystones, and window moldings, as indicated on Drawings. 2. Window Sill Profile: 900 Series. 3. Window Sill Color: #2 Grey. C. Manufactured Stone Veneer Properties: Units consisting of Portland cement, lightweight aggregates and oxide pigments. 1. Compressive Strength: Tested in accordance with ASTM C39 and ASTM C192, greater than 1800 psi. 2. Shear Bond Test: Tested in accordance with ASTM C482, greater than 50 psi. 3. Water Absorption: Tested in accordance with section 3.1.4 and 4.6 of ICC-ES AC51. 4. Freeze/Thaw: Tested in accordance with ASTM C67, less than 3% mass loss. 5. Unit Weight: Shipping weight is less than 15 lbs. per sq. ft., density is determined in accordance with ASTM C567. 2.3 RELATED MATERIALS A. Setting Accessories: 1. Moisture Barrier: Refer to Section 072400. 2. Joint Sealant: Refer to Section 079200. 3. Fasteners: Coated 1-1/2 inch nails, staples, or screws of type and for spacing as recommended by manufactured stone manufacturer for loads encountered.. 4. Cleaner: Nonacid cleaner as recommended by manufactured stone manufacturer. Denton Fire Station No. 8 MANUFACTURED STONE VENEER Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 047300-3 August 2019 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION A. Do not begin the installation process until substrates have been properly prepared. B. Notify Architect of any unsatisfactory preparation of substrate before proceeding. C. Correct all unsatisfactory substrate conditions before installation begins. D. Verify roofs use proper water displacement methods to direct moisture away from the installed stone veneer. E. If substrate surface is questionable, bonding tests should be performed before installation to assess adhesion and confirm proper bonding strength. F. Flashing must be installed at wall penetrations and terminations of the stone veneer. Assure that all flashing and kickouts are corrosion resistant, integrated with the water resistive barrier properly, and installed in accordance with the local building code requirements. G. Clean all surfaces thoroughly prior to installation. H. Use manufacturer surface preparation recommendations to achieve best result. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Water Resistive Barrier: 1. Refer to Section 072400 for instructions. B. Mortar: 1. Apply bonding agent to masonry or concrete substrates in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. 2. Apply mortar-thinset adhesive mixture to the back of the stone for dry stack application. C. Manufactured Stone Veneer: Install in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. 1. Stone Veneer Pattern: Follow the pattern as shown in manufacturer’s current product catalog, website, and new product specification sheets. Product should be pulled from a variety of boxes and blended on site during installation to ensure a consistent overall project color. 2. For dry stack applications, begin stone installation at bottom of wall, maintaining unit level and plum 3. Press units firmly into position, jiggle each piece slightly and apply light pressure to unit to ensure firm bonding, causing mortar to extrude slightly around edges of units and to leave a joint width of size indicated in manufacturer’s instructions. 4. Joint Type: a. Dry Stack Joints: Place units without mortar joints. 5. Install outside corner return units with short and long lengths alternated. 6. Install accessory pieces (quoins, caps, sills, moldings) as work progresses, using same techniques as units in field of wall. D. Plan work to minimize jobsite cutting. Perform necessary cutting with proper tools to provide uniform edges; take care to prevent breaking unit corners or edges. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Cutting and Fitting: Cut and fit for chases, pipes, conduit, sleeves, and grounds. Coordinate with other sections of work to provide correct size, shape, and location. 1. Obtain approval prior to cutting or fitting any area not indicated or where appearance or strength of masonry work may be impaired. 3.4 CLEANING AND SEALING A. Cleaning: Comply with Section 017300. 1. Refer Section 042000 for product. 2. Remove excess mortar and smears using brush or steel wool as recommended by stone manufacturer. 3. Replace defective mortar. Match adjacent work. 4. Clean soiled surfaces with non-acidic solution, acceptable to the stone manufacturer, which will not harm masonry or adjacent materials. 5. Leave surfaces thoroughly clean and free of mortar and other soiling. 6. Use nonmetallic tools in cleaning operations. B. Sealer Application: Apply stone sealer to comply with stone producer’s and sealer manufacturer’s written instructions. 1. Refer Section 071900 for product. END OF SECTION City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING FWN&A Structural Engineering 051200 - 1 August 2019 SECTION 051200 - STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Structural steel. 2. Grout. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 053100 "Steel Decking" for field installation of shear connectors through deck. 2. Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for steel lintels and shelf angles not attached to structural-steel frame, miscellaneous steel fabrications and other steel items not defined as structural steel. 3. Section 099113 "Exterior Painting" and Section 099123 "Interior Painting" and for surface-preparation and priming requirements. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Structural Steel: Elements of the structural frame indicated on Drawings and as described in AISC 303, "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges." 1.4 COORDINATION A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are compatible with one another. B. Coordinate installation of anchorage items to be embedded in or attached to other construction without delaying the Work. Provide setting diagrams, sheet metal templates, instructions, and directions for installation. 1.5 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING FWN&A Structural Engineering 051200 - 2 August 2019 1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication of structural-steel components. 1. Include details of cuts, connections, splices, camber, holes, and other pertinent data. 2. Include embedment Drawings. 3. Indicate welds by standard AWS symbols, distinguishing between shop and field welds, and show size, length, and type of each weld. Show backing bars that are to be removed and supplemental fillet welds where backing bars are to remain. 4. Indicate type, size, and length of bolts, distinguishing between shop and field bolts. Identify pretensioned and slip-critical, high-strength bolted connections. C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For structural-steel connections indicated to comply with design loads, include analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 1.7 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer, fabricator, shop-painting applicators and testing agency. B. Welding certificates. C. Paint Compatibility Certificates: From manufacturers of topcoats applied over shop primers, certifying that shop primers are compatible with topcoats. D. Mill test reports for structural steel, including chemical and physical properties. E. Product Test Reports: For the following: 1. Bolts, nuts, and washers including mechanical properties and chemical analysis. 2. Direct-tension indicators. 3. Tension-control, high-strength, bolt-nut-washer assemblies. 4. Shear stud connectors. 5. Shop primers. 6. Nonshrink grout. F. Survey of existing conditions. G. Source quality-control reports. H. Field quality-control and special inspection reports. 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: A qualified fabricator that participates in the AISC Quality Certification Program and is designated an AISC-Certified Plant, Category STD. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING FWN&A Structural Engineering 051200 - 3 August 2019 B. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who participates in the AISC Quality Certification Program and is designated an AISC-Certified Erector, Category CSE. C. Shop-Painting Applicators: Qualified according to AISC's Sophisticated Paint Endorsement P1 or to SSPC-QP 3, "Standard Procedure for Evaluating Qualifications of Shop Painting Applicators." D. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." E. Comply with applicable provisions of the following specifications and documents: 1. AISC 303. 2. AISC 341 and AISC 341s1. 3. AISC 360. 4. RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts." 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel members off ground and spaced by using pallets, dunnage, or other supports and spacers. Protect steel members and packaged materials from corrosion and deterioration. 1. Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause distortion, damage, or overload to members or supporting structures. Repair or replace damaged materials or structures as directed. B. Store fasteners in a protected place in sealed containers with manufacturer's labels intact. 1. Fasteners may be repackaged provided Owner's testing and inspecting agency observes repackaging and seals containers. 2. Clean and relubricate bolts and nuts that become dry or rusty before use. 3. Comply with manufacturers' written recommendations for cleaning and lubricating ASTM F 1852 fasteners and for retesting fasteners after lubrication. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Connections: Provide details of simple shear connections required by the Contract Documents to be selected or completed by structural-steel fabricator, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, to withstand loads indicated and comply with other information and restrictions indicated. 1. Select and complete connections using schematic details indicated and AISC 360. 2. Use Allowable Stress Design; data are given at service-load level. B. Construction: Combined system of braced frame and shear walls. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING FWN&A Structural Engineering 051200 - 4 August 2019 2.2 STRUCTURAL-STEEL MATERIALS A. W-Shapes: ASTM A 992/A 992M. B. Channels, Angles: ASTM A 36/A 36M. C. Plate and Bar: ASTM A 36/A 36M. D. Cold-Formed Hollow Structural Sections: ASTM A 500/A 500M, Grade B, structural tubing. E. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E or Type S, Grade B. 1. Weight Class: As noted. 2. Finish: Black except where indicated to be galvanized. F. Steel Castings: ASTM A 216/A 216M, Grade WCB with supplementary requirement S11. G. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS requirements. 2.3 BOLTS, CONNECTORS, AND ANCHORS A. High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325, Type 1, heavy-hex steel structural bolts; ASTM A 563, Grade C, heavy-hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F 436, Type 1, hardened carbon-steel washers; all with plain finish. 1. Direct-Tension Indicators: ASTM F 959, Type 325, compressible-washer type with plain finish. B. Shear Connectors: ASTM A 108, Grades 1015 through 1020, headed-stud type, cold-finished carbon steel; AWS D1.1/D1.1M, Type B. C. Headed Anchor Rods: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, straight. 1. Nuts: ASTM A 563 heavy-hex carbon steel. 2. Plate Washers: ASTM A 36/A 36M carbon steel. 3. Washers: ASTM F 436, Type 1, hardened carbon steel. 4. Finish: Plain, ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C. D. Threaded Rods: ASTM A 36/A 36M. 1. Nuts: ASTM A 563 heavy-hex carbon steel. 2. Washers: ASTM F 436, Type 1, hardened or ASTM A 36/A 36M carbon steel. 3. Finish: Plain. E. Clevises and Turnbuckles: Made from cold-finished carbon steel bars, ASTM A 108, Grade 1035. F. Eye Bolts and Nuts: Made from cold-finished carbon steel bars, ASTM A 108, Grade 1030. G. Sleeve Nuts: Made from cold-finished carbon steel bars, ASTM A 108, Grade 1018. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING FWN&A Structural Engineering 051200 - 5 August 2019 2.4 PRIMER A. Primer: Comply with Section 099113 "Exterior Painting" and Section 099123 "Interior Painting." B. Primer: Fabricator's standard lead- and chromate-free, nonasphaltic, rust-inhibiting primer complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat. 2.5 GROUT A. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, factory-packaged, nonmetallic aggregate grout, noncorrosive and nonstaining, mixed with water to consistency suitable for application and a 30-minute working time. 2.6 FABRICATION A. Structural Steel: Fabricate and assemble in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate according to AISC 303, "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges," and to AISC 360. 1. Camber structural-steel members where indicated. 2. Fabricate beams with rolling camber up. 3. Identify high-strength structural steel according to ASTM A 6/A 6M and maintain markings until structural steel has been erected. 4. Mark and match-mark materials for field assembly. 5. Complete structural-steel assemblies, including welding of units, before starting shop- priming operations. B. Thermal Cutting: Perform thermal cutting by machine to greatest extent possible. 1. Plane thermally cut edges to be welded to comply with requirements in AWS D1.1/D1.1M. C. Bolt Holes: Cut, drill, or punch standard bolt holes perpendicular to metal surfaces. D. Finishing: Accurately finish ends of columns and other members transmitting bearing loads. E. Welded Door Frames: Build up welded door frames attached to structural-steel frame. Weld exposed joints continuously and grind smooth. Plug-weld fixed steel bar stops to frames. Secure removable stops to frames with countersunk machine screws, uniformly spaced not more than 10 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated. F. Holes: Provide holes required for securing other work to structural steel and for other work to pass through steel members. 1. Cut, drill, or punch holes perpendicular to steel surfaces. Do not thermally cut bolt holes or enlarge holes by burning. 2. Baseplate Holes: Cut, drill, or punch holes perpendicular to steel surfaces. 3. Weld threaded nuts to framing and other specialty items indicated to receive other work. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING FWN&A Structural Engineering 051200 - 6 August 2019 2.7 SHOP CONNECTIONS A. High-Strength Bolts: Shop install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified. 1. Joint Type: Snug tightened. 2.8 SHOP PRIMING A. Shop prime steel surfaces except the following: 1. Surfaces embedded in concrete or mortar. Extend priming of partially embedded members to a depth of 2 inches. 2. Surfaces to be field welded. 3. Surfaces of high-strength bolted, slip-critical connections. 4. Surfaces to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials (applied fireproofing). 5. Galvanized surfaces. 6. Surfaces enclosed in interior construction. B. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to be painted. Remove loose rust and mill scale and spatter, slag, or flux deposits. Prepare surfaces according to the following specifications and standards: 1. SSPC-SP 2, "Hand Tool Cleaning." or SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning." C. Priming: Immediately after surface preparation, apply primer according to manufacturer's written instructions and at rate recommended by SSPC to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils. Use priming methods that result in full coverage of joints, corners, edges, and exposed surfaces. 1. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges. 2. Apply two coats of shop paint to surfaces that are inaccessible after assembly or erection. Change color of second coat to distinguish it from first. 2.9 GALVANIZING A. Hot-Dip Galvanized Finish: Apply zinc coating by the hot-dip process to member where noted according to ASTM A 123/A 123M. 1. Galvanize lintels and shelf angles. 2.10 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform shop tests and inspections. 1. Provide testing agency with access to places where structural-steel work is being fabricated or produced to perform tests and inspections. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING FWN&A Structural Engineering 051200 - 7 August 2019 B. Bolted Connections: Inspect and test shop-bolted connections according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts." C. Welded Connections: Visually inspect shop-welded connections according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M and the following inspection procedures, at testing agency's option: 1. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165. 2. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on finished weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration are not accepted. 3. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164. 4. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94. D. Prepare test and inspection reports. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify, with certified steel erector present, elevations of concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces and locations of anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments for compliance with requirements. 1. Prepare a certified survey of existing conditions. Include bearing surfaces, anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments showing dimensions, locations, angles, and elevations. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Provide temporary shores, guys, braces, and other supports during erection to keep structural steel secure, plumb, and in alignment against temporary construction loads and loads equal in intensity to design loads. Remove temporary supports when permanent structural steel, connections, and bracing are in place unless otherwise indicated. 3.3 ERECTION A. Set structural steel accurately in locations and to elevations indicated and according to AISC 303 and AISC 360. B. Baseplates Bearing Plates and Leveling Plates: Clean concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen surfaces prior to setting plates. Clean bottom surface of plates. 1. Set plates for structural members on wedges, shims, or setting nuts as required. 2. Weld plate washers to top of baseplate. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING FWN&A Structural Engineering 051200 - 8 August 2019 3. Snug-tighten anchor rods after supported members have been positioned and plumbed. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of plate before packing with grout. 4. Promptly pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates so no voids remain. Neatly finish exposed surfaces; protect grout and allow to cure. Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions for shrinkage-resistant grouts. C. Maintain erection tolerances of structural steel within AISC 303, "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges." D. Align and adjust various members that form part of complete frame or structure before permanently fastening. Before assembly, clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces that are in permanent contact with members. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for discrepancies in elevations and alignment. 1. Level and plumb individual members of structure. E. Splice members only where indicated. F. Do not use thermal cutting during erection unless approved by Engineer. Finish thermally cut sections within smoothness limits in AWS D1.1/D1.1M. G. Do not enlarge unfair holes in members by burning or using drift pins. Ream holes that must be enlarged to admit bolts. 3.4 FIELD CONNECTIONS A. High-Strength Bolts: Install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified. 1. Joint Type: Snug tightened. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Special Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified special inspector to perform the following special inspections: 1. Verify structural-steel materials and inspect steel frame joint details. 2. Verify weld materials and inspect welds. 3. Verify connection materials and inspect high-strength bolted connections. B. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. C. Bolted Connections: Inspect and test bolted connections according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts." D. Welded Connections: Visually inspect field welds according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING FWN&A Structural Engineering 051200 - 9 August 2019 1. In addition to visual inspection, test and inspect field welds according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M and the following inspection procedures, at testing agency's option: a. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165. b. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on finished weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration are not accepted. c. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164. d. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94. 3.6 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION A. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean areas where galvanizing is damaged or missing and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780/A 780M. B. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean exposed areas where primer is damaged or missing and paint with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces. 1. Clean and prepare surfaces by SSPC-SP 2 hand-tool cleaning or SSPC-SP 3 power-tool cleaning. C. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting are specified in Section 099113 "Exterior Painting" and Section 099123 "Interior Painting." D. Touchup Priming: Cleaning and touchup priming are specified in Section 099600 "High- Performance Coatings." END OF SECTION 051200 City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 STEEL JOIST FRAMING FWN&A Structural Engineering 052100 - 1 August 2019 SECTION 052100 - STEEL JOIST FRAMING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. K-series steel joists. 2. K-series steel joist substitutes. 3. Joist accessories. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 042000 "Unit Masonry" for installing bearing plates in unit masonry. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. SJI's "Specifications": Steel Joist Institute's "Standard Specifications, Load Tables and Weight Tables for Steel Joists and Joist Girders." B. Special Joists: Steel joists requiring modification by manufacturer to support nonuniform, unequal, or special loading conditions that invalidate load tables in SJI's "Specifications." 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of joist, accessory, and product. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Include layout, designation, number, type, location, and spacing of joists. 2. Include joining and anchorage details; bracing, bridging, and joist accessories; splice and connection locations and details; and attachments to other construction. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For manufacturer. B. Welding certificates. C. Manufacturer certificates. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 STEEL JOIST FRAMING FWN&A Structural Engineering 052100 - 2 August 2019 D. Mill Certificates: For each type of bolt. E. Comprehensive engineering analysis of special joists signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for its preparation. F. Field quality-control reports. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A manufacturer certified by SJI to manufacture joists complying with applicable standard specifications and load tables in SJI's "Specifications, 1. Manufacturer's responsibilities include providing professional engineering services for designing special joists to comply with performance requirements. B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify field-welding procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, and handle joists as recommended in SJI's "Specifications." B. Protect joists from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and handling. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: 1. Canam Steel Corporation; Canam Group, Inc. 2. CMC Joist & Deck. 3. New Millennium Building Systems, LLC. 4. Valley Joist. 5. Vulcraft; Nucor Vulcraft Group. 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance: Provide special joists and connections capable of withstanding design loads indicated. 1. Use ASD; data are given at service-load level. 2. Design special joists to withstand design loads with live-load deflections no greater than the following: a. Roof Joists: Vertical deflection of [1/360] [1/240] of the span. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 STEEL JOIST FRAMING FWN&A Structural Engineering 052100 - 3 August 2019 2.3 K-SERIES STEEL JOISTS A. Manufacture steel joists of type indicated according to "Standard Specification for Open Web Steel Joists, K-Series" in SJI's "Specifications," with steel-angle top- and bottom-chord members, underslung ends, and parallel top chord. 1. Joist Type: K-series steel joists. B. Steel Joist Substitutes: Manufacture according to "Standard Specifications for Open Web Steel Joists, K-Series" in SJI's "Specifications," with steel-angle or -channel members. C. Extended Ends: Extend bearing ends of joists with SJI's Type R extended ends where indicated, complying with SJI's "Specifications." D. Camber joists according to SJI's "Specifications.". E. Equip bearing ends of joists with manufacturer's standard beveled ends or sloped shoes if joist slope exceeds 1/4 inch per 12 inches. 2.4 PRIMERS A. Primer: SSPC-Paint 15, or manufacturer's standard shop primer complying with performance requirements in SSPC-Paint 15. 2.5 JOIST ACCESSORIES A. Bridging: Provide bridging anchors and number of rows of horizontal or diagonal bridging of material, size, and type required by SJI's "Specifications for type of joist, chord size, spacing, and span. Furnish additional erection bridging if required for stability. B. Steel bearing plates with integral anchorages are specified in Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications." C. Furnish ceiling extensions, either extended bottom-chord elements or a separate extension unit of enough strength to support ceiling construction. Extend ends to within 1/2 inch of finished wall surface unless otherwise indicated. 1. Finish: Plain, uncoated. D. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS standards. E. Furnish miscellaneous accessories including splice plates and bolts required by joist manufacturer to complete joist assembly. 2.6 CLEANING AND SHOP PAINTING A. Clean and remove loose scale, heavy rust, and other foreign materials from fabricated joists and accessories by hand-tool cleaning, SSPC-SP 2 or power-tool cleaning, SSPC-SP 3. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 STEEL JOIST FRAMING FWN&A Structural Engineering 052100 - 4 August 2019 B. Do not prime paint joists and accessories to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials. C. Apply one coat of shop primer to joists and joist accessories to be primed to provide a continuous, dry paint film not less than 1 mil thick. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine supporting substrates, embedded bearing plates, and abutting structural framing for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Do not install joists until supporting construction is in place and secured. B. Install joists and accessories plumb, square, and true to line; securely fasten to supporting construction according to SJI's "Specifications," joist manufacturer's written instructions, and requirements in this Section. 1. Before installation, splice joists delivered to Project site in more than one piece. 2. Space, adjust, and align joists accurately in location before permanently fastening. 3. Install temporary bracing and erection bridging, connections, and anchors to ensure that joists are stabilized during construction. 4. Do not rigidly connecting bottom-chord extensions to columns or supports. C. Field weld joists to supporting steel bearing plates and framework. Coordinate welding sequence and procedure with placement of joists. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work. D. Install and connect bridging concurrently with joist erection, before construction loads are applied. Anchor ends of bridging lines at top and bottom chords if terminating at walls or beams. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. B. Visually inspect field welds according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M. 1. In addition to visual inspection, test field welds according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M and the following procedures, at testing agency's option: a. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165/E 165M. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 STEEL JOIST FRAMING FWN&A Structural Engineering 052100 - 5 August 2019 b. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709. c. Ultrasonic Testing: ASTM E 164. d. Radiographic Testing: ASTM E 94. C. Visually inspect bolted connections. D. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Touchup Painting: After installation, promptly clean, prepare, and prime or reprime field connections, rust spots, and abraded surfaces of prime-painted joists, bearing plates, abutting structural steel, and accessories. 1. Clean and prepare surfaces by hand-tool cleaning according to SSPC-SP 2 or power-tool cleaning according to SSPC-SP 3. 2. Apply a compatible primer of same type as primer used on adjacent surfaces. END OF SECTION 052100 City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 STEEL DECKING FWN&A Structural Engineering 053100 - 1 August 2019 SECTION 053100 - STEEL DECKING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Roof deck. 2. Acoustical roof deck. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for framing deck openings with miscellaneous steel shapes. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of deck, accessory, and product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Include layout and types of deck panels, anchorage details, reinforcing channels, pans, cut deck openings, special jointing, accessories, and attachments to other construction. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Welding certificates. B. Product Certificates: For each type of steel deck. C. Product Test Reports: For tests performed by a qualified testing agency, indicating that each of the following complies with requirements: 1. Power-actuated mechanical fasteners. 2. Acoustical roof deck. D. Evaluation Reports: For steel deck, from ICC-ES. E. Field quality-control reports. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 STEEL DECKING FWN&A Structural Engineering 053100 - 2 August 2019 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 329 for testing indicated. B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.3/D1.3M, "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel." C. FM Global Listing: Provide steel roof deck evaluated by FM Global and listed in its "Approval Guide, Building Materials" for Class 1 fire rating and Class 1-90 windstorm ratings. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect steel deck from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and handling. B. Stack steel deck on platforms or pallets and slope to provide drainage. Protect with a waterproof covering and ventilate to avoid condensation. 1. Protect and ventilate acoustical cellular roof deck with factory-installed insulation to maintain insulation free of moisture. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. AISI Specifications: Comply with calculated structural characteristics of steel deck according to AISI's "North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members." 2.2 ROOF DECK A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: 1. Canam Steel Corporation; Canam Group, Inc. 2. New Millennium Building Systems, LLC. 3. Nucor Corp. 4. Valley Joist. 5. Verco Decking, Inc., a Nucor company. B. Roof Deck: Fabricate panels, without top-flange stiffening grooves, to comply with "SDI Specifications and Commentary for Steel Roof Deck," in SDI Publication No. 31, and with the following: 1. Prime-Painted Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Structural Steel (SS), Grade 33 minimum, shop primed with manufacturer's standard baked-on, rust-inhibitive primer. a. Color: Manufacturer's standard. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 STEEL DECKING FWN&A Structural Engineering 053100 - 3 August 2019 2. Deck Profile: As indicated. 3. Profile Depth: As indicated. 4. Design Uncoated-Steel Thickness: As indicated. 5. Design Uncoated-Steel Thicknesses; Deck Unit/Bottom Plate: As indicated]. 6. Span Condition: Triple span or more. 7. Side Laps: Overlapped. 2.3 ACOUSTICAL ROOF DECK A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: 1. Canam Steel Corporation; Canam Group, Inc. 2. New Millennium Building Systems, LLC. 3. Nucor Corp. B. Roof Deck: Fabricate panels, without top-flange stiffening grooves, to comply with "SDI Specifications and Commentary for Steel Roof Deck," in SDI Publication No. 31, and with the following: 1. Prime-Painted Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Structural Steel (SS), Grade 33 minimum, shop primed with manufacturer's standard baked-on, rust-inhibitive primer. a. Color: Manufacturer's standard. 2. Deck Profile: As indicated. 3. Profile Depth: As indicated. 4. Design Uncoated-Steel Thickness: As indicated. 5. Span Condition: Triple span or more. 6. Side Laps: Overlapped. C. Acoustical Roof Deck: Fabricate panels, without top-flange stiffening grooves, to comply with "SDI Specifications and Commentary for Steel Roof Deck," in SDI Publication No. 31, and with the following: 1. Prime-Painted Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Structural Steel (SS), Grade 33 minimum, shop primed with manufacturer's standard baked-on, rust-inhibitive primer. a. Color: Manufacturer's standard. 2. Deck Profile: As indicated. 3. Cellular Deck Profile: As indicated, with bottom plate. 4. Profile Depth: As indicated. 5. Design Uncoated-Steel Thickness: As indicated. 6. Design Uncoated-Steel Thicknesses; Deck Unit/Bottom Plate: As indicated. 7. Span Condition: Triple span or more. 8. Side Laps: Overlapped. 9. Acoustical Perforations: Deck units with manufacturer's standard perforated vertical webs. 10. Sound-Absorbing Insulation: Manufacturer's standard premolded roll or strip of glass or mineral fiber. a. Installation of sound-absorbing insulation as specified by Architect. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 STEEL DECKING FWN&A Structural Engineering 053100 - 4 August 2019 11. Acoustical Performance: NRC 0.65, tested according to ASTM C 423. 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard accessory materials for deck that comply with requirements indicated. B. Mechanical Fasteners: As indicated. C. Side-Lap Fasteners: As indicated. D. Flexible Closure Strips: Vulcanized, closed-cell, synthetic rubber. E. Miscellaneous Sheet Metal Deck Accessories: Steel sheet, minimum yield strength of 33,000 psi, not less than 0.0359-inch design uncoated thickness, of same material and finish as deck; of profile indicated or required for application. F. Column Closures, End Closures, Z-Closures, and Cover Plates: Steel sheet, of same material, finish, and thickness as deck unless otherwise indicated. G. Flat Sump Plates: Single-piece steel sheet, 0.0747 inch thick, of same material and finish as deck. For drains, cut holes in the field. H. Recessed Sump Pans: Single-piece steel sheet, 0.0747 inch thick, of same material and finish as deck, with 3-inch- wide flanges and sloped recessed pans of 1-1/2-inch minimum depth. For drains, cut holes in the field. I. Repair Paint: Manufacturer's standard rust-inhibitive primer of same color as primer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine supporting frame and field conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Install deck panels and accessories according to applicable specifications and commentary in SDI Publication No. 31, manufacturer's written instructions, and requirements in this Section. B. Locate deck bundles to prevent overloading of supporting members. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 STEEL DECKING FWN&A Structural Engineering 053100 - 5 August 2019 C. Place deck panels on supporting frame and adjust to final position with ends accurately aligned and bearing on supporting frame before being permanently fastened. Do not stretch or contract side-lap interlocks. D. Place deck panels flat and square and fasten to supporting frame without warp or deflection. E. Cut and neatly fit deck panels and accessories around openings and other work projecting through or adjacent to deck. F. Provide additional reinforcement and closure pieces at openings as required for strength, continuity of deck, and support of other work. 3.3 ROOF-DECK INSTALLATION A. Fasten roof-deck panels to steel supporting members as indicated: B. End Bearing: Install deck ends over supporting frame with a minimum end bearing of 1-1/2 inches, with end joints as follows: 1. End Joints: Lapped 2 inches minimum. C. Roof Sump Pans and Sump Plates: Install over openings provided in roof deck and mechanically fasten flanges to top of deck. Space mechanical fasteners not more than 12 inches apart with at least one fastener at each corner. 1. Install reinforcing channels or zees in ribs to span between supports and mechanically fasten. D. Miscellaneous Roof-Deck Accessories: Install ridge and valley plates, finish strips, end closures, and reinforcing channels according to deck manufacturer's written instructions. Mechanically fasten to substrate to provide a complete deck installation. 1. Mechanically attach cover plates at changes in direction of roof-deck panels unless otherwise indicated. E. Flexible Closure Strips: Install flexible closure strips over partitions, walls, and where indicated. Install with adhesive according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure complete closure. F. Sound-Absorbing Insulation: Installation into topside ribs of deck as specified by Architect. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. B. Field welds will be subject to inspection. C. Prepare test and inspection reports. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 STEEL DECKING FWN&A Structural Engineering 053100 - 6 August 2019 3.5 PROTECTION A. Repair Painting: Wire brush and clean rust spots, welds, and abraded areas on both surfaces of prime-painted deck immediately after installation, and apply repair paint. 1. Apply repair paint, of same color as adjacent shop-primed deck, to top and bottom surfaces of deck. END OF SECTION 053100 City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 COLD-FORMED-METAL FRAMING FWN&A Structural Engineering 054000 - 1 August 2019 SECTION 054000 - COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Exterior non-load-bearing wall framing. 2. Interior non-load-bearing wall framing exceeding height limitations of standard, nonstructural metal framing. 3. Ceiling joist framing. 4. Soffit framing. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for miscellaneous steel shapes, masonry shelf angles, and connections used with cold-formed metal framing. 2. Section 092216 "Non-Structural Metal Framing" for standard, interior non-load-bearing, metal-stud framing, with height limitations and ceiling-suspension assemblies. 1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Include layout, spacings, sizes, thicknesses, and types of cold-formed steel framing; fabrication; and fastening and anchorage details, including mechanical fasteners. 2. Indicate reinforcing channels, opening framing, supplemental framing, strapping, bracing, bridging, splices, accessories, connection details, and attachment to adjoining work. C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For cold-formed steel framing. 1. All structural member shall be designed and submitted, sealed by a Structural Engineer as a deferred submittal in accordance with the AISI “Specifications for the Design of Cold- Formed Structural Members”, latest edition. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 COLD-FORMED-METAL FRAMING FWN&A Structural Engineering 054000 - 2 August 2019 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For testing agency. B. Welding certificates. C. Product Certificates: For each type of code-compliance certification for studs and tracks. D. Product Test Reports: For each listed product, for tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency. 1. Steel sheet. 2. Expansion anchors. 3. Power-actuated anchors. 4. Mechanical fasteners. 5. Vertical deflection clips. 6. Horizontal drift deflection clips 7. Miscellaneous structural clips and accessories. E. Evaluation Reports: For nonstandard cold-formed steel framing post-installed anchors and power-actuated fasteners, from ICC-ES or other qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 329 for testing indicated. B. Product Tests: Mill certificates or data from a qualified independent testing agency indicating steel sheet complies with requirements, including base-metal thickness, yield strength, tensile strength, total elongation, chemical requirements, and metallic-coating thickness. C. Code-Compliance Certification of Studs and Tracks: Provide documentation that framing members are certified according to the product-certification program of the Steel Stud Manufacturers Association. D. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." 2. AWS D1.3/D1.3M, "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel." PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: 1. ClarkDietrich Building Systems. 2. MarinoWARE. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 COLD-FORMED-METAL FRAMING FWN&A Structural Engineering 054000 - 3 August 2019 3. MBA Building Supplies. 4. Nuconsteel, A Nucor Company. 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements," to design cold-formed steel framing. B. Structural Performance: Provide cold-formed steel framing capable of withstanding design loads within limits and under conditions indicated. 1. Design Loads: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Deflection Limits: Design framing systems to withstand design loads without deflections greater than the following: a. Exterior Non-Load-Bearing Framing: Horizontal deflection of 1/600 of the wall height. b. Interior Non-Load-Bearing Framing: Horizontal deflection of 1/360 of the wall height under a horizontal load of 5 lbf/sq. ft.. c. Ceiling Joist Framing: Vertical deflection of 1/360 of the span for live loads and 1/240 for total loads of the span. 3. Design framing systems to provide for movement of framing members located outside the insulated building envelope without damage or overstressing, sheathing failure, connection failure, undue strain on fasteners and anchors, or other detrimental effects when subject to a maximum ambient temperature change of 120 deg F. 4. Design framing system to maintain clearances at openings, to allow for construction tolerances, and to accommodate live load deflection of primary building structure as follows: a. Upward and downward movement of L/360. 5. Design exterior non-load-bearing wall framing to accommodate horizontal deflection without regard for contribution of sheathing materials. C. Cold-Formed Steel Framing Standards: Unless more stringent requirements are indicated, framing shall comply with AISI S100, AISI S200, and the following: 1. Wall Studs: AISI S211. 2. Headers: AISI S212. 3. Lateral Design: AISI S213. D. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Comply with ASTM E 119; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Indicate design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or from the listings of another qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 COLD-FORMED-METAL FRAMING FWN&A Structural Engineering 054000 - 4 August 2019 2.3 COLD-FORMED STEEL FRAMING MATERIALS A. Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1003/A 1003M, Structural Grade, Type H, metallic coated, of grade and coating designation as follows: 1. Grade: ST50H (50 ksi steel). 2. Coating: G60. B. Steel Sheet for Vertical Deflection and Drift Clips: ASTM A 653/A 653M, structural steel, zinc coated, of grade and coating as follows: 1. Grade: 50, Class 1. 2. Coating: G60. 2.4 FRAMING ACCESSORIES A. Fabricate steel-framing accessories from ASTM A 1003/A 1003M, Structural Grade, Type H, metallic coated steel sheet, of same grade and coating designation used for framing members. B. Provide accessories of manufacturer's standard thickness and configuration, unless otherwise indicated, as follows: 1. Supplementary framing. 2. Bracing, bridging, and solid blocking. 3. Web stiffeners. 4. Anchor clips. 5. End clips. 6. Foundation clips. 7. Gusset plates. 8. Stud kickers and knee braces. 9. Hole-reinforcing plates. 10. Backer plates. 2.5 ANCHORS, CLIPS, AND FASTENERS A. Steel Shapes and Clips: ASTM A 36/A 36M, zinc coated by hot-dip process according to ASTM A 123/A 123M. B. Anchor Rods: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, threaded carbon-steel hex-headed rods, carbon-steel nuts, and flat, hardened-steel washers; zinc coated by hot-dip process according to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C or mechanically deposition according to ASTM B 695, Class 50. C. Post-Installed Anchors: Fastener systems with bolts of same basic metal as fastened metal, if visible, unless otherwise indicated; with working capacity greater than or equal to the design load, according to an evaluation report acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on ICC-ES AC01, ICC-ES AC193, ICC-ES AC58 or ICC-ES AC308 as appropriate for the substrate. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 COLD-FORMED-METAL FRAMING FWN&A Structural Engineering 054000 - 5 August 2019 1. Uses: Securing cold-formed steel framing to structure. 2. Type: Torque-controlled expansion anchor or Torque-controlled adhesive anchor. 3. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise indicated. D. Power-Actuated Anchors: Fastener systems with working capacity greater than or equal to the design load, according to an evaluation report acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on ICC-ES AC70. E. Mechanical Fasteners: ASTM C 1513, corrosion-resistant-coated, self-drilling, self-tapping, steel drill screws. 1. Head Type: Low-profile head beneath sheathing; manufacturer's standard elsewhere. F. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS standards. 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Galvanizing Repair Paint: ASTM A 780/A 780M or SSPC-Paint 20. B. Sealer Gaskets: Closed-cell neoprene foam, 1/4 inch thick, selected from manufacturer's standard widths to match width of bottom track or rim track members as required. 2.7 FABRICATION A. Fabricate cold-formed steel framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with connections securely fastened, according to referenced AISI's specifications and standards, manufacturer's written instructions, and requirements in this Section. 1. Fabricate framing assemblies using jigs or templates. 2. Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut. 3. Fasten cold-formed steel framing members by welding, screw fastening, clinch fastening, pneumatic pin fastening, or riveting as standard with fabricator. Wire tying of framing members is not permitted. a. Comply with AWS D1.3/D1.3M requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work. b. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to Shop Drawings, with screws penetrating joined members by no fewer than three exposed screw threads. B. Tolerances: Fabricate assemblies level, plumb, and true to line to a maximum allowable variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet and as follows: 1. Spacing: Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch from plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or other finishing materials. 2. Squareness: Fabricate each cold-formed steel framing assembly to a maximum out-of- square tolerance of 1/8 inch. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 COLD-FORMED-METAL FRAMING FWN&A Structural Engineering 054000 - 6 August 2019 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, conditions, and abutting structural framing for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Install sealer gaskets at the underside of wall bottom track or rim track and at the top of foundation wall or slab at stud or joist locations. 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Cold-formed steel framing may be shop or field fabricated for installation, or it may be field assembled. B. Install cold-formed steel framing according to AISI S200, AISI S202, and manufacturer's written instructions unless more stringent requirements are indicated. C. Install shop- or field-fabricated, cold-formed framing and securely anchor to supporting structure. 1. Screw, bolt, or weld wall panels at horizontal and vertical junctures to produce flush, even, true-to-line joints with maximum variation in plane and true position between fabricated panels not exceeding 1/16 inch. D. Install cold-formed steel framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with connections securely fastened. 1. Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut. 2. Fasten cold-formed steel framing members by welding, screw fastening, clinch fastening, or riveting. Wire tying of framing members is not permitted. a. Comply with AWS D1.3/D1.3M requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work. b. Locate mechanical fasteners, install according to Shop Drawings, and comply with requirements for spacing, edge distances, and screw penetration. E. Install framing members in one-piece lengths unless splice connections are indicated for track or tension members. F. Install temporary bracing and supports to secure framing and support loads equal to those for which structure was designed. Maintain braces and supports in place, undisturbed, until entire integrated supporting structure has been completed and permanent connections to framing are secured. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 COLD-FORMED-METAL FRAMING FWN&A Structural Engineering 054000 - 7 August 2019 G. Install insulation, specified in Section 072100 "Thermal Insulation," in framing-assembly members, such as headers, sills, boxed joists, and multiple studs at openings, that are inaccessible on completion of framing work. H. Fasten hole-reinforcing plate over web penetrations that exceed size of manufacturer's approved or standard punched openings. 3.4 EXTERIOR NON-LOAD-BEARING WALL INSTALLATION A. Install continuous tracks sized to match studs. Align tracks accurately and securely anchor to supporting structure. B. Fasten both flanges of studs to top and bottom track unless otherwise indicated. Space studs as follows: 1. Stud Spacing: 16 inches. C. Set studs plumb, except as needed for diagonal bracing or required for nonplumb walls or warped surfaces and similar requirements. D. Isolate non-load-bearing steel framing from building structure to prevent transfer of vertical loads while providing lateral support. 1. Install double deep-leg deflection tracks and anchor outer track to building structure. 2. Connect vertical deflection clips to infill studs and anchor to building structure. 3. Connect drift clips to cold-formed steel framing and anchor to building structure. E. Install horizontal bridging in wall studs, spaced vertically in rows indicated on Shop Drawings but not more than 48 inches apart. Fasten at each stud intersection. 1. Channel Bridging: Cold-rolled steel channel, welded or mechanically fastened to webs of punched studs. 2. Strap Bridging: Combination of flat, taut, steel sheet straps of width and thickness indicated and stud-track solid blocking of width and thickness to match studs. Fasten flat straps to stud flanges and secure solid blocking to stud webs or flanges. 3. Bar Bridging: Proprietary bridging bars installed according to manufacturer's written instructions. F. Top Bridging for Single Deflection Track: Install row of horizontal bridging within 18 inches of single deflection track. Install a combination of bridging and stud or stud-track solid blocking of width and thickness matching studs, secured to stud webs or flanges. 1. Install solid blocking at centers indicated on Shop Drawings. G. Install miscellaneous framing and connections, including stud kickers, web stiffeners, clip angles, continuous angles, anchors, and fasteners, to provide a complete and stable wall-framing system. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 COLD-FORMED-METAL FRAMING FWN&A Structural Engineering 054000 - 8 August 2019 3.5 INTERIOR NON-LOAD-BEARING WALL INSTALLATION A. Install continuous tracks sized to match studs. Align tracks accurately and securely anchor to supporting structure. B. Fasten both flanges of studs to top and bottom track unless otherwise indicated. Space studs as follows: 1. Stud Spacing: 16 inches. C. Set studs plumb, except as needed for diagonal bracing or required for nonplumb walls or warped surfaces and similar requirements. D. Isolate non-load-bearing steel framing from building structure to prevent transfer of vertical loads while providing lateral support. 1. Install double deep-leg deflection tracks and anchor outer track to building structure. 2. Connect vertical deflection clips to studs and anchor to building structure. 3. Connect drift clips to cold-formed steel metal framing and anchor to building structure. E. Install horizontal bridging in wall studs, spaced vertically in rows indicated on Shop Drawings but not more than 48 inches apart. Fasten at each stud intersection. 1. Channel Bridging: Cold-rolled steel channel, welded or mechanically fastened to webs of punched studs. 2. Strap Bridging: Combination of flat, taut, steel sheet straps of width and thickness indicated and stud-track solid blocking of width and thickness to match studs. Fasten flat straps to stud flanges and secure solid blocking to stud webs or flanges. 3. Bar Bridging: Proprietary bridging bars installed according to manufacturer's written instructions. F. Top Bridging for Single Deflection Track: Install row of horizontal bridging within 18 inches of single deflection track. Install a combination of bridging and stud or stud-track solid blocking of width and thickness matching studs, secured to stud webs or flanges. 1. Install solid blocking at centers indicated on Shop Drawings. G. Install miscellaneous framing and connections, including stud kickers, web stiffeners, clip angles, continuous angles, anchors, and fasteners, to provide a complete and stable wall-framing system. 3.6 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Install cold-formed steel framing level, plumb, and true to line to a maximum allowable tolerance variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet and as follows: 1. Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch from plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or other finishing materials. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 COLD-FORMED-METAL FRAMING FWN&A Structural Engineering 054000 - 9 August 2019 3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports. B. Field and shop welds will be subject to testing and inspecting. C. Testing agency will report test results promptly and in writing to Contractor and Architect. D. Cold-formed steel framing will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. E. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. 3.8 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION A. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on fabricated and installed cold-formed steel framing with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780/A 780M and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer, that ensure that cold-formed steel framing is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 054000 City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 COLD-FORMED METAL TRUSSES FWN&A Structural Engineering 055400 - 1 August 2019 SECTION 054400 - COLD-FORMED METAL TRUSSES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Cold-formed steel trusses for roofs. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 054000 "Cold-Formed Metal Framing" for cold-formed steel studs, joists, and rafters. 1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Include layout, spacings, sizes, thicknesses, and types of cold-formed steel trusses; fabrication; and fastening and anchorage details, including mechanical fasteners. 2. Indicate reinforcing channels, opening framing, supplemental framing, strapping, bracing, bridging, splices, accessories, connection details, and attachment to adjoining work. C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For cold-formed steel trusses. Provide design calculations, with truss layout and connections, and shop drawings as noted above for review. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For testing agency. B. Welding certificates. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 COLD-FORMED METAL TRUSSES FWN&A Structural Engineering 055400 - 2 August 2019 C. Product Test Reports: For each listed product, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency. 1. Steel sheet. 2. Expansion anchors. 3. Power-actuated anchors. 4. Mechanical fasteners. 5. Miscellaneous structural clips and accessories. D. Field quality-control reports. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 329 for testing indicated. B. Product Tests: Mill certificates or data from a qualified testing agency indicating steel sheet complies with requirements, including base-metal thickness, yield strength, tensile strength, total elongation, chemical requirements, and metallic-coating thickness. C. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." 2. AWS D1.3/D1.3M, "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel." 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect cold-formed steel trusses from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and handling. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: 1. MarinoWARE. 2. TrusSteel; an ITW company. 3. USA Frametek. 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements," to design cold-formed steel framing. B. Structural Performance: Provide cold-formed steel trusses capable of withstanding design loads within limits and under conditions indicated. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 COLD-FORMED METAL TRUSSES FWN&A Structural Engineering 055400 - 3 August 2019 1. Design Loads: Per 2012 International Building Code, as indicated. 2. Deflection Limits: Design trusses to withstand design loads without deflections greater than the following: a. Roof Trusses: Vertical deflection of 1/360 of the span. 3. Design framing systems to provide for movement of framing members located outside the insulated building envelope without damage or overstressing, sheathing failure, connection failure, undue strain on fasteners and anchors, or other detrimental effects when subject to a maximum ambient temperature change of 120 deg F. C. Cold-Formed Steel Framing Design Standards: 1. Floor and Roof Systems: Design according to AISI S210. 2. Lateral Design: Design according to AISI S213. 3. Roof Trusses: Design according to AISI S214. 2.3 COLD-FORMED STEEL TRUSS MATERIALS A. Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1003/A 1003M, structural grade, Type H, metallic coated, of grade and coating weight as follows: 1. Grade: As required by structural performance. 2. Coating: G60. 2.4 ROOF TRUSSES A. Roof Truss Members: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel sections. 1. Connecting Flange Width: 1-5/8 inches, minimum at top and bottom chords connecting to sheathing or other directly fastened construction. 2. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: As required. 2.5 ACCESSORIES A. Fabricate steel-framing accessories from steel sheet, ASTM A 1003/A 1003M, structural grade, Type H, metallic coated, of same grade and coating weight used for truss members. B. Provide accessories of manufacturer's standard thickness and configuration unless otherwise indicated. C. Provide bent plates at roof hips and valleys as required, min. 16 gage thickness. Extend min. 4 inch each direction for roof deck connections. 2.6 ANCHORS, CLIPS, AND FASTENERS A. Steel Shapes and Clips: ASTM A 36/A 36M, zinc coated by hot-dip process according to ASTM A 123/A 123M. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 COLD-FORMED METAL TRUSSES FWN&A Structural Engineering 055400 - 4 August 2019 B. Power-Actuated Fasteners: Fastener system of type suitable for application, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with capability to sustain, without failure, allowable load capacities calculated according to ICC-ES AC70, greater than or equal to the design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 1190 conducted by a qualified testing agency. C. Mechanical Fasteners: ASTM C 1513, corrosion-resistant-coated, self-drilling, self-tapping steel drill screws. 1. Head Type: Low-profile head beneath sheathing; manufacturer's standard elsewhere. D. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS standards. 2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Galvanizing Repair Paint: SSPC-Paint 20 or MIL-P-21035B, or ASTM A 780. 2.8 FABRICATION A. Fabricate cold-formed steel trusses and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with connections securely fastened, according to referenced AISI's specifications and standards, manufacturer's written instructions, and requirements in this Section. 1. Fabricate trusses using jigs or templates. 2. Fabricate top chord of trusses with a minimum flat width of 1-1/2” perpendicular to the roof slope, for roof deck bearing and fastening. 3. Cut truss members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut. 4. Fasten cold-formed steel truss members by welding, screw fastening, clinch fastening, pneumatic pin fastening, or riveting as standard with fabricator. a. Comply with AWS D1.3/D1.3M requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work. 5. Fasten other materials to cold-formed steel trusses by welding, bolting, pneumatic pin fastening, or screw fastening, according to Shop Drawings. B. Reinforce, stiffen, and brace trusses to withstand handling, delivery, and erection stresses. Lift fabricated trusses to prevent damage or permanent distortion. C. Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate assemblies level, plumb, and true to line to a maximum allowable tolerance variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet and as follows: 1. Spacing: Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch from plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or other finishing materials. 2. Squareness: Fabricate each cold-formed metal framing assembly to a maximum out-of- square tolerance of 1/8 inch. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 COLD-FORMED METAL TRUSSES FWN&A Structural Engineering 055400 - 5 August 2019 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine supporting substrates and abutting cold-formed steel trusses for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install, bridge, and brace cold-formed steel trusses according to AISI S200, AISI S214, AISI's "Code of Standard Practice for Cold-Formed Steel Structural Framing," and manufacturer's written instructions unless more stringent requirements are indicated. B. Install cold-formed steel trusses and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with connections securely fastened. 1. Fasten cold-formed steel trusses by welding or mechanical fasteners. a. Comply with AWS D1.3/D1.3M requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work. b. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to Shop Drawings; comply with requirements for spacing, edge distances, and screw penetration. C. Install temporary bracing and supports. Maintain braces and supports in place, undisturbed, until entire integrated supporting structure has been completed and permanent connections to framing are secured. D. Truss Spacing: 48 inches, maximum. E. Do not alter, cut, or remove framing members or connections of trusses. F. Erect trusses with plane of truss webs plumb and parallel to each other, align, and accurately position at spacings indicated. G. Erect trusses without damaging framing members or connections. H. Coordinate with wall framing to align webs of bottom chords and load-bearing studs or continuously reinforce track to transfer loads to structure. Anchor trusses securely at all bearing points. I. Install continuous bridging and permanently brace trusses as indicated on Shop Drawings and designed according to CFSEI's TechNote 551e, "Design Guide: Permanent Bracing of Cold- Formed Steel Trusses.". J. Erection Tolerances: Install cold-formed steel framing level, plumb, and true to line to a maximum allowable tolerance variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet and as follows: City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 COLD-FORMED METAL TRUSSES FWN&A Structural Engineering 055400 - 6 August 2019 1. Space individual trusses no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch from plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or other finishing materials. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Special Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified special inspector to perform the following special inspections: B. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. C. Field and shop welds will be subject to testing and inspecting. D. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.4 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION A. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on fabricated and installed cold-formed metal framing with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer, that ensure that cold-formed metal trusses are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 054400 Denton Fire Station No. 8 METAL FABRICATIONS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 055000-1 August 2019 SECTION 055000 – METAL FABRICATIONS PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Steel framing and supports for overhead doors. 2. Steel framing and supports for countertops. 3. Steel tube reinforcement for low partitions. 4. Steel framing and supports for mechanical and electrical equipment. 5. Steel framing and supports for applications where framing and supports are not specified elsewhere. 6. Shelf angles. 7. Metal bollards. 8. Loose bearing and leveling plates for applications where they are not specified in other Sections. B. Products furnished, but not installed, under this Section include the following: 1. Anchor bolts, steel pipe sleeves, slotted-channel inserts, and wedge-type inserts indicated to be cast into concrete or built into unit masonry. 2. Loose steel lintels. 1.3 COORDINATION A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are compatible with one another. B. Coordinate installation of metal fabrications that are anchored to or that receive other work. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Nonslip aggregates and nonslip-aggregate surface finishes. 2. Paint products. 3. Grout. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their connections. Show anchorage and accessory items. Provide Shop Drawings for the following: 1. Steel framing and supports for overhead doors. 2. Steel framing and supports for countertops. 3. Steel framing and supports for mechanical and electrical equipment. 4. Steel framing and supports for applications where framing and supports are not specified elsewhere. 5. Metal bollards. 6. Loose steel lintels. C. For metal fabrications indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. D. Provide shop drawings and calculations signed and sealed by a professional engineer licensed to practice in the State in which the Project is located. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." 1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with metal fabrications by field measurements before fabrication. Denton Fire Station No. 8 METAL FABRICATIONS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 055000-2 August 2019 PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000 Quality Requirements, to design ladders and alternating tread devices. B. Structural Performance of Alternating Tread Devices: Alternating tread devices shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated. 1. Uniform Load: 100 lbf/sq. ft.. 2. Concentrated Load: 300 lbf applied on an area of 4 sq. in.. 3. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. 4. Alternating Tread Device Framing: Capable of withstanding stresses resulting from railing loads in addition to loads specified above. 2.2 METALS A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces unless otherwise indicated. For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes. B. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. C. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500/A 500M, cold-formed steel tubing. C. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Standard Weight (Schedule 40) unless otherwise indicated. 2.3 FASTENERS A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners for exterior use and zinc- plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941, Class Fe/Zn 5, at exterior walls. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required. B. Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 307, Grade A; with hex nuts, ASTM A 563; and, where indicated, flat washers. C. Stainless-Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head annealed stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F 593; with hex nuts, ASTM F 594; and, where indicated, flat washers; Alloy Group 1. D. Anchor Rods: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, of dimensions indicated; with nuts, ASTM A 563; and, where indicated, flat washers. 1. Hot-dip galvanize or provide mechanically deposited, zinc coating where item being fastened is indicated to be galvanized. E. Post-Installed Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion anchors or chemical anchors. 1. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941, Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Material for Exterior Locations and Where Stainless Steel Is Indicated: Alloy Group 1 stainless steel bolts, ASTM F 593, and nuts, ASTM F 594. F. Anchors, General: Anchors capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488/E 488M, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Section 099100 Painting. B. Universal Shop Primer: Fast curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer complying with MPI #79 and compatible with topcoat. 1. Use primer containing pigments that make it easily distinguishable from zinc-rich primer. C. Water-Based Primer: Emulsion type, anti-corrosive primer for mildly corrosive environments that is resistant to flash rusting when applied to cleaned steel, complying with MPI #107 and compatible with topcoat. D. Shop Primer for Galvanized Steel: Primer formulated for exterior use over zinc-coated metal and compatible with finish paint systems indicated. E. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and compatible with paints specified to be used over it. F. Non-shrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, non-staining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107/C 1107M. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications. G. Concrete: Comply with requirements in Section 033000 Cat-In-Place Concrete for normal weight, air- entrained, concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3,000 psi. 2.5 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble units only as Denton Fire Station No. 8 METAL FABRICATIONS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 055000-3 August 2019 necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. B. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces. C. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work. D. Form exposed work with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges. E. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface. F. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners or welds where possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips flat-head (countersunk) fasteners unless otherwise indicated. Locate joints where least conspicuous. G. Fabricate seams and other connections that are exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate. H. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items. I. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Space anchoring devices to secure metal fabrications rigidly in place and to support indicated loads. J. Where units are indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry, equip with integrally welded steel strap anchors, 1/8 by 1-1/2 inches, with a minimum 6-inch embedment and 2-inch hook, not less than 8 inches from ends and corners of units and 24 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated. 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS A. General: Provide steel framing and supports not specified in other Sections as needed to complete the Work. B. Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive adjacent construction. C. Galvanize miscellaneous framing and supports where indicated. 1. Galvanize all exterior exposed steel members including loose lintels and shelf angles. D. Prime miscellaneous framing and supports with zinc-rich primer where indicated. 2.7 LOOSE STEEL LINTELS A. Fabricate loose steel lintels from steel angles of sizes indicated and for attachment to concrete framing. Provide horizontally slotted holes to receive 3/4-inch bolts, spaced not more than 6 inches from ends and 24 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated. 1. Provide mitered and welded units at corners. 2. Provide open joints in shelf angles at expansion and control joints. Make open joint approximately 2 inches larger than expansion or control joint. B. For cavity walls, provide vertical channel brackets to support angles from backup masonry and concrete. C. Size loose lintels to provide bearing length at each side of opening equal to 1/12 of clear span, but not less than 8 inches unless otherwise indicated. D. Galvanize shelf angles located in exterior walls. E. Furnish wedge-type concrete inserts, complete with fasteners, to attach shelf angles to cast-in-place concrete. 2.8 MISCELLANEOUS STEEL TRIM A. Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of profiles shown with continuously welded joints and smooth exposed edges. Miter corners and use concealed field splices where possible. B. Provide cutouts, fittings, and anchorages as needed to coordinate assembly and installation with other work. 1. Provide with integrally welded steel strap anchors for embedding in concrete or masonry construction. C. Galvanize exterior miscellaneous steel trim. 2.9 METAL BOLLARDS A. Fabricate metal bollards from Schedule 80 steel pipe. 1. Cap bollards with 1/4-inch- thick steel plate. 2. Where bollards are indicated to receive controls for door operators, provide cutouts for controls and holes for wire. 3. Where bollards are indicated to receive light fixtures, provide cutouts for fixtures and holes for wire. Denton Fire Station No. 8 METAL FABRICATIONS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 055000-4 August 2019 B. Galvanize and paint bollards as indicated. 2.10 LOOSE BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES A. Provide loose bearing and leveling plates for steel items bearing on masonry or concrete construction. Drill plates to receive anchor bolts and for grouting. B. Galvanize plates. C. Prime plates with zinc-rich primer. 2.11 STEEL WELD PLATES AND ANGLES A. Provide steel weld plates and angles not specified in other Sections, for items supported from concrete construction as needed to complete the Work. Provide each unit with no fewer than two integrally welded steel strap anchors for embedding in concrete. 2.12 FINISHES, GENERAL A. Finish metal fabrications after assembly. B. Finish exposed surfaces to remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, and to blend into surrounding surface. 2.13 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES A. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M for steel and iron hardware and with ASTM A 123/A 123M for other steel and iron products. 1. Do not quench or apply post galvanizing treatments that might interfere with paint adhesion. B. Preparation for Shop Priming Galvanized Items: After galvanizing, thoroughly clean grease, dirt, oil, flux, and other foreign matter, and treat with metallic phosphate process. C. Shop prime iron and steel items not indicated to be galvanized unless they are to be embedded in concrete, sprayed-on fireproofing, or masonry, or unless otherwise indicated. 1. Shop prime with primer as indicated in Section 099100 Painting unless zinc-rich primer is indicated. D. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare surfaces to comply with requirements indicated below: 1. Exterior Items: SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, “Commercial Blast Cleaning.” 2. Items indicated to Receive Zinc-Rich Primer: SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, “Commercial Blast Cleaning.” 3. Other Items: SSPC-SP 3, “Power Tool Cleaning.” E. Shop Priming: Apply shop primer to comply with SSPC-PA 1, “Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel,” for shop painting. 1. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and levels. B. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections. C. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface. D. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal fabrications are required to be fastened to in-place construction. Provide threaded fasteners for use with concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through bolts, lag screws, wood screws, and other connectors. E. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete, masonry, or similar construction. F. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that come into contact with gout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals with the following: 1. Cast Aluminum: Heavy coat of bituminous paint. 2. Extruded Aluminum: Two coats of clear lacquer. Denton Fire Station No. 8 METAL FABRICATIONS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 055000-5 August 2019 3.2 INSTALLING MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS A. General: Install framing and supports to comply with requirements of items being supported, including manufacturers' written instructions and requirements indicated on Shop Drawings. B. Anchor supports for and overhead grilles securely to, and rigidly brace from, building structure. C. Support steel roof joists, beams and trusses on solid grouted masonry or steel columns. Secure framing with anchor rods embedded in grouted masonry or with bolted connections to steel columns. 1. Where grout space under bearing plates is indicated for steel framing supported on masonry, install as specified in “Installing Bearing and Leveling Plates” Article. D. Install columns on concrete footings with grouted baseplates. Position and grout column baseplates as specified in “Installing Bearing and Leveling Plates” Article. 1. Grout baseplates of columns supporting steel framing after framing is installed and leveled. 3.3 INSTALLING METAL BOLLARDS A. Fill metal-capped bollards solidly with concrete and allow concrete to cure seven days before installing. B. Anchor bollards in concrete. Fill annular space around bollard solidly with non-shrink grout; mixed and placed to comply with grout manufacturer’s written instructions. Slope grout up approximately 1/8 inch toward bollard. C. Place removable bollards over internal sleeves and secure with 3/4-inchmachine bolts and nuts. After tightening nuts, drill holes in bolts for inserting padlocks. Owner furnishes padlocks. D. Fill bollards solidly with concrete, mounding top surface to shed water. 1. Do not fill removable bollards with concrete. 3.4 INSTALLING BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES A. Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen to improve bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of plates. B. Set bearing and leveling plates on wedges, shims, or leveling nuts. After bearing members have been positioned and plumbed, tighten anchor bolts. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of bearing plate before packing with non-shrink grout. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates to ensure that no voids remain. 3.5 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas. Paint uncoated and abraded areas with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC- PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces. 1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil dry film thickness. B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780/A 780M. END OF SECTION Denton Fire Station No. 8 MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 061053-1 August 2019 SECTION 061053 – MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs. 2. Wood blocking and nailers. 3. Plywood backing panels. 4. Raised platform sub-flooring at Day 103. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Dimension Lumber: Lumber of 2 inches nominal or greater but less than 5 inches nominal in least dimension. B. Lumber grading agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the following: 1. NHLA: National Hardwood Lumber Association. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details. 1. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Indicate type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained. 2. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Include physical properties of treated materials based on testing by a qualified independent testing agency. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Stack lumber flat with spacers beneath and between each bundle to provide air circulation. Protect lumber from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency is indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules-writing agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated. 1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency. 2. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated. B. Maximum Moisture Content of Lumber: 15 percent unless otherwise indicated. 2.2 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED MATERIALS A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA U1; Use Category UC2 for interior construction not in contact with the ground, Use Category UC3b for exterior construction not in contact with the ground, and Use Category UC4a for items in contact with the ground. 1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no arsenic or chromium. B. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Do not use material that is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated material. C. Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC Board of Review. D. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following: 2.3 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS A. General: Where fire-retardant-treated materials are indicated, use materials complying with requirements in this article, that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and with fire-test-response characteristics specified as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated by a Denton Fire Station No. 8 MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 061053-2 August 2019 qualified testing agency. B. Fire-Retardant-Treated Lumber and Plywood by Pressure Process: Products with a flame spread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84, and with no evidence of significant progressive combustion when the test is extended an additional 20 minutes, and with the flame front not extending more than 10.5 feet beyond the centerline of the burners at any time during the test. 1. Use treatment that does not promote corrosion of metal fasteners. 2. Interior Type A: Treated materials shall have a moisture content of 28 percent or less when tested according to ASTM D 3201 at 92 percent relative humidity. Use where exterior type is not indicated. C. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Kiln-dry plywood after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 15 percent. D. Identify fire-retardant-treated wood with appropriate classification marking of testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. E. Application: Treat all miscellaneous carpentry unless otherwise indicated. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER A. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including the following: 1. Blocking. 2. Nailers. 3. Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs. B. For items of dimension lumber size, provide Construction or No. 2 grade lumber of any species. 2.5 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS A. Equipment Backing Panels: DOC PS 1, thickness indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 3/4-inch nominal thickness. B. Roof Sheathing (over foam insulation board): DOC PS1, BDX, thickness as indicated, but not less than 5/8-inch. C. Platform Subfloor: 1-1/8 inch thick tongue and groove plywood, CDX, APA trademarked. 2.6 FASTENERS A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this article for material and manufacture. 1. Where carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure-preservative treated, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners of Type 304 stainless steel. B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667. C. Power-Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272. D. Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1. E. Screws for Fastening to Metal Framing: ASTM C 1002, length as recommended by screw manufacturer for material being fastened. F. Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1. G. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A; with ASTM A 563 hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers. H. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 6 times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry assemblies and equal to 4 times the load imposed when installed in concrete as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency. 1. Material: Carbon-steel components, zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Set carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit. Locate nailers, blocking, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction. B. Where wood-preservative-treated lumber is installed adjacent to metal decking, install continuous flexible flashing separator between wood and metal decking. C. Framing Standard: Comply with AF&PA's WCD 1, "Details for Conventional Wood Frame Construction," unless otherwise indicated. D. Install plywood backing panels by fastening to studs; coordinate locations with utilities requiring backing panels. Install fire-retardant treated plywood backing panels with classification marking of testing agency exposed to view. E. Do not splice structural members between supports unless otherwise indicated. Denton Fire Station No. 8 MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 061053-3 August 2019 F. Provide blocking and framing as indicated and as required to support facing materials, fixtures, specialty items, and trim. G. Sort and select lumber so that natural characteristics will not interfere with installation or with fastening other materials to lumber. Do not use materials with defects that interfere with function of member or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement. H. Securely attach carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying with the following: 1. NES NER-272 for power-driven fasteners. 2. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's International Building Code. 3. Table R602.3(1), "Fastener Schedule for Structural Members," and Table R602.3(2), "Alternate Attachments," in ICC's International Residential Code for One- and Two-Family Dwellings. I. Use steel common nails unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood. Drive nails snug but do not countersink nail heads unless otherwise indicated. 3.2 WOOD SLEEPER, BLOCKING, AND NAILER INSTALLATION A. Install where indicated and where required for attaching other work. Form to shapes indicated and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate locations with other work involved. B. Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces unless otherwise indicated. C. Set wood blocking for support of woodwork, metal work, plumbing fixtures, electrical outlets, lighting fixtures, mirrors, toilet room accessories, etc., where indicated or normally required to support such items. Provide blocking and nailers to allow nailing of centers, ends and edges of wall boards where applied to wood frame construction. Provide nailers and blocking to receive all wood trim and mouldings. D. Nailers shall be at least 2 x 4 material, except as may be detailed otherwise, and shall be securely bolted in place. E. Where bolt sizes and spacing are no specifically noted, use not less than 3/8" bolts at 32" o.c. staggered. Furnish metal expansion shields for concrete. F. Exterior wood nailers for roof curbs, flashings and the like shall be of preservative treated. G. Blocking: Provide blocking to stiffen the structure and for the support of other work such as door stops, toilet accessories, railings, AV equipment, etc.. H. Roof Curbs: Provide wood curbs to frame openings and to support flashings as detailed. Use preservative treated lumber. I. Nailers: Provide nailers of the required sizes where indicated on the Drawings. 1. Nailers shall be at least 2 x 4 material, except as may be detailed otherwise, and shall be securely bolted in place 2. Where bolt sizes and spacing are not specifically noted, use not less than 3/8" bolts and 32" o.c. staggered. J. Grounds: Provide and install grounds where required for plaster, for casework and cabinets and for nailing trim. They shall be continuous, set back 1/2" from exposed edges of overlapping finish, straight, plumb or level, and in true alignment. Spot grounds set in plaster of Paris, not more than 12" apart, may be used where continuous grounds are impractical. 3.3 PROTECTION A. Protect miscellaneous rough carpentry from weather. If, despite protection, miscellaneous rough carpentry becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label. END OF SECTION Denton Fire Station No. 8 SHEATHING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 061600-1 August 2019 SECTION 061600 – SHEATHING PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Wall sheathing. 2. Sheathing joint and penetration treatment. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Stack panels flat with spacers beneath and between each bundle to provide air circulation. Protect sheathing from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 WALL SHEATHING A. Glass-Mat Gypsum Wall Sheathing: ASTM C 1177/1177M. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. CertainTeed Corporation; GlasRoc. b. G-P Gypsum Corporation; Dens-Glass Gold. c. National Gypsum Company; Gold Bond e(2)XP. d. Temple-Inland Inc.; GreenGlass e. United States Gypsum Co.; Securock. 2. Thickness: 1/2 inch thick. 2.2 SHEATHING JOINT-AND-PENETRATION TREATMENT MATERIALS A. Sealant for Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing: Silicone emulsion sealant complying with ASTM C 834, compatible with sheathing tape and sheathing and recommended by tape and sheathing manufacturers for use with glass-fiber sheathing tape and for covering exposed fasteners. Confirm compatibility with air/moisture barrier. 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Adhesives for Field Gluing Panels to Framing: Formulation complying with ASTM D 3498 that is approved for use with type of construction panel indicated by manufacturers of both adhesives and panels. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Do not use materials with defects that impair quality of sheathing or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement. Arrange joints so that pieces do not span between fewer than three support members. B. Cut panels at penetrations, edges, and other obstructions of work; fit tightly against abutting construction unless otherwise indicated. C. Securely attach to substrate by fastening as indicated, complying with the following: 1. NES NER-272 for power-driven fasteners. 2. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's "International Building Code." 3. Table R602.3(1), "Fastener Schedule for Structural Members," and Table R602.3(2), "Alternate Attachments," in ICC's "International Residential Code for One- and Two-Family Dwellings." D. Use screws purposely made for application. Select fasteners of size that will not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections. Install fasteners without splitting wood. E. Coordinate sheathing installation with flashing and joint-sealant installation so these materials are installed in sequence and manner that prevent exterior moisture from passing through completed assembly. F. Do not bridge building expansion joints; cut and space edges of panels to match spacing of structural Denton Fire Station No. 8 SHEATHING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 061600-2 August 2019 support elements. G. Coordinate sheathing installation with installation of materials installed over sheathing so sheathing is not exposed to precipitation or left exposed at end of the workday when rain is forecast. 3.2 GYPSUM SHEATHING INSTALLATION A. Comply with GA-253 and with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Fasten gypsum sheathing to cold-formed metal framing with screws. 2. Install boards with a 3/8-inch gap where non-load-bearing construction abuts structural elements. 3. Install boards with a 1/4-inch gap where they abut masonry or similar materials that might retain moisture, to prevent wicking. B. Apply fasteners so heads bear tightly against face of sheathing, but do not cut into facing. C. Horizontal Installation: Install sheathing with V-grooved edge down and tongue edge up. Interlock tongue with groove to bring long edges in contact with edges of adjacent boards without forcing. Abut ends of boards over centers of studs, and stagger end joints of adjacent boards not less than one stud spacing. Attach boards at perimeter and within field of board to each steel stud. 1. Space fasteners approximately 8 inches o.c. and set back a minimum of 3/8 inch from edges and ends of boards. 2. For sheathing under stucco cladding, boards may be initially tacked in place with screws if overlying self-furring metal lath is screw-attached through sheathing to studs immediately after sheathing is installed. D. Vertical Installation: Install board vertical edges centered over studs. Abut ends and edges of each board with those of adjacent boards. Attach boards at perimeter and within field of board to each stud. 1. Space fasteners approximately 8 inches o.c. and set back a minimum of 3/8 inch from edges and ends of boards. 2. For sheathing under stucco cladding, boards may be initially tacked in place with screws if overlying self-furring metal lath is screw-attached through sheathing to studs immediately after sheathing is installed. E. Seal sheathing joints according to sheathing manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Apply silicone emulsion sealant to joints and fasteners and trowel flat. Apply sufficient amount of sealant to completely cover joints and fasteners after troweling. Seal other penetrations and openings. 2. Apply glass-fiber sheathing tape to glass-mat gypsum sheathing joints and apply and trowel silicone emulsion sealant to embed entire face of tape in sealant. Apply sealant to exposed fasteners with a trowel so fasteners are completely covered. Seal other penetrations and openings. Allow first coat of sealant t dry before applying second coat. END OF SECTION Denton Fire Station No. 8 INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 062023-1 August 2019 SECTION 062023 – INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Interior trim for base, chair rails, and other items indicated. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component materials, dimensions, profiles, textures, and colors and include construction and application details. 1. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical-treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. 2. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced before shipment to Project site to levels specified. 3. Include copies of warranties from chemical-treatment manufacturers for each type of treatment. B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of product involving selection of colors, profiles, or textures. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Stack lumber, plywood, and other panels flat with spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation. Protect materials from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings. B. Deliver interior finish carpentry materials only when environmental conditions meet requirements specified for installation areas. If interior finish carpentry materials must be stored in other than installation areas, store only where environmental conditions meet requirements specified for installation areas. 1.5 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install interior finish carpentry materials until building is enclosed and weatherproof, wet work in space is completed and nominally dry, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. B. Do not install finish carpentry materials that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged. 1. Indications that materials are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. 2. Indications that materials are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and the following grading rules: 1. NHLA: National Hardwood Lumber Association, "Rules for the Measurement and Inspection of Hardwood & Cypress." 2. NLGA: National Lumber Grades Authority, "Standard Grading Rules for Canadian Lumber." 3. SPIB: The Southern Pine Inspection Bureau, "Standard Grading Rules for Southern Pine Lumber." 4. WCLIB: West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau, Standard No. 17, "Grading Rules for West Coast Lumber." 5. WWPA: Western Wood Products Association, "Western Lumber Grading Rules." B. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of inspection agency indicating grade, species, moisture content at time of surfacing, and mill. 1. For exposed lumber, mark grade stamp on end or back of each piece. 2.2 INTERIOR TRIM A. Hardwood Lumber Trim: 1. Species and Grade: a. Stain Grade: Rift cut white maple or quarter sawn white oak unless noted otherwise. b. Opaque Grade: Birch or Poplar in any cut unless noted otherwise. 2. Maximum Moisture Content: 10 percent. 3. Finger Jointing: Not allowed. Denton Fire Station No. 8 INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 062023-2 August 2019 4. Gluing for Width: Not allowed. 5. Veneered Material: Allowed. 6. Face Surface: Surfaced (smooth). 7. Matching: Selected for compatible grain and color. 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Fasteners for Interior Finish Carpentry: Nails, screws, and other anchoring devices of type, size, material, and finish required for application indicated to provide secure attachment, concealed where possible. B. Glue: Aliphatic-resin, polyurethane, or resorcinol wood glue recommended by manufacturer for general carpentry use. C. Installation Adhesive for Foam Plastic Moldings: Product recommended for indicated use by foam plastic molding manufacturer. D. Multipurpose Construction Adhesive: Formulation complying with ASTM D 3498 that is recommended for indicated use by adhesive manufacturer. 2.4 FABRICATION A. Back out or kerf backs of the following members except those with ends exposed in finished work: 1. Interior standing and running trim except shoe and crown molds. B. Ease edges of lumber less than 1 inch in nominal thickness to 1/16-inch radius and edges of lumber 1 inch or more in nominal thickness to 1/8-inch radius. C. Grade: Provide all finish carpentry items in AWI Premium Grade. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. B. Examine finish carpentry materials before installation. Reject materials that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to application. B. Before installing interior finish carpentry, condition materials to average prevailing humidity in installation areas for a minimum of 24 hours unless longer conditioning is recommended by manufacturer. 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Do not use materials that are unsound, warped, improperly treated or finished, inadequately seasoned, too small to fabricate with proper jointing arrangements, or with defective surfaces, sizes, or patterns. B. Install interior finish carpentry level, plumb, true, and aligned with adjacent materials. Use concealed shims where necessary for alignment. 1. Scribe and cut interior finish carpentry to fit adjoining work. Refinish and seal cuts as recommended by manufacturer. 2. Where face fastening is unavoidable, countersink fasteners, fill surface flush, and sand unless otherwise indicated. 3. Install to tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches for level and plumb. Install adjoining interior finish carpentry with 1/32-inch maximum offset for flush installation and 1/16-inch maximum offset for reveal installation. 4. Coordinate interior finish carpentry with materials and systems in or adjacent to it. Provide cutouts for mechanical and electrical items that penetrate interior finish carpentry. 3.4 STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM INSTALLATION A. Install with minimum number of joints practical, using full-length pieces from maximum lengths of lumber available. Do not use pieces less than 24 inches long, except where necessary. Stagger joints in adjacent and related standing and running trim. Miter at returns, miter at outside corners, and cope at inside corners to produce tight-fitting joints with full-surface contact throughout length of joint. Use scarf joints for end-to-end joints. Plane backs of casings to provide uniform thickness across joints where necessary for alignment. 1. Match color and grain pattern of trim for transparent finish (stain or clear finish) across joints. 2. Install trim after gypsum-board joint finishing operations are completed. 3. Install without splitting; drill pilot holes before fastening where necessary to prevent splitting. Fasten to prevent movement or warping. Countersink fastener heads on exposed carpentry work and fill holes. Denton Fire Station No. 8 INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 062023-3 August 2019 3.5 ADJUSTING A. Replace interior finish carpentry that is damaged or does not comply with requirements. Interior finish carpentry may be repaired or refinished if work complies with requirements and shows no evidence of repair or refinishing. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. 3.6 CLEANING A. Clean interior finish carpentry on exposed and semi-exposed surfaces. Restore damaged or soiled areas and touch up factory-applied finishes, if any. 3.7 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products from damage from weather and other causes during construction. B. Remove and replace finish carpentry materials that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. 1. Indications that materials are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. 2. Indications that materials are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. END OF SECTION Denton Fire Station No. 8 WOOD VENEER FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 064113-1 August 2019 SECTION 064113 – WOOD VENEER FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Architectural wood cabinets. 2. Wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for installing wood veneer faced architectural cabinets unless concealed within other construction before cabinet installation. 3. Shop finishing of architectural wood cabinets. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product, including panel products high-pressure decorative laminate cabinet hardware and accessories. 1. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical-treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. B. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale details, attachment devices, and other components. 1. Show details full size. 2. Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, and hanging strips, including concealed blocking and reinforcement specified in other Sections. 3. Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for electrical switches and outlets and other items installed in architectural cabinets. C. Samples for Verification: 1. Shop applied transparent finishes. 2. Lumber for transparent finish, not less than 5 inches wide by 12 inches long, for each species and cut, finished on one side and one edge. 3. Veneer leaves representative of and selected from flitches to be used for transparent finished cabinets. 4. Corner pieces as follows: a. Cabinet front frame joints between stiles and rails, as well as exposed end pieces. b. Miter joints for standing trim. 5. Exposed cabinet hardware and accessories, one unit for each type and finish. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Certificates: For each type of product. B. Woodwork Quality Standard Compliance Certificates: AWI Quality Certification Program certificates. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Build mockups of typical cabinets as shown on Drawings. 2. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. B. Source Limitations: Engage a qualified woodworking firm to assume undivided responsibility for production of interior architectural woodwork with sequence matched wood veneers. 1. Woodworking firm limited to: a. Architectural Woodworking Institute certified. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Do not deliver cabinets until painting and similar operations that could damage woodwork have been completed in installation areas. If cabinets must be stored in other than installation areas, store only in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in "Field Conditions" Article. 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install cabinets until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. B. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install cabinets until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, Denton Fire Station No. 8 WOOD VENEER FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 064113-2 August 2019 and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature between 60 and 90 deg F and relative humidity between 25 and 55 percent during the remainder of the construction period. C. Field Measurements: Where cabinets are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. 1. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support cabinets by field measurements before being enclosed, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. D. Established Dimensions: Where cabinets are indicated to fit to other construction, establish dimensions for areas where cabinets are to fit. Provide allowance for trimming at site, and coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that cabinets can be supported and installed as indicated. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CABINETS A. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the "Architectural Woodwork Standards" for grades of architectural cabinets indicated for construction, finishes, installation, and other requirements. 1. The Contract Documents contain selections chosen from options in the quality standard and additional requirements beyond those of the quality standard. Comply with those selections and requirements in addition to the quality standard. 2.2 WOOD CABINETS FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH A. Grade: Premium B. Type of Construction: Frameless. C. Cabinet, Door, and Drawer Front Interface Style: Flush overlay. D. Wood for Exposed Surfaces: 1. Species: Walnut 2. Cut: Quarter sawn 3. Grain Direction: Vertically for drawer fronts, doors, and fixed panels 4. Matching of Veneer Leaves: Book match. 5. Veneer Matching within Room: Provide cabinet veneers in each room or other space from a single flitch with doors, drawer fronts, and other surfaces matched in a sequenced set with continuous match where veneers are interrupted perpendicular to the grain. E. Materials for Semi-exposed Surfaces: 1. Surfaces Other Than Drawer Bodies: Same species and cut indicated for exposed surfaces. 2. Drawer Sides and Backs: Solid hardwood lumber. 3. Drawer Bottoms: Hardwood plywood F. Drawer Construction: Fabricate with exposed fronts fastened to sub-front with mounting screws from interior of body. 1. Join sub-fronts, backs, and sides with glue and dovetail construction. 2.3 WOOD MATERIALS A. Wood Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified unless otherwise indicated. 1. Wood Moisture Content: 5 to 10 percent. 2. Do not use plain-sawn softwood lumber with exposed, flat surfaces more than 3 inches wide. B. Composite Wood and Agrifiber Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified unless otherwise indicated. 1. Veneer Faced Panel Products (Hardwood Plywood): HPVA HP-1. 2. Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade MD a. Acceptable manufacturers: 1. SierraPine 2. Plum Creek 3. Flakeboard American Limited 3. Cores of sink tops must be water resistant material. a. Acceptable Products: 1. Medex moisture resistant MDF. 2.4 CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES A. General: Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials associated with architectural cabinets except Denton Fire Station No. 8 WOOD VENEER FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 064113-3 August 2019 for items specified in Section 087111 Door Hardware (Descriptive Specification). B. Frameless Concealed Hinges (European Type): BHMA A156.9, B01602, 135 degrees of opening, self-closing. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: BLUM; CLIP top BLUMOTION. C. Wire Pulls: Back mounted, solid metal, 5 inches long, 1 inch deep, and 5/16 inch in diameter D. Adjustable Shelf Standards and Supports: BHMA A156.9, B04071; with shelf rests, B04081. E. Shelf Rests: BHMA A156.9, B04013; metal. F. Drawer Slides: BHMA A156.9. 1. Grade 1 and Grade 2: Side mounted full-extension type; zinc-plated steel with steel ball retainers and ball bearings. a. Basis-of-Design Product: Accuride; 3600 Heavy Duty. 2. For drawers not more than 3 inches high and not more than 24 inches wide, provide Grade 2. 3. For drawers more than 3 inches high but not more than 6 inches high and not more than 24 inches wide, provide Grade 1. 4. For drawers more than 6 inches high or more than 24 inches wide, provide Grade 1HD-100. 5. For computer keyboard shelves, provide Grade 1 6. For trash bins not more than 20 inches high and 16 inches wide, provide Grade 1HD-100. G. Door Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07121. H. Drawer Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07041. I. Door and Drawer Silencers: BHMA A156.16, L03011. J. Exposed Hardware Finishes: For exposed hardware, provide finish that complies with BHMA A156.18 for BHMA finish number indicated. 1. Satin Stainless Steel: BHMA 630. K. For concealed hardware, provide manufacturer's standard finish that complies with product class requirements in BHMA A156.9. L. Under Counter Support Bracket: Speed Brace 21x24C. 1. Finish Color: White. M. Kitchen Island Towel Bar and Trim Rings: Mockett Company model RCK4. N. Kitchen Island Trash Grommet: Mockett Company model TM12B. O. Built-In Bed Pull: Mockett Company model DP-137. 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Fire-retardant-treated softwood lumber, kiln dried to less than 15 percent moisture content. B. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage. Provide metal expansion sleeves or expansion bolts for post-installed anchors. Use nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts at inside face of exterior walls and at floors. C. Adhesives: Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde. 2.6 FABRICATION A. Fabricate cabinets to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. B. Complete fabrication, including assembly and hardware application, to maximum extent possible before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting. 1. Notify Architect seven days in advance of the dates and times woodwork fabrication will be complete. 2. Trial fit assemblies at fabrication shop that cannot be shipped completely assembled. Install dowels, screws, bolted connectors, and other fastening devices that can be removed after trial fitting. Verify that various parts fit as intended and check measurements of assemblies against field measurements before disassembling for shipment. C. Shop-cut openings to maximum extent possible to receive hardware, appliances, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and burrs. 2.7 SHOP FINISHING A. General: Finish architectural wood cabinets at fabrication shop as specified in this Section. Defer only final touchup, cleaning, and polishing until after installation. B. Preparation for Finishing: Comply with referenced quality standard for sanding, filling countersunk fasteners, sealing concealed surfaces, and similar preparations for finishing architectural wood cabinets, as applicable to each unit of work. 1. Backpriming: Apply one coat of sealer or primer, compatible with finish coats, to concealed surfaces of cabinets. C. Transparent Finish: Refer to Finish Schedule. Denton Fire Station No. 8 WOOD VENEER FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 064113-4 August 2019 PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Before installation, condition cabinets to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas. B. Before installing cabinets, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and complete work as required, including removal of packing and backpriming. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Grade: Install cabinets to comply with same grade as item to be installed. B. Assemble cabinets and complete fabrication at Project site to the extent that it was not completed in the shop. C. Install cabinets level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install level and plumb to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches. D. Scribe and cut cabinets to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at cuts. E. Anchor cabinets to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing. Use fine finishing nails or finishing screws for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork. 1. For shop finished items use filler matching finish of items being installed. F. Cabinets: Install without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings properly and are accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide unencumbered operation. Complete installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated. 1. Install cabinets with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch sag, bow, or other variation from a straight line. 2. Maintain veneer sequence matching of cabinets with transparent finish. 3. Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, and at ends not more than 16 inches o.c. with No. 10 wafer-head screws sized for not less than 1-1/2-inch penetration into wood framing, blocking, or hanging strips. G. Touchup finishing work specified in this Section after installation of woodwork. Fill nail holes with matching filler where exposed. 1. Apply specified finish coats, including stains and paste fillers if any, to exposed surfaces where only sealer/prime coats are applied in shop. 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Repair damaged and defective cabinets, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual defects; where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. B. Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware. C. Clean cabinets on exposed and semi-exposed surfaces. END OF SECTION Denton Fire Station No. 8 PLASTIC LAMINATE FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 064116-1 August 2019 SECTION 064116 – PLASTIC LAMINATE FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Plastic laminate faced architectural cabinets. 2. Wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for installing plastic-laminate-faced architectural cabinets unless concealed within other construction before cabinet installation. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product, including panel products high-pressure decorative laminate cabinet hardware and accessories. 1. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical-treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. B. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale details, attachment devices, and other components. 1. Show details full size. 2. Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, and hanging strips, including concealed blocking and reinforcement specified in other Sections. 3. Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for electrical switches and outlets and other items installed in architectural plastic-laminate cabinets. C. Samples for Initial Selection: 1. Plastic laminates. 2. Thermoset decorative panels. D. Samples for Verification: 1. Plastic laminates, 8 by 10 inches, for each type, color, pattern, and surface finish. 2. Wood-grain plastic laminates, 12 by 24 inches, for each type, pattern and surface finish. 3. Exposed cabinet hardware and accessories, one unit for each type and finish. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Certificates: For each type of product. B. Woodwork Quality Standard Compliance Certificates: AWI Quality Certification Program certificates. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Build mockups of typical plastic-laminate cabinets as shown on Drawings. 2. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. B. Source Limitations: Engage a qualified woodworking firm to assume undivided responsibility for production of interior architectural woodwork with plastic laminate veneers. 1. Woodworking firm limited to: a. Architectural Woodworking Institute certified. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Do not deliver cabinets until painting and similar operations that could damage woodwork have been completed in installation areas. If cabinets must be stored in other than installation areas, store only in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in "Field Conditions" Article. 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install cabinets until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. B. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install cabinets until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature between 60 and 90 deg F and relative humidity between 25 and 55 percent during the remainder of the construction period. C. Field Measurements: Where cabinets are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Denton Fire Station No. 8 PLASTIC LAMINATE FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 064116-2 August 2019 Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. 1. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support cabinets by field measurements before being enclosed, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. D. Established Dimensions: Where cabinets are indicated to fit to other construction, establish dimensions for areas where cabinets are to fit. Provide allowance for trimming at site, and coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that cabinets can be supported and installed as indicated. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS A. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the "Architectural Woodwork Standards" for grades of architectural plastic-laminate cabinets indicated for construction, finishes, installation, and other requirements. 1. The Contract Documents contain selections chosen from options in the quality standard and additional requirements beyond those of the quality standard. Comply with those selections and requirements in addition to the quality standard. B. Grade: Premium C. Type of Construction: Frameless. D. Cabinet, Door, and Drawer Front Interface Style: Flush overlay. E. Reveal Dimension: 1/2 inch. F. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, grades as indicated or if not indicated, as required by woodwork quality standard. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Formica Corporation. b. Lamin-Art, Inc. c. Panolam Industries International, Inc. d. Wilsonart International; Div. of Premark International, Inc. G. Laminate Cladding for Exposed Surfaces: 1. Horizontal Surfaces: Grade HGS. 2. Vertical Surfaces: Grade VGS. 3. Pattern Direction: Vertically for drawer fronts, doors, and fixed panels. 4. Edge banding for Plastic Laminate Clad Cabinets: Rigid PVC extrusions, through color with satin finish, 3 mm thick at counter tops, doors, drawer fronts, and exposed shelving on front and back edges (front edge only for fixed shelving); and 1 mm thick elsewhere, including edges of shelving within cabinets H. Materials for Semi-exposed Surfaces: 1. Surfaces Other Than Drawer Bodies: High-pressure decorative laminate, NEMA LD 3, Grade CLS. a. Edges of Plastic-Laminate Shelves: PVC tape, 0.018-inchminimum thickness, matching laminate in color, pattern, and finish. b. Edges of Thermoset Decorative Panel Shelves: PVC or polyester edge banding. c. For semi-exposed backs of panels with exposed plastic-laminate surfaces, provide surface of high-pressure decorative laminate, NEMA LD 3, Grade VGS. 2. Drawer Sides and Backs: Solid-hardwood lumber. 3. Drawer Bottoms: Hardwood plywood I. Drawer Construction: Fabricate with exposed fronts fastened to sub-front with mounting screws from interior of body. 1. Join sub-fronts, backs, and sides with glue and dovetail construction. J. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements: 1. As indicated by laminate manufacturer's designations. 2.2 WOOD MATERIALS A. Wood Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified unless otherwise indicated. 1. Wood Moisture Content: 5 to 10 percent. 2. Plywood: AWI Economy grade Fir, grade A-B, as substrate for surfaces to receive plastic laminate. 3. Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade MD a. Acceptable manufacturers: 1. SierraPine Denton Fire Station No. 8 PLASTIC LAMINATE FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 064116-3 August 2019 2. Plum Creek 3. Flakeboard American Limited 4. Cores of sink tops must be water resistant material. a. Acceptable Products: 1. Medex moisture resistant MDF. 2.3 CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES A. General: Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials associated with architectural cabinets except for items specified in Section 087111 Door Hardware (Descriptive Specification). B. Frameless Concealed Hinges (European Type): BHMA A156.9, B01602, 135 degrees of opening, self-closing. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: BLUM; CLIP top BLUMOTION. C. Wire Pulls: Back mounted, solid metal, 5 inches long, 1 inch deep, and 5/16 inch in diameter D. Adjustable Shelf Standards and Supports: BHMA A156.9, B04071; with shelf rests, B04081. E. Shelf Rests: BHMA A156.9, B04013; metal. F. Drawer Slides: BHMA A156.9. 1. Grade 1 and Grade 2: Side mounted full-extension type; zinc-plated steel with steel ball retainers and ball bearings. a. Basis-of-Design Product: Accuride; 3600 Heavy Duty. 2. For drawers not more than 3 inches high and not more than 24 inches wide, provide Grade 2. 3. For drawers more than 3 inches high but not more than 6 inches high and not more than 24 inches wide, provide Grade 1. 4. For drawers more than 6 inches high or more than 24 inches wide, provide Grade 1HD-100. 5. For computer keyboard shelves, provide Grade 1 6. For trash bins not more than 20 inches high and 16 inches wide, provide Grade 1HD-100. G. Door Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07121. H. Drawer Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07041. I. Door and Drawer Silencers: BHMA A156.16, L03011. J. Exposed Hardware Finishes: For exposed hardware, provide finish that complies with BHMA A156.18 for BHMA finish number indicated. 1. Satin Stainless Steel: BHMA 630. K. For concealed hardware, provide manufacturer's standard finish that complies with product class requirements in BHMA A156.9. L. Under Counter Support Bracket: Speed Brace 21x24C. 1. Finish Color: White. M. Kitchen Island Towel Bar and Trim Rings: Mockett Company model RCK4. N. Kitchen Island Trash Grommet: Mockett Company model TM12B. O. Built-In Bed Pull: Mockett Company model DP-137. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Fire-retardant-treated softwood lumber, kiln dried to less than 15 percent moisture content. B. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage. Provide metal expansion sleeves or expansion bolts for post-installed anchors. Use nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts at inside face of exterior walls and at floors. C. Adhesives: Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde. D. Adhesive for Bonding Plastic Laminate: Unpigmented contact cement]. 1. Adhesive for Bonding Edges: Hot-melt adhesive or adhesive specified above for faces. 2.5 FABRICATION A. Fabricate cabinets to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. B. Complete fabrication, including assembly and hardware application, to maximum extent possible before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting. 1. Notify Architect seven days in advance of the dates and times woodwork fabrication will be complete. 2. Trial fit assemblies at fabrication shop that cannot be shipped completely assembled. Install dowels, screws, bolted connectors, and other fastening devices that can be removed after trial fitting. Verify that various parts fit as intended and check measurements of assemblies against field measurements before disassembling for shipment. C. Shop-cut openings to maximum extent possible to receive hardware, appliances, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and burrs. Denton Fire Station No. 8 PLASTIC LAMINATE FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 064116-4 August 2019 PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Before installation, condition cabinets to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas. B. Before installing cabinets, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and complete work as required. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Grade: Install cabinets to comply with same grade as item to be installed. B. Assemble cabinets and complete fabrication at Project site to the extent that it was not completed in the shop. C. Install cabinets level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install level and plumb to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches. D. Scribe and cut cabinets to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at cuts. E. Anchor cabinets to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing. Use fine finishing nails or finishing screws for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork. 1. Use filler matching finish of items being installed. F. Cabinets: Install without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings properly and are accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide unencumbered operation. Complete installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated. 1. Install cabinets with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch sag, bow, or other variation from a straight line. 2. Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, and at ends not more than 16 inches o.c. with No. 10 wafer-head screws sized for not less than 1-1/2-inch penetration into wood framing, blocking, or hanging strips. 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Repair damaged and defective cabinets, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual defects; where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. B. Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware. C. Clean cabinets on exposed and semi-exposed surfaces. END OF SECTION Denton Fire Station No. 8 SHOWER SURROUNDS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 066100-1 August 2019 SECTION 066100 – SHOWER SURROUNDS PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Solid Surface Shower Receptors B. Solid Surface Wall Panels C. Solid Surface Accessories 1.3 SYSTEM DECSRIPTION A. Performance Requirements: Provide shower receptors and shower systems that conform to the following requirements of regulatory agencies and the quality control of the manufacturer. 1. Provide shower receptors and shower systems that conform to ANSI Z124.1.2-2005 when tested for workmanship and finish, structural integrity and material characteristics. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer’s printed product data for each type of shower receptors and shower system specified. B. Shop Drawings: Include elevations, sections, details and dimensions not shown in Product Data. Submit for review by Architect prior to fabrication. C. Samples: Verification samples minimum of 3" x 3" samples indicating color and pattern. D. Manufacturer’s Installation Instruction: Printed installation instructions for shower receptors and shower system. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Informational Submittals: Submit manufacturer's Instructions. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in unopened factory packaging to the jobsite. B. Inspect materials at delivery to assure that specified products have been received. C. Store in original packaging in an interior climate controlled location away from direct sunlight. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: Products must be installed in an interior climate controlled environment. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Ten year warranty against material and manufacturing defects. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURER A. Basis of Design: Inpro Corporation PO Box 406 Muskego, WI 53150 USA Telephone: 800-222-5556, www.inprocorp.com B. Acceptable Substitutions: As allowed under Section 012500. C. Provide all shower receptors, shower systems and shower wall panels from a single source. 2.2 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Shower receptors and shower systems 1. Receptors: a. Size: Custom made to order. b. Threshold: i. Full Curb in Bathroom 121 & 122. ii. ADA in Bathroom 123. iii. Tile Shelf (with marble threshold) in Bathroom 118. c. Shower Drain: Shower drain assembly shall be Oatey number 42150, Brass, No-caulk, Drain w/Stainless Steel (standard) or Brass Strainer. Drain body is sealed to shower base Denton Fire Station No. 8 SHOWER SURROUNDS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 066100-2 August 2019 with a fiber and rubber washer. Drain is secured to 2”, 40 DWV pipe with a mechanically compressed gasket that does not require caulking. Drain top to accommodate 4-1/4” Universal Snap-Tite Strainer. d. Water Barrier: i. Single, 1/4" thick x 3” high 2. Wall Panels: a. Size: Custom made to order. a. Thickness: 1/4". a. Width: As required for no vertical seams. i. Exception: Long wall in Bathroom 118 & 123. One vertical seam centered about wall providing two equal panels. Panels to be factory seamed. a. Height: As required for no horizontal seams. a. Edge Option: Eased on outside edges. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Soap Shelf 1. Size: 8” x 8”, #DSSHPL. 2. Thickness: 1/2". 3. Material: Polyester and acrylic hybrid resin with natural filler material. 4. Finish: Match shower receptor and wall panels. B. Inside Wedge Corner Molding 1. Size: In length required for no horizontal seams, #DSICP. 2. Grind exposed welds smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces before finishing; restore mechanical finish. C. Mortars, Adhesives and Sealants 1. For substrate deviation or voids greater than 1/2" use Type N mortar mix. Use thin-set type mortar for substrate deviation or voids less than 1/2". 2. Bonding: Translucent 100% Silicone Sealant 3. Sealants: Translucent 100% Silicone Sealant 2.4 MATERIALS A. Shower receptors and wall panels shall be manufactured from a polyester and acrylic hybrid resin with natural filler material. B. Receptor floor to be solid cast product with integral threshold and water barrier. 2.5 FINISHES A. Refer Finish Schedule in Architectural Drawings. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and conditions in which shower receptors and shower systems will be installed. 3.2 PREPARATION A. General: Prior to installation, clean area to remove dust, debris and loose particles. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install components plumb and level, scribe adjacent finishes, in accordance with approved shop drawings and recommended installation instructions. 3.4 CLEANING A. At completion of the installation, clean surfaces in accordance with the manufacturer’s clean-up and maintenance instructions. END OF SECTION Denton Fire Station No. 8 PLASTIC PANELING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 066400-1 August 2019 SECTION 066400 – PLASTIC PANELING PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Plastic sheet paneling (indicated as FRP on Drawings). 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Samples: For plastic paneling and trim accessories, in manufacturer's standard sizes. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install plastic paneling until spaces are enclosed and weathertight and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Source Limitations: Obtain plastic paneling and trim accessories from single manufacturer. 2.2 PLASTIC SHEET PANELING A. Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Plastic Paneling: Gelcoat-finished, glass-fiber-reinforced plastic panels complying with ASTM D 5319. Panels shall be USDA accepted for incidental food contact. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Marlite (Basis of Design) b. Crane Composites, Inc. c. Nudo Products, Inc. 2. Low-Emitting Materials: Paneling shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Public Health's (formerly, the California Department of Health Services') "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers." 3. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As follows when tested by a qualified testing agency according to ASTM E 84. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. a. Class: III/C b. Flame-Spread Index: 200 or less. c. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less. 4. Nominal Thickness: Not less than 0.09 inch. 5. Surface Finish: Molded pebble texture. 6. Color: As indicated in Finish Schedule. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Trim Accessories: Manufacturer's standard two-piece, snap-on vinyl extrusions designed to retain and cover edges of panels. Provide division bars, inside corners, outside corners, and caps as needed to conceal edges. 1. Color: Match panels. B. Exposed Fasteners: Nylon drive rivets recommended by panel manufacturer. C. Concealed Mounting Splines: Continuous, H-shaped aluminum extrusions designed to fit into grooves routed in edges of factory-laminated panels and to be fastened to substrate. D. Sealant: Mildew-resistant, single-component, neutral-curing silicone sealant recommended by plastic paneling manufacturer and complying with requirements in Section 079200 Joint Sealants. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation Denton Fire Station No. 8 PLASTIC PANELING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 066400-2 August 2019 tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Remove wallpaper, vinyl wall covering, loose or soluble paint, and other materials that might interfere with adhesive bond. B. Prepare substrate by sanding high spots and filling low spots as needed to provide flat, even surface for panel installation. C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair adhesive bond, including oil, grease, dirt, and dust. D. Condition panels by unpacking and placing in installation space before installation according to manufacturer's written recommendations. E. Lay out paneling before installing. Locate panel joints to provide equal panels at ends of walls not less than half the width of full panels. 1. Mark plumb lines on substrate at trim accessory and panel joint locations for accurate installation. 2. Locate trim accessories and panel joints to allow clearance at panel edges according to manufacturer's written instructions. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install plastic paneling according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Install panels in a full spread of adhesive. C. Install panels with fasteners. Layout fastener locations and mark on face of panels so that fasteners are accurately aligned. 1. Drill oversized fastener holes in panels and center fasteners in holes. 2. Apply sealant to fastener holes before installing fasteners. D. Install factory-laminated panels using concealed mounting splines in panel joints. E. Install trim accessories with adhesive. Do not fasten through panels. F. Fill grooves in trim accessories with sealant before installing panels, and bed inside corner trim in a bead of sealant. G. Maintain uniform space between panels and wall fixtures. Fill space with sealant. H. Maintain uniform space between adjacent panels and between panels and floors, ceilings, and fixtures. Fill space with sealant. I. Remove excess sealant and smears as paneling is installed. Clean with solvent recommended by sealant manufacturer and then wipe with clean dry cloths until no residue remains. END OF SECTION Denton Fire Station No. 8 BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 071113-1 August 2019 SECTION 071113 – BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Cold-applied, emulsified-asphalt dampproofing. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Include manufacturer’s written instructions for evaluating, preparing, and treating substrate, technical data, and tested physical and performance properties of dampproofing. 2. For fluid applied materials provide the minimum time that must pass before additional applications of fluid applied material may be installed. a. For primers provide the maximum time that may pass before primer must be reapplied. b. For membrane materials provide the maximum time that may pass before solvent wiping or abrasion is required before application of additional coats of membrane materials. c. For systems that require different primers for different substrates, indicate if one primer must be installed before or after another type of primer on an adjacent substrate. B. For membrane at expansion joints, submit the manufacturer’s written product and technical data, as well as, tested physical performance properties. C. Shop Drawings: Show locations and extent of dampproofing. Include details for substrate joints and cracks, sheet flashings, penetrations, inside and outside corners, tie-ins with adjoining dampproofing, and other termination conditions. D. Material Certificates: For each product, signed by manufacturers. E. Installer Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that installers comply with requirements. F. Sample Warranty: Copy of special dampproofing manufacturer’s and Installer’s warranty stating obligations, remedies, limitations, and exclusions before starting dampproofing. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain primary dampproofing materials and primers through one source from a single manufacturer. Provide secondary materials recommended by manufacturer of primary materials. B. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer with a minimum of 5 years’ experience installed bituminous dampproofing who is authorized, approved, or licensed by dampproofing manufacturer to install manufacturer’s products. C. Mockups: Apply dampproofing to 100 sq. ft. of wall to demonstrate surface preparation, crack and joint treatment, corner and termination treatment, thickness, texture, and ex-ecution quality. 1. If Architect/Engineer determines mockups do not comply with requirements, remove dampproofing and prepare substrate, reapply dampproofing until mockups are approved. 2. Document precipitation prior to the mock-up, surface preparation, use of moisture barrier or primer, temperature and sun exposure, if applicable, at each step, mixing paddle type, mixer speed and duration of mixing, and wet film thickness of various layers. 3. Cut out samples of cured membrane and document the presence of blisters, bubbles, and/or pinholes, if any, as well as thickness of complete system. 4. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. Review requirements for dampproofing, including surface preparation specified under other Sections, substrate condition and pretreatment, temperature and dew point before and after installation, time of day for installation, minimum curing period, forecasted weather conditions, special de-tails and sheet flashings, installation procedures, testing and inspection procedures, and protection and repairs. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Apply dampproofing within the range of ambient and substrate temperatures recommended by dampproofing manufacturer. Do not apply dampproofing to a damp or wet substrate, when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent, or when temperatures are less than 5 deg F above dew point. 1. Do not apply dampproofing in snow, rain, fog or mist, or when such weather conditions are imminent during application and curing period. B. Maintain adequate ventilation during application and curing of dampproofing materials. Denton Fire Station No. 8 BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 071113-2 August 2019 1.6 WARRANTY A. Special Manufacturer’s Warranty: Written warranty, signed by dampproofing manufacturer and Installer agreeing to repair or replace dampproofing that does not comply with requirements or that does not remain watertight within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty does not include failure of dampproofing due to failure of substrate prepared and treated according to requirements or formation of new joints and cracks in substrate that exceed 1/16 inch in width. B. Warranty Period: Five years after date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 COLD-APPLIED, EMULSIFIED-ASPHALT DAMPPROOFING A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Sonneborne Building Products Division, Hydrocide 700B 2. Henry Company, 789 Fibered Asphalt Emulsion Dampproofing 3. BASF, MasterSeal 615 4. W.R. Meadows, Inc., Sealmastic Emulsion Type II C. Trowel Coats: ASTM D 1227, Type II, Class 1. D. Fibered Brush and Spray Coats: ASTM D 1227, Type II, Class 1. E. Brush and Spray Coats: ASTM D 1227, Type III, Class 1. 2.2 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. Primer: Manufacturer’s standard, factory-formulated with separate products for concrete, sheathing and metal surfaces if required. B. Glass-Fiber Mat: Non-woven fiberglass fabric of continuous filament or jack-straw filament/yarn pattern of glass fiber, impregnated and bound together with type of organic/synthetic binder that is compatible with type of bituminous compound indicated to be reinforced, weighing 1.0 to 1.5 lbs. per 100 sq. ft,. 36-inch wide. C. Bituminous Grout: Comply with ASTM D 147. D. Plastic Cement: Asphalt based, complying with ASTM D 491, except provide coal tar base where specifically recommended by manufacturer of bituminous dampproofing materials. E. Miscellaneous Materials: 1. Membrane at Expansion Joints: 50 mil minimum, non-staining, uncured sheet neoprene. Tensile Strength: ASTM D 412, Die C - 1400 pounds per square inch minimum. a. Elongation: ASTM D 412 - 300 percent minimum. b. Tear Resistance: ASTM D 624, Die C - 125 pounds per square inch minimum. c. Brittleness: ASTM D 2137 - does not break at minus 30 degrees F. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for surface smoothness and other conditions affecting performance of work. 1. Proceed with dampproofing application only after substrate construction and penetrating work have been completed and unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 2. Verify that concrete has cured and aged for minimum time period recommended by dampproofing manufacturer. 3. Verify that concrete finish texture is wood float or shutter finish as required by manufacturer. 4. Verify that substrate is visibly dry and free of moisture. Test for surface moisture according to ASTM D 4263. 5. Utilize techniques demonstrated to be effect in mock-up installation. 6. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Protection of Other Work: Mask or otherwise protect adjoining exposed surfaces from being stained, spotted, or coated with dampproofing. Prevent dampproofing materials from entering and clogging weep holes and drains. B. Clean and prepare substrate according to ASTM D 5295 and manufacturer’s written recommendations. Provide clean, dust-free, and dry substrate for dampproofing application. C. Close off deck drains and other deck penetrations to prevent spillage and migration of dampproofing fluids. Denton Fire Station No. 8 BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 071113-3 August 2019 D. Remove grease, oil, bitumen, form-release agents, paints, curing compounds, and other penetrating contaminants or film-forming coatings from concrete. E. Remove fins, ridges, and other projections and fill honeycomb, aggregate pockets, and other voids. F. Install cant strips and similar accessories as shown and as recommended by prime materials manufacturer even though not shown. G. Prime substrate as recommended by prime materials manufacturer. H. Apply patching compound for filling and patching tie holes, honeycombs, reveals, and other imperfections; cover with asphalt-coated glass fabric. 3.3 JOINT AND CRACK TREATMENT A. Prepare, treat, rout, and fill joints and cracks in substrate according to dampproofing manufacturer’s written instructions. Remove dust and dirt from joints and cracks complying with ASTM D 4258 dry methods before coating surfaces. 3.4 APPLICATION, GENERAL A. Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations unless more stringent requirements are indicated or required by Project conditions to ensure satisfactory performance of dampproofing. 1. Apply additional coats if recommended by manufacturer or if required to achieve coverages indicated. 2. Allow each coat of dampproofing to cure 24 hours before applying subsequent coats. 3. Allow 24 hours drying time prior to backfilling. 3.5 COLD-APPLIED, EMULSIFIED-ASPHALT DAMPPROOFING A. Apply two coats of dampproofing, by brushing or spraying at rate of 2 to 3 gallons per 100 sq. ft. per coat, to produce uniform, dry film thickness of not less than 30 mils or manufacturer’s minimum thickness greater than 30 mils, whichever is greater. B. Reinforcement: At changes in plane or where otherwise shown as “Reinforced,” install lapped course of glass-fiber mat in first coat dampproofing compound before it thickens. C. Tape joints and abutting dissimilar substrates by bonding reinforcing and flashing mesh in manner recommended by prime materials manufacturer. Comply with details shown and manufacturer’s recommendations. 1. Tape all joints, penetrations, and terminations of dampproofing substrates with a 6” wide layer of glass fabric mesh tape set in initial coat of dampproofing, Topcoat tape extending topcoat application approximately 3” onto initial coat. Lap all tape splices shingle fashion a minimum of 3”. Apply top coat of dampproofing material as specified. 3.6 INSTALLATION OF PROTECTION COURSE A. Where indicated, install protection course over completed-and-cured dampproofing. Comply with dampproofing material manufacturer's written recommendations for attaching protection course. 1. Support protection course with spot application of adhesive of type recommended by protection board manufacturer over cured coating. 2. Install protection course on same day of installation of dampproofing (while coating is tacky) to ensure adhesion. 3.7 CLEANING A. Remove dampproofing materials from surfaces not intended to receive dampproofing. B. Protect waterproofing from damage and wear during remainder of construction period. C. Protect dampproofing from damage due to ultraviolet light, harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes as recommended by manufacturer’s requirements. Provide temporary coverings where dampproofing will be subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after installation. END OF SECTION Denton Fire Station No. 8 WATER REPELLENTS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 071900-1 August 2019 SECTION 071900 – WATER REPELLENTS PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes penetrating water-repellent treatments for the following vertical and horizontal surfaces: 1. Brick. 2. Concrete unit masonry. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General Performance: Water repellents shall meet performance requirements indicated without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, or installation. 1. Water Repellents: Comply with performance requirements specified, as determined by preconstruction testing on manufacturer's standard substrate assemblies representing those indicated for this Project. B. Water Absorption: Minimum 90 percent reduction of water absorption after 24 hours in comparison of treated and untreated specimens. 1. Precast Concrete: ASTM C 642. 2. Cast Stone: ASTM C 1195. 3. Concrete Masonry Units: ASTM C 140. 4. Natural Stone: ASTM C 97. C. Water-Vapor Transmission: Comply with one or both of the following: 1. Maximum 10 percent reduction in rate of vapor transmission in comparison of treated and untreated specimens, according to ASTM E 96. 2. Minimum 80 percent water-vapor transmission in comparison of treated and untreated specimens, according to ASTM D 1653. D. Water Penetration and Leakage through Masonry: Minimum 90 Insert number percent reduction in leakage rate in comparison of treated and untreated specimens, according to ASTM E 514. E. Durability: Maximum 5 percent loss of water-repellent properties after 2500 hours of weathering according to ASTM G 154 in comparison to water-repellent-treated specimens before weathering. F. Chloride-Ion Intrusion in Concrete: NCHRP Report 244, Series II tests. 1. Reduction of Water Absorption: 80 percent. 2. Reduction in Chloride Content: 80 percent. 1.4 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING A. Preconstruction Testing: Installed water repellents shall comply with performance requirements indicated, as evidenced by reports of tests performed on manufacturer's standard substrate assemblies by a qualified testing agency. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated submit water-repellent manufacturer’s literature including product description and written instructions for storage, handling, substrate preparation, protection of surrounding areas not to receive water-repellent, application, and final cleaning. 1. Include manufacturer's printed statement of VOC content. 2. Include manufacturer's recommended number of coats for each type of substrate and spreading rate for each separate coat. B. Environmental Submittals: 1. Environmental regulations applicable to site. 2. Certifications, signed by water-repellent manufacturers, that water repellents comply with environmental regulations applicable to site. C. Samples: For each type of water repellent and substrate indicated, 8 by 8 inches in size, with specified water-repellent treatment applied to half of each Sample. D. Applicator Qualifications: 1. Certification signed by water-repellent manufacturer, certifying that Applicator complies with manufacturer’s requirements to install specified water repellent. 2. Submit evidence that Applicator’s existing company has minimum of 3-years continuous experience in application of specified materials. Submit list of at least five completed projects of similar scope and size, including: a. Project name. Denton Fire Station No. 8 WATER REPELLENTS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 071900-2 August 2019 b. Owner’s name. c. Owner’s Representative name, address, and telephone number. d. Description of work. e. Water repellents used. f. Project supervisor. g. Total cost of water-repellent work and total cost of project. h. Completion date. E. Preconstruction Testing Reports: For each water-repellent-treated substrate, submit third party test reports certifying the specified performance requirements. F. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator Qualifications: Qualified firm that is approved, authorized, or licensed by water-repellent manufacturer to install water repellent. Must have installations of specified materials in local area in use for minimum of three years. 1. Employ foreman trained by water-repellent manufacturer and with minimum of 3-years’ experience as foreman on similar projects, to be on site at all times during Work. B. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1. Review requirements for water-repellent application, including: a. Construction schedule and availability of materials, Applicator’s personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. b. Site use, access, staging, and set-up location limitations. c. Approved mockup procedures. d. Forecast weather conditions. e. Surface preparation and substrate condition and pretreatment. f. Application procedures. g. Minimum curing period. h. Testing and inspection requirements. i. Site protection measures. j. Governing regulations, including environmental regulations, if applicable. 2. Contractor’s site foreman, water-repellent manufacturer’s technical representative, water-repellent Applicator, Owner’s Representative, and Architect/Engineer shall attend. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to Project site in original packages with seals unbroken, labeled with water-repellent manufacturer’s name, product brand name and type, date of manufacture, lot number, and directions for storing. B. Store materials in original, undamaged containers in clean, dry, protected, cool, well-ventilated location on raised platforms with weather-protective coverings, within temperature range required by water-repellent manufacturer and away from sources of ignition. Protect stored materials from direct sunlight. Water- repellent manufacturer’s standard packaging and covering is not considered adequate weather protection. C. Limit stored materials on structures to safe loading of structure at time materials are stored, and to avoid permanent deck deflections. D. Handle materials to avoid damage. Keep containers tightly sealed when not in use, as atmospheric moisture will react with and alter water-repellent solution. E. Remove and replace materials that cannot be applied within stated shelf life, or that are damaged or otherwise unsuitable. F. Conspicuously mark damaged or opened containers or containers with contaminated materials, and remove from site as soon as possible. G. Dispose of unused or unsuitable materials in accordance with water-repellent manufacturer’s recommendations and governing environmental regulations. Do not flush debris or water repellent down existing drains. 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Verify existing dimensions and details prior to installation of materials. Notify Architect/Engineer of conditions found to be different than those indicated in Contract Documents. Architect/Engineer will review situation and inform Contractor and Applicator of changes. B. Limitations: Proceed with application only when the following existing and forecasted weather and substrate conditions permit water repellents to be applied according to manufacturers' written instructions and warranty requirements: 1. Concrete surfaces and mortar have cured for not less than 28 days. 2. Building has been closed in for not less than 30 days before treating wall assemblies. 3. To substrates that are damp or wet, or that have dew, frost, snow, or ice on them. Denton Fire Station No. 8 WATER REPELLENTS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 071900-3 August 2019 4. To substrates below 40 degrees F or less than 5 degrees F above dew point, or above 90 degrees F. 5. When ambient temperature is below 40 degrees F, or is predicted to fall below 40 degrees F within 8 hours after application, or is above 90 degrees F. 6. When rain, snow, fog, or mist is predicted within 24 hours. 7. When wind speeds are at or above 15 miles per hour, or if windy conditions exist that may cause water repellent to be blown onto vegetation or surfaces not intended to be treated. 8. On new concrete or brick masonry exterior walls for at least 30 days following building close-in. C. Install materials in strict accordance with safety requirements required by water-repellent manufacturer, Material Safety Data Sheets, and local, state, and federal rules and regulations. D. Maintain adequate ventilation during preparation and application of water-repellent materials. Notify Owner’s Representative at least 1 week in advance of Work with materials with noxious vapors. Review application schedule and venting precautions with Owner’s Representative prior to beginning application. 1.9 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer’s Warranty: Written warranty, signed by water repellant manufacturer, that the water repellant system will be free of defects related to workmanship or material deficiency for a ten (10) year period from the date of completion of the work provided under this section of the specification. The following performance standards shall be specifically covered under the warranty. 1. Loss of water repellency: a. Using ASTM D 6489 procedure the treated concrete shall not absorb more than 1.0% water by weight for a period of 24 hours. 2. All defective areas shall be retreated by the system manufacturer as determined by the Architect/Engineer. The required written warranty shall be provided by the system manufacturer. 3. The Water Repellant Manufacturer shall be responsible for providing labor and material to reseal areas of the substrate where sealer effectiveness does not meet the specified limits. 4. Provide access to warranty repair and replacement areas. B. Installer’s Warranty: Written warranty, signed by Applicator, that the water repellant system will be free of defects related to workmanship for a five (5) year period from the date of completion of the work provided under this section of the specification. 1. Provide access to warranty repair and replacement areas. 2. Repair or replacement, to satisfaction of Owner, of other work or items which may have been displaced or damaged as consequence of defective work. 3. Make immediate emergency repairs within 48 hours of notice of loss of water repellency. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 PENETRATING WATER REPELLENTS A. Siloxane, Penetrating Water Repellent: Clear, containing 10 percent or more solids of oligomerous alkylalkoxysiloxanes; with alcohol, ethanol, mineral spirits, water, or other proprietary solvent carrier. B. Silane/Siloxane-Blend, Penetrating Water Repellent: Clear, silane and siloxane blend with 400 g/L or less of VOC’s.. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. PROSOCO; Weather Seal Siloxane PD (Basis of Design) b. BASF Construction Chemicals, LLC; Enviroseal 7 c. Pecora Corporation; KlereSeal 910-W d. Evonik Corporation; Protectosil Aqua-Trete EM PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements and conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1. Ensure that Work done by other trades is complete and ready to receive water repellent. 2. Verify that surfaces are clean and dry according to water-repellent manufacturer's requirements. Check moisture content in three representative locations by method recommended by manufacturer. 3. Inspect for previously applied treatments that may inhibit penetration or performance of water repellents. 4. Verify that there is no efflorescence or other removable residues that would be trapped beneath the application of water repellent. 5. Verify that required repairs are complete, cured, and dry before applying water repellent. Denton Fire Station No. 8 WATER REPELLENTS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 071900-4 August 2019 B. Test pH level according to water-repellent manufacturer's written instructions to ensure chemical bond to silica-containing or siliceous minerals. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. D. Notify Architect/Engineer in writing of conditions which may adversely affect water-repellent installation or performance. Do not proceed with water-repellent installation until these conditions have been corrected 3.2 PREPARATION A. Cleaning: Before application of water repellent, clean substrate of substances that could impair penetration or performance of product according to water-repellent manufacturer's written instructions and as follows: 1. Allow wet substrates to dry for at least 24 hours. Verify that substrate is sound and is visibly dry and free of moisture. 2. Provide clean, dust-free, and dry substrate. 3. Proceed with application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Commencing application constitutes acceptance of work surfaces and conditions. 4. Precast Concrete and Concrete Unit Masonry: Remove oil, curing compounds, laitance, and other substances that inhibit penetration or performance of water repellents according to ASTM E 1857. 5. Concrete: Remove oil, curing compounds, laitance, and other substances that inhibit penetration or performance of water repellents according to ASTM E 1857. a. Verify that concrete has cured and aged for minimum time period recommended by water- repellent manufacturer. b. Remove grease, oil, asphalt solids, form-release agents, paints, curing compounds, and other penetrating contaminants or film-forming coatings from concrete. Use concrete cleaner approved by water-repellent manufacturer where necessary. If cleaner is used, rinse thoroughly to remove cleaner residue. c. Thoroughly sweep substrate and clean with oil-free compressed air. B. Protect adjoining work, including mortar and sealant bond surfaces, from spillage or blow-over of water repellent. Cover adjoining and nearby surfaces of aluminum and glass if there is the possibility of water repellent being deposited on surfaces. Cover live vegetation. C. Coordination with Mortar Joints: Do not apply water repellent until pointing mortar for joints adjacent to surfaces receiving water-repellent treatment has been installed and cured and aged for minimum time period recommended by water-repellent manufacturer. D. Coordination with Sealant Joints: Do not apply water repellent until sealants for joints adjacent to surfaces receiving water-repellent treatment have been installed and for minimum time period recommended by water-repellent manufacturer.. 1. Water-repellent work may precede sealant application only if sealant adhesion and compatibility have been tested and verified using substrate, water repellent, and sealant materials identical to those required. 3.3 APPLICATION A. Before beginning application 1. Provide and maintain traffic barricades and control measures, well outside limits of wind-drifting, during application and drying of water repellent to protect vehicular and pedestrian traffic from contact with water repellent. Enclose Work area to contain wind-blown overspray. 2. Provide adequate ventilation during and after application of water repellent. B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect the substrate before application of water repellent and to instruct Applicator on the product and application method to be used. C. Apply water repellent at coverage rate demonstrated in mock-up, in uniform manner, using low-pressure spray equipment, brushes, and rollers. Use brooms and squeegees to achieve even distribution. Do not alter or dilute material. Comply with manufacturer’s written instructions for using airless spraying procedure. 1. Prior to use, thoroughly clean spray equipment, tanks, and hoses, and make free of water, foreign matter, and oily residues. Flush with anhydrous alcohol or small amounts of silane. 2. On vertical surfaces, apply from bottom up, with controlled run-down of about 8 inches, with hand- spray unit, brushes, and rollers. 3. Mask mortar and sealant bond surfaces to prevent water repellent from migrating onto joint surfaces. 4. If water-repellent application is not completed at one time, clearly mark location where application is terminated. 5. Allow water repellent to dry for at least 12 hours before exposing to vehicular, construction, or pedestrian traffic. 6. Apply additional coats in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. Comply with Denton Fire Station No. 8 WATER REPELLENTS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 071900-5 August 2019 manufacturer’s written instructions for limitations on drying time between coats and after rainstorm wetting of surfaces between coats. Consult manufacturer’s technical representative if standard written instructions are not applicable to Project conditions. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Water-repellent manufacturer’s representative shall inspect and approve preparation of substrate and protection of adjacent surfaces before application of water repellent. B. Testing of Water-Repellent Material: Owner reserves the right to invoke the following procedure at any time and as often as Owner deems necessary during the period when water repellent is being applied: 1. Owner will engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample water-repellent material being used. Samples of material delivered to Project site will be taken, identified, sealed, and certified in presence of Contractor. 2. Testing agency will perform tests for compliance of water-repellent material with product requirements. 3. Owner may direct Contractor to stop applying water repellents if test results show material being used does not comply with product requirements. Contractor shall remove non-complying material from Project site, pay for testing, and correct deficiency of surfaces treated with rejected materials, as approved by Architect.. C. Coverage Test: In the presence of Architect, hose down a dry, repellent-treated surface to verify complete and uniform product application. A change in surface color will indicate incomplete application. Test location to be chosen by Architect. 1. Notify Architect seven days in advance of the dates and times when surfaces will be tested. 2. Reapply water repellent until coverage test indicates complete coverage at no cost to Owner. 3.5 CLEANING A. Immediately clean water repellent from adjoining surfaces and surfaces soiled or damaged by water- repellent application as work progresses. Correct damage to work of other trades caused by water- repellent application, as approved by Architect. B. Comply with manufacturer's written cleaning instructions. END OF SECTION Denton Fire Station No. 8 THERMAL INSULATION Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 072100-1 August 2019 SECTION 072100 – THERMAL INSULATION PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Foam-plastic board insulation. 2. Glass-fiber blanket insulation. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration due to moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation. B. Protect foam-plastic board insulation as follows: 1. Do not expose to sunlight except to necessary extent for period of installation and concealment. 2. Protect against ignition at all times. Do not deliver foam-plastic board materials to Project site before installation time. 3. Quickly complete installation and concealment of foam-plastic board insulation in each area of construction. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 FOAM-PLASTIC BOARD INSULATION A. Locations: 1. At cavity wall behind modular brick veneer: Refer Section 092423. 2. At Continuously Insulated (CI) Cement Plaster Stucco system: Refer Section 092423. 3. At Adhered Simulated Stone Veneer Continuously Insulated (CI) system: Refer Section 072400. 2.2 GLASS-FIBER BLANKET INSULATION A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. CertainTeed Corporation. 2. Guardian Building Products, Inc. 3. Johns Manville. 4. Knauf Insulation. 5. Owens Corning. B. Unfaced, Glass-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I; with maximum flame-spread and smoke- developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively, per ASTM E 84; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics. C. Glass-Fiber Blanket, Polypropylene-Scrim-Kraft Faced: ASTM C 665, Type II (non-reflective faced), Class A (faced surface with a flame-spread index of 25 or less); Category 1 (membrane is a vapor barrier). 1. R-Values: R-30 at roofs. Provide a continuous full thickness installation with continuous contact at metal decking. 2. Secure with welded pins and washers at 24 inches on center each way or at the manufacturer’s recommended spacing, whichever is less, to hold insulation in place. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Clean substrates of substances that are harmful to insulation or that interfere with insulation attachment. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL Denton Fire Station No. 8 THERMAL INSULATION Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 072100-2 August 2019 A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and applications indicated. B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed to ice, rain, or snow at any time. C. Extend insulation to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement. D. Provide sizes to fit applications indicated and selected from manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths. Apply single layer of insulation units to produce thickness indicated unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION FOR FRAMED CONSTRUCTION A. Apply insulation units to substrates by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's written instructions. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate with adhesive or use mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units. B. Foam-Plastic Board Insulation: Seal joints between units by applying adhesive, mastic, or sealant to edges of each unit to form a tight seal as units are shoved into place. Fill voids in completed installation with adhesive, mastic, or sealant as recommended by insulation manufacturer. C. Glass-Fiber Blanket Insulation: Install in cavities formed by framing members according to the following requirements: 1. Use insulation widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing members. If more than one length is required to fill the cavities, provide lengths that will produce a snug fit between ends. 2. Place insulation in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between edges of insulation and adjoining framing members. 3. Maintain 3-inch clearance of insulation around recessed lighting fixtures not rated for or protected from contact with insulation. 4. For metal-framed wall cavities where cavity heights exceed 96 inches, support un-faced blankets mechanically and support faced blankets by taping flanges of insulation to flanges of metal studs. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Protect installed insulation from damage due to harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation is subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after installation. END OF SECTION Denton Fire Station No. 8 MASONRY VENEER SYSTEM ON CONTINUOUS INSULATION Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 072400-1 August 2019 SECTION 072400 – MASONRY VENEER SYSTEM ON CONTINUOUS INSULATION PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Manufacturer’s requirements for the proper design, use, materials, and installation of an exterior insulation and finish system having adhered manufactured stone masonry veneer facing. 1.2 REFERENCES A. ANSI A108.5 – American National Standard Specification for Installation of Ceramic Tile with Latex- Portland Cement Mortar B. ANSI A1.08.9 – Installation of Ceramic Tile with Modified Epoxy Emulsion Mortar/Grout C. ANSI A108.10 – Installation of Grout in Tilework D. ANSI A118.4 – American National Standard Specifications for Modified Dry-Set Cement Mortar E. ANSI A118.6 – American National Standard Specifications Cement Grout for Tile Installation F. ANSI A118.8 – American National Standard Specifications for Modified Epoxy Emulsion Grout G. ANSI A137.1 – American National Standard Specifications for Ceramic Tile H. ASTM B117 – Test Method for Salt Spray (Fog) Testing C150 Standard Specification for Portland Cement I. ASTM C270 – Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry J. ASTM C150 – Standard Specification for Portland Cement K. ASTM C482 – Standard Test Method for Bond Strength of Ceramic Tile to Portland Cement Paste (Modified) L. ASTM C920 – Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants M. ASTM C979 – Standard Specification for Pigments for Integrally Colored Concrete N. ASTM C1088 – Standard Specification for Thin Veneer Brick Units Made from Clay or Shale O. ASTM C1135 – Test Method for Determining Tensile Adhesion Properties of Structural Sealants P. ASTM C1177 – Standard Specification for Glass Mat Gypsum Substrate Q. ASTM C1325 – Standard Specification for Non-Asbestos Fiber-Mat Reinforced Cementitious Backer Units R. ASTM C1670 – Standard Specification for Adhered Manufactured Stone Masonry Veneer (AMSMV) Units S. ASTM D2247 – Practice for Testing Water Resistance of Coatings in 100 Percent Relative Humidity T. ASTM D3273 – Standard Test Method for Resistance to Growth of Mold on the Surface of Interior Coatings in an Environmental Chamber U. ASTM E84 – Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials V. ASTM E330 – Test Method for Structural Performance by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference W. ASTM E331 – Test Method for Water Penetration by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. X. ASTM E2134 – Standard Test Method for Evaluating the Tensile-Adhesion Performance of an Exterior Insulation and Finish System (EIFS) Y. ASTM E2273 – Standard Test Method for Determining the Drainage Efficiency of Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems (EIFS) Clad Walls Z. ASTM E2430 – Standard Specification For Expanded Polystyrene (“EPS”) Thermal Insulation Boards For Use In Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems (“EIFS”) AA. ASTM E2485 – Standard Test Method for Freeze/Thaw Resistance of Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems (EIFS) and Water Resistive Barrier Coatings BB. ASTM E2568 – Standard Specification for Class PB Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems (EIFS) CC. ASTM E2570 – Standard Test Method for Evaluating Water-Resistive Barrier Coatings Used Under Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems (EIFS) or Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems (EIFS) with Drainage DD. AC51 Acceptance Criteria for Precast Stone Veneer, ICC Evaluation Service, LLC EE. The International Building Code (IBC) FF. The Masonry Society / American Concrete Institute/ American Society of Civil Engineers 1. TMS 402/ACI 530/ASCE 5 GG. National Fire Protection Association 1. NFPA 285 – Standard Method of Test for the Evaluation of Flammability Characteristics of Exterior Non- load-bearing Wall Assemblies Containing Combustible Components 2. NFPA 268 – Standard Test Method for Determining Ignitability of Exterior Wall Assemblies Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source. HH. Tile Council of North America (TCNA) 1. Handbook for Ceramic, Glass, and Stone Tile Installation 2012 a. EJ171 Movement Joint Guidelines for Ceramic Glass and Stone 1.3 ASSEMBLY DESCRIPTION A. Adhered manufactured stone masonry veneer units or thin brick are bonded to the Parex USA Reinforced cementitious base coat and mechanical fasteners over a continuous insulation. The EPS continuous insulation is adhered with vertical ribbons of adhesive to create drainage over a water resistive barrier coating. The system is installed over glass mat gypsum sheathing, cement board sheathing, Exposure 1 Denton Fire Station No. 8 MASONRY VENEER SYSTEM ON CONTINUOUS INSULATION Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 072400-2 August 2019 plywood or OSB, concrete, or concrete masonry, or clay brick. B. Functional Criteria: 1. General: a. Insulation Board: At system termination, completely encapsulate insulation board edges by mesh reinforced base coat. The use of and maximum thickness of insulation boards shall be in accordance with applicable building codes and Parex USA requirements. b. Flashing: Flashing shall be continuous and watertight. Flashing shall be designed and installed to prevent water infiltration behind the cladding. Refer to Division 07 Flashing Section for specified flashing materials. c. See Current ICC Evaluation Service Report ESR 2562 or Contact Parex USA Technical Department for allowable design wind loads. 1) Usage not meeting above criteria is prohibited unless approved in writing by Parex USA, Inc. prior to installation d. The building interior shall be separated from the insulation board by minimum 1/2 in (12.7 mm) of gypsum board or equivalent 15 minute thermal barrier. e. Terminate the system not less than 2 inches above pavement and 6 inches above soil. f. Minimum pitch of sloped surfaces: 4/12. g. Maximum run of sloped surfaces: 10 inches. The veneer units on the slope shall be not less than the length of the slope measured from the top of the slope to the bottom of the slope. There shall be no horizontal joints within a sloped surface. h. Adhered veneer shall not be installed overhead except mosaic tiles not larger than 2"x 2"x1/8” maximum thickness. 2. Performance Requirements: a. ICC Evaluation Service, Inc. Acceptance Criteria AC 235 and 212. b. Shall meet the testing requirements of the Product Performance Sheets. c. Manufactured stone masonry veneer units to meet the requirements of Acceptance Criteria AC51. 3. Substrate construction behind water-resistive barrier coating: a. Shall be engineered to withstand applicable design loads including required safety factor. b. Surfaces must be structurally sound, stable & rigid enough to support the System. c. Maximum substrate transverse deflection under positive and negative design wind loads shall not exceed (L=span length): L/360. 1) Usage not meeting above criteria is prohibited unless approved in writing by Parex USA, Inc. prior to installation d. Substrate dimensional tolerance: Substrate wall maximum allowed variation from the required plane is 1/4" in 10 feet. e. Surface irregularities: not over 1/8 in (3 mm) 4. MVS-CI System Expansion Joints: a. Expansion joints: Continuous expansion joints shall be installed at the following locations in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations: 1) At building expansion joints. 2) At substrate expansion joints. 3) At floor lines in wood frame construction. 4) At framing deflections in light gauge cold formed metal framing. 5) Where pre-fabricated EIFS wall panels abut one another. 6) Where EIFS abuts other materials. 7) Where substrate changes. 8) Where significant structural movement occurs, such as at i. Changes in roof line. ii. Changes in building shape and/or structural system. b. Adhered veneer expansion joints: 1) At all expansion joints in the MVS-CI assembly. 2) At all inside corners. 3) Manufactured stone masonry veneer: In accordance with the manufactured stone masonry veneer manufacturer’s recommendations. c. Substrate movement and expansion and contraction of continuous insulated assembly and adjacent materials shall be taken into account in design of expansion joints, with proper consideration given to sealant properties, installation conditions, temperature range, coefficients of expansion of materials, joint width to depth ratios, and other material factors. Minimum width of expansion joints shall be as follows: 1) 1/2 in (12.7 mm) where system abuts other materials. 2) 3/4 in (19 mm) expansion joint within system. 3) Larger width where indicated on drawings. Denton Fire Station No. 8 MASONRY VENEER SYSTEM ON CONTINUOUS INSULATION Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 072400-3 August 2019 5. Manufacturer’s Details: a. Manufacturer’s latest published information shall be followed for standard detail treatments At substrate expansion joints. b. Non-standard detail treatments shall be as recommended by manufacturer, approved by Project Designer and be part of the Contract Documents. 6. Building Code Conformance: shall be acceptable for use on the project under building cade having jurisdiction. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit samples, Evaluation Reports, warranties samples, and certificates in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements Submittal Section. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. All system materials, excluding veneer units, shall be Parex USA products and purchased from Parex USA or its authorized distributor. 2. Applicator: a. Shall have completed the manufacturer’s Educational Seminar. b. Shall possess a current manufacturer’s certificate of education. c. Shall be experienced and competent in installation of plaster-like materials, adhered veneers, and liquid-applied air and water-resistive barrier coatings. B. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Insulation Board: Shall be produced and labeled under a third party quality program as required by applicable building code. 1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Delivery: Deliver materials in original packaging with manufacturer's identification. B. Storage: Store materials in a cool, dry location, out of sunlight, protected from weather and other harmful environment, and at a temperature above 40F (4C) and below 110F (43C) in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent overcrowding of construction spaces. 2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other losses. 3. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing. 4. Inspect products on delivery to determine compliance with the Contract Documents and to determine that products are undamaged and properly protected. 1.7 PROJECT / SITE CONDITIONS A. Installation Ambient Air Temperature: Minimum of 40F (4C) and rising, and remain so for 24 hours thereafter. B. Substrate Temperature: Do not apply materials to substrates whose temperature are below 40F (4C) or contain frost or ice. C. Inclement Weather: Do not apply materials during inclement weather unless appropriate protection is employed. D. Sunlight Exposure: Avoid, when possible, installation of the materials in direct sunlight. E. Materials shall not be applied if ambient temperature exceeds 105F (38C) within 24 hours of application or falls below 40F (4C) within 48 hours of application. Protect materials from uneven and excessive evaporation during hot, dry weather. F. Prior to installation, the wall shall be inspected for surface contamination, or other defects that may adversely affect the performance of the materials and shall be free of residual moisture. 1.8 COORDINATION AND SCHEDULING A. The General Contractor must coordinate sheathing fastener type and spacing with sheathing installation contractor. 1. Sheathing fastener type and spacing must be as specified for the MVS-CI system in ICC Evaluation Service Report ESR-2562. B. Coordinate water-resistive & air barrier coating installation with other construction operations. C. Coordinate water-resistive & air barrier coating installation with special inspection schedule. 1.9 WARRANTY A. Warranty: Upon request, at completion of installation, provide manufacturer’s Standard Limited Warranty. Denton Fire Station No. 8 MASONRY VENEER SYSTEM ON CONTINUOUS INSULATION Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 072400-4 August 2019 PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturer, Basis of Design: Parex USA, Inc., 4125 E. La Palma Ave., Suite 250, Anaheim, CA 92807 Contact: Architectural Sales (866.516.0061) or Technical Support (800.226.2424). B. Components: Obtain components from authorized distributors. C. Substitutions: Submit in accordance with Section 012500. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Water Resistive Barrier: 1. Parex USA WeatherSeal Spray & Roll-On water resistive and air barrier coating, fluid consistency, conforming to ASTM 2570, applied by roller, sprayer, or brush. 2. Parex USA WeatherSeal Trowel-On water resistive and air barrier coating, paste consistency, conforming to ASTM E2570, applied by trowel or taping knife. 3. Parex USA 396 Sheathing Tape: Non-woven synthetic fiber tape to reinforce Parex USA WeatherSeal Spray & Roll-On roll on water-resistive barrier at sheathing board joints, into rough openings and other terminations into dissimilar materials available in 4 in, 6 in and 9 in widths. 4. Parex USA 365 Flashing Membrane: Self-sealing, Polyester faced, rubberized asphalt membrane, 30 mils (0.76 mm) thick 5. Parex USA WeatherFlash: Exterior gunnable waterproof joint treatment and fluid applied flashing. Single-component, non-sag, moisture curing. Used in conjunction with WeatherSeal Spray and –Roll- On or WeatherSeal Trowel-On to fill penetrations and open joints up to 1/2 inch (13MM) and to flash rough openings. B. Adhesive for EPS Insulation Board: 1. Parex USA MVS EPS Basecoat /Adhesive: 100% acrylic polymer based, requiring the addition of portland cement; used as an adhesive to laminate EPS Insulation Board to either the Parex USA WeatherSeal Spray & Roll-on or Parex USA WeatherSeal Trowel-On. WARNING: NEVER SUBSTITUTE ANY OTHER ADHESIVE. C. Insulation Board: In compliance with manufacturer’s requirements for Standard System EIFS. 1. Produced and labeled under a third party quality program as required by applicable building code; and produced by a manufacturer approved by Parex USA. 2. Shall conform to ASTM C578 and ASTM E2430, Type I and the Parex USA specification for Molded Expanded Polystyrene Insulation board.. 3. Maximum size shall be 2 ft x 4 ft (610 mm x 1219 mm). 4. Thickness: a. 1 in (25 mm) board thickness. D. Base Coats: 1. Parex USA MVS EPS Basecoat: 100% acrylic polymer based, requiring the addition of portland cement. WARNING: NEVER SUBSTITUTE ANY OTHER BASE COAT. E. Parex USA Reinforcing Mesh for embedment in base coat: 1. For combustible (Type V) construction: a. Parex USA 355 Standard Mesh: Weight 4.5 oz. per sq. yd. (153 g/sq m); coated for protection against alkali. F. Mechanical fasteners and washers: 1. Corrosion resistant screws, applicable per type of framing. Minimum penetration: 3/4 inch into wood framing and three full diameter threads into steel framing, corrosion-resistant to 30 cycles of the Kesternich DIN 50018 SFW 2.0 test. G. Base Coats: 1. 1-1/4 inch diameter minimum 26 gage G90 or Galvalume metal plates. H. Parex USA Masonry Veneer Adhesive: a polymer modified portland cement dry set mortar for bonding veneer units to the fiberglass mesh reinforced EPS Base Coat & Adhesive. I. Adhered Veneer Materials: 1. Manufactured Stone Masonry Veneer as follows: a. Veneer Units: 1) Maximum Weight: 12 pounds per square foot (49 kg/m2) (if higher contact Parex USA Technical Service Department) with no single unit greater than 20 pounds (9 kg). 2) Manufacturer: Coronado Stone Products 3) Size: 1” to 4” in height X 4” to 16” in length. 4) Thickness: 1-1/4” to 2”. 5) Option 1: (Basis of Design) i. Pattern: Idaho Drystack. ii. Color: Aspen. 6) Option 2: Denton Fire Station No. 8 MASONRY VENEER SYSTEM ON CONTINUOUS INSULATION Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 072400-5 August 2019 i. Pattern: Idaho Drystack. ii. Color: Grey Quartzite. 7) Sill Profile: 900 Series. 8) Grout Joint Width: Drystacked. 2.3 RELATED MATERIALS AND ACCESSORIES A. Substrate Materials (not all conditions may apply to this Work): 1. Concrete and Concrete Masonry: unpainted, uncoated, without water-repellants. 2. Glass mat gypsum sheathing conforming to ASTM C 1177. 3. Plywood: Minimum 15/32 inch (11.9 mm) thick exterior grade or PS 1 Exposure 1, C veneer facing out, panels gapped 1/8 inch at all edges. 4. Oriented Strand Board (OSB): Minimum 7/16 inch, APA-The Engineered Wood Association, TECO, or PSI/PTL stamped as Exposure 1 or Exterior Sheathing with a PS2 or PRP-108 rating. 5. Sheathing Fasteners: Sheathing fastener type and spacing must be as specified for the MVS- CI system in ICC Evaluation Service Report ESR-2562. B. Flashing: Refer to Division 07 for flashing materials. C. Sealant System: 1. Sealant for perimeter seals around window and door frames and other wall penetrations shall be low modulus, designed for minimum 50% elongation and minimum 25% compression, and as selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range of options. 2. Expansion joints between sections of adhered masonry veneer shall have a minimum width of 3/4 in (19 mm). 3. Sealants shall conform to ASTM C920, Grade NS, Class 100/50 for expansion joints between EIFS sections, Class 50 for perimeter seals. 4. Sealant backer rod shall be closed-cell polyethylene foam. 5. Joint design, surface preparation, and sealant primer shall be based on sealant manufacturer's recommendations and project conditions. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify project site conditions under provisions of Section 010000. B. Compliance: Comply with manufacturer's instructions for installation. C. Substrate Examination: Examine prior to installation of water-resistive membrane & air barrier coating materials as follows: 1. Substrate shall be examined for soundness or harmful conditions. 2. Substrate shall be free of dust, dirt, laitance, efflorescence, and other harmful contaminants. D. Sealant and Backer Rod: To be installed, where required, in accordance with the sealant manufacturer's specifications and published literature, and using the sealant manufacturers recommended primer. E. Advise Contractor of discrepancies preventing proper installation of the water-resistive membrane & air barrier coating material. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Protection: Protect surrounding material surfaces and areas during installation of system. B. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation. C. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions. 3.3 MIXING A. Mix materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.4 APPLICATION A. General: Installation shall conform to this specification and manufacturer’s written instructions. B. Drainage Accessories and Water Resistive Barrier: 1. Treat concrete masonry substrate with Parex USA WeatherSeal Spray & Roll-On or Parex USA WeatherSeal Trowel-On water-resistive barrier coating and embed Parex USA 396 Sheathing Tape as required. 2. Flash all rough openings with Parex USA WeatherSeal Spray & Roll-On or Parex USA WeatherSealTrowel-On water-resistive barrier and embedded Parex USA 396 Sheathing Tape as required. 3. Flash heads of all openings with metal head flashing as shown in the System detail drawings. 4. Install either drainage tracks (limited to terminations at foundations) or omit track if Parex USA DrainEdge at back-wrap mesh will be installed at system terminations at foundations. Denton Fire Station No. 8 MASONRY VENEER SYSTEM ON CONTINUOUS INSULATION Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 072400-6 August 2019 5. Apply Parex USA WeatherSeal Spray & Roll-on to the surface of the substrate (2 coats required on plywood, OSB, and masonry). Over concrete and masonry, a skim coat Parex USA Stucco Level Coat may be use to fill porous surfaces and allowed to dry prior to Parex USA WeatherSeal Spray & Roll-On application. Apply Parex USA WeatherSeal Trowel-on in a single coat on concrete and concrete masonry. Center Parex USA 396 Joint Tape on edges of all vertical legs of flashing and track and embed in Parex USA WeatherSeal Spray & Roll-On. 6. Treat the heads of all window, door, louver, PTAC unit and similar openings with Parex USA DrainEdge to allow for drainage at these locations. 7. Install mesh back-wrap or edge-wrap at system terminations. C. Insulation Board: 1. Apply Parex USA MVS EPS Basecoat/ Adhesive to backs of insulation boards with a 1/2” x 1/2” U- notch trowel with 2 in. flat segments between notches. (13 x 13 x 51 mm). Apply with ribbons of adhesive oriented in a vertical direction (parallel to the 2 ft (610 mm)) dimension of the EPS board) to EPS boards. 2. Install insulation board without gaps in a running bond pattern and interlocked at corners. 3. After 24 hours of drying, or longer as may be required to completely dry in cool or damp weather, rasp irregularities off insulation board. Rasp to provide a flat surface with maximum variation of 1/4" in 10 feet. D. Base Coat and Reinforcing Mesh: 1. Combustible (Type V) construction: a. Parex USA MVS EPS Basecoat and fully embed Parex USA Standard Mesh 355 in base coat; include diagonal mesh patches at corners of openings and reinforcing mesh patches at joints of track sections. b. Install diagonal mesh patches at corners of openings and reinforcing mesh patches at joints of track sections. c. Allow base coat to dry 24 hours. d. Install corrosion resistant screws with 1-1/4 in washers through the system and into the substrate at a maximum spacing along vertical framing members of 36 inches on center and within 4 and 6 inches of wall tops. E. Manufactured Stone Masonry Veneer: 1. Ensurecomplete coverage of Parex USA Masonry Veneer Adhesive between the Parex USA MVS EPS Basecoat & Adhesive and the back side of the units. 2. Stone form veneer units: Install in accordance with the veneer unit manufacturers pattern as specified with Parex USA Thin veneer Adhesive. Set units with the veneer manufacturer’s specified nominal joint width. 3. For stone form veneer units, skim the base coat with Parex USA Masonry Veneer Adhesive covering small areas onto which the stones can be placed while the adhesive surface is still wet and tacky. 4. Apply Parex USA Masonry Veneer Adhesive to the backs of stone form units in a continuous layer thick enough to provide gap-free contact with the wet skim coat of adhesive, typically ¼” to 3/8 in. (6 mm to 9 mm) thick. Fit veneer units around corners, fitments, fixtures, drains and other built-in objects to maintain uniform joint appearance. 5. Make cut edges smooth, even and free from chipping. Do not split veneer units. 6. Expansion and Perimeter Joints: Keep all control and expansion joints free of setting materials. 7. Curing time of veneer adhesive: a. 72 hours before applying sealant when the temperature is low or the humidity is high. b. 24 hours before applying sealant when hot, dry conditions exist. c. Check the bod strength carefully before sealing. 3.5 CLEAN-UP A. Removal: Remove and legally dispose of materials from job site. 3.6 PROTECTION A. Provide protection of installed materials from water infiltration into or behind them. B. Provide protection of installed materials from dust, dirt, precipitation, and freezing during installation and continuous high humidity until fully cured and dry. C. Clean exposed surfaces using materials and methods recommended by the manufacturer of the material or product being cleaned. Remove and replace work that cannot be cleaned to the satisfaction of the Architect and Owner. END OF SECTION Denton Fire Station No. 8 UNDER SLAB VAPOR BARRIER Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 072600-1 August 2019 SECTION 072600 – UNDER SLAB VAPOR BARRIER PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Sheet materials for controlling vapor diffusion through concrete slabs. 1.3 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. ASTM E1745-17 Standard Specification for Plastic Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Soil or Granular Fill Under Concrete Slabs. 2. ASTM E1643-18a Selection, Design, Installation, and Inspection of Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Earth or Granular Fill Under Concrete Slabs. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Quality Control and Assurance: 1. Summary of test results per paragraph 9.3 of ASTM E1745. 2. All mandatory ASTM E1745 testing must be performed on a single production roll per ASTM E1745 Section 8.1. 3. Contact vapor barrier manufacturer for preconstruction meeting and to coordinate a review of the vapor barrier installation either by digital review or in person. B. Product Data: Manufacturer’s product data, specifications, and installation instructions. Include vapor barrier manufacturer’s requirements for placement, seaming and pipe book installation per ASTM E1643. C. Sample Warranties: Copies of waterproofing manufacturer’ warranty, Installer’s warranty, and General Contractor’s warranty, all stating obligations, remedies, limitations, and exclusions. Submitted with Bid. D. Test Reports: Manufacturer’s independent laboratory test reports showing compliance with ASTM and ACI Standards. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer (applicator) who is acceptable to manufacturer, who has completed applications similar in material and extent to that required for this Project, and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. B. Source Limitations: Vapor Barrier and components to be from one source from a single manufacturer. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in original packages and containers, with seals unbroken, bearing manufacturer's labels indicating brand name and directions for storage and application. B. Store materials in a clean dry location in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions to prevent deterioration from moisture or other detrimental effects. C. Stack membrane on elevated wood platform to eliminate warping. D. Protect materials during handling and application to prevent damage or contamination. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for substrate temperature and moisture content, ambient temperature and humidity, ventilation, and other conditions affecting materials performance. Do not apply on frozen ground. B. Close areas to traffic during application and for time period after application recommended in writing by manufacturer. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Coordinate placement of sheet vapor barrier with Division 03 sections. B. Coordinate placement of sealer and hardener with Division 03 sections and with requirements of finish flooring products, including adhesives, specified in Division 09 Sections. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Sheet Vapor Barrier: Denton Fire Station No. 8 UNDER SLAB VAPOR BARRIER Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 072600-2 August 2019 1. Type: 15 mil polyolefin film meeting requirements of ASTM E1745, Class A. 2. Maintain permeance of less than 0.01 Perms [grains/(ft2 · hr · inHg)] as tested in accordance with mandatory conditioning tests per ASTM E1745 Section 7.1 (7.1.1-7.1.5). 3. Strength: ASTM E1745, Class A. 4. Provide third party documentation that all testing was performed on a single production roll per ASTM E1745 Section 8.1. B. Acceptable Products: 1. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Stego Wrap Vapor Barrier by Stego Industries, LLC (Basis of Design) b. Zero-Perm Vapor Barrier by Alumiseal c. Perminator HP by W.R. Meadows C. Accessories: 1. Bonding Agent: Manufacturer’s approved or recommended vapor barrier bonding agent. 2. Sealing and Seaming: High density polyethylene tape a minimum of 4 inches in width, compatible with vapor barrier membrane, and manufactured by or recommended by vapor barrier membrane manufacturer. Tape for joints shall have at least the same permeability rating as the vapor barrier specified. a. Seams: 1) Provide product equal to Stego Crete Claw by Stego Industries, LLC. b. Penetrations of vapor barrier: 1) Provide product equal to Stego Crete Claw by Stego Industries, LLC. 2) Provide product equal to Stego Mastic by Stego Industries, LLC. i. Manufacturer’s approved vapor proofing mastic with the same permeability rating as the vapor barrier specified. c. Perimeter/terminated edge seal: 1) Provide product equal to Stego Crete Claw by Stego Industries, LLC. 2) Sealing the perimeter with one-sided seam tape is prohibited. d. Penetration Prevention: 1) Provide product equal to Beast Foot by Stego Industries, LLC. 3. Pipe Boot: Construct pipe boots from vapor barrier material and pressure sensitive tape in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine surfaces to receive membrane. Notify Architect if surfaces are not acceptable. Do not begin surface preparation or application until unacceptable conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Level or tamp or roll aggregate, sand or granular base. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Vapor Barrier: 1. Place, protect, and repair vapor barrier sheets according to ASTM E1643 and manufacturer’s written instructions. 2. Unroll vapor barrier with the longest dimension parallel with the direction of the concrete pour. 3. Install vapor barrier without tears, voids, and holes. Lap ends and edges as recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 6 inches over adjacent sheets. Seal laps with tape. 4. Turn up sheets at perimeter, at footings and vertical walls, and against penetrations, and seal joints with tape. 5. Seal joints, tears, holes, perimeter, and penetrations through vapor with tape in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. 6. Point exposed edges with pointing mastic to prevent water from traveling under membrane. 7. Adhere membrane to vertical surfaces with adhesive. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Protect complete membrane from damage. Prior to pouring concrete, inspect membrane for punctures or damage and repair as required to maintain vapor barrier integrity. END OF SECTION Denton Fire Station No. 8 SPF INSULATION Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 072730-1 August 2019 SECTION 072730 – SPF INSULATION PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Thermal Barrier: 1. SPF Insulation must be separated from the occupied interior space by a thermal barrier meeting the requirements of IBC Chapter 26. a. Separated by gyp board see plans b. Separated by an approved spray on Thermal Barrier. 1) Where shown on the plans 2) See Thermal Barrier 2. SPF applied in the crawl space shall be installed with an ignition barrier. See ignition barrier in this specification. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Perm: 1 grain/h•ft2•in-Hg. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide SPF system constructed to perform as continuous air barrier. B. Provide system constructed to perform as continuous air barrier system and as building thermal insulation. System shall accommodate movements of building materials by providing expansion and control joints as required, with accessory air seal materials at such locations, changes in substrate and perimeter conditions. C. System Characteristics: 1. Continuous, with joints and transitions made air-tight. 2. Withstand positive and negative combined design wind, fan and stack pressures on envelope without damage or displacement, and transfer load to structure. 3. Air barrier shall not displace adjacent materials under full load. 4. System shall be joined in airtight and flexible manner to air barrier material of adjacent systems, allowing for relative movement of systems due to thermal and moisture variations and creep. 5. System Penetrations: Penetrations of system and paths of air infiltration / exfiltration shall be made air-tight. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Submit product data for each product including membrane, primers, sealants, adhesives, and auxiliary materials. 2. Include manufacturer's printed instructions for evaluating, preparing, and treating substrate, temperature and other limitations of installation conditions, technical data, and tested physical and performance properties. 3. Submit copy of Evaluation Report (such as CCMC Evaluation Report) or copies of test reports from accredited testing laboratory, for each physical property, indicating that product meets requirements of ULC S705.1-01. B. Shop Drawings: Show locations and extent of system and details of all typical conditions, intersections with other envelope systems and materials, membrane counter-flashings, and details showing how gaps in construction will be bridged, how inside and outside corners are negotiated and how miscellaneous penetrations such as conduits, pipes electric boxes and similar conditions are sealed. C. Samples: Provide sample of product applied to following substrates: 1. Sheathing. D. Submit following Informational Submittals: 1. Certifications specified in Quality Assurance article. 2. Provide evidence of testing by accredited laboratory confirming material has been tested and conforms to requirements of ASTM E2178, Standard for Air Barrier Materials. a. Submit test results of air permeability testing of primary air barrier material (ASTM E 2178) b. Submit test results of assembly in accordance with ABAA test protocol. 3. Certification of compatibility by air/vapor barrier manufacturer, listing all materials on project that it connects to or that come in contact with it. Denton Fire Station No. 8 SPF INSULATION Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 072730-2 August 2019 4. Installer qualifications. 5. Manufacturer's instructions. 6. Manufacturer’s field reports. E. Closeout Submittals: 1. Submit under provisions of Section 017800. 2. Warranty: Submit specified warranty. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single-Source Responsibility: 1. Obtain system materials from single manufacturer regularly engaged in manufacturing product. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufactures materials licensed and certified by Air Barrier Association of America’s (ABAA’s) Quality Assurance Program. C. Installer Qualifications: 1. Certified in writing by system manufacturer as qualified for specified systems. D. Certifications: 1. Submit manufacturer's certification that products furnished for Project meet or exceed specified requirements. 2. Submit manufacturer's certification stating that installed system is in compliance with specified requirements. 1.7 MOCK-UPS A. Include mock-up of product on substrates. B. Field-Constructed Mock-Ups: 1. Construct typical area, not less than 100 s.f., incorporating joint preparation, stud and top of wall conditions, and thermal/ignition barrier and illustrating materials interface and seals. 1.8 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE A. Agenda: 1. Review Project Specifications and Drawings. 2. Establish installation schedules and sequence. 3. Coordinate work with in-place and subsequent construction. 4. Review weather and working conditions. 5. Review installation procedures, including: a. Substrate requirements for Project acceptance (curing of concrete surface, form release agents, temperature). b. Material installation. c. Phasing and sequencing requirements. d. Termination, flashing, expansion joint, and penetration requirements. e. Location and installation methods for ignition barrier and thermal barrier. 6. Discuss necessary protection of people and materials from over-spray and contact with chemicals and gases. B. Conduct tour of areas to receive system and report on surface acceptance, possible problem areas, and recommended remedies. 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to Project site in original packages with seals unbroken, labeled with manufacturer's name, product, date of manufacture, expiration date, and directions for storage. B. Store materials in their original undamaged packages in clean, dry, protected location and within temperature range required by air/vapor barrier manufacturer. Protect stored materials from direct sunlight. C. Avoid spillage. Immediately notify Owner if spillage occurs and start clean up procedures. D. Clean spills and leave area as it was prior to spill. 1.10 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Conditions: Apply system within range of ambient and substrate temperatures recommended by system manufacturer. Do not apply system to damp or wet substrate, unless manufacturer specifically permits that for product. 1. Do not apply system in snow, rain, fog, or mist. 2. Do not apply system when temperature of substrate surfaces and surrounding air temperatures are below those recommended by manufacturer. 3. Do not install product after expiration date printed on label of each container. Product has shelf life of 6 months from date of manufacture. Denton Fire Station No. 8 SPF INSULATION Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 072730-3 August 2019 1.11 SEQUENCING A. Begin installation only after substrate work is complete and penetrations are securely anchored. 1.12 WARRANTY A. Provide manufacturer’s warranty for period of 3 years from date of Substantial Completion. 1. Include primary air/vapor barrier and installed accessory sealant and membrane materials which fail to achieve air tight and watertight seal, exhibit loss of adhesion or cohesion, or do not cure. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Sprayed polyurethane foam material, when tested, shall meet requirements of ULC S705.1-01 Standard for Thermal Insulation-Spray Applied Rigid Polyurethane Foam, Medium Density, Material- Specification. B. Material containers shall be labeled with Evaluation Report number of evaluation agency. C. Design R value: R-26.7 (fill stud cavity). D. Foamed-in-Place Insulation: Hydrophobic, low-density, open-cell modified polyurethane spray insulation; conforming to following. 1. Thermal Resistance (R-Value/inch), ASTM C 518: 4.45 /inch. 2. Corrosion: No significant corrosion when in contact with steel under 85 percent relative humidity. 3. Flame Spread and Smoke Developed Rating, ASTM E 84: Less than 25, less than 400 respectively. E. Products supplied by but not limited to one of following: 1. Demilec, Agribalance, Arlington, Texas 76011. 2. Comparable products by BASF Corporation or Dow Styrofoam. 3. Accepted Substitute in accordance with Section 012500. 2.2 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. A. Furnish auxiliary materials recommended by air/vapor barrier manufacturer for intended use and compatible with air/vapor barrier. B. Primer: Water based liquid primer for concrete, masonry, gypsum sheathing, wood, metal, and painted substrates; 1. Air-Shield™ LM, W.R. Meadows, Inc., Hampshire, Illinois 60140. 2. Aquatac®, Henry Company Inc., El Segundo, CA 90245. 3. Mel-Prime™ Water-Based Primer, W. R. Meadows, Inc., Hampshire, Illinois 60140. 4. Accepted Substitute in accordance with Section 012500. 5. Ignition Barrier: Install Ignition Barrier meeting the requirements of Chapter 26 of the IBC for Attic and Crawl Spaces. Apply ignition barrier recommended and/or compatible with SPF Insulation manufacturer. Follow criteria for SPF Insulation in Crawl Spaces contained in AC 377. Meet the requirements of NFPA 286, UL 1715 and UBC 26-3 [1]. Acceptable Ignition Barrier manufacturers are: a. Elasticoat 1500 Ignition Barrier by BASF b. Aldocoat 800 Intumescent Coating by Aldo Products Company c. NoBurn Plus Intumescent Coating by No-Burn Inc. d. Substitutions in accordance with Section 012500. 6. Qualifications and testing criteria for Ignition Barrier and Thermal Barrier products shall receive approval from Agency Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). The Contractor shall provide AHJ approval letters as a required submittal. Listed manufacturers above are subject to this required prior approval. C. Closed Cell Backer Rods: 1. All joints shall be protected from SPF contamination by the placement of a closed cell backer rod of suitable size to protect the joint from SPF contamination. Protected joints shall include but shall not be limited to: a. Horizontal and vertical precast joints b. Precast and hollow metal frame joints c. Precast and louver/metal panel joints 2.3 EQUIPMENT A. Equipment used to spray polyurethane foam material shall be in accordance with ULC S705.2-02 and equipment manufacturer’s recommendations for specific type of application. B. Equipment settings are to be recorded on Daily Work Record as required by ULC S705.2-02 Installation standard. Denton Fire Station No. 8 SPF INSULATION Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 072730-4 August 2019 C. Each proportioner unit to supply only one spray gun. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine conditions and proceed with Work in accordance with Section 017300. B. Verify that substrate work is complete, clean and dry before beginning installation of system materials. 1. Do not proceed with installation until after minimum curing period recommended by system manufacturer. 2. Ensure that: a. Surfaces are sound, dry, even, and free of oil, grease, dirt, excess mortar or other contaminants. b. Concrete surfaces are cured and dry, smooth without large voids, spalled areas or sharp protrusions. 3. Verify substrate is visibly dry and free of moisture. Test for capillary moisture by plastic sheet method according to ASTM D4263. 4. Notify Architect in writing of anticipated problems using air/vapor barrier over substrate. 5. Commencement of work shall be deemed as acceptance of existing work and conditions. 6. Examine joints before sealing to ensure configurations, surfaces and widths are suitable for spray polyurethane foam. Report in writing defects stating locations of joints deemed unacceptable for application of spray polyurethane foam. 3.2 PREPARATION A. SPF System: 1. Remove rough or sharp projections, loose particles, and foreign matter detrimental to adhesion and application of air/vapor barrier. 2. Clean and prepare surfaces to receive air/vapor barrier in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3. Seal penetrations and cracks, and reinforce changes in substrate and other areas as recommended by manufacturer. a. Prepare, treat, and seal vertical and horizontal surfaces at terminations and penetrations through air/vapor barrier and at protrusions according to air/vapor barrier manufacturer's written instructions. 4. Apply manufacturer’s recommended primer when required for substrate application. 5. Fill voids as recommended by manufacturer. 6. Clean metal studs to ensure proper adhesion. B. Protect people and materials from over-spray and contact with chemicals and gases. C. Protection of Adjacent Surfaces: 1. Mask and cover adjacent areas to protect from over spray. 2. Ensure required foam stop or back up material are in place to prevent over spray and achieve complete seal. 3. Install temporary ducting and fans to exhaust fumes. Provide as necessary for make-up air. 4. Erect barriers, isolate area and post warning signs to advise non-protected personnel to avoid spray area. 5. Install backer rods in precast to precast joints to prevent spray from contaminating joint and preventing acceptable bond of silicone weather seal joints at the precast to precast joint or precast to fenestration products. D. Surface Preparation 1. Ensure surfaces to receive foam insulation are clean, dry, and properly secured to ensure adhesion of polyurethane foam to substrate. 2. Ensure that all work that may penetrate through system is in place and complete. 3. Ensure that surface preparation and primers required conform to manufacturer's instructions. 4. Prepare surfaces by brushing, scrubbing. Scraping, or grinding to remove loose mortar, dust, oil, grease, oxidation, mill scale and other contaminants which will affect adhesion and integrity of spray polyurethane foam. Wipe down metal surfaces to remove release agents or other non- compatible coatings, using clean sponges or rags soaked in solvent compatible with spray polyurethane foam. Ensure surfaces are dry before proceeding. 5. Install transition membranes to applicable surfaces and ensure proper adhesion of transition membranes to substrate, capable of having spray polyurethane foam insulation. 6. Install counter-flashings” a. Metal: Mechanically fasten metal counter-flashings with screws at 8 inches o.c. b. Membrane: Cut into and uncover only 3 inches of siliconized release paper along one Denton Fire Station No. 8 SPF INSULATION Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 072730-5 August 2019 edge of counter-flashing membrane. Adhere membrane flashing to pre-primed substrate minimum of 3 inches and roll firmly in place. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION FOR FRAMED CONSTRUCTION A. Spray Polyurethane Foam: 1. Spray-application of polyurethane foam shall be installed in accordance with ULC S705.2-02 and manufacturer’s instructions. 2. Apply only when surfaces and environmental conditions are within limits prescribed by material manufacturer and ULC S705.2 Installation standard. 3. Apply in consecutive passes as recommended by manufacturer to thickness as indicated on Drawings. Passes shall be not less than 1/2 inch and not greater than 2 inches. 4. Do not install spray polyurethane foam within 3 inches of heat emitting devices such as light fixtures and chimneys. 5. Finished surface of foam insulation shall be free of voids and embedded foreign objects. 6. Remove masking materials and over spray from adjacent areas immediately after foam surface has hardened. Ensure cleaning methods do not damage work performed by other sections. 7. Trim, as required, any excess thickness that would interfere with application of cladding/covering system of other sections. 8. Clean and restore surfaces soiled or damaged by work of this Section. Consult with section of work soiled before cleaning to ensure methods used will not damage work. 9. Do not permit adjacent work to be damaged by work of this Section. Damage to work of this section caused by other sections shall be repaired by this section at no additional expense to Owner. 10. Complete connections to other components or repair gaps, holes or other damage using material which conforms to ULC S710.1 Polyurethane Sealant Foam – One Component – Material or ULC S711.1 Polyurethane Sealant Foam – Two Components – Material and shall be installed in accordance with ULC S710.2 Polyurethane Sealant Foam – One component – Installation or ULC S711.2 Polyurethane Sealant Foam – Two Component – Installation, whichever is appropriate. B. Tolerances: Maximum variation from indicated thickness: 1. Minus (-)1/4 inch; 2. Plus (+)1/2 inch. C. Apply ignition barrier and thermal barrier in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Comply with requirements of Section 014000. B. Manufacturer’s Field Services: 1. Notify manufacturer in timely manner to arrange for manufacturer’s technical representative’s site visits to ensure proper installation, verify work is in accordance with manufacturer’s requirements, and warranty requirements have been met. 2. Manufacturer’s Qualified Technical Representative: Monitor activities and advise applicator of proper installation procedures and precautions. 3. Minimum Site Visits: a. Pre-construction conference. b. First day of installation on site including acceptance of substrate conditions. c. Periodic Visits: Weekly during installation and upon completion to verify that installed system complies with ABAA Quality Assurance Program. 4. Submit reports; include site observations, instructions, and monitoring activities. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Protect installed insulation from damage due to harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation is subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after installation. END OF SECTION Denton Fire Station No. 8 DIMENSIONAL SHINGLE ROOFING SYSTEM Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 073113-1 August 2019 SECTION 073113 – DIMENSIONAL SHINGLE ROOFING SYSTEM (Deduct Alternate No. 3) PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes new dimensional roofing and related flashings. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ASTM D 41-85 – Asphalt Primer Used in Roofing and Waterproofing. B. ASTM D 312-89 – Asphalt Used in Roofing. C. ASTM D 1863-86 – Mineral Aggregate Used on Shingle Roof System D. ASTM D 4586-86 – Asphalt Roof Cement, Asbestos Free E. American Society of Civil Engineer (ASCE) – Minimum Design Codes for Buildings and Other Structures, ASCE 7. F. Federal Specifications (FS) – FF-S-325 Shield, Expansion; Nail, Expansion; and Nail, Drive Screws (Devices, Anchoring, Masonry). G. National Roofing Contractors Association (NRCA) – Roofing and Waterproofing Manual, latest edition. H. National Roofing Contractors Association (NRCA) – Technical Developments. I. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA) – latest edition. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator: 1. Approved manufacturer of accepted roof system. 2. Single applicator with minimum of five years previous successful experience in installations of similar systems. B. Regulatory Requirements: 1. System shall be classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc., UL 790, as Class A roof covering. 2. Follow local, state and federal requirements, safety standards, and codes. 3. Refer to applicable building codes for roofing system installation requirements and limitations. Wen conflict exists, the more restrictive document will govern. C. Pre-installation Conference: 1. Prior to roofing installation, conduct pre-installation conference at project site. 2. Attendance: Owner, Architect, Consultant, Contractor, project superintendent, roof applicator, and roof manufacturer’s technical representative. 3. Agenda: a. Scheduling of roofing operation. b. Daily production anticipated. c. Designation of key individuals and their respective responsibilities. d. Processing procedures of field and change orders. e. Review of staging and material storage locations. f. Accommodations for temporary services (water and power). g. Coordination of work by other trades. h. Protection of completed roofing. i. Emergency rain protection procedures. j. Discussion of process for manufacturer’s inspection and acceptance of completed roofing and flashings. k. Manufacturer’s deck inspection to be performed. D. Installation: 1. Installation shall be in accordance with procedures and standards set forth by National Roofing Contractors Association. 2. Installation shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s current published application procedures and general recommendations of National Roofing Contractors Association. Follow Underwriters Laboratories’ requirements acceptable for use with specified products or systems. 3. Roofing shall be as described in the section and shall be provided and approved by roof system manufacturer. Materials not manufactured or provided by manufacturer shall have written approval from manufacturer stating that materials are acceptable and are compatible with other materials and system required. E. There shall be no deviations made from manufacturer’s published specification, this specification, or Denton Fire Station No. 8 DIMENSIONAL SHINGLE ROOFING SYSTEM Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 073113-2 August 2019 approved shop drawings without prior written approval of Owner’s Representative and Roof Membrane Manufacturer. F. Perform work in this section in accordance with best standards of practice relating to trades involved. G. Laboratory Testing and Samples: 1. At Owner’s request, obtain three (3) field samples of completed roof membrane and assembly. Take samples at locations designated by Owner’s Representative and Architect and test for compliance with requirements on Contract Documents and with manufacturer’s published performance criteria. Test shall be performed by nationally recognized testing laboratory in accordance with accepted ASTM methods. Contractor shall assume costs for extraction and patch of samples and testing of field sample. 2. Correct deficiencies in accordance with manufacturer’s recommended procedures at no cost to Owner. 3. If, for any reason, areas that are tested by Owner fail to meet manufacturer’s requirements, then subsequent expense for retesting of those areas will be borne by Contractor. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in manufacturer's original, unopened containers or packages with labels intact and legible. Any materials delivered to the site must be covered for weather protection. Any materials arriving at the job site unprotected will be rejected. All materials must be tarped and on pallets. B. Store materials in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. C. Store rolled goods on clean, raised platforms. Store other materials in dry area, protected from water and direct sunlight. D. Provide continuous protection of materials against deterioration for duration of project. E. Materials Stored on Roof Levels for Immediate Use: 1. Distribute to prevent concentrated loads that would impose excessive strain on deck or structural members. 2. Positively secure to prevent displacement by wind. 3. Tarp for protection from exposure. 1.6 SITE CONDITIONS A. Job Condition Requirements: 1. Apply roofing in dry weather. 2. Do not apply roofing when ambient temperature is below 45° F. 3. Proceed with roofing work only when weather conditions are in compliance with manufacturer's recommended limitations, and when conditions will permit the work to proceed in accordance with specifications. 4. For further information regarding roofing material manufacturer's recommendations for project conditions, refer to the manufacturer's published application manual. 5. Schedule the work so the building will be left watertight at the end of each day. 6. All surfaces to receive new roofing shall be smooth, dry, and free from dirt, debris, and foreign material before any of this work is installed. Competent operators shall be in attendance at all times equipment is in use. Materials shall be stored neatly in areas designated by the General Contractor. Load placed on the roof at any point shall not exceed the safe load for which the roof is designed. 7. The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions to protect the roof mat and deck from damage. The Contractor shall be responsible for repairing all new areas of damage caused by the negligence of the Contractor, at the Contractor's expense. The Owner's on-site representative shall determine damage caused by Contractor negligence. 8. Follow insurance underwriter's requirements acceptable for use with specified products or systems. 9. Due caution should be exercised so as not to alter the structural integrity of the deck. When cutting through any deck, care should be taken so as not to damage the deck or any part of the deck, such as post tension cables, etc. 10. The Contractor is to verify the location of all interior ducts, electrical lines, piping, conduit, and/or similar obstructions. The Contractor is to perform all work in such a manner as to avoid contact with the above mentioned items. B. Protection of Work and Property: 1. Work: The Contractor shall maintain adequate protection of all his work from damage and shall protect the Owner's and adjacent property from injury or loss arising from this contract. He shall provide and maintain at all times any OSHA required danger signs, guards, and/or obstructions necessary to protect the public and his workmen from any dangers inherent with or created by the work in progress. All federal, state, and city rules and requirements pertaining to safety and all EPA standards, OSHA standards, NESHAP regulations pertaining to asbestos as required shall be fulfilled by the contractor as part of his proposal. 2. Property: Protect existing planting and landscaping as necessary or required to provide and maintain Denton Fire Station No. 8 DIMENSIONAL SHINGLE ROOFING SYSTEM Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 073113-3 August 2019 clearance and access to the work of this contract. Examples of two categories or degrees of protection are generally as follows: a) removal, protection, preservation, or replacement and replanting of plant materials; b) protection of plant materials in place, and replacement of any damage resulting from the Contractor's operations. 3. Twenty-Four Hour Call: The Contractor shall have personnel on call 24 hours per day, seven (7) days per week for emergencies during the course of a job. The Owner's project manager is to have the 24 hour numbers for the contact. Contractor must be able to respond to any emergency call and have personnel on-site within two (2) hours after contact. Numbers available to the Owner's project manager are to be both home and office numbers for: a. Project Manager b. Project Superintendent c. Owner or Company Officer C. Damage to Work of Others: The contractor shall repair, refinish, and make good any damage to the building or landscaping resulting from any of his operation. Damage done to the building, equipment, or grounds must be repaired at the successful contractor's expense holding the Owner harmless from any other claims for property damage and/or personal injury. D. Measurements: It will be the Contractor's responsibility to obtain and/or verify any necessary dimensions by visiting the job site, and the Contractor shall be responsible for the correctness of same. Any drawings supplied are for reference only. E. Cleaning and Disposal of Materials: 1. Contractor shall keep the job clean and free from all loose materials and foreign matter. Contractor shall take necessary precautions to keep outside walls clean and shall allow no roofing materials to remain on the outside walls. 2. All waste materials, rubbish, etc., shall be removed from the jobsite premises as accumulated. Rubbish shall be carefully handled to reduce the spread of dust. A suitable scrap chute or hoist must be used to lower any debris. At completion, all work areas shall be left broom clean and all contractor's equipment and materials removed from the site. 3. Debris shall be deposited at an approved disposal site. 1.7 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Coordinate roofing schedule with work of other trades. B. Plan layup roofing membrane with respect to deck slope. Avoid situations where excessive drainage could pass into completed roofing. C. Maintain communication with roofing manufacturer's representative to inform of progress and to schedule periodic sample testing. D. All penetrations shall be made in roof prior to beginning with roof installation. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Roofing - Manufacturer: Project shall be installed in such a manner that the roofing material manufacturer will furnish a written thirty (30) year limited warranty from the date of substantial completion of the completed project. B. Roofing – Contractor: The Contractor, jointly with any subcontractors employed by him, shall guarantee the work required and performed under this contract will be free from defects in workmanship and materials, and that the building will be and remain waterproof for a two (2) year warranty period, after the Owner accepts the work as substantially complete. The warranty shall be in approved notarized written form, to obligate the contractor and his subcontractors, if any, to make good the requirements of the warranty. C. Warranty repairs shall be performed by a certified installer. The repairs shall be performed in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions and recommended procedures so as to not void the warranty. Repair of the system, including materials and labor, shall be done at no cost to the Owner. D. During the proposal period each Bidder shall make arrangements with the material manufacturer to provide the required warranty. E. Special Warranty: Submit a written warranty signed by manufacturer agreeing to repair or replace asphalt shingles that fail in materials or workmanship with the specified warranty period. Failures include, but are not limited to, deformation or deterioration of asphalt shingles beyond normal weathering. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURER A. Acceptable Manufacturer: 1. CertainTeed Corporation. P.O. Box 860, Valley Forge, PA 19482. Phone: 800-233-8990. 2. Substitutions: Submit in accordance with Section 012500. 2.2 DIMENSIONAL SHINGLES A. Conforming to ASTM D 3018 Type I – Self-Sealing; UL Certification of ASTM D 3462, ASTM D 3161 Class Denton Fire Station No. 8 DIMENSIONAL SHINGLE ROOFING SYSTEM Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 073113-4 August 2019 “F” (110-mph) /UL997 Wind Resistance and UL Class A Fire Resistance; glass fiber mat base; ceramically colored/UV resistant mineral surface granules across the entire face of the shingle; algae-resistant; full two layer laminated four tab shingle, plus additional random tabs 1. Weight: 425 pounds per square (100 square feet). 2. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range of options. 2.3 MATERIALS A. Underlayment: Flexible, self-adhering rubberized asphalt sheet membrane with a polymeric film on the surface and a removable silicone-treated release sheet on the adhesive side 1. Refer Section 074100 for requirements. B. Shingle Nails: Annular standard roofing type nail of hot dipped galvanized coated steel; minimum 19/64 inch head diameter and 0.104 inch shank diameter of minimum length of 1-1/2" and capable to penetrate through deck a minimum one-half inch (1/2") into roof sheathing. C. Plastic Cement: FS SS-C-153, asphaltic type with mineral fiber components. D. Lap Cement: Fibrated cutback asphaltic type as recommended for use as an adhesive in the cold application of asphalt roofing or underlayments; free of toxic solvents. E. Flashing Materials: 1. Sheet Flashings: 24-gauge steel with minimum 1.25 ounce/square feet galvanized coating, ASTM A361. 2. Bituminous Paint: Acid and alkali resistant type: black color. F. Sealants: One-part polyurethane based sealant, complying with ASTM C920, Type M, Class 25, FF TT S 00227E, as manufactured by Sonneborn, or approved equal. G. Polyisocyanurate Nailable Base Clad Rigid Insulation: Rigid closed cell polyisocyanurate, clad on top side with minimum 5/8 inch plywood surface (OSB not allowed); verify compatibility with roofing membrane manufacturer. 1. Refer Section 074100 for requirements. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. The manufacturer's technical specifications shall be considered as part of this specification and should be referred to for more specific application procedures when referred to by these specifications. B. Application of materials shall be in strict accordance with these specifications and the manufacturer's recommendation, and general references as provided by the NRCA when specifically referenced. In the instance a conflict arises between these specifications and those of the manufacturer's, the most stringent specification shall prevail. C. General Instructions: 1. Protect all vertical wall areas with tarpaulin or other equal device. 2. All surfaces shall be free of deck bridges, gaps or other abnormalities. 3. Wrinkles in underlayment are not acceptable. 4. All loose decking material not defective shall be refastened prior to roof application. 3.2 APPLICATION A. Underlayment: Over the entire surface. Provide an additional layer at all ridges, valleys, rakes and eaves. B. Starter Course: A starter course shall consist of shingle starter, self-sealing type shingles. Remove the exposed tab portion and install with the factory applied adhesive adjacent to the eaves. Attach the starter course with approved fasteners along a line parallel to and three inches (3") to four inches (4") above the eaves' edge. The starter course should overhang both the eaves and rake edges one-half inch (1/2") to three-fourths inch (3/4"). C. Shingle Application: General application of all shingles shall be straight and symmetrically aligned on the roof surface by visual appearance. Chalk lines are required and shall be lined to present a precise and definitive appearance. Improperly applied or misaligned shingle application shall be promptly removed and replaced. Start the first course with a full size shingle and overhang the rake edge. Cut seven inches (7") from a full shingle to form a shingle twenty-nine inches (29") long. Use this to start the second course. Cut a twenty-two inch (22") long shingle to start the third course. Use the remaining fourteen inch (14") piece of shingle to start the fourth course and use the remaining seven inch (7") piece to begin the fifth course. Continue up the rake in as many rows as necessary using the same formula as outlined above. The butt of the shingle should be aligned with the tip edge of the saw-tooth of the underlying shingle for a five inch (5") exposure. Extra pieces can be worked in anywhere without creating zippers or color variations. D. The exposure of these shingles is five inches (5"). The "cutout" height in the overlay pattern, and horizontal alignment is attained through the use of abutting the following shingle. E. The shingles may be installed from the left or right side of the deck, utilizing random application method. The first course shall begin with a full strip and continue across the roof with full shingles. Succeeding courses shall be staggered according to the manufacturer's instructions so that the end joints of a given course are offset from the preceding or underlying course. The end joints of each course shall be a minimum of three inches (3") from the fasteners of the underlying shingles. Denton Fire Station No. 8 DIMENSIONAL SHINGLE ROOFING SYSTEM Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 073113-5 August 2019 F. Each course should be continued across the roof with full shingles after application of the appropriate size starting shingle. A fastener line is provided on the face of these shingles and shall be used for proper placement of the fasteners. Placement of the fasteners along this line will ensure attachment through both the overlay and underlay panels of the shingle. The fastener is not a lay line and should not be used for shingle alignment. G. In all courses, where the end of the first shingle does not coincide with the drip edge of a rake, a nail should be placed within one and one-half inches (1-1/2") of the rake edge. Another nail should be placed one inch (1") from the other end of the shingle. All nails in all courses should be six and three-eighths inches (6-3/8") down from the top edge of the shingle and all nails should penetrate both the overlay and underlay portions of the shingles. H. All step-flashing at vertical walls shall be pre-finished sheet metal, to include galvanized counterflashing, minimum 24-gauge, and in full accordance with the standard recommendations of industry manuals, i.e., SMACNA, NRCA, etc. 3.3 CLOSED-CUT VALLEY A. All valleys shall be completed with a close-cut or California cut finish. 3.4 GRAVITY VENTS A. Install a minimum of twelve (12) additional vents installed in conjunction with new roof system in areas designated by the Architect or Owner’s Representative. 3.5 LEAD FLASHING A. Install new lead flashing to soil pipes on roof with new lead flashing, minimum eight inches (8") in height. END OF SECTION Denton Fire Station No. 8 METAL ROOF PANELS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 074100-1 August 2019 SECTION 074100 – METAL ROOF PANELS PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Work Included: The contractor shall provide all material, labor, and administration and other items to provide a complete standing seam metal roof system complying with performance requirements indicated and capable of withstanding structural movement, thermally Induced movement and exposure to weather without failure or infiltration of water into the building interior. B. Coordinate standing seam metal roof system with roofing substructure work. C. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, and Sections in Division 1 of these Specifications. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Preformed and prefinished standing seam metal roof system with continuous mechanically seamed ribs, concealed clips and fastening devices. B. Color coordinated ridge, hip, valley, gable, eave, comer, rake, headwall, counter flashings and miscellaneous flashings and attaching devices. C. Provide concealed clips, fasteners, closures and factory and field applied sealants as necessary to meet design criteria and ensure a weather tight Installation. D. Bituthane membrane roofing underlayment. E. Polyisocyanurate Nailable Base Clad Rigid Insulation. 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Design Requirements: 1. The standing seam metal roof system, including: panels, flashings, attachment clips and attachment screws shall be designed by the metal roof system manufacturer per to meet the following design criteria: a. 2012 version of the International Building Code. b. Basic wind speed as indicated in Drawings. c. Listing of applicable loads by roof zones (interior edges and corners). d. Building importance factor is 1.15 - Essential Facilities. e. Roof snow load as indicated in Drawings. f. Building exposure factor is "C", open terrain. 2. The standing seam metal roof system manufacturer shall provide an engineered analysis of the roofing system, sealed by a registered Structural Engineer employed by the manufacturer and licensed in the State in which the Project is located, verifying that the product and attachment methods will resist wind pressures imposed upon it pursuant to the design criteria and that the roofing system fully complies with all specified requirements. 3. The panel system shall bear fully documented proof that it has been Independent laboratory evaluated using the U.S. Army Corps of Engineers Guide Specification (CEGS) 07416. a. Testing shall include establishment of ultimate and allowable system uplift capacities for both the "field and areas of discontinuity". b. “Proof” shall be defined as both the manufacturer and the product being included in the document entitled: ·List of Approved Standing Seam Metal Roof Systems" as published by the U.S. Army Corps of Engineers. 4. Provide factory preformed panel system that has been pretested and certified by manufacturer to comply with specified requirements under installed conditions. 5. Provide factory engineered and tested end lap (splice) details at roof third points, per ASTM 2140 water immersion testing. 6. Provide continuous mechanically seamed ribs that inherently Increase load span capability, stiffness and flexural stress handling capacity. 7. Provide continuous butyl sealant within the confines of the female flange. 8. Provide factory-preformed panel that has been tested and approved for a Class 4 Impact Hail resistance rating per UL 2218. Listing shall be present on the UL website (Refer to Underwriters Laboratories website at www.ul.com). 9. On-site or field manufactured panels are not acceptable. Field curving of pre-manufactured panels is acceptable. B. Structural Requirements: 1. Panel structural properties determined In accordance with latest edition of American Iron and Steel Institute's "Cold Formed Steel Design Manual, D using "effective width" concepts. 2. Wind uplift design for roof assemblies shall be calculated by the standing seam metal rooting system manufacturer per ASTM E 1592. Calculations shall include establishment of ultimate and Denton Fire Station No. 8 METAL ROOF PANELS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 074100-2 August 2019 allowable roof system uplift capacities for both the "field end "areas of discontinuity"'. 3. Provide confirmation of positive and negative buckling moments and uplift capacity determined by full-scale tests. C. Substrate Criteria: 1. Standing Seam Metal Roofing System: Engineer standing seam metal roof system installed over underlayment and polyisocyanurate nailbase clad rigid insulation over 22-gaugemetal decking that is capable of withstanding the design loads when applied at 90º to the surface and spaced as shown on the approved shop drawings. 2. Waterproof Membrane Underlayment: Apply waterproof membrane under entire roof surface per manufacturers written Instructions. 3. Polyisocyanurate Nailable Base Clad Rigid Insulation: Attach polyisocyanurate nailable base clad rigid insulation to metal decking as per the manufacturers written instructions and In the required pattern to resist the design loading. D. Environmental Requirements: Actual independent laboratory certified test results must be submitted. 1. Resistance to air Infiltration: 0.002 cfm per linear foot of joint when tested in accordance with ASTM E 1680 at static test pressure differential of 12.00 psf. 2. Resistance to water infiltration: No leakage through panel joints when tested in accordance with ASTM E 1648 at static test pressure differential of 20.00 psf. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications, engineered detail drawings, and installation instructions. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Submit one set of full size (24” x 36") approval I design drawings produced by the standing seam metal roof system manufacturer indicating roof panel layout, cross section details for every condition, thickness and dimensions of parts, fastenings and anchoring methods, details and locations of seams, transitions and other provisions necessary for thermal expansion and contraction. 2. Indicate roof terminations, clearly showing flashings and change of direction caps. 3. Clearly indicate locations of field and factory applied sealant 4. Show locations, spacing patterns and types of hold-down clips and fasteners. C. Samples: 1. Submit two (2) samples, twelve inch (12") tong by full width of panel, showing proposed metal gauge and seam profile. 2. Submit color samples on metal for Architect's selection from manufacturer's standard color offering. D. Test Reports: Submit verification the panel system meets the Environmental Conditions for the Indicated test pressures and performance listed for Air and Water Infiltration. E. Engineered Design Calculations: 1. Submit panel system manufacturer's design calculations verifying the panel system meets the specified building code as defined In Section 1.03 System Description, Design Requirements listed above. 2. Design calculations shall be seated by a registered Structural Engineer employed by the standing seam metal roof system manufacturer and licensed in the State in which the Project is located. F. Certification: 1. Submit manufacturer's certification that materials and finishes meet specified requirements. 2. Submit written verification of panel Applicator's factory installation training performed by the standing seam metal roof system manufacturer and a copy of the Panel Applicator's "Authorized Applicator" certificate. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: 1. Minimum twenty (20) years’ experience in the fabrication of standing seam metal roof systems on projects of similar size and scope. Upon request, submit a minimum of five (5} project references for Architect's review. List project address, date of installation, Architects and Owner's name and telephone numbers. 2. No other manufacturer of standing seam metal roof systems will be accepted· without prior written approval of the Architect and based upon the manufacturer verifying the product can meet or exceed a performance criteria listed in these specifications. 3. Requests to be listed as an approved manufacturer must be submitted in writing a minimum 7 days prior to bid date accompanied by product literature, technical information, sealed engineer's calculations verifying conformance, and a product sample. Approved manufacturers will only be set forth in a written and issued addendum. B. Applicator Qualifications: Denton Fire Station No. 8 METAL ROOF PANELS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 074100-3 August 2019 1. Panel Applicator must have a minimum of five (5) years’ experience in the application of standing seam metal roof systems. 2. Panel Applicator must be factory trained by the standing seam metal roof system manufacturer prior to the bid date in order to obtain a contract for installation. 3. Use adequate members of skilled workers who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work in this Section. 4. Use equipment of adequate size, capacity and numbers to accomplish the work of this Section in a timely manner. 5. Upon request, submit a minimum of five (5) successfully completed protects of similar size and scope. List project address, date of installation, Architect and Owner's name and telephone numbers. 6. Single Source Responsibility. Provide all items of the standing seam metal roof system work specified herein by a single roofing contractor to provide undivided responsibility. C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with all requirements of applicable building codes and other agencies having jurisdiction for positive and negative design loads of standing seam metal roof systems. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING: A. Delivery: 1. Delivery of material shall be made only after suitable facilities for Its storage and protection area available on the site. 2. Protect products and accessories from damage and discoloration during transit and at project site. 3. Upon receipt of prefinished preformed metal panels, flat sheets, flashings and panel accessories, Panel Applicator shall examine each container for damage and for completeness of the consignment. B. Storage: 1. Store materials out of the weather in a clean, dry place. One end of each container should be slightly elevated and covered with a loose weatherproof covering to prevent condensation. 2. Panels and/or flashings with strippable film must not be stored in areas exposed to direct sunlight. 3. Care should be taken to prevent contact with any substance that may cause discoloration. 4. Store materials to provide ventilation and prevent bending, abrasion or twisting. 5. Do not overload roof structure with stored materials. Do not permit material storage or traffic on completed roof surfaces. C. Handling: 1. Care should be taken to avoid gouging, scratching or denting. 2. Do not allow traffic on completed roof. If required, provide cushioned walk boards. 3. Protect installed products from damage caused by foreign objects and construction until completion of project. 4. Comply with pertinent provisions of Supplementary General Conditions. 1.7 WARRANTY: A. Furnish manufacturer's standard 20 year written finish warranty stating that architectural fluorocarbon finish will be: 1. Free from fading or color change In excess of five (5) NBS units as measured per ASTM 2244-68. 2. Will not chalk In excess of a numerical rating of seven (7) when measured in accordance with standard procedures specified In ASTM D 659-74. 3. Will not peel, crack, chip or delaminate. B. Furnish a written warranty signed by the Panel .Applicator for a two (2) year period from the date of substantial completion of the building guaranteeing materials and workmanship for weather tightness of the roofing system, flashings, penetrations and against all leaks. C. Special Weathertight Warranty: Furnish manufacturer's 20 year. full system, non-prorated, no dollar limit weathertight warranty to be jointly signed by the manufacturer and the Panel Applicator. D. Protect products and accessories from damage and discoloration during transit and at project site. Store sheets and components in dry storage area to prevent condensation. E. Do not overload roof structure with stored materials. Do not permit material storage or traffic an completed roof surfaces. 1.8 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE: A. Convene prior to commencing work of this Section. B. Attendants: Panel Applicator, installer of each component of associated work, Installers of deck or substrate construction to receive roofing work, Architect, Owner or Owner's Representative, Roofing system manufacturer's technical representative and General Contractor. C. Record discussion, decisions and agreements reached and furnish a copy to each attendant. D. Review installation procedures and coordination required with related Work. Denton Fire Station No. 8 METAL ROOF PANELS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 074100-4 August 2019 E. Tour representative areas of roofing substrates, Inspect and discuss condition of substrates. roof drains, curbs, penetrations, wood nailers and other preparatory work performed by other trades. F. Review structural loading limitations of steel deck and inspect deck for loss of flatness and as required for mechanical fastening. G. Review roofing system requirements (approved manufacturer's shop drawings, specifications and other contract documents. H. Review required submittals. I. Review and finalize construction schedule related to roofing work and verify availability of materials, installer's personnel, equipment and facilities needed to avoid delays. J. Review weather and forecasted weather conditions and procedures for coping with unfavorable conditions, including possibility of temporary roofing. K. General Contractor to document the meeting with written minutes and copy all in attendance. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: A. Standing Seam Metal Roof System: Pac-Clad or prior approved equal. Prior approval is required per Supplementary General Conditions, and alternate manufacturers must be approved per written and issued addendum a minimum of fifteen (15} days prior to the bid date. 1. Pac Clad; Tite-Loc Plus, Contact is Chris Headley, (214)914-6907, ckheadley@gmail.com. 2. Subject to compliance with requirements, acceptable manufacturers include: a. Berridge Manufacturing. b. MBCI. B. Bituthane Membrane Waterproof Underlayment: A minimum 50 mil self-adhering membrane. a. Hyload; HyBase SAM. b. No substitutions allowed. C. Polyisocyanurate Nailable Base Clad Rigid Insulation. 1. Nailable base to be 5/8 inch plywood. No OSB allowed. 2. Applications: a. Living Quarters: minimum R-8.5 (minimum 1-1/2” insulation). b. Vehicle Bays and Support Spaces: minimum R-20 (minimum 3-1/2” insulation). 3. Subject to compliance with requirements, acceptable products include: a. Rmax; Nailable Base 3. b. Atlas Roofing Corporation; AC Foam Nail Base. c. Certain Teed; FlintBoard ISO NB. D. Substitutions: 1. Requests to be listed as an approved manufacturer must be submitted in writing a minimum fifteen (15) days prior to bid date accompanied by product literature, technical information, sealed engineer's calculations verifying conformance, and a product sample. Approved manufacturers will only be set forth in a written and issued addendum. 2. Alternate manufacturers must fully comply with all specified requirements. 2.2 MATERIALS: A. Panels: 1. Prefinished Galvalume® sheet, ASTM AZSO made of 55% aluminum, 1.6% silicon and the balance zinc as described In ASTM specification A792. 2. Panels shall be 22-gauge with a Polyvinylidene (Kynar 500) Finish. 3. Factory fabricated panel with integral continuous overlapping seams suitable for continuous locking or crimping by mechanical means during installation. Onsite or field manufactured panel profiles are not acceptable. 4. Seam Size: 2 inch high x width as indicated on Drawings. a. Provide butyl sealant within the confines of female seam flange, on the bottom edge of female seam flange, designed to seal against adjacent male panel leg. B. Clip Fastener Assemblies: 1. Typical clip, UL-90 requirements: a. Wind Rated Fasteners: As per approved manufacturer's engineered shop drawings. b. Wind Rated Clip: Sliding 22-gauge galvanized steel hook in combination with a double fastened 16--gauge galvanized steel base. both at Fy (MIN) = 33 ksi. Clip hook shall have a shop Installed hot-melt butyl sealant for continuity of seal at clip locations. 2. Typical Low Clip Requirements: a. UL-90 Fasteners: As per approved manufacturer's engineered shop drawings. b. Sliding 26-gauge at Fy--40ksi {MIN) galvanized steel hook in combination with a double fastener 18-gauge at Fy =50 ksi (MIN) galvanized steel base. Clip hook shall have a shop Installed hot-melt butyl sealant for continuity of seal at clip locations. Denton Fire Station No. 8 METAL ROOF PANELS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 074100-5 August 2019 3. Standard Flashing Fasteners: Same as Wind Rated Fasteners specified above. C. Accessories: 1. Provide manufacturer's standard accessories and other items essential to completeness of the standing seam metal roof Installation. 2. Roof Jacks: Manufacturer's standard EPDM with an aluminum sealing base ring; for openings twelve Inches (12") or smaller. 3. Roof Curbs: fabricated to the specifications of the standing seam metal roof manufacturer, thereby assuring compatibility with the roof construction framing and covering. Roof curbs shall be of sufficient size and design to coordinate with requirements for support of heat and smoke vents specified. Roof curb flashing and framing shall provide for the expected expansion and contraction of the standing seam metal roofing system. D. Field Sealants: 1. Color coordinated primer-less silicone, urethane, or high grade, non-curing butyl as recommended and engineered by panel manufacturer. 2. Do not use sealants containing asphalt. E. Bituthane Membrane Waterproof Underlayment: 1. Flexible, self-adhering rubberized asphalt sheet membrane with a polymeric film on the surface and a removable silicone-treated release sheet on the adhesive side 2. Bituthane membrane underlayment shall be rated for high temperature resistance up to 260 F. 3. Bituthane membrane shall have a maximum permeance rating of 0.05 perms. 4. Minimum thickness shall be 50 mils. F. Polylsocyanurate Nailbase Clad Rigid Insulation: Rigid closed cell polyisocyanurate, clad on top side with minimum 5/8 inch plywood surface (OSB not allowed); verify compatibility with roofing membrane manufacturer. 2.3 FABRICATION A. Panels: 1. Provide factory formed panel widths of sixteen inch (16"), with a two inch (2”) high standing seam. 2. On-site or field manufactured panels are not acceptable. Field curving of pre-manufactured panels is acceptable. 3. Provide panels with engineered end laps (splices) at third points, shingled to accommodate water run-off (fabricated with over tap in direction of water flow). 4. Roof panels shall have flush horizontal and vertical surfaces to facilitate sealing at terminations. Panel configurations that create voids and require supplemental closure devices are acceptable. B. Seams: 1. Panel seams shall interlock entire length of seam, by means of a mechanically driven rib seamer. 2. Design standing seam to lock up and resist joint disengagement during design windup lift conditions as calculated to comply with local building codes and design uplift criteria. 3. Provide factory sealant within confines on trailing edge of female seam leg to aid in resistance of leaks and provide panel-to-panel seal while allowing expansion and contraction movement, and the seams shall be continuously locked or crimped together by mechanical means during installation. C. Clips: 1. Provide Wind Rated Clips designed to allow panels to thermally expand and contract and provide a minimum of ±one inch (1") of thermal movement. Clips shall incorporate a self-centering feature to allow a minimum of one inch (1”) of movement in both directions along panel length. 2. Clips shall be designed to meet positive and negative pressures as calculated and engineered by the standing seam metal roofing system manufacturer. D. Engineer panels to use concealed anchors that permit expansion and contraction, including at roof end laps (splices). E. Trim/Flashings: 1. Prefinished sheet metal designed by the manufacturer In the same gauge, material and finish as the standing seam metal roofing system. 2. Locations, design, sealing and fastening methods as per the manufacturer's approved engineered shop drawings. 2.4 FINISH: A. Fluorocarbon Coating: 1. Full strength 70% Kynar 500® coating baked on for fifteen (15) minutes at 450°F to dry-film thickness of 1.0 mil. 2. 15% reflective gloss meeting ASTM D 523 (low-gloss). 3. 0.3 mil baked on epoxy primer. 4. Backer side of panels to be painted with an off-white polyester coating. 5. Top Side Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of color offerings. Denton Fire Station No. 8 METAL ROOF PANELS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 074100-6 August 2019 2.5 PROTECTION A. Metal Roofing: Protect work as required to ensure that the standing seam metal roof system will be without damage at time of final completion. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Workmanship: Standing seam metal roof and sheet metal work shall be fabricated, assembled, and installed in a manner consistent with best trade practice. B. All aspects of installation of roof panels shall be in conformance with the building manufacturer's recommendations. Position and align panels with ribs parallel to the roof slopes. Roofing panels shall be field roll formed in order to provide full lengths without end seams. The roof covering shall be properly flashed and caulked to make a watertight assembly. 3.2 TOUCH UP & CLEAN A. Factory film coating shall be removed after installation. B. Field touch-up of scratches or defaced metal panels will be permitted only if approved by the Architect in writing. Otherwise, any and all defective materials shall be replaced with new materials. C. Keep job site clean of rubbish and debris. END OF SECTION Denton Fire Station No. 8 FIBER CEMENT SIDING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 074646-1 August 2019 SECTION 074646 – FIBER CEMENT SIDING PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes: Wood-fiber cement trim boards for privacy screening. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 013300 Submittal Procedures, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including: 1. Manufacturer's requirements for related materials to be installed by others. 2. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 3. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 4. Installation methods, including nail patterns. C. Warranty: Submit copy of manufacturer’s warranty, made out in Owner’s name, showing that it has been registered with manufacturer. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of the type specified in this section with minimum 3 years of experience. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store products under waterproof cover and elevated above grade, on a flat surface. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Trim Boards: Made of cement and cellulose fiber formed under high pressure with integral surface texture, complying with ASTM C1186 Type A Grade II; with machined edges, for bolt attachment, 5/4 inch thickness, smooth finish, 3-1/2 inch and 5-1/2 inch widths. 1. Acceptable Product: HardieTrim by James Hardie Building Products. B. Fasteners: Galvanized or corrosion resistant complying with ASTM A153; length as required per details on Drawings. C. Finish: Factory primer for field paint finish. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Examine substrate and clean and repair as required to eliminate conditions that would be detrimental to proper installation. B. Do not begin until unacceptable conditions have been corrected. C. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. 1. Read warranty and comply with all terms necessary to maintain warranty coverage. 2. Install in accordance with conditions stated in model code evaluation report applicable to location of project. 3. All field cut edges to be sealed per manufacturer recommendation before installing. 5. Pre-drill all bolt holes to prevent breakage. B. Finish Painting: Specified in Section 099100 Painting. 3.3 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products until completion of project. B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION Denton Fire Station No. 8 FLEXIBLE FLASHING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 076210-1 August 2019 SECTION 076210 – FLEXIBLE FLASHING PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Formed Products: Concealed flashing within wall assemblies to protect and shed incidental water to the exterior. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Flashing and trim assemblies as indicated shall withstand structural movement, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. Completed sheet metal flashing and trim shall not rattle, leak, or loosen, and shall remain watertight. B. Thermal Movements: Provide sheet metal flashing and trim that allows for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes. 1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each manufactured product and accessory. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation layouts of sheet metal flashing and trim, including plans, elevations, expansion-joint locations, and keyed details. Distinguish between shop and field assembled work. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Do not store flashing materials in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage. Store flashing materials away from uncured concrete and masonry. B. Protect strippable protective covering on sheet metal flashing and trim from exposure to sunlight and high humidity, except to the extent necessary for the period of sheet metal flashing and trim installation. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 FLEXIBLE FLASHING A. Self-Adhesive flexible flashing product consisting of a pliable, adhesive rubberized-asphalt compound, bonded to a high-density, cross-laminated polyethylene film to produce an overall thickness of not less than 40 mils. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Advanced Building Products Inc.; Strip-N-Flash b. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing; CCW-705 Air & Vapor Barrier Strips c. Grace Construction Products; Perm-A-Barrier Detail Membrane d. Henry Company; Blueskin SA 2.2 HIGH TEMPERATURE FLASHING A. Self-Adhering, High-Temperature Sheet: Minimum 30 to 40 mils (0.76 to 1.0 mm) thick, consisting of slip- resisting polyethylene-film top surface laminated to layer of butyl or SBS-modified asphalt adhesive, with release-paper backing; cold applied. Provide primer when recommended by manufacturer. 1. Thermal Stability: ASTM D 1970; stable after testing at 240 deg F. 2. Low-Temperature Flexibility: ASTM D 1970; passes after testing at minus 20 deg F. 3. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing Inc.; CCW WIP 300HT b. Grace Construction Products; Ultra. c. Henry Company; Blueskin PE200 HT d. Owens Corning; WeatherLock Metal High Temperature Underlayment 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for complete metal flashing installation and recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal or manufactured item unless otherwise indicated. Denton Fire Station No. 8 FLEXIBLE FLASHING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 076210-2 August 2019 B. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric silicone polymer sealant; low modulus; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and remain watertight. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, to verify actual locations, dimensions and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1. Verify compliance with requirements for installation tolerances of substrates. 2. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and securely anchored. B. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 FLASHING INSTALLATION A. General: Install as indicated on Drawings and per Manufacturer’s recommendations. B. Self-Adhering Sheet Flashing: Install self-adhering sheet flashing, wrinkle free. Apply primer if required by flashing manufacturer. Comply with temperature restrictions of flashing manufacturer for installation. Apply in shingle fashion to shed water, with end laps of not less than 6 inches staggered 24 inches between courses. Overlap side edges not less than 3-1/2 inches. Roll laps with roller. Cover flashing with subsequent construction within 14 days. C. Location: 1. Flexible Flashing: As indicated on drawings, or at all exterior windows, doors or other penetrations where high temperature flashing is not required. 2. High Temperature Flashing: As indicated on drawings, or at all locations where flashing will be in contact with metal coping or metal panels where high temperatures exist. END OF SECTION Denton Fire Station No. 8 ROOF SPECIALTIES Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 077100-1 August 2019 SECTION 077100 – ROOF SPECIALTIES PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Roof edge specialties. 2. Roof edge drainage systems. 3. Reglets and counterflashings. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: For roof specialties. 1. Include plans, elevations, expansion joint locations, keyed details, and attachments to other work. Distinguish between plant and field assembled work. 2. Include details for expansion and contraction; locations of expansion joints, including direction of expansion and contraction. 3. Indicate profile and pattern of seams and layout of fasteners, cleats, clips, and other attachments. 4. Detail termination points and assemblies, including fixed points. 5. Include details of special conditions. C. Samples: For each type of roof specialty and for each color and texture specified. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Certificates: For each type of roof specialty. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects, and set quality standards for fabrication and installation. 1. Build mockup of typical roof edge as shown on Drawings. 2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing. 3. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Do not store roof specialties in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage. Store roof specialties away from uncured concrete and masonry. B. Protect strippable protective covering on roof specialties from exposure to sunlight and high humidity, except to extent necessary for the period of roof-specialty installation. 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify profiles and tolerances of roof-specialty substrates by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. B. Coordination: Coordinate roof specialties with all flashing, trim, and construction of parapets, roof deck, roof and wall panels, and other adjoining work to provide a leak-proof, secure, and noncorrosive installation. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Roofing-System Warranty: Roof specialties are included in warranty provisions in Metal Roof Panel Section. B. Special Warranty on Painted Finishes: Manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace roof specialties that show evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period. 1. Fluoropolymer Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following: a. Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244. b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214. c. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal. 2. Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion. Denton Fire Station No. 8 ROOF SPECIALTIES Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 077100-2 August 2019 PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General Performance: Roof specialties shall withstand exposure to weather and resist thermally induced movement without failure, rattling, leaking, or fastener disengagement due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. B. SPRI Wind Design Standard: Manufacture and install copings and roof edge specialties tested according to SPRI ES-1 and capable of resisting the following design pressures: 1. Design Pressure: As indicated on Drawings. C. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes to prevent buckling, opening of joints, hole elongation, overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Provide clips that resist rotation and avoid shear stress as a result of thermal movements. Base calculations on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime sky heat loss. 1. Temperature Change (Range):120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces. 2.2 ROOF-EDGE DRAINAGE SYSTEMS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Cheney Flashing Company. 2. Hickman Company, W. P. 3. Merchant & Evans, Inc. 4. Metal-Era, Inc. 5. Metal-Fab Manufacturing, LLC. B. Gutters: Manufactured in uniform section lengths not exceeding 12 feet, with matching corner units, ends, outlet tubes, and other accessories. Elevate back edge at least 1 inch above front edge. Furnish flat-stock gutter straps, gutter brackets, expansion joints, and expansion-joint covers fabricated from same metal as gutters. 1. Zinc-Coated Steel: Nominal 0.028-inch minimum thickness. 2. Gutter Profile: As indicated on Drawings. 3. Corners: Factory mitered and mechanically clinched and sealed watertight. C. Downspouts: Plain rectangular complete with machine-crimped elbows, manufactured from the following exposed metal. Furnish with metal hangers, from same material as downspouts, and anchors. 1. Zinc-Coated Steel: Nominal 0.028-inch minimum thickness. 2. Downspout Profile: As indicted on Drawings. 2.3 REGLETS AND COUNTERFLASHINGS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Cheney Flashing Company. 2. Fry Reglet Corporation. 3. Heckmann Building Products Inc. 4. Hickman Company, W. P. 5. Keystone Flashing Company, Inc. 6. Metal-Era, Inc. 7. Metal-Fab Manufacturing, LLC. B. Reglets: Manufactured units formed to provide secure interlocking of separate reglet and counterflashing pieces, from the following exposed metal: 1. Zinc-Coated Steel: Nominal 0.022-inch thickness. 2. Corners: Factory mitered and mechanically clinched and sealed watertight. 3. Surface-Mounted Type: Provide reglets with slotted holes for fastening to substrate, with neoprene or other suitable weatherproofing washers, and with channel for sealant at top edge. C. Counterflashings: Manufactured units of heights to overlap top edges of base flashings by 4 inches and in lengths not exceeding 12 feet designed to snap into reglets and compress against base flashings with joints lapped, from the following exposed metal: 1. Zinc-Coated Steel: Nominal 0.022-inch thickness. D. Accessories: 1. Flexible-Flashing Retainer: Provide resilient plastic or rubber accessory to secure flexible flashing in reglet where clearance does not permit use of standard metal counterflashing or where reglet is provided separate from metal counterflashing. 2. Counterflashing Wind-Restraint Clips: Provide clips to be installed before counterflashing to prevent wind uplift of counterflashing lower edge. E. Zinc-Coated Steel Finish: Two-coat fluoropolymer. 1. Color: Match metal roof panels. Denton Fire Station No. 8 ROOF SPECIALTIES Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 077100-3 August 2019 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Fasteners: Manufacturer's recommended fasteners, suitable for application and designed to meet performance requirements. Furnish the following unless otherwise indicated: 1. Exposed Penetrating Fasteners: Gasketed screws with hex washer heads matching color of sheet metal. 2. Fasteners for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: Series 300 stainless steel or hot-dip zinc- coated steel according to ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329. B. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric polyurethane polymer sealant of type, grade, class, and use classifications required by roofing-specialty manufacturer for each application. C. Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, asbestos free, of consistency required for application. 2.5 FINISHES A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Protect mechanical and painted finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. C. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are unacceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. D. Coil-Coated Galvanized-Steel Sheet Finishes: 1. High-Performance Organic Finish: Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with ASTM A 755/A 755M and coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions. a. Two-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 621. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions. b. Concealed Surface Finish: Apply pretreatment and manufacturer's standard acrylic or polyester backer finish consisting of prime coat and wash coat with a minimum total dry film thickness of 0.5 mil. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, to verify actual locations, dimensions, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Examine walls, roof edges, and parapets for suitable conditions for roof specialties. C. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage where applicable, and securely anchored. D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION A. Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment: Apply primer if required by manufacturer. Comply with temperature restrictions of underlayment manufacturer for installation. Apply wrinkle free, in shingle fashion to shed water, and with end laps of not less than 6 inches staggered 24 inches between courses. Overlap side edges not less than 3-1/2 inches. Roll laps with roller. Cover underlayment within 14 days. 1. Apply continuously under copings roof-edge specialties. 2. Coordinate application of self-adhering sheet underlayment under metal roof panels with requirements for continuity with adjacent air barrier materials. 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. General: Install roof specialties according to manufacturer's written instructions. Anchor roof specialties securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Use fasteners, solder, protective coatings, separators, underlayments, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete roof-specialty systems. 1. Install roof specialties level, plumb, true to line and elevation; with limited oil-canning and without warping, jogs in alignment, buckling, or tool marks. 2. Provide uniform, neat seams with minimum exposure of solder and sealant. 3. Install roof specialties to fit substrates and to result in weathertight performance. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before manufacture. 4. Torch cutting of roof specialties is not permitted. 5. Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces. B. Expansion Provisions: Allow for thermal expansion of exposed roof specialties. 1. Space movement joints at a maximum of 12 feet with no joints within 18 inches of corners or Denton Fire Station No. 8 ROOF SPECIALTIES Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 077100-4 August 2019 intersections unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. 2. When ambient temperature at time of installation is between 40 and 70 deg F, set joint members for 50 percent movement each way. Adjust setting proportionately for installation at higher ambient temperatures. C. Fastener Sizes: Use fasteners of sizes that penetrate wood blocking or sheathing not less than 1-1/4 inches for nails and not less than 3/4 inch for wood screws. D. Seal concealed joints with butyl sealant as required by roofing-specialty manufacturer. E. Seal joints as required for weathertight construction. Place sealant to be completely concealed in joint. Do not install sealants at temperatures below 40 deg F. 3.4 ROOF-EDGE DRAINAGE-SYSTEM INSTALLATION A. General: Install components to produce a complete roof-edge drainage system according to manufacturer's written instructions. Coordinate installation of roof perimeter flashing with installation of roof edge drainage system. B. Gutters: Join and seal gutter lengths. Allow for thermal expansion. Attach gutters to firmly anchored gutter supports spaced not more than 24 inches apart. Attach ends with rivets and seal with sealant to make watertight. Slope to downspouts. 1. Install gutter with expansion joints at locations indicated but not exceeding 25 feet apart. Install expansion-joint caps. C. Downspouts: Join sections with manufacturer's standard telescoping joints. Provide hangers with fasteners designed to hold downspouts securely to walls and various distances away from walls; locate fasteners as per architectural Drawings. 1. Connect downspouts to underground drainage system indicated. 3.5 REGLET AND COUNTERFLASHING INSTALLATION A. General: Coordinate installation of reglets and counterflashings with installation of base flashings. B. Surface-Mounted Reglets: Install reglets to receive flashings where flashing without embedded reglets is indicated on Drawings. Install at height so that inserted counterflashings overlap 4 inches over top edge of base flashings. C. Counterflashings: Insert counterflashings into reglets or other indicated receivers; ensure that counterflashings overlap 4 inches over top edge of base flashings. Lap counterflashing joints a minimum of 4 inches and bed with butyl sealant. Fit counterflashings tightly to base flashings. 3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and weathering. B. Clean and neutralize flux materials. Clean off excess solder and sealants. C. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as roof specialties are installed. On completion of installation, clean finished surfaces, including removing unused fasteners, metal filings, pop rivet stems, and pieces of flashing. Maintain roof specialties in a clean condition during construction. D. Replace roof specialties that have been damaged or that cannot be successfully repaired by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures. END OF SECTION Denton Fire Station No. 8 SNOW GUARDS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 077253-1 August 2019 SECTION 077253 – SNOW GUARDS (Included with Deduct Alternate No. 3) PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Snow guards for metal roofs. 2. Non-penetrating attachment system. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Division 01: Administrative, procedural and temporary work requirements apply to this section B. Section 074100 Metal Roof Panels C. Section 077100 Roof Specialties 1.3 REFERENCES A. Aluminum Association (AA) – Aluminum Standards and Data, 2003 Edition. B. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. B85-03 – Standard Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Die Castings. 2. B221-04a – Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles and Tubes. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittal: 1. Shop Drawings: Include roof plans showing locations of snow guards on roof and attachment details and spacing. 2. Product Data: a. Product description, construction details, material descriptions, individual component dimensions, finishes and installation instructions. 3. Samples: a. Clamp samples. b. 12-inch long cross member samples including all associated hardware. B. Informational Submittals: 1. Include calculation of number and location of snow guards based on designed roof snow load, roof slope, roof type, components, spacings and finish. 2. Test results: Results of product tensile load testing, issued by a recognized independent testing laboratory, showing ultimate load-to-failure value of attachment. C. Closeout Submittals: 1. Certification: Installer’s certification that snow guard system was installed in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and approved Shop Drawings. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer to specialize in production of Snow Guard Products of the type specified with a minimum of 20 years documented experience. B. Installer Qualifications: Installer to specialize in metal roof installation and installation of Snow Guard Products with a minimum of 5 years documented experience. C. Mockup: 1. Size: Minimum 8 feet long, in location as directed by Architect.. 2. Show: Snow guard attachment, cross members and accessories. 3. Approved mockup may remain as part of the Work. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver components to jobsite properly packaged to provide protection during transport, delivery and handling. B. Store products in manufacturer’s original labeled and unopened packaging in a clean and dry location, protected from potential damage, until ready for application. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Attachment system to provide attachment to standing seam metal roofs: 1. With only minor dimpling of panel seams. 2. Without penetrations through roof seams or panels. Denton Fire Station No. 8 SNOW GUARDS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 077253-2 August 2019 3. Without use of sealers or adhesives. 4. Without voiding roof warranty. B. Performance Requirements: Provide snow guards to withstand exposure to the weather and environmental elements, and resist design forces without failure due to defective manufacture. 1. Loading: Design snow guard system to resist minimum in-service vector load of 8 pounds per linear foot of eave. 2. Factor of safety: Utilize a factor of safety 6 to determine allowable loads from ultimate tested clamp tensile load values. 3. Source Limitation: Provide snow guard system as designed and tested by the manufacturer as a complete system. Install components by the same manufacturer. 2.2 MANUFACTURER A. Acceptable Manufacturer: S-5! Metal Roof Innovations, Ltd., 8655 Table Butte Road, Colorado Springs, CO. 80908; Tel: 888-825-3432; Web: www.s-5.com 2.3 BAR/RAIL-TYPE SNOW RETENTION SYSTEMS FOR STANDING SEAM METAL ROOFS A. Basis of Design: ColorGard, manufactured by S-5! Metal Roof Innovations, Ltd. B. Components: 1. Clamps a. Manufactured from 6061-T6 aluminum extrusions conforming to ASTM B221 or aluminum castings conforming to ASTM B85 and to AA Aluminum Standards and Data. 1) Model: No. S-5-U. 2) Set screws: 300 Series stainless steel, 18-8 alloy, 3/8 inch dia., with round nose point. 3) Attachment bolts: 300 Series stainless steel, 18-8 alloy, 8 mm or 10 mm diameter, hex-flange bolt. 2. Cross Members: a. Manufactured from 6061-T6 or 6005-T5 alloy and temper aluminum extrusions conforming to ASTM B221 and AA Aluminum Standards and Data. b. Receptacle in face to receive color-matched metal strips. c. Provide splice connectors ensuring alignment and structural continuity at end joints. 3. Color Strips: Same material and finish as roof panels; obtained from roof panel manufacturer. 4. Snow and Ice Clips: a. Aluminum, with rubber foot, minimum 3 inches wide. 1) Model: SnoClip (in size compatible with standing seam height). PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Prior to beginning installation, verify that: 1. Panel seaming is complete and that attachment is sufficient to withstand loads applied by snow guard system. 2. Installation will not impede roof drainage. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean areas to receive attachments; remove loose and foreign matter that could interfere with installation or performance. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install system in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and approved Shop Drawings. B. ColorGard Snow Retention System: 1. Place clamps at maximum 32 inches on center or as required by in-service loads. 2. Place clamps in straight, aligned rows with both set screws on same side of clamps. 3. Tighten screws to manufacturer’s recommended torque. Randomly test set screw torque using calibrated torque wrench. 4. Insert color-matched metal strips into cross members, staggering strips to cover joints. 5. Attach cross members to clamps; tighten bolts to manufacturer’s recommended torque. 6. Install splice connectors at cross member end joints. 7. Do not cantilever cross members more than 4 inches beyond last clamp at ends. 8. Install one SnoClip per panel between panel seams. a. SnoClips: slide onto cross member before securing cross member to clamps. END OF SECTION Denton Fire Station No. 8 INTUMESCENT FIREPROOFING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 078123-1 August 2019 SECTION 078123 – INTUMESCENT FIREPROOFING PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes mastic and intumescent fire-resistive coatings (MIFRC). 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Shop Drawings: Structural framing plans indicating the following: 1. Extent of fireproofing for each construction and fire-resistance rating. 2. Applicable fire-resistance design designations of a qualified testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Minimum fireproofing thicknesses needed to achieve required fire-resistance rating of each structural component and assembly. 4. Treatment of fireproofing after application. C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, in manufacturer's standard dimensions in size. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Certificates: For each type of fireproofing. B. Evaluation Reports: For fireproofing, from ICC-ES. C. Field quality-control reports. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual certified, licensed, or otherwise qualified by fireproofing manufacturer as experienced and with sufficient trained staff to install manufacturer's products according to specified requirements. 1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not apply fireproofing when ambient or substrate temperature is 50 deg F or lower unless temporary protection and heat are provided to maintain temperature at or above this level for 24 hours before, during, and for 24 hours after product application. B. Ventilation: Ventilate building spaces during and after application of fireproofing, providing complete air exchanges according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use natural means or, if they are inadequate, forced-air circulation until fireproofing dries thoroughly. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Assemblies: Provide fireproofing, including auxiliary materials, according to requirements of each fire- resistance design and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Source Limitations: Obtain fireproofing for each fire-resistance design from single source. C. Fire-Resistance Design: Indicated on Drawings, tested according to ASTM E 119 or UL 263 Insert testing requirement by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Steel members are to be considered unrestrained unless specifically noted otherwise. D. VOC Content: Products shall comply with VOC content limits of authorities having jurisdiction and the following VOC limits when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24): 1. Flat Paints and Coatings: 50 g/L. 2. Nonflat Paints and Coatings: 150 g/L. 3. Primers, Sealers, and Undercoaters: 200 g/L. 4. Fireproofing Exterior Coatings: 350 g/L. E. Low-Emitting Materials: Fireproofing used within the weatherproofing system shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers." F. Asbestos: Provide products containing no detectable asbestos. Denton Fire Station No. 8 INTUMESCENT FIREPROOFING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 078123-2 August 2019 2.2 MASTIC AND INTUMESCENT FIRE-RESISTIVE COATINGS A. MIFRC: Manufacturer's standard, factory-mixed formulation or factory-mixed, multicomponent system consisting of intumescent base coat and topcoat, and complying with indicated fire-resistance design. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Carboline Company, subsidiary of RPM International, Fireproofing Products Div.; AD Firefilm III for interior applications and Nullifire S605 for exterior applications. b. Comparable products by Albi Manufacturer, International Paint, Isolatch. 2. Thickness: As required for fire-resistance design indicated, measured according to requirements of fire-resistance design. 3. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. a. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less. b. Smoke-Developed Index: 50 or less. 4. Finish: Spray-textured finish. a. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 5. Note: Exterior application requires top coat as recommended by manufacturer for application. 2.3 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that are compatible with fireproofing and substrates and are approved by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for use in fire- resistance designs indicated. B. Substrate Primers: Primers approved by fireproofing manufacturer and complying with required fire- resistance design by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. C. Reinforcing Fabric: Glass- or carbon-fiber fabric of type, weight, and form required to comply with fire- resistance designs indicated; approved and provided by fireproofing manufacturer. D. Reinforcing Mesh: Metallic mesh reinforcement of type, weight, and form required to comply with fire- resistance design indicated; approved and provided by fireproofing manufacturer. Include pins and attachment. E. Topcoat: Suitable for application over applied fireproofing; of type recommended in writing by fireproofing manufacturer for each fire-resistance design. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for substrates and other conditions affecting performance of the Work and according to each fire-resistance design. Verify compliance with the following: 1. Substrates are free of dirt, oil, grease, release agents, rolling compounds, mill scale, loose scale, incompatible primers, paints, and encapsulants, or other foreign substances capable of impairing bond of fireproofing with substrates under conditions of normal use or fire exposure. 2. Objects penetrating fireproofing, including clips, hangers, support sleeves, and similar items, are securely attached to substrates. 3. Substrates receiving fireproofing are not obstructed by ducts, piping, equipment, or other suspended construction that will interfere with fireproofing application. B. Conduct tests according to fireproofing manufacturer's written recommendations to verify that substrates are free of substances capable of interfering with bond. C. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work. D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Cover other work subject to damage from fallout or overspray of fireproofing materials during application. B. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of fireproofing. C. Prime substrates where included in fire-resistance design and where recommended in writing by fireproofing manufacturer unless compatible shop primer has been applied and is in satisfactory condition to receive fireproofing. D. For applications visible on completion of Project, repair substrates to remove surface imperfections that could affect uniformity of texture and thickness in finished surface of fireproofing. Remove minor projections and fill voids that would telegraph through fire-resistive products after application. 3.3 APPLICATION A. Construct fireproofing assemblies that are identical to fire-resistance design indicated and products as specified, tested, and substantiated by test reports; for thickness, primers, topcoats, finishing, and other Denton Fire Station No. 8 INTUMESCENT FIREPROOFING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 078123-3 August 2019 materials and procedures affecting fireproofing work. B. Comply with fireproofing manufacturer's written instructions for mixing materials, application procedures, and types of equipment used to mix, convey, and apply fireproofing; as applicable to particular conditions of installation and as required to achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated. C. Coordinate application of fireproofing with other construction to minimize need to cut or remove fireproofing. 1. Do not begin applying fireproofing until clips, hangers, supports, sleeves, and other items penetrating fireproofing are in place. 2. Defer installing ducts, piping, and other items that would interfere with applying fireproofing until application of fireproofing is completed. D. Install auxiliary materials as required, as detailed, and according to fire-resistance design and fireproofing manufacturer's written recommendations for conditions of exposure and intended use. For auxiliary materials, use attachment and anchorage devices of type recommended in writing by fireproofing manufacturer. E. Spray apply fireproofing to maximum extent possible. Following the spraying operation in each area, complete the coverage by trowel application or other placement method recommended in writing by fireproofing manufacturer. F. Extend fireproofing in full thickness over entire area of each substrate to be protected. G. Install body of fireproofing in a single course unless otherwise recommended in writing by fireproofing manufacturer. H. Provide a uniform finish complying with description indicated for each type of fireproofing material and matching finish approved for required mockups. I. Cure fireproofing according to fireproofing manufacturer's written recommendations. J. Do not install enclosing or concealing construction until after fireproofing has been applied, inspected, and tested and corrections have been made to deficient applications. K. Finishes: Where indicated, apply fireproofing to produce the following finishes: 1. Manufacturer's Standard Finishes: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions for each finish selected. 2. Spray-Textured Finish: Finish left as spray applied with no further treatment. 3. Rolled, Spray-Textured Finish: Even finish produced by rolling spray-applied finish with a damp paint roller to remove drippings and excessive roughness. 4. Skip-Troweled Finish: Even leveled surface produced by troweling spray-applied finish to smooth out the texture and neaten edges. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Special Inspections: Engage a qualified special inspector to perform the following special inspections: 1. Test and inspect as required by the IBC, 1704.11. B. Perform the tests and inspections of completed Work in successive stages. Do not proceed with application of fireproofing for the next area until test results for previously completed applications of fireproofing show compliance with requirements. Tested values must equal or exceed values as specified and as indicated and required for approved fire-resistance design. C. Fireproofing will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. 1. Remove and replace fireproofing that does not pass tests and inspections, and retest. 2. Apply additional fireproofing, per manufacturer's written instructions, where test results indicate insufficient thickness, and retest. D. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.5 CLEANING, PROTECTING, AND REPAIRING A. Cleaning: Immediately after completing spraying operations in each containable area of Project, remove material overspray and fallout from surfaces of other construction and clean exposed surfaces to remove evidence of soiling. B. Protect fireproofing, according to advice of manufacturer and Installer, from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes, so fireproofing will be without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. C. As installation of other construction proceeds, inspect fireproofing and repair damaged areas and fireproofing removed due to work of other trades. D. Repair fireproofing damaged by other work before concealing it with other construction. E. Repair fireproofing by reapplying it using same method as original installation or using manufacturer's recommended trowel-applied product. END OF SECTION Denton Fire Station No. 8 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 078413-1 August 2019 SECTION 078413 – PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Penetrations in fire-resistance-rated walls. 2. Penetrations in horizontal assemblies. 3. Penetrations in smoke barriers. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 078446 Fire-Resistive Joint Systems for joints in or between fire-resistance-rated construction, at exterior curtain-wall/floor intersections, and in smoke barriers. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Product Schedule: For each penetration firestopping system. Include location and design designation of qualified testing and inspecting agency. 1. Where Project conditions require modification to a qualified testing and inspecting agency's illustration for a particular penetration firestopping condition, submit illustration, with modifications marked, approved by penetration firestopping manufacturer's fire-protection engineer as an engineering judgment or equivalent fire-resistance-rated assembly. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for penetration firestopping. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A firm that has been approved by FM Global according to FM Global 4991, "Approval of Firestop Contractors," or been evaluated by UL and found to comply with its "Qualified Firestop Contractor Program Requirements." B. Installer Qualifications: A firm experienced in installing penetration firestopping similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful performance. Qualifications include having the necessary experience, staff, and training to install manufacturer's products per specified requirements. Manufacturer's willingness to sell its penetration firestopping products to Contractor or to Installer engaged by Contractor does not in itself confer qualification on buyer. C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Penetration firestopping shall comply with the following requirements: 1. Penetration firestopping tests are performed by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Penetration firestopping is identical to those tested per testing standard referenced in "Penetration Firestopping" Article. Provide rated systems complying with the following requirements: a. Penetration firestopping products bear classification marking of qualified testing and inspecting agency. b. Classification markings on penetration firestopping correspond to designations listed by the following: 1) UL in its "Fire Resistance Directory." D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install penetration firestopping when ambient or substrate temperatures are outside limits permitted by penetration firestopping manufacturers or when substrates are wet because of rain, frost, condensation, or other causes. B. Install and cure penetration firestopping per manufacturer's written instructions using natural means of ventilations or, where this is inadequate, forced-air circulation. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate construction of openings and penetrating items to ensure that penetration firestopping is installed according to specified requirements. B. Coordinate sizing of sleeves, openings, core-drilled holes, or cut openings to accommodate penetration Denton Fire Station No. 8 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 078413-2 August 2019 firestopping. C. Notify Owner's testing agency at least seven days in advance of penetration firestopping installations; confirm dates and times on day preceding each series of installations. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Grace Construction Products. 2. Hilti, Inc. 3. RectorSeal Corporation. 4. Specified Technologies Inc. 5. 3M Fire Protection Products. 6. USG Corporation. 2.2 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING A. Provide penetration firestopping that is produced and installed to resist spread of fire according to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original fire-resistance rating of construction penetrated. Penetration firestopping systems shall be compatible with one another, with the substrates forming openings, and with penetrating items if any. B. Penetrations in Fire-Resistance-Rated Walls: Provide penetration firestopping with ratings determined per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure differential of 0.01-inch wg. 1. Fire-resistance-rated walls include fire walls fire-barrier walls smoke-barrier walls and fire partitions. 2. F-Rating: Not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated. C. Penetrations in Horizontal Assemblies: Provide penetration firestopping with ratings determined per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure differential of 0.01-inch wg. 1. Horizontal assemblies include floors floor/ceiling assemblies and ceiling membranes of roof/ceiling assemblies. 2. F-Rating: At least 1 hour, but not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated. 3. T-Rating: At least 1 hour, but not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated except for floor penetrations within the cavity of a wall. D. Penetrations in Smoke Barriers: Provide penetration firestopping with ratings determined per UL 1479. 1. L-Rating: Not exceeding 5.0 cfm/sq. ft. of penetration opening at 0.30-inch wg at both ambient and elevated temperatures. E. W-Rating: Provide penetration firestopping showing no evidence of water leakage when tested according to UL 1479. F. Exposed Penetration Firestopping: Provide products with flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, as determined per ASTM E 84. G. Accessories: Provide components for each penetration firestopping system that are needed to install fill materials and to maintain ratings required. Use only those components specified by penetration firestopping manufacturer and approved by qualified testing and inspecting agency for firestopping indicated. 1. Permanent forming/damming/backing materials, including the following: a. Slag-wool-fiber or rock-wool-fiber insulation. b. Sealants used in combination with other forming/damming/backing materials to prevent leakage of fill materials in liquid state. c. Fire-rated form board. d. Fillers for sealants. 2. Temporary forming materials. 3. Substrate primers. 4. Collars. 5. Steel sleeves. 2.3 FILL MATERIALS A. Latex Sealants: Single-component latex formulations that do not re-emulsify after cure during exposure to moisture. B. Firestop Devices: Factory-assembled collars formed from galvanized steel and lined with intumescent material sized to fit specific diameter of penetrant. C. Intumescent Composite Sheets: Rigid panels consisting of aluminum-foil-faced elastomeric sheet bonded to galvanized-steel sheet. D. Intumescent Putties: Non-hardening dielectric, water-resistant putties containing no solvents, inorganic fibers, or silicone compounds. E. Intumescent Wrap Strips: Single-component intumescent elastomeric sheets with aluminum foil on one Denton Fire Station No. 8 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 078413-3 August 2019 side. F. Mortars: Prepackaged dry mixes consisting of a blend of inorganic binders, hydraulic cement, fillers, and lightweight aggregate formulated for mixing with water at Project site to form a non-shrinking, homogeneous mortar. G. Pillows/Bags: Reusable heat-expanding pillows/bags consisting of glass-fiber cloth cases filled with a combination of mineral-fiber, water-insoluble expansion agents, and fire-retardant additives. Where exposed, cover openings with steel-reinforcing wire mesh to protect pillows/bags from being easily removed. H. Silicone Foams: Multicomponent, silicone-based liquid elastomers that, when mixed, expand and cure in place to produce a flexible, non-shrinking foam. I. Silicone Sealants: Single-component, silicone-based, neutral-curing elastomeric sealants of grade indicated below: 1. Grade: Pourable (self-leveling) formulation for openings in floors and other horizontal surfaces, and non-sag formulation for openings in vertical and sloped surfaces, unless indicated firestopping limits use of non-sag grade for both opening conditions. 2.4 MIXING A. For those products requiring mixing before application, comply with penetration firestopping manufacturer's written instructions for accurate proportioning of materials, water (if required), type of mixing equipment, selection of mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other items or procedures needed to produce products of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for application indicated. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for opening configurations, penetrating items, substrates, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface Cleaning: Clean out openings immediately before installing penetration firestopping to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and with the following requirements: 1. Remove from surfaces of opening substrates and from penetrating items foreign materials that could interfere with adhesion of penetration firestopping. 2. Clean opening substrates and penetrating items to produce clean, sound surfaces capable of developing optimum bond with penetration firestopping. Remove loose particles remaining from cleaning operation. 3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete. B. Priming: Prime substrates where recommended in writing by manufacturer using that manufacturer's recommended products and methods. Confine primers to areas of bond; do not allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces. C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape to prevent penetration firestopping from contacting adjoining surfaces that will remain exposed on completion of the Work and that would otherwise be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods used to remove stains. Remove tape as soon as possible without disturbing firestopping's seal with substrates. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install penetration firestopping to comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions and published drawings for products and applications indicated. B. Install forming materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materials during their application and in the position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings indicated. 1. After installing fill materials and allowing them to fully cure, remove combustible forming materials and other accessories not indicated as permanent components of firestopping. C. Install fill materials for firestopping by proven techniques to produce the following results: 1. Fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories, and penetrating items as required to achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated. 2. Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings and penetrating items. 3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing the Work, finish to produce smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes. Denton Fire Station No. 8 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 078413-4 August 2019 3.4 IDENTIFICATION (do not install where visible from vehicle bays) A. Identify penetration firestopping with preprinted metal or plastic labels. Attach labels permanently to surfaces adjacent to and within 6 inches of firestopping edge so labels will be visible to anyone seeking to remove penetrating items or firestopping. Use mechanical fasteners or self-adhering-type labels with adhesives capable of permanently bonding labels to surfaces on which labels are placed. Include the following information on labels: 1. The words "Warning - Penetration Firestopping - Do Not Disturb. Notify Building Management of Any Damage." 2. Contractor's name, address, and phone number. 3. Designation of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 4. Date of installation. 5. Manufacturer's name. 6. Installer's name. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. B. Where deficiencies are found or penetration firestopping is damaged or removed because of testing, repair or replace penetration firestopping to comply with requirements. C. Proceed with enclosing penetration firestopping with other construction only after inspection reports are issued and installations comply with requirements. 3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean off excess fill materials adjacent to openings as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials that are approved in writing by penetration firestopping manufacturers and that do not damage materials in which openings occur. B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure that penetration firestopping is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, immediately cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated penetration firestopping and install new materials to produce systems complying with specified requirements. 3.7 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING SCHEDULE A. Where UL-classified systems are indicated, they refer to system numbers in UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" under product Category XHEZ. B. Firestop Systems with No Penetrating Items (FS-1): Comply with the following: 1. Pipes, plastic or metal, conduit in vertical runs, installed through cast-in-place firestop devices. a. Acceptable UL-Classified Systems with FA 1000 Series Systems equivalent to, but not limited to, the following: 1) FA1016, FA1017, FA2053, FA2054 by Hilti. 2) CP 680 Cast-in Firestop Device by Hilti. 3) CP653 Speed Sleeve by Hilti. C. Firestop Systems with No Penetrating Items (FS-2): Comply with the following: 1. Acceptable UL-Classified Systems with CAJ 0000 Series Systems equivalent to, but not limited to, the following: CAJ0055, CAJ0070 by Hilti or CAJ0012, CAJ0102 by Grace. 2. Type of Fill Materials: One or more of the following: a. Latex sealant. b. Silicone sealant. c. Acrylic sealant. d. Intumescent putty. e. Mortar. f. Preformed intumescent blocks. g. Pillows/Bags D. Firestop Systems for Metallic Pipes, Conduit, or Tubing (FS-3): Comply with the following: 1. Acceptable UL-Classified Systems with CAJ, WL, or FC 1000 Series Systems, equivalent to, but not limited to, the following: CAJ1184, CAJ1291, CAJ1277, CAJ1382, CAJ1388, WL1054, WL1249, FC1009 by Hilti or CAJ1403, CAJ1235, CAJ1406, WL1152, WL1207, FC1020 by Grace. 2. Type of Fill Materials: One or more of the following: a. Latex sealant. b. Silicone sealant. c. Acrylic sealant. d. Intumescent putty. e. Mortar. f. Polyurethane firestop foam. Denton Fire Station No. 8 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 078413-5 August 2019 E. Firestop Systems for Nonmetallic Pipe, Conduit, or Tubing (FS-4): Comply with the following: 1. Acceptable UL-Classified Systems with CAJ, FA, or WL 2000 Series Systems, equivalent to, but not limited to, the following: CAJ2109, FA2053, WL2078, WL2128 by Hilti or CAJ2212, CAJ2171, CAJ2210, WL2167, WL2185, WL2170, WL2259 by Grace. 2. Type of Fill Materials: One or more of the following: a. Intumescent sealant. b. Intumescent putty. c. Intumescent wrap strips. d. Firestop device. e. Firestop sleeve device. f. Latex sealant. F. Firestop Systems for Electrical Cables (FS-5): Comply with the following: 1. Acceptable UL-Classified Systems with CAJ, FC, or WL 3000 Series Systems, equivalent to, but not limited to, the following: CAJ3095, FC3012, WL3065, WL3112 by Hilti or CAJ3185, CAJ3199, CAJ3234, FC3018, FC3060, WL3179 by Grace. 2. Type of Fill Materials: One or more of the following: a. Intumescent sealant. b. Latex Sealant c. Pillows/bags d. Intumescent putty. e. Silicone foam. G. Firestop Systems for Cable Trays (FS-6): Comply with the following: 1. Acceptable UL-Classified Systems with CAJ or WL 4000 Series Systems equivalent to, but not limited to, the following: CAJ4035, CAJ4054, WL4011, WL4034 by Hilti or CAJ4035, CBJ4023, WL4025, WL4030 by Grace. 2. Type of Fill Materials: One or more of the following: a. Intumescent sealant. b. Intumescent putty. c. Silicone foam. d. Pillows/bags. e. Foam blocks. f. Firestop mortar. g. Polyurethane firestop foam. H. Firestop Systems for Insulated Pipes (FS-7): Comply with the following: 1. Acceptable UL-Classified Systems with CAJ or WL 5000 Series Systems, equivalent to, but not limited to, the following: CAJ5091, WL5029 by Hilti or CAJ5222, WL5171 by Grace. 2. Type of Fill Materials: One or more of the following: a. Intumescent sealant. b. Silicone foam. c. Intumescent wrap strips. d. Pre-formed intumescent blocks. e. Latex sealant. I. Firestop Systems for Miscellaneous Electrical Penetrants (FS-8): Comply with the following: 1. Acceptable UL-Classified Systems with CAJ 6000 Series Systems equivalent to, but not limited to, the following: CAJ6006, CAJ 6017 by Hilti or CAJ6012, CAJ6013, CAJ6027 by Grace. 2. Type of Fill Materials: One or more of the following: a. Intumescent sealant. b. Latex sealant c. Intumescent putty. d. Mortar. J. Firestop Systems for Miscellaneous Mechanical Penetrations (FS-9): Comply with the following: 1. Acceptable UL-Classified Systems with CAJ 7000 Series Systems equivalent to, but not limited to, the following: CAJ7046, CAJ7051, CAJ7040, CAJ7021 by Hilti or CAJ7067, CAJ7075, CAJ7082 by Grace. 2. Type of Fill Materials: One or both of the following: a. Intumescent sealant. b. Latex sealant. c. Mortar. d. Acrylic sealant. e. Silicone sealant. K. Firestop Systems for Groupings of Penetrations (FS-10): Comply with the following: 1. Acceptable UL-Classified Systems with CAJ or WL 8000 Series Systems, equivalent to, but not limited to, the following: CAJ8056, CAJ8096, WJ8007, WL8014, WL8019 by Hilti or CAJ8042, CAJ8101, CAJ8133, WL8007 by Grace. Denton Fire Station No. 8 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 078413-6 August 2019 2. Type of Fill Materials: One or more of the following: a. Latex sealant. b. Mortar. c. Intumescent wrap strips. d. Firestop device. e. Intumescent composite sheet. f. Pre-formed intumescent blocks. END OF SECTION Denton Fire Station No. 8 FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 078446-1 August 2019 SECTION 078446 – FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Joints in or between fire-resistance-rated constructions. 2. Joints at exterior curtain-wall/floor intersections. 3. Joints in smoke barriers. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Product Schedule: For each fire-resistive joint system. Include location and design designation of qualified testing agency. 1. Where Project conditions require modification to a qualified testing agency's illustration for a particular fire-resistive joint system condition, submit illustration, with modifications marked, approved by fire-resistive joint system manufacturer's fire-protection engineer as an engineering judgment or equivalent fire-resistance-rated assembly. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Installer Certificates: From Installer indicating fire-resistive joint systems have been installed in compliance with requirements and manufacturer's written recommendations. B. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for fire-resistive joint systems. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A firm that has been approved by FM Global according to FM Global 4991, "Approval of Firestop Contractors," or been evaluated by UL and found to comply with UL's "Qualified Firestop Contractor Program Requirements." B. Installer Qualifications: A firm experienced in installing fire-resistive joint systems similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful performance. Qualifications include having the necessary experience, staff, and training to install manufacturer's products per specified requirements. Manufacturer's willingness to sell its fire- resistive joint system products to Contractor or to Installer engaged by Contractor does not in itself confer qualification on buyer. C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Fire-resistive joint systems shall comply with the following requirements: 1. Fire-resistive joint system tests are performed by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Fire-resistive joint systems are identical to those tested per testing standard referenced in "Fire- Resistive Joint Systems" Article. Provide rated systems complying with the following requirements: a. Fire-resistive joint system products bear classification marking of qualified testing agency. b. Fire-resistive joint systems correspond to those indicated by reference to designations listed by the following: 1) UL in its "Fire Resistance Directory." D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install fire-resistive joint systems when ambient or substrate temperatures are outside limits permitted by fire-resistive joint system manufacturers or when substrates are wet due to rain, frost, condensation, or other causes. B. Install and cure fire-resistive joint systems per manufacturer's written instructions using natural means of ventilation or, where this is inadequate, forced-air circulation. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate construction of joints to ensure that fire-resistive joint systems are installed according to specified requirements. B. Coordinate sizing of joints to accommodate fire-resistive joint systems. C. Notify Owner's testing agency at least seven days in advance of fire-resistive joint system installations; confirm dates and times on day preceding each series of installations. Denton Fire Station No. 8 FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 078446-2 August 2019 PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS A. Where required, provide fire-resistive joint systems that are produced and installed to resist spread of fire according to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original fire- resistance rating of assemblies in or between which fire-resistive joint systems are installed. Fire-resistive joint systems shall accommodate building movements without impairing their ability to resist the passage of fire and hot gases. B. Joints in or between Fire-Resistance-Rated Construction: Provide fire-resistive joint systems with ratings determined per ASTM E 1966 or UL 2079: 1. Joints include those installed in or between fire-resistance-rated walls floor or floor/ceiling assemblies and roofs or roof/ceiling assemblies. 2. Fire-Resistance Rating: Equal to or exceeding the fire-resistance rating of construction they will join. 3. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Grace Construction Products. b. Hilti, Inc. c. RectorSeal Corporation. d. Specified Technologies Inc. e. 3M Fire Protection Products. f. USG Corporation. C. Joints at Exterior Curtain-Wall/Floor Intersections: Provide fire-resistive joint systems with rating determined by ASTM E 119 based on testing at a positive pressure differential of 0.01-inch wg or ASTM E 2307. 1. Fire-Resistance Rating: Equal to or exceeding the fire-resistance rating of the floor assembly. 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Grace Construction Products. b. Hilti, Inc. c. RectorSeal Corporation. d. Specified Technologies Inc. e. 3M Fire Protection Products. f. USG Corporation. D. Joints in Smoke Barriers: Provide fire-resistive joint systems with ratings determined per UL 2079. 1. L-Rating: Not exceeding 5.0 cfm/ft of joint at 0.30 inch wg at both ambient and elevated temperatures. 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Grace Construction Products. b. Hilti, Inc. c. RectorSeal Corporation. d. Specified Technologies Inc. e. 3M Fire Protection Products. f. USG Corporation. E. Accessories: Provide components of fire-resistive joint systems, including primers and forming materials, that are needed to install fill materials and to maintain ratings required. Use only components specified by fire-resistive joint system manufacturer and approved by the qualified testing agency for systems indicated. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configurations, substrates, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface Cleaning: Clean joints immediately before installing fire-resistive joint systems to comply with fire- resistive joint system manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements: 1. Remove from surfaces of joint substrates foreign materials that could interfere with adhesion of fill materials. 2. Clean joint substrates to produce clean, sound surfaces capable of developing optimum bond with fill materials. Remove loose particles remaining from cleaning operation. 3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete. B. Priming: Prime substrates where recommended in writing by fire-resistive joint system manufacturer using that manufacturer's recommended products and methods. Confine primers to areas of bond; do not allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces. Denton Fire Station No. 8 FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 078446-3 August 2019 C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape to prevent fill materials of fire-resistive joint system from contacting adjoining surfaces that will remain exposed on completion of the Work and that would otherwise be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods used to remove stains. Remove tape as soon as possible without disturbing fire-resistive joint system's seal with substrates. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install fire-resistive joint systems to comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions and published drawings for products and applications indicated. B. Install forming materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materials during their application and in position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings indicated. 1. After installing fill materials and allowing them to fully cure, remove combustible forming materials and other accessories not indicated as permanent components of fire-resistive joint system. C. Install fill materials for fire-resistive joint systems by proven techniques to produce the following results: 1. Fill voids and cavities formed by joints and forming materials as required to achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated. 2. Apply fill materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by joints. 3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing the Work, finish to produce smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes. 3.4 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify fire-resistive joint systems with preprinted metal or plastic labels. Attach labels permanently to surfaces adjacent to and within 6 inches of joint edge so labels will be visible to anyone seeking to remove or penetrate joint system. Use mechanical fasteners or self-adhering-type labels with adhesives capable of permanently bonding labels to surfaces on which labels are placed. Include the following information on labels: 1. The words "Warning - Fire-Resistive Joint System - Do Not Disturb. Notify Building Management of Any Damage." 2. Contractor's name, address, and phone number. 3. Designation of applicable testing agency. 4. Date of installation. 5. Manufacturer's name. 6. Installer's name. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspecting Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. B. Where deficiencies are found or fire-resistive joint systems are damaged or removed due to testing, repair or replace fire-resistive joint systems so they comply with requirements. C. Proceed with enclosing fire-resistive joint systems with other construction only after inspection reports are issued and installations comply with requirements. 3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTING A. Clean off excess fill materials adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials that are approved in writing by fire-resistive joint system manufacturers and that do not damage materials in which joints occur. B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure fire-resistive joint systems are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. If damage or deterioration occurs despite such protection, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated fire-resistive joint systems immediately and install new materials to produce fire-resistive joint systems complying with specified requirements. 3.7 FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEM SCHEDULE A. Floor-to-Floor, Fire-Resistive Joint System (FRJS-1): 1. Acceptable UL-Classified Products: a. FFD1011, FFD1012, FFD1013, FFD1026 by Hilti. b. FFD1024 & FFD1027 – Grace Flamesafe. 2. Assembly Rating: Refer to Drawings. 3. Nominal Joint Width: As indicated. 4. Movement Capabilities: Class II; refer to Drawings. B. Floor-to-Wall, Fire-Resistive Joint System (FRJS-2): 1. Acceptable UL-Classified Products: a. FWD1011, FWD1012, FWD1013, FWD1021 by Hilti. b. FWD1020 & FWD1024 – Grace Flamesafe. Denton Fire Station No. 8 FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 078446-4 August 2019 2. Assembly Rating: Refer to Drawings. 3. Nominal Joint Width: As indicated. 4. Movement Capabilities: Class II; refer to Drawings. C. Head-of-Wall, Fire-Resistive Joint System (FRJS-3): 1. Acceptable UL-Classified Products: a. HWD0042, HWD0045, HWD0046, HWD0097, HWD0098 by Hilti. b. HWD0107, HWD0146, HWD0144, HWD1047, HWD1021, HWD1024, HWD0148, HWD0149, HWD0150,HWD-0267,HWD-0299,HWD-257 & HWD-0300– Grace Flamesafe. 2. Assembly Rating: Refer to Drawings. 3. Nominal Joint Width: As indicated. 4. Movement Capabilities: Class II; refer to Drawings. D. Wall-to-Wall, Fire-Resistive Joint System (FRJS-4): 1. Acceptable UL-Classified Products: a. WWD1011, WWD1012, WWD0017 by Hilti. b. WWD1028 & WWD1029 – Grace Flamesafe. 2. Assembly Rating: Refer to Drawings. 3. Nominal Joint Width: As indicated. 4. Movement Capabilities: Class II; refer to Drawings. 3.8 PERIMETER FIRE-CONTAINMENT SYSTEMS A. Where fire-rated floor assemblies are required, seal voids at intersection of exterior wall and floor assembly with an approved material per building code requirements. B. Perimeter Fire Containment Systems are only valid if the certain wall construction details exactly match those called for in a selected UL/Omega Point-classified system. If the details do not match, submit an engineer judgement drawing from the firestop material manufacturer in accordance with the requirements of Part 1 of this Section. C. Perimeter Fire-Containment System: 1. Acceptable Omega Point-Classified Products: a. CEJ216P, CEJ244P, CEJ245P, CEJ246P, CEJ259P, CEJ260P, CEJ261P, CEJ262P, CEJ263P by Hilti. b. CEJ150P, CEJ151P, CEJ152P,CEJ153P, CEJ154P, CEJ-273P, CEJ-274P, CEJ-275P, CEJ-276P, CEJ-296P & CEJ-297P – Grace Flamesafe. 2. Assembly Rating: Refer to Drawings. 3. Nominal Joint Width: As indicated. 4. Movement Capabilities: Class II; refer to Drawings. END OF SECTION Denton Fire Station No. 8 JOINT SEALANTS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 079200-1 August 2019 SECTION 079200 – JOINT SEALANTS PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Silicone joint sealants. 2. Urethane joint sealants. 3. Mildew-resistant joint sealants. 4. Butyl joint sealants. 5. Latex joint sealants. 1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product. B. Joint-Sealant Schedule: Include the following information: 1. Joint-sealant application, joint location, and designation. 2. Joint-sealant manufacturer and product name. 3. Joint-sealant formulation. 4. Joint-sealant color. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Test Reports: For each kind of joint sealant, for tests performed by manufacturer B. Field-Adhesion-Test Reports: For each sealant application tested. C. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of strips of cured sealants showing the full range of colors available for each product exposed to view. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An authorized representative who is trained and approved by manufacturer. B. Mockups: Install sealant in mockups of assemblies specified in other Sections that are indicated to receive joint sealants specified in this Section. Use materials and installation methods specified in this Section. 1.7 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING A. Preconstruction Laboratory Testing: Submit to joint-sealant manufacturers, for testing indicated below, samples of materials that will contact or affect joint sealants. 1. Adhesion Testing: Use ASTM C 794 to determine whether priming and other specific joint preparation techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of joint sealants to joint substrates. 2. Compatibility Testing: Use ASTM C 1087 to determine sealant compatibility when in contact with glazing and gasket materials. 3. Stain Testing: Use ASTM C 1248 to determine stain potential of sealant when in contact with stone substrates. 4. Submit manufacturer's recommended number of pieces of each type of material, including joint substrates, joint-sealant backings, and miscellaneous materials. 5. Schedule sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work. 6. For materials failing tests, obtain joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions for corrective measures, including use of specially formulated primers. 7. Testing will not be required if joint-sealant manufacturers submit data that are based on previous testing, not older than 24 months, of sealant products for adhesion to, staining of, and compatibility with joint substrates and other materials matching those submitted. B. Preconstruction Field-Adhesion Testing: Before installing sealants, field test their adhesion to Project joint substrates as follows: 1. Locate test joints where indicated on Project or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. 2. Conduct field tests for each kind of sealant and joint substrate. 3. Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when test joints will be erected. 4. Arrange for tests to take place with joint-sealant manufacturer's technical representative present. a. Test Method: Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field-Applied Sealant Joint Hand Denton Fire Station No. 8 JOINT SEALANTS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 079200-2 August 2019 Pull Tab, in Appendix X1.1 in ASTM C 1193 or Method A, Tail Procedure, in ASTM C 1521. 1) For joints with dissimilar substrates, verify adhesion to each substrate separately; extend cut along one side, verifying adhesion to opposite side. Repeat procedure for opposite side. 5. Report whether sealant failed to adhere to joint substrates or tore cohesively. Include data on pull distance used to test each kind of product and joint substrate. For sealants that fail adhesively, retest until satisfactory adhesion is obtained. 6. Evaluation of Preconstruction Field-Adhesion-Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from testing, in absence of other indications of noncompliance with requirements, will be considered satisfactory. Do not use sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing. 1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions: 1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint-sealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F. 2. When joint substrates are wet. 3. Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint-sealant manufacturer for applications indicated. 4. Where contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed from joint substrates. 1.9 WARRANTY A. Special Installer's Warranty: Installer agrees to repair or replace joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to furnish joint sealants to repair or replace those joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. C. Special warranties specified in this article exclude deterioration or failure of joint sealants from the following: 1. Movement of the structure caused by stresses on the sealant exceeding sealant manufacturer's written specifications for sealant elongation and compression. 2. Disintegration of joint substrates from causes exceeding design specifications. 3. Mechanical damage caused by individuals, tools, or other outside agents. 4. Changes in sealant appearance caused by accumulation of dirt or other atmospheric contaminants. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 JOINT SEALANTS, GENERAL A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by joint- sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. B. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: Match adjacent substrates unless indicated otherwise. 2.2 SILICONE JOINT SEALANTS A. Silicone, S, NS, 50, NT: Single-component, non-sag, plus 50 percent and minus 50 percent movement capability, non-traffic-use, neutral-curing silicone joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 50, Use NT. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Dow Corning Corporation; 791. b. GE Construction Sealants; SCS2000 SilPruf. c. Pecora Corporation; PCS. d. Sika Corporation U.S.; Sikasil WS-295. 2.3 NON-STAINING SILICONE JOINT SEALANTS A. Non-staining Joint Sealants: No staining of substrates when tested according to ASTM C 1248. B. Silicone, Non-staining, S, NS, 50, NT: Non-staining, single-component, non-sag, plus 50 percent and minus 50 percent movement capability, non-traffic-use, neutral-curing silicone joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 50, Use NT. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Dow Corning Corporation; 795. b. GE Construction Sealants; SilPruf NB. Denton Fire Station No. 8 JOINT SEALANTS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 079200-3 August 2019 c. Pecora Corporation; 864NST. d. Tremco Incorporated; Spectrem 2. 2.4 URETHANE JOINT SEALANTS A. Urethane, S, NS, 25, NT: Single-component, non-sag, non-traffic-use, plus 25 percent and minus 25 percent movement capability, urethane joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. BASF Construction Chemicals, LLC, Building Systems; Sonalastic TX1. b. Pecora Corporation; Dynatrol I-XL. c. Sika Corporation U.S.; Sikaflex Textured Sealant. d. Tremco Incorporated; Dymonic. B. Urethane, M, P, 25, T, NT: Multicomponent, pourable, plus 25 percent and minus 25 percent movement capability, traffic- and non-traffic-use, urethane joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type M, Grade P, Class 25, Uses T and NT. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Bostik, Inc.; Chem-Calk 555-SL. b. Pecora Corporation; Urexpan NR-200. c. Sherwin-Williams Company (The); Stampede-2SL. d. Tremco Incorporated; THC 900/901. 2.5 MILDEW-RESISTANT JOINT SEALANTS A. Mildew-Resistant Joint Sealants: Formulated for prolonged exposure to humidity with fungicide to prevent mold and mildew growth. B. Silicone, Mildew Resistant, Acid Curing, S, NS, 25, NT: Mildew-resistant, single-component, non-sag, plus 25 percent and minus 25 percent movement capability, non-traffic-use, acid-curing silicone joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Dow Corning Corporation; 786-M White. b. GE Construction Sealants; SCS1700 Sanitary. c. Tremco Incorporated; Tremsil 200. 2.6 BUTYL JOINT SEALANTS A. Butyl-Rubber-Based Joint Sealants: ASTM C 1311. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Bostik, Inc.; Chem-Calk 300. b. Pecora Corporation; BC-158. 2.7 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS A. Acrylic Latex: Acrylic latex or siliconized acrylic latex, ASTM C 834, Type OP, Grade NF. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. BASF Construction Chemicals, LLC, Building Systems; Sonolac. b. Pecora Corporation; AC-20. c. Sherwin-Williams Company (The); 950A. d. Tremco Incorporated; Tremflex 834. 2.8 JOINT-SEALANT BACKING A. Sealant Backing Material, General: Non-staining; compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 2. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide [product indicated on Drawings] <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation> or comparable product by one of the following: a. BASF Construction Chemicals, LLC, Building Systems. b. Construction Foam Products, a division of Nomaco, Inc. B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance. C. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable. 2.9 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to Denton Fire Station No. 8 JOINT SEALANTS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 079200-4 August 2019 joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests. B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates. C. Masking Tape: Non-staining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint- sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements: 1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost. 2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining after cleaning operations above by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air. Porous joint substrates include the following: a. Concrete. b. Masonry. c. Unglazed surfaces of ceramic tile. 3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete. 4. Clean nonporous joint substrate surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants. Nonporous joint substrates include the following: a. Metal. b. Glass. c. Porcelain enamel. d. Glazed surfaces of ceramic tile. B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer or as indicated by preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces. C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant or primer with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS A. General: Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply. B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated. C. Install sealant backings of kind indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. 1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings. 2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings. 3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application, and replace them with dry materials. D. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants and backs of joints. E. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed: 1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. Denton Fire Station No. 8 JOINT SEALANTS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 079200-5 August 2019 2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration. 3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. F. Tooling of Non-sag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified in subparagraphs below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. 1. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints. 2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces. 3. Provide concave joint profile per Figure 8A in ASTM C 1193 unless otherwise indicated. 4. Provide flush joint profile at locations indicated on Drawings according to Figure 8B in ASTM C 1193. 5. Provide recessed joint configuration of recess depth and at locations indicated on Drawings according to Figure 8C in ASTM C 1193. a. Use masking tape to protect surfaces adjacent to recessed tooled joints. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field-Adhesion Testing: Field test joint-sealant adhesion to joint substrates as follows: 1. Extent of Testing: Test completed and cured sealant joints as follows: a. Perform 10 tests for the first 1000 feet of joint length for each kind of sealant and joint substrate. b. Perform one test for each 1000 feet of joint length thereafter or one test per each floor per elevation. 2. Test Method: Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field-Applied Sealant Joint Hand Pull Tab, in Appendix X1 in ASTM C 1193 or Method A, Tail Procedure, in ASTM C 1521. a. For joints with dissimilar substrates, verify adhesion to each substrate separately; extend cut along one side, verifying adhesion to opposite side. Repeat procedure for opposite side. 3. Inspect tested joints and report on the following: a. Whether sealants filled joint cavities and are free of voids. b. Whether sealant dimensions and configurations comply with specified requirements. c. Whether sealants in joints connected to pulled-out portion failed to adhere to joint substrates or tore cohesively. Include data on pull distance used to test each kind of product and joint substrate. Compare these results to determine if adhesion complies with sealant manufacturer's field-adhesion hand-pull test criteria. 4. Record test results in a field-adhesion-test log. Include dates when sealants were installed, names of persons who installed sealants, test dates, test locations, whether joints were primed, adhesion results and percent elongations, sealant material, sealant configuration, and sealant dimensions. 5. Repair sealants pulled from test area by applying new sealants following same procedures used originally to seal joints. Ensure that original sealant surfaces are clean and that new sealant contacts original sealant. B. Evaluation of Field-Adhesion-Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from testing or noncompliance with other indicated requirements will be considered satisfactory. Remove sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing or to comply with other requirements. Retest failed applications until test results prove sealants comply with indicated requirements. 3.5 CLEANING A. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur. 3.6 PROTECTION A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out, remove, and repair damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work. 3.7 JOINT SEALANT SCHEDULE A. Joint-Sealant Application: Exterior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces. 1. Joint Locations: a. Isolation and contraction joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs. b. Joints between different materials listed above. c. Other joints as indicated on Drawings. 2. Joint Sealant: Urethane, pourable. 3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors. Denton Fire Station No. 8 JOINT SEALANTS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 079200-6 August 2019 B. Joint-Sealant Application: Exterior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal non-traffic surfaces. 1. Joint Locations: a. Construction joints in cast-in-place concrete. b. Joints between plant-precast architectural concrete units. c. Control and expansion joints in unit masonry. d. Joints in dimension stone cladding. e. Joints in exterior insulation and finish systems. f. Joints between different materials listed above. g. Perimeter joints between materials listed above and aluminum frames. h. Other joints as indicated on Drawings. 2. Joint Sealant: Silicone. 3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors. C. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces. 1. Joint Locations: a. Isolation joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs. b. Control and expansion joints in stone flooring. c. Control and expansion joints in tile flooring. d. Other joints as indicated on Drawings. 2. Joint Sealant: Urethane, pourable. 3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors. D. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal non-traffic surfaces. 1. Joint Locations: a. Control and expansion joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls. b. Tile control and expansion joints. c. Vertical joints on exposed surfaces of unit masonry concrete walls. d. Other joints as indicated on Drawings. 2. Joint Sealant: Urethane, non-sag. 3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors. E. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal non-traffic surfaces not subject to significant movement. 1. Joint Locations: a. Control joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls. b. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors and elevator entrances. c. Other joints as indicated on Drawings. 2. Joint Sealant: Latex. 3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors. F. Joint-Sealant Application: Mildew-resistant interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal non-traffic surfaces. 1. Joint Locations: a. Joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls, floors, and counters. b. Tile control and expansion joints where indicated. c. Other joints as indicated on Drawings. 2. Joint Sealant: Silicone, mildew resistant. 3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors. G. Joint-Sealant Application: Concealed mastics. 1. Joint Locations: a. Aluminum thresholds. b. Sill plates. c. Other joints as indicated on Drawings. 2. Joint Sealant: Butyl. 3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors. END OF SECTION Denton Fire Station No. 8 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 081113-1 August 2019 SECTION 081113 – HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Standard and custom hollow metal doors and frames. 2. Steel sidelight; borrowed lite and transom frames. 3. Louvers installed in hollow metal doors. 4. Light frames and glazing installed in hollow metal doors. B. Codes and References: Comply with the version year adopted by the Authority Having Jurisdiction. 1. ANSI/SDI A250.8 - Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames. 2. ANSI/SDI A250.4 - Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Physical Endurance for Steel Doors, Frames, Frames Anchors and Hardware Reinforcing. 3. ANSI/SDI A250.6 - Recommended Practice for Hardware Reinforcing on Standard Steel Doors and Frames. 4. ANSI/SDI A250.10 - Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel Surfaces for Steel Doors and Frames. 5. ANSI/SDI A250.11 - Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames. 6. ASTM A1008 - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy and High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability. 7. ASTM A653 - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process. 8. ASTM A924 - Standard Specification for General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Metallic-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process. 9. ASTM C 1363 - Standard Test Method for Thermal Performance of Building Assemblies by Means of a Hot Box Apparatus. 10. ANSI/BHMA A156.115 - Hardware Preparation in Steel Doors and Frames. 11. ANSI/SDI 122 - Installation and Troubleshooting Guide for Standard Steel Doors and Frames. 12. ANSI/NFPA 80 - Standard for Fire Doors and Fire Windows; National Fire Protection Association. 13. ANSI/NFPA 105: Standard for the Installation of Smoke Door Assemblies. 14. NFPA 252 - Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies; National Fire Protection Association. 15. UL 10C - Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. 16. UL 1784 - Standard for Air Leakage Tests of Door Assemblies. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, core descriptions, hardware reinforcements, profiles, anchors, fire-resistance rating, and finishes. B. Door hardware supplier is to furnish templates, template reference number and/or physical hardware to the steel door and frame supplier in order to prepare the doors and frames to receive the finish hardware items. C. Shop Drawings: Include the following: 1. Elevations of each door design. 2. Details of doors, including vertical and horizontal edge details and metal thicknesses. 3. Frame details for each frame type, including dimensioned profiles and metal thicknesses. 4. Locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware. 5. Details of anchorages, joints, field splices, and connections. 6. Details of accessories. 7. Details of moldings, removable stops, and glazing. 8. Details of conduit and preparations for power, signal, and control systems. D. Samples for Verification: 1. Samples are only required by request of the architect and for manufacturers that are not current members of the Steel Door Institute. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain hollow metal doors and frames through one source from a single manufacturer wherever possible. B. Quality Standard: In addition to requirements specified, furnish SDI-Certified manufacturer products that comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8, latest edition, "Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames". Denton Fire Station No. 8 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 081113-2 August 2019 C. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive pressure according to UL10C (neutral pressure at 40” above sill) or UL 10C. 1. Oversize Fire-Rated Door Assemblies Construction: For units exceeding sizes of tested assemblies, attach construction label certifying doors are built to standard construction requirements for tested and labeled fire rated door assemblies except for size. 2. Temperature-Rise Limit: Where indicated and at vertical exit enclosures (stairwell openings) and exit passageways, provide doors that have a maximum transmitted temperature end point of not more than 450 deg F (250 deg C) above ambient after 30 minutes of standard fire-test exposure. 3. Smoke Control Door Assemblies: Comply with NFPA 105. a. Smoke "S" Label: Doors to bear “S” label, and include smoke and draft control gasketing applied to frame and on meeting stiles of pair doors. D. Fire-Rated, Borrowed-Light Frame Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 257. Provide labeled glazing material. E. Severe Storm Shelter Openings: Provide complete door systems for hurricane or tornado storm shelters, and other areas of refuge, complying and tested according to FEMA 361, Second Edition (2008), Design and Construction Guidance for Community Safe Rooms; and ICC 500 (2008), ICC/NSSA Standard for the Design and Construction of Storm Shelters. 1. Each unit to bear third party permanent label indicating compliance with the referenced testing standards. F. Pre-Submittal Conference: Conduct conference in compliance with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Meetings" with attendance by representatives of Supplier, Installer, and Contractor to review proper methods and procedures for installing hollow metal doors and frames and to verify installation of electrical knockout boxes and conduit at frames with electrified or access control hardware. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver hollow metal work palletized, wrapped, or crated to provide protection during transit and Project site storage. Do not use non-vented plastic. B. Deliver welded frames with two removable spreader bars across bottom of frames, tack welded to jambs and mullions. C. Store hollow metal work under cover at Project site. Place in stacks of five units maximum in a vertical position with heads up, spaced by blocking, on minimum 4-inch high wood blocking. Do not store in a manner that traps excess humidity. 1. Provide minimum 1/4-inch space between each stacked door to permit air circulation. Door and frames to be stacked in a vertical upright position. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of openings by field measurements before fabrication. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for hollow metal frames. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace doors that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. B. Warranty includes installation and finishing that may be required due to repair or replacement of defective doors. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide steel doors and frames from a SDI Certified manufacturer: 1. CECO Door Products (C). 2. Curries Company (CU). 3. Steelcraft (S). 2.2 MATERIALS A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; suitable for exposed applications. Denton Fire Station No. 8 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 081113-3 August 2019 B. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; with minimum G60 (Z180) or A60 (ZF180) metallic coating. C. Frame Anchors: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; with minimum G60 metallic coating.(Z180) or A60 (ZF180). 2.3 HOLLOW METAL DOORS A. General: Provide 1-3/4 inch doors of design indicated, not less than thickness indicated; fabricated with smooth surfaces, without visible joints or seams on exposed faces unless otherwise indicated. Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8 and ANSI/NAAMM HMMA 867. B. Exterior Doors: Face sheets fabricated of commercial quality cold rolled steel that complies with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M. Provide doors complying with requirements indicated below by referencing ANSI/SDI A250.8 for level and model and ANSI/SDI A250.4 for physical performance level: 1. Design: Flush panel. 2. Core Construction: Manufacturer’s standard vertical steel-stiffener core. Minimum 22 gauge steel- stiffeners at 6 inches on-center construction attached by spot welds spaced not more than 5 inches on-centers. Spaces between stiffeners filled with foamed-in-place polyurethane. Core is chemically bonded to all interior surfaces. 3. Level/Model: Level 2 and Physical Performance Level B (Heavy Duty), minimum 18 gauge (0.042-inch – 1.0-mm) thick steel, Model 2. 4. Top and Bottom Edges: Reinforce tops and bottoms of doors with a continuous steel channel not less than 16 gauge, extending the full width of the door and welded to the face sheet. Doors with an inverted top channel to include a steel closure channel, screw attached, with the web of the channel flush with the face sheets of the door. Plastic or composite channel fillers are not acceptable. 5. Hinge Reinforcement: Minimum 7 gauge (3/16”) plate 1-1/4” x 9” or minimum 14 gauge continuous channel with pierced holes, drilled and tapped. 6. Hardware Reinforcements: Fabricate according to ANSI/SDI A250.6 with reinforcing plates from same material as door face sheets. C. Interior Doors: Face sheets fabricated of commercial quality cold rolled steel that complies with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M. Provide doors complying with requirements indicated below by referencing ANSI/SDI A250.8 for level and model and ANSI/SDI A250.4 for physical performance level: 1. Design: Flush panel. 2. Core Construction: Manufacturer’s standard vertical steel-stiffener core. Minimum 22 gauge steel- stiffeners at 6 inches on-center construction attached by spot welds spaced not more than 5 inches on-centers. Spaces between stiffeners filled with fiberglass insulation (min. density 0.8lb./cubic ft.) a. Fire Core Door: As required to provide fire-protection and temperature-rise ratings indicated. 3. Level/Model: Level 2 and Physical Performance Level B (Heavy Duty), minimum 18 gauge (0.042-inch – 1.0-mm) thick steel, Model 2. 4. Top and Bottom Edges: Reinforce tops and bottoms of doors with a continuous steel channel not less than 16 gauge, extending the full width of the door and welded to the face sheet. 5. Hinge Reinforcement: Minimum 7 gauge (3/16”) plate 1-1/4” x 9” or minimum 14 gauge continuous channel with pierced holes, drilled and tapped. 6. Hardware Reinforcements: Fabricate according to ANSI/SDI A250.6 with reinforcing plates from same material as door face sheets. D. Manufacturers Basis of Design: 1. CECO Door Products (C) – Steel-Stiffened with Polyurethane Foam – Trio-E Series. 2. CECO Door Products (C) – Steel-Stiffened – Medallion Series. 3. Curries Company (CU) – Steel-Stiffened with Polyurethane Foam – 777E Series. 4. Curries Company (CU) – Steel-Stiffened – 747 Series. 2.4 HOLLOW METAL DOORS FOR SEVERE STORM SHELTERS A. General: Provide complete tornado or hurricane resistant door and frame shelter assemblies constructed to resist the design wind pressures for components and cladding and missile impact loads as described in ICC 500, ICC/NSSA Standard for the Design and Construction of Storm Shelters. Only single opening and paired opening doors and their frames constructed to resist calculated design wind pressures and laboratory tested missile impacts are acceptable. 1. Door systems, both single doors and paired openings, tested and complying with ICC 500 and FEMA 361, Design and Construction Guidance for Community Safe Rooms and supported by third party test results. 2. Sheets fabricated on exterior openings from commercial quality hot dipped zinc coated steel complying with ASTM A924 A60. Gauges to be in accordance with manufacturers tested assemblies. 3. Vertical Edges: Vertical edges to have the face sheets joined by a continuous weld extending the full height of the door. Welds are to be ground, filled and dressed smooth. Beveled Lock Edge, 1/8 inch in 2 inches (3 mm in 50 mm). Denton Fire Station No. 8 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 081113-4 August 2019 4. Top Edge: Reinforce top of doors with a continuous steel channel extending the full width of the door and welded to the face sheet. Doors with an inverted top channel to include a steel closure channel, screw attached and welded in place with the web of the channel flush with the face sheets of the door. Plastic or composite channel fillers are not acceptable. 5. Hinge Reinforcement: Minimum 7 gauge (3/16”) plate 1-1/4” x 9”. B. Manufacturers Basis of Design: 1. CECO Door Products (C) – StormPro Series. 2. Curries Company (CU) – StormPro Series. 2.5 HOLLOW METAL FRAMES A. General: Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8 and with details indicated for type and profile. B. Exterior Frames: Fabricated from minimum 16 gauge (0.053-inch) hot dipped zinc coated steel that complies with ASTM A 653/A 653M, Coating Designation A60. 1. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped corners. Profile as indicated on drawings. 2. Manufacturers Basis of Design: a. CECO Door Products (C) – SU SR Series. b. Curries Company (CU) – M CM Series. C. Interior Frames: Fabricated frames from minimum 16 gauge (0.053-inch) cold-rolled steel sheet that complies with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M. 1. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped corners. Profile as indicated on drawings. 2. Manufacturers Basis of Design: a. CECO Door Products (C) – BU DU Series. b. CECO Door Products (C) – SU Series. c. Curries Company (CU) – M Series. D. Fire rated frames: Fabricate frames in accordance with NFPA 80, listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated. E. Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate according to ANSI/SDI A250.6 Table 4 with reinforcement plates from same material as frames. 2.6 FRAMES FOR SEVERE STORM SHELTERS A. General: Subject to the same compliance standards and requirements as standard hollow metal frames, provide complete tornado or hurricane resistant door and frame assemblies, for both single doors and paired openings, tested and labeled as complying with ICC 500 and FEMA 361 and supported by third party test results. 1. Fabricate frames from minimum 14 gauge (0.067-inch) hot dipped zinc coated steel that complies with ASTM designations A924 A60. 2. Manufacturers Basis of Design: a. CECO Door Products (C) - StormPro Series. b. Curries Company (CU) - StormPro Series. 2.7 FRAMES ANCHORS A. Jamb Anchors: 1. Masonry Type: Adjustable strap-and-stirrup or T-shaped anchors to suit frame size, formed from A60 metallic coated material, not less than 0.042 inches thick, with corrugated or perforated straps not less than 2 inches wide by 10 inches long; or wire anchors not less than 0.177 inches thick. 2. Stud Wall Type: Designed to engage stud and not less than 0.042 inches thick. 3. Compression Type for Drywall Slip-on (Knock-Down) Frames: Adjustable compression anchors. B. Floor Anchors: Floor anchors to be provided at each jamb, formed from A60 metallic coated material, not less than 0.042 inches thick. C. Mortar Guards: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.016 inches thick. 2.8 HOLLOW METAL PANELS A. Provide hollow metal panels of same materials, construction, and finish as specified for adjoining hollow metal components. 2.9 LOUVERS A. Metal Louvers: Door manufacturer's standard metal louvers unless otherwise indicated. 1. Blade Type: Vision proof inverted V or inverted Y. 2. Metal and Finish: Galvanized steel, 0.040 inch thick, factory primed for paint finish with baked enamel or powder coated finish. Match pre-finished door paint color where applicable. B. Louvers for Fire Rated Doors: Metal louvers with fusible link and closing device, listed and labeled for use in doors with fire protection rating of 1-1/2 hours and less. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide door manufacturers standard Denton Fire Station No. 8 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 081113-5 August 2019 louver to meet rating indicated. 2. Metal and Finish: Galvanized steel, 0.040 inch thick, factory primed for paint finish with baked enamel or powder coated finish. Match pre-finished door paint color where applicable. 2.10 LIGHT OPENINGS AND GLAZING A. Stops and Moldings: Provide stops and moldings around glazed lites where indicated. Form corners of stops and moldings with butted or mitered hairline joints at fabricator’s shop. Fixed and removable stops to allow multiple glazed lites each to be removed independently. Coordinate frame rabbet widths between fixed and removable stops with the type of glazing and installation indicated. B. Moldings for Glazed Lites in Doors and Loose Stops for Glazed Lites in Frames: Minimum 20 gauge thick, fabricated from same material as door face sheet in which they are installed. C. Fixed Frame Moldings: Formed integral with hollow metal frames, a minimum of 5/8 inch (16 mm) high unless otherwise indicated. Provide fixed frame moldings and stops on outside of exterior and on secure side of interior doors and frames. D. Preformed Metal Frames for Light Openings: Manufacturer's standard frame formed of 0.048-inch-thick, cold rolled steel sheet; with baked enamel or powder coated finish; and approved for use in doors of fire protection rating indicated. Match pre-finished door paint color where applicable. 2.11 ACCESSORIES A. Mullions and Transom Bars: Join to adjacent members by welding or rigid mechanical anchors. B. Grout Guards: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.016 inches thick. 2.12 FABRICATION A. Fabricate hollow metal work to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or buckle. Accurately form metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for thickness of metal. Where practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. When shipping limitations so dictate, frames for large openings are to be fabricated in sections for splicing or splining in the field by others. B. Tolerances: Fabricate hollow metal work to tolerances indicated in ANSI/SDI A250.8. C. Hollow Metal Doors: 1. Exterior Doors: Provide optional weep-hole openings in bottom of exterior doors to permit moisture to escape where specified. 2. Glazed Lites: Factory cut openings in doors with applied trim or kits to fit. Factory install glazing where indicated. 3. Astragals: Provide overlapping astragals as noted in door hardware sets in Division 08 Section Door Hardware on one leaf of pairs of doors where required by NFPA 80 for fire-performance rating or where indicated. Extend minimum 3/4 inch beyond edge of door on which astragal is mounted. 4. Continuous Hinge Reinforcement: Provide welded continuous 12 gauge strap for continuous hinges specified in hardware sets in Division 08 Section Door Hardware. D. Hollow Metal Frames: 1. Shipping Limitations: Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling limitations, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of same thickness metal as frames. 2. Welded Frames: Weld flush face joints continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make smooth and invisible. a. Welded frames are to be provided with two steel spreaders temporarily attached to the bottom of both jambs to serve as a brace during shipping and handling. Spreader bars are for bracing only and are not to be used to size the frame opening. 3. Sidelight and Transom Bar Frames: Provide closed tubular members with no visible face seams or joints, fabricated from same material as door frame. Fasten members at crossings and to jambs by butt welding. 4. High Frequency Hinge Reinforcement: Provide high frequency hinge reinforcements at door openings 48-inches and wider with mortise butt type hinges at top hinge locations. 5. Continuous Hinge Reinforcement: Provide welded continuous 12 gauge straps for continuous hinges specified in hardware sets in Division 08 Section Door Hardware. 6. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated for removable stops, provide security screws at exterior locations. 7. Mortar Guards: Provide guard boxes at back of hardware mortises in frames at all hinges and strike preps regardless of grouting requirements. 8. Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottom of jambs and mullions with at least four spot welds per anchor. 9. Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows: a. Masonry Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c. and as follows: 1) Two anchors per jamb up to 60 inches high. 2) Three anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches high. Denton Fire Station No. 8 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 081113-6 August 2019 3) Four anchors per jamb from 90 to 120 inches high. 4) Four anchors per jamb plus 1 additional anchor per jamb for each 24 inches or fraction thereof above 120 inches high. b. Stud Wall Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c. and as follows: 1) Three anchors per jamb up to 60 inches high. 2) Four anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches high. 3) Five anchors per jamb from 90 to 96 inches high. 4) Five anchors per jamb plus 1 additional anchor per jamb for each 24 inches or fraction thereof above 96 inches high. 5) Two anchors per head for frames above 42 inches wide and mounted in metal stud partitions. 10. Door Silencers: Except on weather stripped or gasketed doors, drill stops to receive door silencers. Silencers to be supplied by frame manufacturer regardless if specified in Division 08 Section Door Hardware. E. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow metal work to receive template mortised hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping according to the Door Hardware Schedule and templates furnished as specified in Division 08 Section Door Hardware. 1. Locate hardware as indicated, or if not indicated, according to ANSI/SDI A250.8. 2. Reinforce doors and frames to receive non-template, mortised and surface mounted door hardware. 3. Comply with applicable requirements in ANSI/SDI A250.6 and ANSI/DHI A115 Series specifications for preparation of hollow metal work for hardware. 4. Coordinate locations of conduit and wiring boxes for electrical connections with Division 26 Sections. 2.13 STEEL FINISHES A. Prime Finishes: Doors and frames to be cleaned, and chemically treated to insure maximum finish paint adhesion. Surfaces of the door and frame exposed to view to receive a factory applied coat of rust inhibiting shop primer. 1. Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead and chromate free primer complying with ANSI/SDI A250.10 acceptance criteria; recommended by primer manufacturer for substrate; and compatible with substrate and field-applied coatings. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. General Contractor to verify the accuracy of dimensions given to the steel door and frame manufacturer for existing openings or existing frames (strike height, hinge spacing, hinge back set, etc.). C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Remove welded in shipping spreaders installed at factory. Restore exposed finish by grinding, filling, and dressing, as required to make repaired area smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. B. Prior to installation, adjust and securely brace welded hollow metal frames for square, level, twist, and plumb condition. C. Tolerances shall comply with SDI-117 “Manufacturing Tolerances Standard Steel Doors and Frames.” D. Drill and tap doors and frames to receive non-template, mortised, and surface-mounted door hardware. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install hollow metal work plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in place; comply with Drawings and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Hollow Metal Frames: Install hollow metal frames of size and profile indicated. Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.11 and NFPA 80 at fire rated openings. 1. Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, leveled, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete and frames properly set and secured, remove temporary braces, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged. Shim as necessary to comply with installation tolerances. 2. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor, and secure with post-installed expansion anchors. 3. Masonry Walls: Coordinate installation of frames to allow for solidly filling space between frames and masonry with mortar. 4. Grout Requirements: Do not grout head of frames unless reinforcing has been installed in head of Denton Fire Station No. 8 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 081113-7 August 2019 frame. Do not grout vertical or horizontal closed mullion members. C. Hollow Metal Doors: Fit hollow metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified below. Shim as necessary. 1. Non-Fire-Rated Standard Steel Doors: a. Jambs and Head: 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/16 inch. b. Between Edges of Pairs of Doors: 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/16 inch. c. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Threshold: Maximum 3/8 inch. d. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Finish Floor (No Threshold): Maximum 3/4 inch. 2. Fire-Rated Doors: Install doors with clearances according to NFPA 80. D. Field Glazing: Comply with installation requirements in Division 08 Section Glazing and with hollow metal manufacturer's written instructions. 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace defective work, including hollow metal work that is warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable. B. Remove grout and other bonding material from hollow metal work immediately after installation. C. Prime-Coat and Painted Finish Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of prime coat, or painted finishes, and apply touchup of compatible air drying, rust-inhibitive primer, zinc rich primer (exterior and galvanized openings) or finish paint. END OF SECTION Denton Fire Station No. 8 PLASTIC LAMINATE FACED WOOD DOORS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 081423.16-1 August 2019 SECTION 081423.16 – PLASTIC LAMINATE FACED WOOD DOORS PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Solid core doors with high pressure decorative laminate faces. 2. Solid core moisture resistant doors with high pressure decorative laminate faces. 3. Factory fitting plastic laminate faced wood doors to frames and factory machining for hardware. 4. Louvers installed in plastic laminate faced wood doors. 5. Light frames and glazing installed in plastic laminate faced wood doors. B. Standards and References: Comply with the version year adopted by the Authority Having Jurisdiction. 1. Intertek Testing Service (ITS Warnock Hersey) - Certification Listings for Fire Doors. 2. NFPA 80 - Standard for Fire Doors and Fire Windows; National Fire Protection Association. 3. NFPA 252 – Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies; National Fire Protection Association. 4. UL 10C – Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies; UL 1784 – Standard for Air Leakage Tests of Door Assemblies. 5. Window and Door Manufacturers Association – WDMA I.S.1-A Architectural Wood Flush Doors. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of door. Include details of core and edge construction, louvers, and trim for openings, and WDMA I.S.1-A or AWS classifications. Include factory finishing specifications. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door; construction details not covered in Product Data; and the following: 1. Dimensions and locations of blocking. 2. Dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware. 3. Dimensions and locations of cutouts. 4. Undercuts. 5. Requirements for veneer matching. 6. Doors to be factory finished and finish requirements. 7. Fire-protection ratings for fire-rated doors. C. Samples for Verification: 1. Plastic Laminate, 6 inches (150 mm) square, for each color, texture, and pattern selected. 2. Corner sections of doors, approximately 8 by 10 inches (200 by 250 mm), with door faces and edges representing actual materials to be used. 3. Louver blade and frame sections, 6 inches (150 mm) long, for each material and finish specified. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Sample Warranty: For special warranty. B. Quality Standard Compliance Certificates: AWI Quality Certification Program certificates. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain flush wood doors through one source from a single manufacturer wherever possible. B. Quality Standard: In addition to requirements specified, comply with WDMA I.S.1-A, latest edition, "Industry Standard for Architectural Wood Flush Doors’. C. Fire Rated Wood Doors: Doors complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing at positive pressure according to NFPA 252 (neutral pressure at 40” above sill) or UL 10C (neutral pressure testing according to UL 10B where specified). 1. Oversize Fire Rated Door Assemblies: For units exceeding sizes of tested assemblies provide manufacturer’s construction label, indicating compliance to independent third party certification agency’s procedure, except for size. 2. Temperature Rise Limit: Where indicated and at vertical exit enclosures (stairwell openings) and exit passageways, provide doors that have a maximum transmitted temperature end point of not more than 450 deg F (250 deg C) above ambient after 30 minutes of standard fire test exposure. 3. Smoke Control Door Assemblies: Comply with NFPA 105. 1) Smoke "S" Label: Doors to bear “S” label, and include smoke and draft control gasketing applied to frame and on meeting stiles of pair doors. Denton Fire Station No. 8 PLASTIC LAMINATE FACED WOOD DOORS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 081423.16-2 August 2019 D. Sound Rating Test Reports: Submit manufacturer’s test results of STC ratings from testing performed by independent testing agency for sound resistant doors. E. Pre-Submittal Conference: Conduct conference in compliance with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Meetings" with attendance by representatives of Supplier, Installer, and Contractor to review proper methods and procedures for receiving, handling, and installing flush wood doors. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Package doors individually in cardboard cartons and wrap bundles of doors in plastic sheeting. C. Mark each door on top and bottom rail with opening number used on Shop Drawings. 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during remainder of construction period. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace doors that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Warping (bow, cup, or twist) more than 1/4 inch in a 42-by-84-inch section. b. Telegraphing of core construction in face veneers exceeding 0.01 inch in a 3-inch span. 2. Warranty shall also include installation and finishing that may be required due to repair or replacement of defective doors. 3. Warranty Period for Solid-Core Interior Doors: Life of installation. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 DOOR CONSTRUCTION – GENERAL A. WDMA I.S.1-A Performance Grade: Extra Heavy Duty; Aesthetic Grade: Custom. B. Fire Rated Doors: Provide construction and core as needed to provide fire ratings indicated. 1. Category A Edge Construction: Provide fire rated door edge construction with intumescent seals concealed by outer stile (Category A) at 45, 60, and 90 minute rated doors. Comply with specified requirements for exposed edges. 2. Pairs: Provide fire retardant stiles that are listed and labeled for applications indicated without formed steel edges and astragals. Provide stiles with concealed intumescent seals. Comply with specified requirements for exposed edges. a. Where required or specified, provide formed steel edges and astragals with intumescent seals. Finish steel edges and astragals with baked enamel. 2.2 CORE CONSTRUCTION A. Structural Composite Lumber Core Wood Doors: 1. Structural Composite Lumber: Engineered hardwood composite wood products tested in accordance with WDMA I.S.1A, Testing Cellulosic Composite Materials for Use in Fenestration Products containing no added Urea Formaldehyde. Comply with minimum performance levels below: a. Screw Withdrawal, Face: 700 lbf (3100 N). b. Screw Withdrawal, Edge: 550 lbf (2440 N). 2. Sound Transmission Class: Have an operable STC rating of 30. B. Fire Resistant Composite Core Doors: 1. Core: Non-combustible mineral product complying with requirements of referenced quality standard and testing and inspecting agency for fire protection rating indicated. 2. Blocking: As indicated under article “Blocking”. 3. Edge Construction: At hinge stiles, provide laminated edge construction with improved screw holding capability and split resistance. Comply with specified requirements for exposed edges. 2.3 PLASTIC LAMINATE FACED WOOD DOORS A. Manufacturers (Standard Doors): Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Graham: GPD 2. Eggers Industries: Premium 3. Marshfield: Signature 4. VT Industries: Heritage B. Interior Solid Core Doors: Denton Fire Station No. 8 PLASTIC LAMINATE FACED WOOD DOORS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 081423.16-3 August 2019 1. Core: Structural Composite Lumber complying with 2.2. 2. Construction: Five plies. Stiles and rails bonded to core. 3. WDMA I.S.1-A Performance Grade: Extra Heavy Duty. 4. Faces: High pressure plastic laminate faces. 5. Vertical Edges: Matching laminate. Edges applied before faces. 6. Horizontal Edges: Solid wood or structural composite material meeting the minimum requirements per WDMA section P-1, Performance Standards for Architectural Wood Flush Doors. 2.4 LOUVERS A. Metal Louvers: Door manufacturer's standard metal louvers unless otherwise indicated. 1. Blade Type: Vision proof inverted V or inverted Y. 2. Metal and Finish: Galvanized steel, 0.040 inch thick, factory primed for paint finish with baked enamel or powder coated finish. 3. Color: To be selected by Architect from full range of manufacturers options. 2.5 LIGHT FRAMES AND GLAZING A. Metal Frames for Light Openings in Fire Rated Doors over 20-minute Rating: Manufacturer's standard frame formed of 0.048-inch-thick, cold rolled steel sheet; with baked enamel or powder coated finish; and approved for use in doors of fire protection rating indicated. 1. Manufacturers: a. Air Louver. b. All Metal Stamping. c. Anemostat. d. Pemko. 2. Color: To be selected by Architect from full range of manufacturers options B. Glazing: Comply with installation requirements in Division 08 Section "Glazing" and with the flush wood door manufacturer's written instructions. 2.6 FABRICATION A. Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated. Comply with clearance requirements of referenced quality standard for fitting unless otherwise indicated. 1. Comply with NFPA 80 requirements for fire-rated doors. B. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. Locate hardware to comply with DHI- WDHS-3. Comply with final hardware schedules, door frame Shop Drawings, BHMA-156.115-W, and hardware templates. 1. Coordinate with hardware mortises in metal frames to verify dimensions and alignment before factory machining. 2. Metal Astragals: Factory machine astragals and formed-steel edges for hardware for pairs of fire- rated doors. C. Transom and Side Panels: Fabricate matching panels with same construction, exposed surfaces, and finish as specified for associated doors. Finish bottom edges of transoms and top edges of rabbeted doors same as door stiles. D. Openings: Factory cut and trim openings through doors. 1. Light Openings: Trim openings with moldings of material and profile indicated. 2. Glazing: Factory install glazing in doors indicated to be factory finished. Comply with applicable requirements in Section 088000 Glazing. 3. Louvers: Factory install louvers in prepared openings. E. Electrical Raceways: Provide flush wood doors receiving electrified hardware with concealed wiring harness and standardized Molex™ plug connectors on both ends to accommodate up to twelve wires. Coordinate connectors on end of the wiring harness to plug directly into the electrified hardware and the through wire transfer hardware or wiring harness specified in hardware sets in Division 08 "Door Hardware". Wire nut connections are not acceptable. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine doors and installed door frames, with Installer present, before hanging doors. 1. Verify that installed frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location, and swing characteristics and have been installed with level heads and plumb jambs. 2. Reject doors with defects. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION Denton Fire Station No. 8 PLASTIC LAMINATE FACED WOOD DOORS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 081423.16-4 August 2019 A. Hardware: For installation, see Section 087100 Door Hardware. B. Installation Instructions: Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and referenced quality standard, and as indicated. 1. Install fire-rated doors according to NFPA 80. C. Factory Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge. D. Factory Finished Doors: Restore finish before installation if fitting or machining is required at Project site. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Operation: Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely. B. Finished Doors: Replace doors that are damaged or that do not comply with requirements. Doors may be repaired or refinished if Work complies with requirements and shows no evidence of repair or refinishing. END OF SECTION Denton Fire Station No. 8 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 083113-1 August 2019 SECTION 083113 – ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Access doors and frames for walls and ceilings. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include construction details, fire ratings, materials, individual components and profiles, and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 2. Detail fabrication and installation of access doors and frames for each type of substrate. C. Samples: For each door face material, at least 3 by 5 inches in size, in specified finish. D. Product Schedule: Provide complete access door and frame schedule, including types, locations, sizes, latching or locking provisions, and other data pertinent to installation. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES FOR WALLS AND CEILINGS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Acudor Products, Inc. 2. Babcock-Davis. 3. Jensen Industries; Div. of Broan-Nutone, LLC. 4. J. L. Industries, Inc.; Div. of Activar Construction Products Group. 5. Karp Associates, Inc. 6. Larsen's Manufacturing Company. 7. Milcor Inc. 8. Nystrom, Inc. B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of access door and frame from single source from single manufacturer. C. Flush Access Doors with Exposed Flanges: 1. Assembly Description: Fabricate door to fit flush to frame. Provide manufacturer's standard-width exposed flange, proportional to door size. 2. Locations: Wall and ceiling. 3. Door Size: As indicated. 4. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet for Door: Nominal 0.064 inch, 16 gage. a. Finish: Factory prime. 5. Frame Material: Same material, thickness, and finish as door. 6. Hinges: Manufacturer's standard. 7. Hardware: Latch. D. Hardware: 1. Latch: Cam latch operated by flush key with interior release. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. B. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; with minimum G60 or A60 metallic coating. C. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063-T6. D. Frame Anchors: Same type as door face. E. Inserts, Bolts, and Anchor Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized steel according to ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329. 2.3 FABRICATION A. General: Provide access door and frame assemblies manufactured as integral units ready for installation. B. Metal Surfaces: For metal surfaces exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes. Do not use materials with exposed pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or roughness. C. Doors and Frames: Grind exposed welds smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. Furnish attachment Denton Fire Station No. 8 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 083113-2 August 2019 devices and fasteners of type required to secure access doors to types of supports indicated. 1. For concealed flanges with drywall bead, provide edge trim for gypsum board and gypsum base securely attached to perimeter of frames. 2. Provide mounting holes in frames for attachment of units to metal or wood framing. 3. Provide mounting holes in frame for attachment of masonry anchors. D. Latching Mechanisms: Furnish number required to hold doors in flush, smooth plane when closed. 2.4 FINISHES A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. C. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. D. Steel and Metallic-Coated-Steel Finishes: 1. Factory Prime: Apply manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal primer immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing access doors and frames. B. Install doors flush with adjacent finish surfaces or recessed to receive finish material. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Adjust doors and hardware, after installation, for proper operation. B. Remove and replace doors and frames that are warped, bowed, or otherwise damaged. END OF SECTION Denton Fire Station No. 8 UPCOILING SECURITY GRILLES Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 083326-1 August 2019 SECTION 083326 – UPCOILING SECURITY GRILLES PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes Upcoiling Security Grilles, power operated. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Operation Cycles: Provide upcoiling grille components and operators capable of operating for not less than number of cycles indicated for each grille. One operation cycle is complete when a grille is opened from the closed position to the fully open position and returned to the closed position. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type and size of upcoiling grille and accessory. Include the following: 1. Construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components, profiles for curtain components, and finishes. 2. Rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished accessories. B. Shop Drawings: For each installation and for special components not dimensioned or detailed in manufacturer's product data. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 2. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring. C. Verification Samples: For each finish product specified, two samples, representing actual product, color, and patterns. D. Manufacturer’s Certificates: Certify product meets or exceeds specified requirements. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with a minimum of five years experience in the fabrication and installation of security closures. B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three years experience and approved by manufacturer. C. Source Limitations: Obtain upcoiling grilles from single source from single manufacturer. 1. Obtain operators and controls from upcoiling grille manufacturer. D. Electrical Components, Devices and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Store products in manufacturer’s unopened packaging until ready for installation. B. Protect materials from exposure to moisture. Do not deliver until after wet work is complete and dry. C. Store materials in a dry, warm, ventilated weathertight location. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 UPCOLING GRILLE CURTAIN MATERIALS AND CONSTRUCTION A. Open-Curtain Grilles: Fabricate metal grille curtain as an open network of horizontal rods, spaced at regular intervals, that are interconnected with vertical links, which are formed and spaced as indicated and are free to rotate on the rods. 1. Aluminum Grille Curtain: ASTM B 221 alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and finished for type of use and finish indicated. B. Endlocks: Continuous end links, chains, or other devices at end of rods; locking and retaining grille curtain in guides against excessive pressures, maintain grille curtain alignment, and preventing lateral movement. C. Bottom Bar: Manufacturer’s standard continuous tubular shape, finished to match grille. 1. Astragal: Equip each grille bottom bar with a replaceable, adjustable, continuous, compressible gasket of flexible vinyl, rubber, or neoprene as a cushion bumper. 2. Provide motor-operated grilles with combination bottom astragal and sensor edge. D. Grille Curtain Jamb Guides: Manufacturer's standard extruded aluminum shape having curtain groove with return lips or bars to retain curtain. Provide continuous integral silicone treated wear strips or PVC inserts to prevent metal-to-metal contact and to minimize operational noise; with removable stops on guides to prevent over-travel of curtain. Denton Fire Station No. 8 UPCOILING SECURITY GRILLES Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 083326-2 August 2019 E. Push/Pull Handles: Equip each emergency-operated grille with lifting handles on each side of grille, finished to match grille. 2.2 LOCKING DEVICES A. Slide Bolt: Fabricate with side-locking bolts to engage through slots in tracks for locking by padlock, located on both left and right jamb sides, operable from coil side. B. Safety Interlock Switch: Equip power-operated grilles with safety interlock switch to disengage power supply when grille is locked. 2.3 COUNTERBALANCING MECHANISM A. General: Counterbalance grilles by means of manufacturer's standard mechanism with an adjustable- tension, steel helical torsion spring mounted around a steel shaft and contained in a spring barrel connected to top of curtain with barrel rings. Use grease-sealed bearings or self-lubricating graphite bearings for rotating members. B. Counterbalance Barrel: Fabricate spring barrel of manufacturer's standard hot-formed, structural-quality, welded or seamless carbon-steel pipe, of sufficient diameter and wall thickness to support rolled-up curtain without distortion of parts and to limit barrel deflection to not more than 0.03 in./ft. of span under full load. C. Brackets: Manufacturer's standard mounting brackets of either cast iron or cold-rolled steel plate. 2.4 ELECTRIC GRILLE OPERATORS A. General: Electric grille operator assembly of size and capacity recommended and provided by grille manufacturer for grille and operation-cycles requirement specified, with electric motor and factory-prewired motor controls, starter, gear-reduction unit, solenoid-operated brake, clutch, remote-control stations, control devices, integral gearing for locking grille, and accessories required for proper operation. 1. Comply with NFPA 70. 2. Provide control equipment complying with NEMA ICS 1, NEMA ICS 2, and NEMA ICS 6, with NFPA 70 Class 2 control circuit, maximum 24 V, ac or dc. B. Usage Classification: Electric operator and components capable of operating for not less than number of cycles per hour indicated for each grille. C. Grille Operator Location: Operator is mounted to right of grille head plate and connected to the grille drive shaft with drive train and sprockets. D. Electric Motors: Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and efficiency requirements. 1. Motor Type and Controller: Reversible motor and controller (disconnect switch) for motor exposure indicated. 2. Motor Size: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough to start, accelerate, and operate grille in either direction from any position, at a speed not less than 8 in./sec. and not more than 12 in./sec., without exceeding nameplate ratings or service factor. 3. Operating Controls, Controllers (Disconnect Switches), Wiring Devices, and Wiring: Manufacturer's standard unless otherwise indicated. E. Limit Switches: Equip each motorized grille with adjustable switches interlocked with motor controls and set to automatically stop grille at fully opened and fully closed positions. F. Obstruction Detection Device: Equip powered grille with indicated external automatic safety sensor capable of protecting full width of grille opening. Activation of sensor immediately stops and reverses downward grille travel. 1. Photoelectric Sensor: Manufacturer's standard system designed to detect an obstruction in grille opening without contact between grille and obstruction. a. Self-Monitoring Type: Designed to interface with grille operator control circuit to detect damage to or disconnection of sensing device. When self-monitoring feature is activated, grille closes only with sustained pressure on close button. G. Remote Control Station: Momentary-contact, three-button control station with push-button controls labeled "Open," "Close," and "Stop." 1. Interior units, full-guarded, flush-mounted, heavy-duty type, with general-purpose NEMA ICS 6, Type 1 enclosure. 2. Exterior units, full-guarded, standard-duty, flush-mounted, weatherproof type, NEMA ICS 6, Type 4 enclosure, key operated. H. Radio Remote Control: Provide one transmitter for each door receiver, operable from up to 100 feet away from motor. I. Emergency Manual Operation: Equip each electrically powered grille with capability for emergency manual operation. Design manual mechanism so required force for grille operation does not exceed 25 lbf. J. Emergency Operation Disconnect Device: Equip operator with hand-operated disconnect mechanism for automatically engaging manual operator and releasing brake for emergency manual operation while disconnecting motor without affecting timing of limit switch. Mount mechanism so it is accessible from floor Denton Fire Station No. 8 UPCOILING SECURITY GRILLES Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 083326-3 August 2019 level. Include interlock device to automatically prevent motor from operating when emergency operator is engaged. K. Motor Removal: Design operator so motor may be removed without disturbing limit-switch adjustment and without affecting emergency manual operation. L. Emergency Egress Release: Flush, wall-mounted handle mechanism, for ADA-ABA-compliant egress feature, not dependent on electric power. The release allows an unlocked grille to partially open without affecting limit switches to permit passage, and it automatically resets motor drive upon return of handle to original position 2.5 UPCOILING GRILLE ASSEMBLY A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Basis of Design: a. Overhead Door Corp.; Model 670 2. Cornell Cookson, LLC 3. McKeon Rolling Steel Door Company, Inc. 4. Raynor Garage Doors 5. Clopay Building Products B. Operation Cycles: Not less than 20,000. 1. Include tamperproof cycle counter. C. Grille Curtain: 1. Material: Aluminum 2. Curtain: Horizontal 5/16 inch (7.8 mm) diameter rods with network of vertically interlocking links to form a pattern. 3. Vertical Rod Spacing: 2 inches (51 mm) on center. 4. Pattern: Straight lattice; horizontal spacing 6 inches (152 mm) on center. 5. Accessories: 18” tall, 1/4" thick clear Lexan polycarbonate rodent guard panel full width of grille. D. Electric Grille Operator: 1. Usage Classification: Standard duty, up to 60 cycles per hour. 2. Motor Exposure: Interior. 3. Emergency Manual Operation: Push-up. 4. Obstruction Detection Device: Automatic photoelectric sensor; self-monitoring type. a. Sensor edge bulb color: Black. 5. Remote Control Station: Flush mounted interior 3-button push button station, NEMA type 1 enclosure. a. Provide additional push-buttons for master control stations located in Watch 104 and Vehicle Bays 138. 6. Size: 1/2 horsepower. E. Grille Finish: 1. Aluminum Finish: Clear Anodized. 2.6 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. 2.7 ALUMUNIM FINISHES A. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A41, Class I, 0.018 mm or thicker. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for substrate construction and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Examine locations of electrical connections. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install upcoiling grilles and operating equipment complete with necessary hardware, anchors, inserts, hangers, and equipment supports; according to manufacturer's written instructions and as specified. B. Install upcoiling grilles, hoods, and operators at the mounting locations indicated for each grille. C. Accessibility: Install upcoiling grilles, switches, and controls along accessible routes in compliance with regulatory requirements for accessibility. Denton Fire Station No. 8 UPCOILING SECURITY GRILLES Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 083326-4 August 2019 3.3 STARTUP SERVICE A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service. 1. Perform installation and startup checks according to manufacturer’s written instructions. 2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. 3. Test grille opening when activated by detector, fire-alarm system, emergency-egress release, or self- opening mechanism as required. Reset grille-opening mechanism after successful test. 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Adjust hardware and moving parts to function smoothly so that grilles operate easily, free or warp, twist, or distortion. B. Lubricate bearings and sliding parts as recommended by manufacturer. 3.5 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain upcoiling grilles. 3.6 CLEANING A. Clean curtain and components using non-abrasive materials and methods recommended by manufacturer. B. Remove labels and visible markings. C. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION Denton Fire Station No. 8 PANEL FOLDING DOORS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 107114-1 August 2019 SECTION 083513 – PANEL FOLDING DOORS PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes Four-Fold metal doors with surface mounted tube frames. B. Operation of Four-Fold metal doors includes overhead mounted electro-mechanical operators. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product Data for each type of product specified consisting of manufacturer’s technical Product Data and installation instructions for each type of door required, including data substantiating that products comply with requirements. C. Submittal Drawings showing fabrication and installation of Four-Fold metal doors including plans, elevations, sections, details of components, hardware, operating mechanism, and attachments to the other units of Work. Include wiring diagrams for coordination with electrical trade. D. Reference list including (5) successful installations of this type of door within the past two (2) years. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Design Wind Loads: As indicated on structural drawings or as otherwise determined using design wind loads applicable to project from basic wind speed indicated in miles per hour, according to ASCE 7. The maximum allowable deflection shall not exceed 1/120 of the span. Fiber stresses in main members shall be limited to 27,000 pounds per square inch. Steel frames shall be designed in accordance with the AISC “Steel Construction Manual”. B. Door manufacturer shall have at least 10 years of experience in manufacturing door type specified for emergency vehicle applications. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Store delivered materials and equipment in dry locations with adequate ventilation, free from dust and water, and so as to permit access for inspection and handling. B. Handle materials carefully to prevent damage. 1.6 WARRANTY A. The door manufacturer shall provide a written standard limited warranty for material and workmanship. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Four-Fold industrial metal doors manufactured by Door Engineering and Manufacturing, 400 Cherry Street, Kasota, MN 56050, (800)-959-1352 or equal products by other manufacturers approved in advance. B. Acceptable Product: FF600 Series: Sallyport Glazed, with foamed in place or polyisocyanurate insulation. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Steel Tube: ASTM A513 and ASTM A500/A500M B. Steel Sheets: Steel sheets of commercial quality, complying with ASTM A1011/A1011M hot-rolled steel sheet. C. Hardware: Manufacturer’s standard components. D. Fasteners: Zinc-coated steel. 2.3 FOUR-FOLD DOORS A. Construction: Door framing shall be minimum 14-gauge structural steel tube with 14-gauge steel sheet on the exterior and interior faces. Sheeting shall be formed on the vertical edges with no visible welds on the interior or exterior panel faces. All frames and framing members shall be true to dimension and square in all directions, and no door shall be bowed, warped, or out of line, in the vertical or horizontal plane of the Denton Fire Station No. 8 PANEL FOLDING DOORS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 083513-1 Month 2019 door opening by more than 1/8 inch in 20 feet. Exposed welds and welds which interfere with the installation of various parts shall be ground smooth and flush. B. Surface Mounted Tube Frame: Supply pre-hung tube frame system constructed of minimum TS6x4x0.25, designed to anchor to masonry wall construction or weld to steel structure. All hinges, track supports and operator supports shall be factory attached. C. Factory Finish: Door panels and tube frames shall be finished with manufacturer’s standard PPG Spectracon epoxy primer and polyurethane top coat. Color as selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range of options. 1. Operator and operating hardware shall be powder-coated manufacturer’s standard grey. D. Operating Hardware: Hardware shall include guide tracks and brackets, trolleys, center guides, not less than three pairs of jamb and fold hinges per opening, and all bolts, nuts, fasteners, etc. necessary for complete installation and operation. 1. All hardware, including hinges and trolleys, shall be bolted tot eh panel for easy removal for service or panel replacement. 2. Doors up to 16’ wide and under 30psf wind load shall require no floor mounted supports, guides or tracks. 3. Top tracks shall be adjustable on the end track hangers to allow for adjustment of the door panels in the open position and easily replaceable without removal of the door framing or operators. E. Hinges: Jamb hinges shall be dual shear and have two thrust bearings and two needle bearings. Fold hinges shall be dual shear with two thrust bearings. All bearings shall be completely concealed within the hinge barrel and include grease zerks. All hinge pins shall be minimum 3/4” diameter hardened steel. F. Hinge Guards: Provide plastic guards at jamb hinges to prevent access through hinge space. G. Weather-stripping: Material shall be adjustable and readily replaceable and provide a substantially weather-tight installation. Weather-stripping at center shall be 1/16” cloth inserted neoprene and include no exposed fasteners on the exterior face of the panel. Weather-stripping at sill shall include two 1/16” cloth inserted neoprene sweeps with an aluminum retainer. The retainer shall be attached to the door with adhesive. H. Perimeter Weather-stripping: Provide jamb and head weather-stripping of 1/16” cloth-inserted neoprene bulb (or closed cell neoprene). I. Vision Panels: Provide 1” insulated, tempered vision panels of the size, shape and location as indicated in Drawings. 2.4 OPERATOR A. Each Four-Fold door shall be operated by an overhead mounted electro-mechanical drive unit designed for high cycle operation. Operator consists of an electric motor, gear reducer, and rotating drive arm. The door shall be operated with connecting rods attached to the rotating drive arm on the operator and to control arms attached to the jamb door section and to the door lintel. The connecting rods shall be positive drive, keeping the door under firm control at all times. The connecting rods shall be fitted with spherical bearings and control arms shall be equipped with oil impregnated bronze bearings on polished shafts. B. Operator shall be instantly reversible, open and close rapidly and start and stop gradually. Operator shall be adjustable to allow door to fully clear the opening. Operator shall automatically lock the door in the closed position. Operator shall be equipped with disengaging mechanism to convert to free-wheeling mode for manual operation. C. Electric motor shall be of sufficient size to operate doors under normal operating conditions at no more than 75 percent of rated capacity. The motor shall be wound for phase and voltage as provided on the electrical drawings. E. Electric Controls: Controls shall be furnished by the door manufacturer and shall be complete for each door, and built in accordance with the latest NEMA standards. Incoming electrical shall be 208/230VAC 3- phase. 1. Control panel assemblies shall be UL listed as per NFPA70. 2. Controls shall include a programmable logic controller with digital message display or LED indicators. Controller shall include programmable close timers and programmable inputs/outputs. 3. Controls shall include a variable frequency drive with independent adjustment of the opening and closing speeds. 4. Enclosures shall be NEMA 4 with disconnect switch. a. Enclosure to be semi-recessed in wall per manufacturer’s allowance. 5. Pushbuttons (interior) for each door shall have one (1) momentary pressure three-button push- button station marked “OPEN”, “CLOSE” and “STOP”. Push button enclosure shall be NEMA 4. a. Provide additional push-buttons for vehicle bay doors master control stations located in Watch 104 and Vehicle Bays 138. Provide in custom back box with stainless steel face plate and fasteners as detailed in Architectural. 6. Limit switches shall be provided to stop the travel of the door in its fully open or fully closed position. Denton Fire Station No. 8 PANEL FOLDING DOORS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 083513-2 Month 2019 7. Safety edges: Provide 4-wire fail-safe electric safety edges on leading edge of all doors to reverse door upon contact with obstruction. 8. Photo eyes: Provide (1) exterior, jamb mounted, light curtain type photo eyes, NEMA 4 rated. Phot eye shall cover from floor level to 72” above floor. a. Photo eyes to be recessed and flush-mounted with veneer at jamb. 10. Presence Sensor: Provide (1) interior, overhead mounted, presence sensor with pre-open and pre- close safety fields. Sensor shall be LZR-Widescan or approved equal. 11. Radio controls: Provide one (1) radio receiver and (1) single button remotes per door. Remotes to open and close doors with single button. 12. Timer Activation Loop Detectors: Provide “pulse on exit type” loop detector to activate auto close timer once loop has been activated and cleared. Include hand/auto switch to deactivate timer. Loop Detector shall be LMA-1250 “Deflectometer” Series by EDI or approved equal. Contractor to coordinate installation of preformed loop with installer prior to exterior apron being poured. 13. Wiring: Door manufacturer shall supply controls and components only. Electrical contractor shall install controls and furnish and install conduits and wiring for jobsite power and control wiring. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install Four-Fold metal doors in strict accordance with the approved drawings by qualified door erection crews. All door openings shall be completely prepared by the general contractor prior to the installation of the doors. Permanent or temporary electric wiring shall be brought to the door opening before installation is started and shall be completed so as not to delay the inspection test. B. Doors shall be set plumb, level, and square, and with all parts properly fastened and mounted. All moving parts shall be tested and adjusted and left in good operating condition. 3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Inspection of the doors and a complete operating test will be made by the installer in the presence of the general contractor or architect as soon as the erection is complete. Any defects noted shall be corrected. After door approval in the above test, the general contractor must assume the responsibility for any damage or rough handling of the doors during construction until the building is turned over to the owner and final inspection is made. B. Clean surfaces and repaint abraded or damaged finished surfaces to match factory-applied finish. END OF SECTION Denton Fire Station No. 8 SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 083613-1 August 2019 SECTION 083613 – SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes electrically operated sectional doors. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General Performance: Sectional doors shall meet performance requirements specified without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction and without requiring temporary installation of reinforcing components. B. Structural Performance: Exterior sectional doors shall withstand the effects of gravity loads, and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated according to ASCE/SEI 7. 1. Design Wind Loads: As indicated on structural drawings or as otherwise determined using design wind loads applicable to Project from basic wind speed indicated in miles per hour, according to ASCE 7, Section 6.5, "Method 2-Analytical Procedure." 2. Deflection Limits: Design sectional doors to withstand design wind loads without evidencing permanent deformation or disengagement of door components. Deflection of door in horizontal position (open) shall not exceed 1/120 of the door width. C. Air Infiltration: Maximum rate not more than indicated when tested according to ASTM E 283. 1. Air Infiltration: Maximum rate of 0.08 cfm/sq. ft. at 15 and 25 mph. D. Operation Cycles: Provide sectional door components and operators capable of operating for not less than number of cycles indicated for each door. One operation cycle is complete when a door is opened from the closed position to the fully open position and returned to the closed position. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type and size of sectional door and accessory. Include the following: 1. Construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components, profile door sections, and finishes. 2. Rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished accessories. B. Shop Drawings: For each installation and for special components not dimensioned or detailed in manufacturer's product data. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 2. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each finish product representing actual product, color, and patterns. D. Maintenance Data: For sectional doors to include in maintenance manuals. E. Warranties: Sample of special warranties. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for both installation and maintenance of units required for this Project. B. Source Limitations: Obtain sectional doors from single source from single manufacturer. 1. Obtain operators and controls from sectional door manufacturer. C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. D. Standard for Sectional Doors: Fabricate sectional doors to comply with DASMA 102 unless otherwise indicated. E. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) and Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities". 1.6 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of sectional doors that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection. Denton Fire Station No. 8 SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 083613-2 August 2019 b. Faulty operation of hardware. c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering and use; rust through. d. Delamination of exterior or interior facing materials. 2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 STEEL DOOR SECTIONS A. Exterior Section Faces and Frames: Fabricate from zinc-coated (galvanized), cold-rolled, commercial steel (CS) sheet, complying with ASTM A 653, with indicated zinc coating and thickness. 1. For insulated doors, provide sections with continuous thermal-break construction, separating the exterior and interior faces of door. B. Section Ends and Intermediate Stiles: Enclose open ends of sections with channel end stiles formed from galvanized-steel sheet not less than 0.064-inch- nominal coated thickness and welded to door section. Provide intermediate stiles formed from not less than 0.064-inch- thick galvanized-steel sheet, cut to door section profile, and welded in place. Space stiles not more than 48 inches apart. C. Reinforce bottom section with a continuous channel or angle conforming to bottom-section profile. D. Reinforce sections with continuous horizontal and diagonal reinforcement, as required to stiffen door and for wind loading. Provide galvanized-steel bars, struts, trusses, or strip steel, formed to depth and bolted or welded in place. Ensure that reinforcement does not obstruct vision lites. E. Provide reinforcement for hardware attachment. F. Foamed-in-Place Thermal Insulation: Insulate interior of steel sections with door manufacturer's standard CFC-free polyurethane insulation, foamed in place to completely fill interior of section and pressure bonded to face sheets to prevent delamination under wind load, and with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively, according to ASTM E 84. Enclose insulation completely within steel sections that incorporate the following interior facing material, with no exposed insulation: 1. Interior Facing Material: Zinc-coated (galvanized), cold-rolled, commercial steel (CS) sheet, complying with ASTM A 653, with indicated thickness. G. Fabricate sections so finished door assembly is rigid and aligned, with tight hairline joints and free of warp, twist, and deformation. 2.2 TRACKS, SUPPORTS, AND ACCESSORIES A. Tracks: Manufacturer's standard, galvanized-steel track system of configuration indicated, sized for door size and weight, designed for lift type indicated and clearances shown on Drawings, and complying with ASTM A 653 for minimum G60 zinc coating. Provide complete track assembly including brackets, bracing, and reinforcement for rigid support of ball-bearing roller guides for required door type and size. Slot vertical sections of track spaced 2 inches apart for door-drop safety device. Slope tracks at proper angle from vertical or design tracks to ensure tight closure at jambs when door unit is closed. B. Track Reinforcement and Supports: Galvanized-steel track reinforcement and support members, complying with ASTM A 36 and ASTM A 123. Secure, reinforce, and support tracks as required for door size and weight to provide strength and rigidity without sag, sway, and vibration during opening and closing of doors. 1. Horizontal Track Assembly: Track with continuous reinforcing angle attached to track and supported at points from curve in track to end of track by laterally braced attachments to overhead structural members. C. Weather seals: Replaceable, adjustable, continuous, compressible weather-stripping gaskets of flexible vinyl, rubber, or neoprene fitted to bottom and top of sectional door unless otherwise indicated. D. Windows: Manufacturer's standard window units of type and size indicated and in arrangement shown. Set glazing in vinyl, rubber, or neoprene glazing channel for metal-framed doors and elastic glazing compound for wood doors, as required. Provide removable stops of same material as door-section frames. 2.3 HARDWARE A. General: Provide heavy-duty, corrosion-resistant hardware, with hot-dip galvanized, stainless-steel, or other corrosion-resistant fasteners, to suit door type. B. Hinges: Heavy-duty, galvanized-steel hinges of not less than 0.079-inch- nominal coated thickness at each end stile and at each intermediate stile, according to manufacturer's written recommendations for door size. Attach hinges to door sections through stiles and rails with bolts and lock nuts or lock washers and nuts. Use rivets or self-tapping fasteners where access to nuts is not possible. Provide double-end Denton Fire Station No. 8 SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 083613-3 August 2019 hinges where required, for doors over 16 feet wide unless otherwise recommended by door manufacturer. C. Rollers: Heavy-duty rollers with steel ball-bearings in case-hardened steel races, mounted with varying projections to suit slope of track. Extend roller shaft through both hinges where double hinges are required. Provide 3-inch- diameter roller tires for 3-inch- wide track. D. Push/Pull Handles: For push-up or emergency-operated doors, provide galvanized-steel lifting handles on each side of door. 2.4 LOCKING DEVICES A. Slide Bolt: Fabricate with side-locking bolts to engage through slots in tracks for locking by padlock, located on single-jamb side, operable from inside only. B. Safety Interlock Switch: Equip power-operated doors with safety interlock switch to disengage power supply when door is locked. 2.5 COUNTERBALANCE MECHANISM A. Torsion Spring: Counterbalance mechanism consisting of adjustable-tension torsion springs fabricated from steel-spring wire complying with ASTM A 229, mounted on torsion shaft made of steel tube or solid steel. Provide springs designed for number of operation cycles indicated. B. Cable Drums and Shaft for Doors: Cast-aluminum or gray-iron casting cable drums mounted on torsion shaft and grooved to receive door-lifting cables as door is raised. Mount counterbalance mechanism with manufacturer's standard ball-bearing brackets at each end of torsion shaft. Provide one additional midpoint bracket for shafts up to 16 feet long and two additional brackets at one-third points to support shafts more than 16 feet long unless closer spacing is recommended by door manufacturer. C. Cables: Galvanized-steel lifting cables with cable safety factor of at least 5 to 1. D. Cable Safety Device: Include a spring-loaded steel or spring-loaded bronze cam mounted to bottom door roller assembly on each side and designed to automatically stop door if either lifting cable breaks. E. Bracket: Provide anchor support bracket as required to connect stationary end of spring to the wall and to level the shaft and prevent sag. F. Provide a spring bumper at each horizontal track to cushion door at end of opening operation. 2.6 ELECTRIC DOOR OPERATORS A. General: Electric door operator assembly of size and capacity recommended and provided by door manufacturer for door and "operation cycles" requirement specified, with electric motor and factory-pre- wired motor controls, starter, gear-reduction unit, solenoid-operated brake, clutch, remote-control stations, control devices, integral gearing for locking door, and accessories required for proper operation. 1. Comply with NFPA 70. 2. Provide control equipment complying with NEMA ICS 1, NEMA ICS 2, and NEMA ICS 6; with NFPA 70, Class 2 control circuit, maximum 24-V ac or dc. B. Usage Classification: Electric operator and components capable of operating for not less than number of cycles per hour indicated for each door. C. Door-Operator Type: Unit consisting of electric motor, gears, pulleys, belts, sprockets, chains, and controls needed to operate door and meet required usage classification. 1. Jackshaft, Side Mounted: Jackshaft operator mounted on the inside front wall above door and connected to torsion shaft with an adjustable coupling or drive chain. D. Electric Motors: Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and efficiency requirements specified in Division 11 Section "Common Motor Requirements for Equipment" unless otherwise indicated. 1. Motor Type and Controller: Reversible motor and controller (disconnect switch) for motor exposure indicated. 2. Motor Size: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough to start, accelerate, and operate door in either direction from any position, at a speed not less than 8 in./sec. and not more than 12 in./sec., without exceeding nameplate ratings or service factor. 3. Operating Controls, Controllers (Disconnect Switches), Wiring Devices, and Wiring: Manufacturer's standard unless otherwise indicated. 4. Coordinate wiring requirements and electrical characteristics of motors and other electrical devices with building electrical system and each location where installed. 5. Use adjustable motor-mounting bases for belt-driven operators. E. Limit Switches: Equip each motorized door with adjustable switches interlocked with motor controls and set to automatically stop door at fully opened and fully closed positions. F. Obstruction Detection Device: Equip motorized door with indicated external automatic safety sensor capable of protecting full width of door opening. Activation of device immediately stops and reverses downward door travel. Denton Fire Station No. 8 SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 083613-4 August 2019 1. Photoelectric Sensor: Manufacturer's standard system designed to detect an obstruction in door opening without contact between door and obstruction. a. Self-Monitoring Type: Designed to interface with door operator control circuit to detect damage to or disconnection of sensor device. When self-monitoring feature is activated, door closes only with sustained pressure on close button. G. Remote-Control Station: Momentary-contact, three-button control station with push-button controls labeled "Open," "Close," and "Stop." 1. Interior units, full-guarded, flush-mounted, heavy-duty type, with general-purpose NEMA ICS 6, Type 1 enclosure. 2. Exterior units, full-guarded, standard-duty, flush-mounted, weatherproof type, NEMA ICS 6, Type 4 enclosure, key operated. H. Emergency Operation Disconnect Device: Equip operator with hand-operated disconnect mechanism for automatically engaging manual operator and releasing brake for emergency manual operation while disconnecting motor without affecting timing of limit switch. Mount mechanism so it is accessible from floor level. Include interlock device to automatically prevent motor from operating when emergency operator is engaged. I. Motor Removal: Design operator so motor may be removed without disturbing limit-switch adjustment and without affecting emergency manual operation. J. Radio-Control System: Consisting of the following: 1. Three-channel universal coaxial receiver to open, close, and stop door; two per operator. 2. Multifunction remote control. 3. Remote antenna and mounting kit. 2.7 INSULATED STEEL SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOOR ASSEMBLY A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Basis of Design: a. Overhead Door Corp.; 592 Series Thermacore Insulated Steel Doors. 2. Clopay Building Products. 3. Raynor Garage Doors. 4. Windsor Door. B. Door Assembly: Metal/foam/metal sandwich panel construction, with PVC thermal break and weather-tight ship-lap design meeting joints. 1. Panel Thickness: 2 inches (51 mm). 2. Exterior Surface: Ribbed, textured. 3. Exterior Steel: 0.015 inch (.38 mm), hot-dipped galvanized. 4. End Stiles: 16 gauge with thermal break. 5. Insulation: CFC-free and HCFC-free polyurethane, fully encapsulated. 6. Thermal Values: R-value of 17.5; U-value of 0.057. 7. Air Infiltration: 0.08 cfm at 15 mph; 0.08 cfm at 25 mph. C. Springs: Not less than 100,000 operation cycles. D. Counterbalance Type: Torsion spring. Sized to weight of door, with a helically wound, oil tempered torsion spring mounted on a steel shaft; cable drum of die-cast aluminum with high strength galvanized aircraft cable. E. Windows: Sizes as indicated on Drawings 1. Full Glazed Aluminum Sash Panels: a. Glazing: 1/2 inch (12.5 mm) Low E Insulated glazing. F. Hardware: Galvanized steel hinges and fixtures. Ball bearing rollers with hardened steel races. G. Weather Seals: Fitted to bottom and top and around entire perimeter of door. 1. EPDM bulb-type strip at bottom section. 2. Flexible jamb seals. 3. Flexible header seal. H. Track Width: Provide width required for 3 inch wide rollers. I. Track Configuration: Angle mounted for required lift clearance. J. Roller-Tire Material: Manufacturer’s standard. K. Exhaust Ports: Where required for exhausting vehicles or shown in Drawings. L. Electric Motor Operation: Shall meet UL325/2010 requirements for continuous monitoring of safety devices. 1. Size: 3/4 hp, minimum. 2. Usage Classification: Standard duty. a. Up to 60 cycles per hour. b. Provide with tamper proof counter. 3. Operator Type: Jackshaft, side mounted. 4. Entrapment Protection: Required for momentary contact, includes radio control operation. Denton Fire Station No. 8 SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 083613-5 August 2019 a. Pneumatic sensing edge; constant contact only complying with UL 325/2010. b. Photoelectric sensors monitored to meet UL 325/2010. 5. Operator Controls: a. Push-button operated control stations with open, close and stop buttons. b. Flush mounting. c. Interior location. d. Provide additional push-buttons for vehicle bay doors master control stations located in Watch 104 and Vehicle Bays 138. 6. Special Operation: a. Vehicle detector operation. b. Radio control operation. c. Door timer operation. d. Photocell operation. 7. Emergency Manual Operation: Hoist. M. Locking Devices: Equip door with slide bolt for padlock. 1. Locking Device Assembly: Single-jamb slide locking bars; operable from inside with thumb turn. N. Door Finish and Color: 1. Exterior: a. As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range of options. 2. Interior: a. Match finish and color of exterior section face. 2.8 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. 2.9 STEEL AND GALVANIZED-STEEL FINISHES A. Factory Prime Finish: Manufacturer's standard primer, compatible with field-applied finish. Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning, pretreatment, application, and minimum dry film thickness. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for substrate construction and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Examine locations of electrical connections. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install sectional doors and operating equipment complete with necessary hardware, anchors, inserts, hangers, and equipment supports; according to manufacturer's written instructions and as specified. B. Tracks: 1. Fasten vertical track assembly to opening jambs and framing, spaced not more than 24 inches apart. 2. Hang horizontal track assembly from structural overhead framing with angles or channel hangers attached to framing by welding or bolting, or both. Provide sway bracing, diagonal bracing, and reinforcement as required for rigid installation of track and door-operating equipment. 3. Repair galvanized coating on tracks according to ASTM A 780. C. Accessibility: Install sectional doors, switches, and controls along accessible routes in compliance with regulatory requirements for accessibility. 3.3 STARTUP SERVICES A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service. 1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. Denton Fire Station No. 8 SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 083613-6 August 2019 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Adjust hardware and moving parts to function smoothly so that doors operate easily, free of warp, twist, or distortion. B. Lubricate bearings and sliding parts as recommended by manufacturer. C. Adjust doors and seals to provide weathertight fit around entire perimeter. D. Align and adjust motors, pulleys, belts, sprockets, chains, and controls according to manufacturer's written instructions. E. Touch-up Painting: Immediately after welding galvanized materials, clean welds and abraded galvanized surfaces and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780. END OF SECTION Denton Fire Station No. 8 ALUMINUM FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 084113-1 August 2019 SECTION 084113 – ALUMINUM FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Exterior and interior storefront framing. 2. Exterior and interior manual-swing entrance doors and door-frame units. 3. Operable windows. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. ADA/ABA Accessibility Guidelines: U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disability Act (ADA) and Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities." 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General Performance: Aluminum-framed systems shall withstand the effects of the following performance requirements without exceeding performance criteria or failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction: 1. Movements of supporting structure indicated on Drawings including, but not limited to, story drift and deflection from uniformly distributed and concentrated live loads. 2. Dimensional tolerances of building frame and other adjacent construction. 3. Failure includes the following: a. Deflection exceeding specified limits. b. Thermal stresses transferring to building structure. c. Framing members transferring stresses, including those caused by thermal and structural movements to glazing. d. Noise or vibration created by wind and by thermal and structural movements. e. Loosening or weakening of fasteners, attachments, and other components. f. Sealant failure. g. Failure of operating units. B. Delegated Design: Design aluminum-framed systems, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated. C. Structural Loads: 1. Design Wind Loads: As indicated on structural drawings or as otherwise determined using design wind loads applicable to Project from basic wind speed indicated in miles per hour, according to ASCE 7, Section 6.5, "Method 2-Analytical Procedure." D. Deflection of Framing Members: 1. Deflection Normal to Wall Plane: Limited to edge of glass in a direction perpendicular to glass plane shall not exceed L/175 of the glass edge length for each individual glazing lite or an amount that restricts edge deflection of individual glazing lites to 3/4 inch, whichever is less. 2. Deflection Parallel to Glazing Plane: Limited to L/360 of clear span or 1/8 inch, whichever is smaller. E. Structural-Test Performance: Provide aluminum-framed systems tested according to ASTM E 330 as follows: 1. When tested at positive and negative wind-load design pressures, systems do not evidence deflection exceeding specified limits. 2. When tested at 150 percent of positive and negative wind-load design pressures, systems, including anchorage, do not evidence material failures, structural distress, and permanent deformation of main framing members exceeding 0.2 percent of span. 3. Test Durations: As required by design wind velocity, but not fewer than 10 seconds. F. Air Infiltration: Provide aluminum-framed systems with maximum air leakage through fixed glazing and framing areas of 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. of fixed wall area when tested according to ASTM E 283 at a minimum static-air-pressure difference of 1.57 lbf/sq. ft. G. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: Provide aluminum-framed systems that do not evidence water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas when tested according to ASTM E 331 at a minimum static-air-pressure difference of 20 percent of positive wind-load design pressure, but not less than 6.24 lbf/sq. ft.. H. Water Penetration under Dynamic Pressure: Provide aluminum-framed systems that do not evidence water leakage through fixed glazing and framing areas when tested according to AAMA 501.1 under Denton Fire Station No. 8 ALUMINUM FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 084113-2 August 2019 dynamic pressure equal to 20 percent of positive wind-load design pressure, but not less than 6.24 lbf/sq. ft.. 1. Maximum Water Leakage: No uncontrolled water penetrating aluminum-framed systems or water appearing on systems' normally exposed interior surfaces from sources other than condensation. Water leakage does not include water controlled by flashing and gutters that is drained to exterior and water that cannot damage adjacent materials or finishes. I. Thermal Movements: Provide aluminum-framed systems that allow for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss. 1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces. 2. Test Performance: No buckling; stress on glass; sealant failure; excess stress on framing, anchors, and fasteners; or reduction of performance when tested according to AAMA 501.5. a. High Exterior Ambient-Air Temperature: That which produces an exterior metal-surface temperature of 180 deg F. b. Low Exterior Ambient-Air Temperature: 0 deg F. 3. Interior Ambient-Air Temperature: 75 deg F. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for aluminum-framed systems. B. Shop Drawings: For aluminum-framed systems. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. Include details of provisions for system expansion and contraction and for drainage of moisture in the system to the exterior. 2. For entrance doors, include hardware schedule and indicate operating hardware types, functions, quantities, and locations. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes. D. Other Action Submittals: 1. Entrance Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, detailing fabrication and assembly of entrance door hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams. Coordinate final entrance door hardware schedule with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of entrance door hardware. E. Delegated-Design Submittal: For aluminum-framed systems indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 1. Detail fabrication and assembly of aluminum-framed systems. 2. Include design calculations. F. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for aluminum-framed systems, indicating compliance with performance requirements. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation of units required for this Project. B. Engineering Responsibility: Prepare data for aluminum-framed systems, including Shop Drawings, based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard units in systems similar to those indicated for this Project. C. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for systems' aesthetic effects and performance characteristics. Aesthetic effects are indicated by dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies as they relate to sightlines, to one another, and to adjoining construction. Performance characteristics are indicated by criteria subject to verification by one or more methods including preconstruction testing, field testing, and in-service performance. 1. Do not revise intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architect's approval. If revisions are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for review. D. Source Limitations for Aluminum-Framed Systems: Obtain from single source from single manufacturer. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of structural supports for aluminum-framed systems by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace Denton Fire Station No. 8 ALUMINUM FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 084113-3 August 2019 components of aluminum-framed systems that do not comply with requirements or that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection. b. Noise or vibration caused by thermal movements. c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering. d. Water leakage through fixed glazing and framing areas. e. Failure of operating components. 2. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Special Finish Warranty: Standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finishes or replace aluminum that shows evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period. 1. Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following: a. Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244. b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214. c. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal. 2. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Kawneer Company, Inc. 2. YKK AP America Inc. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated. 1. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209. 2. Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B 221. 3. Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B 429. 4. Structural Profiles: ASTM B 308. 2.3 FRAMING SYSTEMS A. Framing Members: Manufacturer's standard extruded-aluminum framing members of thickness required and reinforced as required to support imposed loads. 1. Construction: Screw spline. 2. Glazing System: Retained mechanically with gaskets on four sides. 3. Glazing Plane: Center. 4. Framing and Backer Plate: Thermally broken. B. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard high-strength aluminum with non-staining, nonferrous shims for aligning system components. C. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, non-staining, non-bleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials. 1. Use self-locking devices where fasteners are subject to loosening or turning out from thermal and structural movements, wind loads, or vibration. 2. Reinforce members as required to receive fastener threads. 3. Use exposed fasteners with countersunk Phillips screw heads, fabricated from stainless steel. D. Concrete and Masonry Inserts: Hot-dip galvanized cast-iron, malleable-iron, or steel inserts, complying with ASTM A 123 or ASTM A 153. E. Concealed Flashing: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, non-staining, non-bleeding flashing compatible with adjacent materials. F. Framing System Gaskets and Sealants: Manufacturer's standard, recommended by manufacturer for joint type. 1. Provide sealants for use inside of the weatherproofing system that have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 2.4 GLAZING SYSTEMS A. Glazing: As specified in Division 08 Section Glazing. B. Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard compression types; replaceable, molded or extruded, of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal. C. Spacers and Setting Blocks: Manufacturer's standard elastomeric type. 2.5 ENTRANCE DOOR SYSTEMS A. Entrance Doors: Manufacturer's standard glazed entrance doors for manual-swing operation. Denton Fire Station No. 8 ALUMINUM FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 084113-4 August 2019 1. Door Construction: 1-3/4-inch overall thickness, with minimum 0.125-inch- thick, extruded- aluminum tubular rail and stile members. Mechanically fasten corners with reinforcing brackets that are deeply penetrated and fillet welded or that incorporate concealed tie rods. 2. Door Design: Wide stile; 5-inch nominal width, with 8 inch top rail and 10 inch bottom rail. 3. Glazing Stops and Gaskets: Beveled, snap-on, extruded-aluminum stops and preformed gaskets. B. Entrance Door Hardware: As specified in Division 08 Section Door Hardware. 2.6 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Joint Sealants: For installation at perimeter of aluminum-framed systems, as specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants." 1. Provide sealants for use inside of the weatherproofing system that have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). B. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied, asphalt-mastic paint complying with SSPC-Paint 12 requirements except containing no asbestos; formulated for 30-mil thickness per coat. C. Operable Windows: Zero sightline operable vents with stainless steel 4-bar hinges and cast bronze cam handles in same finish as frames. 1. Kawneer Company, Inc.; GLASSvent Outswing Casement 2.7 FABRICATION A. Form or extrude aluminum shapes before finishing. B. Framing Members, General: Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the following characteristics: 1. Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations. 2. Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered. 3. Means to drain water passing joints, condensation within framing members, and moisture migrating within the system to exterior. 4. Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members. 5. Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing to maintain required glazing edge clearances. 6. Provisions for field replacement of glazing from interior for vision glass and exterior for spandrel glazing or metal panels. 7. Fasteners, anchors, and connection devices that are concealed from view to greatest extent possible. C. Mechanically Glazed Framing Members: Fabricate for flush glazing without projecting stops. D. Storefront Framing: Fabricate components for assembly using screw-spline system. E. Entrance Door Frames: Reinforce as required to support loads imposed by door operation and for installing entrance door hardware. 1. At exterior doors, provide compression weather stripping at fixed stops. 2. At interior doors, provide silencers at stops to prevent metal-to-metal contact. Install three silencers on strike jamb of single-door frames and two silencers on head of frames for pairs of doors. F. Entrance Doors: Reinforce doors as required for installing entrance door hardware. 1. At pairs of exterior doors, provide sliding-type weather stripping retained in adjustable strip and mortised into door edge. 2. At exterior doors, provide weather sweeps applied to door bottoms. G. After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project according to Shop Drawings. 2.8 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. Standard Finish: 1. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A21, Class I, 0.018 mm or thicker. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Do not install damaged components. 3. Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion. 4. Rigidly secure non-movement joints. Denton Fire Station No. 8 ALUMINUM FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 084113-5 August 2019 5. Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and electrolytic deterioration. 6. Seal joints watertight unless otherwise indicated. B. Metal Protection: 1. Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with primer or applying sealant or tape, or by installing nonconductive spacers as recommended by manufacturer for this purpose. 2. Where aluminum will contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint. C. Install components to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring within framing members, and moisture migrating within the system to exterior. D. Set continuous sill members and flashing in full sealant bed as specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" to produce weathertight installation. E. Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades, and without warp or rack. F. Install glazing as specified in Division 08 Section "Glazing." G. Entrance Doors: Install doors to produce smooth operation and tight fit at contact points. 1. Exterior Doors: Install to produce weathertight enclosure and tight fit at weather stripping. 2. Field-Installed Entrance Door Hardware: Install surface-mounted entrance door hardware according to entrance door hardware manufacturers' written instructions using concealed fasteners to greatest extent possible. H. Install perimeter joint sealants as specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" to produce weathertight installation. 3.3 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Install aluminum-framed systems to comply with the following maximum erection tolerances: 1. Location and Plane: Limit variation from true location and plane to 1/8 inch in 12 feet; 1/4 inch over total length. 2. Alignment: a. Where surfaces abut in line, limit offset from true alignment to 1/16 inch. b. Where surfaces meet at corners, limit offset from true alignment to 1/32 inch. B. Diagonal Measurements: Limit difference between diagonal measurements to 1/8 inch. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Engage a AAMA accredited independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections. B. Testing Services: Testing and inspecting of representative areas to determine compliance of installed systems with specified requirements shall take place as follows and in successive phases as indicated on Drawings. Do not proceed with installation of the next area until test results for previously completed areas show compliance with requirements. 1. Water Spray Test: Before installation of interior finishes has begun, a minimum area of 100 square feet of aluminum framed systems designated by Architect shall be tested according to AAMA 501.2 and shall not evidence water penetration. C. Repair or remove work if test results and inspections indicate that it does not comply with specified requirements. D. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. E. Aluminum-framed assemblies will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. F. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.5 ADJUSTING A. Adjust operating entrance door hardware to function smoothly as recommended by manufacturer. END OF SECTION Denton Fire Station No. 8 TUBULAR DAYLIGHTING DEVICES Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 086223-1 August 2019 SECTION 086223 – TUBULAR DAYLIGHTING DEVICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Tubular daylighting devices and accessories. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Daylight Reflective Tubes: Spectralight Infinity with INFRAREDuction Technology combines with ultra-high Visible Light reflectance with Ultra-low Infrared (IR) reflectance. Patented spectrally-selective optical surface yields an average total- and specular-reflectance greater than 99.5% percent for the Visible Light spectrum (400 nm to 700 nm) providing maximized visible light transmission and less than 25% reflectance for Infrared (IR) heat wavelengths (750 nm to 2500 nm) for minimized heat transmission, resulting in a spectrally-selective Total Solar Spectrum (250 nm to 2500 nm) reflectance less than 37 percent, as measured using a Perkin Elmer Lambda 1050 spectrophotometer with a Universal Reflectance Accessory. Color: a* and b* (defined by CIE L*a*b* color model) shall not exceed plus 2 or be less than minus 2 as determined in accordance to ASTM E 308. B. SOLAMASTER 300 DS Daylighting System: (Suspended or Open Ceilings) 1. AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/IS2/A440, Class CW-PG70 size tested 14 inch (356 mm), Type TDDCC. a. Air Infiltration Test: Air infiltration will not exceed 0.30 cfm/sf aperture with a pressure delta of 1.57 psf across the tube when tested in accordance with ASTM E 283. b. Water Resistance Test: 1) Passes water resistance; no uncontrolled water leakage with a pressure differential of 10.7 psf (512 Pa) or 15 percent of the design load (whichever is greater) and a water spray rate of 5 gallons/hour/sf for 24 minutes when tested in accordance with ICC-ES AC-16, ASTM E 547 and ASTM E 331. c. Uniform Load Test: All units tested with a safety factor of (3) for positive pressure and (2) for negative pressure, acting normal to plane of roof in accordance with ASTM E 330. 1) No breakage, permanent damage to fasteners, hardware parts, or damage to make system inoperable or cause excessive permanent deflection of any section when tested at a Positive Load of 150 psf (7.18 kPa) or Negative Load of 60 psf (2.87 kPa) in accordance with ICC AC-16 Section A, or Negative Load of 70 psf (3.35 kPA) if tested per ICC AC-16 Section B. d. Hurricane Resistance: 1) Meets Florida Building Code TAS, 201, TAS, 202 and TAS 203 for Impact and non- impact components. 2) Meets ASTM E 1886 and ASTM E1996 for missile and cyclic pressure differential testing. e. Fire Testing: 1) When used with the Dome Edge Protection Band, all domes meet fire rating requirements as described in the International Building Code. 2) Self-Ignition Temperature - Greater than 650 degrees F per ASTM D 1929. 3) Smoke Density: Rating no greater than 450 per ASTM E 84 in way intended for use. Classification C. 4) Rate of Burn and/or Extent: Maximum Burning Rate: 2.5 inches/min (62 mm/min) Classification CC-2 per ASTM D 635. 5) Rate of Burn and/or Extent: Maximum Burn Extent: 1 inch (25 mm) Classification CC-1 per ASTM D 635. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 013300. B. Product Data: Manufacturer’s data sheets on each product to be used, including: 1. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 3. Data sheets showing roof dome assembly, flashing base, reflective tubes, diffuser assembly, and accessories. 4. Installation requirements. C. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings showing layout, profiles and product components, including rough opening and framing dimensions, anchorage, roof flashings and accessories. D. Electrical wiring diagrams and recommendations for power and control wiring. E. Verification Samples: As requested by Architect. F. Test Reports: Independent testing agency or evaluation service reports verifying compliance with specified Denton Fire Station No. 8 TUBULAR DAYLIGHTING DEVICES Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 086223-2 August 2019 performance requirements. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Engaged in manufacture of tubular daylighting devices for minimum 25 years. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver products in manufacturer’s original containers, dry, undamaged, seals and labels intact. B. Store products in manufacturer’s unopened packaging until ready for installation. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Daylighting Device: Manufacturer’s standard warranty for 10 years. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Solatube International, Inc., which is located at: Solatube International 2210 Oak Ridge Way; Vista, CA 92081-8341; Toll Free Tel: 888-765-2882; Tel: (760) 477-1120; Fax: (760) 597-4488; Email:sflanagan@solatube.com . Local commercial distributor and factory certified installer – NTX Building Products – Eric Clendenin – eric@ntxbuildingproducts.com B. Substitutions: Submit in accordance with Section 012500. C. Requests for substitutions will be considered provided a daylighting layout with photometric data is supplied to demonstrate light levels will meet original design intent. Light studies based on Sept 21 9am CIE clear sky. 2.2 TUBULAR DAYLIGHTING DEVICES A. Tubular Daylighting Devices General: Transparent roof-mounted skylight dome and self-flashing curb, reflective tube, and ceiling level diffuser assembly, transferring sunlight to interior spaces; complying with ICC AC-16. B. SolaMaster Series: Solatube Model 300 DS: 14 Inch (350 mm) Daylighting System: 1. Model: a. Solatube Model 300 DS-C Closed (Penetrating) Ceiling, AAMA Type TDDCC.. 2. Capture Zone: a. Roof Dome Assembly: Transparent, UV and impact resistant dome with flashing base supporting dome and top of tube. 1) Acrylic Dome Plus Shock Inner Dome Glazing: Type DAI, Inner Dome is 0.115 inch (2.9 mm) minimum thickness classified as CC1 material. High impact resistant injection molded acrylic required for high velocity wind zones. 2) Tube Ring: Attached to top of base section; 0.090 inch (2.3 mm) nominal thickness injection molded high impact acrylic; to prevent thermal bridging between base flashing and tubing and channel condensed moisture out of tubing. 3) Dome Seal: Polyethylene foam seal, black, 0.13 inch (3.2 mm) thick by 14.62 (371 mm) diameter, 2 PCF polyethylene foam. 4) LightTrackerReflector, made of aluminum sheet, thickness 0.015 inch (0.4 mm) with Spectralight Infinity. Positioned in the dome to capture low angle sunlight. b. Flashings: 1) Roof Flashing Base: a) One Piece: One piece, seamless, leak-proof flashing functioning as base support for dome and top of tube. Sheet steel, corrosion resistant conforming to ASTM A 653/A 653M or ASTM A 463/A 463M or ASTM A792/A 792M, 0.028 inch (0.7 mm) plus or minus .006 inch (.015 mm) thick. i. Base Style: Type FC, Curb Cap, with inside dimensions of 27 inches by 27 inches (685 mm by 685 mm) to cover curb as specified in Section 07 60 00 - Flashing and Sheet Metal. 2) Flashing Options: a) Curb Cap Insulation: Type CCI, nominal 1 inch thick thermal isolation pad to reduce thermal conduction between curb-cap and tubing and thermal convection between room air and curb-cap. Rated R-6 (OFxft2xhr/Btu) Denton Fire Station No. 8 TUBULAR DAYLIGHTING DEVICES Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 086223-3 August 2019 Insulation is Polyisocyanurate foam utilizing CFC, HCFC, & HFC free blowing agent. Type-1 Class-1 per ASTM C 1289; Passes UL 1715 (15- minute thermal barrier per IBC 2603.4); Attic ventilation may be required per IBC 1203.2(OFxft2xhr/Btu). For use with Type FC flashing. 3. Transfer Zone: a. Extension Tubes: Aluminum sheet, thickness 0.015 inch (0.4 mm). 1) Reflective Tubes: a) Reflective Extension Tubes: Type EXX, extension tubes with total length of run as indicated on the Drawings. b) Reflective angle adapter tube (standard top and bottom tubes), providing up to a 30-degree angle adjustment. c) Interior Finish: Spectralight Infinity with INFRAREDuction Technology combining ultra-high Visible Light reflectance with Ultra-low Infrared (IR) reflectance. 2) Tube Options: a) Spectralight Infinity SoftLight Extension Tube: Type ES, 24-inch (610 mm) Super-reflective extension tube with structured surface providing precise light spread for enhanced visual comfort. Replaces one standard 24-inch (610 mm) extension tube in the tube assembly. 3) Dome Seal: Polyethylene foam seal, black, 0.13 inch (3.2 mm) thick by 14.62 (371 mm) diameter, 2 PCF polyethylene foam. 4) LightTrackerReflector, made of aluminum sheet, thickness 0.015 inch (0.4 mm) with Spectralight Infinity. Positioned in the dome to capture low angle sunlight. 4. Delivery Zone: a. Ceiling Ring: Injection molded impact resistant acrylic. Nominal thickness is 0.110 inches (2.8 mm). b. Ceiling Ring Seal: Polyethylene foam seal, white, 0.25 inch (6.4 mm) wide by 0.19 inch (4.8 mm) high, 2 PCF polyethylene foam with low-tack pressure sensitive adhesive. Upper glazing: PET GAG plastic with EPDM low density sponge seal to minimize condensation and bug, dirt, and air infiltration per ASTM E283. The nominal thickness is 0.039 inches (0.99 mm). 1) Natural Effect Lens: Type LN. c. Diffuser Assemblies for Tubes Penetrating Ceilings: Ceiling mounted box transitioning from round tube to square ceiling assembly, supporting light transmitting surface at bottom termination of tube 23.8 inches by 23.8 inches (605 mm by 605 mm) square frame to fit standard suspended ceiling grids or hard ceilings. 1) Metal Transition Box: Type TM, Round to Square transition box comprised of Spectralight Infinity SoftLight material with structured finish on exposed reflective surface, .015in (0.4mm) thick. Color: a* and b* (defined by CIE L*a*b* color model) shall not exceed plus 2 or be less than minus 2 as determined in accordance to ASTM E 308. 2) Lens: Type L1 OptiView Fresnel lens design to maximize light output and diffusion with extruded aluminum frame and EPDM foam seal to minimize condensation and bug, dirt and air infiltration per ASTM E 283. Visible Light Transmission shall be greater than 90 percent at 0.022 inch (0.6 mm) thick. Classified as CC2. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners: Same material as metals being fastened, non-magnetic steel, non-corrosive metal of type recommended by manufacturer, or injection molded nylon. B. Suspension Wire: Steel, annealed, galvanized finish, size and type for application and ceiling system requirement. C. Sealant: Polyurethane or copolymer based elastomeric sealant as provided or recommended by manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared. B. Examine openings, substrates, structural support, anchorage, and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions. C. If substrate and rough opening preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. Denton Fire Station No. 8 TUBULAR DAYLIGHTING DEVICES Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 086223-4 August 2019 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation. B. Coordinate requirements for power supply, conduit and wiring. C. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s printed instructions. B. Installing team must be tubular daylighting device manufacturer-certified to ensure warrantied installation. C. Coordinate installation with substrates, air and vapor retarders, roof insulation, roofing membrane, and flashing to ensure that each element of the Work performs properly and that finished installation is weather tight. 1. Install flashing to produce weatherproof seal with curb and overlap with roofing system termination at top of curb. 2. Provide thermal isolation when components penetrate or disrupt building insulation. Pack fibrous insulation in rough opening to maintain continuity of thermal barriers. 3. Coordinate attachment and seal of perimeter air and vapor barrier material. D. Where metal surfaces of tubular unit skylights will contact incompatible metal or corrosive substrates, including preservative-treated wood, provide permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer. E. Align device free of warp or twist, maintain dimensional tolerances. F. After installation of first unit, field test to determine adequacy of installation. Conduct water test in presence of Owner, Architect, or Contractor, or their designated representative. Correct if needed before proceeding with installation of subsequent units. G. Inspect installation to verify secure and proper mounting. Test each fixture to verify operation, control functions, and performance. Correct deficiencies.. 3.4 CLEANING AND SEALING A. Clean exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions. Touch up damaged metal coatings and finishes. Remove excess sealants, glazing materials, dirt, and other substances. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products until completion of project. B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION Denton Fire Station No. 8 DOOR HARDWARE Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 087100-1 August 2019 SECTION 087100 – DOOR HARDWARE PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes commercial door hardware for the following: 1. Swinging doors. 2. Other doors to the extent indicated. B. Door hardware includes, but is not necessarily limited to, the following: 1. Mechanical door hardware. 2. Electromechanical door hardware. 3. Cylinders specified for doors in other sections. C. Related Sections: 1. Division 08 Section Door Hardware Schedule. 2. Division 08 Section Hollow Metal Doors and Frames. 3. Division 08 Section Plastic Laminate Faced Wood Doors. 4. Division 08 Section Aluminum -Framed Entrances and Storefronts. D. Codes and References: Comply with the version year adopted by the Authority Having Jurisdiction. 1. ANSI A117.1 - Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities. 2. FEMA 361 - Design and Construction Guidance for Community Safe Rooms. 3. ICC 500 - ICC/NSSA Standard for the Design and Construction of Storm Shelters. 4. ICC/IBC - International Building Code. 5. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. 6. NFPA 80 - Fire Doors and Windows. 7. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code. 8. NFPA 105 - Installation of Smoke Door Assemblies. 9. State Building Codes, Local Amendments. E. Standards: All hardware specified herein shall comply with the following industry standards: 1. ANSI/BHMA Certified Product Standards - A156 Series 2. UL10C – Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's product data sheets including installation details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, operational descriptions and finishes. B. Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, detailing fabrication and assembly of door hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams. Coordinate the final Door Hardware Schedule with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware. 1. Format: Comply with scheduling sequence and vertical format in DHI's "Sequence and Format for the Hardware Schedule." 2. Organization: Organize the Door Hardware Schedule into door hardware sets indicating complete designations of every item required for each door or opening. Organize door hardware sets in same order as in the Door Hardware Sets at the end of Part 3. Submittals that do not follow the same format and order as the Door Hardware Sets will be rejected and subject to resubmission. 3. Content: Include the following information: a. Type, style, function, size, label, hand, and finish of each door hardware item. b. Manufacturer of each item. c. Fastenings and other pertinent information. d. Location of door hardware set, cross-referenced to Drawings, both on floor plans and in door and frame schedule. e. Explanation of abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule. f. Mounting locations for door hardware. g. Door and frame sizes and materials. h. Warranty information for each product. 4. Submittal Sequence: Submit the final Door Hardware Schedule at earliest possible date, particularly where approval of the Door Hardware Schedule must precede fabrication of other work that is critical in the Project construction schedule. Include Product Data, Samples, Shop Drawings of other work affected by door hardware, and other information essential to the coordinated review of the Door Hardware Schedule. Denton Fire Station No. 8 DOOR HARDWARE Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 087100-2 August 2019 C. Shop Drawings: Details of electrified access control hardware indicating the following: 1. Wiring Diagrams: Upon receipt of approved schedules, submit detailed system wiring diagrams for power, signaling, monitoring, communication, and control of the access control system electrified hardware. Differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring. Include the following: a. Elevation diagram of each unique access controlled opening showing location and interconnection of major system components with respect to their placement in the respective door openings. b. Complete (risers, point-to-point) access control system block wiring diagrams. c. Wiring instructions for each electronic component scheduled herein. 2. Electrical Coordination: Coordinate with related sections the voltages and wiring details required at electrically controlled and operated hardware openings. D. Proof of Certification: Provide copy of manufacturer(s) official certification or accreditation document indicating proof of status as a qualified installer of Windstorm assemblies. E. Keying Schedule: After a keying meeting with the owner has taken place prepare a separate keying schedule detailing final instructions. Submit the keying schedule in electronic format. Include keying system explanation, door numbers, key set symbols, hardware set numbers and special instructions. Owner must approve submitted keying schedule prior to the ordering of permanent cylinders/cores. F. Informational Submittals: 1. Product Test Reports: Indicating compliance with cycle testing requirements, based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified independent testing agency. G. Operating and Maintenance Manuals: Provide manufacturers operating and maintenance manuals for each item comprising the complete door hardware installation in quantity as required in Division 01, Closeout Submittals. The manual is to include the name, address and contact information of the manufacturers providing the hardware and their nearest service representatives. The final copies delivered after completion of the installation test to include “as-built” modifications made during installation, checkout and acceptance. H. Warranties and Maintenance: Special warranties and maintenance agreements specified in this Section. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturers Qualifications: Engage qualified manufacturers with a minimum 5 years of documented experience in producing hardware and equipment similar to that indicated for this Project and that have a proven record of successful in-service performance. B. Installer Qualifications: A minimum 3 years documented experience installing both standard and electrified door hardware similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. C. Door Hardware Supplier Qualifications: Experienced commercial door hardware distributors with a minimum 5 years documented experience supplying both mechanical and electromechanical hardware installations comparable in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project. Supplier recognized as a factory direct distributor by the manufacturers of the primary materials with a warehousing facility in Project's vicinity. Supplier to have on staff a certified Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) available during the course of the Work to consult with Contractor, Architect, and Owner concerning both standard and electromechanical door hardware and keying. D. Windstorm Assembly Installer Qualifications: Installers are to be factory trained and certified prior to project bid, and are responsible for commissioning, servicing, and warranting the installed equipment specified for the project. A pre-installation site inspection of the frame and floor conditions shall be conducted by the factory trained installer prior to any Windstorm assembly hardware applied to the opening. E. Source Limitations: Obtain each type and variety of door hardware specified in this section from a single source unless otherwise indicated. 1. Electrified modifications or enhancements made to a source manufacturer's product line by a secondary or third party source will not be accepted. 2. Provide electromechanical door hardware from the same manufacturer as mechanical door hardware, unless otherwise indicated. F. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with NFPA 70, NFPA 80, NFPA 101 and ANSI A117.1 requirements and guidelines as directed in the model building code including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Electrified modifications or enhancements made to a source manufacturer's product line by a secondary or third party source will not be accepted. 2. Where indicated to comply with accessibility requirements, comply with Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), "Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG)," ANSI A117.1 as follows: a. Handles, Pulls, Latches, Locks, and other Operating Devices: Shape that is easy to grasp with one hand and does not require tight grasping, tight pinching, or twisting of the wrist. b. Door Closers: Comply with the following maximum opening-force requirements indicated: Denton Fire Station No. 8 DOOR HARDWARE Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 087100-3 August 2019 1. Interior Hinged Doors: 5 lbf applied perpendicular to door. 2. Fire Doors: Minimum opening force allowable by authorities having jurisdiction. c. Thresholds: Not more than 1/2 inch high. Bevel raised thresholds with a slope of not more than 1:2. 3. NFPA 101: Comply with the following for means of egress doors: a. Latches, Locks, and Exit Devices: Not more than 15 lbf to release the latch. Locks shall not require the use of a key, tool, or special knowledge for operation. b. Thresholds: Not more than 1/2 inch high. 4. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Provide door hardware for assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252 (neutral pressure at 40” above sill) or UL-10C. a. Test Pressure: Positive pressure labeling. G. Severe Storm Shelter Openings: Provide complete door systems for hurricane or tornado resistant storm shelters and other areas of refuge complying and tested according to FEMA 361, Design and Construction Guidance for Community Safe Rooms; and ICC 500, ICC/NSSA Standard for the Design and Construction of Storm Shelters. H. Each unit to bear third party permanent label demonstrating compliance with the referenced standards. I. Keying Conference: Conduct conference to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Meetings." Keying conference to incorporate the following criteria into the final keying schedule document: 1. Function of building, purpose of each area and degree of security required. 2. Plans for existing and future key system expansion. 3. Requirements for key control storage and software. 4. Installation of permanent keys, cylinder cores and software. 5. Address and requirements for delivery of keys. J. Pre-Submittal Conference: Conduct coordination conference in compliance with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Meetings" with attendance by representatives of Supplier(s), Installer(s), and Contractor(s) to review proper methods and the procedures for receiving, handling, and installing door hardware. 1. Prior to installation of door hardware, conduct a project specific training meeting to instruct the installing contractors' personnel on the proper installation and adjustment of their respective products. Product training to be attended by installers of door hardware (including electromechanical hardware) for aluminum, hollow metal and wood doors. Training will include the use of installation manuals, hardware schedules, templates and physical product samples as required. 2. Inspect and discuss electrical roughing-in, power supply connections, and other preparatory work performed by other trades. 3. Review sequence of operation narratives for each unique access controlled opening. 4. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials. 5. Review the required inspecting, testing, commissioning, and demonstration procedures K. At completion of installation, provide written documentation that components were applied to manufacturer's instructions and recommendations and according to approved schedule. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Inventory door hardware on receipt and provide secure lock-up and shelving for door hardware delivered to Project site. Do not store electronic access control hardware, software or accessories at Project site without prior authorization. B. Tag each item or package separately with identification related to the final Door Hardware Schedule, and include basic installation instructions with each item or package. C. Deliver, as applicable, permanent keys, cylinders, cores, access control credentials, software and related accessories directly to Owner via registered mail or overnight package service. Instructions for delivery to the Owner shall be established at the "Keying Conference". 1.6 COORDINATION A. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared for installing standard and electrified hardware. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing hardware to comply with indicated requirements. B. Door Hardware and Electrical Connections: Coordinate the layout and installation of scheduled electrified door hardware and related access control equipment with required connections to source power junction boxes, low voltage power supplies, detection and monitoring hardware, and fire and detection alarm systems. C. Door and Frame Preparation: Doors and corresponding frames are to be prepared, reinforced and pre-wired (if applicable) to receive the installation of the specified electrified, monitoring, signaling and access control system hardware without additional in-field modifications. Denton Fire Station No. 8 DOOR HARDWARE Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 087100-4 August 2019 1.7 WARRANTY A. General Warranty: Reference Division 01, General Requirements. Special warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Warranty Period: Written warranty, executed by manufacturer(s), agreeing to repair or replace components of standard and electrified door hardware that fails in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period after final acceptance by the Owner. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Structural failures including excessive deflection, cracking, or breakage. 2. Faulty operation of the hardware. 3. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering. 4. Electrical component defects and failures within the systems operation. C. Standard Warranty Period: One year from date of Substantial Completion, unless otherwise indicated. D. Special Warranty Periods: 1. Ten years for mortise locks and latches. 2. Twenty five years for manual surface door closer bodies. 3. Two years for electromechanical door hardware. 1.8 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and maintenance instructions as needed for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and replacement of door hardware. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 SCHEDULED DOOR HARDWARE A. General: Provide door hardware for each door to comply with requirements in Door Hardware Sets and each referenced section that products are to be supplied under. B. Designations: Requirements for quantity, item, size, finish or color, grade, function, and other distinctive qualities of each type of door hardware are indicated in the Door Hardware Sets at the end of Part 3. Products are identified by using door hardware designations, as follows: C. Named Manufacturer's Products: Product designation and manufacturer are listed for each door hardware type required for the purpose of establishing requirements. Manufacturers' names are abbreviated in the Door Hardware Schedule. D. Substitutions: Requests for substitution and product approval for inclusive mechanical and electromechanical door hardware in compliance with the specifications must be submitted in writing and in accordance with the procedures and time frames outlined in Division 01 Substitution Procedures. Approval of requests is at the discretion of the architect, owner, and their designated consultants. 2.2 HANGING DEVICES A. Hinges: ANSI/BHMA A156.1 certified butt hinges with number of hinge knuckles as specified in the Door Hardware Sets. 1. Quantity: Provide the following hinge quantity, unless otherwise indicated: a. Two Hinges: For doors with heights up to 60 inches. b. Three Hinges: For doors with heights 61 to 90 inches. c. Four Hinges: For doors with heights 91 to 120 inches. d. For doors with heights more than 120 inches, provide 4 hinges, plus 1 hinge for every 30 inches of door height greater than 120 inches. 2. Hinge Size: Provide the following, unless otherwise indicated, with hinge widths sized for door thickness and clearances required: a. Widths up to 3’-0”: 4-1/2” standard or heavy weight as specified. b. Sizes from 3’-1” to 4’-0”: 5” standard or heavy weight as specified. 3. Hinge Weight and Base Material: Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following: a. Exterior Doors: Heavy weight, non-ferrous, ball bearing or oil impregnated bearing hinges unless Hardware Sets indicate standard weight. b. Interior Doors: Standard weight, steel, ball bearing or oil impregnated bearing hinges unless Hardware Sets indicate heavy weight. c. Severe Storm Assemblies: At a minimum, provide heavy weight hinges with stainless steel screws used in accordance with and specified as part of a Severe Storm Shelter Opening meeting ICC 500 and FEMA 361. 4. Hinge Options: Comply with the following where indicated in the Hardware Sets or on Drawings: a. Non-removable Pins: Provide set screw in hinge barrel that, when tightened into a groove in Denton Fire Station No. 8 DOOR HARDWARE Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 087100-5 August 2019 hinge pin, prevents removal of pin while door is closed; for the all out-swinging lockable doors. 5. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. McKinney Products (MK). b. Hager Companies (HA). c. Bommer Industries (BO). B. Concealed Hinges: Hinges mortised into door and frame so that they are concealed when the door is closed. Hinges shall be adjustable three ways; vertically, horizontally and compression (in/out) capable of supporting doors up to 282 pounds with four hinges with a 180 degree swing. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. McKinney Products (MK). b. Soss Door hardware. c. Tectus by Simonswerk. C. Continuous Geared Hinges: ANSI/BHMA A156.26 Grade 1-600 certified continuous geared hinge with minimum 0.120-inch thick extruded 6060 T6 aluminum alloy hinge leaves and a minimum overall width of 4 inches. Hinges are non-handed, reversible and fabricated to template screw locations. Provide concealed flush mount (with or without inset), full surface, or half surface, in standard and heavy duty models, as specified in the Hardware Sets. Concealed continuous hinges to be U.L. listed for use on up to and including 90 minute rated door installations and U.L. listed for windstorm components where applicable. Factory trim hinges to suit door height and prepare for electrical cut-outs. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. McKinney Products (MK). b. Pemko Manufacturing (PE). 2.3 DOOR OPERATING TRIM A. Automatic, Self-Latching, and Manual Flush Bolts and Surface Bolts: ANSI/BHMA A156.3 and A156.16, Grade 1, certified automatic, self- latching, and manual flush bolts and surface bolts. Manual flush bolts to be furnished with top rod of sufficient length to allow bolt location approximately six feet from the floor. Furnish dust proof strikes for bottom bolts. Surface bolts to be minimum 8” in length and U.L. listed for labeled fire doors and U.L. listed for windstorm components where applicable. Provide related accessories (mounting brackets, strikes, coordinators, etc.) as required for appropriate installation and operation. Quantity: Provide the following hinge quantity, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Rockwood Manufacturing (RO). b. Trimco (TC). B. Door Push Plates and Pulls: ANS/BHMA A156.6 certified door pushes and pulls of type and design specified below or in the Hardware Sets. Coordinate and provide proper width and height as required where conflicting hardware dictates. 1. Push/Pull Plates: Minimum .050 inch thick, size as indicated in hardware sets, with square corners and beveled edges, secured with exposed screws unless otherwise indicated. 2. Door Pull and Push Bar Design: Size, shape, and material as indicated in the hardware sets. Minimum clearance of 2 1/2-inches from face of door unless otherwise indicated. 3. Offset Pull Design: Size, shape, and material as indicated in the hardware sets. Minimum clearance of 2 1/2-inches from face of door and offset of 90 degrees unless otherwise indicated. 4. Fasteners: Provide manufacturer's designated fastener type as indicated in Hardware Sets. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Rockwood Manufacturing (RO). b. Trimco (TC). 2.4 CYLINDERS AND KEYING A. General: Cylinder manufacturer to have minimum (10) years experience designing secured master key systems and have on record a published security keying system policy. B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of keyed cylinder and keys from the same source manufacturer as locksets and exit devices, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Corbin Russwin Hardware (RU). b Sargent Manufacturing (SA). c. Schlage (SC). C. Cylinders: Original manufacturer cylinders complying with the following: 1. Mortise Type: Threaded cylinders with rings and cams to suit hardware application. 2. Rim Type: Cylinders with back plate, flat-type vertical or horizontal tailpiece, and raised trim ring. 3. Bored-Lock Type: Cylinders with tailpieces to suit locks. 4. Mortise and rim cylinder collars to be solid and recessed to allow the cylinder face to be flush and be Denton Fire Station No. 8 DOOR HARDWARE Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 087100-6 August 2019 free spinning with matching finishes. 5. Keyway: Match Facility Standard. D. Permanent Cores: Manufacturer's standard; finish face to match lockset; complying with the following: 1. Interchangeable Cores: Core insert, removable by use of a special key; usable with other manufacturers' cylinders. E. Keying System: Each type of lock and cylinders to be factory keyed. Conduct specified “Keying Conference" to define and document keying system instructions and requirements. Furnish factory cut, nickel-silver large bow permanently inscribed with a visual key control number as directed by Owner. Incorporate decisions made in keying conference, and as follows: 1. Master Key System: Cylinders are operated by a change key and a master key. 2. Grand Master Key System: Cylinders are operated by a change key, a master key, and a grand master key. 3. Great-Grand Master Key System: Cylinders are operated by a change key, a master key, a grand master key, and a great-grand master key. 4. Existing System: Master key or grand master key locks to Owner's existing system. 5. Keyed Alike: Key all cylinders to same change key. F. Key Quantity: Provide the following minimum number of keys: 1. Top Master Key: One (1) 2. Change Keys per Cylinder: Two (2) 3. Master Keys (per Master Key Level/Group): Five (5) 4. Grand Master Keys (per Grand Master Key Group): Two (2) 5. Construction Keys (where required): Ten (10) 6. Construction Control Keys (where required): Two (2) 7. Permanent Control Keys (where required): Two (2). G. Construction Keying: Provide construction master keyed cylinders or temporary keyed construction cores where specified. Provide construction master keys in quantity as required by project Contractor. Replace construction cores with permanent cores. Furnish permanent cores for installation as directed under specified "Keying Conference". H. Key Registration List: Provide keying transcript list to Owner's representative in the proper format for importing into key control software. I. Key Control Cabinet: Provide a key control system including envelopes, labels, and tags with self-locking key clips, receipt forms, 3-way visible card index, temporary markers, permanent markers, and standard metal cabinet. Key control cabinet shall have expansion capacity of 150% of the number of locks required for the project. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Lund Equipment (LU). b. MMF Industries (MM) c. Telkee (TK). J. Key Control Software: Provide one network version of "Key Wizard" branded key management software package that includes one year of technical support and upgrades to software at no charge. Provide factory key system formatted for importing into “Key Wizard” software. 2.5 MECHANICAL LOCKS AND LATCHING DEVICES A. Mortise Locksets, Grade 1 (Heavy Duty): ANSI/BHMA A156.13, Series 1000, Operational Grade 1 certified. Locksets are to be manufactured with a corrosion resistant steel case and be field-reversible for handing without disassembly of the lock body. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Corbin Russwin Hardware (RU) – ML2000 Series. b. Sargent Manufacturing (SA) – 8200 Series. B. Multi-Point Locksets, Security: Three-point locking system device engineered for in-swinging door applications on windstorm safe shelter rooms. Extra heavy duty steel component construction securing the door to the frame at top, bottom and center latch positions. All three latching points are automatically activated when the device is locked. 1. Severe Storm Shelter Components: Multi-point locking system devices engineered for in-swinging and out-swinging door applications on tornado or hurricane resistant safe shelter rooms. The multi- point latching integrated device is approved for usage as part of a complete ICC 500 and FEMA 361 door, frame and hardware assembly. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Corbin Russwin Hardware (RU) - FE6600/FE6800 Series. b. Sargent Manufacturing (SA) – FM7100 Series. C. Cylindrical Locksets, Grade 1 (Extra-Heavy Duty): ANSI 156.2 Series 4000, Grade 1 certified. 1. Locksets able to withstand 3000 inch pounds of torque applied to the locked lever without gaining access. Denton Fire Station No. 8 DOOR HARDWARE Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 087100-7 August 2019 2. Locksets to fit a standard 2 1/8” bore without the use of through-bolts. 3. Lever handles to be made of solid material with no plastic fillers and latch bolt head to be one-piece stainless steel construction encased within the lock body. 4. Extended cycle test: Locks to have been cycle tested in ordinance with ANSI/BHMA A156.2 requirements to 34 million cycles. 5. Furnish with standard 2 3/4” backset, 1/2" throw latch bolt (3/4" at rated paired openings), and universal non-handed. 6. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Corbin Russwin Hardware (RU) – CL3100 Series. b. Sargent Manufacturing (SA) – 11 Line. c. Schlage (SC) – ND Series. D. Lock Trim Design: As specified in Hardware Sets. 2.6 LOCK AND LATCH STRIKES A. Strikes: Provide manufacturer's standard strike with strike box for each latch or lock bolt, with curved lip extended to protect frame, finished to match door hardware set, unless otherwise indicated, and as follows: 1. Flat-Lip Strikes: For locks with three-piece antifriction latch bolts, as recommended by manufacturer. 2. Extra-Long-Lip Strikes: For locks used on frames with applied wood casing trim. 3. Aluminum-Frame Strike Box: Provide manufacturer's special strike box fabricated for aluminum framing. 4. Double-lipped strikes: For locks at double acting doors. Furnish with retractable stop for rescue hardware applications. B. Standards: Comply with the following: 1. Strikes for Mortise Locks and Latches: BHMA A156.13. 2. Strikes for Bored Locks and Latches: BHMA A156.2. 3. Strikes for Auxiliary Deadlocks: BHMA A156.36. 4. Dustproof Strikes: BHMA A156.16. 2.7 ELECTROMAGNETIC LOCKING DEVICES A. Surface Electromagnetic Locks (Heavy Duty): Electromagnetic locks to be surface mounted type conforming to ANSI A156.23, Grade 1 with minimum holding force strength of 1,200 pounds. Locks to be capable of either 12 or 24 voltage and be UL listed for use on fire rated door assemblies. Electronics are to be fully sealed against tampering and allow exterior weatherproof applications. As indicated in Hardware Sets, provide specified mounting brackets and housings. Power supply to be by the same manufacturer as the lock with combined products having a lifetime replacement warranty. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Securitron (SU) – M62 Series. 2.8 ELECTRIC STRIKES A. Standard Electric Strikes: Heavy duty, cylindrical and mortise lock electric strikes conforming to ANSI/BHMA A156.31, Grade 1, UL listed for both Burglary Resistance and for use on fire rated door assemblies. Stainless steel construction with dual interlocking plunger design tested to exceed 3000 lbs. of static strength and 350 ft-lbs. of dynamic strength. Strikes tested for a minimum 1 million operating cycles. Provide strikes with 12 or 24 VDC capability and supplied standard as fail-secure unless otherwise specified. Option available for latch bolt and latch bolt strike monitoring indicating both the position of the latch bolt and locked condition of the strike. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Folger Adam EDC (FO). b. HES (HS). B. Provide electric strikes with in-line power controller and surge suppressor by the same manufacturer as the strike with the combined products having a five year warranty. 2.9 CONVENTIONAL EXIT DEVICES A. General Requirements: All exit devices specified herein shall meet or exceed the following criteria: 1. At doors not requiring a fire rating, provide devices complying with NFPA 101 and listed and labeled for "Panic Hardware" according to UL305. Provide proper fasteners as required by manufacturer including sex nuts and bolts at openings specified in the Hardware Sets. 2. Where exit devices are required on fire rated doors, provide devices complying with NFPA 80 and with UL labeling indicating "Fire Exit Hardware". Provide devices with the proper fasteners for installation as tested and listed by UL. Consult manufacturer’s catalog and template book for specific requirements. a. Fire Exit Removable Mullions: Provide keyed removable mullions for use with fire exit devices complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and Denton Fire Station No. 8 DOOR HARDWARE Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 087100-8 August 2019 inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire and panic protection, based on testing according to UL 305 and NFPA 252. Mullions to be used only with exit devices for which they have been tested. 3. Except on fire rated doors, provide exit devices with hex key dogging device to hold the push bar and latch in a retracted position. Provide optional keyed cylinder dogging on devices where specified in Hardware Sets. 4. Flush End Caps: Provide heavy weight impact resistant flush end caps made of architectural metal in the same finish as the devices as in the Hardware Sets. Plastic end caps will not be acceptable. 5. Lever Operating Trim: Where exit devices require lever trim, furnish manufacturer's heavy duty trim with cold forged escutcheons, beveled edges, and four threaded studs for thru-bolts. a. Lock Trim Design: As indicated in Hardware Sets, provide finishes and designs to match that of the specified locksets. Provided free-wheeling type trim where indicated. b. Where function of exit device requires a cylinder, provide an interchangeable core type keyed cylinder (Rim or Mortise) as specified in Hardware Sets. 6. Vertical Rod Exit Devices: Provide and install interior surface and concealed vertical rod exit devices as Less Bottom Rod (LBR) unless otherwise indicated. 7. Narrow Stile Applications: At doors constructed with narrow stiles, or as specified in Hardware Sets, provide devices designed for maximum 2” wide stiles. 8. Dummy Push Bar: Nonfunctioning push bar matching functional push bar. 9. Rail Sizing: Provide exit device rails factory sized for proper door width application. 10. Through Bolt Installation: For exit devices and trim as indicated in Door Hardware Sets. B. Conventional Push Rail Exit Devices (Heavy Duty): ANSI/BHMA A156.3, Grade 1 certified panic and fire exit hardware devices furnished in the functions specified in the Hardware Sets. Mounting rails to be formed from smooth stainless steel, brass or bronze architectural materials no less than 0.072" thick, with push rails a minimum of 0.062" thickness. Painted or aluminum metal rails are not acceptable. Exit device latch to be investment cast stainless steel, pull man type, with deadlock feature. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Corbin Russwin Hardware (RU) – ED4000 / ED5000 Series. b. Sargent Manufacturing (SA) – 80 Series. c. Detex (DE) – Advantex Series. 2.10 ELECTROMECHANICAL CONVENTIONAL EXIT DEVICES A. Electrified Conventional Push Rail Devices (Heavy Duty): Subject to same compliance standards and requirements as mechanical exit devices, electrified devices to be of type and design as specified below. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Corbin Russwin Hardware (RU) – ED4000 / ED5000 Series. b. Sargent Manufacturing (SA) – 80 Series. c. Detex (DE) – Advantex Series. B. Electrified Options: As indicated in hardware sets, provide electrified exit device options including: electric latch retraction, electric dogging, outside door trim control, exit alarm, delayed egress, latch bolt monitoring, lock/unlock status monitoring, touch bar monitoring and request-to-exit signaling. Unless otherwise indicated, provide electrified exit devices standard as fail secure. 2.11 DOOR CLOSERS A. All door closers specified herein shall meet or exceed the following criteria: 1. General: Door closers to be from one manufacturer, matching in design and style, with the same type door preparations and templates regardless of application or spring size. Closers to be non-handed with full sized covers including installation and adjusting information on inside of cover. 2. Standards: Closers to comply with UL-10C for Positive Pressure Fire Test and be U.L. listed for use of fire rated doors. 3. Cycle Testing: Provide closers which have surpassed 15 million cycles in a test witnessed and verified by UL. 4. Size of Units: Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for sizing of door closers depending on size of door, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use. Where closers are indicated for doors required being accessible to the physically handicapped, providing units complying with ANSI ICC/A117.1. 5. Closer Arms: Provide heavy duty, forged steel closer arms unless otherwise indicated in Hardware Sets. a. Where closers are indicated to have mechanical dead-stop, provide heavy duty arms and brackets with an integral positive stop. b. Where closers are indicated to have mechanical hold open, provide heavy duty units with an additional built-in mechanical holder assembly designed to hold open against normal wind and traffic conditions. Holder to be manually selectable to on-off position. Denton Fire Station No. 8 DOOR HARDWARE Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 087100-9 August 2019 c. Where closers are indicated to have a cushion-type stop, provide heavy duty arms and brackets with spring stop mechanism to cushion door when opened to maximum degree. d. Closers shall not be installed on exterior or corridor side of doors; where possible install closers on door for optimum aesthetics. Provide drop plates or other accessories as required for proper mounting. 6. Closer Accessories: Provide door closer accessories including custom templates, special mounting brackets, spacers and drop plates as required for proper installation. Provide through-bolt and security type fasteners as specified in the hardware sets. B. Door Closers, Surface Mounted (Large Body Cast Iron): ANSI/BHMA A156.4, Grade 1 surface mounted, heavy duty door closers with complete spring power adjustment, sizes 1 thru 6; and fully operational adjustable according to door size, frequency of use, and opening force. Closers to be rack and pinion type, one piece cast iron body construction, with adjustable backcheck and separate non-critical valves for closing sweep and latch speed control. Provide non-handed units standard. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Corbin Russwin Hardware (RU) - DC8000 Series. b. LCN Closers (LC) – 4040XP Series. c. Sargent Manufacturing (SA) – 281 Series. C. Door Closers, Surface Mounted (Commercial Duty): ANSI/BHMA 156.4, Grade 1 certified surface mounted, institutional grade door closers with complete spring power adjustment, sizes 1 thru 6; and fully operational adjustable according to door size, frequency of use, and opening force. Closers to be rack and pinion type, one piece cast iron or aluminum alloy body construction, with adjustable backcheck, closing sweep, and latch speed control valves. Provide non-handed units standard. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Corbin Russwin Hardware (RU) – DC6000 Series. b. Norton Door Controls (NO) – 8500 Series. c. Sargent Manufacturing (SA) – 1431 Series. D. Door Closers, Surface Mounted (Unitrol): Unitrol arms to have door stop mechanism to absorb dead stop shock on arm and top hinge. Hold-open arms to have a spring loaded mechanism in addition to shock absorber assembly. Arms to be provided with rigid steel main arm and secondary arm lengths proportional to the door width 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Corbin Russwin Hardware (RU) – Unitrol Series. b. Norton Door Controls (NO) – Unitrol Series. 2.12 ARCHITECTURAL TRIM A. Door Protective Trim 1. General: Door protective trim units to be of type and design as specified below or in the Hardware Sets. 2. Size: Fabricate protection plates (kick, armor, or mop) not more than 2" less than door width (LDW) on stop side of single doors and 1” LDW on stop side of pairs of doors, and not more than 1" less than door width on pull side. Coordinate and provide proper width and height as required where conflicting hardware dictates. Height to be as specified in the Hardware Sets. 3. Where plates are applied to fire rated doors with the top of the plate more than 16” above the bottom of the door, provide plates complying with NFPA 80. Consult manufacturer’s catalog and template book for specific requirements for size and applications. 4. Metal Protection Plates: ANSI/BHMA A156.6 certified metal protection plates (kick, armor, or mop), fabricated from the following: a. Stainless Steel: 300 grade, 050-inch thick, with countersunk screw holes (CSK). 5. Fasteners: Provide manufacturer’s designated fastener type as specified in the Hardware Sets. Provide countersunk screw holes. 6. Metal Door Edging: Door protection edging fabricated from a minimum .050-inch thick metal sheet, formed into an angle or "U" cap shapes, surface or mortised mounted onto edge of door. Provide appropriate leg overlap to account for protection plates as required. Height to be as specified in the Hardware Sets. 7. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Rockwood Manufacturing (RO). b. Trimco (TC). 2.13 DOOR STOPS AND HOLDERS A. General: Door stops and holders to be of type and design as specified below or in the Hardware Sets. B. Door Stops and Bumpers: ANSI/BHMA A156.16, Grade 1 certified door stops and wall bumpers. Provide wall bumpers, either convex or concave types with anchorage as indicated, unless floor or other types of door stops are specified in Hardware Sets. Do not mount floor stops where they will impede traffic. Where floor or wall bumpers are not appropriate, provide overhead type stops and holders. Denton Fire Station No. 8 DOOR HARDWARE Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 087100-10 August 2019 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Rockwood Manufacturing (RO). b. Trimco (TC). C. Overhead Door Stops and Holders: ANSI/BHMA A156.6, Grade 1 certified overhead stops and holders to be surface or concealed types as indicated in Hardware Sets. Track, slide, arm and jamb bracket to be constructed of extruded bronze and shock absorber spring of heavy tempered steel. Provide non-handed design with mounting brackets as required for proper operation and function. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Rockwood Manufacturing (RO). a. Rixson Door Controls (RF). b. Sargent Manufacturing (SA). 2.14 ARCHITECTURAL SEALS A. General: Thresholds, weather stripping, and gasket seals to be of type and design as specified below or in the Hardware Sets. Provide continuous weather strip gasketing on exterior doors and provide smoke, light, or sound gasketing on interior doors where indicated. At exterior applications provide non-corrosive fasteners and elsewhere where indicated. B. Smoke Labeled Gasketing: Assemblies complying with NFPA 105 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for smoke control ratings indicated, based on testing according to UL 1784. 1. Provide smoke labeled perimeter gasketing at all smoke labeled openings. C. Fire Labeled Gasketing: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to UL-10C. 1. Provide intumescent seals as indicated to meet UL10C Standard for Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies, and NPFA 252, Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. D. Sound-Rated Gasketing: Assemblies that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency, for sound ratings indicated. E. Replaceable Seal Strips: Provide only those units where resilient or flexible seal strips are easily replaceable and readily available from stocks maintained by manufacturer. F. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. National Guard Products (NG). 2. Pemko Manufacturing (PE). 3. Reese Enterprises, Inc. (RE). 2.15 FABRICATION A. Fasteners: Provide door hardware manufactured to comply with published templates generally prepared for machine, wood, and sheet metal screws. Provide screws according to manufacturers recognized installation standards for application intended. 2.16 FINISHES A. Standard: Designations used in the Hardware Sets and elsewhere indicate hardware finishes complying with ANSI/BHMA A156.18, including coordination with traditional U.S. finishes indicated by certain manufacturers for their products. B. Provide quality of finish, including thickness of plating or coating (if any), composition, hardness, and other qualities complying with manufacturer's standards, but in no case less than specified by referenced standards for the applicable units of hardware C. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine scheduled openings, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, labeled fire door assembly construction, wall and floor construction, and other conditions affecting performance. B. Notify architect of any discrepancies or conflicts between the door schedule, door types, drawings and scheduled hardware. Proceed only after such discrepancies or conflicts have been resolved in writing. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: Comply with ANSI/DHI A115 series. B. Wood Doors: Comply with ANSI/DHI A115 W series. Denton Fire Station No. 8 DOOR HARDWARE Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 087100-11 August 2019 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install each item of mechanical and electromechanical hardware and access control equipment to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and according to specifications. 1. Installers are to be trained and certified by the manufacturer on the proper installation and adjustment of fire, life safety, and security products including: hanging devices; locking devices; closing devices; and seals. B. Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights indicated in following applicable publications, unless specifically indicated or required to comply with governing regulations: 1. Standard Steel Doors and Frames: DHI's "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames." 2. Wood Doors: DHI WDHS.3, "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Wood Flush Doors." 3. Where indicated to comply with accessibility requirements, comply with ANSI A117.1 "Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities." 4. Provide blocking in drywall partitions where wall stops or other wall mounted hardware is located. C. Retrofitting: Install door hardware to comply with manufacturer's published templates and written instructions. Where cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation of surface protective trim units with finishing work specified in Division 9 Sections. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrates involved. D. Thresholds: Set thresholds for exterior and acoustical doors in full bed of sealant complying with requirements specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." E. Storage: Provide a secure lock up for hardware delivered to the project but not yet installed. Control the handling and installation of hardware items so that the completion of the work will not be delayed by hardware losses before and after installation. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field Inspection: Supplier will perform a final inspection of installed door hardware and state in report whether work complies with or deviates from requirements, including whether door hardware is properly installed, operating and adjusted. 3.5 ADJUSTING A. Initial Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements. 3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Protect all hardware stored on construction site in a covered and dry place. Protect exposed hardware installed on doors during the construction phase. Install any and all hardware at the latest possible time frame. B. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door hardware installation. C. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper finish. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure door hardware is without damage or deterioration at time of owner occupancy. 3.7 DEMONSTRATION A. Instruct Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain mechanical and electromechanical door hardware. 3.8 DOOR HARDWARE SETS A. The hardware sets represent the design intent and direction of the owner and architect. They are a guideline only and should not be considered a detailed hardware schedule. Discrepancies, conflicting hardware and missing items should be brought to the attention of the architect with corrections made prior to the bidding process. Omitted items not included in a hardware set should be scheduled with the appropriate additional hardware required for proper application and functionality. B. Manufacturer’s Abbreviations: 1. MK – McKinney 5. HS – HES 2. PE – Pemko 6. SU – Securitron 3. RU – Corbin Russwin 7. RF – Rixson 4. RO – Rockwood Manufacturing 8. OT – By Others Denton Fire Station No. 8 DOOR HARDWARE Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 087100-12 August 2019 HARDWARE SETS Set 1.0 Doors: 124B 1 Continuous Hinge (hollow metal door) CFM83SLI/SLF/HD1 as required PE 1 Exit Device (exit only) ED5200 N950ET 630 RU 1 Closer (surface, Unitrol) DC8210 A11 689 RU 1 Kick Plate K1050 10” x DW-2” 4BE CSK US32D RO 1 Threshold 2005AT PE 1 Rain Guard 346C PE 1 Door Sweep 315CN PE 1 Weatherstrip 332CS PE Set 2.0 Doors: 101A, 107A, 114A, 137C 1 Continuous Hinge (alum/glass door) CFM83SLI/SLF/HD1 as required PE 1 Exit Device (night latch) ED5200 N957 Less Trim 626 RU 1 Interchangeable Core 8500 AP 626 RU 1 SMART Pac Bridge Rectifier 2005M3 HS 1 Electric Strike 9500 630 HS 1 Door Pull RM3330-36 US32D RO 1 Closer (surface, Unitrol) DC8210 A11 689 RU 1 Threshold 2005AT PE 1 Perimeter Gaskets By Frame and Door Manufacturer OT 1 Door Sweep 315CN PE 1 ElectroLynx Harness QC-C3000P (elec. device to device controller) MK 1 Power Supply BPS-24-1 SU 1 Hardware by Security Card Reader, DPS OT Notes: 1. Provide 2006AT threshold at Door 114A. Set 3.0 Doors: 139A 1 Continuous Hinge (hollow metal door) CFM83SLI/SLF/HD1 as required PE 1 Mortise Lock (storeroom) ML2057 NSA C6 626 RU 1 Interchangeable Core 8500 AP 626 RU 1 SMART Pac Bridge Rectifier 2005M3 HS 1 Electric Strike 1600 630 HS 1 Closer (surface, Unitrol) DC8210 A11 689 RU 1 Armor Plate K1050 36” x DW-2” 4BE CSK US32D RO 1 Threshold 171A PE 1 Rain Guard 346C PE 1 Weatherstrip 332CS PE 1 Door Sweep with Drip 345APK TKSP8 x DW PE 1 Hardware by Security Card Reader, DPS, Power Supply OT Denton Fire Station No. 8 DOOR HARDWARE Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 087100-13 August 2019 Set 4.0 Doors: 124A, 143A 1 Continuous Hinge (hollow metal/wood door) CFM83SLI/SLF/HD1 as required PE 1 Pull Plate – 4” x 16” BF107 x 70C US32D RO 1 Push Plate – 6” x 16” 70E US32D RO 1 Closer (surface) DC8200/10 x arm to suit application 689 RU 1 Kick Plate K1050 10” x DW-2” 4BE CSK US32D RO 1 Wall Stop 409 as required US32D RO 3 Silencer – Metal Frame 608 RO Set 5.0 Doors: 105A, 137A 1 Continuous Hinge (hollow metal door) CFM83SLI/SLF/HD1 as required PE 1 Pull Plate – 4” x 16” BF107 x 70C US32D RO 1 Push Plate – 6” x 16” 70E US32D RO 1 Closer (surface) DC8200/10 x arm to suit application 689 RU 1 Threshold 2005AT PE 1 Armor Plate K1050 30” x DW-2” 4BE CSK US32D RO 1 Wall Stop 409 as required US32D RO 3 Silencer – Metal Frame 608 RO Set 6.0 Doors: 101B 3 Hinge TA2714 4-1/2” x 4-1/2” (NRP) US26D MK 1 Mortise Lock (storeroom) ML2057 NSA CT6R 626 RU 1 Interchangeable Core 8500 AP 626 RU 1 SMART Pac Bridge Rectifier 2005M3 HS 1 Electric Strike 9500 630 HS 1 Closer (surface) DC8200/10 x arm to suit application 689 RU 1 Kick Plate K1050 10” x DW-2” 4BE CSK US32D RO 1 Wall Stop 409 as required US32D RO 3 Silencer – Metal Frame 608 RO 1 Viewer 622 CRM RO 1 ElectroLynx Harness QC-C3000P (elec. device to device controller) MK 1 Power Supply BPS-24-1 SU 1 Hardware by Security Card Reader, DPS OT Notes: 1. Door normally closed and latched, ingress by valid credential, free egress at all times. Card reader, door position switch, wire and wiring by electrical and security, coordinate as required. Set 7.0 Doors: 142A 3 Hinge TA2714 4-1/2” x 4-1/2” (NRP) US26D MK 1 Cylindrical Lock (storeroom) CL3357 NZD C6 626 RU 1 Interchangeable Core 8500 AP 626 RU 1 Closer (surface) DC8200/10 x arm to suit application 689 RU Denton Fire Station No. 8 DOOR HARDWARE Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 087100-14 August 2019 1 Kick Plate K1050 10” x DW-2” 4BE CSK US32D RO 1 Wall Stop 409 as required US32D RO 3 Silencer – Metal Frame 608 RO Set 8.0 Doors: 120A 6 Hinge TA2714 4-1/2” x 4-1/2” (NRP) US26D MK 2 Flush Bolt 550/555 to suit application US26D RO 1 Dust Proof Strike 570 US26D RO 1 Cylindrical Lock (storeroom) CL3357 NZD C6 626 RU 1 Interchangeable Core 8500 AP 626 RU 2 Surface Overhead Stop 10-X36 652 RF 2 Kick Plate K1050 10” x DW-2” 4BE CSK US32D RO 2 Silencer – Metal Frame 608 RO Set 9.0 Doors: 115A 6 Hinge TA2714 4-1/2” x 4-1/2” (NRP) US26D MK 2 Flush Bolt 550/555 to suit application US26D RO 1 Dust Proof Strike 570 US26D RO 1 Cylindrical Lock (storeroom) CL3357 NZD C6 626 RU 1 Interchangeable Core 8500 AP 626 RU 1 SMART Pac Bridge Rectifier 2005M3 HS 1 Electric Strike 9500 630 HS 2 Surface Overhead Stop 10-X36 652 RF 2 Kick Plate K1050 10” x DW-2” 4BE CSK US32D RO 2 Silencer – Metal Frame 608 RO 1 ElectroLynx Harness QC-C3000P (elec. device to device controller) MK 1 Power Supply BPS-24-1 SU 1 Hardware by Security Card Reader, DPS OT Notes: 1. Door normally closed and latched, ingress by valid credential, free egress at all times. Card reader, door position switch, wire and wiring by electrical and security, coordinate as required. Set 10.0 Doors: 114B 3 Hinge TA2714 4-1/2” x 4-1/2” (NRP) US26D MK 1 Cylindrical Lock (classroom) CL3355 NZD 626 RU 1 Interchangeable Core 8500 AP 626 RU 1 Closer (surface) DC8200/10 x arm to suit application 689 RU 1 Kick Plate K1050 10” x DW-2” 4BE CSK US32D RO 1 Wall Stop 409 as required US32D RO 1 Gasketing (sound) S88BL x H&J PE Denton Fire Station No. 8 DOOR HARDWARE Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 087100-15 August 2019 Set 11.0 Doors: 119A 3 Hinge TA2714 4-1/2” x 4-1/2” (NRP) US26D MK 1 Cylindrical Lock (storeroom) CL3355 NZD C6 626 RU 1 Interchangeable Core 8500 AP 626 RU 1 Closer (surface) DC8200/10 x arm to suit application 689 RU 1 Armor Plate K1050 36” x DW-2” 4BE CSK US32D RO 1 Wall Stop 409 as required US32D RO 3 Silencer 608 RO Set 12.0 Doors: 116A 3 Hinge TA2714 4-1/2” x 4-1/2” (NRP) US26D MK 1 Cylindrical Lock (office) CL3351 NZD C6 626 RU 1 Interchangeable Core 8500 AP 626 RU 1 Wall Stop 409 as required US32D RO 3 Silencer – Metal Frame 608 RO Set 13.0 Doors: 117A, 126A, 128A, 130A, 132A, 134A, 136A 3 Hinge TA2714 4-1/2” x 4-1/2” (NRP) US26D MK 1 Cylindrical Lock (passage) CL3310 NZD 626 RU 1 Closer (surface, dead stop) DC8210 A4 689 RU 1 Kick Plate K1050 10” x DW-2” 4BE CSK US32D RO 1 Wall Stop 409 as required US32D RO 1 Gasketing (smoke/odor/light/sound) S88BL x H&J PE Set 14.0 Doors: 102A, 118A, 121A, 123A 3 Hinge TA2714 4-1/2” x 4-1/2” (NRP) US26D MK 1 Cylindrical Lock (privacy) CL3320 NZD 626 RU 1 Closer (surface) DC8200/10 x arm to suit application 689 RU 1 Wall Stop 409 as required US32D RO 1 Gasketing (smoke/odor/light/sound) S88BL x H&J PE Set 15.0 Doors: 111A, 112A, 113A 3 Hinge TA2714 4-1/2” x 4-1/2” (NRP) US26D MK 1 Mortise Lock (storeroom) ML2057 NSA C6 626 RU 1 Interchangeable Core 8500 AP 626 RU 1 Wall Stop 409 as required US32D RO 3 Silencer – Metal Frame 608 RO Denton Fire Station No. 8 DOOR HARDWARE Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 087100-16 August 2019 Set 16.0 Doors: 109A 3 Hinge TA2714 4-1/2” x 4-1/2” (NRP) US26D MK 1 Cylindrical Lock (passage) CL3310 NZD 626 RU 1 Closer (surface) DC8200/10 x arm to suit application 689 RU 1 Kick Plate K1050 10” x DW-2” 4BE CSK US32D RO 1 Wall Stop 409 as required US32D RO 1 Gasketing (sound) S88BL x H&J PE Set 17.0 Doors: 105B, 137B 1 Continuous Hinge (hollow metal door) CFM83SLI/SLF/HD1 as required PE 1 Exit Device (rim, passage) ED5200A N910 630 RU 1 Closer (surface, Unitrol) DC8210 A11 689 RU 1 Armor Plate K1050 30” x DW-2” 4BE CSK US32D RO 1 Mop Plate K1050 10” x DW-2” 4BE CSK US32D RO 1 Threshold 2005AT PE 1 Door Sweep 315CN PE 1 Gasketing (smoke/odor/light/sound) S88BL x H&J PE Set 18.0 Doors: 122A 4 Hinge SP3786 5” x 4-1/2” US26D MK 1 Multi-Point Lock FE6618 NSA CT6G 630 RU 1 Interchangeable Core 8000- 626 RU 1 Closer (surface) DC8210 A3 689 RU 1 Gasketing (smoke/sound/light/odor) S88BL x H&J PE Notes: 1. FEMA Storm Assembly. All hardware to be coordinated with assembly manufacturer as required. Set 19.0 Doors: 138A, 138B 1 Four-Fold Panel Door Hardware by Door Manufacturer OT Set 20.0 Doors: 138C, 138D 1 Sectional Overhead Door Hardware by Door Manufacturer OT Set 21.0 Doors: 138E 1 Upcoiling Security Grille Hardware by Door Manufacturer OT Denton Fire Station No. 8 DOOR HARDWARE Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 087100-17 August 2019 DEDUCT ALTERNATE NO. 1 Set A-1.0 Steel Ornamental Swing Gate: 1 Magnetic Lock M62FG-SASM SU 1 Card Reader Provided by Security OT 1 Annunciator PZ1 RU 1 Electromechanical Bar WEMB-BK SU 1 Timer XDT SU 1 Power Supply BPS-24-1 SU 1 Bracket FMK as required SU 1 Hardware Provided by Security OT Notes: 1. Gate normally closed and latched; ingress and egress by valid credentials. Egress without valid credentials activates delayed egress, setting in motion an irreversible 15 second delay. Magnetic lock interfaced with building alarm system. Egress by valid credentials bypasses delayed egress. Card reader, door position switch, wire and wiring by electrical and security, coordinate as required. Balance of hardware by ate manufacturer. END OF SECTION Denton Fire Station No. 8 GLAZING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 088000-1 August 2019 SECTION 088000 – GLAZING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes glazing for the following products and applications, including those specified in other Sections where glazing requirements are specified by reference to this Section: 1. Windows. 2. Doors. 3. Storefront framing. 4. Interior and exterior borrowed lites. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Glass Manufacturers: Firms that produce primary glass, fabricated glass, or both, as defined in referenced glazing publications. B. Glass Thicknesses: Indicated by thickness designations in millimeters according to ASTM C 1036. C. Interspace: Space between lites of an insulating-glass unit. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Installed glazing systems shall withstand normal thermal movement and wind and impact loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, or installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in construction. B. Delegated Design: Design glass, including comprehensive engineering analysis according to ASTM E 1300 by a qualified professional engineer, using the following design criteria: 1. Design Wind Pressures: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Design Wind Pressures: Determine design wind pressures applicable to Project according to ASCE/SEI 7, based on heights above grade indicated on Drawings. a. Basic Wind Speed: 90 mph. 3. Vertical Glazing: For glass surfaces sloped 15 degrees or less from vertical, design glass to resist design wind pressure based on glass type factors for short-duration load. 4. Differential Shading: Design glass to resist thermal stresses induced by differential shading within individual glass lites. C. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes acting on glass framing members and glazing components. 1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces. 1.5 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING A. Preconstruction Adhesion and Compatibility Testing: Test each glazing material type, tape sealant, gasket, glazing accessory, and glass-framing member for adhesion to and compatibility with elastomeric glazing sealants. 1. Testing will not be required if data are submitted based on previous testing of current sealant products and glazing materials matching those submitted. 2. Use ASTM C 1087 to determine whether priming and other specific joint-preparation techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of glazing sealants to glass, tape sealants, gaskets, and glazing channel substrates. 3. Test no fewer than [eight] [Insert number] Samples of each type of material, including joint substrates, shims, sealant backings, secondary seals, and miscellaneous materials. 4. Schedule sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work. 5. For materials failing tests, submit sealant manufacturer's written instructions for corrective measures including the use of specially formulated primers. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each glass product and glazing material indicated. B. Glass Samples: For each type of glass product other than clear monolithic vision glass; 12 inches square. C. Glazing Schedule: List glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and location. Use same Denton Fire Station No. 8 GLAZING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 088000-2 August 2019 designations indicated on Drawings. D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For glass indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. E. Product Certificates: For glass and glazing products, from manufacturer. F. Preconstruction adhesion and compatibility test report. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications for Insulating-Glass Units with Sputter-Coated, Low-E Coatings: A qualified insulating-glass manufacturer who is approved and certified by coated-glass manufacturer. B. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs glass installers for this Project who are certified under the National Glass Association's Certified Glass Installer Program. C. Glass Testing Agency Qualifications: A qualified independent testing agency accredited according to the NFRC CAP 1 Certification Agency Program. D. Sealant Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing indicated. E. Source Limitations for Glass: Obtain insulating glass from single source from single manufacturer for each glass type. F. Source Limitations for Glazing Accessories: Obtain from single source from single manufacturer for each product and installation method. G. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers and organizations below, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards. 1. GANA Publications: GANA's "Laminated Glazing Reference Manual" and GANA's "Glazing Manual." 2. IGMA Publication for Insulating Glass: SIGMA TM-3000, "North American Glazing Guidelines for Sealed Insulating Glass Units for Commercial and Residential Use." H. Safety Glazing Labeling: Where safety glazing labeling is indicated, permanently mark glazing with certification label of the SGCC or another certification agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Label shall indicate manufacturer's name, type of glass, thickness, and safety glazing standard with which glass complies. I. Insulating-Glass Certification Program: Permanently marked either on spacers or on at least one component lite of units with appropriate certification label of IGCC. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer's written instructions. Prevent damage to glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes. B. Comply with insulating-glass manufacturer's written recommendations for venting and sealing units to avoid hermetic seal ruptures due to altitude change. 1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing material manufacturers and when glazing channel substrates are wet from rain, frost, condensation, or other causes. 1. Do not install glazing sealants when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by sealant manufacturer or below 40 deg F. 1.10 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Coated-Glass Products: Manufacturer's standard form in which coated-glass manufacturer agrees to replace coated-glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of coated glass is defined as defects developed from normal use that are not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning coated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include peeling, cracking, and other indications of deterioration in coating. 1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Insulating Glass: Manufacturer's standard form in which insulating- glass manufacturer agrees to replace insulating-glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of insulating glass is defined as failure of hermetic seal under normal use that is not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning insulating glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Evidence of failure is the obstruction of vision by dust, moisture, or film on interior surfaces of glass. 1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. Denton Fire Station No. 8 GLAZING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 088000-3 August 2019 PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 GLASS PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. Thickness: Where glass thickness is indicated, it is a minimum. Provide glass lites in thicknesses as needed to comply with requirements indicated. 1. Minimum Glass Thickness for Exterior Lites: Not less than 6.0 mm. 2. Thickness of Tinted Glass: Provide same thickness for each tint color indicated throughout Project. B. Strength: Where float glass is indicated, provide annealed float glass, Kind HS heat-treated float glass, or Kind FT heat-treated float glass as needed to comply with "Performance Requirements" Article. Where heat-strengthened glass is indicated, provide Kind HS heat-treated float glass or Kind FT heat-treated float glass as needed to comply with "Performance Requirements" Article. Where fully tempered glass is indicated, provide Kind FT heat-treated float glass. C. Thermal and Optical Performance Properties: Provide glass with performance properties specified, as indicated in manufacturer's published test data, based on procedures indicated below: 1. For monolithic-glass lites, properties are based on units with lites 6.0 mm thick. 2. For insulating-glass units, properties are based on units of thickness indicated for overall unit and for each lite. 3. U-Factors: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 100 and based on LBL's WINDOW 5.2 computer program, expressed as Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F. 4. Solar Heat-Gain Coefficient and Visible Transmittance: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 200 and based on LBL's WINDOW 5.2 computer program. 5. Visible Reflectance: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 300. 2.2 GLASS PRODUCTS A. Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Quality-Q3, Class I (clear) unless otherwise indicated. B. Heat-Treated Float Glass: ASTM C 1048; Type I; Quality-Q3; Class I (clear) unless otherwise indicated; of kind and condition indicated. 1. Fabrication Process: By horizontal (roller-hearth) process with roll-wave distortion parallel to bottom edge of glass as installed unless otherwise indicated. 2. For uncoated glass, comply with requirements for Condition A. 3. For coated vision glass, comply with requirements for Condition C (other coated glass). 2.3 INSULATING GLASS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Guardian Industries Corp. (Basis of Design) 2. Oldcastle. 3. Viracon. 4. Vitro Architectural Glass (formerly PPG Glass). B. Insulating-Glass Units: Factory-assembled units consisting of sealed lites of glass separated by a dehydrated interspace, qualified according to ASTM E 2190, and complying with other requirements specified. 1. Sealing System: Dual seal, with manufacturer's standard primary and secondary. 2. Spacer: Manufacturer's standard spacer material and construction. 3. Desiccant: Molecular sieve or silica gel, or blend of both. C. Glass: Comply with applicable requirements in "Glass Products" Article as indicated by designations in "Insulating-Glass Types" Article. 2.4 FIRE-PROTECTION-RATED GLAZING A. Fire-Protection-Rated Glazing, General: Listed and labeled by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252 for door assemblies. B. Monolithic Ceramic Glazing: Clear, ceramic float glass. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Safti First; SuperLite . I-XL IGU b. Technical Glass Products; FireLite IGU (Basis of Design) c. Comparable produts by Vetrotech Saint-Gobain and Nippon Electric Glass. 2.5 GLAZING GASKETS A. Dense Compression Gaskets: Molded or extruded gaskets of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal, made from one of the following: Denton Fire Station No. 8 GLAZING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 088000-4 August 2019 1. Neoprene complying with ASTM C 864. 2. EPDM complying with ASTM C 864. 3. Silicone complying with ASTM C 1115. 4. Thermoplastic polyolefin rubber complying with ASTM C 1115. 2.6 GLAZING SEALANTS A. General: 1. Compatibility: Provide glazing sealants that are compatible with one another and with other materials they will contact, including glass products, seals of insulating-glass units, and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience. 2. Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions for selecting glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions existing at time of installation. 3. VOC Content: For sealants used inside of the weatherproofing system, not more than 250 g/L when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D. 4. Colors of Exposed Glazing Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. B. Glazing Sealant: Neutral-curing silicone glazing sealant complying with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 100/50, Use NT. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Dow Corning Corporation; 790. b. GE Advanced Materials - Silicones; SilPruf LM SCS2700. c. Pecora Corporation; 890. d. Tremco Incorporated; Spectrem 1. C. Glazing Sealant: Neutral-curing silicone glazing sealant complying with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 50, Use NT. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Dow Corning Corporation; 795. b. GE Advanced Materials - Silicones; SilGlaze II SCS2800. c. Pecora Corporation; 864. d. Tremco Incorporated; Spectrem 2. D. Glazing Sealants for Fire-Rated Glazing Products: Products that are approved by testing agencies that listed and labeled fire-resistant glazing products with which they are used for applications and fire- protection ratings indicated. 2.7 GLAZING TAPES A. Back-Bedding Mastic Glazing Tapes: Preformed, butyl-based, 100 percent solids elastomeric tape; non- staining and non-migrating in contact with nonporous surfaces; with or without spacer rod as recommended in writing by tape and glass manufacturers for application indicated; and complying with ASTM C 1281 and AAMA 800 for products indicated below: 1. AAMA 804.3 tape, where indicated. 2. AAMA 806.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is subject to continuous pressure. 3. AAMA 807.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is not subject to continuous pressure. 2.8 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing standard, requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for application indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation. B. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer. C. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, plus or minus 5. D. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions of hardness required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated. E. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side walking). F. Cylindrical Glazing Sealant Backing: ASTM C 1330, Type O (open-cell material), of size and density to control glazing sealant depth and otherwise produce optimum glazing sealant performance. G. Perimeter Insulation for Fire-Resistive Glazing: Product that is approved by testing agency that listed and labeled fire-resistant glazing product with which it is used for application and fire-protection rating indicated. 2.9 FABRICATION OF GLAZING UNITS A. Fabricate glazing units in sizes required to fit openings indicated for Project, with edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of product manufacturer and referenced glazing publications, to comply with system performance requirements. Denton Fire Station No. 8 GLAZING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 088000-5 August 2019 B. Clean-cut or flat-grind vertical edges of butt-glazed monolithic lites to produce square edges with slight chamfers at junctions of edges and faces. C. Grind smooth and polish exposed glass edges and corners. 2.10 MONOLITHIC-GLASS TYPES A. Clear float glass fully tempered float glass. 1. Thickness: 6.0 mm. 2. Provide safety glazing labeling. 3. Provide one way vision film on window between Lobby and Watch Room using LLumar RN076G SR PS or approved equal. 2.11 INSULATING-GLASS TYPES A. Low-e-coated, clear insulating glass. 1. Overall Unit Thickness: 1 inch. a. Overall Unit Thickness at exterior HMF transoms and side lites: 5/8 inch. 2. Thickness of Each Glass Lite: 6.0 mm. 3. Outdoor Lite: Float glass (heat-strengthened where recommended by manufacturer or fully tempered where required by code). 4. Interspace Content: Air. 5. Indoor Lite: Float glass (heat-strengthened where recommended by manufacturer or fully tempered where required by code). 6. Appearance: Clear 7. Low-E Coating: Sputtered on second surface. 8. Visible Light Transmittance: 54 percent minimum. 9. Ultraviolet Transmittance: 16 percent minimum. 10. Solar Energy Transmittance: 24 percent minimum. 11. Winter Nighttime U-Factor: 0.29 maximum. 12. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: 0.28 maximum. 13. Provide safety glazing labeling. 14. Acceptable product: Guardian SuperNeutral 54(#2). 2.12 FIRE-PROTECTION-RATED GLAZING TYPES A. Clear float monolithic ceramic glazing units: 1. Overall unit thickness: 1 inch. 2. Fire Rating: 60 minutes. 3. Surface Grade: Standard. 4. Acceptable product: FireLite IGU PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine framing, glazing channels, and stops, with Installer present, for compliance with the following: 1. Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, square-ness, and offsets at corners. 2. Presence and functioning of weep systems. 3. Minimum required face and edge clearances. 4. Effective sealing between joints of glass-framing members. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing. Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates. B. Examine glazing units to locate exterior and interior surfaces. Label or mark units as needed so that exterior and interior surfaces are readily identifiable. Do not use materials that will leave visible marks in the completed work. 3.3 GLAZING, GENERAL A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications. B. Adjust glazing channel dimensions as required by Project conditions during installation to provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with Denton Fire Station No. 8 GLAZING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 088000-6 August 2019 reasonable tolerances. C. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass is glass with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and impair performance and appearance. D. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by preconstruction testing. E. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead. F. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites. G. Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches. 1. Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of glass. Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, unless gaskets and glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face clearances and to comply with system performance requirements. 2. Provide 1/8-inch minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of tape. H. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to requirements in referenced glazing publications. I. Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics. J. Set glass lites with proper orientation so that coatings face exterior or interior as specified. K. Where wedge-shaped gaskets are driven into one side of channel to pressurize sealant or gasket on opposite side, provide adequate anchorage so gasket cannot walk out when installation is subjected to movement. L. Square cut wedge-shaped gaskets at corners and install gaskets in a manner recommended by gasket manufacturer to prevent corners from pulling away; seal corner joints and butt joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer. 3.4 TAPE GLAZING A. Position tapes on fixed stops so that, when compressed by glass, their exposed edges are flush with or protrude slightly above sightline of stops. B. Install tapes continuously, but not necessarily in one continuous length. Do not stretch tapes to make them fit opening. C. Cover vertical framing joints by applying tapes to heads and sills first and then to jambs. Cover horizontal framing joints by applying tapes to jambs and then to heads and sills. D. Place joints in tapes at corners of opening with adjoining lengths butted together, not lapped. Seal joints in tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer. E. Do not remove release paper from tape until right before each glazing unit is installed. F. Apply heel bead of elastomeric sealant. G. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against tape by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings. H. Apply cap bead of elastomeric sealant over exposed edge of tape. 3.5 GASKET GLAZING (DRY) A. Cut compression gaskets to lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit openings exactly, with allowance for stretch during installation. B. Insert soft compression gasket between glass and frame or fixed stop so it is securely in place with joints miter cut and bonded together at corners. C. Installation with Drive-in Wedge Gaskets: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against soft compression gasket by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer. D. Installation with Pressure-Glazing Stops: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against soft compression gasket. Install dense compression gaskets and pressure-glazing stops, applying pressure uniformly to compression gaskets. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer. E. Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops. Denton Fire Station No. 8 GLAZING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 088000-7 August 2019 3.6 SEALANT GLAZING (WET) A. Install continuous spacers, or spacers combined with cylindrical sealant backing, between glass lites and glazing stops to maintain glass face clearances and to prevent sealant from extruding into glass channel and blocking weep systems until sealants cure. Secure spacers or spacers and backings in place and in position to control depth of installed sealant relative to edge clearance for optimum sealant performance. B. Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete wetting or bond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces. C. Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial wash away from glass. 3.7 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Protect exterior glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching crossed streamers to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. Remove nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces. B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove substances immediately as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer. C. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for buildup of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, or stains; remove as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer. D. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, or abraded or that is damaged from natural causes, accidents, and vandalism, during construction period. E. Wash glass on both exposed surfaces in each area of Project not more than four days before date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer. END OF SECTION Denton Fire Station No. 8 MIRRORS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 088300-1 August 2019 SECTION 088300 – MIRRORS PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes the following types of silvered flat glass mirrors: 1. Annealed monolithic glass mirrors. 2. Glass mirrors qualifying as safety glazing. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Mirrors: Include description of materials and process used to produce each type of silvered flat glass mirror specified that indicates sources of glass, glass coating components, edge sealer, and quality control provisions. B. Shop Drawings: Include mirror elevations, edge details, mirror hardware, and attachment details. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Certificates: For each type of mirror and mirror mastic. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For mirrors to include in maintenance manuals. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs glass installers for this Project who are certified under the National Glass Association's Certified Glass Installer Program. 1.7 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING A. Preconstruction Mirror Mastic Compatibility Test: Submit mirror mastic products to mirror manufacturer for testing to determine compatibility of mastic with mirror backing. 1. Testing is not required if data are submitted based on previous testing of mirror mastic products and mirror backing matching those submitted. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect mirrors according to mirror manufacturer's written instructions and as needed to prevent damage to mirrors from moisture, condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes. B. Comply with mirror manufacturer's written instructions for shipping, storing, and handling mirrors as needed to prevent deterioration of silvering, damage to edges, and abrasion of glass surfaces and applied coatings. Store indoors. 1.9 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install mirrors until ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at levels indicated for final occupancy. 1.10 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to replace mirrors that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of mirrors is defined as defects developed from normal use that are not attributed to mirror breakage or to maintaining and cleaning mirrors contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include discoloration, black spots, and clouding of the silver film. 1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Avalon Glass and Mirror Company. 2. Binswanger Glass. 3. Guardian Industries Corp. 4. Virginia Mirror Company, Inc. B. Source Limitations for Mirrors: Obtain mirrors from single source from single manufacturer. Denton Fire Station No. 8 MIRRORS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 088300-2 August 2019 C. Source Limitations for Mirror Accessories: Obtain mirror glazing accessories from single source. 2.2 SILVERED FLAT GLASS MIRRORS A. Mirrors, General: ASTM C 1503; manufactured using copper-free, low-lead mirror coating process. B. Annealed Monolithic Glass Mirrors: Mirror Select Quality, 1. Nominal Thickness: 6.0 mm. 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Mirror Mastic: An adhesive setting compound, asbestos-free, produced specifically for setting mirrors and certified by both mirror and mastic manufacturer as compatible with glass coating and substrates on which mirrors will be installed. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Franklin International. b. Laurence, C. R. Co., Inc. c. Liquid Nails Adhesive. d. Palmer Products Corporation. e. Royal Adhesives & Sealants, LLC. 2.4 MIRROR HARDWARE A. Provide continuous mirror top and bottom channels. B. Fasteners: Fabricated of same basic metal and alloy as fastened metal and matching it in finished color and texture where fasteners are exposed. C. Anchors and Inserts: Provide devices as required for mirror hardware installation. Provide toothed or lead- shield, expansion-bolt devices for drilled-in-place anchors. Provide galvanized anchors and inserts for applications on inside face of exterior walls and where indicated. 2.5 FABRICATION A. Fabricate mirrors in the shop to greatest extent possible. B. Fabricate cutouts for notches and holes in mirrors without marring visible surfaces. Locate and size cutouts so they fit closely around penetrations in mirrors. C. Mirror Edge Treatment: 1. Seal edges of mirrors with edge sealer after edge treatment to prevent chemical or atmospheric penetration of glass coating. 2. Require mirror manufacturer to perform edge treatment and sealing in factory immediately after cutting to final sizes. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, over which mirrors are to be mounted, with Installer present, for compliance with installation tolerances, substrate preparation, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility of existing finishes or primers with mirror mastic. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces are dry. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Comply with mastic manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparation of substrates, including coating substrates with mastic manufacturer's special bond coating where applicable. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install mirrors to comply with mirror manufacturer's written instructions and with referenced GANA publications. Mount mirrors accurately in place in a manner that avoids distorting reflected images. 1. GANA Publications: "Laminated Glazing Reference Manual," "Glazing Manual" and "Mirrors, Handle with Extreme Care: Tips for the Professional on the Care and Handling of Mirrors." B. Provide a minimum airspace of 1/8 inch between back of mirrors and mounting surface for air circulation between back of mirrors and face of mounting surface. C. Install mirrors with mastic and mirror hardware. Attach mirror hardware securely to mounting surfaces with mechanical fasteners installed with anchors or inserts as applicable. Install fasteners so heads do not impose point loads on backs of mirrors. 1. Mirror Clips: Place a felt or plastic pad between mirror and each clip to prevent spalling of mirror edges. Locate clips so they are symmetrically placed and evenly spaced. 2. Install mastic as follows: a. Apply barrier coat to mirror backing where approved in writing by manufacturers of mirrors Denton Fire Station No. 8 MIRRORS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 088300-3 August 2019 and backing material. b. Apply mastic to comply with mastic manufacturer's written instructions for coverage and to allow air circulation between back of mirrors and face of mounting surface. c. After mastic is applied, align mirrors and press into place while maintaining a minimum airspace of 1/8 inch between back of mirrors and mounting surface. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Protect mirrors from breakage and contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. B. Do not permit edges of mirrors to be exposed to standing water. C. Maintain environmental conditions that prevent mirrors from being exposed to moisture from condensation or other sources for continuous periods of time. D. Clean exposed surface of mirrors not more than four days before date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Clean mirrors as recommended in writing by mirror manufacturer. END OF SECTION Denton Fire Station No. 8 FIXED LOUVERS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 089119-1 August 2019 SECTION 089119 – FIXED LOUVERS PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Fixed louvers. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Louver Terminology: Definitions of terms for metal louvers contained in AMCA 501 apply to this Section unless otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards. B. Horizontal Louver: Louver with horizontal blades (i.e., the axes of the blades are horizontal). C. Vertical Louver: Louver with vertical blades (i.e., the axes of the blades are vertical). D. Drainable-Blade Louver: Louver with blades having gutters that collect water and drain it to channels in jambs and mullions, which carry it to bottom of unit and away from opening. E. Wind-Driven-Rain-Resistant Louver: Louver that provides specified wind-driven rain performance, as determined by testing according to AMCA 500-L. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. For louvers specified to bear AMCA seal, include printed catalog pages showing specified models with appropriate AMCA Certified Ratings Seals. B. Shop Drawings: For louvers and accessories. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. Show frame profiles and blade profiles, angles, and spacing. 1. Show weep paths, gaskets, flashing, sealant, and other means of preventing water intrusion. 2. Show mullion profiles and locations. C. Samples: For each type of metal finish required. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed according to AMCA 500-L by a qualified testing agency or by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, for each type of louver and showing compliance with performance requirements specified. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. AWS D1.2/D1.2M, "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum." 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of openings by field measurements before fabrication. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Source Limitations: Obtain louvers from single source from a single manufacturer where indicated to be of same type, design, or factory-applied color finish. 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Delegated Design: Design louvers, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using structural performance requirements and design criteria indicated. B. Structural Performance: Louvers shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated without permanent deformation of louver components, noise or metal fatigue caused by louver-blade rattle or flutter, or permanent damage to fasteners and anchors. Wind pressures shall be considered to act normal to the face of the building. 1. Wind Loads: Determine loads based on pressures as indicated on Drawings. C. Louver Performance Ratings: Provide louvers complying with requirements specified, as demonstrated by testing manufacturer's stock units identical to those provided, except for length and width according to AMCA 500-L. D. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes. 1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces. E. SMACNA Standard: Comply with recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" for Denton Fire Station No. 8 FIXED LOUVERS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 089119-2 August 2019 fabrication, construction details, and installation procedures. 2.3 FIXED, EXTRUDED-ALUMINUM LOUVERS A. Horizontal, Drainable-Blade Louver : 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Greenheck Fan Corporation (Basis of Design) b. Construction Specialties, Inc. c. Airolite Compnay, LLC d. Ruskin Company; Tomkins PLC 2. Louver Depth: As scheduled in Drawings. 3. Frame and Blade Nominal Thickness: Not less than 0.080 inch. 4. Mullion Type: Exposed. 5. Louver Performance Ratings: a. Free Area: Not less than 50%. b. Point of Beginning Water Penetration: Not less than 900 fpm. 6. AMCA Seal: Mark units with AMCA Certified Ratings Seal. 2.4 LOUVER SCREENS A. General: Provide screen at each exterior louver. 1. Screen Location for Fixed Louvers: Interior face. B. Secure screen frames to louver frames with stainless-steel machine screws, spaced a maximum of 6 inches from each corner and at 12 inches o.c. C. Louver Screen Frames: Fabricate with mitered corners to louver sizes indicated. 1. Metal: Same type and form of metal as indicated for louver to which screens are attached. 2. Finish: Same finish as louver frames to which louver screens are attached. 3. Type: Re-wirable frames with a driven spline or insert. D. Louver Screening for Aluminum Louvers: 1. Bird Screening: Aluminum, 1/2-inch- square mesh, 0.063-inchwire. 2.5 BLANK-OFF PANELS A. Uninsulated, Blank-Off Panels: Metal sheet attached to back of louver. 1. Aluminum sheet for aluminum louvers, not less than 0.050-inch nominal thickness. 2. Panel Finish: Same as louver. 3. Attach blank-off panels with clips or sheet metal screws. 2.6 MATERIALS A. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063-T5, T-52, or T6. B. Fasteners: Use types and sizes to suit unit installation conditions. 1. Use Phillips flat-head screws for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated. 2. For color-finished louvers, use fasteners with heads that match color of louvers. C. Post installed Fasteners for Concrete and Masonry: Torque-controlled expansion anchors, made from stainless-steel components, with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 4 times the loads imposed, for concrete, or 6 times the load imposed for masonry, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. D. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187. 2.7 FABRICATION A. Factory assemble louvers to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. B. Vertical Assemblies: Where height of louver units exceeds fabrication and handling limitations, fabricate units to permit field-bolted assembly with close-fitting joints in jambs and mullions, reinforced with splice plates. 1. Continuous Vertical Assemblies: Fabricate units without interrupting blade-spacing pattern unless horizontal mullions are indicated. 2. Horizontal Mullions: Provide horizontal mullions at joints unless continuous vertical assemblies are indicated. C. Maintain equal louver blade spacing, including separation between blades and frames at head and sill, to produce uniform appearance. D. Fabricate frames, including integral sills, to fit in openings of sizes indicated, with allowances made for fabrication and installation tolerances, adjoining material tolerances, and perimeter sealant joints. 1. Frame Type: Channel unless otherwise indicated. E. Include supports, anchorages, and accessories required for complete assembly. F. Provide vertical mullions of type and at spacings indicated, but not more than is recommended by Denton Fire Station No. 8 FIXED LOUVERS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 089119-3 August 2019 manufacturer, or 72 inches o.c., whichever is less. 1. Exposed Mullions: Where indicated, provide units with exposed mullions of same width and depth as louver frame. Where length of louver exceeds fabrication and handling limitations, provide interlocking split mullions designed to permit expansion and contraction. 2. Exterior Corners: Prefabricated corner units with mitered and welded blades and with fully recessed mullions at corners. G. Provide sub-sills made of same material as louvers for recessed louvers. H. Join frame members to each other and to fixed louver blades with fillet welds concealed from view unless otherwise indicated or size of louver assembly makes bolted connections between frame members necessary. 2.8 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. Finish louvers after assembly. B. High-Performance Organic Finish: 3-coat fluoropolymer finish (minimum 2.0 mils dry-film) complying with AAMA 2605 and containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in both color coat and clear topcoat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions. 1. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full available range. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and openings, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Coordinate setting drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions for installation of anchorages that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry construction. Coordinate delivery of such items to Project site. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Locate and place louvers level, plumb, and at indicated alignment with adjacent work. B. Use concealed anchorages where possible. Provide brass or lead washers fitted to screws where required to protect metal surfaces and to make a weathertight connection. C. Form closely fitted joints with exposed connections accurately located and secured. D. Provide perimeter reveals and openings of uniform width for sealants and joint fillers, as indicated. E. Protect unpainted galvanized and nonferrous-metal surfaces that are in contact with concrete, masonry, or dissimilar metals from corrosion and galvanic action by applying a heavy coating of bituminous paint or by separating surfaces with waterproof gaskets or nonmetallic flashing. F. Install concealed gaskets, flashings, joint fillers, and insulation as louver installation progresses, where weathertight louver joints are required. Comply with Section 079200 Joint Sealants for sealants applied during louver installation. 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Clean exposed louver surfaces that are not protected by temporary covering, to remove fingerprints and soil during construction period. Do not let soil accumulate during construction period. B. Before final inspection, clean exposed surfaces with water and a mild soap or detergent not harmful to finishes. Thoroughly rinse surfaces and dry. C. Restore louvers damaged during installation and construction so no evidence remains of corrective work. If results of restoration are unsuccessful, as determined by Architect, remove damaged units and replace with new units. 1. Touch up minor abrasions in finishes with air-dried coating that matches color and gloss of, and is compatible with, factory-applied finish coating. END OF SECTION Denton Fire Station No. 8 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 092216-1 August 2019 SECTION 092216 – NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Non-load-bearing steel framing systems for interior gypsum board assemblies. 2. Suspension systems for interior gypsum ceilings, soffits, and grid systems. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Shop Drawings: For cold-formed metal framing indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. C. UL Listings: Provide UL listing data for Head of Wall conditions. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Evaluation Reports: For firestop tracks, from ICC-ES. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies that incorporate non-load- bearing steel framing, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated, according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency. B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated, according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency. 2.2 FRAMING SYSTEMS A. Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated. 1. Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal unless otherwise indicated. 2. Protective Coating: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G40, hot-dip galvanized unless otherwise indicated. B. Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645. 1. Steel Studs and Runners: a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 20 gauge (33mils) unless indicated otherwise on Drawings or below. 1) Interior Metal Stud/Gypsum Board Assemblies, Typical Locations: Withstand lateral loading (air pressure) of 5 psf with deflection limit not more than L/240 of partition height. 2) Interior Metal Stud/Gypsum Board Assemblies at Lobbies, Service Corridors, and Exit Corridors: Withstand lateral loading (air pressure) of 7.5 psf with deflection limit not more than L/360 of partition height 3) Interior Metal Stud/Gypsum Board Assemblies at Locations with Ceramic Tile or Other Hard Surface Finishes: Withstand typical lateral loading (air pressure) with deflection limit not more than L/360 of partition height, minimum 20 gauge (30 mills) studs at 16 inches on center. 4) Where wall mounted equipment, woodwork, and casework items are indicated or elsewhere as shown on Drawings, provide minimum 16 gage studs 5) At jambs of openings provide two minimum 20 gage studs. 6) Ceilings: At ceilings using mold-mildew resistant gypsum framing to be 16 inches o.c. for 5/8 inches gypsum 7) Refer to Division 5 for stud framing which is exposed to wind loads and for studs carrying heavy vertical loads (cement plaster, manufactured stone masonry, stone tile thicker than 3/4 inch, etc) b. Where partition heights exceed stud manufacturer’s recommended spans, provide one of the following: 1) Heavier stud gage. 2) Closer stud spacing. 3) Deeper stud size (space permitting); As approved by Architect. 4) Above ceiling bracing, anchored to structure above. Denton Fire Station No. 8 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 092216-2 August 2019 c. Depth: As indicated on Drawings. C. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where indicated, provide the following: 1. Deflection Track: Steel sheet top runner manufactured to prevent cracking of finishes applied to interior partition framing resulting from deflection of structure above; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs. a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1) Dietrich Metal Framing; SLP-TRK Slotted Deflection Track. 2) MBA Building Supplies; FlatSteel Deflection Track Slotted Deflecto Track. 3) Steel Network Inc. (The); VertiClip SLD Series. D. Firestop Tracks: Top runner manufactured to allow partition heads to expand and contract with movement of the structure while maintaining continuity of fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Fire Trak Corp.; Fire Trak System attached to studs with Fire Trak Posi Klip. b. Metal-Lite, Inc.; The System. E. Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width indicated. 1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.018 inch. F. Cold-Rolled Channel Bridging: Steel, 0.053-inch minimum base-metal thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch- wide flanges. 1. Depth: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Clip Angle: Not less than 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 inches, 0.068-inch- thick, galvanized steel. G. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645. 1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.018 inch. 2. Depth: 7/8 inch. H. Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2-inch- deep, steel sheet members designed to reduce sound transmission. 1. Configuration: Asymmetrical. I. Cold-Rolled Furring Channels: 0.053-inch uncoated-steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch- wide flanges. 1. Depth: 3/4 inch. 2. Furring Brackets: Adjustable, corrugated-edge type of steel sheet with minimum uncoated-steel thickness of 0.033 inch. 3. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.062-inch- diameter wire, or double strand of 0.048-inch- diameter wire. 2.3 SUSPENSION SYSTEMS A. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.062-inch- diameter wire, or double strand of 0.048-inch- diameter wire. B. Hanger Attachments to Concrete: 1. Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials with holes or loops for attaching wire hangers and capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to 5 times that imposed by construction as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488 by an independent testing agency. a. Type: Post installed, expansion anchor. 2. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials with clips or other devices for attaching hangers of type indicated, and capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to 10 times that imposed by construction as determined by testing according to ASTM E 1190 by an independent testing agency. C. Wire Hangers: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.16 inch in diameter. D. Flat Hangers: Steel sheet, 1 by 3/16 inch by length indicated. E. Furring Channels (Furring Members): 1. Cold-Rolled Channels: 0.053-inch uncoated-steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch- wide flanges, 3/4 inch deep. 2. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645. a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.018 inch. b. Depth: 1-5/8 inches. 3. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, 7/8 inch deep. a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.018 inch. 4. Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2-inch- deep members designed to reduce sound transmission. a. Configuration: Asymmetrical. F. Grid Suspension System for Gypsum Board Ceilings: ASTM C 645, direct-hung system composed of main beams and cross-furring members that interlock. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: Denton Fire Station No. 8 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 092216-3 August 2019 a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; Drywall Grid Systems. b. Chicago Metallic Corporation; Drywall Grid System. c. USG Corporation; Drywall Suspension System. 2.4 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards. B. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates. C. Isolation Strip at Exterior Walls: Provide the following: 1. Foam Gasket: Adhesive-backed, closed-cell vinyl foam strips that allow fastener penetration without foam displacement, 1/8 inch thick, in width to suit steel stud size. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal frames, cast-in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Suspended Assemblies: Coordinate installation of suspension systems with installation of overhead structure to ensure that inserts and other provisions for anchorages to building structure have been installed to receive hangers at spacing required to support the Work and that hangers will develop their full strength. 1. Furnish concrete inserts and other devices indicated to other trades for installation in advance of time needed for coordination and construction. B. Coordination with Sprayed Fire-Resistive Materials: 1. Before sprayed fire-resistive materials are applied, attach offset anchor plates or ceiling runners (tracks) to surfaces indicated to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials. Where offset anchor plates are required, provide continuous plates fastened to building structure not more than 24 inches o.c. 2. After sprayed fire-resistive materials are applied, remove them only to extent necessary for installation of non-load-bearing steel framing. Do not reduce thickness of fire-resistive materials below that required for fire-resistance ratings indicated. Protect adjacent fire-resistive materials from damage. 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Installation Standard: ASTM C 754. 1. Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 840 that apply to framing installation. B. Install supplementary framing, and blocking to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction. C. Install bracing at terminations in assemblies. D. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with non-load-bearing steel framing members. Frame both sides of joints independently. 3.4 INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES A. Install framing system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types. 1. Single-Layer Application: 16 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated. 2. Multilayer Application: 16 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated. 3. Tile Backing Panels: 16 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated. B. Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at exterior walls, install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall. C. Install studs so flanges within framing system point in same direction. D. Install tracks (runners) at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing around ducts penetrating partitions above ceiling. 1. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where framing extends to overhead structural supports, install to produce joints at tops of framing systems that prevent axial loading of finished assemblies. 2. Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs. a. Install two studs at each jamb unless otherwise indicated. Denton Fire Station No. 8 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 092216-4 August 2019 b. Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud, with a minimum 1/2-inch clearance from jamb stud to allow for installation of control joint in finished assembly. c. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of overhead structure. 3. Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings the same as required for door openings unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above door heads. 4. Fire-Resistance-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated and support closures and to make partitions continuous from floor to underside of solid structure. a. Firestop Track: Where indicated, install to maintain continuity of fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated. 5. Sound-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with sound-rated assembly indicated. E. Direct Furring: 1. Screw to wood framing. 2. Attach to concrete or masonry with stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or powder-driven fasteners spaced 24 inches o.c. F. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than 1/8 inch from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing. 3.5 INSTALLING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS A. Install suspension system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types. 1. Hangers: 48 inches o.c. 2. Carrying Channels (Main Runners): 48 inches o.c. 3. Furring Channels (Furring Members): 16 inches o.c. B. Isolate suspension systems from building structure where they abut or are penetrated by building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement. C. Suspend hangers from building structure as follows: 1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural or suspension system. a. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means. 2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with locations of hangers required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in the form of trapezes or equivalent devices. a. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced installation standards. 3. Wire Hangers: Secure by looping and wire tying, either directly to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for substrate, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail. 4. Flat Hangers: Secure to structure, including intermediate framing members, by attaching to inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for structure and hanger, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail. 5. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. 6. Do not attach hangers to permanent metal forms. Furnish cast-in-place hanger inserts that extend through forms. 7. Do not attach hangers to rolled-in hanger tabs of composite steel floor deck. 8. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit. D. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Wire tie furring channels to supports. E. Grid Suspension Systems: Attach perimeter wall track or angle where grid suspension systems meet vertical surfaces. Mechanically join main beam and cross-furring members to each other and butt-cut to fit into wall track. F. Installation Tolerances: Install suspension systems that are level to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet measured length wise on each member that will receive finishes and transversely between parallel members that will receive finishes. END OF SECTION Denton Fire Station No. 8 CONTINUOUSLY INSULATED CEMENT PLASTER STUCCO Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 092423-1 August 2019 SECTION 092423 – CONTINUOUSLY INSULATED CEMENT PLASTER STUCCO PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Section Includes: 1. Composite insulated stucco wall system consisting of air/water-resistive barrier, drainage mat, rigid insulation, plaster base, stucco base, base coat, reinforcing mesh, primer and finish coat. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 042000 Unit Masonry B. Section 061600 Sheathing C. Section 076210 Flexible Flashing D. Section 092216 Non-Structural Metal Framing E. Section 092900 Gypsum Board 1.3 REFERENCES A. ASTM C150 – Standard Specification for Portland Cement B. ASTM C926 – Standard Specification for Application of Portland Cement-Based Plaster C. ASTM C1063 – Standard Specification for Installation of Lathing and Furring to Receive Interior and Exterior Portland Cement-Based Plaster D. ASTM C847 – Standard Specification for Metal Lath E. ASTM C933 – Standard Specification for Welded Wire Lath F. ASTM C1032 – Standard Specification for Woven Wire Plaster Base G. ASTM C1764 – Standard Test Methods for Non-Metallic Plaster Bases (Lath) used with Portland Cement- Based Plaster in Vertical Applications H. ASTM C1787 – Standard Specification for Installation on Non-Metallic Plaster Bases (Lath) used with Portland Cement-Based Plaster in Vertical Applications I. ICC-ES AC11 – Cementitious Exterior Wall Coatings J. ESR-3463 – ICC Evaluation Service, LLC, ES Report (NEOPOR Rigid Insulation Board) 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide data on Senergy PLATINUM CI STUCCO ULTRA wall system materials, product characteristics, performance criteria, limitations and durability. B. Code Compliance: Provide manufacturer’s applicable code compliance report. C. Samples: Submit 3 – 18-inch X 18-inch size samples illustrating selected finish color and texture. D. Certificate: System manufacturer’s approval of applicator. E. Sealant: Sealant manufacturer’s certificate of compliance with ASTM C920. F. System manufacturer’s current specifications, typical details, system design guide and related product literature which indicate preparation required, storage, installation techniques, jointing requirements and finishing techniques. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: More than 10 years in the cement plaster stucco industry, with more than 1,000 completed cement plaster stucco projects. B. Applicator: Approved by BASF Wall Systems in performing work of this section. C. Regulatory Requirements: Conform to applicable code requirements for cement plaster stucco. D. Field Samples 1. Construct one field sample panel for each color and texture in sizes shown on mock-up. Refer A-9.01. 2. Prepare each sample panel using the same tools and techniques to be used for the actual application. 3. Accepted sample panels may not remain as part of the work. 4. Field samples shall be comprised of all wall assembly components including substrate, air/water- resistive barrier, drainage mat, rigid insulation, plaster base, stucco base, base coat, reinforcing mesh, primer, finish coat and typical sealant/flashing conditions. E. Testing: Denton Fire Station No. 8 CONTINUOUSLY INSULATED CEMENT PLASTER STUCCO Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 092423-2 August 2019 1. General Air/Water-Resistive Barrier Minimum Performance: TEST METHOD CRITERIA RESULT Water-resistive barrier coatings used under EIFS ASTM E2570 Meets all performance requirements Air Leakage of Air Barrier Assemblies ASTM E2357 0.2 l/s.m2 @ 75 Pa (0.04 cfm/ft2 @ 1.57 psf) 0.0007 l/s.m2 (0.0001 cfm/ft2) @ 75 Pa (1.57 psf) positive / post conditioning 0.0014 l/s.m2 (0.0003 cfm/ft2) @ 75 Pa (1.57 psf) negative / post conditioning Air Permeance of Building Materials ASTM E2178 0.2 l/s.m2 @ 75 Pa (0.04 cfm/ft2 @ 1.57 psf) 0.0049 l/s.m2 (0.0001 cfm/ft2) @ 75 Pa (0.00098 cfm/ft2 @ 1.57 psf) Rate of Air Leakage ASTM E283 0.0185 l/s.m2 @ 75 Pa (0.0037 cfm/ft2 @ 1.57 psf) Water Vapor Transmission ASTM E96 Report Value Senershield-R: 18 Perms (grains/Hr. in Hg. ft2) @ 10 mils wet film thickness Senershield-RS: 18 Perms (grains/Hr. in Hg. ft2) @ 12 mils wet film thickness Senershield-R/RS: 14 Perms (grains/Hr. in Hg. ft2) @ 20 mils wet film thickness Senershield-VB: 0.09 Perms (grains/Hr. in Hg. ft2) @ 26 mils wet film thickness Pull-Off Strength of Coatings ASTM D4541 Min. 110 kPa (15.9 psi) or substrate failure Pass – Tested over exterior gypsum sheathing, ASTM C1177 glass-mat sheathing, cement board, OSB, plywood; PVC and galvanized flashing Nail Sealability (without Sheathing Fabric) ASTM D1970 No water penetration at galvanized roofing nail penetration under 127 mm (5”) head of water after 3 days at 40 C (400 F) Pass Surface Burning ASTM E84 Flame Spread < 25 Smoke Development < 450 Meets Class A: Flame Spread = 15 Smoke Developed = 95 2. Air/Water-Resistive Barrier ICC-ES AC-212: TEST METHOD CRITERIA RESULT Sequential Testing: 1. Structural 2. Racking 3. Restrained Environmental Conditioning 4. Water Penetration 1. ASTM E1233 (Procedure A) 2. ASTM E72 3. ICC-ES AC-212 4. ASTM E331 No cracking at joints or interface of flashing No water penetration after 15 min @ 137 Pa (2.86 psf) Pass – Tested over OSB and gypsum sheathing No water penetration after 90 min @ 299 Pa (6.24 psf) Sequential Testing: 1. UV light Exposure 2. Accelerated Aging 3. Hydrostatic Pressure Test 1. ICC-ES AC-212 2. ICC-ES AC-212 3. AATCC 127-1985 No cracking or bond failure to substrate No water penetration after 21.7 in (550mm) water for 5 hours Pass Freeze-Thaw ASTM E2485 (Method B) No sign of deleterious effects after 10 cycles Pass – Tested over exterior gypsum sheathing, ASTM C1177 glass-mat sheathing, cement board, OSB, plywood Water Resistance ASTM D2247 No deleterious effects after 14 day exposure Pass – Tested over exterior gypsum sheathing, ASTM C1177 glass-mat sheathing, cement board, OSB, plywood Tensile Bond ASTM C297 Minimum 103 kPa (15 psi) Pass – Tested over exterior gypsum sheathing, ASTM C1177 glass-mat sheathing, cement board, OSB, plywood, CMU; PVC and galvanized flashing Tensile Bond (after freeze-thaw) ASTM C297 Minimum 103 kPa (15 psi) average; no failure after 10 cycles freeze-thaw Pass Denton Fire Station No. 8 CONTINUOUSLY INSULATED CEMENT PLASTER STUCCO Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 092423-3 August 2019 3. Air/Water-Resistive Barrier ICC-ES AC 148: TEST METHOD CRITERIA RESULT Sequential Testing: 1. UV Light Exposure 2. Accelerated Aging 3. Hydrostatic Pressure Test 1. ICC-ES AC 148 2. ICC-ES AC 148 3. AATCC 127-1985 No cracking or bond failure to substrate No water penetration after 21.7 in (550mm) water for 5 hours Pass Peel Adhesion ASTM D3330 (Method F) After UV Exposure After Accelerated Aging After Elevated Temperature Exposure After Water Immersion Pass – Tested over ASTM C1177 glass-mat sheathing, OBS, plywood, PVC and uncoated aluminum Nail Sealability after Thermal Cycling ASTM D 1970 (Modified) AAMA 711 No water penetration at galvanized roofing nail penetration under 31mm (1.2”) head of water after 24 hours at 40 C (400 F) Pass Tensile Strength after UV Exposure ASTM D5034 AAMA 711 Minimum 0.5N/mm (2.9lb/in) Pass Cold Temperature Pliability ASTM D1970 AAMA 711 No cracking after bending around a 25mm (1”) mandrel after 2 hour exposure to -180 C (00 F) Pass Resistance to Peeling AAMA 711 No signs of distress or failure after 24 hours of exposure at room temperature, 500 C (1220 F), 650 C (1490F), 800 C (1760 F) Pass Drainage Efficiency ASTM E2273 90% Minimum Pass Transverse Wind-Load ASTM E330 3-5/8” 16 gauge steel studs 16” o.c., 1/2” gypsum sheathing, 1 layer ASTM D225 #15 felt, rigid insulation board, lath, 1/2" stucco base Average ultimate loads: -10.8 kPa (-226 psf) +11.8 kPa (+226 psf)* *Positive failure could not be reached. All failures in framing. Transverse Wind-Load ASTM E330 2” x 4” wood studs 16” o.c., 7/16” OSB, 1 layer 60-minute grade D paper, rigid insulation board, lath, 1/2" stucco base Average ultimate loads: -10.4 kPa (-218 psf) +10.9 kPa (+228 psf) All failures in framing. Surface Burning Characteristics ASTM E84 Flame Spread < 25 Smoke Developed < 450 Pass Behavior of materials in a vertical tube furnace at 7500 C ASTM E136 Weight loss of the specimen cannot exceed 50% Pass Freeze-Thaw ICC-ES AC11 No deleterious effects after 10 cycles Pass 4. PLATINUM CI STUCCO ULTRA System ad Component Performance: TEST METHOD CRITERIA RESULT Drainage Efficiency ASTM E2273 90% minimum Flat foam / BASF Drainage Mat / BASF Air/Water- Resistive Barrier exceeds 90% minimum Surface Burning ASTM E84 Flame Spread < 25 Smoke Developed < 450 Meets Class A: Flame Spread = 15 Smoke Developed = 95 Behavior of materials in a vertical tube furnace at 7500 C ASTM E136 Stucco base specimens all met the weight loss criteria for passing the tests Freeze-Thaw Resistance Per ICC-ES acceptance criteria – AC11 10 freeze-thaw cycles with no visible evidence of deterioration when examined under 5X magnification Pass Denton Fire Station No. 8 CONTINUOUSLY INSULATED CEMENT PLASTER STUCCO Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 092423-4 August 2019 5. ASTM E330 Wind-Load: ASSEMBLY DESCRIPTION AVERAGE ULTIMATE LOADS 3-5/8” 16 gauge steel studs 16” o.c., 1/2" gypsum sheathing, SEHERSHIELD-R/RS/VB, BASF DRAINAGE MAT, acceptable rigid insulation board, lath, minimum 1/2" BASF stucco base Average ultimate loads: -10.8 kPa (-226 psf) +11.8 kPa (+226 psf)* *Positive failure could not be reached. All failures in framing. 2” x 4” wood studs 16” o.c., 7/16” OSB, SEHERSHIELD- R/RS/VB, BASF DRAINAGE MAT, acceptable rigid insulation board, lath, minimum 1/2" BASF stucco base Average ultimate loads: -10.4 kPa (-218 psf) +10.9 kPa (+228 psf) All failures in framing. 6. NFPA 285 and NFPA 268 Compliant Assemblies: WALL COMPONENTS MATERIALS Base wall system – Use either 1, 2 or 3 1. Concrete wall 2. Concrete masonry wall 3. 1 layer – 1/2" thick, regular or 5/8” thick Type X gypsum wallboard on interior, installed over steel studs, minimum 3- 5/8” depth, minimum 20 gauge at a maximum of 16” o.c. with lateral bracing every 4 feet vertically Floorline Firestopping 4 lb/cu ft. mineral wool (e.g. Thermafiber) in each stud cavity at each floorline – attached with z-clips or equivalent Cavity Insulation – Use either 1 or 2 1. None 2. Any noncombustible insulation (faced or unfaced) Exterior sheathing – Use either 1 or 2 1. 1/2" thick, exterior type gypsum sheathing 2. 5/8” thick, exterior type gypsum sheathing Air/water-resistive barrier applied to exterior sheathing Senergy SENERSHIELD-R/RS/VB BASF DRAINAGE MAT Exterior insulation – Use either 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5 1. Expanded Polystyrene Foam (EPS) – C578 Type II and Class A per ASTM E84 – maximum thickness of 2.5 inches 2. Expanded Polystyrene Foam (EPS) – C578 Type IX and Class A per ASTM E84 – maximum thickness of 1.8 inches 3. BASF NEOPOR Expanded Polystyrene Foam – C578 Type II and Class A per ASTM E84 – maximum thickness of 2.4 inches 4. Extruded Polystyrene Foam (XPS) – C578 Type X or Type IV and Class A per ASTM E84 – maximum thickness – see note 1 5. Polyisocyanurate Foam – C1289 compliant and Class A per ASTM E84 – maximum thickness – see note 1 Lath – Use either 1, 2 or 3 1. BASF PERMALATH 1000 glass fiber lath 2. Metal lath – either 2.5 lb/yd2 or 3.4 lb/yd2 3. Wire lath – either 1-1/2”, 20-gauge or 1”, 17-gauge Stucco BASF Stucco Base – minimum 1/2" thick Finish Coat BASF Wall Systems Finish Note 1: The potential heat of the foam plastic insulation at the maximum installed thickness must not exceed 4999 Btu/ft2 as determined in accordance with NFPA 259. 7. ASTM E119 1-Hour Fire Resistant Compliant Assembly: WALL COMPONENTS MATERIALS Interior gypsum wall board Any minimum 5/8” thick Type X gypsum wall board complying with ASTM C1396 Steel framing Minimum 3-5/8” deep, minimum 20-gauge steel studs spaced a maximum of 24” o.c. Wall cavity insulation – Use either 1 or 2 1. None 2. Fiberglass batt insulation (faced or unfaced) 3. Mineral wool insulation (faced or unfaced) Exterior sheathing Any minimum 5/8” thick Type X exterior sheathing complying with ASTM C1396 and/or ASTM C1177 Air/water-resistive barrier applied to exterior sheathing Senergy SENERSHIELD-R/RS/VB BASF DRAINAGE MAT Continuous insulation – Use either 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5 1. Expanded Polystyrene Foam (EPS) – C578 Type II and Class A per ASTM E84 – maximum thickness of 2.5 inches 2. Expanded Polystyrene Foam (EPS) – C578 Type IX and Denton Fire Station No. 8 CONTINUOUSLY INSULATED CEMENT PLASTER STUCCO Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 092423-5 August 2019 Class A per ASTM E84 – maximum thickness of 1.8 inches 3. BASF NEOPOR Expanded Polystyrene Foam – C578 Type II and Class A per ASTM E84 – maximum thickness of 2.4 inches 4. Extruded Polystyrene Foam (XPS) – C578 Type X or Type IV and Class A per ASTM E84 – maximum thickness – see note 1 5. Polyisocyanurate Foam – C1289 compliant and Class A per ASTM E84 – maximum thickness – see note 1 Lath – Use either 1, 2 or 3 1. BASF PERMALATH 1000 glass fiber lath 2. Metal lath – either 2.5 lb/yd2 or 3.4 lb/yd2 3. Wire lath – either 1-1/2”, 20-gauge or 1”, 17-gauge Stucco BASF Stucco Base – minimum 1/2" thick Finish Coat BASF Wall Systems Finish Note 1: The potential heat of the foam plastic insulation at the maximum installed thickness must not exceed 4999 Btu/ft2 as determined in accordance with NFPA 259. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver wall system materials in original unopened packages with manufacturer’s labels intact. B. Protect wall system materials during transportation and installation to avoid physical damage. C. Store materials in a cool, dry place protected from exposure to moisture and freezing. Store at no less than 40oF/4oC. D. Store MAXFLASH at a minimum of 40oF. In cold weather, keep containers at room temperature for at least 24 hours before using. E. Store rigid insulation boars flat, in original packaging and protected from direct sunlight and extreme heat. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Do not apply wall system in ambient temperatures below 40oF/4oC. Provide properly vented, supplementary heat during installation and drying period when temperatures less than 40oF/4oC prevail. B. Do not apply wall system materials to frozen surfaces. C. Maintain ambiance temperature at or above 40oF/4oC during and at least 24 hours after wall system installation and until dry. 1.8 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Coordinate and schedule installation of wall system with related work of other sections. B. Coordinate and schedule installation of trim, flashing, and joint sealers to prevent water infiltration behind the system. 1.9 WARRANTY A. PROVIDE BASF WALL Systems limited labor, material and drainage warranty for wall system installations. B. Comply with BASF Wall Systems notification procedures to assure qualification for warranty. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Senergy PLATINUM CI STUCCO ULTRA wall system manufactured by BASF Wall Systems. B. Substitutions: Submit in accordance with Section 012500. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Air/Water-Resistive Barrier Components: 1. Air/Water-Resistive Barrier: a. SENERSHIELD-RS: A one-component fluid-applied vapor permeable air/water-resistive barrier for use with airless spray equipment. b. WS BLOCK FILLER: A one component, water based block filler based on silica fortified chemistry. Use at all CMU block or masonry substrates receiving the Senergy PLATINUM CI STUCCO ULTRA wall system. 2. Rough Opening and Joint Treatment: a. MAXFLASH: A one component elastomeric material for use as a flexible flashing membrane. 3. Transitional Membrane/Expansion Joint Flashing: a. WS FLASH: 30-mil thick, self-sealing, self-healing composite membrane of polyester fabric and rubberized asphalt. Compatible with Senergy fluid-applied air/water-resistive barriers. b. FLASHING PRIMER: A water-based primer for use prior to application of WS FLASH on all acceptable surfaces. Denton Fire Station No. 8 CONTINUOUSLY INSULATED CEMENT PLASTER STUCCO Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 092423-6 August 2019 B. BASF Drainage Mat: Three-dimensional drainage core consisting of fused, entangles filaments. C. Insulation Board: 1. NEOPOR Rigid Insulation Board: meets ASTM C578 Type II. a. R-Value: 7.5 (1-5/8” thickness) b. Flame spread less than 25, smoke development less than 450 ASTM E84. c. Flexural: 40 psi, compressive: 20 psi, minimum thermal resistance 4.6/inch at 75oF (24oC) and 4.9/inch at 40oF (4oC). d. Minimum density 1.45 pcf (23.2 Kg/m3). e. Air-dried (aged) six weeks, or equivalent, prior to installation. f. Maximum size 2’ x 8’ (61cm x 2.44m x 10cm). g. Edges square within 1/32” per foot (.08mm/0.3m). h. Tolerance width 24” (+/-) 1/16” (61cm (+/-) 1.6mm) and length 96” (+/-) 1/8” (2.44m (+/-) 3mm). D. Lath/Plaster Base: 1. BASF PERMALATH 1000: An open weave, three-dimensional self-furring, nominal 1/4” thick glass fiber reinforcing lath for use with a minimum thickness of 1/2" (12.7mm). Complies with ASTM C1764, C1787 and C1788. E. Fastening for Rigid Insulation Board and Lath/Plaster Base: 1. Masonry: Minimum 3/16” (4.7mm) diameter corrosion resistant masonry Wind-lock type MT fastener with Wind-lock ULP 302 washer, Lath Plates or equal with 3/4" (19mm) minimum penetration into masonry. 2. Steel Framing: Minimum 20 ga (33 mil): Minimum #8 or greater corrosion resistant screw with Wind- lock ULP 302 washer, Lath Plate or equal with 5/8” (16mm) minimum penetration into framing. F. BASF Stucco Base Coat: 1. BASF STUCCOBASE PREMIX: Factory-blended stucco mixture of Portland cement, reinforcing fibers, sand, and proprietary ingredients; supplied by BASF Wall Systems. G. Water: Clean and potable without foreign matter. H. Synergy Adhesive/Base Coat: 1. ALPHA Base Coat: A 100% acrylic base coat, field-mixed with Type I or Type II Portland cement. I. Portland Cement: 1. Conform to ASTM C150, Type I, II, or I/II, grey or white; fresh and free of lumps. J. BASF Stucco Reinforcing Mesh: 1. BASF DIAMONDSHIELD: A balanced, open-grid tri-axial glass fiber mesh that distributes stress across three directions for superior crack resistance properties on new or retrofit stucco applications. K. BASF Primer: 1. STUCCOPRIME: 100% acrylic-based primer; color to closely match the selected Senergy Finish Color. L. Senergy Finish Coat: 1. SENERFLEX TERSUS Finish: Modified acrylic based finish with water repellent properties, compatible with base coat; Senergy finish color and scheduled; finish texture: a. M1.5: A 1.5 mm uniform aggregate creating a medium sand texture. b. Occurs at “S1” finish. Refer A-4.01 for locations. 2. SENERFLEX CHROMA Finish: 100% acrylic polymer based finish with integrated high performance colorants for superior fade resistance, compatible with base coat; Senergy finish color and scheduled; finish texture: a. M1.5: Provides a uniform “pebble” appearance. b. Occurs at “S2” finish. Refer A-4.01 for locations. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Trim: Casing bead, corner bead, expansion joint and weep screed accessories shall meet the requirements of ASTM C1063. Accessories shall be: vinyl, meeting ASTM D1784; galvanized, meeting ASTM A525 and ASTM A526; or zinc, meeting ASTM B69. Vinyl or zinc accessories are recommended where highly humid or salt-laden service conditions exist. 1. Continuous Insulation Weep Track: For returning insulated stucco into doors, windows, etc. 2. Foundation Weep Screed: Beveled edge designed to terminate finish system and drain internal moisture. 3. Casing Bead: Square edge style. 4. Corner Bead: Small radius nose style. 5. Control Joints: W-shaped accordion profile style. 6. Expansion Joints: Two-piece slip-joint design. Denton Fire Station No. 8 CONTINUOUSLY INSULATED CEMENT PLASTER STUCCO Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 092423-7 August 2019 PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Walls: 1. Substrates: a. Acceptable substrates are: PermaBase® Cement Board and other cement-boards conforming with ASTM C1325 (Type A-exterior); poured concrete/unit masonry; ASTM C1177 type sheathings, including, Weather Defense™ Platinum sheathing, GreenGlass® sheathing, eXP™ sheathing, GlasRoc® sheathing, Securock™ glass-mat sheathing, and DensGlass® exterior sheathing. DensElement (sheathing only); gypsum sheathing (ASTM C79/C1396); Exposure I or exterior plywood (Grade C/D or better); or Exposure I OSB, Huber Zip Sheathing (sheathing only). Consult the BASF Wall Systems Technical Services Department for all other applications. b. Sheathings must be securely fastened per applicable building code requirements and manufacturer’s recommendations. c. When applying Senergy Air/Water-Resistive Barriers to concrete/unit masonry, verify concrete/unit masonry is free of dust, dirt, grease, oils, laitance, efflorescence, biological residue, existing paint or coatings, curing compounds, form release agents, or any other contaminants which might affect the bond. Masonry walls should be properly cured to full load bearing capacity, laid true, and with joints tooled. Properly prepared concrete will have an open texture similar to fine grit sandpaper. d. Examine surfaces to receive system and verify that substrate and adjacent materials are dry, clean, and sound. Verify substrate surface is flat, free of fins or planar irregularities greater than 1/4" in 10’ (6mm in 3m). 2. Flashings: a. All flashings are by others and must be installed in accordance with specific manufacturer’s requirements. Where appropriate, end-dams must be provided. b. Openings must be flashed prior to window/door, HVAC, etc. installation. Refer to Secondary Moisture Protection Barrier Guidelines for Senergy Stucco Wall System technical bulletin or Air/Water-Resistive/Vapor Barrier Application Guidelines technical bulletin for further guidance. c. Windows and openings shall be flashed per design and building code requirements. d. Individual windows that are ganged to make multiple units require continuous head flashing and/or the joints between the units must be fully sealed. 3. Roof: Verify that all roof flashings have been installed in accordance with the guidelines set by the Asphalt Roofing Manufacturers Association (ARMA) if applicable. 4. Kick-out Flashing: Kick-out flashing must be installed where required. The kick-out flashing must be leak-proof and angled (minimum 100o) to allow for proper drainage and water diversion. B. Do not proceed until all unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Protect all surrounding areas and surfaces from damage and staining during application of wall system. B. Protect finished work at end of each day to prevent water penetration. 3.3 MIXING A. General: No additives are permitted unless specified in product mixing instructions. Close containers when not in use. Prepare in a container that is clean and free of foreign substances. Do not use a container which has contained or been cleaned with a petroleum- based product. Clean tools and equipment with water immediately after use. Dried material can only be removed mechanically. B. Air/Water-Resistive Barriers: 1. SENERSHIELD-RS: Mix with a clean, rust-free paddle and drill until thoroughly blended. Do not add water. C. BASF Stucco Base Coat: 1. BASF STUCCOBASE PREMIX: Use mixer which is clean and free of foreign substances. Add 2-2.5 gallons (7.6-9.5 liters) of clean potable water to mixer. Slowly add one bag of BASF STUCCOBASE PREMIX. Mix for one minute at normal mixing speed. Allow materials to set for 2-4 minutes with mixing blades at rest. Then re-mix, adding water to achieve desired consistency. Desired consistency varies with type of application (trowel or gun), substrate (paper-backed lath or block) and whether the stucco is applied to a wall or a ceiling. Note: Continuous mixing may cause excessive air entrainment. D. Senergy Base Coat: 1. ALPHA Base Coat: Mix base coat with a clean, rust-free paddle and drill until thoroughly blended, before adding Portland cement. Mix one part (by weight) Portland cement with one part base coat. Add Portland cement in small increments, mixing until thoroughly blended after each additional increment. Denton Fire Station No. 8 CONTINUOUSLY INSULATED CEMENT PLASTER STUCCO Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 092423-8 August 2019 Clean, potable water may be added to adjust workability. E. BASF Primer: 1. BASF STUCCOPRIME: Mix the factory-prepared material with a clean, rust-free paddle and drill until thoroughly blended. A small amount of clean, potable water may be added to adjust workability. Do not overwater. F. Senergy Finishes: 1. SENERFLEX TERSUS and CHROMA: Mix the factory-prepared material with a clean, rust-free paddle and drill until thoroughly blended. A small amount of clean, potable water may be added to adjust workability. Do not overwater. 3.4 APPLICATION A. Accessories: 1. Attach window and door drip edge level and per manufacturer’s instructions. B. Air/Water-Resistive Barriers: 1. All sheathing joints and windows/openings must be protected, and the air/water-resistive barrier applied in accordance with Air/Water-Resistive/Vapor Barrier Application Guideline technical bulletin. 2. Substrate shall be dry, clean, sound, and free of releasing agents, paint, or other residue or coatings. Verify substrate is flat, free of fins or planar irregularities greater than 1/4" in 10’ (6.4mm in 3m). 3. Unsatisfactory conditions shall be corrected before application of the Senergy air/water-resistive barriers. 4. Apply WS BLOCK FILLER to masonry substrates receiving the Senergy PLATINUM CI STUCCO ULTRA wall system. 5. Apply Senergy SENERSHIELD-RS air/water-resistive barrier. 6. Apply the MAXFLASH in accordance with the BASF MAXFLASH product bulletin. 7. Installed materials shall be checked before continuing system application. 8. Ensure MAXFLASH overlaps the top flange of the starter track. 9. Installed materials shall be checked before continuing system application. C. BASF DRAINAGE MAT: 1. Apply BASF DRAINAGE MAT horizontally or vertically over Senergy Air/Water-Resistive Barrier ensuring BASF DRAINAGE MAT is free of wrinkles. 2. Abut all vertical and horizontal edges and secure BASF DRAINAGE MAT to substrate with sufficient building staples or galvanized nails to remain in place prior to application of insulation board. D. Insulation Board: 1. Vertical Surfaces: Begin at base of wall with firm temporary support. 2. Apply horizontally in running bond pattern. 3. Precut insulation board to fit openings and projections and install as a single piece around corners of openings. Stagger vertical joints and corners. Stagger insulation board and sheathing joints. 4. Abut all joints and ensure an overall flush surface. 5. With appropriate fastening system, temporarily secure insulation board with minimum two fasteners per board. 6. Rasp flush any irregularities that would interfere with proper application of lath. E. Trim: 1. Refer to Senergy Stucco Wall Systems Lath and Trim Accessories technical bulletin. F. Lath: Install in accordance with all local code requirements, applicable standards and application procedures. 1. BASF PERMALATH 1000: a. Apply with minimum 3” (76mm) overlap at vertical and horizontal edges and overlap on flange of trim accessories. PERMALATH 1000 can be applied horizontally or vertically and should be applied such that it is flat and free of ripples, wrinkles, etc. Fastener system type appropriate for application and substrate. Fastener spacing 6” o.c. (152mm) vertically and 16” o.c. (406mm) horizontally. b. Apply BASF STUCCOBASE within 60 days of BASF PERMALATH 1000 application. G. Stucco Base Coat: 1. Senergy PLATINUM CI STUCCO ULTRA wall system application 3/4”-7/8” thickness (19-22mm): a. Nominal plaster base coat thickness: i. First coat “scratch”: 3/8” (9.5mm). ii. Second coat “brown”: 3/8” (9.5mm). b. Apply selected BASF stucco base mixture to the approved substrate by hand troweling or machine spraying with sufficient force to develop full adhesion between BASF stucco base mixture and the substrate. c. Apply first coat to completely embed lath. Cross rake to provide key for second brown coat. Coat must be uniform in thickness. Ensure the first coat is properly “scratched” and sufficiently rigid to resist cracking prior to application and leveling of the second or “brown” coat. d. Dampen scratch coat, apply second brown coat to provide required total thickness. Trowel BASF stucco base into trim to seat trim. The lath shall be fully embedded in the coating and shall be Denton Fire Station No. 8 CONTINUOUSLY INSULATED CEMENT PLASTER STUCCO Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 092423-9 August 2019 completely covered. Coat must be uniform in thickness. Rod off to desired thickness, leveled with screeds, to provide a true, flat plane. Follow this by wood floating or darbying the surface. e. After the surface has sufficiently hardened, use sponge or hard rubber float as required to fill voids, holes or imperfections, leaving surface ready to receive Senergy Finish. f. Damp cure for at least 48 hours by lightly and evenly fogging the surface with water at least twice a day. Direct sunlight, hot temperatures, low humidity and wind may make additional fogging necessary. g. Allow stucco base to cure a minimum of 6 days prior to application of EPS board shapes, Senergy BaseCoat, BASF STUCCOPRIME or Senergy Finish application. H. BASF DIAMONDSHIELD Reinforcing Mesh: 1. Base coat shall be applied to achieve reinforcing mesh embedment with no reinforcing mesh color visible. 2. Install BASF DIAMONDSHIELD over properly cured PLATINUM CI STUCCO ULTRA System “brown coat” of stucco base. 3. Apply mixed Senergy Base Coat to entire surface of “brown coat” with a stainless-steel trowel to embed the reinforcing mesh. 4. Immediately place BASF DIAMONDSHIELD Reinforcing Mesh against wet base coat and embed the reinforcing mesh into the base coat by troweling from the center to the edges. 5. Lap reinforcing mesh 2-1/2” (64mm) minimum at edges. 6. Ensure reinforcing mesh is continuous at corners, void of wrinkles and embedded in base coat so that no reinforcing mesh color is visible. 7. If required, apply a second layer of base coat to achieve total nominal base coat/reinforcing mesh thickness of 1/16” (1.6mm). 8. Allow base coat with embedded reinforcing mesh to dry hard (normally 8 to 10 hours). I. BASF STUCCOPRIME: 1. Base coat shall be clean, dry, sound and free of paint, contaminants or other residue or coatings. Verify substrate is flat, free of fins or planar irregularities greater than 1/4" in 10’ (6.4mm in 3m). 2. Apply BASF STUCCOPRIME to substrate with a sprayer, 3/8” (10mm) nap roller, or good quality latex paint brush at a rate of approximately 150-250 ft2 per gallon (3.6-6.1 m2 per liter). 3. BASF STUCCOPRIME shall be dry to the touch before proceeding to the Senergy Finish application. J. Senergy Finish Coat: SENERFLEX TERSUS and CHROMA: 1. Apply Senergy Finish directly to the base coat with a clean, stainless steel trowel. 2. Apply and level Senergy Finish during the same operation to minimum obtainable thickness consistent with uniform coverage. 3. Maintain a wet edge on Senergy Finish by applying and texturing continually over the wall surface. 4. Work Senergy Finish to corners, joints or other natural breaks and do not allow material to set up within an uninterrupted wall area. 5. Float Senergy Finish to achieve final texture. 3.5 CLEANING A. Clean adjacent surfaces and remove excess material, droppings, and debris. 3.6 PROTECTION A. Protect BASF Stucco Base form rain, snow and frost for 48-72 hours following application. B. Protect Senergy Base Coat, Air/Water-Resistive barrier, Primer and Finish from rain and temperatures below 40oF (4oC) for 24 hours or until dry. C. Protect installed construction under provisions of Section 017300. END OF SECTION Denton Fire Station No. 8 GYPSUM BOARD Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 092900-1 August 2019 SECTION 092900 – GYPSUM BOARD PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Interior gypsum board. 2. Tile backing panels. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Samples: For the following products: 1. Trim Accessories: Full-size Sample in 12-inch- long length for each trim accessory indicated. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Mockups: Before beginning gypsum board installation, install mockups of at least 100 sq. ft. in surface area to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Install mockups for the following: a. Each level of gypsum board finish indicated for use in exposed locations. 2. Apply or install final decoration indicated, including painting and wallcoverings, on exposed surfaces for review of mockups. 3. Simulate finished lighting conditions for review of mockups. 4. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other potential causes of damage. Stack panels flat and supported on risers on a flat platform to prevent sagging. 1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent. B. Do not install paper-faced gypsum panels until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned. C. Do not install panels that are wet, those that are moisture damaged, and those that are mold damaged. 1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. 2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency. B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency. 2.2 GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL A. Size: Provide maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and that correspond with support system indicated. 2.3 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: Denton Fire Station No. 8 GYPSUM BOARD Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 092900-2 August 2019 1. American Gypsum. 2. CertainTeed Corp. 3. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC. 4. National Gypsum Company. 5. Temple-Inland. 6. USG Corporation. B. Gypsum Board, Type X: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. 1. Thickness: 5/8 inch. 2. Long Edges: Tapered. C. Flexible Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. Manufactured to bend to fit radii and to be more flexible than standard regular-type gypsum board of same thickness. 1. Thickness: 1/4 inch. 2. Long Edges: Tapered. 2.4 SPECIALTY GYPSUM BOARD A. Gypsum Board, Type C: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. Manufactured to have increased fire-resistive capability. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. American Gypsum; Firebloc Type C. b. CertainTeed Corp.; ProRoc Type C. c. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC; Fireguard C. d. National Gypsum Company; Gold Bond Fire-Shield C. e. Temple-Inland; Type TG-C. f. USG Corporation; Firecode C Core. 2. Thickness: As required by fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated on Drawings. 3. Long Edges: Tapered. B. Glass-Mat Interior Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1658/C 1658M. With fiberglass mat laminated to both sides. Specifically designed for interior use. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC; DensArmour Plus. b. Temple-Inland; GreenGlass Interior Glass-Mat Board. 2. Long Edges: Tapered. 3. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D 3274. 2.5 TILE BACKING PANELS A. Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A118.9 and ASTM C 1288 or 1325, with manufacturer's standard edges 1. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: C-Cure; C-Cure Board 990 CertainTeed Corp.; FiberCement. Custom Building Products; Wonderboard. James Hardie Building Products, Inc.; Hardiebacker. National Gypsum Company, Permabase Cement Board. USG Corporation; DUROCK Cement Board. 2. Thickness: 5/8 inch. 3. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D 3274 2.6 TRIM ACCESSORIES A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047. 1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet or rolled zinc. 2. Shapes: a. Cornerbead. b. Bullnose bead. c. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. d. L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. e. U-Bead: J-shaped; exposed short flange does not receive joint compound. f. Expansion (control) joint. B. Aluminum Trim: Extruded accessories of profiles and dimensions indicated in Drawings. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Fry Reglet Corporation (Basis of Design) b. Gordon, Inc. c. Pittcon Industries. 2. Aluminum: Alloy and temper with not less than the strength and durability properties of ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063-T5. Denton Fire Station No. 8 GYPSUM BOARD Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 092900-3 August 2019 3. Anodized Finish: Architectural 200R1 medium etch (AA-M32c10A21), clear color. 4. Location and Profile: (all by Fry Reglet Corporation): a. Interior Wall: Z Reveal Molding: #DRMZ-625-50. b. Exterior Soffit: F Reveal Molding #VPRF-50-50. c. Exterior Soffit Vent: #DCS-50-V-150. 2.7 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M. B. Joint Tape: 1. Interior Gypsum Board: Paper. 2. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: 10-by-10 glass mesh. 3. Tile Backing Panels: As recommended by panel manufacturer. C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Board: For each coat use formulation that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats. 1. Prefilling: At open joints, rounded or beveled panel edges, and damaged surface areas, use setting-type taping compound. 2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and trim flanges, use drying-type, all-purpose compound. a. Use setting-type compound for installing paper-faced metal trim accessories. 3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound. 4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound. 5. Skim Coat: For final coat of Level 5 finish, use drying-type, all-purpose compound. D. Joint Compound for Tile Backing Panels: 1. Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Panel: As recommended by backing panel manufacturer. 2. Cementitious Backer Units: As recommended by backer unit manufacturer. 2.8 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and manufacturer's written recommendations. B. Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended for directly adhering gypsum panels to continuous substrate. 1. Laminating adhesive shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). C. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from 0.033 to 0.112 inch thick. 2. For fastening cementitious backer units, use screws of type and size recommended by panel manufacturer. D. Acoustical Joint Sealant: Manufacturer's standard non-sag, paintable, non-staining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834. Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Pecora Corporation; AC-20 FTR or AIS-919. b. Specified Technologies, Inc.; Smoke N Sound Acoustical Sealant. c. USG Corporation; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant. 2. Acoustical joint sealant shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and substrates including welded hollow-metal frames and framing, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance. B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL A. Comply with ASTM C 840. B. Install ceiling panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid abutting end joints in central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels not less than one framing member. Denton Fire Station No. 8 GYPSUM BOARD Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 092900-4 August 2019 C. Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch of open space between panels. Do not force into place. D. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings. E. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels. F. Cover both faces of support framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings, etc.), except in chases braced internally. 1. Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. in area. 2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits. 3. Where partitions intersect structural members projecting below underside of floor/roof slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by structural members; allow 1/4- to 3/8-inch- wide joints to install sealant. G. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch- wide spaces at these locations and trim edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant. H. Attachment to Steel Framing: Attach panels so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first. I. STC-Rated Assemblies: Seal construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919 and with manufacturer's written recommendations for locating edge trim and closing off sound-flanking paths around or through assemblies, including sealing partitions above acoustical ceilings. J. Install sound attenuation blankets before installing gypsum panels unless blankets are readily installed after panels have been installed on one side. 3.3 APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD A. Install interior gypsum board in the following locations: 1. Type X: Vertical surfaces unless otherwise indicated. 2. Flexible Type: Apply in double layer at curved assemblies. 3. Ceiling Type: Ceiling surfaces. 4. Type C: Where required for specific fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated. 5. Cement Board: Behind wall tile. B. Single-Layer Application: 1. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to greatest extent possible and at right angles to framing unless otherwise indicated. 2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly, and minimize end joints. a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses of panels. b. At stairwells and other high walls, install panels horizontally unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly. 3. On Z-furring members, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) with no end joints. Locate edge joints over furring members. 4. Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws. C. Multilayer Application: 1. On ceilings, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers before applying base layers on walls/partitions; apply face layers in same sequence. Apply base layers at right angles to framing members and offset face-layer joints one framing member, 16 inches minimum, from parallel base- layer joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly. 2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers and face layers vertically (parallel to framing) with joints of base layers located over stud or furring member and face-layer joints offset at least one stud or furring member with base-layer joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly. Stagger joints on opposite sides of partitions. 3. On Z-furring members, apply base layer vertically (parallel to framing) and face layer either vertically (parallel to framing) or horizontally (perpendicular to framing) with vertical joints offset at least one furring member. Locate edge joints of base layer over furring members. 4. Fastening Methods: Fasten base layers and face layers separately to supports with screws. D. Laminating to Substrate: Where gypsum panels are indicated as directly adhered to a substrate (other than studs, joists, furring members, or base layer of gypsum board), comply with gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations and temporarily brace or fasten gypsum panels until fastening adhesive has set. Denton Fire Station No. 8 GYPSUM BOARD Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 092900-5 August 2019 3.4 APPLYING TILE BACKING PANELS A. Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Panels: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions and install at showers, tubs, and where indicated. Install with 1/4-inch gap where panels abut other construction or penetrations. B. Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A108.11. C. Where tile backing panels abut other types of panels in same plane, shim surfaces to produce a uniform plane across panel surfaces. 3.5 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Control Joints: Install control joints at locations indicated on Drawings according to ASTM C 840 and in specific locations approved by Architect for visual effect. C. Wall: Control joints shall be installed where a wall or partition runs in an uninterrupted straight plane exceeding 30 linear feet, or 900 sq ft. 1. Ceiling with Perimeter relief: Control joints in interior ceilings with perimeter relief shall be installed so that linear dimensions between control joints do not exceed 50 ft or 2500 sq. ft 2. Ceiling, without perimeter relief: Control joints in interior ceilings without perimeter relief shall be installed so that linear dimensions between control joints do not exceed 30 ft 3. Exterior: Control joints in exterior ceilings and soffits shall be installed so that linear dimensions between control joints do not exceed 30 ft. at acoustical or fire-rated walls: Where a control joint occurs in an acoustical or fire rated system, blocking shall be provided behind the control joint by using a backing material such as 5/8 in. type X gypsum panel products, mineral fiber, or other tested equivalent. D. Interior Trim: Install in the following locations: 1. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners unless otherwise indicated. 2. LC-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges. 3. L-Bead: Use where indicated. 4. U-Bead: Use where indicated. E. Aluminum Trim: Install in locations indicated on Drawings. 3.6 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces. B. Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged surface areas. C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except for trim products specifically indicated as not intended to receive tape. D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to ASTM C 840: 1. Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated. 2. Level 2: Panels that are substrate for tile and where indicated on Drawings. 3. Level 3: Beneath wall coverings. 4. Level 5: At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view unless otherwise indicated. 3.7 PROTECTION A. Protect adjacent surfaces from drywall compound and promptly remove from floors and other non-drywall surfaces. Repair surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise damaged during drywall application. B. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period. C. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. 1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. 2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. END OF SECTION Denton Fire Station No. 8 CERAMIC TILING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 093013-1 August 2019 SECTION 093013 – CERAMIC TILING PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Ceramic mosaic tile. 2. Porcelain tile. 3. Glazed wall tile. 4. Stone thresholds. 5. Waterproof membrane. 6. Crack isolation membrane. 7. Metal edge strips. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. General: Definitions in the ANSI A108 series of tile installation standards and in ANSI A137.1 apply to Work of this Section unless otherwise specified. B. ANSI A108 Series: ANSI A108.01, ANSI A108.02, ANSI A108.1A, ANSI A108.1B, ANSI A108.1C, ANSI A108.4, ANSI A108.5, ANSI A108.6, ANSI A108.8, ANSI A108.9, ANSI A108.10, ANSI A108.11, ANSI A108.12, ANSI A108.13, ANSI A108.14, ANSI A108.15, ANSI A108.16, and ANSI A108.17, which are contained in its "Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile." C. Module Size: Actual tile size plus joint width indicated. D. Face Size: Actual tile size, excluding spacer lugs. 1.4 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1. Review requirements in ANSI A108.01 for substrates and for preparation by other trades. 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Shop Drawings: Show locations of each type of tile and tile pattern. Show widths, details, and locations of expansion, contraction, control, and isolation joints in tile substrates and finished tile surfaces. C. Samples for Verification: 1. Full-size units of each type and composition of tile and for each color and finish required. For ceramic mosaic tile in color blend patterns, provide full sheets of each color blend. 2. Assembled samples mounted on a rigid panel, with grouted joints, for each type and composition of tile and for each color and finish required. Make samples at least 12 inches square, but not fewer than four tiles. Use grout of type and in color or colors approved for completed Work. 3. Full-size units of each type of trim and accessory for each color and finish required. 4. Stone thresholds in 6-inch lengths. 5. Metal edge strips in 6-inch lengths. 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer. B. Master Grade Certificates: For each shipment, type, and composition of tile, signed by tile manufacturer and Installer. C. Product Certificates: For each type of product. D. Product Test Reports: For tile-setting and -grouting products and certified porcelain tile. 1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials that match and are from same production runs as products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Tile and Trim Units: Furnish quantity of full-size units equal to 3 percent of amount installed for each type, composition, color, pattern, and size indicated. 2. Grout: Furnish quantity of grout equal to 3 percent of amount installed for each type, composition, and color indicated. 1.8 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Dynamic Coefficient of Friction: For tile installed on walkway surfaces, provide products with the following Denton Fire Station No. 8 CERAMIC TILING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 093013-2 August 2019 values as determined by testing identical products per ANSI 137.1: 1. Level Surfaces: Minimum greater than or equal to 0.42. 1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: 1. Installer is a five-star member of the National Tile Contractors Association or a Trowel of Excellence member of the Tile Contractors' Association of America. 2. Installer's supervisor for Project holds the International Masonry Institute's Foreman Certification. 3. Installer employs Ceramic Tile Education Foundation Certified Installers or installers recognized by the U.S. Department of Labor as Journeyman Tile Layers. B. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Build mockup of each type of floor tile installation. 2. Build mockup of each type of wall tile installation. 3. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact until time of use. Comply with requirements in ANSI A137.1 for labeling tile packages. B. Store tile and cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination can be avoided. D. Store liquid materials in unopened containers and protected from freezing. 1.11 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install tile until construction in spaces is complete and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated in referenced standards and manufacturer's written instructions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Source Limitations for Tile: Obtain tile of each type and color or finish from single source or producer. 1. Obtain tile of each type and color or finish from same production run and of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties for each contiguous area. B. Source Limitations for Setting and Grouting Materials: Obtain ingredients of a uniform quality for each mortar, adhesive, and grout component from single manufacturer and each aggregate from single source or producer. 1. Obtain setting and grouting materials, except for unmodified Portland cement and aggregate, from single manufacturer. 2. Obtain waterproof membrane and crack isolation membrane, except for sheet products, from manufacturer of setting and grouting materials. C. Source Limitations for Other Products: Obtain each of the following products specified in this Section from a single manufacturer: 1. Stone thresholds. 2. Waterproof membrane. 3. Crack isolation membrane. 4. Cementitious backer units. 5. Metal edge strips. 2.2 PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. ANSI Ceramic Tile Standard: Provide tile that complies with ANSI A137.1 for types, compositions, and other characteristics indicated. 1. Provide tile complying with Standard grade requirements unless otherwise indicated. B. ANSI Standards for Tile Installation Materials: Provide materials complying with ANSI A108.02, ANSI standards referenced in other Part 2 articles, ANSI standards referenced by TCNA installation methods specified in tile installation schedules, and other requirements specified. C. Factory Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within ranges, blend tile in factory and package so tile units taken from one package show same range in colors as those taken from other packages and match approved Samples. Denton Fire Station No. 8 CERAMIC TILING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 093013-3 August 2019 D. Mounting: For factory-mounted tile, provide back- or edge-mounted tile assemblies as standard with manufacturer unless otherwise indicated. 1. Where tile is indicated for installation on exteriors or in wet areas, do not use back- or edge- mounted tile assemblies unless tile manufacturer specifies in writing that this type of mounting is suitable for installation indicated and has a record of successful in-service performance. 2.3 TILE PRODUCTS A. Tile: Refer to Finish Schedule. 2.4 THRESHOLDS A. General: Fabricate to sizes and profiles indicated or required to provide transition between adjacent floor finishes. 1. Bevel edges at 1:2 slope, with lower edge of bevel aligned with or up to 1/16 inch above adjacent floor surface. Finish bevel to match top surface of threshold. Limit height of threshold to 1/2 inch or less above adjacent floor surface. B. Marble Thresholds: ASTM C 503/C 503M, with a minimum abrasion resistance of 10 according to ASTM C 1353 or ASTM C 241/C 241M and with honed finish. 1. Description: Uniform, fine- to medium-grained white stone with gray veining. 2. Description: Match Architect's sample. 2.5 WATERPROOF MEMBRANE A. General: Manufacturer's standard product, selected from the following that complies with ANSI A118.10 and is recommended by the manufacturer for the application indicated. Include reinforcement and accessories recommended by manufacturer. B. Fabric-Reinforced, Fluid-Applied Membrane: System consisting of liquid-latex rubber or elastomeric polymer and continuous fabric reinforcement. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, : a. Custom Building Products; 9240 Waterproofing and Anti-Fracture Membrane. b. Laticrete International, Inc.; Laticrete 9235 Waterproof Membrane. c. MAPEI Corporation. (Basis of Design: Mapelastic AquaDefense) 2.6 CRACK ISOLATION MEMBRANE A. General: Manufacturer's standard product, selected from the following, that complies with ANSI A118.12 for high performance and is recommended by the manufacturer for the application indicated. Include reinforcement and accessories recommended by manufacturer. B. Chlorinated Polyethylene Sheet: Non-plasticized, chlorinated polyethylene faced on both sides with nonwoven polyester fabric; 0.030-inch nominal thickness. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. MAPEI Corporation. (Basis of Design: Mapelastic AquaDefense) 2.7 SETTING MATERIALS A. Latex-Portland Cement Mortar (Thinset): ANSI A118.4. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Custom Building Products. b. Laticrete International, Inc. c. MAPEI Corporation. 2. Provide prepackaged, dry-mortar mix combined with acrylic resin or styrene-butadiene- rubber liquid-latex additive at Project site. 3. For wall applications, provide mortar that complies with requirements for non-sagging mortar in addition to the other requirements in ANSI A118.4. B. Medium-Bed, Latex-Portland Cement Mortar (for larger tiles): Comply with requirements in ANSI A118.4. Provide product that is approved by manufacturer for application thickness of 5/8 inch. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Laticrete International, Inc. b. MAPEI Corporation. 2. Provide prepackaged, dry-mortar mix combined with acrylic resin or styrene-butadiene- rubber liquid-latex additive at Project site. C. Portland Cement Mortar (Thickset) Installation Materials: ANSI A108.02. 1. Reinforcing Wire Fabric: Galvanized, welded wire fabric, 2 by 2 inches by 0.062-inch diameter; comply with ASTM A 185 and ASTM A 82 except for minimum wire size. 2. Latex Additive: Manufacturer's standard water emulsion, serving as replacement for part or all of gaging water, of type specifically recommended by latex-additive manufacturer for use with field- Denton Fire Station No. 8 CERAMIC TILING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 093013-4 August 2019 mixed portland cement and aggregate mortar bed. 2.8 GROUT MATERIALS A. Sand-Portland Cement Grout: ANSI A108.10, consisting of white or gray cement and white or colored aggregate as required to produce color indicated. B. Standard Cement Grout: ANSI A118.6. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: a. Custom Building Products. b. Laticrete International, Inc. c. MAPEI Corporation. (Basis of Design: Flexcolor CQ) C. Factory Blended, Polymer-Modified Tile Grout for joints between 1/16 inch and 12 mm: ANSI A118.7. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: a. Bostik, Inc. b. Custom Building Products. c. Laticrete International, Inc. d. MAPEI Corporation. (Basis of Design: Flexcolor CQ) D. Water-Cleanable Epoxy Grout (at Laundry Room): ANSI A118.3. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Bostik, Inc. b. Custom Building Products. c. Laticrete International, Inc. d. MAPEI Corporation (Basis of Design: Kerapoxy IEG CQ 100% Solids Epoxy Grout) 2.9 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Trowel-able Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer of tile-setting materials for installations indicated. B. Metal Edge Strips: Angle or L-shaped, height to match tile and setting-bed thickness, metallic or combination of metal and PVC or neoprene base, designed specifically for flooring applications; stainless- steel, ASTM A 666, 300 Series exposed-edge material. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product by one of the following: a. Schluter Systems L.P. 1) Reno-U: floor tile to concrete slab 2) Jolly: wall tile to shower wall panel C. Tile Cleaner: A neutral cleaner capable of removing soil and residue without harming tile and grout surfaces, specifically approved for materials and installations indicated by tile and grout manufacturers. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where tile will be installed, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1. Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm; dry; clean; free of coatings that are incompatible with tile- setting materials, including curing compounds and other substances that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone; and comply with flatness tolerances required by ANSI A108.01 for installations indicated. 2. Verify that concrete substrates for tile floors installed with thinset mortar comply with surface finish requirements in ANSI A108.01 for installations indicated. a. Verify that surfaces that received a steel trowel finish have been mechanically scarified. b. Verify that protrusions, bumps, and ridges have been removed by sanding or grinding. 3. Verify that installation of grounds, anchors, recessed frames, electrical and mechanical units of work, and similar items located in or behind tile has been completed. 4. Verify that joints and cracks in tile substrates are coordinated with tile joint locations; if not coordinated, adjust joint locations in consultation with Architect. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in concrete substrates for tile floors installed with thinset mortar with trowel-able leveling and patching compound specifically recommended by tile-setting material manufacturer. B. Where indicated, prepare substrates to receive waterproofing by applying a reinforced mortar bed that complies with ANSI A108.1A and is sloped 1/4 inch per foot toward drains. C. Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations, verify that tile has been factory blended and packaged so tile units taken from one package show same range of colors as those taken from other packages and match Denton Fire Station No. 8 CERAMIC TILING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 093013-5 August 2019 approved Samples. If not factory blended, either return to manufacturer or blend tiles at Project site before installing. 3.3 CERAMIC TILE INSTALLATION A. Comply with TCNA's "Handbook for Ceramic, Glass, and Stone Tile Installation" for TCNA installation methods specified in tile installation schedules. Comply with parts of the ANSI A108 series "Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile" that are referenced in TCNA installation methods, specified in tile installation schedules, and apply to types of setting and grouting materials used. 1. For the following installations, follow procedures in the ANSI A108 series of tile installation standards for providing 95 percent mortar coverage: a. Tile floors in wet areas. b. Tile floors consisting of tiles 8 by 8 inches or larger. B. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form complete covering without interruptions unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments. C. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items for straight aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other penetrations so plates, collars, or covers overlap tile. D. Provide manufacturer's standard trim shapes where necessary to eliminate exposed tile edges. E. Where accent tile differs in thickness from field tile, vary setting-bed thickness so that tiles are flush. F. Jointing Pattern: Lay tile in grid pattern unless otherwise indicated. Lay out tile work and center tile fields in both directions in each space or on each wall area. Lay out tile work to minimize the use of pieces that are less than half of a tile. Provide uniform joint widths unless otherwise indicated. 1. For tile mounted in sheets, make joints between tile sheets same width as joints within tile sheets so joints between sheets are not apparent in finished work. 2. Where adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls, or trim are specified or indicated to be same size, align joints. 3. Where tiles are specified or indicated to be whole integer multiples of adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls, or trim, align joints unless otherwise indicated. G. Joint Widths: Unless otherwise indicated, install tile with the following joint widths: 1. Ceramic Mosaic Tile: 1/16 inch. 2. Glazed Wall Tile: 1/16 inch. 3. Porcelain Tile: 1/4 inch. H. Lay out tile wainscots to dimensions indicated or to next full tile beyond dimensions indicated. I. Expansion Joints: Provide expansion joints and other sealant-filled joints, including control, contraction, and isolation joints, where indicated. Form joints during installation of setting materials, mortar beds, and tile. Do not saw-cut joints after installing tiles. 1. Where joints occur in concrete substrates, locate joints in tile surfaces directly above them. J. Stone Thresholds: Install stone thresholds in same type of setting bed as adjacent floor unless otherwise indicated. 1. At locations where mortar bed (thickset) would otherwise be exposed above adjacent floor finishes, set thresholds in latex-portland cement mortar (thinset). 2. Do not extend waterproofing or crack isolation membrane under thresholds set in latex-portland cement mortar. Fill joints between such thresholds and adjoining tile set on waterproofing or crack isolation membrane with elastomeric sealant. K. Metal Edge Strips: Install where exposed edge of tile flooring meets carpet, wood, or other flooring that finishes flush with top of tile. L. Grout Sealer: Apply grout sealer to cementitious grout joints in tile floors according to grout-sealer manufacturer's written instructions. As soon as grout sealer has penetrated grout joints, remove excess sealer and sealer from tile faces by wiping with soft cloth. 3.4 WATERPROOFING INSTALLATION A. Install waterproofing to comply with ANSI A108.13 and manufacturer's written instructions to produce waterproof membrane of uniform thickness that is bonded securely to substrate. B. Allow waterproofing to cure and verify by testing that it is watertight before installing tile or setting materials over it. C. Install waterproofing directly on substrates on entire restroom, shower, laundry room and decon. floors and up vertical walls to a height of 6 inches minimum A.F.F. D. Install waterproofing directly on substrates full height up to ceilings at all shower walls. 3.5 CRACK ISOLATION MEMBRANE INSTALLATION A. Install crack isolation membrane to comply with ANSI A108.17 and manufacturer's written instructions to Denton Fire Station No. 8 CERAMIC TILING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 093013-6 August 2019 produce membrane of uniform thickness that is bonded securely to substrate. B. Allow crack isolation membrane to cure before installing tile or setting materials over it. C. Install crack isolation membrane directly on substrates on entire restroom, shower room, laundry room and decon. floors and up vertical walls to a height of 6 inches minimum A.F.F. D. Install crack isolation membrane directly on substrates full height up to ceilings at all shower walls. 3.6 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Remove and replace tile that is damaged or that does not match adjoining tile. Provide new matching units, installed as specified and in a manner to eliminate evidence of replacement. B. Cleaning: On completion of placement and grouting, clean all ceramic tile surfaces so they are free of foreign matter. 1. Remove grout residue from tile as soon as possible. 2. Clean grout smears and haze from tile according to tile and grout manufacturer's written instructions but no sooner than 10 days after installation. Use only cleaners recommended by tile and grout manufacturers and only after determining that cleaners are safe to use by testing on samples of tile and other surfaces to be cleaned. Protect metal surfaces and plumbing fixtures from effects of cleaning. Flush surfaces with clean water before and after cleaning. 3.7 PROTECTION A. Protect installed tile work with kraft paper or other heavy covering during construction period to prevent staining, damage, and wear. If recommended by tile manufacturer, apply coat of neutral protective cleaner to completed tile walls and floors. B. Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from tiled floors for at least seven days after grouting is completed. C. Before final inspection, remove protective coverings and rinse neutral protective cleaner from tile surfaces. 3.8 INTERIOR CERAMIC TILE INSTALLATION SCHEDULE A. Interior Floor Installations, Concrete Subfloor: 1. Ceramic Tile Installation: TCNA F113; thinset mortar. a. Thinset Mortar: Portland cement mortar. b. Grout: Factory blended, polymer-modified tile grout. 2. Ceramic Tile Installation: TCNA F122; thinset mortar on waterproofing membrane. a. Thinset Mortar: Portland cement mortar. b. Grout: Factory blended, polymer-modified tile grout. 3. Ceramic Tile Installation: TCNA F125A; thinset mortar on crack isolation membrane. a. Thinset Mortar: Portland cement mortar. b. Grout: Factory blended, polymer-modified tile grout. 4. Ceramic Tile Installation: TCNA F121; Cement mortar bed (thickset) on waterproofing membrane; TCA F121 and ANSI A108.1A. a. Thinset Mortar for cured-bed method: Latex portland cement mortar. b. Grout: Factory blended, polymer-modified tile grout. B. Interior Wall Installations, Metal Studs of Furring: 1. Ceramic Tile Installation: TCNA W245 or TCNA W248; thinset mortar on glass-mat, water-resistant gypsum backer board. a. Thinset Mortar: Portland cement mortar. b. Grout: Factory blended, polymer-modified tile grout. C. Shower Receptor and Wall Installations, Metal Studs of Furring: 1. Ceramic Tile Installation: B420; Thinset mortar on coated glass-mat, water resistant backer board. a. Thinset Mortar: Latex portland cement mortar. b. Grout: Factory blended, polymer-modified tile grout. END OF SECTION Denton Fire Station No. 8 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 095113-1 August 2019 SECTION 095113 – ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes acoustical panels and exposed suspension systems for ceilings. 1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, 6 inches in size. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For components with factory-applied color finishes. D. Samples for Verification: For each component indicated and for each exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of size indicated below. 1. Acoustical Panel: Set of 6-inch- square Samples of each type, color, pattern, and texture. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved: 1. Suspended ceiling components. 2. Structural members to which suspension systems will be attached. 3. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical panels. 4. Items penetrating finished ceiling including the following: a. Lighting fixtures. b. Air outlets and inlets. c. Speakers. d. Sprinklers. e. Access panels. 5. Perimeter moldings. B. Product Test Reports: For each acoustical panel ceiling, for tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency. 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For finishes to include in maintenance manuals. 1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Acoustical Ceiling Panels: Full-size panels equal to 2 percent of quantity installed. 2. Suspension-System Components: Quantity of each exposed component equal to 2 percent of quantity installed. 3. Hold-Down Clips: Equal to 2 percent of quantity installed. 4. Impact Clips: Equal to 2 percent of quantity installed. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver acoustical panels, suspension-system components, and accessories to Project site in original, unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed, conditioned space where they will be protected against damage from moisture, humidity, temperature extremes, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes. B. Before installing acoustical panels, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized moisture content. C. Handle acoustical panels carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any way. 1.9 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install acoustical panel ceilings until spaces are enclosed and weatherproof, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. Denton Fire Station No. 8 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 095113-2 August 2019 1. Pressurized Plenums: Operate ventilation system for not less than 48 hours before beginning acoustical panel ceiling installation. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Flame-Spread Index: Comply with ASTM E 1264 for Class A materials. 2. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less. B. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Comply with ASTM E 119; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Indicate design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or from the listings of another qualified testing agency. 2.2 ACOUSTICAL PANELS, GENERAL A. Source Limitations: 1. Acoustical Ceiling Panel: Obtain each type from single source from single manufacturer. 2. Suspension System: Obtain each type from single source from single manufacturer. B. Acoustical Panel Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard panels of configuration indicated that comply with ASTM E 1264 classifications as designated by types, patterns, acoustical ratings, and light reflectances unless otherwise indicated. 1. Mounting Method for Measuring NRC: Type E-400; plenum mounting in which face of test specimen is 15-3/4 inches away from test surface according to ASTM E 795. C. Acoustical Panel Colors and Patterns: Match appearance characteristics indicated for each product type. 1. Where appearance characteristics of acoustical panels are indicated by referencing pattern designations in ASTM E 1264 and not manufacturers' proprietary product designations, provide products selected by Architect from each manufacturer's full range that comply with requirements indicated for type, pattern, color, light reflectance, acoustical performance, edge detail, and size. 2.3 ACOUSTICAL PANELS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. (Basis of Design). 2. CertainTeed Corp. 3. Chicago Metallic Corporation. 4. USG Interiors, Inc.; Subsidiary of USG Corporation. B. Classification: Provide fire-resistance-rated panels complying with ASTM E 1264 for type, form, and pattern as follows: 1. Type and Form: Type III, Form 2, mineral base with painted finish. 2. Type and Form: Type IV, Form 2, mineral base with water-repellant membrane and painted finish. 3. Pattern: Refer to Finish Legend. C. Thickness: 3/4 inch D. Modular Size: 24 by 24 inches. 2.4 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS, GENERAL A. Metal Suspension-System Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard direct-hung metal suspension systems of types, structural classifications, and finishes indicated that comply with applicable requirements in ASTM C 635/C 635M. 1. High-Humidity Finish: Comply with ASTM C 635/C 635M requirements for "Coating Classification for Severe Environment Performance" where high-humidity finishes are indicated. B. Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635/C 635M, Table 1, "Direct Hung," unless otherwise indicated. Comply with seismic design requirements. 1. Anchors in Concrete: Anchors of type and material indicated below, with holes or loops for attaching hangers of type indicated and with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to five times that imposed by ceiling construction, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488 or ASTM E 1512 as applicable, conducted by a qualified testing and inspecting agency. a. Type: anchors. b. Corrosion Protection: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5 (0.005 mm) for Class SC 1 service condition. c. Corrosion Protection: Stainless-steel components complying with ASTM F 593 and ASTM F 594, Group 1 Alloy 304 or 316 for bolts; Alloy 304 or 316 for anchor. d. Corrosion Protection: Components fabricated from nickel-copper-alloy rods complying with ASTM B 164 for UNS No. N04400 alloy. Denton Fire Station No. 8 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 095113-3 August 2019 2. Power-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices for attaching hangers of type indicated and with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 10 times that imposed by ceiling construction, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 1190, conducted by a qualified testing and inspecting agency. C. Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Provide wires complying with the following requirements: 1. Zinc-Coated, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper. 2. Size: Select wire diameter so its stress at three times hanger design load (ASTM C 635/C 635M, Table 1, "Direct Hung") will be less than yield stress of wire, but provide not less than 0.106-inch- diameter wire. D. Hold-Down Clips: Where indicated, provide manufacturer's standard hold-down clips spaced 24 inches o.c. on all cross tees. 2.5 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. (Basis of Design: Prelude XL) 2. CertainTeed Corp. 3. Chicago Metallic Corporation. 4. USG Interiors, Inc.; Subsidiary of USG Corporation. B. Wide-Face, Capped, Double-Web, Steel Suspension System: Main and cross runners roll formed from cold-rolled steel sheet; pre-painted, electrolytically zinc coated, or hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 653/A 653M, not less than G30 coating designation; with prefinished 02/11-inch- wide metal caps on flanges. 1. Structural Classification: Intermediate -duty system. C. End Condition of Cross Runners: Override (stepped) or butt-edge type. 2. Face Design: Flat, flush. 3. Cap Material: Steel cold-rolled sheet. 4. Cap Finish: Painted white. 2.6 METAL EDGE MOLDINGS AND TRIM A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 2. CertainTeed Corp. 3. Chicago Metallic Corporation. 4. Fry Reglet Corporation. 5. Gordon, Inc. 6. USG Interiors, Inc.; Subsidiary of USG Corporation. 2.7 ACOUSTICAL SEALANT A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: a. Pecora Corporation; AC-20 FTR Acoustical and Insulation Sealant. b. USG Corporation; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant. 2. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints: a. Pecora Corporation; AIS-919. b. Tremco, Inc.; Tremco Acoustical Sealant. B. Acoustical Sealant: Manufacturer's standard sealant complying with ASTM C 834 and effective in reducing airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90. 1. Exposed and Concealed Joints: Non-sag, paintable, non-staining latex sealant. 2. Concealed Joints: Nondrying, non-hardening, non-skinning, non-staining, gunnable, synthetic- rubber sealant. 3. Acoustical sealant shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, including structural framing to which acoustical panel ceilings attach or abut, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements specified in this and other Sections that affect ceiling installation and anchorage and with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of acoustical panel ceilings. B. Examine acoustical panels before installation. Reject acoustical panels that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged. Denton Fire Station No. 8 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 095113-4 August 2019 C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width panels at borders, and comply with layout shown on reflected ceiling plans. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install acoustical panel ceilings to comply with ASTM C 636/C 636M and seismic design requirements indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions and CISCA's "Ceiling Systems Handbook." B. Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members and as follows: 1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structure or of ceiling suspension system. 2. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, counter-splaying, or other equally effective means. 3. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with location of hangers at spacings required to support standard suspension-system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent devices. 4. Secure wire hangers to ceiling-suspension members and to supports above with a minimum of three tight turns. Connect hangers directly either to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for substrate and that will not deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures. 5. Do not support ceilings directly from permanent metal forms or floor deck. Fasten hangers to cast- in-place hanger inserts, post-installed mechanical or adhesive anchors, or power-actuated fasteners that extend through forms into concrete. 6. When steel framing does not permit installation of hanger wires at spacing required, install carrying channels or other supplemental support for attachment of hanger wires. 7. Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs. 8. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. Attach hangers to structural members. 9. Space hangers not more than 48 inches o.c. along each member supported directly from hangers unless otherwise indicated; provide hangers not more than 8 inches from ends of each member. 10. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced standards and publications. C. Secure bracing wires to ceiling suspension members and to supports with a minimum of four tight turns. Suspend bracing from building's structural members as required for hangers, without attaching to permanent metal forms, steel deck, or steel deck tabs. Fasten bracing wires into concrete with cast-in- place or post-installed anchors. D. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical panels. 1. Apply acoustical sealant in a continuous ribbon concealed on back of vertical legs of moldings before they are installed. 2. Screw attach moldings to substrate at intervals not more than 16 inches o.c. and not more than 3 inches from ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet. Miter corners accurately and connect securely. 3. Do not use exposed fasteners, including pop rivets, on moldings and trim. E. Install suspension-system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another. Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members. F. Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fit accurately into suspension-system runners and edge moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to provide a neat, precise fit. 1. Arrange directionally patterned acoustical panels as follows: a. As indicated on Reflected Ceiling Plans. 2. For square-edged panels, install panels with edges fully hidden from view by flanges of suspension-system runners and moldings. 3. For reveal-edged panels on suspension-system runners, install panels with bottom of reveal in firm contact with top surface of runner flanges. 4. For reveal-edged panels on suspension-system members with box-shaped flanges, install panels with reveal surfaces in firm contact with suspension-system surfaces and panel faces flush with bottom face of runners. 5. Paint cut edges of panel remaining exposed after installation; match color of exposed panel surfaces using coating recommended in writing for this purpose by acoustical panel manufacturer. 6. Install hold-down clips in areas indicated, in areas required by authorities having jurisdiction, and Denton Fire Station No. 8 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 095113-5 August 2019 for fire-resistance ratings; space as recommended by panel manufacturer's written instructions unless otherwise indicated. 7. Protect lighting fixtures and air ducts to comply with requirements indicated for fire-resistance-rated assembly. 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical panel ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and suspension- system members. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and touchup of minor finish damage. Remove and replace ceiling components that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage. END OF SECTION Denton Fire Station No. 8 CONCRETE FLOOR SEALING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 096116-1 August 2019 SECTION 096116 – CONCRETE FLOOR SEALING PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes: 1. Sealing of concrete floor areas not otherwise scheduled to receive finish floor covering. 2. Cleaning and sealing of existing concrete floors not scheduled to receive finish floor covering. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 1. Include data to indicate chemical, solvent, and detergent resistance. 2. Include information for primer, sealants, accessories and other required components. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For fluid-applied floor sealer to include in maintenance manuals. Include the following: 1. Manufacturer's instructions on maintenance renewal of applied treatments. 2. Protocols and product specifications for joint filing, crack repair and/or surface repair. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing Products specified in this Section with minimum 10 years documented experience. B. Installer Qualifications: An installer (applicator) who is approved, trained, or certified by fluid-applied floor sealer manufacturer. C. Source Limitations: Furnish products from one manufacturer for entire Project, unless otherwise acceptable to Architect. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in manner to prevent damage to containers and bags. B. Store materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions in clean and dry location with temperature between 60 deg F and 90 deg F. C. Keep products away from fire or open flame. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with flooring manufacturer's written instructions for substrate temperature, ambient temperature, humidity, ventilation, and other conditions affecting flooring application. 1. Do not apply flooring until spaces are enclosed and weatherproof; wet work in spaces is complete and dry; and overhead work, including installing mechanical systems, lighting, and athletic equipment, is complete. B. Conditioning Period: Begins not less than 7 days before flooring application, is continuous through application, and continues not less than 3 days after application. 1. After conditioning period, maintain relative humidity and ambient temperature planned for building occupants. C. Ventilate area where sealer is being installed. Post and enforce no smoking and no open flame signs until sealer has cured. D. Lighting: Provide permanent lighting or, if permanent lighting is not in place, simulate permanent lighting conditions during floor sealer application. E. Close spaces to traffic during floor sealer application and for not less than 24 hours after application unless manufacturer recommends a longer period. 1.8 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Sequence work under provisions of Division 01 Section “Construction Progress Documentation.” 1.9 WARRANTY A. Provide warranty signed by manufacturer warranting work to be free from defective materials and workmanship, and agreeing to replace components which fail within 2 years from date of Substantial Completion. 1. Failed materials and workmanship includes spalling, cracking, and delamination. Denton Fire Station No. 8 CONCRETE FLOOR SEALING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 096116-2 August 2019 PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Euclid Chemical 2. Dayton Superior Specialty Chemical Corp. 3. L & M Construction Chemicals, Inc. 2.2 CONCRETE FLOOR SEALER A. Liquid densifier and sealer; Euclid, Euco Diamond Hard. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Joint Sealant Materials: Manufacturer’s recommended sealant compatible with flooring system for type of service and joint condition indicated. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, with Installer (Applicator) present, for conditions affecting performance of sealer including substrate moisture content. B. Examine areas to receive sealer for: 1. Defects in substrate that may affect proper execution of work. 2. Deviations beyond allowable tolerance for concrete slab work. 3. Surface curing agents or sealers that would inhibit bond. 4. Surface defects such as cracks that could transfer through if not corrected. C. Do not begin sealer work until concrete has cured a minimum of 28 days. D. Do not begin work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare Substrates: Tests concrete substrate for pH, contaminants, and moisture content in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Ensure concrete is within manufacturers recommended limits prior to installation. B. Concrete Sub-floors: Verify that concrete slabs comply with ASTM F 710 and the following: 1. Slab substrates are dry and free of curing compounds and other materials that may interfere with bond. 2. Mechanically grind slab to remove surface marks and imperfections and to open pores of concrete surfaces to allow penetration of bonding agent. a. Owner and Architect review and approval required prior to sealer installation. 3. Repair cracks and divots and surface imperfections according to manufacturer’s instructions. 4. Vacuum to remove dust and debris. C. Protect walls, floor openings, equipment, electrical openings, door frames, and other obstructions during installation. 3.3 APPLICATION A. General: Apply flooring components according to manufacturer’s written instructions. B. Apply a minimum of 2 coats in accordance with manufacturer’s recommended coverage rates. 3.4 CURING A. Cure flooring materials according to manufacturer's directions, taking care to prevent contamination during application stages and before completing curing process. 1. Indoor Air Quality Procedures: Ventilate in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean as recommended by manufacturer. Do not use materials or methods which may damage surface or surrounding construction. 1. Cleaner, Maximum VOC Content: In accordance with applicable codes. B. Clean flooring prior to final inspection with materials and procedures recommended by sealer manufacturer. C. Do not permit traffic over finished flooring surfaces. D. Protect flooring from damage and wear during construction operation. END OF SECTION Denton Fire Station No. 8 SPORT FLOORING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 096240-1 August 2019 SECTION 096240 – SPORT FLOORING PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Scope: This work comprises furnishing and complete installation of multipurpose sport flooring to include laying, gluing, and welding. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit samples of the materials to be furnished for approval and color selections by the Architect. B. Provide maintenance instruction literature in addition to warranty documentation specified herein. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The sport flooring installer supply a letter of certification from the flooring materials manufacturer stating that it is a current approved installer. B. A conference meeting with Construction Manager, Flooring Installer, Flooring Materials Representative and the Architect shall be conducted prior to execution of this work. 1.4 PRODUCT DELIVERY A. Floor materials shall not be delivered to the job site until the work of other trades in area to receive flooring has been completed. B. Flooring material shall be stored in up-right position. Never store materials in a horizontal position. 1.5 JOB CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: The building shall be dry and enclosed. Permanent heat, light and ventilation shall be installed and operable. B. Flooring installation shall not begin until the installer is familiar with existing subfloor conditions. All work which would cause damage, dirt, dust or interruption of normal installation shall be completed. C. At least one week prior and during installation the room temperature must be maintained at a minimum of 65 degrees F. The installation area shall be closed to all traffic and activity. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Sport Floor: Shall be Sport Impact 10mm (3/8") thick prefabricated rubber sport flooring with smooth textured pattern as manufactured by Mondo America, Inc. (817-421-7861) or approved equal. 1. Color: Shall be #008 “Black" 2. Finish: Shall be "Sealskin" 3. Roll goods width: 6'-0" B. Underlayment: Shall be Mondo "Everlay" moisture barrier/underlayment. C. Reducer: Roppe #26 D. Track and Cap Transition: Roppe #154 E. Leveling Compound: Quality grade leveling compound as recommended by flooring manufacturer. F. Adhesive: Shall be a two part polyurethane adhesive suitable for adherence of a sheet good to concrete G. Miscellaneous: Provide incidental items required for complete installation. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Examine areas to receive sport flooring for conditions that will adversely affect the execution and quality of work. Do not start this work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. B. Ensure that substrates are dry and exhibit neutral alkalinity. Moisture vapor emission tests (calcium chloride tests in accordance with ADTM F1869-98) are mandatory on various areas of the sub-floor prior to the beginning of installation of sport flooring. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface Preparation: Surfaces shall be completely dry before flooring is laid. 1. Sweep the surfaces clean and free of dirt and remove oil, grease, paint, dried mortar and curing compound residue. 2. Fill cracks, grooves, voids and/or construction joints with leveling compound as approved by flooring manufacturer. High spots on the floor shall be removed by grinding down. Denton Fire Station No. 8 SPORT FLOORING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 096240-2 August 2019 3. Clean floor and apply and float feathering compound to leave smooth, flat, hard surface. Prohibit traffic until the feathering compound has cured. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. The installation of the sport flooring shall be done in accordance with the manufacturer written instructions. 1. Seam joints (heat welding method) as recommended by the manufacturer. 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean sport flooring and replace defective or loose material. Remove any soiling foreign matter. END OF SECTION Denton Fire Station No. 8 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 096513-1 August 2019 SECTION 096513 – RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Resilient base. 2. Resilient molding accessories. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, not less than 12 inches long. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of product indicated. D. Samples for Verification: For each type of product indicated and for each color, texture, and pattern required in manufacturer's standard-size Samples, but not less than 12 inches long. E. Product Schedule: For resilient base and accessory products. Use same designations indicated on Drawings. 1.4 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Furnish not less than 10 linear feet for every 500 linear feet or fraction thereof, of each type, color, pattern, and size of resilient product installed. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Coordinate mockups in this Section with mockups specified in other Sections. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store resilient products and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg F or more than 90 deg F. 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F or more than 95 deg F, in spaces to receive resilient products during the following time periods: 1. 48 hours before installation. 2. During installation. 3. 48 hours after installation. B. After installation and until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg For more than 95 deg F. C. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 THERMOSET-RUBBER BASE A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Roppe Corporation (Basis of Design: Pinnacle) 2. Flexco 3. Burke Mercer Flooring Products, Division of Burke Industries Inc. B. Product Standard: ASTM F 1861, Type TS (rubber, vulcanized thermoset), Group I (solid, homogeneous). 1. Style and Location: a. Style B (standard cove toe base): Provide in areas shown in Drawings. C. Thickness: 0.125 inch. D. Height: 4 inch. E. Lengths: Coils in manufacturer's standard length. F. Outside Corners: Job formed. G. Inside Corners: Job formed. H. Colors: Refer to Finish Schedule. Denton Fire Station No. 8 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 096513-2 August 2019 2.2 RUBBER MOLDING ACCESSORY A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Roppe Corporation (Basis of Design) 2. VPI, LLC, Floor Products Division. B. Description: Rubber carpet edge for glue-down applications, stair nosing for carpet, reducer strip for resilient flooring, joiner for tile and carpet transition strips. C. Profile and Dimensions: Refer to Finish Schedule. D. Locations: Provide rubber molding accessories in areas indicated. E. Colors and Patterns: Refer to Finish Schedule. 2.3 INSTALLATION MATERIALS A. Trowel-able Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by resilient-product manufacturer for applications indicated. B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by resilient-product manufacturer for resilient products and substrate conditions indicated. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of resilient products. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 1. Installation of resilient products indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient products. B. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowel-able leveling and patching compound; remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate. C. Do not install resilient products until they are the same temperature as the space where they are to be installed. 1. At least 48 hours in advance of installation, move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed. D. Immediately before installation, sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products. 3.3 RESILIENT BASE INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient base. B. Apply resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required. C. Install resilient base in lengths as long as practical without gaps at seams and with tops of adjacent pieces aligned. D. Tightly adhere resilient base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates. E. Do not stretch resilient base during installation. F. On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of resilient base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material. G. Preformed Corners: Install preformed corners before installing straight pieces. H. Job-Formed Corners: 1. Outside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible and form with returns not less than 3 inches in length. a. Form without producing discoloration (whitening) at bends. 2. Inside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible and form with returns not less than 3 inches in length. a. Miter corners to minimize open joints. 3.4 RESILIENT ACCESSORY INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient accessories. B. Resilient Molding Accessories: Butt to adjacent materials and tightly adhere to substrates throughout length of each piece. Install reducer strips at edges of floor covering that would otherwise be exposed. Denton Fire Station No. 8 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 096513-3 August 2019 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protecting resilient products. B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient-product installation: 1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces. 2. Sweep and vacuum horizontal surfaces thoroughly. 3. Damp-mop horizontal surfaces to remove marks and soil. C. Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. D. Floor Polish: Remove soil, visible adhesive and surface blemishes from resilient stair treads before applying liquid floor polish. 1. Apply three coat(s). E. Cover resilient products subject to wear and foot traffic until Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION Denton Fire Station No. 8 TILE CARPETING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 096813-1 August 2019 SECTION 096813 – TILE CARPETING PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Modular carpet tile. 1.3 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETING A. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1. Review methods and procedures related to carpet tile installation including, but not limited to, the following: a. Review delivery, storage, and handling procedures. b. Review ambient conditions and ventilation procedures. c. Review subfloor preparation procedures. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 1. Include manufacturer's written data on physical characteristics, durability, and fade resistance. 2. Include installation recommendations for each type of substrate. B. Shop Drawings: Show the following: 1. Columns, doorways, enclosing walls or partitions, built-in cabinets, and locations where cutouts are required in carpet tiles. 2. Carpet tile type, color, and dye lot. 3. Type of subfloor. 4. Type of installation. 5. Pattern of installation. 6. Pile direction. 7. Type, color, and location of insets and borders. 8. Type, color, and location of edge, transition, and other accessory strips. 9. Transition details to other flooring materials. C. Samples: For each type of product indicated. 1. Include manufacturer's written data on physical characteristics, durability, and fade resistance. 2. Include installation recommendations for each type of substrate. 1.5 INFORMATION SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer. B. Product Test Reports: For carpet tile, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency. 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For carpet tiles to include in maintenance manuals. Include the following: 1. Methods for maintaining carpet tile, including cleaning and stain-removal products and procedures and manufacturer's recommended maintenance schedule. 2. Precautions for cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to carpet tile. 1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Carpet Tile: Full-size units equal to 5 percent of amount installed for each type indicated, but not less than 10 sq. yd. 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who is certified by the International Certified Floorcovering Installers Association at the Commercial II certification level. B. Fire-Test-Response Ratings: Where indicated, provide carpet tile identical to those of assemblies tested for fire response according to NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency. C. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation. 1. Build mockups at locations and in sizes shown on Drawings. 2. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Denton Fire Station No. 8 TILE CARPETING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 096813-2 August 2019 Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with CRI 104. 1.10 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Comply with CRI 104 for temperature, humidity, and ventilation limitations. B. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install carpet tiles until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. C. Do not install carpet tiles over concrete slabs until slabs have cured and are sufficiently dry to bond with adhesive and concrete slabs have pH range recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. D. Where demountable partitions or other items are indicated for installation on top of carpet tiles, install carpet tiles before installing these items. 1.11 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty for Carpet Tiles: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of carpet tile installation that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of carpet tile due to unusual traffic, failure of substrate, vandalism, or abuse. 2. Failures include, but are not limited to, more than 10 percent edge raveling, snags, runs, dimensional stability, excess static discharge, loss of tuft bind strength, loss of face fiber, and delamination. 3. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 CARPET TILE A. Basis of Design Product: Refer to Finish Schedule. 2.2 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES A. Trowel-able Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. B. Adhesives: Water-resistant, mildew-resistant, non-staining, pressure-sensitive type to suit products and subfloor conditions indicated, that complies with flammability requirements for installed carpet tile and is recommended by carpet tile manufacturer for releasable installation. 1. Adhesives shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content, alkalinity range, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting carpet tile performance. Examine carpet tile for type, color, pattern, and potential defects. B. Concrete Subfloors: Verify that concrete slabs comply with ASTM F 710 and the following: 1. Slab substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, hardeners, and other materials that may interfere with adhesive bond. Determine adhesion and dryness characteristics by performing bond and moisture tests recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. 2. Subfloor finishes comply with requirements specified in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for slabs receiving carpet tile. 3. Subfloors are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits. 4. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners. 5. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents. 6. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing. 7. Moisture Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer and as follows. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing. a. Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test, ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft. in 24 hours. Denton Fire Station No. 8 TILE CARPETING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 096813-3 August 2019 b. Perform relative humidity test using in situ probes, ASTM F 2170. Proceed with installation only after substrates have a maximum 75 percent relative humidity level measurement. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 6.2, "Site Conditions; Floor Preparation," and with carpet tile manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparing substrates indicated to receive carpet tile installation. B. Use trowel-able leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer's written instructions, to fill cracks, holes, depressions, and protrusions in substrates. Fill or level cracks, holes and depressions 1/8 inch wide or wider and protrusions more than 1/32 inch unless more stringent requirements are required by manufacturer's written instructions. C. Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, without using solvents. Use mechanical methods recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer. D. Clean metal substrates of grease, oil, soil and rust, and prime if directed by adhesive manufacturer. Rough sand painted metal surfaces and remove loose paint. Sand aluminum surfaces, to remove metal oxides, immediately before applying adhesive. E. Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before installing carpet tile. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 14, "Carpet Modules," and with carpet tile manufacturer's written installation instructions. B. Installation Method: As recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer. C. Maintain dye lot integrity. Do not mix dye lots in same area. D. Cut and fit carpet tile to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. Bind or seal cut edges as recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. E. Extend carpet tile into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open-bottomed obstructions, removable flanges, alcoves, and similar openings. F. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use nonpermanent, non-staining marking device. G. Install pattern parallel to walls and borders. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Perform the following operations immediately after installing carpet tile: 1. Remove excess adhesive, seam sealer, and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. 2. Remove yarns that protrude from carpet tile surface. 3. Vacuum carpet tile using commercial machine with face-beater element with HEPA filter. B. Protect installed carpet tile to comply with CRI 104, Section 16, "Protecting Indoor Installations." C. Protect carpet tile against damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during the remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer. END OF SECTION Denton Fire Station No. 8 ACOUSTICAL BLANKET INSULATION Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 098116-1 August 2019 SECTION 098116 – ACOUSTICAL BLANKET INSULATION PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Concealed building insulation. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 09 Sections "Gypsum Board Assemblies" for installation in metal-framed assemblies of insulation specified by reference to this Section. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of building insulation through one source. B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide insulation and related materials with the fire-test-response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 1. Surface-Burning Characteristics: ASTM E 84. 2. Fire-Resistance Ratings: ASTM E 119. 3. Combustion Characteristics: ASTM E 136. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Glass-Fiber Insulation: a. CertainTeed Corporation b. Johns Manville Corporation c. Owens Corning d. Knauf Insulation 2. Slag-Wool-/Rock-Wool-Fiber Insulation: a. Fibrex Insulations Inc. b. Owens Corning c. Thermafiber 2.2 INSULATING MATERIALS A. General: Provide insulating materials that comply with requirements and with referenced standards. 1. Preformed Units: Sizes to fit applications indicated x full thickness of stud; selected from manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths. B. Unfaced Glass-Fiber Blanket Insulation (in walls): ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting of fibers manufactured from slag or rock wool; with maximum flame-spread and smoke- developed indices of 25 and 50, respectively; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics. C. Unfaced, Flexible Glass-Fiber Board Insulation (above ceilings): ASTM C 612, Type IA; ASTM C 553, Types I, II, and III; or ASTM C 665, Type I; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indices of 25 and 50, respectively; and of the following properties: 1. Nominal density of 1.0 lb/cu. ft., thermal resistivity of 3.7 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu x in. at 75 deg F. 2. Nominal density of not less than 1.5 lb/cu. ft. nor more than 1.7 lb/cu. ft., thermal resistivity of 4 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu x in. at 75 deg F. 3. Combustion Characteristics: Passes ASTM E 136. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for Sections in which substrates and related work are specified and other conditions affecting performance. Denton Fire Station No. 8 ACOUSTICAL BLANKET INSULATION Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 098116-2 August 2019 B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean substrates of substances harmful to insulations or vapor retarders, including removing projections capable of puncturing vapor retarders or of interfering with insulation attachment. 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and application indicated. B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed at any time to ice and snow. C. Extend insulation in thickness indicated to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement. D. Water-Piping Coordination: If water piping is located on inside of insulated exterior walls, coordinate location of piping to ensure that it is placed on warm side of insulation and insulation encapsulates piping. E. Apply insulation in full width of cavity. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF GENERAL BUILDING INSULATION A. Install mineral-fiber blankets in cavities formed by framing members according to the following requirements: 1. Use blanket widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing members. If more than one length is required to fill cavity, provide lengths that will produce a snug fit between ends. 2. Place blankets in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between edges of insulation and adjoining framing members. 3. For metal-framed wall cavities where cavity heights exceed 96 inches, support unfaced blankets mechanically and support faced blankets by taping stapling flanges to flanges of metal studs. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Protect installed insulation and vapor retarders from damage due to harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation is subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after installation. END OF SECTION Denton Fire Station No. 8 PAINTING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 099100-1 August 2019 SECTION 099100 – PAINTING PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Related Documents: General and Supplementary Conditions of the Contract, Division 01 General Requirements, and Drawings are applicable to this Section. B. Section Includes: 1. Complete interior and exterior surface preparation and finishing for field application of latex based coatings, and requirements for field finishing mechanical and electrical equipment. 2. Examine specifications for various other trades and their provisions regarding their painting. Surfaces that are left unfinished by other sections of the specifications shall be painted or finished as a part of this Section. 3. Colors, including deep tones, will be selected by the Architect. Number of colors to be used on job will be determined by Architect. 1.2 SURFACES NOT TO RECEIVE FIELD FINISHING A. Do not paint copper, bronze, chrome plated items, nickel, stainless steel, Monel metal, lead, face brick, prefinished wall, ceiling, and floor coverings, items with factory applied final finish (except where exposed on roofs and in finished spaces), elevator shafts, crawl spaces, chases, and plenums above suspended ceilings unless otherwise specified or scheduled. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Conform to ASTM D16 for interpretation of terms used in this Section. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Product Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing quality paint and finish products with 3 years’ experience. B. Applicator: Company specializing in commercial painting and finishing with 2 years’ experience. C. Product Labels: Include manufacturer's name, type of paint, stock number, color and label analysis on label of containers. 1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable building code for flame spread/fuel contribution/smoke development rating requirements for finishes. B. Comply with applicable city, county, state, and federal requirements and ordinances regarding maximum VOC (Volatile Organic Compound) content of all coatings. 1.6 TESTS A. Provide periodic testing with W et Film Thickness gage to verify that proper thickness of finish coatings are being applied. 1.7 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data under provisions of Section 013300. B. Provide product data describing physical performance criteria and composition on all finishing products. C. Submit color selection samples under provisions of Section 013300. D. Submit 2 samples, 12 by 12 inches in size illustrating range of colors and textures selected for each surface finishing product scheduled. E. Submit manufacturer's application instructions under provisions of Section 013300. F. Submit certification from manufacturer of coatings listing all products proposed for each. Certify that each product meets current applicable regulations and ordinances regarding maximum VOC content. 1.8 FIELD SAMPLES A. Provide field samples under provisions of Section 014000. B. Provide field sample panel, 96 inches long by 96 inches wide, illustrating each coating color, texture, and finish intended for use. C. Locate where directed. D. Accepted sample may remain as part of the Work. 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to site under provisions of Section 016000. Denton Fire Station No. 8 PAINTING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 099100-2 August 2019 B. Store and protect products under provisions of Section 016000. C. Deliver products to site in sealed and labeled containers; inspect to verify acceptance. D. Container labeling to include manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, brand code, coverage, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup, color designation, and instructions for mixing and reducing. E. Store paint materials at minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F and a maximum of 90 degrees F, in well ventilated area, unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions. F. Take precautionary measures to prevent fire hazards and spontaneous combustion. 1.10 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not apply materials when surface and ambient temperatures are outside the ranges required by paint manufacturer. B. Provide continuous ventilation and heating facilities to maintain surface and ambient temperatures above 45 degrees F for 24 hours before, during, and 48 hours after application of finishes, unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions. C. Do not apply exterior coatings during rain or snow, or when relative humidity is above 75 percent, unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions. D. Minimum Application Temperatures for Latex Paints: 45 degrees F for interiors; 50 degrees F for exterior; unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions. E. Minimum Application Temperature for Varnish and Finishes: 65 degrees F for interior or exterior, unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions. F. Provide lighting level of 80 ft candles measured mid- height at substrate surface. 1.11 EXTRA STOCK A. Provide a 5 gallon container of each color to Owner. B. Label each container with color, number, texture, and room locations, in addition to the manufacturer's label. C. Furnish under provisions of Section 017700. 1.12 SCAFFOLDS AND PROTECTION A. Provide adequate safe ladders, scaffolds, and stages necessary to complete work. B. Protect completed finish and paint work, and protect adjacent finish surfaces from paint splatter, spills and stains. Use adequate drop cloths and masking procedures during progress of work. 1.13 PRECAUTIONS A. Do not store paints, oils, thinners and other flammable items inside the building and shall be stored in approved containers when not in actual use during the painting job. The fire hazard shall be kept at a minimum. B. Precaution shall be taken to protect the public and construction workers during the progress of the work. C. Furnish a temporary fire extinguisher of suitable chemicals and capacity, located near flammable materials. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements indicated, provide products of one of the following: 1. Sherwin-Williams. B. Materials selected for coating systems for each type surface shall be product of a single manufacturer unless otherwise specified. Secondary products such as linseed oil, turpentine and shellacs shall be first quality products of a reputable manufacturer. C. Products specified in Schedule are of Glidden Professional as a standard of quality unless otherwise noted. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Coatings: Ready mixed. Process pigments to a soft paste consistency, capable of being readily and uniformly dispersed to a homogeneous coating with good flow and brushing properties; capable of drying or curing free of streaks or sags. B. Accessory Materials: Linseed oil, shellac, turpentine, paint thinners and other materials not specifically indicated but required to achieve the finishes specified, of commercial quality. C. Patching Materials: Latex filler. 2.3 FINISHES A. Color: Refer to Finish Schedule. Denton Fire Station No. 8 PAINTING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 099100-3 August 2019 2.4 INTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE A. Drywall (Gypsum): 1. Acrylic Latex: a. Sherwin-Williams: 1 coat High Build Latex Primer B28W 8601, 2 coats Sherwin-Williams ProMar 200 Zero VOC. B. Wood Base and Trim (opaque): 1. Acrylic Latex: a. Sherwin-Williams: 1 coat Premium W all & Wood Primer B28W 8111, 2 coats Sherwin- Williams ProMar 200 Zero VOC. C. Wood Base and Trim (transparent): 1. Water-Based Varnish: a. Sherwin-Williams: 1 coat Wood Classics Oil Stain A49-200 Series, 2 coats Sherwin-Williams Wood Classics Waterborne Polyurethane Varnish A68 Series. D. CMU, Concrete Block: a. Sherwin-Williams: 1 coat Cement-Plex B42W 200/B42V201 primer, 2 coats Sherwin- Williams Water Based Catalyzed Epoxy B70 Series. E. Galvanized Metal: 1. High Performance Coating, Water-Based Acrylic a. Sherwin-Williams: Semi-Gloss 2 coats Sherwin-Williams Zero VOC Acrylic Semi-Gloss B66- 650 Series. F. Shop Primed Ferrous Metal: 1. High Performance Coating, Water-Based Acrylic: a. Sherwin-Williams: Semi-Gloss 2 coats Sherwin-Williams Zero VOC Acrylic Semi-Gloss B66- 650 Series. G. Handrails, Stairs, and Guardrails: 1. High Performance Coating, Urethane: a. Sherwin-Williams: 1 coat Recoatable Epoxy Primer B67A5, 2 coats Sherwin-Williams Hi- Solids Polyurethane, B65W 351 Series. H. Decking (Pre-primed/Pre-finished), Bar Joists (Shop Primed): 1. Water-Based Acrylic Dry Fall: a. Sherwin-Williams: 2 coats Low VOC Waterborne Acrylic Dryfall Flat B42W 81 over prepared substrate. 2.5 EXTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE A. Structural Iron and Ferrous Steel. 1. Urethane High Performance Coating: a. Sherwin-Williams: 1 coat Water-based Tile Clad Epoxy Primer B73A200, 2 coats Sherwin- Williams Acrolon 218 HS Acrylic Polyurethane B65-650 topcoat. B. Shop Primed Metal Doors, Trim, Panels and Miscellaneous Surfaces: 1. High Performance Coating, Urethane: (rust inhibitive, UV stable) a. Sherwin-Williams: 1 coat Recoatable Epoxy Primer B67A5, 2 coats Acrolon 218 HS Polyurethane B65W 611. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that surfaces and substrates are ready to receive work as instructed by the product manufacturer. B. Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to commencement of work. Report to Architect any condition that may potentially affect proper application. C. Measure moisture content of surfaces using an electronic moisture meter. Do not apply finishes unless moisture content of surfaces are below the following maximums 1. Plaster and Gypsum Wallboard: 12 percent. 2. Masonry, Concrete, and Concrete Unit Masonry: 12 percent. 3. Interior Located Wood: 15 percent, measured in accordance with ASTM D2016. 4. Exterior Located Wood: 15 percent, measured in accordance with ASTM D2016. 5. Concrete Floors: 8 percent. D. Test shop applied primers for compatibility with subsequent cover materials. E. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing surfaces and substrate. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Remove electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim, and fittings prior to preparing surfaces or finishing. B. Correct minor defects and clean surfaces which affect work of this Section. Remove existing coatings Denton Fire Station No. 8 PAINTING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 099100-4 August 2019 which exhibit loose surface defects. C. Shellac and seal marks which may bleed through surface finishes. D. Impervious Surfaces: Remove mildew by scrubbing with solution of tri-sodium phosphate and bleach. Rinse with clean water and allow surface to dry. E. Aluminum Surfaces Scheduled for Paint Finish: Remove surface contamination by steam or high pressure water. Remove oxidation with acid etch and solvent washing. Apply etching primer immediately following cleaning. F. Insulated Coverings: Remove dirt, grease, and oil from canvas and cotton. G. Concrete Floors: Remove contamination, acid etch, and rinse floors with clear water. Verify required acid- alkali balance is achieved. Allow to dry. H. Gypsum Board Surfaces: Latex fill minor defects. Spot prime defects after repair. I. Galvanized Surfaces: Remove surface contamination and oils and wash with solvent. Apply coat of etching primer. J. Concrete and Unit Masonry Surfaces Scheduled to Receive Paint Finish: Remove dirt, loose mortar, scale, salt or alkali powder, and other foreign matter. Remove oil and grease with a solution of tri- sodium phosphate; rinse well and allow to dry. Remove stains caused by weathering of corroding metals with a solution of sodium metasilicate after thoroughly wetting with water. Allow to dry. K. Uncoated Steel and Iron Surfaces: Remove grease, scale, dirt, and rust. W here heavy coatings of scale are evident, remove by wire brushing or sandblasting; clean by washing with solvent. Apply a treatment of phosphoric acid solution, ensuring weld joints, bolts, and nuts are similarly cleaned. Spot prime paint after repairs. L. Shop Primed Steel Surfaces: Sand and scrape to remove loose primer and rust. Feather edges to make touch-up patches inconspicuous. Clean surfaces with solvent. Prime bare steel surfaces. M. Interior Wood Items Schedule to Receive Transparent Finish: Wipe off dust and grit prior to sealing, seal knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections with sealer. Fill nail holes and cracks after sealer has dried; sand lightly between coats. N. Exterior Wood Scheduled to Receive Transparent Finish: Remove dust, grit, and foreign matter; seal knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections with sealer. Fill nail holes with tinted exterior caulking compound after sealer has been applied. O. Shop Finished Items: Finish in accordance with AW I standards and guide lines. P. Metal Doors Scheduled for Painting: Seal top and bottom edges with primer. 3.3 SURFACE PREPARATION OF PREVIOUSLY COATED SURFACES A. General: 1. Remove cracked and deteriorated sealants and calking. 2. Remove chalk deposits and loose, blistered, peeling, scaling, or crazed finish to bare base material or sound substrate by scraping and sanding. 3. Wash surfaces with solution of TSP to remove wax, oil, grease, and other foreign material; rinse, and allow to dry. Exercise caution that TSP solution does not soften existing coating. 4. Abrade glossy surfaces by sanding or wiping with liquid de-glosser. 5. Remove mildew as specified above. 6. Test compatibility of existing coatings by applying new coating to small, inconspicuous area. If new coatings lift or blister existing coatings, request recommendation from Architect. 7. Apply specified primer to surfaces scheduled to receive coatings. B. Gypsum Wallboard: 1. Fill cracks and voids with spackling compound. 2. Apply primer over bare surfaces and newly applied texture coatings. C. Metal: 1. Remove rust from surfaces to bare metal in accordance with SP3 "Power Tool Cleaning". 2. Exercise care not to remove galvanizing. 3. Complete preparation as specified for new work. D. Wood: 1. Fill cracks, crevices and nail holes with putty or wood filler. 2. Apply primer over bare surfaces and filler material. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Protect elements surrounding the work of this Section from damage or disfiguration. B. Repair damage to other surfaces caused by work of this Section. C. Furnish drop cloths, shields, and protective methods to prevent spray or droppings from disfiguring other surfaces. D. Remove empty paint containers from site. Denton Fire Station No. 8 PAINTING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 099100-5 August 2019 3.5 APPLICATION A. The intent of these Specifications is to produce the highest quality appearance of paint and finish surfaces. Employ skilled mechanics only. The proper preparation of all surfaces will be strictly enforced and wherever finished surfaces show any defects due to improper preparation, workmanship, etc., the defects shall be removed and the work refinished at the expense of the Contractor. B. Apply products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Final finish coats shall have visual evidence of solid hiding and uniform appearance, and shall be free and smooth of brush marks, streaks, sags, runs, laps, or skipped areas. C. Do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not dry. D. Apply each coat to uniform finish and thickness. E. Apply each coat of paint slightly darker than preceding coat unless otherwise approved. F. Wet sand (or use vacuum sander) lightly between coats on wood and metal items to achieve required finish. G. Allow applied coat to dry before next coat is applied. H. Where clear finishes are required, tint fillers to match wood. Work fillers into the grain before set. Wipe excess from surface. I. Prime back surfaces of interior and exterior woodwork scheduled to be painted with primer paint. J. Prime back surfaces of interior woodwork scheduled to receive stain or varnish finish with gloss varnish reduced 25 percent with mineral spirits. K. Edges of paint adjoining other materials or colors shall be sharp and clean with no overlapping. 3.6 FINISHING MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT A. Paint all shop primed equipment. Paint shop prefinished items where exposed to view in finished spaces. In mechanical rooms, repair shop pre-finished coatings which have been scratched or otherwise damaged with identical touch-up paint. Sand prior to touching up as required. B. Remove unfinished louvers, grilles, covers, and access panels on mechanical and electrical components and paint separately. C. Paint all grilles, registers, diffusers, and speaker grilles to match adjacent wall and ceiling surfaces, except that factory pre-finished items need not be painted if installed in a suspended acoustical ceiling system where the acoustical panels match the mechanical or electrical item color. D. In all finished spaces, prime and paint exposed pipes, conduit, boxes, ducts, hangers, brackets, collars and supports. Paint to match adjacent surfaces. E. Repair or replace identification markings on mechanical or electrical equipment when painted accidentally. F. Paint interior surfaces of air ducts and convectors that are visible through grilles and louvers with one coat of flat black paint, to limit of sight line. Paint dampers exposed behind louvers, grilles, and convector to match face panels. G. Paint all surfaces of plywood backboards for electrical and telephone equipment before installing equipment. H. Replace electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim, and fittings removed prior to finishing. I. Paint exposed air handlers, roof ventilators, goose necks, exhaust fans and other items on the roof with 2 coats exterior enamel. Prepare surfaces in accordance with the base metal or primer as specified herein. J. Paint concrete support bases with gray floor deck enamel. K. Pipe hangers and other supports need not be painted except where installed in crawl spaces, where they shall be painted with a thick coat of asphaltic paint. L. Electrostatically paint vehicle exhaust removal and filtration units as specified in Section 233516. 3.7 CLEANING/TOUCH-UP A. As Work proceeds, promptly remove paint where spilled, splashed, or spattered. B. During progress of Work maintain premises free of unnecessary accumulation of tools, equipment, surplus materials, and debris. C. Collect cotton waste, cloths, and material which may constitute a fire hazard, place in closed metal containers and remove daily from site. D. Spot painting will be allowed to correct soiled or damaged paint surfaces only when touch-up spot will blend into surrounding finish and is invisible to normal viewing (as determined by the Architect). Otherwise, re-coat entire section to corners or to a visible stopping point. 3.8 V.O.C. (VOLATILE ORGANIC COMPOUND) COMPLIANCE A. Products listed in following schedule and/or substitutes proposed for use by Contractor must be formulated to meet all applicable ordinances and regulations regarding maximum V.O.C. content. Utilize products which have been specially formulated to need such requirements. END OF SECTION Denton Fire Station No. 8 DECORATIVE EXTERIOR FINISH SYSTEM Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 099450-1 August 2019 SECTION 099450 – DECORATIVE EXTERIOR FINISH SYSTEM PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes surface preparation and field application of elastomeric decorative exterior finish system (DEFS) consisting of base coat, reinforcing mesh and finish coat to the following: 1. Exterior soffits. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Factory Mutual Class I Rating. B. ASTM E 84 Flame spread classification 0 to 10. 1.4 QUALIFICATIONS A. Installer: Minimum of 5 years experience and manufacturer’s written approval on manufacturer’s company letterhead. B. Manufacturer: 1. Minimum of 5 years experience producing component materials for system installed in this country. 2. Member of Exterior Insulation Manufacturers Association (EIMA). C. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain approved DEFS system materials from a single manufacturer. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. Indicate project specific details identifying transitions to dissimilar materials and other representations to evaluate the proposed system installation requirements. B. Product Data: Submit copies of manufacturer’s product data sheets and printed installation instructions for each product proposed for use in accordance with Section 013000. C. Samples: Submit three 1’-0” by 1’-0” samples of selected finish color and texture for approval by Architect. D. Maintenance Kit: Supply maintenance kit, with unopened containers to repair a minimum of 20 square foot area. E. Test reports certifying entire system has passed ASTM E 84 and ASTM E 108, modified for vertical walls for Class A. 1.6 MOCK-UP A. Provide under provisions of Section 014000. B. Construct one field sample panel, of size required to illustrate color and texture of the final coating. 1. Obtain Architect’s acceptance of mock-up’s visual qualities before start of final work. 1.7 PRODUCT DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. Deliver and store products in original unopened packaging with legible manufacturer’s identification, in accordance with Section 016000. B. Store products in a cool (not less than 40 degrees F) dry place out of direct sunlight, protected from the elements and from damage, in accordance with Section 016000. 1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Weather and Environmental Conditions: 1. Application of the system shall not take place during inclement weather unless appropriate protection is employed. 2. Installation of wet materials in temperatures less than 40 degrees F shall take place only if supplementary heat is provided and is maintained for a minimum of 24 hours after application of the wet materials. B. Protection: 1. Protect surrounding areas and surfaces during application of wall system. 1.9 WARRANTY A. Provide 5 year labor and material warranty. B. Installer: Provide 2 year warranty on workmanship related to DEFS application C. Warranty to cover: 1. Material defects including but not limited to, peeling, cracking, delamination, flaking, finish degradation or similar failures. Denton Fire Station No. 8 DECORATIVE EXTERIOR FINISH SYSTEM Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 099450-2 August 2019 PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements herein, provide products from one of the following:. 1. BASF Senergy (Basis of Design) 2. Parex USA, Inc. 3. Dryvit Systems, Inc. 4. Sto Corporation. B. Acceptable Products: 1. Direct Finish System for Soffits and Ceilings by BASF Senergy. C. Substitutions: Submit in accordance with Section 012500. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Base Coat: 100 percent acrylic-based providing a high-build leveling coat. 1. Acceptable Product: Senerflex Standard Base Coat by BASF Senergy. B. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I, II, or I/II, grey or white; fresh and free of lumps and as approved by DEFS system manufacturer. C. Water: Clean and potable. D. Reinforcing Mesh: Balanced, open weave, glass fiber reinforcing mesh; twisted multi-end strands treated for compatibility with DEFS system components. 1. Acceptable Product: Flexguard 4, standard weight, 4 oz. by BASF Senergy. E. Primer: A 100 percent acrylic-based primer that helps alleviate shadowing and enhances performance of the DEFS system. Color to closely match the selected finish coat color. 1. Acceptable Product: Tinted Primer by BASF F. Finish Coat: Factory-mixed, 100 percent acrylic polymer finish with advanced technology to improve long- term performance and dirt pick-up resistance; air cured, compatible with base coat. 1. Acceptable Product: Senerflex by BASF Senergy. a. Finish Texture: Fine. b. Finish Color: As scheduled on Drawings. G. Reglets and Vents: Refer to Section 092900. 2.3 MIXING AND PREPARATION A. Perform according to manufacturer’s recommendations. B. No additives are permitted unless specified. Prepare in a container that is clean and free of foreign substances. Do not use a container which has contained or been cleaned with a petroleum-based product. Clean tools with soap and water immediately after use. C. Base Coat: Mix base coat with a clean, rust-free paddle and drill until thoroughly blended, before adding Portland cement. Mix one part (by weight) Portland cement with one part base coat. Add Portland cement in small increments, mixing until thoroughly blended after each additional increment. Clean, potable water may be added to adjust workability. D. Primer: Mix the factory-prepared material with a clean, rust-free paddle and drill until thoroughly blended. A small amount of clean, potable water may be added to adjust workability. Do not overwater. E. Finish Coat: Mix the factory-prepared material with a clean, rust-free paddle and drill until thoroughly blended. A small amount of clean, potable water may be added to adjust workability. Do not overwater. 1. Use no additives such as rapid binders, antifreeze, or accelerators. 2. Finish Coating: Use immediately after mixing. Keep containers closed when not in use. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for the installation of materials. If unsatisfactory conditions exist, report them in writing to the Architect and do not commence any installation until such conditions have been corrected. B. Examine surfaces to receive the system for: 1. Substrates contrary to recommendations of the system manufacturer. 2. Defects such as coatings on the substrate that will adversely affect the execution and quality of work. 3. Deviations beyond allowable tolerances for installation of substrate material. The substrate shall have no plan or irregularities greater than 1/8 inch over 10 foot dimension. 4. Confirm manufacturer’s current requirements for control joint placement. 3.2 APPLICATION A. General: Install in accordance with system manufacturer’s printed instructions. Denton Fire Station No. 8 DECORATIVE EXTERIOR FINISH SYSTEM Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 099450-3 August 2019 B. Base Coat /Reinforcing Mesh: 1. Base coat shall be applied to achieve reinforcing mesh embedment with no reinforcing mesh color visible. C. Standard Impact Reinforcing Mesh: 1. Install where indicated on Drawings. 2. Apply mixed base coat to entire surface with a stainless steel trowel to embed the reinforcing mesh. 3. Immediately place reinforcing mesh against wet base coat and embed the reinforcing mesh into the base coat by troweling from the center to the edges. 4. Lap reinforcing mesh 2-1/2” (64 mm) minimum at edges. 5. Ensure reinforcing mesh is continuous at corners, void of wrinkles and embedded in base coat so that no reinforcing mesh color is visible. 6. If required, apply a second layer of base coat to achieve total nominal base coat/reinforcing mesh thickness of 1/16” (1.6 mm). 7. Allow base coat with embedded reinforcing mesh to dry hard (normally 8 to 10 hours). D. Primer: 1. Apply to the base coat/reinforcing mesh with a sprayer, 3/8” (10 mm) nap roller, or good quality latex paint brush at a rate of approximately 150-250 ft2 per gallon (3.6-6.1 m2 per liter). 2. Primer shall be dry to the touch before proceeding to the finish coat. E. Finish Coat: 1. Apply to the primed base coat with a clean, stainless steel trowel. 2. Apply and level finish coat during the same operation to minimum obtainable thickness consistent with uniform coverage. 3. Maintain a wet edge on finish coat by applying and texturing continually over the soffit surface. 4. Work finish coat to corners, joints or other natural breaks and do not allow material to set up within an uninterrupted soffit area. 5. Achieve final texture after veneer finish has jelled so that it does not stick to the trowel. 6. Final Thickness: Not greater than diameter of largest aggregate of finish material. 3.3 TOUCH-UP A. After installation, touch-up areas where finish coat has been damaged with manufacturer’s recommended primer compatible with finish coat. B. Touch-up so that repair is not obvious. 3.4 COMPLETION A. Exposed surfaces shall be clean and free from scratches, dents, tool marks, stains, discoloration, and other defects and damage. 3.5 CLEANUP A. Remove extra materials and debris from job site. B. Clean adjacent materials and surfaces and the work area of foreign materials resulting from the Work. END OF SECTION Denton Fire Station No. 8 SIGNAGE Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 101400-1 August 2019 SECTION 101400 – SIGNAGE PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Related Documents: Provisions established in Conditions of the Contract, Division 01 – General Requirements, and the Drawings are collectively applicable to this Section. B. Section Includes 1. Identifying devices where shown on the Drawings complete and as specified including the following: a. Parking signs indicating accessible spaces. b. Pin mounted building identification signs. c. Interior code required signs. d. Interior room identification signs. e. Cast bronze building dedication plaque. 2. Coordination for installation of signage provided by others. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include manufacturer’s construction details relative to materials, dimensions of individual components, profiles, and finishes for each type of sign required. B. Shop Drawings: Provide shop drawings for fabrication and erection of signs. Include plans, elevations, and large-scale sections of typical members and other components. Show anchors, accessories, layout, and installation details. C. Samples for Verification: 1. Physical: Submit samples of one competed sign for review and approval. Approved sample may be incorporated into Project. 2. Color: Submit manufacturer's standard color selection chart. Do not proceed until colors have been selected. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single-Source Responsibility: For each separate type of sign required, obtain signs from one source from a single manufacturer. B. Manufacturer shall have a minimum of five years’ experience in the manufacturing of signs specified. C. Codes and Standards: 1. Panel signs shall have 1/32-inch raised copy and grade 2 Braille, and shall comply with all existing federal, state, and local accessibility standards. 2. Code and Standards: Comply with American with Disabilities Act of 1990, Title 3 Provisions, Public Accommodations and Commercial Facilities. Updated March 15, 2012. 3. Comply with the State of Texas Accessibility Standards, latest edition. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements herein, provide products from one of the following: 1. Sign Innovations, Oklahoma City, Oklahoma 2. J & B Graphics, Inc., Oklahoma City, Oklahoma 3. ASI Sign Systems, Inc., Irving, Texas 4. A Sign of Quality, LLC, Royse City, Texas B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 012500. 2.2 HANDICAPPED PARKING A. Screen Printed Signs: 1. Per City requirements. 2. Type and Size as required: a. "Handicapped Parking Only" – 12 inches by 18 inches. b. "Van Accessible" – 12 inches by 6 inches. c. “Minimum Fine” – 12 inches by 10 inches d. “Tow Away” – 12 inches by 6 inches. 3. Post: a. Schedule 40 galvanized steel in length required to meet City installation heights. Denton Fire Station No. 8 SIGNAGE Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 101400-2 August 2019 2.3 BUILDING IDENTIFICATION SIGNAGE A. Aluminum Sign: Shall be aluminum numerals and letters as indicated in Drawings. B. Style: Halo-lit reverse channel in depth(s) as indicated in Drawings. C. Material: 0.125” minimum thick aluminum face and 0.63” minimum thick aluminum return. D. Construction: Spot weld with NO visible welds. Provide weep holes for drainage as required. E. Finish: Shall be powder coat paint finish. F. Protective Treatment: Matthews Super Satin Clear Coat or approved equal. G. Color: As indicated in Drawings, equivalent to RAL color system. H. Font: As indicated in Drawings. I. Refer to Drawings for details and electrical requirements. J. Provide 3/16” Clear Polycarbonate “Bird Guard.” K. LED Lighting: White illumination shall be “thin LED” LED lighting as manufactured by Sloan LED or approved equal. 2.4 ROOM IDENTIFICATION SIGNAGE SYSTEMS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Sign Innovations; 1333 SE 38th Street, Oklahoma City, OK, 73129; (405) 840-1151. 2. Substitutions: Submit in accordance with Section 012500. B. Plastic Signs: constructed with 1/8 inch single-ply modified acrylic with radius corners and matte non-glare finish and comply with applicable provisions of the ADA and Texas Accessibility Standards including, but not limited to, raised tactile, graphics, text and Grade 2 Braille characters. 1. Sign Type: a. Room Identification: One sign for each room listed in Drawings unless noted otherwise. b. Code Required: Restrooms, Shower Rooms, Exit, and Occupant Load. 2. Letter Style: Helvetica Medium, 5/8 inches tall. 3. Letter Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range of options. 4. Sign Background Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range of options. 5. Sign Size: a. 8 x 6 inches at restrooms and shower rooms. b. 3 x 6 inches at all other room identification locations. c. 2 x 2 inches for exit signs. 6. Mounting: Double sided adhesive or as recommended by manufacturer. 2.5 BUILDING DEDICATION PLAQUE A. Plaque shall be as manufactured by The Southwell Company, P.O. Box 299, San Antonio, Texas 78291 or approved equal. Tablet shall be cast of virgin ingots (85-5-5-5 Standard U. S. bronze alloy). Casting shall be free of pits and gas holes and all letters shall be sharp and hand tooled. Border and faces of raised letters shall be satin/brushed finish and background shall be leatherette finish. Plaque shall be chemically cleaned and etched and treated with Alodine and sprayed with two coats of Clear Acrylic Lacquer. B. Size: To be determined. Minimum size 24 inches by 30 inches. C. Border Design: Raised, satin/brushed finish. D. Letter style: "Helvetica" satin/brushed finish. E. Background: Leatherette finish, Oxidized-Dark Bronze. F. Text: Include Project Name, Year Contract Awarded, Names of City Council at time of award of General Contract, and Names of Architect and General Contractor, etc. G. Refer to Section 012100 for allowance. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. Deliver and store identifying devices in protective wrappings until ready for installation. Install letters in protective wrappings and remove wrappings just prior to substantial completion. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install signs plumb, level and square and in proper planes with other work, at heights required by accessibility codes and standards. B. Anchor each plastic laminate sign with adhesive. C. Install signs with sufficient amount of foam tape for proper installation. D. Attach as recommended by sign manufacturer. E. Anchor each sign with adhesive. F. Coordinate arrival and installation of graphic signs with hardware installation. Graphic signs function as and are coordinated with the hardware as shown on the Drawings. G. Room name signs shall be placed on the public side of the door except where noted otherwise. Denton Fire Station No. 8 SIGNAGE Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 101400-3 August 2019 H. Single Door Sign: Provide one sign as specified above, mounted to wall adjacent to door on knob side. I. Pair of Doors: Provide one sign as specified above, mounted to adjacent wall closest to active leaf of door. Do not install sign where it will be obstructed by door when door is in the ‘open’ position. J. Attachment: Mounting to surfaces shall be done by pressure sensitive frame double-faced tape. Signs shall be delivered to the project site with the tape in place and trimmed on each sign, but with the protective paper layer not removed. Paper layer shall be removed just prior to installation of signs. 3.3 EXTERIOR INSTALLATION - PARKING AND DIRECTIONAL SIGNS A. Mount posts in footing width and depth as shown in Drawings. B. Handicapped Signs: Mount signs at height to comply with accessibility codes. 3.4 COORDINATION A. Coordinate the installation of the identifying devices with the hardware manufacturer for lockset and knob leave outs as detailed and scheduled. 3.5 DAMAGE A. Any identifying device which is scratched or defaced will be rejected. 3.6 CLEANING A. Remove protective materials and clean all signs. Clean surfaces with plain water or water with soap or household detergent. END OF SECTION Denton Fire Station No. 8 TRAFFIC SIGNAGE MJ Thomas Engineering, LLC. 101453-1 August 2019 SECTION 101453 TRAFFIC SIGNAGE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Extent of traffic signage is indicated on the drawings. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. For installation use only personnel who are skilled in the work required. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings 1. Submit Shop Drawings in accordance with Division 1 Section “Submittals”. 1.04 INSTALLATION METHODS A. Submit two copies of manufacturer’s recommended installation method showing all requirements for installation. 1.05 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Protect traffic signage before, during and after installation. B. Protect installed work of other trades. 1.06 REPLACEMENTS A. In event of damage, make necessary replacements. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS AND DESIGN A. Provide traffic signage as indicated on the drawings and in accordance with the local requirements of the local jurisdiction. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Inspect installed work of other trades and verify that such work is complete to a point where this work may commence. B. Verify that installation may be made in accordance with approved Shop Drawings and manufacturer’s instructions. 3.02 DISCREPANCIES A. In event of discrepancy, notify Architect. B. Do not proceed with installation until discrepancies have been resolved. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install where indicated, anchoring all components firmly in place in complete accordance with approved Shop Drawings and the manufacturer’s recommendations. Denton Fire Station No. 8 TRAFFIC SIGNAGE MJ Thomas Engineering, LLC. 101453-2 August 2019 B. Traffic signage shall be located in accordance with the latest requirements of the State of Texas, including ADA signage, and in accordance with codes and requirements of the local jurisdiction. END OF SECTION Denton Fire Station No. 8 WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 102600-1 August 2019 SECTION 102600 – WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Corner guards and end wall guards. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, impact strength, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each impact-resistant wall protection unit. B. Shop Drawings: For each impact-resistant wall protection unit showing locations and extent. Include sections, details, and attachments to other work. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of impact-resistant wall protection unit indicated. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer. B. Source Limitations: Obtain impact-resistant wall protection units from single source from single manufacturer. C. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of impact-resistant wall protection units and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Section 014000 Quality Requirements. D. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Provide impact-resistant, plastic wall protection units with surface- burning characteristics as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84, NFPA 255, or UL 723 by UL or another qualified testing agency. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store impact-resistant wall protection units in original undamaged packages and containers inside well- ventilated area protected from weather, moisture, soiling, extreme temperatures, and humidity. 1. Maintain room temperature within storage area at not less than 70 deg F during the period plastic materials are stored. 2. Store plastic wall protection components for a minimum of 72 hours, or until plastic material attains a minimum room temperature of 70 deg F. a. Store corner-guard covers in a vertical position. b. Store covers in a horizontal position. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install impact-resistant wall protection units until building is enclosed and weatherproof, wet work is complete and dry, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature at 70 deg F for not less than 72 hours before beginning installation and for the remainder of the construction period. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of impact-resistant wall protection units that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Structural failures. b. Deterioration of plastic and other materials beyond normal use. 2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240. B. Fasteners: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless-steel, or other noncorrosive metal screws, bolts, and other fasteners compatible with items being fastened. Use security-type fasteners where exposed to view. 2.2 CORNER GUARDS AND END WALL GUARDS A. Flush-Mounted, Stainless Steel Cover Guards: Manufacturer's standard assembly consisting of stainless steel cover that is flush with adjacent wall surface, installed over retainer; including mounting Denton Fire Station No. 8 WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 102600-2 August 2019 hardware; fabricated with 90- or 135-degree turn to match wall condition; full wall height. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Construction Specialties, Inc. b. Inpro Corporation c. Nystrom, Inc. B. Provide flush mounted corner and end wall guards in configurations indicated x full height. C. Acceptable Product: Inpro Corporation #SS-CGFM corner guards and #SS-EWFM end wall guards. D. Material: Stainless-steel Type 304, 16 gauge, No. 4 satin finish. 2.3 FABRICATION A. Assemble components in factory to greatest extent possible to minimize field assembly. Disassemble only as necessary for shipping and handling. B. Fabricate components with tight seams and joints with exposed edges rolled. Provide surfaces free of wrinkles, chips, dents, uneven coloration, and other imperfections. Fabricate members and fittings to produce flush, smooth, and rigid hairline joints. 2.4 METAL FINISHES A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. 1. Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, or blend into finish. 2. Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform finish, free of cross scratches. 3. Run grain of directional finishes with long dimension of each piece. 4. When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove embedded foreign matter and leave surfaces chemically clean. B. Protect finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and wall areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work. B. Examine walls to which impact-resistant wall protection will be attached for blocking, grounds, and other solid backing that have been installed in the locations required for secure attachment of support fasteners. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Complete finishing operations, including painting, before installing impact-resistant wall protection system components. B. Before installation, clean substrate to remove dust, debris, and loose particles. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install impact-resistant wall protection units level, plumb, and true to line without distortions. Do not use materials with chips, cracks, voids, stains, or other defects that might be visible in the finished Work. 1. Provide splices, mounting hardware, anchors, and other accessories required for a complete installation. a. Provide anchoring devices to withstand imposed loads. b. Where splices occur in horizontal runs of more than 20 feet, splice aluminum retainers and plastic covers at different locations along the run, but no closer than 12 inches. c. Adjust caps as required to ensure tight seams. 3.4 CLEANING A. Immediately after completion of installation, clean plastic covers and accessories using a standard, ammonia-based, household cleaning agent. B. Remove excess adhesive using methods and materials recommended in writing by manufacturer. END OF SECTION Denton Fire Station No. 8 TOILET, BATH AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 102800-1 August 2019 SECTION 102800 – TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Public-use washroom accessories. 2. Private-use washroom accessories. 3. Underlavatory guards. 4. Custodial accessories. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include the following: 1. Construction details and dimensions. 2. Anchoring and mounting requirements, including requirements for cutouts in other work and substrate preparation. 3. Material and finish descriptions. 4. Features that will be included for Project. 5. Manufacturer's warranty. B. Product Schedule: Indicating types, quantities, sizes, and installation locations by room of each accessory required. 1. Identify locations using room designations indicated. 2. Identify products using designations indicated. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For toilet and bath accessories to include in maintenance manuals. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: For products listed together in the same Part 2 articles, obtain products from single source from single manufacturer. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate accessory locations with other work to prevent interference with clearances required for access by people with disabilities, and for proper installation, adjustment, operation, cleaning, and servicing of accessories. B. Deliver inserts and anchoring devices set into concrete or masonry as required to prevent delaying the Work. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Special Mirror Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to replace mirrors that develop visible silver spoilage defects and that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: 15 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304, 0.031-inch minimum nominal thickness unless otherwise indicated. B. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, with G60 hot-dip zinc coating. C. Galvanized-Steel Mounting Devices: ASTM A 153/A 153M, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. D. Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as accessory unit and tamper-and-theft resistant where exposed, and of galvanized steel where concealed. E. Chrome Plating: ASTM B 456, Service Condition Number SC 2 (moderate service). F. Mirrors: ASTM C 1503, Mirror Glazing Quality, clear-glass mirrors, nominal 6.0 mm thick. 2.2 BATHROOM AND RESTROOM ACCESSORIES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: Denton Fire Station No. 8 TOILET, BATH AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 102800-2 August 2019 1. American Specialties, Inc. 2. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. 3. Bradley Corporation. 4. GAMCO Specialty Accessories; a division of Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. B. Accessory Schedule: 1. Toilet Tissue Holder: Bobrick No. 265; surface mounted roll type 18 gauge plated steel with satin chrome finish. a. Provide one at Restroom 102 and Bathroom 118, 121, 122 & 123. 2. Grab Bars: Bobrick No. B-6806 x 48 and B-6806 x 36; 1-1/2" dia. x 18 gage stainless steel grab bars for exposed mounting. The bars shall be supported by flanges at both ends. Center line of each grab bar shall be 2-1/4" from the face of the wall. Mounting screws shall be stainless steel with interrupted slot head. a. Provide one set of bars 48" and 36" at each ADA accessible toilet. 3. Soap Dispenser: DermaPro 9033-12; hand wash soap dispenser with a push-bar dispensing system as manufactured by Gojo Industries. a. Provide one at Laundry 140. 4. Surface Mount Paper Towel Dispenser: Bobrick No. B-262; 22 gauge stainless steel, C-fold paper towel dispenser. a. Provide one at Laundry/EMS 109, Bathroom 118, 121, 122, 123, and Laundry 140. 5. Recessed Paper Towel Dispenser: Bobrick No. B-36903; TrimLine Series towel/waste receptacle, 22 gauge stainless steel, C-fold paper towel dispenser. a. Provide one at Restroom 102. 6. Mop and Broom Holder: Bobrick B-223; stainless steel unit 24" long with 3 vinyl coated mop holders with spring loaded rubber cams. a. Provide one at WH 119 and Laundry 140. 7. Shower Curtain Rod: Bobrick No. B-207; heavy duty curtain rod. 1" O.D. x 20 gauge stainless steel tubing with 1/8" thick, one piece die-formed stainless steel flanges. a. Provide one at each shower stall. 8. Handicap Shower Bench: Bobrick No. B-5181; reversible folding shower bench complying with barrier free accessibility guidelines. Water resistant solid phenolic bench; type 304 stainless steel frame and mounting bracket; self-locking mechanism. a. Provide one at each handicap shower and at locations indicated on the Drawings. 9. Surface Mounted Hooks: Bobrick No. B-6827; type 304, 22 gauge stainless steel with satin finish. a. Provide at locations indicated on the Drawings. 10. Mirror: Bobrick No. B-165; stainless steel channel frame fabricated of alloy 18-8 stainless steel, type 304, 20 gauge with mitered corners and concealed wall hanger with locking devices. a. Provide at locations indicated on the Drawings. 2.3 UNDERLAVATORY GUARDS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Plumberex Specialty Products, Inc. 2. Truebro by IPS Corporation. B. Underlavatory Guard: 1. Description: Insulating pipe covering for supply and drain piping assemblies that prevent direct contact with and burns from piping; allow service access without removing coverings. 2. Material and Finish: Antimicrobial, molded plastic, white. a. Shelf: Not less than nominal 0.05-inch- thick stainless steel. b. Rod: Approximately 1/4-inch- diameter stainless steel. 2.4 FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate units with tight seams and joints, and exposed edges rolled. Hang doors and access panels with full-length, continuous hinges. Equip units for concealed anchorage and with corrosion-resistant backing plates. B. Keys: Provide universal keys for internal access to accessories for servicing and resupplying. Provide minimum of six keys to Owner's representative. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install accessories according to manufacturers' written instructions, using fasteners appropriate to substrate indicated and recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units level, plumb, and firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated. Denton Fire Station No. 8 TOILET, BATH AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 102800-3 August 2019 3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust accessories for unencumbered, smooth operation. Replace damaged or defective items. B. Remove temporary labels and protective coatings. C. Clean and polish exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written recommendations. END OF SECTION Denton Fire Station No. 8 FIRE PROTECTION CABINETS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 104413-1 August 2019 SECTION 104413 – FIRE PROTECTION CABINETS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Fire-protection cabinets for the following: a. Portable fire extinguishers. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. Show door hardware, cabinet type, trim style, and panel style. Include roughing-in dimensions and details showing recessed, semi-recessed, or surface-mounting method and relationships of box and trim to surrounding construction. B. Shop Drawings: For fire-protection cabinets. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. C. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples 6 by 6 inches square. 1.4 COORDINATION A. Coordinate size of fire-protection cabinets to ensure that type and capacity of fire extinguishers indicated are accommodated. B. Coordinate sizes and locations of fire-protection cabinets with wall depths. 1.5 SEQUENCING A. Apply vinyl lettering on field-painted fire-protection cabinets after painting is complete. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Fire-Rated Fire-Protection Cabinets: Listed and labeled to comply with requirements in ASTM E 814 for fire-resistance rating of walls where they are installed. B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 2.2 FIRE-PROTECTION CABINET A. Cabinet Type: Suitable for fire extinguisher. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. JL Industries, Inc.; a division of the Activar Construction Products Group. b. Larsen’s Manufacturing Company. c. Potter Roemer LLC. B. Cabinet Construction: Non-rated in non-rated walls; 1 or 2 hour fire rated in rated walls to match rating of wall. 1. Fire-Rated Cabinets: Construct fire-rated cabinets with double walls fabricated from 0.043-inch- thick cold-rolled steel sheet lined with minimum 5/8-inch- thick fire-barrier material. Provide factory- drilled mounting holes. C. Corridor 106 & 124 and Vehicle Bays 138: Furnish semi-recessed cabinet equal to Larsen’s AL 2409-R7 Fire Extinguisher Cabinet. At rated wall locations, furnish semi-recessed cabinet equal to Larsen’s AL FS 2409-R7 Fire Extinguisher Cabinet. 1. Size: 9-1/2” x 24" x 6" deep 2. Material: Aluminum 3. Trim: 1-1/2" square trim, semi-recessed 4. Door: Full DSA glass panel D. Kitchen: Furnish semi-recessed cabinet equal to Larsen’s AL 2712-RK Fire Extinguisher Cabinet. 1. Size: 12” x 27" x 8" deep 2. Material: Aluminum 3. Trim: 1-1/4" square trim, semi-recessed 4. Door: Full DSA glass panel 2.3 FABRICATION A. Fire-Protection Cabinets: Provide manufacturer's standard box (tub) with trim, frame, door, and hardware to suit cabinet type, trim style, and door style indicated. Denton Fire Station No. 8 FIRE PROTECTION CABINETS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 104413-2 August 2019 1. Weld joints and grind smooth. 2. Provide factory-drilled mounting holes. 3. Prepare doors and frames to receive locks. 4. Install door locks at factory. B. Cabinet Doors: Fabricate doors according to manufacturer's standards, from materials indicated and coordinated with cabinet types and trim styles. 1. Fabricate door frames with tubular stiles and rails and hollow-metal design, minimum 1/2 inch thick. 2. Miter and weld perimeter door frames. C. Cabinet Trim: Fabricate cabinet trim in one piece with corners mitered, welded, and ground smooth. 2.4 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with NAAMM's AMP 500, "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products," for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces of fire-protection cabinets from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. C. Finish fire-protection cabinets after assembly. D. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine roughing-in for cabinets to verify actual locations of piping connections before cabinet installation. B. Examine walls and partitions for suitable framing depth and blocking where semi-recessed cabinets will be installed. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare recesses for semi-recessed fire-protection cabinets as required by type and size of cabinet and trim style. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install fire-protection cabinets in locations and at mounting heights indicated or, if not indicated, at heights acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. B. Fire-Protection Cabinets: Fasten cabinets to structure, square and plumb. 1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide recessed fire-protection cabinets. If wall thickness is inadequate for recessed cabinets, provide semi-recessed fire-protection cabinets. 2. Provide inside latch and lock for break-glass panels. 3. Fasten mounting brackets to inside surface of fire-protection cabinets, square and plumb. 4. Fire-Rated Cabinets: a. Install cabinet with not more than 1/16-inch tolerance between pipe OD and knockout OD. Center pipe within knockout. b. Seal through penetrations with firestopping sealant as specified in Section 078413 Penetration Firestopping. C. Identification: Apply vinyl lettering at locations indicated. 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as fire-protection cabinets are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. B. Adjust fire-protection cabinet doors to operate easily without binding. Verify that integral locking devices operate properly. C. On completion of fire-protection cabinet installation, clean interior and exterior surfaces as recommended by manufacturer. D. Touch up marred finishes, or replace fire-protection cabinets that cannot be restored to factory-finished appearance. Use only materials and procedures recommended or furnished by fire-protection cabinet and mounting bracket manufacturers. E. Replace fire-protection cabinets that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures. END OF SECTION Denton Fire Station No. 8 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 104416-1 August 2019 SECTION 104416 – FIRE EXTINGUISHERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes portable, hand-carried fire extinguishers and mounting brackets for fire extinguishers. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include rating and classification, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for fire extinguisher and mounting brackets. B. Product Schedule: For fire extinguishers. Coordinate final fire-extinguisher schedule with fire-protection cabinet schedule to ensure proper fit and function. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Warranty: Sample of special warranty. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fire extinguishers to include in maintenance manuals. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate type and capacity of fire extinguishers with fire-protection cabinets to ensure fit and function. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace fire extinguishers that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Failure of hydrostatic test according to NFPA 10. b. Faulty operation of valves or release levers. 2. Warranty Period: Six years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10, "Portable Fire Extinguishers." B. Fire Extinguishers: Listed and labeled for type, rating, and classification by an independent testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Provide fire extinguishers approved, listed, and labeled by FM Global. 2.2 PORTABLE, HAND-CARRIED FIRE EXTINGUISHERS A. Fire Extinguishers: Type, size, and capacity for each and indicated. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. JL Industries, Inc.; a division of the Activar Construction Products Group. b. Larsen’s Manufacturing Company. c. Potter Roemer LLC. 2. Instruction Labels: Include pictorial marking system complying with NFPA 10, Appendix B, and bar coding for documenting fire-extinguisher location, inspections, maintenance, and recharging. B. Multipurpose Dry-Chemical Type in Steel Container: UL-rated 4A-80B:C, 10-lb nominal capacity, with siliconized mono ammonium phosphate-based dry chemical in enameled-steel container. C. Class K Wet-Chemical Type in Stainless Steel Container (for use in kitchen): UL-rated 2A:K, 2.5-gal nominal capacity, with low pH potassium acetate solution in stainless steel container. 2.3 MOUNTING BRACKETS A. Mounting Brackets: Manufacturer's standard galvanized steel, designed to secure fire extinguisher to wall or structure, of sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguishers indicated, with plated or red baked-enamel finish. Denton Fire Station No. 8 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 104416-2 August 2019 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. JL Industries, Inc.; a division of the Activar Construction Products Group. b. Larsen’s Manufacturing Company. c. Potter Roemer LLC. B. Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, size, spacing, and location. Locate as indicated by Architect. 1. Identify bracket-mounted fire extinguishers with the words "FIRE EXTINGUISHER" in red letter decals applied to mounting surface. a. Orientation: Vertical. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine fire extinguishers for proper charging and tagging. 1. Remove and replace damaged, defective, or undercharged fire extinguishers. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: Install fire extinguishers and mounting brackets in locations indicated and in compliance with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Mounting Brackets: 54 inches above finished floor to top of fire extinguisher. B. Mounting Brackets: Fasten mounting brackets to surfaces, square and plumb, at locations indicated. END OF SECTION Denton Fire Station No. 8 TURN-OUT GEAR LOCKERS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 105510-1 August 2019 SECTION 105510 – TURN-OUT GEAR LOCKERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes: Furnishing and installing turn-out gear lockers. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s product data and installation instructions. B. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer’s shop drawings for each individual run of lockers for review before fabricating the lockers. 1. Provide plan indicating locker layout. C. Samples: Submit manufacturer’s standard color samples. D. Owner’s Manual: Provide maintenance manual at closeout. E. Warranty: Submit manufacturer’s standard warranty. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer shall have a minimum of five years’ experience in the direct manufacture of lockers. B. Installer shall have experience in locker installation. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE & HANDLING A. Delivery: Deliver materials to site in manufacturer’s original, unopened containers with labels identifying product and manufacturer’s name. B. Storage: Store materials in a clean dry area. C. Handling: Protect materials and finish during installation and handling to prevent damage. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURER A. Mid-Minnesota Wire (GearGrid Product Line), 670 SW 15th St, Forest Lake, MN 55025. Toll-free: 888-643- 6694. Website: www.geargrid.com. 2.2 TURN-OUT GEAR LOCKERS A. Model: GearGrid Two-Tier Wall Mount installed at wall and free standing tube wall structure. B. Size: 24”W x 20”D x 84”H C. Quantity: Twenty-one (21) lockers at Bunker Gear 143. D. Construction: Units shall be welded at all applicable joints. Forming of metal shall be completed by standard cold-forming operations. Use of fasteners will only be required to allow for knock-down shipping, securing units to mounting surface and on applicable accessories. E. Mounting: 1. Wall: 11 gauge steel brackets. 2. Free Standing Tube Wall Structure: a. Vertical Posts: 4” x 4” x 0.25” wall thickness ASTM A513 steel tubing. b. Floor Mounting Plates: 0.5” steel plate welded to vertical posts with 0.375” mounting holes. c. Horizontal Frames: 4” x 4” 0.1875” wall thickness ASTM A513 steel tubing. Frames mechanically fastened to vertical posts with supplied or identified hardware. d. Standard Finish: Components to be cleaned using a phosphatized bath, clear water rinse and electro-statically coated with a durable TGIC powder coating. e. Color: Red Baron F. Vertical Dividers: 1. Outer Frames: 1.25” O.D. x 16 gauge wall thickness ASTM A513 steel tubing. 2. Inner Grid: 0.25” diameter ASTM 510 cold drawn steel wire resistance welded to a 3” square pattern. G. Back Panel: 1. Grid: 0.25” diameter ASTM 510 cold drawn steel wire resistance welded to a 3” square pattern. H. Shelves: (1) Top, (1) Bottom. 0.25” diameter ASTM 510 cold drawn steel wire resistance welded and cold formed. Top shelf includes a 20 gauge steel bracket to accept a 2” x 16” name placard. I. Apparel Hooks: (3) per opening. 0.25” diameter ASTM 510 cold drawn steel wire resistance welded and cold formed. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Horizontal Hang Bar: 1. Tube: 1.25” O.D. x 16 gauge 304 stainless steel tubing. 2. Brackets: Attach to side mesh, powder coated Denton Fire Station No. 8 TURN-OUT GEAR LOCKERS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 105510-2 August 2019 B. Coat Drying Hanger: 1. 0.25” diameter 304 stainless steel wire cold formed and resistance welded. 2. Black vinyl coating on hook end. C. Glove Drying Hanger: 1. 0.25” diameter 304 stainless steel wire cold formed and resistance welded. 2. Black vinyl coating on hook end. 2.4 FINISH A. General: All system components excluding assembly and mounting hardware and stainless steel components are to receive the standard finish. B. Standard Finish: Components to be cleaned using a phosphatized bath, clear water rinse and electro- statically coated with a durable TGIC powder coating. C. Color: Red Baron PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install lockers to wall and free standing tube wall structure in configuration indicated on drawings in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. B. Use manufacturer’s hardware for assembly. C. Anchor to mounting surface with proper hardware. 3.2 ADJUST & CLEAN A. Clean exposed surfaces and leave free of defects. END OF SECTION Denton Fire Station No. 8 FIXED ALUMINUM SUN SCREENS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 107114-1 August 2019 SECTION 107114 – FIXED ALUMINUM SUN SCREENS PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Sun screen. 2. Reinforcing, shims, anchors, and attachment devices. 3. Accessories necessary to complete Work. 1.3 SYSTEM DECSRIPTION A. Design Requirements: 1. Manufacturer: Responsible for designing each system, including anchorage to structural system and necessary modifications to meet specified requirements and maintain visual design concepts. 2. Provide aluminum decorative screen systems, including necessary modifications to meet specified requirements and maintaining visual design concepts. 3. Perimeter Conditions: Allow for installation tolerances, expansion and contraction of adjacent materials, structural deflections, and sealant manufacturer's recommended joint design. 4. Drawings: Diagrammatic and do not purport to identify nor solve problems of thermal or structural movement, or anchorage. 5. Requirements Shown by Details: Establish basic dimension of unit, sight lines and profiles of members. 6. Attachments: Account for site peculiarities and expansion and contraction movements so there is no possibility of loosening, weakening and fracturing connection between units and building structure or between units themselves. 7. Anchors, Fasteners and Braces: Structurally stressed not more than 50 percent of allowable stress when maximum loads are applied. 8. Allow for expansion and contraction due to structural movement without detriment to appearance or performance. 9. Accommodate building structure deflections in connections to structure. B. Thermal Requirements: Accommodate expansion and contraction movement due to surface temperature differential of 180 degrees F without causing buckling, stress on structural elements, reduction of performance or other detrimental effects. C. Structural Performance: Provide exterior sun control assemblies capable of withstanding the effects of loads and stresses from dead loads, live loads, snow loads, snow drift loads and wind loads without evidencing permanent deformation of assembly or components including blades, frames, and supports; noise or metal fatigue caused by blade rattle or flutter; or permanent damage to fasteners and anchors. 1. Dead Load: As required by applicable building code. 2. Live Load: As required by applicable building code. 3. Snow Load: As required by applicable building code. 4. Wind Load: Uniform pressure (velocity pressure) of 30 lb./sq. ft. acting inward or outward. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit for each manufactured product in accordance with Section 013300. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Submit drawings indicating elevations, detailed design, dimensions, member profiles, joint locations, arrangement of units, member connections, and thickness of various components. 2. Details of special shapes. 3. Reinforcing and anchorage system. 4. Interfacing with building construction. 5. Provisions for expansion and contraction. 6. Clearly indicate locations of exposed fasteners and joints for Architect's acceptance. C. Samples: Submit samples indicating quality of finish in required colors on alloys used for work, 12 inches long for extrusions and 6 inches square for sheet materials. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Informational Submittals: Submit manufacturer's Instructions. Denton Fire Station No. 8 FIXED ALUMINUM SUN SCREENS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 107114-2 August 2019 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with following: 1. Protect finished surfaces to prevent damage. 2. Do not use adhesive papers or sprayed coatings which become firmly bonded when exposed to sun. 3. Do not leave coating residue on surfaces. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Submit warranty stating fluorocarbon (PVDF) coating finish will be free from fading more than 10 percent, chalking, yellowing, peeling, cracking, pitting, corroding or non-uniformity of color, or gloss deterioration beyond manufacturer's descriptive standards for 10 years and agreeing to promptly correct defects. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: 1. The Airolite Company, Schofield, WI (Basis of Design) 2. Construction Specialties, Cranford, NJ. B. Acceptable Substitutions: 1. Refer to Section 012500. C. Acceptable Profile: 1. Horizontal, fixed, extruded aluminum sun screen assemblies complying with the following: a. Blade: 6” wide X 1.875” thick airfoil blades with a minimum thickness of 0.080”. Eight (8) blades per section required. b. Outrigger: Aluminum plate outriggers, tapered and cut to profiles as indicated on Drawings, in thickness required to withstand loads in 1.3 but not less than 0.25“. c. Include anti-sag rods at locations shown on Drawings to maintain level installation and aesthetic appearance requirements. Provide rods analyzed for strength under loading conditions. Finish to be Series 300 stainless steel. d. Mounting Bracket: Extruded aluminum tee shape as indicated. 2.2 FRAMING MATERIALS AND ACCESSORIES A. Aluminum: 1. ASTM B221, alloy 6063-T5 for extrusions; ASTM B209, alloy 5005-H16 for sheets; or other alloys and temper recommended by manufacturer appropriate for specified finish. 2. Minimum thickness of 0.081 inch for framing members and 0.050 inch for applied stops and similar components. B. Inserts and Anchorage Devices: 1. Manufacturer's standard formed or fabricated assemblies, steel or aluminum, of shapes, plates, bars or tubes. 2. Hot-dip galvanized steel assemblies after fabrication, comply with ASTM A123, 2.0 ounce minimum coating. C. Fasteners: Non-magnetic stainless steel or cadmium plated steel coated with yellow or silver iridescence plating, compatible with materials being fastened. 1. Exposed Locations: Series 300 stainless steel. 2. Concealed Locations: Cadmium plated steel with 0.0005 inch plating thickness and color chromate coated. 3. Provide nuts or washers of design having means to prevent disengagement; deforming of fastener threads is not acceptable. 4. Provide concealed fasteners wherever possible. 5. Exposed Locations: Countersunk flathead fasteners with finish matching item fastened. D. Expansion Anchor Devices: Drilled-in, expansion bolt anchors. E. Shims: Non-staining, non-ferrous, type as recommended by system manufacturer. F. Protective Coatings: Cold applied asphalt mastic, SSPC-Paint 12, compounded for 30 mil thickness for each coat; or alkyd type zinc chromate primer, FS TT-P-645. 2.3 FABRICATION A. Take accurate field measurements to verify required dimensions prior to fabrication. 1. Location of exposed joints is subject to Architect's acceptance. 2. Fabricate components in accordance with approved shop drawings. Remove burrs and ease Denton Fire Station No. 8 FIXED ALUMINUM SUN SCREENS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 107114-3 August 2019 edges. Shop fabricate to greatest extent practicable to minimize field cutting, splicing, and assembly. Disassemble only to extent necessary for shipping and handling limitations. B. Welding: Comply with recommendations of American Welding Society (AWS). 1. Performed by AWS qualified welders using recommended electrodes and methods to avoid distortion and discoloration. 2. Grind exposed welds smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces before finishing; restore mechanical finish. 2.4 FINISH A. High Performance Organic Finish: 3-coat fluoropolymer finish (minimum 2.0 mils dry-film) complying with AAMA 2605 and containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in both color coat and clear topcoat. Prepare, pretreat and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturer’s written instructions. 1. Color: As selected by Architect from full range of manufacturer’s options. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine conditions and proceed with Work when substrates are ready. 1. Verify dimensions, tolerances, and method of attachment with other Work. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Align assemblies plumb and level, free of warp or twist, aligning with adjacent Work. B. Tolerances: Tolerances are not accumulative. 1. Limit Variations from Plumb and Level: a. 1/8 inch in 20 feet vertically and horizontally. b. 1/4 inch in 40 feet either direction. 2. Jog in Alignment: 1/16 inch maximum. 3. Location: 1/4 inch maximum deviation of any member at any location. C. Provide attachments and shims to permanently fasten system to building structure. 1. Anchor securely in place, allowing for required movement, including expansion and contraction. 2. Separate dissimilar materials at contract points, including metal in contact with masonry or concrete surfaces, with protective coating or preformed separators to prevent contact and electrolytic action. 3.3 CLEANING A. General: Clean surfaces in compliance with manufacturer's recommendations; remove excess mastic, mastic smears, and other foreign materials. END OF SECTION Denton Fire Station No. 8 GROUND-SET FLAGPOLES Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 107516-1 August 2019 SECTION 107516 – GROUND-SET FLAGPOLES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes ground-set flagpoles made from aluminum. B. Owner-Furnished Material: Flags. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, operating characteristics, fittings, accessories, and finishes for flagpoles. B. Shop Drawings: For flagpoles. 1. Include plans, elevations, and attachment details. Show general arrangement, jointing, fittings, accessories, grounding, anchoring, and support. 2. Include section, and details of foundation system. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Spiral wrap flagpoles with heavy paper and enclose in a hard fiber tube or other protective container. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Source Limitations: Obtain flagpoles as complete units, including fittings, accessories, bases, and anchorage devices, from single source from single manufacturer. 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000 Quality Requirements, to design flagpole assemblies. B. Structural Performance: Flagpole assemblies, including anchorages and supports, shall withstand design loads indicated within limits and under conditions indicated. 1. Wind Loads: Determine according to NAAMM FP 1001. Refer to Drawings for basic wind speed. 2.3 ALUMINUM FLAGPOLES A. Aluminum Flagpoles: Tapered flagpoles fabricated from seamless extruded tubing complying with ASTM B 241/B 241M, Alloy 6063, with a minimum wall thickness of 3/16 inch. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. American Flagpole; a Kearney-National Inc. company. b. Baartol Company. c. Concord Industries, Inc. B. Exposed Height: 30 feet. C. Construct flagpoles in one piece if possible. If more than one piece is necessary, comply with the following: 1. Fabricate shop and field joints without using fasteners, screw collars, or lead calking. 2. Provide flush hairline joints using self-aligning, snug-fitting, internal sleeves. D. Metal Foundation Tube: Manufacturer's standard corrugated-steel foundation tube, 0.060-inch wall thickness with 3/16-inch steel bottom plate and support plate; 3/4-inch- diameter, steel ground spike; and steel centering wedges welded together. Galvanize foundation tube after assembly. Furnish loose hardwood wedges at top of foundation tube for plumbing pole. 1. Flashing Collar: Same material and finish as flagpole. E. Sleeve for Aluminum Flagpole: Fiberglass foundation sleeve, made to fit flagpole, for casting into concrete foundation. 1. Flashing Collar: Same material and finish as flagpole. F. Cast-Metal Shoe Base: Made from aluminum with same finish and color as flagpoles for anchor-bolt mounting; furnish with anchor bolts. 1. Furnish ground spike. Denton Fire Station No. 8 GROUND-SET FLAGPOLES Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 107516-2 August 2019 2.4 FITTINGS A. Finial Ball: Flush-seam ball, sized as indicated or, if not indicated, to match flagpole-butt diameter. 1. 0.063-inch spun aluminum, finished to match flagpole with gold anodic finish. B. External Halyard: Ball-bearing, non-fouling, revolving truck assembly of cast metal with continuous 5/16- inch- diameter, braided polypropylene halyard and 9-inchcast-metal cleats with fasteners. Finish exposed metal surfaces to match flagpole. 1. Halyard Flag Snaps: Stainless-steel swivel snap hooks. Furnish two per halyard. 2. Plastic Halyard Flag Clips: Made from injection-molded, UV-stabilized, acetal resin (Delrin). Clips attach to flag and have two eyes for inserting both runs of halyards. Furnish two per halyard. a. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide "Quiet Halyard" flag clasp by Acme/Lingo Flagpoles LLC. 2.5 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A41, clear anodized, 0.7 mil thickness. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Foundation Excavation: Excavate to neat clean lines in undisturbed soil. Remove loose soil and foreign matter from excavation and moisten earth before placing concrete. Place and compact drainage material at excavation bottom. B. Provide forms where required due to unstable soil conditions and for perimeter of flagpole base at grade. Secure and brace forms to prevent displacement during concreting. C. Foundation Tube: Place foundation tube, center, and brace to prevent displacement during concreting. Place concrete. Plumb and level foundation tube and allow concrete to cure. D. Place concrete, as specified in Section 033000 Cast-in-Place Concrete. Compact concrete in place by using vibrators. Moist-cure exposed concrete for no fewer than seven days or use non-staining curing compound. E. Trowel exposed concrete surfaces to a smooth, dense finish, free of trowel marks, and uniform in texture and appearance. Provide positive slope for water runoff to perimeter of concrete base. 3.2 FLAGPOLE INSTALLATION A. General: Install flagpoles where indicated and according to Shop Drawings and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Foundation Tube: Place flagpole in tube, seated on bottom plate between steel centering wedges, and install hardwood wedges to secure flagpole in place. Place and compact sand in foundation tube and remove hardwood wedges. Seal top of foundation tube with a 2-inch layer of elastomeric joint sealant and cover with flashing collar. C. Baseplate: Cast anchor bolts in concrete foundation. Install baseplate on washers placed over leveling nuts on anchor bolts and adjust until flagpole is plumb. After flagpole is plumb, tighten retaining nuts and fill space under baseplate solidly with non-shrink, nonmetallic grout. Finish exposed grout surfaces smooth and slope 45 degrees away from edges of baseplate. END OF SECTION Denton Fire Station No. 8 MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 109900-1 August 2019 SECTION 109900 – MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Miscellaneous specialty items as listed herein. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Including all pertinent performance characteristics and criteria. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate materials, construction, sizes, quantities, finishes, and installation details. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCTS A. Mobile Hose Storage Rack: Ready Rack #HC-64-2T. B. Stainless Steel Wash Table: At Laundry 140, provide 14 gauge stainless steel table with formed splash, integrally welded coved sink, stainless steel leg tubing, stainless steel billet feet and associated connections and miscellaneous items required for complete installation as detailed in Drawings. C. Semi-Permanent Shower Threshold: Freedom Showers, model #APFSPT, in Bathroom 118. D. Mail Box: Titan Mailbox as manufactured by Steel Mailbox Company, 10 gauge steel, 21-1/2” D x 10-1/2” H x 8-1/4” W; color shall be “Gun Metal.” Mount mailbox on steel post as detailed in Drawings. E. Air Compressor: Quincy #QT-54. F. Bicycle Rack: Dero Hoop Rack Heavy Duty in ground, schedule 40 powder coated pipe bike rack as manufactured by Dero Bike Racks. Provide two hoops with all accessories required for complete in ground installation. Color as selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range of options. G. Wood Handrail: Creative Stair Parts #6040 – Species: Walnut. Location: Day Room 103. H. Wood Hand rail Wall Brackets: Creative Stair Parts #3002H – Finish: Satin Nickel. Location: Day Room 103. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that surfaces and conditions are ready to receive work of this Section. B. Notify Architect of any existing conditions which will adversely affect execution. C. Beginning of execution will constitute acceptance of existing conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare substrate surfaces as recommended by manufacturer. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install using skilled workers in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions and recommendations. 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Adjust and fit items to be flush with adjacent construction. B. Fasten or adhere for tight connections and joints. END OF SECTION Denton Fire Station No. 8 RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 113100-1 August 2019 SECTION 113100 – RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Cooking appliances. 2. Refrigeration appliances. 3. Cleaning appliances. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, dimensions, furnished accessories, and finishes for each appliance. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer and manufacturer. B. Product Certificates: For each type of appliance, from manufacturer. C. Field quality-control reports. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each residential appliance to include in operation and maintenance manuals. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Maintains, within 25 miles of Project site, a service center capable of providing training, parts, and emergency maintenance repairs. B. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer for installation and maintenance of units required for this Project. C. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of residential appliance from single manufacturer. D. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with the following: 1. NFPA: Provide electrical appliances listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. E. Accessibility: Where residential appliances are indicated to comply with accessibility requirements, comply with the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines and Texas Accessibility Standards (TAS). F. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Special Warranties: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace residential appliances or components that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion unless stated otherwise. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 APPLIANCES A. Vehicle Bays and Support Spaces: 1. Extractor: Dexter Laundry model T-900 a. Provide a 3 year warranty on all parts. b. Provide a 10 year warranty on frame, shaft, cylinder, seals, bearings and bearing housing. 2. Ice Maker: Hoshizaki model F-801MWH-C 3. Ice Bin: Hoshizaki model B-500SF B. Kitchen/Living Quarters: 1. Range: Wolfe model C60SS-6B24GN a. Provide accessories: Extra oven rack and casters. 2. Dishwasher: KitchenAid model KDFE104HPS a. Provide manufacturer extended warranty. Denton Fire Station No. 8 RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 113100-2 August 2019 2.2 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS A. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. B. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, power connections, and other conditions affecting installation and performance of residential appliances. B. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. B. Utilities: Comply with plumbing and electrical requirements. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests and inspections. 1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing. B. Tests and Inspections: 1. Perform visual, mechanical, and electrical inspection and testing for each appliance according to manufacturers' written recommendations. Certify compliance with each manufacturer's appliance-performance parameters. 2. Leak Test: After installation, test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist. 3. Operational Test: After installation, start units to confirm proper operation. 4. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and components. C. An appliance will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. D. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.4 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain residential appliances. END OF SECTION Denton Fire Station No. 8 HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS - ALUMINUM Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 122112-1 August 2019 SECTION 122112 – HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS - ALUMINUM PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes horizontal louver blinds with aluminum. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include styles, material descriptions, construction details, dimensions of individual components and profiles, features, finishes, and operating instructions. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for horizontal louver blinds. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each colored component of each type of shade indicated. 1. Include similar Samples of accessories involving color selection. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain horizontal louver blinds through one source from a single manufacturer. B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Passes NFPA 701 small and large-scale vertical burn. Materials tested shall be identical to products proposed for use. D. Product Standard: Provide horizontal louver blinds complying with WCSC A 100.1. E. Anti-Microbial Characteristics: ‘No Growth’ per ASTM G 21 results for fungi ATCC9642, ATCC9644, ATCC9645. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver blinds in factory packages, marked with manufacturer and product name, and location of installation using same designations indicated on Drawings. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install blinds until construction and wet and dirty finish work in spaces, including painting, is complete and ambient temperature is maintained between 60 degrees and 90 degrees and humidity not more than 80%. B. Field Measurements: Where horizontal louver blinds are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Blinds: Before installation begins, for each size, color, texture, and pattern indicated, full-size units equal to 2 percent of amount installed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Hunter Douglas Architectural, 13915 Danielson St., Ste. 100, Poway, CA 92064. Tel: 800-727-8953. 1. Basis of Design Product: CE80 1” Mini Aluminum Blind B. Acceptable Substitutions: As allowed under Section 012500. 2.2 1” MINI HORIZONTAL ALUMINUM BLINDS A. Materials: 1. Slats: 1” wide x .008” thick, heat-treated and spring tempered aluminum alloy 6011 with eased corners and manufacturing burrs removed. Furnish not less than nominal 15.2 slats per foot to ensure tight closure and light control. Finish with manufacturer’s standard baked-on finish in colors selected by architect from manufacturer’s available contract colors utilizing Dust Shield™ finish to inhibit dust build-up for easier maintenance. 2. Slat Support: Braided ladders of 100% polyester yarn color compatible with slats and spacing of ladder no more than 20mm. 3. Headrail: U-shaped profile with rolled edges, measuring 1” x 1 1/2” x .024” constructed of corrosion resistant steel. Internally fit with components required for specified performance and designed for Denton Fire Station No. 8 HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS - ALUMINUM Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 122112-2 August 2019 smooth, quiet, trouble-free operation. Headrail finish to be standard baked-on polyester and to match slats. Ends fitted with .030” steel end lock with adjustable tab for centering blinds. 4. Bottom Rail: Steel, with corrosion-resistant finish formed with double-lock seam into closed oval shape for optimum beam and torsional strength. Ends fitted with color-coordinated engineered polymer caps. Color-coordinated engineered polymer tape buttons secure the ladder and cord. Bottom Rail finish to be standard baked-on polyester color coordinated to slats. 5. Lifting Mechanism: Crashproof steel cordlocks with corrosion-resistant finish, two-ply polyester cord filler in braided polyester jacket lift cords, cord equalizers, cordlock adapter, and Cord Stop/Single Pull Cord. Located on either side of individual blind unit as per architect’s request. 6. Tilting Mechanism: Permanently lubricated die-cast worm and gear type tilter gear mechanism in fully enclosed housing with clutch action to protect ladder tapes from over rotation of the solid steel, corrosion resistant tilt rod. 7. Tilt Control Wand: Tubular shaped 7/16” diameter extruded clear plastic, ribbed for positive grip and detachable without tools. Located on either side of individual blind unit as per architect’s request. 8. Mounting Hardware: Manufacturer’s standard .042” steel box brackets with baked-on polyester finish to match headrail with additional support brackets for blinds over 60” wide. 9. Options: 2 slat valance. 2.3 FABRICATION A. Blind measurements shall be accurate to within +/- 1/8” or as recommended in writing by manufacturer. 2.4 FINISHES A. Slat: Selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range of options. B. Slat Support: Braided ladders shall be color coordinated with slat. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, operational clearances, and other conditions affecting performance. 1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation. B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install roller shades level, plumb, and aligned with adjacent units according to manufacturer's written instructions, and located so shade band is not closer than 2 inches to interior face of glass. Allow clearances for window operation hardware. B. Adjust and balance roller shades to operate smoothly, easily, safely, and free from binding or malfunction throughout entire operational range. C. Clean roller shade surfaces after installation, according to manufacturer's written instructions. D. Engage installer to train Owner’s maintenance personnel to adjust, operate and maintain roller shade systems. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products until completion of project. Touch-up, repair or replace damages products before Substantial Completion. B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer that ensure that roller shades are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION Denton Fire Station No. 8 ROLLER WINDOW SHADES Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 122413-1 August 2019 SECTION 122413 – ROLLER WINDOW SHADES PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes motorized sunscreen t roller shades. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include styles, material descriptions, construction details, dimensions of individual components and profiles, features, finishes, and operating instructions. B. Shop Drawings: Show location and extent of roller shades. Include elevations, sections, details, and dimensions not shown in Product Data. Show installation details, mountings, attachments to other work, operational clearances, and relationship to adjoining work. Include typical wiring diagrams including integration of motor controllers with building management system. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each colored component of each type of shade indicated. 1. Include similar Samples of accessories involving color selection. D. Samples for Verification: For each colored component of each type of shade indicated. 1. Complete, full-size operating unit not less than 16 inches wide for each type of roller shade indicated. 2. For the following products: a. Shade Material: Not less than 3 inches square, with specified treatments applied. E. Maintenance Data: For roller shades to include in maintenance manuals. Include the following: 1. Methods for maintaining roller shades and finishes and operating hardware. 2. Precautions about cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to fabrics, finishes, and performance. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Obtain roller shades through one source from a single manufacturer with a minimum of twenty years’ experience in manufacturing products comparable to those specified in this section. B. Installer Qualifications: Installer trained and certified by the manufacturer with a minimum of ten years’ experience in installing products comparable to those specified in this section. C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Passes NFPA 701 small and large-scale vertical burn. Materials tested shall be identical to products proposed for use. D. Product Standard: Provide roller shades complying with WCMA A 100.1. E. Anti-Microbial Characteristics: ‘No Growth’ per ASTM G 21 results for fungi ATCC9642, ATCC9644, ATCC9645. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver shades in factory packages, marked with manufacturer and product name, and location of installation using same designations indicated on Drawings. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install roller shades until construction and wet and dirty finish work in spaces, including painting, is complete and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. B. Field Measurements: Where roller shades are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Rollers Shades: Before installation begins, for each size, color, texture, and pattern indicated, full- size units equal to 2 percent of amount installed. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Roller Shade Hardware and Chain Warranty: Manufacturer’s standard non-depreciating twenty-five year limited warranty. B. Standard Shadecloth: Manufacturer’s standard twenty-five year warranty. Denton Fire Station No. 8 ROLLER WINDOW SHADES Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 122413-2 August 2019 C. Roller Shade Installation: One year form date of Substantial Completion. D. Roller Shade Motors and Motor Control Systems: Manufacturer’s standard non-depreciating five year warranty. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Mecho, 42-03 35th St.; Long Island City, NY 11101, Tel: 718-729-2020. 1. Basis of Design Product: Motorized UrbanShade System. B. Acceptable Substitutions: As allowed under Section 012500. 2.2 ROLLER SHADE TYPE AND SHADECLOTH A. Motorized Shades: 1. Mounting: Surface mounted with fascia. 2. Configuration: Single solar shadecloth. 3. Solar shadecloth: a. Fabric: EuroVeil 5300, thin, fine, screen cloth in basketweave pattern at 5 percent open. b. Color: Selected from manufacturer’s full range of options. 4. Controls: Electrically operated, IQ/MLC low voltage control system. 2.3 SHADE BAND A. Shade Bands: Construction of shade band includes the fabric, the hem weight, hem pocket, shade roller tube, and the attachment of the shade band to the roller tube. Sewn hems and open hem pockets are not acceptable. 1. Hem Pockets and Hem Weights: Fabric hem pocket with RF-welded seams (including welded ends) and concealed hem weights. Hem weights shall be of appropriate size and weight for shade band. Hem weight shall be continuous inside a sealed hem pocket. Hem pocket construction and hem weights shall be similar, for all shades within one room. 2. Shade Band and Shade Roller Attachment: a. Use extruded aluminum shade roller tube of a diameter and wall thickness required to support shade fabric without excessive deflection. Roller tubes less than 1.55 inch (39.37 mm) in diameter for manual shades, and less than 2.55 inches (64.77 mm) for motorize shades are not acceptable. b. Provide for positive mechanical engagement with drive / brake mechanism. c. Provide for positive mechanical attachment of shade band to roller tube; shade band shall be made removable / replaceable with a "snap-on" "snap-off" spline mounting, without having to remove shade roller from shade brackets. d. Mounting spline shall not require use of adhesives, adhesive tapes, staples, and/or rivets. e. Any method of attaching shade band to roller tube that requires the use of adhesive, adhesive tapes, staples, and/or rivets are not acceptable. 2.4 SHADE FABRICATION A. Fabricate units to completely fill existing openings from head to sill and jamb-to-jamb, unless specifically indicated otherwise. B. Fabricate shadecloth to hang flat without buckling or distortion. Fabricate with heat-sealed trimmed edges to hang straight without curling or reveling. Fabricate unguided shadecloth to roll true and straight without shifting sideways more than 1/8 inch (3 mm) in either direction per 8 feet (2438 mm) of shade height due to warp distortion or weave design. Fabricate hem as follows: 1. Hembar: Concealed hembar. C. Provide battens in standard shades as required to assure proper tracking and uniform rolling of the shadebands. Contractor shall be responsible for assuring the width-to-height (W:H) ratios shall not exceed manufacturer's standards or, in absence of such standards, shall be responsible for establishing appropriate standards to assure proper tracking and rolling of the shadecloth within specified standards. Battens shall be roll-formed stainless steel or tempered steel, as required. 2.5 COMPONENTS A. Access and Material Requirements: 1. Provide shade hardware allowing for the removal of shade roller tube from brackets without removing hardware from opening and without requiring end or center supports to be removed. 2. Provide shade hardware that allows for removal and re-mounting of the shade bands without having to remove the shade tube, drive or operating support brackets. 3. Use only Delrin engineered plastics by DuPont for all plastic components of shade hardware. Denton Fire Station No. 8 ROLLER WINDOW SHADES Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 122413-3 August 2019 Styrene based plastics, and /or polyester, or reinforced polyester will not be acceptable. B. Motorized Shade Hardware and Shade Brackets: 1. Provide shade hardware constructed of minimum 1/8-inch (3 mm) thick plated steel, or heavier, thicker, as required to support 150 percent of the full weight of each shade. 2. Provide shade hardware system that allows for field adjustment of motor or replacement of any operable hardware component without requiring removal of brackets, regardless of mounting position (inside, or outside mount). 3. Provide shade hardware system that allows for operation of multiple shade bands offset by a maximum of 8 to 45 degrees from the motor axis between shade bands (4 to 22.5 degrees) on each side of the radial line, by a single shade motor (multi-banded shade, subject to manufacturer's design criteria). 2.6 SHADE MOTOR DRIVE SYSTEM A. Shade Motors: 1. Tubular, asynchronous (non-synchronous) motors, with built-in reversible capacitor operating at 110 VAC (60 hz), single phase, temperature Class A, thermally protected, totally enclosed, maintenance free with line voltage power supply equipped with locking disconnect plug assembly furnished with each motor. 2. Conceal motors inside shade roller tube. 3. Maximum current draw for each shade motor of 2.3 amps. 4. Use motors rated at the same nominal speed for all shades in the same room. B. Total hanging weight of shade band shall not exceed 80 percent of the rated lifting capacity of the shade motor and tube assembly. 2.7 MOTOR CONTROL SYSTEMS A. IQ/MLC: Specifications and design of shade motors and motor control system are based on the IQ/MLC motor logic control system manufactured by Mecho. Other systems may be acceptable provide that all of the following performance capabilities are provided. Motor logic control systems not in complete compliance with these performance criteria shall not be accepted as equal systems not in complete compliance with these performance criteria shall not be accepted as equal systems. 1. Motor Control System: a. Provide power to each shade motor via individual 3 conductor line voltage circuits connecting each motor to the relay based motor logic controllers (IQ/MLC). b. Control system components shall provide appropriate (spike and brown out) over-current protection (plus or minus 10 percent of line voltage) for each of the four individual motor circuits and shall be rated by UL or ETL as a recognized component of this system and tested as an integrated system. c. Motor control system shall allow each group of four shade motors in any combination to be controlled by each of four local switch ports, with up to fourteen possible "sub-group" combinations via local 3 button wall switches and all at once via a master 3 button switch. System shall allow for overlapping switch combinations from two or more local switches. d. Multiple "sub-groups" from different IQ/MLC control components shall be capable of being combined to form "groups" operated by a single 3 button wall switch, from either the master port or in series from a local switch port. e. Each shade motor shall be accessible (for control purposes) from up to four local switches and one master switch. f. Control system shall allow for automatic alignment of shade hem bars in stopped position at 25 percent, 50 percent, and 75 percent of opening heights, and up to three user-defined intermediate stopping positions in addition to all up / all down, regardless of shade height, for a total of five positions. Control system shall allow shades to be stopped at any point in the opening height noting that shades may not be in alignment at these non-defined positions). g. Control system shall have two standard operating modes: Normal mode allowing the shades to be stopped anywhere in the window's opening height and uniform mode, allowing the shades to only be stopped at the predefined intermediate stop positions. Both modes shall allow for all up / all down positioning. h. Control system components shall allow for interface with both audiovisual system components and building fire and life safety system via a dry contact terminal block. i. Control system components shall allow for interface with external analog input control devices such as solar activated controllers, 24 hour timers, and similar items; via a dry contact terminal block. j. Reconfiguration of switch groups shall not require rewiring of the hardwired line voltage Denton Fire Station No. 8 ROLLER WINDOW SHADES Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 122413-4 August 2019 motor power supply wiring, or the low voltage control wiring. Reconfiguration of switch groups shall be accomplished within the motor control device (IQ/MLC). 2. Wall Switches: a. Three-button architectural flush mounted switches with stainless steel cover plate and no exposed fasteners. b. Connect local wall switches to control system components via low voltage (12V DC) 4- conductor modular cable equipped with RJ-11 type connectors supplied, installed and certified under Division 16 - Electrical. c. Connect master wall switches to control system components via low voltage (12V DC) 6- conductor modular cable equipped with RJ-12 type connectors supplied, installed and certified under Division 16 - Electrical. 2.8 ACCESSORIES A. Fascia: 1. Continuous removable extruded aluminum fascia that attaches to shade mounting brackets without the use of adhesives, magnetic strips, or exposed fasteners. 2. Fascia shall be able to be installed across two or more shade bands in one piece. 3. Fascia shall fully conceal brackets, shade roller and fabric on the tube. 4. Provide bracket / fascia end caps where mounting conditions expose outside of roller shade brackets. 5. Notching of Fascia for manual chain shall not be acceptable. 6. Color: Selected from manufacturer’s full range of options. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, operational clearances, and other conditions affecting performance. 1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation. B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install roller shades level, plumb, and aligned with adjacent units according to manufacturer's written instructions, and located so shade band is not closer than 2 inches to interior face of glass. Allow clearances for window operation hardware. B. Turn-Key Single-Source Responsibility for Motorized Interior Roller Shades: To control the responsibility for performance of motorized roller shade systems, assign the design, engineering, and installation of motorized roller shade systems, motors, controls, and low voltage electrical control wiring specified in this Section to a single manufacturer and their authorized installer/dealer. The Architect will not produce a set of electrical drawings for the installation of control wiring for the motors, or motor controllers of the motorized roller shades. Power wiring (line voltage), shall be provided by the roller shade installer/dealer, in accordance with the requirements provided by the manufacturer. Coordinate the following with the roller shade installer/dealer: 1. General Contractor shall provide power panels and circuits of sufficient size to accommodate roller shade manufacturer's requirements, as indicated on the mechanical and electrical drawings. 2. General Contractor shall coordinate with requirements of roller shade installer/dealer, before inaccessible areas are constructed. 3. General Contractor shall run line voltage as dedicated home runs (of sufficient quantity, in sufficient capacity as required) terminating in junction boxes in locations designated by roller shade dealer. 4. General Contractor shall provide and run all line voltage (from the terminating points) to the motor controllers, wire all roller shade motors to the motor controllers, and provide and run low voltage control wiring from motor controllers to switch/ control locations designated by the Architect. All above-ceiling and concealed wiring shall be plenum-rated, or installed in conduit, as required by the electrical code having jurisdiction. 5. General Contractor shall provide conduit with pull wire in all areas, which might not be accessible to roller shade contractor due to building design, equipment location or schedule. C. Adjust and balance roller shades to operate smoothly, easily, safely, and free from binding or malfunction throughout entire operational range. D. Clean roller shade surfaces after installation, according to manufacturer's written instructions. Denton Fire Station No. 8 ROLLER WINDOW SHADES Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 122413-5 August 2019 E. Engage installer to train Owner’s maintenance personnel to adjust, operate and maintain roller shade systems. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products until completion of project. Touch-up, repair or replace damages products before Substantial Completion. B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer that ensure that roller shades are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION Denton Fire Station No. 8 BLACKOUT WINDOW SHADES Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 122414-1 August 2019 SECTION 122414 – BLACKOUT WINDOW SHADES PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes manual blackout roller shades. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include styles, material descriptions, construction details, dimensions of individual components and profiles, features, finishes, and operating instructions. B. Shop Drawings: Show location and extent of roller shades. Include elevations, sections, details, and dimensions not shown in Product Data. Show installation details, mountings, attachments to other work, operational clearances, and relationship to adjoining work. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each colored component of each type of shade indicated. 1. Include similar Samples of accessories involving color selection. D. Samples for Verification: For each colored component of each type of shade indicated. 1. Complete, full-size operating unit not less than 16 inches wide for each type of roller shade indicated. 2. For the following products: a. Shade Material: Not less than 3 inches square, with specified treatments applied. E. Maintenance Data: For roller shades to include in maintenance manuals. Include the following: 1. Methods for maintaining roller shades and finishes and operating hardware. 2. Precautions about cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to fabrics, finishes, and performance. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Obtain roller shades through one source from a single manufacturer with a minimum of twenty years’ experience in manufacturing products comparable to those specified in this section. B. Installer Qualifications: Installer trained and certified by the manufacturer with a minimum of ten years’ experience in installing products comparable to those specified in this section. C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Passes NFPA 701 small and large-scale vertical burn. Materials tested shall be identical to products proposed for use. D. Product Standard: Provide roller shades complying with WCMA A 100.1. E. Anti-Microbial Characteristics: ‘No Growth’ per ASTM G 21 results for fungi ATCC9642, ATCC9644, ATCC9645. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver shades in factory packages, marked with manufacturer and product name, and location of installation using same designations indicated on Drawings. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install roller shades until construction and wet and dirty finish work in spaces, including painting, is complete and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. B. Field Measurements: Where roller shades are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Rollers Shades: Before installation begins, for each size, color, texture, and pattern indicated, full- size units equal to 2 percent of amount installed. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Roller Shade Hardware and Chain Warranty: Manufacturer’s standard non-depreciating twenty-five year limited warranty. B. Standard Shadecloth: Manufacturer’s standard twenty-five year warranty. C. Roller Shade Installation: One year form date of Substantial Completion. Denton Fire Station No. 8 BLACKOUT WINDOW SHADES Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 122414-2 August 2019 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Mecho, 42-03 35th St.; Long Island City, NY 11101, Tel: 718-729-2020. 1. Basis of Design Product: Manual UrbanShade System. B. Acceptable Substitutions: As allowed under Section 012500. 2.2 ROLLER SHADE TYPE AND SHADECLOTH A. Manually Operated Shades: 1. Mounting: Surface mounted with fascia. 2. Configuration: Single blackout shadecloth. 3. Blackout shadecloth: a. Fabric: Classic Blackout 0700, Vinyl coated fabric blackout material same color reverse side (for exterior). b. Color: Selected from manufacturer’s full range of options. 4. Managed Lift Force, Hardware: a. Lifting Force: 3.5 to 8.5 pounds for shade assemblies with a shade band hanging weight, not including mounting hardware, of 35 pounds. b. Backward compatible components including fascia, regular and reverse roll, pockets, and wall-mounting accessories. c. Includes offset drive capability, left/right, front, or back to allow for utilization of blackout channels. d. Allows for ease of operation when obstructions do not allow for direct drive chain access. e. Offset chain drive shall not cause an increase of friction or pull force when operated up to a 26 degree angle from vertical. 2.3 SHADE BAND A. Shade Bands: Construction of shade band includes the fabric, the hem weight, hem pocket, shade roller tube, and the attachment of the shade band to the roller tube. Sewn hems and open hem pockets are not acceptable. 1. Hem Pockets and Hem Weights: Fabric hem pocket with RF-welded seams (including welded ends) and concealed hem weights. Hem weights shall be of appropriate size and weight for shade band. Hem weight shall be continuous inside a sealed hem pocket. Hem pocket construction and hem weights shall be similar, for all shades within one room. 2. Shade Band and Shade Roller Attachment: a. Use extruded aluminum shade roller tube of a diameter and wall thickness required to support shade fabric without excessive deflection. Roller tubes less than 1.55 inch (39.37 mm) in diameter for manual shades, and less than 2.55 inches (64.77 mm) for motorize shades are not acceptable. b. Provide for positive mechanical engagement with drive / brake mechanism. c. Provide for positive mechanical attachment of shade band to roller tube; shade band shall be made removable / replaceable with a "snap-on" "snap-off" spline mounting, without having to remove shade roller from shade brackets. d. Mounting spline shall not require use of adhesives, adhesive tapes, staples, and/or rivets. e. Any method of attaching shade band to roller tube that requires the use of adhesive, adhesive tapes, staples, and/or rivets are not acceptable. 2.4 SHADE FABRICATION A. Fabricate units to completely fill existing openings from head to sill and jamb-to-jamb, unless specifically indicated otherwise. B. Fabricate shadecloth to hang flat without buckling or distortion. Fabricate with heat-sealed trimmed edges to hang straight without curling or reveling. Fabricate unguided shadecloth to roll true and straight without shifting sideways more than 1/8 inch (3 mm) in either direction per 8 feet (2438 mm) of shade height due to warp distortion or weave design. Fabricate hem as follows: 1. Hembar: Exposed blackout hembar with polybond seal for blackout shades. C. Provide battens in standard shades as required to assure proper tracking and uniform rolling of the shadebands. Contractor shall be responsible for assuring the width-to-height (W:H) ratios shall not exceed manufacturer's standards or, in absence of such standards, shall be responsible for establishing appropriate standards to assure proper tracking and rolling of the shadecloth within specified standards. Battens shall be roll-formed stainless steel or tempered steel, as required. D. Blackout shadebands, when used in side channels, shall have horizontally mounted, roll-formed stainless steel or tempered-steel battens not more than 3 feet on center extending fully into side channels. Battens Denton Fire Station No. 8 BLACKOUT WINDOW SHADES Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 122414-3 August 2019 shall be concealed in an integrally-colored fabric to match the inside and outside colors of the shadeband, in accordance with manufacturer's published standards for spacing and requirements. 1. Battens shall be roll formed of stainless steel or tempered steel and concave to match the contour of the roller tube. 2. Batten pockets shall be self-colored fabric front and back RF welded into the shadecloth. A self-color opaque liner shall be provided front and back to eliminate any see through of the batten pocket that shall not exceed 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) high and be totally opaque. A see-through moire effect, which occurs with multiple layers of transparent fabrics, shall not be acceptable. 2.5 COMPONENTS A. Access and Material Requirements: 1. Provide shade hardware allowing for the removal of shade roller tube from brackets without removing hardware from opening and without requiring end or center supports to be removed. 2. Provide shade hardware that allows for removal and re-mounting of the shade bands without having to remove the shade tube, drive or operating support brackets. 3. Use only Delrin engineered plastics by DuPont for all plastic components of shade hardware. Styrene based plastics, and /or polyester, or reinforced polyester will not be acceptable. B. Manual Operated Chain Drive Hardware and Brackets, Mecho: 1. Provide for universal, regular and offset drive capacity, allowing drive chain to fall at front, rear or non-offset for all shade drive end brackets. Universal offset shall be adjustable for future change. 2. Provide hardware capable for installation of a removable fascia, for both regular and/or reverse roll, which shall be installed without exposed fastening devices of any kind. 3. Provide shade hardware system that allows for removable regular and/or reverse roll fascias to be mounted continuously across two or more shade bands without requiring exposed fasteners of any kind. 4. Provide shade hardware system that allows for operation of multiple shade bands (multi-banded shades) by a single chain operator, subject to manufacturer's design criteria. Connectors shall be offset to assure alignment from the first to the last shade band. 5. Provide shade hardware system that allows multi-banded manually operated shades to be capable of smooth operation when the axis is offset a maximum of 6 degrees on each side of the plane perpendicular to the radial line of the curve, for a 12 degrees total offset. 6. Provide positive mechanical engagement of drive mechanism to shade roller tube. Friction fit connectors for drive mechanism connection to shade roller tube are not acceptable 7. Provide shade hardware constructed of minimum 1/8 inch (3 mm) thick plated steel or heavier as required to support 150 percent of the full weight of each shade. 8. Drive Bracket / Brake Assembly: a. Mecho Drive Bracket model Mecho5x shall be fully integrated with all Mecho accessories, including, but not limited to: SnapLoc fascia, SnapLoc Zipper channels, room darkening side / sill channels, center supports and connectors for multi-banded shades. b. Mecho5x drive sprocket and brake assembly shall rotate and be supported on a welded 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) steel pin. c. The brake shall be an over-running clutch design which disengages to 90 percent during the raising and lowering of a shade. The brake shall withstand a pull force of 50 lbs. (22 kg) in the stopped position. d. The braking mechanism shall be applied to an oil-impregnated hub on to which the brake system is mounted. The oil impregnated hub design includes an articulated brake assembly, which assures a smooth, non-jerky operation in raising and lowering the shades. The assembly shall be permanently lubricated. Products that require externally applied lubrication and or not permanently lubricated are not acceptable. e. The entire Mecho5x assembly shall be fully mounted on the steel support bracket, and fully independent of the shade tube assembly, which may be removed and reinstalled without effecting the roller shade limit adjustments. f. Drive Chain: No. 10 qualified stainless steel chain rated to 90 lbs (41 kg) minimum breaking strength. Nickel plate chain shall not be accepted. 2.6 ACCESSORIES A. Fascia: 1. Continuous removable extruded aluminum fascia that attaches to shade mounting brackets without the use of adhesives, magnetic strips, or exposed fasteners. 2. Fascia shall be able to be installed across two or more shade bands in one piece. 3. Fascia shall fully conceal brackets, shade roller and fabric on the tube. 4. Provide bracket / fascia end caps where mounting conditions expose outside of roller shade Denton Fire Station No. 8 BLACKOUT WINDOW SHADES Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 122414-4 August 2019 brackets. 5. Notching of Fascia for manual chain shall not be acceptable. B. Room Darkening Channels: 1. Side Channels, Mecho: Extruded aluminum with polybond edge seals and SnapLoc-mounting brackets and with concealed fastening. Exposed fastening is not acceptable. Units 1-15/16 inches (49 mm) wide by 1-3/16 inches (30 mm) deep, two-band center channels, 2-5/8 inches (67 mm) wide by 1-3/16 inches (30 mm) deep. 2. Sill Channels: Extruded aluminum with polybond edge seals and SnapLoc-mounting brackets and with concealed fastening. Exposed fastening is not acceptable. 3. Channel Color: Selected from manufacturer’s full range of options. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, operational clearances, and other conditions affecting performance. 1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation. B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install roller shades level, plumb, and aligned with adjacent units according to manufacturer's written instructions, and located so shade band is not closer than 2 inches to interior face of glass. Allow clearances for window operation hardware. B. Adjust and balance roller shades to operate smoothly, easily, safely, and free from binding or malfunction throughout entire operational range. C. Clean roller shade surfaces after installation, according to manufacturer's written instructions. D. Engage installer to train Owner’s maintenance personnel to adjust, operate and maintain roller shade systems. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products until completion of project. Touch-up, repair or replace damages products before Substantial Completion. B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer that ensure that roller shades are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION Denton Fire Station No. 8 METAL COUNTERTOPS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 123616-1 August 2019 SECTION 123616 – METAL COUNTERTOPS PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Stainless steel countertops, shelves, and integral sinks 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For countertop materials and sinks. B. Shop Drawings: Include plans sections, details, and attachments to other work. Detail fabrication and installation, including field joints. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of material exposed to view. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver metal countertops only after casework has been completed in installation areas. B. Keep finished surfaces covered with polyethylene film or other protective covering during handling and installation. 1.5 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of construction to receive metal countertops by field measurements before fabrication. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304. B. Sealant for Countertops: Manufacturer's standard sealant of characteristics indicated below that complies with applicable requirements in Section 079200 Joint Sealants. 1. Mildew-Resistant Joint Sealant: Mildew resistant, single component, non-sag, neutral curing, silicone. 2. Joint Sealant: Single component, non-sag, neutral curing, silicone; Class 25. 3. Color: Clear. 2.2 STAINLESS STEEL COUNTERTOPS, SHELVES AND INTEGRAL SINKS A. Countertops: Fabricate from 0.063-inch thick (16 gauge), stainless steel sheet. Provide smooth, clean exposed tops and edges in uniform plane, free of defects. Provide front and end overhang over the base cabinets as detailed in Drawings. 1. Joints: Fabricate countertops without field-made joints in sections for joining in field, with joints at locations indicated. 2. Weld shop-made joints 3. Sound deaden the undersurface with heavy-build mastic coating. 4. Extend the top down as indicated in Drawings. 5. Where a backsplash occurs, form the backsplash coved to and integral with top surface, as indicated in Drawings. 6. Provide raised (marine) edge around perimeter of tops containing sinks; pitch tops containing sinks two ways to provide drainage without channeling or grooving as indicated in Drawings. 7. Where stainless steel sinks occur in stainless-steel tops, factory-weld into one integral unit. B. Wall-Mounted Shelves: Fabricate from stainless steel sheet, not less than 0.050-inch nominal thickness. Weld shop-made joints. Fold down up the front edge a minimum of 3/4 inch; fold up the back edge a minimum of 3 inches. Provide integral stiffening brackets, formed by folding up ends a minimum of 3/4 inch and by welding to upturned front and back edges. C. Stainless Steel Sinks: Fabricate from stainless steel sheet, not less than 0.050-inch thick (18 gauge) Fabricate with corners rounded and coved to at least 5/8-inchradius. Slope the sink bottoms to outlet without channeling or grooving. Provide continuous butt-welded joints. 1. Provide sizes indicated or manufacturer's closest standard size of equal or greater volume, as approved by Architect. 2. Provide double-wall construction for sink partitions with top edge rounded to at least 1/2-inch Denton Fire Station No. 8 METAL COUNTERTOPS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 123616-2 August 2019 diameter. 3. Factory punch holes for fittings. 4. Provide sinks with stainless steel strainers and tailpieces. 5. Provide sinks with integral rims except where located in stainless steel countertops. 6. Apply 1/8-inch thick coating of heat resistant, sound deadening mastic to under-sink surfaces. 2.3 STAINLESS STEEL FINISH A. Countertops: Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform, non-directional satin finish matching No. 4 finish, with no evidence of welds and free of cross scratches. Run grain with long dimension of each piece. When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove embedded foreign matter and leave surfaces clean. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of metal countertops. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install metal countertops level, plumb, and true; shim as required, using concealed shims. B. Field Jointing: Where possible, make field jointing in the same manner as shop jointing; use fasteners recommended by manufacturer. Prepare edges to be joined in shop so Project Site processing of top and edge surfaces is not required. Locate field joints where shown in Drawings. C. Secure tops to cabinets with Z-type or L-type fasteners or equivalent; use two or more fasteners at each front, end, and back. D. Abut top and edge surfaces in one true plane, with internal supports placed to prevent deflection. E. Seal junctures of tops, splashes, and walls with mildew-resistant silicone sealant or another permanently elastic sealing compound recommended by countertop material manufacturer. F. Wall-Mounted Shelves: Fasten to masonry, partition framing, blocking, or reinforcements in partitions. Fasten each shelf through upturned back edge at not less than 24 inches o.c. 3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Repair or remove and replace defective work as directed on completion of installation. B. Clean finished surfaces, touch up as required, and remove or refinish damaged or soiled areas to match original factory finish, as approved by Architect. C. Protection: Provide 6-mil plastic or other suitable water-resistant covering over the countertop surfaces. Tape to underside of countertop at a minimum of 48 inches o.c. Remove protection at Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION Denton Fire Station No. 8 SIMULATED STONE COUNTERTOPS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 123661-1 August 2019 SECTION 123661 – SIMULATED STONE COUNTERTOPS PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Solid-surface-material countertops and backsplashes. 2. Quartz agglomerate countertops and backsplashes. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For countertop materials and sinks. B. Shop Drawings: For countertops. Show materials, finishes, edge and backsplash profiles, methods of joining, and cutouts for plumbing fixtures. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of material exposed to view. 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions of countertops by field measurements after base cabinets are installed but before countertop fabrication is complete. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate locations of utilities that will penetrate countertops or backsplashes. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SOLID-SURFACE-MATERIAL COUNTERTOPS A. Configuration: Provide countertops with the following front and backsplash style: 1. Front: Straight, slightly eased at top. 2. Backsplash: Straight, slightly eased at corner 3. Endsplash: Matching backsplash. B. Countertops: 3/4-inch (19 mm) thick, solid surface material. C. Countertop Backsplashes: 1/2-inch (12 mm) thick, solid surface material. D. Fabrication: Fabricate countertops in one piece with shop-applied edges and backsplashes unless otherwise indicated. Comply with solid surface material manufacturer's written instructions for adhesives, sealers, fabrication, and finishing. 1. Fabricate with loose backsplashes for field assembly. 2.2 QUARTZ AGGLOMERATE COUNTERTOPS A. Configuration: Provide countertops with the following front and backsplash style: 1. Front: Straight, slightly eased at top. 2. Backsplash: Straight, slightly eased at corner. 3. Endsplash: Matching backsplash. B. Countertops: 3/4-inch (2 cm) thick, quartz agglomerate. C. Countertop Backsplashes: 3/4-inch (2 cm) thick, quartz agglomerate. D. Fabrication: Fabricate tops in one piece with shop-applied edges and backsplashes unless otherwise indicated. Comply with quartz agglomerate manufacturer's written instructions for adhesives, sealers, fabrication, and finishing. 1. Fabricate with loose backsplashes for field assembly. 2.3 COUNTERTOP MATERIALS A. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2. B. Adhesives: Adhesives shall not contain urea formaldehyde. C. Adhesives: Adhesives shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers." D. Solid Surface Material: Homogeneous solid sheets of filled plastic resin complying with ANSI SS1. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. DuPont Corian 2. Type: Provide Standard Type unless Special Purpose Type is indicated. Denton Fire Station No. 8 SIMULATED STONE COUNTERTOPS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 123661-2 August 2019 3. Integral Sink Bowls: Corian Cameo White, model 810. 4. Colors and Patterns: Refer to Finish Legend. E. Quartz Agglomerate: Solid sheets consisting of quartz aggregates bound together with a matrix of filled plastic resin and complying with the "Physical Characteristics of Materials" Article of ANSI SS1. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. DuPont Corian b. Caesarstone 2. Colors and Patterns: Refer to Finish Schedule. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install countertops level to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 8 feet. B. Fasten countertops by screwing through corner blocks of base units into underside of countertop. Pre-drill holes for screws as recommended by manufacturer. Align adjacent surfaces and, using adhesive in color to match countertop, form seams to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Carefully dress joints smooth, remove surface scratches, and clean entire surface. 1. Install backsplashes and endsplashes to comply with manufacturer's written instructions for adhesives, sealers, fabrication, and finishing. 2. Seal edges of cutouts in particleboard sub-tops by saturating with varnish. END OF SECTION Denton Fire Station No. 8 ENTRANCE FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 124813-1 August 2019 SECTION 124813 – ENTRANCE FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Entrance mats in recessed surface mounted frames. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes. B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of product indicated, not less than 6 inch square sections of grate material and 6 inch length of frame material. C. Maintenance Data: For floor mats and frames to include in maintenance manuals. D. Shop Drawings: Show layout and types of grates and frames not less than half-scale sections of typical installations, details of patterns or designs, anchors, and accessories, and field measurements of slab recess to receive frames grates (if applicable). 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain floor mats and frames through one source from a single manufacturer. B. Accessibility Requirements: Provide installed floor mats that comply with Section 4.5 in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG)." 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate size and location of recesses in concrete with installation of finish floors to receive floor mats and frames. 1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials not less than 2% of installed, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Floor mats and frames shall be fabricated free of defects in materials and workmanship in accordance with the General Conditions, and the manufacturer shall offer a 5 year warranty against defects in materials and workmanship PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 ENTRANCE MATS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. C/S Group 2. Balco, Inc. 3. ARDEN Architectural Specialties, Inc. 4. Nystrom 5. Babcock-Davis B. Basis of Design: C/S Group Pedimat M1 1. Mat Frame: Tapered Angle Frame shall be a 1/2” deep recessed frame in 6063-TS aluminum alloy. Frame finish to be clear anodized. 2. Tread Insert: MonoTuft HD Carpet 3. Tread Spacing: 2-inch o.c. 4. Tread Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range of options. 5. Vinyl End Trim: As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range of options. 2.2 FABRICATION A. Floor Mats: Shop fabricate units to greatest extent possible in sizes indicated. Unless otherwise indicated, Denton Fire Station No. 8 ENTRANCE FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 124813-2 August 2019 provide single unit for each mat installation; do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum sizes for units that are removed for maintenance and cleaning. Where joints in mats are necessary, space symmetrically and away from normal traffic lanes. Miter corner joints in framing elements with hairline joints or provide prefabricated corner units without joints. B. Recessed Frames: As indicated, for permanent recessed installation, complete with corner pins or reinforcement and anchorage devices. 1. Fabricate edge-frame members in single lengths or, where frame dimensions exceed maximum available lengths, provide minimum number of pieces possible, with hairline joints equally spaced and pieces spliced together by straight connecting pins. C. Coat surfaces of aluminum frames that will contact cementitious material with manufacturer's standard protective coating. 2.3 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes. C. Class II, Clear Anodic Finish: AA-M12C22A31 (Mechanical Finish: non-specular as fabricated; Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class II, clear coating 0.010 mm or thicker) complying with AAMA 611. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Products must be placed on a flat and level substrate, not more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet out of plumb, per ACI 302. B. Examine substrates and floor conditions for compliance with requirements for location, sizes, minimum recess depth, and other conditions affecting installation of floor mats and frames. 1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install recessed mat frames to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Set mat tops at height recommended by manufacturer for most effective cleaning action; coordinate top of mat surfaces with bottom of doors that swing across mats to provide clearance between door and mat. 1. Install necessary shims, spacers, and anchorages for proper location and secure attachment of frames. 2. Install grout and fill around frames and, if required to set mat tops at proper elevations, in recesses under mats. Finish grout and fill smooth and level. 3. Install frames and treads flush, level and tightly fitted together to prevent tread units from bowing, warping, moving or slipping. Final installation should provide a tightly fitted mat that does not produce excessive movement when being walked on. 3.3 PROTECTION A. After completing frame installation and concrete work, provide temporary filler of plywood or fiberboard in recesses and cover frames with plywood protective flooring. Maintain protection until construction traffic has ended and Project is near Substantial Completion. B. Install product when no further wheeled construction traffic will occur and wet type operations, including painting, are complete. END OF SECTION City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 FIRE SUPPRESSION SUBMITTAL PROCESS MDE Project NO: 191124 210010 - 1 August 2019 SECTION 210010 – FIRE SUPPRESSION SUBMITTAL PROCESS PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with all submittal provisions of Division 1. B. Submit electronic copies of the submittal to the prime consultant (i.e. architect) in order to process and track the submittals properly in accordance with Division 1 and 21 submittal requirements. Architects and consultants are to submit all submittals and RFI’s to the mechanical engineer electronically. Send to “mdengca@md-eng.com”. Submittals shall be labeled by their project specification section or CSI specification section if not listed in project specifications. C. Contractor is responsible to separate submittals per specification section. Unseparated submittals are subject to rejection without review. D. Allow a minimum of ten (10) working days for the review of submittals and each re-submittal. E. Submittals that have been reviewed and marked as REJECTED (REJ) or REVISE & RESUBMIT (RES) should be resubmitted within 10 days to be reviewed again by engineer. F. Compliance with the Contract documents shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor. Items on equipment that are were not accepted by the Architect in writing as an approved equal shall be replaced or revised to comply with the contract documents at the Contractor's expense. G. Resubmission of rejected submittals shall be limited to one (1) in number. Costs for processing subsequent resubmittals in excess of the first resubmittal, resulting from the Contractor's disregard of Architect/Engineer's primary submittal rejection comments, shall be borne by the Contractor. Costs shall be based on Architect/Engineer's hourly rates as published in their current professional fee schedules and shall also include reimbursable costs for delivery, mailing, and photocopies at direct cost-plus ten percent (10%). 1.2 REQUIRED SPECIFICATIONS (Project specific) A. The chart below are the submittals required for the project. 1. Submittals marked with an “X” are required for this project. 2. Submittals without an “X” are not required for this project. See required specifications on next page City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 FIRE SUPPRESSION SUBMITTAL PROCESS MDE Project NO: 191124 210010 - 2 August 2019 Required Spec X Submittal Name Reference Common Work Results for Fire Suppression X -Shop Drawings, Access Doors 21 05 00 Meters & Gauges for Fire Suppression -Pressure gauges, Gage attachments, Test plugs -Sight flow indicators 21 05 19 General Duty Valves -Valves, Cocks & Specialties 21 05 23 Hangers and Supports -Pipe hangers and supports, Hanger rods X -Sleeves, Trapezes, Concrete supports 21 05 29 Vibration & Seismic Controls -Isolation material and Support units 21 05 48 Identification for Fire Suppression Piping -Valve tags, Pipe markers, Equipment plates X -Conceals devices, Manufacturers 21 05 53 Fire Protection Systems -Piping, Backflow Preventers, FD connections 21 10 00 Wet-Pipe Sprinkler Systems -Piping, Backflow Preventers, FD connections X -Standpipes, Valves, Switches, Sprinklers 21 13 00 Centrifugal Fire Pumps -Product Data- See Specification.21 31 16 City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION MDE Project NO: 191124 210500 - 1 August 2019 SECTION 210500 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to the Work in this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Work Included: Provide complete fire suppression systems where shown on the drawings, as specified herein, and as needed for a complete and proper installation including, but not necessarily limited to the following summary of work: 1. Furnish and install a complete fire sprinkler and wet standpipe system as shown on drawings and described herein. 2. Other items and services required to complete the systems. B. Any Alternate Proposals are summarized in Division 01 of the Specifications. The Contractor is directed to refer to all Sections of the Specifications and Drawings for this project to determine the exact extent and scope of the various Alternate Proposals as each pertains to the work of all trades. 1.3 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Unless otherwise specified, materials are to be new and of current U.S. manufacture, free from defects and of the best quality of their respective kinds. B. Equipment and/or materials damaged in shipment or handling, or otherwise damaged before installation, shall be replaced with new equipment and/or materials. Damaged equipment and/or materials shall not be repaired at the jobsite. C. Furnishing of the proper equipment and/or materials and to see that it is installed as recommended by the manufacturer is entirely the responsibility of the Contractor. If required for proper installation, the Contractor shall obtain advice and supervisory assistance from a representative of the specific manufacturer of the equipment being installed. D. Materials and adhesives to conform to Federal Standard Flame-Spread Properties, Inc., with composite fire and smoke hazard ratings, maximum 25 for flame spread and 50 for smoke developed. Adhesives to be waterproof. E. The Contractor shall promptly notify the Architect in writing of any conflict between the requirements of the Contract Documents and the manufacturer's directions and shall obtain the Architect instructions before proceeding with the work. Should the Contractor perform any such work that does not comply with the manufacturer's directions or such instructions from the Architect, he shall bear all costs arising in connection with the deficiencies. F. Belts, pulleys, chains, gears, couplings, projecting screws, keys or other rotating parts which are located so that a person can come in close proximity thereto shall be fully enclosed properly provided with a guard. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE AND APPLICABLE STANDARDS A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workers that are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. B. The Contractor shall be responsible for fitting his material and apparatus into the building and shall carefully lay out his work at the site to conform to the structural conditions, to avoid all obstructions, to conform to the details of the installation and thereby to provide an integrated satisfactory operating installation. The contractor must support all pipe, equipment, and all other items furnished and installed under this scope from steel joists or structural steel frames. It is prohibited to support pipe, equipment, and all other items furnished under this scope from the metal deck. C. Without additional cost to the Owner, provide such other labor and materials as are required to complete the work of this Section in accordance with the requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, regardless of whether such materials and associated labor are called for elsewhere in these Contract Documents. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION MDE Project NO: 191124 210500 - 2 August 2019 D. Codes: Perform all work in accordance with the latest edition of the following codes: 1. State and city building, fire, plumbing and mechanical codes. 2. International Fire Code (NMFC) 3. International Mechanical Code (NMMC) 4. International Plumbing Code (NMPC) 5. National Electrical Code (NMEC) 6. International Energy Conservation Code (NMECC) 7. International Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 8. American with Disabilities Act (ADA) 9. ICC/ANSI A117.1 – Accessible and Useable Buildings and Facilities. 10. All authorities having jurisdiction. (AHJ) 11. Architectural code review drawing. E. The Contractor shall comply in every respect with all requirements of National Fire Protection Association, local Fire Department regulations and utility company requirements. In no case does this relieve the Contractor of the responsibility of complying with these Specifications and Drawings where specified conditions are of higher quality than the requirements of the above-specified authorities. Where requirements of the Specifications and Drawings are more lenient than the requirements of the above authorities having jurisdiction, the Contractor shall make installations in compliance with the requirements of the above authorities with no extra compensation. F. Where conflicts occur between drawings, specifications or code requirements, the most stringent requirement shall take precedence. G. Standards: The specifications and standards of the following organizations are by reference made a part of these specifications. All work, unless otherwise indicated, shall comply with the requirements and recommendations wherever applicable: 1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI). 2. Air Conditioning, Heating and Refrigeration Institute (ARI). 3. American Gas Association (AGA). 4. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM). 5. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME). 6. American Society of Refrigeration, Heating and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE). 7. Electrical Testing Laboratories (ETL). 8. National Bureau of Standards (NBS). 9. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA). 10. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA). 11. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning National Association (SMACNA). 12. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL). H. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." 2. ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX. 1.5 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES A.The requirements and recommendations of the latest edition of the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) Act are by reference made a part of these specifications. All work shall comply with the requirements and recommendations wherever applicable. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with all submittal provisions of Division 1. B. General: Submit electronic copies of the submittal to the prime consultant (i.e. architect) in order to process and track the submittals properly in accordance with Division 01 and 26 submittal requirements. Architects are then to submit all documents and RFI’s to the Electrical Engineer electronically. Send to mdengca@md-eng.com. Submittals shall be labeled by their project specification section. C. Product Data: Submit the following: 1. Materials list of items proposed to be provided under Division 21. 2. Manufacturer's specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with the specified requirements. The term "Compliance" is understood to mean that the Contractor certifies that the submitted equipment will meet or exceed the contract document requirements. Items that do not clearly meet this definition should be identified and explained as required in the following paragraph. 3. Identify the difference between the specified item or function and the proposed. Explain with enough detail so that the Engineer/Owner can easily determine that the item complies with the functional intent. List any disadvantages or advantages of the proposed item versus the specified item. Submit technical data sheets and/or pictures City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION MDE Project NO: 191124 210500 - 3 August 2019 and diagrams to support and clarify. Organize in a clear and concise format. All substitutions shall be approved in writing by Architect. The Architect’s decision shall be final. 4. Allow a minimum of ten (10) working days for the review of submittals and each re- submittal. 5. Submittals that have been reviewed and marked as REJECTED (REJ) or REVISE & RESUBMIT (RES) should be resubmitted with-in 10 days to be reviewed again by engineer. 6. Compliance with the Contract documents shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor. Items on equipment that are were not accepted by the Architect in writing as an approved equal shall be replaced or revised to comply with the contract documents at the Contractor's expense. 7. Manufacturer's recommended installation procedures which, when reviewed by the Architect, shall become the basis for accepting or rejecting actual installation procedures used on the work. 8. Sign the submittal as an indication of compliance with the contract documents. Any deviations from the contract documents shall be indicated on the submittal prior to signing. Any deviations not indicated shall be cause for rejection and removal of the non- complying equipment at the Contractor’s expense. 9.All owner requested VE (Value Engineering) changes must be submitted to MD Engineering on a signed letter describing all VE changes and signed by both the architect and owner or will be subject to rejection without review. a.All proposed VE items must meet all code requirements. D. Submittals required of materials and equipment under this section include the following: 1. Piping and Accessories Materials: a.Clearly marked up manufacturer's data showing compliance with the specifications for: (Include model numbers and highlight or circle products) 1)Piping material proposed for each system. 2)Valves, cocks, and specialties. a) RPZ’s, Double back flow preventers, Vacuum breakers. 3)Flexible connectors for piping. 4)Flanges. 5)Pumps, and circulators 6)Compressors. b.l/8" scale (minimum) fire suppression piping shop drawings showing coordinated piping routing and arrangements with all equipment, accessories and system expansion and contraction compensation methods. 2. Vibration Isolation and Sound Control Materials: a.Submit shop drawings showing the structural design and details of inertia bases, steel beam bases, and other custom-fabricated work not covered by manufacturer's submitted data. b.Furnish layouts of templates to be furnished to fabricators of equipment bases, foundations, and other support systems, as needed for coordination of vibration isolation units with other work. c.Submit shop drawings indicating the scope of vibration isolation work, locations of units and flexible connections. Include support isolation points for piping, pumps, etc. d.Include schedule of isolation units, showing size or manufacturer's part number, the weight supported and resulting deflection of each unit. e.For spring isolation units, show wire size, spring diameter, free height, solid-compression height, operating height, fatigue characteristics and ratio of horizontal to vertical stiffness. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION MDE Project NO: 191124 210500 - 4 August 2019 f.For spring-and-pad type isolation units, show the basis of spring rate selection for the range of loading weights. 3. Mechanical Identification Materials: a.Clearly marked-up product literature or samples showing compliance with specified materials for: 1)Valve tagging. 2)Pipe marking. 3)Equipment marking. 4. Insulation: a.Manufacturer's certified data on thermal performance. b.Details, when required, of methods to be used in providing for unusual piping expansion and contraction. c.Manufacturer's data on any alternate insulation material of reduced thickness, including pre-insulated pipe. d.Manufacturer's data on all jacketing materials, sealants and fasteners. 5. Fire Protection System: a.Provide hydraulic calculations for all areas. b.Provide clearly marked-up manufacturer's data showing compliance with the specifications for: 1)All required system valves and switches. 2)Sprinkler heads for all areas and sprinkler cabinet. 3)Fire hoses, hose valves and cabinets. 4)Fire department connection. c.Provide all electrical characteristics. d.Submit all hydraulic calculations and drawings to be submitted to the Authority Having Jurisdiction and obtain stamp of approval prior to submission to the Architect/Engineer. 6. Record Documents: Reference the requirements detailed in this section. 7. Operation and Maintenance Manual Requirements. E.Resubmission of rejected submittals shall be limited to one (1) in number. Costs for processing subsequent resubmittals in excess of the first resubmittal, resulting from the Contractor's disregard of Architect/Engineer's primary submittal rejection comments, shall be borne by the Contractor. Costs shall be based on Architect/Engineer's hourly rates as published in their current professional fee schedules and shall also include reimbursable costs for delivery, mailing, and photocopies at direct cost plus ten percent (10%). 1.7 SUBSTITUTIONS A. Comply with all provisions of Division 1. B. The use of manufacturers' names and catalog numbers followed by the phrase "or equal" is generally used to establish a standard of quality and utility for the specified items and to provide a dimensional reference for construction documents that are drawn to scale. C. Submittals for "equal" items shall, where applicable, include the following data that are not necessarily required for specified items: 1. Performance characteristics. 2. Materials. 3. Finish. 4. Certification of conformance with specified codes and standards. 5. Manufacturer's specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with the specified requirements. The term "Compliance" is understood to mean that the Contractor certifies that the submitted equipment will meet or exceed the contract document requirements. Items that do not clearly meet this definition should be identified and explained as required in Paragraph 6 below. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION MDE Project NO: 191124 210500 - 5 August 2019 6. Identify the difference between the specified item or function and the proposed. Explain with enough detail so that the Architect/ Engineer/Owner can easily determine that the item complies with the functional intent. List any disadvantages or advantages of the proposed item versus the specified item. Submit technical data sheets and/or pictures and diagrams to support and clarify. Include shop drawings for all piping and ductwork equipment per Paragraph 1.5 Submittals. Organize in a clear and concise format. D. Submittals of "equal" components or systems may be rejected if: 1. The material or equipment would necessitate the alteration of any portion of the mechanical, electrical, architectural or structural design. 2. Dimensions vary from the specified material or equipment in such a manner that accessibility or clearances are impaired or the work of other trades is adversely affected. E. Proposed substitutions for materials or equipment must be submitted ten (10) days prior to final bid date for consideration as approved equals. Otherwise, such substitutions will not be permitted. Proposals for substitutions shall be made only by the prime bidders. Manufacturers, distributors, and sub-contractors shall not make proposals to the Architect for substitutions. F. All equipment installed on this project shall have local representation, local factory authorized service, and a local stock of repair parts G. No substitution shall be made unless authorized in writing by the Architect. Should a substitution be accepted, and should the substitute material prove defective or otherwise unsatisfactory for the service intended, and within the guarantee period, the Contractor shall replace this material or equipment with material or equipment specified, at his own expense, and to the satisfaction of the Architect. H. Contractors submitting bids on substitute materials and equipment must also provide a written performance guarantee certifying that the substitute materials and equipment will produce the specified effects and meet the approval of the Architect. 1.8 ORDINANCES, PERMITS, METERS, UTILITIES AND ROYALTIES A. Procure all permits and licenses necessary for completion of this project and pay all lawful fees required and necessary pursuant in obtaining said permits and licenses. All required certificates of approvals and inspections by local governing and regulating authorities shall be obtained and paid for by the Contractor. B. Pay all fees required for the connection of water to utility mains, and any meter fees if required. C.Pay any royalty payments required or fees for the use of patented equipment or systems. Defend all law suits or claims for infringement of any patent rights and shall hold the Owner and/or Architect/Engineer harmless from loss as a result of said suits or claims. 1.9 COMPATIBILITY OF EQUIPMENT A. Assume full responsibility for satisfactory operation of all component parts of the fire protection systems to assure compatibility of all equipment and performance of the integrated systems in accordance with the requirements of the specifications. Should the Contractor consider any part of the specifications or drawings as rendering his acceptance of such responsibility impossible, prohibitive, or restrictive, he shall notify the Engineer before submitting his bid, and the bid shall be accompanied by a written statement of any objections or exceptions to the specifications and drawings. B. The size of fire protection equipment indicated on the Drawings is based on the dimensions of a particular manufacturer. While other manufacturers may be acceptable, it is the responsibility of the Contractor to determine if the equipment he proposes to furnish will fit in the space. Fabrication Drawings shall be prepared when required by the Architect/Engineer or Owner to indicate a suitable arrangement. C. All equipment shall be installed in a manner to permit access to all surfaces. All valves, motors, drives, filters, and other accessory items shall be installed in a position to allow removal for service without disassembly of another part. 1.10 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS A. The drawings show the arrangements of work. Should project conditions necessitate rearrangement, or if the materials or equipment can be installed to a better advantage in a different manner, the Contractor shall, before proceeding with the work, prepare and submit five copies of Drawings of the proposed arrangement for the Architect’s review. Allow a minimum of ten (10) working days for review. B. Should the Contractor propose to install equipment requiring space conditions other than those shown, or rearrange the equipment, he shall assume responsibility for the rearrangement of the space and shall have the Architect review the change before proceeding with the work. The request for such changes shall be accompanied by shop drawings of the space in question. Identify monetary credits proposed or other benefits of the change. Allow a minimum of ten (10) working days for review. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION MDE Project NO: 191124 210500 - 6 August 2019 C. The Contractor shall be responsible for the proper location and size of all slots, holes or openings in the building structure pertaining to his work and for the correct location of pipe sleeves. 1.11 CONNECTIONS FOR OTHERS A. The Contractor shall rough in for and make all water, etc. connections to all equipment, machinery, etc., provided by others in accordance with detailed roughing-in Drawings provided by the equipment suppliers, by actual measurements of the equipment connections, or as detailed. B. After the equipment is set in place, this Contractor shall make all final connections and shall provide all required pipe, fittings, valves, traps, etc. C. Provide all air gap fittings required, using materials hereinbefore specified. In each service line connected to an item of equipment or piece of machinery, provide a shutoff valve. 1.12 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Provide the record documents associated with the work of Division 21 in strict accordance with the provisions of these specifications. B. Throughout progress of the Division 21 Work, maintain an accurate record of changes in the Contract Documents that apply to work of Division 21. Changes shall include all addendums issued during bidding. Maintain an accurate record of the location of mechanical service lines and outlets and all outside utilities. C. Delegate the responsibility for maintenance of Record Documents to one person on the Contractor's staff as approved by the Architect. D. Accuracy of Records 1. Thoroughly coordinate changes within the Record Documents, making adequate and proper entries on each page of Specifications and each sheet of drawings and other documents where such entry is required to show the change properly. Match the symbology and format of the base documents. 2. Accuracy of records shall be such that a future verification of items shown in the Contract Documents may rely reasonably on information obtained from the approved Project Record Documents. E. Maintain the job set of Record Documents completely protected from deterioration and from loss and damage until completion of the work and transfer of all recorded data to the final Project Record Documents. F. Making Entries on Drawings 1. Using an erasable colored pencil (not ink or indelible pencil), clearly describe the change by graphic line and note as required. 2. Date all entries. 3. Call attention to the entry by a "cloud" drawn around the area or areas affected. 4. In the event of overlapping changes, use different colors for the overlapping changes. 5. Make entries within 24 hours after receipt of information that the change has occurred. 6. Maintain the base drawing format and use the same symbology. 7. Convert field mark-ups to finished CADD record drawings when required in this section. G. Conversion of Schematic Layouts 1. In some cases, on the drawings, arrangements of ductwork and piping and similar items are shown schematically and are not intended to portray precise physical layout. Determine final physical arrangement subject to the Architect's approval. However, design of future modifications of the facility may require accurate information as to the final physical layout of items which are shown only schematically on the drawings. 2. Show on the job set of record drawings, by dimension accurate to within one inch, the centerline of each run of items such as all sleeves and piping, etc., below grade, in walls, or in the concrete slab. A surface mounted device indicates the exact location: City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION MDE Project NO: 191124 210500 - 7 August 2019 a. Clearly identify the item by accurate note such as "Sanitary Sewer" and the like. b. Show, by symbol or note, the vertical location of the item "under slab," "in ceiling plenum," "exposed," and the like. c. Make all identification sufficiently descriptive that it may be related reliably to the specifications. H. Final Project Record Documents 1. The purpose of the final Project Record Documents is to provide factual information regarding all aspects of the Work, both concealed and visible, to enable future modification of the Work to proceed without lengthy and expensive site measurement, investigation, and examination. 2. Provide CAD electronic files in .dwg format using AutoCAD software. Upon written request, completion of a release form, and payment of the Engineer’s standard fee of $200 plus applicable sales tax for a set-up charge and $50 per drawing plus applicable sales tax for copies of such files, Engineer will provide AutoCAD electronic files of base Contract Drawings in dwg format on compact discs. Engineer will also provide a list of drawing layers and names that shall be maintained. 3. Provide completed record drawings on CD-R and one full size hard copy of each drawing. 4. Refer to Division 1 for additional requirements. 1.13 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit two copies of a preliminary draft of the proposed manual or manuals to the Architect for review and comments. Allow a minimum of ten (10) working days for review. B. Submit specified number copies of the approved manual to the Architect prior to indoctrination of operation and maintenance personnel. C. Prepare in accordance with the following standards: Format: Size: Paper: Text: Drawings: 8½" x 11" White bond, at least 20 lb. weight Neatly written or printed 11" in height preferable; bind in with text; foldout acceptable; larger drawings acceptable but fold to fit within the Manual and provide a drawing pocket inside rear cover or bind in with text. Flysheets:Separate each section of the Manual with neatly prepared flysheets briefly describing contents of the ensuing section; flysheets may be in color. Binding:Use heavy-duty plastic or fiber-board covers with binding mechanism concealed inside the manual; 3-ring binders will be acceptable; all binding is subject to the Architect's approval. Measurements:Provide all measurements in U.S. standard units such as feet-and-inches, lbs, and cfm. Where items may be expected to be measured within ten years in accordance with metric formulae, provide additional measurements in the "International System of Units" (SI). D. Provide front and back covers for each manual, using durable material approved by the Architect, and clearly identified on or through the cover with at least the following information: City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION MDE Project NO: 191124 210500 - 8 August 2019 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL (Required layout) E. Contents: Include at least the following: 2. Neatly typewritten index near the front of the manual, giving immediate information as to location within the manual of all emergency information regarding the installation. 3. Complete instructions regarding operation and maintenance of all equipment provided including lubrication, disassembly, and reassembly. 4. Complete nomenclature of all parts of all equipment. 5. Complete nomenclature and part number of all replaceable parts, name and address of nearest vendor, and all other data pertinent to procurement procedures. 6. Copy of all guarantees and warranties issued. 7. Manufacturer's bulletins, drawings, and descriptive data, clearly indicating the precise items included in this installation and deleting, or otherwise clearly indicating, all manufacturers' data with which this installation is not concerned. 8. Such other data as required in other sections of these specifications. 9. Signed warranty documents Title Page o Job Name o Site Address o Include Contact information of prime contractor. Table of contents Warranty Information. o Include all contractor warranties Signed and dated documents Permits-Inspections Subcontractor list o Include all subcontractors. Company name, Contact info. Trade Responsibility. Vendor list o Include name and addresses of vendors Warranty information Replaceable parts Approved submittals o Include all approved product submittals Reports/Certificates/Redlines o Engineers Observation Reports o As-builts o RPZ Certifications o Fire Marshal Approval o Owners Training Report O&M Manuals Equipment Information. o Include Model, Serial and location. Signed Approval o Page for approval signature of the engineer and approval date. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION MDE Project NO: 191124 210500 - 9 August 2019 1.14 WARRANTY A. Contractor shall warranty all equipment and workmanship for a period of at least one year after date of substantial completion and replace or repair any faulty equipment or installation at no cost to the Owner for such service during this period, all in accordance with requirements of Division 1. B. This warranty shall not void specific warranties issued by manufacturers for greater periods of time. Nor shall it void any rights guaranteed to the Owner by law. C. Warranties shall be in writing in a form satisfactory to the Owner, and shall be delivered to the Owner before final payment is made. D. Upon completion of the work of Division 21, thoroughly clean all exposed portions of the mechanical installation, removing all traces of soil, labels, grease, oil and other foreign material and using only the type cleaner recommended by the manufacturer of the item being cleaned. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCESS DOORS A. Access doors mounted in painted surfaces shall be of Milcor (Inland-Ryerson Construction Products Company) manufacturer, Style K for plastered surfaces and Style M or DW for non- plastered surfaces. The Style K doors shall be set so that the finished surface of the door is even with the finished surfaces of the adjacent finishes. Access doors mounted on tile surfaces shall be stainless steel materials. Access doors shall be a minimum of 18" x 18" in size. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 ACCCESS DOORS A. In fire-rated walls, access door shall be fire rated same as wall. 3.2 TESTING AND INSPECTION A. Provide personnel and equipment, make required tests, and secure required approvals from the Architect and governmental agencies having jurisdiction. B. Make written notice to the Architect adequately in advance of each of the following stages of construction: 1. When all rough-in is complete, but not covered. 2. As specified in all Division 21 sections. 3. At the completion of the work of Division 21. C. When material or workmanship is found to not comply with the specified requirements, remove the noncomplying items from the job site and replace them with items complying with the specified requirements at no additional cost to the Owner. This shall be performed within 3 days after receipt of written notice of noncompliance. 3.3 INSTALLATION METHODS A. Unless noted otherwise, piping may be run exposed in mechanical rooms and janitor's closets. Piping exposed in mechanical rooms and janitor's closets shall be run tight against the structure, as required by the Architect, allowing for expansion. B. Conceal piping to be installed as hereinbefore specified. C. Piping suspended from the structure shall be adequately and properly supported on hanger rods or clamps as specified in Section 21 0529 “Hangers and Supports for Fire Suppression Piping and Equipment”. Perforated strap hangers will not be permitted. The contractor must support all pipe, equipment, and all other items furnished and installed under this scope from steel joists or structural steel frames. It is prohibited to support pipe, equipment, and all other items furnished under this scope from the metal deck. D. Where space is limited above ceilings, below concrete beams or other concrete projections, piping shall be sleeved through the beam or projection, rather than hung below. Provide sleeves where required and locate where approved by the Architect. E. Cut pipe accurately to measurements established at the building and install into position without springing or forcing. All open ends of pipes shall be capped or otherwise closed until the systems are closed with final connections. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION MDE Project NO: 191124 210500 - 10 August 2019 F. No pipe joints nearer than 12" to a wall, ceiling or floor penetration will be permitted, unless joint is of the welded type. G. Piping systems shall be made up straight and true and run at proper grades to permit proper flow of the contained material. Piping shall be graded for proper drainage. H. Piping shall follow as closely as possible the routes shown on plans, which take into consideration conditions to be met at the site and in the building. Should any unforeseen conditions arise, lines shall be changed or rerouted as required after approval from the Architect. I. All piping shall be installed with due regard to expansion and contraction and so as to prevent excessive strain and stress in the piping and in connections to equipment. J. All piping shall be clean when it is installed; rust and/or dirt shall be removed. K. Screw joints shall be made with taper threads, properly cut. Threads shall be cut using graphite and oil applied to the pipe only. When threads are cut on pipes, the ends shall be carefully reamed to remove any burrs. Pipe shall be up-ended and hammered to remove all shavings and foreign material, before installing. L. Requirements for assembling joints in cast iron and copper lines are set forth elsewhere in these specifications. For any special materials, consult the manufacturers for the recommended procedures in assembling the joints. M. This Contractor shall provide wall or ceiling access doors for unrestricted access to all concealed items of the fire suppression system. N. Install roof pipe penetrations through sleeves, and flash with membrane flashing and roofing mastic compatible with roofing system. Roofing Supplier/Contractor shall approve roof penetration and flashing. O. For additional installation requirements, refer to individual sections in Division 21. 3.4 CUTTING AND PATCHING A.Perform cutting and patching associated with the work in strict accordance with the provisions of Division 1 of these Specifications and the following: 1. Coordinate work to minimize cutting and patching work. Cut and patch walls, floors, etc., resulting from work in existing construction or by failure to provide proper openings or recesses in new construction. If cutting and patching is required, it shall be performed by trades specializing in that type work. 2. Perform Architect-approved cutting and demolition by methods which will prevent damage to other portions of the work and provide proper surfaces to receive installation of new work and/or repair. a. Openings cut through concrete and masonry shall be made with masonry saws and/or core drills and at such locations acceptable to the Architect. Impact-type equipment will not be used except where specifically acceptable to the Architect. b. Openings in precast concrete slabs or walls for pipes, etc., shall be core drilled to exact size. Oversize the hole to allow for link seals, and to deter pipe corrosion condensation from forming. c. Where openings are cut through masonry walls, provide and install lintels or other structural supports to protect the remaining masonry. Adequate supports shall be provided during the cutting operation to prevent any damage to the masonry occasioned by the operation. All structural members, supports, etc., shall be of the proper size and shape, and shall be installed in a manner acceptable to the Architect. d. Openings cut through plaster or drywall shall be cut prior to plaster finish coat or texture coat on drywall. Cutting of the finish coat of plaster or texture coat of drywall will not be permitted unless written approval of the Architect is obtained. e. Openings shall be restored and/or repaired as required to replace the cut surface to an "as-new" and/or "as original" condition. Refer to the appropriate section of the specifications for the material involved. 3. Perform fitting and adjusting of products to provide finished installation complying with the specified tolerances and finishes. 4. Provide all core drilling of holes. Where sleeves and/or blockouts are required, they shall be cut or provided at locations required. On completion of this work or as work progresses, make all repairs and do all patching required as a result of work under this Contract. All patching shall be performed in a manner that will restore the surrounding work to its original condition to the satisfaction of the Architect. 5. Assume responsibility for the proper size of all sleeves and/or blockouts in the building structure pertaining to the work and for providing the correct location of pipe sleeves and/or blockouts. 6. No cutting, boring or excavating which will weaken the structure will be permitted. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION MDE Project NO: 191124 210500 - 11 August 2019 3.5 EXISTING UTILITIES AND TEMPORARY SERVICES FOR CONSTRUCTION A. Verify the location and capacity of existing utility services pertaining to work of Division 21. Relocate existing utilities unearthed by excavation as directed by the utility service companies affected. 1. Temporary Services for Construction 2. Provide temporary services in strict accordance with the provisions of these specifications. B. When any piece of fire suppression equipment is operable and it is to the advantage of the Contractor to operate the equipment, he may do so, providing that he properly supervises the operation, and has the Architect’s written permission to do so. The warranty period shall, however, not commence until such time as the equipment is operated for the beneficial use of the Owner, or date of substantial completion, whichever occurs first. C. Regardless of whether or not the equipment has or has not been operated, the Contractor shall properly clean the equipment, install clean filter media, properly adjust, and complete all deficiency list items before final acceptance by the Owner. The date of acceptance and performance certification will be the same date. 3.6 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILLING A. Perform all excavation and backfilling necessary for the installation of the work. This shall include shoring and pumping in ditches to keep them in dry condition until the work has been installed. All shoring required to protect the excavation and safeguard employees shall be properly performed. B. Perform excavation and backfilling in strict accordance with the provisions of these specifications including trench safety requirements. C. All excavations shall be made to the proper depth, with allowances made for floor slabs, forms, beams, etc. Ground under piping shall be well compacted before piping is installed. D. Backfilling shall be made with selected soil, free from rocks and debris and shall be pneumatically tamped with 6 inch layers to secure a field density ratio of 95 percent as defined by ASTM Designation D698-57T (Proctor Soil Compaction Test). E. Excavated materials not suitable and not used in the backfill shall be removed from the site. F. Field check and verify the locations of all underground utilities. Avoid disturbing these as far as possible. In the event existing utilities are damaged, they shall be repaired at no cost to Owner. G. In a lime stabilized area, the lime stabilization shall be fully restored after the excavation is complete. H. Replace concrete, curbs, paving and other surface improvements cut during excavation to their original condition. 3.7 JOBSITE CONDITIONS A.Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed. Include required work to correct conditions detrimental to the timely and proper completion of all Division 21 Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. B.The Contractor shall at all times take such precautions as may be necessary to properly protect all materials and equipment from damage from the time of delivery until the completion of the work. This shall include the erection of all required temporary shelters and supports to adequately protect any items stored in the open on the site from the weather, the ground and surrounding work; the cribbing of any items above the floor of the construction; and the covering of items in the incomplete building with tarpaulins or other protective covering; the installation of electric heaters in electrical switchgear and similar equipment to prevent moisture damage. Failure on the part of the Contractor to comply with the above will be sufficient cause for the rejection of the items in question. C.Take particular care not to damage the building structure in performing work. All finished floors, step treads, and finished surfaces shall be covered to prevent any damage by workmen or their tools and equipment during the construction of the building. D.Equipment and materials shall be protected from rust both before and after installation. Any equipment or materials found in a rusty condition at the time of final inspection must be cleaned of rust and repainted as specified elsewhere in these Specifications. 3.8 STORAGE AND PROTECTION A. Contractor shall provide the required protection of equipment and materials from the time of delivery until the completion of the Work. Protect from damage, rust, rain, humidity and dust. B. Do not receive equipment or materials on the jobsite until adequate space has been provided for storage. C. Provide adequate supports for protection from the ground and erect required shelters for items stored in the open. D. Items stored within the building are to be adequately protected and covered with tarpaulins or other protective covering. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION MDE Project NO: 191124 210500 - 12 August 2019 E. Protect the building at all times during construction from damage by workmen, their tools and/or equipment. Protect floors, steps, wall, ceilings, doors, windows and other finish surfaces. F. Equipment and materials found in a rusty condition at completion of the work will be thoroughly cleaned of rust and refinished as required to its original condition. 3.9 PREPARATION AND COORDINATION A. Perform coordination work in strict accordance with provisions of these specifications and the following: 2.Coordinate as necessary with other trades to assure proper and adequate interface with all work. 3.Where pipes or other fire suppression items are shown in conflict with locations of structural members and other equipment, include labor and materials required for extensions, offsets and supports to clear the encroachment. 4.Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish and install all supplementary or miscellaneous items, appurtenances and devices incidental to or necessary for a sound, secure and complete installation of the fire suppression system. 5.Coordinate accepted equipment changes from those scheduled or specified with other trades affected. Additional compensation to other trades for equipment changes is the responsibility of the Contractor making the change. B. The Mechanical, Electrical, and associated Drawings are necessarily diagrammatic by their nature, and are not intended to show every connection in detail or every pipe or conduit in its exact location. These details are subject to the requirements of standards referenced elsewhere in these specifications, and structural and architectural conditions. The Contractor shall carefully investigate structural and finish conditions and shall coordinate the separate trades in order to avoid interference between the various phases of work. Work shall be organized and laid out so that it will be concealed in furred chases and suspended ceilings, etc., in finished portions of the building, unless specifically noted to be exposed. All exposed work shall be installed parallel or perpendicular to the lines of the building unless otherwise noted. C. When the mechanical and electrical Drawings do not give exact details as to the elevation of pipe, conduit and ducts, the Contractor shall physically arrange the systems to fit in the space available at the elevations intended with proper grades for the functioning of the system involved. Piping, exposed conduit and the duct systems are generally intended to be installed true and square to the building construction, and located as high as possible against the structure in a neat and workmanlike manner. The Drawings do not show all required offsets, control lines, pilot lines and other location details. Work shall be concealed in all finished areas. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION MDE Project NO: 191124 210500 - 13 August 2019 D. The general installation precedence of materials shall be as follows. Note that if an interference is encountered, this shall guide the contractor in the determination of which trade shall be given the "Right-of-Way". Building lines Structural Members Soil and Drain Piping Condensate Drains Vent Piping Supply, Return, and Outside Air Ductwork Exhaust Ductwork Fire Protection Piping Gas Piping Domestic Water (Cold and Hot) Electrical Conduit E. Where items such as diffusers, thermostats, switches, and control panels are not specifically located on the Drawings, locate as determined in the field by the Architect. Where such items are installed without such specific direction, relocate as directed by the Architect and at no additional cost to the Owner. F. Verify all dimensions and distances. No additional compensation will be allowed because of differences between work shown on the Drawings and actual dimensions and distances at the jobsite. 3.10 PAINTING A. All equipment shall be delivered to the job with suitable factory finish. Should the finish be damaged in transit or during the installation, it shall be finished to match appearance of original finish. All work shall be subject to approval by Architect. B. All equipment, piping, conduit, insulation, etc., furnished and installed in exposed areas under Divisions 21 of these Specifications and as hereinafter specified shall be cleaned, prepared, and painted according to the following specification. In the event of a conflict between the specifications referenced, the provisions of this specification shall prevail only for Division 21 work C. Before painting, materials and equipment surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned of cement, plaster, and other foreign materials, and all oil and grease spots shall be removed. Such surfaces shall be carefully wiped and all cracks and corners scraped out. Exposed metal work shall be carefully brushed down with the steel brushes to remove rust and other spots and left smooth and clean. END OF SECTION City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT MDE Project No: 191124 210529 - 1 August 2019 SECTION 21 05 29 - PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to the Work in this Section 1.2 SUMMARY A. Provide all equipment, materials, labor, supervision, and services necessary for or incidental to the installation of all necessary identification items as indicated on the drawings and as specified. B. Work included: 1. Pipe hangers and supports. 2. Concrete supports for equipment. 3. Sleeving for fire suppression equipment. C. Submittals: Provide submittals as required in Section 21 00 10 “Submittal Process”. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. B. Without additional cost to the Owner, provide such other labor and materials as are required to complete the work of this Section in accordance with the requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, regardless of whether such materials and associated labor are called for elsewhere in these Contract Documents. 1.4 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Automatic Sprinkler Pipe Supports: NFPA 13, Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems. B. Standpipe System Supports: NFPA 14, Standard for the Installation of Standpipe and Hose Systems. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Supports, hangers, anchors, guides and supplementary steel shall be provided for horizontal and vertical piping and shall meet or exceed the ASA Code for Pressure Piping. B. Rod sizes noted are minimum sizes. The structural integrity of the supports is the responsibility of the Contractor. C. Supports for Vertical Riser Piping: 1. Provide Grinnell Fig. 261 double bolt riser clamps at each floor. Bear on structure. 2. At 8 feet o.c., 2-hole rigid clamps. Kindorf channels and C-105 straps. Support from vertical surfaces. D. Supports for Vertical and Horizontal Piping in Chases and Partitions: 1. Supports shall be steel plate, angles or unistruts mounted vertically or horizontally with unistrut clamps P2426, P2008 or P1109. 2. Attach supports to wall or floor construction with clip angles, brackets or other approved anchoring devices. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT MDE Project No: 191124 210529 - 2 August 2019 2.2 HANGER RODS A. Provide steel hanger rods, threaded both ends, threaded one end or continuous threaded. B. Size hanger rods as follows: Pipe Size Rod Diameter 4" & Smaller 3/8" 5" thru 8" 1/2" 10" & 12" 5/8" 14" & 16" 3/4" 2.3 SLEEVES A. Provide sleeves where pipes penetrate floors, walls, foundations, fireproofing, etc. B. Size sleeves large enough to allow for movement due to expansion and to provide for continuous movement. Provide a bead of sealant in space between pipe and sleeve. Use link-seal to seal between pipe and sleeve for all slab on grade floor penetrations. C. Use Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe sleeves for all floor and foundation penetrations. Sleeves shall extend minimum of 2" above finished floor and flush with vertical wall surface. 2.4 TRAPEZES A. Trapezes of Kindorf, Elcen or approved equal may be provided where multiple lines run horizontally at the same elevation. 2.5 CONCRETE SUPPORTS FOR EQUIPMENT A. Provide concrete pad foundations for the support of equipment such as floor-mounted pumps, etc. B. Unless otherwise noted, concrete pads shall be constructed of not less than 3,000 lb. concrete and not less than 4" high and shall extend on all sides a minimum of 8 inches beyond the limits of the mounted equipment. Pads shall be poured in forms built of new-dressed lumber. All corners of the foundations shall be neatly chamfered 3/4" wide by means of sheet metal of triangular wood strips nailed to the form. Reinforce with No. 4 rebar 6" on center. C. Foundation bolts, 3/4" round-hooked, shall be placed in the forms when the concrete is poured, the bolts being correctly located by means of templates. Each bolt shall be set in a sleeve of size to provide 1/2" clearance around bolt. Allow 1" below the equipment bases for alignment and grouting. After grouting, the forms shall be removed and the surface of the foundations shall be hand rubbed with carborundum. D. Foundation pads for equipment located on the exterior of the building shall be provided as indicated. E. Submit shop drawings of concrete pads for review by the Architect. 2.6 STRAP HANGERS A. Under no circumstances will perforated strap iron or wire be acceptable for hangers on this project. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF SUPPORTS A. All pipe supports shall be designed and installed to avoid interferences with other piping, hangers, ducts, electrical conduit, supports, building structure, equipment, etc. All piping shall be installed with due regard to expansion and contraction. The type of hanger, method of support, location of support, etc., shall be governed in part by this specification. B. Pipe hangers shall be attached to the structure as follows: 1. Poured-in-Place Concrete: Each hanger rod shall be fitted with a nut at its upper end, which nut shall be set into an Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., listed universal concrete insert placed in the formwork before concrete is poured. 2. Steel Bar Joists: Where pipes and loads are supported under bar joists, hanger rods shall be run through the space between the bottom angles and secured with a washer and two nuts. Where larger lines are supported beneath bar joists, hanger rods shall be secured to angle irons of adequate size. Each angle shall span across two or more joists City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT MDE Project No: 191124 210529 - 3 August 2019 as required to distribute the weight properly and shall be welded to the joists or otherwise permanently affixed thereto. 3. Steel Beams: Pipes and loads supported under steel beams shall be installed using approved beam clamps. 3.2 SPACING A. Install hangers for steel piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes according to MSS SP 69 Tables 3 and 4: 1. NPS 3/4: Maximum span, 7 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 2. NPS 1: Maximum span, 7 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 3. NPS 1-1/4: Maximum span, 7 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 4. NPS 1-1/2: Maximum span, 9 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 5. NPS 2: Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 6. NPS 2-1/2: Maximum span, 11 feet; minimum rod size, 1/2 inch. 7. NPS 3: Maximum span, 12 feet; minimum rod size, 1/2 inch. 8. NPS 3-1/2: Maximum span, 13 feet; minimum rod size, 1/2 inch. 9. NPS 4: Maximum span, 14 feet; minimum rod size, 5/8 inch. 10. NPS 5: Maximum span, 16 feet; minimum rod size, 5/8 inch. 11. NPS 6: Maximum span, 17 feet; minimum rod size, 3/4 inch. 12. NPS 8: Maximum span, 19 feet; minimum rod size, 3/4 inch. 13. NPS 10: Maximum span, 22 feet; minimum rod size, 7/8 inch. 14. NPS 12: Maximum span, 23 feet; minimum rod size, 7/8 inch. 15. NPS 14: Maximum span, 25 feet; minimum rod size, 1 inch. 16. NPS 16: Maximum span, 27 feet; minimum rod size, 1 inch. 17. NPS 18: Maximum span, 28 feet; minimum rod size, 1 inch. 18. NPS 20: Maximum span, 30 feet; minimum rod size, 1-1/4 inches. B. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes: 1. NPS 1/2: Maximum span, 5 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 2. NPS 5/8: Maximum span, 5 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 3. NPS 1: Maximum span, 6 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 4. NPS 1-1/4: Maximum span, 8 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 5. NPS 1-1/2: Maximum span, 8 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 6. NPS 2: Maximum span, 8 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 7. NPS 2-1/2: Maximum span, 9 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 8. NPS 3: Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 9. NPS 4: Maximum span, 12 feet; minimum rod size, 1/2 inch. C. Spacing and rod sizes for other piping materials shall be as recommended by the manufacturer. 3.3 TRAPEZES A. Trapeze members, including suspension rods, shall be properly sized for the number, size and loaded weight of the lines they are to support. Install as noted above. 3.4 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. All hangers and supports for fire standpipe systems and fire sprinkler systems shall be Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. approved types. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT MDE Project No: 191124 210529 - 4 August 2019 3.5 EQUIPMENT FOUNDATIONS A. Provide equipment foundations associated with the work in accordance with the provisions of these specifications. B. Provide concrete bases for all pad or floor mounted equipment. 3.6 MISCELLANEOUS A. Install any other special foundations, hangers and supports indicated on the drawings, specified elsewhere, or required by installation conditions. END OF SECTION City of Denton Fire Station 8 IDENTIFICATION FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT MDE Project No: 191124 210553 - 1 August 2019 SECTION 21 05 53 - IDENTIFICATION FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Provide all equipment, materials, labor, supervision, and services necessary for or incidental to the installation of all necessary identification items as indicated on the drawings and as specified. B. Work included: 1. Valve tagging 2. Pipe marking 3. Equipment marking C.Submittals: Provide submittals as required in Section 21 00 10, “Submittal Process”. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. B. Without additional cost to the Owner, provide such other labor and materials as are required to complete the work of this Section in accordance with the requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, regardless of whether such materials and associated labor are called for elsewhere in these Contract Documents. C. When requested, provide the Architect with manufacturer's certificate that materials meet or exceed minimum requirements as specified. Marking system shall conform to ASME 13.1, latest edition and OSHA 29 CFR 1910.261 requirements. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 VALVE TAGS A. Provide a tag for each valve in main and branch piping of fire suppression piping systems. 1. Tags shall be 1-1/2" diameter of solid brass with blacked filled stamped characters of 1/4" height above and 1/2" height below. 2. Provide 8" long meter seals for use with valve tags. B. Provide a valve chart with a schedule and location plans for all identified equipment, both in a frame with an acrylic cover to be located as directed by the Architect. 2.2 PIPE MARKERS A. Provide pipe markers for pipes that provide 360 degree visibility with ANSI approved color coded background, color of legend in relation to background color, legend letter size, and length of color field. Additionally, direction of flow arrows shall be printed on the same markers, and words shall be repeated and reversed for use with flow in either direction. 1. Each marker shall be formed with a clear acrylic covering suitable for use outdoors. B. For diameters 3/4" to 6", marker shall be formed in order to snap on and completely surround the pipe. For diameters 6" and larger, provide radius formed markers of same material. 2.3 EQUIPMENT PLATES A. Plate shall be black with white letters that appear when the plate is engraved. B. Plate material shall be specifically suited for conditions surrounding the equipment. Outdoor equipment shall require special plate material for outdoor use. C. Plate size shall be as required with lettering size appropriate for the information shown but in no case less than 1/8" high. Lettering style shall match existing facility standards. D. Nomenclature for plates shall be based on the equipment designations shown on the equipment schedules and as approved by the Architect. 2.4 CONCEALED DEVICES A. Operable devices and equipment located above ceilings shall be marked with color coded W. H. City of Denton Fire Station 8 IDENTIFICATION FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT MDE Project No: 191124 210553 - 2 August 2019 Brady "Tack" type markers. 2.5 MANUFACTURERS A. Provide marking system as manufactured by W. H. Brady Company, Seton, Craftmark, or approved equal. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Place all markers and plates in such locations that they are easily read by a person without assuming awkward or hazardous positions. 3.2 VALVE TAGS A. Secure one valve tag to each valve. 3.3 PIPE MARKERS A. Markers shall not require taping or the use of any adhesive material or fasteners to permanently secure them to the pipe. For diameters 6" and larger, secure with stainless steel spring fasteners. B. Install sufficient quantities of markers that tracing of pipe systems can be readily accomplished. Install within three feet before and/or after penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, underground or other non-accessible enclosures; at access doors, manholes or other access points which permit view of concealed piping; and when there is a change in direction of the concealed pipe. Locations in major mechanical rooms shall be labeled at a maximum spacing of every 20 feet. Other piping shall have labels at a maximum spacing of every 30 feet and at least once in every area that the pipe passes over or through. Install additional markers where directed by the Architect. 3.4 EQUIPMENT PLATES A. Provide engraved plates for all fire suppression equipment. B. Secure all plates with two self-tapping metal screws with round heads. Alternately, plates may be fastened with "pop" rivets provided no cracking or injury occurs to the plate. Plates attached with adhesives shall not be permitted. END OF SECTION City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS MDE Project NO: 191124 211300 - 1 August 2019 SECTION 211300 - FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A.Provide a complete fire protection system for the building as specified, as indicated on the drawings, and as required by all authorities having jurisdiction and Texas Commission on Jail Standards. The drawings show the general arrangement of plumbing, air conditioning, piping, ductwork, and other apparatus. The Contractor shall coordinate this work with all other construction so that there shall be no conflict as to space required. The mechanical and electrical work shall, in general, take precedence over sprinkler work, except where it is absolutely necessary to maintain required coverage. B.Work Included: 1. Complete fire protection sprinkler system with city approved piping, valves, and accessories for a complete system. The existing system shall remain operational during all phases of construction. 2. The requirement that the entire fire protection installation shall be as required by and subject to the approval of all approving authorities, shall govern the installation for this project. The drawings are intended as a guide for the system arrangement; omission of specific indication of any item shall not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility of furnishing and installing that item if it is required by the approving authorities. 3. Upon completion of the work, the Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining from the approving authorities, a certificate of approval or other indication of such approval and acceptance by said Authorities. 4. The system shall be hydraulically designed, based on a flow data obtained from local authorities. Contractor shall be responsible for the design and obtaining this information and incorporating it into his bid and the design. C.Design Responsibility and Certification: The designer of the fire protection systems shall be responsible for all design, coordination and approval of each system in order to assure compliance with drawings, specifications, codes and authorities having jurisdiction. Drawings, calculations and other supporting evidence of this design shall be provided to the proper reviewing agencies and to the Architect and shall bear appropriate professional certification that the Designer has met the Quality Assurance requirements stated herein. Certification shall be indicative that the Designer acknowledges and accepts full design responsibility. Descriptions and limitations set forth in these specifications must be followed unless more stringent requirements are established by the reviewing agency. 1.3 FIRE PROTECTION DESIGN CRITERIA A. Sprinkler systems shall be designed for the densities shown on the drawings. Hydraulic calculations shall be based on simultaneous operation of heads in the designated area plus flows in the standpipes in accordance with NFPA 13. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS MDE Project NO: 191124 211300 - 2 August 2019 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. B.Without additional cost to the Owner, provide such other labor and materials as are required to complete the work of this Section in accordance with the requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, regardless of whether such materials and associated labor are called for elsewhere in these Contract Documents. C.The Contractor shall be licensed to sell, install and service the types of systems required by these specifications. D.Design system under direct supervision of a Professional Engineer experienced in design of this work and licensed in the State of Texas. The designer of the fire protection systems shall be certified by the National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies (NICET) for Automatic Sprinkler System Design, Level III. The installer shall have on their staff a full-time Responsible Managing Employee (RME) licensed by the State Fire Marshall, to install and service fire protection systems. The RME shall assure that each fire protection system as installed meets the standards as provided by the applicable publications referenced herein and the requirements of these specifications. All design submittal documents and shop drawings shall bear the responsible engineers signed and dated seal. E.All parts of fire protection piping systems shall conform to all provisions of Underwriters' Laboratories requirements. All equipment shall bear the Underwriters' Laboratories label of approval. F.Determine volume and pressure of incoming water supply from residual pressure water flow test. G.When requested, provide the Architect with manufacturer's certificate that materials meet or exceed minimum requirements as specified. H.All aspects of design, securing approval of design and construction, shall be in accordance with the latest edition of the National Fire Protection Association Standards, including but not limited to NFPA - 10, 13, 14, 20 and 24, and shall conform in all respects to the rules and regulations of the Building Code and Fire Code of the City in which this project is located, all Factory Mutual requirements and all other approving authorities having jurisdiction. I.Installation shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations and Factory Mutual standards. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A.Provide submittals as required in Section 21 00 10, “Submittal Process”. B.Shop Drawings: Indicate pipe materials used, jointing methods, supports, and floor and wall penetration seals. Indicate installation, layout, weights, mounting and support details, and piping connections. Indicate hydraulic calculations, detailed pipe layout, hangers and supports, components and accessories. Indicate system controls. C.Product Data: Provide data on sprinkler heads, valves, and specialties, including manufacturer’s catalogue information. Submit performance ratings rough-in details, weights, support requirements, and piping connections. Submit two of each style of sprinkler head specified D.Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that system has been tested and meets or exceeds requirements specified, and suggested by listed codes. E.Provide certificate of compliance from authority have jurisdiction indicating approval of field acceptance tests. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS MDE Project NO: 191124 211300 - 3 August 2019 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPING A.Underground pipe to the inside of the building shall be cement lined cast iron or PVC Class 150 (SDR 17) with cast iron Class 250 fittings. B.All sprinkler piping within the building shall be per NFPA schedules with approved compatible fittings and valve connections. Piping may be joined by welding, and/or the use of grooved, flanged or threaded joints and connections. 2.2 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS A.Backflow preventers (BFP) shall be reduced pressure type, Febco 825, or approved equal. A BFP shall be installed to isolate all non-potable water requirements from the building domestic water system. (All BFP's shall be installed within the building, unless otherwise dictated by code authorities.) 2.3 FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTIONS A.At the points designated on the Contract Drawings, install Fire Department Connections (Siamese fittings) required for fire protection purposes. From a point on the incoming water supply line, this Contractor shall extend water line for fire protection purposes to Fire Department Connections (Siamese fittings). B.Wall type Fire Department Connections (Siamese fittings) shall be equal to Potter Roemer double clapper flush type Siamese connections having threads complying with the requirements of the City Fire Department. They shall have proper caps with pin type lugs attached to the body of the Fire Department Connections (Siamese fittings) with substantial chains. The plate fitting against the building shall have raised letters reading "AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER" or "STANDPIPE". All external surfaces shall be chromium plated polished surfaces or as directed by Architect. C.Sidewalk type Fire Department Connections (Siamese fittings having threads complying with the requirements of the City Fire Department) shall be equal to Potter Roemer free standing fire department cast brass body and escutcheon. They shall have proper caps with pin type lugs attached to the body of connection with substantial chains. "STANDPIPE" or "AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER" to be cast on head of connection. All external surfaces shall be chromium plated polished surfaces or as directed by Architect. D.Fire department connection shall be Factory Mutual approved. 2.4 STANDPIPES A.Install at each floor level on each standpipe not more than 5'-0" from finished floor an indicating control valve, and a 2-1/2" fire department connection with a 2-1/2" x 1-1/2" reducer with cap and chain. Threads shall conform to the local fire protection district standards. 2.5 VALVES A.Control valves inside buildings shall be listed 175-pound W.O.G. approved indicating type valve. B.Check valves shall be listed, 175-pound W.O.G. horizontal swing check valves or approved equivalent such as wafer check valves. C.Drain and test valves shall be 175-pound W.O.G., bronze threaded globe valves with renewable composition disc. 2.6 WATER FLOW SWITCHES A. Vane-type waterflow detectors shall be installed on the sprinkler mains. Detector shall be designed for mounting on either vertical or horizontal piping, but shall not be mounted in a fitting or within 12 inches of any fitting that changes the direction of water flow, and shall have a sensitivity setting to signal any flow of water that equals or exceeds 10 gpm. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS MDE Project NO: 191124 211300 - 4 August 2019 B. Detector switch mechanisms shall incorporate an instantly recycling pneumatic retard element with an adjustable range of 0 to 60 second. Switches shall be suitable for operation on 24-volt D.C., and shall be actuated by a vane extended into the waterway of the piping. Detectors shall be of dust tight construction. Detector switch enclosures shall be secured with a tamper proof bolt that requires the use of a special wrench for removal. Vane-type waterflow detectors shall be Underwriters' Laboratories listed. The detector shall be furnished and installed under this section and wired completely under Division 26. C. Water flow switches shall be Factory Mutual approved. 2.7 TAMPER SWITCHES A.Tamper switches shall be installed on each valve inside the building. Switches shall be mounted so as not to interfere with the normal operation of the valve control or when the stem has moved no more than one-fifth (1/5) of the distance from its normal position. The mechanism shall be contained in a weather-proof die cast aluminum housing which shall provide a 3/4 inch tapped conduit entrance and incorporate the necessary facilities for attachment to the valve. Switch housings shall be furnished in red baked enamel. The switch mechanism shall have a minimum rated capacity of one amp, 125 A.C. - 0.25 amp, 24 volt D.C. The entire installed assembly shall be tamper proof and arranged to cause a switch operation if the housing cover is removed or if the unit is removed from its mounting. Supervisory switches and gate valve switches shall be Underwriters' Laboratories listed. Supervisory switches shall be furnished and installed under this section and wired completely under Division 26. B.Tamper switches shall be Factory Mutual approved. 2.8 SPRINKLER SYSTEM A.Automatic Sprinklers: Sprinkler heads of proper temperature rating shall be installed throughout the building as required by approving authorities. Where furred or finished ceilings occur, the piping shall be installed above the ceilings with the sprinkler heads nippled through the ceiling and set in metal escutcheon plates. Where lay-in ceilings occur, center the sprinkler heads on each tile. Sprinkler heads shall be, in general, provided as follows: Area Served Type Head Trim Fully finished area with gypsum board and/or lay-in ceilings Fully concealed head with painted cover (color by Architect) Semi-finished areas Semi-recessed head with chrome escutcheon Non-finished areas cover Pendant heads, with cage cover where head is less than 7' AFF and in janitor closets. Provide protective cages over these heads At the Owner's option, the above may be revised per specific building requirements. Contractor shall price per the above but must verify all final requirements with Architect prior to placing orders. B.Sprinkler Cabinet: One cabinet with spare sprinklers and a head wrench per NFPA. Install as directed by the Architect. C.Provide spare heads equal to one percent (1%) of the total number of heads installed under the Contract, but not less than ten (10). The heads shall be packed in a suitable wall mounted sprinkler cabinet and shall be representative of, and in proportion to, the number of each type and temperature rating heads installed. In addition to the spare heads, the Contractor shall provide not less than one special sprinkler head wrench for each type of head. The cabinet shall be located where directed by the Architect. D.Sprinkler Risers: Shall be equipped with a variable pressure alarm valve including retarding chamber, drain valve, standard trim, and gauges. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS MDE Project NO: 191124 211300 - 5 August 2019 E.Water Alarm: A water motor alarm shall be connected to each alarm valve and shall discharge to a brass alarm gong located on the exterior of the building as directed by the Architect. Alarm gong finish to be selected by the Architect. The alarm valves shall be Underwriters' Laboratories approved, wet type, connected to water supply and indicated on the Shop Drawings. Each alarm valve shall be provided with a circuit closer. Valves shall conform to the equipment of NFPA Standard No. 13, complete with retarding chamber and pressure switch. F.Water Flow Alarm Switch: Provide, where indicated on the Drawings, McDonnell UL approved line size flow switches. See Division 28 for electrical signal connection by others to these flow switches. G.Drains: Shall be piped to the outside of buildings as part of this work, except in locations where a drain is provided by the plumbing design, specifically for sprinkler system use. H.Piping System Valves: Shall be approved for fire protection piping systems and shall be installed as required by the NFPA. I.Hangers: Shall be installed as required and shall be listed by the Underwriters' Laboratories for use in a sprinkler system. 2.9 SIGNS A.Approved enameled metal signs shall be securely attached at all main drains, auxiliary drains, inspectors' test connections and control valves. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL A.All pipe trenches shall be dug to a line and the bottom cleaned and shaped to provide support of the pipe through its entire length. B.For all requirements for above grade or underground fire main, comply with NFPA-24 Private Fire Service Mains. C.Where plastic pipe (PVC) is installed underground, manufacturer's instructions shall be strictly followed in regard to cover and backfilling materials and procedures. 3.2 SPRINKLER PIPING A.Install per NFPA-13 and insofar as possible, all sprinkler system mains and branches shall be installed as close as possible below structural concrete slabs. B.Route piping in orderly manner, plumb and parallel to building structure. Maintain gradient All piping for all systems shall be coordinated with lighting fixtures, air conditioning ducts, piping, air handling units, and all other obstructions to minimize obstructions with other work prior to installation. C.Slope piping and arrange systems to drain at low points. Use eccentric reducers to maintain top of pipe level. D.Provide drain valves at main shut-off valves, low points of piping and apparatus. Provide Fire Department test station, piped to drain. E.Center heads in two directions in ceiling tile and provide piping offsets as required in areas with accessible ceiling tiles. F.Apply paper cover to ensure concealed sprinkler head and cover plates do not receive field paint finish. 3.3 HANGERS AND SLEEVES A. All hangers shall be installed and spaced in accordance with NFPA No. 13. B. Sleeves shall be set for all pipes passing through concrete floors and masonry walls. C. Provide chrome plated escutcheon plates at all wall penetrations. 3.4 AUXILIARY DRAINS A. Auxiliary drains consisting of plugs or globe valves and plugs where the capacity of a trapped pipe section exceeds 5 gallons, shall be provided to drain all points in the system that cannot be drained back to a main riser. Field conditions may dictate additional drains which could not be determined for bidding purposes which shall be provided as required by NFPA No. 13. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS MDE Project NO: 191124 211300 - 6 August 2019 3.5 INSPECTORS' TEST CONNECTIONS A. Furnish and install inspectors' test connections per NFPA No. 13. 3.6 CONCEALED WORK A. No work shall be concealed unless first inspected and approved by the authority having jurisdiction. 3.7 TESTING A. Hydrostatically test entire standpipe system in accordance with NFPA 14 and sprinkler in accordance with NFPA 13. All piping shall be tested in the presence of the Owner's representative and other approving authority and shall be proved tight. Unsatisfactory workmanship shall be corrected to the satisfaction of the above mentioned persons. Defective materials shall be replaced with new materials and the defective materials removed from the premises. B. Provide certificates to the Owner indicating all testing has been appropriately conducted for each fire protection system. END OF SECTION City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 PLUMBING SUBMITTAL PROCESS MDE Project NO: 191124 220010 - 1 August 2019 SECTION 22 00 10 – PLUMBING SUBMITTAL PROCESS PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with all submittal provisions of Division 1. B. Submit electronic copies of the submittal to the prime consultant (i.e. architect) in order to process and track the submittals properly in accordance with Division 1 and 22 submittal requirements. Architects and consultants are to submit all submittals and RFI’s to the mechanical engineer electronically. Send to “mdengca@md-eng.com”. Submittals shall be labeled by their project specification section or CSI specification section if not listed in project specifications. C. Contractor is responsible to separate submittals per specification section. Unseparated submittals are subject to rejection without review. D. Allow a minimum of ten (10) working days for the review of submittals and each re-submittal. E. Submittals that have been reviewed and marked as REJECTED (REJ) or REVISE & RESUBMIT (RES) should be resubmitted within 10 days to be reviewed again by engineer. F. Compliance with the Contract Documents shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor. Items on equipment that were not accepted by the Architect in writing as an approved equal shall be replaced or revised to comply with the contract documents at the Contractor's expense. G. Resubmission of rejected submittals shall be limited to one (1) in number. Costs for processing subsequent resubmittals in excess of the first resubmittal, resulting from the Contractor's disregard of Architect/Engineer's primary submittal rejection comments, shall be borne by the Contractor. Costs shall be based on Architect/Engineer's hourly rates as published in their current professional fee schedules and shall also include reimbursable costs for delivery, mailing, and photocopies at direct cost plus ten percent (10%). 1.2 REQUIRED SPECIFICATIONS (Project specific) A. The chart below are the submittals required for the project. 1. Submittals marked with an “X” are required for this project. 2. Submittals without an “X” are not required for this project. See required specifications on next page City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 PLUMBING SUBMITTAL PROCESS MDE Project NO: 191124 220010 - 2 August 2019 Required Spec Required Spec X Submittal Name Reference X Submittal Name Reference Common Work Results for Plumbing Sanitary Sewerage PumpsX -Shop Drawings 22 05 00 -Sewerage pumps, Grinder pumps, 22 13 29 Common Motor Requirements for Plumbing Packaged Submersible Sewerage Pumps -Polyphase motors, Single phase motors NA -Submersible sewerage pumps 22 13 33 -Motor Starters, Shop Drawings, O&M manual 22 05 13 Packaged Wastewater Pump Units Expansion Fittings and Loops for Plumbing Piping NA -Waste water pumps 22 13 36X -All Expansion joints 22 05 16 Facility Storm Drainage Meters and Gauges for Plumbing Piping -Pipe & Fittings 22 14 00 -Thermometers, Thermowells, Pressure gauges Sump PumpsX -Gage attachments, Test plugs, Sight flow ind. 22 05 19 NA -Sump Pumps 22 14 29 General Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping Packaged, Submersible, Drainage Pumps -Valves, Cocks, Specialties, Trap primers NA -Submersible drainage pumps 22 14 36X -Trap guards, Flanges 22 05 23 General Service Compressed-Air Systems Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping -Air Compressor, Reducing valves, Gages -Pipe hangers and supports, Inserts, Hanger rods NA -Piping, Valves 22 15 00X -Sleeves, Trapezes, Concrete supports 22 05 29 Water Softeners Heat Tracing for Plumbing Piping -Product Data 22 31 11 -Heating cables, Controls, Accessories 22 05 33 Commercial Gas Domestic Water Heater Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping X -Gas boilers, Flues, Expansion Tanks 22 34 36 -Isolation material and support units 22 05 48 Commercial Electric Water Heaters Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment -Tankless water heaters 22 34 37X -Valve tags, Pipe markers, Equipment plates 22 05 53 Plumbing Fixtures Piping Insulation -Stops, Escutcheons, Flow control devicesX -Pipe insulation, Adhesives, Covers, Thickness 22 07 00 -Carriers, Water closets, Urinals, Bathtubs, Facility Water Distribution -Lavatories, Sinks, Showers, Hose bibs 22 40 00 -Pipe and fittings, Valves, Cocks, Specialties Commercial Plumbing FixturesX -Trap Guards & Primers, Flanges 22 11 00 X -Fixtures, Trim, drain body, hydrants, valves 22 42 00 Domestic Water Pumps Security Plumbing FixturesX -In-Line Circulators 22 11 23 -Fixtures, Trim, drain body, hydrants, valves 22 46 00 Facility Sanitary SewerageX -Pipe & Fittings 22 13 00 Sanitary Waste Interceptors NA -Hair interceptor, Grease/Oil traps 22 13 23 City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING MDE Project NO: 191124 220500 - 1 August 2019 SECTION 220500 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to the Work in this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Work Included: Provide complete plumbing systems where shown on the drawings, as specified herein, and as needed for a complete and proper installation including, but not necessarily limited to the following summary of work: 1. Furnish and install a complete sanitary waste and vent system as shown on drawings and described herein. 2. Furnish and install a complete domestic cold and hot water piping to all plumbing fixtures and equipment. 3. Furnish and install a complete Storm Drain system as shown on drawings. 4. Other items and services required to complete the systems. B. Any Alternate Proposals are summarized in Division 01 of the Specifications. The Contractor is directed to refer to all Sections of the Specifications and Drawings for this project to determine the exact extent and scope of the various Alternate Proposals as each pertains to the work of all trades. 1.3 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Unless otherwise specified, materials are to be new and of current U.S. manufactured, free from defects, and of the best quality of their respective kinds. B. Equipment and/or materials damaged in shipment or handling or otherwise damaged before installation, shall be replaced with new equipment and/or materials. Damaged equipment and/or materials shall not be repaired at the jobsite. C. Furnishing of the proper equipment and/or materials and to see that it is installed as recommended by the manufacturer is entirely the responsibility of the Contractor. If required for proper installation, the Contractor shall obtain advice and supervisory assistance from a representative of the specific manufacturer of the equipment being installed. D. Materials and adhesives to conform to Federal Standard Flame-Spread Properties, Inc., with composite fire and smoke hazard ratings, maximum 25 for flame spread and 50 for smoke developed. Adhesives to be waterproof. E. The Contractor shall promptly notify the Architect in writing of any conflict between the requirements of the Contract Documents and the manufacturer's directions and shall obtain the Architect instructions before proceeding with the work. Should the Contractor perform any such work that does not comply with the manufacturer's directions or such instructions from the Architect, he shall bear all costs arising in connection with the deficiencies. F. Belts, pulleys, chains, gears, couplings, projecting screws, keys, or other rotating parts which are located so that a person can come in close proximity thereto shall be fully enclosed properly provided with a guard. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE AND APPLICABLE STANDARDS A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workers that are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts, completely familiar with the specified requirements, and is knowledgeable of the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. B. The Contractor shall be responsible for fitting his material and apparatus into the building and shall carefully lay out his work at the site to conform to the structural conditions, to avoid all obstructions, to conform to the details of the installation and thereby to provide an integrated satisfactory operating installation. The contractor must support all pipe, equipment, and all other items furnished and installed under this scope from steel joists or structural steel frames. It is prohibited to support pipe, equipment, and all other items furnished under this scope from the metal deck. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING MDE Project NO: 191124 220500 - 2 August 2019 C. Without additional cost to the Owner, provide such other labor and materials as are required to complete the work of this Section in accordance with the requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, regardless of whether such materials and associated labor are called for elsewhere in these Contract Documents. D. Codes: Perform all work in accordance with the latest adopted edition of the following codes: 1. State and city building, fire, plumbing and mechanical codes. 2. International Fire Code 3. International Mechanical Code 4. International Plumbing Code 5. International Electrical Code 6. International Energy Conservation Code 7. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 8. American with Disabilities Act (ADA) 9. ICC/ANSI A117.1 Accessible and Useable Buildings and Facilities. 10. All authorities having jurisdiction. 11. Architectural code review drawing. E. Where conflicts occur between drawings, specifications or code requirements the most stringent requirement shall take precedence. F. Standards: The specifications and standards of the following organizations are by reference made a part of these specifications. All work, unless otherwise indicated, shall comply with the requirements and recommendations wherever applicable: 1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI). 2. Air Conditioning, Heating and Refrigeration Institute (AHRI). 3. American Gas Association (AGA). 4. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM). 5. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME). 6. American Society of Refrigeration, Heating and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE). 7. Electrical Testing Laboratories (ETL). 8. National Bureau of Standards (NBS). 9. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA). 10. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA). 11. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning National Association (SMACNA). 12. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL). G. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." 2. ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX. 1.5 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES A.The requirements and recommendations of the latest edition of the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) Act are by reference made a part of these specifications. All work shall comply with the requirements and recommendations wherever applicable. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A.Comply with all submittal provisions of Division 22 00 10 “Submittal Process.” B.Submit electronic copies of the submittal to the prime consultant (i.e. architect) in order to process and track the submittals properly in accordance with Division 1 and 22 submittal requirements. Submittals shall be labeled by their project specification section or CSI specification section if not listed in project specifications City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING MDE Project NO: 191124 220500 - 3 August 2019 C.Product Data: Submit the following: 1. Materials list of items proposed to be provided under Division 22. 2. Manufacturer's specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with the specified requirements. The term "Compliance" is understood to mean that the Contractor certifies that the submitted equipment will meet or exceed the contract document requirements. Items that do not clearly meet this definition should be identified and explained as required in the following paragraph. 3. Identify the difference between the specified item or function and the proposed. Explain with enough detail so that the Engineer/Owner can easily determine that the item complies with the functional intent. List any disadvantages or advantages of the proposed item versus the specified item. Submit technical data sheets and/or pictures and diagrams to support and clarify. Organize in a clear and concise format. All substitutions shall be approved in writing by Architect. The Architect’s decision shall be final. 4. Allow a minimum of ten (10) working days for the review of submittals and each re- submittal. 5. Submittals that have been reviewed and marked as REJECTED (REJ) or MAKE CORRECTIONS NOTED (MCN) should be resubmitted within 10 days to be reviewed again by engineer. 6. Compliance with the Contract documents shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor. Items on equipment that were not accepted by the Architect in writing as an approved equal shall be replaced or revised to comply with the contract documents at the Contractor's expense. 7. Manufacturer's recommended installation procedures which, when reviewed by the Architect, shall become the basis for accepting or rejecting actual installation procedures used on the work. 8. Sign the submittal as an indication of compliance with the contract documents. Any deviations from the contract documents shall be indicated on the submittal prior to signing. Any deviations not indicated shall be cause for rejection and removal of the non- complying equipment at the Contractor’s expense. 9.All owner requested VE (Value Engineering) changes must be submitted to MD Engineering on a signed letter describing all VE changes and signed by both the architect and owner or will be subject to rejection without review. a.All proposed VE items must meet all code requirements. D.Submittals required of materials and equipment under this section include the following: 1.Piping and Accessories Materials: a.Clearly marked up manufacturer's data showing compliance with the specifications for: (Include model numbers and highlight / circle products) 1)Piping material proposed for each system. 2)Valves, cocks, and specialties. 3)Flexible connectors for piping. 4)Flanges. 5)Pumps and circulators 6)Compressors. b.l/8" scale (minimum) sanitary sewer, storm water, domestic hot and domestic cold water piping shop drawings showing coordinated piping routing and arrangements with all equipment, accessories, and system expansion and contraction compensation methods. 2.Vibration Isolation and Sound Control Materials: a.Submit shop drawings showing the structural design and details of inertia bases, steel beam bases, and other custom-fabricated work not covered by manufacturer's submitted data. b.Furnish layouts of templates to be furnished to fabricators of equipment bases, foundations, and other support systems, as needed for coordination of vibration isolation units with other work. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING MDE Project NO: 191124 220500 - 4 August 2019 c.Submit shop drawings indicating the scope of vibration isolation work, locations of units, and flexible connections. Include support isolation points for piping, motor driven equipment, inertia bases, etc. d.Include schedule of isolation units, showing size or manufacturer's part number, the weight supported, and resulting deflection of each unit. e.For spring isolation units, show wire size, spring diameter, free height, solid-compression height, operating height, fatigue characteristics. and ratio of horizontal to vertical stiffness. f.For spring-and-pad type isolation units, show the basis of spring rate selection for the range of loading weights. 3.Mechanical Identification Materials: a.Clearly marked-up product literature or samples showing compliance with specified materials for: (Include model numbers and highlight or circle products) 1)Valve tagging. 2)Pipe marking. 3)Equipment marking. 4.Insulation: a.Manufacturer's certified data on thermal performance. b.Details, when required, of methods to be used in providing for unusual piping expansion and contraction. c.Manufacturer's data on any alternate insulation material of reduced thickness, including pre-insulated pipe. d.Manufacturer's data on all jacketing materials, sealants and, fasteners. 5.Plumbing Materials: a.Clearly marked-up manufacturer's data showing compliance with the specifications on: (Include model numbers and highlight or circle products) 1)Fixtures, carriers and, all accessories. 2)Plumbing equipment. 3)Water hammer arresters. 4)Backflow preventers. 5)Trap primers 6)Trapguards 7)Thermostatic mixing valves. 8)Gas regulators. 6.Heating: a.Provide clearly marked-up manufacturer's data showing compliance with scheduled values and specifications for: (Include model numbers and highlight or circle products) 1)Flue pipe and accessories. 2)Water Heaters b.Provide all electrical characteristics. 7.Record Documents: Reference the requirements detailed in this section. 8.Operation and Maintenance Data: Reference the requirements detailed in this section. E.Resubmission of rejected submittals shall be limited to one (1) in number. Costs for processing subsequent resubmittals in excess of the first resubmittal, resulting from the Contractor's disregard of Architect/Engineer's primary submittal rejection comments, shall be borne by the Contractor. Costs shall be based on Architect/Engineer's hourly rates as published in their current professional fee schedules and shall also include reimbursable costs for delivery, mailing, and photocopies at direct cost plus ten percent (10%). City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING MDE Project NO: 191124 220500 - 5 August 2019 1.7 SUBSTITUTIONS A.The use of manufacturers' names and catalog numbers followed by the phrase "or equal" is generally used to establish a standard of quality and utility for the specified items and to provide a dimensional reference for construction documents that are drawn to scale. B.Submittals for "equal" items shall, where applicable, include the following data that are not necessarily required for specified items: 1. Performance characteristics. 2. Materials. 3. Finish. 4. Certification of conformance with specified codes and standards. 5. Manufacturer's specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with the specified requirements. The term "Compliance" is understood to mean that the Contractor certifies that the submitted equipment will meet or exceed the contract document requirements. Items that do not clearly meet this definition should be identified and explained as required in Paragraph 6 below. 6. Identify the difference between the specified item or function and the proposed. Explain with enough detail so that the Architect/Engineer/Owner can easily determine that the item complies with the functional intent. List any disadvantages or advantages of the proposed item versus the specified item. Submit technical data sheets and/or pictures and diagrams to support and clarify. Include shop drawings for all piping and ductwork equipment per Paragraph 1.5 Submittals. Organize in a clear and concise format. C.Submittals of "equal" components or systems may be rejected if: 1. The material or equipment would necessitate the alteration of any portion of the mechanical, electrical, architectural, or structural design. 2. Dimensions vary from the specified material or equipment in such a manner that accessibility or clearances are impaired or the work of other trades is adversely affected. D.Proposed substitutions for materials or equipment must be submitted ten (10) days prior to final bid date for consideration as approved equals. Otherwise, such substitutions will not be permitted. Proposals for substitutions shall be made only by the prime bidders. Manufacturers, distributors, and sub-contractors shall not make proposals to the Architect for substitutions. E.All equipment installed on this project shall have local representation, local factory authorized service, and a local stock of repair parts. F.No substitution shall be made unless authorized in writing by the Architect. Should a substitution be accepted, proves defective or otherwise unsatisfactory for the service intended, and within the guarantee period, the Contractor shall replace defective material or equipment with material or equipment specified, at his own expense and to the satisfaction of the Architect. G.Contractors submitting bids on substitute materials/equipment must also provide a written performance guarantee certifying that the substitute materials/equipment will produce the specified effects and meet the approval of the Architect. 1.8 ORDINANCES, PERMITS, METERS, UTILITIES AND ROYALTIES A.Procure all permits and licenses necessary for completion of this project and pay all lawful fees required and necessary pursuant in obtaining said permits and licenses. All required certificates of approvals and inspections by local governing and regulating authorities shall be obtained and paid for by the Contractor. B. Pay all fees required for any connection of water, and sewer to utility mains and any meter fees if required. C.Pay any royalty payments or fees required for the use of patented equipment or systems. Defend all law suits or claims for infringement of any patent rights and shall hold the Owner/Architect/Engineer harmless from loss as a result of said suits or claims. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING MDE Project NO: 191124 220500 - 6 August 2019 1.9 COMPATIBILITY OF EQUIPMENT A. Assume full responsibility for satisfactory operation of all component parts of the plumbing systems to assure compatibility of all equipment and performance of the integrated systems in accordance with the requirements of the specifications. Should the Contractor consider any part of the specifications or drawings as rendering his acceptance of such responsibility impossible, prohibitive, or restrictive, he shall notify the Engineer before submitting his bid, and the bid shall be accompanied by a written statement of any objections or exceptions to the specifications and drawings. B. The size of plumbing equipment indicated on the Drawings is based on the dimensions of a particular manufacturer. While other manufacturers may be acceptable, it is the responsibility of the Contractor to determine if the equipment he proposes to furnish will fit in the space. Fabrication Drawings shall be prepared when required by the Architect/Engineer/Owner to indicate a suitable arrangement. C. All equipment shall be installed in a manner to permit access to all surfaces. All valves, motors, drives, filters, and other accessory items shall be installed in a position to allow removal for service without disassembly of another part. 1.10 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS A.The drawings show the arrangements of work. Should project conditions necessitate rearrangement or if the materials or equipment can be installed to a better advantage in a different manner, the Contractor shall, before proceeding with the work, prepare and submit five copies of Drawings of the proposed arrangement for the Architect’s review. Allow a minimum of ten (10) working days for review. B.Should the Contractor propose to install equipment requiring space conditions other than those shown or rearrange the equipment, he shall assume responsibility for the rearrangement of the space and shall have the Architect review the change before proceeding with the work. The request for such changes shall be accompanied by shop drawings of the space in question. Identify monetary credits proposed or other benefits of the change. Allow a minimum of ten (10) working days for review. C.The Contractor shall be responsible for the proper location and size of all slots, holes or openings in the building structure pertaining to his work and for the correct location of pipe sleeves. 1.11 CONNECTIONS FOR OTHERS A.The Plumbing Contractor shall rough in and make all water, sewer, etc. connections to all fixtures, equipment, machinery, etc., provided by others in accordance with detailed roughing-in Drawings provided by the equipment suppliers, by actual measurements of the equipment connections, or as detailed. B.After the equipment is set in place, this Contractor shall make all final connections and shall provide all required pipe, fittings, valves, traps, etc. C.Provide all code approved air gap fittings required, using materials hereinbefore specified. In each service line connected to an item of equipment or piece of machinery, provide a shutoff valve. On each drain not provided with a trap, provide a suitable trap. D.All pipe fittings, valves, traps, etc., exposed in finished areas and connected to chrome plated lines provided by others shall be chrome plated to match. 1.12 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Provide the record documents associated with the work of Division 22 in strict accordance with the provisions of these specifications. B. Throughout progress of the Division 22 work, maintain an accurate record of changes in the Contract Documents that apply to work of Division 22. Changes shall include all addendums issued during bidding. Maintain an accurate record of the location of mechanical service lines, outlets and, all outside utilities. C. Delegate the responsibility for maintenance of Record Documents to one person on the Contractor's staff as approved by the Architect. D. Accuracy of Records 1. Thoroughly coordinate changes within the Record Documents, making adequate and proper entries on each page of Specifications, and sheet of drawings and other documents where such entry is required to show the change properly. Match the symbology and format of the base documents. 2. Accuracy of records shall be such that a future verification of items shown in the Contract Documents may rely reasonably on information obtained from the approved Project Record Documents. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING MDE Project NO: 191124 220500 - 7 August 2019 E. Maintain the job set of Record Documents completely protected from deterioration, from loss and damage until completion of the work and transfer of all recorded data to the final Project Record Documents. F. Making Entries on Drawings 1. Using an erasable colored pencil (not ink or indelible pencil), clearly describe the change by graphic line and note as required. 2. Date all entries. 3. Call attention to the entry by a "cloud" drawn around the area/s affected. 4. In the event of overlapping changes, use different colors for the overlapping changes. 5. Make entries within 24 hours after receipt of information that the change has occurred. 6. Maintain the base drawing format and use the same symbology. 7. Convert field mark-ups to finished CADD record drawings when required in this section. G. Conversion of Schematic Layouts 1. In some cases on the drawings, arrangements of piping and similar items are shown schematically and are not intended to portray precise physical layout. Determine final physical arrangement subject to the Architect's approval. However, design of future modifications of the facility may require accurate information as to the final physical layout of items which are shown only schematically on the drawings. 2. Show on the job set of record drawings, by dimension accurate to within one inch, the centerline of each run of items such as all sleeves and piping, etc., below grade, in walls, or in the concrete slab. A surface mounted device indicates the exact location. a.Clearly identify the item by accurate note such as "Sanitary Sewer" and the like. b.Show, by symbol or note, the vertical location of the item "under slab," "in ceiling plenum", "exposed", and the like. c.Make all identification sufficiently descriptive that it may be related reliably to the specifications. H. Final Project Record Documents 1. The purpose of the final Project Record Documents is to provide factual information regarding all aspects of the Work, both concealed and visible, to enable future modification of the Work to proceed without lengthy and expensive site measurement, investigation, and examination. 2. Provide CAD electronic files in .dwg format using AutoCAD software. Upon written request, completion of a release form, and payment of the Engineer’s standard fee of $200 plus applicable sales tax for a set-up charge and $50 per drawing plus applicable sales tax for copies of such files, Engineer will provide AutoCAD electronic files of base Contract Drawings in dwg format on compact discs. Engineer will also provide a list of drawing layers and names that shall be maintained. 3. Provide completed record drawings on CD-R and one full size hard copy of each drawing. 4. Refer to Division 1 for additional requirements. 1.13 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit two copies of a preliminary draft of the proposed manual or manuals to the Architect for review and comments. Allow a minimum of ten (10) working days for review. B. Submit specified number copies of the approved manual to the Architect prior to indoctrination of operation and maintenance personnel. C. Prepare in accordance with the following standards: Format: Size: Paper: Text: Drawings: 8½" x 11" White bond, at least 20 lb. weight Neatly written or printed 11" in height preferable; bind in with text; foldout acceptable; larger drawings acceptable but fold to fit within the Manual and provide a drawing pocket inside rear cover or bind in with text. Flysheets:Separate each section of the Manual with neatly prepared flysheets briefly describing contents of the ensuing section; flysheets may be in color. Binding:Use heavy-duty plastic or fiber-board covers with binding mechanism concealed inside the manual; 3-ring binders will be acceptable; all City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING MDE Project NO: 191124 220500 - 8 August 2019 binding is subject to the Architect's approval. Measurements:Provide all measurements in U.S. standard units such as feet-and-inches, lbs, and cfm. Where items may be expected to be measured within ten years in accordance with metric formulae, provide additional measurements in the "International System of Units" (SI). D. Provide front and back covers for each manual, using durable material approved by the Architect, and clearly identified on or through the cover with at least the following information: (SEE NEXT PAGE) OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL (Required Layout) Title Page o Job Name o Site Address o Include Contact information of prime contractor. Table of Contents Warranty Information. o Include all contractor warranties Signed and dated documents Permits-Inspections Subcontractor List o Include all subcontractors. Company name, Contact info. Trade Responsibility. Vendor List o Include name and addresses of vendors Warranty information Replaceable parts Approved Submittals o Include all approved product submittals Reports/Certificates/Redlines o Engineers Observation Reports o Engineer/Manufacturer Start-up Report o Contractor Start-up Report o As-builts o RPZ Certifications o Owners Training Report O&M Manuals Equipment Information. o Include Model, Serial. and location. Signed Approval o Page for approval signature of the engineer and approval date. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING MDE Project NO: 191124 220500 - 9 August 2019 E. Contents: Include at least the following: 1. Neatly typewritten index near the front of the manual, giving immediate information as to location within the manual of all emergency information regarding the installation. 2. Complete instructions regarding operation and maintenance of all equipment provided including lubrication, disassembly, and reassembly. 3. Complete nomenclature of all parts of all equipment. 4. Complete nomenclature and part number of all replaceable parts, name and address of nearest vendor, and all other data pertinent to procurement procedures. 5. Copy of all guarantees and warranties issued. 6. Manufacturer's bulletins, drawings, and descriptive data clearly indicating the precise items included in this installation and deleting, or otherwise clearly indicating, all manufacturers' data with which this installation is not concerned. 7. Such other data as required in other sections of these specifications. 1.14 WARRANTY A. Contractor shall warranty all equipment and workmanship for a period of at least one year after date of substantial completion and replace/repair any faulty equipment or installation at no cost to the Owner for such service during this period, all in accordance with requirements of Division 1. B. This warranty shall not void specific warranties issued by manufacturers for greater periods of time. Nor shall it void any rights guaranteed to the Owner by law. C. Warranties shall be in writing in a form satisfactory to the Owner, and shall be delivered to the Owner before final payment is made. D. Upon completion of the work of Division 22, thoroughly clean all exposed portions of the mechanical installation, removing all traces of soil, labels, grease, oil and other foreign material and using only the type cleaner recommended by the manufacturer of the item being cleaned. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCESS DOORS A. Access doors mounted in painted surfaces shall be of Milcor (Inland-Ryerson Construction Products Company) manufacturer, Style K for plastered surfaces and Style M or DW for non- plastered surfaces. The Style K doors shall be set so that the finished surface of the door is even with the finished surfaces of the adjacent finishes. Access doors mounted on tile surfaces shall be stainless steel materials. Access doors shall be a minimum of 18" x 18" in size. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 ACCESS DOORS A. In fire-rated walls, access door shall be fire rated same as wall. 3.2 TESTING AND INSPECTION A. Provide personnel and equipment, make required tests, and secure required approvals from the Architect and governmental agencies having jurisdiction. B. Make written notice to the Architect adequately in advance of each of the following stages of construction: 1. When all rough-in is complete, but not covered. 2. As specified in all Division 22 sections. 3. At the completion of the work of Division 22. C. When material or workmanship is found to not comply with the specified requirements, remove the noncomplying items from the job site and replace them with items complying with the specified requirements at no additional cost to the Owner. This shall be performed within 3 days after receipt of written notice of noncompliance. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING MDE Project NO: 191124 220500 - 10 August 2019 3.3 INSTALLATION METHODS A. Unless noted otherwise, piping may be run exposed in mechanical rooms and janitor's closets. Piping exposed in mechanical rooms and janitor's closets shall be run tight against the structure, as required by the Architect, allowing for expansion. B. Conceal piping to be installed as hereinbefore specified. C. Piping suspended from the structure shall be adequately and properly supported on hanger rods or clamps as specified in Section 22 0529 “Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment”. Perforated strap hangers will not be permitted. The contractor must support all pipe, equipment, and all other items furnished and installed under this scope from steel joists or structural steel frames. It is prohibited to support pipe, equipment, and all other items furnished under this scope from the metal deck. D. Where space is limited above ceilings, below concrete beams or other concrete projections, piping shall be sleeved through the beam or projection, rather than hung below. Provide sleeves where required and locate where approved by the Architect. E. Cut pipe accurately to measurements established at the building and install into position without springing or forcing. All open ends of pipes shall be capped or otherwise closed until the systems are closed with final connections. F. No pipe joints nearer than 12" to a wall, ceiling or floor penetration will be permitted, unless joint is of the welded type. G. Piping systems shall be made up straight and true and run at proper grades to permit proper flow of the contained material. Piping shall be graded for proper drainage. H. Piping shall follow as closely as possible the routes shown on plans, which take into consideration conditions to be met at the site and in the building. Should any unforeseen conditions arise, lines shall be changed or rerouted as required after approval from the Architect. I. All piping shall be installed with due regard to expansion and contraction and so as to prevent excessive strain and stress in the piping and in connections to equipment. J. All piping shall be clean when it is installed; rust and/or dirt shall be removed. K. Screw joints shall be made with taper threads, properly cut. Threads shall be cut using graphite and oil applied to the pipe only. When threads are cut on pipes, the ends shall be carefully reamed to remove any burrs. Pipe shall be up-ended and hammered to remove all shavings and foreign material, before installing. L. Requirements for assembling joints in cast iron and copper lines are set forth elsewhere in these specifications. For any special materials, consult the manufacturers for the recommended procedures in assembling the joints. M. Contractor shall provide wall or ceiling access doors for unrestricted access to all concealed items of the fire suppression system. N. Install roof pipe penetrations through sleeves, and flash with membrane flashing and roofing mastic compatible with roofing system. Roofing Supplier/Contractor shall approve roof penetration and flashing. O. Properly cap or plug all open ends of pipes and equipment to keep dirt and other foreign materials out of the system. P. Arrangement: 1.All piping shall be run parallel to building lines and shall be arranged so as not to interfere with removal of other equipment or devices nor to block access to doors, windows, manholes or other access openings. 2.Piping shall be arranged so as to facilitate removal of tube bundles. 3.Piping shall be placed and installed so that there will be no interference with the installation of the equipment, ducts, etc. 4.All piping shall be installed to ensure noiseless circulation. 5.All valves and specialties shall be placed to permit easy operation and access. 6.All piping shall be erected and pitched to ensure proper draining. 7.Piping shall be installed so as to avoid liquid or air pockets throughout the piping system. 8.Eccentric reducers with flat side up shall be used wherever changes in pipe size would cause an air trap. 9.Expansion and contraction of piping shall be provided by expansion loops, bends or expansion joints to prevent injury to connections, piping, equipment or the building. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING MDE Project NO: 191124 220500 - 11 August 2019 Q. Connections for Removal: 1. Install flanged connections, Victaulic couplings, or unions on all bypasses, ahead of all traps and at all connections to equipment, where shown on the drawings and where required to facilitate convenient removal of equipment. Piping connections to equipment shall include valves to allow isolating equipment for easy removal. R. Sleeves 1. Provide sleeves around all pipes passing through walls, floors, ceiling, partitions, structural members or other building parts. Sleeves shall be per Section 22 0548, “Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment”. S. Plates 1. Provide spring clamp plates (escutcheons) where pipes are exposed in finished locations of the building and run through walls, floors or ceilings. Plates shall be chrome plated brass and shall be set tight on the pipe and to the building surface. T. Flashing 1. Refer to Architectural Drawings and Specifications for flashing requirements. U. For additional installation requirements, refer to individual sections in Division 22. 3.4 CUTTING AND PATCHING A.Perform cutting and patching associated with the work in strict accordance with the provisions of Division 1 of these Specifications and the following: 1. Coordinate work to minimize cutting and patching work. Cut and patch walls, floors, etc., resulting from work in existing construction or by failure to provide proper openings or recesses in new construction. If cutting and patching is required, it shall be performed by trades specializing in that type work. 2. Perform Architect-approved cutting and demolition by methods which will prevent damage to other portions of the work and provide proper surfaces to receive installation of new work and/or repair. a. Openings cut through concrete and masonry shall be made with masonry saws and/or core drills and at such locations acceptable to the Architect. Impact-type equipment will not be used except where specifically acceptable to the Architect. b. Openings in precast concrete slabs or walls for pipes, etc., shall be core drilled to exact size. Oversize the hole to allow for link seals, and to deter pipe corrosion condensation from forming. c. Where openings are cut through masonry walls, provide and install lintels or other structural supports to protect the remaining masonry. Adequate supports shall be provided during the cutting operation to prevent any damage to the masonry occasioned by the operation. All structural members, supports, etc., shall be of the proper size and shape, and shall be installed in a manner acceptable to the Architect. d. Openings cut through plaster or drywall shall be cut prior to plaster finish coat or texture coat on drywall. Cutting of the finish coat of plaster or texture coat of drywall will not be permitted unless written approval of the Architect is obtained. e. Openings shall be restored and/or repaired as required to replace the cut surface to an "as-new" and/or "as original" condition. Refer to the appropriate section of the specifications for the material involved. 3. Perform fitting and adjusting of products to provide finished installation complying with the specified tolerances and finishes. 4. Provide all core drilling of holes. Where sleeves and/or blockouts are required, they shall be cut or provided at locations required. On completion of this work or as work progresses, make all repairs and do all patching required as a result of work under this Contract. All patching shall be performed in a manner that will restore the surrounding work to its original condition to the satisfaction of the Architect. 5. Assume responsibility for the proper size of all sleeves and/or blockouts in the building structure pertaining to the work and for providing the correct location of pipe sleeves and/or blockouts. 6. No cutting, boring or excavating which will weaken the structure will be permitted. 3.5 EXISTING UTILITIES AND TEMPORARY SERVICES FOR CONSTRUCTION A. Verify the location and capacity of existing utility services pertaining to work of Division 22. Relocate existing utilities unearthed by excavation as directed by the utility service companies affected. 1. Temporary Services for Construction 2. Provide temporary services in strict accordance with the provisions of these City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING MDE Project NO: 191124 220500 - 12 August 2019 specifications. B. When any piece of plumbing equipment is operable and it is to the advantage of the Contractor to operate the equipment, he may do so, providing that he properly supervises the operation, and has the Architect’s written permission to do so. The warranty period shall, however, not commence until such time as the equipment is operated for the beneficial use of the Owner, or date of substantial completion, whichever occurs first. C. Regardless of whether or not the equipment has or has not been operated, the Contractor shall properly clean the equipment, install clean filter media, properly adjust, and complete all deficiency list items before final acceptance by the Owner. The date of acceptance and performance certification will be the same date. 3.6 DEMOLITION AND RELOCATION A. The Contractor shall modify, remove, and/or relocate all materials and items so indicated on the Drawings or required by the installation of new facilities. All removals and/or dismantling shall be conducted in a manner as to produce maximum salvage. Salvage materials shall remain the property of the Owner, and shall be delivered to such destination or otherwise disposed of as directed by the Owner. Materials and/or items scheduled for relocation and which are damaged during dismantling or reassembly operations shall be repaired and restored to good operative condition. The Contractor may, at his discretion, and upon the approval of the Owner, substitute new materials and/or items of like design and quality in lieu of materials and/or items to be relocated. B. All items which are to be relocated shall be carefully removed in reverse to original assembly or placement and protected until relocated. The Contractor shall clean and repair and provide all new materials, fittings, and appurtenances required to complete the relocations and to restore to good operative order. All relocations shall be performed by workmen skilled in the work and in accordance with standard practice of the trades involved. C. When items scheduled for relocation and/or reuse are found to be in damaged condition before work has been started on dismantling, the Contractor shall call the attention of the Owner to such items and receive further instructions before removal. Items damaged in repositioning operations are the Contractor's responsibility and shall be repaired or replaced by the Contractor as approved by the Owner, at no additional cost to the Owner. D. Service lines and wiring to items to be removed, salvaged, or relocated shall be removed to points indicated on the Drawings, specified, or acceptable to the Owner. Service lines and wiring not scheduled for reuse shall be removed to the points at which reuse is to be continued or service is to remain. Such services shall be sealed, capped, or otherwise tied-off or disconnected in a safe manner acceptable to the Owner. All disconnections or connections into the existing facilities shall be done in such a manner as to result in minimum interruption of services to adjacent occupied areas. Services to existing areas or facilities which must remain in operation during the construction period shall not be interrupted without prior specific approval of the Owner as hereinbefore specified. 3.7 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILLING A. Perform all excavation and backfilling necessary for the installation of the work. This shall include shoring and pumping in ditches to keep them in dry condition until the work has been installed. All shoring required to protect the excavation and safeguard employees shall be properly performed. B. Perform excavation and backfilling in strict accordance with the provisions of these specifications including trench safety requirements. C. All excavations shall be made to the proper depth, with allowances made for floor slabs, forms, beams, etc. Ground under piping shall be well compacted before piping is installed. 1. Cut the bottom of the trench or excavation to uniform grade so that pipe will bear on undisturbed soil. 2. Should rock be encountered, excavate 6" below pipe, fill with pea gravel and tamp well. 3. Carefully lay out alignment of pipe trenches to avoid obstructions. Secure approval of proposed route of pipe before any cutting is begun. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING MDE Project NO: 191124 220500 - 13 August 2019 D. After pipe lines have been inspected, tested and approved, backfill trenches or excavation with material as recommended by the manufacturer of the type of pipe used. E. Backfilling shall be made with selected soil, free from rocks and debris and shall be pneumatically tamped with 6 inch layers to secure a field density ratio of 95 percent as defined by ASTM Designation D698-57T (Proctor Soil Compaction Test). F. Excavated materials not suitable and not used in the backfill shall be removed from the site. G. Field check and verify the locations of all underground utilities. Avoid disturbing these as far as possible. In the event existing utilities are damaged, they shall be repaired at no cost to Owner. H. Compact backfill where trenching or excavation is required in improved areas such as pavements, walks, lawns, and similar areas, to a condition equal to undisturbed earth, and restore surface of the area to the condition existing prior to the trenching or excavating operation. I. In a lime stabilized area, the lime stabilization shall be fully restored after the excavation is complete. J. Replace concrete, curbs, paving and other surface improvements cut during excavation to their original condition. 3.8 JOBSITE CONDITIONS A.Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed. Include required work to correct conditions detrimental to the timely and proper completion of all Division 22 Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. B.The Contractor shall at all times take such precautions as may be necessary to properly protect all materials and equipment from damage from the time of delivery until the completion of the work. This shall include the erection of all required temporary shelters and supports to adequately protect any items stored in the open on the site from the weather, the ground and surrounding work; the cribbing of any items above the floor of the construction; and the covering of items in the incomplete building with tarpaulins or other protective covering. Failure on the part of the Contractor to comply with the above will be sufficient cause for the rejection of the items in question. C.Take particular care not to damage the building structure in performing work. All finished floors, step treads, and finished surfaces shall be covered to prevent any damage by workmen or their tools and equipment during the construction of the building. D.Equipment and materials shall be protected from rust both before and after installation. Any equipment or materials found in a rusty condition at the time of final inspection must be cleaned of rust and repainted as specified elsewhere in these Specifications. 3.9 STORAGE AND PROTECTION A. Contractor shall provide the required protection of equipment and materials from the time of delivery until the completion of the Work. Protect from damage, rust, rain, humidity and dust. B. Do not receive equipment or materials on the jobsite until adequate space has been provided for storage. C. Provide adequate supports for protection from the ground and erect required shelters for items stored in the open. D. Items stored within the building are to be adequately protected and covered with tarpaulins or other protective covering. E. Protect the building at all times during construction from damage by workmen, their tools and/or equipment. Protect floors, steps, wall, ceilings, doors, windows and other finish surfaces. F. Equipment and materials found in a rusty condition at completion of the work will be thoroughly cleaned of rust and refinished as required to its original condition. 3.10 PREPARATION AND COORDINATION A.Perform coordination work in strict accordance with provisions of these specifications and the following: 1. Coordinate as necessary with other trades to assure proper and adequate interface with all work. 2. Where pipes or other fire suppression items are shown in conflict with locations of structural members and other equipment, include labor and materials required for extensions, offsets and supports to clear the encroachment. 3. Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish and install all supplementary or miscellaneous items, appurtenances and devices incidental to or necessary for a sound, secure and complete installation of the fire suppression system. 4. Coordinate accepted equipment changes from those scheduled or specified with other trades affected. Additional compensation to other trades for equipment changes is the responsibility of the Contractor making the change. B.The Mechanical, Electrical, Plumbing, and associated Drawings are necessarily diagrammatic by their nature, and are not intended to show every connection in detail or every pipe or conduit in its City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING MDE Project NO: 191124 220500 - 14 August 2019 exact location. These details are subject to the requirements of standards referenced elsewhere in these specifications, and structural and architectural conditions. The Contractor shall carefully investigate structural and finish conditions and shall coordinate the separate trades in order to avoid interference between the various phases of work. Work shall be organized and laid out so that it will be concealed in furred chases and suspended ceilings, etc., in finished portions of the building, unless specifically noted to be exposed. All exposed work shall be installed parallel or perpendicular to the lines of the building unless otherwise noted. C.When the mechanical and electrical, plumbing, drawings do not give exact details as to the elevation of pipe, conduit and ducts, the Contractor shall physically arrange the systems to fit in the space available at the elevations intended with proper grades for the functioning of the system involved. Piping, exposed conduit and the duct systems are generally intended to be installed true and square to the building construction, and located as high as possible against the structure in a neat and workmanlike manner. The Drawings do not show all required offsets, control lines, pilot lines and other location details. Work shall be concealed in all finished areas. D.The general installation precedence of materials shall be as follows. Note that if an interference is encountered, this shall guide the contractor in the determination of which trade shall be given the "Right-of-Way". Building lines Structural Members Soil and Drain Piping Condensate Drains Vent Piping Supply, Return, and Outside Air Ductwork Exhaust Ductwork Fire Protection Piping Gas Piping Domestic Water (Cold and Hot) Electrical Conduit E.Where items such as diffusers, thermostats, switches, and control panels are not specifically located on the Drawings, locate as determined in the field by the Architect. Where such items are installed without such specific direction, relocate as directed by the Architect and at no additional cost to the Owner. F.Verify all dimensions and distances. No additional compensation will be allowed because of differences between work shown on the Drawings and actual dimensions and distances at the jobsite. 3.11 CLEANING AND FLUSHING A. Remove all labels, dirt, paint, grease, and stains from all piping and accessories installed under this Contract. Flush and treat piping systems. B. A temporary flushing connection shall be arranged for each section of piping. Water required for flushing shall be furnished by the Contractor. All temporary cross connections for flushing and drainage connections shall be furnished, installed and subsequently removed by the Contractor. C. In filling the systems, be sure to vent in such a manner that the control valves cannot backfill, thus causing foreign matter to be introduced into the valve body. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING MDE Project NO: 191124 220500 - 15 August 2019 3.12 PAINTING A. All equipment shall be delivered to the job with suitable factory finish. Should the finish be damaged in transit or during the installation, it shall be finished to match appearance of original finish. All work shall be subject to approval by Architect. B. All equipment, piping, conduit, insulation, etc., furnished and installed in exposed areas under Divisions 22 of these Specifications and as hereinafter specified shall be cleaned, prepared, and painted according to the following specification. In the event of a conflict between the specifications referenced, the provisions of this specification shall prevail only for Division 22 work. C. Before painting, materials and equipment surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned of cement, plaster, and other foreign materials, and all oil and grease spots shall be removed. Such surfaces shall be carefully wiped and all cracks and corners scraped out. Exposed metal work shall be carefully brushed down with the steel brushes to remove rust and other spots and left smooth and clean. END OF SECTION City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR PLUMBING PIPING MDE Project NO: 191124 220516 - 1 August 2019 SECTION 220516 - EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR PLUMBING PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Flexible, ball-joint, packed expansion joints. 2. Slip-joint packed expansion joints. 3. Expansion-compensator packless expansion joints. 4. Flexible-hose packless expansion joints. 5. Metal-bellows packless expansion joints. 6. Rubber packless expansion joints. 7. Grooved-joint expansion joints. 8. Pipe loops and swing connections. 9. Alignment guides and anchors. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Compatibility: Products shall be suitable for piping service fluids, materials, working pressures, and temperatures. B. Capability: Products to absorb 200 percent of maximum axial movement between anchors. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A.Provide submittals as required in section 22 00 10, “Submittal Process.” B. Delegated-Design Submittal: For each anchor and alignment guide indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 1. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for thermal expansion of piping systems and for selecting and designing expansion joints, loops, and swing connections. 2. Anchor Details: Detail fabrication of each anchor indicated. Show dimensions and methods of assembly and attachment to building structure. 3. Alignment Guide Details: Detail field assembly and attachment to building structure. 4. Schedule: Indicate type, manufacturer's number, size, material, pressure rating, end connections, and location for each expansion joint. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PACKED EXPANSION JOINTS A. Flexible, Ball-Joint, Packed Expansion Joints: 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, based upon the following: a. Hyspan Precision Products, Inc. 2. Standards: ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section II, "Materials"; and ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," for materials and design of pressure-containing parts and bolting. 3. Material: Carbon-steel assembly with asbestos-free composition packing. 4. Design: For 360-degree rotation and angular deflection. 5. Minimum Pressure Rating: 250 psig at 400 deg F. 6. Angular Deflection for NPS 6 and Smaller: 30 degree minimum. 7. Angular Deflection for NPS 8 and Larger: 15 degree minimum. 8. End Connections for NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded. 9. End Connections for NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Flanged. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR PLUMBING PIPING MDE Project NO: 191124 220516 - 2 August 2019 B. Slip-Joint Packed Expansion Joints: 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, based upon the following: a. Hyspan Precision Products, Inc. 2. Standard: ASTM F 1007. 3. Material: Carbon steel with asbestos-free PTFE packing. 4. Design: With internal guide and injection device for repacking under pressure. Include drip connection if used for steam piping. 5. Configuration: Single joint with base and double joint with base class(es) unless otherwise indicated. 6. End Connections: Flanged or weld ends to match piping system. 2.2 PACKLESS EXPANSION JOINTS A. Metal, Expansion-Compensator Packless Expansion Joints: 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, based upon the following: a. Metraflex, Inc. 2. Minimum Pressure Rating: 150 psig unless otherwise indicated. 3. Configuration for Copper Tubing: Two-ply, phosphor-bronze bellows with copper pipe ends. a. End Connections for Copper Tubing NPS 2 and Smaller: Solder joint or threaded. b. End Connections for Copper Tubing NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Threaded. 4. Configuration for Steel Piping: Two-ply, stainless-steel bellows; steel-pipe end connections; and carbon-steel shroud. a. End Connections for Steel Pipe NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded. b. End Connections for Steel Pipe NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Flanged. B. Rubber, Expansion-Compensator Packless Expansion Joints: 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, based upon the following: a. Amber/Booth Company, Inc.; a div. of Vibration Isolation Products of Texas, Inc. b. Mason Industries, Inc.; Mercer Rubber Co. 2. Material: Twin reinforced-rubber spheres with external restraining cables. 3. Minimum Pressure Rating: 150 psig at 170 deg F unless otherwise indicated. 4. End Connections for NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded. C. Flexible-Hose Packless Expansion Joints: 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, based upon the following: a. Metraflex, Inc. 2. Description: Manufactured assembly with inlet and outlet elbow fittings and two flexible- metal-hose legs joined by long-radius, 180-degree return bend or center section of flexible hose. 3. Flexible Hose: Corrugated-metal inner hoses and braided outer sheaths. 4. Expansion Joints for Copper Tubing NPS 2 and Smaller: Copper-alloy fittings with solder- joint end connections. a. Bronze hoses and single-braid bronze sheaths with 450 psig at 70 deg F and 340 psig at 450 deg F ratings. b. Bronze hoses and double-braid bronze sheaths with 700 psig at 70 deg F and 500 psig at 450 deg F ratings. 5. Expansion Joints for Copper Tubing NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Copper-alloy fittings with threaded end connections. a. Stainless-steel hoses and single-braid, stainless-steel sheaths with 300 psig at 70 deg F and 225 psig at 450 deg F ratings. b. Stainless-steel hoses and double-braid, stainless-steel sheaths with 420 psig at 70 deg F and 315 psig at 450 deg F ratings. 6. Expansion Joints for Steel Piping NPS 2 and Smaller: Carbon-steel fittings with threaded end connections. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR PLUMBING PIPING MDE Project NO: 191124 220516 - 3 August 2019 a. Stainless-steel hoses and single-braid, stainless-steel sheaths with 450 psig at 70 deg F and 325 psig at 600 deg F ratings. b. Stainless-steel hoses and double-braid, stainless-steel sheaths with 700 psig at 70 deg F and 515 psig at 600 deg F ratings. 7. Expansion Joints for Steel Piping NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 6: Carbon-steel fittings with flanged end connections. a. Stainless-steel hoses and single-braid, stainless-steel sheaths with 200 psig at 70 deg F and 145 psig at 600 deg F ratings. b. Stainless-steel hoses and double-braid, stainless-steel sheaths with 275 psig at 70 deg F and 200 psig at 600 deg F ratings. 8. Expansion Joints for Steel Piping NPS 8 to NPS 12: Carbon-steel fittings with flanged end connections. a. Stainless-steel hoses and single-braid, stainless-steel sheaths with 125 psig at 70 deg F and 90 psig at 600 deg F ratings. b. Stainless-steel hoses and double-braid, stainless-steel sheaths with 165 psig at 70 deg F and 120 psig at 600 deg F ratings. 9. Expansion Joints for Steel Piping NPS 14 and Larger: Carbon-steel fittings with weld end connections. a. Stainless-steel hoses and double-braid, stainless-steel sheaths with 165 psig at 70 deg F and 120 psig at 600 deg F ratings. D. Metal-Bellows Packless Expansion Joints: 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, based upon the following: a. Metraflex, Inc. 2. Standards: ASTM F 1120 and EJMA's "Standards of the Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association, Inc." 3. Type: Circular, corrugated bellows with external tie rods. 4. Minimum Pressure Rating: 150 psig unless otherwise indicated. 5. Configuration: Single joint with base and double joint with base class(es) unless otherwise indicated. 6. Expansion Joints for Copper Tubing: Single- or multi-ply phosphor-bronze bellows, copper pipe ends, and brass shrouds. a. End Connections for Copper Tubing NPS 2 and Smaller: Solder joint or threaded. b. End Connections for Copper Tubing NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Solder joint or threaded. c. End Connections for Copper Tubing NPS 5 and Larger: Flanged. 7. Expansion Joints for Steel Piping: Single- or multi-ply stainless-steel bellows, steel pipe ends, and carbon-steel shroud. a. End Connections for Steel Pipe NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded. b. End Connections for Steel Pipe NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Flanged. E. Rubber Packless Expansion Joints: 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, based upon the following: a. Metraflex, Inc. 2. Standards: ASTM F 1123 and FSA's "Technical Handbook: Non-Metallic Expansion Joints and Flexible Pipe Connectors." 3. Material: Fabric-reinforced rubber complying with FSA-NMEJ-703. 4. Arch Type: Single or multiple arches with external control rods. 5. Spherical Type: Single or multiple spheres with external control rods. 6. Minimum Pressure Rating for NPS 1-1/2 to NPS 4: 150 psig at 220 deg F. 7. Minimum Pressure Rating for NPS 5 and NPS 6: 140 psig at 200 deg F. 8. Minimum Pressure Rating for NPS 8 to NPS 12: 140 psig at 180 deg F. 9. Material for Fluids Containing Acids, Alkalies, or Chemicals: BR. 10. Material for Fluids Containing Gas, Hydrocarbons, or Oil: Buna-N. 11. Material for Water: BR. 12. End Connections: Full-faced, integral steel flanges with steel retaining rings. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR PLUMBING PIPING MDE Project NO: 191124 220516 - 4 August 2019 2.3 GROOVED-JOINT EXPANSION JOINTS A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, based upon the following: 1. Victaulic Company. B. Description: Factory-assembled expansion joint made of several grooved-end pipe nipples, couplings, and grooved joints. C. Standard: AWWA C606, for grooved joints. D. Nipples: Galvanized, ASTM A 53/A 53M, Schedule 40, Type E or S, steel pipe with grooved ends. E. Couplings: Five, flexible type for steel-pipe dimensions. Include ferrous housing sections, Buna-N gasket suitable for diluted acid, alkaline fluids, and cold and hot water, and bolts and nuts. 2.4 ALIGNMENT GUIDES AND ANCHORS A. Alignment Guides: 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, based upon the following: a. Metraflex, Inc. 2. Description: Steel, factory-fabricated alignment guide, with bolted two-section outer cylinder and base for attaching to structure; with two-section guiding spider for bolting to pipe. B. Anchor Materials: 1. Steel Shapes and Plates: ASTM A 36/A 36M. 2. Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.10 or ASTM A 183, steel hex head. 3. Washers: ASTM F 844, steel, plain, flat washers. 4. Mechanical Fasteners: Insert-wedge-type stud with expansion plug anchor for use in hardened portland cement concrete, with tension and shear capacities appropriate for application. a. Stud: Threaded, zinc-coated carbon steel or stainless steel. b. Expansion Plug: Zinc-coated steel. c. Washer and Nut: Zinc-coated steel. 5. Chemical Fasteners: Insert-type-stud, bonding-system anchor for use with hardened portland cement concrete, with tension and shear capacities appropriate for application. a. Bonding Material: ASTM C 881/C 881M, Type IV, Grade 3, two-component epoxy resin suitable for surface temperature of hardened concrete where fastener is to be installed. b. Stud: ASTM A 307, zinc-coated carbon steel or stainless steel with continuous thread on stud unless otherwise indicated. c. Washer and Nut: Zinc-coated steel. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXPANSION-JOINT INSTALLATION A. Install expansion joints of sizes matching sizes of piping in which they are installed. B. Install packed-type expansion joints with packing suitable for fluid service. C. Install metal-bellows expansion joints according to EJMA's "Standards of the Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association, Inc." D. Install rubber packless expansion joints according to FSA-NMEJ-702. E. Install grooved-joint expansion joints to grooved-end steel piping 3.2 PIPE LOOP AND SWING CONNECTION INSTALLATION A. Install pipe loops cold-sprung in tension or compression as required to partly absorb tension or compression produced during anticipated change in temperature. 3.3 ALIGNMENT-GUIDE AND ANCHOR INSTALLATION A. Install alignment guides to guide expansion and to avoid end-loading and torsional stress. B. Install two guide(s) on each side of pipe expansion fittings and loops. Install guides nearest to expansion joint not more than four pipe diameters from expansion joint. C. Attach guides to pipe and secure guides to building structure. D. Install anchors at locations to prevent stresses from exceeding those permitted by ASME B31.9 and to prevent transfer of loading and stresses to connected equipment. E. Anchor Attachments: City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR PLUMBING PIPING MDE Project NO: 191124 220516 - 5 August 2019 1. Anchor Attachment to Steel Pipe: Attach by welding. Comply with ASME B31.9 and ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications." 2. Anchor Attachment to Copper Tubing: Attach with pipe hangers. Use MSS SP-69, Type 24, U-bolts bolted to anchor. F. Fabricate and install steel anchors by welding steel shapes, plates, and bars. Comply with ASME B31.9 and AWS D1.1/D1.1M. 1. Anchor Attachment to Steel Structural Members: Attach by welding. 2. Anchor Attachment to Concrete Structural Members: Attach by fasteners. Follow fastener manufacturer's written instructions. G. Use grout to form flat bearing surfaces for guides and anchors attached to concrete. END OF SECTION City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING MDE Project NO: 191124 220519 - 1 August 2019 SECTION 220519 - METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Bimetallic-actuated thermometers. 2. Liquid-in-glass thermometers. 3. Thermowells. 4. Dial-type pressure gages. 5. Gage attachments. 6. Test plugs. 7. Test-plug kits. 8. Sight flow indicators. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. ASME B40.1: Gages, Pressure Indicating Dial Type, Elastic Element B. ASTM E1: Specification for ASTM Thermometers C. ASTM E77: Verification and Calibration of Liquid-in-Glass Thermometers 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Provide submittals as required in section 22 00 10, “Submittal Process”. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 BIMETALLIC-ACTUATED THERMOMETERS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Ashcroft Inc. 2. Trerice, H. O. Co. 3. Watts Regulator Co.; a div. of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. 4. Weiss Instruments, Inc. B. Standard: ASME B40.200. C. Case: Liquid-filled and sealed type(s); stainless steel with 3-inch nominal diameter. D. Dial: Non-reflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings and scales in deg F. E. Connector Type(s): Union joint, adjustable angle, with unified-inch screw threads. F. Connector Size: 1/2 inch, with ASME B1.1 screw thread. G. Stem: 0.25 or 0.375 inch in diameter; stainless steel. H. Window: Shatterproof glass. I. Ring: Stainless steel. J. Element: Bimetal coil. K. Pointer: Dark-colored metal. L. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of scale range. 2.2 LIQUID-IN-GLASS THERMOMETERS A. Metal-Case, Compact-Style, Liquid-in-Glass Thermometers: 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Trerice, H. O. Co. 2. Standard: ASME B40.200. 3. Case: Cast aluminum; 6-inch nominal size. 4. Case Form: Back angle unless otherwise indicated. 5. Tube: Glass with magnifying lens and blue or red organic liquid. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING MDE Project NO: 191124 220519 - 2 August 2019 6. Tube Background: Non-reflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings graduated in deg F. 7. Window: Shatterproof glass. 8. Stem: Aluminum or brass and of length to suit installation. a. Design for Thermowell Installation: Bare stem. 9. Connector: 3/4 inch, with ASME B1.1 screw threads. 10. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of scale range or one scale division, to a maximum of 1.5 percent of scale range. B. Metal-Case, Industrial-Style, Liquid-in-Glass Thermometers: 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Flo Fab Inc. b. Trerice, H. O. Co. c. Weiss Instruments, Inc. 2. Standard: ASME B40.200. 3. Case: Cast aluminum; 7-inch nominal size unless otherwise indicated. 4. Case Form: Adjustable angle unless otherwise indicated. 5. Tube: Glass with magnifying lens and blue or red organic liquid. 6. Tube Background: Non-reflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings graduated in deg F. 7. Window: Glass. 8. Stem: Aluminum and of length to suit installation. a. Design for Air-Duct Installation: With ventilated shroud. b. Design for Thermowell Installation: Bare stem. 9. Connector: 1-1/4 inches, with ASME B1.1 screw threads. 10. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of scale range or one scale division, to a maximum of 1.5 percent of scale range. 2.3 THERMOWELLS A. General: 1. Standard: ASME B40.200. 2. Description: Pressure-tight, socket-type fitting made for insertion into piping tee fitting. 3. Material for Use with Copper Tubing: CNR or CUNI. 4. Material for Use with Steel Piping: CRES. 5. Type: Stepped shank unless straight or tapered shank is indicated. 6. External Threads: NPS 1/2, NPS 3/4, or NPS 1, ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads. 7. Internal Threads: 1/2, 3/4, and 1 inch, with ASME B1.1 screw threads. 8. Bore: Diameter required to match thermometer bulb or stem. 9. Insertion Length: Length required to match thermometer bulb or stem. 10. Lagging Extension: Include on thermowells for insulated piping and tubing. 11. Bushings: For converting size of thermowell's internal screw thread to size of thermometer connection. B. Heat-Transfer Medium: Mixture of graphite and glycerin. 2.4 PRESSURE GAGES A. Direct-Mounted, Metal-Case, Dial-Type Pressure Gages: 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Dwyer Instruments, Inc. b. Trerice, H. O. Co. c. Watts Regulator Co.; a div. of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. d. Weiss Instruments, Inc. 2. Standard: ASME B40.100. 3. Case: Liquid-filled type(s); cast aluminum or drawn steel; 4-1/2-inch nominal diameter. 4. Pressure-Element Assembly: Bourdon tube unless otherwise indicated. 5. Pressure Connection: Brass, with NPS 1/2, ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads and bottom- outlet type unless back-outlet type is indicated. 6. Movement: Mechanical, with link to pressure element and connection to pointer. 7. Dial: Non-reflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings graduated in psi. 8. Pointer: Dark-colored metal. 9. Window: Glass. 10. Ring: Metal. 11. Accuracy: Grade A, plus or minus 1 percent of middle half of scale range. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING MDE Project NO: 191124 220519 - 3 August 2019 2.5 GAGE ATTACHMENTS A. Snubbers: ASME B40.100, brass; with NPS 1/2, ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads and piston-type surge-dampening device. Include extension for use on insulated piping. B. Siphons: Loop-shaped section of brass pipe with NPS 1/2 pipe threads. C. Valves: Brass or stainless-steel needle, with NPS 1/2, ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads. 2.6 TEST PLUGS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Trerice, H. O. Co. 2. Watts Regulator Co.; a div. of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. 3. Weiss Instruments, Inc. B. Description: Test-station fitting made for insertion into piping tee fitting. C. Body: Brass or stainless steel with core inserts and gasketed and threaded cap. Include extended stem on units to be installed in insulated piping. D. Thread Size: NPS 1/2, ASME B1.20.1 pipe thread. E. Minimum Pressure and Temperature Rating: 500 psig at 200 deg F. F. Core Inserts: Chlorosulfonated polyethylene synthetic and EPDM self-sealing rubber. 2.7 TEST-PLUG KITS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Flow Design, Inc. 2. Trerice, H. O. Co. 3. Watts Regulator Co.; a div. of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. 4. Weiss Instruments, Inc. B. Furnish one test-plug kit(s) containing one thermometer(s), one pressure gage and adapter, and carrying case. Thermometer sensing elements, pressure gage, and adapter probes shall be of diameter to fit test plugs and of length to project into piping. C. Low-Range Thermometer: Small, bimetallic insertion type with 1- to 2-inch- diameter dial and tapered-end sensing element. Dial range shall be at least 25 to 125 deg F. D. High-Range Thermometer: Small, bimetallic insertion type with 1- to 2-inch- diameter dial and tapered-end sensing element. Dial range shall be at least 0 to 220 deg F. E. Pressure Gage: Small, Bourdon-tube insertion type with 2- to 3-inch- diameter dial and probe. Dial range shall be at least 0 to 200 psig. F. Carrying Case: Metal or plastic, with formed instrument padding. 2.8 SIGHT FLOW INDICATORS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Archon Industries, Inc. 2. Dwyer Instruments, Inc. 3. Penberthy; A Brand of Tyco Valves & Controls - Prophetstown. B. Description: Piping inline-installation device for visual verification of flow. C. Construction: Bronze or stainless-steel body, with sight glass and ball, flapper, or paddle wheel indicator, and threaded or flanged ends. D. Minimum Pressure Rating: 125 psig. E. Minimum Temperature Rating: 200 deg F. F. End Connections for NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded. G. End Connections for NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Flanged. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING MDE Project NO: 191124 220519 - 4 August 2019 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install thermowells with socket extending one-third of pipe diameter and in vertical position in piping tees. B. Install thermowells of sizes required to match thermometer connectors. Include bushings if required to match sizes. C. Install thermowells with extension on insulated piping. D. Fill thermowells with heat-transfer medium. E. Install direct-mounted thermometers in thermowells and adjust vertical and tilted positions. F. Install direct-mounted pressure gages in piping tees with pressure gage located on pipe at the most readable position. G. Install valve and snubber in piping for each pressure gage for fluids. H. Install test plugs in piping tees. I. Install flow indicators in piping systems in accessible positions for easy viewing. J. Install permanent indicators on walls or brackets in accessible and readable positions. K. Install connection fittings in accessible locations for attachment to portable indicators. L. Install pressure gages in the following locations: 1. As indicated in the Contract documents and required by the equipment manufacturer. 3.2 CONNECTIONS A. Install meters and gages adjacent to machines and equipment to allow service and maintenance of meters, gages, machines, and equipment. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. After installation, calibrate meters according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Adjust faces of meters and gages to proper angle for best visibility. END OF SECTION City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING MDE Project NO: 191124 22 05 23 - 1 August 2019 SECTION 220523 - GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to the Work in this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. The Contractor shall furnish and install items as shown on the drawings or as necessary to provide a complete working system in accordance with the intent of the drawings and specifications, including all valves as indicated or as necessary to completely control the entire piping system. The piping drawings are diagrammatic and indicate the general routing, locations, and connections. The piping may require be offsetting, lowering or rising as needed to avoid interferences or as directed at the site. This does not relieve the Contractor from responsibility for the proper installation of piping systems. B. Work Included: 1. Work included: a. Sanitary drain, waste, and vent piping. b. Storm Drain and Subsoil drainage piping. c. Domestic hot and cold water piping. d. Equipment drains and relief valve piping. C. Submittals: Provide submittals as required in Section 22 00 10 “Submittal Process”. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. B. Without additional cost to the Owner, provide such other labor and materials as are required to complete the work of this Section in accordance with the requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, regardless of whether such materials and associated labor are called for elsewhere in these Contract Documents. C. When requested, provide the Architect with manufacturer's certificate that materials meet or exceed minimum requirements to comply with ANSI, ASTM, ASME, CISPI, IAPMO, PDI, and AWWA and all other applicable standards. D. Copies of each welder's certification documents shall be furnished to the Architect prior to them performing work. E. All pipes, valves, and fittings shall be manufactured in the United States. Mill Test reports and manufacturer’s certifications shall be submitted to the Engineer on all such materials used. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 VALVES, COCKS AND SPECIALTIES A. Materials: Bronze, ductile iron, or cast iron per local codes with screwed, or flanged ends for steel pipe and solder ends for copper pipe. B. Valve locations: Unless otherwise indicated, provide a valve on each branch serving a restroom. 1. Provide a valve on inlet and outlet of each piece of equipment. 2. Provide valves to isolate individual or group of fixtures and equipment on branch runouts from piping mains. This is in addition to valves at each fixture and equipment. 3. Provide interior shut-off and drain valves on each branch to wall hydrant and hose bibb. 4. Provide valves at the base of domestic water pipe risers. 5. Provide valves as indicated and where required to adequately service parts of systems and equipment. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING MDE Project NO: 191124 22 05 23 - 2 August 2019 C. Gate Valves: Rated for 200 PSIG WOG: 1. 2-1/2" and below – Nibco T-113 for steel pipe and Nibco S-113, for copper pipe, or approved equal. 2. 3" and above –Nibco F-619 or engineer approved equal. D. Ball Valves: Rated for 200 psig WOG. 1. 2-1/2" and below – Nibco T-595-Y for steel pipe and Nibco S-595-Y for copper pipe or engineer approved equal. E. Check Valves (Domestic Water System): 1. Swing check valve with bronze or composition disc rated for 200 psig WOG. 2. 2-1/2" and below – Nibco T-413-B, or engineer approved equal. 3. 3" and above – Nibco F-918-B, or engineer approved equal. F. Water Balancing Cocks: 1. Provide cocks with memory stop, Dezurik 100 or approved equal. G. Backflow Preventer: 1. Double check valve assembly consisting of two independently operating, spring loaded check valves, two gate valves, and four test cocks for field testing, Zurn, Wilkins Model 950XL or approved equal. 2. Provide reduced pressure type if required by local codes. H. Water Hammer Arrestors: 1. Provide arrestors sized in accordance with PDI Standard WH-201, permanently sealed, pre-charged to 60 PSIG, suitable for temperatures up to 250 DegF and maximum 350 PSIG working pressure: Model 650 Series as manufactured by Sioux Chief Mfg. Co. or approved equal. a. Provide at each branch run-off to fixtures or as required by manufacturer and PDI Standard WH-201. b. For laundry applications, Series 660-H or approved equal. I. Butterfly Valves: 1. Butterfly valves may be used in lieu of gate valves on chilled water and hot water heating lines rated to 150 psig: 2" - 12", with stem shall be offset from the disc centerline to provide full 360-degree circumferential seating, or " Crane 21-BRZ (21-BRB under 150 Deg. F). Crane 22F-BRZ (22F-BRB under 150 Deg. F) or engineer approved equal as manufactured by Jenkins or Centerline or Victaulic. J. Gauge Cocks and Manual Air Vents: 1. Provide brass, lever handle cock, 1/4" FPT, as shown on the drawings or as specified herein. K. Dielectric Unions or Waterway Fittings: 1. Provide dielectric unions or waterway fittings at all piping connections (except to valves) between dissimilar metals, Watts No. 3000 series, or engineer approved equal. L. Trap Primers: 1. Trap primer valve shall be factory assembled, prepiped and shall include a bronze ¾” NPT, WOG rated inlet ball valve, a brass ¾” electronic solenoid valve and a type “L” copper manifold with brass compression fittings. Unit shall include a single point power connection at 120/1/60, a manual override switch, 2 amp breakers and geared 24 hour timer with relay and 5 second dwell function. A code approved atmospheric vacuum breaker shall be included for backflow protection. Complete unit shall be provided in a 16 gauge steel box with access door suitable for flush mounting or NEMA 1 rated box with cover for surface mounting. Trap primers shall be installed per manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations. a. "Prime-Rite" PT or PTS as manufactured by Precision Plumbing Products, Inc. or approved equal. b. Trap primers shall be provided on all floor sinks and floor drains, except shower drains. Verify with authority having jurisdiction. M. Trap Guards (If approved by local authority having jurisdiction): 1. Trap guard shall be manufactured from smooth, soft, flexible, elastomeric PVC material molded into shape of duck's bill, open on top with curl closure at bottom. The design shall allow for wastewater to open and adequately discharge floor drain through its interior and then close and returns to original molded shape after wastewater discharge is complete. Trap guard shall be as manufactured by ProSet Systems, Inc. or pre-approved equal. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING MDE Project NO: 191124 22 05 23 - 3 August 2019 2. Trap guard shall meet the following standards: a. ASME A112.6.3. b. NSF/ANSI 14. c. CSA B 79. 3. Prior to ordering trap guard, contractor shall confirm drain manufacturer provided for project to insure proper fit for trap guard. This shall be indicated on the submittal. 2.2 FLANGES A. Flanges shall be 150 pound; A.S.A. forged steel, raised face, weld neck or slip-on. Slip-on flanges shall be welded both inside and outside. B. Flange Adapters: Flat face, for direct connection to ANSI Class 125 or 150 flanged components. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine valve interior for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and corrosion. Remove special packing materials, such as blocks, used to prevent disc movement during shipping and handling. B. Operate valves in positions from fully open to fully closed. Examine guides and seats made accessible by such operations. C. Examine threads on valve and mating pipe for form and cleanliness. D. Examine mating flange faces for conditions that might cause leakage. Check bolting for proper size, length, and material. Verify that gasket is of proper size, that its material composition is suitable for service, and that it is free from defects and damage. E. Do not attempt to repair defective valves; replace with new valves. 3.2 VALVE INSTALLATION A. Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow service, maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown. B. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary. C. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above center of pipe. D. Install valves in position to allow full stem movement. E. Install check valves for proper direction of flow and as follows: 1. Swing Check Valves: In horizontal position with hinge pin level. 2. Lift Check Valves: With stem upright and plumb. END OF SECTION City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 MDE Project NO: 191124 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220529 - 1 August 2019 SECTION 220529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to the Work in this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Provide all equipment, materials, labor, supervision, and services necessary for or incidental to the installation of all necessary identification items as indicated on the drawings and as specified. B. Work included: 1. Pipe hangers and supports. 2. Concrete supports for equipment. 3. Sleeving for plumbing equipment. C. Submittals: Provide submittals as required in Section 22 00 10 “Submittal Process”. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. B. Without additional cost to the Owner, provide such other labor and materials as are required to complete the work of this Section in accordance with the requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, regardless of whether such materials and associated labor are called for elsewhere in these Contract Documents. 1.4 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Automatic Sprinkler Pipe Supports: NFPA 13, Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems. B. Standpipe System Supports: NFPA 14, Standard for the Installation of Standpipe and Hose Systems. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Supports, hangers, anchors, guides and supplementary steel shall be provided for horizontal and vertical piping and shall meet or exceed the ASA Code for Pressure Piping. B. Rod sizes noted are minimum sizes. The structural integrity of the supports is the responsibility of the Contractor. C. Hangers Supporting and Contacting Brass or Copper: 1. 3" and Smaller: Grinnell Fig. CT-109, copper plated, split-ring hanger with adjusters. 2. 4" and Larger: Grinnell Fig. CT-65, copper plated, clevis hanger with 2 nuts each rod. 3. Isolate copper or brass from ferrous metals with an approved dielectric material. D. Hangers Supporting Insulated Lines: 1. Outside Diameter of Insulation 6" or Smaller and all Ferrous Pipe 3" Diameter and Smaller: Grinnell Fig. 108, malleable iron, split type with adjustable swivel and locknut. 2. Outside Diameter of Insulation 7" and Larger and all Ferrous Pipe Larger than 3" Diameter: Grinnell Fig. 260, malleable iron, clevis hanger with two nuts on each support. E. Protection Shields for Hangers: 1. Galvanized metal shields shall encircle the lower half of the insulation. 2. Provide shields at hangers on domestic hot and cold water pipes on trapeze type hangers. 3. Provide rigid insulation at all shields and hangers, extending a minimum of 6" each side of hanger. 4. Shield gauges shall be as follows: City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 MDE Project NO: 191124 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220529 - 2 August 2019 U.S.S. Gauge Insulation Diameter (Galvanized) Up to 3" 22 3" thru 6" 16 Above 6" 12 F. Supports for Vertical Riser Piping: 1. Provide Grinnell Fig. 261 double bolt riser clamps at each floor. Bear on structure. 2. At 8 feet o.c., 2-hole rigid clamps. Kindorf channels and C-105 straps. Support from vertical surfaces. 3. Brass or copper pipe shall be isolated from support with sheet polyethylene, minimum 1/8" thick. G. Supports for Vertical and Horizontal Piping in Chases and Partitions: 1. Provide securely anchored supports for pipes serving plumbing fixtures and equipment near the area the pipe penetrates the wall. 2. Supports shall be steel plate, angles or unistruts mounted vertically or horizontally with unistrut clamps P2426, P2008 or P1109. 3. Attach supports to wall or floor construction with clip angles, brackets or other approved anchoring devices. 4. Brass and copper pipe shall be isolated from support with sheet polyethylene, minimum 1/8" thick. H. Pipe Void System for support of piping in void spaces of structurally engineers slabs. 1. Pipe Voids serve as sacrificial falsework, which isolate critical building systems, such as domestic water, fire water, sanitary sewer utility pipes, electrical, communication conduits, and other building system piping from the potentially damaging effects of expansive soils. The Pipe Voids furnished for this project shall be in accordance with these specifications and in reasonably close conformity with the lines, grades, design and dimensions shown on the plans or as established by the Engineer. The Pipe Voids shall be resistant to water and UV rays and shall be chiefly comprised of carbon steel expanded metal, which is structurally efficient and biodegradable. 2. Pipe Void Structure: a. Pipe Voids shall provide a dimensionally stable void space, maintaining uniform separation between the base soil and the critical building systems. The Pipe Voids shall have sufficient structural strength to maintain the intended void space while experiencing the anticipated construction loads. b. The Pipe Void (system) shall be designed to perform as sacrificial falsework and shall remain in place after construction and shall not be reused. c. Serving as a structural fuse, Pipe Voids shall intercept the potential accumulation of vertical and lateral soil forces on critical building utility systems which can result from soil movement. The Pipe Voids shall intercept, absorb or redirect the forces of soil movements by: crumpling, crushing, collapsing, deforming, material section degradation, soil extrusion, open corrugation load span designs or combination of any or all load relief design functions. 3. Pipe Void Material: a. Pipe Voids shall be constructed from Carbon Steel Expanded Metal, Types I & II, conforming to ASTM F1267 and shall be assembled when required with 16ga. galvanized steel C-Rings. b. The carbon steel shall conform to ASTM A1011 and contain a minimum of 40% RECYCLED material. c. All expanded metal components used for the manufacture of any Pipe Void shall fully conform to EMMA (Expanded Metal Manufacturers Association) minimum material standards. d. All assembly and/or fabrications of the Pipe Voids shall occur entirely within the United States. e. The Pipe Void material shall not promote the formation or emergence of mold spore, organic or other biological colonization. f. The Pipe Voids must be able to be delivered and stored unprotected in the open jobsite environment for a minimum of 90 days without loss of design strength. 4. Pipe Void Material, Minimum Physical Properties Requirements: a. Pipe Void shall be naturally waterproof in terms of its intended use in this section. b. Pipe Void shall have negligible buoyancy. c. Pipe Void shall maintain structural integrity in 100% relative humidity. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 MDE Project NO: 191124 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220529 - 3 August 2019 d. Pipe Void material shall not emit offensive off-gassing odors during decomposition. e. The structural integrity of the Pipe Void shall be unaffected by high/low ambient temperatures and elevated surface temperatures from direct sunlight extremes, above or sub-freezing, frozen soil and ice buildup. f. Pipe Void must have an industry history of providing consistent performance integrity during and after all types of weather event applications, while in readiness storage or installed, without the threat of partial or full section premature collapse during backfill or concrete casting operations. g. Pipe Void strength shall not be affected by becoming damp, wet, or when completely submerged in standing water. h. Pipe Void must be fire-resistant and incombustible. i. All Suspension Hardware to be Stainless Steel Grade, including nuts, washers & hanger rods. j. All Suspended Piping using the Pipe Void Systems, must be permanently fixed to and permanently suspended but supported at constant elevations by structural components above. k. All Pipe Void System protection component materials excluding hanger hardware, backfill, piping or conduits shall be furnished per project specifications by SV-PV system manufacturer. 5. Pipe Void Material, Minimum Performance Requirements: a. The Pipe Void (system) shall be designed to provide sufficient dynamic live and dead load support capacities of but not limited to all loads common to this type of construction; b. Installation of utility piping and/or conduit – dead/live loads, Placement of backfill materials; c. Manpower and foot traffic loads after application of substrates, Do not Walk on Void components without Substrates in place. d. Sub-standard Pipe Void cover sheet substrates, can affect desired performance; use only the types of substrates as those approved for use and recommended by the Pipe Void (system) manufacturer. e. Substrate materials shall originate from FSC (Forest Stewardship Council, United States) mills and be in new or like new condition, performing to APA (The Engineered Wood Association) current standards 6. Pipe Void System shall be equal to SuperVoid Saddle Pipe Void System or preapproved equal. 2.2 INSERTS A. Provide inserts at each hanger as required for concrete support. Avoid interference with concrete reinforcing. B. Inserts to be malleable iron case of galvanized steel shell and expander plug for threaded connection with lateral adjustment, top slot for reinforcing rods, and lugs for attaching to forms. C. Provide reinforcing as required to support load. D. Size inserts to suit threaded hanger rods. 2.3 HANGER RODS A. Provide steel hanger rods, threaded both ends, threaded one end or continuous threaded. B. Size hanger rods as follows: Pipe Size Rod Diameter 4" & Smaller 3/8" 5" thru 8" 1/2" 10" & 12" 5/8" 14" & 16" 3/4" City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 MDE Project NO: 191124 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220529 - 4 August 2019 2.4 SLEEVES A. Provide sleeves where pipes penetrate floors, walls, foundations, fireproofing, etc. B. Size sleeves large enough to allow for movement due to expansion and to provide for continuous movement. Provide a bead of sealant in space between pipe and sleeve. Use link-seal to seal between pipe and sleeve for all slab on grade floor penetrations. C. Use Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe sleeves for all floor and foundation penetrations. Sleeves shall extend minimum of 2" above finished floor and flush with vertical wall surface. 2.5 TRAPEZES A. Trapezes of Kindorf, Elcen or approved equal may be provided where multiple lines run horizontally at the same elevation. 2.6 CONCRETE SUPPORTS FOR EQUIPMENT A. Provide concrete pad foundations for the support of equipment such as floor-mounted pumps, etc. B. Unless otherwise noted, concrete pads shall be constructed of not less than 3,000 lb. concrete and not less than 4" high and shall extend on all sides a minimum of 8 inches beyond the limits of the mounted equipment. Pads shall be poured in forms built of new-dressed lumber. All corners of the foundations shall be neatly chamfered 3/4" wide by means of sheet metal of triangular wood strips nailed to the form. Reinforce with No. 4 rebar 6" on center. C. Foundation bolts, 3/4" round-hooked, shall be placed in the forms when the concrete is poured, the bolts being correctly located by means of templates. Each bolt shall be set in a sleeve of size to provide 1/2" clearance around bolt. Allow 1" below the equipment bases for alignment and grouting. After grouting, the forms shall be removed and the surface of the foundations shall be hand rubbed with carborundum. D. Foundation pads for equipment located on the exterior of the building shall be provided as indicated. E. Submit shop drawings of concrete pads for review by the Architect. 2.7 STRAP HANGERS A. Under no circumstances will perforated strap iron, fabric or wire be acceptable for hangers on this project. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF SUPPORTS A. All pipe supports shall be designed and installed to avoid interferences with other piping, hangers, ducts, electrical conduit, supports, building structure, equipment, etc. All piping shall be installed with due regard to expansion and contraction. The type of hanger, method of support, location of support, etc., shall be governed in part by this specification. B. Pipe hangers shall be attached to the structure as follows: 1. Poured-in-Place Concrete: Each hanger rod shall be fitted with a nut at its upper end, which nut shall be set into an Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., listed universal concrete insert placed in the formwork before concrete is poured. 2. Steel Bar Joists: Where pipes and loads are supported under bar joists, hanger rods shall be run through the space between the bottom angles and secured with a washer and two nuts. Where larger lines are supported beneath bar joists, hanger rods shall be secured to angle irons of adequate size. Each angle shall span across two or more joists as required to distribute the weight properly and shall be welded to the joists or otherwise permanently affixed thereto. 3. Steel Beams: Pipes and loads supported under steel beams shall be installed using approved beam clamps. 3.2 SPACING A. Cast iron soil pipe shall be supported on hangers spaced no more than pipe length being installed. B. Install hangers for steel piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes according to MSS SP 69 Tables 3 and 4: City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 MDE Project NO: 191124 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220529 - 5 August 2019 1. NPS 3/4: Maximum span, 7 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 2. NPS 1: Maximum span, 7 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 3. NPS 1-1/4: Maximum span, 7 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 4. NPS 1-1/2: Maximum span, 9 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 5. NPS 2: Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 6. NPS 2-1/2: Maximum span, 11 feet; minimum rod size, 1/2 inch. 7. NPS 3: Maximum span, 12 feet; minimum rod size, 1/2 inch. 8. NPS 3-1/2: Maximum span, 13 feet; minimum rod size, 1/2 inch. 9. NPS 4: Maximum span, 14 feet; minimum rod size, 5/8 inch. 10. NPS 5: Maximum span, 16 feet; minimum rod size, 5/8 inch. 11. NPS 6: Maximum span, 17 feet; minimum rod size, 3/4 inch. 12. NPS 8: Maximum span, 19 feet; minimum rod size, 3/4 inch. 13. NPS 10: Maximum span, 22 feet; minimum rod size, 7/8 inch. 14. NPS 12: Maximum span, 23 feet; minimum rod size, 7/8 inch. 15. NPS 14: Maximum span, 25 feet; minimum rod size, 1 inch. 16. NPS 16: Maximum span, 27 feet; minimum rod size, 1 inch. 17. NPS 18: Maximum span, 28 feet; minimum rod size, 1 inch. 18. NPS 20: Maximum span, 30 feet; minimum rod size, 1-1/4 inches. C. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes: 19. NPS 1/2: Maximum span, 5 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 20. NPS 5/8: Maximum span, 5 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 21. NPS 1: Maximum span, 6 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 22. NPS 1-1/4: Maximum span, 8 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 23. NPS 1-1/2: Maximum span, 8 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 24. NPS 2: Maximum span, 8 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 25. NPS 2-1/2: Maximum span, 9 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 26. NPS 3: Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 27. NPS 4: Maximum span, 12 feet; minimum rod size, 1/2 inch. D. Spacing and rod sizes for other piping materials shall be as recommended by the manufacturer. 3.3 TRAPEZES A. Trapeze members, including suspension rods, shall be properly sized for the number, size and loaded weight of the lines they are to support. Install as noted above. 3.4 MISCELLANEOUS A. Install any other special foundations, hangers and supports indicated on the drawings, specified elsewhere, or required by installation conditions. 3.5 EQUIPMENT FOUNDATIONS A. Provide equipment foundations associated with the work in accordance with the provisions of these specifications. B. Provide concrete bases for all pad or floor mounted equipment. 3.6 HANGERS, SUPPORTS, ANCHORS AND GUIDES A. All hangers and supports for fire standpipe systems and fire sprinkler systems shall be Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. approved types. B. Supports, hangers, anchors, and guides shall be provided for all horizontal and vertical piping as per the project specifications. C. The Contractor shall be responsible for structural integrity of all supports. All structural hanging materials shall have a factor of safety of 5. D. Anchor points and pipe guides as shown on drawings or as required shall be located and constructed to permit the piping system to take up its expansion and contraction freely in opposite directions away from the anchored points. E. Guide points for expansion joints shall be located and constructed wherever required or shown on drawings and at each side of an expansion joint or loop, to permit only free axial movement in piping systems but shall not be further than 3 pipe diameters on each side of joint. Guides for pipe with expansion joints shall be of the roller type securely welded to structural steel. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 MDE Project NO: 191124 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220529 - 6 August 2019 F. Maximum spacing between pipe supports for steel, cast iron, plastic or copper pipe shall be per local code to prevent excessive stress: (This does not apply where there are concentrated loads between supports.) G. Double bolt riser clamps shall be F & S, F & M, Grinnell or approved equal. H. For copper tubing, supports shall be especially designed for copper tubing and shall be of exact O.D. diameter of tubing and shall be copper plated. I. Roller type supports shall be used for pipes subject to axial movement. They shall be braced so that movement occurs in roller rather than support rods. J. Provide miscellaneous steel required for support of pipes other than steel shown on the structural Drawings. K. In general, all piping shall be supported from only structural building members or approved steel inserts embedded in concrete. Where structural members must be increased in strength and/or additional members added to provide for piping support, the mechanical contractor shall include such anticipated costs in his pricing. L. Pipe Void support system must be installed as required by manufacturer, and shall include any additional supports or wraps to prevent soil intrusion. Installations are subject to inspection by the Pipe Void System Manufacturer, their designated authorized personnel or representatives, for installation compliance and overall quality control 3.7 SUPPORT OF VERTICAL RISERS A. Vertical piping shall be installed in such manner that its weight plus the weight of its contents, covering and appurtenances cannot be concentrated at locations on slabs, beams and other structural elements to exceed the carrying capacity of those members as approved by the structural engineer. B. In all cases, the Contractor shall coordinate the riser support design with the Architect. He shall submit drawings showing weights, points of support, and details of support or anchoring for approval. The Architect must approve the proposed method of support before work is started. The Contractor shall bear all responsibility for materials and workmanship described in this section and shall ensure that all hangers and supports are properly installed. END OF SECTION City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT MDE Project NO: 191124 220553 - 1 August 2019 SECTION 220553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to the Work in this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Provide all equipment, materials, labor, supervision, and services necessary for or incidental to the installation of all necessary identification items as indicated on the drawings and as specified. B. Work included: 1. Valve tagging 2. Pipe marking 3. Equipment marking C.Submittals: Provide submittals as required in Section 22 00 10, “Submittal Process”. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. B. Without additional cost to the Owner, provide such other labor and materials as are required to complete the work of this Section in accordance with the requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, regardless of whether such materials and associated labor are called for elsewhere in these Contract Documents. C. When requested, provide the Architect with manufacturer's certificate that materials meet or exceed minimum requirements as specified. Marking system shall conform to the latest addition of ASME 13.1, and OSHA 29 CFR 1910.261 requirements. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 VALVE TAGS A. Provide a tag for each valve in main and branch piping of domestic water piping systems. 1. Tags shall be 1-1/2" diameter of solid brass with blacked filled stamped characters of 1/4" height above and 1/2" height below. 2. Provide 8" long meter seals for use with valve tags. B. Provide a valve chart with a schedule and location plans for all identified equipment, both in a frame with an acrylic cover to be located as directed by the Architect. 2.2 PIPE MARKERS A. Provide pipe markers for pipes that provide 360 degree visibility with ANSI approved color coded background, color of legend in relation to background color, legend letter size, and length of color field. Additionally, direction of flow arrows shall be printed on the same markers, and words shall be repeated and reversed for use with flow in either direction. 1. Each marker shall be formed with a clear acrylic covering suitable for use outdoors. 2. For diameters 3/4" to 6", marker shall be formed in order to snap on and completely surround the pipe. For diameters 6" and larger, provide radius formed markers of same material. 2.3 EQUIPMENT PLATES A. Plate shall be black with white letters that appear when the plate is engraved. B. Plate material shall be specifically suited for conditions surrounding the equipment. Outdoor equipment shall require special plate material for outdoor use. C. Plate size shall be as required with lettering size appropriate for the information shown but in no case less than 1/8" high. Lettering style shall match existing facility standards. D. Nomenclature for plates shall be based on the equipment designations shown on the equipment schedules and as approved by the Architect. 2.4 CONCEALED DEVICES A. Operable devices and equipment located above ceilings shall be marked with color coded W. H. Brady "Tack" type markers. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT MDE Project NO: 191124 220553 - 2 August 2019 2.5 MANUFACTURERS A. Provide marking system as manufactured by W. H. Brady Company, Seton, Craftmark, or approved equal. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Place all markers and plates in such locations that they are easily read by a person without assuming awkward or hazardous positions. 3.2 VALVE TAGS A. Secure one valve tag to each valve. 3.3 PIPE MARKERS A. For diameters 3/4" to 6", markers shall snap around the pipe, completely surrounding the pipe. Markers shall not require taping or the use of any adhesive material or fasteners to permanently secure them to the pipe. For diameters 6" and larger, secure with stainless steel spring fasteners. B. Install sufficient quantities of markers that tracing of pipe systems can be readily accomplished. Install within three feet before and/or after penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, underground or other non-accessible enclosures; at access doors, manholes or other access points which permit view of concealed piping; and when there is a change in direction of the concealed pipe. Locations in major mechanical rooms shall be labeled at a maximum spacing of every 20 feet. Other piping shall have labels at a maximum spacing of every 30 feet and at least once in every area that the pipe passes over or through. Install additional markers where directed by the Architect. 3.4 EQUIPMENT PLATES A. Provide engraved plates for all fire suppression equipment. B. Secure all plates with two self-tapping metal screws with round heads. Alternately, plates may be fastened with "pop" rivets provided no cracking or injury occurs to the plate. Plates attached with adhesives shall not be permitted. END OF SECTION City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 PLUMBING INSULATION MDE Project NO: 191124 22 07 00 - 1 August 2019 SECTION 220700 - PLUMBING INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to the Work in this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Provide all equipment, materials, labor, supervision, and services necessary for or incidental to the insulation of the plumbing systems as indicated on the drawings and as specified herein. B. Factory insulated equipment is excluded from this section of the specifications except that the insulating material characteristics shall equal or exceed those of specified materials for similar service. C. Work Included: 1. Piping: a. All above ground and below ground domestic hot and cold-water piping. b. All horizontal sanitary drains handling cooling coil condensate. c. All plumbing items requiring insulation due to rules and regulations for the handicapped. D. Submittals: Provide submittals as required in Section 22 00 10, “Submittal Process”. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. B. Without additional cost to the Owner, provide such other labor and materials as are required to complete the work of this Section in accordance with the requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, regardless of whether such materials and associated labor are called for elsewhere in these Contract Documents. C. When requested, provide the Architect with manufacturer's certificate that materials meet or exceed minimum requirements as specified. D. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Fiberglass Insulation: a. Owens-Corning Fiberglas b. Manville c. Certain Teed 2. Urethane Insulation: a. Armstrong (Armalok) b. Thermacor 3. Mastics: a. Benjamin Foster b. Insul-Coustic c. Chicago Mastic d. Childers Products 4. High Temperature Bonding Cements: Ryder Thermocote 5. PVC Fittings: Zeston, Inc. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 PLUMBING INSULATION MDE Project NO: 191124 22 07 00 - 2 August 2019 1.4 GENERAL A. All materials shall be applied by workmen skilled in this trade. Mechanical fasteners shall be used whenever possible to assure permanent construction. Unsightly work shall be cause for rejection. B. Materials will be applied only after all surfaces have been tested and cleaned. C. All material, jacket, coverings, sealers, mastics and adhesives shall not exceed flame spread rating of 25 and smoke developed of 50 in accordance with ASTM Method E84, UL Standard 723 and NFPA Bulletins 255 and 90A. D. Insulation shall be vermin resistant. E. Non-compressible insulation material shall be installed at hangers of cold piping to eliminate through metal conductance. F. Sizing, paint, and pipe shield or saddle shall be provided under other sections of Division 22. G. Insulation of cold surfaces shall be vapor sealed. H. Minimum thickness of insulation shall be as listed or energy code as adopted by authority having jurisdiction. However, sufficient insulation shall be provided to eliminate condensation on the cold surfaces and to maintain a maximum exterior insulation surface of 125ºF. (OSHA Standard) on the hot surfaces. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPE INSULATION A. Pipe Insulation: 1. Above ground-Johns Manville AP-T preformed one-piece fiberglass with reinforced craft paper and aluminum foil jacket. Include vapor barrier where required. a. Use pre-formed PVC fitting covers with fiberglass inserts. Fiberglass shall be same density as pipe insulation. b. Where insulation is exposed to weather, use Manville Flame-Safe ML, or approved equal, Metal-Jacketed Fiberglass pipe insulation. Attachment shall be made by 1/2" 0.020 aluminum bands with approved closure system. 2. Armstrong Armaflex or equal may be used, in thermally equivalent thicknesses, but only for condensate plumbing lines. 3. Condensate drain lines shall be insulated from AC unit to indirect waste termination points and first 10'-0" of horizontal drain line at floor drains receiving condensate. Material shall be closed cell type with 3/4" thick molded pipe covering with a density of 7 lbs. thermal conductivity at 0.28 at 75ºF. Do not split the insulation. All joints shall be glued with manufacturer's adhesive. 2.2 ADHESIVES A. Water based, polymeric, UL classified lagging adhesive for applying canvas and glass cloth; Foster 30-36 or Childers CP-50. B. A fast setting, rubber based, UL classified, vapor barrier lap and attachment adhesive; Foster 85- 15 or Childers CP-85. C. Same adhesive, except non-flammable when wet; Foster 85-20 or Childers CP-82. D. A rubber based, UL classified, fast setting contact adhesive for adhering flexible cellular insulation; Foster 82-40 or Armstrong 520. 2.3 EXPANSION BALL VALVE, BALL JOINT & SPECIALTY INSULATION COVERS A. Furnish and install removable and reusable insulation covers. B. Insulation and jacketing material shall be as required for service temperatures. C. Covers shall have hook and loop fasteners and draw cords. 2.4 INSULATION THICKNESS A. Piping insulation thickness based on a maximum k value of 0.23 Btu in/hr ft² F at a mean temperature of 75F. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 PLUMBING INSULATION MDE Project NO: 191124 22 07 00 - 3 August 2019 Pipe Sizes System Runouts To 12 ft. Max. 1 1/2 " and Less 1 1/2” Up Domestic hot water 1"1"2" Domestic cold water.1"1"1" Horizontal drain bodies. EWC traps and tailpieces. Condensate drain piping.1"1"1" *Contractor is responsible for completing sizing calculations per code requirement. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. The installation of all insulation shall be made by experienced craftsmen in a neat, workmanlike manner and shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's published recommendations for service intended, as interpreted by the Architect. B. All adhesives used in conjunction with insulation shall be compatible with the insulation and vapor barrier used and be vermin-proof and mildew resistant. 3.2 APPLICATION A. Install materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Insulation shall be the full specified thickness, continuous through walls, floors, ceilings, etc. Reducing thickness or cutting back of insulation to pass obstructions or through sleeves will not be permitted. C. Valve and fitting insulation shall be built up to the thickness of the adjacent pipe insulation or may be factory prefabricated units at the Contractor's option. D. Any painting of pipe insulation shall be accomplished under the Painting Section. After finish painting, any insulation showing splits or other signs of poor workmanship shall be replaced. E. No part of any system shall be insulated until all required tests have been completed. F. All insulation shall be installed so that it does not interfere with the functions of thermometer wells, gage connections and/or cocks, unions, access panels, hand holes, manholes, sight glasses, etc., or obscure serial numbers or other nameplate data. G. Insulation shall be extended to include stiff leg supports as required to prevent sweating. H. Complete vapor barriers to prevent sweating shall be installed on all cold systems and equipment. If a single tape adhesive system or staples are used for closure of the longitudinal lap, a vapor barrier mastic must be used to ensure a vapor proof closure. All edges and abutments shall be sealed, waterproof and vapor proof. Supplier of jacket materials shall certify that the material proposed is approved for use in return air plenums, where applicable. I. Where necessary, the application of insulation shall be arranged to accommodate movement of piping due to thermal expansion and/or contraction. J. Exterior Piping: All pipe and fittings specified herein to be insulated when installed exposed to weather, shall be insulated, and wrapped with a 0.016" smooth or corrugated aluminum jacket with proper closure system positioned to shed water to make a waterproof assembly. Fittings shall be insulated with molded insulation fittings or pipe insulation carved and mitered to fit properly. Insulation shall be butted together and adhered in place with contact cement. Where possible tubing shall be slipped on without slitting. Where insulation terminates, it shall be neatly beveled and finished. No portion of this insulation shall be concealed prior to approval by the Architect. K. Below Grade Piping: All pipe and fittings specified herein to be insulated, when installed below grade shall be insulated and spirally wrapped with open mesh glass tape embedded in asphaltic mastic and then completely covered with waterproof asphaltic mastic so as to make a waterproof assembly. Fittings shall be insulated with molded insulation fittings or pipe insulation carved and City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 PLUMBING INSULATION MDE Project NO: 191124 22 07 00 - 4 August 2019 mitered to fit properly. Insulation shall be butted together and adhered in place with contact cement. Where possible tubing shall be slipped on without slitting. Where insulation terminates, it shall be neatly beveled and finished. No portion of this insulation shall be concealed before the Architect has checked and approved same. L. Piping supports shall pass completely around the exterior of the finished insulation. Rigid blocks of insulation material shall be provided at all support points. In addition, sheet metal saddles shall be provided at support points in accordance with the following table: Pipe Size Gauge Metal Saddle Length Up to 2-1/2"18 6" 3" - 5"16 10" 6" - 8"16 14" 10" and Over 16 18" M. Saddles shall cover the bottom of the insulation, and saddle edges shall be hemmed or suitably covered to prevent damage to the insulation material. N. The vapor barrier and finish shall be continuous at all support points. END OF SECTION City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION MDE Project NO: 191124 221100 - 1 August 2019 SECTION 221100 - FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to the Work in this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. The Contractor shall furnish and install items as shown on the drawings or as necessary to provide a complete working system in accordance with the intent of the drawings and specifications, including all valves as indicated or as necessary to completely control the entire piping system. The piping drawings are diagrammatic and indicate the general routing, locations, and connections. The piping may require be offsetting, lowering or rising as needed to avoid interferences or as directed at the site. This does not relieve the Contractor from responsibility for the proper installation of piping systems. B. Work Included: 1. Work included: a. Domestic hot and cold water piping. b. Valves. C.Submittals: Provide submittals as required in Section 22 00 10, “Submittal Process”. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. B. Without additional cost to the Owner, provide such other labor and materials as are required to complete the work of this Section in accordance with the requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, regardless of whether such materials and associated labor are called for elsewhere in these Contract Documents. C. When requested, provide the Architect with manufacturer's certificate that materials meet or exceed minimum requirements to comply with ANSI, ASTM, ASME, CISPI, IAPMO, PDI, and AWWA and all other applicable standards. D. Copies of each welder's certification documents shall be furnished to the Architect prior to them performing work. E. All pipes, valves, and fittings shall be manufactured in the United States. Mill Test reports and manufacturer’s certifications shall be submitted to the Engineer on all such materials used. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS A. Domestic Hot and Cold Water Piping: 1. Piping below grade - 2" and smaller shall be Type K copper with wrought copper fittings; piping 2-1/2" and larger shall be cast iron AWWA class 150 water main with mechanical joint fittings. 2. Piping above grade may be Type L copper with wrought copper fittings. Provide lead-free solder joints for all fittings. 3. Pro-press or similar fittings are an acceptable product. 4. Valves a.Manufacturers: Provide ball valve(s) from the same manufacturer as the piping system. b.Full-port ball valve: two-piece, ASTM F1960 cold-expansion ends, with PEX-a reinforcing cold-expansion ring. c.LF brass valve with a positive stop shoulder manufactured from C69300 brass. d.In compliance with: 250 CWP, ANSI/NSF 359, ANSI/NSF 14/61, cNSF-us-pw_G lead free 0.25% Lead max., ASTM F1960, ASTM F 877 (CAN/CSA B137.5). PART 3 - EXECUTION City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION MDE Project NO: 191124 221100 - 2 August 2019 3.1 GENERAL A. All work shall be performed by workmen skilled in the trade required for the work. All materials and equipment shall be installed in accordance with the approved recommendations of the manufacturer and the best practices of the trade in conformance with the contract documents. B. Refer to Section 22 0529, “Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment” for general piping support requirements. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Refer to Section 22 0500, “Common Work Results for Plumbing” for general installation requirements. B. Underground Pipe: The bottom of the trench shall be shaped to give substantially uniform support to the lower third of each pipe. Each pipe shall be laid true to line and grade and in such manner as to form a concentric joint with adjoining pipe and to prevent sudden offsets to flow line. As work progresses, the interior of the pipe shall be cleaned of dirt and foreign materials of any kind. Where cleaning after laying is difficult, a suitable swab or drag shall be kept in the pipe and pulled forward past each joint immediately after joining has been completed. Trenches shall be kept free from water until pipe joining is complete and pipe shall not be laid when condition of trench or weather is unsuitable for such work. At all times when work is not in progress, all open ends of pipe fittings shall be securely closed to the satisfaction of the Architect so that no water, earth or other substance will enter pipe or fittings. C. Erection of Pipe above Grade: Piping shall be properly supported and adequate provisions shall be made for flashing, expansion, contraction, slope and anchorage. All piping shall be cut accurately for fabrication to measurements established at the construction site. Pipe shall be worked into place without springing and/or forcing, properly clearing all structural elements, finished rooms, windows, doors, and other openings and equipment. Cutting or other weakening of the building structure to facilitate installation will not be permitted. D. All changes in direction shall be made with fittings, except that bending of pipe will be permitted providing a hydraulic pipe bender is used. Bent pipe showing kinks, wrinkles or other malformation will not be acceptable. E. Copper tubing shall be joined by the following method: 1.The tubing shall be reamed to remove all burrs from the inside diameter of the pipe. 2.The tubing and fitting shall be sanded or brushed to a uniform bright finish. 3.Apply a paste flux to both tubing and fitting. 4.Fully heat the joined parts and apply solder to the joint. 5.Completely fill the joint with solder, wiping any excess solder outside the joint while still liquid. F. Mitering of pipe to form elbows or notching straight runs to form tees will not be permitted unless shop fabricated by a certified welder. Weldolet or Threadolet fittings may be used in lieu of welding tees. G. Provide sleeves around all pipes passing through walls, floors, ceiling, partitions, structural members or other building parts. END OF SECTION City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 DOMESTIC WATER PUMPS MDE Project No. 191124 221123 - 1 August 2019 SECTION 22 11 23 - DOMESTIC WATER PUMPS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to the Work in this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A.Provide all equipment, materials, labor, supervision and services necessary for or incidental to the installation of all pumps as indicated on the drawings and as specified. B.Work Included 1. In-Line Circulators. C.Submittals: Provide submittals as required in Section 22 0500, “Common Work Results for Plumbing”. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Use adequate numbers of skilled workers who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. B.Without additional cost to the Owner, provide such other labor and materials as are required to complete the work of this Section in accordance with the requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, regardless of whether such materials and associated labor are called for elsewhere in these Contract Documents. C.When requested, provide the Architect with manufacturer's certificate and performance curves showing pumps meet or exceed the minimum requirements as specified. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 IN-LINE CIRCULATORS A. Shall be centrifugal in-line, all bronze construction, single stage, vertical split case design and shall be capable of being serviced internally without disturbing the piping. The working pressure shall be 175 psig. The impeller shall be of the enclosed type, dynamically and hydraulically balanced, keyed to the shaft and locked down. Provide with mechanical seal and oil lubricated sleeve bearings with readily accessible lubrication port. Pumps shall be coupled to the motor with a spring or resilient type coupling to ensure quiet operation. Provide pumps as manufactured by Grundfoss, Bell and Gossett, Taco, Thrush or Armstrong. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A.All pumps shall be located as shown or indicated on the drawings and installed as recommended by the manufacturer. B.Ensure pumps operate at specified system fluid temperatures without vapor binding and cavitations, are non-overloading in parallel or individual operation, and operate within 15 percent of midpoint of published maximum efficiency curve. C.Follow manufacturer's recommendations for testing and start-up. END OF SECTION City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 FACILITY SANITARY SEWERAGE MDE Project NO: 191124 221300 - 1 August 2019 SECTION 221300 - FACILITY SANITARY SEWERAGE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to the Work in this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. The Contractor shall furnish and install items as shown on the drawings or as necessary to provide a complete working system in accordance with the intent of the drawings and specifications, including all valves as indicated or as necessary to completely control the entire piping system. The piping drawings are diagrammatic and indicate the general routing, locations, and connections. The piping may require be offsetting, lowering or rising as needed to avoid interferences or as directed at the site. This does not relieve the Contractor from responsibility for the proper installation of piping systems. B. Work Included: 1. Work included: a. Sanitary drain, waste, and vent piping. b. Equipment drains and relief valve piping. C. Submittals: Provide submittals as required in Section 22 00 10, “Submittal Process”. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. B. Without additional cost to the Owner, provide such other labor and materials as are required to complete the work of this Section in accordance with the requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, regardless of whether such materials and associated labor are called for elsewhere in these Contract Documents. C. When requested, provide the Architect with manufacturer's certificate that materials meet or exceed minimum requirements to comply with ANSI, ASTM, ASME, CISPI, IAPMO, PDI, and AWWA and all other applicable standards. D. Copies of each welder's certification documents shall be furnished to the Architect prior to them performing work. E. All pipes, valves, and fittings shall be manufactured in the United States. Mill Test reports and manufacturer’s certifications shall be submitted to the Engineer on all such materials used. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS A. Sanitary Drain, Waste, and Vent Piping: 1. Piping underground shall be service weight hub and spigot cast iron pipe and shall extend to above the floor. Joints shall be positive double seal elastomeric compression joints. 2. Piping above grade, 1-1/2" or smaller and vent piping, may be threaded galvanized schedule 40 steel or DWV copper. All 2" and larger pipe shall be service weight cast iron hub and spigot or "No Hub". 3. Fittings shall be galvanized cast iron drainage fittings for threaded piping, cast iron soil fittings for hub and spigot piping and "No-Hub" piping, DWV copper for DWV copper piping. 4. Pipe Manufacturers shall be Charlotte Pipe, Tyler Pipe, or AB&I. 5. Standard Coupling Manufacturers shall be Mission, Tyler, or Anico. 6. Above grade in projects with plenum spaces, Contractor may use pipe as specified below or PVC specified above wrapped with insulation to meet flame spread rating as indicated City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 FACILITY SANITARY SEWERAGE MDE Project NO: 191124 221300 - 2 August 2019 in code and accepted by AHJ. a.Piping above grade, 1-1/2" or smaller and vent piping, may be threaded galvanized schedule 40 steel or DWV copper. All 2" and larger pipe shall be service weight cast iron hub and spigot conforming to ASTM A 74 or "No Hub" conforming to CISPI 301. b.Fittings shall be galvanized cast iron drainage fittings for threaded piping, cast iron soil fittings for hub and spigot piping conforming to ASTM A 74 and hubless couplings per CISPI 310, DWV copper for DWV copper piping. c.Pipe Manufacturers shall be Charlotte Pipe, Tyler Pipe, or AB&I. d.Joints for hubless cast iron soil pipes and fittings shall conform to CISPI 310, latest revision and be certified by NSF for compliance to CISPI 310 e.Extra Heavy Cast Iron Fitttings shall be manufactured from an elastomer meeting the requirements of ASTM C 564. All pipe and fittings shall be manufactured in the U.S and marked with the collective trademark of the Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute (CISPI) and listed by NSF International f.Coupling Manufacturers shall be Mission, Tyler, or Anico. B. Equipment Drains and Relief Valve Piping: 1. All drain piping from air dryers, automatic air vents, pump bases, air handling units, etc., shall be Type L hard drawn copper, not less than connection size. Condensate drains shall be trapped. Extend all equipment drain piping to a suitable drain. 2. All relief valve piping shall be Type L hard drawn copper or schedule 40 steel, not less than valve outlet size. Extend discharge piping to a hub drain or floor receptor as required by local codes. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. All work shall be performed by workmen skilled in the trade required for the work. All materials and equipment shall be installed in accordance with the approved recommendations of the manufacturer and the best practices of the trade in conformance with the contract documents. B. Refer to Section 22 0529, “Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment” for general piping support requirements. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Refer to Section 22 0500, “Common Work Results for Plumbing” for general installation requirements. B. Provide sleeves around all pipes passing through walls, floors, ceiling, partitions, structural members or other building parts. C. Provide drainage lines with properly specified clean-outs. Locate clean-outs in runs at not more than 75' on center or as required by local codes. Provide clean-outs at base of each soil and waste stack and whenever necessary to make accessible all parts of drainage soil and waste systems whether or not indicated on drawings. Clean-outs located inside detention areas shall have security fasteners. D. Extend clean-outs within chases to near wall and provide access cover compatible with wall construction. E. Provide clean-outs of required size with flashing flange where installed with membrane water proofing. Lubricate threaded clean-out plugs. Provide clearance at clean-out for rodding of drainage system. F. Lubricate threaded clean-out plugs. Provide clearance at clean-out for rodding of drainage system. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 FACILITY SANITARY SEWERAGE MDE Project NO: 191124 221300 - 3 August 2019 G. Encase exterior clean-outs in concrete flush with grade. H. Minimum slope of piping shall be in accordance with the following unless otherwise specifically shown on the drawings or specified. Type of Piping or Fluid Conveyed System Component Length for 1" Fall Direction of Fall Sewer, Sanitary through 3”Main or Branch 4 feet Direction of Flow Sewer, Sanitary through 4” and above Main or Branch 8 feet Direction of Flow END OF SECTION City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE MDE Project NO: 191124 221400 - 1 August 2019 SECTION 221400 - FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to the Work in this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. The Contractor shall furnish and install items as shown on the drawings or as necessary to provide a complete working system in accordance with the intent of the drawings and specifications, including all valves as indicated or as necessary to completely control the entire piping system. The piping drawings are diagrammatic and indicate the general routing, locations, and connections. The piping may require be offsetting, lowering or rising as needed to avoid interferences or as directed at the site. This does not relieve the Contractor from responsibility for the proper installation of piping systems. B. Work Included: 1. Work included: a. Storm Drain and Subsoil drainage piping. C.Submittals: Provide submittals as required in Section 22 00 10, “Submittal Process”. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. B. Without additional cost to the Owner, provide such other labor and materials as are required to complete the work of this Section in accordance with the requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, regardless of whether such materials and associated labor are called for elsewhere in these Contract Documents. C. When requested, provide the Architect with manufacturer's certificate that materials meet or exceed minimum requirements to comply with ANSI, ASTM, ASME, CISPI, IAPMO, PDI, and AWWA and all other applicable standards. D. Copies of each welder's certification documents shall be furnished to the Architect prior to them performing work. E. All pipes, valves, and fittings shall be manufactured in the United States. Mill Test reports and manufacturer’s certifications shall be submitted to the Engineer on all such materials used. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS A. Storm Drain and Subsoil Drainage Piping: 1. Piping below grade - Service weight hub and spigot cast iron soil pipe and fittings with elastomeric joints as specified above. 2. Piping above grade - Service weight hub and spigot or "No Hub" cast iron pipe and fittings. 3. Subsoil piping shall be corrugated polyethylene perforated tubing with solvent weld fittings as manufactured by Advanced Drainage Systems, Inc. or approved equal. 4. Fittings shall be galvanized cast iron drainage fittings for threaded piping, cast iron soil fittings for hub and spigot piping conforming to ASTM A 74 and hubless couplings shall conform to CISPI Standard 310 and shall be listed with NSF International, DWV copper for DWV copper piping. 5. Pipe Manufacturers shall be Charlotte Pipe, Tyler Pipe, or AB&I. 6. Standard Coupling Manufacturers shall be Mission, Tyler, or Anico. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE MDE Project NO: 191124 221400 - 2 August 2019 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. All work shall be performed by workmen skilled in the trade required for the work. All materials and equipment shall be installed in accordance with the approved recommendations of the manufacturer and the best practices of the trade in conformance with the contract documents. B. Refer to Section 22 05 29, “Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment” for general piping support requirements. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Refer to Section 22 05 00, “Common Work Results for Plumbing” for general installation requirements. B. Provide sleeves around all pipes passing through walls, floors, ceiling, partitions, structural members or other building parts. END OF SECTION Denton Fire Station No. 8 REINFORCED CONCRETE STORM SEWERS MJ Thomas Engineering, LLC. 221423-1 August 2019 SECTION 221423 REINFORCED CONCRETE STORM SEWERS AND APPURTENANCES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE A. The work includes the construction of reinforced concrete pipe storm sewers and other miscellaneous drainage structures and appurtenances. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit to the Architect/Engineer in conformance with the requirements of the CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT. 1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 312333 -Trenching and Backfilling PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Reinforced Concrete Pipe: Reinforced concrete pipe shall conform to the current specifications for reinforced concrete pipe, ASTM Designation C76 of the class shown on the plans. If not otherwise shown on the plans, all reinforced concrete pipes shall be Class Ill. All pipe shall be machine made by a process that will provide for uniform placement of zero slump concrete in the form and compaction by mechanical devices which will assure a dense concrete in the finished product. B. Concrete for Inlets and Appurtenances: Reinforced concrete for inlets shall have a minimum compressive strength at twenty-eight (28) days of 4,000 pounds per square inch and a minimum cement content of five (5) sacks of cement per cubic yard of concrete. C. Mortar: Mortar for pipe joints and connections to other drainage structures shall be composed of one (1) part by volume of Portland cement and two (2) parts of sand. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 BEDDING A. All pipe shall receive embedment per the detail on the plans. 3.02 EXCAVATION A. Excavation for storm sewer pipes shall consist of performing all excavation of every description and of whatever substance is encountered to the depth required. All excavated material which is not required for backfill or fill shall be removed and disposed of by the Contractor. All excavation shall be made by open cut; banks of trenches shall be kept as nearly vertical as possible and, if required, shall be properly sheeted and braced. For pipes having an inside diameter of thirty-three (33") inches or less, the trench shall be excavated a minimum of sixteen (16") inches wider than the outside diameter of the pipe. The trench shall be excavated a minimum of sixteen (16") inches wider than the outside diameter of the pipe so that a clear space of not less than eight (8") inches is provided on each side of the pipe. Denton Fire Station No. 8 REINFORCED CONCRETE STORM SEWERS MJ Thomas Engineering, LLC. 221423-2 August 2019 B. Cold Applied, Preformed Plastic Gaskets. These preformed gaskets may be used for sealing tongue and groove concrete pipe sewers. The gasket shall be produced from blends of refined hydrocarbon resins and plasticizing compounds reinforced with inert mineral filler and shall contain no solvents, irritating fumes, or obnoxious odors. The gasket joint sealer shall not depend on oxidizing, evaporating, or chemical action for its adhesive or cohesive strength and shall be supplied in extruded rope form of suitable cross section. The gasket joint sealer shall be protected by a removable two piece wrapper designed so that one-half may be removed longitudinally without disturbing the other half to facilitate application. Preformed gaskets shall be Ram-Nek, as manufactured by K T. Snyder Co., Inc. of Houston, Texas, or approved equal. 3.05 BACKFILL A. After the bedding has been prepared and the pipes installed as required, backfill shall be placed in accordance with Section 321313. If the material, when tested, fails to meet the density requirements, the backfill shall be required to be removed and replaced to meet the proper density. B. Backfill shall not be placed until the Architect/Engineer or his representative has observed the trench and authorized the placing of backfill. All debris shall be removed from the trench prior to beginning the backfilling operations. Sheet, shoring and bracing shall be pulled and removed during the progress of the backfilling in such a manner to protect the trench and the pipe. C. Backfilling shall then be brought up to an elevation slightly above the original ground level to allow for subsequent settlement. The top surface of slopes of all backfill shall be neatly graded off in a workmanlike manner, and where select topsoil, sod, or other material is removed and piled separately, such material shall be carefully replaced in a manner satisfactory to the Architect/Engineer. The top one (1') foot of backfill material shall be of as good quality as the original topsoil which was removed. 3.06 DRAINAGE STRUCTURES A. Inlets: Inlets shall be constructed as shown on the drawings. Excavation shall be made with appropriate equipment with a minimum of interference with adjacent improvements and existing utilities. After installation of inlets, all excavated areas which are not occupied by the inlet shall be backfilled with selected materials from the excavation. The backfill material shall be compacted to not less than ninety-five (95%) percent to one hundred (100%) percent of standard density, in accordance with AASHTO T-99. END OF SECTION City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 COMMERCIAL GAS DOMESTIC WATER HEATER MDE Project NO: 191124 223436 - 1 August 2019 SECTION 223436 - COMMERCIAL GAS DOMESTIC WATER HEATER PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to the Work in this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Provide all equipment, materials, labor, supervision, and services necessary for or incidental to the installation of the heating system as indicated on the drawings and as specified. Provide factory trained start-up service for all equipment. B. Work Included: 1. Condensing Gas Fired Storage Water Heater C. Submittals: Provide submittals as required in Section 22 05 00, “Common Work Results for Plumbing”. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Listing: The water heater will be listed ETL listed to UL 795 or ANSI Z21.10.3/CSA 4.3 “Gas Water Heaters” B. ASME Compliance: Water heater shall bear the ASME HLW stamp and be National Board listed. C. Water heaters with full rated input between 199,000 and 300,000 BTU will operate at a minimum 95.3% thermal efficiency at full firing rate when tested to the ANSI Z21.10.3 thermal efficiency test protocol (DOE 10 CFR 431). D. The water heater will comply with latest approved ASHRAE 90.1 requirements. E. Water heater manufacturer certified to the ISO 9001 International Quality System. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A.Provide submittals in accordance with section 22 00 10, “Submittal Process” B. Product Data: Include rated capacities; shipping, installed, and operating weights; furnished specialties and accessories for each model indicated. C. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, required clearances, components, and size of each field connection D. Wiring Diagrams: Detail for wiring power signal, differentiate between manufacture- installed and field-installed wiring E. Maintenance Data: Include in the maintenance manuals specified in Division 1. Include maintenance guide and wiring diagrams. 1.5 WARRANTY A. Storage tank, heating surfaces, and combustion chamber will have a manufacturer’s 15-year warranty (8 years non-prorated, 7 years prorated) covering manufacturing or material defects, waterside or fire side corrosion, leaks, and/or the production of rusty water. Warranties must be directly provided from the water heater manufacturer. Warranties provided by distributors, contractors, sales representatives or third party insurers will not be accepted. B. Burner and all heater parts: 1 year PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 CONDENSING GAS FIRED STORAGE WATER HEATER A. Water heaters will be of the BTU input(s) and storage capacity indicated on the equipment schedule. B. The water heater will be a vertical fire tube, design that is constructed and stamped in accordance with Section IV, Part HLW of the ASME code. Water heater will be National Board Registered for a working pressure of 150 psi and will be pressure tested at 1-1/2 times working pressure. C. Water heater will be a single-pass, down-fired, fire tube design contained within an integral storage tank. D. Tank, combustion chamber and fire tubes will be unlined. Lined or plated water heaters will not be acceptable. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 COMMERCIAL GAS DOMESTIC WATER HEATER MDE Project NO: 191124 223436 - 2 August 2019 E. Tank, combustion chamber and fire tubes will be constructed from phase-balanced austenitic and ferritic duplex steel with a chemical structure containing a minimum of 21% chromium to prevent corrosion and mill certified per ASTM A 923Methods A to ensure that the product is free of detrimental chemical precipitation that affects corrosion resistance. The material selected shall be tested and certified to pass stress chloride cracking test protocols as defined in ISO 3651-2and ASTM G123 - 00(2005) “Standard Test Method for Evaluating Stress-Corrosion Cracking of Stainless Alloys with Different Nickel Content in Boiling Acidified Sodium Chloride Solution.” F. Tank will be welded utilizing joint designs to minimize volume of weld deposit and heat input. All heat affected zones (HAZ) shall be processed after welding to ensure the HAZ corrosion resistance is consistent with the mill condition base metal chemical composition. Weld procedures (amperage, volts, welding speed, filler metals and shielding gases) utilized shall result in a narrow range of austenite-ferrite microstructure content consistent with phase balanced objectives for welds, HAZ and the base metal. G. All internal and external tank surfaces shall undergo full immersion passivation and pickling processing to meet critical temperature, duration and chemical concentration controls required to complete corrosion resistance restoration of pressure vessel surfaces. Other passivation and pickling methods are not accepted. Immersion passivation and pickling certification documents are required and shall be provided with each product. H. Materials shall meet ASME Section II material requirements and be accepted by NSF 61 for municipal potable water systems. Storage tank materials shall contain more than 80% post- consumer recycled materials and be 100% recyclable. I. All water contacting tank surfaces will be non-porous and exhibit 0% water absorption. J. All tank connections/fittings will be non-ferrous or stainless steel. K. To preserve thermal efficiency, the water heater will not use or require a circulator piped from the hot water outlet to the cold water inlet of the heater for the purpose of temperature control during normal operation. Connection for a building return circulation line will be made to a dedicated hot return fitting at the center of the storage vessel and not the cold inlet piping. Connection to a sidearm tank, if used, will be made to a dedicated hot return fitting at the center of the storage vessel and not the cold inlet piping. L. Finished vessel will not require sacrificial or impressed current anodes and none will be used. Water heaters or sidearm storage tanks that employ anode rods of any type will not be acceptable. M. Combustion will be provided by a premix, fan-assisted surface burner with a gas train meeting UL, ANSI and FM standards for the input specified. N. MASS code requirements for the input specified. O. Burner will be stainless steel. P. Gas train components will capable of self-proportionating gas and air to maintain optimum combustion in response to varying vent pressures. Q. At 199,000 to 399,000 BTU input, the burner will be fixed input. R. Burner NOx emissions will be less than 20 ppm when corrected to 3% oxygen. S.For units 199,000 BTU or greater, A CO sensor must be interlocked to the burner controls of the unit and monitored by the fire control panel. T. Water heater will be a category IV, condensing appliance and vent through PVC or Polypropylene. Water heater will satisfy requirements for sealed combustion. Vents for inlet air and exhaust can terminate in different pressure zones. U. WATER HEATER TRIM 1. As a minimum, the heater will be equipped with the following: a. electronic flame monitoring b. electronic low water cutoff c. an immersion operating control d. an immersion UL listed temperature limiting device e. an ASME- rated temperature and pressure relief valve f. and options as selected on form PV 8293 V. Operating and safety controls shall meet the requirements of UL 795 and FM W. The water heater shall employ an electronic operating control with digital temperature readout. Operator shall be capable of connecting to a building automation system through serial connection using Modbus RTU protocol. X. Provide heaters as manufactured by PVI, A.O. Smith, Rinnai, or Lochinvar. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 COMMERCIAL GAS DOMESTIC WATER HEATER MDE Project NO: 191124 223436 - 3 August 2019 2.2 CONDENSING GAS FIRED TANKLESS WATER HEATER A.The heater shall be certified by CSA according to ANSI Z21.10.3, meets the energy efficiency requirements of the U. S. Department of Energy and ASHRAE 90.1, and air quality districts with similar requirements for low NOx emissions of 14 ng/J or 20 ppm, and shall be certified to NSF 5 Standards. B.Water heaters will be of the BTU input(s) and storage capacity indicated on the equipment schedule. 1.The indoor heater shall be vented with a 3”/5” direct vent concentric vent with a length not to exceed 43 ft. C.The water heater shall use a commercial grade copper alloy, fin tube heat exchanger with quick release brass or bronze waterways. The heater shall be controlled by an onboard solid-state printed circuit board which uses the following factory installed components: 1.Thermistors to monitor water temperature. 2.Flow sensor to measure flow rate. 3.Flame sensor to monitor combustion. 4.Air-fuel ratio rod to measure and adjust air input in order to maintain optimal combustion efficiency. 5.Electronic spark igniter. 6.Aluminized stainless steel burners 7.Hi-limit switch to monitor water temperature. 8.Modulating gas valve. 9.Overheat cutoff fuse. 10.Dual freeze protection that incorporates heating blocks and the ability to automatically fire the heater to protect the heat exchanger. D.The instant water heater shall have the ability to link to additional heaters for more capacity. 1.The heater can manifold to Easy-Link up to 4 heaters to provide additional capacity. 2.The linking control wire shall be supplied with the heater. 3.The Easy-Link and Multi-Unit Controller shall modulate the system for the most efficient performance. 4.The Easy-Link and Multi-Unit Controller shall rotate the priority heater every 12 hours of operation time or 100 starts for balanced duty/cycle operation. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install water heaters level and plumb in accordance with manufacturers written instructions and referenced standards B. Start up on the unit shall be performed by factory trained and authorized personnel. A copy of the startup report shall be provided to the owner and submitted in the O&M Manuals. 3.2 EQUIPMENT START-UP A. Prior to operation, the factory start-up representative shall, in the presence of the Architect's representative perform all system and equipment checks as prescribed by the manufacturer in his written start-up procedures. B. The factory start-up representative shall place the equipment in operation and record all start-up data. Three copies of all data shall be given to the Architect. END OF SECTION City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 COMMERCIAL PLUMBING FIXTURES MDE Project NO: 191124 224200 - 1 August 2019 SECTION 22 42 00 - COMMERCIAL PLUMBING FIXTURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to the Work in this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Provide all equipment, materials, labor, supervision and services necessary for or incidental to the installation of a complete and operating plumbing system inside the building and to points outside the building as indicated on the drawings and as specified. B. Work Included 1. Plumbing fixtures. 2. Plumbing accessories. 3. Plumbing equipment. C. Submittals: Provide submittals as required in Section 22 00 10, “Submittal Process”. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workers who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. B. Without additional cost to the Owner, provide such other labor and materials as are required to complete the work of this Section in accordance with the requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, regardless of whether such materials and associated labor are called for elsewhere in these Contract Documents. C. When requested, provide the Architect with manufacturer's certificate that materials meet or exceed minimum requirements as specified. All work shall conform to the requirements of applicable codes. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PLUMBING FIXTURES A. Furnish and install all plumbing fixtures and equipment as scheduled and shown on drawings. All plumbing fixture brass trim shall be so designed that all wearing parts are to be in a standardized renewable operating unit which can be removed without detaching the supply fixture or faucet proper. The standardized renewable operating units are to be interchangeable with all supply fixtures and faucets. All exposed metal parts of all fixtures, including faucets, waste fittings, waste plugs, strainers, flush valves, traps, supplies, nipples and escutcheons shall be chromium plated brass, unless other materials or finish is specified. Angle stops with S.P.S. brass nipples from wall to stops shall be provided on all water supplies to fixtures. Fixture trim must be that of the fixture manufacturer wherever possible and must bear a permanent impression of the manufacturer. B. Furnish and install all plumbing fixtures specified herein and shown on plans. Kohler and Just fixtures are specified, however, Crane, OR Elkay may be used if they are equal in all respects to those specified. Contractor shall submit on trim as well as fixtures. C. Wall hung fixtures where scheduled on drawings are to be supported by Josam, Wade, Smith or approved equal chair carriers with integral adjustable fittings. D. Floor drains shall be as scheduled and in accordance with ANSI A112.21.1. Provide caulking flange for connection to cast iron pipe, screwed outlets for connection to steel pipe, and side outlet when shown. Provide suitable clamping device and extensions if required, where installed in connection with waterproofing membrane. (Submit detailed shop drawings for these drains). Double drainage pattern floor drains shall have integral seepage pan for embedding in floor construction, and weep holes to provide adequate drainage from pan to drain pipe. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 COMMERCIAL PLUMBING FIXTURES MDE Project NO: 191124 224200 - 2 August 2019 2.2 PLUMBING SPECIALTIES A. Clean-outs 1. Provide drainage lines with properly specified clean-outs. Locate clean-outs in runs at not more than 75' on center or as required by local codes. Provide clean-outs at base of each soil and waste stack and whenever necessary to make accessible all parts of drainage soil and waste systems whether or not indicated on drawings. Extend clean-outs within chases to near wall and provide access cover compatible with wall construction. Provide clean-outs of required size with flashing flange where installed with membrane water proofing. 2. Exterior Surfaced Areas: Round cast nickel bronze access frame and vandal proof non-skid cover; Model 4245 as manufactured by JR Smith or approved equal. 3. Exterior Unsurfaced Areas: Ferrule type with coated cast iron body and round tapered thread bronze cover; Model 4280 as manufactured by JR Smith or approved equal. 4. Interior Finished Floor Areas: Coated cast iron body, round with scoriated cover Model 4025C in service areas, square with bronze foot traffic cover Model 4045C compatible with floor finish in finished floor areas or carpet clean-out cover where required; clean-outs shall be as manufactured by JR Smith or approved equal. 5. Interior Finished Wall Areas: Cast iron body, cast iron plug, and round flat stainless steel access cover secured with machine screw; Model 4402 as manufactured by JR Smith or approved equal. 6. Interior Unfinished Accessible Areas: Cast iron tee with threaded plug. Provide bolted stack clean-outs on vertical rainwater leaders. B. Access Boxes (Coordinate all locations with Architect prior to installation): Provide 18 gauge steel frame and door with heavy duty piano hinge and keyed cam-lock. 1. Access doors mounted in painted surfaces shall be of Milcor (Inland-Ryerson Construction Products Company) manufacturer, Style K for plastered surfaces and Style M or DW for non-plastered surfaces. The Style K doors shall be set so that the finished surface of the door is even with the finished surfaces of the adjacent finishes. Access doors mounted on tile surfaces shall be stainless steel materials. Access doors shall be a minimum of 18" x 18" in size. 2. Walls: a. Provide square frame and secured cover with brushed chrome plate finish in tile walls. b. Provide square frame and cover with bonderized prime-coated steel face and lock in walls of other finished rooms. 3. Ceilings: a. Provide square frame and cover with bonderized prime-coated steel face and lock. 4. Floors: a. Provide plain steel frame with plain nickel-bronze scoriated cover. C. Provide cast brass "P" traps on all sanitary branch waste connections from fixtures or equipment not provided with traps. Exposed traps shall be polished brass chromium plated with nipple and set screw escutcheons. Concealed traps may be wrought cast brass. Slip joints not permitted on sewer side of trap. Traps shall correspond to fittings on cast iron soil pipe or steel pipe respectively, and size shall be as required by connected service or fixture, or as scheduled. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Review millwork and other related shop drawings for coordination and ADA requirements. Confirm location and size of fixture and/or opening before rough-in and installation. B. Verify adjacent construction is ready to receive rough in and finish work of this Section 3.2 INSTALLATION OF PLUMBING PIPING A. The plumbing piping system shall be installed as specified in Section 22 1300, “Facility Sanitary Sewerage”. B. Lubricate threaded clean-out plugs. Provide clearance at clean-out for rodding of drainage system. C. Encase exterior clean-outs in concrete flush with grade. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF PLUMBING FIXTURES A. Install each fixture with trap, easily removable for servicing and cleaning. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 COMMERCIAL PLUMBING FIXTURES MDE Project NO: 191124 224200 - 3 August 2019 B. Provide chrome plated rigid or flexible supplies to fixtures with ¼ turn stops, reducers, and escutcheons to make a watertight finished connection. C. Fixture heights will be defined on the Architectural Drawings. Where the mounting heights vary, the defined heights as shown on the Architectural Drawings shall prevail. Install components level and plumb. D. All fixtures must be securely fastened to the floor or walls by means of inserts or expansion bolts in concrete work, and by means of expansion bolts, toggle bolts or through bolts in masonry work, and by means of framing and screws in frame construction, to the satisfaction of the Architect. E. Drains 1. Contractor shall install all floor and roof drains according to manufacturer's recommendations. Provide and install all flashing and weatherproofing as required. Adjust extension sections on all drains as required for proper height adjustment. 2. All floor drains to be trapped. Connect floor drains to sanitary waste piping as indicated on plans. 3. Each AC equipment drain opening which normally discharges water (such as air conditioning unit drains, overflows, and similar drips and drains) shall be connected to the drain openings by means of an indirect drain or piped down directly over the floor drains which are provided for this purpose. 4. Each water relief valve discharge shall be piped down to 6 inches above floor, but not necessarily over a floor drain or connected to a drain opening, unless otherwise indicated. No drain piping is required from the discharges or drain valves, unless otherwise indicated. 5. All drains, overflow, condensate and relief, to be routed to nearest trapped hub or floor drain if not shown on drawings. 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust stops and regulating valves for intended water flow rate to fixtures without splashing, noise, or overflow. B. At completion, clean plumbing fixtures and equipment. END OF SECTION City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 MECHANICAL SUBMITTAL PROCESS MDE Project NO: 191124 230010 - 1 August 2019 SECTION 230010 – MECHANICAL SUBMITTAL PROCESS PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with all submittal provisions of Division 1. B. Submit electronic copies of the submittal to the prime consultant (i.e. architect) in order to process and track the submittals properly in accordance with Division 1 and 23 submittal requirements. Architects and consultants are to submit all submittals and RFI’s to the mechanical engineer electronically. Send to “mdengca@md-eng.com”. Submittals shall be labeled by their project specification section or CSI specification section if not listed in project specifications. C. Contractor is responsible to separate submittals per specification section. Unseparated submittals are subject to rejection without review. D. Allow a minimum of ten (10) working days for the review of submittals and each re-submittal. E. Submittals that have been reviewed and marked as REJECTED (REJ) or REVISE & RESUBMIT (RES) should be resubmitted within 10 days to be reviewed again by engineer. F. Compliance with the Contract documents shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor. Items on equipment that are were not accepted by the Architect in writing as an approved equal shall be replaced or revised to comply with the contract documents at the Contractor's expense. G. Resubmission of rejected submittals shall be limited to one (1) in number. Costs for processing subsequent resubmittals in excess of the first resubmittal, resulting from the Contractor's disregard of Architect/Engineer's primary submittal rejection comments, shall be borne by the Contractor. Costs shall be based on Architect/Engineer's hourly rates as published in their current professional fee schedules and shall also include reimbursable costs for delivery, mailing, and photocopies at direct cost plus ten percent (10%). 1.2 REQUIRED SPECIFICATIONS (Project specific) A. The chart below are the submittals required for the project. 1. Submittals marked with an “X” are required for this project. 2. Submittals without an “X” are not required for this project. See required specifications on next page Required Spec Required Spec X Submittal Name Reference X Submittal Name Reference City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 MECHANICAL SUBMITTAL PROCESS MDE Project NO: 191124 230010 - 2 August 2019 Common Work Results for HVAC Diffusers, Registers, GrillsX -O&M manual, Shop Drawings 23 05 00 -Air supplies, Returns, Louvers, Roof hoods Common Motor Requirements for HVAC X -Louvered penthouse, Goosenecks 23 37 13 -Polyphase Motors, Single Phase Motors,X Commercial Kitchen Hoods 23 38 13X -Motor Starters 23 05 13 -Product Data, Shop Drawings Hangers & Supports for HVAC Piping & Equip.X Heat Generation Equipment 23 50 00 -Hangers and supports, Inserts, Hanger rods -Tubular Infrared Heaters, Heater flues X -Sleeves, Trapezes 23 05 29 Packaged Outdoor HVAC Equipment 23 74 00 Vibration & Seismic Controls for HVAC Pipe, etc. -Packaged Equipment, Controls, Hail Guards -Isolation material, Support units, 23 05 48 Dedicated OSA Units Identification for HVAC Piping & Equipment -Equipment 23 75 00 X -Valve tags, Pipe markers, Equipment plates,23 05 53 DX Split System Testing, Adjusting & Balancing for HVAC X 23 76 00 X -Certifications 23 05 93 VRF Air Conditioning Systems (General) HAVC Insulation -VRF Equipment, Condenser, FCU, -Piping Insulation, Duct insulation, Adhesives - Refrigeration selector boxes, Controls 23 81 49 X -Sealants, Covers, Aluminum UV covers. 23 07 00 VRF Air Conditioning Systems (LG) Instrumentation & Control for HVAC -VRF Equipment, Condenser, FCU, -Shop drawings, Software, Equipment 23 09 00 - Refrigeration selector boxes, Controls 23 81 49 Direct-Digital Control System for HVAC VRF Air Conditioning Systems (Mitsubishi) -Product Details. See Spec for more details 23 84 00 -VRF Equipment, Condenser, FCU, Sequence of Operations for HVAC Controls - Refrigeration selector boxes, Controls 23 81 49 X -Control system, Shop drawings. Testing 23 09 93 VRF Air Conditioning Systems (Daikin) Facility Natural Gas Piping -VRF Equipment, Condenser, FCU,X -Piping, Valves, Cocks, Regulators, Flanges 23 11 23 - Refrigeration selector boxes, Controls 23 81 49 Refrigeration Piping VRF Air Conditioning Systems (Toshiba) -Pipe, Fittings, Valves, Cocks, Hangers, Sleeves -VRF Equipment, Condenser, FCU,X -Trapezes, Brazing Rod 23 23 00 - Refrigeration selector boxes, Controls 23 81 49 Variable Frequency Motor Controllers (VFD)Unit HeatersX -Manufacturer, Product info 23 29 23 X -Electric UH, Gas UH, Flue piping 23 82 39 Air Distribution Humidity Control Equipment -Duct Work, Flexible duct, Access doors -Product Details. See Spec for more details 23 84 00X -Fire & Smoke dampers 23 31 00 Vehicle Exhaust System Ventilation Ducts X -Equipment submittal 23 35 16 -Product Details. See Spec for more details 23 31 13.01 Integrated Automation of Facility Equipment Exterior Ducts -Product Data, Shop Drawings 25 51 00 -Product Details. See Spec for more details 23 31 13.02 Integrated Automation of Fire Suppression Hangers & Supports for Duct Work -Product Data, Shop Drawings 25 53 00 X -duct hangers 23 31 50 Integrated Automation Sequence of Facility HVAC Power Ventilators -Product Data, Shop Drawings 25 91 00 X -Up blast, Belt driven, Utility fans, V-belt 23 34 23 Integrated Automation Sequence of Fire Supp. -Product Data, Shop Drawings 25 93 00 City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC MDE Project NO: 191124 230500 - 1 August 2019 SECTION 23 05 00 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to the Work in this Section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION A. The General Requirements for Mechanical Work are intended to be complementary to the General Requirements of the Construction Contract. B. Work Included: Provide complete mechanical systems where shown on the drawings, as specified herein, and as needed for a complete and proper installation including, but not necessarily limited to the following summary of work: 1. Furnish and install a complete gas system as shown on drawings and described herein. 2. Furnish and install a complete heating and air conditioning system as shown on drawings and described herein. 3. Furnish and install a complete ventilation system as shown on drawings and described herein. 4. Other items and services required to complete the systems. 1.3 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Unless otherwise specified, materials are to be new and of current U.S. manufacture, free from defects and of the best quality of their respective kinds. B. Equipment and/or materials damaged in shipment or handling, or otherwise damaged before installation, shall be replaced with new equipment and/or materials. Damaged equipment and/or materials shall not be repaired at the jobsite. C. Furnishing of the proper equipment and/or materials and to see that it is installed as recommended by the manufacturer is entirely the responsibility of the Contractor. If required for proper installation, the Contractor shall obtain advice and supervisory assistance from a representative of the specific manufacturer of the equipment being installed. D. Materials and adhesives to conform to Federal Standard Flame-Spread Properties, Inc., with composite fire and smoke hazard ratings, maximum 25 for flame spread and 50 for smoke developed. Adhesives to be waterproof. E. The Contractor shall promptly notify the Architect in writing of any conflict between the requirements of the Contract Documents and the manufacturer's directions and shall obtain the Architect instructions before proceeding with the work. Should the Contractor perform any such work that does not comply with the manufacturer's directions or such instructions from the Architect, he shall bear all costs arising in connection with the deficiencies. F. Belts, pulleys, chains, gears, couplings, projecting screws, keys or other rotating parts which are located so that a person can come in close proximity thereto shall be fully enclosed properly provided with a guard. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE AND APPLICABLE STANDARDS A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workers that are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. B.The Contractor shall be responsible for fitting his material and apparatus into the building and shall carefully lay out his work at the site to conform to the structural conditions, to avoid all obstructions, to conform to the details of the installation and thereby to provide an integrated satisfactory operating installation. The contractor must support all duct, pipe, equipment, and all other items furnished and installed under this scope from steel joists or structural steel frames. It is prohibited to support duct, pipe, equipment, and all other items furnished under this scope from the metal deck. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC MDE Project NO: 191124 230500 - 2 August 2019 C. Without additional cost to the Owner, provide such other labor and materials as are required to complete the work of this Section in accordance with the requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, regardless of whether such materials and associated labor are called for elsewhere in these Contract Documents. D. Codes: Perform all work in accordance with the latest edition of the following codes: 1. State and city building, fire, plumbing and mechanical codes. 2. International Fire Code 3. International Mechanical Code 4. International Plumbing Code 5. International Electrical Code 6. Energy Conservation Code 7. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 8. American with Disabilities Act (ADA) 9. ICC/ANSI A117.1 Accessible and Useable Buildings and Facilities. 10. All authorities having jurisdiction. 11. Architectural code review drawing. E. The Contractor shall comply in every respect with all requirements of National Fire Protection Association, local Fire Department regulations and utility company requirements. In no case does this relieve the Contractor of the responsibility of complying with these Specifications and Drawings where specified conditions are of higher quality than the requirements of the above-specified authorities. Where requirements of the Specifications and Drawings are more lenient than the requirements of the above authorities having jurisdiction, the Contractor shall make installations in compliance with the requirements of the above authorities with no extra compensation. F. Where conflicts occur between drawings, specifications or code requirements, the most stringent requirement shall take precedence. G. Standards: The specifications and standards of the following organizations are by reference made a part of these specifications. All work, unless otherwise indicated, shall comply with the requirements and recommendations wherever applicable: 1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI). 2. Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute (ARI). 3. American Gas Association (AGA). American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM). 4. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME). 5. American Society of Refrigeration, Heating and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE). 6. Electrical Testing Laboratories (ETL). 7. National Bureau of Standards (NBS). 8. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA). 9. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA). 10. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning National Association (SMACNA). 11. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL). H. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." 2. ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX. 1.5 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES A.The requirements and recommendations of the latest edition of the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) Act are by reference made a part of these specifications. All work shall comply with the requirements and recommendations wherever applicable. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with all submittal provisions of Division 1. B. Submit electronic copies of the submittal to the prime consultant (i.e. architect) in order to process and track the submittals properly in accordance with Division 1 and 23 submittal requirements. Architects and consultants are to submit all submittals and RFI’s to the mechanical engineer electronically. Send to “mdengca@md-eng.com”. Submittals shall be labeled by their project specification section or CSI specification section if not listed in project specifications City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC MDE Project NO: 191124 230500 - 3 August 2019 C. Product Data: Submit the following: 1. Materials list of items proposed to be provided under Division 23. 2. Manufacturer's specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with the specified requirements. The term "Compliance" is understood to mean that the Contractor certifies that the submitted equipment will meet or exceed the contract document requirements. Items that do not clearly meet this definition should be identified and explained as required in the following paragraph. 3. Identify the difference between the specified item or function and the proposed. Explain with enough detail so that the Engineer/Owner can easily determine that the item complies with the functional intent. List any disadvantages or advantages of the proposed item versus the specified item. Submit technical data sheets and/or pictures and diagrams to support and clarify. Organize in a clear and concise format. All substitutions shall be approved in writing by Architect. The Architect’s decision shall be final. 4. Allow a minimum of ten (10) working days for the review of submittals and each re- submittal. 5. Submittals that have been reviewed and marked as REJECTED (REJ) or MAKE CORRECTIONS NOTED (MCN) should be resubmitted within 10 days to be reviewed again by engineer. 6. Compliance with the Contract documents shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor. Items on equipment that are were not accepted by the Architect in writing as an approved equal shall be replaced or revised to comply with the contract documents at the Contractor's expense. 7. Manufacturer's recommended installation procedures which, when reviewed by the Architect, shall become the basis for accepting or rejecting actual installation procedures used on the work. 8. Sign the submittal as an indication of compliance with the contract documents. Any deviations from the contract documents shall be indicated on the submittal prior to signing. Any deviations not indicated shall be cause for rejection and removal of the non- complying equipment at the Contractor’s expense. D. Submittals required of materials and equipment under this section include the following: 1.Piping and Accessories Materials: a.Clearly marked up manufacturer's data showing compliance with the specifications for: (Include model numbers and highlight products) 1)Piping material proposed for each system. 2)Valves, cocks, and specialties. 3)Flexible connectors for piping. 4)Flanges. b.l/8" scale (minimum) gas, and refrigerant piping shop drawings showing coordinated piping routing and arrangements with all equipment, accessories and system expansion and contraction compensation methods. 2.Vibration Isolation and Sound Control Materials: a.Submit shop drawings showing the structural design and details of inertia bases, steel beam bases, and other custom-fabricated work not covered by manufacturer's submitted data. b.Furnish layouts of templates to be furnished to fabricators of equipment bases, foundations, and other support systems, as needed for coordination of vibration isolation units with other work. c.Submit shop drawings indicating the scope of vibration isolation work, locations of units and flexible connections. Include support isolation points for piping, air handling units, inertia bases, etc. d.Include schedule of isolation units, showing size or manufacturer's part number, the weight supported and resulting deflection of each unit. e.For spring isolation units, show wire size, spring diameter, free height, solid-compression height, operating height, fatigue characteristics and ratio of horizontal to vertical stiffness. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC MDE Project NO: 191124 230500 - 4 August 2019 f.For spring-and-pad type isolation units, show the basis of spring rate selection for the range of loading weights. 3.Mechanical Identification Materials: a.Clearly marked-up product literature or samples showing compliance with specified materials for: (Include model numbers and highlight products) 1)Valve tagging. 2)Pipe marking. 3)Equipment marking. 4.Insulation: a.Manufacturer's certified data on thermal performance. b.Details, when required, of methods to be used in providing for unusual piping expansion and contraction. c.Manufacturer's data on any alternate insulation material of reduced thickness, including pre-insulated pipe. d.Manufacturer's data on all jacketing materials, sealants and fasteners. 5.Heating: a.Provide clearly marked-up manufacturer's data showing compliance with scheduled values and specifications for: (Include model numbers and highlight products) 1)Flue pipe and accessories. 2)Unit heaters. b.Provide all electrical characteristics. 6.Refrigeration: a.Provide clearly marked-up manufacturer's data showing compliance with scheduled values and specifications for: (Include model numbers and highlight products) 1)Condensing Units b.Provide all electrical characteristics. 7.Air Handling: a.Provide clearly marked-up manufacturer's data showing compliance with scheduled values and specifications for: (Include model numbers and highlight products) 1)AHU, factory assembled. 2)Fan coil units. 3)Filters. b.Provide all electrical characteristics. 8.Ventilation Fans and equipment: a.Shop Drawings: Indicate assembly of centrifugal fans and accessories including fan curves with specified operating point clearly plotted, sound power levels for both fan inlet and outlet at rated capacity, and electrical characteristics and connection requirements. b.Product Data: Submittal data for approval for all fans of every description furnished. 1)Fan curves with specified operating point clearly plotted. The recommended range of operation shall be stable. 2)Fans shall be capable of operating stably at reduced loads imposed by means of variable speed drives. 3)Data on sound power levels for both fan inlet and outlet at rated capacity. 4)Electrical characteristics and connection requirements. 5)All data on fan accessories. 6)Manufacturer's Installation Instructions. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC MDE Project NO: 191124 230500 - 5 August 2019 9.Air Distribution Materials: a.Provide clearly marked-up manufacturer's data showing compliance with scheduled values and specifications for: (Include model numbers and highlight products) 1)Air devices. 2)1/4" scale ductwork shop drawings for all systems showing equipment locations, detailed data such as bottom of duct elevations, airstream sizes, all duct accessories, and duct construction details showing compliance with SMACNA requirements for the specified duct pressure of each system. 3)Fire dampers, fire and smoke dampers. 10.Testing and Balancing: a. Brief description of test and balance contractor experience. b. Certificate of Qualification from AABC. c. Biographical information of the Registered Professional Engineer and certified Test and Balance Supervisor proposed to manage the project. d. List of instruments to be used with latest date of calibration test for each. e. Test and balance reports. f.VRF Certification from brand being installed on project. 11.Record Documents: Reference the requirements detailed in this section. 12.Operation and Maintenance Data: Reference the requirements detailed in this section. E. Resubmission of rejected submittals shall be limited to one (1) in number. Costs for processing subsequent resubmittals in excess of the first resubmittal, resulting from the Contractor's disregard of Architect/Engineer's primary submittal rejection comments, shall be borne by the Contractor. Costs shall be based on Architect/Engineer's hourly rates as published in their current professional fee schedules and shall also include reimbursable costs for delivery, mailing, and photocopies at direct cost plus ten percent (10%). 1.7 SUBSTITUTIONS A. Comply with all provisions of Division 1. B. The use of manufacturers' names and catalog numbers followed by the phrase "or equal" is generally used to establish a standard of quality and utility for the specified items and to provide a dimensional reference for construction documents that are drawn to scale. C. Submittals for "equal" items shall, where applicable, include the following data that are not necessarily required for specified items: 1. Performance characteristics. 2. Materials. 3. Finish. 4. Certification of conformance with specified codes and standards. 5. Manufacturer's specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with the specified requirements. The term "Compliance" is understood to mean that the Contractor certifies that the submitted equipment will meet or exceed the contract document requirements. Items that do not clearly meet this definition should be identified and explained as required in Paragraph 6 below. 6. Identify the difference between the specified item or function and the proposed. Explain with enough detail so that the Architect/ Engineer/Owner can easily determine that the item complies with the functional intent. List any disadvantages or advantages of the proposed item versus the specified item. Submit technical data sheets and/or pictures and diagrams to support and clarify. Include shop drawings for all piping and ductwork equipment per Paragraph 1.5 Submittals. Organize in a clear and concise format D. Submittals of "equal" components or systems may be rejected if: 1. The material or equipment would necessitate the alteration of any portion of the mechanical, electrical, architectural or structural design. 2. Dimensions vary from the specified material or equipment in such a manner that accessibility or clearances are impaired or the work of other trades is adversely affected. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC MDE Project NO: 191124 230500 - 6 August 2019 E. Proposed substitutions for materials or equipment must be submitted ten (10) days prior to final bid date for consideration as approved equals. Otherwise, such substitutions will not be permitted. Proposals for substitutions shall be made only by the prime bidders. Manufacturers, distributors, and sub-contractors shall not make proposals to the Architect for substitutions. F. All equipment installed on this project shall have local representation, local factory authorized service, and a local stock of repair parts G. No substitution shall be made unless authorized in writing by the Architect. Should a substitution be accepted, and should the substitute material prove defective or otherwise unsatisfactory for the service intended, and within the guarantee period, the Contractor shall replace this material or equipment with material or equipment specified, at his own expense, and to the satisfaction of the Architect. H. Contractors submitting bids on substitute materials and equipment must also provide a written performance guarantee certifying that the substitute materials and equipment will produce the specified effects and meet the approval of the Architect. 1.8 ORDINANCES, PERMITS, METERS, UTILITIES AND ROYALTIES A.Procure all permits and licenses necessary for completion of this project and pay all lawful fees required and necessary pursuant in obtaining said permits and licenses. All required certificates of approvals and inspections by local governing and regulating authorities shall be obtained and paid for by the Contractor. B. Pay all fees required for the connection of gas to utility mains, and any meter fees if required. C.Pay any royalty payments required or fees for the use of patented equipment or systems. Defend all law suits or claims for infringement of any patent rights and shall hold the Owner and/or Architect/Engineer harmless from loss as a result of said suits or claims. 1.9 COMPATIBILITY OF EQUIPMENT A. Assume full responsibility for satisfactory operation of all component parts of the mechanical systems to assure compatibility of all equipment and performance of the integrated systems in accordance with the requirements of the specifications. Should the Contractor consider any part of the specifications or drawings as rendering his acceptance of such responsibility impossible, prohibitive, or restrictive, he shall notify the Engineer before submitting his bid, and the bid shall be accompanied by a written statement of any objections or exceptions to the specifications and drawings. B. The size of mechanical and electrical equipment indicated on the Drawings is based on the dimensions of a particular manufacturer. While other manufacturers may be acceptable, it is the responsibility of the Contractor to determine if the equipment he proposes to furnish will fit in the space. Fabrication Drawings shall be prepared when required by the Architect/Engineer or Owner to indicate a suitable arrangement. C. All equipment shall be installed in a manner to permit access to all surfaces. All valves, motors, drives, filters, and other accessory items shall be installed in a position to allow removal for service without disassembly of another part. 1.10 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS A.The drawings show the arrangements of work. Should project conditions necessitate rearrangement, or if the materials or equipment can be installed to a better advantage in a different manner, the Contractor shall, before proceeding with the work, prepare and submit five copies of Drawings of the proposed arrangement for the Architect’s review. Allow a minimum of ten (10) working days for review. B.Should the Contractor propose to install equipment requiring space conditions other than those shown, or rearrange the equipment, he shall assume responsibility for the rearrangement of the space and shall have the Architect review the change before proceeding with the work. The request for such changes shall be accompanied by shop drawings of the space in question. Identify monetary credits proposed or other benefits of the change. Allow a minimum of ten (10) working days for review. C.The Contractor shall be responsible for the proper location and size of all slots, holes or openings in the building structure pertaining to his work and for the correct location of pipe sleeves. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC MDE Project NO: 191124 230500 - 7 August 2019 1.11 CONNECTIONS FOR OTHERS A.The Mechanical Contractor shall rough in for and make all gas connections to all equipment, machinery, etc., provided by others in accordance with detailed roughing-in Drawings provided by the equipment suppliers, by actual measurements of the equipment connections, or as detailed B.After the equipment is set in place, this Contractor shall make all final connections and shall provide all required pipe, fittings, valves, traps, etc. C.Provide all air gap fittings required, using materials hereinbefore specified. In each service line connected to an item of equipment or piece of machinery, provide a shutoff valve. On each drain not provided with a trap, provide a suitable trap. D.All pipe fittings, valves, traps, etc., exposed in finished areas and connected to chrome plated lines provided by others shall be chrome plated to match. E.Provide all galvanized sheet metal ductwork, transition pieces, etc., required for a complete installation. Exposed sheet metal shall be paint-grip type. 1.12 LOCATION OF OUTLETS A. Supply and return air outlets in suspended acoustical tile ceilings shall occur symmetrically in tile joints or in the centers of whole tiles. The final determination of the exact location of each outlet and the arrangement to be followed shall be acceptable to the Architect. B. The drawings show the locations of the various outlets and equipment. Exact locations of these outlets and equipment shall be determined by reference to the general construction plans and to all detail drawings, equipment drawings, roughing-in drawings, etc., by measurements at the building, and in cooperation with the other trades. The Architect reserves the right to make any reasonable change in location of any outlet or equipment before installation, without additional cost. C. The Contractor shall install his work complete and in good working order. If any of the requirements of the drawings and specifications are impossible to perform, or if the installation when made in accordance with such requirements will not perform satisfactorily, he shall report same to the Architect for correction. D. No extra compensation will be allowed for extra work or change caused by failure to comply with the above requirements. 1.13 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Provide the record documents associated with the work of Division 23 in strict accordance with the provisions of these specifications. B. Throughout progress of the Division 23 Work, maintain an accurate record of changes in the Contract Documents that apply to work of Division 23. Changes shall include all addendums issued during bidding. Maintain an accurate record of the location of mechanical service lines and outlets and all outside utilities. C. Delegate the responsibility for maintenance of Record Documents to one person on the Contractor's staff as approved by the Architect. D. Accuracy of Records 1. Thoroughly coordinate changes within the Record Documents, making adequate and proper entries on each page of Specifications and each sheet of drawings and other documents where such entry is required to show the change properly. Match the symbology and format of the base documents. 2. Accuracy of records shall be such that a future verification of items shown in the Contract Documents may rely reasonably on information obtained from the approved Project Record Documents. E. Maintain the job set of Record Documents completely protected from deterioration and from loss and damage until completion of the work and transfer of all recorded data to the final Project Record Documents. F. Making Entries on Drawings 1. Using an erasable colored pencil (not ink or indelible pencil), clearly describe the change by graphic line and note as required. 2. Date all entries. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC MDE Project NO: 191124 230500 - 8 August 2019 3. Call attention to the entry by a "cloud" drawn around the area or areas affected. 4. In the event of overlapping changes, use different colors for the overlapping changes. 5. Make entries within 24 hours after receipt of information that the change has occurred. 6. Maintain the base drawing format and use the same symbology. 7. Convert field mark-ups to finished CADD record drawings when required in this section. G. Conversion of Schematic Layouts 1. In some cases on the drawings, arrangements of ductwork and piping and similar items are shown schematically and are not intended to portray precise physical layout. Determine final physical arrangement subject to the Architect's approval. However, design of future modifications of the facility may require accurate information as to the final physical layout of items which are shown only schematically on the drawings. 2. Show on the job set of record drawings, by dimension accurate to within one inch, the centerline of each run of items such as all sleeves and piping, etc., below grade, in walls, or in the concrete slab. A surface mounted device indicates the exact location: a.Clearly identify the item by accurate note such as "Sanitary Sewer" and the like. b.Show, by symbol or note, the vertical location of the item "under slab," "in ceiling plenum," "exposed," and the like. c.Make all identification sufficiently descriptive that it may be related reliably to the specifications. H. Final Project Record Documents 1.The purpose of the final Project Record Documents is to provide factual information regarding all aspects of the Work, both concealed and visible, to enable future modification of the Work to proceed without lengthy and expensive site measurement, investigation, and examination. 2. Provide CAD electronic files in .dwg format using AutoCAD software. Upon written request, completion of a release form, and payment of the Engineer’s standard fee of $200 plus applicable sales tax for a set-up charge and $50 per drawing plus applicable sales tax for copies of such files, Engineer will provide AutoCAD electronic files of base Contract Drawings in dwg format on compact discs. Engineer will also provide a list of drawing layers and names that shall be maintained. 3. Provide completed record drawings on CD-R and one full size hard copy of each drawing. 4. Refer to Division 1 for additional requirements. I. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA Submit two copies of a preliminary draft of the proposed manual or manuals to the Architect for review and comments. Allow a minimum of ten (10) working days for review. J. Submit specified number copies of the approved manual to the Architect prior to indoctrination of operation and maintenance personnel. K. Prepare in accordance with the following standards: Format: Size: Paper: Text: Drawings: 8½" x 11" White bond, at least 20 lb. weight Neatly written or printed 11" in height preferable; bind in with text; foldout acceptable; larger drawings acceptable but fold to fit within the Manual and provide a drawing pocket inside rear cover or bind in with text. Flysheets:Separate each section of the Manual with neatly prepared flysheets briefly describing contents of the ensuing section; flysheets may be in color. Binding:Use heavy-duty plastic or fiber-board covers with binding mechanism concealed inside the manual; 3-ring binders will be acceptable; all binding is subject to the Architect's approval. Measurements:Provide all measurements in U.S. standard units such as feet-and-inches, lbs, and cfm. Where items may be expected to be measured within ten years in accordance with metric formulae, provide additional measurements in the "International System of City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC MDE Project NO: 191124 230500 - 9 August 2019 Units" (SI). L. Provide front and back covers for each manual, using durable material approved by the Architect, and clearly identified on or through the cover with at least the following information: OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS OPERATING AND MAINTENAN CE MANUAL (Required Layout M. Contents: Include at least the following: 1. Neatly typewritten index near the front of the manual, giving immediate information as to location within the manual of all emergency information regarding the installation. 2. Complete instructions regarding operation and maintenance of all equipment provided including lubrication, disassembly, and reassembly. 3. Complete nomenclature of all parts of all equipment. 4. Complete nomenclature and part number of all replaceable parts, name and address of nearest vendor, and all other data pertinent to procurement procedures. 5. Copy of all guarantees and warranties issued. 6. Manufacturer's bulletins, drawings, and descriptive data, clearly indicating the precise items included in this installation and deleting, or otherwise clearly indicating, all manufacturers' data with which this installation is not concerned. Title Page o Job Name o Site Address o Include Contact information of prime contractor. Table of contents Warranty Information. o Include all contractor warranties Signed and dated documents Permits-Inspections Subcontractor list o Include all subcontractors. Company name, Contact info. Trade Responsibility. Vendor list o Include name and addresses of vendors Warranty information Replaceable parts Approved submittals o Include all approved product submittals Reports/Certificates/Redlines o Engineers Observation Reports o Engineer/Manufacturer Start-up Report (VRF only) o Contractor Start-up Report o Manufacturer Start-up Report o Test & Balance Report o As-builts for Duct, & refrigeration piping o Updated VRF Selection Report (Refrigeration line measurements and refrigeration calculations) o Owners Training Report (All Trades) O&M Manuals Equipment Information. o Include Model, Serial and location. Signed Approval o Page for approval signature of the engineer and approval date. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC MDE Project NO: 191124 230500 - 10 August 2019 7. Such other data as required in other sections of these specifications. 1.14 WARRANTY A. Contractor shall warranty all equipment and workmanship for a period of one year after date of substantial completion and replace or repair any faulty equipment or installation at no cost to the Owner for such service during this period, all in accordance with requirements of Division 1. B. This warranty shall not void specific warranties issued by manufacturers for greater periods of time. Nor shall it void any rights guaranteed to the Owner by law. C. Warranties shall be in writing in a form satisfactory to the Owner, and shall be delivered to the Owner before final payment is made. D. Upon completion of the work of Division 23, thoroughly clean all exposed portions of the mechanical installation, removing all traces of soil, labels, grease, oil and other foreign material and using only the type cleaner recommended by the manufacturer of the item being cleaned. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCESS DOORS A. Access doors mounted in painted surfaces shall be of Milcor (Inland-Ryerson Construction Products Company) manufacturer, Style K for plastered surfaces and Style M or DW for non- plastered surfaces. The Style K doors shall be set so that the finished surface of the door is even with the finished surfaces of the adjacent finishes. Access doors mounted on tile surfaces shall be stainless steel materials. Access doors shall be a minimum of 18" x 18" in size. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 ACCESS DOORS A. In fire-rated walls, access door shall be fire rated same as wall. 3.2 TESTING AND INSPECTION A. Provide personnel and equipment, make required tests, and secure required approvals from the Architect and governmental agencies having jurisdiction. B. Make written notice to the Architect adequately in advance of each of the following stages of construction: 1. When all rough-in is complete, but not covered. 2. As specified in all Division 23 sections. 3. At the completion of the work of Division 23. C. When material or workmanship is found to not comply with the specified requirements, remove the noncomplying items from the job site and replace them with items complying with the specified requirements at no additional cost to the Owner. This shall be performed within 3 days after receipt of written notice of noncompliance. 3.3 INSTALLATION METHODS A. Unless noted otherwise, piping and ductwork may be run exposed in mechanical rooms and janitor's closets. Piping and ductwork exposed in mechanical rooms and janitor's closets shall be run tight against the structure, as required by the Architect, allowing for expansion. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC MDE Project NO: 191124 230500 - 11 August 2019 B. Conceal piping and ductwork to be installed as hereinbefore specified. C. Piping suspended from the structure shall be adequately and properly supported on hanger rods or clamps as specified in Section 23 0529 “Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment”. Perforated strap hangers will not be permitted. The contractor must support all duct, pipe, equipment, and all other items furnished and installed under this scope from steel joists or structural steel frames. It is prohibited to support duct, pipe, equipment, and all other items furnished under this scope from the metal deck. D. Where space is limited above ceilings, below concrete beams or other concrete projections, piping shall be sleeved through the beam or projection, rather than hung below. Provide sleeves where required and locate where approved by the Architect. E. Cut pipe accurately to measurements established at the building and install into position without springing or forcing. All open ends of pipes shall be capped or otherwise closed until the systems are closed with final connections. F. No pipe joints nearer than 12" to a wall, ceiling or floor penetration will be permitted, unless joint is of the welded type. G. Piping systems shall be made up straight and true and run at proper grades to permit proper flow of the contained material. Piping shall be graded for proper drainage. H. Piping shall follow as closely as possible the routes shown on plans, which take into consideration conditions to be met at the site and in the building. Should any unforeseen conditions arise, lines shall be changed or rerouted as required after approval from the Architect. I. All piping shall be installed with due regard to expansion and contraction and so as to prevent excessive strain and stress in the piping and in connections to equipment. J. All piping shall be clean when it is installed; rust and/or dirt shall be removed. K. Screw joints shall be made with taper threads, properly cut. Threads shall be cut using graphite and oil applied to the pipe only. When threads are cut on pipes, the ends shall be carefully reamed to remove any burrs. Pipe shall be up-ended and hammered to remove all shavings and foreign material, before installing. L. Requirements for assembling joints in cast iron and copper lines are set forth elsewhere in these specifications. For any special materials, consult the manufacturers for the recommended procedures in assembling the joints. M. This Contractor shall provide wall or ceiling access doors for unrestricted access to all concealed items of the fire suppression system. N. Install roof pipe penetrations through sleeves, and flash with membrane flashing and roofing mastic compatible with roofing system. Roofing Supplier/Contractor shall approve roof penetration and flashing. O. For additional installation requirements, refer to individual sections in Division 23. 3.4 CUTTING AND PATCHING A.Perform cutting and patching associated with the work in strict accordance with the provisions of Division 1 of these Specifications and the following: 1. Coordinate work to minimize cutting and patching work. Cut and patch walls, floors, etc., resulting from work in existing construction or by failure to provide proper openings or recesses in new construction. If cutting and patching is required, it shall be performed by trades specializing in that type work. 2. Perform Architect-approved cutting and demolition by methods which will prevent damage to other portions of the work and provide proper surfaces to receive installation of new work and/or repair. a. Openings cut through concrete and masonry shall be made with masonry saws and/or core drills and at such locations acceptable to the Architect. Impact-type equipment will not be used except where specifically acceptable to the Architect. b. Openings in precast concrete slabs or walls for pipes, etc., shall be core drilled to exact size. Oversize the hole to allow for link seals, and to deter pipe corrosion condensation from forming. c. Where openings are cut through masonry walls, provide and install lintels or other structural supports to protect the remaining masonry. Adequate supports shall be provided during the cutting operation to prevent any damage to the masonry occasioned by the operation. All structural members, supports, etc., shall be of the proper size and shape, and shall be installed in a manner acceptable to the Architect. d. Openings cut through plaster or drywall shall be cut prior to plaster finish coat or texture coat on drywall. Cutting of the finish coat of plaster or texture coat of drywall will not be permitted unless written approval of the Architect is obtained. e. Openings shall be restored and/or repaired as required to replace the cut City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC MDE Project NO: 191124 230500 - 12 August 2019 surface to an "as-new" and/or "as original" condition. Refer to the appropriate section of the specifications for the material involved. 3. Perform fitting and adjusting of products to provide finished installation complying with the specified tolerances and finishes. 4. Provide all core drilling of holes. Where sleeves and/or blockouts are required, they shall be cut or provided at locations required. On completion of this work or as work progresses, make all repairs and do all patching required as a result of work under this Contract. All patching shall be performed in a manner that will restore the surrounding work to its original condition to the satisfaction of the Architect. 5. Assume responsibility for the proper size of all sleeves and/or blockouts in the building structure pertaining to the work and for providing the correct location of pipe sleeves and/or blockouts. 6. No cutting, boring or excavating which will weaken the structure will be permitted. 3.5 EXISTING UTILITIES AND TEMPORARY SERVICES FOR CONSTRUCTION A. Verify the location and capacity of existing utility services pertaining to work of Division 21. Relocate existing utilities unearthed by excavation as directed by the utility service companies affected. 1. Temporary Services for Construction 2. Provide temporary services in strict accordance with the provisions of these specifications. B. When any piece of fire suppression equipment is operable and it is to the advantage of the Contractor to operate the equipment, he may do so, providing that he properly supervises the operation, and has the Architect’s written permission to do so. The warranty period shall, however, not commence until such time as the equipment is operated for the beneficial use of the Owner, or date of substantial completion, whichever occurs first. C. Regardless of whether or not the equipment has or has not been operated, the Contractor shall properly clean the equipment, install clean filter media, properly adjust, and complete all deficiency list items before final acceptance by the Owner. The date of acceptance and performance certification will be the same date. 3.6 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILLING A. Perform all excavation and backfilling necessary for the installation of the work. This shall include shoring and pumping in ditches to keep them in dry condition until the work has been installed. All shoring required to protect the excavation and safeguard employees shall be properly performed. B. Perform excavation and backfilling in strict accordance with the provisions of these specifications including trench safety requirements. C. All excavations shall be made to the proper depth, with allowances made for floor slabs, forms, beams, etc. Ground under piping shall be well compacted before piping is installed. D. Backfilling shall be made with selected soil, free from rocks and debris and shall be pneumatically tamped with 6 inch layers to secure a field density ratio of 95 percent as defined by ASTM Designation D698-57T (Proctor Soil Compaction Test). E. Excavated materials not suitable and not used in the backfill shall be removed from the site. F. Field check and verify the locations of all underground utilities. Avoid disturbing these as far as possible. In the event existing utilities are damaged, they shall be repaired at no cost to Owner. G. In a lime stabilized area, the lime stabilization shall be fully restored after the excavation is complete. H. Replace concrete, curbs, paving and other surface improvements cut during excavation to their original condition. 3.7 JOBSITE CONDITIONS A.Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed. Include required work to correct conditions detrimental to the timely and proper completion of all Division 21 Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC MDE Project NO: 191124 230500 - 13 August 2019 B.The Contractor shall at all times take such precautions as may be necessary to properly protect all materials and equipment from damage from the time of delivery until the completion of the work. This shall include the erection of all required temporary shelters and supports to adequately protect any items stored in the open on the site from the weather, the ground and surrounding work; the cribbing of any items above the floor of the construction; and the covering of items in the incomplete building with tarpaulins or other protective covering; the installation of electric heaters in electrical switchgear and similar equipment to prevent moisture damage. Failure on the part of the Contractor to comply with the above will be sufficient cause for the rejection of the items in question. C.Take particular care not to damage the building structure in performing work. All finished floors, step treads, and finished surfaces shall be covered to prevent any damage by workmen or their tools and equipment during the construction of the building. D.Equipment and materials shall be protected from rust both before and after installation. Any equipment or materials found in a rusty condition at the time of final inspection must be cleaned of rust and repainted as specified elsewhere in these Specifications. 3.8 STORAGE AND PROTECTION A. Contractor shall provide the required protection of equipment and materials from the time of delivery until the completion of the Work. Protect from damage, rust, rain, humidity and dust. B. Do not receive equipment or materials on the jobsite until adequate space has been provided for storage. C. Provide adequate supports for protection from the ground and erect required shelters for items stored in the open. D. Items stored within the building are to be adequately protected and covered with tarpaulins or other protective covering. E. Protect the building at all times during construction from damage by workmen, their tools and/or equipment. Protect floors, steps, wall, ceilings, doors, windows and other finish surfaces. F. Equipment and materials found in a rusty condition at completion of the work will be thoroughly cleaned of rust and refinished as required to its original condition. 3.9 PREPARATION AND COORDINATION A.Perform coordination work in strict accordance with provisions of these specifications and the following: 1. Coordinate as necessary with other trades to assure proper and adequate interface with all work. 2. Where pipes or other fire suppression items are shown in conflict with locations of structural members and other equipment, include labor and materials required for extensions, offsets and supports to clear the encroachment. 3. Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish and install all supplementary or miscellaneous items, appurtenances and devices incidental to or necessary for a sound, secure and complete installation of the fire suppression system. 4. Coordinate accepted equipment changes from those scheduled or specified with other trades affected. Additional compensation to other trades for equipment changes is the responsibility of the Contractor making the change. B.The Mechanical, Electrical, Plumbing, and associated Drawings are necessarily diagrammatic by their nature, and are not intended to show every connection in detail or every pipe or conduit in its exact location. These details are subject to the requirements of standards referenced elsewhere in these specifications, and structural and architectural conditions. The Contractor shall carefully investigate structural and finish conditions and shall coordinate the separate trades in order to avoid interference between the various phases of work. Work shall be organized and laid out so that it will be concealed in furred chases and suspended ceilings, etc., in finished portions of the building, unless specifically noted to be exposed. All exposed work shall be installed parallel or perpendicular to the lines of the building unless otherwise noted. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC MDE Project NO: 191124 230500 - 14 August 2019 C.When the mechanical, plumbing and electrical Drawings do not give exact details as to the elevation of pipe, conduit and ducts, the Contractor shall physically arrange the systems to fit in the space available at the elevations intended with proper grades for the functioning of the system involved. Piping, exposed conduit and the duct systems are generally intended to be installed true and square to the building construction, and located as high as possible against the structure in a neat and workmanlike manner. The Drawings do not show all required offsets, control lines, pilot lines and other location details. Work shall be concealed in all finished areas. D.The general installation precedence of materials shall be as follows. Note that if an interference is encountered, this shall guide the contractor in the determination of which trade shall be given the "Right-of-Way". Building lines Structural Members Soil and Drain Piping Condensate Drains Vent Piping Supply, Return, and Outside Air Ductwork Exhaust Ductwork Fire Protection Piping Gas Piping Domestic Water (Cold and Hot) Electrical Conduit E.Where items such as diffusers, thermostats, switches, and control panels are not specifically located on the Drawings, locate as determined in the field by the Architect. Where such items are installed without such specific direction, relocate as directed by the Architect and at no additional cost to the Owner. F.Verify all dimensions and distances. No additional compensation will be allowed because of differences between work shown on the Drawings and actual dimensions and distances at the jobsite. 3.10 PAINTING A. All equipment shall be delivered to the job with suitable factory finish. Should the finish be damaged in transit or during the installation, it shall be finished to match appearance of original finish. All work shall be subject to approval by Architect. B. All equipment, piping, conduit, insulation, etc., furnished and installed in exposed areas under Divisions 23 of these Specifications and as hereinafter specified shall be cleaned, prepared, and painted according to the following specification. In the event of a conflict between the specifications referenced, the provisions of this specification shall prevail only for Division 23 work. C. Before painting, materials and equipment surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned of cement, plaster, and other foreign materials, and all oil and grease spots shall be removed. Such surfaces shall be carefully wiped and all cracks and corners scraped out. Exposed metal work shall be carefully brushed down with the steel brushes to remove rust and other spots and left smooth and clean. 3.11 TRAINING A. Contractors are responsible to provide owner with an adequate amount of training to be able to operate any system installed. 1. This includes training for any HVAC, Fire. 2. Provide a sign in sheet that is to be added to the O&M manual 1. Owners & all building maintenance personal are required to have training. END OF SECTION City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT MDE Project NO: 191124 230513 - 1 August 2019 SECTION 230513 - COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes general requirements for single-phase and poly-phase, general-purpose, horizontal, small and medium, squirrel-cage induction motors for use on ac power systems up to 600 V and installed at equipment manufacturer's factory or shipped separately by equipment manufacturer for field installation. 1.3 COORDINATION A. Coordinate features of motors installed units, and accessory devices to be compatible with the following: 1. Motor controllers. 2. Torque, speed, and horsepower requirements of the load. 3. Ratings and characteristics of supply circuit and required control sequence. 4. Ambient and environmental conditions of installation location. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL MOTOR REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with requirements in this Section except when stricter requirements are specified in HVAC equipment schedules or Sections. B. Comply with NEMA MG 1 unless otherwise indicated. C. Provide a shaft grounding ring for motors used in direct-driven VFD motor applications. D. Comply with IEEE 841 for severe-duty motors. 2.2 MOTOR CHARACTERISTICS A. Duty: Continuous duty at ambient temperature of 40 deg C and at altitude of 3600 feet above sea level. B. Capacity and Torque Characteristics: Sufficient to start, accelerate, and operate connected loads at designated speeds, at installed altitude and environment, with indicated operating sequence, and without exceeding nameplate ratings or considering service factor. 2.3 POLYPHASE MOTORS A. Description: NEMA MG 1, Design B, medium induction motor. B. Efficiency: Energy efficient, as defined in NEMA MG 1. C. Service Factor: 1.15. D. Multispeed Motors: Variable torque. 1. For motors with 2:1 speed ratio, consequent pole, single winding. 2. For motors with other than 2:1 speed ratio, separate winding for each speed. E. Multispeed Motors: Separate winding for each speed. F. Rotor: Random-wound, squirrel cage. G. Bearings: Re-greaseable, shielded, antifriction ball bearings suitable for radial and thrust loading. H. Temperature Rise: Match insulation rating. I. Insulation: Class F (non-inverter duty motors). J. Code Letter Designation: 1. Motors 15 HP and Larger: NEMA starting Code F or Code G. 2. Motors Smaller than 15 HP: Manufacturer's standard starting characteristic. K. Enclosure Material: Cast iron for motor frame sizes 324T and larger; rolled steel for motor frame sizes smaller than 324T. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT MDE Project NO: 191124 230513 - 2 August 2019 2.4 POLYPHASE MOTORS WITH ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS A. Motors Used with Reduced-Voltage and Multispeed Controllers: Match wiring connection requirements for controller with required motor leads. Provide terminals in motor terminal box, suited to control method. B. Motors Used with Variable Frequency Controllers: Ratings, characteristics, and features coordinated with and approved by controller manufacturer. 1. Windings: Copper magnet wire with moisture-resistant insulation varnish, designed and tested to resist transient spikes, high frequencies, and short time rise pulses produced by pulse-width modulated inverters. 2. Energy- and Premium-Efficient Motors: Class B temperature rise; Class F insulation. 3. Inverter-Duty Motors: Class F temperature rise; Class H insulation. 4. Thermal Protection: Comply with NEMA MG 1 requirements for thermally protected motors. C. Severe-Duty Motors: Comply with IEEE 841, with 1.15 minimum service factor. 2.5 SINGLE-PHASE MOTORS A. Motors larger than 1/20 hp shall be one of the following, to suit starting torque and requirements of specific motor application: 1. Permanent-split capacitor. 2. Split phase. 3. Capacitor start, inductor run. 4. Capacitor start, capacitor run. B. Multispeed Motors: Variable-torque, permanent-split-capacitor type. C. Bearings: Pre-lubricated, antifriction ball bearings or sleeve bearings suitable for radial and thrust loading. D. Motors 1/20 HP and Smaller: Shaded-pole type. E. Thermal Protection: Internal protection to automatically open power supply circuit to motor when winding temperature exceeds a safe value calibrated to temperature rating of motor insulation. Thermal-protection device shall automatically reset when motor temperature returns to normal range. 2.6 MOTOR STARTERS A. Provide motor starters as manufactured by one of the following: 1. General Electric Company. 2. Siemens Energy and Automation. 3. Square D Schneider Electric. 4. Cutler Hammer. B. General: 1. Starters furnished as integral parts of factory-assembled, pre-wired equipment shall conform to the requirements of this Section. 2. All controllers shall be provided with a heavy-duty type push-button station, rated for 10 amperes continuous load at 600 volt or less. 3. Enclosures shall be general purpose NEMA Type 1, except that pushbutton stations installed outside the building or otherwise exposed to the weather shall be NEMA Type 3R, dust and weather tight. NEMA Type 4 enclosures shall be provided for surface mounting, except as otherwise indicated. 4. Pushbutton stations for non-interlocking contactors shall be momentary contact type with start button, stop button, and red indicator light. Where required for delayed "seal-in" or where otherwise noted. C. Manual Motor Starters 1. Provide single-phase, horsepower rated manual motor starters, of sizes and ratings indicated. Equip with manually operated quick-make, quick-break toggle mechanisms; and with one-piece melting alloy type thermal units. Starter to become inoperative when thermal unit is removed. Provide starters with double break, silver alloy contacts, visible from both sides of starter, green pilot lights, and switch capable of being padlocked “OFF”. 2. Provide surface mounted starters in NEMA Type 1 or Type 3 enclosure as required. D. Magnetic Motor Starters 1. Provide fused disconnect switches complete with time delay fuses. 2. Provide contactors with three overload relays. 3. 120 volt holding coil. 4. Provide pilot light in cover, green type. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT MDE Project NO: 191124 230513 - 3 August 2019 5. Provide reset button, and Hand-Off-Automatic switch behind lockable cover, field convertible to Off/Auto or Start/Stop pushbutton. 6. Provide two sets of normally open auxiliary contacts in addition to standard auxiliary holding contacts supplied with each contactor. 7. Provide surface mounted starters in NEMA Type 1 or Type 3 enclosure as required. E. Combinations Motor Starters 1. Provide fused, 3-pole, load break disconnect switches with RK-1 fuses, rotary operating handle, and lock-off facility. 2. Restrict opening of switch enclosure by the use of a defeater screw, unless switch is in the OFF position. 3. Provide contactors with three overload relays. 4. 120 volt holding coil. 5. Provide pilot light in cover, green. 6. Provide reset button, and Hand-Off-Automatic switch behind lockable cover, field convertible to Off/Auto or Start/Stop pushbutton. 7. Provide two sets of normally open auxiliary contacts in addition to standard auxiliary holding contacts supplied with each contactor. 8. Provide control transformer of sufficient capacity to handle operating coil and associated controls. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 MOTOR STARTERS A. Install motor starters as indicated, in accordance with Division 16 and equipment manufacturer's written instructions, and with recognized industry practices complying with applicable requirements of NEC, UL, and NEMA standards. B. In finished areas, mount motor protection switches flush and install suitable cover plates. C. Install heaters correlated with full load current of motors provided. D. Set overload devices to suit motors provided. E. Install fuses in fusible disconnect switches. END OF SECTION City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT MDE Project NO: 191124 230529- 1 August 2019 SECTION 230529 - PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to the Work in this Section 1.2 SUMMARY A. Provide all equipment, materials, labor, supervision, and services necessary for or incidental to the installation of all necessary identification items as indicated on the drawings and as specified. B. Work included: 1. Pipe hangers and supports. 2. Concrete supports for equipment. 3. Sleeving for mechanical equipment. C. Submittals: Provide submittals as required in Section 23 0500 “Common Work Results for HVAC”. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. B. Without additional cost to the Owner, provide such other labor and materials as are required to complete the work of this Section in accordance with the requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, regardless of whether such materials and associated labor are called for elsewhere in these Contract Documents. 1.5 SUBMITTALS: A. Provide submittals as required in Section 23 00 10, “Submittal Proess”. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Supports, hangers, anchors, guides and supplementary steel shall be provided for horizontal and vertical piping and shall meet or exceed the ASA Code for Pressure Piping. B. Rod sizes noted are minimum sizes. The structural integrity of the supports is the responsibility of the Contractor. C. Hangers Supporting and Contacting Brass or Copper: 1. 3" and Smaller: Grinnell Fig. CT-109, copper plated, split-ring hanger with adjusters. 2. 4" and Larger: Grinnell Fig. CT-65, copper plated, clevis hanger with 2 nuts each rod. 3. Isolate copper or brass from ferrous metals with an approved dielectric material. D. Hangers Supporting Insulated Lines: 1. Outside Diameter of Insulation 6" or Smaller and all Ferrous Pipe 3" Diameter and Smaller: Grinnell Fig. 108, malleable iron, split type with adjustable swivel and locknut. 2. Outside Diameter of Insulation 7" and Larger and all Ferrous Pipe Larger than 3" Diameter: Grinnell Fig. 260, malleable iron, clevis hanger with two nuts on each support. E. Protection Shields for Hangers: 1. Galvanized metal shields shall encircle the lower half of the insulation. 2. Provide shields at hangers on dual and low temperature pipes on trapeze type hangers. 3. Provide rigid insulation at all shields and hangers, extending a minimum of 6" each side of hanger. 4. Shield gauges shall be as follows: U.S.S. Gauge Insulation Diameter (Galvanized) Up to 3" 22 3" thru 6" 16 Above 6" 12 F. Supports for Vertical Riser Piping: 1. Provide Grinnell Fig. 261 double bolt riser clamps at each floor. Bear on structure. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT MDE Project NO: 191124 230529- 2 August 2019 2. At 8 feet o.c., 2-hole rigid clamps. Kindorf channels and C-105 straps. Support from vertical surfaces. 3. Brass or copper pipe shall be isolated from support with sheet polyethylene, minimum 1/8" thick. G. Supports for Vertical and Horizontal Piping in Chases and Partitions: 1. Provide securely anchored supports for pipes serving plumbing fixtures and equipment near the area the pipe penetrates the wall. 2. Supports shall be steel plate, angles or unistruts mounted vertically or horizontally with unistrut clamps P2426, P2008 or P1109. 3. Attach supports to wall or floor construction with clip angles, brackets or other approved anchoring devices. 4. Brass and copper pipe shall be isolated from support with sheet polyethylene, minimum 1/8" thick. 2.2 INSERTS A. Provide inserts at each hanger as required for concrete support. Avoid interference with concrete reinforcing. B. Inserts to be malleable iron case of galvanized steel shell and expander plug for threaded connection with lateral adjustment, top slot for reinforcing rods, and lugs for attaching to forms. C. Provide reinforcing as required to support load. D. Size inserts to suit threaded hanger rods. 2.3 HANGER RODS A. Provide steel hanger rods, threaded both ends, threaded one end or continuous threaded. B. Size hanger rods as follows: Pipe Size Rod Diameter 4" & Smaller 3/8" 5" thru 8" 1/2" 10" & 12" 5/8" 14" & 16" 3/4" 2.4 SLEEVES A. Provide sleeves where pipes penetrate floors, walls, foundations, fireproofing, etc. B. Size sleeves large enough to allow for movement due to expansion and to provide for continuous movement. Provide a bead of sealant in space between pipe and sleeve. Use link-seal to seal between pipe and sleeve for all slab on grade floor penetrations. C. Use Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe sleeves for all floor and foundation penetrations. Sleeves shall extend minimum of 2" above finished floor and flush with vertical wall surface. 2.5 TRAPEZES A. Trapezes of Kindorf, Elcen or approved equal may be provided where multiple lines run horizontally at the same elevation. 2.6 CONCRETE SUPPORTS FOR EQUIPMENT A. Provide concrete pad foundations for the support of equipment such as floor-mounted pumps, air handling units, fans, etc. B. Unless otherwise noted, concrete pads shall be constructed of not less than 3,000 lb. concrete and not less than 4" high and shall extend on all sides a minimum of 8 inches beyond the limits of the mounted equipment. Pads shall be poured in forms built of new-dressed lumber. All corners of the foundations shall be neatly chamfered 3/4" wide by means of sheet metal of triangular wood strips nailed to the form. Reinforce with No. 4 rebar 6" on center. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT MDE Project NO: 191124 230529- 3 August 2019 C. Foundation bolts, 3/4" round-hooked, shall be placed in the forms when the concrete is poured, the bolts being correctly located by means of templates. Each bolt shall be set in a sleeve of size to provide 1/2" clearance around bolt. Allow 1" below the equipment bases for alignment and grouting. After grouting, the forms shall be removed and the surface of the foundations shall be hand rubbed with carborundum. D. Foundation pads for equipment located on the exterior of the building shall be provided as indicated. E. Submit shop drawings of concrete pads for review by the Architect. 2.7 STRAP HANGERS A. Under no circumstances will perforated strap iron or wire be acceptable for hangers on this project. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF SUPPORTS A. All pipe supports shall be designed and installed to avoid interferences with other piping, hangers, ducts, electrical conduit, supports, building structure, equipment, etc. All piping shall be installed with due regard to expansion and contraction. The type of hanger, method of support, location of support, etc., shall be governed in part by this specification. B. Pipe hangers shall be attached to the structure as follows: 1. Poured-in-Place Concrete: Each hanger rod shall be fitted with a nut at its upper end, which nut shall be set into an Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., listed universal concrete insert placed in the formwork before concrete is poured. 2. Steel Bar Joists: Where pipes and loads are supported under bar joists, hanger rods shall be run through the space between the bottom angles and secured with a washer and two nuts. Where larger lines are supported beneath bar joists, hanger rods shall be secured to angle irons of adequate size. Each angle shall span across two or more joists as required to distribute the weight properly and shall be welded to the joists or otherwise permanently affixed thereto. 3. Steel Beams: Pipes and loads supported under steel beams shall be installed using approved beam clamps. 3.2 SPACING A. Install hangers for steel piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes according to MSS SP 69 Tables 3 and 4: 1. NPS 3/4: Maximum span, 7 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 2. NPS 1: Maximum span, 7 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 3. NPS 1-1/4: Maximum span, 7 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 4. NPS 1-1/2: Maximum span, 9 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 5. NPS 2: Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 6. NPS 2-1/2: Maximum span, 11 feet; minimum rod size, 1/2 inch. 7. NPS 3: Maximum span, 12 feet; minimum rod size, 1/2 inch. 8. NPS 3-1/2: Maximum span, 13 feet; minimum rod size, 1/2 inch. 9. NPS 4: Maximum span, 14 feet; minimum rod size, 5/8 inch. 10. NPS 5: Maximum span, 16 feet; minimum rod size, 5/8 inch. 11. NPS 6: Maximum span, 17 feet; minimum rod size, 3/4 inch. 12. NPS 8: Maximum span, 19 feet; minimum rod size, 3/4 inch. 13. NPS 10: Maximum span, 22 feet; minimum rod size, 7/8 inch. 14. NPS 12: Maximum span, 23 feet; minimum rod size, 7/8 inch. 15. NPS 14: Maximum span, 25 feet; minimum rod size, 1 inch. 16. NPS 16: Maximum span, 27 feet; minimum rod size, 1 inch. 17. NPS 18: Maximum span, 28 feet; minimum rod size, 1 inch. 18. NPS 20: Maximum span, 30 feet; minimum rod size, 1-1/4 inches. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT MDE Project NO: 191124 230529- 4 August 2019 B. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes: 1. NPS 1/2: Maximum span, 5 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 2. NPS 5/8: Maximum span, 5 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 3. NPS 1: Maximum span, 6 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 4. NPS 1-1/4: Maximum span, 8 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 5. NPS 1-1/2: Maximum span, 8 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 6. NPS 2: Maximum span, 8 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 7. NPS 2-1/2: Maximum span, 9 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 8. NPS 3: Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 9. NPS 4: Maximum span, 12 feet; minimum rod size, 1/2 inch. C. Spacing and rod sizes for other piping materials shall be as recommended by the manufacturer. 3.3 TRAPEZES A. Trapeze members, including suspension rods, shall be properly sized for the number, size and loaded weight of the lines they are to support. Install as noted above. 3.4 EQUIPMENT FOUNDATIONS A. Provide equipment foundations associated with the work in accordance with the provisions of these specifications. B. Provide concrete bases for all pad or floor mounted equipment. 3.5 MISCELLANEOUS A. Install any other special foundations, hangers and supports indicated on the drawings, specified elsewhere, or required by installation conditions. END OF SECTION City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT MDE Project NO: 191124 230553 - 1 August 2019 SECTION 230553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to the Work in this Section. 1.2 SCOPE A. Provide all equipment, materials, labor, supervision, and services necessary for or incidental to the installation of all necessary identification items as indicated on the drawings and as specified. B. Work included: 1. Valve tagging 2. Pipe marking 3. Equipment marking C.Submittals: Provide submittals as required in Section 23 00 10. “Submittal Process”. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. B. Without additional cost to the Owner, provide such other labor and materials as are required to complete the work of this Section in accordance with the requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, regardless of whether such materials and associated labor are called for elsewhere in these Contract Documents. C. When requested, provide the Architect with manufacturer's certificate that materials meet or exceed minimum requirements as specified. Marking system shall conform to ASME 13.1, latest edition and OSHA 29 CFR 1910.261 requirements. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 VALVE TAGS A. Provide a tag for each valve in main and branch piping of natural gas and refrigerant piping systems. 1. Tags shall be 1-1/2" diameter of solid brass with blacked filled stamped characters of 1/4" height above and 1/2" height below. 2. Provide 8" long meter seals for use with valve tags. B. Provide a valve chart with a schedule and location plans for all identified equipment, both in a frame with an acrylic cover to be located as directed by the Architect. 2.2 PIPE MARKERS A. Provide pipe markers for pipes that provide 360 degree visibility with ANSI approved color coded background, color of legend in relation to background color, legend letter size, and length of color field. Additionally, direction of flow arrows shall be printed on the same markers, and words shall be repeated and reversed for use with flow in either direction. 1. Each marker shall be formed with a clear acrylic covering suitable for use outdoors. 2. For diameters 3/4" to 6", marker shall be formed in order to snap on and completely surround the pipe. For diameters 6" and larger, provide radius formed markers of same material. 2.3 EQUIPMENT PLATES A. Plate shall be black with white letters that appear when the plate is engraved. B. Plate material shall be specifically suited for conditions surrounding the equipment. Outdoor equipment shall require special plate material for outdoor use. C. Plate size shall be as required with lettering size appropriate for the information shown but in no case less than 1/8" high. Lettering style shall match existing facility standards. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT MDE Project NO: 191124 230553 - 2 August 2019 D. Nomenclature for plates shall be based on the equipment designations shown on the equipment schedules and as approved by the Architect. 2.4 CONCEALED DEVICES A. Operable devices and equipment located above ceilings shall be marked with color coded W. H. Brady "Tack" type markers. 2.5 MANUFACTURERS A. Provide marking system as manufactured by W. H. Brady Company, Seton, Craftmark, or approved equal. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Place all markers and plates in such locations that they are easily read by a person without assuming awkward or hazardous positions. 3.2 VALVE TAGS A. Secure one valve tag to each REFRIGERANT valve. 3.3 PIPE MARKERS A. For diameters 3/4" to 6", markers shall snap around the pipe, completely surrounding the pipe. Markers shall not require taping or the use of any adhesive material or fasteners to permanently secure them to the pipe. For diameters 6" and larger, secure with stainless steel spring fasteners. B. Install sufficient quantities of markers that tracing of pipe systems can be readily accomplished. Install within three feet before and/or after penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, underground or other non-accessible enclosures; at access doors, manholes or other access points which permit view of concealed piping; and when there is a change in direction of the concealed pipe. Locations in major mechanical rooms shall be labeled at a maximum spacing of every 20 feet. Other piping shall have labels at a maximum spacing of every 30 feet and at least once in every area that the pipe passes over or through. Install additional markers where directed by the Architect. 3.4 EQUIPMENT PLATES A. Provide engraved plates for all HVAC equipment and all remote mounted starter/disconnects. B. Secure all plates with two self-tapping metal screws with round heads. Alternately, plates may be fastened with "pop" rivets provided no cracking or injury occurs to the plate. Plates attached with adhesives shall not be permitted. END OF SECTION City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC MDE Project NO: 191124 230593 - 1 August 2019 SECTION 230593 - TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to the Work in this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Testing and Balancing Agency Qualifications 1. The testing, adjusting, and balancing of the heating, ventilating and air conditioning systems shall be performed by a technical firm or balancing agency certified in Air TAB and system commissioning by the Associated Air Balance Council (AABC). The TAB agency shall also employ a permanent full time Registered Professional Engineer on staff with a minimum of five years specialized experience in testing and balancing. The testing and balancing agency shall possess calibrated instruments, qualified engineers, and skilled technicians to perform required tests in accordance with the AABC. 2. The testing and balancing agency shall be an independent firm separate and distinct from; not to be associated with, or be subsidiary of a firm performing work under other Sections of Division 22 & 23 and shall be under contract directly to the Owner. B. Testing and Balancing Agency Responsibilities 1.Submittals a. Engineer and Technicians Data: Submit proof that the agency, the Test and Balance Engineer assigned to supervise the procedures, and the technicians proposed to perform the procedures meet the qualifications specified. b. Sample Form: Submit sample forms, proposed for use on this project, for approval. c. Certified Reports: Submit testing, adjusting, and balancing reports bearing the seal and signature of the Certified Agency. d. Certification from VRF manufacturer for test and balance of VRF products. Without this certification, the T&B company will not be considered an approved T&B company for VRF products 2.Review the construction documents, submittal, and shop drawings for balance ability. Submit a list of suggestions or recommendations to the Architect/Engineer for consideration. 3.Perform a job site observation prior to the ceiling installation to verify that ductwork, piping, dampers, valves, and air terminal devices have been installed per the contract documents. Submit in writing to the Architect/Engineer a list of any discrepancies noted. 4.Test, adjust and balance the heating, ventilating, and air conditioning systems in accordance with AABC. 5.Verify the operation, calibration, and set points of all heating, ventilating, and air conditioning systems controls. 6.Submit in writing to the Architect/Engineer a list of deficiencies for correction by the installing contractor. In the event a deficiency remains after being reported as corrected, the balancing agency may submit an itemized request for its lost time for payment by the installing contractor. All deficiencies that prevent proper T&B work from being completed shall be corrected prior to submittal of the Final T&B Report. 7.Measure and record space temperature readings after occupancy for a period of two consecutive eight hour periods. Make adjustments if necessary to achieve an even temperature distribution. 8.Submit certified, bound, typewritten report for approval by the Owner and Architect/Engineer including all test report data, instrument calibration, and schematic drawings of the HVAC layout. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC MDE Project NO: 191124 230593 - 2 August 2019 9.Provide preliminary smoke testing and smoke testing for all authorities having jurisdiction. Preliminary smoke testing must be completed in the presence of the architect/engineer and must be completed a minimum of 14 days prior to any smoke tests scheduled for authorities having jurisdiction. Provide all materials required to perform smoke tests. 10.Make a total of three inspections within 90 days after occupancy of the building to insure that satisfactory conditions are being maintained. Submit a report of the findings to the Owner and Architect/Engineer. 11.Make an inspection in the building during the opposite season from which the initial adjustments were made. At that time, make any necessary modifications to the initial adjustments required to produce optimum operation of the system for all seasons. Submit a report of the findings to the Owner and Engineer. C. Contractor Responsibilities 1. The Contractor shall provide the T&B firm with copies of all Drawings, Specifications, Shop Drawings, Submittal Data, Up-to-Date Revisions, Change Orders, and other data required for planning, preparation and execution of the T&B work. 2. Coordinate the HVAC installation and start up schedule with the T&B Agency and General Contractor to allow sufficient time prior to the completion date for testing and balancing to be conducted and deficiency items corrected and retested. Provide sufficient personnel and utilities to operate the HVAC systems during normal and overtime hours to meet the completion date and testing and balancing schedule. 3. The Mechanical Contractor shall install all systems complete and provide balancing valves, test plugs, thermometer wells, flow measurement orifices, volume dampers, splitter dampers, etc. necessary for T&B work. All equipment shall be operated at the Contractor’s expense for a minimum of three consecutive days prior to balancing in order to make certain the equipment is free from mechanical defects, runs smoothly and quietly, and performs satisfactorily to meet the requirements set forth in the contract documents. 4. Provide written notification to the T&B agency and General Contractor the systems are ready for balancing. Should the systems not be ready for balancing, it shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to compensate the T&B Agency for time lost. 5. Correct any deficiency items noted during testing and balancing including controls calibration, installation of balancing devices, sheave replacements, and motor replacements at no additional cost to the Owner. Provide written notification to the Testing and Balancing Agency and General Contractor when systems are ready for retesting. Should the systems not be ready for retesting it shall be the Contractors responsibility to compensate the T&B Agency for time lost. 6. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to install all valves, dampers, and other adjustment devices in a manner that will leave them accessible and readily adjustable. 7. The Control Contractor shall provide and install the control system, complete with all temperature, pressure and humidity sensors installed and calibrated for accurate control. 8. Perform all tests of plumbing, mechanical and piping systems and equipment as specified herein and as required to obtain approvals from all authorities having jurisdiction. 9. Provide all instruments, materials and labor to perform the testing and to obtain and record all measurements. 10. The Contractor is to perform duct leakage testing in accordance with the latest edition of the SMACNA - HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual and maintain a log book on site indicating the area tested, date tested, leakage amount, and personnel performing the test. At the end of the project submit a final type written report with the results. The test and balance agency is to be notified one week prior to duct leakage testing and at their option witness the testing to confirm the testing is being performed in accordance with these specifications. 11. Acceptable T&B Companies: PHI, EAB. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC MDE Project NO: 191124 230593 - 3 August 2019 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 EQUIPMENT A. The balancing agency shall have a complete set of instruments as required by AABC standards. B. Calibration histories for each instrument used for measurement shall be available for examination. Calibration, accuracy, and maintenance of all instruments shall be in accordance with AABC standards. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 CLEANING AND ADJUSTING A. Equipment, piping, valves, fittings and fixtures shall be cleaned of grease, metal cuttings and foreign matter that may have accumulated from operation of the system during the test. Any stoppage, discoloration or other damage to the finish, furnishings or parts of the building, due to the Contractor's failure to properly protect such items shall be repaired by the Contractor without additional cost to the Owner. B. When the work is complete, the water systems shall be adjusted for all required flows. Flush valves and automatic control devices shall be adjusted for proper operation. Hot water heaters shall be tested for proper operation of all safety and operating controls as recommended by the manufacturer. Demonstrate that supply and recirculation systems are balanced for specified flows and temperatures and as shown on the drawings. C. Sterilization: After pressure tests have been made, the entire domestic water distribution system shall be thoroughly flushed with water until all entrained dirt and mud have been removed, and shall be sterilized by chlorinating material. The chlorinating material shall be either liquid chlorine conforming to Federal Specification BB-C-120 or hypochlorite conforming to Federal Specification 0-C-114, Type II, Grade B, or Federal Specification 0-S-602, Grade A or B. The chlorinating material shall provide a dosage of not less than 50 parts per million and shall be introduced into the system in an approved manner. The treatment water shall be retained in the pipe long enough to destroy all non-spore forming bacteria. Except where a shorter period is approved, the retention time shall be at least 24 hours and shall produce not less than 10 ppm of residual chlorine at the extreme end of the system at the end of the retention period. D. All valves and faucets in the system being sterilized shall be opened and closed several times during the contact period. The system shall then be flushed with clean water until the residual chlorine is reduced to less than 1.0 ppm. Samples of water shall be taken from several points in the system in properly sterilized containers for bacterial examination. The sterilizing shall be repeated until tests indicate the absence of pollution for at least two full days. The system will not be accepted until satisfactory bacteriological results have been obtained. 3.2 EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEM TESTS A. General: The Test and Balance firm shall test all HVAC equipment and systems and make final adjustments and corrections necessary to place the systems in proper operating condition. 1. After testing and balancing, patch insulation, ductwork, and housings, using materials identical to those removed. Air test drilled openings shall be sealed with plastic plugs to allow future access. Seal insulation to re-establish integrity of the vapor barrier. 2. Mark equipment settings, including damper control positions, valve indicators, fan speed control levers, and similar controls and devices to show final settings. B. Air Distribution Devices: 1. Proportion each air handling unit, damper, register, diffuser and grille so that air distribution will be as scheduled, with tests showing air quantities indicated for each inlet and outlet that do not vary by more than plus or minus 10 percent from those indicated on the drawings. C. Ductwork: 1. The contractor shall perform duct leakage testing on 25% of the supply, return and exhaust ductwork in accordance with SMACNA - HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual. Seal any ductwork not meeting the following acceptable leakage rates and retest until test is successful. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC MDE Project NO: 191124 230593 - 4 August 2019 Duct System Allowable % Leakage Low Pressure Supply 2% @ construction pressure class Low Pres. Return/Exhaust 2% @ construction pressure class Smoke Exhaust 2% @ construction pressure class D. Gas System: 1. The complete gas piping system shall be tested with air at a pressure of fifteen (15) PSI and proved tight at such pressure for twenty-four (24) hours. Test may be done in segments as dictated by construction requirements. Peppermint fumes or soap bubbles shall be used to locate leaks. All tests shall be approved by the local authorities and reviewed by a representative of the Architect before the tests are removed. E. Fan Balancing: 1. Provide proper fan design and balance fans and drives to limit vibration (displacement in mils) at operating speed to the values in the following table unless specified elsewhere. Measure vibration at each fan bearing, in all three planes. FAN VIBRATION CRITERIA Fan RPM (peak-to peak) Mils (in each plane) 500 4.2 800 3.0 1200 2.0 1700 1.5 2000 and greater 1.3 3.3 SYSTEM OPERATING TESTS A. After the successful completion of all equipment start-up and test requirements, the following formal testing and balancing shall be performed on the complete mechanical system: 1. Temperature Controls - The balancing agency shall be assisted by the temperature controls contractor in the commissioning of the operation and calibration of all temperature control systems. The following tests are required: a.Verify all controlling devices are calibrated and set for design operating conditions. b.Verify all components are installed and functional. c.Verify the accuracy of each temperature sensor by temperature measurement. d.Check the sequence of operation for all control modes to ensure that they are in accordance with the contract documents. e.Verify that default setpoints are correct if different from the normal operating set points. f.Verify all interlock systems function. g.Perform all system verifications to assure the safety of the system and its components. h.Verify changeover from heating to cooling occurs as specified. i.Calibrate and adjust all thermostats and other controlling devices. j.Replace defective controllers at no cost to the Owner. 2. Mechanical Contractor Responsibility a. Final Operating Test: An operating test shall be performed by the Contractor to the satisfaction of the Architect and the Owner for a period of not less than 8 hours. Should any element of the system not perform properly, the Contractor shall make all required corrections, and the test shall be repeated until successfully performed 3.4 AIR SYSTEM PROCEDURES A. The balancing agency shall perform the following testing and balancing functions in accordance with the AABC National Standards for TAB. 1. Diffusers and Grilles - Determine air velocity at outlets with a velometer or anemometer and using air device manufacturer's data, calculate the delivery cfm, or determine cubic feet per minute flow with a test hood. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC MDE Project NO: 191124 230593 - 5 August 2019 2. Fans - Test supply, return, exhaust fans and adjust fan blower speeds to achieve specified CFM. 3. Current and Voltage - Measure and record motor full load amperage and voltage. Actual amperages higher than nameplate full load amps are not acceptable. Verify heater sizes. 4. Pitot-tube Traverse - Perform a Pitot-tube traverse (minimum of 16 points) on main supply and return ducts to obtain design CFM. If a Pitot-tube traverse is not practical, the summation of the outlets or inlets may be used with an explanation why a traverse was not conducted. 5. Outside Air - Test and adjust system minimum outside air by Pitot-tube traverse. If a Pitot-tube traverse is not practical, the percentage of outside air may be determined by calculations from the return air, outside air, and mixed air temperatures when the temperature differential between the return and outside air is greater than 20oF. 6. Static Pressure - Test and record system static pressures, including entering and leaving static pressures of each fan, coil section, and filter section. For VAV systems, establish and record the minimum operating static pressure setpoint required for the air handling unit to achieve design airflow at the last terminal box in the system. 7. Air Temperature - Take wet bulb and dry bulb air temperatures on the entering and leaving side of each cooling coil. Dry bulb temperature shall be taken on the entering and leaving side of each heating coil. 8. Main Ducts - Adjust main ducts to within design CFM requirements and traverse for total CFM quantities. 9. Branch Ducts - Adjust branch ducts to within design CFM requirements. Multi-diffuser branch ducts shall have at least one volume damper completely open. 10. Tolerances a. Test and balance each diffuser, grille and register to within 10% of design requirements. b. Test and balance each fan and air-handling unit to within plus 10% and minus 5% of design requirements. Test and balance units having filters with clean filters in place. 11. Minimizing Drafts - Adjust all diffusers, grilles, and registers to minimize drafts in all areas. 12. If inspections or tests reveal defects, such defective work or material shall be replaced or repaired as necessary and inspections and tests shall be repeated. Repairs to piping shall be made with new materials. Patching of screwed joints or holes shall not be acceptable. 3.5 TEST AND BALANCE REPORT A. The Final TAB Report shall be typewritten on 8.5 x 11 inch white bond paper, in bound form with an index and tabs to segregate the data into logical sections. The summary shall include information on special testing conditions and results. A listing of the TAB Agency, Contractor, Owner, Architect, and Engineer shall be included. B. The report shall present data entered on AABC or NEBB standard forms (modified as necessary to include additional data hereinafter required) or pre-approved acceptable equivalent thereof. C. The report shall contain copies of pump curves, fan curves, field test reports and as-built plans (size 11 x 17 inches) of the HVAC systems. D. Include a certification sheet containing the seal and name, corporate address, telephone number, and signature of the Certified Test and Balance Engineer. E. Include a listing of the instrumentation’s used for the procedures along with the proof of calibration. F. System Identification - Each supply, return, and exhaust opening shall be identified and numbered on reduced plans no larger than 11 x 17 inches to correspond to the numbers used on the report data sheets. G. Air Outlet Test Report Forms - Each grille, diffuser, and register shall be identified as to location (room number) and area served. Record the size, type, and manufacturer of each diffuser, grille, and register. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC MDE Project NO: 191124 230593 - 6 August 2019 H. Air Handling Unit Test Report Forms - Record the manufacturer, model number and motor nameplate data and all design and manufacturer-rated data including supply, return, and outside airflows, fan rpm, sp, and bhp. Report the following. 1. Total actual CFM by traverse. Include duct traverse form. If not practical, the sum of the outlets may be used, or a combination of each of these procedures. 2. Inlet and outlet static pressures at the fan, coil and filter sections. 3. Actual outside air and return air total CFM. 4. Actual operating current, voltage, and brake horsepower of each fan motor. 5. Final RPM of the fan and motor. 6. Fan and motor sheave sizes and center distance. Belt size and quantity. 7. For VAV air handling systems, report the minimum static pressure set point required to achieve design CFM to the last terminal box in the system while maintaining design airflow at the air handler. 8. Coil EAT and LAT (db/wb), EWT, LWT, and air pressure drops. 9. Outside air temperature (DB/WB). I. Fan Test Report Forms - Record the manufacturer, model number, motor nameplate data and all design and manufacturer-rated data. Report the following. 1. Total actual CFM by traverse. Include duct traverse form. If not practical, the sum of the outlets may be used, or a combination of each of these procedures. 2. Suction and discharge static pressure of each fan. 3. Actual operating current, voltage, and brake horsepower of each fan motor. 4. Final RPM of the fan and motor. 5. Fan and motor sheave sizes and center distance. Belt size and quantity. J. Pumps Test Forms - Submit pump curve showing design, operating, and no-flow points of operation. Also, record the following items on each pump test form: 1. Manufacturer, size, and serial number. 2. All design and manufacturer's rated data. 3. Pump operating suction and discharge pressure and final total dynamic head and apparent GPM. 4. No flow (pump discharge valve closed) suction and discharge pressure and corresponding total dynamic head. 5. Rated and actual operating current, voltage, RPM, and brake horsepower of each pump motor. 3.6 FINAL JOB MEETING A. At job completion, all Division 21, 22, 23, 26, and 28 representatives shall meet at the job site and shall demonstrate the operation of all equipment and systems. The Architect and Owner shall be advised in writing 10 days prior to the time and date of this inspection. 3.7 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION: A. Testing and Balancing Agency 1. At the time of final inspection, the Test and Balance Agency may be required to recheck, in the presence of the Owner's representative, specific and random selections of data, air quantities, and air motion recorded in the Certified Report. 2. Points and areas for recheck shall be selected by the Owner's representative. 3. Measurement and test procedures shall be the same as approved for work forming basis of Certified Report. 4. If random tests elicit a measured flow deviation of 10% or more from that recorded in the Certified Report the report will be rejected, all systems shall be retested, new data recorded, new Certified Report submitted, and new inspection tests made, at no additional cost to Owner. END OF SECTION City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 HVAC INSULATION MDE Project NO: 191124 230700 - 1 August 2019 SECTION 230700 - HVAC INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to the Work in this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Provide all equipment, materials, labor, supervision, and services necessary for or incidental to the insulation of the mechanical systems as indicated on the drawings and as specified herein. B. Factory insulated equipment is excluded from this section of the specifications except that the insulating material characteristics shall equal or exceed those of specified materials for similar service. C. Work Included: 1. Piping: a. Cooling coil condensate drain lines. b. All refrigerant lines. 2. Ductwork: a. Supply air: 1) Insulate externally with thermal duct wrap. b. Return air: 1) Insulate externally with thermal duct wrap. c. Make-up air duct: 1) Insulated externally. d. All round ductwork exposed to view shall be double wall factory internally insulated with 1" thick glass fiber duct and fittings. D.Submittals: Provide submittals as required in Section 23 00 10, “Submittal Process”. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. B. Without additional cost to the Owner, provide such other labor and materials as are required to complete the work of this Section in accordance with the requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, regardless of whether such materials and associated labor are called for elsewhere in these Contract Documents. C. When requested, provide the Architect with manufacturer's certificate that materials meet or exceed minimum requirements as specified. D. Pipe joints or cuts, shall be sealed with manufacturers glue. Any type of duct tape, foil tape, electrical tape or any other product that what the manufacturer supplies will be rejected and all insulation will be removed and replaced at the contractors cost. E. Splits or exposed piping will not be acceptable. All incorrectly installed insulation will be repaired at contractors cost. F. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Fiberglass Insulation: a. Owens-Corning Fiberglas b. Manville c. Certain Teed 2. Urethane Insulation: a. Armstrong (Armalok) b. Thermacor 3. Mastics: a. Benjamin Foster b. Insul-Coustic c. Chicago Mastic d. Childers Products 4. High Temperature Bonding Cements: Ryder Thermocote 5. PVC Fittings: Zeston, Inc. 1.4 GENERAL A. All materials shall be applied by workmen skilled in this trade. Mechanical fasteners shall be used whenever possible to assure permanent construction. Unsightly work shall be cause for rejection. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 HVAC INSULATION MDE Project NO: 191124 230700 - 2 August 2019 B. Materials will be applied only after all surfaces have been tested and cleaned. C. All material, jacket, coverings, sealers, mastics and adhesives shall not exceed flame spread rating of 25 and smoke developed of 50 in accordance with ASTM Method E84, UL Standard 723 and NFPA Bulletins 255 and 90A. D. Insulation shall be vermin resistant. E. Non-compressible insulation material shall be installed at hangers of cold piping to eliminate through metal conductance. F. Sizing, paint, pipe shield or saddle, and internal duct insulation shall be provided under other sections of Division 23. G. Insulation of cold surfaces shall be vapor sealed. H. Minimum thickness of insulation shall be as listed or energy code as adopted by authority having jurisdiction. However, sufficient insulation shall be provided to eliminate condensation on the cold surfaces and to maintain a maximum exterior insulation surface of 125ºF. (OSHA Standard) on the hot surfaces. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPING SYSTEMS A. Pipe Insulation: 1. Above ground-Johns Manville AP-T preformed one-piece fiberglass with reinforced craft paper and aluminum foil jacket. Include vapor barrier where required. a. Use pre-formed PVC fitting covers with fiberglass inserts. Fiberglass shall be same density as pipe insulation. b. Where insulation is exposed to weather, use Manville Flame-Safe ML, or approved equal, Metal-Jacketed Fiberglass pipe insulation. Attachment shall be made by 1/2" 0.020 aluminum bands with approved closure system. 2.1” Armstrong SOLID CORE Armaflex or equal for all refrigerant lines. Split Armaflex is not approved in refrigeration applications. Both the liquid and gas refrigerant lines must be insulated 3. Condensate drain lines shall be insulated from AC unit to indirect waste termination points and first 10'-0" of horizontal drain line at floor drains receiving condensate. Material shall be closed cell type with 3/4" thick molded pipe covering with a density of 7 lbs. thermal conductivity at 0.28 at 75ºF. Do not split the insulation. All joints shall be glued with manufacturer's adhesive. 2.2 DUCTWORK SYSTEMS A. External insulation for metal ductwork (flexible blanket): Johns Manville Microlite fiberglass duct wrap with FSK reinforced craft paper and aluminum foil facing, conforming to the requirements of NFPA 90A and 90B. B. High velocity ductwork with external insulation shall be insulated with blanket wrap fiberglass insulation, 1-1/2 inches thick, one (1) pound density or minimum thermal resistance of 6.0, complete with scrim kraft jacket. Facing overlapping joints shall be at least two (2) inches and held in place with outward clinching staples on approximately four (4) inch centers. Underside of ducts exceeding 24 inches in diameter shall be spot cemented and finally secured with sheet metal screws and washers. C. High velocity flexible ductwork shall be UL 181, Class I, with rating to meet or exceed NFPA 90A- 90B and reinforced with a perforated sheet metal inner jacket. D. High velocity ductwork located in non-conditioned spaces shall be insulated with 2" thick fiberglass board insulation with vapor barrier jacket. E. Other manufacturers are Certainteed, Knauf, and Owens Corning or approved equal. F. Fibrous-Glass Duct Liner: Comply with ASTM C 1071, NFPA 90A, or NFPA 90B; and with NAIMA AH124, "Fibrous Glass Duct Liner Standard." City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 HVAC INSULATION MDE Project NO: 191124 230700 - 3 August 2019 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. CertainTeed Corporation; Insulation Group. b. Johns Manville. c. Knauf Insulation. d. Owens Corning. 2. Maximum Thermal Conductivity: 0.27 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F at 75 deg F mean temperature. 3. All duct liner products shall avoid air erosion up to velocities of 4,000 feet per minute. G. Solvent-Based Liner Adhesive: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B and with ASTM C 916. 2.3 ADHESIVES A. Water based, polymeric, UL classified lagging adhesive for applying canvas and glass cloth; Foster 30-36 or Childers CP-50. B. A fast setting, rubber based, UL classified, vapor barrier lap and attachment adhesive; Foster 85- 15 or Childers CP-85. C. Same adhesive, except non-flammable when wet; Foster 85-20 or Childers CP-82. D. A rubber based, UL classified, fast setting contact adhesive for adhering flexible cellular insulation; Foster 82-40 or Armstrong 520. 2.4 INSULATION THICKNESS A. Piping insulation thickness based on a maximum k value of 0.23 Btu in/hr ft² F at a mean temperature of 75F. Pipe Sizes System Runout s To 12 ft. Max. 1 1/2 " and Less 1 1/2” Up Refrigerant piping 1"1"2" Condensate drain piping 1"1"1" B. Exterior Duct Insulation: All supply, return and outside air ductwork, shall be insulation 2" thick, with a minimum installed R value of 8.0. 2.5 DUCT SEALANTS A. A fast setting, rubber based, UL classified, high velocity duct sealer; Foster 32-14 or 3M EC-800. B. Same sealer, except non-flammable when wet; Foster 30-02. C. 2.6 EXPANSION AND BALL JOINT INSULATION COVERS A. Furnish and install removable and reusable insulation covers. B. Insulation and jacketing material shall be as required for service temperatures. C. Covers shall have hook and loop fasteners and draw cords PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. The installation of all insulation shall be made by experienced craftsmen in a neat, workmanlike manner and shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's published recommendations for service intended, as interpreted by the Architect. B. All adhesives used in conjunction with insulation shall be compatible with the insulation and vapor barrier used and be vermin-proof and mildew resistant. 3.2 APPLICATION A. Install materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Ductwork: City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 HVAC INSULATION MDE Project NO: 191124 230700 - 4 August 2019 1. External Duct Insulation: All external duct shall be installed without sagging or loose fitting sections. Outer jacket shall be sealed with mastic to form a continuous vapor barrier. Install as recommended by the insulation manufacturer. 2. Flexible fiberglass insulation shall be wrapped around ducts and secured with outward clinching staples. Ducts 24" wide and larger shall have the insulation additionally secured with stick clips on 18" centers or with 4" wide bands of adhesive applied on 18" centers. Insulation shall be lapped a minimum of 4" and all seams and penetrations shall be sealed with an approved mastic reinforced with 3" glass mesh reinforcement. Where insulation terminates, all raw glass shall be sealed to duct. C. Insulation shall be the full specified thickness, continuous through walls, floors, ceilings, etc. Reducing thickness or cutting back of insulation to pass obstructions or through sleeves will not be permitted. D. Valve and fitting insulation shall be built up to the thickness of the adjacent pipe insulation or may be factory prefabricated units at the Contractor's option. E. Any painting of pipe insulation shall be accomplished under the Painting Section. After finish painting, any insulation showing splits or other signs of poor workmanship shall be replaced. F. No part of any system shall be insulated until all required tests have been completed. G. All insulation shall be installed so that it does not interfere with the functions of thermometer wells, gage connections and/or cocks, unions, access panels, hand holes, manholes, sight glasses, etc., or obscure serial numbers or other nameplate data. H. Insulation shall be extended to include stiff leg supports as required to prevent sweating. I. Complete vapor barriers to prevent sweating shall be installed on all cold systems and equipment. If a single tape adhesive system or staples are used for closure of the longitudinal lap, a vapor barrier mastic must be used to ensure a vaporproof closure. All edges and abutments shall be sealed, waterproof and vaporproof. Supplier of jacket materials shall certify that the material proposed is approved for use in return air plenums, where applicable. J. Where necessary, the application of insulation shall be arranged to accommodate movement of piping due to thermal expansion and/or contraction. K.Exterior Refrigeration Piping: All pipe and fittings specified herein to be insulated when installed exposed to weather, and wrapped with an 0.016" smooth or corrugated aluminum jacket with proper closure system positioned to shed water to make a waterproof assembly. Fittings shall be insulated with molded insulation fittings or pipe insulation carved and mitered to fit properly. Insulation shall be butted together and adhered in place with contact cement. Where possible tubing shall be slipped on without slitting. Where insulation terminates, it shall be neatly beveled and finished. No portion of this insulation shall be concealed prior to approval by the Architect. L. Below Grade Piping: All pipe and fittings specified herein to be insulated, when installed below grade shall be insulated and spirally wrapped with open mesh glass tape embedded in asphaltic mastic and then completely covered with waterproof asphaltic mastic so as to make a waterproof assembly. Fittings shall be insulated with molded insulation fittings or pipe insulation carved and mitered to fit properly. Insulation shall be butted together and adhered in place with contact cement. Where possible tubing shall be slipped on without slitting. Where insulation terminates, it shall be neatly beveled and finished. No portion of this insulation shall be concealed before the Architect has checked and approved same. M. Piping supports shall pass completely around the exterior of the finished insulation. Rigid blocks of insulation material shall be provided at all support points. In addition, sheet metal saddles shall be provided at support points in accordance with the following table: Pipe Size Gauge Metal Saddle Length Up to 2-1/2"18 6" 3" - 5"16 10" 6" - 8"16 14" 10" and Over 16 18" City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 HVAC INSULATION MDE Project NO: 191124 230700 - 5 August 2019 N. Saddles shall cover the bottom of the insulation, and saddle edges shall be hemmed or suitably covered to prevent damage to the insulation material. O. The vapor barrier and finish shall be continuous at all support points. P. Shop Application of Duct Liner: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-19, "Flexible Duct Liner Installation." 1. Adhere a single layer of indicated thickness of duct liner with at least 90 percent adhesive coverage at liner contact surface area. Attaining indicated thickness with multiple layers of duct liner is prohibited. 2. Apply adhesive to transverse edges of liner facing upstream that do not receive metal nosing. 3. Butt transverse joints without gaps, and coat joint with adhesive. 4. Fold and compress liner in corners of rectangular ducts or cut and fit to ensure butted- edge overlapping. 5. Do not apply liner in rectangular ducts with longitudinal joints, except at corners of ducts, unless duct size and dimensions of standard liner make longitudinal joints necessary. 6. Apply adhesive coating on longitudinal seams in ducts. 7. Secure liner with mechanical fasteners 4 inches from corners and at intervals not exceeding 12 inches transversely; at 3 inches from transverse joints and at intervals not exceeding 18 inches longitudinally. 8. Secure transversely oriented liner edges facing the airstream with metal nosings that have either channel or "Z" profiles or are integrally formed from duct wall. Fabricate edge facings at the following locations: a. Fan discharges. b. Intervals of lined duct preceding unlined duct. c. Upstream edges of transverse joints in ducts where air velocities are higher than 2000 fpm or where indicated. 9. Secure insulation between perforated sheet metal inner duct of same thickness as specified for outer shell. Use mechanical fasteners that maintain inner duct at uniform distance from outer shell without compressing insulation. a. Sheet Metal Inner Duct Perforations: 3/32-inch diameter, with an overall open area of 23 percent. Q. Lined exterior ductwork shall be treated with an acid etch bath and two coats of UV resistant paint. Color shall be approved by Architect. R. Terminate inner ducts with buildouts attached to fire-damper sleeves, dampers, turning vane assemblies, or other devices. Fabricated buildouts (metal hat sections) or other buildout means are optional; when used, secure buildouts to duct walls with bolts, screws, rivets, or welds. END OF SECTION City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS MDE Project NO: 191124 230993 - 1 August 2019 SECTION 230993 - SEQUENCE OF OPERATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, apply to the Work specified in this Section. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. All other Sections of Division 15 B. All other Divisions of the Contract Documents. Refer to each Division’s specifications and drawings for all requirements. 1.3 SCOPE A. Control sequence is hereby defined to mean the manner in which, and methods by which, the controls function. The requirements for each type of operation are specified in this section. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workers who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. B. Without additional cost to the Owner, provide such other labor and materials as are required to complete the work of this Section in accordance with the requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, regardless of whether such materials and associated labor are called for elsewhere in these Contract Documents. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A.Provide submittals as required in Section 23 00 10, “Submittal Process”. PART 2 - SEQUENCE OF OPERATION FOR THE MECHANICAL SYSTEM 2.1 GENERAL A. All HVAC systems shall be controlled with Direct Digital Control (DDC) according to the point list contained in this section of the Specifications or shown on the drawings and shall be stand-alone. Additional points or software programming not listed in the point list but which are required to meet the following sequence of operation shall be provided. 2.2 HOT WATER UNIT HEATER A. A space thermostat shall monitor the space temperature and open the hot water valve when the space temperature drops below setpoint, an Aquastat located on the hot water leaving piping shall cycle the unit heater fan when hot water is available. a. Units providing 199,000 BTU or grater shall be equipped with a CO sensor to deactivate the heating sources gas supply upon alarm. This sensor shall be monitored by the fire alarm panel. 2.3 APPARATUS BAY EXHAUST FAN. A. The Apparatus bay fan shall have a timer switch adjustable from 1-60 minutes mounted 48” AFF at a location directed by the architect and the owner to allow for manual operation. The switch shall open an outside air in-take damper. An end switch on the damper shall start the Apparatus Bay Exhaust Fan. The outside air in-take damper shall be closed and the exhaust fan shall stop when the time is complete. B. CO sensor and NO2 sensor shall be located at a height as recommended by the manufacturer in location indicated on the plans or by the architect. C. In the auto position, the fan shall operate in the following manner. On sensing a CO or NO2 level above set point (adjustable), the relay shall open an outside air in-take damper. An end switch on the damper shall start the Apparatus Bay Exhaust Fan. On the sensing an acceptable CO or NO2 level, the outside air-intake damper shall be closed and the exhaust fan shall stop. The fans shall also be interlocked to the garage door motors. When the garage door motors are powered down to a closed position the fans shall be energized and run for 15 minutes (adjustable). City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS MDE Project NO: 191124 230993 - 2 August 2019 2.4 BUNKER GEAR VENTILATION FAN A. The fan shall have an HOA switch mounted 48” A.F.F. at a location as directed by the architect and owner. B. In the auto position, the fan shall operate in the following manner. On sensing a RH level above setpoint, the fan shall be energized. The fan shall be de-energized upon sensing an RH level below setpoint. 2.5 MANUAL PURGE FANS A. Provide wall mounted mushroom type push button adjacent to door (unless noted otherwise) which shall activate the air side economizer mode for 10 minutes (adj.) regardless of ambient conditions. Cooling or heating systems shall be enabled to try to maintain mode of operation room temperature set point. 2.6 EXHAUST FANS A. The DDC Controller shall start and stop exhaust fans serving one room with a motion sensor interlocked with the light fixtures. B. The DDC Controller shall start and stop all other exhaust fans on a Time of Day Program . C. The DDC Controller shall monitor the exhaust fan status. Fan failure an alarm shall be sent to the EMS operator. 2.7 ELECTRICAL INTERLOCKS A. Provide electrical interlocks as listed herein, in other sections of these specifications and as noted in the equipment schedules. B. Electrical interlocks shall be made by means of auxiliary contacts on motor starters or shall be accomplished with separate relays unless indicated otherwise. No motor power lead shall be utilized in an interlock circuit, unless indicated otherwise. Each separate control power lead serving a starter shall be provided with a disconnecting switch suitably identified and housed, which may be a toggle switch or other suitable disconnecting device, or proper capacity and number of poles. END OF SECTION City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 FACILITY NATURAL GAS PIPING MDE Project NO: 191124 231123 - 1 August 2019 SECTION 231123 - FACILITY NATURAL GAS PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to the Work in this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. The Contractor shall furnish and install items as shown on the drawings or as necessary to provide a complete working system in accordance with the intent of the drawings and specifications, including all valves as indicated or as necessary to completely control the entire piping system. The piping drawings are diagrammatic and indicate the general routing, locations, and connections. The piping may require be offsetting, lowering or rising as needed to avoid interferences or as directed at the site. This does not relieve the Contractor from responsibility for the proper installation of piping systems. B. Work Included: 1. Gas piping. C. Submittals: Provide submittals as required in Section 23 0500, “Common Work Results for HVAC”. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. B. Without additional cost to the Owner, provide such other labor and materials as are required to complete the work of this Section in accordance with the requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, regardless of whether such materials and associated labor are called for elsewhere in these Contract Documents. C. When requested, provide the Architect with manufacturer's certificate that materials meet or exceed minimum requirements to comply with ANSI, ASTM, ASME, CISPI, IAPMO, PDI, and AWWA and all other applicable standards. D. Copies of each welder's certification documents shall be furnished to the Architect prior to them performing work. E. All pipes, valves, and fittings shall be manufactured in the United States. Mill Test reports and manufacturer’s certifications shall be submitted to the Engineer on all such materials used. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Provide submittals as required in section 23 00 10, “Submittal Process” PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS A. Gas Piping: 1. Piping below grade - Schedule 40 black steel pipe conforming to ASTM A-120 with factory fabricated steel fittings, threaded or welded. All buried piping shall be protected against corrosion by a factory applied wrapping, following the recommendations of the local gas company. All field-fabricated joints shall be similarly protected. Non-ferrous pipe with tracer wire may be used if approved by local governing authorities.2. 2. Underground gas distribution piping may be polyethylene plastic gas pipe SDR 11 conforming to ASTM D 2513 only when approved for use with 5 psi medium pressure distribution by both the Gas Utility Company and local building officials, and shall be listed by IAPMO. a. Plastic pipe shall be buried in its entirety and shall not run under or within any structure and shall be furnished with a copper trace wire. b. Any connection of such plastic pipe to metallic pipe shall be by means of an approved compression coupling with insert. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 FACILITY NATURAL GAS PIPING MDE Project NO: 191124 231123 - 2 August 2019 c. Joints in such plastic pipe of 1-1/2" and smaller shall be made by an approved Dresser coupling socket weld fitting or compression fitting if approved by local code. Pipe 2" and larger may be joined as described above or by heat fusion method, but all such work shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. d. Meter and regulator risers shall be made with pre-bent factory coated steel piping joined as described in (b) above. Such steel piping shall be at least three (3) feet long on that end joining to the plastic. e. Where plastic pipe joins to building, all exposed pipe shall be steel. All exposed metal on Dresser couplings shall be wrapped and sealed to prevent corrosion. f. Pipe shall be permanently marked at maximum 2 foot intervals with the following minimum information: 1) Manufacturer's name and the word "Natural Gas" 2) Material designation 3) SDR 11 4) IAPMO listing 3. Piping above grade - Schedule 40 black steel pipe conforming to ASTM A-120 with threaded black malleable iron fittings. All piping 2-1/2" and larger shall be welded. Welded fittings shall be factory fabricated schedule 40 black steel as manufactured by Tube-Turns or approved equal. 2.2 VALVES, COCKS AND SPECIALTIES A. Materials: Bronze, ductile iron, or cast iron per local codes with screwed, Vic-Press 304™, grooved, or flanged ends for steel pipe and Permalynx push-to-connect, grooved, or solder ends for copper pipe. B. Valve locations: 1. Provide a valve on inlet and outlet of each piece of equipment. 2. Provide valves to isolate individual or a group of equipment on branch runouts from piping mains. This is in addition to valves at each fixture and equipment. 3. Provide valves as indicated and where required to adequately service parts of systems and equipment. C. Gas Cocks: 1. Cocks on 2" lines and smaller shall be Jenkins 30A or Crane No. 324 or approved equal. 2. Cocks on 2-1/2" line and larger shall be Emco-Nordstrom No. 143 flanged pattern or approved equal. 3. All gas cocks at boilers shall be lubricated plug type. 4. Provide removable handles for all plug cocks. 5. Other special type valves or patterns shall be used where required. D. Gauge Cocks and Manual Air Vents: 1. Provide brass, lever handle cock, 1/4" FPT, as shown on the drawings or as specified herein. E. Dielectric Unions or Waterway Fittings: 1. Provide dielectric unions or waterway fittings at all piping connections (except to valves) between dissimilar metals, Watts No. 3000 series, Victaulic Style 47, or engineer approved equal. 2.3 PRESSURE REGULATORS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Actaris Metering Systems 2. Elster American Meter Company. 3. Fisher Control Valves and Regulators; Division of Emerson Process Management. 4. Maxitrol Company. 5. Richards Industries; Jordan Valve Div. B. General Requirements: 1. Single stage and suitable for natural gas. 2. Steel jacket and corrosion-resistant components. 3. Elevation compensator. 4. End Connections: Threaded for regulators NPS 2 and smaller. 5. Venting: a. Regulators with included approved vent-limiting device (REG 3 and REG 5A) do not require venting to atmosphere provided they are mounted in a ventilated location (e.g. near a gas appliance which also requires placement in a ventilated area). City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 FACILITY NATURAL GAS PIPING MDE Project NO: 191124 231123 - 3 August 2019 b. Ventilated locations include (but not limited to) mechanical rooms, attics, garages, and basements. c. Vent limiting device: Limit the fuel gas leakage to 2.5 cc per hour in the event of a diaphragm failure. C. Service Regulators 1. Diaphragm Case: Die-cast aluminum with polyurethane top coat. 2. Valve Body: Cast iron. 3. Closing Spring: Steel, zinc plated. 4. Diaphragm Plate: Steel. 5. Seat Disc: Nitrile rubber. 6. Orifice: Aluminum. 7. Lever: Steel, zinc plated. 8. Vent Screen: Stainless steel. 9. Seal Plug: Die-cast aluminum. 10. Maximum Inlet Pressure: 60 psig. D. Low Pressure Regulators 1. Diaphragm Case: Die-cast aluminum with polyurethane top coat. 2. Valve Body: Cast iron. 3. Closing Spring: Steel, zinc plated. 4. Diaphragm Plate: Steel. 5. Seat Disc: Nitrile rubber. 6. Orifice: Aluminum. 7. Lever: Steel, zinc plated. 8. Vent Screen: Stainless steel. 9. Seal Plug: Die-cast aluminum. 10. Maximum Inlet Pressure: 5 psig. E. Appliance Pressure Regulators: Provided by manufacturer of appliance. Appliance pressure regulator will comply with ANSI Z21.18. 1. Body and Diaphragm Case: Die-cast aluminum. 2. Closing Spring: Steel, zinc plated, interchangeable. 3. Diaphragm Plate: Steel, zinc plated. 4. Seat Disc: Nitrile rubber. 5. Orifice: Aluminum. 6. Lever: Steel, zinc plated. 7. Vent Screen: Stainless steel. 8. Seal Plug: Die-cast aluminum. 9. Maximum Inlet Pressure: 1 psig. 2.4 FLANGES A. Flanges shall be 150 pound; A.S.A. forged steel, raised face, weld neck or slip-on. Slip-on flanges shall be welded both inside and outside. B. Flange Adapters: Flat face, for direct connection to ANSI Class 125 or 150 flanged components. Victaulic Style 741 or W45 flange adapter nipple for sizes 14” through 24” PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. All work shall be performed by workmen skilled in the trade required for the work. All materials and equipment shall be installed in accordance with the approved recommendations of the manufacturer and the best practices of the trade in conformance with the contract documents. B. Refer to Section 23 0529, “Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment” for general piping support requirements. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 FACILITY NATURAL GAS PIPING MDE Project NO: 191124 231123 - 4 August 2019 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Refer to Section 23 0500, “Common Work Results for HVAC” for general installation requirements B. Underground Pipe: The bottom of the trench shall be shaped to give substantially uniform support to the lower third of each pipe. Each pipe shall be laid true to line and grade and in such manner as to form a concentric joint with adjoining pipe and to prevent sudden offsets to flow line. As work progresses, the interior of the pipe shall be cleaned of dirt and foreign materials of any kind. Where cleaning after laying is difficult, a suitable swab or drag shall be kept in the pipe and pulled forward past each joint immediately after joining has been completed. Trenches shall be kept free from water until pipe joining is complete and pipe shall not be laid when condition of trench or weather is unsuitable for such work. At all times when work is not in progress, all open ends of pipe fittings shall be securely closed to the satisfaction of the Architect so that no water, earth or other substance will enter pipe or fittings. C. Above Ground Interior Exposed Piping: All Exposed piping shall have (2) coats of paint and have identification tags every 20’. See specification 23 05 53 for required tag types. D. Above Ground Exterior Exposed Piping: All exposed piping shall have (2) coats of UV paint applied to the pipe. Colors shall be Yellow or Gray. E. Erection of Pipe above Grade: Piping shall be properly supported and adequate provisions shall be made for flashing, expansion, contraction, slope and anchorage. All piping shall be cut accurately for fabrication to measurements established at the construction site. Pipe shall be worked into place without springing and/or forcing, properly clearing all structural elements, finished rooms, windows, doors, and other openings and equipment. Cutting or other weakening of the building structure to facilitate installation will not be permitted. F. All changes in direction shall be made with fittings, except that bending of pipe will be permitted providing a hydraulic pipe bender is used. Bent pipe showing kinks, wrinkles or other malformation will not be acceptable. G. Copper tubing shall be joined by the following method: 1.The tubing shall be reamed to remove all burrs from the inside diameter of the pipe. 2.The tubing and fitting shall be sanded or brushed to a uniform bright finish. 3.Apply a paste flux to both tubing and fitting. 4.Fully heat the joined parts and apply solder to the joint. 5.Completely fill the joint with solder, wiping any excess solder outside the joint while still liquid. H. Mitering of pipe to form elbows or notching straight runs to form tees will not be permitted unless shop fabricated by a certified welder. Weldolet or Threadolet fittings may be used in lieu of welding tees. I. Provide sleeves around all pipes passing through walls, floors, ceiling, partitions, structural members or other building parts. J. Gas Piping: 1.All gas piping within the building shall be run exposed or enclosed in a sleeve vented to the outdoors, if required by local codes. 2.All piping shall be run straight without sags or traps and shall be so pitched as to drain back to the riser and from the riser to the system low points. A dirt pocket consisting of a nipple and a cap shall be provided at the bottom of each riser and at all low points of the gas distribution system. Provide access for cleaning of same dirt pocket. 3.Provide connections throughout the system to allow for adequate horizontal and vertical expansion and contraction of piping. 4.Provide a pressure regulator, with relief piping routed to the outdoors, at each gas consuming device or group of devices, where such devices operate at a pressure less than that of the gas supply line. Refer to the drawings for additional regulators and other information. Coordinate required regulators with others furnishing gas burning equipment. END OF SECTION City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 REFRIGERANT PIPING MDE Project NO: 191124 232300 - 1 August 2019 SECTION 232300 - REFRIGERANT PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to the Work in this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. The Contractor shall furnish and install items as shown on the drawings or as necessary to provide a complete working system in accordance with the intent of the drawings and specifications, including all valves as indicated or as necessary to completely control the entire piping system. The piping drawings are diagrammatic and indicate the general routing, locations, and connections. The piping may require be offsetting, lowering or rising as needed to avoid interferences or as directed at the site. This does not relieve the Contractor from responsibility for the proper installation of piping systems. B. Work Included: 1. Refrigerant piping and accessories. C. Submittals: Provide submittals as required in Section 23 00 10, “Submittal Process”. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. B. Without additional cost to the Owner, provide such other labor and materials as are required to complete the work of this Section in accordance with the requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, regardless of whether such materials and associated labor are called for elsewhere in these Contract Documents. C. When requested, provide the Architect with manufacturer's certificate that materials meet or exceed minimum requirements to comply with ANSI, ASTM, ASME, CISPI, IAPMO, PDI, and AWWA and all other applicable standards. D. Copies of each welder's certification documents shall be furnished to the Architect prior to them performing work. E. All pipes, valves, and fittings shall be manufactured in the United States. Mill Test reports and manufacturer’s certifications shall be submitted to the Engineer on all such materials used. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS A. Refrigerant Piping: 1. Seamless ACR copper tubing, Type L, hard drawn with wrought or bronze solder joint fittings. 2. Soft copper is not an accepted product. Soft copper shall only be used for a maximum of 4’ to flare a connection to a FCU. 3. Coiled/pre-insulated line-sets are not an accepted product. 2.2 VALVES, COCKS AND SPECIALTIES A. Materials: Bronze, or copper only B. Isolation Valve locations: 1.Provide a valve on inlet and outlet of each piece of equipment. (all refrigeration lines) a. Locate at condenser b. Locate at fan coil unit. c. Locate at inlet and outlet of all refrigeration selector boxes 2. Provide valves to isolate individual or a group of equipment on branch runouts from piping mains. This is in addition to valves at each fixture and equipment. 3. Provide valves as indicated and where required to adequately service parts of systems and equipment. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 REFRIGERANT PIPING MDE Project NO: 191124 232300 - 2 August 2019 C. Refrigerant Valves: 1. KeepRite 410A Refrigeration ball valves with relief port attached to brass valve. 2. Globe and Angle Valves: Forged brass or bronze alloy with packed stem and seal cap. 3. Check Valves: Spring-loaded, forged brass or bronze alloy body with solder connections. 4. Relief Valves: Forged brass bodies with nonferrous corrosion resistant internal working parts. Valves shall be in accordance with ANSI B9.1. 5. Solenoid Valves: Two-position, direct acting or pilot operated type, UL listed, with manual opening stem and constructed for servicing without removal from lines. Valves shall have coil housing, stainless steel enclosing tube, replaceable seat, and proper inlet and outlet connections for the type of pipe containing the valve. 2.3 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Supports, hangers, anchors, guides and supplementary steel shall be provided for horizontal and vertical piping and shall meet or exceed the ASA Code for Pressure Piping. B. Rod sizes noted are minimum sizes. The structural integrity of the supports is the responsibility of the Contractor. C. Hangers Supporting and Contacting Copper: 1. 3" and Smaller: Grinnell Fig. CT-109, copper plated, split-ring hanger with adjusters. D. Hangers Supporting Insulated Lines: 1. All hangers must support outside of insulation and not on pipe directly. E. Supports for Vertical Riser Piping: 1. Brass or copper pipe shall be isolated from support with sheet polyethylene, minimum 1/8" thick. F. Supports for Vertical and Horizontal Piping in Chases and Partitions: 1. Provide securely anchored supports for pipes serving plumbing fixtures and equipment near the area the pipe penetrates the wall. 2. Supports shall be steel plate, angles or unistruts mounted vertically or horizontally with unistrut clamps P2426, P2008 or P1109. 3. Attach supports to wall or floor construction with clip angles, brackets or other approved anchoring devices. 4. Brass and copper pipe shall be isolated from support with sheet polyethylene, minimum 1/8" thick. 2.4 SLEEVES A. Provide sleeves where pipes penetrate floors, walls, foundations, fireproofing, etc. B. Size sleeves large enough to allow for movement due to expansion and to provide for continuous movement. Provide a bead of sealant in space between pipe and sleeve. 2.5 TRAPEZES A. Trapezes of Kindorf, Elcen or approved equal may be provided where multiple lines run horizontally at the same elevation. 2.6 STRAP HANGERS A. Under no circumstances will perforated strap iron, zip ties, tape, fabric strap or wire be acceptable for hangers or supports on this project. 2.7 BRAZING ROD A. Refrigerant piping shall be brazed with no less than silver solder "Sil-Fos"#15. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. All work shall be performed by workmen skilled in the trade required for the work. All materials and equipment shall be installed in accordance with the approved recommendations of the manufacturer and the best practices of the trade in conformance with the contract documents. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 REFRIGERANT PIPING MDE Project NO: 191124 232300 - 3 August 2019 B.Contractor shall consider all refrigeration piping materials are subject to change in temperature and will expand and contract with this change. Installation techniques must allow for expansion and contraction changes, this will prevent stress that will buckle and rupture the copper tubing or joint. Consider components, pipe type, length, hanger type, and rapid temperature differences within the piping system when calculating expansion. It is the contractor’s responsibility to ensure that the pipe has adequate room for expansion and contraction without putting undue stress on the VRF components such as “Y” branches, changeover boxes, headers, and indoor units. Contractor shall follow the recommendations found in the most recent issue of The Piping Handbook, for expansion loops, expansion joints, pipe offsets and other methods to allow the refrigerant pipe to expand and contract based on the temperature ranges within each refrigerant pipe in the system. Failure to follow this procedure can cause a tendency for lines to bow, and possibly buckle or rupture, particularly on smaller pipe sizes. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Refer to Section 23 0500, “Common Work Results for HVAC” for general installation requirements. B. Erection of Pipe above Grade: Piping shall be properly supported and adequate provisions shall be made for flashing, expansion, contraction, slope and anchorage. All piping shall be cut accurately for fabrication to measurements established at the construction site. Pipe shall be worked into place without springing and/or forcing, properly clearing all structural elements, finished rooms, windows, doors, and other openings and equipment. Cutting or other weakening of the building structure to facilitate installation will not be permitted C. All changes in direction shall be made with fittings, except that bending of pipe will be permitted providing a hydraulic pipe bender is used. Bent pipe showing kinks, wrinkles or other malformation will not be acceptable. D. Copper tubing shall be joined by the following method: 1.The tubing shall be reamed to remove all burrs from the inside diameter of the pipe. 2.The tubing and fitting shall be sanded or brushed to a uniform bright finish. 3.The tubing shall be brazed with silver solder no less than #15 sil-fos. E.Provide sleeves around all pipes passing through walls, floors, ceiling, partitions, structural members or other building parts. F. Refrigerant Piping: 1.Refrigerant piping shall not be run concealed in walls or partitions nor underground or under the floor except as indicated on the drawings. Where pipe passes through building structure, pipe joints shall not be concealed, but shall be located where they may be readily inspected. 2. Refrigerant piping shall be brazed with silver solder "Sil-Fos"#15. The inside of tubing and fittings shall be free of flux. The parts to be joined shall be cleaned bright with emery cloth and shall be heated to a temperature slightly greater than the solder flow point, and shall be kept hot until the solder has penetrated the full depth of the fitting. Joints shall be cooled in the air after which flame marks and traces of flux shall be removed. During the brazing operation, the tubing shall be protected from forming an oxide film on the inside by slowly flowing dry nitrogen to expel the air. Installation of the piping shall comply with ANSI B31.5. 3.Refrigerant lines shall be installed so that the gas velocity in the evaporator suction line is sufficient to move the oil along with the gas to the compressor. Where equipment location requires a vertical riser, the line size shall be as shown and installed to provide sufficient gas velocity or a double riser shall be installed as shown on the drawings. The larger riser shall have a trap, of minimum volume, formed by the use of 90 degree and 45 degree ells. The small riser shall be located with its inlet just upstream of the trap and shall connect to the top of the horizontal line. Valves shall not be installed in risers except as shown on the drawings. 4.Refrigerant driers, sight glass liquid and moisture indicators, and strainers shall be provided in refrigerant piping for remote installations when not furnished by the manufacturer as part of the equipment. Driers shall be installed in liquid line with service valves and a valved bypass line which are the same size as liquid line in which the drier is installed. Driers of 50 cubic inches and larger shall be installed with the cover and the full cartridge being easily removable. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 REFRIGERANT PIPING MDE Project NO: 191124 232300 - 4 August 2019 5.Sight glass liquid and moisture indicators shall be installed in the liquid line downstream of the drier. Connections shall be the same size as the liquid line in which it is installed, up to 7/8"; 1-1/8" and larger shall have a 1/4" indicator installed in the "By-pass" position. 6.Refrigeration lines shall not be installed over and IT equipment or electrical equipment. Route lines accordingly. IF routing refrigeration lines over IT equipment or other electrical equipment is unavoidable, refrigeration lines shall be installed wrapped with an 0.016" smooth or corrugated aluminum jacket with proper closure system positioned to shed water to make a waterproof assembly. 7.Refrigerant Charging Valve: A valved refrigerant charging connection shall be provided for each field piped refrigeration system when not provided as part of the condensing unit. The valve shall be located on the reducing outlet of a full size tee in the liquid line, upstream from the refrigerant drier and sight glass moisture indicator. Valves shall be of the seal cap type, 1/2" min. port size. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF SUPPORTS A. All pipe supports shall be designed and installed to avoid interferences with other piping, hangers, ducts, electrical conduit, supports, building structure, equipment, etc. All piping shall be installed with due regard to expansion and contraction. The type of hanger, method of support, location of support, etc., shall be governed in part by this specification. B. Pipe hangers shall be attached to the structure as follows: 1. Poured-in-Place Concrete: Each hanger rod shall be fitted with a nut at its upper end, which nut shall be set into an Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., listed universal concrete insert placed in the formwork before concrete is poured. 2. Steel Bar Joists: Where pipes and loads are supported under bar joists, hanger rods shall be run through the space between the bottom angles and secured with a washer and two nuts. Where larger lines are supported beneath bar joists, hanger rods shall be secured to angle irons of adequate size. Each angle shall span across two or more joists as required to distribute the weight properly and shall be welded to the joists or otherwise permanently affixed thereto. 3. Steel Beams: Pipes and loads supported under steel beams shall be installed using approved beam clamps. 3.4 SPACING A. Install hangers for steel piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes according to MSS SP 69 Tables 3 and 4: 1. NPS 3/4: Maximum span, 7 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 2. NPS 1: Maximum span, 7 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 3. NPS 1-1/4: Maximum span, 7 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 4. NPS 1-1/2: Maximum span, 9 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 5. NPS 2: Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. B. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes: 1. NPS 1/2: Maximum span, 5 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 2. NPS 5/8: Maximum span, 5 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 3. NPS 1: Maximum span, 6 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 4. NPS 1-1/4: Maximum span, 8 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 5. NPS 1-1/2: Maximum span, 8 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. C. Spacing and rod sizes for other piping materials shall be as recommended by the manufacturer. 3.5 TRAPEZES A. Trapeze members, including suspension rods, shall be properly sized for the number, size and loaded weight of the lines they are to support. Install as noted above. 3.6 EXPANSION & CONTRACTION JOINTS 1. Under normal conditions, the vapor pipe temperature of a refrigeration system can vary as much as 180deg F. with this large variance in pipe temperature, the contractor must install pipe expansion and contraction to avoid pipe and fitting failures. 2. The refrigerant pipe support system must be built to allow free expansion to occur. When a segment of pipe is mounted between two fixed points, provisions must be provided to allow pipe expansion to naturally occur. The only way to protect the system from failures is to install expansion loops, U-bends or expansion hoses mounted in the horizontal position. 3. When expansion loops are installed in a vertical riser, the loop is to be formed in a horizontal position resulting in a torsional movement during expansion and contraction. Pipe that runs through a shaft shall have an expansion joint before entering shaft, and before exiting the shaft. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 REFRIGERANT PIPING MDE Project NO: 191124 232300 - 5 August 2019 4. Expansion Calculations: a.LE=CxLx(Tr-Ta)x12 LE = Linear Pipe Expansion C = Constant (Copper 0.0000104 in/in degree F) L = Length of pipe (ft) Tr = Refrigerant pipe Temp Ta = Ambient air Temp 12 = Inches to feet conversion. 5. Types of expansion joints. a. U-Bends- One solid piece of bent copper. b. Expansion loops. c. Stainless steel vibration absorbers - Braded refrigeration hose. 6. Pipe Length Calculations for Fittings: a. When measuring liquid line to calculate refrigerant charge it is important to calculate for fitting losses. Count all fittings and add the equivalent feet of pipe for each fitting. See chart below. Nominal Pipe Size 90 Degree Standard 90 Degree Long Radius 90 Degree Street 45 Degree Standard 45 Degree Street 3/8 1.4’0.9’2.3’0.7’1.1’ 1/2 1.6’1.0’2.5’.08’1.3’ 3/4 2.0’1.4’3.2’.09’1.6’ 1 2.6’1.7’4.1’1.3’2.1’ 1-1/4 3.3’2.3’5.6’1.7’3.0’ 1-1/2 4.0’2.6’6.3’2.1’3.4’ 2 5.0’3.3’8.2’2.6’4.5’ END OF SECTION City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 VARIABLE FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS MDE Project NO: 191124 232923- 1 August 2019 SECTION 232923 - VARIABLE-FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A.Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A.Section includes separately enclosed, pre-assembled, combination VFDs, rated 600 V and less, for speed control of three-phase, squirrel-cage induction motors. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A.BAS: Building automation system. B.CPT: Control power transformer. C.EMI: Electromagnetic interference. D.IGBT: Insulated-gate bipolar transistor. E.LAN: Local area network. F.LED: Light-emitting diode. G.MCP: Motor-circuit protector. H.NC: Normally closed. I.NO: Normally open. J.OCPD: Over current protective device. K.PCC: Point of common coupling. L.PID: Proportional plus integral plus derivative. M.PWM: Pulse-width modulated. N.RFI: Radio-frequency interference. O.TDD: Total demand (harmonic current) distortion. P.THD(V): Total harmonic voltage distortion. Q.VFD: Variable frequency drive (motor controller). 1.4 SUBMITTALS A.Provide submittals as required in section 23 00 10, “Submittal Process”. B.Product Data: For each type and rating of VFD indicated. Include features, performance, electrical ratings, operating characteristics, shipping and operating weights, and furnished specialties and accessories. C.Shop Drawings: For each VFD indicated. Include dimensioned plans and elevations indicating conduit entry locations and sizes, mounting arrangements, details and required clearances and service space around equipment. 1. Show tabulations of installed devices, equipment features, and ratings. Include the following: a. Each installed unit's type and details. b. Factory-installed devices. c. Enclosure types and details. d. Nameplate legends. e. Short-circuit current (withstand) rating of enclosed unit. f. Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of each VFD and installed devices. g. Specified modifications. 2. Schematic and Connection Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring. D.Harmonic Analysis Study and Report. E. Coordination Drawings: Floor plans, drawn to scale, showing dimensioned layout, required working clearances, and required area above and around VFDs. Show VFD layout and relationships between electrical components and adjacent structural and mechanical elements. Show support locations, type of support, and weight on each support. Indicate field measurements. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 VARIABLE FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS MDE Project NO: 191124 232923- 2 August 2019 F.Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency. G.Seismic Qualification Certificates: For VFDs, accessories, and components, from manufacturer. 1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation. 2. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based, and their installation requirements. H.Product Certificates: For each VFD, from manufacturer that includes factory test reports. I.Source quality-control reports. J.Field quality-control reports. K.ISO 9000 certificate. L.Operation and Maintenance Data: For VFDs to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following: 1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting thermal-magnetic circuit breaker and MCP trip settings. 2. Manufacturer's written instructions for setting field-adjustable overload relays. 3. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing, adjusting, and reprogramming microprocessor control modules. 4. Manufacturer's written instructions for setting field-adjustable timers, controls, and status and alarm points. M.Load-Current and List of Settings of Adjustable Overload Relays: Compile after motors have been installed and arrange to demonstrate that switch settings for motor-running overload protection suit actual motors to be protected. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Testing Agency Qualifications: UL and/or ETL listed and labeled. 1. Tested to UL-508A. 2. Plenum rated applications: Tested to UL-508C. B.Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. C.Comply with NFPA 70. D.Harmonic Analysis Study and Report: Comply with IEEE Standard 399 and NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. 1. The VFD manufacturer shall provide calculations; specific to this installation, showing total harmonic voltage distortion is less than 5%. Input filters shall be sized and provided as required by the VFD manufacturer to ensure compliance with IEEE Standard 519. Trap filters shall not be an acceptable means of reducing harmonic distortion. 2. Calculations shall use the building electrical service entrance as the point of common coupling. 3. VFD manufacturer shall request in writing the following: a. Electrical one-line diagram identifying all VFDs and transformers. b. Transformers (including utility transformer) upstream of VFDs. 1) kVA. 2) % impedance. 3) Primary and secondary voltages. 4) Feeder size and approximate length. c. Schedule of all existing and new VFDs. 1) Voltage. 2) Phases. 3) Horsepower. 4) Feed size and approximately length. E.Manufacturer is ISO 9000 certified. F.Local service representative's requirements: 1. Provide and maintain field service personnel authorized by Manufacturer to perform service both in and out of warranty. 2. Maintain full stock of service parts for all units furnished. 3. Provide in-depth training in operation of all units. G.IEEE Compliance: Fabricate and test VFD according to IEEE 344 to withstand seismic forces defined in Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems." City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 VARIABLE FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS MDE Project NO: 191124 232923- 3 August 2019 1.6 WARRANTY A.Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace VFDs that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Five (5) years on all parts and labor from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURED UNITS A.Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. ABB. 2. Danfoss Inc.; Danfoss Drives Div. 3. Yaskawa Electric America, Inc; Drives Division. 4. Toshiba International Corporation. B.General Requirements for VFDs: Comply with NEMA ICS 7, NEMA ICS 61800-2, and UL 508C. C.VFD Description: Variable-frequency power converter (rectifier, dc bus, and IGBT, PWM inverter) factory packaged in an enclosure, with integral disconnecting means and overcurrent and overload protection; listed and labeled by an NRTL as a complete unit; arranged to provide self-protection, protection, and variable-speed control of one or more three-phase induction motors by adjusting output voltage and frequency. 1. Units suitable for operation of NEMA MG 1, Design A and Design B motors as defined by NEMA MG 1, Section IV, Part 30, "Application Considerations for Constant Speed Motors Used on a Sinusoidal Bus with Harmonic Content and General Purpose Motors Used with Adjustable-Voltage or Adjustable-Frequency Controls or Both." 2. Units suitable for operation of inverter-duty motors as defined by NEMA MG 1, Section IV, Part 31, "Definite-Purpose Inverter-Fed Polyphase Motors." 3. Listed and labeled for integrated short-circuit current (withstand) rating by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. D.Design and Rating: Match load type, such as fans, blowers, and pumps; and type of connection used between motor and load such as direct or through a power-transmission connection. E.Output Rating: Three-phase; 0 to 120 Hz, with voltage proportional to frequency throughout voltage range; maximum voltage equals input voltage. F.Unit Operating Requirements: 1. Input AC Voltage Tolerance: Plus 10 and minus 10 percent of VFD input voltage rating. 2. Input AC Voltage Unbalance: Not exceeding 3 percent. 3. Input Frequency Tolerance: Plus or minus 3 percent of VFD frequency rating. 4. Minimum Efficiency: 99 percent at 60 Hz, full load. 5. Minimum Displacement Primary-Side Power Factor: 98 percent under any load or speed condition. 6. Minimum Short-Circuit Current (Withstand) Rating: 65 kAIC unless noted otherwise on the Drawings. VFD shall be able to withstand in-rush from re-engaging service disconnect between VFD and motor. G.Rate equipment for continuous operation, capable of driving full load without derating, under the following conditions unless otherwise indicated: 1. Ambient Temperature Rating: Not less than 14 deg F and not exceeding 104 deg F. 2. Ambient Storage Temperature Rating: Not less than minus 4 deg F and not exceeding 140 deg F 3. Humidity Rating: Less than 95 percent (non-condensing). 4. Altitude Rating: Not exceeding 3300 feet. 5. Vibration Withstand: Comply with IEC 60068-2-6. 6. Overload Capability: 1.5 times the base load current for 60 seconds; minimum of 1.8 times the base load current for three seconds. 7. Starting Torque: Minimum 100 percent of rated torque from 3 to 60 Hz. 8. Speed Regulation: Plus or minus 5 percent. 9. Output Carrier Frequency: Selectable throughout the following range: 2 to 12 kHz. 10. Stop Modes: Programmable; includes fast, free-wheel, and dc injection braking. 11. Exception: VFDs whose output current is derated for any of the above conditions shall be sized based on those derated values. H.Inverter Logic: Microprocessor based, isolated from all power circuits. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 VARIABLE FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS MDE Project NO: 191124 232923- 4 August 2019 I.Internal Adjustability Capabilities: 1. Minimum Speed: 5 to 25 percent of maximum rpm. 2. Maximum Speed: 80 to 100 percent of maximum rpm. 3. Acceleration: 0.1 to 999.9 seconds. 4. Deceleration: 0.1 to 999.9 seconds. 5. Current Limit: 30 to minimum of 150 percent of maximum rating. J.Self-Protection and Reliability Features: 1. Input transient protection by means of surge suppressors to provide three-phase protection against damage from supply voltage surges 10 percent or more above nominal line voltage. 2. Loss of Input Signal Protection: Selectable response strategy, including speed default to a percent of the most recent speed, a preset speed, or stop; with alarm. 3. Under- and overvoltage trips. 4. Inverter overcurrent trips. 5. VFD and Motor Overload/Overtemperature Protection: Microprocessor-based thermal protection system for monitoring VFDs and motor thermal characteristics, and for providing VFD overtemperature and motor overload alarm and trip; settings selectable via the keypad; NRTL approved. 6. Critical frequency rejection, with three selectable, adjustable deadbands. 7. Instantaneous line-to-line and line-to-ground overcurrent trips. 8. Loss-of-phase protection. 9. Reverse-phase protection. 10. Short-circuit protection. 11. Motor overtemperature fault. K.Automatic Reset/Restart: Attempt a minimum of three restarts after drive fault or on return of power after an interruption and before shutting down for manual reset or fault correction; adjustable delay time between restart attempts. L.Torque Boost: Automatically varies starting and continuous torque to at least 1.5 times the minimum torque to ensure high-starting torque and increased torque at slow speeds. M.Motor Temperature Compensation at Slow Speeds: Adjustable current fall-back based on output frequency for temperature protection of self-cooled, fan-ventilated motors at slow speeds. N.Integral Input Disconnecting Means and OCPD: NEMA AB 1, instantaneous-trip circuit breaker with pad-lockable, door-mounted handle mechanism. 1. Disconnect Rating: Not less than 115 percent of NFPA 70 motor full-load current rating or VFD input current rating, whichever is larger. 2.2 CONTROLS AND INDICATION A.Status Lights: Door-mounted LED indicators displaying the following conditions: 1. Power on. 2. Run. 3. Overvoltage. 4. Line fault. 5. Overcurrent. 6. External fault. B.Panel-Mounted Operator Station: Manufacturer's standard front-accessible, sealed keypad and plain-English language digital display; allows complete programming, program copying, operating, monitoring, and diagnostic capability. 1. Keypad: In addition to required programming and control keys, include keys for HAND, OFF, and AUTO modes. 2. Security Access: Provide electronic security access to controls through identification and password with at least three levels of access: View only; view and operate; and view, operate, and service. a. Control Authority: Supports at least four conditions: Off, local manual control at VFD, local automatic control at VFD, and automatic control through a remote source. 3. VFD Parameters: Ability to scroll and display in plain English language the following parameters: a. Output frequency (Hz). b. Motor speed (rpm). c. Motor status (running, stop, fault). d. Motor current (amperes). e. Motor torque (percent). City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 VARIABLE FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS MDE Project NO: 191124 232923- 5 August 2019 f. Fault or alarming status (code). g. PID feedback signal (percent). h. DC-link voltage (V dc). i. Set point frequency (Hz). j. Motor output voltage (V ac). C.Historical Logging Information and Displays: 1. Real-time clock with current time and date. 2. Running log of total power versus time. 3. Total run time. 4. Fault log, maintaining last four faults with time and date stamp for each. D.Control Signal Interfaces: 1. Electric Input Signal Interface: a. A minimum of two, programmable analog inputs: 4 to 20 mA or 0 to 10 V. b. A minimum of six, multifunction, programmable digital inputs. 2. Output Signal Interface: A minimum of one programmable analog output signal(s) (4 to 20 mA), which can be configured for any of the following: a. Output frequency (Hz). b. Output current (load). c. DC-link voltage (V dc). d. Motor torque (percent). e. Motor speed (rpm). f. Set point frequency (Hz). 3. Remote Indication Interface: A minimum of two programmable dry-circuit relay outputs (120 V, 1 A) for remote indication of the following: a. Motor running. b. Set point speed reached. c. Fault and warning indication (overtemperature or overcurrent). d. PID high- or low-speed limits reached. 2.3 LINE CONDITIONING AND FILTERING A.Output DC Reactors: Unless noted otherwise provide 5% impedance reactors for VFDs whose cable lengths between VFD and motor exceed 100 ft. B.Input Line Conditioning: Based on the harmonic analysis study and report, provide input filtering, as required, to limit TDD at input terminals of all VFDs to less than 5 percent and THD(V) to 3 percent. 2.4 BYPASS SYSTEMS A.General: Provide manual bypass as specified herein for VFDs scheduled for motors serving single fan or single pump systems only. B.Bypass Operation: Safely transfers motor between power converter output and bypass circuit, manually, automatically, or both. Selector switches set modes and indicator lights indicate mode selected. Unit is capable of stable operation (starting, stopping, and running) with motor completely disconnected from power converter. C.Bypass Controller: Three-contactor-style bypass allows motor operation via the power converter or the bypass controller; with input isolating switch and barrier arranged to isolate the power converter input and output and permit safe testing and troubleshooting of the power converter, both energized and de-energized, while motor is operating in bypass mode. 1. Bypass Contactor: Load-break, IEC-rated contactor. 2. Input and Output Isolating Contactors: Non-load-break, IEC-rated contactors. 3. Isolating Switch: Non-load-break switch arranged to isolate power converter and permit safe troubleshooting and testing of the power converter, both energized and de-energized, while motor is operating in bypass mode; pad-lockable, door-mounted handle mechanism. D.Bypass Contactor Configuration: Full-voltage (across-the-line) type. 1. NORMAL/BYPASS selector switch. 2. HAND/OFF/AUTO selector switch. 3. NORMAL/TEST Selector Switch: Allows testing and adjusting of VFD while the motor is running in the bypass mode. 4. Contactor Coils: Pressure-encapsulated type with coil transient suppressors. a. Operating Voltage: Depending on contactor NEMA size and line-voltage rating, manufacturer's standard matching control power or line voltage. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 VARIABLE FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS MDE Project NO: 191124 232923- 6 August 2019 b. Power Contacts: Totally enclosed, double break, and silver-cadmium oxide; assembled to allow inspection and replacement without disturbing line or load wiring. 5. Control Circuits: 120-V ac; obtained from integral CPT, with primary and secondary fuses, with CPT of sufficient capacity to operate all integral devices and remotely located pilot, indicating, and control devices. 6. Overload Relays: NEMA ICS 2. a. Melting-Alloy Overload Relays: 1) Inverse-time-current characteristic. 2) Class 10 tripping characteristic. 3) Heaters in each phase matched to nameplate full-load current of actual protected motor and with appropriate adjustment for duty cycle. b. Bimetallic Overload Relays: 1) Inverse-time-current characteristic. 2) Class 10 tripping characteristic. 3) Heaters in each phase matched to nameplate full-load current of actual protected motor and with appropriate adjustment for duty cycle. 4) Ambient compensated. 5) Automatic resetting. c. Solid-State Overload Relays: 1) Switch or dial selectable for motor-running overload protection. 2) Sensors in each phase. 3) Class 10 tripping characteristic selected to protect motor against voltage and current unbalance and single phasing. 4) Class II ground-fault protection, with start and run delays to prevent nuisance trip on starting. 5) Analog communication module. d. NC isolated overload alarm contact. e. External overload reset push button. 7. Motor protection from single phase power conditions: The Bypass system must be able to detect a single phase input power condition while running in bypass, disengage the motor in a controlled fashion, and give a single phase input power indication. 8. The system (VFD and Bypass) tolerated voltage window shall allow the system to operate from a line voltage of +30% to -35% nominal voltage, as a minimum. The system shall incorporate circuitry that will allow the drive or bypass contactor to remain “sealed in” over this voltage tolerance at a minimum. 9. The Bypass system shall NOT depend on the VFD for bypass operation. The bypass shall be completely functional in both Hand and Automatic modes even if the VFD has been removed from the enclosure for repair / replacement. 10. Serial Communications: The bypass and VFD shall be capable of being monitored and/or controlled via serial communications as specified herein. a. BACnet Serial communication bypass capabilities shall include, but not be limited to; bypass run-stop control; the ability to force the unit to bypass; and the ability to lock and unlock the keypad. The bypass shall have the capability of allowing the DDC to monitor feedback such as, bypass current (in amps), bypass kilowatt hours (resettable), bypass operating hours (resettable), and bypass logic board temperature. The DDC shall also be capable of monitoring the bypass relays output status, and all digital input status. “Pass thru I/O” All bypass diagnostic warning and fault information shall be transmitted over the serial communications bus. Remote bypass fault reset shall be possible. The following additional bypass status indications and settings shall be transmitted over the serial communications bus – keypad “Hand” or “Auto” selected, and bypass selected. The DDC system shall also be able to monitor if the motor is running under load in both VFD and bypass (proof of flow) in the VFD mode over serial communications or Form C relay output. A minimum of 40 field parameters shall be capable of being monitored in the bypass mode. 11. Run permissive circuit - There shall be a run permissive circuit for damper or valve control. Regardless of the source of a run command (keypad, time-clock control, or serial communications) the VFD and bypass shall provide a dry contact closure that will signal the damper to open (VFD motor does not operate). When the damper is fully open, a normally open dry contact (end-switch) shall close. The closed end-switch is wired to a VFD system input and allows motor operation. Two separate safety interlock inputs shall be provided. When either safety is opened, the motor shall be commanded to coast to stop, and the damper shall be commanded to close. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 VARIABLE FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS MDE Project NO: 191124 232923- 7 August 2019 12. The bypass control shall monitor the status of the VFD and bypass contactors and indicate when there is a welded contactor contact or open contactor coil. This failed contactor operation shall be indicated on the Bypass LCD display as well as over the serial communications protocol. 13. The bypass control shall include a programmable time delay for bypass start and keypad indication that this time delay is in process. This will allow VAV boxes to be driven open before the motor operates at full speed in the bypass mode. The time delay shall be field programmable from 0 – 120 seconds. 14. The bypass control shall be programmable for manual or automatic transfer to bypass. The user shall be able to select via keypad programming which drive faults will generate an automatic transfer to bypass and which faults require a manual transfer to bypass. 15. There shall be an adjustable motor current sensing circuit for the bypass and VFD mode to provide proof of flow indication. The condition shall be indicated on the keypad display, transmitted over the building automation protocol and on a relay output contact closure. 16. The bypass controller shall have six programmable digital inputs, and five programmable form C relay outputs. 17. The relay outputs from the bypass shall programmable for any of the following indications. a. System started. b. System running. c. Bypass override enabled. d. Drive fault. e. Bypass fault. f. Bypass H-O-A position. g. Motor proof of flow (broken belt). h. Overload. i. Bypass selected. j. Bypass run. k. System started (damper opening). l. Bypass alarm. m. Over temperature. 18. The digital inputs for the system shall accept 24VAC or 24VDC. The bypass shall incorporate internally sourced power supply and not require an external control power source. The bypass power board shall supply 250 mA of 24 VDC for use by others to power external devices. 19. Customer Interlock Terminal Strip – provide a separate terminal strip for connection of freeze, fire, smoke contacts, and external start command. All external safety interlocks shall remain fully functional whether the system is in VFD or Bypass mode. The remote start/stop contact shall operate in VFD and bypass modes. The terminal strip shall allow for independent connection of up to four (4) unique safety inputs. 20. The user shall be able to select the text to be displayed on the keypad when the safety opens. Example text display indications include “Firestat”, “Freezstat”, “Over pressure” and “Low pressure”. The user shall also be able to determine which of the four (4) safety contacts is open over the serial communications connection. 21. Class 10, 20, or 30 (selectable) electronic motor overload protection shall be included. 22. Phase-Failure, Phase-Reversal, and Undervoltage and Overvoltage Relays: Solid-state sensing circuit with isolated output contacts for hard-wired connections. Provide adjustable undervoltage, overvoltage, and time-delay settings.] 2.5 OPTIONAL FEATURES A.Multiple-Motor Capability: VFD suitable for variable-speed service to multiple motors. Overload protection shuts down VFD and motors served by it, and generates fault indications, when overload protection activates. 1. Configure to allow two or more motors to operate simultaneously at the same speed; separate overload relay for each controlled motor. 2. Configure to allow two motors to operate separately; operator selectable via local or remote switch or contact closures; single overload relay for both motors; separate output magnetic contactors for each motor. 3. [Configure to allow two motors to operate simultaneously and in a lead/lag mode, with one motor operated at variable speed via the power converter and the other at constant speed via the bypass controller; separate overload relay for each controlled motor.] B.Damper control circuit with end of travel feedback capability. C.Sleep Function: Senses a minimal deviation of a feedback signal and stops the motor. On an increase in speed-command signal deviation, VFD resumes normal operation. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 VARIABLE FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS MDE Project NO: 191124 232923- 8 August 2019 D.Remote digital operator kit. 2.6 ENCLOSURES A.Provide enclosures for each application listed below unless otherwise scheduled. B.VFD Enclosures: NEMA 250, to comply with environmental conditions at installed location. 1. Dry and Clean Indoor Locations: Type 1. 2. Outdoor Locations: Type 3R. 3. Other Wet or Damp Indoor Locations: Type 4. 4. Indoor Locations Subject to Dust, Falling Dirt, and Dripping Noncorrosive Liquids: Type 12. C.Plenum Rating: UL 1995; NRTL certification label on enclosure, clearly identifying VFD as "Plenum Rated." 2.7 ACCESSORIES A.General Requirements for Control-Circuit and Pilot Devices: NEMA ICS 5; factory installed in VFD enclosure cover unless otherwise indicated. 1. Push Buttons, Pilot Lights, and Selector Switches: Standard-duty, oil tight type. a. Push Buttons: Covered types; maintained. b. Pilot Lights: LED type. c. Selector Switches: Rotary type. B.Control Relays: Auxiliary and adjustable solid-state time-delay relays. C.Phase-Failure, Phase-Reversal, and Undervoltage and Overvoltage Relays: Solid-state sensing circuit with isolated output contacts for hard-wired connections. Provide adjustable undervoltage, overvoltage, and time-delay settings. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.Store loose VFDs per manufacturer’s recommendations. Keep packing secured and all VFD components free from contact with construction dust, dirt and debris. B.Cover and protect from dust, dirt and debris through the entire construction process. Do not remove cover until startup. C.Protect unit mounted VFDs during delivery from damage. 3.2 EXAMINATION A.Examine areas, surfaces, and substrates to receive VFDs, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance. B.Examine VFD before installation. Reject VFDs that are visibly damaged, wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged. C.Examine roughing-in for conduit systems to verify actual locations of conduit connections before VFD installation. D.Notify the Owner, in writing, of any conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the Work. E.Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.3 COORDINATION A.Coordinate features of motors, load characteristics, installed units, and accessory devices to be compatible with the following: 1. Torque, speed, and horsepower requirements of the load. 2. Ratings and characteristics of supply circuit and required control sequence. 3. Ambient and environmental conditions of installation location. B.Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided. Cast anchor- bolt inserts into bases. C.Coordinate sizes and locations of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations with actual equipment provided. D.Coordinate with DDC Contractor as necessary to integrate controls. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 VARIABLE FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS MDE Project NO: 191124 232923- 9 August 2019 E.Interruption of Existing Electrical Systems: Do not interrupt electrical systems in facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary electrical service according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Architect, Construction Manager and Owner no fewer than two weeks in advance of proposed interruption of electrical systems. 2. Indicate method of providing temporary electrical service. 3. Do not proceed with interruption of electrical systems without Architect's, Construction Manager's or Owner's written permission. 4. Comply with NFPA 70E. F.Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for VFDs, including clearances between VFDs, and adjacent surfaces and other items. 3.4 INSTALLATION A.Coordinate layout and installation of VFDs with other construction including conduit, piping, equipment and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels. B.Install VFD where shown in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, and with recognized industry practices, to ensure that VFD complies with requirements and serve intended purposes. C.Maintain required code and service clearances in front of and around VFDs. D.Install units on pad mounts or on wall as shown. Mount on properly sized supports and bracing sized to handle the VFD load and mounting configuration. Do not mount on AHU unless indicated so on the drawings or in the specifications. E.Wall-Mounted Controllers: Install VFDs on walls with tops at uniform height and with disconnect operating handles not higher than 48 inches above finished floor unless otherwise indicated, and by bolting units to wall or mounting on lightweight structural-steel channels bolted to wall. For controllers not on walls, provide freestanding racks complying with Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems". F.Floor-Mounted Controllers: Install VFDs on 4-inch nominal thickness concrete base. Comply with requirements for concrete base specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete." 1. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around the full perimeter of concrete base. 2. For supported equipment, install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend through concrete base and anchor into structural concrete floor. 3. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 4. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment. G.Roof-Mounted Controllers: Install VFD on roofs with tops at uniform height and with disconnect operating handles not higher than 48 inches above finished roof surface unless otherwise indicated, and by bolting units to curbs or mounting on freestanding, lightweight, structural-steel channels bolted to curbs. Seal roof penetrations after raceways are installed. 1. Curbs and roof penetrations are specified in Division 07 Section "Roof Accessories." 2. Structural-steel channels are specified in Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems." H.Seismic Bracing: Comply with requirements specified in Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems." I.Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components. J.Install fuses in each fusible-switch VFD. K.Install fuses in control circuits if not factory installed. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Fuses." L.Install, connect, and fuse thermal-protector monitoring relays furnished with motor-driven equipment. M.Install electrical connections for power, controls, and devices. N.Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems." O.Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." 3.5 IDENTIFICATION City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 VARIABLE FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS MDE Project NO: 191124 232923- 10 August 2019 A.Identify VFDs, components, and control wiring. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems." 1. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs. 2. Label each VFD with engraved nameplate. 3. Label each enclosure-mounted control and pilot device. B.Operating Instructions: Frame printed operating instructions for VFDs, including control sequences and emergency procedures. Fabricate frame of finished metal, and cover instructions with clear acrylic plastic. Mount on front of VFD units. 3.6 CONTROL WIRING INSTALLATION A.Install wiring between VFDs and remote devices and facility's Building Automation System. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Control-Voltage Electrical Power Cables." B.Bundle, train, and support wiring in enclosures. C.Connect selector switches and other automatic control devices where applicable. 1. Connect selector switches to bypass only those manual- and automatic control devices that have no safety functions when switches are in manual-control position. 2. Connect selector switches with control circuit in both manual and automatic positions for safety-type control devices such as low- and high-pressure cutouts, high-temperature cutouts, and motor overload protectors. 3.7 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A.Testing: Test and inspect VFDs according to requirements in NEMA ICS 61800-2. 1. Test each VFD while connected to its specified motor. 2. Verification of Performance: Rate VFDs according to operation of functions and features specified. B.VFDs will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. C.Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. B.Acceptance Testing Preparation: 1. Test insulation resistance for each VFD element, bus, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit. 2. Test continuity of each circuit. C.Tests and Inspections: 1. Inspect VFD, wiring, components, connections, and equipment installation. Test and adjust controllers, components, and equipment. 2. Test insulation resistance for each VFD element, component, connecting motor supply, feeder, and control circuits. 3. Test continuity of each circuit. 4. Verify that voltages at VFD locations are within 10 percent of motor nameplate rated voltages. If outside this range for any motor, notify Architect, Construction Manager and Owner before starting the motor(s). 5. Test each motor for proper phase rotation. 6. Perform each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters. 7. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest. 8. Test and adjust controls, remote monitoring, and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. D.VFDs will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. E.Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies the VFD and describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations made after remedial action. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 VARIABLE FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS MDE Project NO: 191124 232923- 11 August 2019 4.1 STARTUP SERVICE A.Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service. 1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions. 4.2 ADJUSTING A.Program microprocessors for required operational sequences, status indications, alarms, event recording, and display features. Clear events memory after final acceptance testing and prior to Substantial Completion. B.Set field-adjustable switches, auxiliary relays, time-delay relays, timers, and overload-relay pickup and trip ranges. C.Set the taps on reduced-voltage autotransformer controllers. D.Set field-adjustable circuit-breaker trip ranges as specified in Division 26 Section "Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination Study." E.Set field-adjustable pressure switches. 4.3 PROTECTION A.Replace VFDs whose interiors have been exposed to water or other liquids prior to Substantial Completion. 4.4 DEMONSTRATION & TRAINING A.Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, reprogram, and maintain VFDs. B.Training of Owner's operating personnel shall be on site and shall be a minimum of eight hours and shall be performed in addition to start-up of system. END OF SECTION City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 AIR DISTRIBUTION MDE Project NO: 191124 233113 - 1 August 2019 SECTION 233113 – AIR DISTRIBUTION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to the Work in this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Provide all equipment, materials, labor, supervision and services necessary for or incidental to the installation of all air distribution items as indicated on the drawings and as specified. B. Work Included: 1. Ductwork. 2. Access Doors. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. B. Without additional cost to the Owner, provide such other labor and materials as are required to complete the work of this Section in accordance with the requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, regardless of whether such materials and associated labor are called for elsewhere in these Contract Documents. C. When requested, provide the Architect with manufacturer's certificate that materials and methods meet or exceed minimum requirements as specified. D. Under no circumstances shall OBD’s or butterfly dampers be used on any registers. In accessible areas manual dampers shall be used. In hard lid ceiling areas, remote cable dampers shall be used. Access panels shall not be used to access any damper in a hard lid ceiling. E. Mechanical rooms and Electrical rooms shall not be used as return air plenums. Hard duct OSA & R/A directly into FCU’s. F.Return Air, Exhaust, Air Make-up & OSA ducts shall be steel duct work connections. Flexible duct shall not be used for these types of terminations. G. Exterior Duct & Serviceability 1) Exterior duct shall have a minimum 18” clearance from the roof deck. 2) Provide engineered stamped & OSHA approved steps over duct to easily access all areas of the roof. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Provide submittals as required in section 23 00 10, “Submittal Process.” PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SHEET METAL DUCTWORK A.Ducts shall be constructed of new-galvanized steel sheets and erected in a first class manner, straight and smooth, with joints neatly finished, anchored securely to the building and free from vibration. B.All ducts penetrating fire walls shall be minimum 26-gauge galvanized steel regardless of SMACNA Standards. C.All elbows shall be curved elbows with a centerline radius equal to 1-1/2 times the width of the duct. Air turns consisting of curved metal vanes, arranged to permit the air to follow abrupt turns without appreciable turbulence shall be installed in square elbows, only where approved by the engineer. Air turns shall be the manufacturer's standard products, and shall be quiet and free from vibration. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 AIR DISTRIBUTION MDE Project NO: 191124 233113 - 2 August 2019 D.All primary and secondary ductwork of constant volume, shall be fabricated in accordance with the Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractor's National Association, Inc. (SMACNA) "HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible, Second Edition, 2005". The duct static pressure rating for this duct shall be two times the external static pressure of the system fan. The requirements for the seal class corresponding to the above static pressure shall be met. E.Longitudinal joints shall be Pittsburgh lock or Acme grooved seam. Side panels greater than 10 inches in depth shall be cross-broken for added stiffness. F.Transverse joints (With a side wall larger than 14”) shall be Ductmate, TDC or types fabricated according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" Figure 1-4, "Transverse (Girth) Joints," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." G.Round steel duct shall be spiral duct construction in all commercial applications. Snap lock round duct is acceptable in residential construction only. H.At each major branch from a primary rectangular or square trunk duct, and where shown on the drawings, install a splitter damper or multiblade adjustable air pickup. Splitter damper shall have end bearings and consist of a blade constructed of 20 gauge-galvanized steel securely riveted or welded to a square operating rod. The length of the splitter blade shall be 1-1/2 times the width of the split in the main duct, but in no case less than 12". Multi-blade adjustable pickup shall be as manufactured by Titus Model AG-45 or approved equal with operator adjustable from the duct exterior. I.Each individual air supply duct tap shall be equipped with a volume control device for the manual adjustment of airflow in each tap. Face bars, blanks, OBD’s and equalizing grids shall not be used to regulate airflow. J.Exposed duct shall use Fantech IR Series manual control dampers. No substitutes. K.Volume dampers shall have end bearings and be multi-blade type with opposed acting blades linked together and controlled by a single operator. Multi-blade dampers shall be not less than No. 16-gauge galvanized steel mounted to plenum or ductwork per SMACNA requirements. L.Regulators shall be stamped galvanized steel, lever type with locking screw mounted on face of ductwork or concealed type with adjustable cover plate as manufactured by Young Regulator Model No. 315 with 2-1/4" diameter cover plate or approved equal. M.Dampers handles shall be extended so the damper is not obstructed by any insulation and easily adjustable. N.Damper quadrants, volume dampers and other duct flow control quadrants shall be as manufactured by Young Regulator or approved equal and shall be damper sleeves. O.For all areas where damper adjustments cannot be accessed through the ceiling, Bowden cable controls shall be used. Damper controller and cable shall be concealed above the ceiling. Cable shall consist of Bowden cable 0.054” stainless steel control wire encapsulated with 1/16” flexible galvanized spiral wire sheath. Control kit shall consist of 270-896 bracket with a 7/8” diameter cold rolled steel zinc plated threaded cap suitable for painting, and 14 gauge steel rack and pinion gear drive converting rotary motion to push-pull motion. Control shafts shall be D-style flatted ¼” diameter with 265 degree rotation providing graduations for positive locking and control, and 1-1/2” linear travel capability. Control kit shall be manually operated using Young Regulator Model 030-12 wrench. Provide a wrench for each cable control system installed. Control kit shall be Young Regulator Model 270-896P with tamper proof screws or prior approval equal. P.On the inlet and outlet of each piece of air moving equipment or terminal unit, unless noted otherwise, install a flexible connection made with sufficient slack to render it flexible. Q.Furnish and install 24-gauge galvanized steel counter flashings for all ducts penetrating roofs and for all roof mounted equipment unless directed otherwise by the Architect. R.All duct penetrations through the floor to another level must be sealed with 24-gauge sheet metal fastened to the floor and duct sealing the hole. No open areas are acceptable. All Standards for penetrations through floors and fire safety must be followed. S.All exposed duct shall be fabricated with paint grip duct and shall be painted with 2 coat primer and 2 coat gloss paint. Color to be chosen by owner. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 AIR DISTRIBUTION MDE Project NO: 191124 233113 - 3 August 2019 2.2 PRE-INSULATED HVAC DUCTWORK SYSTEM (Contractors Alternate) A. Pre-Insulated HVAC Ductwork System: Provide Kingspan KoolDuct System for supply, return, fresh-air and exhaust air duct as shown in the contract drawings. System shall include panels, fabrication methods, coupling systems, and accessories to provide a complete system to meet the following performance criteria. 1. Classification: UL listed as a Class 1 Air Duct, to UL 181, NFPA 90A and NFPA 90B. 2. Fire & Smoke Performance must meet ASTM E84 or UL 723. a. Flame Spread <=25 b. Smoke Developed <=50 3. Materials: CFC/HCFC free, zero Ozone Depletion Potential, fiber free rigid thermoset phenolic insulation core faced with 1mil low vapor permeability aluminum foil reinforced with glass scrim. 4. Nominal Density: 3.4 to 3.75 pcf (55 to 60 kg/m3). 5. Closed Cell Content: minimum 90 percent 6. Compressive Strength: Minimum 29 psi (200 kPa) at 10 percent compression. 7. Air Leakage: SMACNA Air Leakage Class 3. 8. Mean Air Velocity Maximum 5000 fpm (25.4 m/s) with all joints sealed. 9. Design Pressures: a. Positive Pressure: Maximum 4 inch w.g. (1000 Pa). b. Negative Pressure: Maximum 3 inch w.g. (750 Pa). 10. Commissioning Pressures - As designed to, max commissioning 4 inch w.g. (1000Pa.). 11. Temperature Range: Internal air temperature range -15 to 185 deg. F (-26 to 85 C) during continuous operation, inside ducts or ambient surrounding temperature. 12. Thermal Resistance, Wall Thickness and R-Value: a. 7/8 inch (22 mm) thick, R 6.0 square feet per hour F/Btu (1.047 square meter K/W). b. 1-3/16 inch (30 mm) thick, R 8.1 square feet per hour F/Btu (1.428 square c. meter K/W). d. 1-25/32 inch (45mm) thick, R 12 square feet per hour F/Btu (2.15 square e. meter K/W). 13. Thermal Conductivity: at 50 to 74 deg. F (10 to 23 deg C), mean 0.146 Btu inch per square foot per hour deg. F (0.021 W/m K) per ASTM C518. 14. Typical Configuration: Rectangular. B. ACCESSORIES 1. Fittings: In accordance with SMACNA Phenolic Duct Construction Standards or the ASHRAE Design Fundamentals Handbook Chapter 35 or the SMACNA HVAC Duct Systems Design Manual.2. 2. Support Systems: Tiger Support and Wire Hanger Assembly. Steel Channel Support and Threaded Rods. 3. Coupling System: Tiger Clip Coupling System. Aluminum Grip Coupling System. 4-Bolt Coupling System. 4. Access Doors: Metal insulated access doors. Fabricated from the Kingspan KoolDuct System including the same insulation system, and to ensure a continuous vapor barrier. 5. Turning Vanes 6. V-Groove Sealant: Silicone with VOC content of 250 g/L or less. C. FABRICATION 1. Fabricate ductwork with panels, joints, seams, transitions, reinforcements, supports, elbows, connections, and accessories in accordance with SMANCA Phenolic Duct Construction Standards and the manufacturer guidelines. a. 90 degree mitered elbows shall include turning veins. b. Interior Ductwork: Standard finish. c. Exterior Ductwork: Dual-Tech pre-fabricated, double layer ducting system. 1) Inner layer shall be R-8 Kingspan KoolDuct 2) Outer layer shall be R-8 Kingspan KoolDuct 3) Exterior layer shall be .032 aluminum. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 AIR DISTRIBUTION MDE Project NO: 191124 233113 - 4 August 2019 2.3 FLEXIBLE DUCTWORK A. Core material shall be a PVC Coated Fiberglass reinforced fabric supported by helically wound galvanized steel. The fabric shall be mechanically fastened to the steel helix without the use of adhesive. B. The internal working pressure rating shall be at least as follows with a bursting pressure of at least 2- 1/2 times the working pressure. C. The duct shall be rated for a velocity of at least 5500 feet per minute. D. Suitable for operating temperatures of at least 250 degrees F. E.Factory insulate the flexible duct with flexible fiberglass insulation. The R value shall be at least 8.0 at a mean temperature of 75 degrees F. (R4.2 & 6 not acceptable) F. Cover the insulation with a reinforced aluminum pigmented vapor barrier jacket having a permeance of not greater than 0.05 perms when tested in accordance with ASTM E 96, procedure A. G. The ductwork shall be UL 181 listed, Class 1 Air Duct and comply with NFPA 90A and NFPA 90B. H. Duct shall be secured with metal bands no less than 1.5” wide. I. Duct shall be Flexmaster Type 8M or pre-approved equal 2.4 ACCESS DOORS A. Access doors mounted in painted surfaces shall be of Milcor (Inland-Ryerson Construction Products Company) manufacturer, Style K for plastered surfaces and Style M or DW for non- plastered surfaces. The Style K doors shall be set so that the finished surface of the door is even with the finished surfaces of the adjacent finishes. Access doors mounted on tile surfaces shall be stainless steel materials. Access doors shall be a minimum of 18" x 18" in size. B. Access doors are not permitted in public areas of buildings. 2.4 FIRE AND SMOKE DAMPERS A. Provide combination fire and smoke dampers where shown on the drawings. Dampers shall meet all requirements of fire dampers and additionally shall include an operating shaft, which, when rotated 90 deg., causes the damper to operate between closed and open. All dampers shall comply with the requirements of UL-555S, 350°F temperature rating and with pressure and velocity levels as required by the installation. Provide breakaway duct connects as required by UL. B.Each damper shall be provided with and end switch. C.Each damper shall have a duct door with-in 6” of the outlet of each damper. The minimal size duct door shall be no less 8x8. D. Each damper shall be furnished complete with 18 gauge galvanized factory sleeve and damper operator (pneumatic or electric to conform to control system) factory installed on exterior of sleeve and properly linked to damper operating shaft. Operators shall be UL listed and labeled as Fire Damper Operators. E. Each damper shall be activated by a duct smoke detector provided by Division 26. F. Dampers shall be as manufactured by Ruskin, Nailor-Hart or approved equal. G. Wiring 1. Each smoke zone shall be wired on a separate circuit. a.Each fire/smoke damper shall be wired on a separate circuit in each designated zone. b.Each smoke damper for make-up air shall be wired on a separate circuit in each designated zone, separate from the fire/smoke damper and the exhaust damper. c.Each smoke damper for smoke exhaust shall be wired on a separate circuit in each designated zone, separate from the fire/smoke damper and make-up air damper. 2.5 KITCHEN GREASE EXHAUST DUCTWORK A.The kitchen grease exhaust ductwork shall be constructed of black steel not less than 16 ga. up to 4 sq. ft. area, 14 ga. above 4 sq. ft. or as required by local codes with continuous grease-tight and water-tight welds at all joints and seams. B.The system shall be so constructed that no grease will become pocketed in any portion thereof and shall slope at not less than that prescribed by local codes, back to the hood. Where permitted by local codes, provide approved duct grease residue trap when minimum slopes are not provided due to restricted clearance. C.Openings in duct shall conform to code requirements and shall be provided for complete and thorough cleaning of duct system. D.Air velocity in the duct shall be not less than 1500 fpm nor more than 2500 fpm. E.Connection to hood shall be made above the finished ceiling unless shown otherwise on the drawings. F.All connections to fans shall be bolted flanged type and shall be gasketed with a resilient gasket not less than 3/8" thick, for fume-tight seal and for vibration absorption. Gasket shall be of a material City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 AIR DISTRIBUTION MDE Project NO: 191124 233113 - 5 August 2019 impervious to grease and be NPFA approved as fire and leak proof. G.All kitchen hood exhaust ducts shall have fire rated duct wrap or enclosure as required to meet all code requirements. Method shall be approved by governing authorities having jurisdiction prior to installation. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION - METAL DUCTS A.All ductwork shall be installed as recommended by SMACNA and as shown or indicated on the drawings. Coordinate ductwork with all other trades and elements of the building construction. B.All ductwork accessories shall be provided as specified or shown or indicated on the drawings, install as recommended by SMACNA and the manufacturer. C.Ductwork shall be installed in a neat, workmanlike manner with ducts generally parallel to structure and tops of ducts as high as possible against building construction. Provide offsets as necessary to avoid obstructions, piping, or structural members, It is contractors responsibility to communicate with other trades to reduce the amount of offsets needed. The additional cost of offsets and fittings shall not be passed onto the owner. D.Flexible ductwork shall be installed and supported as recommended by SMACNA and the manufacturer. Refer to section 2.4 for more details. E.At each major branch from a primary rectangular or square trunk duct, and where shown on the drawings, install a splitter damper or multi-blade adjustable air pickup. Refer to section 2.1 for requirements. F.Volume dampers shall be installed within ducts or plenums where shown on the drawings and on all supply/return/exhaust taps for balancing of system. G.All Dampers shall be marked with a flag for easy identification of location. H.Round or oval ductwork shall be fastened together with a minimum of three sheet metal screws equally spaced around the perimeter of the duct and taped with an approved duct sealing tape. Ductwork shall be furnished complete with all factory fabricated starting collars, Y shaped branch takeoffs, adjustable elbows, etc. I.Where ducts are in mechanical rooms or unfinished areas, or where dampers occur above lift out ceilings, regulators shall be stamped galvanized steel, lever type with locking screw mounted on face of ductwork. For all other areas, where damper adjustments cannot be accessed through the ceiling, regulators shall be the concealed type with adjustable cover plate. J.On the inlet and outlet of each piece of air moving equipment, unless noted otherwise, install a flexible connection made with sufficient slack to render it flexible. K.Where air intakes and/or discharges are indicated on the drawings and no air device is indicated, install 1/4" bird screens over each duct opening set in galvanized steel frames and securely attach to the openings. L.Provide concentric taps on all connections from the main duct to branch ducts. M.Provide stamped steel duct access doors at each fire damper, fire and smoke damper, where control devices occur within ductwork, and as indicated on the drawings. Access doors shall be fully insulated where duct is lined internally. Provide with mounting flange, double thickness door with cam latch, gasket and retaining wire. No tools shall be required to open the access door. N.The minimum size of each access door shall be sufficient to provide adequate access for the intended purpose of installation. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Commissioning: Include testing and verification of functional and operational performance at intended pressure and temp ranges, training for operations maintenance and documentation. Commissioning test pressure shall not exceed the pressure rating to which the ductwork has been designed and fabricated. B. Air Leakage Testing: Test in accordance with ASHRAE 90.1 and with SMANCA HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual, including operation at static pressure on at least 25 percent of the total installed duct area. 3.3 DUCT SEALING A.All exposed duct shall be internally sealed, or gasket sealed fittings shall be used. 1. Duct sealer on exposed joints will not be acceptable. B. All seams, joints and taps must be sealed with a water and air tight sealant. C. Sealer must be a Water Based Duct Sealer designed for use in high velocity air conditioning, refrigeration, ventilating, and air distributing systems up to 15w.g.. It must be suitable for use in both indoor and outdoor applications and exceeds all SMACNA Pressure and Sealing Classes. 1. Duct tape and Foil tape is not an approved sealer. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 AIR DISTRIBUTION MDE Project NO: 191124 233113 - 6 August 2019 END OF SECTION City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR DUCTWORK MDE Project NO: 191124 233150- 1 August 2019 SECTION 233150 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR DUCT WORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to the Work in this Section 1.2 SUMMARY A. Provide all equipment, materials, labor, supervision, and services necessary for or incidental to the installation of all necessary identification items as indicated on the drawings and as specified. B. Contractor shall field verify and coordinate all ductwork hangers and supports, dimensions, clearances, and ductwork elevations with new and existing building structures. C. Submittals: Provide submittals as required in Section 23 05 00 “Common Work Results for HVAC”. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. B. Without additional cost to the Owner, provide such other labor and materials as are required to complete the work of this Section in accordance with the requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, regardless of whether such materials and associated labor are called for elsewhere in these Contract Documents. C. All duct shall be installed in a quality workmanship. Ductwork shall be straight and level. D. Methods of supporting ductwork shall be in accordance with the SMANCA Manual, Section 1 – Low Velocity Systems, unless otherwise shown on the drawings or specifications herein. E. SMANCA – Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association Inc. F. Electrically operated and power actuated tools for installing welded studs and power driven fasteners, shall be listed by a nationally recognized testing agency. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A.Provide submittals as required in section 23 00 10, “Submittal Process.” 1.5 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. 23 31 13: Air Distribution B. 23 07 00: HVAC Insulation PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Type 1: Hangers shall be rod type hangers: Mild Carbon steel, unless otherwise specified: fully threaded with (2) removeable nuts on each end for positioning and locking rod in place. Rods must be galvanized or Cadmium plated. B. Type 2: 1”-1.5” 24 gage galvanized strap. Strap must be fastened to SMANCA standards. C. Type 3: Dyna-Tite Suspension system: Using aviation grade galvanized wire rope and cable locks. This application shall only be acceptable for round exposed duct. D. Hangers for ducts shall be as specified in the SMANCA Manual, with the following exceptions. 1. Lower hanger attachments for rectangular duct with any dimensions 36” wide and above shall be trapeze hangers, supported by minimal 3/8 threaded galvanized rod. 2. Trapeze hangers shall be a minimum 1-1/2 x 1-1/2 x ¼” angle or 1-5/8 Unistrut larger size as required by larger or heavier ductwork. 3. Lower hanger attachments for rectangular duct maximum dimensions less than 30” 24 gage flat strap attached directly to duct. Fasteners penetrating duct must be completely sealed. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR DUCTWORK MDE Project NO: 191124 233150- 2 August 2019 4. Wire used as supports or as banding shall not be acceptable. 5. Threaded support rods shall utilize sufficient support, jamb, and lock nuts to allow adjustment for duct heights. E.Exposed duct hangers shall be: Duct Mate Round duct hangers, Model: GRDM4703GA or similar. 2.2 MISCELLANEOUS FASTENERS AND UPPER HANGER ATTACHMENTS A. Machine Bolts and Nuts: Galvanized or cadmium plated steel. B. Steel “C” clamps with lock nuts. Elcen Co. No. 29L, with 25B steel retaining clips. C. Hilti KH-EZI All-thread concrete screw anchor D. Hilti HMN nail in anchor. E. Hilti HDI-P Threaded rod expansion fitting. F. Sheet metal fasteners shall be a minimum #10x3/4 sheet metal screw. 2.3 BRANCH FITTINGS, JOINTS & TURNING VANES A. Provide supports necessary for lengths over 16” or heights over 8”. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 UPPER HANGER ATTACHMENTS A. General Note: Upper hanger attachments for ductwork shall be secured to overhead structural steel or steel bar joists wherever possible, unless otherwise specified. B. When required by ductwork support spacing schedules, provide intermediate structural steel members, framed to span the structural steel or steel bar joists. The minimum size of structural steel members, for the use of intermediate steel framing, shall be 2-1/2 x 2-1/2 x ¼” steel angles. Steel members shall be shop primed prior to installation. Intermediate steel shall be sized for span and load to show no deflection. C. Secure upper hanger attachments to bar joists at the panel points of joists. D. Under no circumstance shall any hole be drilled in structural steel members. E. Exercise extreme caution in the field drilling of holes in precast concrete work, to avoid damage to reinforcing. Power driven types of fasteners shall be utilized in the attachment of hangers to precast concrete work. F. Upper hanger attachments shall be specified in the manual, with the following exceptions: 1. Do not use flat bar, bent rod, or power activated drive pins as upper hanger attachments in concrete construction. Expansion nails or concrete screws shall be the only approved product. G. Attachments to structural steel: Secure to steel beams with beam clamps, welded studs, or “C” clamps with locking nuts and safety bars. H.Under no circumstances shall power activated fasteners be used unless with prior written consent from the Mechanical Engineer’s Representative. I. Do not attach welded studs or power activated fasteners to steel less than 3/16” in thickness. J. Attachments to Cellular Steel or Fluted Metal Decks: Do not support ductwork from cellular or fluted metal roof decks. Attach hangers to structural steel members wherever possible. K. Riser Supports: Support vertical ducts by means of two steel angles or channels, anchor bolted to the floor slab or adjacent structural member at every floor through which the riser passes. L. Steel angle or channel support sizes shall be as follows: Max Side Dimension Support Angle Support Channel 36” 1 x 1x 1-1/8 1 x ½ x 1/8 48” 1-1/2 x 1-1/2 x 1/8 1-1/2 x ¾ x 1/8 60” 2 x 2 x 1/8 2 x 1 x 1/8 Over 60” 2-1/2 x 2-1/2 x 3/16 2 x 1 x 3/16 City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR DUCTWORK MDE Project NO: 191124 233150- 3 August 2019 3.2 DUCT HANGER SPACING A.Duct hanger spacing shall be in strict accordance with SMANCA and as follows: 1. Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Sizes: Max. Side of Duct Perimeter Rod Pair at 10’ Spacing Rod Pair at 8’ Spacing Rod Pair at 4’ Spacing 0-72 ¼”¼”¼” 73-96 3/8”¼”¼” 97-120 3/8”3/8”¼” 121-168 ½”3/8”3/8” 169-192 ½”½”3/8” 2. Round Hanger Strap. Duct Diameter Strap Hangers Max Spacing 4-26 (1) 1” x 22 Ga.10’ 27-36 (1) 1” x 18 Ga.10’ 37-50 (1) 1” x 18 Ga.10’ 51-60 (2) 1” x 18 Ga.10’ City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 HVAC POWER VENTILATORS MDE Project NO: 191124 233423 - 1 August 2019 SECTION 233423 - HVAC POWER VENTILATORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to the Work in this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Provide all equipment, materials, labor, supervision, and services necessary for or incidental to the installation of all necessary air handling items as shown on the drawings and/or specified. B. Work Included: 1. Fans 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. B. Without additional cost to the Owner, provide such other labor and materials as are required to complete the work of this Section in accordance with the requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, regardless of whether such materials and associated labor are called for elsewhere in these Contract Documents. When requested, provide Architect with manufacturer's certificate that materials meet or exceed minimum requirements as specified. C. All roof mounted equipment shall be factory applied powder coated to match the color of the standing seam roof. No exceptions. In the case that the factory does not have this process a after market application will be acceptable with submitted approval to the engineer. 1.4 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not operate fans for any purpose until ductwork is clean, filters in place, bearings lubricated, and fan has been test run under observation. 1.5 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Provide two sets of belts for each fan, not including the set installed on the fans. Tag sets to identify fan. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A.Provide submittals as required in section 23 00 10, “Submittal Process.” PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Performance Ratings: Conform to AMCA 210 and bear the AMCA Certified Rating Seal. B. Sound Ratings: AMCA 301, tested to AMCA 300, and bear AMCA Certified Sound Rating Seal. C. Fabrication: Conform to AMCA 99. D. Performance Base: Sea level conditions. E. Temperature Limit: Maximum 400 degrees F. F. Static and Dynamic Balance: Eliminate vibration or noise transmission to occupied areas. G. Greenheck, Cook or Penn may be used if they are equal in all respects to those specified. Provide manufacturers accessories as scheduled. Provide extra sheaves and belts if required to meet scheduled performance. H. Base fan performance at standard conditions (density 0.075 Lb/ft^3). I. Each fan shall bear a permanently affixed manufacturer's nameplate containing the model number and individual serial number for future identification. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 HVAC POWER VENTILATORS MDE Project NO: 191124 233423 - 2 August 2019 2.2 SPUN ALUMINUM CENTRIFUGAL UPLBAST: A. The fan wheel shall be centrifugal backward inclined, constructed of aluminum and shall include a wheel cone carefully matched to the inlet cone for precise running tolerances. Wheels shall be statically and dynamically balanced. The fan housing shall be constructed of heavy gauge aluminum with a rigid internal support structure. Windbands shall have a rolled bead for added strength and shall be joined to curbcaps with a leakproof, continuously welded seam. B. Motors shall be heavy duty ball bearing type, carefully matched to the fan load, and furnished at the specified voltage, phase and enclosure. Motors and drives shall be mounted on vibration isolators, out of the airstream. Fresh air for motor cooling shall be drawn into the motor compartment from an area free of discharge contaminants. Motors shall be readily accessible for maintenance. Drive frame assemblies shall be constructed of heavy gauge steel and mounted on vibration isolators. C. Precision ground and polished fan shafts shall be mounted in permanently sealed, lubricated pillow block ball bearings. Bearings shall be selected for a minimum (L10) life in excess of 100,000 hours at maximum cataloged operating speed. Drives shall be sized for a minimum of 150% of driven horsepower. Pulleys shall be of the fully machined cast iron type, keyed and securely attached to the wheel and motor shafts. D. Motor pulleys shall be adjustable for final system balancing. A disconnect switch shall be factory installed and wired from the fan motor to a junction box installed within the motor compartment. A conduit chase shall be provided through the curb cap to the motor compartment for ease of electrical wiring. E. Standard with UL Listing for "Power Ventilators for Smoke Control Systems" for 500 degrees F for 4 hours and 1,000 degrees F for 15 min. Units have centrifugal backward inclined steel wheels with embossments on the blades and cooling fins for added strength and cooling. Flange Safety Vibration Isolators are oversized to accommodate the added heat and weight. Unit has heat baffle to reduce motor compartment temp. Unit shall have Dual Belt and Pulley System. 2.3 ROOF MOUNTED CENTRIFUGAL SUPPLY BELT DRIVE A. Fans selected shall be capable of accommodating static pressure and flow variations of +/- 15% of scheduled values. B. Each fan shall be belt driven in AMCA arrangement 9 only with wheel secured to the fan shaft. C. Fans are to be equipped with lifting lugs. D. After fabrication all carbon steel components shall be cleaned and chemically treated by a phosphatizing process to insure proper removal of grease, oil, scale, etc. Fan shall then be coated with a minimum of 2-4 mils of Permatector (Polyester Urethane), electrostatically applied and baked. Finish color shall be industrial gray. Coating must exceed 1,000-hour salt spray under ASTM B117 test method. E. Fan housing to be aerodynamically designed with punched inlet and outlet flanges for ductwork connection on inline fans. Fan housing shall be constructed of rolled steel with a continuous seam weld. Housing and bearing support shall be constructed of welded structural steel members to prevent vibration and rigidly support the shaft and bearings. OSHA compliant weather hood, or an OSHA compliant belt guard shall be included to completely cover the motor pulley and belt(s). F. Curb cap shall be constructed of painted steel and welded to the fan housing. Hoods shall be inter-locking panel style for superior strength. Hood construction shall be painted steel. One-half inch galvanized mesh bird screen shall be horizontally mounted in the intake perimeter of the hood. G. The fan wheel shall be of the non-overloading backward inclined centrifugal type. Wheels shall be statically and dynamically balanced to balance grade G6.3 per ANSI S2.19. Wheel shall be constructed with completely welded aluminum. The maximum pressure capabilities shall be 4.5 inches W.G. H. Aluminum parts shall not require protective coating. I. The wheel and fan inlet shall be carefully matched and shall have precise running tolerances for maximum performance and operating efficiency. J. Motors shall meet or exceed EPACT (Energy Policy ACT) efficiencies. Motors to be NEMA T-frame, 1800 or 3600 RPM, Open Drip Proof (ODP) or Totally Enclosed Fan Cooled (TEFC) with a 1.15 service factor. K. Drive belts and sheaves shall be sized for 150% of the fan operating brake horsepower, and shall be readily and easily accessible for service, if required. L. Fan shaft to be turned and polished steel that is sized so the first critical speed is at least 25% over the maximum operating speed for each pressure class. M. Fan shaft bearings shall be Air Handling Quality, bearings shall be heavy-duty grease lubricated, self- aligning or roller pillow block type. N. Air Handling Quality bearings to be designed with low swivel torque to allow the outer race of the bearing to pivot or swivel within the cast pillow block. Bearings shall be 100% tested for noise and City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 HVAC POWER VENTILATORS MDE Project NO: 191124 233423 - 3 August 2019 vibration by the manufacturer. Bearings shall be 100% tested to insure the inner race diameter is within tolerance to prevent vibration. O. Bearings shall be selected for a basic rating fatigue life (L-10) of 80,000 hours at maximum operating speed for each pressure class Bearings shall be fixed to the fan shaft using concentric mounting locking collars, which reduce vibration, increase service life, and improve serviceability. Bearings that use set screws shall not be allowed. Bearings shall have extended lube lines with Zerk fittings to allow for lubrication. P. Roof exhaust fans shall be upblast centrifugal belt driven type. The fan wheel shall be centrifugal backward inclined, constructed of aluminum and shall include a wheel cone carefully matched to the inlet cone for precise running tolerances. Wheels shall be statically and dynamically balanced. The fan housing shall be constructed of heavy gauge aluminum with a rigid internal support structure. Windbands shall have a rolled bead for added strength and shall be joined to curbcaps with a leakproof, continuously welded seam. Q. Motors shall be heavy duty ball bearing type, carefully matched to the fan load, and furnished at the specified voltage, phase and enclosure. Motors and drives shall be mounted on vibration isolators, out of the airstream. Fresh air for motor cooling shall be drawn into the motor compartment from an area free of discharge contaminants. Motors shall be readily accessible for maintenance. Drive frame assemblies shall be constructed of heavy gauge steel and mounted on vibration isolators. R. Precision ground and polished fan shafts shall be mounted in permanently sealed, lubricated pillow block ball bearings. Bearings shall be selected for a minimum (L50) life in excess of 200,000 hours at maximum cataloged operating speed. Drives shall be sized for a minimum of 150% of driven horsepower. Pulleys shall be of the fully machined cast iron type, keyed and securely attached to the wheel and motor shafts. S. Motor pulleys shall be adjustable for final system balancing. A disconnect switch shall be factory installed and wired from the fan motor to a junction box installed within the motor compartment. A conduit chase shall be provided through the curb cap to the motor compartment for ease of electrical wiring. T. A disconnect switch shall be factory installed and wired from the fan motor to a junction box installed within the motor compartment. U. A fan conduit chase shall be provided through the curb cap to the motor compartment for ease of installation. 2.4 ROOF MOUNTED UPBLAST BELT DRIVE A. Fans selected shall be capable of accommodating static pressure and flow variations of +/- 15% of scheduled values. B. Each fan shall be belt driven in AMCA arrangement 9 only with wheel secured to the fan shaft. C. Fans are to be equipped with lifting lugs. D. After fabrication all carbon steel components shall be cleaned and chemically treated by a phosphatizing process to insure proper removal of grease, oil, scale, etc. Fan shall then be coated with a minimum of 2-4 mils of Permatector (Polyester Urethane), electrostatically applied and baked. Finish color shall be industrial gray. Coating must exceed 1,000-hour salt spray under ASTM B117 test method. E. Fan housing to be aerodynamically designed with punched inlet and outlet flanges for ductwork connection on inline fans. Fan housing shall be constructed of rolled steel with a continuous seam weld. Housing and bearing support shall be constructed of welded structural steel members to prevent vibration and rigidly support the shaft and bearings. OSHA compliant weatherhood or an OSHA compliant belt guard shall be included to completely cover the motor pulley and belt(s). F. Curb cap shall be constructed of painted steel and welded to the fan housing. G. Windbands shall be constructed of heavy gauge painted steel with reinforced edges and bolted seams. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 HVAC POWER VENTILATORS MDE Project NO: 191124 233423 - 4 August 2019 H. Butterfly dampers are to be supplied on all fans size 18 and greater. For fans smaller than size 18, stack cap dampers shall be provided. All dampers shall be constructed of aluminum. I. The fan wheel shall be of the non-overloading backward inclined centrifugal type. Wheels shall be statically and dynamically balanced to balance grade G6.3 per ANSI S2.19. Wheel shall be constructed with completely welded aluminum. The maximum pressure capabilities shall be 4.5 inches W.G. J. Aluminum parts shall not require protective coating. K. The wheel and fan inlet shall be carefully matched and shall have precise running tolerances for maximum performance and operating efficiency. L. Motors shall meet or exceed EPACT (Energy Policy ACT) efficiencies. Motors to be NEMA T-frame, 1800 or 3600 RPM, Open Drip Proof (ODP) or Totally Enclosed Fan Cooled (TEFC) with a 1.15 service factor. M. Drive belts and sheaves shall be sized for 150% of the fan operating brake horsepower, and shall be readily and easily accessible for service, if required. N. Fan shaft to be turned and polished steel that is sized so the first critical speed is at least 25% over the maximum operating speed for each pressure class. O. Fan shaft bearings shall be Air Handling Quality, bearings shall be heavy-duty grease lubricated, self- aligning or roller pillow block type. P. Air Handling Quality bearings to be designed with low swivel torque to allow the outer race of the bearing to pivot or swivel within the cast pillow block. Bearings shall be 100% tested for noise and vibration by the manufacturer. Bearings shall be 100% tested to insure the inner race diameter is within tolerance to prevent vibration. Q. Bearings shall be selected for a basic rating fatigue life (L-10) of 80,000 hours at maximum operating speed for each pressure class Bearings shall be fixed to the fan shaft using concentric mounting locking collars, which reduce vibration, increase service life, and improve serviceability. Bearings that use set screws shall not be allowed. Bearings shall have extended lube lines with Zerk fittings to allow for lubrication. R. Roof exhaust fans shall be upblast centrifugal belt driven type. The fan wheel shall be centrifugal backward inclined, constructed of aluminum and shall include a wheel cone carefully matched to the inlet cone for precise running tolerances. Wheels shall be statically and dynamically balanced. The fan housing shall be constructed of heavy gauge aluminum with a rigid internal support structure. Windbands shall have a rolled bead for added strength and shall be joined to curbcaps with a leakproof, continuously welded seam. S. Motors shall be heavy duty ball bearing type, carefully matched to the fan load, and furnished at the specified voltage, phase and enclosure. Motors and drives shall be mounted on vibration isolators, out of the airstream. Fresh air for motor cooling shall be drawn into the motor compartment from an area free of discharge contaminants. Motors shall be readily accessible for maintenance. Drive frame assemblies shall be constructed of heavy gauge steel and mounted on vibration isolators. T. Precision ground and polished fan shafts shall be mounted in permanently sealed, lubricated pillow block ball bearings. Bearings shall be selected for a minimum (L50) life in excess of 200,000 hours at maximum cataloged operating speed. Drives shall be sized for a minimum of 150% of driven horsepower. Pulleys shall be of the fully machined cast iron type, keyed and securely attached to the wheel and motor shafts. U. Motor pulleys shall be adjustable for final system balancing. A disconnect switch shall be factory installed and wired from the fan motor to a junction box installed within the motor compartment. A conduit chase shall be provided through the curb cap to the motor compartment for ease of electrical wiring. V. A disconnect switch shall be factory installed and wired from the fan motor to a junction box installed within the motor compartment W. A fan conduit chase shall be provided through the curb cap to the motor compartment for ease of installation. X. Variable Frequency Motor Controller: Refer Section 23 2923 “Variable Frequency Motor Controllers”. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 HVAC POWER VENTILATORS MDE Project NO: 191124 233423 - 5 August 2019 2.5 UTILITY SET FANS A. Description: Direct-drive centrifugal fans consisting of housing, wheel, fan shaft, bearings, motor and disconnect switch, drive assembly, and accessories. B. Housing: Fabricated of galvanized steel with side sheets fastened with a deep lock seam or welded to scroll sheets. 1. Housing Discharge Arrangement: Adjustable to eight standard positions. C. Fan Wheels: Single-width, single inlet; welded to cast-iron or cast-steel hub and spun-steel inlet cone, with hub keyed to shaft. 1. Blade Materials: Aluminum. 2. Blade Type: Backward inclined. D. Fan Shaft: Turned, ground, and polished steel; keyed to wheel hub. E. Shaft Bearings: Pre-lubricated and sealed, self-aligning, pillow-block-type ball bearings with ABMA 9, L50 of 200,000 hours. F. Accessories: Provide as scheduled for each individual fan. 1. Inlet and Outlet: Flanged. 2. Companion Flanges: Rolled flanges for duct connections of same material as housing. Backdraft Dampers: Gravity actuated with counterweight and interlocking aluminum blades with felt edges in steel frame installed on fan discharge. 3. Access Door: Gasketed door in scroll with latch-type handles. 4. Scroll Dampers: Single-blade damper installed at fan scroll top with adjustable linkage. 5. Inlet Screens: Removable wire mesh. 6. Drain Connections: NPS 3/4 threaded coupling drain connection installed at lowest point of housing. 7. Weather Hoods: Weather resistant with stamped vents over motor and drive compartment. 8. Discharge Dampers: Assembly with parallel blades constructed of two plates formed around and to shaft, channel frame, sealed ball bearings, with blades linked outside of airstream to single control lever of same material as housing. 2.6 V-BELT DRIVES A. All v-belt drives shall be designed for a minimum of 50% overload. Where more than one belt is required, matched sets shall be used. All belt drives shall be furnished with belt guards. Belts on fans 10hp and over shall be Gates Poly-Chain. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install units with manufacturer recommended clearances for service and maintenance. C. Install fans with resilient mountings and flexible electrical leads. D. Install flexible connections between fan inlet and discharge ductwork. Ensure metal bands of connectors are parallel with minimum one inch flex between ductwork and fan while running. E. Install fan restraining snubbers as required. Adjust snubbers to prevent tension in flexible connectors when fan is operating. F. Install vent sets on equipment rails. G. Provide fixed sheaves and belts if required to meet design conditions for final air balance. H. Provide safety screen where inlet or outlet is exposed. I. Provide backdraft dampers on discharge of exhaust fans where indicated. J. Label units according to requirements specified in Division 23 Section "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment". K. Refer to Division 23 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC" for testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures. END OF SECTION City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 MDE Project No. 191124 VEHICLE EXHAUST REMOVAL/FILTRATION 233516 - 1 August 2019 SECTION 233516 – VEHICLE EXHUAST REMOVAL/FILTRATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to the Work in this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Provide all equipment, materials, labor, supervision and services necessary for or incidental to the installation of all air distribution items as indicated on the drawings and as specified. B. Work Included: 1. The air filtration system shall be a totally automatic activated system that also contains a manual override system. The system shall be hands free, to allow emergency personnel to respond to the emergency at hand. The system shall automatically activate when the bay doors open, when apparatus egress and ingress the fire station or by means of several other methods as stated within. The filtration system shall operate for a minimum of twenty (20) minutes to complete station air cleaning. The system shall have the capability to increase this time to a maximum of sixty (60) minutes on an initial activation. Additional manual override switches shall allow for each individual unit to operate on a 24/7 basis as deemed necessary by the end user initiate all units to operate on a predetermined set time; a reset to bypass the timer and terminate activation with a cascading down of units as they turn off. 2. The timer control shall be designed to sequentially start and stop the exhaust capture air filtration units to avoid power surges and contain only UL approved components. The timer control box shall be one hundred (100) percent low voltage (24V max) to eliminate shock hazards to personnel. 3. Provide additional parts as part of base bid. a. 2 Additional Filters per Unit. b. Indicator lights. c. Belts (if any). C. Submittals: Provide submittals as required in Section 23 0500,”Common Work Results for HVAC”. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. B. Without additional cost to the Owner, provide such other labor and materials as are required to complete the work of this Section in accordance with the requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, regardless of whether such materials and associated labor are called for elsewhere in these Contract Documents. C. When requested, provide the Architect with manufacturer's certificate that materials and methods meet or exceed minimum requirements as specified. D. The system shall have documented evidence of having been successfully tested to meet regulatory health and safety standards in at least one (1) active Fire/EMS departments. E. The test shall have been conducted under the direction of an independent industrial hygienist. One of the submitted test must show, with no exceptions, as a matter of personnel health and safety, that the system meets and/or surpasses federal regulatory standards for ACGIH, NFPA, BOCA, ASHRAE, EPA, OSHA, PEL (short term), TLV/STEL, and NIOSH. Test parameters shall include VOCs, NO2, SO2, CO, Particulates and Diesel Exhaust Particulates as one of the standards of measurement. The testing shall have been performed by a certified industrial hygienist and shall verify performance standards with the fire apparatus idling in bays, on the tarmac, and entering/exiting bays as would occur during normal station operation 1.4 WARRANTY A. Warranty shall be of at least two (2) years on all system parts and labor, excluding filters. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 MDE Project No. 191124 VEHICLE EXHAUST REMOVAL/FILTRATION 233516 - 2 August 2019 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 EQUIPMENT A. Basis of Design: AirHAWK Model 3000XL i. No substitutions allowed. B. The filtration equipment shall be delivered and installed as a turnkey system with no requirement for station personnel involvement. The exhaust capture equipment will be self-contained five stage progressive filtration designed system. The system filtration media must be verified by the manufacturer to be capable of capturing vehicle exhaust with a blower and with a motor capable of a delivered volume of 2750 cfm (cubic feet per minute) meeting NFPA and OSHA Standards. C. Clean, filtered air shall be returned to the apparatus bay areas from the rear of the same system. There will be no heat/air loss or air exhausted to the outside atmosphere. The system equipment will not require building structural modifications. Equipment Features: 1. Ceiling suspended design evenly distributing the unit weight. 2. 208-230 single phase 60Hz Power with no less than a 2750 cfm blower driven by 1hp motor. 3. Utilize a horizontal pull-through design for optimum exhaust elimination. 4. Includes MERV 11 pre-filter, dual V-Bank 98% DOP, MERV 16 primary filter, PCO (photo catalytic oxidation) filter section, and a 2 stage Gas Phase carbon blended with potassium permanganate 50/50 filters. 5. Relocation or re-positioning capabilities, not a permanent fixture type system. 6. Access internally sealed filter replacement compartment door utilizing two (2) bolts to ensure safety in filter access and replacement as well as UL guidelines. 7. There shall be 2 compartment doors to access both the component filter section as well as the motor blower section. This will provide easy access in a safe and efficient manner to replace filters or work on the blower/motor components. 8. Red LED filter change indicator to be visible from the floor level. 9. Visible green LED run light. 10. Capable of 24/7 operation 11. Maximum 65db sound level when in operation. 12. Accommodate any vehicle or vehicle arrangement. 13. Accommodate any ceiling height or ceiling construction. 14. Must have rear baffle box to exhaust clean air back into bay areas through a minimum of more than 30 directional ports so as to evenly distribute return clean air and provide a fan sound control system for apparatus bay areas. D. Equipment Activation: The air filtration system shall work in tandem with and include an automatic, hands free, activation system featuring: 1. Operation engineered through a wall mount control panel. 2. No maintenance will be required over the entire life of the system. Excluding filters 3. Housed in a NEMA 4x enclosure complying with UL and CSA specifications. 4. Control Panel to contain a 60-minute timer adjustable to operate in 1-minute increments from 1-60 minutes. 5. Control panel switches to allow individual unit manual bypass opting for 24/7 operation. 6. Control panel to have an external timer Bypass switch for immediate system shutdown. System to automatically reactivate under any normal activation inputs. 7. A photoelectric eye to span up to 200 contiguous feet of bay doors and be able to operate at least seven (6-7) feet off the floor. Doors not in line with other doors or having obstructions with over four (4) feet of wall or barrier protrusions eliminating a clear line of site will require a separate photoelectric eye beam. 8. Apparatus leaving bays must activate all units within the apparatus bay. 9. Control panel engineering to sequentially start filtration units with two (2) second delay to avoid station power surges. 10. Control panel must have the capability to accommodate up to six (6) or ten (10) filtration units per control unit for future system expansion. 11. System shall be able to accept up to three (3) alternate methods of activation including: a. Apparatus ignition activation b. Activation in response to signal from CO/NO2 monitor utilizing ACI Q-5 or equivalent E. Equipment Safety: The system shall include the following safetyfeatures: 1. All Control panel control wiring shall be low voltage (24 VAC max) to eliminate electrical hazard. 2. Control panel will house internal visible LED indicators for all “ON” units. 3. All components must be UL registered. 4. Filtration units shall have an integral thermal overload to work in tandem with electrical panel City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 MDE Project No. 191124 VEHICLE EXHAUST REMOVAL/FILTRATION 233516 - 3 August 2019 breakers. 5. Filtration unit blower and wiring to be contained in a single blower box compartment, inaccessible to personnel. 6. System shall be capable of cycling up when turned ON to avoid power surges. 7. Filter tracks to ensure safe filter replacement. F. Equipment Filters: 1. All filtration media shall be separately housed in a self-contained compartment with sealing on the filter door to avoid gas/particulate bypass, tight fit, slide track, filter compartment to eliminate diesel and contaminant bypass of the individual filters. The filter door closure shall contain seals to avoid bypass air. 2. Pre-filter Panel: a. Filter shall be capable of providing a minimum efficiency reporting value of MERV 11 when evaluated under the guideline of ASHRAE Standard 52.2.19. b. Filter shall be no less than 24”x24”x4” (nominal), including frame, incorporating filtration media no less than 26.6 ft2. c. Initial filter airflow resistance shall be maximum 0.25 in w.g. d. Filter airflow capacity at 300 fpm (feet per minute) shall be 1200 cfm. e. Filter airflow capacity at 500 fpm shall be 2000 cfm at 0.25 in w.g. f. Filter frame shall be composed of moisture resistant heavy duty beverage board frame. g. Filter shall be two (2) piece construction with double wall thickness around the outer edge and integral die cut cross member. h. Filter pleats shall have individual die cut fingers. i. Adhesive used shall be highly water repellent and cover the entire inside of the die cut frame. j. Filter pleat supports shall be composed of galvanized steel. k. Filter shall be classified by Underwriters Laboratories as UL Class 2. l. Filter shall be designed to perform up to six (6) to twenty-four (24) months and longer, based on environmental conditions and use. 3. High Efficiency Particle Filter Second Stage a. No less than 98% DOP MERV 16 ASHRAE rating, V-bank foundation DOP design to encompass a minimum surface of 200 ft2 and capable of removing particulate as small as 0.3µ in size. b. Filter shall be enclosed in a heavy-duty, moisture resistant die cut frame to eliminate warping, cracking, or distortion under normal operation conditions. c. Filter shall have integral pleat separators to provide pleat stabilization. Filter shall not contain aluminum or steel separators in between filter strata of each V bank section. d. Filter shall be effective at 100% relative humidity, turbulent air flow, intermittent exposure to water and repeated fan shutdowns. e. Initial filter airflow resistance at 500 fpm shall be 0.80 in w.g. f. Filter shall be rated to work from 0°F to 180°F. g. Filter shall be able to handle airflow volumes up to 3000 cfm. h. Filter perimeter header shall be secured by standard latches or clamping devices. i. Filter shall be leak free around the entireperimeter. j. Each mini-pleat pack shall be sealed within the heat resistant plastic end panels and galvanized steel support struts. k. Mini-pleats are to be separated by continuous beads of thermo-setting adhesive, not steel separators between mini-pleats. l. Filter shall measure no less than 24”x24”x12” (nominal), including frame and fit snugly into the track. m. Filter cannot be a flat face filter to avoid intense filter blockage. n. Filter shall be classified by Underwriters Laboratories as UL 900 Class 2. o. Filter shall be designed to perform up to twenty-four (24) to forty-eight (48) months and longer, based on environmental conditions and use. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 MDE Project No. 191124 VEHICLE EXHAUST REMOVAL/FILTRATION 233516 - 4 August 2019 4. Ga a. s Phase Carbon/ potassium permanganate 2 Stage Filter: Filter shall contain a minimum of 26 lbs. of carbon blend with potassium permanganate, to include fifty (50) percent active premium grade coconut shell carbon blended with fifty (50) percent potassium permanganate b. Filter frame weight shall be separatelycalculated. c. Filter shall measure no less than 24”x24”x12” (nominal), includingframe. d. Filter shall have V-bank design, not flat face surface, to provide extensive capture, e. extended life and fit snugly intothetrack. Filter shall ship with an after filter to prevent carbon duct from migrating downstream. f. Filter shall have galvanized steel supportstrutsonboth sides of the filter. g. Filter end caps shall be made from resilient ABS plastic. h. The honeycomb panels containing the carbon granules shall be water resistant. i. Non-volatile hot melt glue shall be used to bond the carbon panels, end caps and steel j. support members. Initial filter airflow resistance at 500 fpm shall be 0.38 in w.g. k. Filter cannot show evidence of air pockets between absorbent carbon/potassium permanganate. l. The gas phase filter shall be capable of controlling and eliminating VOCs, chemicals and gas of diesel contamination within the apparatusbays. m. Manufacturer shall provide evidence of facility certification to ISO 9001:2000. n. Filter shall be designed to perform up to twenty-four (24) to forty-eight (48) months and longer, based on environmental conditions anduse. 5. Photo Catalytic Oxidation (PCO) Section a Equipped with 2 UV lamps of at least 3 milliwatt / CM². b UV-C 254 nanometers. c. Titanium dioxide Ti02 coated grid with a minimum of 70 square feet of Ti02 covered surface area. d. Converts dangerous carcinogenic substances into harmless substances of CO2 and water vapor. e. Destroys airborne viruses. f. Decontaminates to keep the apparatus bay area environment fresh and healthy. 6. Carbon Monoxide/Nitrogen Dioxide (CO/NO2) Activation: a. The ACI Q-5, or equivalent, shall be integrated into the system for additional safety operation. The CO/NO2 monitor must be connected to the control panel to engage the air filtration units automatically once the gas detector measures unsafe levels of CO and/or NO2 in the apparatus bays. The air filtration units are to operate until these gases are reduced to OSHA acceptable levels. These are two (2) separate monitor sensors. The CO monitor shall be installed within the breathing zone five to six feet from the floor. The NO2 monitor sensor shall be installed a minimum of one to four feet from the ceiling. b. When the sensors are activated, they shall be interlocked to have overhead grilles 152 and 153 to close and overhead sectionals doors 142 and 144 to open half-way till such time that the sensors are no longer activated or 10 minutes, whichever is longer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Installation of the entire vehicle exhaust/air filtration system shall be performed by the successful manufacturer, or approved manufacturer’s qualified installers with experience of a minimum of Ten (10) similar department installations of the same type of equipment. Successful vendor is required to coordinate installation with the project mechanical and electrical contractors. The electrical contractor shall only be responsible for the electrical energy source to each filtration unit which shall be capable of providing the proper voltage and current requirements of the electrical components within the system. The vendor shall provide complete Installation, Operation and Service Instruction Manuals for each installation. END OF SECTION City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES MDE Project NO: 191124 233713 - 1 August 2019 SECTION 233713 - DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS AND GRILLES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to the Work in this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Provide all equipment, materials, labor, supervision, and services necessary for or incidental to the installation of all necessary air handling items as shown on the drawings and/or specified. B. Work Included: 1. Air Supply and Grilles. 2. Louvers. C.Submittals: Provide submittals as required in section 23 00 10, “Submittal Process.” 1. Submit schedule of outlets and inlets indicating type, size, location, application, and noise level. 2. Review requirements of outlets and inlets as to size, finish, and type of mounting prior to submitting product data and schedules of outlets and inlets. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. B. Under no circumstances shall OBD’s or butterfly dampers be used on any registers. In accessible areas manual dampers shall be used. In hard lid ceiling areas remote cable dampers shall be used. Access panels shall not be used to access any damper in a hard lid ceiling. C. Without additional cost to the Owner, provide such other labor and materials as are required to complete the work of this Section in accordance with the requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, regardless of whether such materials and associated labor are called for elsewhere in these Contract Documents. When requested, provide Architect with manufacturer's certificate that materials meet or exceed minimum requirements as specified. D. Test and rate performance of air outlets and inlets in accordance with ADC Equipment Test Code 1062 and ASHRAE 70. E. Test and rate performance of louvers in accordance with AMCA 500. F. Exposed duct. 1. All exposed drops shall utilize round diffusers. Under no circumstances shall square diffusers be used on exposed duct. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 AIR SUPPLIES AND RETURNS: A. Grilles, registers and ceiling outlets shall be as scheduled on the Drawings. Devices shall be the type, size, capacity, performance, and by the manufacturer scheduled or approved equal. If a manufacturer other than the one scheduled is used, the sizes shown on the Drawings shall be checked for performance, noise level, face velocity, throw, pressure drop, etc., before the submittal is made. Selections shall meet the manufacturer's own published data for the above performance criteria. The throw shall be such that the velocity at the end of the throw in the five foot occupancy zone will be not more than 50 FPM nor less than 25 FPM. Noise levels shall not exceed those published in the ASHRAE Guide for the type of space being served (NC level). B. Locations of outlets on Drawings are approximate and shall be coordinated with other trades to make symmetrical patterns and shall be governed by the established pattern of the lighting fixtures or architectural reflected ceiling plan. Where called for on the schedules, the grilles, registers and ceiling outlets shall be provided with deflecting devices and manual damper. These shall be the standard product of the manufacturer, subject to review by the Architect, and equal to brand scheduled. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES MDE Project NO: 191124 233713 - 2 August 2019 C. All adjustable pattern lay-in type-ceiling diffusers shall be adjustable without the use of tools. D. Linear slot diffusers shall be used in all areas shown on documents for both the supply and return grills. E. All ceiling mounted devices shall be provided with frames compatible with the ceiling type. Coordinate air device frame type and color with architectural reflected ceiling plans and Architect's room finish schedule to match adjacent surface in which the device will be installed. F. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Price 2. Titus 2.2 LOUVERS A. Aluminum fixed blade louvers shall be extruded aluminum, stationary stormproof type, with a drain gutter in each blade. Blades and frames shall be minimum 0.1 inch thick with reinforcing bosses and shall be of 6063-T5 alloy. Head, jamb and sill shall be of one piece structural member of 6063-T5 Alloy with integral calking slot and retaining bead. Supports and blades shall have provision for expansion and contraction. All fastenings shall be stainless steel or aluminum. Louvers shall be free of all scratches, blemishes and defects. Sizes shall be as shown on the Drawings. Louvers shall have a minimum free area of 50% and a maximum pressure drop of 0.02 inches of water at 500 feet per minute air velocity. B. Structural supports shall be provided and designed by the louver manufacturer to carry a wind load of not less than thirty-five pounds per square foot (35 psi). C. Provide louvers with removable bird screens, consisting of aluminum frame with mitered corners and 0.063 inch (1.6 mm) diameter 1/2 inch aluminum wire mesh. Bird screen shall be attached to interior of louver with sheet metal screws or clips. D. Provide backdraft dampers adjacent to each wall louver in all cases with exception of louvers that provide the introduction of combustion air. E. Louver finish shall be as directed by Architect. F. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Greenheck 2. Ruskin 3. Pottorff 2.3 GOOSENECKS A. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA Low Pressure Duct Construction Standards of minimum 18 gage galvanized steel. B. Mount on minimum 14 inch high curb base where size exceeds 9 x 9 inch PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install items in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. B. Check location of outlets and inlets and make necessary adjustments in position to conform to architectural features, symmetry, and lighting arrangement. C. Install diffusers to ductwork with air tight connection. D. Provide balancing dampers on duct take-off to diffusers, and grilles and registers, regardless of whether dampers are specified as part of the diffuser, or grille and register assembly. E. Paint ductwork visible behind air outlets and inlets matte black. If grille is not ducted then provide insulated boot with side opening in order to prevent visible systems above the ceiling. F. Grille security level shall match or exceed the type of ceiling/wall the grille is installed in. END OF SECTION City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 COMMERCIAL KITCHEN HOODS MDE Project NO: 191124 233813 - 1 August 2019 SECTION 233813 - COMMERCIAL-KITCHEN HOODS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION This section specifies food service, grease-extracting, energy saving, exhaust ventilators. 1.2 DEFINATIONS A. Ventilator, kitchen hood, hood and canopy; for purposes of this specification section, these terms all have the same definition. B. UL Listed grease extractor: a slotted (not mesh) type grease extractor that has been tested and rated by Underwriters Laboratories. C. Eyebrow, compensating, short circuit, short cycle types are not allowed. 1.3 RELATED WORK A. Section 05 50 00, METAL FABRICATIONS: Supports for Ventilators. E. Section 22 11 00, FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION: Plumbing Connections. F. Section 21 10 00, WATER-BASED FIRE-SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS: Section 21 13 13, WET- PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS: Building Fire-Protection System. G. Section 23 34 00, HVAC FANS: Up-blast kitchen hood exhaust fans. H. Section 26 05 21, LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES (600 VOLTS AND BELOW): Electrical Connections. 1.4 QUALITY CONTROL A. Installer Qualifications: Experienced in food service equipment installation or supervised by an experienced food service equipment installer. 1. Where required to complete equipment installation, electrician and plumber shall be licensed in jurisdiction where project is located. B. NSF Compliance: Equipment bears NSF Certification Mark or UL Classification Mark indicating compliance with applicable NSF standards, including NSF/ANSI 2, NSF 2-Supplement, and NSF/ANSI 4. C. UL Listing: Equipment has been evaluated according to UL 710, is listed in UL "Heating, Cooling, Ventilating and Cooking Equipment Directory," and is labeled for intended use. D. Fire-Protection Systems: Comply with NFPA 96 and NFPA 17A. E. Welding: Perform welding according to AWS D9.1M/D9.1. F. Seismic Restraint: 1. Comply with requirements in Section 13 05 41, SEISMIC RESTRAINT REQUIREMENTS FOR NON-STRUCTURAL COMPONENTS. 2. Comply with applicable guidelines for seismic restraint of kitchen equipment contained in SMACNA's "Kitchen Ventilation Systems and Food Service Equipment Guidelines," Appendix A. G. In-Use Service: At least one factory-authorized service agency for equipment shall be located in the geographical area of the installation and shall have the ability to provide service within 24 hours after receiving a service call. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A.Provide submittals as required in section 23 00 10, “Submittal Process.” B. Manufacturer’s Literature and Data: 1. Include manufacturer's address and telephone number. 2. Include catalog or model numbers, and illustrations and descriptions of ventilators and accessories. C. Installation Drawings: Show dimensions; method of assembly; and details of installation, adjoining construction, coordination with service utilities, and other work required for a complete installation. D. Field Test Reports: Indicate dates and times of tests and certify test results. E. Operating Instructions: Include operating instructions covering operation of all components and maintenance procedures covering proper cleaning and necessary lubrication or adjustments to controls. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Warrant food service equipment to be free from defects in materials and workmanship in accordance with requirements of "Warranty of Construction" article in FAR clause 52.246-21. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 COMMERCIAL KITCHEN HOODS MDE Project NO: 191124 233813 - 2 August 2019 1.7 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referenced in the text by the basic designation only. B. American Welding Society (AWS): D9.1M/D9.1-2006 ..............Sheet Metal Welding Code C. ASTM International (ASTM): A666-03.............................Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar D. National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (NAAMM): AMP500-06........................Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products, 2006 E. NFPA International (NFPA): #96-2008 ...........................Standard for Ventilation Control and Fire Protection of Commercial Cooking Operations F. NSF International/American National Standards Institute (NSF/ANSI): Standard #2-2009..............Food Service Equipment Standard #4-2009..............Commercial Cooking, Rethermalization, and Powered Hot Food Holding and Transport Equipment G. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association (SMACNA): 1767-2001 .........................Kitchen Ventilation Systems and Food Service Equipment Fabrication and Installation Guidelines H. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL): #710-06 .............................Exhaust Hoods for Commercial Cooking Equipment PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 EXHAUST HOODS A. The hood shall be constructed of a minimum of 18 gauge, (type 304) stainless steel with a #3 finish. Hood shall be constructed using the standing seam method for optimum strength. The seams on the canopy shall be welded liquidtight, and all exposed external welds shall be ground and polished to match the original finish of the metal. Lighter material gauges, alternate material types and finishes (400 series stainless steel, cold rolled steel, etc.) and non-liquidtight welding (tack weld, spot weld, etc.) is not acceptable. Construction shall include corrosion-resistant steel framing members for strength. Short circuit style hoods are not allowed. Hood shall be of a design to lower the CFM requirements by at least 20 to 30 percent. This can be accomplished by various internal configurations or air deflectors. B. Designer to verify CFM and pressure drop with manufacturer. INTERNATIONAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS PER LINEAR FOOT TYPE OF HOOD CFM EXTRA HEAVY-DUTY COOKING APPLIANCES Double Island Canopy (per side)550 Single Island Canopy 700 Wall-Mounted Canopy 550 HEAVY-DUTY COOKING APPLIANCES Double Island Canopy (per side)400 Single Island Canopy 600 Wall-Mounted Canopy 400 MEDIUM-DUTY COOKING APPLIANCES Double Island Canopy (per side)300 Single Island Canopy 500 Wall-Mounted Canopy 300 LIGHT-DUTY COOKING APPLIANCES Double Island Canopy (per side)250 Single Island Canopy 400 Wall-Mounted Canopy 200 C. Hood shall include UL listed and NSF certified grease extractor type, high efficiency cartridge style baffle filters of adequate number and sizes to ensure optimum performance in accordance with manufacturer’s published information. The filter housing shall terminate in a pitched, full length City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 COMMERCIAL KITCHEN HOODS MDE Project NO: 191124 233813 - 3 August 2019 grease trough, which shall drain into a removable grease container. Hood shall be provided with one (1) filter removal tool. D. Vapor proof, UL Listed, recessed // Incandescent // Fluorescent// light fixtures shall be prewired to a junction box situated at the top of the hood for field connection. Wiring shall conform to the requirements of the National Electrical Code (NEC #70). E. Demand ventilator control system shall be installed in the hood. The demand system shall sense the heat/smoke/vapor and shall vary the speed of the exhaust fan according to the need. The demand system shall utilize various types of sensors to accomplish this, such as exhaust temperature sensor, optic sensor, carbon dioxide sensor and other state of the art sensing devices. F. Fire protection systems: Wet chemical with wall-mounted stainless-steel cabinet. 1. Fire-protection system to provide duct, plenum, and surface protection for ventilator and equipment located below ventilator. 2. System interwired with shunt trip breaker and gas solenoid valve of equipment located below ventilator for power and fuel shutoff during system actuation. G. Options 1. Enclosure Panels: 1.3 mm (0.05 inch) thick stainless steel shall be installed; locate between ventilator top and ceiling on all exposed sides. 2. Back shall be // finished // unfinished. (ALL EXPOSED AREAS OF HOOD TO BE FINISHED) 3. Back Splash: Refer to architectural drawing for backsplash detail. 4. Remote monitoring of the demand ventilation control showing what is transpiring during the course of a day. //Provide remote monitoring of the kitchen ventilation system via the DDC control system. Coordinate interface with Section 23 09 23, DIRECT-DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC.// 5. Fresh air make-up plenum incorporated into the front face of the hood or provided at ceiling line immediately in front of the hood. H. Exhaust Ventilator System Requirements: SYMBOL Description Type K1301 Ventilator Single sided- Wall K1302 Ventilator Single sided- Island K1303 Ventilator Dual sided K1304 Fire-protection system with remote, wall-mounted pull station(s) located near door(s) - City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 COMMERCIAL KITCHEN HOODS MDE Project NO: 191124 233813 - 4 August 2019 PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install ventilators level and plumb with access clearances required for operation, maintenance and cleaning and in accordance with the manufacturer's published documentation. B. Coordinate installation of ventilators with overhead supports; see Section 05 50 00, METAL FABRICATIONS. C. Interconnect ventilators to service utilities. D. Install seismic restraints for equipment. E. Provide additional filters, indicator lights & any replicable parts for general servicing. 3.2 FIELD TESTING A. Field Testing, General: Following installation, test ventilators for compliance with specified requirements and those of authorities having jurisdiction. Perform testing after air-handling systems have been balanced and adjusted. B. Smoke Test: 1. Test Conditions: a. Perform tests with cooking equipment served by ventilator turned off. b. Perform tests with supply and exhaust fans serving the food service kitchen area turned on. 2. Test Procedure: Move a smoke bomb around the perimeter of cooking equipment at the top surface. 3. Test-Performance Requirements: No visible smoke shall escape from the ventilator canopy into the room. C. Demand Ventilator Control Test: 1. Test Conditions: a. Perform tests with cooking equipment served by exhaust ventilator turned off. b. Perform tests with air-handling units serving food service kitchen turned on. 2. Test Procedure: Turn on equipment and measure speed of exhaust fan(s) as equipment heats up. Move a smoke bomb around the perimeter of the cooking equipment at the top surface and continue to measure speed of exhaust fan(s). 3. Test-Performance Requirements: Speed of fan(s) should increase/decrease with the severity of the heat or smoke. D. Wet Fire Extinguishing System: Test system to verify that equipment operation complies with NFPA 96 and NFPA 17A. 3.3 CLEAN-UP A. At completion of the installation, clean and adjust equipment as required to produce ready-for-use condition. B. Where stainless-steel surfaces are damaged during installation procedures, repair finishes to match adjoining undamaged surfaces. 3.4 INSTRUCTIONS A. Instruct personnel and transmit operating instructions in accordance with requirements. END OF SECTION Denton Fire Station No. 8 PARTICULATE AIR FILTRATION Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 234100-1 August 2019 SECTION 234100 – PARTICULATE AIR FILTRATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Air filtration system: AirHAWK 1000 B. Intent: 1. It is the intent of this specification to provide for the purchase, delivery and installation of an AirHAWK 1000 air filtration system as specified. The use of brand name, AirHAWK 1000 is for specification purposes of an acceptable of like kind and quality. The air filtration system shall work to capture, clean and purify the environment within areas such as, communication centers, living spaces day rooms, bunk rooms, kitchen areas, etc. 2. This unit shall be installed above the ceiling/dropped ceiling (plenum) where the afforded space is sufficient to allow for a neat and professional installation. The ductwork shall be installed to give optimum air flow and maximum environment cleaning. Where spacing and facility areas allow, an AirHAWK 1000 can be installed to cover multiple areas, providing required air changes. 3. This AirHAWK 1000 filtration system can be used in areas to capture, reduce or eliminate the vehicle exhaust products from the apparatus in addition to contaminants generated by other sources. Contaminants may consist of airborne engine vapors, diesel exhaust, soot, gases, carbon monoxide, nitrous dioxide, and any other gas or diesel exhaust powered equipment located in the bay area. Additional toxins to be captured must include Volatile Organic Compounds, particulate and damaging lung dust. 4. The quantity of units needed will be determined by the cubic footage of each space and in which the environment is to be cleaned with ten air changes per hour, or every six minutes a change of air will occur through the air cleaners. This formula for determining the number of units will be used unless otherwise specified. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1.4 MANUFACTURER CERTIFICATION A. Product shall be manufactured by a manufacturer with a current ISO 9001:2000 certification. This will insure manufacturer employs a high standard that insures quality management and quality control to produce the highest product quality. 1.5 WARRANTY A. All valid bids must include at least a two (2) year written warranty on all system parts, excluding filters, and must include all labor and transportation costs associated with the warranty entitlements. The warranty can be voided when it has been determined that a claim is due to the customer’s negligence or misuse. B. The warranty will remain in effect only when installations and repairs are performed by a qualified licensed electrician who is contracted by the customer and that ALL instructions depicted in the installation manual are followed. An inspection after installation is completed is required to certify correct installation of all facets of the system. 1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. Provide 2 additional filter media for each type as described in Section 2.2, 1 photo-catalytic oxidation chamber as described in Section 2.2, and any belts if required. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURER A. Acceptable Manufacturer: MagneGrip Group; 11449 Deerfield Road, Cincinnati, OH 45242; Telephone: 800-875-5440; Web: airhawksystems.com 1. Basis of Design: AirHAWK 1000 a. No substitutions allowed. Denton Fire Station No. 8 PARTICULATE AIR FILTRATION Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 234100-2 August 2019 2.2 EQUIPMENT A. Pre-Filter: 1. Shall be of a synthetic media multi pleated type 12” X 24” X 4”. Media shall be 100% synthetic fibers. An expanded metal reinforcement shall be laminated to the air heavy side. A heavy duty moisture resistant beverage board shall be used to encase the frame. It shall be rated at MERV 7. B. Primary Filter: 1. Shall be a MicroMax NHM, MERV 14 HEPA grade air filter with efficiency based upon .3 micron size particle. Self-extinguishing adhesive shall bond the media pack to the frame. Size shall be 12” X 24” X 4”. C. Photo-Catalytic Oxidation Chamber 1. Photo-Catalytic Oxidation (PCO) is a technology that provides chemical-free oxidation of volatile organic chemicals (VOC’s) and microbes. It changes these chemicals into carbon dioxide (CO2) and water. Developed by Sandia Laboratory and the National Renewable Laboratory and used by the Department of Defense for destroying toxic organic compounds (VOC’s). It utilizes the activation of a catalytic surface with ultra violet UV lamp having spectra less than 254 nanometers (nm). 2. The photo-catalytic oxidation chamber (PCO) shall utilize a grid made of aircraft aluminum honeycomb material with 1/8” cells and 3/4” thick. There shall be 35 square feet of surface area. This grid shall be impregnated with titanium dioxide (TiO2) into the cell area and on the total surface area (35 sq. ft.) of the grid or substrate. This (TiO2) application shall be rugged enough so as not to flake off or deteriorate over time and should be washable (if necessary) with mild soap, Windex and water. 3. This surface area of the grid or catalyst shall be illuminated with one (1) UV lamp with a minimum rating of 3 milliwatts/CM². The lamp shall be UV-C 254 nanometers and have a life expectancy of up to 9000 hours. Shall be a 25¼” X 11½” X 5” component of the filtration package. D. Gas-Phase Filtration: 1. The “1000” is equipped with a carbon filter that is a combination 50/50 blend of activated charcoal and potassium permanganate on zeolite. Thousands of pores trap and absorb volatile organic compounds (VOC’s). To be 12” X 24” X 2” in size. E. Unit Cabinet: 1. Shall be manufactured with 18-Gauge galvanized steel, measuring 44½” X 25 ¾” X 14” with 10” inlet and outlet collars for attaching ductwork gauge of clenched or welded construction. Door access panels shall be fully hinged for entry to both filter and motor blower compartments. F. Motor Blower: 1. Shall be direct-drive; 1/6 HP, single phase. The 1/6 HP, 2.8 amp motors are ball bearing style. 2.3 OPERATIONAL DETAILS A. Blower and Motor: 1. The motor must be capable of being removed as a single assembly without having to remove the unit from its mounted location, when, if ever, maintenance is required in these areas. The unit must be able to remain in place during motor / blower service or removal. 2. The blower shall be a 1/6 HP direct-drive permanently lubricated ball-bearing blower capable of processing air at 992 cubic feet per hour. The blower wheel shall be reinforced to provide long, trouble-free service. The motor mounting system shall incorporate a welded ring motor mount, complete assembly, to assure no possible vibration or movement. The blower shall be mounted in the clean-air section of the chassis, down-stream of all filters and the PCO, to provide contamination protection. The blower shall provide thermal over-load protection with automatic reset capability. The fan wheel shall be statically and dynamically balanced. The components shall allow for 115VAC /1/60 Hz operation. The blower shall be capable of 24/7 operation. B. Air Distribution: 1. The system shall contain an air-circulation function to thoroughly mix the facility-air with the cleaned air. The system shall be designed to completely circulate and purify the air within the facility by providing at least 10 complete clean-air exchanges per hour. If more or less air changes are required, calculations will be performed to conform to the requirements and the proper number of units needed will be specified. The air currents shall contain both horizontal and vertical eddy-current components to prevent dead-air pockets of pollution or particulate from forming within the defined areas. PART 3 – EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 HEAT GENERATION EQUIPMENT MDE Project NO: 191124 235000 - 1 August 2019 SECTION 235000 - HEAT GENERATION EQUIPMENT PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, apply to the Work specified in this Section. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. All other Sections of Division 23 B. All other Divisions of the Contract Documents. Refer to each Division's specifications and drawings for all requirements. 1.3 SCOPE A. Provide all equipment, materials, labor, supervision, and services necessary for or incidental to the installation of the heating system as indicated on the drawings and as specified. Provide factory trained start-up service for all equipment B. Work Included 1. Water heaters. 2. Flue pipe. 3. Electric Unit Heater. 4. Infrared Radiant heaters. C. Submittals: Provide submittals as required in section 23 00 10, “Submittal Process.” 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. When requested, provide the Architect with manufacturer's certificate that materials meet or exceed minimum requirements as specified. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 TUBULAR INFRARED HEATERS A. Fuel type: Burner shall be designed for natural gas having characteristics some of those of gas available at project site. B. Gas control: Operation shall include a defined input differential. Heater must be CSA Design Certified to operate to on input differential of to least 30% between the low and nominal rated input modes. 1. The heater’s control system shall be designed to shut off the gas flow to the main burner in the event either a gas supply or power supply interruption occurs. C. Combustion chamber: Shall be 4 inch O.D. 16 gauge titanium stabilized aluminized sheet (150-200 MBH to allow for the operating temperature to exceed the 1030"F as set forth in the ANSI 283.20 Standard) or aluminized steel (below 150 MBH), finished with a high emissivity rated corrosion resistant, block coating with on emissivity level documented at .92 or higher. (A 409 grade stainless steel chamber shall be used when specified for harsher environments). D. Emitter tube: Shall be 4 inch O'D. 16 gauge aluminized steel finished with a high emissivity rated, corrosion resistant, block coating with on emissivity level documented to .92 or higher. (A 304 grade stainless steel emitter tube shall be used when specified for harsher environments). E. Burner type: Unit shall be a positive pressure power burner with a combustion fan upstream of the burner and exhaust gases for component longevity, maximum combustion efficiency, and energy transfer. Negative pressure (pull through) type appliances will not be allowed. F. Fan enclosure: Combustion fan shall be totally housed inside burner control box and not exposed. Appliances with exposed combustion/exhauster fans shall not be permitted. G. Burner: Stainless-steel venturi burner. The flame anchoring screen shall have a minimum temperature rating equivalent to 304 grade stainless steel. Non stainless steel burners shall not be permitted. H. Tube connections: The heater’s combustion chamber and radiant emitter tube shall incorporate a 4 inch slip fit, interlocking connection in which the upstream tube slides into the next tube and is held by a bolted clamp. A butted tube connection system shall not be permitted. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 HEAT GENERATION EQUIPMENT MDE Project NO: 191124 235000 - 2 August 2019 I. Ignition system: Hot surface silicon carbide capable of temperatures achieving 2400 F. Igniter shall be readily accessible and serviceable without the use of tools. Spark ignition systems shall not be emitted. J. Reflectors: Shall be .025 polished aluminum with a multi-faceted design which includes reflector end caps. Reflector shall have a polished bright finish with clear visual reflection ability. (A sample will be required at time of submittal). Reflector shall have a minimum of 7 sheet metal bends in its fabrication to optimize downward radiation. Reflectors shall be rotatable from 0 to 45 degrees when required. The heater’s reflector hanging system shall be designed to permit expansion while minimizing noise and/or rattles. (A 304 grade stainless steel reflector material shall be used when specified for harsher environments). K. Control box: Heater's exterior control chassis shall be constructed of corrosion resistant enameled steel. (A 304 grade stainless steel housing shall be used when specified for harsher environments). 1. The heater's top cover shall be constructed of ABS plastic material. 2. Air intake: An air intake collar shall be supplied as part of the burner control assembly to accept a 4 inch O.D. supply duct. 3. The heater’s control comportment shall be accessible without the use of tools and serviceable while heater is operating. 4. Outdoor modifications are required for any application that will be placed in space defined as outdoors. The rating label shall bear the outdoor certification approval. L. Heaters shall be equipped with a sight glass allowing a visual inspection of igniter and burner operation from the floor. Sight glass visible only at appliance level shall not be permitted. M. The heaters shall utilize a downstream turbulator baffle for maximum heat transfer. N. Heater shall be supplied with a stainless steel flexible gas connector. O. Burner Safety Controls: 1. Heater controls shall include a safety differential pressure switch to monitor combustion air flow, as to provide complete burner shutdown due to insufficient combustion air or flue blockage. 2. The heater shall incorporate a self-diagnostic ignition module, and recycle the heater after an inadvertent shutdown. 3. The heater’s control system shall be designed to shut off the gas flow to the main burner in the event either a gas supply or power supply interruption occurs' 4. The heater's blower motor shall be thermally protected and the motor's impeller shall be balanced. 5. Heater control assembly shall include three indicator lights that define the units operating input ranges' One indicator shall validate air flow. Two indicator lights shall indicate low and high firing stages. 6. The heater’s air flow control system shall provide a 45 second pre-purge prior to initiating burner operation and a 90 second post-purge upon completion, effectively removing all products of combustion from heat exchanger and/or radiant tubes. 7. No condensation shall form as a result of combustion in the combustion chamber or radiant tubes while at operating temperatures' 8. Thermostat control shall be two-stage operating on 24 volts. P. Venting: Shall be per manufacturer approval and specifications. Q. Thermostat: Devices and wiring as specified 1. Thermostat: 2-stage, digital programmable wall mounting type with 50 to 90 deg F (10 to 32 deg C) operating range. 2. Control Transformer: integrally mounted. R. Provide units as manufactured by Superior Radiant Systems, Co-Ray-Vac, Reflect-O-Ray or Reverber Ray. 2.2 HEATER FLUES A. Flue shall be double wall with galvanized finish, UL listed Type B as manufactured by Metalbestos or approved equal with AGA approved vent cap, roof flashing and storm collar. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 HEAT GENERATION EQUIPMENT MDE Project NO: 191124 235000 - 3 August 2019 PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Equipment shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. B. Vent Piping: 1.Install vent piping in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. 2.Maintain same vent pipe diameter to end. 3.Ensure vent pipe is gas tight and will not leak. 4.Do not common vent or connect more than 1 appliance to venting system. 5.Terminate horizontal or vertical vent in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. 6.Slope horizontal vent 1/4 inch downwards for every 12 inches. 7.Supply combustion air to units in accordance with ANSI Z223.1/NFPA 54. C. Gas Piping: 1.Install gas piping in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. 2.Leak test gas appliances and its gas connections before placing in operation. 3.Size gas piping in accordance with UPC or other accepted engineering method. D. Electrical Wiring: 1.Install electrical wiring in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. 2.Do not connect electrical power to unit until electrical wiring has been completed. E. Start up on the equipment shall be performed by factory trained and authorized personnel. A copy of the startup report shall be provided to the owner and submitted in the O&M Manuals. 3.2 EQUIPMENT START-UP A. Prior to operation, the factory start-up representative shall, in the presence of the Architect's representative perform all system and equipment checks as prescribed by the manufacturer in his written start-up procedures. B. The factory start-up representative shall place the equipment in operation and record all start-up data. Three copies of all data shall be given to the Architect. END OF SECTION City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 DX SPLIT SYSTEMS MDE Project NO: 191124 237600 - 1 August 2019 SECTION 23 76 00 - DX SPLIT SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to the Work in this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Provide all equipment, materials, labor, supervision and services necessary for or incidental to the installation of a complete and operating refrigeration and air handling system as indicated on the drawings and as specified. B. Work included: 1. Direct Expansion Condensing Units 2. Gas Fired Furnace C.Submittals: Provide submittals as required in Section 23 10 00 “Submittal Process” 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. B. Without additional cost to the Owner, provide such other labor and materials as are required to complete the work of this Section in accordance with the requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, regardless of whether such materials and associated labor are called for elsewhere in these Contract Documents. C. When requested, provide the Architect with manufacturer's certificate that the equipment meets or exceeds minimum requirements as specified. D. All equipment shall have a minimum EER in accordance with ASHRAE 90.1 unless specified otherwise. E. The units shall be listed by Electrical Laboratories (ETL) and bear the ETL label. F. All wiring shall be in accordance with the National Electric Code (NEC). G. The system will be produced in an ISO 9001 and ISO 14001 facility, which are standards set by the International Standard Organization (ISO). The system shall be factory tested for safety and function. H. No HVAC equipment shall be ran during construction. It is the contractor’s responsibility to provide temporary heating or cooling during the construction process. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 D-X CONDENSING UNIT (NON-RESIDENTIAL TYPE) A. General: Condensing unit shall be designed, constructed, assembled, rated, and tested in accordance with ARI Standards 210 - 75 and 270 - 75. Unit shall have capacities to meet the design conditions specified or indicated on the drawings. The unit shall be a factory packaged unit and shall be suitable for mounting on roof of building. The package shall consist of one of more refrigerant compressors with electric motors, condensers, fans, controls, control wiring and piping, all factory assembled in a weatherproof enclosure mounted on a structural steel base ready for field connection to the system piping. Unit shall be factory pressurized with nitrogen or dry air and shall still be holding pressure prior to connection of field piping. The unit shall be sufficiently rigid and shall be arranged to permit handling by a crane, boom or by helicopter. The unit shall be provided with equipment rails and flashing if required for roof application. B. Energy Efficiency Ratio (E.E.R.): Units shall produce not less than scheduled BTU's per watt input when tested in accordance with ARI Standard 210. The Contractor shall submit data to demonstrate that the units will produce the energy efficiency ratio specified. The unit shall be ASHRAE 90.1-2001 compliant when paired with scheduled air handling unit. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 DX SPLIT SYSTEMS MDE Project NO: 191124 237600 - 2 August 2019 C. Unit Enclosure: Unit enclosure shall be constructed of steel not less than 18 US gage thickness, with removable access panels completely weatherized for outside installation, and properly reinforced and braced. Panels and access door shall be provided for inspection and access to all internal parts. Surface of steel parts shall be factory corrosion protected by a painted or coating system. Joints shall be watertight. D. Compressors: Compressors shall be semi-hermetic or full hermetic type and shall be equipped with oil failure protection, low suction and high pressure protection, oil heater(s), suction and discharge service valves and provision for field testing and charging units. If standard with the manufacturer, two or more compressors, but not more than four may be provided in lieu of a single compressor with cylinder unloading in which case capacity reduction shall be provided by sequence operation of the compressors or combination of the two methods. Where compressors are paralleled, not more than three compressors per refrigerant circuit shall be provided. Each compressor shall be provided with devices to protect the compressor from short-cycling whenever the compressor is shutdown by any of the safety controls. Compressors shall be provided with factory installed vibration isolation and shall be warranted for a minimum of five (5) years. E. Compressor Motor and Motor Starter: Compressor motor shall be suitable for electric power characteristics as shown on drawings. Motor shall conform to NEMA MG-1. Motor starters shall conform to NEMA ICS. Motor shall be constant speed, squirrel cage induction, low starting current, high torque type, and shall be furnished with magnetic part wind or across the line motor starter with general purpose enclosures protected from the weather. Provide ambient compensated 3-leg protection for all starters. Compressor shall be direct-connected. F. Air-Cooled Condenser: Air-cooled condenser shall be enclosed within unit housing and shall consist of coils, fans, and electric motor. The condenser shall provide a minimum of 3 deg. F of subcooling. The air-cooled condenser may be used for refrigerant storage in lieu of a separate receiver, provided that condenser storage capacity is designed for such use. Controls shall temporarily bypass system low pressurestat to permit start-up whenever minimum ambient temperature is below design evaporator coil suction temperature. G. Condenser coil shall be finned-tube type and shall be seamless copper or aluminum tubes with aluminum fins. On condensers with all aluminum construction, aluminum alloy conforming to ASTM B210, alloy 1100, shall be used for the tubes, and aluminum alloy conforming to chemical requirements of ASTM B209, alloy 7072, shall be used for fins and sheets. Fins shall be soldered or mechanically bonded to tubes and installed in a metal casing. Coil shall be tested after assembly at pressures specified in ANSI B9.1 for refrigerant employed in system. H. Fans shall be either centrifugal or propeller driven as best suited for the application. Fans shall be directly connected to motor shaft, or indirectly corrected to motor by means of v-belt drive. Fans shall be statically and dynamically balanced. I. Motors shall conform to NEMA MG-1. Motor starters shall conform to NEMA ICS. Motors shall be totally enclosed type or open type so located within an enclosure as to be fully protected from weather. Motor starter shall be magnetic across-the-line type with weather-resistant enclosure. Thermal protection shall be manual reset type. J. Condenser Controls: Head pressure control shall be provided to ensure condensing temperature for proper system operation at all ambient temperatures down to 10 degrees F. Control shall be by condenser flooding method, factory installed. K. Solid state variable speed fan motor controller may be provided to control airflow over coil. Condensers with multiple fans may be provided with fan cycling control to cycle one of two fans, two of three fans or four of six fans in response to outdoor ambient temperature. The use of dampers to control condenser air flow shall not be permitted. L. HUMIDITY CONTROL: All units shall be equipped with a RAWAL valve. This applies to all units even in not detailed on equipment sheet. M. Units shall be as manufactured by Trane, Carrier, Daikin, JCI, or Lennox. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 DX SPLIT SYSTEMS MDE Project NO: 191124 237600 - 3 August 2019 2.2 GAS FIRED FURNACE A. Furnish and install gas fired furnaces in the location and of the capacity shown on the drawings. Furnace section shall be AGA approved. Furnace shall have efficiency rating per ASHRAE 90 standards or local energy codes, whichever is more stringent. B. Fan section shall have forward-curved blades, double-inlet fan mounted on the motor shaft. Fans shall be statically and dynamically balanced and motor shall have permanently lubricated bearings. C. Casing shall be made of galvanized steel, bonderized and finished with baked enamel. D. Heat exchanger shall be cold rolled steel and sectional in design. E. Burners shall be aluminized steel and tapered for even gas distribution; ignition shall be accomplished by means of an electronic ignition system. F. Cooling coils, when scheduled, shall be nonferrous construction with mechanically bonded smooth plate fins. All tube joints shall be brazed with phos copper or silver alloy. G. Controls shall include: Gas valve, with 100% automatic main burner and pilot shutoff; fan and limit control, prewired indoor fan relay with transformer; and a low-voltage automatic heating/cooling thermostat. H. Install 1" throwaway filters in units and provide to owner, one complete set of extra filters. I. Provide units as manufactured by Carrier, Daikin, JCI or Lennox. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Equipment shall be installed as shown or indicated on the drawings and as recommended by the manufacturer. B. Control Wiring. 1. All low voltage control wiring shall inside walls shall be installed into rigid conduit. 2. All exterior low voltage control wiring shall be installed in a liquid tight conduit. C. Provide full port refrigerant valves at each indoor unit and outdoor unit. D. DX Refrigerant systems use a high-pressure refrigerant and have unique installation procedures and requirements. It is imperative that the installation of these systems meet factory specifications in order for the systems to meet the expected performance and efficiency. 1. Factory training for installing technicians. – Prior to installation, the installing mechanical contractor must provide written proof that all installing technicians have received adequate training by the equipment manufacturer or approved alternate. Approved contractors who are awarded this project may contact the manufacturer to arrange training prior to installation for any unqualified technicians. The mechanical contractor’s installation price shall be inclusive of the manufacturer’s installation requirements including the cost of training, specialty tools, and cost charged by the manufacturer for technical assistance. 2. Job installation support and certification. – In order to assure properly installed system components and approved installation procedures, the specified manufacturer or approved alternate must provide installation technical support for the installing contractor via telephone and the internet, and job site supervision. Upon completion of installation and prior to factory startup, a factory authorized commissioning agent must inspect the installation of each system to verify proper installation. Upon verification of proper installation, the manufacturer is to submit a letter of certification approving the installation of their respective systems. 3. Factory Startup and Warranty Approval – Upon verification and written receipt of proper installation, a factory authorized commissioning agent is to perform a factory approved initial startup of all system components. Such that the requirements to receive the maximum manufacturer’s warranty are met and confirmed with the manufacturer. 3.2 PRODUCT SUPPORT A.Maintain a fully staffed service office within 400 miles (1 day drive) of the job site. Fully staffed means a full time secretary, complete service library, at least 2 factory trained service technicians and the factory recommended spare parts inventory. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 DX SPLIT SYSTEMS MDE Project NO: 191124 237600 - 4 August 2019 B.Provide a 24 hour/7 day technical support phone number to factory service office. Support shall be for all components including controls, mechanical components, system operation and alarm codes, etc. C.The Manufacturer or local representative shall maintain a complete parts inventory for all systems that will allow for 24 hour receipt of any necessary part. D.Provide owner/operator and service training both on line and at designated training centers. 3.3 EQUIPMENT START-UP A. Equipment start up shall be by factory trained personnel. The startup shall be attended by the control’s contractor and Test and Balance contractor. B.WITHOUT PRIOR APPROVAL FROM THE ENGINEER AND OWNER, ALL MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT SHALL NOT BE OPERATED DURING CONSTRUCTION OF THE BUILDING PER MANUFACTURER RECOMMENDATIONS. THE MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE TO PROVIDE TEMPORARY HEATING OR COOLING AS NEEDED TO CLIMATIZE THE BUILDING. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 UNIT HEATERS MDE Project NO: 191124 238239 - 1 August 2019 SECTION 238239 - UNIT HEATERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Electric unit heaters. 2. Gas-fired, power vented, cabinet unit heaters. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. 1.4 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Cabinet unit heater filters: Furnish one spare filter(s) for each filter installed. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Provide Submittals as required in section 23 00 10, “Submittal Process”. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GAS-FIRED, POWER VENTED, CABINET UNIT HEATERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Reznor. 2. Modine. B. Description: A factory-assembled and -tested unit certified by the CSA to ANSI Z83.8b. C. Cabinet: Galvanzied steel with powder coat finish with manufacturer's standard paint, in color selected by Architect. D. Burner: One piece assembly with a single venture orifice, natural gas burner. E. Heat Exchanger: Stainless steel tubes, four-pass serpentine style, fabricated with no welding or brazing, only tool pressed mechanical joints. F. Category I combustion air/venting system shall include a vibration isolated power vented motor and wheel assembly, flame rollout switch and a combustion air pressure switch. G. Electrical Connection: Factory wire motors and controls for a single field connection. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas to receive unit heaters for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. B. Examine roughing-in for piping and electrical connections to verify actual locations before unit heater installation. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install wall boxes in finished wall assembly; seal and weatherproof. Joint-sealant materials and applications are specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants." B. Install cabinet unit heaters to comply with NFPA 90A. C. Install propeller unit heaters level and plumb. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 UNIT HEATERS MDE Project NO: 191124 238239 - 2 August 2019 D. Suspend propeller unit heaters from structure with all-thread hanger rods and elastomeric hangers. Hanger rods and attachments to structure are specified in Division 23 Section "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment." Vibration hangers are specified in Division 23 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment." E. Install wall-mounting thermostats and switch controls in electrical outlet boxes at heights to match lighting controls. Verify location of thermostats and other exposed control sensors with Drawings and room details before installation. F. If drawing schedules unit mounted thermostats, verify unit mounting height. If unit height is more than 9” from finished floor, then thermostat shall be wall mounted. 3.3 CONNECTIONS A. Connect supply and return ducts to cabinet unit heaters with flexible duct connectors specified in Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories." B. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems." C. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports: 1. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation. 2. Operate electric heating elements through each stage to verify proper operation and electrical connections. 3. Test and adjust controls and safety devices. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. B. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above. 3.5 ADJUSTING A. Adjust initial temperature set points. B. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to two visits to Project during other-than-normal occupancy hours for this purpose. END OF SECTION City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 ELECTRICAL SUBMITTAL PROCESS MDE Project NO: 191124 260010 - 1 August 2019 SECTION 260010 – ELECTRICAL SUBMITTAL PROCESS PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with all submittal provisions of Division 01. B. Submit electronic copies of the submittal to the prime consultant (i.e. architect) in order to process and track the submittals properly in accordance with Division 1 and 26 submittal requirements. Architects and consultants are to submit all submittals and RFI’s to the electrical engineer electronically. Send to “mdengca@md-eng.com”. Submittals shall be labeled by their project specification section or CSI specification section if not listed in project specifications. C. Contractor is responsible to separate submittals per specification section. Unseparated submittals are subject to rejection without review. D. Allow a minimum of ten (10) working days for the review of submittals and each re-submittal. E. Submittals that have been reviewed and marked as REJECTED (REJ) or REVISE & RESUBMIT (RES) should be resubmitted within 10 days to be reviewed again by engineer. F. Compliance with the Contract documents shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor. Items on equipment that were not accepted by the Architect in writing as an approved equal shall be replaced or revised to comply with the contract documents at the Contractor's expense. G. Resubmission of rejected submittals shall be limited to one (1) in number. Costs for processing subsequent resubmittals in excess of the first resubmittal, resulting from the Contractor's disregard of Architect/Engineer's primary submittal rejection comments, shall be borne by the Contractor. Costs shall be based on Architect/Engineer's hourly rates as published in their current professional fee schedules and shall also include reimbursable costs for delivery, mailing, and photocopies at direct cost-plus ten percent (10%). 1.2 REQUIRED SPECIFICATIONS (Project specific) A. The chart below are the submittals required for the project. 1. Submittals marked with an “X” are required for this project. 2. Submittals without an “X” are not required for this project. See required specifications on next page City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 ELECTRICAL SUBMITTAL PROCESS MDE Project NO: 191124 260010 - 2 August 2019 Required Spec Required Spec X Submittal Name Reference X Submittal Name Reference Common Work Results for Electrical PanelboardsX -Submittals, Shop Drawings.26 05 00 -Manufacturer, Panelboards, Distribution Electrical Demolition X -Lighting, Circuit breakers 26 24 16 -See Specification for information 26 05 01 Motor Starters Electrical Work in Existing Facilities -Manufacturer, Manual, Combination -Site Inspection Report 26 05 02 -Magnetic 26 24 22 Fire Stopping Tenant MeteringX -Materials 26 05 03 -Product Data per Specification 26 25 00 Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables Electrical Cabinets & EnclosuresX -Conductors, Cables 26 05 19 X -Hinged cover enclosures, cabinets, Fab. 26 27 16 Grounding & Bonding For Electrical Systems Wiring DevicesX -Materials, Chemical ground rod 26 05 26 X -Receptacles, Switches, Wall plates 26 27 26 Hangers & Supports for Electrical Systems Enclosed SwitchesX -Hanger & clamps, Fabricated devices 26 05 29 X -Components 26 28 16 Conduit for Electrical Systems Packaged Engine Generators -PropaneX -Conduit & fittings, Supports 26 05 33.13 -Rating, Engine, Alternators, Controls 26 32 13.11 Boxes for Electrical Systems Packaged Engine Generators - NGX -Boxes, Floor Boxes 26 05 33.16 -Rating, Engine, Alternators, Controls 26 32 13.22 Cable Trays for Electrical Systems Packaged Engine Generators-Diesel -Cable Trays 26 05 36 X -Rating, Engine, Alternators, Controls 26 22 13.33 IN-Floor Race Ways for Electrical Systems Uninterruptible Power Supply -In-floor Duct Systems 26 05 39 -See Spec for all submittal information 26 33 53 Identification for Electrical Systems Automatic Transfer SwitchX -Submit all marking systems per spec.26 05 53 X -Transfer Switch 26 36 23 Overcurrent Protective Device Corr. Study Quick Disconnect Switch -Final Report 26 05 73 -Heavy-Duty Double Throw Safety Switches 26 36 33 Electrical Testing Facility Lightning ProtectionX -Final Report 26 05 93 X -Components 26 41 00 Disconnect Switches Surge Protection DevicesX -Manufacturer, Switches, Components 26 06 20 -General Info, Design, Performance Lighting & Receptacle (Relay) Panelboards X -Testing, Warranty 26 43 00 -Product Data per specification 26 09 26 Lighting Lighting Control System -Shop drawings, Lamps, Fluorescent Ballast -Product Data per Specification 26 09 33 -Recessed, lenses, parts. 26 50 00 Occupancy Sensors Digital Network Lighting Control SystemX -Sensor, Shop Drawing for sensor layout.26 09 23 -Qualifications, Products, Warranty.26 50 90 Low Voltage Underground Electric Service Entrance LED Lighting -Metering Equipment, Raceways& Fittings 26 21 16 X -Product Data per Specification 26 55 00 Low Voltage Transformers Detention Lighting -Product Data per Specification 26 22 00 -Fixtures, components, Security, Ballasts, Switchboards -Exit signs, Emergency lighting, Lenses, 26 55 63 -Manufacturer, Bus, Feeder protective devices Telephone Data-Raceway SystemX -Metering, Enclosures, Name plates, 26 24 13 X -Raceways 26 55 64 City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 ELECTRICAL SUBMITTAL PROCESS MDE Project NO: 191124 260010 - 3 August 2019 Required Spec Required Spec X Submittal Name Reference X Submittal Name Reference Disposal of Lamps and Ballasts Communication Faceplates & Connectors -Qualifications, Disposal data 26 57 00 -Product Data per Specification 27 15 43 Provisions of Elevators AV Control Syatems & Antenna Systems -Qualifications, Power switch module -Product Data per Specification 27 41 00 -Pits, Elevator cabs. 26 60 00 TV Broadband Distribution System Conduits and Backboxes for Communications Systems -Product Data per Specification 27 41 33 -Conduits, Boxes, Raceways. 27 05 23 Sound Systems Grounding & Bonding for Communications Systems -Product Data per Specification 27 51 16.13 -Product Data per Specification 27 05 26 Common Work Results for Security System Telecom Hangers & Supports -Shop drawings, Computer equipment, -Product Data per Specification 27 05 28 -Grounding, Wiring & Cabling, Raceways Cable Trays for Communications Systems -Boxes, Fittings 28 05 10 -Product Data per Specification 27 05 29 Digital Video Manage & Recording System Comm Cabinet Racks & Enclosures -Product Data per Specification 28 23 00 -Product Data per Specification 27 11 16 Fire Detection & Alarm Systems Comm Termination Blocks & Patch Panels -FA Control panel, Devices, Detectors, GFCI -Product Data per Specification 27 11 19 X -Contacts, Grounding, Operations 28 31 10 Comm Cable Management & Cable Runway Sampling Type Smoke Detector Systems -Product Data per Specification 27 11 23 -Detector assembly, Display, Networking,28 31 11 Communication Copper Horizontal Cabling -Product Data per Specification 27 15 13 City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL MDE Project NO: 191124 260500 - 1 August 2019 SECTION 260500 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to the Work in this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. General Requirements for Electrical Work are intended to be complementary to General Requirements of Construction Contract. B. Work Included: Provide complete electrical systems where shown on Drawings, as specified herein, and as needed for complete and proper installation including, but not necessarily limited to following summary of Work. 1. Interior and exterior lighting 2. Emergency exit and egress lighting 3. Fire detection and alarm system 4. Telephone raceway system 5. Switchboards and panelboards 6. Power feeds to mechanical, plumbing and fire protection equipment: a. Provide conduit, wire, disconnect switch, overcurrent and short circuit protection for all equipment, whether shown on the drawings or not, including, motorized dampers, smoke dampers, electric heat trace, power for energy management system, water softening equipment, water treatment systems, air dryers, electric flush valves, electric trap primers, electric solenoids, shower valves, and other miscellaneous equipment. 8. Surge protective devices 9. Occupancy sensors 10. Packaged generator set 11. Automatic transfer switch 12. Electrical service entrance 13. Other items and services required to complete electrical systems 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE AND APPLICABLE STANDARD A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workers thoroughly trained and experienced in necessary crafts and completely familiar with specified requirements and methods needed for proper performance of Work of this Division. Ensure that there is a minimum of one journeyman electrician, on job site whenever Division 26 Work is being performed. B. Without additional cost, provide labor and materials as required to complete Work of this Division in accordance with requirements of Governmental Agencies having jurisdiction, regardless of whether materials and associated labor are called for elsewhere in these Contract Documents. C. Codes: Electrical and fire alarm work shall conform to requirements and recommendations of the following codes. Refer to the most recent code adopted by the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). 1. National Electrical Code 2. International Energy Code 3. International Fire Code 4. International Building Code 5. Local amendments to the above codes D. Standards: Specifications and Standards of following organizations are by reference made part of these Specifications. Electrical Work, unless otherwise indicated, shall comply with requirements and recommendations wherever applicable: 1. Association of Edison Illuminating Companies (AEIC) 2. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 3. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) 4. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 5. Certified Ballast Manufacturers (CBM) 6. Electrical Testing Laboratories (ETL) 7. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE) 8. Insulated Power Cable Engineers Association (IPCEA) 9. National Bureau of Standards (NBS) 10. National Electrical Contractors Association (NECA) 11. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA) City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL MDE Project NO: 191124 260500 - 2 August 2019 12. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 13. Radio-Television Manufacturer's Association (RTMA) 14. Reflector Luminaire Manufacturers (RLM) 15. Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (UL) 1.4 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES A. Requirements and recommendations of latest editions of Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA), and Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), project accessibility standards are by reference made part of these Specifications. Work shall comply with requirements and recommendations wherever applicable. 1.5 DEFINITIONS A. Terms furnish, install, and provide are used interchangeably and shall mean to furnish and install, complete and ready for intended use. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with pertinent provisions of 26 00 10. B. Submittals required of materials and equipment include following: 1. Materials list of items proposed to be provided under Division 26. 2. Manufacturer's specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with specified requirements. Term "Compliance" is understood to mean that Contractor certifies that submitted equipment meets or exceeds Contract Document requirements. Items that do not clearly meet this definition should be identified and explained as required in following paragraph. 3. Identify difference between specified item and proposed item. Explain with enough detail so that it can easily be determined that item complies with functional intent. List the disadvantages or advantages of proposed item versus specified item. Submit technical data sheets and/or pictures and diagrams to support and clarify. Organize in clear and concise format. Substitutions shall be approved in writing by Engineer. Engineer’s decision shall be final. 4. Allow minimum of 10 working days for review of each submittal and re-submittal. 5. Items of equipment that are not accepted in writing as approved equal shall be replaced or revised to comply with Contract Documents at Contractor's expense. 6. The manufacturers recommended installation procedures shall become basis for accepting or rejecting actual installation procedures used on Work. 7. Shop drawings shall consist of detailed drawings with dimensions, schedules, weights, capacities, installation details and pertinent information needed to describe the material or equipment. C. Submittals required of materials and equipment under this Division include following listed items not supplied by Owner. These submittal requirements are intended to be complimentary to requirements that may be listed in individual sections. In event of conflict, more stringent requirement shall apply. 1. Conductors and Cables: a. Submit product data for each specified product. b. Submit tabular list of wire and wiring systems that will be increased in capacity or size to comply with Section 26 05 19 and/or similar requirements shown on Drawings. List shall include size shown on Drawings, proposed increase to comply with Section 26 0519, and proposed installed length. 2. Raceways and Boxes: a. Submit product data for surface raceways, wireways and fittings, floor boxes, hinged-cover enclosures, and cabinets. b. Submit Shop Drawings including layout drawings showing components and wiring for nonstandard boxes, enclosures, and cabinets. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL MDE Project NO: 191124 260500 - 3 August 2019 3. Wiring Devices: a. Submit product data for each specified product. b. Submit operation and maintenance data for wiring devices, for inclusion in "Operating and Maintenance Manual" specified in this Section. c. Submit dimension plan for locations of all non-standard devices including but not limited to floor boxes, ceiling boxes, cord reels and welding boxes. 4. Switchboards: a. Submit product data for each product and component specified. b. Submit Shop Drawings for each switchboard including dimensioned plans and elevations, component and device lists, and single-line diagram showing main and branch bus current ratings and short-time and short-circuit ratings of switchboard. c. Submit schedule of features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual protective devices. d. Submit manufacturer's schematic wiring diagram. e. Submit point-to-point control wiring diagram, differentiating between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring. f. Submit qualification data for field-testing organization certificates, signed by Contractor, certifying that organization complies with requirements specified in Quality Assurance below. Include list of completed projects with project names, addresses, names of Engineers and Owners, plus other information specified. g. Submit maintenance data for materials and products, for inclusion in Operating and Maintenance Manual as specified in this Section. 5. Grounding: a. Submit product data for grounding rods, connectors and connection materials, and grounding fittings. 7. Panelboards: a. Submit product data for each type panelboard, accessory item, and component specified. b. Submit Shop Drawings prepared by the manufacturers including dimensioned plans, sections, and elevations. Show tabulations of installed devices, major features, and voltage rating. Include enclosure type with details for types other than NEMA Type 1; bus configuration and current ratings; short-circuit current rating of panelboard; and features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual protective devices and auxiliary components. c. Submit typewritten panelboard schedules to the Engineer for approval prior to installation. d. Submit maintenance data for panelboard components, for inclusion in Operating and Maintenance Manual specified in this Section. Include instructions for testing circuit breakers. 8. Disconnect Switches: a. Submit product data for disconnect switches and specified accessories. 9. Automatic Transfer Switches: a. Submit Shop Drawings or product data for each transfer switch, including dimensioned plans, sections, and elevations showing minimum clearances; conductor entry provisions; gutter space; installed features and devices; and materials lists. b. Submit wiring diagrams, elementary or schematic, differentiating between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring. c. Submit operation and maintenance data for each type of product, for inclusion in Operating and Maintenance Manual specified in this section. Include features and operating sequences, both automatic and manual. List factory settings of relays and provide relay setting and calibration instructions. d. Submit manufacturer's certificate of compliance to referenced standards and tested short-circuit closing and withstand ratings applicable to protective devices and current ratings. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL MDE Project NO: 191124 260500 - 4 August 2019 10. Engine-Generator Set: a. Submit exhaust emissions. Submit prototype test data. b. Submit wiring diagrams for system, showing power and control connections and distinguishing between factory-installed and field-installed wiring. c. Submit product data for products specified in this Section. Include data on features, components, ratings, and performance. Include a dimensioned outline plan and elevation drawings of the engine generator set, the weatherproof enclosure, sub-base fuel tank and other system components. d. Submit maintenance data for system and components for inclusion in Operating and Maintenance Manual specified in this Section. e. Submit detailed operating instructions, covering operation under both normal and emergency conditions and sound test reports. f. Submit certification of torsional vibration compatibility: Conform to NFPA 110. g. Submit factory test reports for units to be shipped for this Project showing evidence of compliance with specified requirements. 11. Motor Controllers: a. Submit product data for specified products. Include dimensions, ratings, and data on features and components. b. Submit maintenance data for products for inclusion in Operating and Maintenance Manual specified in this Section. 12. Interior Lighting: a. Submit product data describing fixtures, lamps, ballasts, and emergency lighting units. Arrange product data for fixtures in order of fixture designation. Include data on features and accessories. b. Submit outline drawings indicating dimensions and principal features of fixtures, including color. c. Submit electrical ratings and photometric data including certified results of laboratory tests for fixtures and lamps. d. Submit battery and charger data for emergency lighting units. e. Submit Shop Drawings detailing nonstandard fixtures and indicating dimensions, weights, and methods of field assembly, components, features, and accessories. f. Submit wiring diagrams detailing wiring for control system showing both factory- installed and field-installed wiring for each specific system which differentiates between factory-installed and field-installed wiring. g. Submit maintenance data for fixtures to include in operation and maintenance manual specified in this Section. h. Submit lamp data for each fixture. 13. Fire Alarm System: a. Submit product data for each type of system component specified including dimensioned plans and elevations showing installed features and devices. Include list of materials and nationally recognized testing laboratory-listing data. Submit to Engineer after being reviewed and approved by local authority having jurisdiction. b. Submit wiring diagrams from manufacturer differentiating clearly between factory- and field-installed wiring. Include diagrams for equipment and for system with terminals and interconnections identified. Make diagrams specific to this Project and distinguish between field and factory wiring. c. Submit device address list. d. Submit system operation description covering this specific Project, including method of operation and supervision of each type of circuit and sequence of operations for manually and automatically initiated system inputs and outputs. Manufacturer's standard descriptions for generic systems are unacceptable. e. Submit operating instructions for mounting at fire alarm control panel. f. Submit battery hours of operation calculations for loss of normal power operation. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL MDE Project NO: 191124 260500 - 5 August 2019 g. Submit maintenance data for fire alarm systems to include in operation and maintenance manual specified in this Section. Include data for each type of product, including features and operating sequences, both automatic and manual. Include recommendations for spare parts to be stocked at site. Provide names, addresses, and telephone numbers of service organizations that carry stock of repair parts for system to be furnished. h. Submit design drawings approved by local authority having jurisdiction. i. Submit plans showing device locations and any smoke removal zones approved by AHJ. j. Submit voltage drop calculations. 14. Provide a dimension layout of electrical rooms(s) and elevator equipment room(s) if applicable. 1.7 SUBSTITUTIONS A. The Contract Documents list manufacturers' names and catalog numbers followed by phrase "or equal" are to establish a standard of quality and utility for the specified items and to provide a dimensional reference to the scaled drawings. B. Submittals for "equal" items shall include the following data, which is not necessarily required for specified items, which list the manufacturer and catalog number: 1. Performance characteristics. 2. Materials. 3. Finish. 4. Certification of conformance with specified codes and standards. 5. Manufacturer's specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with specified requirements. Term "compliance" is understood to mean that the submitted equipment will meet or exceed the Contract Document requirements. Items that do not clearly meet this definition shall be identified and explained as required in following Paragraph. 6. Identify all differences between the specified item and proposed item. Explain all differences with sufficient detail to permit the Engineer to easily determine that the substituted item complies with the functional intent. List disadvantages and advantages of proposed item versus specified item. Submit technical data sheets and/or pictures and diagrams to support and clarify. Organize in clear and concise format. Engineer shall approve substitutions in writing. Engineer’s decision shall be final unless owner approves. C. Submittals of "equal" components or systems may be rejected if: 1. Material or equipment would necessitate alteration of mechanical, electrical, architectural, or structural design. 2. Dimensions vary from specified material or equipment so that accessibility or clearances are impaired or Work of other trades is adversely affected. D. Proposed substitutions for materials or equipment must be submitted 10 days prior to final bid date for consideration as approved equals. Otherwise, substitutions will not be permitted. Only the prime bidders shall be permitted make proposals for substitutions. E. No substitution shall be made unless authorized in writing by the Engineer. Should substitution be accepted, and should substitute material prove defective or otherwise unsatisfactory for service intended, and within guarantee period, replace this material or equipment with material or equipment specified, to satisfaction of Engineer and at no cost to Owner. 1.8 ORDINANCES, PERMITS, METERS, UTILITIES AND ROYALTIES A. Purchase all necessary permits and licenses necessary for completion of the Work. Pay all lawful fees required and necessary pursuant in obtaining said permits and licenses. Required certificates of approvals and inspections by local governing and regulating authorities. B. Pay all fees required for connection of utility power and telephone services required for the Work. C. Pay royalty payments or fees required for use of patented equipment or systems. Defend lawsuits or claims for infringement of patent rights and hold Owner and/or Engineer harmless from loss as result of said suits or claims. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL MDE Project NO: 191124 260500 - 6 August 2019 1.9 COMPATIBILITY OF EQUIPMENT A. Assume full responsibility for satisfactory operation of component parts of electrical systems. Assure compatibility of equipment and performance of integrated systems in accordance with requirements of the Construction Documents. Notify the Engineer before submitting a bid should Specifications or Drawings make acceptance of responsibility impossible, prohibitive, or restrictive. The bid shall be accompanied by a written statement listing any objections or exceptions to the applicable specification section and/or drawing. 1.10 UTILITIES AND TEMPORARY POWER A. Verify location and capacity of all existing utility services before starting Work. The locations and sizes of electrical lines are shown in accordance with data secured from Owner's survey. The data shown is offered as estimating guide without guarantee of accuracy. B. Pay all utility charges for temporary power. Provide temporary lighting and power required. Install in accordance with OSHA requirements and as described in General Requirements Division 01. 1.10 FLASHINGS, SLEEVES, AND INSERTS A. Furnish and install flashings where conduits pass through outside walls. Flashings shall be properly formed to fit around conduit and shall be caulked, with 790 Silicone Building Sealant by Dow Corning Corporation, so as to make watertight seal between conduit and building. B. Unless otherwise specified, install sleeves for each conduit where it may pass through interior walls or floors. Galvanized 22-gage sheet iron sleeves shall be used. Finish flush with each finished wall surface. In pipe chases, the sleeve shall extend 1-1/2 inches above floor slab and shall be watertight. C. Raceways that pass through concrete beams or walls and masonry exterior walls shall be provided with galvanized wrought iron pipe sleeves, unless shown otherwise on drawings. Inside diameter of these sleeves shall be at least 1/2 inch greater than outside diameters of service pipes. After pipes are installed in these sleeves, fill annular space between pipes and sleeves with 790 Silicone Building Sealant by Dow Corning Corporation. Completed installation shall be watertight. D. Roof penetrations shall be provided with counter flashings arranged to provide weatherproof installation. E. Penetrations through walls, floors and ceilings shall be done in manner to maintain integrity of fire rating of respective wall, floor, or ceiling. F. Reference Division 7 for additional sealant requirements. Where conflicts occur with the specified requirements, the more stringent shall apply. 1.11 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Perform cutting and patching in strict accordance with provisions of these Specifications and following: 1. Coordinate Work to minimize cutting and patching. 2. Use adequate number of skilled workers who are thoroughly trained and experienced in necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with specified requirements and methods needed for proper performance of Work. B. Request for Engineer’s consent: 1. Prior to cutting which affects structural safety, submit a written request to Engineer for permission to proceed with cutting. 2. When conditions of Work or schedule require a change of materials or methods for cutting and patching, notify Engineer and secure written permission to proceed with the work. C. Perform cutting and demolition using methods that will prevent damage to other portions of Work. D. Perform fitting and adjusting to provide a finished installation complying with specified tolerances and finishes. 1.12 SURFACE CONDITIONS A. Examine areas and conditions under which Work of this Division will be performed. Work required to correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of Work shall be included as part of Work of this Division. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL MDE Project NO: 191124 260500 - 7 August 2019 1.13 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS A. Drawings show arrangements of Work. Rearrangement of spaces and equipment will be considered when Project conditions make this necessary and/or materials or equipment can be installed to better advantage. Prior to proceeding with Work, coordinate with various trades to prepare and submit electronic copies of Drawings of proposed arrangement for Engineer’s review. Allow minimum of 10 working days for review. B. Installation or rearrangement of equipment and space for Contractor’s convenience or to accommodate material or equipment substitutions will be considered. Assume responsibility for rearrangement of equipment and space and have Engineer review change before proceeding with Work. Request for changes shall be accompanied by Shop Drawings of affected equipment and space. Identify proposed monetary credits or other benefits. Allow minimum of 10 working days for review. C. Properly locate and size all required pipe sleeves and slots, holes, or openings in structure. 1.14 PREPARATION AND COORDINATION A. Coordinate the work in strict accordance with the Contract Documents as follows: 1. Where lighting fixtures and other electrical items are shown in conflict with locations of structural members and mechanical or other equipment, provide required supports and wiring to clear encroachment. 2. Install power and control wiring for installation of equipment furnished under Divisions 21, 22 and 23. Furnish disconnect switches and other equipment as required for proper operation of equipment unless equipment is specified to be factory mounted. B. Information on the Drawings and in these Specifications is as accurate as could be secured, but absolute accuracy is not guaranteed. The drawings are diagrammatic, and the exact locations, distances, levels, and other conditions shall be governed by actual construction. The drawings and specifications shall be for guidance. C. Where receptacle locations are not dimensioned on either the Architectural or Engineering Drawings, the J-box may be located on the nearest stud. When receptacles are dimensioned on the Drawings, Provide a cross brace and mount the receptacle as dimensioned. D. Field-verify measurements. No extra compensation will be allowed because of differences between Work shown on Drawings and actual site measurements. E. Branch circuit wiring and arrangement of home runs have been designed for maximum economy consistent with adequate sizing and other considerations. Increase size of wiring and wiring systems to accommodate more stringent requirements listed in these Specifications or on Drawings. Install wiring with circuits arranged as shown on Drawings. Deviations shall be approved in advance by Engineer. 1.15 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Provide Project record documents associated with Work in accordance with provisions of these Specifications. Refer to Division 1 for additional requirements. B. Throughout progress of the Work, maintain accurate record of all changes in Contract Documents (Drawings and Specifications). Changes shall include Addendums issued during bidding and location of electrical service lines, receptacles, and outside utilities. C. Delegate responsibility for maintenance of record documents to one person on Contractor's staff. D. Accuracy of Records 1. Thoroughly coordinate changes within record documents, making adequate and proper entries on each page of Specifications and each sheet of Drawings and other documents where required to show change properly. Match symbology and format of base documents. 2. Accuracy of records shall be such that future searches for items shown in Contract Documents may rely reasonably on information obtained from approved Project record documents. E. Maintain a job set of record documents protected from deterioration and from loss and damage until completion of Work. Transfer all recorded data to final Project record documents. F. Making Entries on Drawings 1. Using erasable colored pencil (not ink or indelible pencil), clearly describe change by graphic line and note as required. 2. Date entries. 3. Call attention to entry by "cloud" drawn around area or areas affected. 4. In event of overlapping changes, use different colors for overlapping changes. 5. Make entries within 24 hours after receipt of information that changes have occurred. 6. Maintain base drawing format and use the same symbols. 7. Convert field mark-ups to finished CADD record drawings when required in this Section. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL MDE Project NO: 191124 260500 - 8 August 2019 G. Conversion of Schematic Layouts 1. In some cases on Drawings, arrangements of conduits, circuits, and similar items, are shown schematically and are not intended to portray precise physical layout. Determine final physical arrangement, subject to Engineer’s approval. The design of future modifications of facility may require accurate information as to final physical layout of items that are shown only schematically on Drawings. Show by dimension accurate to within one inch, centerline of each run of sleeves and conduit below grade, in walls, or in concrete slab, etc. Surface mounted device indicates exact location: a. Clearly identify item by accurate note (e.g., "Rigid Conduit”). b. Show, by symbol or note, vertical location of item “under slab,” “in ceiling plenum,” “exposed,” etc. c. Make identification sufficiently descriptive that it may be related reliably to Specifications. H. Final Project Record Documents 1. The purpose of the final Project Record Documents is to provide factual information regarding all aspects of the Work, both concealed and visible, to enable future modification of the Work to proceed without lengthy and expensive site measurement, investigation, and examination. 2. Provide CADD electronic files in dwg Format using AutoCAD Release 2002 or later software. Upon written request, completion of a release form, and payment of the Engineer’s standard fee of $200 plus applicable sales tax for a set-up charge and $50 per drawing plus applicable sales tax for copies of such files, Engineer will provide AutoCAD Release 2002 electronic files of base Contract Drawings in dwg format on compact discs. Engineer will also provide a list of drawing layers and names that shall be maintained. 3. Provide completed record drawings on a CD reproducible of each drawing. 4. Refer to Division 01 for additional requirements. 1.16 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit two copies of preliminary draft of proposed manual or manuals to Engineer for review and comments. Allow minimum of 10 working days for review. B. Submit approved manual to Engineer prior to indoctrination of operation and maintenance personnel. C. Where instruction manuals are required for submittal, they shall be prepared in accordance with the following: Format: Size: Paper: Text: Drawings: 8-1/2-inch by 11-inch White bond, at least 20 pound weight Neatly written or printed 11 inches in height preferable; bind in with text; foldout acceptable; larger drawings acceptable but fold to fit within Manual and provide drawing pocket inside rear cover or bind in with text. Flysheets:Separate each section of Manual with neatly prepared flysheets briefly describing contents of ensuing section; flysheets may be in color. Binding:Use heavy-duty plastic or fiberboard covers with binding mechanism concealed inside manual; 3-ring binders will be acceptable; binding is subject to Engineer’s approval. Measurements:Provide measurements in U.S. standard units (e.g., feet, inches, and pounds). Where items may be expected to be measured within 10 years in accordance with metric formulae, provide additional measurements in "International System of Units" (SI). City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL MDE Project NO: 191124 260500 - 9 August 2019 D. Provide front and back covers for each manual, using durable material approved by Engineer, and clearly identified on or through cover with at least following information: OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION Name and Address of Work Name of Contractor General subject of this manual Space for approval signature of Engineer and approval date[s] E. Contents: Include at least following: 1. Neatly typewritten index near front of Manual, giving immediate information as to location within manual of emergency information regarding installation. 2. Complete instructions regarding operation and maintenance of equipment involved including lubrication, disassembly, and reassembly. 3. Complete nomenclature of parts of equipment. 4. Complete nomenclature and part number of replaceable parts, name and address of nearest vendor and other data pertinent to procurement procedures. 5. Copy of guarantees and warranties issued. 6. Manufacturer's bulletins, cuts, and descriptive data, where pertinent, clearly indicating precise items included in this installation and deleting, or otherwise clearly indicating, manufacturers' data with which this installation is not concerned. 7. Other data as required in pertinent Sections of these Specifications. 1.17 EQUIPMENT FOUNDATIONS O&M Manual Requirements MEP & Fire Suppression Title Page o Job Name o Site Address o Include Contact information of prime contractor. Table of contents Warranty Information. o Include all contractor warranties Signed and dated documents Permits-Inspections Subcontractor list o Include all subcontractors. Company name, Contact info. Trade Responsibility. Vendor list o Include name and addresses of vendors Warranty information Replaceable parts Approved submittals o Include all approved product submittals Reports/Certificates/Redlines o Engineers Observation Reports o Electrical tests. o Grounding test Report o Generator testing o Overcurrent Protection Study o Sequence of operations report o Surge Protection Commissioning Report o Contractor Start-up Report o Manufacturer Start-up Report o Owners Training Report. (All Trades) O&M Manuals Equipment Information. o Include Model, Serial and location. Signed Approval o Page for approval signature of the engineer and approval date. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL MDE Project NO: 191124 260500 - 10 August 2019 A. Provide equipment foundations in accordance with provisions of these Specifications. B. Provide concrete bases for main switchboard, distribution panelboards, floor-mounted transformers and other equipment that is to be pad- or floor-mounted. Bases shall be 4 inches high above finished floors or grades (unless otherwise noted) and shall protrude 2 inches beyond sides of equipment and shall have exposed chamfered edges. Construct bases from ready-mixed hard rock concrete, ASTM C94, reinforced with #3 Rebars, ASTM A615, Grade 40. Rebars shall be located at 18 inches on center each way. C. Field-verify exact location of outdoor pad mounted equipment with Engineer. Supply necessary fill and grade site to provide natural drainage away from equipment. D. Provide structural concrete foundations for generator, pad mounted transformers and lighting pole bases. 1.18 TESTING AND INSPECTION A. Provide personnel and equipment, make required tests, and secure required approvals from Engineer and Governmental Agencies having jurisdiction B. Make written notice to Engineer adequately in advance of each of following stages of construction: 1. When rough in is complete, but not covered 2. At completion of Work of this Division 3. In underground condition prior to placing backfill, concrete floor slab, and when associated electrical Work is in place C. When material or workmanship is found to not comply with specified requirements, remove items from job site and replace them with items complying with specified requirements at no additional cost to Owner. This shall be performed within 3 days after receipt of written notice of noncompliance. D. In Engineer’s presence, test parts of electrical system and prove that items provided under this Division function electrically in required manner. 1.19 SITE VISITS BY FACTORY PERSONNEL A. Pay for travel expenses, living expenses, and miscellaneous expenses associated with site visits of factory personnel to perform on site testing, inspections, and reviews. 1.20 WARRANTY A. Warrant equipment and workmanship for period of one year after date of substantial completion and replace or repair faulty equipment or installation at no cost to Owner for service during this period, in accordance with requirements of Division 1. B. Warranty shall not void specific warranties issued by manufacturers for greater periods of time or void rights guaranteed to Owner by law. C. Warranties shall be in writing in form satisfactory to Owner, and shall be delivered to Owner before final payment is made. D. All manufacturers shall provide the manufacturers warranties starting at time of start-up and not at time of delivery. 1.21 PROJECT COMPLETION A. Upon completion of Work of this Division, thoroughly clean exposed portions of electrical installation, removing traces of soil, labels, grease, oil, and other foreign material, and using only type cleaner recommended by manufacturer of item being cleaned. B. Thoroughly indoctrinate Owner's operation and maintenance personnel in contents of operations and maintenance manual required to be submitted as part of this Division of these Specifications. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL MDE Project NO: 191124 260500 - 11 August 2019 1.22 TRAINING A. Contractors are responsible to provide owner with an adequate amount of training to be able to operate any system installed. 1. This includes training but not limited to any Lighting Controls, Generator, Digital Controls, Security systems, 2. Provide a sign in sheet that is to be added to the O&M manual a. Owners & all building maintenance personal are required to have training. Part 2 – Not Used Part 3 – Not Used END OF SECTION City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 FIRESTOPPING MDE Project NO: 191124 260503 - 1 August 2019 SECTION 260503 - FIRESTOPPING PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to the Work in this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Only tested firestop systems shall be used in specific locations as follows: 1. Penetrations for the passage of conduit and other electrical equipment through fire-rated vertical barriers (walls and partitions), horizontal barriers (floor/ceiling assemblies), and vertical service shaft walls and partitions. 2. Completion of firestop installations to maintain the rating integrity of the barrier penetrated. 3. SUBMITTALS: Provide submittals as required in section 26 00 10, “Submittal Process.” 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Firestopping: Material or combination of materials used to retain integrity of fire-rated construction by maintaining an effective barrier against the spread of flame, smoke, water and hot gases through penetrations in fire rated wall and floor assemblies. 1.4 REFERENCES A. Test Requirements: ASTM E-814, "Standard Method of Fire Tests of Through Penetration Fire Stops" (July 1997). B. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) of Northbrook, IL runs ASTM E-814 under their designation of UL 1479 and publishes the results in their "FIRE RESISTANCE DIRECTORY" that is updated annually. 1. UL Fire Resistance Directory: a. Through-Penetration Firestop Devices (XHCR) b. Fire Resistance Ratings (BXUV) c. Through-Penetration Firestop Systems (XHEZ) d. Fill, Voids, or Cavity Material (XHHW) e. Forming Materials (XHKU) C. Inspection Requirements: ASTM E 2174-01 “Standard Practice for On-Site Inspection of Installed Fire Stops”. D. International Firestop Council Guidelines for Evaluating Firestop Systems Engineering Judgments. E. ASTM E-84, Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. F. All major building codes: ICBO, SBCCI, BOCA, and IBC. (Note to specifier: Retain or delete building codes listed above as applicable). G. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code H. NFPA 70 – National Electric Code. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. A manufacturer's direct representative (not distributor or agent) to be on-site during initial installation of firestop systems to train appropriate contractor personnel in proper selection and installation procedures. This will be done per manufacturer's written recommendations published in their literature and drawing details. B. Firestop System installation must meet requirements of ASTM E-814 or UL 1479 tested assemblies that provide a fire rating equal to that of construction being penetrated. C. Proposed firestop materials and methods shall conform to applicable governing codes having local jurisdiction. D. Firestop Systems do not reestablish the structural integrity of load bearing partitions/assemblies, or support live loads and traffic. Installer shall consult the structural engineer prior to penetrating any load bearing assembly. E. For those firestop applications that exist for which no UL tested system is available through a manufacturer, a manufacturer's engineering judgment derived from similar UL system designs or other tests will be submitted to local authorities having jurisdiction for their review and approval prior to installation. Engineer judgment drawings must follow requirements set forth by the International Firestop Council (September 7, 1994 as may be amended from time to time). City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 FIRESTOPPING MDE Project NO: 191124 260503 - 2 August 2019 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Submit Product Data: Manufacturer's specifications and technical data for each material including the composition and limitations, documentation of UL firestop systems to be used and manufacturer's installation instructions to comply with Section 26 00 10. B. Manufacturer's engineering judgment identification number and drawing details when no UL system is available for an application. Engineer judgment must include both project name and contractor’s name that will install firestop system as described in drawing. C. Submit material safety data sheets provided with product delivered to job-site. 1.7 INSTALLER QUALIFICATIONS A. Engage an experienced Installer who is certified, licensed, or otherwise qualified by the firestopping manufacturer as having the necessary experience, staff, and training to install manufacture’s products per specified requirements. A manufacturer’s willingness to sell its firestopping products to the Contractor or to an Installer engaged by the Contractor does not in itself confer qualification on the buyer. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials undamaged in manufacturer's clearly labeled, unopened containers, identified with brand, type, and UL label where applicable. B. Coordinate delivery of materials with scheduled installation date to allow minimum storage time at job-site. C. Store materials under cover and protect from weather and damage in compliance with manufacturer's requirements. D. Comply with recommended procedures, precautions or remedies described in material safety data sheets as applicable. E. Do not use damaged or expired materials. 1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Do not use materials that contain flammable solvents. B. Scheduling 1. Schedule installation of CAST IN PLACE firestop devices after completion of floor formwork, metal form deck, or composite deck but before placement of concrete. 2. Schedule installation of other firestopping materials after completion of penetrating item installation but prior to covering or concealing of openings. C. Verify existing conditions and substrates before starting work. Correct unsatisfactory conditions before proceeding. D. Weather conditions: Do not proceed with installation of firestop materials when temperatures exceed the manufacturer's recommended limitations for installation printed on product label and product data sheet. E. During installation, provide masking and drop cloths to prevent firestopping materials from contaminating any adjacent surfaces.PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 FIRESTOPPING, GENERAL A. Provide firestopping composed of components that are compatible with each other, the substrates forming openings, and the items, if any, penetrating the firestopping under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by the firestopping manufacturer based on testing and field experience. B. Provide components for each firestopping system that are needed to install fill material. Use only components specified by the firestopping manufacturer and approved by the qualified testing agency for the designated fire-resistance-rated systems. C. Firestopping materials are either “cast-in-place” (integral with concrete placement) or “post installed”. Provide cast-in-place Firestop devices prior to concrete placement. 2.2 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with through penetration firestop systems (XHEZ) listed in Volume II of the UL Fire Resistance Directory, provide products of the following manufacturers as identified below: 1. Hilti, Inc., Tulsa, Oklahoma (800) 879-8000 2. Tremco Sealants & Coatings, Beechwood, Ohio (216) 292-5000 3. 3M Fire Protection Products, St. Paul, Minnesota (612) 736-0203 4. Johns-Manville Firetemp 5. Other manufacturers listed in the U.L. Fire Resistance Directory – Volume 2 City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 FIRESTOPPING MDE Project NO: 191124 260503 - 3 August 2019 2.3 MATERIALS A. Use only firestop products that have been UL 1479, ASTM E-814 tested for specific fire-rated construction conditions conforming to construction assembly type, penetrating item type, annular space requirements, and fire-rating involved for each separate instance. B. Cast-in place firestop devices are installed prior to concrete placement for use with non- combustible and combustible plastic conduit penetrating concrete floors, the following products are acceptable: 1. Hilti CP 680 Cast-In Place Firestop Device 2. Hilti CP 681 Tub Box Kit 3. Equivalent products listed in the U.L. Fire Resistance Directory – Volume 2 C. Sealants or caulking materials for use with non-combustible items including steel pipe, copper pipe, rigid steel conduit and electrical metallic tubing (EMT), the following products are acceptable: 1. Hilti FS-ONE Intumescent Firestop Sealant 2. Hilti CP 604 Self-leveling Firestop Sealant 3. Hilti CP 620 Fire Foam 4. 3M Fire Stop Sealant 2000 5. 3M Fire Barrier CP25 WB 6. Tremco Tremstop Fyre-Sil Sealant 7. Equivalent products listed in the U.L. Fire Resistance Directory – Volume 2 D. Sealants or caulking materials for use with sheet metal ducts, the following products are acceptable: 1. Hilti CP 601s Elastomeric Firestop Sealant 2. Hilti CP 606 Flexible Firestop Sealant 3. Hilti FS-ONE Intumescent Firestop Sealant 4. Hilti CP 604 Self-leveling Firestop Sealant 5. Equivalent products listed in the U.L. Fire Resistance Directory – Volume 2 E. Intumescent sealants or caulking materials for use with combustible items (penetrants consumed by high heat and flame) including insulated metal pipe, PVC jacketed, flexible cable or cable bundles and plastic pipe, the following products are acceptable: 1. Hilti FS-ONE Intumescent Firestop Sealant 2. 3M Fire Barrier CP25 WB 3. Tremco Tremstop WBM Intumescent Firestop Sealant 4. Equivalent products listed in the U.L. Fire Resistance Directory – Volume 2 F. Intumescent sealants, caulking or putty materials for use with flexible cable or cable bundles, the following products are acceptable: 1. Hilti FS-ONE Intumescent Firestop Sealant 2. Hilti CP 620 Fire Foam 3. Hilti CP 618 Firestop Putty Stick 4. 3M Fire Barrier CP25 WB 5. Tremco Tremstop WBM Intumescent Firestop Sealant 6. Equivalent products listed in the U.L. Fire Resistance Directory – Volume 2 G. Non curing, re-penetrable intumescent sealants, caulking or putty materials for use with flexible cable or cable bundles, the following products are acceptable: 1. Hilti CP 618 Firestop Putty Stick 2. Equivalent products listed in the U.L. Fire Resistance Directory – Volume 2 H. Wall opening protective materials for use with U.L. listed metallic and specified nonmetallic outlet boxes, the following products are acceptable: 1. Hilti CP 617 Firestop Putty Pad 2. Equivalent products listed in the U.L. Fire Resistance Directory – Volume 1 I. Firestop collar or wrap devices attached to assembly around combustible plastic conduit, the following products are acceptable: 1. Hilti CP 642 Firestop Collar 2. Hilti CP 643 Firestop Collar 3. 3M Fire Barrier PPD Plastic Pipe Device 4. Hilti CP 645 Wrap Strip 5. Equivalent products listed in the U.L. Fire Resistance Directory – Volume 2 J. Materials used for large size/complex penetrations made to accommodate cable trays, multiple steel and copper pipes, electrical busways in raceways, the following products are acceptable: 1. Hilti CP 637 Firestop Mortar 2. Hilti FS 657 FIRE BLOCK 3. Hilti CP 620 Fire Foam 4. 3M Firestop Foam 2001 5. 3M Fire Barrier CS-195 Composite Sheet 6. Equivalent products listed in the U.L. Fire Resistance Directory – Volume 2 City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 FIRESTOPPING MDE Project NO: 191124 260503 - 4 August 2019 K. Non curing, re-penetrable materials used for large size/complex penetrations made to accommodate cable trays, multiple steel and copper pipes, electrical busways in raceways, the following products are acceptable: 1. Hilti FS 657 FIRE BLOCK 2. Equivalent products listed in the U.L. Fire Resistance Directory – Volume 2 L. Provide a firestop system with an "F" Rating as determined by UL 1479 or ASTM E814, which is equal to the time rating of construction being penetrated.PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Verification of Conditions: Examine areas and conditions under which work is to be performed and identify conditions detrimental to proper or timely completion. 1. Verify penetrations are properly sized and in suitable condition for application of materials. 2. Surfaces to which firestop materials will be applied shall be free of dirt, grease, oil, rust, laitance, release agents, water repellents, and any other substances that may affect proper adhesion. 3. Provide masking and temporary covering to prevent soiling of adjacent surfaces by firestopping materials. 4. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for temperature and humidity conditions before, during and after installation of firestopping. 5. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 COORDINATION A. Coordinate location and proper selection of cast-in-place Firestop Devices with trade responsible for the work. Ensure device is installed before placement of concrete. B. Responsible trade to provide adequate spacing of field run pipes to allow for installation of cast-in- place firestop devices without interferences. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Regulatory Requirements: Install firestop materials in accordance with UL Fire Resistance Directory. B. Manufacturer's Instructions: Comply with manufacturer's instructions for installation of through- penetration and construction joint materials. 1. Seal all holes or voids made by penetrations to ensure an air and water resistant seal. 2. Protect materials from damage on surfaces subjected to traffic. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Examine sealed penetration areas to ensure proper installation before concealing or enclosing areas. B. Keep areas of work accessible until inspection by applicable code authorities. C. Inspection of through-penetration firestopping shall be performed in accordance with ASTM E 2174, “Standard Practice for On-Site Inspection of Installed Fire Stops” or other recognized standard. D. Perform under this section patching and repairing of firestopping caused by cutting or penetrating of existing firestop systems already installed by other trades. 3.5 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Remove equipment, materials and debris, leaving area in undamaged, clean condition. B. Clean all surfaces adjacent to sealed holes and joints to be free of excess firestop materials and soiling as work progresses. END OF SECTION City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 SITE ELECTRICAL MDE Project NO: 191124 26 05 05 - 1 August 2019 SECTION 26 05 05 - SITE ELECTRICAL PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to the Work in this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Provide labor, materials, equipment, tools and services, and perform operations required for, and reasonably incidental to, the providing of all site electrical work. B. The site electrical work shall include, but not be limited to, the furnishing and installation of necessary materials and making arrangements for: 1. The connection of electrical, telephone, data and cable utilities. 2. Underground conduit. C. Meet with the electric utility company and all other utility provider's representative prior to bidding the project. Review the site plan and the load summary and verify the requirements for providing electric service to the building. Determine what work will be provided by the power company and what work will be performed by the contractor. Obtain copies of appropriate details, standards, and instructions. Utility locations are subject to change during this coordination. All changes must be accounted for in the bid. No additional funds will be provided for failing to coordinate this work. Request the amount of any utility charges to be charged to the project. Include these costs in the bid. D. Provide all equipment, materials, labor, supervision, and services necessary for or incidental to the installation of electrical service as directed by the utility company. E. Work Includes, but is not limited to: 1. Furnish and install underground primary trench, for the direct buried primary and secondary service conductors. 2. Furnish and install conduits, wires, transformer pads and meeting equipment to provide an electrical service entrance as shown on the drawing and/or specified herein. Coordinate work with the electric utility company, verify all requirements, and install service entrance equipment in exact compliance with utility company and local governmental agency requirements. 3. Arrange with the electric utility company to inspect the work. 4. Include in the bid, all utility company charges and costs related to the installation of the electric service. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data and shop drawings in accordance with Division 1 for products specified under B. Provide submittals as required in section 26 00 10, “Electrical Submittal Process.” 1.4 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. National Electrical Code (NEC), Article 300 B. Service installation standards of the serving utility company(s) PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 ELECTRICAL SERVICE A. Coordination: The location of the electrical service entrance shall be coordinated with the electric utility company and with all other trades. Provide materials and equipment required to connect the electrical service. B. Materials: Provide materials in accordance with other Sections of these Specifications. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 SITE ELECTRICAL MDE Project NO: 191124 26 05 05 - 2 August 2019 PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Underground installation of more than one conduit shall be in a “ductbank” arrangement. All conduits shall be laid so joints are staggered. B. Pour a red colored concrete envelope minimum 3" thick over electrical, cable television, and telephone service conduit. C. Where specifically indicated on the Drawings, a full concrete enclosed ductbank with reinforcing rods shall be installed. D. Perform excavation, shoring, backfilling and concrete work in connection with electrical work in accordance with other Divisions of the Specifications. E. All underground conduits shall be sloped away from the building to negate water entering the building through the conduit system. F. Provide underground warning tape 6" to 12" below finished surface along entire length of underground conduit or ductbank. Provide a separate length of tape for every 24" in width of ductbank. Interface installation of underground warning tape with backfilling. 3.2 UTILITIES A. The locations, elevations and voltage of electrical lines included within the area of this work are indicated on the Drawings or in the Specifications in accordance with information received by the Owner. B. The Contractor shall examine the site and shall verify, to his own satisfaction, the location and elevation of all utilities, and shall adequately inform himself as to their relation to the work. C. The work associated with existing utility lines to be abandoned or removed, shown within the scope of this project, will be arranged by the Owner with the respective utility. D. Existing utility lines not indicated but encountered during construction shall be protected, relocated or capped as directed by the Owner's Representative. All precautions shall be exercised to prevent damage to existing lines not shown, but should work become necessary, it must be authorized prior to execution except in an emergency situation. E. Before beginning excavations of any nature whatsoever, the Contractor shall make an attempt to locate all underground utilities of every nature occurring within the bounds of the area to be excavated. The Contractor shall then proceed with caution in his excavation work so that no utility shall be damaged with a resultant loss of service. F. Should damage result to any utility through the Contractor's negligence or failure to comply with the above directive, he shall be liable for such damage and for all expense incurred in the expeditious repair or replacement of such damaged utilities. G. Repair of damaged utilities shall be to a condition equal to or better than the adjacent undamaged portion of such utility and to the complete satisfaction of the Owner. END OF SECTION City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES MDE Project NO: 191124 26 05 19 - 1 August 2019 SECTION 260519 - LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to the Work in this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Provide all equipment, materials, labor, supervision, and services necessary for or incidental to the installation of conductors as indicated on the Drawings and as specified. B. Work included: 1. Wiring connections and terminations, 600 Volt rating and below. 1.3 SUBMITTALS: Provide submittals as required in section 26 05 05, “Submittal Process.” 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workers who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. B. Without additional cost to the Owner, provide such other labor and materials as are required to complete the work of this Section in accordance to the requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, regardless of whether such materials and associated labor are called for elsewhere in these Contract Documents. C. When requested, provide the manufacturer's certifications that confirm that materials meet or exceed minimum requirements as specified. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 CONDUCTORS A. Provide conductors made of soft-drawn, annealed copper with conductivity not less than that of 98% pure copper. B. Building Wire: 1. Thermoplastic-insulated building wire: NEMA WC 5 2. Feeders and branch circuits: Copper, stranded conductor, 600-volt insulation, THHN/THWN-2 3. Control circuits: Copper, stranded conductor 600-volt insulation, THHN/THWN-2 4. Where more than one conductor of the same phase or more than one neutral conductor occurs at the same outlet or junction box, these conductors shall be identifiable from each other by use of stripes or distinguishing markings 5. Type MC shall be acceptable behind wall and above ceilings. a. AC cables shall not be used 6. Use the following color code system: 240/120 Volt Systems 208Y/120 Volt Systems 480Y/277 Volt Systems Phase A Black Black Brown City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES MDE Project NO: 191124 26 05 19 - 2 August 2019 Phase B Orange Red Orange Phase C Blue Blue Yellow Neutral White White Gray Ground Green Green Green Switch Purple Purple Purple C. Remote Control and Signal Cable: 1. Control cable for Class 2 or Class 3 remote control and signal circuits: Copper conductor, 300-volt insulation, rated 60-degree C, individual conductors twisted together, shielded, and covered with a PVC jacket; UL listed. 2. Plenum cable for Class 2 or Class 3 remote control and signal circuits: Copper conductor, 300-volt insulation, rated 60-degree C, individual conductors twisted together, shielded, and covered with a nonmetallic jacket; UL listed for use in air handling ducts, hollow spaces used as ducts, and plenums. 2.2 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Provide products by the following manufacturers: 1. Rome 2. Cable 3. Pirelli 4. Belden 5. Or approved equal PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL WIRING METHODS (LESS THAN 600 VOLTS) A. Install conductor sizes as indicated. Provide No. 10 AWG conductor for the entire circuit length for single-phase, 20-ampere circuits for which the distance from panelboard to the last outlet is more than 100 feet for 120-volt circuits or 200 feet for 277-volt circuits. The minimum wire size shall be 12 AWG for power and lighting circuits, and no smaller than 18 AWG for control wiring. Remote control wiring shall not be less than 14 AWG for installed lengths of 50 feet or less. Remote control conductors shall be increased one size (per NEC Table 310) for each additional 50 feet of length. Increase the raceway system to accommodate the increased wire size. B. Provide an equal number of conductors of equal size for each phase of a circuit in same raceway or cable. C. Splice only in junction boxes, outlet boxes, pullboxes, or manholes. D. Neatly train and lace wiring inside boxes, equipment, and panelboards. E. Make conductor lengths for parallel circuits equal. F. Phasing shall be consistent throughout each installation from the service connection to every device connection and outlet. Where interface is made to an existing system, the existing phasing configuration shall be maintained. 3.2 WIRING INSTALLATION IN RACEWAYS A. Pull all conductors into a raceway at the same time. Use UL listed wire-pulling lubricant for pulling 4 AWG and larger wires. B. Install wire in raceway after interior of building has been physically protected from the weather and all mechanical work likely to injure conductors has been completed. C. Completely and thoroughly swab raceway system before installing conductors. 3.3 CABLE INSTALLATION A. Provide protection for exposed cables where subject to damage. B. Support cables above accessible ceilings. Do not rest on ceiling tiles, light fixtures or air devices. Use spring metal clips or metal cable ties to support cables from structure. Include bridle rings or drive rings. C. Use suitable cable fittings and connectors. 3.4 WIRING CONNECTIONS AND TERMINATIONS A. Splice only in accessible boxes or manholes. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES MDE Project NO: 191124 26 05 19 - 3 August 2019 B. Use solderless pressure connectors with insulating covers for copper wire splices and taps 8 AWG and smaller. C. Use split bolt connectors for copper wire splices and taps 6 AWG and larger. Tape uninsulated conductors and connectors with electrical tape to 150 percent of the insulation value of conductor. D. Thoroughly clean wires before installing lugs and connectors. E. Make splices, taps and terminations to carry full capacity of conductors without perceptible temperature rise. F. Terminate spare conductors with electrical b-caps or other U.L. approved electrical termination products. G. Field Testing. Insulation resistance of all feeder conductors served by a protective device rated 200A or higher shall be tested. Each conductor shall have its insulation resistance tested after the installation is completed and all splices, taps and connections are made except connection to or into its source and point (or points) of termination. Insulation resistance of conductors which are to operate at 600 volts or less shall be tested by using a Biddle Megger of not less than 1000 volts d-c. Insulation resistance of conductors rated at 600 volts shall be free of shorts and grounds and have a minimum resistance phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground of at least 10 megohms. Conductors that do not exceed insulation resistance values listed above shall be removed at Contractor's expense and replaced and test repeated. The Contractor shall furnish all instruments and personnel required for tests, shall tabulate readings observed, and shall forward copies of the test readings to the Owner in accordance with Section 26 0593. These test reports shall identify each conductor tested, date and time of test and weather conditions. Each test shall be signed by the party making the test. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field inspection and testing will be performed under applicable provisions of Division 26. B. Inspect wire and cable for physical damage and proper connection. C. Torque test conductor connections and terminations to manufacturers recommended values. D. Perform continuity tests on all power and equipment branch circuit conductors. Verify proper phasing of all connections. 3.6 WIRE AND CABLE INSTALLATION SCHEDULE A. All locations: Building wire in raceways. 3.7 600-VOLT INSULATED CONDUCTORS A. Size: Install conductor sizes as indicated. Provide No. 10 AWG conductor for the entire circuit length for single-phase, 20-ampere circuits for which the distance from panelboard to the last outlet is more than 100 feet for 120-volt circuits or 200 feet for 277-volt circuits. B. Home Runs: Except where specifically indicated, provide branch circuit home runs with not more than two different line conductors and a common neutral in a single raceway for 3-wire, single- phase systems, nor more than three different line conductors and a common neutral in a single raceway for 4-wire, 3-phase systems. Use home run circuit numbers as indicated for panelboard connections. C. Where more than one conductor of the same phase or more than one neutral conductor occurs at the same outlet or junction box, these conductors shall be identifiable from each other by use of stripes or distinguishing markings. END OF SECTION City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS MDE Project NO: 191124 260526 - 1 August 2019 SECTION 260526 - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to the Work in this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Provide all equipment, materials, labor, supervision, and services necessary for or incidental to the installation of electrical systems grounding as shown or indicated on the Drawings and/or as specified. B. Work Included: 1. Power systems grounding 2. Electrical equipment and raceway grounding and bonding C. SUBMITTALS: Provide submittals as required in section 26 00 10, “Submittal Process.” 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. B. Without additional cost to the Owner, provide such other labor and materials as are required to complete the work of this Section in accordance with the requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, regardless of whether such materials and associated labor are called for elsewhere in these Contract Documents. C. When requested, provide the Engineer with the manufacturer's certificate that materials meet or exceed minimum requirements as specified. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Provide electrical grounding system indicated with assembly of materials, including but not limited to: 1. Wires and cables 2. Connectors 3. Terminals 4. Ground rods 5. Bonding jumper braid 6. Surge arrestors B. Where materials or components are not indicated, provide products complying with NEC, UL, IEEE, and established industry standards for applications indicated. 2.2 CHEMICAL GROUND ROD A. Self-contained ground rod(s) using electrolytically enhanced grounding shall be provided for power system grounding where indicated on the drawings. The ground rod shall operate by hygroscopically extracting moisture from the air to activate the electrolytic process improving performance. The ground rod system shall be UL listed and have been manufactured for a minimum of 10 years. The ground rod system shall be 100% self activating sealed and maintenance free. The system shall not require the addition of chemical or water solutions. B. Electrode unit 1. The copper ground rod shall consist of 2” nominal diameter hollow copper tube with a wall thickness of not less than .083”. The tube shall be permanently capped on the top and bottom. Air breather holes shall be provided in the top of the tube and drainage holes shall be provided in the bottom of the tube for electrolyte drainage into the surrounding soil. Shaft configuration: Straight Shaft Model No: K2-1020CS; UL Listing: 467. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS MDE Project NO: 191124 260526 - 2 August 2019 2. The ground rod shall be filled from the factory with non-hazardous Calsolyte to enhance grounding performance. 3. Ground rod shall be twenty feet long for straight (vertical) installation. 4. A stranded 4/0 AWG Cu ground wire shall be Cadwelded to the side of rod for electrode conductor connection. A clamping “U-bolt” with pressure plate on the tip end of the tube shall be provided for testing and temporary connections. C. Ground Access Box 1. Provide a precast concrete box with slots for conduit entrances. Minimum size shall be ten-inch diameter by twelve high. Provide a cast iron, flush traffic rated cover with “breather” slots, XIT model #XB-12. D. Backfill Material 1. Natural volcanic, non-corrosive form of bentonite clay grout backfill material free of polymer sealant. XIT model #LNC. 2. Shall absorb approximately 14 gallons of water per 50# bag for optimal 30% solids density. 3. PH value 8-10 with maximum resistively of 3 ohm-m at 30% solids density. E. Manufacturer: Lyncole XIT Grounding, 3547 Voyager St., Torrance, CA 90503, Phone (800) 962- 2610; or approved equal. F. Ground Wire Termination: Exothermic connection to 4/0 conductor. U-bolt with pressure plate provided as test point. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install electrical grounding systems in accordance with applicable portions of NEC, with NECA's "Standard of Installation," and in accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that products comply with requirements and serve intended functions. B. Provide a separate, insulated equipment grounding conductor in feeder circuits. Terminate each end on a grounding lug, bus, or bushing. C. Connect grounding electrode conductors to metal water pipe using a suitable ground clamp. Make connections to flanged piping at street side of flange. Provide bonding jumper around water meter. D. Installation of Chemical Ground Rod 1. Install a supplemental ground rod system in compliance with manufacturer’s instruction or recommendation. 2. Bore minimum 6” diameter hole, 6” deeper than the length of rod to be buried. Insure that the top of the copper chemical ground rod will not come in contact with the metal grate of the protective box or hand-hole cover. 3. Remove sealing tape from leaching holes 4. Place chemical ground rod in hole, so that the top of unit is about 6” below grade. 5. Backfill. 6. Lynconite backfill is specific clay (bentonite clay) included with the system. Mix each 50# backfill grout material with 14 gallons water to form a slurry and pour around chemical ground rod up to “bury to here sticker”. 7. Place protective box in accordance with the drawings 8. Remove sealing tape from the top breather holes to activate. 9. Connect grounding electrode conductor to ground rod pigtail exothermically( Cadweld or Thermoweld). 10. Bury grounding conductor 30” below grade. Cover conductor with a small amount of backfill for protection against corrosion. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect grounding and bonding system conductors and connections for tightness and proper installation. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS MDE Project NO: 191124 260526 - 3 August 2019 B. Electrical Tests: 1. Perform fall-of-potential test or alternative in accordance with IEEE Standard 81-1991 on the main grounding electrode or systems. 2. Perform point-to-point tests to determine the resistance between the main grounding system and all major electrical equipment frames, system neutral, and/or derived neutral points. C. Test Values: 1. The resistance between the main grounding electrode and ground should be no greater than two ohms. Install additional grounding electrodes, as required, to achieve the specified resistance value. 2. Investigate point-to-point resistance values which exceed 0.5 ohm. Correct deficiencies at no additional cost. Retest to prove compliance D. Provide written certification to the Engineer that the grounding system has been tested and complies with the specified requirements. E. Provide a test report. END OF SECTION City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS MDE Project NO: 191124 260529 - 1 August 2019 SECTION 260529 - SUPPORTING DEVICES PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to the Work in this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Provide all equipment, materials, labor, supervision, and services necessary for or incidental to the installation of support systems as shown or indicated on the Drawings and/or as specified. B. Work Included: 1. Conduit and equipment support 2. Fastening hardware C.SUBMITTALS: Provide submittals as required in section 26 00 10, “Submittal Process.” 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workers who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. B. Without additional cost to the Owner, provide such other labor and materials as are required to complete the work in this Section in accordance with the requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, regardless of whether such materials and associated labor are called for elsewhere in these Contract Documents. C. When requested, provide the Architect with manufacturer's certificates that confirm materials meet or exceed minimum requirements as specified. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 HANGERS AND CLAMPS A. Provide supporting devices of types, sizes, and materials indicated, and having the following construction features: 1. Clevis Hangers: For supporting 2" rigid metal conduit; galvanized steel; with 1/2" diameter hole for round steel rod, approximately 54 pounds per units. 2. Riser Clamps: For supporting 5" rigid metal conduit; black steel; with 2 bolts and nuts, and 4" ears, approximately 510 pounds per 100 units. 3. Reducing Couplings: Steel rod reducing coupling, 1/2" x 5/8", black steel, approximately 16 pounds per 100 units. 4. C-Clamps: Black steel, 1-1/4" x 3/16" stock; 3/8" cross bolt; flange width 2", approximately 52 pounds per 100 units. 5. I-Beam Clamps: Black steel, 1-1/4" x 3/16" stock; 3/8" cross bolt; flange width 2"; approximately 52 pounds per 100 units. 6. One-Hole Conduit Straps: For supporting 3/4" rigid metal conduit; galvanized steel; approximately 7 pounds per 100 units. 7. Two-Hole Conduit Straps: For supporting 3/4" rigid metal conduit, galvanized steel; 3/4" strap width; and 2-1/8" between center of screw holes. 8. Hexagon Nuts: For 1/2" rod size; galvanized steel; approximately 4 pounds per 100 units. 9. Round Steel Rod: Black steel; 1/2" diameter; approximately 67 pounds per 100 feet. 10. Offset Conduit Clamps: For supporting 2" rigid metal conduit; black steel; approximately 200 pounds per 100 units. B. Anchors: Provide anchors of types, sizes, and materials indicated, and having the following construction features: 1. Lead Expansion Anchors: 1/2", approximately 38 pounds per 100 units. 2. Toggle Bolts: Springhead; 3/16" x 4"; approximately 5 pounds per 100 units. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS MDE Project NO: 191124 260529 - 2 August 2019 C. Sleeves and Seals: Provide sleeves and seals, of types, sizes and materials indicated; and having the following construction features: 1. Wall and Floor Seals: Provide factory-assembled watertight wall and floor seals, of types and sizes indicated; suitable for sealing around conduit, pipe, or tubing passing through concrete floors and walls. Construct with steel sleeves, malleable iron body, neoprene sealing grommets and rings, metal pressure rings, pressure clamps, and cap screws. D. Conduit Cable Supports: Provide cable supports with insulating wedging plug for non-armored type electrical cables in risers; construct for 2" rigid metal conduit; 3-wires, type wire as indicated; construct body of malleable iron casting with hot dip galvanized finish. E. U-Channel Strut Systems: Provide U-channel strut system for supporting electrical equipment, 16-gage hot dip galvanized steel, of types and sizes indicated; construct with 9/16" diameter holes, 8" O.C. on top surface, with standard green finish, and with the following fittings which mate and match with U-channel: Fixture hangers Channel hangers End caps Beam clamps Thin wall conduit clamps Wiring stud Rigid conduit clamps Conduit hangers U-bolts 2.2 FABRICATED SUPPORTING DEVICES A. Provide pipe sleeves of one of the following: 1. Sheet Metal: Fabricate from galvanized sheet metal; round tube closed with snaplock joint, welded spiral seams, or welded longitudinal joint. Fabricate from the following gages: 3" and smaller, 20 gauge; 4" to 6", 16 gauge; over 6", 14 gauge. 2. Steel Pipe: Fabricate from Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe, remove burrs. 3. Iron Pipe: Fabricate from cast iron or ductile iron pipe; remove burrs. 4. Plastic Pipe: Fabricate from Schedule 80 PVC plastic pipe; remove burrs. B. Sleeve Seals: Provide sleeve seals for sleeves located in foundation walls below grade, or in exterior walls, of one of the following: 1. Dow # 790 Silicone Building Sealant by Dow Corning Corporation. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF SUPPORTING DEVICES A. Fasten hanger rods, conduit clamps, and outlet and junction boxes to building structure using expansion anchors, preset inserts, or beam clamps. B. Install hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments to support piping properly from building structure. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal conduits to be supported together on trapeze type hangers where possible. Install supports with maximum spacing indicated. C. Use toggle bolts or hollow wall fasteners in hollow masonry, plaster, or gypsum board partitions and walls; expansion anchors or present inserts in solid masonry walls; self-drilling anchors or expansion anchor on concrete surfaces; sheet metal screws in sheet metal studs; and wood screws in wood construction. D. Do not fasten supports to piping, ductwork, mechanical equipment, or conduit. E. Fabricate supports from structural steel or steel channel, rigidly welded or bolted to present a neat appearance. Use hexagon head bolts with spring lock washers under all nuts. F. Install freestanding electrical equipment on concrete pads. G. Install surface-mounted cabinets and panelboards with minimum of four anchors. H. Bridge studs top and bottom with channels to support surface and flush-mounted cabinets and panelboards in stud walls. I. Tighten sleeve seal nuts until sealing grommets have expanded to form watertight seal. END OF SECTION City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 CONDUIT FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS MDE Project NO: 191124 260533.13 - 1 August 2019 SECTION 260533.13 - CONDUIT FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to the Work in this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Provide all equipment, materials, labor, supervision, and services necessary for or incidental to the installation of a complete and operating electrical raceway system, as indicated on the Drawings and as specified. B. Work included: 1. Rigid metal conduit and fittings 2. Electrical metallic tubing and fittings 3. Flexible metal conduit and fittings 4. Non-metallic conduit and fittings 5. Surface-mounted raceway C.SUBMITTALS: Provide submittals as required in section 26 00 10, “Submittal Process.” 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workers who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. B. Without additional cost to the Owner, provide such other labor and materials as are required to complete the work of this Section in accordance to the requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, regardless of whether such materials and associated labor are called for elsewhere in these Contract Documents. C. When requested, provide the Architect with manufacturer's certificates that confirm that materials meet or exceed minimum requirements as specified. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 CONDUITS AND FITTINGS A. Provide metal conduits, tubing, fittings, and couplings of types, grades, sizes, and weights (wall thickness) for each service indicated. Where types and grades are not indicated, provide proper selection determined by installer to fulfill wiring requirements and comply with applicable portions of NEC for raceways. B. Rigid Metal Conduit and Fittings 1. Rigid steel conduit: ANSI C80.1 2. Fittings and conduit bodies: ANSI/NEMA FB 1; threaded type, material to match conduit. C. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT) and Fittings 1. EMT: ANSI C80.3 galvanized tubing 2. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: ANSI/NEMA FB 1; steel compression type D. Flexible Metal Conduit and Fittings 1. Conduit: FS WW-C-566; steel 2. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: ANSI/NEMA FB 1 E. Liquid tight Flexible Conduit and Fittings 1. Conduit: Flexible metal conduit with PVC jacket 2. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: ANSI/NEMA FB 1 F. Plastic Conduit and Fittings 1. Conduit: NEMA TC 2; Schedule 40 PVC 2. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: NEMA TC 3 City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 CONDUIT FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS MDE Project NO: 191124 260533.13 - 2 August 2019 2.2 CONDUIT SUPPORTS A. Conduit Clamps, Straps, and Supports: Steel or malleable iron. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 CONDUIT SIZING, ARRANGEMENT AND SUPPORT A. Size of conduit shall be as indicated on the drawings or sized for conductor type installed, whichever is larger. Size all conduits in accordance with the NEC. Minimum conduit size shall be ¾ inch. B. Arrange conduit to maintain headroom and present a neat appearance. C. Route exposed conduit and conduit above accessible ceilings parallel and perpendicular to walls and adjacent piping. D. Maintain minimum 6-inch clearance between conduit and piping. Maintain 12-inch clearance between conduit and heat sources such as flues, steam pipes, and heating appliances. E. Arrange conduit supports to prevent distortion of alignment by wire pulling operations. Fasten conduit using galvanized straps, lay-in adjustable hangers, clevis hangers, or bolted split stamped galvanized hangers. F. Group conduit in parallel runs where practical and use conduit rack constructed of steel channel with conduit straps or clamps. G. Do not fasten conduit with wire or perforated pipe straps. Remove all wire used for temporary conduit support during construction, before conductors are pulled. 3.2 CONDUIT INSTALLATION A. Cut conduit square using a saw or pipe cutter; de-burr cut ends. B. Bring conduit to the shoulder of fittings and couplings and fasten securely. C. Use conduit hubs for fastening conduit to cast boxes and for fastening conduit to sheet metal boxes in damp or wet locations. D. Install no more than the equivalent of three 90-degree bends between boxes. E. Use conduit bodies to make sharp changes in direction, as around beams. F. Use hydraulic one-shot conduit bender or factory elbows for bends in conduit larger than 2-inches in size. G. Avoid moisture traps where possible; where unavoidable, provide junction box with drain fitting at conduit low point. H. Use suitable conduit caps to protect installed conduit against entrance of dirt and moisture. I. Provide a pull tape for spare empty conduits. The tape shall be fiberglass reinforced polyester tape with distance marking in feet continuous along its length. Furnish T&B or Greenlee products. J. Install expansion joints where conduit crosses building expansion joints. K. Where conduit penetrates fire-rated walls and floors, provide mechanical firestop fittings with UL listed fire rating equal to wall or floor rating. Seal opening around conduit with UL listed foamed silicone elastomer compound. L. Route conduit through roof openings for piping and ductwork where possible; otherwise route through roof jack with pitch pocket. M. Maximum size conduit in slabs above grade: 3/4 inch. N. Use PVC-coated rigid steel factory elbows for bends in plastic conduit runs longer than 100 feet or in plastic conduit runs, which have more than two bends regardless of length. O. Make joints in accordance with manufacturers’ written instructions. P. Provide plastic warning tape for underground conduit or duct bank installations. Install warning tape directly above conduit one foot below finished grade or as shown on drawings. Q. Sand for intermediate fill around underground conduits shall be washed sand, suitable for concrete or masonry. Reference Section 26 0500 for additional backfill and excavation requirements. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 CONDUIT FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS MDE Project NO: 191124 260533.13 - 3 August 2019 3.3 CONDUIT INSTALLATION SCHEDULE A. Underground installations more than two feet from foundation wall: Rigid steel conduit or Schedule 40 plastic conduit. B. Installations in or under concrete slab, or underground within 2 feet of foundation wall: Rigid steel conduit. C. In slab above grade: Rigid steel conduit. D. Exposed outdoor locations: Rigid steel conduit. E. Wet interior locations: Rigid Steel Conduit. F. Concealed dry interior locations: Electrical metallic tubing. G. Exposed dry interior locations: Electrical metallic tubing. END OF SECTION City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS MDE Project NO: 191124 260533.16 - 1 August 2019 SECTION 260533.16 - BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to the Work in this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Provide all equipment, materials, labor, supervision, and services necessary for or incidental to the installation of outlets, pull and junction boxes as indicated on the Drawings and specified. B. Work included: 1. Wall and ceiling outlet boxes 2. Pull and junction boxes 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workers who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. B. Without additional cost to the Owner, provide such other labor and materials as are required to complete the work of this Section in accordance with the requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, regardless of whether such materials and associated labor are called for elsewhere in these Contract Documents. C. When requested, provide the Engineer with manufacturer's certificates that confirm that materials meet or exceed minimum requirements as specified. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A.Provide submittals as required in section 26 00 10, “Submittal Process.” PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 BOXES A. Provide standard, stamped galvanized steel boxes except as hereinafter noted, by Steel City or approved equal. B. Outlet Boxes 1. Sheet Metal Outlet Boxes: ANSI/NEMA OS 1; galvanized steel, with 1/2 inch male fixture studs where required. 2. Cast Boxes: Aluminum or cast ferroalloy, deep type, gasket and cover, threaded hubs. C. Pull and Junction Boxes 1. Sheet metal boxes: ANSI/NEMA OS 1, galvanized steel. 2. Cast metal boxes for outdoor and wet location installation shall be NEMA 250;, Type 4 and Type 6, flat-flanged, surface-mounted junction boxes, UL listed as rain tight. Galvanized cast iron or cast aluminum box and cover with ground flange, neoprene gasket, and stainless steel cover screws. 3. Cast Metal Boxes for Underground Installations: NEMA 250 Type 4, outside flanged, recessed cover box for flush mounting, UL listed as raintight. Galvanized cast iron or cast aluminum box and plain cover with neoprene gasket and stainless steel cover screws. 2.2 FLOOR BOXES A. Combination Flush Floor Boxes 1. Where indicated in plan, furnish and install Wiremold/Legrand Resource RFB series four compartment floor boxes. 2. Boxes located on the First Floor shall be Cast Iron, with a maximum depth of 3-7/16”. 3. Boxes located on the Second Floor shall be Shallow Stamped Steel, with a maximum depth of 2-7/16”. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS MDE Project NO: 191124 260533.16 - 2 August 2019 PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 COORDINATION OF BOX LOCATIONS A. Provide electrical boxes as shown on Drawings, and as required for splices, taps, wire pulling, equipment connections, and code compliance. B. Electrical box locations shown on Contract Drawings are approximate unless dimensioned. C. Locate and install boxes to allow access. D. Locate and install to maintain headroom and to present a neat appearance. 3.2 OUTLET BOX INSTALLATION A. Do not install boxes back-to-back in walls. Provide a minimum 6-inch separation between boxes. Provide a minimum 24-inch separation between boxes in acoustic-rated walls. B. Locate boxes in masonry walls to require cutting of masonry unit corner only. Coordinate masonry cutting to achieve neat openings for boxes. C. Provide knockout closures for unused openings. D. Support boxes securely and independently of conduit. E. Use multiple gang boxes where more than one device is mounted together. Do not use sectional boxes. Provide barriers to separate wiring of different voltage systems. F. Install boxes in walls without damaging wall insulation. G. Coordinate mounting heights and locations of outlets mounted above counters, benches, and backsplashes. H. Position outlets to locate luminaires as shown on reflected ceiling plans. I. In inaccessible ceiling areas, position outlets and junction boxes within 6 inches of recessed luminaire, to be accessible through luminaire ceiling opening. J. Provide recessed outlet boxes in finished areas; secure boxes to interior wall and partition studs, accurately positioning to allow for surface finish thickness. Use stamped steel stud bridges for flush outlets in hollow stud wall, and adjustable steel channel fasteners for flush ceiling outlet boxes. K. Align wall-mounted outlet boxes for switches, thermostats, and similar devices. L. Provide cast outlet boxes in exterior locations and wet locations. 3.3 PULL AND JUNCTION BOX INSTALLATION A. Locate pull boxes and junction boxes above accessible ceilings or in unfinished areas. B. Support pull and junction boxes independent of conduit. C. Set underground pull and junction boxes level and flush with finished grade. END OF SECTION City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 CABLE TRAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS MDE Project NO: 191124 260536 - 1 August 2019 SECTION 260536 - CABLE TRAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. This section specifies the furnishing, installation and connection of raceway systems and wiring for the low voltage systems. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A.Provide submittals as required in section 26 05 10, “Submittal Process.” B. Shop Drawings: 1. Sufficient information, clearly presented, shall be included to determine compliance with the drawings and specifications. C. Certifications: Two weeks prior to final inspection, submit four copies of the following to the Engineer: 1. Certification that the materials are in accordance with the drawings and specifications. 2. Certification, by the Contractor, that the complete installation has been properly installed and tested. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CABLE TRAY RACEWAYS A. General 1. Factory fabricate, assemble and fit 2. Material shall be aluminum. 3. Coordinate dimensions of the straight lengths elbows, junction boxes and other components. 4. Protect cables at their egress from the raceways with fittings that are mechanically secure to the raceways 5. Provide 45 degrees sweep e1bow at every 90 degrees change in direction. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SYSTEM INSTALLATION A. Provide as required by the NEC and the manufacturer’s shop drawings the raceways, grounds and other equipment. B. Equipment Grounding Conductors: 1. Install an equipment grounding conductor in each raceway. The conductor shall be copper, sized as shown, and shall have green insulation. The conductor size shall at a minimum be equal to the size of the largest current-carrying conductor present at that point. 2. Bond all of the equipment grounding conductors in each enclosure. 3. Trough-type raceway sections shall be made electrically continuous by short bonding jumpers between adjacent sections. Jumpers shall be exothermically bonded to each raceway section. Jumpers shall be sized per radiology equipment manufacturer’s requirements. 4. Provide not less than one 3000mm (ten foot) equipment grounding conductor pigtail at each box or junction point where an item of equipment is connected. 5. The grounding conductors shall be continuous back to the electrical system ground from which the low voltage equipment is served. END OF SECTION City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS MDE Project NO: 191124 260553 - 1 August 2019 SECTION 260553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to the Work in this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Provide all equipment, materials, labor, supervision, and services necessary for or incidental to the installation of identification for electrical equipment as shown or as specified. B. Work Included: 1. Nameplates and tape labels 2. Wire and cable markers 3. Buried conduit markers B. SUBMITTALS: Provide submittals as required in section 26 00 10, “Submittal Process.” 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workers who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. B. Without additional cost to the Owner, provide such other labor and materials as are required to complete the work of this Section in accordance to the requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, regardless of whether such materials and associated labor are called for elsewhere in these Contract Documents. C. When requested, provide the manufacturer's certificates that confirm that materials meet or exceed minimum requirements as specified. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Nameplates: Engraved three-layer laminated plastic, white letters on a black background. B. Wire and Cable Markers: Clothe markers, split sleeve or tubing type C. Buried Conduit Marker: Continuous printed plastic tape. D. Outdoor Equipment Cables: Manufacturer's Standards 1. Weather and sun resistant 2. Vandal resistant 2.2 EQUIPMENT AND RACEWAYS OVER 600 VOLTS A. Provide “WARNING - HIGH VOLTAGE - KEEP OUT” signs on all equipment. With 2-inch high lettering, mark exposed raceways containing conductors operating in excess of 600 volts every 100 feet with the words “WARNING - HIGH VOLTAGE”. 2.3 SPECIAL RACEWAY IDENTIFICATION A. Special Systems. Brady Series 55200, 2" wide, pipe banding tape or colored conduit. All covers for pull boxes shall have a 4” octagon shaped sticker with the identification of circuit in correlating color. 1. Fire alarm: red 2. Telephone: blue 3. Data/Communications: blue 4. Low voltage controls: black 5. Sound systems: yellow 6. Clock systems: green City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS MDE Project NO: 191124 260553 - 2 August 2019 2.4 WIRE AND CABLE MARKERS A. Lighting and Power Circuit Wire Markers. 1. Sizes #12 through 3/0 AWG. Brady SCN clip-sleeve wire markers. 2. Sizes 4/0 AWG and larger. Brady HSA heat shrink sleeves, custom printed. 3. Legends. Panel and circuit description; for example "EP1-1", "E1 - 2", "LPA-14". 2.5 EQUIPMENT AND WIRING DEVICE NAMEPLATES A. General: White core laminated plastic. White lettering on black background, same style throughout project. B. Emergency Equipment Nameplates: White lettering on red background. C. Fasteners: Stainless steel self-tapping screws. Use epoxy adhesive only when NEMA enclosure rating is compromised by screws and for wiring device nameplates. D. Switchboard, Motor Control Center, Panelboard, Dry-type Transformer and Control Panel Main Nameplate: 5/8" high block letters. E. Other Nameplates: 3/8" high block or condensed letters. F. Legends: 1. General. Description as indicated on drawings, i.e., "PANEL EP-1", "XFRM ET-1", “TS-1". 2. Voltage. Description of operating voltage, i.e., “120 Volts”, “120/208 Volts”, “208 Volts”, “277/480 Volts”, or “480 Volts”, “Single Phase” or “Three Phase”. 3. Source: Description of source; i.e., "FED FROM PANEL EP-1, CKT. #1". 4. Available fault current and data calculated. G. AIC Rating: Short Circuit current rating, fully rated; i.e., “10,000 Amperes, Fully Rated”, 2.6 PANELBOARD CIRCUIT BREAKER IDENTIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer's standard labels supplied with panelboard. B. AIC Rating: Short circuit current rating, fully rated; i.e. “10,000 Amperes, Fully Rated”. 2.7 EQUIPMENT CONTROL PANEL NAMEPLATES A. White core laminated plastic. White lettering on black background, same style throughout, 3/8" high block or condensed letters. B. Legends: 1. Manufacturer’s Short Circuit Current Rating (SCCR). 2.8 TERMINAL IDENTIFICATIONS A. Brady B-500 vinyl cloth pre-printed self-adhesive terminal markers. Legends: 1 through 96, A through Z. 2.9 FUSE IDENTIFICATION LABELS A. Obtain original label from fuse box or carton or from fuse manufacturer, indicating manufacturer's name, fuse type, voltage and ampere rating. Attach with contact cement. 2.10 GROUND TERMINAL AND BUS IDENTIFICATION A. Type: Green paint or dye, factory applied to terminal and bus. B. Self-Adhesive Label Legend: "Ground", "Ground Bus", "Equipment Ground Bus" or "Isolated Ground Bus." 2.11 EMERGENCY FIXTURE AND OUTLET IDENTIFICATION A. Self-adhesive red vinyl dots, 1/4" diameter. Brady QD-25-RD. 2.12 CONCEALED EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION A. Brady ceiling tacks, 7/8" diameter with 7/16" long point. 1. Electrical equipment: #23255 (orange). 2. Fire alarm equipment: #23252 (red). 2.13 NOT USED City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS MDE Project NO: 191124 260553 - 3 August 2019 2.14 DUCT RUN MARKERS A. General. 1. Construction: Class A concrete. 2. Size: 6 inches square or round, 24 inches long. 45" chamfer on top edges. 3. Markings: Impressed or cast Letter "D" and two arrows. Locate one arrow below letter, pointing to duct run. Locate second arrow at right of letters, pointing parallel to duct run. 4. Marking sizes: V-shaped 1/4" wide at surface and 1/4" deep. 3" long for letter and arrow to right. 2" long for arrow below letter. B. Change of Direction Markers: Angle arrow to right of letter to correspond to angular change of duct run direction. 2.15 DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMER WARNING SIGN A. Construction: Indoor/outdoor type, plastic or fiber glass, non-corrosive, impervious to weather. B. Legend: "Danger" upper legend, white block letters on red panel on black panel. "High Voltage" lower legend, black condensed block letters on white. C. Manufacturer: Brady, #71565. D. Size: 7 inches high x 10 inches wide. 2.16 GENERATOR WARNING SIGNS A. Construction: Indoor/outdoor type. Plastic or fiber glass, non-corrosive, impervious to weather. B. Legend: "Danger" upper legend white block letters on red panel on black panel. "Warning" middle legend, red block letters on white panel, underlined in red. "This machine is automatically controlled" lower middle legend, black condensed block letters on white panel. "It may start at any time" bottom legend, red block letters on white panel. C. Manufacturer: Brady, #47161. D. Size: 7 inches high x 10 inches wide. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Install nameplates, signs and labels, and engraved wall plates parallel to equipment lines. Embossed tape will not be permitted for any application. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive nameplates. B. Install nameplates parallel to equipment lines. C. Secure nameplates to equipment fronts using stainless steel screws. Secure nameplate to inside face of recessed panelboard doors in finished locations. D. Outdoor equipment labels shall be installed by the manufacturer as specified. 3.3 WIRE IDENTIFICATION A. Provide wire markers on each conductor in panelboard gutters, pull boxes, and junction boxes, and at load connection. Identify with branch circuit or feeder number for power and lighting circuits, and with control wire number as indicated on equipment manufacturer's shop drawings for control wiring. 3.4 NAMEPLATE ENGRAVING SCHEDULE A. Provide nameplates to identify all electrical distribution and control equipment, and loads served. Letter Height: 1/4 inch for individual switches and loads served, 1/4 inch for distribution and control equipment identification. 3.5 EQUIPMENT NAMEPLATES A. General: Identify panelboards, dry-type transformers and control panels with nameplates showing descriptions or designations on Drawings. B. Identify disconnect and transfer switches with nameplates describing loads served and panelboard circuit controlling load. C. Identify conduits, connected to pull and junction boxes, with nameplates describing the complete circuit number of the conductors contained in each conduit. D. Identify receptacles, where the nominal voltage between contact pairs is greater than 150 volts, with nameplates describing the complete circuit number, voltage, and phases. E. Identify wall switches, where the equipment served is not in sight of the wall switch, with nameplates describing the equipment served by the wall switches. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS MDE Project NO: 191124 260553 - 4 August 2019 F. Locations. 1. Switchboards, Motor Control Centers, Distribution Panelboards. Locate main nameplate in center over top wiring gutter. Locate individual nameplates for switches and starters centrally on device doors. Locate individual nameplates adjacent and to the side of circuit breakers. 2. Lighting and Appliance Panelboards. Locate main nameplate in center of cover approxi- mately 2" down from top of panel. 3. Dry-type transformers. In middle of front cover panel. 4. Receptacles and Wall Switches. On wall directly above device plate. 5. Other equipment: In middle near top of equipment. 3.6 PANELBOARD CIRCUIT BREAKER IDENTIFICATIONS A. General. Attach numbered identification to each panelboard circuit breaker in space provided by manufacturer. B. Sequence. Arrange numbering to correspond to panelboard pole positions. For two pole breakers, number according to the upper pole only. For three pole breakers, number according to middle pole only. For multiple breakers occupying poles on both left and right side, number according to left side only. C. Numbering Convention. Number poles from top to bottom. Utilize consecutive odd numbers for left side and consecutive even numbers for right side. D. Separate Sub-feed Breakers. Number with last number of panelboard sequence. E. Circuit Directory. Prepare a neatly typed circuit directory behind clear heat resistant plastic in a metal frame attached to the inside of the door for each panelboard. Identify circuits by equipment served and by room numbers where room numbers exist. Indicate spares and spaces with light, erasable pencil marking. An adhesive mounted directory pocket is not acceptable. 3.7 BURIED CONDUIT OR DIRECT BURIED CABLE IDENTIFICATION A. Underground-Type Plastic Line Marker: Manufacturer's standard permanent, bright-colored, continuous-printed plastic tape, intended for direct-burial service; not less than 6" wide x 4 mils thick. B. Provide tape with printing of "Buried Electrical Conduit" or other similar warning. Install directly above buried conduit or cable one half the distance to conduit below finished grade. END OF SECTION City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 ELECTRICAL TESTING MDE Project NO: 191124 260593 - 1 August 2019 SECTION 260593 - ELECTRICAL TESTING PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to the Work in this Section. 1.2 SCOPE A. Provide all equipment, materials, labor, supervision, tools and services necessary for or incidental to the testing and inspecting of each new system and each new item of equipment provided or installed under this Division of the Specifications. B. Tests and inspections for each new system and each new item of equipment shall be in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. C. Acceptance Tests shall be performed within twenty-four hours of receipt of equipment and shall prove that electrical equipment is operational within industry and manufacturer’s tolerances and is acceptable for installation. D. Field tests shall prove that the equipment is installed in accordance with the design drawings and specifications and the manufacturer’s instructions. E. Upon completion of tests and inspections specified, attach a label to each service device. Labels shall indicate the test date and test company. F. Work Included: 1. Wire and cable (600 Volts and below) 2. Motor starters 3. Switchboards 4. Transformers 5. Automatic transfer switch 6. Life safety systems 7. Ballasts 8. Generators 9. Emergency battery packs 10. Grounding G. Engage the services of a recognized testing laboratory with more than five (5) years of experience and certified by the National Electrical Testing Association (NETA) for the purpose of performing the inspections and tests specified. The testing laboratory shall perform tests and inspections designated to be performed by the Testing Laboratory (TL). All other Inspectors and Tests may be performed by the Contractor’s qualified personnel. The testing laboratory’s responsibility shall include the following: 1. Notification of the Engineer prior to the start of testing. 2. Specifying the power requirements for each test site. 3. Providing sufficient protective barriers and warning signs to conduct tests and inspections safely. 4. Reporting any material or workmanship found to be defective during tests and inspections to the Engineer. 5. Implementation of the final settings and adjustments on the electrical equipment in accordance with the values specified in the coordination study. 6. Maintaining written records of tests. Comply with the submittal requirements specified in this section. 7. Upon satisfactory completion of tests and related effort, apply label to tested components indicating results, person responsible and date. 8. Acceptable Testing Laboratories a. Southwest Energy Systems, LLC b. Shermco Industries c. ABB Service Engineering d. General Electric Service Engineering e. Square D Services City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 ELECTRICAL TESTING MDE Project NO: 191124 260593 - 2 August 2019 H. Engage the services of the manufacturer’s service organization to perform the tests and inspections, as specified. 1.3 DIVISION OF RESPONSIBILITY – CONTRACTOR A. Perform routine insulation resistance, continuity, and rotation tests for new distribution and utilization equipment as specified prior to, and in addition to, the tests specified to be performed by the testing laboratory. Responsibility shall include the following: 1. Supply a suitable source of power to the testing laboratory or the manufacturer’s representative at each site. Notify the testing laboratory or the manufacturer’s representative when equipment becomes available for acceptance tests. 2. Coordinate the work to expedite the project scheduling. 3. Provide a complete set of electrical drawings and specifications, and pertinent change orders to the testing laboratory and the manufacturer’s representative. 4. Maintain records of all tests and inspections performed and assemble all information required to comply with the submittal requirements specified in this Section. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Provide a copie of a draft and final report, which shall contain the following information: 1. An executive summary which identifies any significant problems encountered and corrective actions. 2. A tabulation of all life safety system test results and certification including field measurements. 3. A tabulation of all cable test data. 4. Copies of all system certifications. B. The Final and Draft Reports shall be prepared using the following format: Format: Size: Paper: Text: Drawings: 8½" x 11" White bond, at least 20 lb. weight Typewritten or printed 11" in height preferable; bind in with text; foldout acceptable; larger drawings acceptable but fold to fit within the Manual and provide a drawing pocket inside rear cover or bind in with text. Flysheets:Separate each section of the Manual with neatly prepared flysheets briefly describing contents of the ensuing section; flysheets may be in color. Binding:Use heavy-duty plastic or fiberboard covers with 3-ring binding mechanism concealed inside the manual. All binding is subject to the Owner’s Representative's approval. Measurements:Provide all measurements in U.S. standard units such as feet-and-inches, lbs., and cfm. Where items may be expected to be measured within ten years in accordance with metric formulae, provide additional measurements in the "International System of Units" (SI). 1. Provide front and back covers for each manual, using durable material approved by the Engineer, and clearly identified on or through the cover with at least the following information: a. Electrical Testing Adjusting and Balancing b. Owner’s Name c. Project Title d. Space for approval signature of the engineer and approval date 2. Contents: Include at least the following: a. Neatly typewritten index near the front of the Manual, giving immediate information as to location within the manual. b. Such other data as required in pertinent sections of these specifications. C. Submit a copie of a Draft Report to the engineer. Revise the report as required to accommodate the Engineer’s comments. D. Submit a copie of the Final Report within 30 calendar days after approval of the Draft Report. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 ELECTRICAL TESTING MDE Project NO: 191124 260593 - 3 August 2019 1.5 TEST INSTRUMENT CALIBRATION A. The testing laboratory shall maintain test instruments, which have been calibrated within rated accuracy. Dated calibration labels shall be visible on the test equipment. B. Instruments shall be calibrated in accordance with the following frequency schedule: 1. Field instruments – 6 months maximum. 2. Laboratory instruments – 12 months. 3. Leased specialty equipment – 12 months. 1.6 SAFETY PRACTICES A. Safety practices shall include, but are not limited to, the following requirements: 1. Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970 – OSHA. 2. “Accident Prevention Manual for Industrial Operations,” as published by the National Safety Council. 3. Applicable safety operating procedures of the governing authorities. 4. Division 26 specifications. B. Perform tests with apparatus de-energized, except where otherwise specifically required. C. Power circuits shall have conductors shorted to ground by a hot-line grounded device approved for that purpose. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen thoroughly trained and experienced in necessary crafts and completely familiar with specified requirements and methods needed for proper performance of Work of this Section. B. Without additional cost to Owner, provide labor and materials as required to complete the Work of this Section in accordance with requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, regardless of whether such materials and associated labor are called for elsewhere in these Contract Documents. C. When requested, provide Architect with manufacturer's certificate that the test equipment meet or exceed minimum requirements as specified. PART 2 – PRODUCTS – (Not Used) PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL PROCEDURES – ACCEPTANCE AND FIELD TESTS A. Perform each test and inspection until acceptable results are obtained in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions, unless otherwise specified. B. Perform the following tests and inspections for each system and item of equipment as applicable, unless otherwise specified: 1. Inspect for physical damage and defective materials or installation work. Inspect for proper physical, electrical and mechanical conditions (materials and installation work). 2. Inspect equipment and systems for compliance with requirements of the Drawings and Specifications. Compare equipment nameplate information with the latest one-line diagrams. Verify that connections and terminations are in accordance with the one-line diagrams. 3. Check tightness of cable connections and bolted bus joints by calibrated torque wrench method. Refer to manufacturer’s instructions for proper foot-pound levels. Place a mark on each tightened bolt to ensure completeness. C. Promptly report any discrepancies or unsatisfactory conditions determined by test or inspection. D. Perform insulation resistance tests for each applicable system and item of equipment. Do not perform this test on solid-state devices. Note: In some cases terminated cables cannot be tested unless disconnected from the end devices. 1. Apply test voltages as follows: Insulation Resistance Test Voltage Voltage Rating Test Voltage 150 – 600 V 1000 V 601 – 5000 V 2500 V 5001 V & higher 5000 V 2. Investigate values of insulation resistance less than the manufacturers recommended minimum, or less than a value equal to kV+1 in megohms. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 ELECTRICAL TESTING MDE Project NO: 191124 260593 - 4 August 2019 E. Overpotential tests shall not proceed until resistance tests are satisfactorily performed. Perform overpotential tests for each system and item of equipment as specified. 3.2 CABLES (600 VOLTS AND LESS) – FIELD TESTING A. Inspect for shield grounding, cable support and termination. B. Check visible cable bends against ICEA and manufacturer’s minimum allowable bending radius C. Inspect for fireproofing in common cable areas. D. Where cables are terminated through window type cable trays, make an inspection to verify that neutrals and grounds are properly terminated for normal operation of protective devices. E. Perform insulation resistance tests on each cable with respect to ground and adjacent cables. Record test results. F. Perform continuity tests to confirm proper cable connections. 3.3 SWITCHBOARDS – FIELD TESTING A. At the completion of the work the switchboard shall be field tested in the presence of the Engineer. Tests shall be conducted by the service organization of the manufacturer. B. Tests shall include the following: C. Operation of each disconnecting means under load. D. Operation of all metering equipment. E. The manufacturer shall observe all cable bracing both incoming and outgoing and certify that same is provided in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. F. The ground fault system shall be set by the testing laboratory at the level specified by the approved coordination study. Each system shall be tested by checking coordination between ground fault and phase to ground fault of a 1P-20 ampere lighting branch circuit. G. Bus joints shall be re-torqued in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Submit certification. 3.4 SOLID STATE MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS – 600 VOLTS AND LESS – FIELD TESTING A. Perform insulation resistance tests from each pole-to-ground, from pole-to-pole, and across open contracts of each phase. Test values shall not be less than 50 meg-ohms. Record final test results. B. Utilize primary current injection method to verify the following settings are in accordance with the coordination study. 1. Minimum pickup current of trip devices, where possible 2. Long time delay, using 300% pickup current 3. Short time pickup and short time delay 4. Instantaneous pickup current 5. Ground fault pickup current and time delay C. Verify trip unit reset characteristics. D. Activate auxiliary protective devices, such as ground fault and under voltage relays, to insure operation of shunt trip devices. E. Where charging motors are used, electrically operate circuit breaker to verify performance of limit switches. 3.5 MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS (600 VOLTS AND LESS) – FIELD TESTING A. The testing lab shall check each circuit breaker for proper mounting, conductor size and feeder designation. B. Operate circuit breaker to insure smooth operation. C. Open unsealed breakers and check internal components for tightness, when applicable. The testing lab shall measure contact resistance in micro-ohms for devices with full load ampere. ratings larger than 400 amperes. Investigate deviations greater than 50%, as compared to adjacent poles and similar breakers. 3.7 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH A. Set the timers and test the start generator function. B. Open the circuit breaker in the main switchboard serving the ATS and verify proper starting and load transfer of the ATS. 3.8 INSTRUMENT TRANSFORMERS – FIELD TESTING A. The Testing Lab shall perform all work. B. Verify proper operation of grounding and shorting devices. C. Electrically confirm transformer polarity. D. Verify connection at secondary current transformer leads by applying low current to leads and check for current contribution at applicable devices. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 ELECTRICAL TESTING MDE Project NO: 191124 260593 - 5 August 2019 E. Confirm transformer ratio. F. Verify connection of secondary power transformer and control transformer leads by applying low voltage to leads and check for voltage contribution at applicable devices. G. Check power transformer secondary load with secondary voltage and current measurements to insure that load is less than the wattage of power transformer. 3.9 METERS – FIELD TESTING The Testing Laboratory shall perform all work. A. Check calibration of meters at five (5) points. Use full-scale instruments having precision not more than 50% of meter being tested. Apply test values, record data and plot curves from 0 to full-scale reading. 1. Zero sequence system is grounded upstream from sensor 2. Ground strap systems are grounded through sensing device 3. Ground connection is made ahead of neutral disconnect link B. Verify that control power transformer capacity is adequate for system C. Manually operate monitor panels to test sequences for: 1. Trip test 2. No trip test 3. Non-automatic reset D. Insure control circuit has switchable fuse device with current limiting fuses. E. Measure system neutral insulation resistance to insure no shunt ground paths exist. Remove neutral-to-ground disconnect link, and measure neutral insulation resistance, and then replace link. System neutral insulation shall be one (1) meg-ohm or greater. Record test results 3.10 GROUNDING SYSTEMS – FIELD TESTING All work shall be performed by the Testing Laboratory A. Perform ground continuity tests between main ground system and equipment frames, and between main ground system and system neutral and/or derived neutral points. Make test by passing a minimum 10-amp DC current between the ground reference system and the ground point to be tested. Measure voltage drop and calculate resistance by voltage drop method. B. Submit in a letter indicating the ohmic resistance of the service grounds and a statement that the grounding system is free of all defects, stray currents, shorts, etc. C. Perform fall of potential tests on the main ground electrode system. The main ground electrode system resistance-to-ground shall be no greater than five (5) ohms. D. Record final test results. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 ELECTRICAL TESTING MDE Project NO: 191124 260593 - 6 August 2019 3.11 STARTERS A. Motor Controllers: 1. Submit with certification in tabular form a complete listing of all motors on the project for which motor controllers have been furnished. Include on this listing the nameplate full load amperes of each motor and the size overload heaters installed in each motor controller. B. Motors: 1. Test all motors under load and verify that motor rotation is correct C. Chillers: 1. Verify proper functioning of the wye-delta starter 2. While the chiller is fully loaded, measure and record volts, amps, power factor of all three phases 3.12 SURGE ARRESTORS – FIELD TESTING The Testing Laboratory shall perform all work. A. Verify integrity of ground and discharge counter connections. B. Perform a 60-hertz spark-over test. Record test results. C. Perform a radio influence voltage test. Record test results. D. Perform an insulation power factor test. Record test results E. Perform ground continuity test to ground grid system. Record test results. 3.13 LIFE SAFETY SYSTEMS A. All wiring must be inspected and tested to insure that there are no grounds, opens or shorts. The minimum allowable resistance between any two conductors or between conductors and ground is ten (10) megohms as measured with a 500 volt megger after all conduit, conductors, detector bases, etc., have been installed, but before the detector devices are plugged into the bases or end-of-line devices installed. B. Perform all electrical and mechanical tests required by the equipment manufacturer's form. A checkout report is to be prepared by the technician and submitted in triplicate, one copy of which will be registered with the equipment manufacturer. The report is to include, but not be limited to: 1. A complete list of equipment installed and wired 2. Indication that all equipment is properly installed and functions and conforms to these specifications 3. Tests of individual zones as applicable 4. Serial numbers, locations by zone and model number for each installed detector 5. Voltage (sensitivity) settings for each ionization detector as measured in place 6. Response time of detector C. Submit a certified report indicating the following: 1. 4 of the FACP 3.15 EMERGENCY BATTERY PACKS A. Each emergency battery pack shall be shown to operate satisfactorily. This shall be accomplished by the use of the unit mounted test switch as one test. The second test shall be the interruption of power to the unit. B. Quartz standby lamps in H.I.D. luminaires shall be tested to show proper operation by testing as listed above. 3.16 CALIBRATION A. Calibrate and adjust all components requiring same as directed, in accordance with manufacturer's procedures and recommendations or as required, for the following categories of equipment: 1. Transformer taps 2. Lighting fixtures (lamp positions, reflector positions, etc., as required) 3. Motor starters 4. Generator Controls and synchronization B. Provide overloads in all motor starters, in accordance with motor nameplate data and as recommended by the manufacturer. 3.17 RE-TESTING A. Correct deficiencies and re-test. Verify by re-tests that specified requirements are met. B. Notify the Architect/Engineer seven (7) days prior to the testing dates. Should the Architect/Engineer elect not to witness a specific test a statement of certification shall be forwarded to the Architect/Engineer for his approval. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 ELECTRICAL TESTING MDE Project NO: 191124 260593 - 7 August 2019 C. Conduct tests at a time agreeable to the Architect/Engineer. Provide premium labor as necessary. D. Products which are found defective or do not pass such tests shall be removed and replaced. Tests shall be repeated. E. Arrange for and conduct all test and inspections required by the authorities having jurisdiction. Pay all fees for testing and inspection. END OF SECTION City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 DISCONNECT SWITCHES MDE Project NO: 191124 260620 - 1 August 2019 SECTION 260620 - DISCONNECT SWITCHES PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, apply to the Work specified in this Section. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. All other Sections of Division 26. B. All other Divisions of the Contract Documents. Refer to each Division's Specifications and Drawings for requirements. 1.3 SCOPE A. Provide all equipment, materials, labor, supervision, and services necessary for or incidental to the installation of disconnect switches as shown or indicated on the Drawings and/or as specified. B. Work Included: 1. Circuit disconnects 2. Motor disconnects 1.4 SUBMITTALS A.Provide submittals as required in section 26 05 10, “Submittal Process.” 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workers who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. B. Without additional cost to the Owner, provide such other labor and materials as are required to complete the work of this Section in accordance to the requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, regardless of whether such materials and associated labor are called for elsewhere in these Contract Documents. C. When requested, provide the Architect with manufacturer's certificate that materials meet or exceed minimum requirements as specified. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Provide disconnect switches manufactured by one of the following: 1. General Electric Company 2. Siemens Energy and Automation 3. Square D Schneider Electric 4. Eaton, Cutler Hammer 2.2 HEAVY-DUTY SAFETY SWITCHES A. Provide surface-mounted, heavy-duty type, sheet-steel enclosed safety switches, of types, sizes and electrical characteristics indicated; fusible type, rated 600 volts, and incorporating quick-make, quick-break type switches; construct so that switch blades are visible in OFF position with door open. Equip with operating handle which is pad lockable in OFF position; construct current carrying parts of high-conductivity copper, with silver-tungsten type switch contacts, and positive pressure type reinforced fuse clips. Provide NEMA Type 3R enclosures at exterior equipment. Provide class RK-1 current limiting and time delay fuses. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 DISCONNECT SWITCHES MDE Project NO: 191124 260620 - 2 August 2019 2.3 COMPONENTS A. Motor and circuit disconnect shall have an Underwriters' Laboratory label. B. Single Phase Disconnect Switches: Two pole toggle switch equal to Square D Type F with thermal overloads in appropriate enclosure. C. Three Phase Motor Disconnect Switches: 3 pole heavy duty 250 or 600 volt as required in NEMA Type 1 or 3 enclosures as indicated and as required. D. Enclosures 1. Normal indoor locations – heavy duty NEMA 1 2. Outdoor or wet locations – heavy duty NEMA 3R PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install circuit and motor disconnect switches as indicated, complying with manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC, NEMA, and NECA's "Standard of Installation", and in accordance with recognized industry practices. END OF SECTION City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 OCCUPANCY SENSORS MDE Project NO: 191124 260923 - 1 August 2019 SECTION 260923 - OCCUPANCY SENSORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, apply to the Work specified in this Section. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. All other Sections of Division 26. B. All other Divisions of the Contract Documents. Refer to each Division's Specifications and Drawings for requirements. 1.3 SCOPE A. Provide all labor, materials, tools, appliances, control hardware, sensor, wire, junction boxes and equipment necessary for and incidental to the delivery, installation and furnishing of a completely operational occupancy sensor lighting control system, as described herein. B. Examine all general specification provisions and drawings for related electrical work required as work under Division 26. C. Coordinate all work described in this section with all other applicable plans and specifications, including but not limited to wiring, conduit, fixtures, HVAC systems and building management systems. 1.4 EQUIPMENT QUALIFICATION A. Products supplied shall be from a single manufacturer that has been continuously involved in the manufacturing of occupancy sensors for a minimum of five (5) years. Mixing of manufacturers shall not be allowed. B. All components shall be U.L. listed, offer a five (5) year warranty and meet all state and local applicable code requirements. C. Products shall be manufactured by an ISO 9002 certified manufacturing facility and shall have a defect rate of less than 1/3 of 1%. D. Wall switch products must be capable of withstanding the effects of inrush current. Submittals shall clearly indicate the method used. 1.5 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Ensure the proper installation of the occupancy sensor based lighting control system so that lighting is turned off automatically after reasonable time delay when a room or area is vacated by the last person to occupy said room or area. B. The occupancy sensor based lighting control system shall accommodate all conditions of space utilization and all irregular work hours and habits. C.Warrant all equipment furnished in accordance to this specification to be undamaged, free of defects in materials and workmanship, and in conformance with the specifications. The work shall include repair or replacement, and testing without charge to the owner, all or any parts of equipment which are found to be damaged, defective or non-conforming and returned to the supplier. The warranty shall commence upon the owner's acceptance of the project. Warranty on labor shall be for a minimum period of one (1) year. D. Provide a light switch in each room as shown or as specified in Section 26 5000. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Provide submittals as required in section 26 05 10, “Submittal Process.” B. Substantiate conformance to this specification by submitting the necessary documents, performance data and wiring diagrams. Any deviations to this specification must be clearly stated by letter and submitted. C. Submit a lighting plan clearly marked by the manufacturer showing proper product, location and orientation of each sensor. D. Submit standard catalog literature that includes performance specifications indicating compliance to the specification. E. Catalog sheets must clearly state any load restrictions when used with electronic ballasts. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 OCCUPANCY SENSORS MDE Project NO: 191124 260923 - 2 August 2019 1.7 SYSTEM OPERATION A. Make all proper adjustments to assure owner's satisfaction with the occupancy system. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. The Watt Stopper, Leviton, Cooper Industries or Hubbell. B. The listing of any manufacturer as "acceptable" does not imply automatic approval. It is the sole responsibility of the electrical contractor to ensure that any price quotations received and submittals made are for sensors that meet or exceed the specifications included herein. 2.2 PRODUCTS A. Passive infrared sensors shall utilize Pulse Count Processing and Digital Signature Analysis to respond only to those signals caused by human motion. Passive infrared sensors shall only be used in corridors or hallways. Provide a wall switch infrared sensor with ON/OFF switching in janitor rooms, storage rooms with limited shelving B. Passive infrared sensors shall utilize mixed signal ASIC which provides high immunity to false triggering from RFI (hand-held radios) and EMI (electrical noise on the line), superior performance, and greater reliability. C. Passive infrared sensors shall have a multiple segmented Lodif Fresnel lens, in a multiple-tier configuration, with grooves-in to eliminate dust and residue build-up. D. Dual technology sensors shall be corner mounted to avoid detection outside the controlled area when doors are left open. Dual technology sensors shall be used in toilets, rooms with partitions, open offices with cubicles, cafeterias and storage rooms or warehouses with shelving. E. Dual technology sensors shall consist of passive infrared and ultrasonic technologies for occupancy detection. Products that react to noise or ambient sound shall not be considered. 1. The Dual Technology sensor shall be capable of detecting presence in the control area by detecting doppler shifts in transmitted ultrasound and passive infrared heat changes. 2. Sensor shall utilize Dual Sensing Verification Principle for coordination between ultrasonic and PIR technologies. Detection verification of both technologies must occur in order to activate lighting systems. Upon verification, detection by either shall hold lighting on. 3. Sensor shall be capable of corner mounting to a wall or ceiling in order to eliminate detection through open doorways and outside of controlled area. To provide superior small motion detection and immediate activation upon entry, coverage of both technologies must be complete and overlapping throughout the controlled area. 4. To avoid false ON activations and to provide immunity to RFI and EMI, Detection Signature Analysis shall be used to examine the frequency, duration, and amplitude of a signal, to respond only to those signals caused by human motion. F. Low Voltage Digital Time Switch: The digital time switch shall be programmable to turn loads off after a preset time. Time switch shall be a five terminal, completely self-contained control system that replaces a standard toggle switch. Switching mechanism shall be a 30V @ 1A air gap relay. 1. Time switch shall operate at either 24 VAC/VDC/VAC-half wave rectified. Time switch shall be capable of operating as an ON/OFF switch. 2. Time switch shall have no minimum load requirement. Time-out period shall be adjustable in increments of 5 minutes from 5 minutes to 1 hour, and in increments of 15 minutes from 1 hour to12 hours. G. All sensors shall be capable of operating normally with electronic ballasts, PL lamp systems and rated motor loads. H. Coverage of sensors shall remain constant after sensitivity control has been set. No automatic reduction shall occur in coverage due to the cycling of air conditioner or heating fans. I. All sensors shall have readily accessible, user adjustable settings for time delay and sensitivity. Settings shall be located on the sensor (not the control unit) and shall be recessed to limit tampering. J. In the event of failure, a bypass manual override shall be provided on each sensor. When bypass is utilized, lighting shall remain on constantly or control shall divert to a wall switch until sensor is replaced. This control shall be recessed to prevent tampering. K. All sensors shall provide an LED as a visual means of indication at all times to verify that motion is being detected during both testing and normal operation. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 OCCUPANCY SENSORS MDE Project NO: 191124 260923 - 3 August 2019 L. Where specified, sensor shall have an internal additional isolated relay with Normally Open, Normally Closed and Common outputs for use with HVAC control, Data Logging and other control options. Sensors utilizing separate components or specially modified units to achieve this function are not acceptable. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3. 1 INSTALLATION A. Locate and aim sensory in the correct location required for complete and proper volumetric coverage within the range of coverage(s) of controlled areas per the manufacturer's recommendations. Rooms shall have ninety (90) to one hundred (100) percent coverage to completely cover the controlled area to accommodate all occupancy habits of single or multiple occupants at any location within the room(s). The locations and quantities of sensors shown on the drawings are diagrammatic and indicate only the rooms which are to be provided with sensors. The contractor shall provide additional sensors as required to properly and completely cover the respective room. B. Meet with the manufacturer's factory authorized representative, at the owner's facility, to verify placement of sensors and installation criteria. END OF SECTION City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 LOW VOLTAGE UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL SERVICE ENTRANCE MDE Project NO: 191124 26 21 16 - 1 August 2019 SECTION 262116 - LOW VOLTAGE UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL SERVICE ENTRANCE PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to the Work in this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Provide all equipment, materials, labor, supervision, and services necessary for or incidental to the installation of electrical service from the utility company transformer location to the main switchboard as shown or indicated on the drawings and/or as specified. B. Work included: 1. Furnish and install conduits, wires, and metering equipment to provide an additional electrical service entrance as shown on the drawings and/or specified herein. Coordinate work with the electric utility company, verify all requirements, and install service entrance equipment in exact compliance with utility company and local governmental agency requirements. 2. Arrange with the electric utility company to inspect the work and include all utility charges and costs related to the installation of the electric service. 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Underground service entrance. B. System Voltage: 208/120Y volt, 3 phase, 4 wire, 60 hertz. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workers who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. B. Without additional cost to the Owner, provide such other labor and materials as are required to complete the work of this Section in accordance with the requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, regardless of whether such materials and associated labor are called for elsewhere in these Contract Documents. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 METERING EQUIPMENT A. All metering shall be furnished and/or installed, as directed by the electric utility company. Install equipment and furnish current transformer cabinet as required at no additional cost to the Owner. 2.2 RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS A. Provide the excavation and backfill of conduit trench for primary and secondary conduits. Arrange with the electric utility to inspect the conduits before backfilling the trench. Correct all deficiencies B. Conduit elbows shall be factory manufactured, rigid galvanized steel conduit, 24 inch minimum long radius, sweep bends. Apply corrosion protective tape, half lapped, to elbows. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install service-entrance equipment as indicated, in accordance with equipment manufacturer's written instructions and with recognized industry practices, to ensure that service-entrance equipment fulfills all requirements. Comply with applicable installation requirements of NEC and NEMA standards. B. Coordinate with other work, including utility company wiring, as necessary to interface installation of service-entrance equipment work with other work. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 PANELBOARDS MDE Project NO: 191124 262416 - 1 August 2019 SECTION 262416 - PANELBOARDS PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to the Work in this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Provide all equipment, materials, labor, supervision, and services necessary for or incidental to the installation of electrical panelboards as shown or indicated on the Drawings and/or as specified. B. Work Included 1. Power distribution panelboards 2. Lighting and branch circuit panelboards 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Provide submittals as required in section 26 05 10, “Submittal Process.” 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workers who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. B. Without additional cost to the Owner, provide such other labor and materials as are required to complete the work of this Section in accordance to the requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, regardless of whether such materials and associated labor are called for elsewhere in these Contract Documents. C. When requested, provide the manufacturer's certification that materials meet or exceed minimum requirements as specified. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Panelboards shall be manufactured by one of the following: 1. Siemens Energy and Automation 2. General Electric Company 3. Square D Schneider Electric 4. Eaton Corporation 5. Shall be same manufacturer as switchboard if applicable. 2.2 PANELBOARDS (GENERAL) A. Panelboards shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL), and shall be so labeled, rated for intended voltage and current characteristics as scheduled. Circuit breakers shall be fully rated. B. Cabinets for panelboards shall be by NEC gauge sheet steel having steel doors and trim to conform to the cabinet mounting. The trim on cabinets shall be made adjustable with the door. Door shall be mounted with heavy concealed hinges. C. Cabinets shall have wiring space top, bottom and both sides in accordance with the National Electrical Code, but no less than 4-inches wide, with standard knockouts. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 PANELBOARDS MDE Project NO: 191124 262416 - 2 August 2019 D. Provide a clear, plastic-covered, typed directory card and cardholder on the inside of each door. Key locks alike, and provide Owner with not less than 5 keys. Finish shall be gray enamel over a rust inhibitor, except cans may be galvanized. E. Multisection panels shall be same height and depth. F. Interiors shall be completely factory assembled, and shall consist of rigid frame supporting the rectangular bus, mains, neutral and ground bars. Bussing shall be sized in accordance with UL Standards, braced throughout to conform to industry standards governing short circuit stresses in panelboards, and arranged for sequence phasing throughout. Bussing shall be tinned copper. G. Phase bussing shall be full height without reduction, full size neutral, unless otherwise scheduled, with suitable lug for each outgoing circuit requiring a neutral connection. Provide ground bus with suitable lugs for each branch circuit ground conductor. H. Terminals for feeder conductors, branch circuit devices and neutrals shall be UL listed as suitable for type of conductors specified. I. Interiors shall be designed such that circuit protective devices may be changed, replaced, or additional circuits added without disturbing adjacent units and without machining, drilling or tapping. In no case shall the width of panelboard enclosure be less than 20-inches. Branch circuit breakers shall be bolt-in type. J. Enclosures 1. Circuit switching/protective devices shall be housed in an enclosure suitable for the environment in which they are located. 2. Normal indoor locations - NEMA 1 general purpose. 3. Outdoor or vault locations - NEMA 3R. 2.3 POWER DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS A. Provide dead-front safety type power distribution panelboards as indicated, with panelboard switching and protective devices in quantities, ratings, types, and with arrangement shown; with anti-turn solderless pressure type main lug connectors approved for copper conductors. Equip with copper bus bars with not less than 98% conductivity, and with full-sized neutral bus; provide suitable lugs on neutral bus for outgoing feeders requiring neutral connections. Also provide an electronic trip for breakers. B. Provide bolt-in type heavy-duty molded-case branch circuit breaker types for each circuit, with toggle handles that indicate when tripped. Where multiple-pole breakers are indicated, provide with common trip so overload on one pole will trip all poles simultaneously. Provide panelboards with bare un-insulated grounding bars suitable for bolting to enclosures. Select enclosures fabricated by same manufacturer as panelboards, which mate properly with panelboards. C. On multisection and split-bus panels, the lugs and bus on each and every section shall be of the same current rating as the main overcurrent device protecting the feeder serving the panel and each section shall have a separate neutral, ground bar and conductors. Panel bus shall have double lugs to effect parallel feed of bus bars (rather than series) where scheduled. Feed-thru lugs are not acceptable. 2.4 NOT USED 2.5 INDIVIDUALLY MOUNTED CIRCUIT BREAKERS A. Individually mounted circuit breakers shall be molded case, capacity as indicated, in a NEMA Type 1 enclosure unless otherwise noted. Breakers shall be quick-make, quick-break thermal magnetic common trip type, ambient compensated with trip-free handle and have interrupting rating in accordance with UL listings for sizes required, but not less than 10,000 amperes rms symmetrical, and conform to requirements of NEMA Standard Publication No. AB1-1969. Each unit shall have insulated neutral and/or ground terminal of proper size, where indicated. Lugs shall be UL listed for copper cables. B. Enclosures City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 PANELBOARDS MDE Project NO: 191124 262416 - 3 August 2019 1. Circuit switching/protective devices shall be housed in an enclosure suitable for the environment in which they are located. Provide lifting eyes or brackets. 2. Normal indoor locations - NEMA 1 general purpose. 3. Outdoor or vault locations - NEMA 3R. C. Circuit breakers shall be of same manufacturer as panelboards. 2.6 PANELBOARD ACCESSORIES A. Provide panelboard accessories and devices as recommended by panelboard manufacturer for ratings and applications indicated. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install panelboards and enclosures as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC standards and NECA's "Standard of Installation", and in compliance with recognized industry practices to ensure that products fulfill requirements. B. Coordinate installation of panelboards and enclosures with cable and raceway installation work. Anchor enclosures firmly to walls and structural surfaces, ensuring that they are permanently and mechanically secure. Provide cross channels at top and bottom in stud walls to support panels. C. Provide properly wired electrical connections within enclosures. D. Prepare and affix typewritten directory to inside cover of panelboard indicating loads controlled by each circuit. E. Install wall-mounted panelboards a maximum of 6 feet 6 inches above finish floor to top of panel. END OF SECTION City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 ELECTRICAL CABINETS AND ENCLOSURES MDE Project NO: 191124 262716 - 1 August 2019 SECTION 262716 - ELECTRICAL CABINETS AND ENCLOSURES PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to the Work in this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Provide all equipment, materials, labor, supervision, and services necessary for or incidental to the installation of electrical cabinets and enclosures as indicated on the Drawings and as specified. B. Work included: 1. Hinged cover enclosures 2. Cabinets 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workers who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. B. Without additional cost to the Owner, provide such other labor and materials as are required to complete the work of this Section in accordance to the requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, regardless of whether such materials and associated labor are called for elsewhere in these Contract Documents. C. When requested, provide manufacturer's certificates that confirm the materials meet or exceed minimum requirements as specified. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A.Provide submittals as required in section 26 05 10, “Submittal Process.” PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 HINGED COVER ENCLOSURES A. Type: 1. Indoor locations - NEMA Type 1 2. Outdoor locations - NEMA Type 3R C. Finish: Manufacturer's standard gray enamel finish. D. Covers: Continuous hinge, held closed by flush vandal-resistant latch operable by key. Make keys interchangeable with new enclosures of the same voltage and use. D. Panel for Mounting Terminal Blocks or Electrical Components: 14 gage steel, manufacturer's standard gray enamel. 2.2 CABINETS A. Cabinet Boxes: Galvanized steel with removable end walls, 24 inches wide 10 inches deep. Provide ¾-inch-thick, plywood backboard painted matte white, for mounting terminal blocks. B. Cabinet Fronts: Steel, surface type with concealed trim clamps, screw cover front concealed hinge and flush lock keyed to match branch circuit panelboard; finish in gray baked enamel. C. Provide identification label. Reference Section 26 05 53. 2.3 FABRICATION A. Shop assembled enclosures and cabinets housing terminal blocks or electrical components in accordance with ANSI/NEMA ICS 6. B. Provide knockouts on enclosures. C. Provide protective pocket inside front cover with schematic diagram, connection diagram, and layout drawing of control wiring and components within enclosures. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 ELECTRICAL CABINETS AND ENCLOSURES MDE Project NO: 191124 262716 - 2 August 2019 PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install cabinets and enclosures plumb, and anchor securely to wall and structural supports at each corner, minimum. B. Provide accessory feet for free-standing equipment enclosures. C. Install trim plumb, minimum 6'-6" from finished grade or floor to top of enclosure. END OF SECTION City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 WIRING DEVICES MDE Project NO: 191124 262726 - 1 August 2019 SECTION 262726 - WIRING DEVICES PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to the Work in this Section. 1.2 SCOPE OF WORK A. Provide labor, material, equipment, tools and services, and perform operations required for, and reasonably incidental to, the providing of wiring devices, including related systems and accessories. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data and shop drawings in accordance with Division 01 for products specified under PART 2 - PRODUCTS. B. Provide submittals as required in section 26 05 10, “Submittal Process.” 1.4 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. The wiring devices specified herein shall be designed, manufactured, tested and installed according to the latest version of the following standards: 1. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) WD-1 2. Federal Specification (FS) WC-596 3. Federal Specification (FS) WS-896 4. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) B. All wiring devices shall be UL listed. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Digital switches: Acuity Controls or equal by Lutron, Leviton or Douglas Controls B. Conventional wiring devices: Pass & Seymour, Hubbell, Leviton or Cooper. 2.2 RECEPTACLES A. General 1. Receptacles shall be standard style as indicated herein. They shall be constructed of high-impact resistant thermoplastic material with a nylon face and thermoplastic back body, gray color. Unless noted otherwise, they shall be 2-pole, 3-wire with a green equipment ground screw or an automatic grounding system attached to the strap. 2. Receptacle color shall be gray to match stainless steel covers. unless noted otherwise. B. Specification Grade 1. Specification Grade receptacles shall be standard style. The face shall be constructed of a high-impact resistant thermoplastic. The contacts shall be a triple wipe, T-slot, one- piece copper alloy design. The device shall have a green ground screw or an automatic grounding system attached to the strap. The device shall be 20-ampere, 125-volts, NEMA configuration 5-20R, back and side-wired. C. Special purpose receptacles shall be of the specific NEMA configuration indicated on the Drawings. D. Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter (GFCI) 1. GFCI receptacles shall be a feed-through type wired for single receptacle protection thus not affecting receptacles downstream on the same circuit. They shall be UL rated Class 1 with 5-milliampere ground fault trip level and a 20-ampere feed-through rating. GFCI receptacles shall be NEMA configuration 5-20R. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 WIRING DEVICES MDE Project NO: 191124 262726 - 2 August 2019 E. Isolated Ground (IG) 1. Isolated ground receptacles shall be standard style. The contacts shall be a triple wipe, T-slot, one-piece copper alloy design. The ground contacts shall be isolated from the mounting strap and conduit system. The device shall have a green ground screw that totally isolates the grounding contacts, and it shall require that the insulated ground conductor run uninterrupted to the neutral at the service entrance. The device shall also have an automatic grounding system and center rivet attached to the mounting strap allowing the use of a metal wall plate. The device shall carry an identifying triangle on the face to signify Isolated Ground. The device shall be 20-ampere, 125-volts, NEMA configuration 5-20R, back and side-wired, orange. 2.3 SWITCHES A. Digital Switch 1. Provide a Rocker Digital Switch by Lighting Control and Design 2. Switch shall be 100% digital 3. Switch shall have designer style controls 4. Switch shall be capable of controlling switching, dimming and preset scenes. 5. Switch shall be capable with the digital network lighting control system. 2.4 WALL PLATES A. Wall plates shall be provided for all switches, receptacles, blanks, telephone and special purpose outlets. The wall plates shall be of suitable configuration for the device for which it is to cover with color matched mounting screws. Color of the wall plates shall be stainless steel, unless noted otherwise. B. Weatherproof: Wiring devices in wet and damp locations shall be installed with a hinged metal outlet cover/enclosure clearly marked “Suitable for Wet Locations While in Use” and “UL Listed”. There shall be a gasket between the cover/enclosure and the mounting surface, and between the hinged cover and mounting plate/base to assure proper seal. The cover/enclosure shall employ stainless steel mounting hardware and be constructed of impact resistant polycarbonate. The cover/enclosure shall be specification grade as manufactured by Pass and Seymour or equal. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF WIRING DEVICES A. Each wiring device shall be mounted in a metallic outlet box. In general, devices in finished spaces shall be flush mounted and devices in unfinished spaces, i.e. mechanical and electrical equipment rooms shall be surface mounted. Verify the requirements of all spaces with the Architect. B. Wall Plates 1. Each device shall have a cover plate appropriate for the application. 2. Cover plates shall be installed true and plumb with building lines, mortar joints and architectural features. 3. Adjacent devices shall be mounted under a common cover plate suitable for the application. C. Mount receptacles and special systems outlets above finish floor to the device centerline, unless noted or required otherwise. D. Place conductor under wiring device screw terminals and draw up snugly. E. Mount switches above finish floor to the device centerline and 6" from a door strike, unless noted or required otherwise. F. Grounding continuity shall be maintained between devices and metallic raceway system in addition to the green equipment grounding conductor run with circuit conductors. Care shall be taken when installing receptacles having an isolated ground pole so as to not bond the equipment ground conductor to the conduit system. G. Wire each receptacle using correct polarity (i.e., neutral to neutral terminal, etc.). H. Mount receptacles throughout the project with ground pole at the top of the configuration when mounted vertically, on the right when horizontally mounted. I. All exterior wiring devices shall be provided with a weatherproof cover/enclosure. Exterior receptacles shall be GFCI type. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 WIRING DEVICES MDE Project NO: 191124 262726 - 3 August 2019 J. De-rate dimmer capacity as required by the manufacturer if side sections are removed. K. Run separate neutral wire for each phase of a three-phase system when dimmers are installed on multiple phases and for each dimmer when multiple dimmers are installed on the same phase. L. Receptacles located in secure areas shall be GFCI type. END OF SECTION City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 ENCLOSED SWITCHES MDE Project NO: 191124 262816 - 1 August 2019 SECTION 262816 - ENCLOSED SWITCHES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to the Work in this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Provide all equipment, materials, labor, supervision, and services necessary for or incidental to the installation of disconnect switches as shown or indicated on the Drawings and/or as specified. B. Work Included: 1. Circuit disconnects 2. Motor disconnects 1.3 SUBMITTALS A.Provide submittals as required in section 26 05 10, “Submittal Process.”. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workers who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. B. Without additional cost to the Owner, provide such other labor and materials as are required to complete the work of this Section in accordance to the requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, regardless of whether such materials and associated labor are called for elsewhere in these Contract Documents. C. When requested, provide the Architect with manufacturer's certificate that materials meet or exceed minimum requirements as specified. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Provide disconnect switches manufactured by one of the following: 1. Square D Schneider Electric 2.2 HEAVY-DUTY SAFETY SWITCHES A. Provide surface-mounted, heavy-duty type, sheet-steel enclosed safety switches, of types, sizes and electrical characteristics indicated; fusible type, rated 600 volts, and incorporating quick-make, quick-break type switches; construct so that switch blades are visible in OFF position with door open. Equip with operating handle which is pad lockable in OFF position; construct current carrying parts of high-conductivity copper, with silver-tungsten type switch contacts, and positive pressure type reinforced fuse clips. Provide NEMA Type 3R enclosures at exterior equipment with class RK-! Fuses. 2.3 COMPONENTS A. Motor and circuit disconnects shall have an Underwriters' Laboratory label. B. Single Phase Disconnect Switches: Two pole toggle switch equal to Square D Type F with thermal overloads in appropriate enclosure. C. Three Phase Motor Disconnect Switches: 3 pole heavy duty 250 or 600 volt as required in NEMA Type 1 or 3 enclosures as indicated and as required. D. Enclosures 1. Normal indoor locations – heavy duty NEMA 1 2. Outdoor or wet locations – heavy duty NEMA 3R City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 ENCLOSED SWITCHES MDE Project NO: 191124 262816 - 2 August 2019 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install circuit and motor disconnect switches as indicated, complying with manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC, NEMA, and NECA's "Standard of Installation", and in accordance with recognized industry practices. END OF SECTION City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 ENGINE GENERATORS - DIESEL MDE Project NO: 191124 263213 - 1 August 2019 SECTION 263213 - PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATORS - DIESEL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes packaged engine-generator sets for emergency power supply with the following features: 1. Diesel engine. 2. Unit-mounted cooling system. 3. Unit-mounted control and monitoring. 4. Performance requirements for sensitive loads. 5. Fuel system. 6. Integrated Parallel of generator sets. 7. Outdoor enclosure. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 263600 "Transfer Switches" for transfer switches including sensors and relays to initiate automatic-starting and -stopping signals for engine-generator sets. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Operational Bandwidth: The total variation from the lowest to highest value of a parameter over the range of conditions indicated, expressed as a percentage of the nominal value of the parameter. B. EPS: Emergency power supply. C. EPSS: Emergency power supply system. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories. 2. Include thermal damage curve for generator. 3. Include time-current characteristic curves for generator protective device. 4. Include fuel consumption in gallons per hour at 0.8 power factor at 0.5, 0.75 and 1.0 times generator capacity. 5. Include generator efficiency at 0.8 power factor at 0.5, 0.75 and 1.0 times generator capacity. 6. Include air flow requirements for cooling and combustion air in cfm at 0.8 power factor and rated load. Testing shall be performed per ISO3046 standards. Provide drawings showing requirements and limitations for location of air intake and exhausts. 7. Include generator characteristics, including, but not limited to kw rating, efficiency, reactances, and short-circuit current capability. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Include plans and elevations for engine-generator set and other components specified. Indicate access requirements affected by height of subbase fuel tank. 2. Include details of equipment assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, center of gravity of full assembly, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 3. Identify fluid drain ports and clearance requirements for proper fluid drain. 4. Design calculations for selecting vibration isolators and seismic restraints and for designing vibration isolation bases. 5. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication including anchorages and attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include base weights. 6. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. Complete schematic, wiring, and interconnection diagrams showing terminal markings for EPS equipment and functional relationship between all electrical components. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 ENGINE GENERATORS - DIESEL MDE Project NO: 191124 263213 - 2 August 2019 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: 1. Statement of quality from manufacturer detailing acceptance as an ISO9001 manufacturer. B. Source quality-control reports, including, but not limited to the following: 1. Certified summary of prototype-unit test report. 2. Certified Test Reports: For components and accessories that are equivalent, but not identical, to those tested on prototype unit. 3. Certified Summary of Performance Tests: Certify compliance with specified requirement to meet performance criteria for sensitive loads. 4. Report of factory test on units to be shipped for this Project, showing evidence of compliance with specified requirements. 5. Report of sound generation. 6. Report of exhaust emissions showing compliance with applicable regulations. 7. Certified Torsional Vibration Compatibility: Comply with NFPA 110. C. Field quality-control reports. D. Warranty: For special warranty. (SEE 1.9-A-1) 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For packaged engine generators to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. 1. In addition to items specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following: a. List of tools and replacement items recommended to be stored at Project for ready access. Include part and drawing numbers, current unit prices, and source of supply. b. Operating instructions laminated and mounted adjacent to generator location. c. Training plan. 1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Fuses: One for every 10 of each type and rating but no fewer than one of each. 2. Indicator Lamps: Two for every six of each type used, but no fewer than two of each. 3. Filters: One set each of lubricating oil, fuel, and combustion-air filters. 4. Special Tools: Tools unique to the product for standard maintenance, listed by part number in operations and maintenance manual. 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer accepted as an ISO9001 manufacturer. B. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved by manufacturer. C. Third-Party Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or an NRTL. 1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Certified by NETA to supervise on-site testing. 1.9 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of packaged engine generators and associated auxiliary components that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Manufacturer shall agree to start warranty period 2 years from date of manufacturer start-up or Substantial Completion date. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Provide generator sizing as detailed on one-line drawing on E0.1: B. Manufacturers: 1. Generac Power Systems (Basis of Design) a. Model # SD150-6.7L-150kW 2. Kohler Power 3. Caterpillar 4. Approved equal City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 ENGINE GENERATORS - DIESEL MDE Project NO: 191124 263213 - 3 August 2019 C. Source Limitations: Obtain packaged generator sets and auxiliary components through one source from a single manufacturer. Generator set shall be standard offering from manufacturer. No special ratings will be permitted. D. Engineering changes resulting from the substitution of another product will be the responsibility of the electrical contractor. E. Manufacturer catalog numbers in the documents are from Generac Power Systems Inc. to be used for reference. 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. NFPA Compliance: 1. Comply with NFPA 37. 2. Comply with NFPA 70. B. UL Compliance: Comply with UL 2200/CSA. C. Engine Exhaust Emissions: Comply with EPA Tier requirements and applicable state and local government requirements. D. Noise Emission: Comply with applicable state and local government requirements for maximum noise level at adjacent property boundaries due to sound emitted by generator set including engine, engine exhaust, engine cooling-air intake and discharge, and other components of installation. E. Environmental Conditions: Engine-generator system shall withstand the following environmental conditions without mechanical or electrical damage or degradation of performance capability: 1. Ambient Temperature: Minus 15 to plus 50 deg C for diesel-fired. 2. Relative Humidity: Zero to 95 percent. 3. Altitude: Sea level to 1500 feet. 2.3 ASSEMBLY DESCRIPTION A. Factory-assembled and -tested, water-cooled engine, with brushless generator and accessories. B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended location and application. C. EPSS Class: Engine-generator set shall be classified as a Class 48 in accordance with NFPA 110. D. Governor: Adjustable isochronous, with speed sensing. E. Emissions: Comply with EPA Tier and local requirements for standby generation. F. Mounting Frame: Structural steel framework to maintain alignment of mounted components without depending on concrete foundation. Provide lifting attachments sized and spaced to prevent deflection of base during lifting and moving. 1. Rigging Diagram: Inscribed on metal plate permanently attached to mounting frame to indicate location and lifting capacity of each lifting attachment and generator-set center of gravity. G. Capacities and Characteristics: 1. Power Output Ratings: Nominal ratings as indicated at 0.8 power factor excluding power required for the continued and repeated operation of the unit and auxiliaries, with capacity as required to operate as a unit as evidenced by records of prototype testing. 2. Output Connections: Three-phase, four wire. 3. Nameplates: For each major system component to identify manufacturer's name and address, and model and serial number of components. Nameplate shall be in accordance with NFPA70. H. Generator-Set Performance: 1. Oversizing alternator compared with the rated power output of the engine is permissible to meet specified performance. a. Nameplate Data for Oversized Generator: Show ratings required by the Contract Documents rather than ratings that would normally be applied to generator size installed. 2. Steady-State Voltage Operational Bandwidth: 1 percent of rated output voltage from no load to full load. 3. Transient Voltage Performance: Not more than 20 percent variation for 50 percent step- load increase or decrease. Voltage shall recover and remain within the steady-state operating band within 5 seconds. 4. Steady-State Frequency Operational Bandwidth: Plus or minus 0.25 percent of rated frequency from no load to full load. 5. Steady-State Frequency Stability: When system is operating at any constant load within the rated load, there shall be no random speed variations outside the steady-state operational band and no hunting or surging of speed. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 ENGINE GENERATORS - DIESEL MDE Project NO: 191124 263213 - 4 August 2019 6. Transient Frequency Performance: Less than 5-Hz variation for 50 percent step-load increase or decrease. Frequency shall recover and remain within the steady-state operating band within 5 seconds. 7. Output Waveform: At no load, harmonic content measured line to neutral shall not exceed 2 percent total with no slot ripple. Telephone influence factor, determined according to NEMA MG 1, shall not exceed 50 percent. 8. Sustained Short-Circuit Current: For a three-phase, bolted short circuit at system output terminals, system shall supply a minimum of 300 percent of rated full-load current for not less than 10 seconds and then clear the fault automatically, without damage to winding insulation or other generator system components. 9. Block Load Performance: per NFPA110, the unit shall be able to fully recover from a 100% block load. 10. Excitation System: Performance shall be unaffected by 10% total voltage distortion (THD) caused by nonlinear load. a. Provide permanent magnet excitation (PMG) for power source to voltage regulator. 11. Start Time: Comply with NFPA 110, Type 10, system requirements. 2.4 ENGINE A. Fuel: Diesel Fuel oil, Grade DF-2, Ultra Low Sulfur. 1. ASTM D 975 or ASTM D 396 for Ultra Lower Sulfur Diesel. 2. Biodiesel fuel is not recommended. B. Engine Rating: Prime mover shall have adequate horsepower to meet the specified kW at the specified site altitude and temperatures. Products that de-rate below specified kW for temperature or altitude shall not be accepted. C. Maximum Piston Speed for Four-Cycle Engines: 2250 fpm (11.4 m/s). D. Lubrication System: The following items are mounted on engine or skid: 1. Filter and Strainer: Per manufacturer recommendations. 2. Thermostatic Control Valve: Control flow in system to maintain optimum oil temperature. Unit shall be capable of full flow and is designed to be fail-safe. 3. Crankcase Drain: Arranged for complete gravity drainage to an easily removable container with no disassembly and without use of pumps, siphons, special tools, or appliances. E. Cooling System: Closed loop, liquid cooled, with radiator factory mounted on engine-generator-set mounting frame and integral engine-driven coolant pump. 1. Coolant: Solution of 50 percent ethylene-glycol-based antifreeze and 50 percent water, with anticorrosion additives as recommended by engine manufacturer. 2. Cooling System Sizing: Sized to adequately cool the generator set, including aftercooler, without de-rate to an ambient temperature of 122 deg F (50 deg C) for diesel. Maximum external restriction shall be no greater than 0.5 inch (12.7 mm) of water column. 3. Size of Radiator: Adequate to contain expansion of total system coolant from cold start to 110 percent load condition. 4. Expansion Tank: Constructed of welded steel plate and rated to withstand maximum closed-loop coolant system pressure for engine used. Equip with gage glass and petcock. 5. Temperature Control: Self-contained, thermostatic-control valve modulates coolant flow automatically to maintain optimum constant coolant temperature as recommended by engine manufacturer. 6. Coolant Hose: Flexible assembly with inside surface of nonporous rubber and outer covering of aging-, ultraviolet-, and abrasion-resistant fabric. a. Rating: 50-psig (345-kPa) maximum working pressure with coolant at 180 deg F (82 deg C), and noncollapsible under vacuum. b. End Fittings: Flanges or steel pipe nipples with clamps to suit piping and equipment connections. F. Muffler/Silencer: Critical type, sized as recommended by engine manufacturer and selected with exhaust piping system to not exceed engine manufacturer's engine backpressure requirements. 1. Minimum sound attenuation of 25 dB(A) at 500 Hz. 2. Sound level measured at a distance of 23 feet (7 m) from exhaust discharge after installation is complete shall be 78 dB(A) or less. . G. Air-Intake Filter: Engine-mounted air cleaner with replaceable dry-filter element. H. Starting System: 12 V electric, with negative ground. 1. Components: Sized so they are not damaged during a full engine-cranking cycle with ambient temperature at maximum specified in "Performance Requirements" Article. 2. Cranking Motor: Heavy-duty unit that automatically engages and releases from engine flywheel without binding. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 ENGINE GENERATORS - DIESEL MDE Project NO: 191124 263213 - 5 August 2019 3. Cranking Cycle: As required by NFPA 110 for system level specified. 4. Battery: Lead acid, certified to meet NFPA 110, with capacity within ambient temperature range specified in "Performance Requirements" Article to provide specified cranking cycle at least three times without recharging. 5. Battery Cable: Size as recommended by engine manufacturer for cable length indicated. Include required interconnecting conductors and connection accessories. 6. Battery Compartment: Factory fabricated of metal with acid-resistant finish and thermal insulation. Thermostatically controlled heater shall be arranged to maintain battery above 10 deg C regardless of external ambient temperature within range specified in "Performance Requirements" Article. Include accessories required to support and fasten batteries in place. Provide ventilation to exhaust battery gases. 7. Battery-Charging Alternator: Factory mounted on engine with solid-state voltage regulation and continuous rating adequate for batteries provided. 8. Battery Charger: Current-limiting, automatic-equalizing and float-charging type designed for lead-acid batteries. Unit shall comply with UL 1236 and include the following features: a. Operation: Equalizing-charging rate of 10 A shall be initiated automatically after battery has lost charge until an adjustable equalizing voltage is achieved at battery terminals. Unit shall then be automatically switched to a lower float- charging mode and shall continue to operate in that mode until battery is discharged again. b. Automatic Temperature Compensation: Adjust float and equalize voltages for variations in ambient temperature from minus 40 deg F (minus 40 deg C) to 140 deg F (60 deg C) to prevent overcharging at high temperatures and undercharging at low temperatures. c. Automatic Voltage Regulation: Maintain constant output voltage regardless of input voltage variations up to plus or minus 10 percent. d. Ammeter and Voltmeter: Flush mounted in door. Meters shall indicate charging rates. e. Safety Functions: Sense abnormally low battery voltage and close contacts providing low battery voltage indication on control and monitoring panel. Sense high battery voltage and loss of ac input or dc output of battery charger. Either condition shall close contacts that provide a battery-charger malfunction indication at system control and monitoring panel. f. Enclosure and Mounting: NEMA 250, Type 1, wall-mounted cabinet with adequate vibration isolation if mounted within the generator set. g. Battery chargers mounted within the Automatic Transfer Switch are not acceptable. 2.5 DIESEL FUEL-OIL SYSTEM A. Comply with NFPA 30. B. Piping: Fuel-oil piping shall be Schedule 40 black steel, complying with requirements in Section 231113 "Facility Fuel-Oil Piping." Cast iron, aluminum, copper, and galvanizing shall not be used in the fuel-oil system. C. Main Fuel Pump: Mounted on engine to provide primary fuel flow under starting and load conditions. D. Fuel Filtering: Primary fuel filter to remove water and contaminants lager than 10 micron. Secondary filter to remove contaminants larger than 2 micron. E. Relief-Bypass Valve: Automatically regulates pressure in fuel line and returns excess fuel to source. F. Fuel-Oil Storage Tank: Comply with requirements in Section 231313 "Facility Underground Fuel-Oil Storage Tanks" or Section 231323 "Facility Aboveground Fuel-Oil Storage Tanks." 1. Fuel Tank Capacity: Minimum 133 percent of total fuel required for low-fuel level sensor quantity or required for the indicated EPSS Class. 2. Duplex Fuel-Oil Transfer Pump: Comply with requirements in Section 231213 "Facility Fuel-Oil Pumps." G. Day Tank: Comply with UL 142, freestanding, factory-fabricated fuel tank assembly, with integral, float-controlled transfer pump and the following features: 1. Containment: Integral rupture basin with a capacity of 150 percent of nominal capacity of day tank. a. Leak Detector: Locate in rupture basin and connect to provide audible and visual alarm in the event of day-tank leak. 2. Tank Capacity: As recommended by engine manufacturer for an uninterrupted period of 24 hours' operation at 100 percent of rated power output of engine-generator system without being refilled. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 ENGINE GENERATORS - DIESEL MDE Project NO: 191124 263213 - 6 August 2019 3. Pump Capacity: Exceeds maximum flow of fuel drawn by engine-mounted fuel supply pump at 110 percent of rated capacity, including fuel returned from engine. 4. Low-Level Alarm Sensor: Shall be provided, in accordance with NFPA110, to indicate when less than the minimum fuel necessary for full load running, as required by the specified EPSS class. 5. High-Level Alarm Sensor: Liquid-level device operates alarm and redundant fuel shutoff contacts at midpoint between overflow level and 100 percent of normal fuel level. 6. Piping Connections: Factory-installed fuel supply and return lines from tank to engine; local fuel fill, vent line, overflow line; and tank drain line with shutoff valve. 7. Redundant High-Level Fuel Shutoff: Actuated by high-level alarm sensor in day tank to operate a separate motor control device that disconnects day-tank pump motor. Sensor shall signal solenoid valve, located in fuel suction line between fuel storage tank and day tank, to close. Both actions shall remain in shutoff state until manually reset. Shutoff action shall initiate an alarm signal to control panel but shall not shut down engine-generator set. H. Subbase-Mounted, Double-Wall, Fuel-Oil Tank: Factory installed and piped, complying with UL 142 fuel-oil tank. Features include the following: 1. Tank Bottom: Sloped bottom to remove particulates and other fuel-borne contaminants from the fuel intake to the engine. 2. Tank Top: Sloped top to prevent standing water. 3. Electric tank level indicator with digital readout on control panel. 4. Low Fuel Sensing Switch: shall be provided, in accordance with NFPA110, to indicate when less than the minimum fuel necessary for full load running, as required by the specified EPSS class. 5. Fuel-Tank Capacity: Minimum 133 percent of total fuel required for low-fuel sensor quantity or for the hours of continuous operation for indicated EPSS class. 6. Leak detection in interstitial space. 7. Vandal-resistant fill cap. 8. Containment Provisions: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 9. Tank shall be production tested to 2 psi (13.8 kPa). 10. 24 hours capacity. 2.6 CONTROL AND MONITORING A. Automatic Starting System Sequence of Operation: When mode-selector switch on the control and monitoring panel is in the automatic position, remote-control contacts in one or more separate automatic transfer switches initiate starting and stopping of generator set. When mode-selector switch is switched to the manual position, generator set starts. The off position of same switch initiates generator-set shutdown. When generator set is running, specified system or equipment failures or derangements automatically shut down generator set and initiate alarms. B. Manual Starting System Sequence of Operation: Switching on-off switch on the generator control panel to the manual position starts generator set. The off position of same switch initiates generator-set shutdown. When generator set is running, specified system or equipment failures or derangements automatically shut down generator set and initiate alarms. C. Provide minimum run time control set for 30 minutes with override only by operation of a remote emergency-stop switch. D. Comply with UL 508A. E. Configuration: Operating and safety indications, protective devices, basic system controls, and engine gages shall be grouped in a common control and monitoring panel mounted on the generator set. Mounting method shall isolate the control panel from generator-set vibration. Panel shall be powered from the engine-generator set battery. 1. Engine and generator control wiring shall be multi-stranded annealed copper conductors encased by cross-linked polyethylene insulation resistant to heat, abrasion, oil, water, diesel fuel, and antifreeze. Wiring shall be suitable for continuous use at 250 deg F (121 deg C) with insulation not brittle at minus 60 deg F (minus 51 deg C). Cables shall be enclosed in nylon flexible conduit, which is slotted to allow easy access and moisture to escape. a. Engines that are equipped with an electronic engine control module (ECM) shall monitor and control engine functionality and seamlessly integrate with the generator set controller through digital communications. ECM monitored parameters shall be integrated into the genset controllers NFPA 110 alarm and warning requirements. b. For engines without ECM functionality or for any additional generator set controller monitoring, sensors are to be conditioned to a 4 to 20 ma signal level City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 ENGINE GENERATORS - DIESEL MDE Project NO: 191124 263213 - 7 August 2019 to enhance noise immunity and all sensor connections shall be sealed to prevent corrosion. 2. Construction: All circuitry within the control panel shall be individually environmentally sealed to prevent corrosion. Encapsulated circuit boards with surface mounted components and sealed, automotive-style connectors for sensors and circuit board connectors. Enclosed circuit boards and terminal strips that are susceptible to corrosion are not acceptable. 3. Custom ladder logic functionality inside the generator controller shall be supported to provide application support flexibility. The ladder logic function shall have access to all the controller inputs and customer assignable outputs. F. Supporting Items: Include sensors, transducers, terminals, relays, and other devices and include wiring required to support specified items. Locate sensors and other supporting items on engine or generator, unless otherwise indicated. Sensors are to be conditioned to a 4 to 20 mA signal level to enhance noise immunity and all sensor connections shall be sealed to prevent corrosions. G. Connection to Datalink: Provide connections for datalink transmission of indications to remote data terminals via ModBus RS485. H. The control system shall provide pre-wired customer use I/O: 4 relay outputs (user definable functions), 4 contact inputs, 2 analog inputs, communications support via RS232, RS485, or an optional modem. Additional I/O must be an available option. Customer I/O shall be software configurable providing full access to all alarm, event, data logging, and shutdown functionality. I. Supporting Items: Include sensors, transducers, terminals, relays, and other devices and include wiring required to support specified items. Locate sensors and other supporting items on engine or generator, unless otherwise indicated. J. Parallel Engine Generator Sets: 1. The controller shall be integral to the generator set and capable of automatically synchronizing and paralleling generator set to a common bus without use of external controllers of operators. Paralleling controls shall be standard manufacturer controller, factory tested prior to shipment to jobsite. Paralleling functions shall include: a. Automatic paralleling via system controller. b. Automatic paralleling via two-wire initiated start. c. Manually initiated paralleling with automatic synchronization. 2. Paralleling features include: a. Dead bus arbitration. b. Automatic synchronization at each generator. c. Real and reactive load sharing. d. Permissive/Load add relay function (3 system load add). e. Load shed relay function (3 system load shed). 3. Redundant Control: The design of the system shall allow continued generator paralleled operation with failures to the system controller and/or communication. Control systems that have any systemic single point failure modes are not acceptable. This is inclusive of systems that rely on reactive cross current and isochronous load sharing control loops. Control systems that rely on redundant communications will be evaluated for potential common mode failures that can impact both of communication channels. a. Retain the ability parallel generators automatically with a loss of data communication and/or load share lines. b. (Optional) accessory controller providing redundant load sequencing (load/add/shed) function. 4. Sequence of operation: a. After loss of utility, the automatic transfer switch(es) (ATS) shall send a group start signal to the generator set system. Each generator set in the system shall automatically start and accelerate to rated speed and voltage. The first generator set to reach rated speed and voltage shall automatically close its paralleling switch, energizing the generator bus. At this point, the first priority permissive signal shall be enabled, allowing generator loads to be energized. Each additional generator set in the system shall automatically drive the output voltage, frequency, and phase to match the bus, and close the generator paralleling switch once the conditions have been met. As each subsequent generator is brought on-line, an additional permissive signal shall be enabled, allowing additional loads to be added to the bus. b. Once all generator sets are on-line, the paralleling system controller shall actively monitor real (kW) and reactive (kVA) load requirements of the system, and adjust the generator set output to maintain balanced loading. c. Once utility power has been restored, the ATS shall remove the group start signal. The generator set will enter cooldown mode. At the expiration of the City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 ENGINE GENERATORS - DIESEL MDE Project NO: 191124 263213 - 8 August 2019 cooldown timer, the generator set shall open the paralleling switch and automatically shut down. K. Maintenance: 1. All engine, voltage regulator, control panel, and accessory units shall be accessible through a single electronic service tool. The following maintenance functionality shall be integral to the generator set controls: a. Engine running hours. b. Service maintenance interval (running hours, calendar days). c. Engine crank attempt counter. d. Engine successful starts counter. e. 20 events are stored in control panel memory. f. Control panel shall time and date stamp all alarms and warnings. A snap shot of key parameters shall be saved in the control panel for use in troubleshooting alarms. g. A predictive maintenance algorithm will determine the optimal time for maintenance service based on the generator loading and operation. L. Programmable Cycle Timer: To start and run the generator for a predetermined time. The timer shall use 14 user-programmable sequences that are repeated in a 7-day cycle. Each sequence shall have the following programmable set points: 1. Day of the week. 2. Time of the day start. 3. Duration of cycle. 4. Option to exercise at reduced speed for quiet test mode. M. Monitoring Software: Provide monitoring software capable of communicating to no less than 15 generator sets. Software shall be connectable via RS232 connection directly on the generator control panel. Software functionality to include: 1. Display generator set operating parameters including necessary pressures and temperatures, electrical output, fuel level. 2. Ability to program custom I/O alarms as well as modify standard alarm settings for applications (password protected). 3. Data logging and trending of up to 15 parameters, user selectable, for testing, troubleshooting, and record keeping. 4. High speed data logging and trending of up to 0.2 millisecond providing sine wave visibility for testing and identification of harmonic distortion levels. 2.7 GENERATOR OVERCURRENT AND FAULT PROTECTION A. Overcurrent protective devices for the entire EPSS shall be coordinated to optimize selective tripping when a short circuit occurs. Coordination of protective devices shall consider both utility and EPSS as the voltage source. 1. Overcurrent protective devices for the EPSS shall be accessible only to authorized personnel and each located in a separate box per NEC700 separation of circuits. B. Generator Circuit Breaker: Molded-case, electronic type; 100 percent rated; complying with UL 489. 1. Tripping Characteristic: Designed specifically for generator protection. 2. Trip Rating: Matched to generator output rating. 3. Shunt Trip: Connected to trip breaker when generator set is shut down by other protective devices. 4. Mounting: Each circuit breaker installed in separate box in accordance with NEC700 separation of circuits. C. Generator Protector: Microprocessor-based unit shall continuously monitor current level in each phase of generator output, integrate generator heating effect over time, and predict when thermal damage of alternator will occur. When signaled by generator protector or other generator-set protective devices, a shunt-trip device in the generator disconnect switch shall open the switch to disconnect the generator from load circuits. Protector performs the following functions: 1. Initiates a generator overload alarm when generator has operated at an overload equivalent to 110 percent of full-rated load for 60 seconds. Indication for this alarm is integrated with other generator-set malfunction alarms. Contacts shall be available for load shed functions. 2. Under single or three-phase fault conditions, regulates generator to 300 percent of rated full-load current for up to 10 seconds. 3. As overcurrent heating effect on the generator approaches the thermal damage point of the unit, protector switches the excitation system off, opens the generator disconnect device, and shuts down the generator set. 4. Senses clearing of a fault by other overcurrent devices and controls recovery of rated voltage to avoid overshoot. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 ENGINE GENERATORS - DIESEL MDE Project NO: 191124 263213 - 9 August 2019 D. Ground-Fault Indication: Comply with NFPA 70, "Emergency System" signals for ground fault. 1. Indicate ground fault with other generator-set alarm indications. 2. Trip generator protective device on ground fault. 2.8 GENERATOR, EXCITER, AND VOLTAGE REGULATOR A. Comply with NEMA MG 1 and UL2200, sized for 248 deg F (120 deg C) temperature rise above ambient at rated load. B. Drive: Generator shaft shall be directly connected to engine shaft. Exciter shall be rotated integrally with generator rotor. C. Electrical Insulation: Class H. D. Stator-Winding Leads: Brought out to terminal box to permit future reconnection for other voltages if required. Provide 12 lead alternator. E. Winding Coils: Skewed to improve sine wave shape and eliminate ripple effects caused by air gaps. F. Range: Provide broad range of output voltage by adjusting the excitation level. G. Construction shall prevent mechanical, electrical, and thermal damage due to vibration, overspeed up to 125 percent of rated speed, and heat during operation at 110 percent of rated capacity. H. Enclosure: Drip proof. I. Instrument Transformers: Mounted within generator enclosure. J. Voltage Regulator: Solid-state type on a sealed circuit board, separate from exciter, providing performance as specified and as required by NFPA 110. Must be 3-phase sensing. 1. Voltage Adjustment on Control and Monitoring Panel: Provide plus or minus 5 percent adjustment of output-voltage operating band. 2. Provide anti-hunt provision to stabilize voltage. . K. Strip Heater: Thermostatically controlled unit arranged to maintain stator windings above dew point. L. Windings: Two-thirds pitch stator winding and fully linked amortisseur winding. M. Subtransient Reactance: 15 percent, maximum. N. Excitation: Permanent magnet (PMG) type providing 300 percent current output for up to 10 seconds to a downstream breaker selective coordination and improved motor starting. 2.9 OUTDOOR GENERATOR-SET ENCLOSURE Coordinate with Drawings to define basic outdoor-enclosure type. Edit to specify enclosure features required. Coordinate requirements for water, fuel, power, controls, and alarms with Drawings. Many enclosure manufacturers have options for 150 mph (241 km/h) wind ratings on larger (400 kW and greater) product. The wind resistance item can be modified to include this requirement if needed. A. Description: OEM Factory manufactured, vandal-resistant, sound-attenuating, weatherproof steel housing, wind resistant up to 100 mph (160 km/h). Multiple panels shall be lockable and provide adequate access to components requiring maintenance. Panel shall be removable by one person without tools. Instruments and control shall be mounted within enclosure. 100 mph (160 km/h) is standard for all enclosures, 180 mph (290 km/h) is an upgrade option. Revise wind speed in "Structural Design and Anchorage" Subparagraph below to suit local conditions. 1. Structural Design and Anchorage: Comply with ASCE 7 for wind loads up to 180 mph. 2. Hinged Doors: a. Door Panels: With integral stiffeners, and capable of being removed by one person without tools. b. Slip-pin hinges and latches stainless steel with nylon spacers. c. Gasketed for weather and rodent protection. d. Handles to have padlocking provisions. 3. Space Heater: Thermostatically controlled and sized to prevent condensation. Provide as needed to meet NFPA110, Level 1 temperature levels. 4. Thermal Insulation: Manufacturer's standard materials and thickness selected in coordination with space heater to maintain winter interior temperature within operating limits required by engine-generator-set components. 5. Muffler Location: Within to enclosure. All exhaust piping shall be wrapped for personnel protection and to eliminate excessive heat build up during generator operation. 6. Assembly Hardware (Nuts and Bolts): Use JS500 and nylon washers to prevent paint deterioration. B. Sound Attenuation: Factory enclosure, designed to meet the following design criteria: 1. Weather protective enclosure limiting sound emissions to 85 dB(A) at 23 ft (7 m) in a free field environment. C. Engine Cooling Airflow through Enclosure: Maintain temperature rise of system components within required limits when unit operates at 110 percent of rated load for 2 hours with ambient temperature at top of range specified in system service conditions. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 ENGINE GENERATORS - DIESEL MDE Project NO: 191124 263213 - 10 August 2019 1. Louvers: Fixed-engine, cooling-air inlet and discharge. Storm-proof and drainable louvers prevent entry of rain and snow. D. Convenience Outlets: Factory wired, GFCI. Arrange for external electrical connection. 2.10 VIBRATION ISOLATION DEVICES A. Elastomeric Isolator Pads: Oil- and water-resistant elastomer or natural rubber, arranged in single or multiple layers, molded with a nonslip pattern and galvanized-steel baseplates of sufficient stiffness for uniform loading over pad area, and factory cut to sizes that match requirements of supported equipment. 1. Material: Standard neoprene separated by steel shims. 2. Shore "A" Scale Durometer Rating: 30. 3. Number of Layers: Three. 4. Minimum Deflection: 1 inch (25 mm). B. Comply with requirements in Section 232116 Hydronic Piping Specialties" for vibration isolation and flexible connector materials for steel piping. C. Comply with requirements in Section 233113 "Metal Ducts" for vibration isolation and flexible connector materials for exhaust shroud and ductwork. D. Vibration isolation devices shall not be used to accommodate misalignments or to make bends. 2.11 FINISHES A. Outdoor Enclosures and Components: Electrostatically applied Rhino Coat finish over corrosion- resistant pretreatment and compatible primer. B. Powder coated paint surfaces, meeting the following applicable standards: 1. Paint Thickness: More than 2.5 mil per ASTM D 1186.87. 2. Material Hardness: ASTM D 3363-92a. 3. Resistance to Cracking: ASTM D 522-B. 4. Paint Adhesion: ASTM D 3359-B. 5. Resistance to Salt Water Corrosion: ASTM B 117 or ASTM D 1654. 6. Resistance to Humidity: ASTM D 1735 or ASTM D 1654. 7. Impact Resistance: ASTM 2784. 8. UV Protection: SAE J1690. 2.12 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Prototype Testing: Factory test engine-generator set using same engine model, constructed of identical or equivalent components and equipped with identical or equivalent accessories. 1. Tests: Comply with NFPA 110, Level 1 Energy Converters and with IEEE 115. B. Project-Specific Equipment Tests: Before shipment, factory test engine-generator set and other system components and accessories manufactured specifically for this Project. Perform tests at rated load and power factor. Include the following tests: 1. Test components and accessories furnished with installed unit that are not identical to those on tested prototype to demonstrate compatibility and reliability. 2. Test generator, exciter, and voltage regulator as a unit. 3. Full load run. 4. Maximum power. 5. Voltage regulation. 6. Transient and steady-state governing. 7. Single-step load pickup. 8. Safety shutdown. 9. Provide 14 days' advance notice of tests and opportunity for observation of tests by Owner's representative. 10. Report factory test results within 10 days of completion of test. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas, equipment bases, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation and other conditions affecting packaged engine-generator performance. B. Examine roughing-in for piping systems and electrical connections. Verify actual locations of connections before packaged engine-generator installation. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 ENGINE GENERATORS - DIESEL MDE Project NO: 191124 263213 - 11 August 2019 3.2 PREPARATION . A. Interruption of Existing Electrical Service: Do not interrupt electrical service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary electrical service according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Construction Manager no fewer than fourteen working days in advance of proposed interruption of electrical service. 2. Do not proceed with interruption of electrical service without Construction Manager's written permission. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Comply with packaged engine-generator manufacturers' written installation and alignment instructions and with NFPA 110. B. Equipment Mounting: 1. Install packaged engine generators on cast-in-place concrete equipment bases. Comply with requirements for equipment bases and foundations specified in Section 03 30 00 "Cast-in-Place Concrete." 2. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases for packaged engine generators. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified with concrete. C. Install packaged engine-generator to provide access, without removing connections or accessories, for periodic maintenance. NFPA 110 requires indoor Level 1 engine generators to be installed in a dedicated room with 1 or 2 hour fire rating. Indoor installations also require the storage of fuel within the building and large air flows for cooling and combustion. Consult NFPA 110 and the authority having jurisdiction for requirements. Minimum deflection should be verified with structural or seismic engineer. D. Install packaged engine-generator with elastomeric isolator pad shaving a minimum deflection of 1 inch (25 mm) on 8-inch- (200-mm-) high concrete base. Secure sets enclosure to anchor bolts installed in concrete bases. Refer to detail on Electrical sheet. E. Install Schedule 40, black steel piping with welded joints and connect to engine muffler. Install thimble at wall. Piping shall be same diameter as muffler outlet. 1. Insulate muffler/silencer and exhaust system components according to requirements in Section 230719 "HVAC Piping Insulation." Refer to Section 07 72 00 "Roof Accessories" for roof curbs, piping supports, and roof- penetration boots. 2. Install isolating thimbles where exhaust piping penetrates combustible surfaces with a minimum of 9 inches (225 mm) clearance from combustibles. F. Install condensate drain piping to muffler drain outlet full size of drain connection with a shutoff valve, stainless-steel flexible connector, and Schedule 40, black steel pipe with welded joints. G. Electrical Wiring: Install electrical devices furnished by equipment manufacturers but not specified to be factory mounted. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 ENGINE GENERATORS - DIESEL MDE Project NO: 191124 263213 - 12 August 2019 3.4 CONNECTIONS A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping and specialties. B. Connect fuel, cooling-system, and exhaust-system piping adjacent to packaged engine-generator to allow service and maintenance. C. Connect engine exhaust pipe to engine with flexible connector. D. Connect fuel piping to engines with a gate valve and union and flexible connector. E. Ground equipment according to Section 26 00 26 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems." Refer to One-line and plan. F. Balance single-phase loads to obtain a maximum of 10 percent unbalance between any two phases. 3.5 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify system components according to 26 00 53 "Identification for Electrical Systems." B. Install a sign indicating the generator neutral is bonded to the main service neutral at the main service location. 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: At the owner's request, the contractor shall engage a qualified, third-party, testing agency to witness tests and inspections. B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections. C. Perform tests and inspections. 1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections. D. Tests and Inspections: 1. Perform tests recommended by manufacturer and each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical and mechanical test listed in the first two subparagraphs as specified in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters. a. Visual and Mechanical Inspection 1) Compare equipment nameplate data with drawings and specifications. 2) Inspect physical and mechanical condition. 3) Inspect anchorage, alignment, and grounding. 4) Verify the unit is clean. b. Electrical and Mechanical Tests 1) Test protective relay devices per manufacturer recommendations. 2) Verify phase rotation, phasing, and synchronized operation as required by the application. 3) Functionally test engine shutdown for low oil pressure, overtemperature, overspeed, and other protection features as applicable. 4) Conduct performance test in accordance with NFPA 110. 5) Verify correct functioning of the governor and regulator. 2. NFPA 110 Acceptance Tests: Perform tests required by NFPA 110 that are additional to those specified here including, but not limited to, single-step full-load pickup test. 3. Battery Tests: Equalize charging of battery cells according to manufacturer's written instructions. Record individual cell voltages. a. Measure charging voltage and voltages between available battery terminals for full-charging and float-charging conditions. Check electrolyte level and specific gravity under both conditions. b. Test for contact integrity of all connectors. Perform an integrity load test and a capacity load test for the battery. c. Verify acceptance of charge for each element of the battery after discharge. d. Verify that measurements are within manufacturer's specifications. 4. Battery-Charger Tests: Verify specified rates of charge for both equalizing and float- charging conditions. 5. System Integrity Tests: Methodically verify proper installation, connection, and integrity of each element of engine-generator system before and during system operation. Check for air, exhaust, and fluid leaks. 6. Voltage and Frequency Transient Stability Tests: Use data capture from manufacturer control panel and software to measure voltage and frequency transients for 50 and 100 percent step-load increases and decreases, and verify that performance is as specified. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 ENGINE GENERATORS - DIESEL MDE Project NO: 191124 263213 - 13 August 2019 E. Coordinate tests with tests for transfer switches and run them concurrently. F. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation for generator and associated equipment. G. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. H. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above. I. Retest: Correct deficiencies identified by tests and observations and retest until specified requirements are met. J. Report results of tests and inspections in writing. Record adjustable relay settings and measured insulation resistances, time delays, and other values and observations. Attach a label or tag to each tested component indicating satisfactory completion of tests. 3.7 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Initial Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, provide 60 months' full maintenance by EGSA Certified employees of manufacturer's designated service organization. Include quarterly exercising to check for proper starting, load transfer, and running under load. Include routine preventive maintenance as recommended by manufacturer and adjusting as required for proper operation. Provide parts and supplies same as those used in the manufacture and installation of original equipment. 3.8 TRAINING A. The equipment supplier shall provide training for the facility operating personnel covering operation and maintenance of the equipment provided. The training program shall be not less than 4 hours in duration and the class size shall be limited to 5 persons. Training date shall be coordinated with the facility owner. END OF SECTION City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH MDE Project NO: 191124 263623 - 1 August 2019 SECTION 263623 - AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to the Work in this Section. 1.2 SCOPE A. Provide all equipment, materials, labor, supervision and services necessary for or incidental to the installation of complete automatic transfer switches as shown or indicated on the drawings and/or as specified. B. Work Included: 1. Automatic transfer switch 2. Equipment concrete pads 3. Conduits to package generator set C. SUBMITTALS: Provide submittals as required in section 26 05 10, “Submittal Process.” 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workers who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. B. Without additional cost to the Engineer, provide such other labor and materials as are required to complete the work of this Section in accordance with the requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, regardless of whether such materials and associated labor are called for elsewhere in these Contract Documents C. Provide the Engineer with manufacturer's certificate that materials meet or exceed minimum requirements as specified. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH A. General Automatic Transfer Switch: Electrically operated, 3 pole with fourth neutral pole, mechanically held and obtaining control and transfer power from the source to which it is being transferred. Switch shall be front accessible. B. Acceptable manufacturers: Generac HTS or approved equal. C. Refer to project drawings for specifications on the sizes and types of transfer switch equipment, number of poles and ratings. All transfer switch equipment and accessories shall be UL listed and labeled, tested per UL Standard 1008, and CSA approved. D. Provide the following features in addition to automatic transfer function: 1. Flush mounted display panel with LED indicators to indicate switch position and source availability 2. 3 position test switch: Fast Test, Auto, and Normal Test 3. Signal before transfer contacts 4. Standby accept voltage: 85-95% 5. Standby accept frequency: 85-95% 6. Nominal voltage: 1 volt increments 7. Allowable deviation of utility: 1-100% 8. Engine warm-up time: 1-300 seconds 9. Minimum run time: 5-60 minutes 10. Return to utility timer: 1-30 minutes 11. Engine cool down timer: 1-30 minutes 12. Signal before transfer timer: 1-30 seconds 13. Transfer type: In phase Time Delay neutral 14. Phase Difference for In phase monitor: -7 +0 degrees 15. One additional normally open contact on both normal and emergency relays 16. SPDT auxiliary contacts E. Enclosure: Mounted in separate NEMA 1 enclosure. PART 3 – EXECUTION City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH MDE Project NO: 191124 263623 - 2 August 2019 3.1 WARRANTY AND SERVICE A. The transfer switch manufacturer shall maintain a factory-trained, factory direct, field service organization, available on a 24-hour call basis. B. Provide 5-year warranty and warranty documentation to owner. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. All power conductors shall be terminated directly without looping or crossing. B. All conductors shall be marked with permanent wire markers. C. The manufacturer's authorized service representative shall provide the following services prior and subsequent to placing the switches in operation: 1. All clearances and contact pressures shall be verified for proper operation prior to testing 2. Adjust all time delay settings and provide verification by test. Provide record of settings to owner or owner's representative subsequent to start up 3.3 WIRING AND CONNECTIONS A. Provide conduit, wiring and connections required and recommended by unit supplier. 3.4 TESTING A. Perform load tests as specified. END OF SECTION City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 FACILITY LIGHTNING PROTECTION MDE Project NO: 191124 264100 - 1 August 2019 SECTION 264100 - FACILITY LIGHTNING PROTECTION PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to the Work in this Section. 1.2 CODES AND STANDARDS A. The following specifications and standards of the latest issue form a part of this specification. 1. Lightning Protection Institute 2. Installation Standard, LPI 175 3. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. 4. Installation Requirements, LPI 175 5. National Electrical Code (NEC) 6. National Fire Protection Association 7. Lightning Protection Code, NFPA 780 B. All materials tested by Underwriter's Laboratories shall bear their labels A, B and C for materials and installation. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. B. Without additional cost to the Owner, provide such other labor and materials as are required to complete the work of this Section in accordance with the requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, regardless of whether such materials and associated labor are called for elsewhere in these Contract Documents C. The lightning protection system shall conform to the requirements and standards for lightning protection systems of the LPI, UL, NFPA, and NEC. Upon completion, application shall be made to the Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. for inspection and certification. In addition, the Lightning Protection Institute certified system shall be delivered to the owner ensuring that the concealed components have also been monitored during job progress D. The system to be furnished under this specification shall be the standard product of manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of lightning protection equipment and shall be the manufacturer's latest approved design. The equipment shall be UL listed and properly UL labeled. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Provide submittals as required in section 26 05 10, “Submittal Process.” B. Product Data - Submit manufacturer's data on lightning protection systems and components. C. Shop Drawings - Submit dimensioned layout drawings of lightning protection system equipment and components, including conductor routing and connections. D. UL Certificate - Provide Owner with UL Master Label for overall system which is suitable for fastening to building for display. Comply with UL 96A, "Master Labeled Lightning Protection Systems." PART 2 – PRODUCT 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturer - Subject to compliance with requirements, provide lightning protection components of one of the following (for each type of component): 1. Advanced Lightning Technology 2. East Coast Lightning Equipment 3. Harger Lightning Protection 4. Robbins Lightning Protection 5. Thompson Lightning Protection, Inc. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 FACILITY LIGHTNING PROTECTION MDE Project NO: 191124 264100 - 2 August 2019 2.2 LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM COMPONENTS A. Standard - All equipment used this installation shall be UL listed and properly labeled. All equipment shall be new, and of a design and construction to suit the application where it is used in accordance with accepted industry standards and LPI, UL, NFPA, and NEC code requirements. B. Lighting Protection Equipment - All materials shall be copper and bronze and of the size, weight, and construction to suit the application and used in accordance with LPI, UL, and NFPA code requirements. Class 1 components may be utilized on roof levels 75 feet and below in height. Class II size components are required for roof levels over 75 feet in height. Bolt type connectors and splicers shall be utilized on Class I and Class II structures. Pressure squeeze clamps are not acceptable. All mounting hardware shall be stainless steel to prevent corrosion. C. Aluminum Components - Aluminum materials may not be used except on roof that utilize aluminum roofing components. On aluminum metal roofs or where aluminum parapet caps exist, the entire roof lightning protection equipment shall utilize aluminum components to insure compatibility. However, the downleads and grounding are to utilize copper with the bimetal transition occurring at the through roof assembly with and approved bimetal through roof assembly. Lead coating is not acceptable as a bimetal transition. D. Materials below grade to 18" above grade: Copper, except ground rods to be stainless steel. E. Air Terminals: 1. Point: Solid copper, 12" height x 3/8" diameter F. Fasteners and Attachments: Same material as air terminals. G. Main Conductors: Copper cable, minimum weight 187.5 lbs/1,000 ft; minimum wire size No.17 AWAG (Class I) H. Secondary Conductors: Copper cable; minimum 13 strand No. 17 AWG. I. Fasteners: 1. Same material as conductor 2. Galvanized fasteners not acceptable J. Connectors and Disconnectors 1. Compression type designed to withstand 2,000 lbs. pull 2. Exothermic Welding Type, below grade and in non-accessible areas K. Ground Electrodes: 10 ft. stainless steel rods 3/4" diameter. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. All cables shall be installed under the deck so they are not visible to the eye. They are to penetrate the roof and tie into probes. B. The installation shall be accomplished by an experienced installation company that is a UL listed, a member of the Lightning Protection Institute, United Lightning Protection Association qualified and an employer of Certified Master Installers of lightning protection systems. A Certified Master Installer shall directly supervise the work. C. All equipment shall be installed in a neat, workmanlike manner. The system shall consist of a complete conductor network at the roof and include air terminals, connectors, splicers, bonds, copper downleads, and proper terminals. D. Air Terminals: Install in plumb position securely fastened to withstand overturning. D. Conductors: 1. Fastening: a. Fasten conductors to building at 3 feet maximum intervals b. On masonry, set fasteners in brick, block or stone, but not in mortar joints E. Conductor Runs: 1. Bend to radii greater than 8 inches 2. Limit angle of turns to 90 degrees 3. Route horizontal conductors around obstructions in horizontal plane 4. Route connectors in horizontal or vertical planes only 5. Install roof conductors concealed under roofing system. Exposed conductors will not be acceptable. Install under deck and penetrate through. No Exceptions. F. Connect conductor to metal bodies of inductance located within 6 feet by secondary conductor. G. Ground: Extend minimum of 10 ft into earth. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 FACILITY LIGHTNING PROTECTION MDE Project NO: 191124 264100 - 3 August 2019 3.2 COORDINATION A. The lightning protection installer will work with other trades to insure a correct, neat and unobtrusive installation. B. It shall be the responsibility of the lightning protection installer to assure a sound bond to the main water service and the main electrical service ground bar and to assure interconnection with other ground systems. C. Install approved SPD’s on power service. 3.3 COMPLETION A. Upon completion of the installation, the lightning protection installer shall secure and deliver to the Owner the Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. Master Label certification and the Lightning Protection Institute Certified System certification. The system will not be accepted without the UL Master Label plate and the LPI certificate. 3.4 PERSONNEL TRAINING A. Building Maintenance Personnel Training: Train Owner's building maintenance personnel in procedures for testing and determining resistance-to-ground values of lightning protection system. END OF SECTION City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES MDE Project NO: 191124 264300 - 1 August 2019 SECTION 264300 - SURGE PROTECTING DEVICES PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to the Work in this Section. 1.2 SCOPE A. This section includes Surge Protective Devices (SPD) for low-voltage power equipment (1000Vac and less). B. Work under this section consists of furnishing all materials necessary for the execution and complete installation of Surge Protective Devices (SPD). C. SUBMITTALS: Provide submittals as required in section 26 00 10, ”Submittal Process” 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE/REFERENCE STANDARDS The SPD surge protection system shall be designed and manufactured, and where appropriate, listed to the following standards: A. Underwriters Laboratory (UL) 1. UL1449 3rd Edition: Surge Protective Devices (SPD) 2. UL1283 5th Edition: Electromagnetic Interference Filters 3. UL796 9th Edition: Printed Wiring Boards 4. UL67 11th Edition: UL Standard for Safety for Panelboards B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)/Institute of Electrical & Electronic Engineers (IEEE) 1. C62.41.1: 2002 IEEE Guide on the Surge Environment in Low-Voltage (1000V and less) AC Power Circuits 2. C62.41.2: 2002 IEEE Recommended Practice on Characterization of Surges in Low- Voltage (1000V and Less) AC Power Circuits 3. C62.45: 2002 IEEE Recommended Practice on Surge Testing for Equipment Connected to Low-Voltage (1000V and Less) AC Power Circuits 4. C62.62: 2000 IEEE Standard Test Specifications for Surge Protective Devices for Low Voltage (1000V and Less) AC Power Circuits 5. C62.72: 2007 IEEE Guide for the Application of Surge Protective Devices for Low Voltage (1000V and Less) AC Power Circuits C. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) D. National Fire Protection Association, NFPA 70 National Electric Code (NEC) E. Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA F. Federal Information Processing Standards (FIPS) G. MIL-STD 220A 1.3 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Service Conditions: The Surge Protective Device (SPD) shall be rated for continuous operation under the following conditions: 1. Maximum Continuous Operating Voltage (MCOV): 115% to 125% of the nominal operating voltage 2. Operating Temperature: 0C to 60C 3. Relative Humidity: 0% to 95%, non-condensing 4. Operating Altitude: 0 feet to 12,000 feet 1.4 LOCATIONS A. See the electrical One Line Diagram for Surge Protective Device (SPD) unit locations. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS A. The specified equipment is based upon THOR SYSTEMS as supplied by Critical Site Solutions, Irving, Texas. Listed substitutions shall conform to the specifications in its entirety. Complete documentation including literature, drawings and specification review shall be provided. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES MDE Project NO: 191124 264300 - 2 August 2019 2.2 GENERAL A. The following are the general requirements of the SPD products: 1. Nomenclatures used herein are intended to indicate product type and configuration of equipment required. 2. UL1449 3rd Edition Listed and must bear the 3rd Edition mark. 3. UL1283 5th Edition Listed. 4. The Surge Protective Device (SPD) shall be a stand alone configuration. Systems that must be integral to the switchgear will not be considered. 5. The surge protection system shall provide effective high-energy Transient Voltage Suppression and attenuate high frequency electrical noise. 6. All suppression systems must be permanently connected, parallel designs. Series suppression elements are not acceptable. 7. Short Circuit Current Rating of 100kAIC without the need for fuses or breakers external to the SPD. NEC Article 285.6 requires test data confirming the specified short circuit carrying capability (AIC rating) is provided. 8. All SPD units shall be provided with an auxiliary dry contact (Form C) actuated by any single suppression module including N-G failure for connection to a Building Automation System. 9. All SPD units shall be from the same manufacturer. 10. SPD modules shall be configured to isolate individual suppression component failures without causing total loss of surge protection in that mode. 11. Surge protection or filtering component failures or fuse openings are not permissible during UL1449 3rd Edition Nominal Discharge testing. 12. SPD designs using a single fuse to protect two (2) or more surge paths are not acceptable. 13. Overcurrent protection limiting the 100% rated surge protection is not acceptable. 14. Fuse links or printed circuit board trace fusing are not acceptable. 15. The SPD shall provide redundant parallel copper bus structure and/or low impedance traces, which are 100% surge rated top and bottom of printed circuit board to reduce suppression path impedance. 16. All printed circuit boards are heavy copper double-sided plated through and meet the requirements of UL796 including those for Direct Support applications, as indicated by a Delta symbol on the circuit board. 17. Hybrid three-tier design utilizing: a. Thermally Protected Metal Oxide Varistors (TpMOVs) featuring: 1) “Fail-safe” design technology with integrated thermal apparatus that monitors the status providing local physical indication of the metal oxide disk has built-in dielectric (arc shield) protection and remote indication by an integral N.O micro-switch 2) The TpMOV eliminates the requirement of internal or external fuses (which would limit surge protection capability) for the surge protection components, while providing a Short Circuit Current Rating (SCCR) of 100,000 Amps b. Silicon Avalanche Diodes (SADs) supplying the most ideal suppression element and very fast reaction time; rated 15,000 Watts each and provided L-N and L-G. c. Filter capacitors to suppress EMI/RFI electrical noise. 1) All products shall be provided with high strand count, high frequency/low impedance wire 2) Products which are encapsulated in an epoxy resin compound or any other compound of similar form are not acceptable 2.3 MODULAR DESIGN (with Individual Replaceable “Per Mode” Modules) A. The TSri Modular Series is a full three-tier hybrid design featuring Thermally Protected Metal Oxide Varistors (TpMOVs), Silicon Avalanche Diodes (SADs), and Sinewave Tracking Filter Capacitors. B. The TSri Series has the ability to be upgraded in the field. C. Configured for the voltage configuration as shown on plans. D. A modular hybrid design utilizing the following UL Recognized components: 1. Thermally Protected Metal Oxide Varistors (TpMOVs) utilizing “fail-safe” technology. (Systems using fuse links or printed circuit board trace fusing are not acceptable.) 2. Silicon Avalanche Diodes (SADs) are provided L-N and L-G mode. 3. EMI/RFI Filter Capacitors which are UL1283 Listed providing electrical noise attenuation E. Each module is voltage keyed by color, by numerical identification, and coordinating pin and sleeve to assure correct assembly field replacement. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES MDE Project NO: 191124 264300 - 3 August 2019 F. The modular design is available for the complete range of surge ratings (50 through 300), featuring a full complement surge rating on each field replaceable module. G. Modes of Protection: The SPD system shall provide surge protection in all possible modes (L-N, L- G, L-L, and N-G). Each replaceable module must provide the uncompromising ability to deliver full surge current rating from 50kA to 300kA per mode. H. The internal SPD/TVSS connection method is an Internal Fused Disconnect or Surge Rated Disconnect or Distribution Block. I. The replaceable module must be an individual module (one [1] module per mode). Each system must provide a spare module. Modular designs with only a single module or surge brick are not acceptable. J. Each individual module features a green LED indicating the individual module has all surge protection devices active. If any single component is taken off-line, the green LED will turn off and a red LED will illuminate, providing individual module as well as total system status indication. K. Monitoring Options: Select the appropriate monitoring system from the table below: SPD Monitoring Options Modular Products Monitoring Type Feature Descriptions Type 1 Provides: •Solid State Status Indication Lights •Audible Alarm with Alarm Silence sounds in event of a protection mode failure Form C Contacts for remote monitor Type 2 Provides: •Surge Counter (microprocessor-based with 8 levels of sensitivity providing programmable adjustment of the Counter trigger level) •Audible Alarm with Silence (Ack) button; includes Enable button Form C Contacts for remote monitor L. Provide the SPD in a NEMA 4 enclosure not exceeding 20”H x 16”W x 8”D in size. M. Each replaceable module shall bolt directly to a low impedance solid copper bus structure. Modular systems with plug-in component modules are not acceptable. N. Each SPD system shall be supplied with one (1) field replaceable module. O. The Modular SPD system is supplied with UL1283 Listed EMI/RFI noise filtering having an electrical noise attenuation of 36 to 44dB in the range of 50 kHz to 100MHz as defined by MIL- STD-220A test procedures. P. The TSri Series SPD system offers an Extended Filter, UL1283 Listed, having an electrical noise attenuation of 45 to 50dB in the range of 50 kHz to 100MHz as defined by MIL-STD-220A test procedures. Q. The let-through voltage test results used to obtain the UL1449 3rd Edition Voltage Performance Ratings “VPR” (6kV, 3000 Amps, 8/20µs waveform) must not exceed the UL assigned values listed in the following table: 3000A Voltage Let-Through Ratings Modular Products Voltage Rating L-N L-G N-G L-L 208/120 Vac 800 700 600 1200 480/277 Vac 1200 1200 1000 1800 Note: Ratings in the above chart were recorded with Fused Disconnects in place. R. The let-through voltage test results based on the previous UL1449 2nd Edition (issue date August 1996) Suppression Voltage Rating “SVR” (6kV; 500 Amps; 8/20µs waveform) must not exceed the UL assigned values listed in the following table: City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES MDE Project NO: 191124 264300 - 4 August 2019 500A Voltage Let-Through Ratings Modular Products Voltage Rating L-N L-G N-G L-L 208/120 Vac 400 400 400 700 480/277 Vac 700 800 800 900 Note: Ratings in the above chart were recorded with Fused Disconnects in place. S. The Modular systems’ surge current ratings shall be based on the electrical system ampacity listed in the following table. Note: The “per phase” value derived by adding the L-N mode and the L-G mode. SPD Applications Modular Systems Surge Protection (kA)Electrical System Ampacity @ SPD Install Point Per Mode Per Phase 2500 – 6000A 300 600 1200 – 2000A 250 500 600 – 1000A 200 400 225 – 400A 150 300 125 – 225A 100 200 T. Approved Manufacturer: The following MODULAR SPD models are acceptable, subject to conformance with indicated requirements: THOR SYSTEMS - TSr Product Series. Example: Model TSri300Fx 3Y4 M202; Replaceable Module; 300kA per Mode (600 per Phase); 480/277Vac, 3 Phase Wye; Fused Disconnect Switch; Type 2 Monitor (LED indication, Audible Alarm, Surge Counter); Form C Contact; Extended EFI/RFI Filter. 2.4 PERFORMANCE A. Provide a Test Report from a recognized independent testing laboratory (NETA or NRTL) verifying the COMPLETE suppressor (including all necessary fusing, disconnects, monitoring systems, etc.) can survive published current rating on a per mode basis using the IEEE C62.41, 8/20µs waveform. Note that test data on individual module is not acceptable. B. Provide a COMPLETE documentation package per the requirements of NEMA LS1-1992 C. The SPD shall be capable of surviving the UL 1449 3rd Edition Nominal Discharge Test. The repetitive surge current capacity shall be tested utilizing an 8x20µs, 20kA short circuit test waveform (as defined by ANSI/UL 1449 3rd Edition – 2009, IEEE C62.41.2 – 2002 and IEEE C62.45 – 2002). Surges shall be applied in three (3) groups of five (5) surges. Within one (1) second after the application of each surge, the specified MCOV shall be applied for sixty (60) seconds (+15 seconds). After each group of five (5) surges, the sample shall rest for thirty (30) minutes. After the 15th surge, the MCOV shall be reapplied for at least fifteen (15) minutes. During and following this test there shall be no opening of any supplementary protective devices either internal or external to the device. D. The SPD must provide superior surge protection performance with the ability to deliver 100% rated surge capacity. E. The Surge protection system must be rated and marked with a Short Circuit Current Rating (SCCR) of 100kAic without the need for external fuses or breakers. The use of Overcurrent protection that limits the specified surge currents is not acceptable. 2.5 FACTORY TESTING A. Standard factory tests shall be performed on the equipment under this section. All tests shall be in accordance with the latest version of NEMA and UL standards. B. All surge protective devices, subassemblies, and components are to be 100% tested and certified by the manufacturer to meet their published performance parameters. 2.6 WARRANTY A. All Surge Protective Devices (SPD), associated hardware, and supporting components shall be warranted to be free from defects in materials and workmanship, under normal use and in accordance with the instructions provided, for a period of five (5) years. Arc Shield: NORMAL Operating Position City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES MDE Project NO: 191124 264300 - 5 August 2019 WARNING! Failure to confirm voltage can result in serious damage, injury, or even death. B. Any component or subassembly contained within the surge protection system that shows evidence of failure or incorrect operation during the five (5) year warranty period, shall be replaced by the manufacturer. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 EXECUTION A. This section covers the execution and commissioning of the Surge Protective Device/Transient Voltage Surge Suppression (SPD) required on this project. B. Technical assistance shall be provided by the manufacturer through the efforts of a factory representative or a local distributor and via a factory staffed, THOR SYSTEMS’ toll-free technical hotline (1.877.298.1100) and website (www.ThorSystems.us). C. Verify absence of damage. D. The unit shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s printed instructions. All local and national codes must be observed. E. The unit shall be installed of the same voltage rating as the intended protected equipment. F. The location of the field-mounted SPD shall allow adequate clearances for maintenance. G. Lead Length: The mounting of the SPD shall ensure the connecting leads are as short (recommend one [1] meter or less) and straight (no sharp bends) as reasonably possible. H. The SPD shall be marked with a Short Circuit Current Rating (SCCR) and shall not be installed at a point on the system where the available fault current is in excess of that rating per the National Electric Code, Article 285, Section 6. I. Panel Extension Kits shall be factory mounted on the panelboard and tested at the SPD manufacturer’s facility and shipped complete to the jobsite. The engineer may allow field mounting of the SPD extension assembly. J. THOR SYSTEMS’ representatives are committed to assuring proper installation guidelines are followed by the commissioning of each individual SPD and verification of proper grounding, including Ground resistance measurement and the recording of the resistance readings, which will be forwarded to the facilities manager with a completed Commissioning Report. K. System Commissioning. Upon completion of the installation of the Surge Protective Device (SPD) a factory-authorized service representative shall provide product commissioning services. These services shall include but are not limited to the following: 1. Before energizing the SPD verify the SPD is correct as specified: manufacturer, product series, and model number. a. All voltage modes including L-L (Line-to-Line), L-G (Line-to-Ground), L-N (Line- to-Neutral), and N-G (Neutral-to-Ground) shall be measured and verified against the unit voltage ratings. b. Continuity measurements shall be made between the Neutral and Ground connections to verify the Neutral-to-Ground bond. c. Use a calibrated Ground resistance meter to measure the Ground resistance of the Ground wire connected to each individual SPD unit. Record the Ground reading in unit documentation. NOTE: The preferred reading is less than 5 Ohms. A Ground system measuring above 10 ohms needs to be evaluated. 2. Energize the SPD: a. All voltage modes including L-L (Line-to-Line), L-G (Line-to-Ground), L-N (Line- to-Neutral), and N-G (Neutral-to-Ground) shall be measured at the unit terminals and again verified against the unit voltage ratings. b. All indicating LEDs shall be illuminated Green. The factory shall be contacted in the event of any illuminated Red LEDs. c. Monitoring functions shall be checked (if applicable) for correct operation and verification of sensitivity setting. Upon energizing the SPD: 1) The Yellow ACTIVE SURGE LED should turn On, then Off 2) The Green STATUS and Yellow ENABLE LEDs should turn On 3) When the Green and Yellow LEDs turn on, the Counter should display a sensitivity setting of SEN3, which is the factory default setting. The display setting should change to 0000 City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES MDE Project NO: 191124 264300 - 6 August 2019 4) The Audible Alarm should sound on fault. ACK silences alarm. Note: The Alarm should be in the Enabled status unless the customer has requested the alarm not sound d. Results of the System Commissioning shall be on a standard Commissioning Report which is submitted upon completion to the facilities manager. END OF SECTION City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 LED LIGHTING MDE Project NO: 191124 265500 - 1 August 2019 SECTION 265500 - LED LIGHTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. All other Sections of Division 26. C. All other Divisions of the Contract Documents. Refer to each Division’s specifications and drawings. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Provided all equipment, materials, labor supervision, and services necessary for or incidental to the installation of all lighting fixtures as indicated on the drawings, and as specified. B. Work included: 1. This Section includes interior lighting fixtures, lighting fixtures mounted on exterior building surfaces, lamps, ballasts, emergency lighting units, and all accessories. 2. Lighting fixtures shall be furnished as scheduled on the drawings and as specified herein. 3. Interior solid-state luminaires that use LED technology. 4. Lighting fixture supports. C. Provide emergency exit signs at locations shown. Mount signs on ceiling for ceiling heights 10’ or less. Mount sign on wall 9” above door where ceiling heights exceed 10’. D. Related Requirements: 1. Section 26 09 23 "Occupancy Sensors" for automatic control of lighting, including time switches, photoelectric relays, occupancy, vacancy sensors, and multipole lighting relays and contactors. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit electronic copies of the submittal to the prime consultant (i.e. architect) in order to process and track the submittals properly in accordance with Division 01 and 26 submittal requirements. Architects and consultants are then to submit all documents and RFI’s to the Electrical Engineer electronically. Send to mdengca@md-eng.com. Submittals shall be labeled by their project specification section. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's catalog cut sheets, data sheets and installation instruction for all light fixtures, lamps and drivers arranged in order of fixture designation. 1. Arrange in order of luminaire designation. 2. Include data on features, accessories, and finishes. 3. Include physical description and dimensions of luminaires. 4. Include emergency lighting units, including batteries and chargers. 5. Include life, output (lumens, CCT, and CRI), wattage, and energy efficiency data. 6. Photometric data and adjustment factors based on laboratory tests, complying with IESNA Lighting Measurements Testing and Calculation Guides, of each lighting fixture type. The adjustment factors shall be for lamps and accessories identical to those indicated for the lighting fixture as applied in this Project. a. Manufacturers' Certified Data: Photometric data certified by manufacturer's laboratory with a current accreditation under the National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program for Energy Efficient Lighting Products. b. Testing Agency Certified Data: For indicated luminaires, photometric data certified by a qualified independent testing agency. Photometric data for remaining luminaires shall be certified by manufacturer. C. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements. D. Shop Drawings: For nonstandard or custom luminaires. 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and mounting and attachment details. 2. Include details of luminaire assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 LED LIGHTING MDE Project NO: 191124 265500 - 2 August 2019 3. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. E. Samples: For each luminaire and for each color and texture with standard factory-applied finish. F. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of luminaire with custom factory-applied finishes. 1. Include Samples of luminaires and accessories involving color and finish selection. G. Samples for Verification: For each type of luminaire. 1. Include Samples of luminaires and accessories to verify finish selection. H. Lighting Schedule: Substitutions from the “Lighting Fixture Schedule” will only be approved with written prior consent from owner and architect. I. Incomplete submittals or submittals combined with other spec sections will be returned un-reviewed and rejected. J. Resubmission of rejected submittals shall be limited to one (1) in number. Costs for processing subsequent resubmittals in excess of the first resubmittal, resulting from the Contractor's disregard of Architect/Engineer's primary submittal rejection comments, shall be borne by the Contractor. Costs shall be based on Architect/Engineer's hourly rates as published in their current professional fee schedules and shall also include reimbursable costs for delivery, mailing, and photocopies at direct cost plus ten percent (10%). 1.4 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS (Spare Parts) A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. LED strips: Ten for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type. 2. Diffusers and Lenses: Ten for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type. 3. Globes and Guards: Ten for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workers who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. B. Without additional cost to the Owner, provide such other labor and materials as are required to complete the work of this Section in accordance with the requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, regardless of whether such materials and associated labor are called for elsewhere in these Contract Documents C. Provide the manufacturer's certificates that confirm that materials meet or exceed minimum requirements as specified. D. Standards: Comply with applicable NEMA, IEEE, UL and NFPA Standards. E. NFPA 101 Compliance: Comply with visibility and luminance requirements for exit signs. F. Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Provided by an independent agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is an NRTL as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, accredited under the NVLAP for Energy Efficient Lighting Products, and complying with the applicable IES testing standards. G. Provide luminaires from a single manufacturer for each luminaire type. H. Exterior lighting is to conform with AHJ (Authority Having Jurisdiction) on all requirements of illumination of property line, and that lighting is shielded from any upward diffusion. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect finishes of exposed surfaces by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. B. Store products in a clean and dry area. C. Install LED’s wearing white cotton gloves to avoid grease and fingerprints on the fixtures. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 LED LIGHTING MDE Project NO: 191124 265500 - 3 August 2019 1.7 WARRANTY A. Warranty: Manufacturer and Installer agree to repair or replace components of luminaires that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. B. Warranty Period: Materials, 5 years from date of Substantial Completion. C. Warranty Period: Labor, 1 Year from date of Substantial Completion PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Seismic Performance: Luminaires and lamps shall be labeled vibration and shock resistant. 1. The term "withstand" means "the luminaire will remain in place without separation of any parts when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the luminaire will be fully operational during and after the seismic event. 2.2 LUMINAIRE REQUIREMENTS A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. B. NRTL Compliance: Luminaires for hazardous locations shall be listed and labeled for indicated class and division of hazard by an NRTL. C. Recessed Fixtures: Comply with NEMA LE 4. D. Bulb shape complying with ANSI C79.1. E. Lamp base complying with ANSI C81.61 or IEC 60061-1. F. Rated lamp life of 35,000-50,000 hours. G. Lamps dimmable from 100 percent to 10 percent of maximum light output. H. Integral driver. I. Nominal Operating Voltage: 120 V ac-277 V ac J. Lens Thickness: At least 0.125 inch (3.175 mm) minimum unless otherwise indicated. 2.3 MANUFACTURERS A. Approved Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, unless specified on the light fixture schedule. 1. Lithonia 2. LSI 3. HALO 4. Metalux 5. Columbia 6. GE 7. Portfolio 8. Prescolite 9. Elite 10. Hubble 2.4 METAL FINISHES A. Variations in finishes are unacceptable in the same piece. Variations in finishes of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and if they can be and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 LED LIGHTING MDE Project NO: 191124 265500 - 4 August 2019 2.5 LUMINAIRE FIXTURE SUPPORT COMPONENTS A. Comply with requirements in Section 26 05 29 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for channel and angle iron supports and nonmetallic channel and angle supports. B. Single-Stem Hangers: 1/2-inch (13-mm) steel tubing with swivel ball fittings and ceiling canopy. Finish same as luminaire. C. Rod Hangers: 3/16-inch (5-mm) minimum diameter, cadmium-plated, threaded steel rod. D. Hook Hangers: Integrated assembly matched to luminaire, line voltage, and equipment with threaded attachment, cord, and locking-type plug. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Examine roughing-in for luminaire to verify actual locations of luminaire and electrical connections before fixture installation. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Comply with NECA 1. B. Install luminaires level, plumb, and square with ceilings and walls unless otherwise indicated. C. Install lamps in each luminaire. D. Supports: 1. Sized and rated for luminaire weight. 2. Able to maintain luminaire position after cleaning and relamping. 3. Provide support for luminaire without causing deflection of ceiling or wall. 4. Luminaire mounting devices shall be capable of supporting a horizontal force of 100 percent of luminaire weight and vertical force of 400 percent of luminaire weight. E. Flush-Mounted Luminaire Support: 1. Secured to outlet box. 2. Attached to ceiling structural members at four points equally spaced around circumference of luminaire. 3. Trim ring flush with finished surface. F. Wall-Mounted Luminaire Support: 1. Attached to structural members in walls. 2. Do not attach luminaires directly to gypsum board. G. Ceiling-Mounted Luminaire Support: 1. Ceiling mount with 2-5/32-inch- (4-mm-) diameter aircraft cable supports adjustable to 120 inches in length. 2. Ceiling mount with pendant mount: With 5/32-inch-diameter aircraft cable supports adjustable to 120 inches. 3. Ceiling mount with hook mount. H. Suspended Luminaire Support: 1. Pendants and Rods: Where longer than 48 inches, brace to limit swinging. 2. Stem-Mounted, Single-Unit Luminaires: Suspend with twin-stem hangers. Support with approved outlet box and accessories that hold stem and provide damping of luminaire oscillations. Support outlet box vertically to building structure using approved devices. 3. Continuous Rows of Luminaires: Use tubing or stem for wiring at one point and wire support for suspension for each unit length of luminaire chassis, including one at each end. 4. Do not use ceiling grid as support for pendant luminaires. Connect support wires or rods to building structure. I. Ceiling-Grid-Mounted Luminaires: 1. Secure to any required outlet box. 2. Use approved devices and support components to connect luminaire to building structure in a minimum of four locations, spaced near corners of luminaire. J. Comply with requirements in Section 26 05 19 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables" for wiring connections. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 LED LIGHTING MDE Project NO: 191124 265500 - 5 August 2019 3.3 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 26 05 53 "Identification for Electrical Systems." 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform the following tests and inspections: 1. Operational Test: After installing luminaires, switches, and accessories, and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test units to confirm proper operation. 2. Test for Emergency Lighting: Interrupt power supply to demonstrate proper operation. Verify transfer from normal power to battery power and retransfer to normal. B. Luminaire will be considered defective if it does not pass operation tests and inspections. C. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.5 ADJUSTING & CLEANING A. Prior to final acceptance, thoroughly clean all fixtures, inside and out, including plastics and glassware. Adjust all trim to properly fit adjacent surface, replace broken or damaged parts and lamps. Test all fixtures for proper operation. B. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting the direction of aim of luminaires to suit occupied conditions. Make up to 2 visits to Project during other-than-normal hours for this purpose. Some of this work may be required during hours of darkness. 1. During adjustment visits, inspect all luminaires. Replace lamps or luminaires that are defective. 2. Parts and supplies shall be manufacturer's authorized replacement parts and supplies. 3. Adjust the aim of luminaires in the presence of the Architect. END OF SECTION City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 TELEPHONE/DATA RACEWAY MDE Project NO: 191124 265564 - 1 August 2019 SECTION 265564 - TELEPHONE/DATA RACEWAY SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, apply to the Work specified in this Section. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. All other Sections of Division 26. B. All other Divisions of the Contract Documents. Refer to each Division's Specifications and Drawings for requirements. 1.3 SCOPE A. Provide all equipment materials, labor, supervision, and services necessary for or incidental to the installation of a completed telephone raceway system as shown or indicated on the drawings and/or as specified. B. Work Included: 1. Conduit 2. Outlet boxes 3. Pull and junction boxes 4. Above ceiling wire way (in office building) as shown on drawings C. SUBMITTALS: Provide submittals as required in section 26 00 10, “Submittal Process” 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. B. Without additional cost to the Owner, provide such other labor and materials as are required to complete the work of this Section in accordance to the requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, regardless of whether such materials and associated labor are called for elsewhere in these Contract Documents. C. When requested, provide the Architect with manufacturer's certificate that materials meet or exceed minimum requirements as specified. 1.5 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Conduit and back boxes to form empty raceway system. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 RACEWAYS A. Where telephone/data outlets are shown on walls, provide a single gang box with concealed 1” EMT to the closest accessible ceiling space. B. Where telephone/data outlets are shown in floor, provide a recessed floor box with 1” under slab conduit to accessible ceiling space. PART 3 - EXECUTION A. Place “TELEPHONE/DATA” label on pull and junction boxes. B. Provide a nylon pull cord in each conduit run. END OF SECTION City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEM MDE Project NO: 191124 283110 - 1 August 2019 SECTION 283110 - FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEMS PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to the Work in this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A This is a performance based specification. The Fire Alarm Contractor will be responsible for the complete system design. The Contractor shall submit shop drawings sealed by a Professional Engineer or a licensed Fire Alarm Planning Superintendent. B. Design, furnish and install all material and labor necessary to meet or exceed the performance criteria identified in this specification. C. All fire alarm device locations shall be coordinated with architectural finishes and millwork. D. Provide all design, equipment, material, labor, supervision and services necessary for or incidental to the installation of a complete and fully operating fire alarm and detection system meeting or exceeding all applicable codes and regulations governing the project and meeting the approval of all authorities having jurisdiction. E. Drawings are diagrammatic and may not show all required fire alarm devices. Provide devices, wiring, equipment, and accessories necessary to comply with requirements of this Specification and local and state building codes, NFPA, and ADA requirements. 1.3 REFERENCES A. This building occupancy classification is Group B. Equipment and installation shall comply with current provisions of following standards: 1. International Building Code 2009 Edition 2 Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) 3 Local and State Building Codes 4. Authorities Having Jurisdiction National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Standards: a. NFPA 70 National Electrical Code b. NFPA 72 National Fire Alarm Code c. NFPA 101 Life Safety Code 5. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., (UL), shall list system and components for use in fire protective signaling system under following standards as applicable: a. UL 864/UOJZ, APOU Control Units for Fire Protective Signaling Systems b. UL 268 Smoke Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling Systems c. UL 268A Smoke Detectors for Duct Applications d. UL 521 Heat Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling Systems e. UL 464 Audible Signaling Appliances f. UL 1638 Visual Signaling Appliances g. UL 346 Waterflow Indicators for Fire Protective Signaling Systems h. UL 1481 Power Supplies for Fire Protective Signaling Systems i. UL 1711 Amplifiers for Fire Protective Signaling Systems 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. B. Provide proof of Factory qualifications and Authorization and Factory Training for the products specified. These qualification credentials shall not be more than 2 years old, to ensure up-to-date product and application knowledge. Shall provide evidence of at least five (5) years experience as a company, in installation and servicing the specified fire alarm system of similar size and scope. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEM MDE Project NO: 191124 283110 - 2 August 2019 C. Supplier shall have sufficient stock on hand and have fully equipped service organization capable of guaranteeing response time within 8 hours of service calls, 24 hours per day, 7 days per week to service completed systems. D. Provide a copy of the certificate of successful completion of authorized Training Course given by manufacturer of Fire Alarm Equipment. E. When requested, provide the manufacturer’s certificate that materials meet or exceed minimum requirements as specified. F. Shall be a licensed fire alarm contractor with the state of Texas. G. Shall have a permanent full time NICET Level III fire alarm manager on staff. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submit 1 complete set of documentation. Document the type, size, rating, style, catalog number, manufacturer name, photographs, and/or catalog data sheets for items proposed to meet these specifications. Proposed equipment shall be subject to approval of Engineer and no equipment shall be ordered or installed without that approval. B. Submit complete set of Shop Drawings, one for each unit sub-assembly that requires that field wire be connected to it. Shop Drawings shall be reproduced electronically from Master Copy supplied in digital format. 1. Operating manuals for the fire alarm system. 2. Point-to-point diagrams of entire system. This shall include connected initiating devices, notification devices, powers supplies and addressable field modules. Drawings shall be provided in standard DXF format. Also provide vellum plots of each sheet. System-generated point-to-point diagrams are required to ensure accuracy. 3. Equipment cutsheets of all equipment proposed for installation. 4. Name, address, and telephone number of authorized factory representative and factory authorized servicing agent. 5. Drawings must reflect device address and programmed characteristics. 6. Battery calculations for all integral and remote power supplies. 7. Provide name and telephone number of full time NICET Level III fire alarm manager on duty responsible for this project. 8. Provide evidence of at least five (5) experience as a company, in installation and servicing the specified fire alarm systems of similar size and scope. 9. Provide a complete set of fire alarm and detection system design documents indicating all equipment required to meet all applicable codes, regulations, standards and requirements of the authorities having jurisdiction. Provide written certification that whether specifically identified in the shop drawing submittals or not, design, labor and materials shall be furnished and installed meeting or exceeding all applicable codes, regulations, standards and requirements of the authorities having jurisdiction. 10. Provide proof of training of key individuals installing personnel involved on project. D. Close out submittal: Provide three (3) copies of all documents as described in the submittal Division 01, in addition to all drawings and backup documentation identifying as built conditions. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Provided the local IDS installer contact (name, address and phone number). The installer shall respond on-site within eight (8) hours of trouble call after receipt of call to address where warranty is. B. Guarantee all labor, workmanship, and materials for the new and existing system for a period of one year from date of final acceptance. Should a failure occur within the first year of the system, provide all labor and materials necessary to restore the system to the condition require for testing and acceptance for this contract, at no additional cost. C. During the warranty period, additional detectors may be connected and their use entered in the database. New devices will be connected in the same manner as shown on the drawings and the existence of the new connections shall not void this warranty. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Life Safety/Fire Alarm System shall be microprocessor-based network system. Control Panel Assemblies and connected Field Appliances shall be both designed and manufactured by same company, and shall be tested and cross-listed as compatible to ensure fully functioning system is designed and installed. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEM MDE Project NO: 191124 283110 - 3 August 2019 B. Conform to this Specification in its entirety to ensure the installed and programmed Life Safety/Fire Alarm System will accommodate future requirements and operations. Any specified item or operational feature not specifically addressed prior to bid date shall be provided without exception. 2.2 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Equipment shall be new and unused. Components and systems shall be designed for uninterrupted duty. Equipment, materials, accessories, devices, and other facilities specified or indicated on Drawings shall be best suited for intended use and shall be provided by a single manufacturer. Where the equipment provided under this Specification interfaces with equipment provided by a different manufacturer, then that equipment shall be recognized as compatible by both manufacturers, and listed by UL. B. System installation and operations shall be verified by the manufacturer’s representative and a verification certificate presented upon completion. The manufacturer’s representative shall be responsible for on-site demonstration of operation of system and initial owner’s staff training. All equipment and components shall be installed in strict compliance with manufacturers’ recommendations. C. “As-Built” riser and wiring diagrams reflecting T-taps and each programmed device characteristic including detector type, base type, address, sensitivity setting, and wire configurations shall be provided to Engineer. D. It shall be possible for the contractor, using a Program/Service Tool or laptop PC to change personality/function of Devices to meet changes in building layout or environment. E. System shall be designed with the capability of expanding the entire system by adding 30% more detection and/or initiating devices without adding any additional equipment to the fire alarm control panel or power supplies. This shall include any additional equipment such as panels, expansion cards, SLC loops, etc. Provide a complete and fully operational system capable of having 30% additional detection and/or initiating devices above what shall be required by applicable codes, regulations, standards and the authority having jurisdiction. Provide written documentation specifically identifying system is designed with these provisions for expansion. 2.3 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. EST B. Notifier C. Silent Knight D. Other manufacturers must have written approval 21 days before bid time. 2.4 EQUIPMENT A. Life Safety/Fire Alarm System shall be designed specifically for fire-protection signaling system. B. Fire Alarm System shall include required hardware and system programming to provide complete and operational system, capable of providing protected premises with following functions and operations: 1. System operational software shall be stored in non-volatile memory. Control panel disassembly and replacement of electronic components of any kind shall not be required in order to upgrade operations of installed system to conform to future application code and operating system changes. 2. System response to any alarm condition must occur within 3 seconds, regardless of size and complexity of installed system. 3. System Common Control Functions shall be automatically routed to any node of system as function of time of day and date. 2.5 MAIN FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL A. The fire alarm control panel (FACP) shall have the following: 1. The FACP shall have a power supply as required and be capable of expansion to a maximum of 4.5 total amps via bus connected expander modules that supervise low battery, loss of AC and loss of communication. 2. The FACP shall have Day/Night sensitivity capabilities on detectors and be capable of supporting 250 analog addressable points and expandable to a maximum of 500 analog addressable points. This shall be accomplished via three signaling line circuits (SLC) capable of supporting a minimum of 125 devices each. The communications protocol on the SLC loop must be digital. 3. The FACP shall have a built in UL approved digital communicator. The communicator must allow local and remote up/downloading of system operating options, event history, and detector sensitivity data. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEM MDE Project NO: 191124 283110 - 4 August 2019 4. The FACP shall automatically test the smoke detectors in compliance with NFPA standards to ensure that they are within listed sensitivity parameters and be listed with Underwriters Laboratories for this purpose. 5. The FACP shall compensate for the accumulation of contaminants that affect detector sensitivity. The FACP shall have day/night sensitivity adjustments, maintenance alert feature (differentiated from trouble condition), detector sensitivity selections, auto- programming mode (Jumpstart) and the ability to upgrade the core operating software on site or over the telephone. 6. The main communication bus shall be capable of class A or class B configuration with a total Bus length of 3,000 feet between panels. 2.6 SYSTEM WIRING A. The Signaling Line Circuit and Data Communication Bus shall be wired with standard NEC 760 compliant wiring, no twisted, shielded or mid capacitance wiring is required for standard installations. All FACP screw terminals shall be capable of accepting 14-18 AWG wire. All system wiring shall be in accordance with the requirements of NFPA 70, the National Electrical Code (NEC) and also comply with article 760 of the NEC. 2.7 SLC LOOP DEVICES A. Devices supported must include intelligent, addressable photoelectric smoke detectors, intelligent addressable heat detectors, intelligent addressable input modules, relay output modules or intelligent addressable notification modules. There is to be no limit to the number of any particular device type up to the maximum of 250 that can be connected to the SLC. 2.8 ANALOG DETECTOR FUNCTIONS A. The products of combustion detectors must communicate analog values using a digital protocol to the control panel for the following functions: 1. Automatic compliance with NFPA 72 standards for detector sensitivity testing Drift compensation to assure detector is operating correctly 2. Maintenance alert when a detector nears the trouble condition Trouble alert when a detector is out of tolerance 3. Alert control panel of analog values that indicate fire. 2.9 SENSITIVITY FUNCTION A. The FACP shall have the ability to set three different sensitivity levels. A zone can be programmed to a day and a night sensitivity value. The day/night schedule shall allow for 16 holiday dates that are user programmable to allow the FACP to respond at the night level on those days. 2.10 SERIAL/PARALLEL INTERFACE A. The fire system shall be capable of supporting up to two serial / parallel interfaces that are capable of driving standard computer style printers. The interface shall be programmable as to what information is sent to it and shall include the ability to print out Detector Status, Event History and System Programming. 2.11 DIGITAL COMMUNICATOR A. The digital communicator must be an integral part of the control panel and be capable of reporting all zones of alarm, supervisory, and trouble as well as all system status information such as loss of AC, low battery, ground fault, loss of supervision to any remote devices with individual and distinct messages to a central station or remote station. The communicator must be capable of up/downloading of all fire alarm system programming options, Event history and Sensitivity compliance information to a PC on site or at a remote location. 2.12 DRY CONTACTS A. The FACP shall have two form “C” dry contacts, one will be dedicated to trouble conditions, the other one will be programmable for alarm, trouble, notification, pre-alarm, waterflow, manual pull, aux. 1 or aux. 2. The trouble contact shall be normal in an electrically energized state so that any total power loss (AC and Backup) will cause a trouble condition. In the event that the Microprocessor on the FACP fails the trouble contacts shall also indicate a trouble condition. 2.13 GROUND FAULT DETECTION A. A ground fault detection circuit, to detect grounds on all field wiring. The ground fault detector shall operate the general trouble devices as specified but shall not cause an alarm to be sounded. Ground fault will not interfere with the normal operation, such as alarm, or other trouble conditions. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEM MDE Project NO: 191124 283110 - 5 August 2019 2.14 OVERCURRENT PROTECTION A. All low voltage circuits will be protected by microprocessor controlled circuit breakers or have a self restoring circuit breaker for the following: smoke detector power, main power supply, indicating appliance circuits, battery standby power and auxiliary output. 2.15 TEST FUNCTIONS A. A “Lamp Test” mode shall be a standard feature of the fire alarm control panel and shall test all LED’s and the LCD display on the main panel and remote annunciators. B. A “Walk Test” mode shall be a standard feature of the fire alarm control panel. The walk test feature shall function so that each alarm input tested will operate the associated notification appliance for two seconds. The FACP will then automatically perform a reset and confirm normal device operation. The event memory shall contain the information on the point tested. The zone tripped, the zone restore and the individual points return too normal. C. A “Fire Drill” mode shall allow the manual testing of the fire alarm system notification circuits. The “Fire Drill” shall be capable of being controlled at the main annunciator, remote annunciators and via a remote contact input. D. A “Bypass Mode” shall allow for any point or nac circuit to be bypassed without effecting the operation of the total fire system. 2.16 REMOTE INPUT CAPABILITIES A. The control panel shall have provisions for supervised switch inputs for the purpose of Alarm reset and Alarm and trouble restore. 2.17 MOUNTING A. The system cabinet shall be grey and flush mounted. The cabinet door shall be easily removable to facilitate installation and service. 2.18 AUDIBLE SYSTEM TROUBLE SOUNDER A. An audible system trouble sounder shall be an integral part of the control unit. Provisions shall also be provided for an optional supervised remote trouble signal. 2.19 POWER SUPPLY AND CHARGER A. The entire system shall operate on 24 VDC, filtered switch mode power supply with the rated current available of 5 Amps. The FACP must have a battery charging circuit capable of complying with the following requirements: B. Twenty Four (24) hours of battery standby with five (5) minutes of alarm signaling at the end of this Twenty Four (24) hour period (as required per NFPA 72 remote station signaling requirements) using rechargeable batteries with automatic charger to maintain standby gel-cell batteries in a fully charged condition. C. The power supply shall comply with UL Standard 864 for power limiting. D. The FACP will indicate a trouble condition if there is a loss of AC power or if the batteries are missing or have insufficient capacity to support proper system operation in the event of AC failure. A “Battery Test” will be performed automatically every minute to check the integrity of the batteries. The test must disconnect the batteries from the charging circuit and place a load on the battery to verify the battery condition. In the event that it is necessary to provide additional power one or more 3-BPS Power Supply modules can be provided. 2.20 CONNECTIONS AND CIRCUITS A. Connections to the light and power service shall be on a dedicated branch circuit in accordance with the National Fire Alarm Code NFPA 72, National Electrical Code (NEC) NFPA 70, and the local authority having jurisdiction (AHJ). The circuit and connections shall be mechanically protected. A circuit disconnecting means shall be accessible only to authorized personnel and shall be clearly marked “FIRE ALARM CIRCUIT CONTROL”. 2.21 NOTIFICATION DEVICES A. The visible and audible/visible signal be listed by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. per UL. B. The visible signaling appliance shall maintain a minimum flash rate of 1Hz or greater regardless or power input voltage. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEM MDE Project NO: 191124 283110 - 6 August 2019 2.22 SMOKE DETECTORS A. Smoke detectors shall be ceiling mounted, intelligent, addressable photoelectric smoke detectors. The combination detector head and twist lock base shall be UL listed. B. The base shall permit direct interchange with the ionization smoke detector or the heat detector. The Smoke detector shall have a flashing status LED for visual supervision. When the detector is actuated, the flashing LED will latch on steady at full brilliance. The detector may be reset by actuating the control panel’s reset switch. The sensitivity of the detector shall be capable of being selected and measured by the control panel without the need for external test equipment. 2.23 HEAT DETECTORS A. Furnish and install intelligent, addressable heat detectors where indicated on drawings. The combination heat detector and twist lock base shall be UL listed compatible with the fire alarm control panel. The base shall permit direct interchange with the Ionization smoke detector and the photoelectric smoke detector. The base shall be appropriate twist lock base. The heat detector shall have a flashing status LED for visual supervision. When the detector is actuated, the flashing LED will latch on steady at full brilliance. The detector may be reset by actuating the control panel’s reset switch. Electronics of the unit shall be shielded to protect against false alarms from E.M.I. and R.F.I. 2.24 DUCT DETECTORS A. Duct Detectors shall be provided, installed and powered with remote test switches on the supply and return for each unit 2000CFM or larger. Addressable intelligent modules to monitor the duct detectors for required supervision are to be provided. 2.25 FIRE/SMOKE DAMPERS A. Fire/Smoke Damper shut down shall be achieved by an intelligent addressable control relay on each electrical circuit serving fire/smoke dampers. 2.26 WATER FLOW TAMPER SWITCHES A. Water Flow/Tamper switches are to be provided and installed by the sprinkler contractor. Addressable intelligent modules to monitor these switches for required supervision. 2.27 SYSTEM OPERATION A. When a device indicates any alarm condition the control panel must respond within 3 seconds. The General Alarm or Supervisory Alarm LED on the annunciator(s) should light and the LCD should prompt the user as to the number of current events. The alarm notification must be stored in event memory for later review. Event memory must be available at the main annunciator. B. When the alarmed device is restored to normal, the control panel shall be required to be manually reset to clear the alarm condition, except that the alarms may be silenced as programmed. C. An alarm shall be silenced by a code or Firefighter key at the main or remote annunciators. When silenced, this shall not prevent the resounding of subsequent events if another event should occur (subsequent alarm feature). When alarms are silenced the silenced LED on the control panel, and on any remote annunciators shall remain lit, until the alarmed device is returned to normal. D. When a device indicates a trouble condition, the control panel System Trouble LED should light and the LCD should prompt the user as to the number of current events. The trouble information must be stored in event memory for later review. Event memory must be available at the main and all remote annunciators. E. When the device in trouble is restored to normal, the control panel shall be automatically reset. The trouble restore information must be stored in event memory for later review. Event memory must be available at the main and all remote annunciators. A trouble shall be silenced by a code or Firefighter key at the main or remote annunciators. When silenced, this shall not prevent the resounding of subsequent events if another event should occur. F. Each SLC loop shall be electrically supervised for opens and ground faults in the circuit wiring, and shall be so arranged that a fault condition on any loop will not cause an alarm to sound. Additionally, every addressable device connected to the SLC will be supervised and individually identified if in a fault condition. The occurrence of any fault will light a trouble LED and sound the system trouble sounder, but will not interfere with the proper operation of any circuit which does not have a fault condition. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEM MDE Project NO: 191124 283110 - 7 August 2019 G. Each indicating appliance circuit shall be electrically supervised for opens, grounds and short circuit faults, on the circuit wiring, and shall be so arranged that a fault condition on any indicating appliance circuit or group of circuits will not cause an alarm to sound. The occurrence of any fault will light the trouble LED and sound the system trouble sounder, but will not interfere with the proper operation of any circuit which does not have a fault condition. H. Any alarm, trouble or supervisory signal shall also be communicated to the owner’s offsite central monitoring facility.2.28 SPARE SYSTEM COMPONENTS A. Provide 10% spare parts for the following components: 1. Smoke detectors 2. Duct smoke detectors 3. Heat Detectors 4. Horn/Strobe notification devices 5. Strobe only notification devices B. The spare system components shall be delivered to the Owner’s attic stock, as directed. PART 3. – EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION: A. System components shall be installed in accordance with the latest revisions of the appropriate NFPA pamphlets, the requirements contained herein, National Electrical Code, local and state regulations, the requirements of the fire department and other applicable authorities having jurisdiction (AHJ). B. All conduit, junction boxes, conduit supports and hangers shall be concealed in finished areas and may be exposed in unfinished areas. C. All wire on the fire alarm system shall be UL Listed as fire alarm protection signaling circuit cable per National Electrical Code, Articles 760. Wiring shall be installed in a conduit raceway system. Paint junction boxes red. Hand label as “FA” with black permanent marker. 3.2 WIRING METHODS A. Wiring methods shall be suitable for an inaccessible ceiling space. Reference article 370-29, NEC. 3.3 TEST A. Before the installation shall be considered completed and acceptable by the code authority, a test of the system shall be performed. Test of system shall require the activation of all detection and initiating devices. B. Where application of heat would destroy detector, it may be manually activated. C. The communication loops and the indicating appliance circuits shall be opened in at least two (2) locations per circuit to check for the presence of correct supervision circuitry. D. Leave the fire alarm system in proper working order, and, without additional expense to the owner, replace any defective materials or equipment provided under this contract within one year from the date of final acceptance by the awarding authority. E. Prior to final test the fire department and any other authority having jurisdiction must be notified in accordance with local requirements and any testing and/or final inspection shall be performed. Written approval from the authorities having jurisdiction shall be provided prior to final acceptance of system. F. The service of a competent, factory-trained engineer or technician authorized by the manufacturer of the fire alarm equipment shall be provided to technically supervise and participate during all of the adjustments and tests for the system. All testing shall be in accordance with NFPA 72, Chapter 7. G. Provide testing and written verification that owner’s central monitoring system is fully functional and accurately receiving alarm and status information from the system fire alarm control panel and the intrusion detection system. 3.4 FINAL INSPECTION A. At the final inspection, a factory-trained representative of the manufacturer of the major equipment shall demonstrate that the system functios properly in every respect. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEM MDE Project NO: 191124 283110 - 8 August 2019 3.5 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. The intent of this section is to require complete documentation of the FA System for the purpose of system operation and maintenance during and after the warranty period. It is intended that the operation and maintenance manuals be detailed in the coverage of the system to the extent they may be used as the sole guide to the troubleshooting, identification, and repair of defective parts. B. Provide six complete drawing books and maintenance and operation manuals on the completed system. These manuals shall include basic wiring diagrams, schematics, and functional details such that any component, wire, or piece of equipment in the system may be easily identified by going to the actual equipment and making reference to this manual. It is required that everything in the system be neatly labeled and easily identifiable. Every terminal, wire, component, or piece of equipment, relay, and other such items shall have a number or letter designation. All of these identification characteristics shall be included in the maintenance and operation manuals. C. Reference Section 26 0500 for additional requirements. 1. The maintenance manual requirement is in addition to shop drawing requirements. Maintenance manuals and drawing sets shall be complied after system fabrication and testing, and shall incorporate any changes made after shop drawing submittal. 2. Provide manufacturer’s standard literature, detailing all equipment included in the system. The maintenance manuals shall contain specifications, adjustment procedures, circuit schematics, component location diagrams, and replacement parts identification. All references to equipment not supplied on this project shall be deleted. D. All drawings shall be developed specifically for this project and shall be reduced to 11” X 17”, folded and bound with hard plastic covers. Provide component identification and cross reference on the drawings for the maintenance department to understand the function of each item (the block diagram), find the room where the FA device is mounted (contract document plans), find its location in the control panel (arrangement drawings), find how it is wired (wiring diagrams), and its detailed specifications (vendor data sheets), and how to repair it (spare part lists). Include the following drawings as a minimum: 1. Functional Block Diagram: Provide overall block diagrams showing the major interconnections between the new and existing subsystems. 2. Arrangement Drawings: Provide drawings showing the physical arrangement of all major system components. 3. Elevation drawings of all equipment panels showing the location of each component in the panel. Components in the racks shall be identified as in the functional block diagrams. 4. Wiring Diagrams: Provide wiring diagrams showing all new and existing field-installed inter-connecting wiring. Wire identification on the diagrams shall agree with the wire markers installed on the equipment. 3.6 TRAINING AND INSTRUCTION A. Provide FA system operation and administration/maintenance training for the Owner’s personnel. Training materials shall be provided to the Owner 30 days in advance of the training courses. Training sessions and intervals shall be as follows: 1. Manufacturer’s factory certification training shall be provided on site. This training shall be sufficient provision for the Owner’s technicians to be permitted to provide service to the system during the warranty period (when required) without voiding the conditions of the warranty. B. Instruction shall be provided as required for operating the system. Hands-on demonstrations of the operation of all system components shall be provided. C. Provide a typewritten "Sequence of Operation." END OF SECTION Denton Fire Station No. 8 EARTHWORK MJ Thomas Engineering, LLC. 310000-1 August 2019 SECTION 310000 EARTHWORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Excavating, filling, backfilling, grading, and compacting of earth at the site. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 003132 - Geotechnical Data 2. Section 014500 - Quality Control 3. Section 312513 - Erosion and Sedimentation Controls 4. Section 311400 - Site Preparation 5. Section 321823 - Trenching and Backfilling 6. Section 314133 - Trench Shielding 1.02 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): ASTM D 698-78 Tests Methods for Moisture-Density Relations of Soils and Soil-Aggregate Mixtures, Using 5.5-lb. Rammer and 12-in. Drop. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Samples: Submit in accordance with Section 013323 – Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples. Submit material analysis results of existing and imported (if required) topsoil from a testing laboratory indicating compliance with these specifications. Any topsoil delivered to the site which does not comply with the approved sample shall be re-tested at the Contractor’s expense and replaced. B. Test Reports: 1. Submit copies of test reports in accordance with Section 014500 - Quality Control. 2. Submit copies of test reports for select fill material. No select fill material, if required, shall be delivered to the site until after the tests have been made and test reports confirmed. 3. Compaction Tests: Submit copies of compaction test reports. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Laboratory Control: Select fill material and imported topsoil, if required, shall be inspected and tested by an independent testing laboratory. Testing laboratory shall make tests for the soil from the selected source to determine that it meets the specified requirements for select fill and imported topsoil. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Temporary Sheeting: Shore and sheet excavations to protect utilities and to prevent cave-in. Maintain sheeting secure until permanent construction is in place. Remove sheeting as excavations are backfilled. B. Drainage: Provide for adequate surface drainage during construction to keep the site free of surface water without creating a nuisance in adjacent areas and in accordance with the erosion control plan. Denton Fire Station No. 8 EARTHWORK MJ Thomas Engineering, LLC. 310000-2 August 2019 C. Pumping: Keep the excavations free of water at all times by pumping or other means. This shall be the responsibility of the Contractor regardless of the cause, source, or nature of the water. D. Protection: 1. Property: Protect adjoining property, including improvements outside the limits of the work. Protect walks, curbs, and paving from damage by heavy equipment and trucks. 2. Trees: Protect tops, trunks, and roots of trees on the site which are to remain. Box or fence trees vulnerable to damage during construction. Remove interfering branches with care and cover scars with tree paint. Do not permit fires, storage of materials or excavation within the branch spread of trees to remain. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 SOIL MATERIALS A. Topsoil: 1. Topsoil on the paving site areas shall be stripped, cleaned of grass, roots and debris to a depth of between 6" and stockpiled for later use. Provide soil amendments to existing topsoil per 2.0.1 A.2.B and C or import topsoil. 2. Import topsoil, as required. a. Contractor shall haul and place imported topsoil obtained from the off-site sources as necessary to construct the topsoil layer and various other details of the construction drawings. All costs related to such imported topsoil fill will be included in the contract price, and no additional or separate payment for imported fill will be due to Contractor. b. Topsoil shall be secured from an approved off-site location. It shall be: 1) Natural, fertile, friable agricultural soil, having characteristics of representative productive soils in the vicinity, and obtained from naturally well-drained areas. 2) Topsoil shall not be excessively acid or alkaline nor contain toxic substances. 3) Topsoil shall be without admixture of subsoil and shall be reasonably free from clay lumps, stone, stumps, roots, live plants, or similar substances one inch or more in diameter, debris, or other objects which might be a hindrance to planting operations. 4) Topsoil shall be free from Johnson grass (Sorgum halepense), nut grass (Cyperus rotundus), and objectionable weeds. c. The soil texture shall be classified as loam or sandy loam according to the “soil triangle” published by the United States Agriculture Department and the following Criteria: 1) Sand (2.0 to 0.05 mm dia.)(No. 10 sieve): Loam 25-50%; Sandy Loam 45- 85%. 2) Silt (0.05 to 0.002 mm dia.)(No. 270 sieve): Loam 30-50%; Sandy Loam less than 50%. 3) Clay (smaller than 0.002 mm dia.)(Hydrometer Analysis): Sandy Loam less than 50%. 4) Natural organic content: Not less than 1.5%. 5) pH of Soil: Not more than 7.6. 6) Soil texture shall be determined by utilizing processes as prescribed in ASTM D 422 using the No. 10 and No. 270 sieves and a hydrometer analysis. 3. Unsuitable Materials: Topsoil or unclassified fill will be declared as “unsuitable” by the Landscape Architect, Geotechnical Engineer or Civil Engineer if, in his opinion, any of the following conditions or matter and articles are present to a degree that is judged detrimental to the proposed use of the material: 1) Moisture. Denton Fire Station No. 8 EARTHWORK MJ Thomas Engineering, LLC. 310000-3 August 2019 2) Decayed or un-decayed vegetation. 3) Hardpan clay, heavy clay, or clay balls. 4) Rubbish. 5) Construction rubble. 6) Sand or gravel. 7) Rocks, cobbles, or boulders. 8) Cementitious matter. 9) Foreign matter of any kind. 10) Spoils from piers. 4. Unsuitable materials shall be disposed of as “waste” as specified in Sections 311400 and 311100. 5. Wet Material: If fill material is unsatisfactory for use as embankment solely because of high moisture content, the Architect may grant the Contractor permission to process the material to reduce the moisture content to a usable optimum condition. B. Unselected Earth Fill: Clean, sandy soil free of organic matter and refuse, roots, clay lumps and rocks larger than 2". C. Granular Fill: Clean gravel or crushed rock graded to produce a mixture passing 1-¾” sieve and retained on ¼” sieve. Granular fill for areas to be covered with membrane waterproofing shall be clean pea gravel graded no larger than ¾”. D. Free-Draining Fill: Coarse sand of sand gravel mixture with less than 12% passing a No. 200 sieve, and a Plasticity Index less than 4. E. Filter Fabric Protective Membrane: The geomembrane filter fabric shall consist of a minimum 4-mils thick polyethylene (impermeable) film with a layer of nonwoven needle-punched polyester or polypropylene fabric bonded to one side. Fabric-film-fabric laminate being furnished shall consist of fabric fused or heat-sealed or otherwise bonded film so as to form an integral geomembrane. Filter fabric shall be able to withstand normal handling and placement at material temperatures from 20ºF. To 145ºF. without endangering the serviceability of the material in the intended application. If the filter fabric evidences delamination, such delamination shall serve as grounds for rejection. Filter fabric shall be mildew, abrasion and puncture resistant and suitable for long term burial in the presence of water or moisture in the intended construction application. Product/manufacturer. Petromat MB: Phillips fibers Corp. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Remove grass, weeds, roots and other vegetation from areas to be excavated, filled and graded. Fill stump holes and like small excavations with suitable material placed in lifts and thoroughly tamped. B. Scarify the subgrade soil in place to a depth of 6 inches and compact to between 95 and 100 percent of Standard Density, at or above optimum moisture content, in accordance with ASTM D 698. C. Install filter fabric in prepared subgrade soil in strict compliance with manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations. Filter fabric joints at the end of each roll and on adjacent rolls shall be overlapped a minimum of 6". Before subsequent rolls of fabric are place, an application of sealant shall be placed along the edge and end of the in-place roll, which is to be overlapped. Sealant shall be applied at the rate of 35- 40 linear feet per gallon to develop an approximately 3-inch wide drool centered about 4" from the edge of the in-place fabric. Then within 5-15 minutes, depending upon the ambient temperature, the next roll of moisture barrier fabric shall be placed overlapping the in-place roll by 6". Immediately after placing the overlapping fabric, the overlap seam area shall be rolled with a heavy roller to force the asphalt into the overlapping fabric. 3.02 EXCAVATION A. General: Excavate to the lines, grades and sections shown on the drawings. Allow space for the construction of forms. Excavate as required regardless of the condition or type of material Denton Fire Station No. 8 EARTHWORK MJ Thomas Engineering, LLC. 310000-4 August 2019 encountered. 1. Cut areas accurately to the indicated cross-sections and grades. Take care to prevent excavation below the grades indicated. Any bottoms and slopes that are undercut shall be backfilled with earth fill and compacted. 2. Finish the excavating required for graded areas to a tolerance of 0.10 foot above or below the rough grade. 3. Remove underground obstructions except for piping and conduit which shall be handles as specified in Section 31 11 00. 3.03 WASTING A. Surplus excavated material not suitable or required for embankment fill and backfill shall be wasted off site in a legal matter. 3.04 FILL AND BACKFILL A. Filling: Construct compacted fills to the lines, grades and sections shown on the drawings. 1. Complete stripping and wasting operations in advance of fill construction. 2. Deposit and mix fill material in horizontal layers not more than 8" deep, loose measurement. Manipulate each layer until the material is uniformly mixed and pulverized. a. Fill material layers shall be reduced to not more than 4” deep for structure backfill compactors or small self-propelled compactors. 3. Fill material shall have a moisture content at or slightly above the optimum, to achieve specified compaction. If fill is too wet, dry by aeration to achieve desired moisture content. If fell is too dry, add water and mix in by blading and discing to achieve desired moisture content. 4. Exercise care to prevent movement or breakage or walls, trenches, and pipe during filling and compaction. Place fill near such items by means of light equipment and tamp with pneumatic or hand tampers. B. Backfilling: Construct compacted fill against and around concrete beams below finish grade. 1. Do not backfill until underground construction has been inspected, tested and approved, forms removed, and the excavations cleaned of trash and debris. 2. Do not backfill against beams until all of the permanent structural concrete supports and bracing members are in place or until adequate shoring has been erected to prevent displacement and deflection of the beams under horizontal load. Exercise care in the placing and compacting of backfill so as not to damage the structure in any way. 3. Bring backfill to required grades by depositing material in horizontal layers not more than 8" deep, loose measurement. a. Fill material layers shall be reduced to not more than 4” deep for structure backfill compactors or small self-propelled compactors. 3.05 COMPACTION A. Compact each layer of earth fill and backfill thoroughly and evenly until there is no evidence of further compaction and a solid and uniform density is secured. 1. Equipment for compacting shall be sheepsfoot and rubber tired rollers or other compactors capable of obtaining the required density. Compact the fill with power tampers and by hand in areas not accessible to rollers. 2. Compact each layer of fill to the density listed below as a function of the location. The Denton Fire Station No. 8 EARTHWORK MJ Thomas Engineering, LLC. 310000-5 August 2019 required density in each case is indicated as a percentage of the maximum dry unit weight determined using the standard compaction test ASTM D 698. 3. Compact fill to the density listed below at a moisture content per the geotechnical report. a. Material under paving 95 to 100%. b. Material under lawn areas 85 to 90%. c. Material adjacent to retaining walls 93 to 98%. 3.06 FINE GRADING A. All fine grading and corresponding construction shall be performed as specified herein, and the complete work shall conform to the required lines, grades, and cross sections of the plans. 1. The maximum allowable deviation from the required finished grades of a line or plane shall be a slope (gradient) of plus or minus 0.5% in a horizontal dimension of 8' maximum. This shall be field tested by using an 8' long straight edge. If the surface has a deviation of more than ¼” above or below the midpoint of the straight edge when its ends rest on high or low points, the finished grade will be unsatisfactory and shall be immediately corrected. B. Road and Parking Lot Subgrade: Fine grading of the concrete road and parking lot subgrade shall be performed after final mixing and compaction of the lime treated is satisfactorily performed. Fine grading may be executed with a combination of a light roller and road grader. See Specification Section 31 32 00. C. Concrete Walks: Fine grading of concrete walk subgrades shall be scarified to a 6" depth and recompacted to 95% of ASTM D 698 at a moisture content between - 1% and +4%. D. Athletic Fields (if shown on plans): Fine grading of the athletic fields shall be performed as a final step after placing imported topsoil and mixing of the soil amendments. 1. Topsoil shall first be placed and compacted to normal density, minimum 90% of Tex-113-E Density shall be graded to within 0.02 foot of finished grade. 2. Contractor shall provide to the Engineer a survey for grade verification at the following intervals: a. Top of native material. b. Top of rough grade. c. Finished grade. Elevations provided shall have an accuracy of 0.01’. 3. Fine grading shall be executed over all athletic field playing areas by the placement and use of final grade stakes or “blue tops” as directed on the grading plan. Final grade stakes shall be placed at intervals not to exceed 50' along the exact contour lines as dimensioned on the grading plan. The stakes will be driven to the exact even foot elevation of the contour and will then be painted a bright color on top or be marked with a brightly colored plastic attachment. 4. Fine grading will then be executed with any or all of the following machinery; road grader, tractor box blade, discing machinery, weighted spike harrow, and weighted drags. Bulldozer blades or front end loader buckets are not acceptable devices for fine grading operations. 5. The use of a watering truck to moisten dried and hardened areas may be necessary. 6. It is anticipated that some areas will be loosened and pulverized with discing machinery and will then be recompacted to normal density before fine grading. 7. Satisfactorily fine graded areas shall be true in plane, even in gradient (slope), uniform in surface texture, free of rocks greater than ½” in diameter, and of normal compaction. Areas of loose granular soil pockets interspersed with over-compacted soils are not acceptable. Fine graded areas shall promote complete surface drainage, be ready for turfgrass planting, and assure playability. E. Timing Denton Fire Station No. 8 EARTHWORK MJ Thomas Engineering, LLC. 310000-6 August 2019 1. Fine grading will not begin until all underground utilities are complete, in place, tested to be working properly, and properly backfilled. Fine grading should not be attempted until construction which involves heavy vehicles is complete or nearly complete. Such vehicles cause rutting and over-compaction. 2. After fine grading is accomplished, it shall be the contractor’s responsibility to protect all the fine graded areas from vehicular traffic or other disruptive activities. Damages to the fine graded surfaces will be restored to a satisfactory condition as prescribed herein until the job is finished and accepted. F. Site Grading: Shape and finish earthwork to bring the site to the finish grades and elevations shown on the drawings. 1. Establish grades by means of grade stakes placed at corners of units, at abrupt changes of grade, and elsewhere as may be required. 2. Rough grade for walks, paving, and site improvements to the subgrade elevations required. Soft and unstable material which will not readily compact when rolled or tamped shall be removed and the resulting depressions filled with stable material and re-compacted. 3. Finish grade to the finish contours and spot grades shown. Extend cuts and fills to feather out beyond the last finish contour or spot grade shown. Grade to uniform levels and slopes between points for which elevations are given, round off abrupt changes in elevation, and finish off smoothly. Finish grades shall slope away from the building in all directions to assure proper drainage, minimum of 2%. G. Grading Around Trees: Where grading is required within the branch spread of trees that are to remain, perform the work as follows: 1. When trenching occurs, the tree roots shall not be cut but the trench shall be tunneled under or around the roots by hand digging. 2. When the existing grade at a tree is below the new finished grade, and fill not exceeding 6" is required, clean washed gravel graded from 1" to 2" size shall be placed directly around the tree trunk. The gravel shall extend out from trunk on all sides a minimum of 18" and finish approximately 2" above the finished grade at the tree. Install gravel before earth fill is placed. 3. Trees in areas where the new finished grade is to be lowered shall have regrading work done by hand to elevation as indicated. Existing grades immediately surrounding the trunk shall not be altered except at the direction of the Architect. 3.07 PLACING TOPSOIL A. Prior to placing topsoil, scarify subgrade to a depth of 6". Following scarification, topsoil shall be spread in one lift. The in place depth of the topsoil at the pay field shall be 6”. Topsoil shall be compacted to the approximate density of undisturbed soil. Provide topsoil to comply with Section 2.01. If there is insufficient stockpiled topsoil from on-site sources to complete the work, bring in topsoil from off-site sources as needed (topsoil for athletic fields shall be imported). After topsoil has been placed, blade, roll lightly, and rake as required to comply with 3.08, B below. B. After placement of topsoil, Contractor shall eliminate all low or hollow places that would allow water to stand or pond during rainfall or during operation of lawn irrigation systems. The area shall be free of all natural debris and shall also be free of all clods and rocks which are ¾” in size or larger. 3.08 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Compaction Tests: Field density testing of the select fill material under the paving and at perimeter grade beam shall be performed by an Independent Testing Laboratory. 1. Testing laboratory shall make one in place density test for each 5,000 sq. ft. of area per lift, but in no case less than two tests, and one test per 100 linear feet of backfill area adjacent to Denton Fire Station No. 8 EARTHWORK MJ Thomas Engineering, LLC. 310000-7 August 2019 grade beams, to insure that the specified density is obtained. B. Compaction Tests: Field density testing of fill material shall be performed by an Independent Testing Laboratory. 1. Testing laboratory shall make one in place density test for each 5,000 sq. ft. of area per lift, but in no case less than two tests, and one test per 100 linear feet of backfill area adjacent to grade beams, to insure that the specified density is obtained. C. Provide “As Built” survey of all areas for verification of grades and acceptance by Engineer. Contractor shall provide a CAD drawing of the survey by a State of Texas Licensed Surveyor. Survey shots shall include point location, description, elevation, and shall be on the same coordinate plane as the original project. END OF SECTION Denton Fire Station No. 8 SOILS FOR EARTHWORK MJ Thomas Engineering, LLC. 310513-1 August 2019 SECTION 310513 SOILS FOR EARTHWORK PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED This section of the specifications describes the various classes of Earth Fill. All of the classes of Earth Fill contained in this specification may not be used on this project. The classes of Earth Fill used on this project are shown on the drawings or specified in other sections of the specifications. This specification section does not include specifications for placement and compaction of Earth Fill. Specifications for placement and compaction of Earth Fill are included in other sections of the specifications and/or shown on the drawings. 1.02 STANDARDS Soil materials shall be classified into the appropriate class of Earth Fill shown below according to ASTM D- 2487 “Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes” or other appropriate methods as designated by the Engineer. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS; CLASSIFICATIONS A. CLASS 1 EARTH FILL: Limited to clays and sandy clays classified as CH material with a liquid limit greater than or equal to 50, a plasticity index greater than or equal to 25, and a minimum of 60% passing the No. 200 sieve, which are free of organic materials. B. CLASS 2 EARTH FILL: Limited to clays and sandy clays classified as CH and CL materials with a coefficient of permeability less than or equal to 1.0 x 10 -7 cm/sec, a liquid limit greater than or equal to 30, a plasticity index greater than or equal to 15, and more than 50% passing the No. 200 sieve, which are free of organic materials. C. CLASS 3 EARTH FILL: Consist of any materials classified as CH, CL, SM, SP, SP-SM, SC, and GC, which have a minimum plasticity index of 4, which are free of organic materials. D. CLASS 4 EARTH FILL: Consist of materials which are classified as SP, SM, SC, CL, OR dual classifications thereof, which have a liquid limit less than or equal to 30 and a plasticity index of a minimum of 6 and a maximum of 15, which are free of organic materials and have a maximum particle size of 2 inches. E. CLASS 5 EARTH FILL: Consist of materials classified as SP or SP-SM which have a plasticity index less than or equal to 4 and a maximum of 12% passing the No. 200 sieve, which are free of organic materials. (Class 6 through Class 11 reserved) F. CLASS 12 EARTH FILL: Consist of soils suitable for topsoil which are relatively free of stones or other objectionable debris, which have sufficient humus content to readily support vegetative growth. The suitability of soils for topsoil shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer. END OF SECTION Denton Fire Station No. 8 AGGREGATES FOR EARTHWORK MJ Thomas Engineering, LLC. 310516-1 August 2019 SECTION 310516 AGGREGATES FOR EARTHWORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED This section of the specifications describes the various classes of Aggregate Fill. All of the classes of Aggregate Fill contained in this specification may not be used on this project. The classes of Aggregate Fill used on this project are shown on the drawings or specified in other sections of the specifications. This specification section does not include installation. Installation of Aggregate Fill is included in other sections of the specifications and/or on the drawings. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE CLASSIFICATION TESTING A. CONTRACTOR TESTING 1. Arrange and pay for the services of an independent testing laboratory to sample and test proposed Aggregate Fill materials. 2. Submit the test results to the Engineer and obtain approval prior to providing Aggregate Fill. B. OWNER TESTING The Owner shall arrange and pay for additional testing on the Aggregate Fill after delivery to the project site as determined necessary by the Engineer. C. CONTAMINATION CERTIFICATION 1. Obtain a written, notarized certification from the Supplier of each proposed Aggregate Fill source stating that to the best of the Supplier’s knowledge and belief there has never been contamination of the source with hazardous or toxic materials. 2. Submit these certifications to the Engineer prior to proceeding to furnish Aggregate Fill to the site. The lack of such certification on a potential Aggregate Fill source shall be cause for rejection of that source 1.03 STANDARDS Aggregate Fill shall be classified into the appropriate class listed below according to ASTM testing procedures as specified for the various classes. American Society for Testing Materials standards: ASTM C33 Specification for Concrete Aggregates ASTM C88 Test Method for soundness of Aggregates by Use of Sodium Sulfate or Magnesium Sulfate ASTM C125 Terminology Relating to Concrete and Concrete Aggregates ASTM C131 Test Method for Resistance to Degradation of Small-Size coarse Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in the Los Angeles Machine ASTM C535 Test Method for Resistance to Degradation of Large-Size coarse Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in the Los Angeles Machine ASTM D448 Classification for Standard sizes of Aggregate for Road and Bridge Construction PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS; CLASSIFICATIONS A. CLASS I AGGREGATE FILL: Consist of durable particles of crushed stone free of silt, clay, or other Denton Fire Station No. 8 AGGREGATES FOR EARTHWORK MJ Thomas Engineering, LLC. 310516-2 August 2019 unsuitable materials and have a percentage of wear of not more than 40% when tested in accordance with ASTM C131 or C535. When material is subjected to five (5) cycles of the sodium sulfate soundness test in accordance with ASTM C88, Sodium Sulfate Solution, the weighted percentage of loss shall not exceed 12%. The source of the material shall be approved by the Engineer and meet the following gradation in accordance with ASTM D448, size number 57: Sieve Size Square Opening Percent Passing 1-1/2" 100 1" 95 - 100 1/2" 25 - 60 No.4 0 - 10 No. 8 0 - 5 B. CLASS 2 AGGREGATE FILL: Consist of durable particles of crushed stone free of silt, clay, or other unsuitable materials and have a percentage of wear of not more than 40% when tested in accordance with ASTM Method C131 or C535. When material is subjected to five (5) cycles of the sodium sulfate soundness test in accordance with ASTM C88, Sodium Sulfate Solution, the weighted percentage of loss shall not exceed 12%. The source of the material shall be approved by the Engineer and meet the following gradation in accordance with ASTM D448, size number 67: Sieve Size Square Opening Percent Passing 1" 100 3/4" 90 - 100 3/8" 20 - 55 No.4 0 - 10 No.8 0 - 5 C. CLASS 3 AGGREGATE FILL: Consist of durable particles of crushed stone free of silt clay, or other unsuitable materials and have a percentage of wear of not more than 40% when tested in accordance with ASTM C131 or C535. When material is subjected to five (5) cycles of the sodium sulfate soundness test in accordance with ASTM C88, Sodium Sulfate Solution, the weighted percentage of loss shall not exceed 12%. The source of the material shall be approved by the Engineer and meet the following gradation in accordance with ASTM D448, size number 7: Sieve Size Square Opening Percent Passing 3/4" 100 1/2" 90 - 100 3/8" 40 - 70 No.4 0 - 15 No.8 0 - 5 D. CLASS 4 AGGREGATE FILL: Consist of durable particles of crushed stone free of silt, clay, or other unsuitable materials and have a percentage of wear of not more than 40% when tested in accordance with ASTM C131 or C535. When material is subjected to five (5) cycles of the sodium sulfate soundness test in accordance with ASTM Method C88, Sodium Sulfate Solution, the weighted percentage of loss shall not exceed 12%. The source of the material shall be approved by the Engineer and meet the following gradation in accordance with ASTM D448, size number 467: Sieve Size Square Opening Percent Passing 2" 100 1-1/2" 95 - 100 3/4" 35 - 70 3/8" 10 - 30 No. 4 0 - 5 Denton Fire Station No. 8 AGGREGATES FOR EARTHWORK MJ Thomas Engineering, LLC. 310516-3 August 2019 E. CLASS 5 AGGREGATE FILL: Consist of durable particles of crushed stone free of silt, clay, or other unsuitable materials and have a percentage of wear of not more than 40% when tested in accordance with ASTM C131 or C535. When material is subjected to five (5) cycles of the sodium sulfate soundness test in accordance with ASTM C88, Sodium Sulfate Solution, the weighted percentage of loss shall not exceed 12%. The source of the material shall be approved by the Engineer and meet the following gradation in accordance with ASTM D448, size number 357: Sieve Size Square Opening Percent Passing 2-1/2" 100 2" 95 - 100 1'' 35 – 70 1/2" 10 - 30 No. 4 0 - 5 F. CLASS 6 AGGREGATE FILL: Consist of durable particles of crushed stone free of silt, clay, or other unsuitable materials and have a percentage of wear of not more than 40% when tested in accordance with ASTM C131 or C535. When material is subjected to five (5) cycles of the sodium sulfate soundness test in accordance with ASTM C88, Sodium Sulfate Solution, the weighted percentage of loss shall not exceed 12%. The source of the material shall be approved by the Engineer and meet the following gradation in accordance with ASTM D448, size number 1: Sieve Size Square Opening Percent Passing 4" 100 3 - 1/2" 90 - 100 2 - 1/2" 25 - 60 1 - 1/2" 0 - 15 3/4" 0 - 5 G. CLASS 7 AGGREGATE FILL: Consist of durable particles of crushed stone free of silt, clay, or other unsuitable materials and shall have a percentage of wear of not more than 40% when tested in accordance with ASTM C131 or C535. When material is subjected to five (5) cycles of the sodium sulfate soundness test in accordance with ASTM C88, Sodium Sulfate Solution, the weighted percentage of loss shall not exceed 12%. The source of the material shall be approved by the Engineer and meet the following gradation in accordance with ASTM D448, size number 6: Sieve Size Square Opening Percent Passing 1" 100 3/4" 90 - 100 1/2" 20 - 55 3/8" 0 - 15 No.4 0 - 5 H. CLASS & AGGREGATE FILL: Consist of durable particles of crushed stone free of silt, clay, or other unsuitable materials and shall have a percentage of wear of not more than 40% when tested in accordance with ASTM C131 or C535. When material is subjected to five (5) cycles of the sodium sulfate soundness test in accordance with ASTM C88, Sodium Sulfate Solution, the weighted percentage of loss shall not exceed 12%. The source of the material shall be approved by the Engineer and meet the following gradation in accordance with ASTM D448, size number 56: Sieve Size Square Opening Percent Passing 1-1/2" 100 1" 90 - 100 3/4" 40 - 85 1/2" 10 - 40 3/8" 0 - 15 No. 4 0 - 5 Denton Fire Station No. 8 AGGREGATES FOR EARTHWORK MJ Thomas Engineering, LLC. 310516-4 August 2019 I. CLASS 9 AGGREGATE FILL: Consist of washed and screened gravel and natural sands or sands manufactured by crushing stones complying with the requirements of ASTM C33, "Standard Specifications for Concrete Aggregates", except that the gradation shall be as follows: Sieve Size Square Opening Percent Passing 1/2" 100 3/8" 95 - 100 No. 4 80 - 95 No. 8 65 – 85 No. 16 50 – 75 No. 30 25 – 60 No. 50 10 – 30 No. 100 0 - 10 Class 9 Aggregate Fill shall have not more than 45% passing any sieve and retained on the next consecutive sieve of those shown above, and its fineness modulus, as defined in ASTM C125, shall be not less than 2.3 nor more than 3.1. J. CLASS 10 AGGREGATE FILL: Consist of washed and screened natural sands or sands manufactured by crushing stones complying with the requirements and tests of “Standard Specifications for Concrete Aggregates”, ASTM C33. The gradation as included in ASTM C33 is as follows: Sieve Size Square Opening Percent Passing 3/8” 100 No. 4 95-100 No. 8 80-100 No. 16 50-85 No. 30 25-60 No. 50 10-30 No. 100 2-10 Class 10 Aggregate Fill shall have not more than 45% passing any sieve and retained on the next consecutive sieve of those shown above, and its fineness modulus, as defined in ASTM C125, shall be not less than 2.3 nor more than 3.1. K. CLASS 11 AGGREGATE FILL: Consist of durable particles of crushed stone free of silt, clay, or other unsuitable material and have a percentage of wear of not more than 40% when tested in accordance with ASTM C131 or C535. When material is subjected to five (5) cycles of the sodium sulfate soundness test in accordance with ASTM C88, Sodium Sulfate Solution, the weighted percentage of loss shall not exceed 12%. The source of the material shall be approved by the Engineer and meet the following gradation: Sieve Size Square Opening Percent Passing 1-3/4" 100 7/8" 65 - 90 3/8" 50 - 70 No.4 35 - 55 No.40 15 - 30 No.100 0 - 12 (Wet Sieve Method) L. CLASS 12 AGGREGATE FILL: Consist of durable particles of crushed stone free of silt, clay, or other unsuitable material and have a percentage of wear of not more than 40% when tested in accordance with ASTM C131 or C535. When material is subjected to five (5) cycles of the sodium sulfate soundness test in accordance with ASTM C88, Sodium Sulfate Solution, the weighted percentage of loss shall not exceed 12%. The source of the material shall be approved by the Engineer and meet the following gradation: Sieve Size Square Opening Percent Passing 1-1/2” 100 1" 85 - 100 3/4" 60 - 95 Denton Fire Station No. 8 AGGREGATES FOR EARTHWORK MJ Thomas Engineering, LLC. 310516-5 August 2019 3/8" 50 - 80 No.4 40 - 65 No.16 20 - 40 No.100 0 - 12 (Wet Sieve Method) M. CLASS 13 AGGREGATE FILL: Consist of durable particles of crushed stone free of silt, clay, or other unsuitable material and have a percentage of wear of not more than 40% when tested in accordance with ASTM C131 or C535. When material is subjected to five (5) cycles of the sodium sulfate soundness test in accordance with ASTM C88, Sodium Sulfate Solution, the weighted percentage of loss shall not exceed 12%. The source of the material shall be approved by the Engineer and shall meet the following gradation: Sieve Size Square Opening Percent Passing 1-3/4" 100 7/8" 65 - 90 3/8" 50 - 70 No. 4 35 - 55 No. 40 15 - 30 No. 100 0 - 3 (Wet Sieve Method) N. CLASS 14 AGGREGATE FILL. Consist of durable particles of crushed stone free of silt, clay, or other unsuitable material and have a percentage of wear of not more than 40% when tested in accordance with ASTM C131 or C535. When material is subjected to five (5) cycles of the sodium sulfate soundness test in accordance with ASTM C88, Sodium Sulfate Solution, the weighted percentage of loss shall not exceed 12%. The source of the material shall be approved by the Engineer and meet the following gradation: Sieve Size Square Opening Percent Passing 1-1/2" 100 1" 85 - 100 3/4" 60 - 95 3/8" 50 - 80 No.4 40 - 65 No. 16 20 - 40 No.100 0 - 3 (Wet Sieve Method) O. CLASS 15 AGGREGATE FILL. Consist of durable particles of silica sand, washed clean chemically inert, and packaged by the Supplier. The material shall meet applicable regulatory requirements for monitor well filter pack. The source of the material shall be approved by the Engineer and shall meet the following gradation requirements. Sieve Size Square Opening Percent Passing No.20 98 - 100 No.40 0 - 2 END OF SECTION Denton Fire Station No. 8 CLEARING AND GRUBBING MJ Thomas Engineering, LLC. 311100-1 August 2019 SECTION 31 11 00 CLEARING AND GRUBBING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED Furnish labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary to perform operations in connection with clearing, grubbing, and disposal of cleared and grubbed materials. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE; DEFINITIONS A. CLEARING: Clearing is defined as the removal of trees, shrubs, bushes, and other organic matter at or above original ground level. B. GRUBBING: Grubbing is defined as the removal of stumps, roots, boards, logs, and other organic matter found at or above ground level. PART 2 - PRODUCTS [Not Used] PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Mark areas to be cleared and grubbed prior to commencing clearing operations. Engineer shall approve clearing and grubbing limits prior to commencement of clearing operations. B. Trees and shrubs outside of the clearing limits, which are within 10' of the clearing limits, shall be clearly marked to avoid damage during clearing and grubbing operations. C. Remove trees and brush outside the clearing limits, but within the immediate vicinity of the work, upon receipt of approval by the Engineer, when the trees or brush interfere with or retard the progress of construction operations. D. Clearly mark trees and shrubs within the clearing limits, which are to remain, and protect the trees and shrubs from damage during the clearing and grubbing operations. E. The clearing limits shall not extend beyond the project limits. F. Establish the clearing limits as follows: 1. Embankments plus 10' beyond the top of the excavation. 2. Excavations plus 5' beyond the top of the excavation. 3. Concrete structures plus 10' beyond the edge of the footing. 4. New roadways and new parking areas plus 5' beyond the edge of pavement. 5. Retaining walls plus 10' beyond the edge of the footing. 6. Underground utility trench top width plus 8'. G. Establish the grubbing as follows: 1. Embankments plus 2' beyond the toe of the embankment. 2. Concrete structures plus 2' beyond the edge of the footing. 3. New roadways and new parking areas plus 1' beyond the edge of pavement. 4. Retaining walls plus 2' beyond the edge of the footing. Denton Fire Station No. 8 CLEARING AND GRUBBING MJ Thomas Engineering, LLC. 311100-2 August 2019 3.02 INSTALLATION A. CLEARING Clearing shall consist of the felling, cutting up, and the satisfactory disposal of trees and other vegetation, together with the down timber, snags, brush, rubbish, fences, and debris occurring within the area to be cleared. B. GRUBBING 1. Grubbing shall consist of the removal and disposal of stumps and roots larger than 1" in diameter. 2. Extend grubbing to the depth indicated below: In the case of multiple construction items, the greater depth shall apply. a) Footings - 18" below the bottom of the footing. b) Walks - 12" below the bottom of the walk. c) Roads and Taxiways - 18" below the bottom of the subgrade. d) Parking Areas - 12" below the bottom of the subgrade. e) Runways - 24" below the bottom of the subgrade. f) Embankments - 24" below existing ground. g) Concrete Structures - 18" below the bottom of the concrete. h) Retaining Walls - 18" below the bottom of the footing. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL BURNING NOT PERMITTED Completely remove timber, logs, roots, brush, rotten wood, and other refuse from the Owner’s property. Disposal of materials in streams shall not be permitted and no materials shall be piled in stream channels or in areas where it might be washed away by floods. Timber within the area to be cleared shall become the property of the Contractor, and the Contractor may cut, trim, hew, saw, or otherwise dress felled timber within the limits of the Owner’s property, provided timber and waster material is disposed of in a satisfactory manner. Materials shall be removed from the site daily, unless permission is granted by the Engineer to store the materials for longer periods. END OF SECTION Denton Fire Station No. 8 SITE PREPARATION MJ Thomas Engineering, LLC. 311400-1 August 2019 SECTION 311400 SITE PREPARATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: Clearing the site of vegetation, site improvements and obstructions to make way for new work. 1.02 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Existing Conditions: Contractor shall visit the site and verify the nature and extent of clearing work required. B. Protection: Contractor shall be responsible for the protection of adjoining property and improvements outside the limits of the work. Protect paving from damage by heavy equipment and trucks. Take precautions to prevent injury to trees which are to remain. PART 2 - PRODUCTS [Not used] PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PERFORMANCE A. Clearing: 1. Remove trees, shrubs and other vegetation from within the area of the site where shown on the drawings. Grub out roots to a depth of at least 18 inches below natural grade. 2. Dig out and remove buried obstructions to a depth of 24" below natural grade or 24" below the intended excavation elevation, whichever is lower. 3. Unless otherwise specified on the drawings, trees with calipers greater than 3" shall not be cleared (removed). B. Pavement Removal Bituminous and concrete pavements shall be removed to neatly sawed edges. Saw cuts shall be made full depth. If a saw cut in concrete pavement falls within 3' of an existing score joint, construction joint, saw joint, cold join, expansion joint, or edge, the concrete shall be removed to that joint or edge. All saw cuts shall be parallel and/or perpendicular to the line of existing pavement. If an edge of a cut is damaged subsequent to saw cutting, the concrete shall again be sawed to a neat, straight line for the purpose of removing the damaged area. C. Disposal: 1. Clean up and remove from the site existing stumps, logs, broken paving rubble, and trash. 2. Clean up and remove from the site the stumps, logs, broken paving, rubble and debris resulting from the clearing and grubbing operations. 3. Material to be wasted shall be legally disposed of off-site. 4. Burning of combustible materials on the site will not be permitted. 5. Remove and dispose of excess soil off site in a legal manner. No extra pay. 3.02 BACKFILLING A. All holes, cavities, and depressions in the ground caused by site preparation operations will be Denton Fire Station No. 8 SITE PREPARATION MJ Thomas Engineering, LLC. 311400-2 August 2019 backfilled and tamped to normal compaction and will be graded to prevent ponding of water and to promote drainage. In areas that are to be immediately excavated, the Architect/Engineer may permit holes, etc., to remain open. 3.03 STORM WATER MANAGEMENT PRACTICES A. During the progress of the work, the contractor shall maintain existing storm water erosion and silt control measures in place at the site and shall provide additional erosion control barriers, silt fences, and other techniques in accordance with best management practices. Refer to Section 312300 for additional requirements and land disturbance permit requirements. END OF SECTION Denton Fire Station No. 8 TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING MJ Thomas Engineering, LLC. 312333-1 August 2019 SECTION 312333 TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED Furnish labor, materials, equipments and incidentals necessary to perform operations in trenching, pipe bedding, backfilling, clearing, grubbing and site preparation, handling, storage, transportation and disposal of excavated material; pumping and dewatering, preparation of subgrades, protection of adjacent property; fills, grading; and other appurtenant work. Trenching, backfilling, and pipe embedment procedures shall be in full compliance with Section 314133, Trench Shielding. Earth removed from excavations and which is not required for backfill shall be removed from the site by the Contractor at his own expense, unless arrangements arc made with the Owner through his representative to allow disposal on site. If permitted, the Contractor shall dump and spread excess earth in a manner agreed upon by the Contractor and the Owner Excavation, other than trench excavation and embankment fills are not part of this specification section 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE CLASSIFICATION A. Excavations shall include material of whatever nature encountered, including but not limited to clays, sands, gravels, conglomeritic boulders, weathered clay shales, rock, debris and abandoned existing structures. Excavation and trenching shall include the removal and subsequent handling of materials excavated or otherwise handled in the performance of the work. B. Bidders must satisfy themselves as to the actual existing subsurface conditions prior to the submittal of a proposal to complete the proposed work. C. Trench excavation shall consist of excavation to the lines and grades indicated, required for installation of the pipe, pipe bedding, backfill, and to accommodate trench safety systems 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be in accordance with SECTION 013323 – Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples and SECTION 012300 – Alternates, Submittals and shall include: 1. Sieve analysis on embedment materials. 2. Test results indicating soil resistivity for embedment material used on metal pipe. 1.04 STANDARDS The following publications, referred to hereafter by basic designation only, form a part of this specification to the extent indicated by the references thereto: ASTM D-48 “Standard Classification for Sizes of Aggregate for Road and Bridge Construction" ASTM D-698 "Moisture-Density Relationship of Soils and Soil Aggregate Mixtures, Using 5.5 -Ib Rammer and 12 Inch Drop" ASTM D-1556 "Density of Soil in Place by the Sand Cone Method" ASTM D-2487 "Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes" ASTM D-2922 "Density of Soil and Soil - Aggregate In-Place by Nuclear Methods" ASTM D-3017 "Moisture Content of Soil and Soil - Aggregate In-Place by Nuclear Methods" ASTM D-4253 "Test Methods for Maximum Index Density of Soils Using a Vibratory Table" ASTM D-4254 "Test Methods for Minimum Index Density of Soils and Calculations of Relative Density" Any other testing required by these specifications and not specifically referenced to a standard shall be performed under ASTM or other appropriate standards as designated by the Engineer. Reference herein or on the drawings to soil classifications shall be understood to be according to ASTM D-2487, "Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes" unless indicated otherwise. Denton Fire Station No. 8 TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING MJ Thomas Engineering, LLC. 312333-2 August 2019 1.05 DELIVERY AND STORAGE Excavated materials to be used for backfill may be deposited in stockpiles at points convenient for re-handling the material during the backfilling process. The location of stockpiles shall be within the limits of construction easements or public right-of-way. The location of stockpiles is subject to the approval of the Owner or the Owner's representative. Keep drainage channels clear of stockpiled materials. 1.06 JOB CONDITIONS Place no embedment or backfill material during freezing weather or upon frozen subgrades or previously placed frozen embedment or backfill materials. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. CONCRETE FOR BACKFILL, BLOCKING, CRADLING AND ENCASEMENT. Unless other strength requirements arc designated, concrete used shall be 3,500 psi as specified in Section 033000, CAST- IN-PLACE CONCRETE. B. CLASS 1 EARTH FILL: Limited to clays and sandy clays classified as CH material with a liquid limit greater than or equal to 50, a plasticity index greater than or equal to 25, and a minimum of 60% passing the No. 200 sieve, which arc free of organic materials C. CLASS 3 EARTH FILL- Consist of any materials classified as CH, CL, SM, SP, SP-SM, SC, and GC, which have a minimum plasticity index of 4, which are free of organic materials. D. CLASS 12 EARTH FILL: Consist of soils suitable for topsoil which are relatively free of stones or other objectionable debris, which have sufficient humus content to readily support vegetative growth. The suitability of soils for topsoil shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer. E. CLASS 2 AGGREGATE FILL: [For Reinforced Concrete or Concrete Cylinder Pipe] Consist of durable particles of crushed stone free of silt, clay, or other unsuitable materials and have a percentage of wear of not more than 40% when tested in accordance with ASTM Method C-13 1 or C-535. When material is subjected to five (5) cycles of the sodium sulfate soundness test in accordance with ASTM C-88, Sodium Sulfate Solution, the weighted percentage of loss shall not exceed 12%. The source of the material shall be approved by the Engineer and meet the following gradation in accordance with ASTM D-448, size number 67: Sieve Size Square Opening Percent Passing 1" 100 3/4" 90 - 100 3/8" 20 - 55 No. 4 0 - 10 No. 8 0 - 5 F. CLASS 3 AGGREGATE FILL: [For Iron, Cast Iron, or Corrugated Metal Pipe] Consist of durable particles of crushed stone free of silt, clay, or other unsuitable materials and have a percentage of wear of not more than 40% when tested in accordance with ASTM C-131 or C-535. When material is subjected to five (5) cycles of the sodium sulfate soundness test in accordance with ASTM C-88, Sodium Sulfate Solution, the weighted percentage of loss shall not exceed 12%. The source of the material shall be approved by the Engineer and meet the following gradation in accordance with ASTM D-448, size number 7: Sieve Size Square Opening Percent Passing 3/4" 100 ½" 90 - 100 3/8" 40 - 70 No. 4 0 - 15 No. 8 0 - 5 G. CLASS 10 AGGREGATE FILL: or Iron-reinforced Concrete, Vitrified Clay, PVC, Fiberglass, or Asbestos Cement Pipe] Consist of washed and screened natural sands or sands manufactured by Denton Fire Station No. 8 TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING MJ Thomas Engineering, LLC. 312333-3 August 2019 crushing stones complying with the requirements and tests of "Standard Specifications for Concrete Aggregates", ASTM C-33. The gradation as included in ASTM C-33 is as follows: Sieve Size Square Opening Percent Passing 8" 00 No. 4 95 - 100 No .8 80 - 100 No. 16 50 - 85 No. 30 25 - 60 No. 50 10-30 No. 100 2-10 Class 10 Aggregate Fill shall have not more than 45°/O passing any sieve and retained on the next consecutive sieve of those shown above, and its fineness modulus, as defined in ASTM C-125, shall be not less than 2.3 nor more than 3.1. H. CEMENT: Type I Portland Cement 2.02 MIXES; SAND-CEMENT BACKFILL [OR EMBEDMENT] A. A minimum sand and cement mixture of 27 parts sand and 2 parts cement will be required. Fine Sand 1 Cubic Yard Cement 1 Bag (Minimum) Water Optimum Moisture B. Sand shall be free of any cohesive material and shall meet the following gradation and plasticity index requirements: Sieve Size Percent Passing 1" 100 ½" 95 - 100 No. 40 80 - 100 Plasticity Index 10 Maximum Liquid Limit 25 or less 2.03 FABRICATIONS [Not Used] 2.04 MANUFACTURED PRODUCTS [Not Used] PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. SITE 1. Clear sites of logs, trees, roots, brush, tree trimmings and other objectionable materials and debris which are to be occupied by pipe trenches, and grub stumps. Designate material not salvaged for reuse as surface material as spoiled and dispose of material in accordance with Paragraph E - DISPOSAL OF SPOIL MATERIAL, of this section. 2. Do not remove trees outside of the required working area unless their removal is authorized in writing by the Engineer and with the approval of the local governing authority. Adequately protect the trees left standing from permanent damage by construction operations. Standing trees may be trimmed where necessary to facilitate construction, but only with written authorization from the Engineer. B. DEWATERING 1. Provide and maintain adequate dewatering equipment to remove and dispose of surface and ground water entering the excavations, trenches, or other parts of the work. Keep each Denton Fire Station No. 8 TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING MJ Thomas Engineering, LLC. 312333-4 August 2019 excavation dry during subgrade preparation and continually thereafter until the proposed pipe is installed. Maintain the proper procedures necessary to protect against damage to the proposed work from hydrostatic pressure, flotation, or other water related causes. 2. Dewater excavations which extend down to or below ground water elevation by lowering and keeping the ground water level a minimum of 2-feet below the bottom of the excavation. 3. Divert surface water or otherwise prevent water from entering excavated areas to the fullest extent possible without causing damage to adjacent property. 4. Provide and maintain any piping or conduit necessary to facilitate drainage. Do not alter area drainage patterns to the extent that adjacent property and landowners become threatened with localized flooding and/or water damage. Should such a situation occur, the Contractor shall be responsible for repairing the damage at no additional cost to the Owner. C. PROTECTION OF EXISTING STRUCTURES AND UTILITIES 1. Prior to the start of construction, communicate with the local representatives of utilities companies, including but limited to oil, gas, telephone, and communications companies, as well as, local water and sewer utilities operating in the location of the proposed construction area. Seek the utility companies assistance in locating existing facilities to avoid conflicts during construction. The location, number, depth, and owner of utilities indicated are for information purposes only, and all utilities and structures may not be shown or may not be in the location shown. 2. Where construction endangers adjacent structures, utilities, embankments and/or roadways, the Contractor shall, at his own expense, carefully support and protect such structures so that no damage occurs throughout the construction process. In case damage should occur, the Contractor shall be responsible for restoring the damaged structure to a condition acceptable to the Owner of that structure and shall bear all cost of such reparations. 3. Repair or replace damaged street surfaces, driveways, sidewalks, curbs, gutters, fences, drainage structures, or other such facilities to the satisfaction of the Owner. Structures shall be returned to a condition equal to or better than the original condition and of same or better material and quality. D. BLASTING Blasting shall not be allowed in any instance. E. DISPOSAL OF SPOIL MATERIAL 1. Suitable material from excavations which meets the requirements for pipe backfill material as indicated, except stripping excavation, may be reused. Designate the remaining excavated materials as spoiled material and dispose of material off the site in accordance with all applicable laws, ordinances, and codes. Contractor shall be responsible for the storage, transportation, and deposition of spoiled material and shall be responsible for acquiring the necessary permits, and the payment of fees and duties at no additional cost to the Owner. 2. No burning of materials shall be permitted on the site. 3.02 TRENCH EXCAVATION A. GENERAL The trenches shall be excavated to the alignment and depth indicated or as necessary for the proper installation of the pipe and appurtenances. Brace and dewater the trench if necessary so that the workmen may work therein safely and efficiently. Any specific requirement listed in Part 3.00 EXECUTION may be modified as necessary to meet OSHA requirements. However, if trench widths are wider than indicated, the Contractor shall be responsible for determining the proper class of embedment and piping and the installation. Denton Fire Station No. 8 TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING MJ Thomas Engineering, LLC. 312333-5 August 2019 B. TRENCH WIDTH The trench widths shall be as shown on the drawings. C. PIPE FOUNDATION SUBGRADE 1. Excavate the trench to an even grade to permit the installation of the pipe so that the full length of the pipe barrel is supported on the proper depth of bedding material. The entire foundation subgrade area in the bottom of the excavations shall be firm, stable material, and the material shall not be disturbed below required grade except as described in this specification. Where the character of the subgrade material is such that proper subgrade cannot be obtained at the elevation indicated, deepen the excavation to a satisfactory subgrade material. 2. Remove the material until a firm, stable, and uniform bearing is reached and the subgrade brought back to the required grade with the specified bedding material compacted in place or with lean concrete material. The expense of replacing any unsatisfactory subgrade shall be borne by the Contractor. D. CORRECTING FAULTY GRADE Should any part of the trench be excavated below required grade, correct the trench with bedding material, thoroughly compacted, or with lean concrete, at no additional compensation to the Contractor. E. CARE OF SURFACE MATERIAL FOR REUSE If local conditions permit reuse, keep surface material suitable for reuse separate from the general excavation material. F. TRENCHING METHODS The use of any suitable trench digging machinery is permitted except in places where such operations may cause damage, above or below ground, in which case, employ hand methods. G. PIPE CLEARANCE IN ROCK Remove ledge rock, rock fragments, shale, or other rock to provide proper clearance for bedding materials. Provide adequate clearance for properly jointing pipe laid in rock trenches at bell holes. 3.03 BACKFILL A. BEDDING WITHING PIPE ZONE 1. CONCRETE CRADLE, ENCASEMENT OR CONCRETE ARCH Where indicated, install in the pipe in concrete cradle, encasement, or concrete arch. Take precautions to prevent pipe movement or deflection during construction. Where pipes are placed below structures, completely encase pipes in 1,500 psi concrete, and extend up to bottom of structure. 2. CONCRETE BLOCKING Place blocking to rest against firm undisturbed trench walls. The supporting area for each block shall be at least as great as that indicated and shall be sufficient to withstand the thrust, including water hammer, which may develop. Each block shall rest on a firm undisturbed foundation of trench sides and bottom. B. AGGREGATE FILL BEDDING 1. After the trench has been cut to the depths indicated, bring up the bedding layer to a point slightly above grade in maximum 4" lifts and uniformly compact to the density indicated. Form bell holes and scoop out a trough to grade so that the pipe is uniformly supported by Denton Fire Station No. 8 TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING MJ Thomas Engineering, LLC. 312333-6 August 2019 the embedment material. Lay and joint the pipe. Bring up the embedment material in maximum 4" lifts on either side of the pipe to the elevation above the pipe shown on the plans. Uniformly compact the pipe as indicated. 2. After moisture is gone from the embedment material, place and compact the remaining backfill by tampering or other appropriate methods. Water jetting shall not be permitted. C. COMPACTION REQUIREMENTS 1. Compact earth fill an adhesive aggregate fill in maximum 4" lifts with pneumatic rollers or power hand tampers and make a minimum of eight (8) passes. 2. Compact cohesionless aggregate fill in maximum 4" lifts with vibratory rollers or vibratory plate power hand compactors and make a minimum of eight (8) passes. 3. The acceptability of the compaction equipment shall be based upon the results of a test section. 4. Compact earth fill and cohesive aggregate fill to a minimum of 95% of maximum dry density as determined by ASTM D-698, Standard Proctor. 5. Compact earth fill Class 1 and 2 at a moisture content within minus 0 to plus 5 percentage points of the optimum moisture content. Compact the remaining classes of earth fill and cohesive aggregate fill at a moisture content within minus 2 to plus 5 percentage points of optimum moisture content. The moisture ranges listed above are minimum and maximum limits. A tighter moisture range within these limits may be required to consistently achieve the specified density. 6. Compact cohesionless aggregate fill on which it is not practical to control the density by “Proctor” methods to a minimum of 75% of relative density as determined by ASTM D-4253 and D-4254, or at the discretion of the Engineer, by a field compaction mold method correlated to ASTM D-4253 and D-4254. 7. Compact cohesionless aggregate fill at moisture content within a range that accommodates consistent placement and compaction to the minimum relative density specified above. 8. The Owner will arrange and pay for density and moisture testing. The testing frequency and methods shall be as requested by the Engineer. The Engineer may waive testing requirements on cohesionless bedding where testing is not practical because of limited space between the pipe and trench walls, however, the minimum number of passes of the compaction equipment specified above shall be achieved. 3.04 FINISHING A. Grade and rake areas smooth and even which do not receive any type of paved surface, to allow drainage to drain away from the structures and toward the roads and streets or the natural drainage course. Break up large clods of earth and remove rocks, trash and debris near the surface. B. Finish the top portion of backfill beneath established sodded (lawn) areas with not less than 6" of topsoil corresponding to, or better than, that underlying adjoining sodded areas. 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Compact backfill and appropriate embedment material to a minimum of 95% of maximum density at a moisture content of 0 to + 5% of optimum for backfill and at optimum for sand-cement embedment as determined by ASTM D-698-78 (Standard Proctor), B. Make periodic tests of compaction for conformance with this section by an approved testing laboratory selected and paid for by the Owner. Contractor shall pay for re-testing until acceptable test results are obtained. Denton Fire Station No. 8 TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING MJ Thomas Engineering, LLC. 312333-7 August 2019 3.06 CLEAN AND ADJUST Remove surplus pipeline materials, tools, rubbish and temporary structures and leave the construction site clean, to the satisfaction of the Engineer. END OF SECTION Denton Fire Station No. 8 EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROLS MJ Thomas Engineering, LLC. 312500-1 August 2019 SECTION 312500 EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED Provide labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary to seed the slopes and other areas as specified. This specification includes seedbed fertilization, watering, mulching, and emulsifying or tacking the mulch and maintenance until final acceptance by the Owner. 1.02 STANDARDS The seed used on this project will conform to ITEM 164.2 Standard Specifications for Construction of Highways, Streets and Bridges, Texas Department of Transportation. 1.03 DELIVERY AND STORAGE Deliver seed with each variety separately bagged. 1.04 OPTIONS A. If dry mechanical methods are used, the fertilizer may be spread at the same time as the seed. After sowing, straw mulch will be mechanically spread over the seeded area. B. When seed and fertilizer are to be distributed as a water slurry, apply the mixture within thirty (30) minutes of mixing. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. SEED: From the previous season's crop, labeled in accordance with the Texas Seed Law. 1. Seed for Fall planting (temporary) shall be one (1) or more of the following small grains as designated by the Engineer: Wheat, oats, cereal rye, or barley. 2. Seed for Spring planting (permanent) shall be Bermuda grass. B. FERTILIZER A uniform application of 10-6-4 (nitrogen-phosphorus-potassium) fertilizer at a rate of 18 pounds per 1,000 square feet (800 pounds per acre). C. MULCH 1. Consisting of straw, wood-fiber, mulch nettings, wood chips or other suitable material approved by the Engineer and free of Johnson grass and other noxious weed seeds. 2. Straw mulch shall be oat, wheat or rice straw, prairie hay, Bermuda grass hay, or other hay harvested before seed production and approved by the Engineer. The straw mulch will be kept dry and shall not be rotted or molded. A minimum of 50% by weight of the herbage making up the hay shall be l0" in length or longer. D. TOPSOIL: As specified for Class 12 Earth Fill in Section 310513, SOILS FOR EARTHWORK. Denton Fire Station No. 8 EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROLS MJ Thomas Engineering, LLC. 312500-2 August 2019 E. HERBICIDE: Contractor shall be responsible for using herbicides in a manner consistent with label requirements and precautions. Only registered herbicides having a minimal residual effect shall be used. Contractor shall strictly adhere to all Federal, State, and local laws governing herbicide usage. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION [Not Used] 3.02 TOPSOIL PLACEMENT Place topsoil as specified for Class 12 Earth Fill. 3.03 FALL PLANTING Fall planting will be temporary only and will be required if construction is completed between September 15 and April 15. The Fall planting is to be followed by a Spring planting of perennial vegetation. A. SEEDBED PREPARATION Use a one-way plow, tandem disk, bedder, or equipment which will accomplish similar results. Break or mix the surface of the soil with the tillage equipment. Additional tillage operations will be necessary if required so planting can be on a clean, firm seedbed. Chiseling will be necessary on areas which have been severely compacted. B. SEEDING 1. Seeding will be required on disturbed or excavated areas and on new embankments of whatever nature unless requested otherwise by the Engineer. 2. Optimum Fall planting dates are September 1 to November 30. Accomplish the seeding for Fall planting within these dates unless approval to do otherwise is obtained from the Engineer. Planting rates when drilled or broadcast are as follows: Wheat 120 lbs/acre Oats 128 lbs/acre Rye 200 lbs/acre Barley 114 lbs/acre 3.04 SPRING PLANTING Follow procedures for Spring planting if construction is completed between April 15 and September 15, or after a temporary Fall planting has been made. A. SEEDBED PREPARATION Seedbed preparation for Spring planting is the same as that stated in the Fall planting of temporary cover with one addition. Any temporary cover crop must be top killed using an approved contact herbicide or by mechanically undercutting the growing cover crop, leaving residues on or near the soil surface. B. MULCHING 1. Spread mulch material on the area to be planted if construction was completed too late for planting a temporary fall crop or if insufficient residues are produced by the Fall planting. Mulch the planting areas to control soil erosion and seed loss by wind and water and to promote grass establishment. Apply Mulch hay at the rate of 2 tons per acre and spread uniformly so that about 25% of the ground surface is uniformly visible through the mulch. 2. Anchor the mulch hay by treading into the soil with a straight disk type mulch tiller. Perform Denton Fire Station No. 8 EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROLS MJ Thomas Engineering, LLC. 312500-3 August 2019 disking across the slope along contours. Other types of mulch such as wood cellulose fiber or cotton bur mulch may be used at recommended rates, if approved by the Engineer. Apply mulch in a manner that will not hinder emergence of seedlings. C. SEEDING 1. Plant Bermuda grass seed between April 15 and Sept. 15. Sow the seed at the rate of 10 pounds of pure live seed (PLS) per 1,000 SF, or more if required to obtain a complete stand of grass. The PLS content is determined by multiplying the seed package weight by the product of the percent purity, and the percent germination, which are contained on the seed label. 2. Accomplish seeding by mechanical means using either broadcasting or drilling type equipment to provide uniform distribution of the seed in the planting areas. Cover Bermuda grass seed with1/4 to 1/2" of approved topsoil. If seed is drilled, the distance between drill rows shall not exceed 12". Hydro-seeding may be used to apply seed, fertilizer, and wood- fiber mulch with the approval of the Engineer. 3.05 MAINTENANCE A. IRRIGATION Supply the seeded areas with adequate moisture (4" penetration) at ten (10) day intervals, if needed, for seed germination and plant growth until acceptance by the Owner. Water the seed in a manner which will prevent erosion of the soil. Furnish all water to be used. B. REPAIR Repair washouts and other bare soil areas in a seeded area either by re-seeding, sprigging, or spot- sodding, and perform maintenance as needed to establish grass in the area. C. WEED CONTROL 1. Control competitive weed growth during the establishment period by mowing and/or with herbicides. Chemical usage shall be in accordance with the current recommendations of the Texas Agricultural Experiment Station or local Soil Conservation Service Field Office Technical Guides. Strictly adhere to all Federal, State, and local laws governing herbicides. 2. Weed control shall be the Contractor's responsibility whether topsoil is from on-site or off-site sources and also for seeded areas which are specified not to receive topsoil. 3.06 SEEDING OF DISTURBED AREAS A. Disturbed areas will require seeding as specified in this section unless requested otherwise by the Engineer or shown otherwise on the drawings or in the specifications. B. Any areas which are disturbed by the Contractor which are not shown on the drawings or specified to require disturbance including any approved areas not shown on the drawings, shall be considered as unauthorized disturbed areas. Any such areas shall be seeded as specified in this section at the Contractor's expense and shall not be measured or paid under this section. 3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL; OBSERVATION AND ACCEPTANCE A. OBSERVATION Upon completion of the site preparation, mulching, fertilizing, seeding, and maintenance of seeded areas, the Engineer will observe the seeded areas periodically to determine the establishment success. The Engineer will consider soil coverage, purity of the grass stand, and maturity of the plants. Denton Fire Station No. 8 EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROLS MJ Thomas Engineering, LLC. 312500-4 August 2019 B. ESTABLISHMENT OF STAND AND ACCEPTANCE The Engineer will determine that a grassed area is established upon fulfillment of the following conditions: 1. The permanent grass stand uniformly covers the planting area, with no exposed soil areas more than 6" across in any dimension. 2. The permanent grass stand is free of over-topping weed species which would compete for sunlight, moisture, and nutrients. In addition, no area of pure weed species greater than 6" across in any dimension shall occur within a permanent grass stand. 3. The majority of the grass plants in a stand shall have a well established root system to survive if irrigation is discontinued. Establish the permanent grass stand before September 15 to preclude having to perform a temporary Fall seeding. In the event a Fall seeding must be performed, follow-up the temporary seeding with a permanent seeding as specified. Upon final acceptance of the work under this contract, the Owner will assume the responsibility of maintaining the grassed areas. END OF SECTION Denton Fire Station No. 8 TERMITE CONTROL Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 313116-1 August 2019 SECTION 313116 – TERMITE CONTROL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Soil treatment with termiticide. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of termite control product. 1. Include the EPA-Registered Label for termiticide products. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Certificates: For termite control products, from manufacturer. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: Formulate and apply termiticides and termiticide devices according to the EPA- Registered Label. B. Source Limitations: Obtain termite control products from single source from single manufacturer. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: To ensure penetration, do not treat soil that is water saturated or frozen. Do not treat soil while precipitation is occurring. Comply with requirements of the EPA-Registered Label and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Coordinate soil treatment application with excavating, filling, grading, and concreting operations. Treat soil under footings, grade beams, and ground-supported slabs before construction. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Soil Treatment Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form, signed by Applicator and Contractor, certifying that termite control work, consisting of applied soil termiticide treatment, will prevent infestation of subterranean termites. If subterranean termite activity or damage is discovered during warranty period, re- treat soil and repair or replace damage caused by termite infestation. 1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SOIL TREATMENT A. Termiticide: Provide an EPA-Registered termiticide, complying with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction, in an aqueous solution formulated to prevent termite infestation. Provide quantity required for application at the label volume and rate for the maximum termiticide concentration allowed for each specific use, according to product's EPA-Registered Label. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. BASF Corporation, Agricultural Products; Termidor. b. Bayer Environmental Science; Premise 75. 2. Service Life of Treatment: Soil treatment termiticide that is effective for not less than five years against infestation of subterranean termites. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for moisture content of soil per termiticide label requirements, interfaces with earthwork, slab and foundation work, landscaping, utility installation, and other conditions affecting performance of termite control. B. Proceed with application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Denton Fire Station No. 8 TERMITE CONTROL Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 313116-2 August 2019 3.2 PREPARATION A. General: Comply with the most stringent requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and with manufacturer's written instructions for preparation before beginning application of termite control treatment. Remove all extraneous sources of wood cellulose and other edible materials such as wood debris, tree stumps and roots, stakes, formwork, and construction waste wood from soil within and around foundations. B. Soil Treatment Preparation: Remove foreign matter and impermeable soil materials that could decrease treatment effectiveness on areas to be treated. Loosen, rake, and level soil to be treated except previously compacted areas under slabs and footings. Termiticides may be applied before placing compacted fill under slabs if recommended in writing by termiticide manufacturer. 1. Fit filling hose connected to water source at the site with a backflow preventer, complying with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 3.3 APPLICATION, GENERAL A. General: Comply with the most stringent requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and with manufacturer's EPA-Registered Label for products. 3.4 APPLYING SOIL TREATMENT A. Application: Mix soil treatment termiticide solution to a uniform consistency. Provide quantity required for application at the label volume and rate for the maximum specified concentration of termiticide, according to manufacturer's EPA-Registered Label, to the following so that a continuous horizontal and vertical termiticidal barrier or treated zone is established around and under building construction. Distribute treatment evenly. 1. Slabs-on-Grade and Basement Slabs: Underground-supported slab construction, including footings, building slabs, and attached slabs as an overall treatment. Treat soil materials before concrete footings and slabs are placed. 2. Foundations: Adjacent soil, including soil along the entire inside perimeter of foundation walls; along both sides of interior partition walls; around plumbing pipes and electric conduit penetrating the slab; around interior column footers, piers, and chimney bases; and along the entire outside perimeter, from grade to bottom of footing. Avoid soil washout around footings. 3. Crawlspaces: Soil under and adjacent to foundations as previously indicated. Treat adjacent areas including around entrance platform, porches, and equipment bases. Apply overall treatment only where attached concrete platform and porches are on fill or ground. B. Avoid disturbance of treated soil after application. Keep off treated areas until completely dry. C. Protect termiticide solution, dispersed in treated soils and fills, from being diluted until ground-supported slabs are installed. Use waterproof barrier according to EPA-Registered Label instructions. D. Post warning signs in areas of application. E. Reapply soil treatment solution to areas disturbed by subsequent excavation, grading, landscaping, or other construction activities following application. END OF SECTION Denton Fire Station No. 8 TRENCH SHIELDING MJ Thomas Engineering, LLC. 314133-1 August 2019 SECTION 314133 TRENCH SHIELDING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. This specification consists of the basic requirements which the Contractor must comply with in order to provide for the safety and health of workers in a trench. This specification is for the purpose of providing minimum performance specifications, and the Contractor shall develop, design, and implement the trench safety system. The Contractor shall bear the sole responsibility for the adequacy of the trench safety system and providing "a safe place to work" for the workman. B. Should the trench safety protection system require wider trenches than specified elsewhere, the Contractor shall be responsible for the costs associated with determining adequacy of pipe bedding and class, as well as, purchase and installation of alternate materials. 1.02 STANDARDS A. The following standard shall be the minimum governing requirement of this specification and is hereby made a part of this specification as if written in its entirety. Occupational Safety and Health Standards - Excavations (29CFR Part 1926), U.S. Department of Labor, latest edition. B. Comply with the applicable Federal, State, and local rules, regulations, and ordinances. END OF SECTION Denton Fire Station No. 8 EXCAVATION SUPPORT AND PROTECTION Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 315000-1 August 2019 SECTION 315000 – EXCAVATION SUPPORT AND PROTECTION PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes temporary excavation support and protection systems. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, performance properties, and dimensions of individual components and profiles, and calculations for excavation support and protection system. 1.4 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Project-Site Information: A geotechnical report has been prepared for this Project and is available for information only. The opinions expressed in this report are those of a geotechnical engineer and represent interpretations of subsoil conditions, tests, and results of analyses conducted by a geotechnical engineer. Owner is not responsible for interpretations or conclusions drawn from the data. 1. Make additional test borings and conduct other exploratory operations necessary for excavation support and protection according to the performance requirements. 2. The geotechnical report is included elsewhere in Project Manual. B. Survey Work: Engage a qualified land surveyor or professional engineer to survey adjacent existing buildings, structures, and site improvements; establish exact elevations at fixed points to act as benchmarks. Clearly identify benchmarks and record existing elevations. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide, design, monitor, and maintain excavation support and protection system capable of supporting excavation sidewalls and of resisting earth and hydrostatic pressures and superimposed and construction loads. 1. Contractor Design: Design excavation support and protection system, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer. 2. Prevent surface water from entering excavations by grading, dikes, or other means. 3. Install excavation support and protection systems without damaging existing buildings, structures, and site improvements adjacent to excavation. 4. Continuously monitor vibrations, settlements, and movements to ensure stability of excavations and constructed slopes and to ensure that damage to permanent structures is prevented. 2.2 MATERIALS A. General: Provide materials that are either new or in serviceable condition. B. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, ASTM A 690/A 690M, or ASTM A 992/A 992M. C. Steel Sheet Piling: ASTM A 328/A 328M, ASTM A 572/A 572M, or ASTM A 690/A 690M; with continuous interlocks. D. Wood Lagging: Lumber, mixed hardwood, nominal rough thickness of size and strength required for application. E. Shotcrete: Comply with Section 033713 Shotcrete for shotcrete materials and mixes, reinforcement, and shotcrete application. F. Cast-in-Place Concrete: ACI 301, of compressive strength required for application. G. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed. H. Tiebacks: Steel bars, ASTM A 722/A 722M. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards that could develop during excavation support and protection system operations. 1. Shore, support, and protect utilities encountered. B. Install excavation support and protection systems to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, Denton Fire Station No. 8 EXCAVATION SUPPORT AND PROTECTION Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 315000-2 August 2019 walks, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities. 1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by authorities having jurisdiction. C. Locate excavation support and protection systems clear of permanent construction so that construction and finishing of other work is not impeded. 3.2 SOLDIER PILES AND LAGGING A. Install steel soldier piles before starting excavation. Extend soldier piles below excavation grade level to depths adequate to prevent lateral movement. Space soldier piles at regular intervals not to exceed allowable flexural strength of wood lagging. Accurately align exposed faces of flanges to vary not more than 2 inches from a horizontal line and not more than 1:120 out of vertical alignment. B. Install wood lagging within flanges of soldier piles as excavation proceeds. Trim excavation as required to install lagging. Fill voids behind lagging with soil, and compact. C. Install wales horizontally at locations indicated on Drawings and secure to soldier piles. 3.3 SHEET PILING A. Before starting excavation, install one-piece sheet piling lengths and tightly interlock vertical edges to form a continuous barrier. B. Accurately place the piling, using templates and guide frames unless otherwise recommended in writing by the sheet piling manufacturer. Limit vertical offset of adjacent sheet piling to 60 inches. Accurately align exposed faces of sheet piling to vary not more than 2 inches from a horizontal line and not more than 1:120 out of vertical alignment. C. Cut tops of sheet piling to uniform elevation at top of excavation. 3.4 TIEBACKS A. Drill, install, grout, and tension tiebacks. B. Test load-carrying capacity of each tieback and replace and retest deficient tiebacks. 1. Have test loading observed by a qualified professional engineer responsible for design of excavation support and protection system. C. Maintain tiebacks in place until permanent construction is able to withstand lateral earth and hydrostatic pressures. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Survey-Work Benchmarks: Resurvey benchmarks regularly during installation of excavation support and protection systems, excavation progress, and for as long as excavation remains open. Maintain an accurate log of surveyed elevations and positions for comparison with original elevations and positions. Promptly notify Architect if changes in elevations or positions occur or if cracks, sags, or other damage is evident in adjacent construction. B. Promptly correct detected bulges, breakage, or other evidence of movement to ensure that excavation support and protection system remains stable. C. Promptly repair damages to adjacent facilities caused by installation or faulty performance of excavation support and protection systems. 3.6 REMOVAL AND REPAIRS A. Remove excavation support and protection systems when construction has progressed sufficiently to support excavation and earth and hydrostatic pressures. Remove in stages to avoid disturbing underlying soils and rock or damaging structures, pavements, facilities, and utilities. 1. Remove excavation support and protection systems to a minimum depth of 48 inches below overlying construction and abandon remainder. 2. Fill voids immediately with approved backfill compacted to density specified in Section 312000 Earth Moving. 3. Repair or replace, as approved by Architect, adjacent work damaged or displaced by removing excavation support and protection systems. B. Leave excavation support and protection systems permanently in place. END OF SECTION City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 DRILLED CONCRETE PIERS AND SHAFTS FWN&A Structural Engineering 316329 - 1 August 2019 SECTION 316329 - DRILLED CONCRETE PIERS AND SHAFTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Dry-installed drilled piers. 1.3 UNIT PRICES A. Drilled Piers: Actual net volume of drilled piers in place and approved. Actual length, shaft diameter, may vary, to coincide with elevations where satisfactory bearing strata are encountered. These dimensions may also vary with actual bearing value of bearing strata determined by an independent testing and inspecting agency. Adjustments are made on net variation of total quantities, based on design dimensions for shafts. 1. Base bids on indicated number of drilled piers and, for each pier, the design length from top elevation to bottom of shaft, and the diameter of shaft. 2. Unit prices include labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals required for excavation, trimming, shoring, steel casings, dewatering, reinforcement, concrete fill, testing and inspecting, and other items for complete drilled-pier installation. B. Rock Measurement: Volume of rock actually removed, measured in original position, but not to exceed outside dimensions of drilled piers cast against rock. Unit prices for rock excavation include replacement with approved materials. C. Trial Drilled Pier: Same unit price as indicated for drilled pier, including backfilling. 1.4 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1. Review methods and procedures related to drilled piers including, but not limited to, the following: a. Review geotechnical report. b. Discuss existing utilities and subsurface conditions. c. Review coordination with temporary controls and protections. d. Review measurement and payment of unit prices. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 DRILLED CONCRETE PIERS AND SHAFTS FWN&A Structural Engineering 316329 - 2 August 2019 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture. Submit alternative design mixtures when characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments. 1. Indicate amounts of mixing water to be withheld for later addition at Project site. C. Shop Drawings: For concrete reinforcement, detailing fabricating, bending, supporting, and placing. 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer land surveyor professional engineer and testing agency. B. Welding certificates. C. Material Certificates: From manufacturer, for the following: 1. Cementitious materials. 2. Admixtures. 3. Steel reinforcement and accessories. D. Field quality-control reports. 1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Record drawings. 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer that has specialized in drilled-pier work. B. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM C 1077, ASTM D 3740, and ASTM E 329 for testing indicated. C. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." 2. AWS D1.4/D1.4M, "Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel." 1.9 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Existing Utilities: Locate existing underground utilities before excavating drilled piers. If utilities are to remain in place, provide protection from damage during drilled-pier operations. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 DRILLED CONCRETE PIERS AND SHAFTS FWN&A Structural Engineering 316329 - 3 August 2019 1. Should uncharted or incorrectly charted piping or other utilities be encountered during excavation, adapt drilling procedure if necessary to prevent damage to utilities. Cooperate with Owner and utility companies in keeping services and facilities in operation without interruption. Repair damaged utilities to satisfaction of utility owner. B. Interruption of Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt any utility to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Architect and Owner no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of utility. 2. Do not proceed with interruption of utility without Architect's and Owner's written permission. C. Project-Site Information: A geotechnical report has been prepared for this Project and is available for information only. The opinions expressed in this report are those of geotechnical engineer and represent interpretations of subsoil conditions, tests, and results of analyses conducted by geotechnical engineer. Owner is not responsible for interpretations or conclusions drawn from this data. 1. Make additional test borings and conduct other exploratory operations necessary for drilled piers. 2. The geotechnical report is included elsewhere in the Project Manual. D. Survey Work: Engage a qualified land surveyor or professional engineer to perform surveys, layouts, and measurements for drilled piers. Before excavating, lay out each drilled pier to lines and levels required. Record actual measurements of each drilled pier's location, shaft diameter, bottom and top elevations, deviations from specified tolerances, and other specified data. 1. Record and maintain information pertinent to each drilled pier and indicate on record Drawings. Cooperate with Owner's testing and inspecting agency to provide data for required reports. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Drilled-Pier Standard: Comply with ACI 336.1 except as modified in this Section. 2.2 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed. B. Low-Alloy-Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 706/A 706M, deformed. C. Joint Dowel Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, plain. Cut bars true to length with ends square and free of burrs. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 DRILLED CONCRETE PIERS AND SHAFTS FWN&A Structural Engineering 316329 - 4 August 2019 2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of same type, brand, and source, throughout Project: 1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150/C 150M, Type I/II . Supplement with the following: a. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class C or Class F. B. Normal-Weight Aggregate: ASTM C 33/C 33M, graded, 3/4-inch- nominal maximum coarse- aggregate size. Provide aggregate from a single source. 1. Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement. C. Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M and potable. D. Chemical Admixtures: Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and that do not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those permitted in hardened concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride. 1. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A. 2. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D. 3. High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type G. 4. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017/C 1017M, Type II. 2.4 STEEL CASINGS A. Steel Pipe Casings: ASTM A 283/A 283M, Grade C, or ASTM A 36/A 36M, carbon-steel plate, with joints full-penetration welded according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M. B. Steel casings shall be included in the project base bid. 2.5 CONCRETE MIXTURES A. Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the basis of laboratory trial mixture or field test data, or both, according to ACI 301. B. Cementitious Materials: Limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other than portland cement according to ACI 301 limits as if concrete were exposed to deicing chemicals. C. Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows: 1. Compressive Strength (28 Days): 3000 psi. 2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.50. 3. Minimum Slump: Capable of maintaining the following slump until completion of placement: a. 8 inches. 4. Air Content: Do not air entrain concrete. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 DRILLED CONCRETE PIERS AND SHAFTS FWN&A Structural Engineering 316329 - 5 August 2019 2.6 REINFORCEMENT FABRICATION A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice." 2.7 CONCRETE MIXING A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M, and furnish batch ticket information. 1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, vibration, and other hazards created by drilled-pier operations. 3.2 EXCAVATION A. Unclassified Excavation: Excavate to bearing elevations regardless of character of surface and subsurface conditions encountered. Unclassified excavated materials may include rock, soil materials, and obstructions. 1. Obstructions: Unclassified excavation may include removal of unanticipated boulders, concrete, masonry, or other subsurface obstructions. No changes in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time are authorized for removal of obstructions. 2. Obstructions: Unclassified excavated materials may include removal of unanticipated boulders, concrete, masonry, or other subsurface obstructions. Payment for removing obstructions that cannot be removed by conventional augers fitted with soil or rock teeth, drilling buckets, or underreaming tools attached to drilling equipment of size, power, torque, and downthrust necessary for the Work is according to Contract provisions for changes in the Work. B. Classified Excavation: Excavation is classified as standard excavation, special excavation, and obstruction removal and includes excavation to bearing elevations as follows: 1. Standard excavation includes excavation accomplished with conventional augers fitted with soil or rock teeth, attached to drilling equipment of size, power, torque, and downthrust necessary for the Work. C. Prevent surface water from entering excavated shafts. Conduct water to site drainage facilities. D. Excavate shafts for drilled piers to indicated elevations. Remove loose material from bottom of excavation. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 DRILLED CONCRETE PIERS AND SHAFTS FWN&A Structural Engineering 316329 - 6 August 2019 1. Excavate bottom of drilled piers to level plane within 1:12 tolerance. 2. Remove water from excavated shafts before concreting. 3. Excavate rock sockets of dimensions indicated. E. Notify and allow testing and inspecting agency to test and inspect bottom of excavation. If unsuitable bearing stratum is encountered, make adjustments to drilled piers as determined by Architect. 1. Do not excavate shafts deeper than elevations indicated unless approved by Architect. 2. Payment for additional authorized excavation is according to Contract provisions for changes in the Work. F. Excavate shafts for closely spaced drilled piers and for drilled piers occurring in fragile or sand strata only after adjacent drilled piers are filled with concrete and allowed to set. G. Temporary Casings: Install watertight steel casings of sufficient length and thickness to prevent water seepage into shaft; to withstand compressive, displacement, and withdrawal stresses; and to maintain stability of shaft walls. 1. Remove temporary casings, maintained in plumb position, during concrete placement and before initial set of concrete. H. Tolerances: Construct drilled piers to remain within ACI 336.1 tolerances. 1. If location or out-of-plumb tolerances are exceeded, provide corrective construction. Submit corrective construction proposals to Architect for review before proceeding. 3.3 TEMPORARY STEEL CASING INSTALLATION A. Install temporary steel casings of minimum wall thickness required and of diameter not less than diameter of the specified drilled pier. 1. Install casings as excavation proceeds, to maintain sidewall stability. 2. Fabricate bottom edge of lowest casing section with cutting shoe capable of penetrating rock and achieving water seal. 3. Connect casing sections by continuous penetration welds to form watertight, continuous casing. 4. Remove the temporary steel casing gradually while placing concrete in the pier. Contractor shall maintain sufficient head of concrete pressure to ensure water and soil material do not move into the pier excavation as noted below. 3.4 STEEL REINFORCEMENT INSTALLATION A. Comply with recommendations in CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating, placing, and supporting reinforcement. B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, and other materials that reduce or destroy bond with concrete. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 DRILLED CONCRETE PIERS AND SHAFTS FWN&A Structural Engineering 316329 - 7 August 2019 C. Fabricate and install reinforcing cages symmetrically about axis of shafts in a single unit. D. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement during concreting. Maintain minimum cover over reinforcement. E. Use templates to set anchor bolts, leveling plates, and other accessories furnished in work of other Sections. Provide blocking and holding devices to maintain required position during final concrete placement. F. Protect exposed ends of extended reinforcement, dowels, or anchor bolts from mechanical damage and exposure to weather. 3.5 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. Place concrete in continuous operation and without segregation immediately after inspection and approval of shaft by a qualified Special Inspector and testing agency. B. Dry Method: Place concrete to fall vertically down the center of drilled pier without striking sides of shaft or steel reinforcement. 1. Where concrete cannot be directed down shaft without striking reinforcement, place concrete with chutes, tremies, or pumps. 2. Vibrate top 60 inches of concrete. C. Coordinate withdrawal of temporary casings with concrete placement to maintain at least a 60- inch head of concrete above bottom of casing. 1. Vibrate top 60 inches of concrete after withdrawal of temporary casing. D. Screed concrete at cutoff elevation level and apply scoured, rough finish. Where cutoff elevation is above the ground elevation, form top section above grade and extend shaft to required elevation. E. Protect concrete work, according to ACI 301, from frost, freezing, or low temperatures that could cause physical damage or reduced strength. 1. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials. 2. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other mineral-containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators. F. If hot-weather conditions exist that would seriously impair quality and strength of concrete, place concrete according to ACI 301 to maintain delivered temperature of concrete at no more than 90 deg F. 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Special Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified special inspector to perform the following special inspections: City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 DRILLED CONCRETE PIERS AND SHAFTS FWN&A Structural Engineering 316329 - 8 August 2019 1. Drilled piers. 2. Excavation. 3. Concrete. 4. Steel reinforcement welding. B. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. C. Drilled-Pier Tests and Inspections: For each drilled pier, before concrete placement. 1. Soil Testing: Bottom elevations, bearing capacities, and lengths of drilled piers indicated have been estimated from available soil data. Actual elevations and drilled-pier lengths and bearing capacities are determined by testing and inspecting agency. Final evaluations and approval of data are determined by Architect. D. Concrete Tests and Inspections: ASTM C 172/C 172M except modified for slump to comply with ASTM C 94/C 94M. 1. Slump: ASTM C 143/C 143M; one test at point of placement for each compressive- strength test but no fewer than one test for each concrete load. 2. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064/C 1064M; one test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F and below and 80 deg F and above, and one test for each set of compressive- strength specimens. 3. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31/C 31M; one set of four standard cylinders for each compressive-strength test unless otherwise indicated. Mold and store cylinders for laboratory-cured test specimens unless field-cured test specimens are required. 4. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39/C 39M; one set for each drilled pier but not more than one set for each truck load. Test one specimen at seven days, test two specimens at 28 days(for 6”x12” cylinders) and 3 at 28 days (for 4”x8” cylinders), and retain one specimen in reserve for later testing if required. 5. If frequency of testing provides fewer than five strength tests for a given class of concrete, conduct tests from at least five randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used. 6. If strength of field-cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion laboratory-cured cylinders, Contractor shall evaluate operations and provide corrective procedures for protecting and curing in-place concrete. 7. Strength of each concrete mixture is satisfactory if every average of any three consecutive compressive-strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive strength and no compressive-strength test value falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi. 8. Report test results in writing to Architect, concrete manufacturer, and Contractor within 48 hours of testing. List Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing and inspecting agency, location of concrete batch in Work, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mixture proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7- and 28-day tests in reports of compressive-strength tests. 9. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be permitted by Architect but not be used as sole basis for approval or rejection of concrete. 10. Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency to make additional tests of concrete if test results indicate that slump, compressive strengths, or other requirements have not been met, as directed by Architect. City of Denton Fire Station No. 8 DRILLED CONCRETE PIERS AND SHAFTS FWN&A Structural Engineering 316329 - 9 August 2019 a. Continuous coring of drilled piers may be required, at Contractor's expense, if temporary casings have not been withdrawn within specified time limits or if observations of placement operations indicate deficient concrete quality, presence of voids, segregation, or other possible defects. 11. Perform additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. 12. Correct deficiencies in the Work that test reports and inspections indicate do not comply with the Contract Documents. E. An excavation, concrete, or a drilled pier will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. F. Prepare test and inspection reports for each drilled pier as follows: 1. Actual top and bottom elevations. 2. Actual drilled-pier diameter at top, bottom, and bell. 3. Top of rock elevation. 4. Description of soil materials. 5. Description, location, and dimensions of obstructions. 6. Final top centerline location and deviations from requirements. 7. Variation of shaft from plumb. 8. Shaft excavating method. 9. Design and tested bearing capacity of bottom. 10. Depth of rock socket. 11. Levelness of bottom and adequacy of cleanout. 12. Ground-water conditions and water-infiltration rate, depth, and pumping. 13. Description, purpose, length, wall thickness, diameter, tip, and top and bottom elevations of temporary or permanent casings. Include anchorage and sealing methods used and condition and weather tightness of splices if any. 14. Description of soil or water movement, sidewall stability, loss of ground, and means of control. 15. Date and time of starting and completing excavation. 16. Inspection report. 17. Condition of reinforcing steel and splices. 18. Position of reinforcing steel. 19. Concrete placing method, including elevation of consolidation and delays. 20. Elevation of concrete during removal of casings. 21. Locations of construction joints. 22. Concrete volume. 23. Concrete testing results. 3.7 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS A. Disposal: Remove surplus satisfactory soil and waste material, including unsatisfactory soil, trash, and debris, and legally dispose of it off Owner's property. END OF SECTION 316329 Denton Fire Station No. 8 CONCRETE PAVING MJ Thomas Engineering, LLC. 321313-1 August 2019 SECTION 321313 CONCRETE PAVING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Provisions established within the General and Supplementary General Conditions of the Contract, Division 1 - General Requirements, and the Drawings are collectively applicable to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: New concrete walks, curbs and gutters, paving, approaches, and other concrete flatwork outside the building. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 310000 - Earthwork 2. Section 033000 - Cast-in-place Concrete 3. Section 321373 - Sealants and Caulkings 1.03 REFERENCES A. American Concrete Institute (ACI): 1. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings. 2. ACI 304 - Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete. 3. ACI 305 - Recommended Practices for Hot Weather Concreting. 4. ACI 306 - Recommended Practices for Cold Weather Concreting. B. American National Standards Institute/American Society for Testing and Materials (ANSI/ASTM): 1. ANSI/ASTM D1752-84 - Specification for Preformed Sponge Rubber and Cork Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction. C. NCTOG - Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Codes and Standards: Comply with the applicable provisions of the following codes, specifications, and standards: ACI 301 “Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings.” ACI 304 “Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting and Placing Concrete.” ACI 311 “Recommended Practice for Concrete Inspection.” ACI 318 “Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete.” ACI 347 “Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork.” Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute, “Manual for Standard Practice.” B. Workmanship: Contractor is responsible for correction of concrete work which does not conform to the specified requirements, including strength, tolerance, and finishes. Correct deficient unsatisfactory concrete as directed by the Engineer. All pavement replacement shall be a minimum of ½ panel. C. Perform work in accordance with ACI 301. D. Obtain materials from same source throughout. E. City Standards: Street sidewalks, curbs and gutters, and approaches shall be constructed to meet or exceed the requirements of the city standard specifications (or NCTCOG) where the city standards are applicable. Denton Fire Station No. 8 CONCRETE PAVING MJ Thomas Engineering, LLC. 321313-2 August 2019 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data under provisions of SECTION 013323 – Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples. And SECTION 012300 – Alternates. B. Include data on joint filler, admixtures and curing compounds. C. Submit manufacturer’s instructions under provisions of SECTION 013323 – Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples and SECTION 012300 - Alternates D. Provide field samples of surface textures specified for Engineer approval prior to beginning work. 1.06 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not place pavement when base surface or ambient temperature is less than 40°F, or if base surface is wet or frozen. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Formwork shall meet the requirements specified in SECTION 031100 - CONCRETE FORMING. B. Reinforcement shall meet the requirements specified in SECTION 032000 - CONCRETE REINFORCING. ASTM A 615, Grade 60. C. Concrete shall meet the requirements specified in SECTION 033000 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150 Type I Domestic manufacturer. Use only one brand of cement throughout the project. Minimum compressive strength shall be 3,500 psi at 28 days. Provide entrained air of 5% (±1%) ASTM C260 with a maximum water cement ratio of 0.50. D. Expansion Joints: 1. Redwood expansion for joints to be caulked with sealant and joints in architectural concrete flatwork. E. Normal Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33 1. Fine Aggregate: Clean, sharp, natural sand free from loam, clay, lumps, or other deleterious substances. 2. Coarse Aggregate: Clean, uncoated, processed aggregate containing no clay, mud, loam or foreign matter, as follows: a. Crushed stone, processed from natural rock or stone. b. Washed gravel, either natural or crushed. Use of pit or bankrun gravel is not permitted. c. Maximum Aggregate Size: 1½". F. Water: Clean, fresh, free from oil, acid, organic matter or other deleterious substances. G. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260. H. Fly ash and calcium chloride or admixture containing more than 0.1% chloride ions are not permitted. I. Supports for reinforcement: Provide supports for reinforcement-plastic chairs and fastening reinforcing in place. Wood, brick and other devices will not be acceptable. 2.02 RELATED MATERIAL A. Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C309, Type I. B. Bonding Compound: Polyvinyl acetate or acrylic base, rewettable type. Denton Fire Station No. 8 CONCRETE PAVING MJ Thomas Engineering, LLC. 321313-3 August 2019 Product/manufacturer; one of the following: Weldcrete; Larsen Products EucoWeld; Euclid Chemical Co. Sonocrete; Sonneborn-Contech Acrylic Bondcrete; The Burke Co. 2.03 PROPORTIONING AND DESIGN OF MIXES A. Prepare design mix for concrete, to produce a minimum 28 day compressive strength of 3,500 psi, as indicated on Contract Documents. Use an independent testing facility acceptable to the Architect for preparing and reporting proposed mix designs. B. Proportion mixes by laboratory trial batch, using materials to be employed on the project for each class of concrete required, complying with ACI 211.1. C. Submit written reports to the Architect of each proposed mix for each class concrete at least 15 days prior to start of work. Do not begin concrete production until mixes have been reviewed by the Architect/Engineer. D. Admixtures: 1. Use air-entraining admixture in exterior exposed concrete. Add air-entraining admixture at the manufacturer’s prescribed rate to result in concrete at the point of placement having air content of 5% (±1%) with a maximum water cement ratio of 0.50. E. Slump Limits: Proportion and design mixes to result in concrete slump at the point of placement of not less than 3" and not more than 5". 2.04 CONCRETE MIXING A. Ready-Mix Concrete: Comply with the requirements of ASTM C94, and as herein specified. No additional water to be added to the batch for material with insufficient slump with approval of Architect/Engineer. 1. During hot weather, or under conditions contributing to rapid setting of concrete, a shorter mixing time than specified in ASTM C 94 may be required. When the air temperature is between 85° F and 90° F, reduce the mixing and delivery time from 1-2 hours to 75 minutes, and when the air temperature is above 90° F, reduce the mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Verify compacted subgrade is ready to support paving and imposed loads, free of frost, smooth and properly compacted. B. Verify gradients and elevations of base are correct, and proper drainage has been provided so that water does not stand in the area to receive paving. C. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Verify subgrade meets specified moisture, density and composition specified no longer than two days before concrete placement. B. Moisten base to minimize absorption of water from fresh concrete. C. Notify Architect, Owner, and testing laboratory, minimum 24 hours prior to commencement of concreting operations. D. Grade Control: Establish and maintain the lines and grades for concrete site work items by means of Denton Fire Station No. 8 CONCRETE PAVING MJ Thomas Engineering, LLC. 321313-4 August 2019 lines and grade stakes. Complete any fine grading required to prepare the subgrade. Maintain the finished subgrade cushions in a satisfactory condition. E. Ensure all irrigation and electrical sleeves are installed prior to concrete placement. 3.03 INSERTS AND ACCESSORIES A. Make provisions for installation of inserts, accessories, anchors, and sleeves. 3.04 INSTALLATION A. Forming: Set forms to lines and grades, and brace and secure to withstand wet concrete without deflection or leakage. Stake forms securely in position with joints keyed to prevent relative displacement. Clean and oil forms each time they are used. Refer to SECTION 031100 - CONCRETE FORMING for additional installation requirements. Place concrete in thicknesses scheduled below: 1. Walks: As shown on paving plan; as detailed. 2. Curbs and Gutters: As detailed. 3. Drive Approaches and Drive Pavement as detailed. 4. Miscellaneous: Catch basins and other miscellaneous items of concrete shall be constructed to detail. B. Reinforcing: Install reinforcing to meet the requirements of SECTION 032000 - CONCRETE REINFORCING. Where reinforcement is not specifically detailed, reinforce paving and walks with #4 rebar at 12" o.c. each way. 1. Comply with the specified codes and standards, and Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute’s recommended practice for “Placing Reinforcing Bars,” for details and methods of reinforcement placement and supports. 2. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other materials which reduce or destroy bond with concrete. 3. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement by formwork, construction, or concrete-placement operations. Locate and support reinforcing by metal chairs, runners, bolsters, spacers and hangers. 4. Place reinforcement to obtain the minimum coverage for concrete protection. Arrange, space and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position during concrete placement operations. Set wire ties so ends are directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces. C. Concrete: Place concrete to meet the requirements of SECTION 033000 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE. 1. Place concrete in accordance with ACI 301 and 304. Deposit concrete so that specified slab thickness will be obtained after vibrating and finishing operations. Minimize handling to prevent honeycombs. Exercise care to prevent disturbance of forms and reinforcing and damage to vapor retarder. Place concrete to lines and levels shown, properly sloped to drain into adjacent yard areas or drainage structures. 2. Hot Weather Placement: ACI 305. 3. Cold Weather Placement: ACI 306. 4. Ensure reinforcement, inserts, embedded parts, and formed joints are not disturbed during concrete placement. Denton Fire Station No. 8 CONCRETE PAVING MJ Thomas Engineering, LLC. 321313-5 August 2019 5. Place concrete continuously between predetermined construction joints. Do not break or interrupt successive pours such that cold joints occur. D. Expansion Joints: Locate expansion joints around fixed objects within or abutting concrete, and at intervals of not more than 30 ft. o.c. along walks and curbs and max of 90 ft. o.c. along all other paving. 1. Install preformed filler with the top edge approximately 1/4" below the finished concrete surface to leave a neat, straight joint. 2. Joint edges shall be rounded with an edging tool. 3. There shall be no connection by reinforcement or keyway across expansion joints. Joints shall be held in alignment with sleeved, smooth dowels. 4. Install expansion joints at all point of curvatures, point of tangency, structuring and point of inflections. E. Scoring: Provide all tooled joints on all sidewalks and flatwork. 1. Saw cut, approaches, and paving using an abrasive or diamond blade. Cut joint width shall be 1/8" and depth shall be 1/4" deep at walks and 1/4 slab thickness at approaches and paving. Cutting of joints must be done as soon as concrete surface is firm enough not to be torn or damaged by the blade (within 4 to 12 hours), and before random shrinkage cracks can form in the concrete slab. a. Tool joint walks at max 5 foot intervals each way. b. Score curbs and gutters at approximately 5 foot intervals. c. Score approaches and paving at max 12 foot intervals each way or as shown. F. Standard Finishing: Strike slabs off true by double screeding to the required level at or below the elevations and grades shown on the drawings. Set edge forms and screed strips accurately to produce the designated elevations and contours. 1. Standard Walks: Float with wood floats to true planes with no coarse aggregate visible. Hand trowel to produce smooth surfaces. Brush surfaces with a soft fiber brush to produce a uniformly striated finish. Edge concrete surfaces with a rounded edging tool. 2. Curbs and gutters: Finish the curb and flow lines of gutters with a steel “S” shaped trowel to the contour of the curb and gutter and then cross brush surfaces with a soft fiber brush to produce a fine brush finish. 3. Approaches: Screed and float to a monolithic medium float finish and belt with a canvas belt to produce a herringbone texture finish. 4. Non-Slip Broom Finish: Apply non-slip broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps, and ramps. Immediately after trowel finishing, slightly roughen surface by brooming with fiber bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate required final finish with Architect before application. G. Curing: 1. Cure concrete 7 days as specified in SECTION 03 30 00 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE. Coat exposed surfaces with curing compound and protect surfaces from pedestrian and vehicular traffic during the curing period. Damaged areas shall be re-sprayed. 2. Concrete surfaces designated to receive chemical stain must be free of curing compound. Accordingly, finished concrete shall be “water-cured” or shall be completely sandblasted if cured with a curing compound membrane. 3. Concrete surfaces shall be cured by application of curing compound. Provide membrane curing by applying membrane-forming curing compound to damp concrete surfaces as soon as water film has disappeared. Apply uniformly in 2-coat continuous operation by power- spray equipment in accordance with manufacturer’s directions. Apply second coat at right Denton Fire Station No. 8 CONCRETE PAVING MJ Thomas Engineering, LLC. 321313-6 August 2019 angle to first coat. H. Removing Forms: Forms shall remain in place for a least 12 hours after concrete has been placed and finished. Remove forms without damaging the concrete. Bars and heavy tools shall not be used to pry against the concrete in removing the forms. 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Grade and Smoothness Tests: 1. Plan Grade: Finished surface of the flatwork shall not vary more than 0.02 ft. above or below the plan grade or elevation. Finished surfaces of abutting pavement and walks shall coincide at their juncture. Where a new pavement or walk abuts an existing surface, transition pavement or walk strip shall be installed. 2. Surface Smoothness: Finished surface of the flatwork shall have no abrupt changes or more than 1/8" and shall not deviate from the testing edge of a 12 ft. straight edge more than 1/4" plus or minus tolerance. Flow line of gutters shall not deviate from the testing edge of a 10 ft. straight edge more than 1/8" plus or minus tolerance. 3. Concrete shall be sampled and tested for quality control during the placement of concrete, as follows: a. Slump: ASTM C 143: One test for each concrete load at point of discharge; and one for each set of compressive strength test specimens. b. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31; one set of 4 standard cylinders for each compressive strength test. Mold and store cylinders for laboratory cured test specimens. c. Compressive Strength Tests: ASTM C 39; one set for each 100 cu. Yds. or fraction thereof, of each concrete class placed in any day or for each 5,000 sq. Ft. of surface area placed; 1 specimen tested at 7 days, 2 specimens tested at 28 days and the remaining specimen held for future testing, if required. Report test results in writing to the Architect and the Contractor on the same day that tests are made. Reports of compressive strength tests shall contain the project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of contractor, name of concrete type and class, location of concrete batch in the structure, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mix proportions and materials; compressive breaking strength and type of break for both 7-day test and 28-day tests. B. Additional Tests: The testing service will make additional tests of in-place concrete when test results indicate specified concrete strengths and other characteristics have not been attained. Test to determine adequacy of concrete will be by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42. Contractor shall pay for such test conducted, and any other additional testing as may be required, when unacceptable concrete is verified. C. Concrete shall meet the compressive strength as shown on the plans and specifications regardless of ACI 318. ACI 318 shall have no bearing on pass/fail of all site concrete. 3.06 CLEANING A. Remove debris, scraps, surplus materials, tools and equipment from the premises upon completion of the work. Clean concrete droppings from walks and curbs. Leave the graded areas free of debris and rubble. 3.07 PROTECTION A. Immediately after placement, protect concrete under provisions of SECTION 015000 – TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS from premature drying, excessive hot or cold temperatures, and mechanical injury. 3.08 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS A. Patching Defective Areas: Repair and patch defective areas with cement mortar immediately after removal of forms, but only when acceptable to the Architect/Engineer. Remove and replace damaged Denton Fire Station No. 8 CONCRETE PAVING MJ Thomas Engineering, LLC. 321313-7 August 2019 concrete as directed by Engineer. B. Cut out honeycomb, rock pockets, voids over ½” diameter, and holes left by tie rods and bolts, down to solid concrete, but in no case to a depth of less than 1". Make edge of cuts perpendicular to the concrete surface. Before placing cement mortar, thoroughly clean, dampen with water and brush-coat the area to be patched with neat cement grout. Proprietary patching compounds may be used when acceptable to the Architect/Engineer. END OF SECTION Denton Fire Station No. 8 SEALANTS AND CAULKINGS MJ Thomas Engineering, LLC. 321373-1 August 2019 SECTION 321373 SEALANTS AND CAULKINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Provisions established within the General and Supplementary General Conditions of the Contract, Division 1 - General Requirements, and the Drawings are collectively applicable to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Sealing and caulking of joints. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 321313 - Concrete Paving 2. Section 033000 - Cast-In-Place Concrete 1.03 REFERENCES A. American National Standards Institute/American Society for Testing and Materials (ANSI/ASTM): 1. ANSI/ASTM D 1056 - Flexible Cellular Materials - Sponge or Expanded Rubber. 2. ANSI/ASTM D 1565 - Flexible Cellular Materials - Vinyl Chloride Polymers and Copolymers (Open-Cell Foam). 3. ASTM C790 - Use of Latex Sealing Compounds. 4. ASTM C804 - Use of Solvent - Release Type Sealants. 5. ASTM C834 - Latex Sealing compounds. 6. ASTM C920 - Elastomeric Joint Sealants. 7. ASTM C962 - Use of Elastomeric Joint Sealers. B. Federal Specification (FS): 1. FS TT-C-00598 - Caulking Compound, Oil and Resin Base Type. 2. FS TT-S-001657 - Sealing Compound, Single Component, Butyl Rubber Based, solvent Release Type. 3. FS TT-S-00227 - Sealing Compound: Elastomeric Type, Multi-Component. 4. FS TT-S-00230 - Sealing Compound: Elastomeric Type, Single Component. 5. FS TT-S-001543 - Sealing Compound, Silicone Rubber Base. C. SWI (Sealing and Waterproofers Institute) - Sealant and Caulking Guide Specification. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 012300 Alternates and 013323 Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples. B. Submit product data indicating sealant chemical characteristics, performance criteria, limitations, color availability and application instructions. C. Submit two samples 1/4 inch diameter x 4 inches in size illustrating color selections available. D. Submit manufacturer’s certificate under provisions of Section 012300 Alternates and 013323 Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples that products meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this Section with minimum 3 years documented experience. B. Applicator: Company specializing in applying the work of this Section with minimum 3 years documented experience and approved by sealant manufacturer. C. Conform to Sealant and Waterproofers Institute requirements for materials and installation. Denton Fire Station No. 8 SEALANTS AND CAULKINGS MJ Thomas Engineering, LLC. 321373-2 August 2019 1.06 FIELD SAMPLES A. Provide samples under provisions of Section 012300 Alternates and 013323 Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples. B. Construct one field sample joint, 5 feet long, illustrating sealant type, color, and tooled surface. C. Locate where directed. D. Accepted sample may remain as part of the Work. 1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: No caulking shall be done at temperatures below 40°F. 1.08 WARRANTY A. Furnish to the Owner a written warranty that the caulking shall remain watertight for a period of 2 years from the date of acceptance of the project. Joints which prove defective by leaking, cracking, melting or shrinking of the sealant shall be re-sealed without additional expense to the Owner. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Polyurethane (Type 2 Sealant): 1. Two-part conforming to FS TT-S-00227E, Class A, Type I (self-leveling) and ASTM- 920. 2. Color: Custom color as selected by Architect. 3. Acceptable products a. Urexpan NR-00, Pecora Corp. b. Sonolastic Paving Joint Sealant, Sonneborn-Contech. c. THC 900 (Self leveling) or 901 (low sag), Tremco. NO SUBSTITUTIONS 2.02 ACCESSORIES A. Primer: Non-staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application. B. Joint Cleaner: Non-corrosive and non-staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer; compatible with joint forming materials. C. Joint Backing: Refer to Section 321313 Concrete Paving for expansion joint filler. D. Bond Breaker: Pressure sensitive tape recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that surfaces and joint openings are ready to receive work and field measurements are as shown on Drawings and recommended by the manufacturer. B. Beginning of installation means installer accepts existing substrate. Denton Fire Station No. 8 SEALANTS AND CAULKINGS MJ Thomas Engineering, LLC. 321373-3 August 2019 3.02 PREPARATION A. Joint surfaces shall be clean and dry. Remove loose mortar and other material completely with compressed air or by brushing. 1. Joints to be caulked shall be at least 1/4" wide. At any point where the width of the joint is appreciably less, cut or grind out the joint to that width to assure an adequate volume of sealant along the length of the joint. 2. Pack with backing material the voids and recesses around metal frames which are deeper than the depth required for caulking. Leave the proper depth for the sealant. 3. Particular attention shall be paid to the preparation of horizontal joints in war surfaces to be filled with sealant. Adjust joint depth to comply with sealant manufacturer’s recommendations by malleting down the joint filler or filling in with rod stock as may be required. 4. Perform preparation in accordance with ASTM C804 for solvent release sealants, C790 for latex base sealants, and C962 for elastomeric sealants 3.03 APPLICATION A. Priming: prime porous joint surfaces, particularly concrete. Test the primer to make sure it causes no staining of the material on which it is applied. B. Depth of sealant: Seal joints to a depth of approximately 2” the joint width, but never less than 1/4" deep. Follow the sealant manufacturer’s recommendations where possible. C. Apply the sealant in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. 1. Force the sealant into joints with enough pressure to expel all air and provide a solid filling. Correct any flowing or sagging before final inspection is made. 2. Where adjacent surfaces permit, use masking tape to obtain straight, even lines. Remove tape immediately after the joints have been sealed. 3. Fill joints flush with adjacent surfaces except where a recessed joint is specifically detailed. Tool beads with a sled runner or similar tool to insure full contact with joint faces. 4. For caulking horizontal joints in wear surfaces, use a gun with a narrow nozzle. Apple the flow type sealant with the nozzle riding along the bottoms so that the sealant is forced up to completely fill the slot without cavities. Provide and use a portable vacuum cleaner to remove loose dirt from the joints just ahead of the caulking gun. D. Install sealant free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter, ridges, and sage. E. Tool joins concave. Sealant shall achieve a firm skin before surface coating is applied. 3.04 CLEANING/REPAIRING A. Clean adjacent surfaces of soiling due to caulking operations. This applicator shall be responsible for and shall bear the cost of replacing any material damaged or discolored due to caulking operations. B. Repair or replace defaced or disfigured finishes caused by work of this Section. 3.05 SEALANT SCHEDULE A. Locations specified below for sealant required under this section are general and shall not be considered as affecting the required use of sealing compounds specified under other sections of the specifications. 3.06 SEALANT TYPE APPLICATION A. Horizontal control and expansion joints in concrete paving and at junctures between this material and other adjacent materials. END OF SECTION Denton Fire Station No. 8 PARKING BUMPERS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 321713-1 August 2019 SECTION 321713 – PARKING BUMPERS PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes precast concrete wheel stops. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 PARKING BUMPERS A. Concrete Wheel Stops: Unless noted otherwise in Drawings by Civil engineer or dictated by City in which Project is located, provide precast, steel-reinforced, air-entrained concrete, 4000-psi minimum compressive strength, 6-inch high X 10-inch wide X 72-inch long. Provide chamfered corners, transverse drainage slots on underside, and a minimum of two factory-formed or -drilled vertical holes through wheel stop for anchoring to substrate. 1. Surface Appearance: Free of pockets, sand streaks, honeycombs, and other obvious defects. Corners shall be uniform, straight, and sharp. 2. Mounting Hardware: Galvanized-steel spike or dowel, 1/2-inchdiameter, 12-inch minimum length, 2 per stop. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that pavement is in suitable condition to begin installation according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: Install wheel stops according to manufacturer's written instructions unless otherwise indicated. B. Securely anchor wheel stops to pavement with hardware in each preformed vertical hole in wheel stop as recommended in writing by manufacturer. Recess head of hardware beneath top of wheel stop. END OF SECTION Denton Fire Station No. 8 PAVEMENT MARKINGS MJ Thomas Engineering, LLC. 321723-1 August 2019 SECTION 32 17 23 PAVEMENT MARKINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE Provide all labor, materials and equipment necessary to paint all parking stripes as indicated on the Drawings and as specified herein on concrete or asphalt paving. 1.02 PROTECTION The Contractor shall protect his own work and adjacent surfaces from damage or splatters with suitable coverings. Take every precaution to avoid danger of fire. Remove oily rags, waste, and empty cans from site every night. 1.03 DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. Deliver materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact. B. Store materials and equipment in an approved area. Store rags, paint, and solvents in closed metal containers located in designated area. Use adequate means and precautions to prevent fire, explosions and other damage caused by paint materials. 1.04 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Provisions established within the General and Supplementary General Conditions of the Contract, Division 1 - General Requirements, and the Drawings are collectively applicable to this Section. 1.05 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Pavement marking on concrete paving. 1.06 REFERENCES A. Federal Specification (Fed. Spec.) Fed Spec. TT-P-115E Paint, Traffic, Highway, White, and per City requirements, color for fire lanes. 1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: Apply paint when ambient temperature is 50°F or above, and relative humidity is below 85%. 1.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer: Shall have a minimum of 2 years experience in the layout and striping of parking lots. B. Job Conditions: Do not apply marking paint when weather is foggy or rainy, or ambient or pavement temperatures are below 40°F, nor when such conditions are anticipated during eight hours after application. 1.09 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer’s product data and installation instructions. B. Substitutions: Submit in accordance with of Section 012300 Alternates and 013323 Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples. Denton Fire Station No. 8 PAVEMENT MARKINGS MJ Thomas Engineering, LLC. 321723-2 August 2019 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Traffic Paint: Fed. Spec. TT-P-115E, Type III alkyd-chlorinated rubber-chlorinated paraffin marking paint. Fire lane stripes shall be per City requirements. Provide Premium Chlorinated Rubber Base Paint as manufactured by Transline: Phone (800) 321-1751 or approved equal. B. Paint Schedule is as follows, see plans for locations and if required: Parking Stall Stripes: Handicap Parking Stripes and Crosswalks: Fire Lane Striping: Lettering on yellow or white stripes: Lettering on red or blue ACR-Stripe (White) ACR-Stripe (White) ACR-Stripe (Red) ACR-Stripe (Black) ACR-Stripe (White) C. Cleaning Solvent: VM & P Naphtha. D. When striping must be removed from existing concrete paving (see Site Plan for possible locations), striping shall be water or sandblasted to expose the concrete beneath. 2.02 EQUIPMENT A. Applicators: Hand-operated push type marking machine or conventional airless spray equipment with guide lines and templates. 2.03 WORKMANSHIP A. All work shall be done by experienced, skilled craftsmen. All finishes shall be applied in accordance with manufacturer’s printed directions. All finishes shall be applied evenly and be free from runs, skips or other defects. B. Do not apply paint during extremely hot weather or when air and/or surface temperature is below 50 degrees Fahrenheit or if rain is imminent. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Surface Conditions: Clean and dry free from dirt, loose paint, oil, grease, wax, and other contaminants. B. Concrete Surfaces: Allow concrete to cure a minimum of 90 days prior to application of marking paint. C. Existing Concrete and Asphalt Surfaces: Shall be swept clean of all debris, including grease. D. Equipment Condition: Clean previously used paint and solvent from application equipment, using VM & P Naphtha. E. Paint: Stir contents thoroughly from bottom of container. Do not thin paint. F. Locate markings as indicated on Drawings. Provide qualified technician to supervise equipment and application of markings. Lay out markings using guide lines, templates and forms. G. Allow paving to cure before painting as required by manufacturer of traffic paint. H. Apply primer for all locations to receive paint. 3.02 APPLICATION A. Two (2) coats minimum at the rate of 8.0 mils dry film thickness. B. Fire Lane Striping: Stripe fire lanes as shown on the plans and as required to meet City requirements. Denton Fire Station No. 8 PAVEMENT MARKINGS MJ Thomas Engineering, LLC. 321723-3 August 2019 C. Directional Striping and Painting: Stripe and paint all directional stripes pavement markings. D. Stripes shall be 4” wide unless shown otherwise. E. Apply striping as shown on the drawings by power spray or other approved method. 3.03 CLEANING A. Upon completion of the work, remove all spatterings, spots and blemishes caused by this work. Remove all extra materials from the job site and leave buildings and grounds in neat, clean and finished condition. END OF SECTION Denton Fire Station No. 8 STEEL ROLL GATE SYSTEM Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 323100-1 August 2019 SECTION 323100 – STEEL ROLL GATE SYSTEM (Deduct Alternate No. 1) PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. The contractor shall provide all labor, materials and appurtenances necessary for installation of the steel roll gate system defined herein at City of Denton Fire Station. 1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. The manufacturer shall supply a total roll gate system of the Ameristar® PassPort II Industrial Ornamental design series and Genesis style. The system shall include all components (i.e., pickets, rails, gate uprights, wheels and hardware) required. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The contractor shall provide laborers and supervisors who are thoroughly familiar with the type of construction involved and materials and techniques specified. 1.4 SUBMITTAL A. The manufacturer’s submittal package consisting of gate elevations, hardware details, and installation details shall be submitted prior to installation. 1.5 PRODUCT HANDLING AND STORAGE A. Upon receipt at the job site, all materials shall be checked to ensure that no damage occurred during shipping or handling. Materials shall be stored in such a manner to ensure proper ventilation and drainage, and to protect against damage, weather, vandalism and theft. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURER A. The steel roll gate system shall conform to the Ameristar® PassPort II Industrial Ornamental design series gate, Genesis style and 2-Rail frame configuration manufactured by Ameristar Fence Products, Inc., in Tulsa, Oklahoma. For questions, please contact Emily Sullivan at 888-333-3422. 1. Gate Width: As required for 25-foot clear opening (24-foot drive way and curbs). 2. Gate Height: 6 feet 3. Travel Direction: Left ( travel to open position viewed from outside fence line looking in) B. Substitutions: Submit in accordance with Section 012500. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Steel material for roll gate components (i.e. pickets, rails, diagonals and uprights), shall be commercial steel with a minimum yield strength of 45,000 psi (344 MPa). B. Ornamental picket material shall be 1” square x 14 Ga. Tubing. Picket spacing shall be 4-3/4”. Material for top rails, uprights and diagonals rails shall be 2” square x 12 Ga. Material for the bottom rail shall be 2” x 4” x 11 Ga. Posts shall be a minimum of 4” square x 11 Ga. C. Provide "Emergency Release Lever" in padlocked box, accessible from outside the gate. 2.3 FABRICATION A. Pickets/pales, rails, uprights and posts shall be precut to specified lengths. Diagonals shall be precut to specified lengths and angles. Frame materials shall be joined by welding. Pickets/pales shall be face welded to roll gate frame, except for Invincible or Gauntlet style gates over 18’ long. Invincible or Gauntlet style gates over 18’ long shall have pickets face-welded to 2” x 2” angle iron to form panels equal in length to the gate frame bay width. B. The manufactured roll gates and bolt-on panels (if applicable) shall be subjected to the PermaCoat® thermal stratification coating process (high-temperature, in-line, multi-stage, multi-layer) including, as a minimum, a six-stage pre-treatment/wash (with zinc phosphate), an electrostatic spray application of an epoxy base, and a separate electrostatic spray application of a polyester finish. The base coat shall be a thermosetting epoxy powder coating (gray in color) with a minimum thickness of 2 mils (0.0508mm). The topcoat shall be a “no-mar” TGIC polyester powder coat finish with a minimum thickness of 2 mils (0.0508mm). The color shall be Black. The stratification-coated framework shall be capable of meeting the performance requirements for each quality characteristic shown in Table 1. C. Completed gates shall be capable of supporting a 200 lb. load applied at midspan without permanent deformation. Denton Fire Station No. 8 STEEL ROLL GATE SYSTEM Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 323100-2 August 2019 PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. All new installation shall be laid out by the contractor in accordance with the construction plans. 3.2 GATE INSTALLATION A. Gate posts shall be set in accordance with the spacings shown in the construction plans. The “Earthwork” and “Concrete” sections shall govern post base material requirements, but not less than minimum 36” deep. 6” wheels shall be bolted to the gate (between the wheel plates welded near the ends of the gate bottom rail). That gate shall be set upright with the V-grooved wheels positioned over the pre-installed steel V-track that traverses the gate opening. Roller guides shall be affixed to the gate posts at a height even with the gate top rail to hold the gate in a vertical position. Gate stops shall be welded to the end of the gate or track so gate cannot pass rollers in either direction. 3.3 GATE INSTALLATION MAINTENANCE A. When cutting/drilling posts adhere to the following steps to seal the exposed steel surfaces; 1. Remove all metal shavings from cut area. 2. Apply zinc-rich primer to thoroughly cover cut edge and/or drilled hole; let dry. 3. Apply 2 coats of custom finish paint matching fence color. Failure to seal exposed surfaces per steps 1-3 above will negate warranty. Ameristar spray cans or paint pens shall be used to prime and finish exposed surfaces; it is recommended that paint pens be used to prevent overspray. Use of non-Ameristar parts or components will negate the manufactures’ warranty. 3.4 CLEANING A. The contractor shall clean the jobsite of excess materials; post-hole excavations shall be scattered uniformly away from posts. Table 1 –Coating Performance Requirements Quality Characteristics ASTM Test Method Performance Requirements Adhesion D3359 – Method B Adhesion (Retention of Coating) over 90% of test area (Tape and knife test). Corrosion Resistance B117, D714 & D1654 Corrosion Resistance over 1,500 hours (Scribed per D1654; failure mode is accumulation of 1/8” coating loss from scribe or medium #8 blisters). Impact Resistance D2794 Impact Resistance over 60 inch lb. (Forward impact using 0.625” ball). Weathering Resistance D822 D2244, D523 (60˚ Method) Weathering Resistance over 1,000 hours (Failure mode is 60% loss of gloss or color variance of more than 3 delta-E color units). END OF SECTION Denton Fire Station No. 8 STEEL ORNAMENTAL FENCE SYSTEM Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 323119-1 August 2019 SECTION 323119 – STEEL ORNAMENTAL FENCE SYSTEM (Deduct Alternate No. 1) PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. The contractor shall provide all labor, materials and appurtenances necessary for installation of the welded ornamental steel fence system defined herein at City of Denton Fire Station. 1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. The manufacturer shall supply a total fence system of Montage Industrial® Welded and Rackable (ATF – All Terrain Flexibility) Ornamental Steel Genesis design. The system shall include all components (i.e., panels, posts, gates and hardware) required. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The contractor shall provide laborers and supervisors who are thoroughly familiar with the type of construction involved and materials and techniques specified. 1.4 SUBMITTAL A. The manufacturer’s literature shall be submitted prior to installation. 1.5 PRODUCT HANDLING AND STORAGE A. Upon receipt at the job site, all materials shall be checked to ensure that no damage occurred during shipping or handling. Materials shall be stored in such a manner to ensure proper ventilation and drainage, and to protect against damage, weather, vandalism and theft. 1.6 PRODUCT WARRANTY A. All structural fence components (i.e. rails, pickets, and posts) shall be warranted within specified limitations, by the manufacturer for a period of 20 years from date of original purchase. Warranty shall cover any defects in material finish, including cracking, peeling, chipping, blistering or corroding. B. Reimbursement for labor necessary to restore or replace components that have been found to be defective under the terms of manufactures warranty shall be guaranteed for five (5) years from date of original purchase. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURER A. The fence system shall conform to Montage Industrial Welded and Rackable (ATF – All Terrain Flexibility) Ornamental Steel, Genesis design, Extended Picket bottom rail treatment, 2-Rail style manufactured by Ameristar Fence Products, Inc., in Tulsa, Oklahoma. For questions, please contact Emily Sullivan at 888-333-3422. B. Substitutions: Submit in accordance with Section 012500. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Steel material for fence panels and posts shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A653/A653M, with a minimum yield strength of 45,000 psi (344 MPa) and a minimum zinc (hot-dip galvanized) coating weight of 0.60 oz/ft2 (184 g/m2), Coating Designation G-60. B. Material for pickets shall be 1” square x 16 Ga. tubing. The rails shall be steel channel, 1.75” x 1. 75” x 0.105”. Picket holes in the rail shall be spaced 4.715” o.c. Fence posts and gate posts shall meet the minimum size requirement of Table 1. C. Provide "Emergency Release Lever" in padlocked box, accessible from outside the gate. 2.3 FABRICATION A. Pickets, rails and posts shall be pre-cut to specified lengths. Rails shall be pre-punched to accept pickets. B. Pickets shall be inserted into the pre-punched holes in the rails and shall be aligned to standard spacing using a specially calibrated alignment fixture. The aligned pickets and rails shall be joined at each picket - to-rail intersection by Ameristar’s proprietary fusion welding process, thus completing the rigid panel assembly (Note: The process produces a virtually seamless, spatter-free good-neighbor appearance, equally attractive from either side of the panel). C. The manufactured panels and posts shall be subjected to an inline electrodeposition coating (E-Coat) process consisting of a multi-stage pretreatment/wash (with zinc phosphate), followed by a duplex application of an epoxy primer and an acrylic topcoat. The minimum cumulative coating thickness of Denton Fire Station No. 8 STEEL ORNAMENTAL FENCE SYSTEM Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 323119-2 August 2019 epoxy and acrylic shall be 2 mils (0.058 mm). The color shall be Black. The coated panels and posts shall be capable of meeting the performance requirements for each quality characteristic shown in Table 2 (Note: The requirements in Table 2 meet or exceed the coating performance criteria of ASTM F2408). D. The manufactured fence system shall be capable of meeting the vertical load, horizontal load, and infill performance requirements for Industrial weight fences under ASTM F2408. E. Swing gates shall be fabricated using 1.75” x 14ga Forerunner double channel rail, 2” sq. x 12ga. gate ends, and 1” sq. x 14ga. pickets. Gates that exceed 6’ in width will have a 1.75” sq. x 14ga. intermediate upright. All rail and upright intersections shall be joined by welding. All picket and rail intersections shall also be joined by welding. Gusset plates will be welded at each upright to rail intersection. Cable kits will be provided for additional trussing for all gates leaves over 6’. F. Pedestrian swing gates shall be self-closing, having a gate leaf no larger than 48” width. Integrated hinge- closer set (2 qty) shall be ADA compliant that shall include a variable speed and final snap adjustment with compact design (no greater than 5” x 6” footprint). Hinge-closer set (2 qty) shall be tested to a minimum of 500,000 cycles and capable of self-closing gates up to a maximum gate weight of 260 lbs. and maximum weight load capacity of 1,500 lbs. Hinge-closer device shall be externally mounted with tamper-resistant security fasteners, with full range of adjustability, horizontal (.5” - 1.375”) and vertical (0 -.5”). Maintenance free hinge-closer set shall be tested to operate in temperatures of negative 20 F to 200 F degrees, and swings to negative 2 degrees to ensure reliable final lock engagement. 1. Provide security mesh in same finish as other fencing components as required to prevent access from outside without key or valid credentials. 2. Provide solid panel in size and location required for gate hardware attachment. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. All new installation shall be laid out by the contractor in accordance with the construction plans. 3.2 FENCE INSTALLATION A. Fence post shall be spaced according to Table 3, plus or minus ½”. For installations that must be raked to follow sloping grades, the post spacing dimension must be measured along the grade. Fence panels shall be attached to posts with brackets supplied by the manufacturer. Posts shall be set in concrete footers having a minimum depth of 36” (Note: In some cases, local restrictions of freezing weather conditions may require a greater depth). The “Earthwork” and “Concrete” sections shall govern material requirements for the concrete footer. Posts setting by other methods such as plated posts or grouted core-drilled footers are permissible only if shown by engineering analysis to be sufficient in strength for the intended application. 3.3 FENCE INSTALLATION MAINTENANCE A. When cutting/drilling rails or posts adhere to the following steps to seal the exposed steel surfaces; 1. Remove all metal shavings from cut area. 2. Apply zinc-rich primer to thoroughly cover cut edge and/or drilled hole; let dry. 3. Apply 2 coats of custom finish paint matching fence color. Failure to seal exposed surfaces per steps 1-3 above will negate warranty. Ameristar spray cans or paint pens shall be used to prime and finish exposed surfaces; it is recommended that paint pens be used to prevent overspray. Use of non-Ameristar parts or components will negate the manufactures’ warranty. 3.4 GATE INSTALLATION A. Gate posts shall be spaced according to the manufacturers’ gate drawings, dependent on standard out -to- out gate leaf dimensions and gate hardware selected. Type and quantity of gate hinges shall be based on the application; weight, height, and number of gate cycles. The manufacturers’ gate drawings shall identify the necessary gate hardware required for the application. Gate hardware shall be provided by the manufacturer of the gate and shall be installed per manufacturer’s recommendations. 3.5 CLEANING A. The contractor shall clean the jobsite of excess materials; post-hole excavations shall be scattered uniformly away from posts. Denton Fire Station No. 8 STEEL ORNAMENTAL FENCE SYSTEM Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 323119-3 August 2019 Table 1 –Minimum Sizes for Montage Industrial Posts Fence Posts Panel Height 2-1/2” x 14 Ga. Up to & Including 6’ Height 2-1/2” x 12 Ga. Over 6’ Up to & Including 8’ Height Gate Leaf Gate Height Up to & Including 4’ Over 4’ Up to & Including 6’ Over 6’ Up to & Including 8’ Up to 4’ 2-1/2” x 12 Ga. 3” x 12 Ga. 3” x 12 Ga. 4’1” to 6’ 3” x 12Ga. 4” x 11 Ga. 4” x 11 Ga. 6’1” to 8’ 3” x 12 Ga. 4” x 11 Ga. 6” x 3/16” 8’1” to 10’ 4” x 11 Ga. 6” x 3/16” 6” x 3/16” 10’1” to 12’ 4” x 11 Ga. 6” x 3/16” 6” x 3/16” 12’1” to 14’ 4” x 11 Ga. 6” x 3/16” 6” x 3/16” 14’1” to 16’ 6” x 3/16” 6” x 3/16” 6” x 3/16” Table 2 –Coating Performance Requirements Quality Characteristics ASTM Test Method Performance Requirements Adhesion D3359 – Method B Adhesion (Retention of Coating) over 90% of test area (Tape and knife test). Corrosion Resistance B117, D714 & D1654 Corrosion Resistance over 1,500 hours (Scribed per D1654; failure mode is accumulation of 1/8” coating loss from scribe or medium #8 blisters). Impact Resistance D2794 Impact Resistance over 60 inch lb. (Forward impact using 0.625” ball). Weathering Resistance D822 D2244, D523 (60˚ Method) Weathering Resistance over 1,000 hours (Failure mode is 60% loss of gloss or color variance of more than 3 delta-E color units). Table 3 –Montage Industrial –Post Spacing By Bracket Type Span For INVINCIBLE® 8’ Nominal (91-1/2” Rail) For CLASSIC, GENESIS, & MAJESTIC 8’ Nominal (92-5/8” Rail) Post Size 2-1/2” 3” 2-1/2” 3” 2-1/2” 3” 2-1/2” 3” 2-1/2” 3” Bracket Type Industrial Flat Mount (BB301)* Industrial Line 2-1/2” (BB319) 3” (BB320) Industrial Universal 2.5” (BB302) 3” (BB303) Industrial Flat Mount (BB301) Industrial Swivel (BB304)* Post Settings ± ½” O.C. 94-1/2” 95” 94-1/2” 95” 96” 96-1/2” 96” 96-1/2” *96” *96-1/2” *Note: When using BB304 swivel brackets on either or both ends of a panel installation, care must be taken to ensure the spacing between post and adjoining pickets meets applicable codes. This will require trimming one or both ends of the panel. When using the BB301 flat mount bracket for Invincible style, rail may need to be drilled to accommodate rail to bracket attachment. END OF SECTION Denton Fire Station No. 8 VEHICULAR SLIDE GATE OPERATOR Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 323132-1 August 2019 SECTION 323132 – VEHICULAR SLIDE GATE OPERATOR (Deduct Alternate No. 1) PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Electric gate operators: DoorKing Model 9150. 2. Furnish and install a complete microprocessor based vehicular slide gate operator system, with a solid-state board to control all functions of the slide gate operator, as described herein and shown on the plans. Include all necessary control boards, power supplies, loop detectors, connectors, and accessories for a complete operational system. 1.3 RELATED WORK A. Section 323100 – Steel Roll Gate System B. Section 323119 – Steel Ornamental Fence System C. Parking control and gate operator systems contractor shall coordinate all work with other contractors and trades where necessary. D. All necessary conduit, raceways and pull boxes shall be installed by the electrical contractor. E. Installation of the vehicular slide gate operator system shall be coordinated with the installation of other parking control related systems. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Substantial transformation and final assembly shall occur in the United States of America per Section 1605 of the ARRA-09. B. Installer Qualifications: Installation performed by factory authorized dealer contractor specifically trained in gate operator systems of the type found within this section. 1. Provide documentation of maintenance and repair service availability within four (4) hours of notification for emergency conditions. 2. Provide quarterly maintenance for one year following Substantial Completion of the Project. C. Installation shall comply with all applicable codes. D. All equipment shall be new, in current production, and the standard products of a manufacturer of vehicular gate operator equipment. E. If required, manufacturer shall be able to demonstrate features, functions and operating characteristics to the Owner. 1.5 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Vehicular Slide Gate Operator shall be in compliance with Underwriter Laboratories Inc. (UL) Standard for Safety - Door, Drapery, Gate, Louver and Window Operators and Systems, UL 325 Fourth Edition; and Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL) Standard for Safety - Tests for Safety- Related Controls Employing Solid-State Devices, UL 991 Second Edition. B. Vehicular Slide Gate Operator shall be tested for compliance to UL 325 and UL 991 and shall be LISTED by a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL). C. Vehicular slide gate fabrication, construction and installation shall conform to ASTM F2200; Standard Specification for Automated Vehicular Gate Construction. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Provisions: Comply with Section 013300 - Submittals. B. Shall include an equipment list, data sheet(s), system description, block diagrams on equipment to be furnished and electrical wiring diagrams for installation. a. Provide weight of gate to confirm motor HP size option. C. Shall include all data necessary to evaluate design, quality and configuration of proposed equipment and system(s). 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, and handle materials and products in strict compliance with manufacturer’s instructions and industry standards. B. Store products indoors in manufacturer’s original containers and packaging with labels clearly identifying Denton Fire Station No. 8 VEHICULAR SLIDE GATE OPERATOR Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 323132-2 August 2019 product name and manufacturer. Protect from damage. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer’s standard five (5) year warranty. B. Manufacturer shall not be responsible for improper use, handling, or installation of the product. C. Installing contractor shall guarantee the equipment, wire and installation for 12-months from date of acceptance. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURER A. Acceptable Manufacturer: DoorKing, Inc.; 120 S Glasgow Ave; Inglewood, CA 90301; Telephone: 800-826- 0023; Web: doorking.com. B. Substitutions: Submit in accordance with Section 012500. 2.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Slide Gate Operator: 1. The slide gate operator shall use a microprocessor based solid-state control board that controls all functions of the slide gate operator. Operator shall be rated for continuous duty for use in residential, commercial and industrial applications. 2. Primary reduction system shall employ an adjustable clutch and power transfer shall be provided by single cog belt drive train. 3. Operator shall employ magnetic sensing to set open and close limit adjustment. Mechanical type limit switches shall not be allowed. 4. Operator shall automatically set both open and close limit adjustments upon power-up and activation in the open direction. Operator shall automatically sense for any gate coasting to insure true limit settings. 5. Pulling medium shall provide a positive mechanical connection to the gate system. Friction driven rail type pulling mediums shall not be allowed. Roller chain pulling medium shall be minimum size #40. 6. A positive dead bolt shall activate only when the gate is forced open, to reduce solenoid lock wear and failure. 7. Operator shall be capable of being mounted at the front, center or rear of the gate system, shall be designed for either left or right hand mount and shall be designed for pad or post mounting. 8. Operator frame shall use 12-gauge G90 galvanized steel to avoid rusting and shall be painted charcoal gray with polyester powder coat, exterior grade semi-gloss texture.. 9. Operator shall have two 115 VAC convenience outlets available for accessory transformer power and shall have a built-in lockable power disconnect and reset switch. B. Control Circuit: 1. Control board shall have connections for optional Gate Tracker board. Gate tracker shall record operator cycles (x100), input errors, loop detector errors, obstruction hits, and power up events. Record shall be time and date stamped. 2. Control board shall allow a stop or a stop and reverse function (settable) from a safety related input. 3. Control board shall have two ports for plug in of vehicular loop detectors, (DoorKing Models 9409 or 9410). 4. A dry set of relay contacts shall be available for external use, and shall have four programmable functions. 5. A special input shall allow the gate to be partially opened. 6. A timer override function shall cause an opening gate to stop and then reverse direction when the reverse loop(s) or reverse input is clear even if the gate has not reached the full open position, to help reduce tailgating. 7. Control board shall have separate inputs for external contact and non-contact entrapment protection devices. 8. Functions will be user programmable by DIP-switches located on the control board. C. Fail-Safe Operation: 1. To prioritize safety over security, operator shall assume a fail-safe mode in the event of a power loss or if an entrapment is sensed (entrapment alarm activated). a. Operator shall revert to a fail-safe mode allowing the gate to be pushed open without any special knowledge or use of any special cranks, keys or other devices. D. Entrapment Prevention: Denton Fire Station No. 8 VEHICULAR SLIDE GATE OPERATOR Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 323132-3 August 2019 1. Non-contact sensors, or contact sensors, or combination thereof, shall be utilized to prevent persons from becoming entrapped in the gate system. 2. Warning signs shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer’s installation instructions and UL 325 guidelines. E. Convenience Open Drive System: 1. A battery powered convenience open DC drive system shall be available as a factory installed option. 2. The DC drive system shall monitor the primary power source and shall power the gate open upon command, or automatically, if power to the operator is interrupted. 3. When power is restored, the DC drive system shall automatically set the operator to return to normal operation and disengage. 4. The system shall provide a trickle charge to the batteries to maintain nominal battery power levels. a. LIMITATIONS: This convenience open DC drive system is not intended to operate the vehicular gate operator continuously during a power interruption. Its sole purpose is to provide a convenient method to open the gate should a power interruption occur. For applications that require continuous back-up power, refer to the DoorKing Model 2000 Power Inverter System. F. Electronic Reverse: 1. The vehicular gate operator shall be equipped with an inherent electronic obstruction sensing system. The electronic sensing system shall automatically cause the gate operator to stop and reverse if an obstruction is sensed during the open or close cycle. 2. For enhanced safety, the control circuit shall check the obstruction sensing system circuit prior to the start of each cycle of operation. Should the control circuit detect a fault in the obstruction sensing system, the motor shall not be allowed to start. G. A complete operational system shall be provided. 2.3 EQUIPMENT A. Model 9150 Vehicular Slide Gate Operator: 1. Single cog belt drive train with adjustable clutch. 2. Automatic limit / coast magnetic adjustment system. 3. Solid-state control circuit and motor control. 4. Partial open limit feature. 5. Compliant to UL 325, UL 991 and CSA C22.2 No. 247 and listed by Intertek Testing Laboratories NA, Inc. (ETL), a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory. a. UL Class of Operation: I, II, III and IV. 6. #40 roller chain. 7. 1/2 HP a. 1000 lb maximum gate weight, 800 lb if convenience open option is installed. b. 30-ft maximum gate length, approximately 1-ft/sec gate speed. c. Operates at 115 VAC; 230 or 460 volt operation is available utilizing factory installed step down transformer. d. Typical current draw is 5.4 amps at 115 V; 2.7 amps at 230 V; 1.35 amps at 460 V. e. Dimensions: 24 inches high, 15 inches wide, 16.5 inches deep. 8. 1 HP a. 1500 lb maximum gate weight, 1300 lb if convenience open option is installed. b. 45-ft maximum gate length, approximately 1-ft/sec gate speed. c. Operates at 115 VAC; 230 or 460 volt operation is available utilizing factory installed step down transformer. d. Typical current draw is 9.7 amps at 115 V; 4.9 amps at 230 V; 2.5 amps at 460 V. e. Dimensions: 27.5 inches high, 28.5 inches wide, 16.5 inches deep. B. Entrapment Prevention: 1. Non-contact sensors (photo-cells). a. P/N 8080-010 Infrared thru-beam, 165 foot sensing distance. b. P/N 8080-011 Photo-reflective beam, 30 foot sensing distance. 2. Contact sensors. a. P/N 8080-015 Single-sided sensitivity with mounting channel. b. P/N 8080-020 Three-sided sensitivity with mounting channel. c. P/N 8080-021 Sensor designed to mount on 2 inch round post. d. P/N 8080-022 Sensor designed to mount on 2 inch square post. C. Options Included in this Work: 1. Vehicle Loop Detectors. Denton Fire Station No. 8 VEHICULAR SLIDE GATE OPERATOR Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 323132-4 August 2019 a. P/N 9410-010 Single channel detector. b. P/N 9409-010 Two channel detector. a. Installation depth and sealing with concrete paving as recommended by manufacturer. 2. Environmental Control a. P/N 1601-154 Heater kit. 3. Drive Chain. a. P/N 2600-444 Nickel plated drive chain, #40. 4. Post Mount Base Plate (if applicable). a. P/N 2600-495 Use to post mount the 9150 operator (mounting post are not included). 5. Gate Tracker: The vehicular slide gate operator shall have output for connection to Gate Tracker control board (P/N 2351-010). Gate Tracker shall maintain a detailed electronic record of cycles, input errors, loop detector errors, obstruction hits, and each time power is applied to the operator. This record shall be time and date stamped and shall be analyzed using the DoorKing Remote Account Manager for Windows software. a. DoorKing 1830 series telephone entry or access control system is required for Gate Tracker operations. 6. Convenience open (battery backup) drive system. 7. Opticom Gate Opener. a. Model 500632 Gate Opener Panel (powered off the gate operator and mounted within the enclosure) b. Model 762 Phase Selector (plugs into 500632 Gate Opener Panel) c. Model 138 Cable d. Model 721 Optical Detector 8. A complete operational system shall be provided. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Shall be installed by qualified technicians who have been factory trained and certified. B. Model 9150 shall be post or pad mounted, as required. 1. Post mount (requires DoorKing P/N 2600-495 base plate) a. Mounting posts shall be welded to base plate and mounted in concrete, plumb and level. 2. Pad mount a. Mounted directly to a concrete pad, plumb and level. C. Wiring shall be uniform and in accordance with national electric codes and manufacturer’s instructions. D. All splices shall be in easily accessible junction boxes or on terminal boards E. All cable runs in all junction boxes shall be tagged and identified. F. Coordinate all work with other effected trades and contractors. 3.2 SYSTEM INITIALIZING AND PROGRAMMING A. System shall be turned on and adjustment made to meet requirements of specifications and on-site conditions. B. System shall function as specified. 3.3 SYSTEM TEST PROCEDURES A. System shall be completely tested to assure that all components and accessories are hooked-up and in working order. B. System shall be pre-tested by contractor and certified to function in accordance with plans and specifications. C. System shall be tested in presence of owner's representative. 3.4 OWNER INSTRUCTIONS A. Installation contractor shall conduct up to (1) hour of instruction in use and operation of the system to designated owner representatives, within (30) days of acceptance. B. Installation contractor shall conduct up to (1) hour of technical training, in troubleshooting and service of the system, to designated owner representatives within (90) days of system acceptance. 3.5 MANUALS AND DRAWINGS A. Contractor shall provide owner with (2) copies of standard factory prepared operation, installation and Denton Fire Station No. 8 VEHICULAR SLIDE GATE OPERATOR Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 323132-5 August 2019 maintenance manuals. Manuals shall include typical wiring diagrams. B. Contractor shall provide owner with (2) copies of any risers, layouts, and special wiring diagrams showing any changes to standard drawings, if required on project. 3.6 MAINTENANCE A. The manufacturer recommends periodic maintenance at three month intervals as described in the installation and maintenance manual. B. External reversing devices should be checked at least once a month. END OF SECTION Denton Fire Station No. 8 LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION SYSTEM Christopher Russell Landscape Architecture 328400 August 2019 SECTION 32 84 00 LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL PROVISIONS Applicable requirements of the General Conditions and other sections of the Project Manual apply to this section. 1.2 SCOPE OF WORK A. Provide a complete and operable landscape irrigation system including all equipment not specifically specified herein or on drawings to meet requirements of all governing authorities. B. Provide a complete and operating lawn sprinkler installation as shown on the plans, including, but not limited to, the following items: 1. Tap, water meter, and double check valve. 2. Pipe and fittings. 3. Sprinkler heads. 4. Control system and connection to electrical supply. 5. Trenching, installation of system, connection to water source, testing, and backfilling. 6. Permits and Impact Fees (if required). 1.3 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 32 92 00 - Turf Establishment (Hydromulch) B. Section 32 93 00 - Landscaping C. Perform work in accordance with requirements of conditions of the contract and Division 01 - General Requirements as well as provisions of all applicable laws, codes, ordinances, rules, and regulations. D. Conform to requirements of reference information listed below except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified in Contract Documents. Denton Fire Station No. 8 LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION SYSTEM Christopher Russell Landscape Architecture 328400 August 2019 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) - Specifications and Test Methods specifically referenced in this Section. 2. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) - UL Wires and Cables. 1.4 APPLICABLE STANDARDS ASTM Sections: D2241 - Poly Vinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Pipe (SDR-PR) D2464 - Poly Vinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Threaded, Schedule 40 D2466 - Poly Vinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Socket Type, Schedule 40 D2564 - Solvent Cements for Poly Vinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Pipe and Fittings STANDARD RECOMMENDED PRACTICE FOR: D2855 - Making Solvent-Cemented Joints with Poly Vinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe and Fittings 1.5 GENERAL CONDITIONS SPECIFICALLY FOR LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION A. The Contractor will flag the location of all heads, electric valves, quick coupler valves, gate valves, automatic controllers, backflow preventors, etc., prior to construction for the Landscape Architect or Owner's approval. The Contractor shall report to the Landscape Architect any deviations between the irrigation plan, specifications, and the site. Failure to do so prior to the installation of the equipment (which subsequently requires replacement or relocation of the equipment) will result in the work being done at the Contractor's expense. B. All local, municipal, and state laws, ordinances, codes and regulations relating to, or governing of, any portion of this work are hereby incorporated into and made a part of these specifications and will be carried out by the Contractor. The Contractor must carry sufficient insurance coverage, and must be active in irrigation installation for a minimum of 5 years. C. Any permits needed for construction of the work included in this contract, which is required by any legally constituted authority having jurisdiction, shall be obtained by the Contractor. The Contractor shall pay for all costs in connection with any inspections or examinations required by these authorities. The Landscape Architect or Owner's Representative will be notified when these inspections are required. Any necessary work needed to be done by the Contractor as a result of these inspections will be performed at the Contractor's expense. Copies of all permits and inspection reports shall be forwarded to the Owner's Representative. Denton Fire Station No. 8 LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION SYSTEM Christopher Russell Landscape Architecture 328400 August 2019 1.6 GUARANTEE AND MAINTENANCE A. Material and workmanship shall be fully guaranteed for one year after the Date of Substantial Completion; replacement of defective material or repair of work shall be done at no expense to the Owner during the first year, except for repairs or replacements necessitated by damage of any kind not of the Contractor's making. Any reimbursement for repairs must have prior approval of the Owner's Representative. B. Raising and lowering heads to proper height, adjusting arc and radius, filling trenches that have settled, packing the earth firmly around the heads and quick couplers will all be considered part of warranty work and done at no charge to the Owner for one year after acceptance of system. C. The Contractor will extend to the Owner all of the warranties and guarantees provided by the manufacturer on all equipment used. Printed copies of such warranties and guarantees will be provided the Owner with final payment. D. Contractor will provide four (4) copies of service and maintenance manuals on all major items in the installation along with the request for final payment. E. The Contractor shall provide a minimum of three (3) hours of operating instructions to the Owner's designated representative. The Owner's representative will be notified at least one week in advance with a date for such instruction. Demonstrate the proper operation of each and every head, each electric valve, and each controller. F. Maintenance and guarantee as stated above does not include alterations necessitated by relandscaping, addition of trees, regrading, or the addition and changes in walks, walls, driveways, or the like. Further, maintenance does not include trimming grass around heads or any service required due to lack of the Owner's maintenance of lawns and plants. It is also expressly understood that the guarantee and maintenance, after final acceptance, does not cover any mechanical damage (breakage) or any repairs or service needed for causes beyond the control of this Contractor. G. Provide schedule indicating length of time each valve is required to be open to provide determined amount of water. H. Expenses due to vandalism or damage before substantial completion shall be borne by the Contractor. 1.7 SUBSTITUTIONS Sprinkler material shall be as specified. The sprinkler system has been designed according to the operating characteristics of the specified equipment. Therefore, no substitutions of equipment will be allowed except under provisions of Section 01630. Denton Fire Station No. 8 LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION SYSTEM Christopher Russell Landscape Architecture 328400 August 2019 1.8 RECORD DRAWINGS The Contractor is to provide record drawings on reproducible mylars as provided by the Owner. Information to be included will be the dimensional location of major components from permanent fixed points, such as buildings, walls, corners, sidewalks, curbs, etc. At least two actual measurement dimensions will be shown with a minimum of 75 degrees between the lines of measurement to each major item of the system, such as electric valves, quick couplers, main line shut-off valves, or wire splice boxes, etc. Single dimensions will be shown at appropriate intervals from permanent features to the main line piping and to the wire routing. Dimensions are to be recorded on the drawings so that maintenance personnel can locate and service these items. Since pipe routing shown on the plan is schematic by nature, actual routing shall be clearly indicated on the record drawing. 1.9 DEVIATION FROM PLANS The Irrigation Contractor is cautioned to defend the hydraulics of this system by following the plans and specifications carefully. Particular attention should be given to operating controllers in alternate sequence, by not operating the system until flow controls or section valves have been adjusted to proper operating pressure, by not installing additional tees or elbows unless approved by the Landscape Architect or Owner's representative by following the manufacturer's recommendations for installation of all items, etc. Prior to start of construction, the Contractor will confirm the static water pressure in writing to the Owner's representative. 1.10 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions stated elsewhere. B. Include piping layout to water source, list of fittings to be used, control system, and wiring diagrams and data. C. Provide one sprinkler head of each type, complete with housing. Accepted samples may be used in work. D. Controller charts - Do not prepare charts until record (as-built) drawings have been approved by Landscape Architect. 1. Provide one controller chart for each automatic controller installed. a. Chart may be same size reproduction of record drawing, if scale permits fitting inside controller door without folding drawing. If photo reduction prints are required keep reduction to maximum size possible to retain full legibility. b. Chart shall be blueline print of actual "as-built" system, showing area covered by that controller valve, using a Denton Fire Station No. 8 LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION SYSTEM Christopher Russell Landscape Architecture 328400 August 2019 distinctly different pastel color for each zone. Highlight heads, lateral piping, and control valve. 2. Identify area of coverage of each remote control valve, using a distinctly different pastel color for each zone. Highlight heads, lateral piping, and control valves. 3. Following review of charts by Landscape Architect, hermetically seal each chart between two layers of 20 mm thick clear plastic. 4. Charts shall be completed and approved by Landscape Architect prior to final completion walk-through of irrigation system. 5. Attach approved chart to inside of each controller door. E. Operation Manual: Submit 3 sets of operation manuals to Consultant for approval prior to scheduling final completion walk-through. Manual to include the following in 1"-3" ring binder: 1. Index sheet stating project name, and listing company, address, phone number and contact person of Owner, Consultant and Contractor, including Primary Sub-Contractors. 2. Written instructions for operation and maintenance of pumping equipment, fertilizer/chemical injectors (if applicable). 3. Manufacturer Technical Manual for controllers. 4. Manufacturer cut sheets for all heads, control valves, quick coupling valves, gate valves, controllers, drip irrigation components, and valve boxes. 1.11 QUALIFICATIONS AND REQUIREMENTS A. Installer Qualifications - Installer shall have had considerable experience and demonstrate ability in the installation of irrigation system(s) of specific type(s) in a neat, orderly, and responsible manner in accordance with recognized standards of workmanship. To demonstrate ability and experience necessary for this project, and financial stability, submit, prior to contract award the following: 1. List of 3 projects completed in the last 2 years of similar complexity to this project. Description of projects shall include: a. Name of project b. Location c. Owner d. Brief description of work and project budget Denton Fire Station No. 8 LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION SYSTEM Christopher Russell Landscape Architecture 328400 August 2019 B. Special Requirements: 1. Work involving substantial plumbing for installation of copper piping, backflow preventer(s), and related Work shall be executed by licensed and bonded plumber(s). Secure a permit at least 48 hours prior to start of installation. 2. Tolerances - Specified depths of mains and laterals and pitch of pipes are minimums. Settlement of trenches is cause for removal of finish grade treatment, refilling, recompaction, and repair of finish grade treatment. 3. Coordination with Other Contracts - Protect, maintain, and coordinate Work with Work under other Section. 4. Damage to Other Improvements - Contractor shall replace or repair damage to grading, soil preparation, seeding, sodding, or planting done under other Sections during Work associated with installation of irrigation system at no additional cost to Owner. C. Pre-Construction Conference - Contractor shall schedule and conduct a conference to review in detail quality control and construction requirements for equipment, materials, and systems used to perform the Work. Conference shall be scheduled not less than 10 days prior to commencement of Work. All parties required to be in attendance shall be notified no later than 7 days prior to date of conference. Contractor shall notify qualified representatives of each party concerned with that portion of Work to attend conference, including but not limited to Landscape Architect, Contractor's superintendent, and installer. 1. Minutes of conference shall be recorded and distributed by Contractor to all parties in attendance within five days of conference. 1.12 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING - Deliver, unload, store, and handle materials, packaging, bundling, products in dry, weatherproof, waterproof condition in manner to prevent damage, breakage, deterioration, intrusion, ignition, and vandalism. Deliver in original unopened packaging containers prominently displaying manufacturer name, volume, quantity, contents, instructions, and conformance to local, state, and federal law. Remove and replace cracked, broken, or contaminated items or elements prematurely exposed to moisture, inclement weather, snow, ice, temperature extremes, fire, or jobsite damage. A. Handling of PVC Pipe - Exercise care in handling, loading and storing of PVC pipe. All PVC pipe shall be transported in a vehicle which allows length of pipe to lie flat so as not to subject it to undue bending or concentrated external loads. All sections of pipe that have been dented or damaged shall be discarded, and if installed, shall be removed and replaced with new piping. Denton Fire Station No. 8 LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION SYSTEM Christopher Russell Landscape Architecture 328400 August 2019 1.13 JOBSITE CONDITIONS: A. Protection of Property: 1. Preserve and protect all trees, plants, monuments, structures, and paved areas from damage due to Work of this Section. In the event damage does occur, all damage to inanimate items shall be completely repaired or replaced to satisfaction of Owner. All injury to living plants shall be repaired by Owner, and all costs of such repairs shall be charged to and paid by Contractor. 2. Protect buildings, walks, walls, and other property from damage. Flag and barricade open ditches. Damage caused to asphalt, concrete, or other building material surfaces shall be repaired or replaced at no cost to Owner. Restore disturbed areas to original condition. B. Existing Trees (if required): 1. All trenching or other Work under limb spread of any and all evergreens or low branching deciduous materials shall be done by hand or by other methods so as to prevent damage to limbs or branches. 2. Where it is necessary to excavate adjacent to existing trees, use all possible care to avoid injury to trees and tree roots. Excavation, in areas where 2 inch and larger roots occur, shall be done by hand. Roots 2 inches or larger in diameter, except directly in the path of pipe or conduit, shall be tunneled under and shall be heavily wrapped with burlap to prevent scarring or excessive drying. Where a trenching machine is operated close to trees having roots smaller than 2 inches in diameter, wall of trench adjacent to tree shall be hand trimmed, making clean cuts through roots. Roots 2 inches and larger in diameter shall be painted with two coats of "Tree Seal." Trenches adjacent to trees shall be closed within 24 hours, and when this is not possible, side of trench adjacent to tree shall be kept shaded with moistened burlap or canvas. C. Protection and Repair of Underground Lines: 1. Request proper utility company to stake exact location (including depth) of all underground electric, gas, or telephone lines. Take whatever precautions are necessary to protect these underground lines from damage. If damage does occur, all damage shall be repaired by Contractor, and all costs of such repairs shall be paid by Contractor unless other arrangements have been made. D. Replacement of Paving and Curb - Where trenches and lines cross existing roadways, paths, curbing, etc., damage to these shall be kept to a minimum and shall be restored to original condition. Denton Fire Station No. 8 LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION SYSTEM Christopher Russell Landscape Architecture 328400 August 2019 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. "Sprinkler Mains" are that portion of piping from water source to operating valves. This portion of the piping is under constant pressure. B. "Lateral Piping" is that portion of the piping from operating valves to the sprinkler heads. This portion of the piping is under pressure during operation of the system. C. "Quick Coupling Valve Lines" are considered a part of the sprinkler main. 2.2 GENERAL PIPING A. Pressure Supply Line (from point of connection through backflow prevention unit) - Type 'K' Hard Copper. B. Pressure Supply Lines (downstream of backflow prevention units) - Schedule 40 PVC (1" - 2-1/2"). C. Non-Pressure Lines - Class 200 PVC BE. D. Drip Tubing - Agriculture Products, Inc. - Standard IPS flexible vinyl pipe. E. Emitter Tubing - by emitter manufacturer. 2.3 COPPER PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Copper Pipe - Type K, hard tempered. B. Fittings - Wrought copper, solder joint type. C. Joints - Soldered with solder, 45% silver, 15% copper, 16% zinc, and 24% cadmium and solidus at 1125 F and liquids at 1145 F. 2.4 BRASS PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Brass Pipe - 85% red brass, ANSI Schedule 40 screwed pipe. B. Fittings - Medium brass, screwed 125-pound class. 2.5 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE PIPE Denton Fire Station No. 8 LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION SYSTEM Christopher Russell Landscape Architecture 328400 August 2019 Polyvinyl chloride pipe (hereinafter referred to as PVC pipe) shall have been manufactured in accordance with the Product Standards as follows: A. Product Standard PS-22-70 shall apply and be the governing authority as applicable to main line piping and shall be SDR-21 (Class 200) specification. B. Product Standard PS 22-70 shall apply and be the governing authority, as applicable to PVC lateral piping, shall be per SDR-21 (Class 200) specification. 2 1/2" and smaller main line and lateral line piping will be solvent-weld joints. C. Marking and Identification: All PVC pipe shall be continuously and permanently marked with the following information: manufacturer's name, pipe size, type of pipe and material, SDR number, Commercial Standard Number and NSF (National Sanitation Foundation) Seal. 2.6 PIPE FITTINGS A. 2 1/2" and smaller pipefittings shall be PVC Schedule 40, as manufactured by the LASCO COMPANY, or equal. B. All PVC fittings shall be of the same material as the PVC pipe specified and shall be compatible with the PVC pipe furnished. C. Only solvent recommended by the manufacturer of the PVC pipe and the manufacturer of the PVC fittings shall be used. 2.7 LOW PRESSURE/VOLUME SYSTEMS A. Drip Tubing - Manufactured of flexible vinyl chloride compound conforming to ASTM D1248, Type 1, Class C, Category 4, P14 and ASTM D3350 for PE 122111C. B. Fittings - Type and make recommended by tubing manufacturer. C. Drip Valve Assembly - Type and size shown on Drawings. 1. Wye Stainer - Plastic construction with 120 mesh nylon screen and 1/2 inch blowout assembly. Pepco "Y" Filter. 2. Control Valve - 2 way, solenoid pilot operated type made of synthetic, non-corrosive material; diaphragm activated and slow closing. Include freely pivoted seat seal; retained (mounted) without attachment to diaphragm. 3. Emitters - O1-PC series, single port, pressure compensating, press on type. Denton Fire Station No. 8 LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION SYSTEM Christopher Russell Landscape Architecture 328400 August 2019 2.8 QUICK COUPLING VALVES Brass two-piece body designed for working pressure of 150 psi; operable with quick coupler. Equip coupler with locking rubber cover. #44 LVC manufactured by Rainbird or approved equal. 2.9 VALVE BOXES A. Gate Valves, Drip Line Blowout Stubs, Quick Coupling Valves, and Wire Stubs - Carson #910-12 or approved equal. B. 3/4 inch through 2 inch Control Valves - Carson #1419B-13B or approved equal. C. Drip Valve Assemblies - Carson #1419B-13B or approved equal. D. Control Wiring Splices - Carson #910-12 or approved equal. 2.10 ELECTRICAL CONTROL WIRING A. Low Voltage: 1. Electrical Control Wire - AWG UF UL approved No. direct burial copper wire for control wire and No. 12 for common wire - or larger if required to operate system as designed. 2. Wire Colors: a. Control Wires - Red b. Common Wires - White c. Spare Wires - Black (labeled at terminators) 3. If multiple controllers are utilized, and wire paths of different controllers cross each other, both common and control wires from each controller shall be different colors approved by Landscape Architect. 4. Control wire connections and splices shall be made with 3M direct bury slice, Rainbird Pentite connectors, or similar dry splice method. B. High Voltage - Type required by local codes and ordinances, of proper size to accommodate needs of equipment serviced. ALL WIRE SPLICES SHALL BE IN VALVE BOXES, AND NO DIRECTLY BURIED OR UNDERGROUND SPLICES WILL BE ACCEPTED. 2.11 EXPANSION COILS Denton Fire Station No. 8 LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION SYSTEM Christopher Russell Landscape Architecture 328400 August 2019 Expansion coils, which are to consist of approximately 10 wraps of wire around 1" pipe, will be provided on each wire approximately every 100 feet. Wires are to be bundled and taped together every 10 feet. Provide expansion coil at each electric valve inside the valve box. 2.12 MAIN LINE SHUT-OFF VALVES All main line shut-off valves 2 1/2" and smaller shall be bronze bodied, bronze fitted gate valves with threaded connections and a 150# W.O.G. rating. Valve stems shall be equipped with a heavy cast bronze wheel handle. NIBCO #T113 or approved equal. 2.13 DRAIN VALVES (if applicable) A. All mainline drain shall be installed as per the detail on the plan using a bronze bodied globe valve with a wheel handle. NIBCO #T211 or approved equal. B. Automatic drains shall be brass bodied, spring-loaded valves that open with less than 3PSI. Automatic drains shall be located after the manual drain valves. 2.14 SPRINKLER HEADS As indicated on Drawings. Fabricated riser units in accordance with details on Drawings - with riser nipples of same size as riser opening in sprinkler body. 2.15 SLEEVES A. All sleeve piping shall be Class 200 PVC with solvent weld joints. Sleeves shall extend at least 2'-0" past the edge of pavement. B. Bores, if necessary, shall be completed by a commercial boring company approved by the Landscape Architect and/or Owner's representative. C. Bore holes, if necessary, are to be made with a minimum 12" clearance between the top of the sleeve piping and the bottom of the concrete paving. Denton Fire Station No. 8 LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION SYSTEM Christopher Russell Landscape Architecture 328400 August 2019 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Before installation is started, the Contractor shall place a stake where each sprinkler head, quick coupler valve, and electric valves are to be located in accordance with the plans. The staking shall be approved by the Landscape Architect or Owner's representative before the installation is started. Should a discrepancy in the plans become apparent at this time, such discrepancy shall be pointed out to the Landscape Architect or Owner's representative. Work must not proceed until the Owner's representative approves any design changes made necessary by such discrepancy. Should such changes create extra cost to the Contractor, approval for extra compensation shall be obtained in writing from the Owner's representative before commencing work. Should such changes create a savings in cost to the Contractor, a written reduction in the contract price shall be approved by the Owner's representative in writing before commencing work. B. The Contractor is cautioned to provide adequate protection to those using the site. Provide barricades as necessary. C. All material shall be installed in strict accordance to the manufacturer's installation specifications which shall be considered a supplement to these specifications. D. Piping layout indicated is diagrammatic only. Route piping to avoid plants and structures. Provide full and complete coverage. E. Review layout requirements with other effected work. Coordinate locations of sleeves (under paving) to accommodate system. 3.2 EXCAVATION, BACKFILL, AND PROTECTION OF SHRUBBERY, GENERAL A. All excavation in this contract shall be unclassified and is to include earth, loose rock, rock, or any combination thereof, in wet or dry state. B. All trenches shall be backfilled with the material removed, except that no rock or debris, which can damage the pipe, shall be used as backfill. In this case, the special backfill specifications shall take precedence over this general specification. (See 3.7) C. All trench backfill shall be water settled and compacted in order to prevent after-settling. Use only the minimum amount of water necessary to settle ditches. Flooding of ditches without compaction will not be permitted. D. All trenches and adjoining areas shall be hand-raked to finish grade. Remove rocks, excess dirt, and debris from the site. Denton Fire Station No. 8 LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION SYSTEM Christopher Russell Landscape Architecture 328400 August 2019 E. Install sleeving under asphalt paving and concrete walks, prior to concreting and paving operations, to accommodate piping and wiring. Compact backfill around sleeves to 95% Modified Proctor Density within 2% of optimum moisture content in accordance with ASTM D1557. F. Boring will be permitted only where pipe must pass under obstruction(s) which cannot be removed. In backfilling bore, final density of backfill shall match that of surrounding soil. It is acceptable to use sleeves of suitable diameter installed first by jacking or boring, and pipe laid through sleeves. Observe same precautions as though pipe were installed in open trench. 3.3 PIPE INSTALLATION Note: All pipe is to be inspected prior to the installation. Pay particular attention to mechanical damage resulting from shipment and storage and to defects that occur during extrusion. Such defective pipe shall be removed from the site at the end of each workday. The Owner's representative shall have the option to accept or reject pipe that does not appear to be of good and uniform quality. A. Main Line Piping: Pipe shall be installed in a 4" wide (minimum) trench with a minimum of 18" of cover. B. Lateral Piping: All PVC lateral line piping shall be solvent-weld type. Install in 4-inch wide (minimum) trench deep enough to allow for installation of sprinkler heads and valves, but in no case with less than 12 inches of cover for rotary and/or spray zone laterals. C. PVC Pipe Installation: 1. All lumber, rubbish and large rocks (over 2" diameter) shall be removed from the trenches. Pipe shall have a firm, uniform bearing for the entire length of each pipeline to prevent uneven settlement. Wedging or blocking of pipe will not be permitted. Pad the trenches with sand if the trench is rocky. See 3.7 2. Never lay PVC pipe when there is water in the trench. Never lay PVC pipe when the temperature is 32 degrees F. or below. Pipe shall be snaked from side to side of trench bottom to allow for expansion and contraction. 3. All foreign matter or dirt shall be removed from inside of the pipe before welding and piping and shall be kept clean by approved means during and after laying of pipe. Denton Fire Station No. 8 LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION SYSTEM Christopher Russell Landscape Architecture 328400 August 2019 4. Backfilling of Trenches: Because of the expansion and contraction of PVC pipe, backfilling shall be done in the cool part of the day. If this is not possible or practical, water settling of trenches is necessary before and during backfill. Selected fill dirt or sand shall be used if soil condition is rocky or contains large clods. 5. After pipe installation is completed, flush system completely to remove any and all debris from piping prior to installation of adapters and sprinkler heads. 6. Replace and/or repair plant material, structures, and installations by others, damaged by work of this Section. D. PVC Pipe and Fitting Assembly: Contractor shall use only the solvent supplied and recommended by the manufacturer of the PVC pipe to be installed on this project site to make any solvent-welded joints. The pipe and fittings shall be thoroughly cleaned of dirt, dust and moisture before applying solvent. PVC pipe and fittings shall be cleaned with PVC primer or sanded with plumber's cloth before solvent welding. The Contractor shall make solvent welds with a non-synthetic bristly brush in the following sequence: 1. Apply an even coat of solvent to the outside of the pipe. Then, apply solvent to the inside of the pipe, making sure that coated area on the pipe is equal to the depth of the fitting socket. 2. Insert pipe quickly into the fitting and turn the pipe approximately 1/4 turn to distribute the solvent and remove air bubbles. Check all tees and ells for correct position; then hold joint for approximately 15 seconds so that pipe does not push out from the fitting. Wipe off any excess solvent with a clean rag. 3. Allow at least fifteen (15) minutes set-up time for each welded joint before moving. 4. On PVC to metal connection, the Contractor shall work the metal connections first. A non-hardening pipe dope such as Permatex #2, or equal, shall be used on all threaded PVC to metal joints, and light wrench pressure is all that should be used. Teflon tape or a liquid Teflon paste can also be used on all threaded PVC to metal joints, and light wrench pressure is all that should be used. 5. Where threaded PVC connections are required, use threaded PVC adapters into which the pipe may be welded. Teflon tape will be used on threads. E. Drip Tubing: Denton Fire Station No. 8 LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION SYSTEM Christopher Russell Landscape Architecture 328400 August 2019 1. Make all fitting connections per manufacturer recommendations. 2. Use only manufacturer provided or recommended hole punch when making penetrations in drip tubing for insert fittings. Use of any other hole punch shall be cause for immediate removal and replacement of all installed drip tubing. 3. Install drip line blowout stubs at all dead ends of drip tubing. 3.4 AUTOMATIC CONTROLLERS/PEDESTALS A. Automatic controllers shall be supplied in accordance with the materials list and shall be located as shown on the plan. B. Owner will provide 120 volt, 20-amp service to within 5 ft. of controller location(s). Contractor shall provide service into the controllers as part of this contract. C. All electric work shall conform to local codes, ordinance, and authorities having jurisdiction. All high voltage electrical work shall be performed by a licensed electrician. 3.5 ELECTRIC VALVES A. Electric remote valves shall be supplied in accordance with the specifications and sized according to the plan. 1. Valves shall be installed in a level position. Valves shall be installed deep enough so that there will be at least 10" of cover over the valve. 2. Manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for the valve supplied shall become a part of these specifications. 3. A plastic valve box (with extension if necessary) shall be installed over the valve with the stem centered in the box to enable flow adjustment to be easily operated. A green plastic top shall be installed on the valve box flush with the final grade. 3.6 QUICK VALVE ASSEMBLIES Install quick couplers on double swing-joint assemblies of Schedule 80 PVC pipe; flush to grade. Angled nipple relative to pressure supply line shall be no more than 45 and no less than 10 . Install quick coupling valves as detailed. 3.7 DRIP VALVE ASSEMBLIES Denton Fire Station No. 8 LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION SYSTEM Christopher Russell Landscape Architecture 328400 August 2019 Install drip valve assembly as detailed. 3.8 DRIP EMITTERS Stake all surface emitters as detailed and staked with acceptable tubing stakes. 3.9 HEAD INSTALLATION A. IMPORTANT: Backfill shall be specially tamped under the head flange and around the head for a distance of one foot by a suitable means, after trench backfill has dried from water settling. The purpose is to eliminate loose heads in the ground that would move when run over with mowers thereby creating a possible source of damage. B. CAUTION: Refer to Guarantee and Maintenance (1.6) regarding importance of backfill. C. ALL SPRINKLERS 1. All sprinklers shall be located 4" from back of curb and checked for proper operation and proper alignment for direction of throw. 2. After system is thoroughly flushed and ready for operation, each section of sprinklers must be adjusted to control pressure at heads. Use the following method, one section per time: Remove last head on section and install a temporary riser above grade. Install tee with pressure gauge attached on top and reinstall head with nipple onto tee. Correct operating pressure at last head of each section - 40 lbs. for rotary heads and 20 to 25 lbs. for spray heads. 3. The system shall be flushed free of all dirt and debris prior to the installation of the heads. D. ROTARY HEADS 1. All rotary heads shall be installed 4" from back of vehicular curb using a full swing joint with schedule 40 PVC threaded fittings and Schedule 80 PVC nipples. The top of the head shall be no more than 1/4" above finished grade. Adjust part-circle arcs as required to complete coverage. Denton Fire Station No. 8 LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION SYSTEM Christopher Russell Landscape Architecture 328400 August 2019 E. SECTION VALVE WIRING 1. Section valve wiring shall be supplied in accordance with the specifications. Valve wires shall be bundled with plastic electrical tape every 10 feet. Wiring shall be inspected during installation to avoid any wiring with faulty insulation. All wire splices shall be made with mechanical connectors, which are then waterproofed, and a 10" valve box is to be installed over all splices. F. QUICK COUPLER VALVES 1. Provide quick coupler valves (whether shown on plans or not) so that no limit of proposed landscaping cannot be reached with a maximum 100’ long hose. 3.10 SPECIAL BACKFILL SPECIFICATIONS A. If rock in encountered, the Contractor will remove the rock to a depth 2" below the bottom of the pipe. A minimum of 2" of sand bedding will then be installed completely around the pipe. The next 4" of trench will then be backfilled with a select backfill free from rocks and debris and water settled. The remaining backfill will then be completed with the material remaining on site. No rocks larger than 2" in diameter will be allowed in this remaining backfill material. 3.11 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Flushing - After piping, risers, and valves are in place and connected, but prior to installation of sprinkler heads, quick coupler assemblies, and hose valves, thoroughly flush piping system under full head of water pressure from dead end fittings. Maintain flushing for 5 minutes through furthermost valves. Cap risers after flushing. B. Testing - Conduct tests in presence of Owner. Arrange for presence of Owner 48 hours in advance of testing. Supply force pump and all other test equipment. 1. After backfilling, and installation of all control valves, fill pressure supply line with water, and pressurize to 40 PSI over the designated static pressure or 120 PSI, whichever is greater, for a period of 2 hours. 2. Leakage, Pressure Loss - Test is acceptable if no leakage or loss of pressure is evident during test period. 3. Leaks - Detect and repair leaks. 4. Retest system until test pressure can be maintained for duration of tests. Denton Fire Station No. 8 LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION SYSTEM Christopher Russell Landscape Architecture 328400 August 2019 5. Before final acceptance, pressure supply line shall remain under pressure for a period of 48 hours. C. Walk Through for Substantial Completion: 1. Arrange for Owner's presence 48 hours in advance of walk-through. 2. Entire system shall be completely installed and operational prior to scheduling of walk-through. 3. Operate each zone in its entirety for Owner at time of walk-through and open all valve boxes if directed. 4. Generate a list of items to be corrected prior to Final Completion. 5. Furnish all materials and perform all Work required to correct all inadequacies of coverage due to deviations from Contract Documents. 6. During walk-through, expose all drip emitters under operations for observation by Owner to demonstrate that they are performing and installed as designed; prior to placing of all mulch material. Schedule separate walk-through if necessary. D. Walk-Through for Final Completion: 1. Arrange for Owner's presence 48 hours in advance of walk-through. 2. Show evidence to Owner that Owner has received all accessories, charts, record drawings, and equipment as required before Final Completion walk-through is scheduled. 3. Operate each zone, in its entirety for Owner at time of walk-through to ensure correction of all incomplete items. 4. Items deemed not acceptable by Owner shall be reworked to complete satisfaction of Owner. 5. If after request to Owner for walk-through for Final Completion of irrigation system, Owner finds items during walk-through which have not been properly adjusted, reworked, or replaced as indicated on list of uncompleted items from previous walk-through, Contractor shall be charged for all subsequent walk-throughs. Funds will be withheld from final payment and/or retainage to Contractor, in amount equal to additional time and expenses required by Owner to conduct and document further walk-throughs as deemed necessary to ensure compliance with Contract Documents. Denton Fire Station No. 8 LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION SYSTEM Christopher Russell Landscape Architecture 328400 August 2019 3.12 ADJUSTING Upon completion of installation, "fine-tune" entire system by regulating valves, adjusting patterns and break-up arms, and setting pressure reducing valves at proper pressure to provide optimum and efficient coverage. Flush and adjust all sprinkler heads for optimum performance and to prevent overspray onto walks, roadways, and buildings as much as possible. Heads of same type shall be operating at same pressure ±7%. A. If it is determined that irrigation adjustments will provide proper and more adequate coverage, make such adjustments prior to Final Acceptance, as directed, at no additional cost to Owner. Adjustments may also include changes in nozzle sizes, degrees of arc, and control valve throttling. B. All sprinkler heads shall be set perpendicular to finish grade unless otherwise designated. C. Areas which do not conform to designated operation requirements due to unauthorized changes or poor installation practices shall be immediately corrected at no additional cost to the Owner. 3.13 CLEANING Maintain continuous cleaning operation throughout duration of Work. Dispose of, off- site at no additional cost to Owner, all trash or debris generated by installation of irrigation system. 3.14 FINAL CLEAN-UP Upon completion of the work and before acceptance and final payment will be made, the Contractor shall clean and remove from the site of the work, his surplus and discarded materials, temporary structures and discarded materials and debris of every kind. He shall leave the site of the work in a neat and orderly condition equal to that which originally existed. Surplus and waste materials removed from the site of the work shall be disposed of at locations satisfactory to the Owner's representative. 3.15 SYSTEM DEMONSTRATION A. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation and maintenance of system, including adjusting of sprinkler heads. Use operation and maintenance material as basis for demonstration. (See 1.6/Guarantee and Maintenance) END OF SECTION Denton Fire Station No. 8 FINISH GRADING FOR LANDSCAPE AREAS Christopher Russell Landscape Architecture 329119 August 2019 SECTION 32 91 19 FINISH GRADING FOR LANDSCAPE AREAS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Perform topsoil grading work as shown and specified. The work includes: 1. Topsoil Placement: 2. Site fine grading (raking and bed preparation of new shrub, groundcover, and grass areas) of topsoil. 3. Removing debris and waste materials. B. Related Work. 1. Section 32 93 00 - Landscaping 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE Comply with applicable city, state and federal requirements regarding materials and methods of work and disposal of waste materials. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit topsoil material sample (on-site stockpile and/or imported topsoil) for Landscape Architect's approval. B. Provide and pay for material testing. Testing agency shall be acceptable by the Owner. Provide the following data: 1. Test representative material sample proposed for use. a. pH factor (range of 6 to 8). b. Mechanical analysis (Plastic Index of 7 to 20. Minimum laboratory dry weight at optimum moisture content of 110 lbs./cu. ft.). c. Percentage of organic content. d. Recommendation on type and quantity of additives required to establish satisfactory pH factor and supply of nutrients to bring nutrients to satisfactory level for planting. 1.4 WORK SCHEDULE A. General: Work continuously on the site with the exception of bad weather delays until the work is complete. B. The Contractor shall be ready to tentatively begin work within seven (7) working days of notice to proceed from Owner. 1.5 JOB CONDITIONS A. Protect existing utilities, pavement and other facilities from damage caused by earthwork operations. Verify utility locations prior to start up of project. Denton Fire Station No. 8 FINISH GRADING FOR LANDSCAPE AREAS Christopher Russell Landscape Architecture 329119 August 2019 B. Locate, protect, and maintain benchmarks, monuments, control points and project engineering reference points. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Topsoil (on-site stockpile and/or imported): Fertile, friable, natural topsoil of sandy loam character, without admixture of subsoil material, obtained from a well-drained, arable site, reasonably free from clay clods, stones, plants, roots and other foreign materials. 1. Provide imported topsoil free of substances harmful to the plants which will be grown in the soil. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Contractor to rough grade site prior to landscaping with ±1" tolerance according to the following as applicable: • Hydromulched Grassed areas = 1/10" of finished grade • Solid Sod Grassed areas = 1" of finished grade • Shrub and groundcover beds = -6" of finished grade (6” topsoil to be placed 6” below finished grade) B. Examine proposed rough grading area and conditions of installation prior to landscape construction. Do not start grading work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. C. Notify the Owner of unexpected subsurface conditions. D. Establish extent of grading by area and elevation. 3.2 FINE GRADING A. Fine grade topsoil eliminating rough and low areas to ensure positive drainage. B. Remove stones, roots, weeds, and debris while spreading topsoil materials. Rake surface clean of stones 1" or larger in any dimension and all debris. Provide surfaces suitable for soil preparation provided under lawn and planting work. C. Leave all graded areas approximately 1/2" below finished paved surfaces at edges only. 3.3 MAINTENANCE A. Protect graded areas from traffic and erosion. Keep free of trash and debris. Repair and re-establish grades in settled, eroded and damaged areas. B. Where completed areas are disturbed by construction operations or adverse weather, scarify surface, reshape and compact to required density. Denton Fire Station No. 8 FINISH GRADING FOR LANDSCAPE AREAS Christopher Russell Landscape Architecture 329119 August 2019 3.4 WASTE MATERIALS Haul from site and legally dispose of waste materials, including excess topsoil used for this project, rock, trash and debris. 3.5 CLEAN UP Upon completion of filling and grading work, remove equipment and tools. Leave site clear, clean, free of debris and ready for landscaping work. END OF SECTION Denton Fire Station No. 8 TURF ESTABLISHMENT (HYDROMULCH) Christopher Russell Landscape Architecture 329200 August 2019 SECTION 32 92 00 TURF ESTABLISHMENT (HYDROMULCH) PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION Work Included - This work involves various operations necessary to provide and establish a turf-bed in accordance with the plans and specification contained herein. 1.2 RELATED WORK A. Section 32 91 19: Finish Grading for Landscape Areas B. Section 32 93 00: Landscaping 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications of Workmen - Provide at least one person who shall be present at all times during execution of this portion of the work, who shall be thoroughly familiar with the type of materials being installed and the proper materials and methods for their installation, and who shall direct all work performed under this section. B. Equipment - Hydromulching equipment shall be suitable for the project and in good repair. C. Inspection - Provide for inspection by Landscape Architect of materials used. Materials shall be delivered to project in standard sealed container. Keep empty packages to verify quantities used, then dispose as directed. D. Standards - All plants and planting material shall meet or exceed the specifications of Federal, State and County laws requiring inspection for plant disease and insect control. E. Materials Lists - Within 10 days after award of the Contract, submit a complete list of all materials proposed to be furnished and installed under this section, demonstrating complete conformance with the requirements specified. F. Certificates - Deliver all certificates to the Landscape Architect. G. Deliver Receipts and Invoices - All delivery receipts and copies of invoices for materials used for this work shall be subject to checking by the Owner or his representative and shall be subsequently delivered to the office of the Owner. H. Samples and Producers' Specifications - Various samples, certificates, and specifications of seed, fertilizer, sand, compost, other soil amendments, and other materials shall be submitted for approval as required by subsequent sections of this specification. 1.4 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Deliver and Storage 1. Deliver all items to the job site in their original containers with all labels intact and legible at time of Landscape Architect's inspection. 2. Use all means necessary to protect materials before, during, and after installation and to protect the work and materials of all other trades. Denton Fire Station No. 8 TURF ESTABLISHMENT (HYDROMULCH) Christopher Russell Landscape Architecture 329200 August 2019 3. Immediately remove from the site all materials that do not comply with the specified requirements. B. Replacements - In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary to the approval of the Landscape Architect and at no additional cost to the Owner. 1.5 JOB CONDITIONS A. Bermudagrass hydromulch shall not be applied prior to May 15 nor after August 15 nor at any time the soil temperature is less than 70EF. Contractor shall guarantee a full stand of grass. B. Contractor shall initially provide a grassing of perennial Ryegrass as Base Bid. C. As an alternate, Contractor shall provide a bid price to return in Spring, scalp the Ryegrass, and overseed with Bermuda to establish a permanent turfgrass. 1.6 GUARANTEE A. Coverage will be complete; areas of ungerminated seed 12" square and larger will be rehydromulched. B. Repair any damage made during reshooting immediately. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Ryegrass Seed - “SOUTHWEST EAGLE BLEND” as supplied by Lesco Industries (phone:972-424-8007) composed of 34% “Legacy II” 34% “Linedrive”, and 29% “Buccaneer” or approved equal. B. Bermudagrass Seed - Turfgrass seed shall be "Cynodon dactylon" (Common Bermudagrass). The seed shall be harvested within one (1) year prior to planting, free of Johnsongrass, field bind weed, dodder seed, and free of other weed seed to the limits allowable under the Federal Seed Act and applicable seed laws. The seed shall not be a mixture. The seed shall be hulled, extra fancy grade, treated with fungicide, and have a germination and purity that will produce, after allowance for Federal Seed Act tolerances, a pure live seed content not less than 85%. Seed shall be labeled in accordance with U.S. Department of Agriculture rules and regulations. 1. Certificate Submittal - Prior to planting, provide the Landscape Architect with the State Certificate stating analysis of purity and germination of seed. 2.2 MULCH Conwed Regular wood fiber mulch, or approved equal. 2.3 FERTILIZER Mississippi Chemical 18-18-5, water soluble, or an approved equal. Delivered to the site in bags labeled with the manufacturer's guaranteed analysis. If stored at the site, protect fertilizer from the elements at all times. Denton Fire Station No. 8 TURF ESTABLISHMENT (HYDROMULCH) Christopher Russell Landscape Architecture 329200 August 2019 2.4 HERBICIDE Monsanto Roundup applied at 3 ounces active ingredient per 1,000 square feet or other approved post-emergent herbicide. 2.5 Apply Fiber Tack with hydromulch on all slopes and berms at the rate of one and one-half (1- 1/2) pounds of Fiber Tack per one thousand (1,000) square feet PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this section will be performed. Correct conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. Contractor shall inspect existing automatic irrigation systems with Owner prior to commencing the work. Any problems with the system shall be noted by the Landscape Architect and repaired by Contractor prior to proceeding with the turfgrass operations. C. After soil preparation and prior to planting, Contractor shall re-inspect irrigation system to ensure system is operating properly in every respect. Contractor shall raise, lower and make all head adjustments as necessary prior to planting. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Herbicide - Two weeks prior to planting, the area to be hydromulched is to be treated with post-emergent herbicide at a rate of 3 ounces active ingredient per 1,000 square feet of planted area. B. Contractor shall inspect treated areas with Landscape Architect for approval prior to tillage and planting. C. Any treated areas which are deemed unacceptable shall be re-treated by Contractor at no additional expense to Owner. D. Tillage - Tillage shall be accomplished to loosen the soil, destroy existing vegetation, and prepare an acceptable seed bed. All areas shall be tilled to a depth of two inches. E. Cleaning - Soil shall be further prepared by the removal of debris, building materials, rubbish, weeds, and stones larger than one and one-half (1-1/2") inches in diameter. F. Fine Grading - After tillage and cleaning, all areas to be planted shall be leveled, fine graded, and drug with a weighted spike harrow or float drag. The required result shall be the elimination of ruts, depressions, humps, and objectionable soil clods. This shall be the final soil preparation step to be completed before the commencement of fertilizing and planting. G. Rock Removal - During the soil preparation process, a "Rock Pick" or "Rock Rake" shall be used to gather surface stones as small as one and one-half (1-1/2) inch in diameter. The Contractor shall be responsible for the disposal of collected materials. Denton Fire Station No. 8 TURF ESTABLISHMENT (HYDROMULCH) Christopher Russell Landscape Architecture 329200 August 2019 3.3 HYDROMULCHING A. Application 1. Typical mix for 800-gallon tank with coverage not to exceed 6,000 s.f. shall consist of 15 lbs. of grass seed, 360 lbs. of Conwed mulch, and 150 lbs. of 18-18-5 fertilizer. Add tackifier at manufacturer's recommended rate. 2. Apply in a uniform manner over all areas to be hydromulched. B. Protection 1. No heavy equipment shall be moved over the planted lawn areas unless the soil is again prepared, graded, leveled, and replanted. It will be the responsibility of this Contractor to protect all paving surfaces, curbs, utilities, plant materials, and any other existing improvements from damage. Any damages shall be repaired or replaced at no cost to the Owner. Contractor will also locate and stake all irrigation heads, valve risers, etc., prior to beginning any soil preparation work. C. Establishment and Acceptance 1. Regardless of unseasonable climatic conditions and other adverse conditions affecting planting operations and the growth of the turfgrass, it shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor to establish a uniform stand of turfgrass as herein specified. When adverse conditions such as drought, cold weather, high winds, excessive precipitation, or other factors prevail to such an extent that satisfactory results are unlikely, the Owner may, at his own discretion, stop any phase of work until conditions change to favor the establishment of turfgrass. 2. Uniform Stand of Turfgrass - A uniform stand with complete coverage of the specified grass shall be defined as not less than one hundred fifty (150) growing plants per square foot for seeded areas. Growing plants shall be defined as healthy grass plants of two blades or more at least 1-1/2 inches tall. 3. Block Sodding (if applicable) - At locations shown on plans or where directed, soft blocks shall be carefully placed on the prepared areas. When sufficiently dry, the sodded area shall be rolled or tamped to form a thoroughly compacted, solid mat. Any voids left in the block sodding shall be filled with additional sod and tamped. Surfaces of block sod, which in the opinion of the Landscape Architect, may slide due to the height and slope of the surface or nature of the soil, shall upon direction of the Landscape Architect driven through the sod blocks into firm earth sufficiently close to hold the block sod firmly in place. 3.4 POST-PLANTING MAINTENANCE A. Maintenance shall begin immediately after each portion of grass area is planted. All planted areas will be protected and maintained by watering, weed control, and replanting as necessary after initial planting and for as much longer as necessary to establish a UNIFORM STAND WITH COMPLETE COVERAGE. Upon receipt of Substantial Completion from the Landscape Architect, the Contractor shall maintain the turf (including regular mowing and edging) for a period of 90 days. B. Watering - Use the automatic irrigation system to apply at least one-half (1/2") inch of water over the entire planted area every three days. If necessary, watering equipment (other than the automatic irrigation system) required to establish and maintain a uniform stand of grass will be furnished by the Contractor. Contractor shall water thoroughly and infrequently once grass is established to encourage deep root growth. Denton Fire Station No. 8 TURF ESTABLISHMENT (HYDROMULCH) Christopher Russell Landscape Architecture 329200 August 2019 C. Mowing of Grass: 1. It is anticipated that a minimum of one (1) mowing will occur before the grass areas are accepted by the Owner. 2. Once grass is established the planted area shall be mowed at least once a week during the growing season. Grass shall be mowed to a height of one (1") inch. Mowing during dormant season will be done as necessary (if Contractor has not received Final Acceptance). D. Weed Control - Keep seeded areas free of weeds by "pulling" weeds until grass has been established. 3.7 EROSION CONTROL A. Throughout the project and the maintenance period for turfgrass, it is the Contractor's responsibility to maintain the topsoil in place at specified grades. Topsoil and turfgrass losses due to erosion will be replaced by the Contractor until establishment and acceptance is achieved. 3.8 CLEANUP A. Contractor shall remove any excess material or debris brought onto the site or unearthed as a result of his turfgrass operations. 3.9 GUARANTEE A. Contractor shall guarantee all materials used for this work to be the type, quality, and quantity specified. END OF SECTION Denton Fire Station No. 8 LANDSCAPING Christopher Russell Landscape Architecture 329300 August 2019 SECTION 32 93 00 LANDSCAPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL CONDITIONS The requirements of the "General Conditions of the Agreement" shall apply to all work of this Section with the same force and effect as though repeated in full herein. 1.2 WORK INCLUDED Furnish all labor, material, equipment and services necessary to provide all landscape planting, and related items complete in place, as shown on the Drawings and specified, herein. A. Work Specified in this Section: Rock excavation (for tree planting) if required, topsoil placement (if required), fine grading, soil preparation, planting, clean-up, and all other miscellaneous items related to landscaping as shown on the drawings. B. Rock excavation for trees is included as part of work. Contractor shall examine Geotechnical Report to determine what, if any, trees may need rock excavation. If rock is encountered, Contractor to follow procedure for “Tree Hole Water Retention” as outlined under Planting Installation in this section. 1.3 RELATED WORK A. Section 32 91 19: Finish Grading for Landscape Areas B. Section 32 84 00: Landscape Irrigation System 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Standards: 1. “Grades and Standards” latest edition. Texas Association of Nurserymen Specifications. Austin, Texas 78704. 2. Standardized Plant Names, 1942 Edition, American Joint Committee on Horticulture Nomenclature. 3. American Standards for Nursery Stock, Latest Edition, American Association of Nurserymen. B. Source Quality Control: 1. Submit documentation to Landscape Architect within ten (10) days after award of Contract that all plant material to be supplied by Landscape Contractor is available. Landscape Contractor to submit pay application for stored materials confirming plant materials are being held at the grower’s. Any and all substitutions due to unavailability must be requested in writing prior to confirmation of ordering. All materials shall be subject to inspection by Landscape Architect at any time after confirmation of ordering. 2. Plants to be supplied by Landscape Contractor shall be subject to inspection and approval of Landscape Architect at place of growth or upon delivery for conformity to Specifications. Such approval shall not impair the right of Denton Fire Station No. 8 LANDSCAPING Christopher Russell Landscape Architecture 329300 August 2019 inspection and rejection during progress of the work. Inspection and tagging of plant material by the Landscape Architect is for design intent only and does not constitute the Landscape Architect's approval of the plant materials in regards to their health and vigor. The health and vigor of the plant material is the sole responsibility of the Contractor. Submit written request for inspection of plant material at place of growth to Landscape Architect. Written request shall state the place of growth and quantity of plants to be inspected. Landscape Architect reserves the right to refuse inspection at this time if, in their judgment, a sufficient quantity of plants is not available for inspection. 3. All plants approved at the nursery by the Landscape Architect shall be tagged with numbered self-locking tags approved by the Landscape Architect and furnished by the contractor. Trees delivered to the site without these tags or with broken tags shall be rejected. 4. Substitutions of plant materials will not be permitted unless authorized in writing by Landscape Architect. If proof is submitted that any plant specified is not obtainable, a proposal will be considered for use of the nearest equivalent size or variety with corresponding adjustment of Contract Price. Such proof shall be substantiated and submitted in writing to Owner at least twenty (20) days prior to start of Work under this Section. These provisions shall not relieve Contractor of the responsibility of obtaining specified materials in advance if special growing conditions or other arrangements must be made in order to supply specified materials. 5. Plants identified as “specimen” shall be approved and tagged at place of growth by Landscape Architect. Photographs shall be submitted for preliminary approval. 6. The Contractor shall submit specifications of any item being used on site upon the request of the Landscape Architect. 7. The Contractor shall submit a minimum of three (3) photographs of each tree species specified on drawings if Landscape Architect does not tag trees at nursery. Each of the three photographs should be of a different tree within that species. Photographs should be representative of remainder of trees in that species to be planted. Approval of photographs does not constitute approval of all trees to be planted. 1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Delivery: 1. Deliver packaged materials to site in original unopened containers bearing manufacturer's guaranteed chemical analysis, name, trademark, and conformance to State Law. 2. Deliver all plants with legible identification labels. a. Label trees, evergreens, bundles of containers of like shrubs, or groundcover plants. b. State correct plant name and size indicated on plant list. c. Use durable waterproof labels with water-resistant ink, which will remain legible for at least 60 days. 3. Protect plant material during and after delivery to prevent damage to root ball or desiccation of leaves. Denton Fire Station No. 8 LANDSCAPING Christopher Russell Landscape Architecture 329300 August 2019 B. Storage: 1. Store plant material in shade and protect from weather. 2. Storage at the site is allowed, however, Contractor accepts full responsibility for damage, theft, or vandalism. 3. Any plant material balled or burlapped, not installed within 24 hours of delivery shall be healed in until such time as it is installed. 4. Maintain and protect plant material not to be planted within four (4) hours in a healthy, vigorous condition. C. Handling: The Contractor is cautioned to exercise care in handling, loading, unloading and storing of plant materials. Plant materials that have been damaged in any way will be discarded and if installed, shall be replaced with undamaged materials at the Contractor's expense. 1.6 JOB CONDITIONS A. Perform actual planting only when weather and soil conditions are suitable in accordance with locally accepted practice. B. Scheduling: Install trees, shrubs, and liner stock plant material before grassing is commenced. C. Landscape Contractor shall note that rock may be encountered on some areas of the site. Rock excavation shall be included as part of bid. 1.7 QUALIFICATIONS OF WORKMEN Provide at least one person who shall be present at all times during execution of this portion of the Work, who shall be thoroughly familiar with the type of materials being installed and the proper materials and methods for their installation, and who shall direct all work performed under this Section. 1.8 SAMPLES AND TESTS Landscape Architect reserves the right to take and analyze samples of materials for conformity to specifications at any time. Contractor shall furnish samples upon request by Landscape Architect. Rejected materials shall be immediately removed from the site at Contractor's expense. Cost of testing of materials not meeting Specifications shall be paid by Contractor. 1.9 PLANT GUARANTEE A. All trees, shrubs, vines, and groundcovers will be guaranteed for a twelve (12) month period after Final Acceptance (including trees supplied by Owner). The Contractor will replace all dead or defective materials upon notification (weather permitting) with plants of the same kind and size as those originally planted. Plants, including trees, which have partially died so that shape, size, or symmetry has been damaged, shall be considered subject to replacement, and the opinion of the Landscape Architect will be final. At the direction of the Landscape Architect, plants may be replaced at the start of the next planting or digging season, but in such cases, Contractor will remove dead plants within two (2) working days. Denton Fire Station No. 8 LANDSCAPING Christopher Russell Landscape Architecture 329300 August 2019 B. Contractor to make monthly visits to the site and submit a written statement as to his opinion of maintenance and items in need of correction that the contractor, in his opinion, feels if uncorrected would void warranty conditions. Reports shall be submitted to the Landscape Architect by the last working day of the month. C. All replacement work (including materials, labor and equipment) will be done at no cost to the Owner. Any damage, such as ruts in lawn or bed areas, that occurs when Contractor makes replacements, will be repaired immediately by the Contractor. D. The guarantee will not apply where plants die after Final Acceptance because of injury by storms, drowning, drought, hail, freeze, insects, disease, mechanical injury by humans or machines, and theft. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. All materials shall be of standard, approved and first-grade quality and shall be in prime condition when installed and accepted. Any commercially processed or packaged material shall be delivered to the site in the original unopened container bearing the manufacturer's guaranteed analysis. Contractor shall supply Landscape Architect with a sample of all supplied materials accompanied by analytical data from an approved laboratory source illustrating compliance or bearing the manufacturer's guaranteed analysis. B. Product Manufacturer's name(s) and/or model numbers are used herein to set a standard of quality and are not intended to be a restraint of trade or prevent submittals of other manufacturer's products of equal quality. C. Soil Amendment: 1. Compost Mix: "A Professional Bedding Soil" as produced by Living Earth Technologies, Inc., 1808 W. Northwest Highway, Dallas, Texas (phone: 214/869-4332) or “Natural T. L. Compost” as produced by Soil Building Systems, Inc. 1770 “Y” Street, Dallas, Texas (phone: 972-831-8181), or approved equal. D. Tree Backfill Fertilizer: 13.13.13 analysis bulk fertilizer. E. Shrub, Groundcover, and Seasonal Color Fertilizer: Provide commercial balanced slow release fertilizer, delivered to the site in bags labeled with the manufacturer's guaranteed analysis. If stored on the site, protect fertilizer from the elements at all times. Osmocote or approved equal. F. Tree, Shrub, and Groundcover Planting Tablets: a. Shall be slow-released type (such as Agriform or approved equal) with potential acidity of not more than 5% by weight containing the following percentages of nutrients by weight: 20% nitrogen 10% phosphoric acid 5% potash Denton Fire Station No. 8 LANDSCAPING Christopher Russell Landscape Architecture 329300 August 2019 G. Plant Material: 1. Plant names indicated, comply with "Standardized Plant Names" as adopted by the latest edition of the American Joint Committee of Horticultural Nomenclature. Names of varieties not listed conform generally with names accepted by the nursery trade. Provide stock true to botanical name and legibly tagged. 2. Plant material shall meet and/or exceed grades and standards set forth by the Texas Association of Nurserymen. All plants shall have a normal habit of growth and shall be sound, healthy, vigorous and free of insect infestations, plant diseases, sunscalds, fresh abrasions of the bark, excessive abrasions, or other objectionable disfigurements. Tree trunks shall be sturdy and have well "hardened" systems and vigorous and fibrous root systems which are not root or pot-bound. In the event of disagreement as to condition of root system, the root conditions of the plants furnished by the Contractor in containers will be determined by removal of earth from the roots of not less than two plants or more than two percent of the total number of plants of each species or variety where container-grown plants are from several sources, the roots of not less than two plants of each species or the variety from each source will be inspected. In case the sample plants inspected are found to be defective, the Landscape Architect reserves the right to reject the entire lot or lots of plants represented by the defective samples. Any plants rendered unsuitable for planting because of this inspection will be considered as samples and will be provided at the expense of the Contractor. 3. Trees, which have damaged or crooked leaders, or multiple leaders, unless specified, will be rejected. Trees with abrasions of the bark, sun scalds, disfiguring knots will be rejected. Trees with low forking will be rejected unless specifically approved by Landscape Architect. 4. Plants shall be measured when branches are in their normal position. Height and spread dimensions specified refer to main body of plant and not branch tip to tip. Caliper measurement shall be taken at a point on the trunk six (6”) inches above the crown at natural grade of trees up to four (4”) inches in caliper and at a point twelve (12”) inches above the crown at natural grade for trees over four (4”) inches in caliper. The measurements specified are the measurements specified and possess a normal balance between height and spread. 5. The size of the plants will correspond with that normally expected for species and variety of commercially available nursery stock or as specified on Drawings. The minimum acceptable size of all plants measured before pruning with the branches in normal position, shall conform with the measurements, if any, specified on the drawings in the list of plants to be furnished. Plants larger in size than specified may be used with the approval of the Landscape Architect, but the use of larger plants will make no change in Contract price. If the use of larger plants is approved, the ball of earth, container size, or spread of roots for each plant will be increased proportionately. 6. Provide "specimen" plants with a special height, shape, or character of growth. Tag specimen trees or shrubs at the source of supply. Plants may be inspected by the Landscape Architect and reviewed at the place of growth, for compliance with specification requirement for quality, size, and variety. Such approval shall not impair the right of inspection and rejection upon delivery at the site or during the progress of the work. 7. Field-selected or Nursery Grown Balled and Burlapped Tree Stock (B&B): Dig balled and burlapped plants with, natural balls of earth of sufficient diameter and Denton Fire Station No. 8 LANDSCAPING Christopher Russell Landscape Architecture 329300 August 2019 depth to encompass the fibrous and feeding root system necessary for full recovery of the plant. Balled and Burlapped trees shall have a root ball size of ten (10) times the caliper up to 4” caliper and eight (8) times the caliper above 4” caliper. If a tree is of multi-trunk variety, the caliper of the tree is the size of the largest trunk plus 1/2 of all the other trunks combined. Cracked or mushroomed balls are not acceptable. Selectively remove 1/2 to 2/3 of twig growth. 8. Container-grown Stock (General): Grown in a container for sufficient length of time for the root system to have developed to hold the soil together, firm and whole. a. Container stock shall have been grown continuously in the containers, and in the container in which delivered, for at least six (6) months, but not over two (2) years. Container stock shall not be pruned before delivery. b. No plants shall be loose in the container. c. Container stock shall not be pot bound. d. Stock shall not have cracked or broken balls when removed from the container. 9. Container-grown Tree Stock: Grown in a container from seedling stage and complies with Paragraph 2.1 - G-6, Container-grown Stock requirements. 10. Containerized Tree Stock: Grown in a container for not less than one (1) year and complies with Paragraph 2.1 - G-6, Container-grown Stock requirements. 11. Plants planted in rows shall be matched in form, height and overall character. 12. Shrubs and small plants shall meet the requirements for spread and height indicated in the plant list. a. The measurements for height shall be taken from the ground level to the average height of the top of the plant and not the longest branch. b. Single stemmed or thin plants will not be accepted. (1) Side branches shall be generous, well-twigged, and the plant as a whole well-bushed to the ground. c. Plants shall be in a moist, vigorous condition, free from dead wood, bruises, or other root or branch injuries. 13. Pruning: At no time shall trees or plant materials be pruned, trimmed or topped prior to delivery and any alteration of their shape shall be conducted only with the approval and when in the presence of the Landscape Architect. 14. All plants not conforming to the requirements herein specified, shall be considered defective and such plants, whether in place or not, shall be marked as rejected and immediately removed from the site of the work and replaced with new plants at the Contractor's expense. The plants shall be of the species, variety, size and conditions specified herein or as shown on the Drawings. Under no conditions will there be any substitutions of plants or sizes listed on the accompanying plans, except with the express consent of the Landscape Architect. H. Tree Paint: Morrison Tree Seal, Cabort Tree Paint, or equal. I. Water: Furnished by Landscape Contractor; transport as required. Denton Fire Station No. 8 LANDSCAPING Christopher Russell Landscape Architecture 329300 August 2019 J. Mulch Topdressing: Shall be shredded, fine textured, pinebark mulch. Minimum 2" layer spread uniformly. K. Steel Edging and Stakes: 1/8" x 4" Ryerson 'Estate' edging, as manufactured by Joseph Ryerson Co., Inc., Houston, Texas (phone 713-675-6111), or approved equal. Used as designated on drawings only. L. Soil Saver/Jute Mesh (if required): Heavy weight (green) jute mesh as manufactured by Jim Walls Company, 12820 Hillcrest Road, Dallas, Texas 75230, or approved equal. Install on all slopes, groundcover or shrub bed slopes greater than 3:1 slope. M. Guying and Staking Materials: 1. Metal "T" Posts: 6' length minimum metal stakes used for fencing. Painted green. Minimum two per tree in north/south axis. 2. Guying Hardware: a. Wire: Pliable and galvanized at the following sizes: Ornamental Trees 16 gauge Shade Trees 14 gauge b. Hose: 1/2" new rubber hose (black). c. Turnbuckles: Galvanized or dip-painted, size as required. Turnbuckle openings shall be at least 3". N. Soil Separator: “Trivera Spunbound” as manufactured by Contech Construction Products or approved equal. O. Gravel Mulch (if applicable): 3/4" - 1-1/2" crushed granite (gray / pink color). Install 3" layer over layer of polypropylene filter fabric. Provide sample of gravel mulch and filter fabric for Landscape Architect's approval. P. Other Materials: All other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper installation, shall be as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the Landscape Architect. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Obtain Landscape Architect's certification that final grades to +0.10' have been established prior to commencing planting operations. Provide for inclusion of all amendments, settling, etc. Landscape Contractor shall be responsible for shaping all planting areas as indicated on Plans or as directed by Landscape Architect. B. Inspect trees, shrubs and groundcover plant material for injury, insect infestation and trees and shrubs for improper pruning. C. Do not begin planting of trees until deficiencies are corrected or plants replaced. 3.2 PLANTING PREPARATION A. Soil Preparation for Groundcover, Shrub, and Seasonal Color Beds: Denton Fire Station No. 8 LANDSCAPING Christopher Russell Landscape Architecture 329300 August 2019 1. Excavate existing soil, if necessary, and add to shrub, groundcover, and seasonal color areas the following: 4” layer of Compost Mix 14-14-14 slow release fertilizer (Osmacote) at a rate of 5 lbs. / 100 s.f. 2. Spread materials uniformly and cultivate thoroughly by means of a mechanical tiller. Till to a minimum depth of 8". 3. Pocket planting of shrub, groundcover, and seasonal color is not allowed. B. Final Grades: 1. Minor modifications to grade may be required to establish the final grade. 2. Finish grading shall ensure proper drainage of the site as determined on Drawings. 3. All areas shall be graded so that the final grades will be 1" below adjacent paved areas, curbs, valve boxes, edging, clean-outs, drains, manholes, etc., or as indicated on Plans. 4. At time of planting, the top 6" of all areas to be planted shall be free of stones, stumps, or other deleterious matter 1" in diameter or larger, and shall be free from all wire, plaster, or similar objects that would be a hindrance to planting or maintenance. C. Disposal of Excess Soil: Disposal of any unacceptable or excess soil shall be the sole responsibility of the Landscape Contractor. Excess soil may be spoiled on-site per direction of Owner. 3.3 PLANTING INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Actual planting shall be performed during those periods when weather and soil conditions are suitable and in accordance with locally accepted practice, as approved by the Landscape Architect. 2. Only as many plants as can be planted and watered on that same day shall be distributed in a planting area. 3. Containers shall be opened and plants shall be removed in such a manner that the ball of earth surrounding the roots is not broken and they shall be planted and watered as herein specified immediately after removal from the containers. Containers shall not be opened prior to placing the plants in the planting area. B. Layout of Major Plantings: Locations for plants and outlines of areas to be planted shall be marked on the ground by the Contractor before any plant pits are dug. All such locations shall be approved by the Landscape Architect. If underground construction or utility line is encountered in the excavation of planting areas, other locations for planting may be selected by the Landscape Architect. Layout shall be accomplished by flagged Denton Fire Station No. 8 LANDSCAPING Christopher Russell Landscape Architecture 329300 August 2019 grade stakes indicating plant names and specified container size on each stake. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to confirm with the Landscape Architect's superintendent and governing agencies the location and depth of all underground utilities, and obstructions. C. Excavation: 1. Excavation for planting shall include the stripping and stacking of all acceptable topsoil encountered within the areas to be excavated for trenches, tree holes, plant pits and planting beds. 2. Excess soil generated from the planting holes and not used as backfill, or in establishing the final grades may be spoiled on-site per direction of Owner. 3. Protect all areas from excessive compaction when trucking plants or other material to the planting site. 4. Tree and shrub pits shall be excavated to allow the root ball to set on undisturbed soil and excavated to the following diameters: Plant Size Pit Diameter Up to 5 gallon 14" greater than container root ball diameter 5 gallon container 24” greater than and greater root ball diameter (including trees) 5. All excavated holes shall have vertical sides with roughened surfaces. 6. All holes for trees and large shrubs shall be tested for water retention prior to tree or shrub installation. After hole is excavated, it is to be filled with water to the top of the excavation. If, after 24 hours, the hole still holds water, the Landscape Contractor shall excavate an additional 6" from the bottom of hole. The Landscape Contractor shall then install 6" of native washed gravel covered on the top (and up a minimum of 12" on the sides of the hole) with filter fabric. The Landscape Contractor shall also install a capped 3" diameter PVC sump which will extend from near the bottom of the rock layer to 3" above the proposed finish grade so the hole can be evacuated through mechanical means. D. Planting Trees: 1. Container Removal: a. Remove tree from plastic container or box carefully so container can be re- used. b. Do not injure root ball. 2. Center tree in pit. 3. Face plants with fullest growth into prevailing wind. 4. Set plant plumb and hold rigidly in position until soil has been tamped firmly around ball. Denton Fire Station No. 8 LANDSCAPING Christopher Russell Landscape Architecture 329300 August 2019 5. Tree Pit Backfill: a. Tree backfill should be composed of 5 parts existing of soil excavated from the hole to one part Soil Amendment, thoroughly mixed with 5 lbs. per cubic yard tree backfill fertilizer. Tree backfill to be mechanically mixed prior to backfill operations. 6. Set tree in upright position in the center of the hole and compact the backfill mixture around the ball or roots. Thoroughly water each plant after backfilling. After planting trees not in beds, surround the pits with a 3" height berm. 7. Plant Tablets: a. After the water has completely drained from the plant pit, planting tablets shall be placed in the top 3" of the plant pit as indicated below: • Four tablets per every foot of rootball diameter per tree. b. Planting tablets shall be set with each plant on the top of the rootball while the plants are still in their containers so the required number of tablets to be used in each hole can be easily verified by the Landscape Architect. 8. Pruning: Pruning shall be limited to the minimum necessary to remove injured twigs and branches or to limb-up trees as directed by the Landscape Architect. Pruning may not be done prior to delivery of plants. Cuts over 3/4" in diameter shall be painted with tree paint. 9. Guying and Staking Removal: At no charge to the Owner, the Contractor shall return to the site at the end of the one-year guarantee period and remove all guying and/or staking materials. E. Planting Shrubs: 1. Container Removal: a. Cut cans on two sides with an acceptable can cutter. Do not cut cans with spade or ax. b. Do not injure root system. 2. Center plant in pit or trench. 3. Face plants with fullest growth into prevailing wind. 4. Set plant plumb and hold rigidly in position until soil has been tamped firmly around ball or roots. 5. Fill holes with backfill composed of 50% soil taken from the hole and 50% Soil Amendment, thoroughly mixed. 6. Set plant in upright position in the center of the hole and compact the backfill mixture around the ball or roots. Thoroughly water each plant after backfilling. After shrubs not in beds, surround the pits with a 3" height berm. 7. Plant Tablets: a. After the water has completely drained from plant pit, planting tablets shall be placed in the top 3" of the plant pit as indicated below: Denton Fire Station No. 8 LANDSCAPING Christopher Russell Landscape Architecture 329300 August 2019 • One tablet per one-gallon container and two-gallon container • Two tablets per five-gallon container b. Planting tablets shall be set with each tablet on the top of the rootball while the plants are still in their containers so the required number of tablets to be used in each hole can be easily verified by the Landscape Architect. 8. Pruning: Pruning shall be limited to the minimum necessary to remove injured twigs and branches. Pruning may not be done prior to delivery of plants. Cuts over 3/4" in diameter shall be painted with tree paint. F. Planting Groundcover: 1. Space the plants evenly as indicated on the Drawings, staggering. 2. After planting is completed, cover the bed uniformly with a minimum 2" layer of mulch topdressing. 3. Thoroughly water entire planting bed. 3.4 CLEAN-UP A. After all planting operations have been completed, remove all trash, excess soil, empty plant containers and rubbish from the property. All scars, ruts or other marks in the ground caused by this work shall be repaired and the ground left in a neat and orderly condition throughout the site. Contractor shall pick up all trash resulting from this work no less frequently than each Friday before leaving the site, once a week, and/or the last working day of each week. All trash shall be removed completely from the site. B. The Contractor shall leave the site area broom-clean and shall wash down all paved areas within the Contract area, leaving the premises in a clean condition. 3.5 MAINTENANCE A. Maintain the trees, shrubs and groundcovers until Final Completion and Acceptance of the entire project. B. Maintenance shall include pruning, cultivating, weeding, watering, and application of appropriate insecticides and fungicides necessary to maintain plant free of insects and disease. 1. Re-set settled plants to proper grade and position. Restore planting saucer and adjacent material and remove deal material. 2. Tighten and repair guy wires and stakes as required. 3. Correct defective work as soon as possible after deficiencies become apparent and weather and season permit. 4. Deep-water trees, plants, and groundcover beds within the first 24 hours of initial planting, and not less than twice per week until final acceptance. 3.6 OBSERVATION SCHEDULE A. When observations are conducted by someone other than the Landscape Architect, the Contractor shall show evidence in writing of when and by whom these observations were made. Denton Fire Station No. 8 LANDSCAPING Christopher Russell Landscape Architecture 329300 August 2019 B. No site visits shall commence without all items noted in previous Observation Reports either completed or remedied unless such compliance has been waived by the Owner and/or Landscape Architect. END OF SECTION Denton Fire Station No. 8 STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING MJ Thomas Engineering, LLC. 334100-1 August 2019 SECTION 334100 STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE A. Section Includes: Furnishing high density corrugated and corrugated smooth lined Polyethylene storm sewer tube and fittings for gravity flow sewers, including all clearing and grubbing, excavation, sheetings, shoring, dewatering, pipe laying, jointing. backfilling, and any other work that is required or necessary to complete the installation as shown on the plans and as specified herein. 1.02 DESCRIPTION A. This item shall govern for the furnishing and installing of all High Density Corrugated Polyethylene (HDPE) Smooth Lined Pipe and / or materials for constructing of culverts, side road pipes, storm sewers, stubs, and all related connections and fittings, all of which shall conform to ASTM F 2306, latest edition. The pipes shall be of the sizes, types, and dimensions shown on the plans, and contained in this specification. In addition, it shall include all connections and joints to new or existing pipes, storm sewer manholes, inlets, headwalls, and other appurtenances as may be required to complete the work. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. The Contractor shall furnish an affidavit that the tubing, specials, fittings, and appurtenances furnished comply with all provisions of this and the ASTM specifications as shown herein. 1.04 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 310000 - Earthwork B. Section 312333 - Trenching and Backfilling PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS Unless otherwise specified on the plans or herein, thermoplastic pipe and joint fittings shall conform to the following: A. High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) Corrugated and Smooth Lined Pipe & Fittings shall be manufactured in accordance with requirements of ASTM F 2306, latest edition. Type S: This pipe shall have a full circular cross section, with an outer corrugated pipe wall and a smooth inner wall. B. High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) Corrugated and Smooth Lined Pipe shall be manufactured from virgin PE compounds which conform with the requirements of cell class 335400C as defined and described in ASTM D 3350. C. Minimum Pipe Stiffness (PS) at five percent deflection shall be as described in ASTM F 2306, Section 6.3 when tested in accordance with ASTM D 2412. D. All HDPE Corrugated and Smooth Lined Pipe shall be certified through the Plastics Pipe Institute (PPI) Third Party Certification program. All HDPE pipe delivered and used shall bear the Third Party Administered PPI seal. Denton Fire Station No. 8 STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING MJ Thomas Engineering, LLC. 334100-2 August 2019 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION Installation shall be in accordance with ASTM D 2321, “Standard Practice for Underground Installation of Thermoplastic Pipe for Sewers and Other Gravity Flow Applications”. Figure 1: Definitions of Terms for Backfill in Trench Condition: A. General Installation Requirements: Thermoplastic pipe shall be unloaded and handled with reasonable care. Pipe shall be placed in the bed starting at the downstream end. Trenches must be excavated in such a manner as to insure that the sides will be stable under all working conditions. Trench walls shall be sloped or supported in conformance with all standards of safety. Only as much trench as can be safely maintained shall be opened. All trenches shall be backfilled as soon as practicable, but no later than the end of each working day. Trench details, including foundation, bedding, haunching, initial backfill, final backfill, pipe zone, and trench width are shown in Figure 1. B. Trench Widths: Trench width shall be in accordance with ASTM D2321 and shall be sufficient to ensure working room to properly and safely place and compact haunching and other backfill materials. Minimum trench width shall not be less than 1.25 times the pipe outside diameter plus 12 inches. (1.25 x O.D. + 12”) Note: On multiple pipe barrel runs the clear distance between pipes is as follows: 12”-24” Diameters: Clear span =12” 24” & Greater Diameter: Clear span = ½ x Diameter Denton Fire Station No. 8 STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING MJ Thomas Engineering, LLC. 334100-3 August 2019 C. Outside the Right-of-Way Bedding and Backfill: Bedding material shall meet the requirements of ASTM D2321 Class I material. A minimum of 6” of bedding shall be provided prior to placement and shall be loosely compacted. Bedding material size shall be 1½” granular material and shall extend to the springline of the pipe. Initial backfill material shall meet the requirements of ASTM D2321 Class I material and shall extend from the springline to 6” over the top of the pipe. Backfill material shall be placed in 6 inch lifts and compacted to 90% Std. Proctor Density. D. Inside the Right-of-Way Bedding and Backfill: Bedding material shall meet the requirements of ASTM D2321 Class I material. A minimum of 6” of bedding shall be provided prior to placement and shall be loosely compacted. Bedding material size shall be 1½” maximum granular material. Initial backfill material shall meet the same requirements as the bedding material and shall extend to 6 inches above the top of the pipe. Final backfill material shall meet the requirements of ASTM D2321 Class I material. All initial and final backfill material shall be placed in 6 inch lifts and compacted to 90% SPD. E. Minimum Cover: The minimum cover is one foot (1.0’) for HS-25 Live Loads (4”-42” Diameters) and two feet for (2.0’) for larger diameter structures (48”- 60” Diameter); however, care should be taken when heavy construction equipment loads cross the pipe trench during construction. If the passage of construction equipment over an installed pipeline is necessary during project construction, compacted fill in the form of a ramp shall be constructed to a minimum elevation of three (3.0’) feet over the top of the pipe. Any damaged pipe shall be replaced at the contractor’s expense. F. Installation Deflection: At the Engineer’s discretion, all pipe exceeding 5% deflection may require replacement at the contractor’s expense when measured or inspected not less than 60 days following completion of installation or prior to paving operations. Deflection is defined per ASTM D 2321. All pipe shall be video inspected (CCTV) at the contractor’s expense prior to acceptance. G. Joints: Joints shall be installed that the connection of pipe sections will form a continuous line free from irregularities in the flow line. Joints shall meet one of the following: 1. Soil tight joints shall be as specified in ASTM F2306. 2. Watertight joints must meet a 74kPa (10.8 psi) laboratory test per ASTM D3212 and utilize a bell and spigot design with a gasket meeting ASTM F477. H. High Groundwater Table: In installations where a high groundwater table is encountered, a soil filter fabric as per manufacturer’s recommendations shall be installed around the initial backfill material. In flowable fill or high groundwater installations, pipe shall be restrained as per manufacturer’s recommendations. I. Measurement and Payment: This item shall be measured for payment by the linear foot. Such measurements shall be made between the ends of the barrel along its flow line. For multiple pipes, the measured length shall be the sum of the lengths of the barrels, measured as described above. Pipe shall be paid for at the contract unit price per linear foot, complete in place, as provided by the proposal and contract. The contract price per linear foot shall be the total compensation for the furnishing of all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals necessary to complete the work including excavation, backfill, and disposal of surplus materials in accordance with the plans and these specifications. J. Comply with requirement in 3.02 A. 3.02 LAYING AND JOINTING A. Installation: Installed tube produced to these specifications shall be installed according to the standard practice of ASTM Designation F 449 except where installations are under proposed or existing paving. Such installations must utilize an envelope of standard crushed rock bedding materials to a minimum of 6 inches above the crown of the pipe. In either case, the internal diameter of the installed barrel of the tube must not be reduced by more than 5% of its base inside diameter when measured not less than 30 days following completion of installment. B. Assembly of Joints: All joints shall be assembled in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer. Denton Fire Station No. 8 STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING MJ Thomas Engineering, LLC. 334100-4 August 2019 3.03 BACKFILL A. After the bedding has been prepared and the pipes installed as required, backfill shall be placed in accordance with SECTION 32 18 23. If the material, when tested. fails to meet the density requirements, the backfill shall be required to be removed and replaced to meet the proper density. B. The backfill shall not be placed until the Architect/Engineer or his representative has observed the trench and authorized the placing of backfill. All debris shall be removed from the trench prior to beginning the backfilling operations. Sheet, shoring and bracing shall be pulled and removed during the progress of the backfilling in such a manner to protect the trench and the pipe. C. Backfilling shall then be brought up to an elevation slightly above the original ground level to allow for subsequent settlement. The top surface of slopes of all backfill shall be neatly graded off in a workmanlike manner, and where select topsoil, sod, or other material is removed and piled separately, such material shall be carefully replaced in a manner satisfactory to the Architect/Engineer. The top 1' of backfill material shall be of as good quality as the original topsoil which was removed. 3.04 TESTING C. Testing: All polyethylene tubing shall be tested for elongation, brittleness, joint separation, quality and ring stiffness as specified in the applicable ASTM Designations. D. Rejection: This pipe and fittings may be rejected for failure to meet any of the requirements of this specification, and may be retested to establish conformity in accordance with agreement between the Owner and the Contractor. END OF SECTION